Skip to main content

Full text of "An ecological survey of Isle Royale, Lake Superior"

See other formats 


Google 


This  is  a  digital  copy  of  a  book  that  was  preserved  for  generations  on  library  shelves  before  it  was  carefully  scanned  by  Google  as  part  of  a  project 

to  make  the  world's  books  discoverable  online. 

It  has  survived  long  enough  for  the  copyright  to  expire  and  the  book  to  enter  the  public  domain.  A  public  domain  book  is  one  that  was  never  subject 

to  copyright  or  whose  legal  copyright  term  has  expired.  Whether  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  may  vary  country  to  country.  Public  domain  books 

are  our  gateways  to  the  past,  representing  a  wealth  of  history,  culture  and  knowledge  that's  often  difficult  to  discover. 

Marks,  notations  and  other  maiginalia  present  in  the  original  volume  will  appear  in  this  file  -  a  reminder  of  this  book's  long  journey  from  the 

publisher  to  a  library  and  finally  to  you. 

Usage  guidelines 

Google  is  proud  to  partner  with  libraries  to  digitize  public  domain  materials  and  make  them  widely  accessible.  Public  domain  books  belong  to  the 
public  and  we  are  merely  their  custodians.  Nevertheless,  this  work  is  expensive,  so  in  order  to  keep  providing  tliis  resource,  we  liave  taken  steps  to 
prevent  abuse  by  commercial  parties,  including  placing  technical  restrictions  on  automated  querying. 
We  also  ask  that  you: 

+  Make  non-commercial  use  of  the  files  We  designed  Google  Book  Search  for  use  by  individuals,  and  we  request  that  you  use  these  files  for 
personal,  non-commercial  purposes. 

+  Refrain  fivm  automated  querying  Do  not  send  automated  queries  of  any  sort  to  Google's  system:  If  you  are  conducting  research  on  machine 
translation,  optical  character  recognition  or  other  areas  where  access  to  a  large  amount  of  text  is  helpful,  please  contact  us.  We  encourage  the 
use  of  public  domain  materials  for  these  purposes  and  may  be  able  to  help. 

+  Maintain  attributionTht  GoogXt  "watermark"  you  see  on  each  file  is  essential  for  in  forming  people  about  this  project  and  helping  them  find 
additional  materials  through  Google  Book  Search.  Please  do  not  remove  it. 

+  Keep  it  legal  Whatever  your  use,  remember  that  you  are  responsible  for  ensuring  that  what  you  are  doing  is  legal.  Do  not  assume  that  just 
because  we  believe  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  the  United  States,  that  the  work  is  also  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  other 
countries.  Whether  a  book  is  still  in  copyright  varies  from  country  to  country,  and  we  can't  offer  guidance  on  whether  any  specific  use  of 
any  specific  book  is  allowed.  Please  do  not  assume  that  a  book's  appearance  in  Google  Book  Search  means  it  can  be  used  in  any  manner 
anywhere  in  the  world.  Copyright  infringement  liabili^  can  be  quite  severe. 

About  Google  Book  Search 

Google's  mission  is  to  organize  the  world's  information  and  to  make  it  universally  accessible  and  useful.   Google  Book  Search  helps  readers 
discover  the  world's  books  while  helping  authors  and  publishers  reach  new  audiences.  You  can  search  through  the  full  text  of  this  book  on  the  web 

at|http: //books  .google  .com/I 


jiGoogle 


I 


Coo<^le 


n 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


AN  ECOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


ISLE  ROYALE,  LAKE  SUPERIOR 


PREPARED  UNDER  THE  DIRECTION  OF 


CHAS.  C'ADAMS. 


A    Heport  from  the  University  of  Ulchigan  Wtiseum,  published  liy  ihc  State  Biolojjical 
Survey,  as  a  part  of  the  Report  of  the  Board  of  llie 
Geological  Sun'cy  for  I  oris. 


lyCoogle 


jiGoogle 


^       ■Ti.'.-tjf  •  'jlJ^M, 


Google 


D,Bi,z,db,>jOogLe 


jiGoogle 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Introductory  Note  and  AcknowledgtueDts,  bj  Dr.  Charles  C.  Adams, 

PART    I.      ECOLOGICAL    PAPrSB. 

Isle  Roynte  as  a  Biotic  Environment,  by  Dr.  Charies  C.  Adams 

I.  Introduction , 

1.  Itinerary  and  Peraonnet  of  the  Party. 

2.  Aims  and  Method  of  Work 

3.  PKTiouB  fiiolc^eal  Inveatigationa  upon  Isle  Royale 

4.  Hiatorical  Note 

5.  Available  Maps  of  Isle  Royale 

II.    The  BioU  Considered  by  Stations 

1.  Location  of  Field  Stations  in  1005 

2.  General  Characteristics  of  the  Stations 

III.    The  Evolution  of  the  Gross  Environment 

1 .  Geological  Succession 

2.  Topography  and  its  Origin 

8.  Atmospbenc  Influences  and  their  Evohjtion..'. 

a.  Climate 

b.  Seiches 

c.  Climatic  Succession 

d.  Lake  Storms  and  their  Influence 

4.  Surface  Currents  of  Lake  Superior. 

5.  Origin  of  the  Habitats 

i     The  £cological  Relations  of  the  Invertebrate  Fauna  of  Ue  Royale,  Michigan, 

by  Dr.  H.  A,  Gleason 

I.    Introduction 

II.  The   Lake  

in.   The  Inland  Lakes 

JV.    The  Tamarack  Swamp  and  the  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps 

V.   The  Gravel  and  Sand  Beaches 

VI.   The  Rock  Beach 

VII.  The  Cladonia  Clearings  and  Jack  Pine  Ridges 

VIII.   The  Balflftm-S[inice  Forest 

IX.    Artificial  Clearings 

X.    Summary. 

3,   Th«  Ecological  Distribution  of  the  Birds  of  Isle  Royale,  Lake  Superior,    by 

Otto  MdCreaiy 

I.   Introduction 

II.   Light^house  Peninsula,  (between  Rock  Harbor  and  the  Head  of  Conglom- 
erate Bay) 

1.  Lake  Superior  and  Beach  (Station  I,  Sub.  1.) 

2.  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest  (Station  I,  Sub.  2  and  3) 

3.  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps  (Station  I,  Sub.  4) 

4.  Jack  Pine  Ridge  (Station  I,  Sub.  5) 

5.  Sphagnum  and  Spruce  Bog  (Station  I,  Sub.  6) 

e .   Valley  at  the  Head  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (Station  I,  Sub.  1) 

in.  Trail  to  MeCargoe  Cove 

1.  Ransom  Clearing  (Station  11,  Sub.  1) 

2.  Benson  Brook  (Station  II,  Sub,  1) 

3.  Spruce  and  Tamarack  Swamps  (Station  II,  Sub.  2  and  5) 

4.  Rock  Ridge  Clearings  (Station  II,  Sub.  3) 


207309 


IV.    WeBteni  End  o!  Rock  Harbor  and  Trail  to  Sumaer  Lake 

1.  Harbor.     (Vicinity  ot  Station  III,  Sub.  2) 

2.  Small  Islands  (Station  III,  Sub.  1) 

3.  Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta  (Station  III,  Sub.  3) 

4.  Trail  to  Sumner  Lake  (SUtion  III,  Sub.  4) 

a.  Birch  Forest 

b.  Birch  and  Coniferous  Forest 

5.  Sumner  Lake  {Station  III,  Sub.  5) 

V.    Siskowit  Lake  Reiion 

1.  Siskowit  Bay  and  Shore  (Station  V,  Sub.  1) 

2.  Trail  to  Siskowit  Lake  (Station  V,  Sub.  4) 

3.  Siskowit  Lake  (Station  V,  Sub.  6  and  vicinity) 

4.  Burning  West  of  Outlet  to  Siskowit  ha.ke  (Station  V,  Wdnity  of  Sub.  9), 

5.  Long  and  Menagerie  Islands  (Station  V,  Sub.  10) 

VI.    Summary. 

1.  Water  Birds 

2.  Shore  Birds 

3.  Birds  Frequenting  Swamps 

4.  Birds  of  Clearings  and  Partial  Clearings 

5.  ffirds  Frequenting  the  Forests 

4.  The  Fall  Migration  of  Birds  at  Washington  Harbor,  Isle  Royale,  Lake  Superior, 

by  Max  Minor  Peet 

I.    Introduction .' 

II.   The  Environment 

1.  Tho  Clearing 

2.  The  Forest 

3.  Food 

III.  The  Weather  Conditions  and  Migrants 

1 .  Weather  Conditions 

2,  The  Bird  Migrants. 

a.  Warblers 


b.  Spar 

c.  Hawl 


Hawks 108 

d.  Owls 104 

e.  Thrushes 104 

t.  Other  Birds 104 

IV.  Large  Bird  Waves 105 

1.  First  Wave 106 

2.  Second  Wave 108 

3.  Third  Wave 107 

4.  Fourth  Wave 107 

5.  Fifth  Wave 109 

6.  Sixth  Wave 109 

V.  The  ReUtlon  of  Weather  to  Migration lOB 

1.  Influence  of  Wind '. 110 

2.  Influence  of  Temperature Ill 

3.  Influence  of  Barometric  Pressure Ill 

4.  Condition  of  the  Sky Ill 

5.  Summary  and  Conclusion Ill 

VI.  The  Routes  of  Migration 112 

VII.   The  Perils  of  Migration 113 

1.  Fatigue 113 

2.  Natural  Enemies 115 

3.  Blunders  and  Fatalities 116 

.  The  Ecological  Succession  of  Birds,  by  Dr.  Chas.  C.  Adams 121 

I.    Introduction 121 

II.   Representative  Literature  on  Habitats  and  Succession 123 

1.  Habitat  Preference 123 

2.  Succession 126 

III.  The  Major  Avian  Environments 128 

IV.  Minor  Avian  Environments  and  their  Associations 133 

V.    Avian  Suecession 134 

1 .  General  Remarks 134 

2.  Succession  on  Isle  Royale 134 

a.  The  Aquatic  Association  and  Habitat 136 


.y  Google 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL. 


To  the  Honorable  flte  Boai-d  of  Cieological  Survey  of  tlie  8tHte  of  Micli- 
igau: 

Gov.  Fred  SI.  Wanier,  Tresideut. 
Hod.  T*.  51.  Forry,  Jr.,  Viceri-esident, 
Hon.  L.  L.  IVi-iglit,  Secretary. 

<5eutlemeii : — I  b^  to  present  berewitli  for  priutiug,  a  report  by  Dr. 
Cbiis.  C  AdauiB  on  the  ecology,  tkat  it*  the  natural  history,  of  I»)e  Boyale. 
Thin  conies  to  us  with  the  approval  of  I>r.  A.  G.  Kuthi'eii,  our  Chief  Field 
Xatoi-alist.  and  oiir  Board  of  Scientific  AdviBers,  and  is  u  continuation 
of  the  work  published  in  our  annual  report  for  1005. 

This  contribution  to  the  Biological  KuiTey  of  the  State,  which  the 
leKittlatni'e  authorized  nie  to  Kupen'ise  by  Act  No.  250  of  the  session  of 
11105,  comes  fi-oni  the  ITuivei-sity  Museum.  The  explorations  were  made 
without  expense  to  the  State  Survey  by  means  of  contributions  from 
frien<38  of  the  Museum.  As  tliis  wovk  is  in  hamiony  with  the  aims  of 
the  niological  Hui'\'ey  we  ai-e  fortunate  in  securing  such  co-operation. 
The  i^jwrts  on  the  Porcupine  Monntains  and  Isle  Royale  at  the  north 
eod  of  the  state  complement  the  work  on  Walnut  I-ake,  Oakland  county, 
and  ^hat  in  Huron  and  Tuscola  counties. 

I  trust  that  the  present  reiwrt  will  be  of  service  to  the  schools  of  the 
state. 

Vei-y  respect fullv, 

AI.FRED  C.  LANE, 

State  Geologist. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Fig.     1.  The  Light-house  at  Rock  Harbor,  lele  Roy^e 

2.  Cliffs  between  Tonkin  and  Conglomenite  Bays. 

3.  Summer  storm  waves  upon  the  be&ch  (I.  1)  nt  the  liead  of  Tonkin  Bay, 

south  of  the  Lkht-house 

4.  Sand  beach  at  the  head  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (1, 1) 

5.  Beach  pool  (1,  1)  near  Tonkin  Bay 

6.  Transition  from  the  beach  (I,  1)  to  rock  clearing  (I,  2),  south  ot  the  light- 

7.  Natural  rock  opening  (I,  2)  or  avenue,  farther  up  tbe  elope  than  in  Fi|.  6. 

8.  Natural  rock  clearing  or  opening  (1,  2)  north  ot  the  Light-house  at  Rock 
Harbor 

9.  Natural  rock  clearioK  (t,  2)  south  of  the  Light-house 

10.  Aibor  Vitae  b<^  (I,  4)  near  Tonkin  Bay 

11.  View  from  the  Jack  Pine  ridge  (I,  S),  lookmg  toward   the  head  of  Con- 
glomerate Bay 

12.  &cond  growth  ot  White  Birch  on  the  Trail  to  the  Jack  Pine  Ridge  (I,  5), 
Conglomerate  Bay 

13.  Jack  Pine  ridge  (I,  5)  Conglomerate  Bay 

14.  Sphagnum-Black  Spruce  bog  (I,  6)  near  the  Jack  Pme  ridge 

15.  Small  island  near  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  {III,  1) 

16.  Buhwh  >one  and  delto  at  the  bead  of  Rock  Haihor  (lU,  3) 

17.  Exposed  section  of  spit  formed  as  the  water  level  has  lowered  in  Rock  Har- 
bor, near  the  bonnning  of  the  trail  to  Sumner  Lake  (III,  4) 

18.  Sumner  Lake  (in,  5) 

19.  Western  end  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5} 

20.  Northeastern  margin  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  6) 

21.  Southeastern  comer  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5) 

22.  Western  end  of  Sumner  Lake  (IIL  5) 

23.  Northern  shore  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5) 

24.  Rock  opening  about  Camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3) 

26.  Rock  opening  at  the  Siskowit  camp  (V,  3) 

26.  Rock  opening  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3) 

27.  Border  of  the  miening  about  the  Siskowit  Camp  (V,  3),  near  the  beginning 
of  the  trail  to  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  4) 

28.  Ant  nest  in  the  opening  at  the  Siskowit  Camp  (V,  3).. 

29.  Genera]  character  of  the  south  shore,  near  the  eastern  entrance  to  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  2) 

30.  Rock  pool  on  the  beach  (V,  2),  where  a   variety  of  invertebrates  was 
secured 

31.  Saxifmga  aizoon  on  beach  (V,  2) 

32.  General  view  along  the  shore  at  V,  2 

33.  Farther  up  the  same  slope  as  Fitr.  32  and  adjacent  to  it 

34.  Still  farther  up  the  slope  and  adjacent  to  Fig.  S3 

35.  Looking  up  the  slope  on  the  western  portion  of  Station  V,  2 

36.  Upper  portion  of  western  part  of  Station  V,  2 

37.  Detail  of  western  part  of  Station  V,  2 

38.  Character  of  ground  cover  in  parts  of  the  Balsam-Spruce  forest  (V,  4) 

39.  Open  space  in  the  Balsam-Birch  forest  (V,  4) 

40.  Open  space  in  the  Balsam-Bircb  forest  (V,  4) 

41.  Tamarack  Swamp  (V.  5) 

42.  Spruce  margin  of  Station  V.  6 »olS 


43.  £fiaok  Spruce  margin  of  Station  V,  5. . . 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Page. 

44.  Bog  margLn  of  Station  V,  5 16 

45.  Long  Island  gull  rookeiy,  (V,  10) 16 

46.  Pond  in  Tamarack— Black  Spruce  swamp  (V,  11) 16 

47.  Margin  ot  Lily  pond  (V,  11) 16 

4«.  Black  Spruce  in  Cassandra  i one  of  Station  (V,  11) I« 

49.  Maple  forest  on  the  Desor  trail  (III, '04) 16 

50.  Forest  along  Washington  Brook  (IV,  '  04) 16 

51.  Showing  origin  of  the  glacial  Great  Lakes,  their  relation  to  the  ice  sheet 
and  their  Mississippi  drainage.  (After  Taylor  and  Leverett).  Cham- 
berlin  and  Salisbury,  Geology,  III,  p.  396.  Fie.  516 33 

5'2,  Showing  the  Algonquin  stafe  of  the  Great  Lakea;  a  wal«r  barrier  to  north- 
ward dispersal  ot  the  land  biota.  (After  Taylor  and  Leverett).  Cham- 
berlain and  Salisbury  Geology,  III,  p.  401.  Fig.  521 34 

53.  Contour  Map  of  Isle  Koyale,  Michigan.     Contour  interval  100  feet.     Pre- 

fared  by  Dr.  A.  C.  Lane 34 
he  Nipissing  Great  Lakes;  showing  the  fresh-water  highway  or  barrier 

in  the  west  and  the  sea  barrier  in  the  east.     (After  Taylor).    Chamber-  36 

lin  and  Salisbury,  Geology,  III,  p.  404.  Fie.  522 

55.  Surface  currents  of  Lake  Superior.     To  show  their  possible  influence  on 

the  origin  of  the  biota.     (Drawn  by  Hall,  after  Harrineton.) 56 

56.  "The  Wetidigo  Road",  from  the  clearing  at  the  ciub-house  to  Wendigo, 
Washington  Harbor 56 

57.  LonglHland(V,  10),  Siskowit  Bay,  looking  toward  late  RoyaleLight-HoUBe.  56 

58.  Gulfrookery  on  Long  Island  (V,  10) 56 

59.  Gull  rookery  on  Long  lahind  (V,  10) 5ft 

60.  Eagle  nest  at  Tobin  Harbor  (IV,  8) 56 

61.  Variations  in  the  shell  width  of  Potygyra  aUmlahrit 298 

62.  Variation  in  the  shell  height  of  Pol^gyra  aSn>labria 298 

63.  Lymnaea  slagnalU  varieties  from  Isle  Royale 298 


3y  Google 


,                                        CONTENi-S.  vii 

Pagp. 

b.  The  Shore  and. Marsh  Association  and  Habitat 138 

c.  Bc^forest  Association  and  Habitat 139 

d.  Aspen-birch  Association  and  Habitat 139 

e.  The  Climax  Association  or  Formation  and  Habitat 141 

3.  Interna!  Factors 142 

4.  Environmental  Factors 143 

5.  Environmental  and  Associational  Convei^nce 144 

6.  Succession  and  Environmental  Evolution 145 

7.  The  Relation  of  Succession  to  Organic  Evolution 145 

VT.    Some  Principles  of  Succession 146 

VII.   Some  AdvantBj^eg  of  a  Knowledge  of  the  Laws  of  Succession 149 

.   The  Coleoptera  of  Isle  Royale,  Lake  Superior,  and  their  Relation  to  the  North 

American  Centers  of  Dispersal,  by  Dr.  Chas.  C.  Adams 157 

I.    Introductory  Note 167 

II.    Notes  on  the  Habitat  Relations  of  Beetles. 158 

III.  The  Succession  of  Beetle  Associations 160 

1.  The  Lake  Shore  and  its  Beetle  Associations. 160 

2.  Rock  Openings  and  Associated  Beetles 160 

3.  Lake,  Fond  and  Bog  Habitats  and  Associations 161 

4.  The  Forests  and  their  Beetle  Associations 161 

IV.  The  General  Characteristics  of  the  North  American  Beetle  Fauna 163 

1.  Compiled  Generaliiations  on  the  Fauna 163 

2,  Comments  on  the  Preceding  Generalizations,  and  on  the  Literature  of 
Gec^raphic  Distribution 182 

V.   The  Present  Centers  of  Dispersal  of  the  Beetle  Fauna 183 

VI.  The  General  Characteristics  and  Affinities  of  the  Isle  Royale  Fauna 190 

1.  Faunal  Characteristics 190 

2.  MisceLaneouB  Notes  on  the  Fauna 191 

VII.   Lists  of  Isle  Royale  Beetles 192 

1.  List  of  Species  Collected  in  1905 192 

2.  SupplemenUry  List  of  Isle  Royrie  Beetles,  by  A.  B.  Wolcott 204 


.  Notes  on  the  Vwetation  of  Isle  Royrie,  Michi^n,  by  W.  P.  Holt 217 

I.    General  Observations  on  the  Plant  Sooeties 217 


2.  Shore  Vegetation 222 

3.  Forests 224 

4.  Burnings 225 

II.    Annotated  List  of  Plants 227 

2,  Annotated  List  of  Certain  Isle  Royale  Invertebrates,  by  Dr.  Chas.  C.  Adams —  249 

3.  Annotated  List  of  the  Mollusc*  of  Isle  Royale,  Michigan,  by  Biyant  Walker 281 

I .  Introduction 281 

II.  Faunai  Affinities 281 

UI.    Annotated  List 283 

4.. Report  on  the  Isle  Royale  Orthoptera  of  the  1905  Expedition  to  Isle  Royale, 

by  A.  P-Morse 299 

I,    General  Remarks 299 

II.    Annotated  List  of  Species 302 

III.    Station  List,  1905  Collections 

5.  Neuropteniid  Insects  from  Isle  Royale,  Michigan,  by  Dr.  James  G.  Needham 30S 

6.  Diplera  of  the  1905  University  Miiseum  Expedition  to  Isle  Royale,  by  Prof. 

James  S.  Hine 308 

7.  AnnoUted  List  of  Isle  Royale  Hymenoptera.  by  E.  S.  Titus 317 

8.  The  Ants  of  Isle  Royale,  Michigan,  by  Dr.  William  Morton  Wheeler.. 325 

9.  The  Cold  Blooded  Vertebrates  of  Isle  Royale,  by  Dr.   A.  G.  Ruthven 329 

10.  Annotated  List  of  the  Birds  of  Isle  Royale,  by  Max  Minor  Peet 337 

I,  Introduction 337 

II.  Classified  List  of  Birds  Observed  in  1905 339 

1.  SiunmeT  Residents 339 

2.  Migrants 339 

3.  Wmter  Residents  (migrants  from  the  north) 340 

4.  Permanent  Residents j^., . . . .  ,340 

_,.:by(jOOglC 


viii  CONTENTS. 

P««e. 

III.   Annotated  List 340 

11.  Noit«8  on  Isle  Royale  Hammals  and  their  Ecological  Relations,  by  I>r.  Chas.  C. 

Ad&nu 389 

I.   Introduction 389 

n.   Mammal  Succeasiona 390 

1.  Irftke-Pond-Swamp  Seriea 391 

2.  The  Land  Series 392 

III.  Faunal  Affinities  and  MisrationB 393 

1.  The  Geographic  Affinities  of  tbe  Fauna 393 

2.  Post-Glacial  Origin  of  the  Fauna 394 

IV.  Annotated  List 396 


3y  Google 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE. 


Throngli  the  genei-OMity  of  Mr.  Bryant  Walker,  of  DetFoit,  Hon.  Peter 
White*  and  Mr.  H.  M.  Kaufman  of  Marquette,  tlie  Univereily  Mu»eum  of 
the  University  of  Michigan  wan  able,  in  tlie  summer  of  1904,  to  »end  a 
party  to  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and  to  Isle  Royale,  Mivliigan.  The 
aim  of  the  party  was  to  collect  specimens  for  the  museum  and  to  make  an 
ecological  snrvej'  of  the  regions  visited.  The  party  wan  only  able  to 
spend  a  few  weeks  on  Isle  Eoyale  at  that  time,  but  through  the  continued 
generosity  of  Mr.  White  and  Mr,  Walker,  the  survey  was  continued  dur- 
ing the  summer  of  1905.  The  present  volume  on  the  natural  liistory  of 
the  island  has  resulted  from  these  surveys. 

To  Mr.  White  and  Mr.  Walker  the  Museum  is  under  special  obligations 
for  their  hearty  and  Hul)stantial  support,  not  only  in  the  funds  provided, 
but  also  for  their  aid  in  securing  the  transportation  of  the  party.  Many 
other  individuals  also  ns-sisted  in  various  ways.  Those  who  aided  the 
party  in  the  matter  of  trauxportation  wei"e:  Mr.  Henry  Kussel,  of  the 
Michigan  Central  Railway;  Mr.  Geo.  T.  Arnold,  of  the  Union  Ticket 
Office  and  Dock  of  Mackinac  Island;  Mr.  U,  H.  Brigham,  of  the  U.  8. 
and  Dominion  Ti-aunportation  Company  ("Booth  Line'')  ;  Mr.  Henry 
Meyering,  of  the  Graham  and  Morton  Line;  Mr,  M.  Adson,  of  the  Duluth, 
South  Shore  and  Atlantic  Railway.  The  survey  is  furthermore  indebted 
to  Section  Director  C.  F.  Schneider  of  the  Michigan  Section  of  the  Clim- 
atological  Sen'ice  of  the  U.  S.  Weather  Bureau,  for  the  loan  of  meteoro- 
logical instruments;  to  Major  Lansing  H.  Beach,  J>etroit,  of  the  Light 
House  Establishment,  for  permission  and  suggestions  as  to  camping  in 
the  abandoned  Ligbt-houee  at  Kock  Harbor;  to  Mr.  Geo.  C  Stone,  Sec- 
retary of  the  Washington  Club  of  Duluth,  Minn.,  for  the  use  of  their 
grounds  and  many  fnvora  from  their  care-takers,  Mr.  Olias.  Preulx  and 
Mr.  Michael  Hollinger;  to  Mr.  K.  Keutson,  of  Park  Place  ("Seutson's 
Hesort"),  Rock  Harlmr,  Isle  Royale,  for  many  favors  during  the  stay 
upon  the  island;  to  .Mr.  J,  H.  Malone,  Keei)er  of  the  Isle  Eoyale  Light, 
and  to  his  sons,  particularly  to  the  Assistant  Keeper,  Mr.  J.  A.  Maloue. 
for  many  favors  and  for  their  hospitality.  It  is  a  pleasure  to  have  this 
opportunity  of  thanking  these  persons  for  their  cooperation. 

On  the  return  of  the  party  from  the  field,  work  was  at  ouce  begun  upon 
the  collections,  and  in  this  a  large  number  of  specialists  have  aided  by 
the  determination  of  the  specimens.  Acknowledgements  are  made  to 
such  persons  throughout  the  report  and  will  not  be  repeated  here.  Those 
who  were  not  members  of  the  party,  hut  who  have  prepared  papera  ai'e : 
Mr.  Bryant  Walker,  of  Detroit,  Michigan,  Dr.  W,  M.  W'heeler,  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History;  Mr.  A.  P.  Morse.  Research  Assistant  of  tho 
Carnegie  Institution,  and  Wellesley  College;  Dr.  Jas.  G.  Needham,  Cor- 
^Recenllf  deceascrl. 


xiv  INTRODUCTION. 

nell  University;  Prof.  J.  S.  Hine,  Ohio  State  University;  Prof.  E.  S. 
Titas,  Utah  Agricultural  Experiment  Station ;  Dr.  A.  G.  Ruthven,  Univer- 
sity Museum,  UniverBity  of  Itfichtgan,  and  Mr.  A.  B.  Wolcott,  Field 
Museum  of  Katural  History. 

The  volunteer  members  of  the  Museum  party  should  be  mentioned  in 
this  connection:  Dr.  B,  A.  Brown,  l>r,  H.  A.  Gleason,  Mr.  W.  P.  Holt, 
Mr,  Max  Minor  Peet,  Mr.  Otto  McCreary,  and  the  w-riter.  It  will  be 
evident  that  the  volunteer  work  of  thia  report  comprises  the  major  part 
of  it. 

Personally  the  writer  wishes  to  expi-ess  his  appreciation  of  the  assist- 
ance of  Mr.  Walker  and  Mr.  White;  of  the  cooperation  of  the  members 
of  the  party  and  the  many  specialists  who  have  examined  the  specimens; 
and  of  the  valuable  suggestions  and  assistance  of :  Mr.  Nonnan  B.  Conger, 
Inspector  U.  6,  Weather  Bureau,  Detroit;  Dr.  Glover  M.  Allen,  Boston 
Society  of  Natural  History;  Mr.  Frank  Leverett  and  Mr.  P.  B.  Taylor, 
of  the  U.  8.  Geological  hurvey;  Prof.  H.  F.  Wickham,  State  University 
of  Iowa ;  and  to  Mr.  A,  B.  \^'olcott,  of  the  Field  Museum  of  Natural 
History.  Also  to  Dr.  A.  C  Lnne  of  the  Afichigan  Geological  Survey  for 
many  favors  and  courtesies,  including  the  preparation  of  the  topographic 
map,  and  to  Dr.  A.  O.  Buthven,  Chief  Field  Naturalist  of  the  Survey, 
for  assistance  in  the  publication  of  the  report. 

The  shortcomings  of  this  report  will  he  no  more  evident  to  any  one 
than  to  the  writer.  If,  however,  with  its  defects,  it  preserves  some  "van- 
ishing data,"  and  i)reBentR  suggestions  for  the  improvement  of  such 
ecological  survej-s,  it  will  have  served  the  purpose  for  which  it  was 
intended. 

CHAS.  C.  ADAMS. 
July  23.  Ift08. 

Hull  Zoological  Laboratory, 
University  of  Chicago. 


3y  Google 


ERRATA  ISLE  ROYALE  REPORT. 


Pni^e    11.    lli>«   <3.  '»'  torgtr  resd  large. 

l>)tge    ts,    line   11,  for  White  Spruce  read  Blact  Sjir-urr. 

I*aK«    I4>    llDe  T,  (or  liit  been  read  had  been. 

rn^e    lO.    line  16,  for  Cicaila  reBU  TlWrrrii. 

I'ase    le,    line  40,  tor  ohM-Hoiv  read  aiit-llnii. 

Page    l^t     line  SS,   for  hardioood   rpad  linnlicr.oai. 

Page    21.    line  24,  for  HibblKcan  rpBd  Hipjilgcug    land  elgenhere  In  Ihe  rerort). 

^BKe    21,    line   25,  (or  ccTjicolor  rend  p(e*frliip(. 

Page    21.    line' 48,  for  I.imnaea  rwd  Lj/iHiiofu    (Had  elsewliere  la  the  report). 

I>BK«    22.    line  28,  for  SF  read  iH. 

£*age    22,    line  43.  for  Acchna  read  j1c»c'iho. 

I*aKe    20,    line  21.  (or  Orupharria  read  G//iopflnfna. 

r>flK«   2T.   line  2.  (or  Mlloir  read  blUOKii, 

page    20.    line  14,  (or  Fly.  ^  read  r"'!?!.  ii  oriJ  (U. 

Paiee    -40.    Ilo^   21,  for  FAe  bcarfnif  of  Ihi    latter  read  tfiirlr. 

rsfCR    •IT,    line   46,  for  c  read  J. 

I-aK»   -48.    line  14,  (or  Fig,  S3  read  Fly.  Sj, 


rage   i 


f  33,  for  r  read  J. 


[•age  01>    llitc  28.  dele   (Fig.  SSI. 

Page  G3,    line  10,  dele  Ftff.  X: 

Page  03,    line  IS,  for  Lalie  read  Lakfi. 

I'age  «-4.    line  a,  (or  Fig.  U  read  Fig.  }S. 

Page  41^,    llUM  48  and  40,  for  Formica  ailamall  read  F 

I'OKB  GS.    lines  50  and  01,  dele  !fo.  lU. 

j-Bge  ''''t    '!"*  ■^"'  '"'■  O'Tp'iocna  read  agrojiharna. 

Page  I>8.    line  23,  tor  XI  read  F/, 

Page  HO,  line  C,  (or  coniKHoH  of  ircafAT  rend  ooiiilff 

I'age  13S,    line  31,  (or  fotterfd  read  Jorcultd. 

I>aee  l!t2,  line  20.  foe  BuriM,  F.  «.  read  Uurag.  F.   I.. 

page  158,   line  43,   tranapoHp  B»prf«((rf«  and  Trichlai. 

page  ISO.  line -9,   for  Op-opftofmn  rend   Ourophariia. 

Page  161.    line  44,  for  Tftefr         '    "    ' 


I'age 


18B,   line  2S,  dele  "William. 


I>age  200,  line  46,  for  Balitobma  read  JloUtoblut. 

j>a^e  20B,    line  46,  for  A'cy  Jeraeu  read   -VriP  Jcrie/i. 

PblS^  257,   line  17.  re&d   SaH(ci'Ia'-=l((Wor. 

page  201.   line  43,  (or  /aasfilaeae  read  Jni*f<fnc. 

I>il^e  284.    line  28.    for  St-6i  read   f7r)».  K(-(W. 

page  30rt.    line  28,  dele  1. 

page  306,    Hue  26,  add  ». 

j>age  3O0.    tine  30.  add  8.  t'oao"*". 

page  342,   line  25.  (or  Fig.  *l  rend  fig.  JT, 

paee  3S0.    line  .15,  add  Pig.  60. 

Page  3G4,   line  IT,  add  Flo.  n ;  line  20,  dele  Fig.  n. 

Page  8©3.   line  13,  for  (ojlMfHce*  read  liifccfiicrii. 

pg^^  S07.   line  T,  for  Canton  read  CotON. 

I'age  40T,  Hoe  26,  (or  /,  .V.  itaionc  read  J.  ft.  Jfnioic 


I'age 


419.  line  14,  (or  Hoopt  read  Baofim. 


rfbyGoOgIC 


abiGoogle 


ISLE  KOYALK  AS  A  BIOTIC  KSVIROSMEKT. 

BY    im.    CHARLES  I'.   ADAMS. 
I.       INTHODtCTION. 

i.  Itinerary  and  Feraomtel  of  the  Parly.  Tlie  Univereity  Mueeuin 
party  left  Ann  Arbor,  Michigan,  Junf>  lili,  and  reiifhed  the  abandoDed 
light-house  at  Rock  Harbor,  Isle  Koyalo,  on  tlie  morainfc  of  July  5,  1905. 
Th^  jMirty  was  coinpoeed  of  the  foltowing:  N.  A.  Wood,  Dr.  R.  A. 
Brown.  Dr.  11,  A.  (iteaaon,  W.  P.  Holf,  Otto  Mcf.'reary,  a  camp  hand, 
B.  F.  Silvery,  and  the  writer.  In  fieueral,  the  duties  of  the  various 
!Deinber»  were  as  follows:  Mr.  Wood,  llie  Museum  taxidermiHt. 
looked  after  the  trapping  of  mammaln  and  the  inTparation  of  bird  and 
mammal  skins.  He  wns  assisted  by  Dr.  Brown,  who  gave  moat  of  his  at- 
tention to  the  study  of  the  bii-d  life,  and  who  remained  with  the  party 
until  July  25.  In  the  study  of  bird  life.  Dr.  Brown,  Mr.  Wood  and  Mr, 
Mi'Creary  co-operated,  the  latter  devoting  his  entire  time  to  the  ecolog- 
ical phase  of  the  work.  l>r.  (Ileason  devoted  his  attention  to  the  collec- 
tion and  ecological  study  of  invertebnites.  particularly  molluscs  and  in- 
sects, and  most  of  the  photographs  were  taken  by  him.  In  eollecting  in- 
sects about  the  camps,  he  was  assisted  by  B.  F,  Savery.  Mr.  Holt's  time 
was  devoted  to  the  study  of  the  vegetation.  The  writer,  who  was  in 
charge  of  the  expedition,  gave  special  attention  to  the  environmental 
dynamics,  biotic  succession,  and  the  genera!  correlation  of  the  work 
of  the  various  members  of  the  party. 

Dnring  the  stay  at  Kock  Harbor,  Fig.  J,  the  following  localities  were 
examined  :  The  shore,  from  the  light-house  south  to  the  bead  of  Conglom- 
erate Bay;  the  region  abcwit  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  and  Sumner 
lake:  a  line  from  the  month  of  Benson  brook  to  Sargent  I^ake  and  Me- 
Carjjoe  Cove.;  and  the  vicinity  of  Tobin  Harbor;  in  other  words,  the 
localities  included   in   Stations   I-IV, 

The  party  remained  at  Rock  Hartor  from  July  ~i  to  August  1,  an^I 
then  moved  to  Kiskowit  Bay.  Here  Mr,  Max  M.  Peet  joined  the  party 
on  August  S,  and  devoted  his  attention  to  collecting  birds  ond  mammals. 
He  also  took  a  numlter  of  the  photographs.  While  at  the  Siekowit 
Camp,  the  bay  and  lake  of  that  name  were  examined,  and  also  the  Hay- 
town  trail  and  the  islands  near  the  Isle  Koyale  Light.  All  of  these  lo- 
calities are' included  in  Station  V. 

On  August  IT  the  party  moved  to  Wiishington  Harbor,  and  was  then 
partially  disbanded.  The  members  who  remained  made  their  headquar- 
ters on  the  grounds  of  the  Washington  Club,  at  the  head  of  Washington 
Harltor.  After  September  3  Mr.  I'eet  alone  remained  there  until  the 
22nd,  in  order  that  he  might  continue  the  study  of  the  fall  migration 

..Google 


2  MICHIQAN    SURVBT,   1908. 

of  the  birds.     He  returned  on  the  last  boat  of  tlie  Reaaon  for  Dnliitb, 
Minn. 

Dnring  the  previous  (190i)  season,  the  Mnseum  prfrty  had  made  a 
general  examination  of  the  vicinity  about  Washington  Harbor,  so  that  it 
was  now  thought  desirable  to  devote  more  time  to  other  localities.  With 
the  exception  of  bird  migration,  no  detailed  work  was  done  in  this  vicin- 
ity in  1905.  In  addition  to  the  region  about  the  head  of  the  harbor,  l^ke 
Desor  was  also  reached  from  this  point  by  means  of  the  road  along  the 
crest  of  the  (ireenstone  Itange. 

2.  The  Aim  and  Metltodfi  of  Work.  The  field  work  whs  couductcd  oii 
the  same  general  plan  as  that  pursued  during  the  pievioue  season  in 
the  Porcupine  Mounitainn  and  at  Washingjfxin  Hapboi'.  Much  inor** 
ground  was  covered,  however,  l>ecause  it  seemed  imprnhable  that  a  third 
trip  could  be  made  to  the  same  region.  It  therefore  seemed  desirable 
to  gain  some  idea  of  the  biota  of  the  island  as  a  whole,  because  of  its 
Canadian  character.  Even  then,  the  survey  was  confined  almost  exclu- 
sively to  the  region  south  of  the  (ireenstono  Range. 

As  mentioned  in  the  report  for  1904  (Kuthven.  '06,  pp.  11-12).  the  aim 
of  the  work  was  not  simply  to  collect  8|)ccimens,  but  also  to  study  the 
relations  of  the  plant  and  animal  life  (the  biota)  to  their  surround- 
ings. The  environment  as  well  as  the  biota  was  considered  from  a  dyn- . 
amic  standpoint,  and  an  ctfort  was  made  to  analyse  the  environment 
in  order  that  the  dominant  conditions  and  proceiwes  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed might  be  recogni7.ed,  and  their  laws  of  change  be  perceived  and 
formulated.  To  i-esolve  au<'h  a  pi-obleni  as  this  must  of  necessity 
require  more  time  and  detaite<l  investigation  than  the  possibilities  of  a 
few  months  work  will  pei-mit,  and  yet  it  is  equally  evident  that  prelimi- 
nary work  should  be  carried  on  from  a  genetic  stand|>oint.  becanst^  such 
a  method  determines  upon  what  facts  cni])haKis  should  l»e  i>laced.  and  the 
broader  and  moi-e  general  relations,  as  well  as  the  details,  are  equally 
subject  to  a  genetic  and  dynamic  treatment.  In  jireliniinary  work  of 
this  character,  it  is  considen-d  of  special  importance  to  discover,  if  pos- 
fiible,  the  order  of  the  major  biotic  siiccessions,  becanse  these  succes- 
sions must  be  clearly  i)er<'cived  before  their  causes  can  undergo  ade- 
quate analysis.  Our  knowledge  of  causes  generally  laps  far  behind  our 
recognition  of  successions. 

Thus  throughout  the  study  of  the  Isle  Royale  biota  a  special  effort 
was  made  to  investigate  the  genesis  or  successions  of  events.  The  en- 
vironment has  not  lieeu  considered  as  limited  to  habitats  alone,  bnt 
also  to  include  that  greater  unit,  the  geographic.  To  ignore  this  is 
to  overlook  the  real  background.  It  is  believed  that  certain  advantages 
ai*e  derived  from  this  method  of  work,  which,  although  they  may  be 
recognized  from  other  points  of  view,  are  likely  to  be  subordinated  to 
other  facts.  It  should  not  for  a  moment  Ik?  thonght  that  this  method  is 
considered  as  the  only  one  of  approach,  but  it  apjiears  to  have  certain 
advantages  which  seem  to  justify  its  adoption.  Nor  should  it  be  inferred 
that  the  genesis  of  the  biota  and  the  habitat  is  all  that  should  he  in- 
cluded in  an  ecological  survey.  The  problem  of  suci-essinn  is  only  one  of 
several  which  clearly  show  the  intimate  i*elations  and  i-esponses  between 
organisms  and  their  envtmnmenf ;  others  that  remain  to  be  investigated 
involve  physiological  and  structural  change»<.  and  various  modifications 
of  habit  and  behavior  of  Ixith  plants  and  animals, 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLB  ROYALE.  3 

The  ecolofcical  relationa  in  the  north  are  so  different,  in  some  i-cajiocta. 
from  th«ffie  farther  south,  that  one  inay  easily  form  au  erroneous  *;ou- 
(■eption  of  the  conditions  under  whicli  nucli  a  pieliniinapj-  investigation 
may  be  made.  A  very  favorable  condition  for  the  work  wjiu  the  fact  thiit 
practically  all  the  time  was  devoted  to  it,  instead  of  only  ocniHJonal 
trips  being  made  for  the  purpose,  as  is  necessary  with  those  busy  with 
other  dutieH.  There  are  also  certain  advantages  in  being  able  to  be  io 
(Im?  field  coutinuouely,  an  a  certain  familiarity  with  conditions  iw  ac- 
tjuired  in  the  beginning,  especially  whei-e  the  variety  of  forms  is  limited, 
nhirh  otherwise  would  involve,  time  upon  each  visit.  Although 
tuoat  of  the  ntenibers  of  our  party  were  upon  the  island  only  during  July 
nnd  Angust,  yet  at  this  time  those  seasonal  plieuomena  were  concen- 
trated which  require  much  more,  or  several  times  that  amount  of  time 
for  their  development  farther  south.  The  seasonal  contrast  is  well  il 
Inatrated  when  the  siminier  season  at  the  other  extreme  of  the  State  of 
Michigan — 5(10  miles  away— is  contrasted  with  that  of  Isle  Itoyale.  8uch 
relations  are  further  reinforced  by  the  fact  that  the  species  and 
societies  which  are  dominant  in  the  various  northern  habitats  are 
ycTv  much  smaller  in  nunil»ei-  than  farther  south.  This  necessarily  sim- 
plifies the  problem,  and  to  a  corresponding  degree  i-educes  the  cham-es 
of  error  in  anticipating  biotic  changes  which  are  correlated  with  those 
"f  the  environment.  This  is  a  i-elation  of  much  imiH>rtance  in  liie  study 
t'f  HMcicssida.  The  writer  was  especially  impressed  with  the  rrUitirr 
xiMpUrilu  of  the  problem  of  eiivironnieutnl  relations  and  of  the  biotic 
Bncressiim  «|>on  Isle  Royale,  and  has  received  further  coufiniiation  of  the 
"pinion  that  a  tendency  to  exaggerate  the  complexity  of  the  cnviifm- 
meat  is  prevalent. 

An  iiii|M>rtant  aid  .in  envii-onjnental  analysis  has  l>een  reieived  from 
llie  elTort  to  distinguish  the  major  or  geograpliic  features  of  the  gross 
eiiviroii.nient  from  the  minor  habitat  units  which  make  up  the  mosaic 
or  complex,  although  their  mutual  and  genetic  n-lations  weiv  not 
"vcrlooked.  Some  of  these  relations  have  l)een  well  expressinl  by 
llontgniuery  in  his  comment  on  distribntion  t'll(>,  p.  G)  as  follows: 
"And,  as  is  always  the  case  when  the  method  has  been  consistent  and 
wientific.  the  factors  of  distribution  and  the  meaning  of  it  will  ulti- 
mately be  stated  in  very  simple  form.  These  factoi-H  appear  to  ns  now 
to  be  enornionsly  complex,  but  this  is  Wcause  we  hai-e  hardl.i"  com- 
menced to  analyze  them."' 

At  this  point  it  should  lie  mentioned  that  there  are  certain  dif- 
ficulties which  tend  to  confnse  tlie  field  worker,  which,  if  clearly 
understood,  will  often  be  of  aid  in  ecological  studies.  In  pursuing 
fleld  studies,  in  addition  to  a  knowledge  of  the  species,  one  of  the  fii-st 
essentials  is  a  familiarity  with  the  habits  and  habitat  preferences  of 
organismB;  and  further,  there  should  be  the  ability  Io  i-ecoguize  bow 
the  dominance  of  one  society  is  transformed  into  that  of  another. 
The  lack  of  a  sufficient  power  of  constructive  imagiuation  makes  the 
detection  of  such  traosformations  very  difflruH.  ]>erhapa  even  impossible 
to  some.  This  limitation  almost  completely  i-estricts  such  a  student 
to  the  purely  descriptive  phases  of  fleld  ecologj',  because  the  explanatory 
phase  lies  beyond  his  gi-asp,  although  there  remains  for  him  a  hirgn 


4  MICHIGAN  SURTET,   1908. 

field  (or  UBeful  and  valuable  activity  in  the  stndy  of  habitat  preference, 
and  the  mntnal  relations  of  the  aBBOciated  species  in  given  habitats.  A 
familiarity  with  the  forms  studied,  under  diverse  circumstances,  de- 
velops a  certain  perspective  which  is  a  great  help  in  preventing  confusion 
caused  by  minor  and  relatively  insignificant  details. 

The  limited  time  spent  in  the  present  investigation  did  not  permit 
detailed  studies  of  the  interrelations  of  the  oi^aoisms  within  the  habitat, 
either  in  their  relation  to  the  environment  or  to  each  other.  In  local 
studies  attention  is  usually  given  to  detailed  life  histories  rather  than 
to  a  delibCTate  study  of  their  interrelations  as  members  of  a  society. 
The  emphasis  which  is  sometimes  placed  upon  individnal  life  histories 
would  lead  one  to  expect  that  such  histories  could  be  assembled  and 
would  give  us  the  same  result  as  if  they  had  been  studied  as  a  aocietf/. 
But  the  points  of  view  are  so  different  that  such  a  result,  although 
theoretically  possible,  is  unlikely  to  be  obtained.  At  this  time  we  only 
wish  to  emjdiasize  the  fact  that  both  methods  should  be  used  to  secnre 
the  best  results.  For  example,  in  applying  these  principles  to  the  study 
of  birds,  the  life  histories  of  the  dominant  species  of  a  society  might 
first  be  given  special  attention.  Then  the  relations  of  the  dominant 
species  to  others  of  the  association  and  to  the  environraeut  may  be  deter- 
mined and  later  on  the  subordinate  kiuds  considered.  This  will  involve 
prolonged  study  in  the  field  (and  laboratory)  of  the  habits  of  nesting- 
feeding,  rearing  of  young,  etc.,  as  influenced  not  only  by  other  mem- 
bers of  the  same  species,  but  also  by  other  species  in  the  same  habitat. 
The  same  general  method  is  applicable  to  other  groups  of  organisms. 

3.  Previous  Biological  Inveatigatians  upon  Isle  Royale.  Previous  to 
the  investigations  by  the  Museum  party  in  1904,  {Huthven  and  others. 
'06)  there  seems  to  have  been  very  little  study  of  the  Isle  Royale  biota. 
Several  collections  of  plants  and  animals  have  been  made,  but  very  little 
has  been  published  about  them.  In  1848  W.  D.  Whitney  was  "ornithologist 
and  botanist"  for  the  government  geological  survey  parties,  and  he  pub- 
lished a  list  of  the  plants  found.  (Foster  and  Whitney,  '51,  pp.  359-381). 
Incidental  mention  is  also  made  in  these  geological  reports  of  the  collec- 
tions of  animals  (Foster  and  Whitney,  '50,  pp.  17,  51,  201;  Jackson,  '49. 
pp.  423,  440,  441,) ;  but,  so  far  as  known  to  the  writer,  no  detailed  reports 
were  published. 

So  far  as  the  vegetation  is  concerned,  the  most  important  source  of 
information  is  the  maps  of  the  Ives  Linear  Survey.  Here  the  general 
character  of  the  forest,  the  extent  of  the  swamps,  and  the  underbrush 
are  indicated.  Mr,  Henry  Oilman  ('73),  of  Detroit,  made  two  visits 
to  the  island  (one  of  which  was  in  1873),  and  his  botanical  and  ethno- 
logical collections  were  presented  to  Columbia  and  Harvard  Colleges- 
In  1890  Mr.  F.  E.  Wood  made  a  collection  of  plants  from  the  vicinity 
of  Rock  Harbor  and  presented  them  to  the  herbarium  of  the  Botanical 
Department  of  the  University  of  Michigan;  and  in  1901  W.  A.  Wheeler 
('01)  published  a  short  pajwr  on  some  plants  taken  on  the  northeast 
end  of  the  island,  ' 

The  invertebrate  fauna  found  in  the  deep  water  off  Isle  Royale  was 
examined  by  Smith  in  1871,  and  a  list  of  Coleoptera  from  Isle  Hoyale 
was  published  by  Hubbard  and  Schwarz  ('78).  The  writer  has  recent!\' 
published  a  paper  on  certain  phases  of  the  problem  of  succession,  ns 


ECOLOaV   OF    ISLB   ROYALE.  5 

illustrafed  by  the  birds  upon  Isle  Boyale.  This  paper,  with  Bome  ad- 
ditions, is  included  in  this  volume.  Detailed  references  to  these  papers 
will  be  found  in  the  accompanying  bibliographies. 

From  the  above  remarks,  is  it  quite  evident  that  very  little  attention 
bas  been  given  to  the  biolog:ical  conditions  of  the^  island,  and  moch 
remains  to  be  done.  In  all  probability  other  naturalists  have  visited 
the  Isle,  but  I  have  not  learned  of  their  results. 

4.  Historical  Nate.  The  history  of  Isle  Royale,  since  its  cession 
by  the  Chippewa  Indians  in  1843,  is,  in  brief,  one  of  prospecting, 
mining  explorations,  flying,  summ^  resorts,  and  scit*ntiflc  surveys  of 
the  topography,  hydrology,  geolog}-,  and  biology. 

A  general  historical  account  is  given  in  Lane's  report  ('98)  on  the  geol- 
ogy  of  the  island,  and  need  be  mentioned  here  only  in  outline.  There 
is  abundant  evidence  that  in  prehistoric  times  the  Indians  mined  copper 
«n  the  island.  Within  three  or  four  years  after  the  cession  of  the  island 
to  the  United  States,  it  was  invaded  by  prospectors  and  explorers,  so 
that  by  1847,  according  to  Lane,  "the  island  presented  perhaps  as  lively 
a  scene  as  ever  in  its  history."  At  this  time  the  Linear  Survey  was 
made  by  William  Ives.  But  this  period  of  activity  was  only  of  short 
doration,  for  the  decline  was  almost  as  rapid  as  had  been  the  ascent ,  and 
by  18S5  the  "island  was  a  desert  once  more,  with  no  permanent  in- 
habitants." (Lane).  This  passive  condition  of  affairs  lasted  until  the 
Lake  Survey  engineers  arrived  in  1867.  This  survey  continued  until 
1871,  during  which  interval  explorations  were  somewhat  revived,  and 
continued  for  several  years,  only  to  be  followed  by  another  relapse  and 
still  another  ascent  in  1891,  when  a  number  of  careful  and  detailed 
explorations  were  made  for  copper  by  means  of  the  diamond  drill. 
But  this  activity  also  ceased  about  1892.  A  year  later,  and  again  in 
1895,  Dr.  Lane  visited  the  island  for  geological  investigations. 

The  mineral  sources  are  thus  seen  to  have  been  the  main  attraction. 
The  forest  growth  is  too  stunted  and  inaccessible  to  have  merited  the 
attenti<m  of  lumbermen,  although  several  timber  prospectors  were  pre- 
sent during  the  summer  of  1905.  During  more  recent  years  the  Ash- 
ing and  summer  resort  business  have  attracted  some  attention  to  the 
island,  and  have  made  it  accessible  during  the  summer  through  regular 
steamboat  service.  The  climate,  scenery  and  the  fishing  make  the 
island  very  attractive  as  a  summer  resort,  but  it  should  be  recognized 
that  if  the  scenery  is  to  be  preswved  the  forests  must  be  protected 
from  fires,  because  reforestation  is  exceedingly  slow  on  land  with  such 
a  shallow  soil.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  geographic  isolation  may  be  a 
protection  from  such  devastation,  because  the  cool  summer  climate, 
the  rocky  coast,  the  forests,  the  picturesque  scenery,  and  the 
surrounding  Lake  Superior,  are  natural  features  which  should  long 
r^natD  attractive  to  summer  visitors.  If  the  interest  in  copper  should 
revive  permanently,  the  biota  will  become  gr^tly  modified,  in  which 
cajse  some  conception  of  the  conditions  upon  the  island  in  1904  and 
1905  will  be  preserved  by  these  records. 

[It  may  be  of  interest  to  note  here  that  86,000  acres  of  the  island 
were  for  sale  in  the  winter  of  1908  for  $150,000.     Lane.] 

5.  Available  Maps  of  Tale  Royale.  The  available  maps  are  not 
generally  known  to  the  public,  and  are  therefore  listed  here,  especially 
those  which  are  of  value  from  a  biological  standpoint.  >oIc 


6  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

1.  The  Ives  Linear  Survey  Maps.  Because  of  their  large  size  (2 
inches  to  the  milej,  and  the  detailH  concerning  the  character  of  the 
swamps,  the  forest  and  the  soil,  this  is  the  most  useful  map  for  tbe 
field.  Photolithogi-aphii-  copies  of  the  township  maps,  of  which  there 
are  eighteen,  inav  be  secured  for  25  cents  each  from  the  General  Land 
Office  at  Washington,  ]>.  €. 

2.  The  U.  8.  I.rfike  Survey  Chart  of  Isle  Royale,  (Catalog  No.  Sh.). 
This  is  very  uBeful  l>ecau8e  it  indicates  the  topop^phy,  in  part  liy 
hachures,  and  gives  the  details  of  the  coast,  including  soundings  and 
the  character  of  the  bottom.  A  large  tract  of  the  interior,  between 
lakes  Desor  and  Chickenbone,  is  unmapped.  This  nuip  may  be  secure<l 
for  25  cents  from  the  Lake  Hur\ey  Oflices  at  Detroit  and  Duluth.  An 
excellent  cliart  of  the  cntiif-  Lake  Superior  basin  may  be  secured  from 
the  same  source. 

3.  Lane's  Geologicjil  Map.  Published  hy  the  Michigan  State  Geo- 
logical Survey.  It  accompanies  Lane's  report  ('98)  on  the  geology  of 
the  island,  and  is  on  a  scale  of  ■%  of  an  inch  to  the  mile. 

4.  Passage  Island  Topogi-aphic  Hh^t.  This  is  the  only  sheet  pub- 
lished by  the  V.  S.  Geological  Survey  which  includes  any  part  of  Isle 
Royale,  and  it  covers  only  the  extreme  northeastern  end  of  the  island. 
This  may  be  secured  from  the  Survey  for  5  cents.  The  contour  inter- 
val is  2»  feet,  and  the  scale  one  inch  to  the  mile. 

5.  An  English  land  company  is  said  to  own  much  of  the  island,  and 
has  published  a  map  on  a  scale  of  %  of  an  inch  to  the  mile.  'Oie  agent 
for  this  company  is  R.  R.  Goodell,  Houghton,  Michigan. 

H.       TUG    BIOTA    CONSIDEBBD    BY    STATIONS. 

1.  The  Location  of  Field  Stations  in,  1905.  As  a  detailed  survey  of 
the  entire  island  was  impossible,  it  was  necessary  to  select  representa- 
tive localities  and  conditions,  or  habitats,  and  to  devote  to  these  all 
available  time  for  study  and  collecting.  In  order  to  make  sure  that 
these  conditions  were  re])reseutative,  considerable  care  was  necessary 
in  locating  these  i^tations.  In  general  a  Station,  in  the  strict  sense, 
stands  for  a  region,  while  a  Substation  refers  to  a  particular  habitat, 
usually  of  relatively  limited  extent.  The  character  and  extent  of  a 
Substation,  (or,  as  it  is  generally  called,  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  a 
"station,''!  was  determined  primarily  by  the  relatively  homogeneous 
character  of  the  conditions.  Thus  a  "station,"  as  the  Balsam-Spruce 
forest  (V,  4)  for  example,  varied  somewhat  in  its  extent  with  different 
groups  of  organisms.  In  the  case  of  birds  it  included  a  greater  area 
than  was  necessary  for  many  invertebrates,  such  as  land  snails,  but 
in  every  case  such  a  "station"  is  intended  to  enable  one  to  determine 
wiiat  organisms  were  dominant  and  chaiacteiiKtic  of  such  a  sample 
sitnation. 

Some  such  system  of  sainpliug  is  generally  advantageous  or  necessary, 
and  ihis  is  particularly  essential  in  the  case  of  a  surveying  party,  in 
order  to  give  deflniteness  and  co-ordinated  activity  to  their  work,  parti- 
cularly if  the  results  are  to  be  made  at  all  comparable.  Of  course  some 
individual  judgment  is  necessary  in  applying  such  a  plan  to  different 
groups,  but  no  more  perhaps  than  is  necessary  to  carry  out  any  other 
comprehensive  plan.  ^-  i 

^  ^  i,Cooglc 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE. 


J.    Lwntion  of  Field  Statiattfi,  I'.m. 


s^tation  I.  Light-houKe  Peninsiila.  l>etween  Kwk  Harbor  and  tlie 
iM^aa  of  Conglomerate  Bav,  Sec.  ;!G  and  X.  K.  '/i  Sw.  3i.  T.  66  N.,  R.  a^t 
W\ 

Snb.  1.     Lake   and    Bay   Beaches. 

Sob. 'a.     Natural  Rock'CIearinps,  K.  E.  14  Rec.  26. 

Sub.  3.     Balsani-Spruce  Forest,  N.  E.  V4  Sec.  26. 

Snb.  4.     Tamarack,  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps,  See.  26. 

Snb.  5.     Jack  Pine  Ridge.  S.  W.  1/4  Spc.  26  and  S.  E.  V^  Sec.  "- 

Sub.  6.     Sphagnum-Spruce  Bog.  H.  W.  14   Sec.  26  and   8.   E, 

Vi  Sec.  27. 
Sob.  7.     Light-house  Clearing,  N.  W.  %  Sec.  26. 
Stution  II.     Rock  Harbor  and  McOargoe  Cove  Trail,  Sec.  27,  22,  21, 
20,  29,  30,  T.  66  X.,  R.  34  W..  and  Sec.  25  and  26,  B.  35  W.,  T.  66  N. 

Sab.  1.     Benson  Brook  and  Ransom  Clearing  (outlet  of  Benson 
Lake),  >'.   E.  14   Sec.  27  and  S.  E.  y^   Sec.  22,  T. 
66  N..  K.  U  \V. 
Sub.  2.     Tamarack  Swamp,  S.  W.  14  Sec.  22  and  8.  E.  ^  Sec. 

21.  T.  66  X.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  3.     Rock  Ridge  Clearings  (burned  ovei).  Sec.  21  and  20, 

T.  66  >'.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  4.     McChi^oc  Cove,  at  end  of  Trail.  X.   E.   y^   Sec.  2(1 

T.  66  N..  R.  33  W. 
Snb.  5.     Forbes  Lake,  N.  E.  14  Sec.  28,  T.  66  N.,  R.  34  W. 
Station  III.     Western  End  of  Bock  Harbor.  Sec.  28,  33  and  32,  T 
66  N..  R.  34  W.,  and  Sec.  5  and  4,  T.  65  N.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  1.     Small  Island,  S.  E.  y^  Sec.  32. 
Sub.  2,     In  Harbor  at  West  end  of  Island,  Sub.  1. 
Snb.  3.     Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta,  Sec.  32,  T.  66  N.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  4.     Trail  to  Sunlner  Lake,  Sec.  33,  T.  66  N.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  5.     Sumner  Lake,  Sec.  33  and  34,  T.  66  N.,  fl.  34  W. 
Sub.  6.     Southwest  Coves  of  Rock  Harbor,   Sec.   5  and  4,  T. 

65  N.,  R.  34  W. 

Station  IV.     Tobin  Harbor  and  Vicinity,  T.  66  and  6T  N.,  R.  33  W. 
Sub.  1.     Scovill  Point,  Sec.  26  and  35,  T.  67  N.,  R.  33  W. 
Sub.  2.     Island  Xo.  14,  Sec.  26,  T.  67  X.,  R.  Sti  W. 
Sub.  3.     BaTOu,  Xorth  of  Monnment  Rock  Trail,  X.  W.  14  l^ec. 

34,  T.  67  X.,  R.  33  yV. 
Bnb.  4.    Trail  to  Monument  Bock,  X.  W.  Vi  Sec.  34,  T.  67  X^., 

H.  33  W. 
Sub.  5.    Clearing  at  Xeutson's  Resort  (Park  Place),  Sec.  4,  T. 

66  N.,  R.  33  W. 

Sub.  6.    Small  island  in  Tobin  Harbor.  Sec.  5,  T.  66  X..  R.  3;t  \V. 
Sub.  7.    Head  of  Tobin  Harbor,  Sec.  7,  T.  66  N.,  R.  33  W. 
Sub.  8.    Trail  to  Greenstone  Range,  Sec.  7,  T.  66  X.,  R.  33  W., 

and  Sec.  12,  T.  66  N.,  R.  34  W. 
Sub.  9.     Mountain  Top,  Sec.  12,  T.  66  X.,  R.  34  W. 
Station  V.    Siskowit  Bay,  Lake  and  Vicinity. 

Sab.  1.     The  Beach,  (at  camp).  Sec.  32.  T.  65  X..  R.  35  W. 
Sub.  2.     Heath  Zone  and  Beach,  Sec.  33,  T.  65  X.,  B.  35  W. 
Sub.  3.     Bock  Clearing  (at  camp).  Sec.  32,  T.  65  X.,  R.  35  W. 


8  MICHIGAN   eURVBY,   1908. 

Sub.  4.     Trail  throogh  Baisam-Birch  Foreet,  Sec.  32  and  31,  T. 

05  >'.,  R.  35  AV. 
Sab.  5.     Tamarack  Swamp.  N.  W.  %  Sec.  32,  T.  65  N.,  R.  35  W- 
Snb.  6.    South  Shore  of  Siskowit  Lake.  Sec.  31  and  32,  T.  65 

>'.,  R.  35  W. 
Snb.  7.     Havtown  Trail,  from  Siakowit  Ijabe,  West  Line  of  Sec. 
24,  aoi-oss  Sec.  13,  T.  G5  N.,  R.  3(1  ^V.,  cf.  Lane.  '!I8. 
pi.  XI. 
Sub.  S.     .\rlM)r  Vitae  Swamp,  at  end  of  Havtown  Trail,  X.  W. 

i,i  Sec.  13,  T.  65  N.,  R.  36  W. 
Sub.  9.     Ontlet  of  Siskowit  Lake,  N.  W.  i/l  Sec.  36,  T.  65  X., 

R.  36  W..  and  Kec.  31,  T.  65  X.,  R.  35  W. 
Sub.  10.     Long  Inland  Gull  Rookerv  and  Menagerie  Island,  T. 

64  X..  K.  .35  W. 
Sub.  11.     Taiuaiack  Spruce  Swamp,  See.  33.  T.  65  N.,  R.  35  W. 
The  following  stations  were  examined  by  tbe  Museum  partr  during 
the  season  of  1904.     Part  of  these  Stations  were  re-examined  and  will 
be  referred  to  by  Station  number  and  date,  thus:    Sta.  I.  '04. 

Station  I,  'M.  Clearing  on  the  Shore  of  Washingfoii  Harbor,  Sec.  2u, 
T.  64  X.,  R.  38  W. 

Station  II,  '04.    Washington  Treek.  Sec.  29,  T.  64  X.,  R.  38  W. 
Station  III,  '04.     Trail  along  the  top  of  (ireenstoue  Range   (Desor 
Trail).  T.  64  X.,  R.  37.  38  W. 

Station  IV,  '04.    Washington  Brook.  Sees.  2S  and  .32,  T.  64  X.,  R.  3S  W. 
Station  Y.  '04.    Tamarack  Swamp,  Sec.  20.  T.  64  X..  R.  38  W. 
Station  VI.  '04.    South  of  Greenstone  Range,  Sec.  32.  T.  64  X..  R.  38  \V. 
Station  TII,  '04.    Lake  Desor,  T.  64  X.,  R.  32  W. 

Station  VIII.  '04.  Western  end  of  Siskowit  Bav.  Wees.  27  and  2S, 
T.  64  X.,  E.  37  W. 

Station  IX,  '04,  SonthwpHtern  end  of  Minong  Trap  Range,  Sec.  30. 
T.  64  X.,  R.  39  W. 

Station  X.  '04.  Washington  Harbor.  T.  64  X.,  R.  .38  W. 
2.  General  Charactfrhtu-s  of  the  Statiottf*.  In  this  swtlon,  I  do  not 
aim  to  give  a  completely  correlated  account  of  the  biota  of  each  stn- 
tion,  but  to  present  a  general  idea  of  the  main  characteristics  of  the 
various  situations  examined,  and  some  of  their  common  and  represeii- 
tati^'e  plants  and  animals.  Photographs  illustrating  the  chamc- 
teriaticB  of  the  various  ''stations"  will  accompany  thJK  section,  and 
should  be  consulted  in  connection  with  the  text. 

Station  I,  Substatifni  1.  The  Lake  and  Bay  Biachix.  This  "station" 
includes  the  shore  line  from  Rock  Harbor,  near  the  light-bouse,  Fig.  1, 
to  the  head  of  Conglomerate  Bay.  The  entii-e  shore  was  not  studied  in 
detail,  as  most  of  the  time  nas  devoted  to  the  lieachcs  which  ai-e  l>eing 
formed  at  the  heads  of  the  coves  and  bays.  Quite  a  variety  of  condi- 
tions are  repre8ent<Hl  along  this  shoi-e.  due  not  only  to  the  degree  of 
exposure  to  the  waves  of  Lake  Superior,  but  also  to  the  character  of 
the  rocky  coast  itself.  All  degrees  of  shore  and  beach  are  developed,  from 
overhanging  and  vertical  '■liffs,  Fig.  2,  with  bases  strewn  with  large 
blocks  lowered  by  sappiug,  to  a  shore  line  with  a  low  angle  strewn  with 
shingle  and  gravel,  and  a  sandy  beach,  as  found  at  the  head  of  Conglom- 
erate Bay.    In  harmony  with  the  dip  of  the  i-ocks  and  the  effect  of  the 

D,  _,    i..C0CH^Ic 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE  KOYALE.  » 

glacial  ice  movement  upon  tbe  valley  alapes,  which  tend  to  be  gentle 
on  the  soQtheaetem  aide,  the  corresponding  shores  of  the  bays  and 
coves  are  nsually  at  a  low  angle,  except  possibly  where  faulting  has 
taken  place,  or  a  wave  cut  terrace  has  been  developed.  The  northern 
Bides  of  tlie  bays  are  comparatively  abrupt,  and  there  is  thus  a  tendency 
for  the  cliffs  to  occur  mainly  upon  tbe  northern  slopes  and  shores.  The 
larger  bays  are  the  submerged  portions  of  the  valleys,  marie  the 
location  of  the  less  resistant  rocks,  and  are  inherited  topographic  fea- 
tures; but  many  of  tbe  minor  cnvcs  and  the  rocky  headlands  have  been 
carved  by  the  activity  of  the  present  lake.  The  beaches  are  only  de- 
veloped at  the  beads  of  the  coves  and  bays,  and  are  very  largely  com- 
posed of  shingle  and  gravel.  The  only  extensive  sand  beach  seen  was 
at  the  head  of  Conglouievate  Bay.  The  character  of  the  material  com- 
posing these  beaches  clearly  shows  its  local  origin,  and  emphasizes  the 
isolation  which  prevents  long  shore  transportation  of  sncli  material.  Thus 
only  floating  material  is  liable  to  extensive  long  shore  dispersal,  a  signifi- 
cant fact  that  beOTS  npoo  the  dispersal  of  the  snail  life  along  the  shore. 

During  severe  storms,  the  wave  action  upon  this  coast  is  quite  in- 
tense and  even  the  waves  of  the  summer  storms  are  quite  active,  aa  may 
be  »een  by  referring  to  Fig.  3.  The  blue  deep  lake  water  comes  close 
np  to  the  shore,  so  that  generally  no  breaker  line  is  developed  off  shore. 
In  several  places  there  arc  numerous  reefs  or  islands  (usually  the  iso- 
lated continuations  of  the  rock  ridges),  which  tend  to  break  the  force 
of  the  waves  rolling  in  from  the  opeu  lake. 

>'o  effort  was  made  to  study  the  life  of  the  open  lake,  only  the  shallow 
irater  of  tbe  bays  and  coves  being  examined.  The  major  environmental 
features  of  tbe  coast  are  tbe  Ijower,  Middle  and  Upper  Beaches;  but  these 
are  only  differentiated  clearly  at  the  heads  of  the  coves  and  harbors. 
The  Ijower  and  Middle  Beaches  are  only  seasonal  expressions  of  the  same 
phenomena,  but  ecologically  they  are  fairly  distinct. 

Tlic  Ijoicer  Bench.  This  beach  extends  from  the  shallow  water  to 
the  upper  limit  of  the  summer  waves.  The  submerged  portion  is  not 
sharply  defined  above  on  account  of  tbe  changes  in  level  of  the  water 
surface,  dne  to  waves,  the  pariodical  and  seasonal  fluctuations,  and  the 
atmospheric  pressure  fseichesl.  In  time  there  has  been  a  downward 
migration  of  the  entire  beach  zone,  a  tendency  which  is  in  part  counter- 
acted by  the  northward  elevation  of  the  land.  This  is  the  zone  domi- 
nated by  water,  ice,  and  wave  action.  It  is  certainly  a  sharpiy  defined 
tension  line  upon  an  exposed  coast,  which  clearly  suggests  that  it  is  not 
probable  that  many  forms  of  animals  have  made  tbe  transition  from 
fresh  water  to  the  land  under  such  conditions.  If  we  consider  the 
shore  habitats  as  including  all  stages  from  a  rock  cliff  to  the  sand  beach, 
the  lower  beach  and  the  protected  shores  are  the  most  favorable  aquatic 
habitats  upon  sncb  shores. 

Upon  the  sloping  rock,  shingle,  gravel  and  sand  beaches  is  found  a 
varied  fauna.  lu  winter,  when  the  bays  are  frozen  over,  a  calm  is  pro- 
duced which  must  be  favorable  to  the  pi-eservation  of  the  aquatic  life 
upon  this  stormy  coast. 

The  general  character  of  the  sandy  beach  at  tbe  head  of  Conglomerate 
Bay  is  shown  in  Ft;/.  .{.  The  life  of  the  submerged  portion  of  the  shore 
ie  quite  limited,  except  on  the  beaches  and  protected  portions.    The  vege- 


10  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   I90S. 

tation  consists  of  al^e,  which  grown  in  moderate  abim<^aDce.  though 
not  luxuriantly,  as  found  about  the  Gull  Rookery  (V,  10),  or  at  the 
fishermen's  cainp  at  Rock  Harbor,  a  fact  which  suggests  that  the  abun- 
daofl^  of  suitable  nitrogenous  material  is  mucli  greater  in  such  places 
tbau  in  the  open  lake  water.  With  the  development  of  the  fall  storms. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Maloue  states  that  the**  rocks  (V.  10)  are  washed  free  of 
the  algae,  thus  evidently  necesuitating  a  repopulation  of  these  surfaces 
each  season. 

The  characteristic  fauna  secured  in  the  shallow  water  shore  margins 
were  the  snails,  Litnnaca  stagnnHs.  L.  cmarijinata.  and  Pht/sa  sai/ii.  A 
small  fish,  the  Miller's  ^'humh,  VranitU'a  frnnklini.  is  also  fairly  abun- 
dant and  characteristic  of  this  shore. 

Upon  low  rocky  shores  beach  pools,  Fig.  5,  are  occasionally  found 
which,  when  favorably  located,  art  supplied  with  water  by  the  ordinary 
summer  waives,  otherwise  by  storm  waves  and  rains.  The  precarious 
existence  of  life  in  such  places  is  indicated  by  the  general  type 
of  the  fanna,  which  shows  exceptional  power  of  locomotion,  usually 
coupled  with  a  short  life  cycle.  The  immature  stages  of  insects 
are  rather  characteristic,  as  shown  by  nymphs  of  the  water  boat- 
men, Ctyrixa,  dragonflies  and  Caddis  fly  larvae.  Water  beetles  were 
represented  by  Rhantus  J)inotatu8,  and  the  snails  by  Limnaea  emarginata 
and  Planorbia  "parvus.  The  Gulls  and  Spotted  Sandpipers  should  be 
mentioned  as  birds  which  frequent  these  conditions. 

The  Middle  Beach.'  This  beach  occupies  the  strip  of  shore  over  wliicii 
the  winter  waves  retreat  as  they  fall  to  the  upper  summer  storm  limit.  It 
is  thus  seen  that  the  Middle  Beach  is  only  a  temporary  or  summer  aban- 
donment of  part  of  the  upper  shore,  which  is  repeatedly  claimed  by  the 
winter  wares.  In  summer  this  strip  is  exposed  to  denudation;  in  the 
fali  and  early  winter,  to  the  fury  of  the  waves,  and,  later,  it  is  coverefl 
with  ice.  Driftwood  and  debris  tend  to  lodge  here  and  to  accumulate. 
It  is  an  important  region  of  biotic  invasion  for  laud  forms.  Beach 
pools  are  also  developed  in  this  area,  upon  the  abandoned  wave  cut  ter- 
races of  earlier  lake  levels.  Upon  the  cliff  faces,  sloping  rock  shores  and 
shingle  beaches,  little  is  found  that  is  favorable  to  life,  but  upon  the 
protected  sand  of  the  Middle  Beach,  relatively  favorable  conditions  for 
many  organisms  are  found  during  its  period  of  exposure.  The  character 
of  the  substratum  of  the  Middle  Beach  varies  from  rock  to  shingle, 
gravel  and  sand. 

The  characteristic  features  of  the  vegetation,  where  the  wave  action 
is  not  too  severe,  are  the  fruits  which  are  washed  ashore  by  the  waves, 
together  with  certain  annuals  and  lichens.  The  fauna  varies  with  the 
chara<-ter  of  the  conditions.  The  open  character  of  this  beach  and  the 
relative  abundance  of  animal  food  makes  such  situations  favorable  for 
spiders  of  the  genus  Pardosa.  The  same  open  character  makes  the 
shores  a  favorable  patrol  for  certain  butterflies,  particularly  Bagilai- 
chia  aHhcmis.  Insects  and  snails  washed  ashore  by  the  waves  also 
characterize  this  habitat. 

The  Upper  Beach.  This  part  of  the  beach  is  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
waves,  and  forms  the  transition  between  the  open  beach  area  and  the 
Inland  forests.  The  width  of  this  belt  varies  greatly  with  the  gradient  of 
the  shore.    Where  the  beach  is  continuous  with  a  more  or  less  bare  rock 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  11 

ridge,  tbis  hnbitnt  may  be  rattier  extpusire  and  ill  defined,  as  at  the  ridge 
south  of  the  lighthouse  (I.  2(.  but  when  it  bordei-s  a  depresfiion.  as  iit 
tlie  head  of  the  rockboiind  coveH,  or  where  a  beaeh  is  well  de^'eloped, 
this  transitional  zone  is  more  clearly  defined  and  limited.  When  thia 
beach  is  wide  and  grades  into  the  rovk  o|>eningit,  rr  in  F'lfiurrs  fl  and  7. 
the  cruataceous  and  fqliaceous  licheim  grow  niton  the  rorks;  but  if 
sM>il  accnmulates,  as  is  shown  in  Fifj.  6,  the  Cladonin — Jlearlierry  society 
becomes  established,  and  includes  some  annuals,  such  as  SoHdario.  A 
limited  variety  of  insects,  especially  ants,  characterize  such  conditions. 
When  adjacent  to  the  forests,  in  depressions,  this  tteacli  is  generaliy  bor- 
dered by  alders,  soine  aspens  and  young  trees. 

The  fauna  consists  largely  of  insecls,  such  as  bntlerflies,  certain  dra- 
gonflies  and  Hymenoptc-ra,  which  frequent  the  open  places  on  wing. 

Station  I,  Substation  ~.  yatural  Rock  Clearings.  This  Station  con- 
sists of  two  sniall  rock  opeuings.  one  just  north  of  the  light-house,  and 
the  other  south  of  it,  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  Tonkin  Buy, 
only  a  short  distance  from  the  light-honse.  They  were  both  park-like  ave- 
nues extending  along  the  ridges,  largely  bordered  by  the  Balsam-Spruce 
forest. 

The  north  ridge  will  first  Ite  considered.  The  general  character  of  the 
opening  is  well  shown  in  Fiff.  S.  The  White  (Spruce,  Balsam,  Paper 
Birch  and  Arbor  Vitae  bound  the  rid^e  on  either  side,  within  which 
there  ie  a  distinct  heath  zone  of  Bearberry  and  patches  of  Clmlonia,  while 
along  the  central  aisle  there  is  a  shallow  residual  and  humic  soil  on  the 
almost  bare  rock.  The  south  slope  is  rather  gradual,  but  the  north 
slope  and  the  end  of  the  ridge  at  the  shore  form  a  ciiflf. 

The  fauna  of  this  location  was  limited,  Snails  were  found  among 
the  CUidonia,  such  as  ^'crtigo,  Zonitoiilrs  arborcu  and  Pyramidvla 
cnmkhcitei  anthoiii/i.     This  was  also  a  rnnway  for  Hares, 

The  south  opening  or  clearing  is  situated  on  a  low  sandstone  ridge 
which  slopes  down  to  the  heach.  and  is  thus  in  marked  contrast  to  the 
north  clearing,  which  ended  in  a  cliff.  This  gradual  slope  beautifully 
illustrates  the  transition  from  the  bare  rock  beach,  through  the  moss 
and  lichen  zone,  to  tlie  Cladonia.  Itearberry  and  Solidago  fiora,  (Fiffn. 
6  and  7),  and  on  to  the  crest  of  the  ridge.  Fig.  9,  with  its  dominance 
of  Cladonia  and  Bearl>erry.  The  severity  of  the  conditions  is  furthered 
b.y  the  weathering  of  the  sandstone  into  thin  scale  like  layers,  about  '/i 
of  an  inch  thick,  which  l)ecome  loosened  and  slide  down  the  slo|)e.  Thus 
a  vegetation  may  become  fixed  to  the  rock  surface,  but  not  permanently 
to  the  slope.  These  scale  like  fi-agments  are  shown  in  Fig.  G.  That  a 
greater  amount  of  vegetation  would  grow  here,  if  the  soil  were  allowed 
to  accumulate,  is  shown  in  Fig.  (1,  where  such  conditions  have  been 
produced  by  the  presence  of  a  larger  boulder.  The  (7?fldo»i.ia -Bearberry 
aVenue  extends  along  the  crest  of  the  ridge,  Fig.  9.  This  is  bounded 
by  large  Jack  Fines  near  the  beach,  and  farther  from  the  shore  by  the 
^Isam-Bircb  forest. 

The  zonal  distribution  on  the  ridges  is  quite  marked;  the  central  strip 
is  composed  of  Cladonia,  Bearberry,  Solidago,  and  lAnnea  borealis: 
while  this  is  bordered  by  a  shrub  zone  composed  of  Junipcrtis  nana. 
alder,  Arbor  Vitae  and  young  Balsams,  and  a  bordering  ti'ee  zone  is  com- 
posed primarily   of  Balsam.     When  once  the  shade  of  the  forest,  es- 


12  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

specially  that  of  the  Balsams,  encroaches  upon  the  Cladonia  society, 
the  Bearberry  first  becomes  reduced  in  number,  and  is  then  replaced 
by  Aster  macrophyllus,  and  a  moss  from  the  forest  floor.  The  former 
is  perhaps  the  most  striking  and  characteristic  shade  plant  upon  Isle 
Boyale.  The  succession,  or  order  of  invasion  on  the  ridge,  from  the  Cla- 
donia to  the  Juniper  and  into  the  Balsam  forest,  is  thus  briefly  shown 
in  the  transverse  section  from  the  central  ridge  to  its  margin.  This  zonal 
phenomenon,  as  will  be  seen  later,  is  only  an  expression  of  the  relative 
rates  of  invasion,  and  is  not  a  phenomenon  separate  from  the  normal 
sacceaaion. 

The  soil  upon  the  top  of  the  ridge  is  about  two  inches  deep.  It  is 
residual,  supplemented  by  the  faiunus  from  a  now  extinct  emstaceous 
lichen  society  (that  of  the  dadonfa-Bearberry),  and  at  its  margins 
by  the  Juniper,  Balsam,  Birch  and  Ja^k  Pine  leaves  and  debris  and 
further,  to  an  important  degree,  by  the  excrement  of  the  numerous 
Varying  Hares  which  frequent  the  rock  ridges. 

In  the  case  of  rock  ridges  which  entend  down  to  the  beach  and  are 
thus  in  direct  communication  with  the  shore  drift,  conditions  exist 
which  show  how  such  ridj^es  may  have  been  invaded  by  lichens  from 
two  sources — the  shore  drift  and  the  ex^wsed  beach  itself — because  of 
the  continuity  of  the  rock  habitat.  Of  course  possibly  another  origin 
is  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  this  ridge  was  itself  once  a  beach.  Ants, 
^^si^oppers  and  a  few  other  insects  characterize  this  fauna,  which 
is  limited  in  variety,  but  fairly  abundant  in  individuals.  The  Hares 
are  abundant  and  form  distinct  paths  or  runways,  as  shown  in  Fig.  9. 

Station  I,  Substation  3.  Balaam^White  Spruce  Forest.  This  station 
included  the  forest  traversed  by  a  blazed  trait  from  near  the  south- 
eastern part  of  Sta,  I,  2,  and  extended  northward  to  the  clearing  about 
the  light-house  (I,  7),  and  beyond  it  to  the  north  rock  clearing  (I,  2). 
Most  of  the  region  occupied  by  the  forest  is  of  low  relief,  with  an  occa- 
sional low  rock  ridge  or  hill.  The  dominant  tree  was  the  Balsam  Fir, 
with  much  Paper  Birch  and  White  Spruce.  Where  the  forest  was  very 
dense,  especially  if  due  to  the  number  of  Balsams,  the  ground  was  densely 
shaded  and  there  was  almost  no  herbaceous  ground  cover;  but  wherever 
there  was  a  small  opening,  due  to  a  fallen  tree,  or  where  one  had  been 
cut  down,  there  was  an  abundant  growth  of  Large-leaved  Aster  and 
White-flowering  Raspberry ;  and  it  ■was  in  the  midst  of  such  conditions 
that  young  Balsams  abounded.  These  were  very  characteristic  plants  in 
such  conditions.  In  most  cases  at  thick  layer  of  humus  covered  the 
ground,  but  the  tree  growth  was  of  small  size.  The  common  size  of  the 
Balsam  was  about  4  inches,  the  larger  ones  reaching  8  to  10  inches.  The 
Birches  averaged  larger,  usually  about  6  inches,  yio  evidence  of  bums 
were  seen,  but  probably  many  trees  have  been  cut  from  this  vicinitj, 
because  of  its  proximity  to  the  light-house,  and  the  former  Indian  camp- 
ground now  occupied  by  the  fishermen.  The  Balsam  appeared  to  become 
dominant  at  this  place,  as  more  young  trees  of  this  species  were  seen 
than  of  any  other. 

The  fauna  found  in  this  forest  was  rather  limited,  and  doubtless 
great  numbers  of  the  insects  which  were  taken  in  the  clearing  about  the 
light-house  (I.  7),  bred  in  the  adjacent  forests.  This  is  particulai-ly  true 
of  the  Cerambycids  and  other  wood  infesting  beetles,  the  wood-boring 


ECOLOOY  OP   ISIJJ  ROYALE.  18 

Hymenoptera  (Urocerus),  and  tlieir  parasites.  In  addition  to  such  spe- 
cies as  feed  upon  Balsam,  White  Spruce  and  Paper  Birch  and  their  asso- 
ciated vegetation,  there  were  those  animals  which  are  dependent  npmi 
the  shade,  moisture,  soil,  decaying  logs  and  other  features  aesociated 
with  forests.  To  this  class  Ijelong  certain  insects  which  frequent  decay- 
ing timber  or  the  fungi  growing  apon  them,  and  the  earthworms  of  the 
soil,  "the  ground  beetles  or  Carabidn,  and  the  ground-inhabiting  spiders, 
Lycosids.  Some  of  the  birds  found  were:  Chickadee,  Red-breasted 
Nnthatch.  Golden-crowned  Kinglet,  Whitewinged  Crossbill  and  Purple 
Finch. 

Station  I,  4.  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  or  Whito  Spruce  Sicampg. 
This  swamp  Is  located  in  one  of  ibe  valleys  near  the  head  of  Tonkin 
Bay,  and  extends  back  from  the  bay  about  one-fourth  of  a  mile.  It 
be^oB  just  back  of  the  beach  and  is  bordered  by  a  strip  of  Alders, 
Paper  Birch,  Mountain  Ash,  young  Balsams  and  White  Spruces.  The 
rock  walls  of  this  valley  are  abont  75  or  100  feet  apart  and  are  well 
shaded  and  covered  by  lichens  and  mosses,  the  south  surface  largely  by 
lichens  alone.  Back  of  the  marginaJ  beach  strip  above  mentioned,  comes 
the  dense  growth  of  very  large  Arbor  Vitae  trees,  intermingled  with  nu- 
merous large  fallen  trunks,  partially  decayed  and  covered  with  a  dense 
growth  of  mosses.  In  the  dryer  places  the  ground  is  covered  with  a 
dense  litter,  and  a  thick  damp  or  wet  mass  of  mosses,  but  no  pools  of 
water.  The  undergrowth  is  composed  of  young  Balsams,  Birch  and 
Oround  Hemlock,  Fig.  10. 

Proceeding  farther  np  the  valley,  the  Arbor  Vitae  is  replaced  by 
Balsams  and  Paper  Birch;  the  forest  is  more  open,  and  the  amount  of 
mosB  on  the  ground  is  greatly  reduced,  and  is  replaced  by  a  growth  of 
Large-leaved  Aster  and  large  quantities  of  Ground  Hemlock— all  of 
this  vegetation  being  indicative  of  mesophytic  conditions.  In  this  re- 
gion there  are  scattered  pockets  or  small  pools  of  water  containing 
dogwoods.  Still  farther  up  the  valley  the  Balsams  and  Arbor  Vitae  oon- 
tinue  and  Tamaracks  are  added,  but  no  stnnding  water  was  found.  The 
valley  turns,  and  returns  to  the  bay  on  the  north  side  of  the  ridge  which 
bounds  the  Arbor  Vitae  swamp  on  the  north;  the  entire  basin  is  thus 
somewhat  horseshoe  shaped.  The  returning  section  becomes  almost  pure 
Tamarack  and  contains  numerous  small  pools  of  water.  The  conspicu- 
ous feature  of  this  environment  is  its  jnngle-like  character,  the  rapid  ac- 
cumulation of  litter  and  liumus,  and  the  damp  substratum. 

The  fauna  of  such  a  bog  is  surprisingly  limited  in  variety  and  amount. 
A  few  shells  were  found,  as  Pymmtdula  (^onkkeitei  anikoni/i  and,  in 
the  small  pools,  Pisidium.  The  large  numbers  of  Mosquitoes  and  Black 
Flies  made  up  for  all  deficiencies,  and  were  almost  intolerable.  The 
birds  frequenting  this  forest  were  the  Red-breasted  >.'uthatch.  Black- 
throated  Green  Warbler  and  Chickadee. 

Station  I,  5.  The  Jack  Pine  Ridge.  This  ridge  is  located  near  the 
mouth  of  Conglomerate  Bay.  on  the  north  shore.  Some  general  idea 
of  the  location  is  given  in  Fiff.  11.  which  is  a  view  looking  toward  the 
head  of  Conglomerate  Bay.  Just  bock  of  the  beadi,  on  an  outcrop  of 
conglomerate,  was  a  small  rock  clearing,  with  Cladonia.  Juniperus  nana. 
and  a  wild  rose.  From  here  the  trail  extended  through  n  narrow  strip 
of  forest,  composed  of  Balsams.  White  Spruce  and  Arbor  Vitae,  with  an 


14  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

undergrowth  of  Balsam,  Mountain  Alder,  and  a  ground  co\~er  of  Lat^e- 
leaved  Aster,  and  passed  on  through  a  belt  of  young  growth  of  Birch, 
with  the  usual  White-flowering  Raspberry  and  Large-leaved  Aster,  Fiff. 
12,  and  up  the  face  of  an  escarpment  to  the  crest  of  the  ridge,  which 
had  a  height  of  about  IflO  feet  above  the  lake  level.  Proui  the  nliundauce 
and  characteristic  growth  of  Jack  Pines  on  this  ridge,  the  station  tak^ 
its  name.  Part  of  the  ridge  has  been  burneil  over,  as  was  shown  by  the 
burned  and  fallen  timber,  but  the  part  to  which  our  attention  was  given 
was  apparently  an  oi'iginal  growth.  The  Jack  Pine  was  scattered,  and 
largely  occupied  the  depressions  and  the  larger  crevices.  The  ridge  is 
fairly  flat  topped,  but  is  occasionally  broken  by  transverse  gullies,  which 
contain  As|>enB,  Birches,  etc.  The  surface  of  the  lava  has  weathered 
but  little  in  some  places,  the  original  roche  nioiitontt's  surface 
being  very  clearly  preserved,  and  the  planed  glacial  surface  but  little 
eroded,  Xear  the  escarpment,  however,  disintegration  and  decomposi- 
tion have  been  much  more  active,  probably  influenced  in  part  by  Jake 
waves  at  former  lewis,  thereby  developing  a  talus  slope,  composed  of  an- 
gular blocks,  and  in  sonic  places  foi-ming  a  stony  soil.  Alt  intermediate 
stages  are  found  between  these  two  extremes.  In  addition  to  the  large 
amount  of  bare  rock  surface,  and  that  covered  by  only  a  thin  layer  of  soil 
and  vegetation,  the  shallowness  of  the  soil  is  further  evidenced  by  over- 
turned trees.  Fig.  13.  This  soil  is  of  residual  and  oi^anic  origin,  the 
crustaceous  lichens  and  the  ('ladonia-Uearlierry  society,  and  later  the 
Jack  Pines,  having  contributed  much  to  its  foruiati<»n.  The  ex<-reinent  of 
the  Hares  has  also  l>eeu  an  important  factor  in  soil  formation,  and  that 
of  the  Lynx  also,  though  1o  a  nmch  less  degree. 

The  process  of  weathering  must  be  relatively  rapid  on  this  ridge, 
because  it  is  exposed  to  tlie  winds  at  all  seasons  of  the  year,  aud  to  the 
marked  seasonal  and  daily  changes  of  temperatui-e.  The  heat  of  the 
noonday  sun  is  excessive,  and  the  radiation  from  the  nearly  bare  rock 
must  be  rapid,  as  it  also  is  at  night,  so  that  the  various  influmioes  con- 
sequent to  temperature  changes  are  allowed  full  play.  Weathering  i»- 
further  favored  by  the  irregularities  of  the  surface,  and  the  crevices, 
which  allow  the  accumulation  and  downward  conduction  of  this  moisture, 
thus  permitting  the  prying  action  of  ice. 

In  general,  the  succession  of  plant  swieties  on  this  ridge  appears 
to  be  about  as  follows:  Lichens  are  the  jnoneers  on  the  rock  anrface, 
and  these  may  be  of  several  species.  UinbiJicaria,  and  the  crustaceous 
and  foliaceous  forms.  As  a  soil  dei-elops  in  the  crevices  or  on  the  sur- 
faces, these  are  followed  bv  Cladonui.  Hearberry,  Sibhaldiopsia  tridentata, 
Solidago,  Diervilla  dicrcilla  (Bush  Honeysuckle);  and  later,  when  the 
soil  Itecomes  deei)er.  by  Amelanchivr,  Pniinin  pennxylffinica  (probably 
dispersed  to  these  ridges  by  birds)  and  Junipents  nana.  The  presence 
of  the  Small-toothed  Aspen,  willow  aud  an  occasional  Bireh  pi*ol«ibly  in- 
dicates the  next  society.  In  the  shade  of  the  Birches  and  Jack  Pines 
dolidfiffo  and  Aster  niairophyllun  occur,  if  sufllcient  soil  is  developed. 
From  the  character  of  the  vegetation  in  the  ravines  which  traversed  the 
ridge,  and  ui>on  the  latus  slope  toward  the  bay.  it  is  apparent  that  the 
next  society  lends  to  !»■  that  of  Birch  and  Aspen  with  some  Balsam. 
Pennsylvania  Cherry,  yit.  Alder;  and  a  ground  cover  of  Large-leaved 
Aster,  Lai^-flowering  Haspberr.x',  (irotind  Cornel  and  Lf/copodhnii.     It 


ECOLOGT  OF   IBLB  ROTALE.  15 

is  clearly  seen  tbat  nniODg  these  there  are  several  elemeats  ot  the 
Balsam,  White  Spruce  and  Birch  forest  eociety,  which  tends  to  ulti- 
mately possess  the  ridge. 

The  fauna  of  the  ridge  ib  quite  diversified,  and  there  is  a  general 
faiinal  correlation  corresponding  vith  these  successions  of  the  regetation. 
Thus  during  the  Lichen-Heath  stage,  ants  and  spiders,  certain  shells, 
and  grasshoppers  are  abundant.  As  the  soil  becomes  thicker  or  the 
creviees  deepen,  a  subtraranean  fauna,  consisting  of  myriapodB,  earth- 
worms, etc.,  develops.  As  shmbs  and  trees  encroach  in  patches,  the 
animals  frequenting  the  open  tend  to  perpetuate  themselves  mainly  at 
the  open  margins.  From  this  condition  on,  so  far  as  the  fauna  is  con- 
cerned, it  is  largely  a  question  of  an  "opening"  or  a  forest  environment. 
Ko  long  as  this  habitat  remains  open,  the  grasshoppers,  ants,  spiders, 
butterflies,  flies,  and  certain  Hymenoptera,  Hares  and  Bats  are  character- 
istic, and  this  condition  tends  to  nmtinue  as  long  as  the  trees  are 
scattered.  The  Cicada  is  very  characteristic  of  the  Jack  Pine  stage, 
and  although  it  occurs  elsewhere  in  young  Birches  it  is  not  so  character- 
istic a.s  on  these  hot  ridges.  With  the  advent  of  the  Balsam-Birch  society, 
which  is  slowly  encroaching  upon  the  ridges,  the  forms  frequenting  the 
open  will  disappear,  or  linger  in  the  tfpen  siHtts  where  local  conditions 
have  retarded  the  advance  of  the  forest.  (Inly  a  few  birds  were  seen 
here,  but  Hares  hud  been  numerous,  as  was  ahcuvu  by  the  large  amount 
of  excrement,  and  there  was  similar  evidence  of  the  occurrence  of  the 
Lynx.  A  bat  was  flushed  frimi  under  a  stone  at  the  edge  of  the  escarp- 
ment. 

Station  I,  f).  Taniamck-Spiuci!  Bog.  This  is  a  very  small  bog  located 
at  the  base  of  the  north  slope  of  the  -Jack  Pine  Ridge  (I,  5),  and  roughly 
estimated  aa  about  -30  by  300  feet  in  extent.  The  central  part  is 
covered  with  sphagnum,  Cassandra,  and  a  scattered  growth  of  Labrador 
Tea.  Widely  scattered  throughout  the  bog  occur  Tamaracks  and  Black 
Spruces,  small  Birches,  Dwarf  Cranberry,  Cotton  Grass  and  alders.  No 
standing  open  water  was  found  in  this  area,  nor  was  the  bottom  quaking. 
Bordering  the  sphagnum  zone  is  one  of  alders,  willows,  and  a  tall  grass 
which  merged  into  n  zone  of  Tamaracks,  willows,  alders,  Cassandra,  and 
Balsam;  Fig.  1).  Along  tlie  western  end  a  narrow  strip  of  water,  a 
few  inches  deep,  was  found,  which  flowed  through  a  ravine  across  the 
ridge.  Along  this  outlet  the  deeper  soil  and  moisture  has  permitted 
the  development  of  Balsam,  Birch,  Kmall-toothed  Aspen,  Mt.  Maple, 
Ground  Hemlock,  Ground  Cornel,  Lai-ge-leaved  Aster,  and  a  few  Black 
Ash  trees. 

The  fauna,  like  the  vegetation,  was  not  studied  in  detail,  but  the  fol- 
lowing general  relations  were  observed.  In  the  open  central  Sphagnum- 
Cassandra  society  were  numerous  large  ajit  nests.  A  Toad  \vas  ob- 
Herved  here:  and  the  following  birds:  Golden-crowned  Kinglet,  White- 
throated  Sjmrrow,  Cedar  Waxwing,  and  Black-throated  Green  War- 
bler. 

Station  J.  7.  Light-house  Clearing.  This  was  a  small  clearing  which 
has  been  made  about  the  Lij^t-house:  it  connects  by  a  path  to  the  fish- 
ing camp  on  Rock  Harbor.  It  covers  about  half  an  acre,  and  was  orip- 
nally,  in  all  probability,  a  Balsam  and  Sprace  forest  like  the  surround- 
ing forest.    A  sod  covered  much  of  the  gi-ound,  and  there  were  numerous 


16  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

weeds,  of  whicL  the  Cow  Parsnip  nmbels  furnished  excellent  places  for 
collecting  Syrphid  flies,  Cerambrcid  beetles  and  Hymenoptera. 

The  fauna  of  this  clearing  consisted  largely  of  insects  which  fre- 
quent flowers,  and  butterflies  which  fly  in  open  places ;  but  a  few  animals 
were  found  about  the  Light-house  itself.  The  Chipping  Sparrow  bred 
in  this  clearing.    Fig.  1. 

Station  II.  This  station  included  the  clearing  at  the  mouth  of  the 
stream  which  drained  Lake  Benson,  and  which  we  called  Benson  Brook, 
and  followed  the  biased  trail  to  Sargent  Lake,  and  on  to  McCargoe  Gm'e. 
The  clearing  at  the  beginning  of  the  trail  at  Rock  Harbor  marks  the 
site  of  the  former  settlement  called  Ransom  on  the  old  maps. 

Station  II,  Substation  1.  Ransom  Clearing  and  Betigon  Brook.  The 
clearing  was  occupied  by  scattered  Small-toothed  Aspens  and  Birches, 
and  was  well  sodded  with  grass  and  Bed  Glover.  Our  attention  was 
called  to  this  locality  because  of  the  great  number  of  Garter  Snakes 
(Thamnophis  sirtalia)  which  were  found  there.  These  snakes  were  veri' 
abundant  in  a  small  area  east  of  the  mouth  of  the  brook,  in  a  rauk 
growth  of  grass  and  among  some  mils. 

The  brook  contained  but  little  life,  although  it  was  carefully  examined 
near  its  mouth  and  farther  back  where  the  trail  ci-osses  the  bi-ook. 
Only  a  few  dead  Physa  were  found,  and  a  louug  fish,  at  the  mouth  of  tlie 
brook. 

Station  II,  Substation  2.  Tamarack  Swamp.  This  is  a  long  swamp 
which  is  crossed  by  the  trail,  and  which  contains  a  scattered  tree 
growth  of  Tamaracks,  Black  Spruces  and  Arbor  Vitae,  a  dense  shrub 
growth  of  Cassandra  and  Labrador  Tea,  and  a  ground  cover  of  Sphagnum 
and  Pitcher  Plants.  While  no  water  was  seen  on  the  surface,  it  was 
a  wet  swamp. 

This  locality  was  only  examined  for  birds  and  mammals. 

Station  II,  Substation  3.  Rock  Ridges.  This  station  number  is  given 
to  the  open  rock  ridges  which  were  crossed  by  the  trail  between  II,  2 
and  Sargent  Lake.  These  ridges  have  been  burned  over  and  are  largely 
destitute  of  soil  and  the  Cladonia  growth  usually  found  on  other  rock 
ridges.  Small-toothed  A8i)en8  generally  border  these  ridges  which  have 
a  northeasterly  southwesterly  direction.  The  heat  during  the  middle 
of  the  day  is  excessive.  The  scant  vegetation  which  grows  in  some 
crevices  and  depressions  in  the  rock  leaves  an  open  area  which  is  decided- 
ly favorable  for  grasshoppers.  In  some  places  they  were  exceedingly 
abundant  and  many  ridges  were  examined  almost  solely  for  their  grass- 
hopper fauna.  In  the  dry  soil  on  one  ridge  an  anti-lion  laiTa  was 
found  in  the  dust  at  the.  base  of  its  funnel,  and  a  large  (iaiter  Snake 
was  taken  on  another.  The  grasslioppers  found  liei-e  were  Vliloealtin 
conspi'rsa  and  abdominalis.  t'ircotcttix  ven-ucttUiliis.  MvlanopUiS 
aiaskaiius  and  faaciatus. 

Station  II,  Substation  -J.  McCargoe  Core.  This  station  simply  marks 
the  location  of  the  end  of  (he  trail,  and  the  cove  where  a  few  molluscs 
were  found.  There  were  dead  shells  of  Anod<nita  grandis  footiana, 
which  were  abundant  at  the  edge  of  the  water.  Here  upon  the  low 
rocky  shore 'were  also  found  specimens  of  Limnaca  stagnaUs. 

Station  II,  Substation  5.  Forbes  Lake.  The  examination  of  this 
small  lake  was  mainly  confined  to  the  north  shore,  as  the  south  shore 


Oeologlcal   Burvejr  of  MkhlgaD, 


I   Report  for  1008. 


PIG.   1.      TUB  LIGUT-II0U8I-:  AT  ROCK   HARBOR,   I8LK  ROYALE. 


FIO,   2,      CLIFFS   BETWEEN  TONKIN  AND   CONGIX>MBKATE 


uQP«8l<-/OT 


jiGoogle 


G«ol(«leal   Survey  of  Michigan. 


Anniuil  Report  (or  IDOS. 


AT   THE    HEAD   OF 


D,!...zPdhvGOO,<.J 
PIG.    4.      SAND  BEACH   AT  THE    HEAD   OF  CONGLOMEHATE  BAY    (1,   1). 


jiGoogle 


0«al(tfnl   Survey   of  Michigan. 


Annual  Report  for  1608. 


FIG.  5.      BEACH  POOL   (I,   1)    NEAR  TONKIN  BAY. 


byCOOgll^^i^ 


jiGoogle 


Gcologfe*!  Snn'e)'  of  Ulcblgaa. 


Anuusl   Reirart  tor  IBOS. 


zedbyGO'     UC?) 


jiGoogle 


Qeologleal   Survej'  af  MlcblgBD. 


,    2}    NORTH    OF   THK   LIGHT- 


B'  THE  LIOHT-HOU8B,  ADJACEWT 


jiGoogle 


Geoiosiol  Surve?  o(  Hiehlgan, 


ADDual  Keport  tm  1S06. 


FlU.   10.     ARBOR  VITAR  BOG   <I,  41   NICAR  TONKIN  BAY. 


VIEW  FROM  THE  JACK  PINE  RIDGR  (I.  r>).  LOOKING  TOWARD  THE  HRA1> 
OP  COSttLOMERATK  BAY. 


hyCOOQlp-TTJV 


jiGoogle 


Otologlcal   Survey  ot  Micblgan. 


I    Report   for  1)>08. 


NE  KIDOK    (I,  5)    rOXOLnMERATK  BAY. 


vCexwIc 


jiGoogle 


a«oI«|lc«l  Survey  of  HIchlsan. 


1  Report  for  1908. 


14.      SPHAGNUM-BLACK  SPRUCE   BOG    (I,   '()    NEAR   THE   JACK   PINE  RIDGE. 


.ibiCoogle 


Geological   Surve;  of  Michigan.  Annual   Report  for  1908. 


-I.RI!SII    ZONE   AND  DELTA  AT  THE  HEAD   OP  ROCK  HARBOR    (III,   3). 


jiGoogle 


Qtoloflo]   Barv«y  c 


jal    Report   for   1908. 


*'"'■   IT.     GXPOBSD    SECTION     OF     SPIT     FORMED    AS    THE    WATER     LEVEL    HAS 

LOWERED  IN   ROCK  SAItBOR,  NEAR  THE   BEGINNING  OF  TUE 

TRAIL  TO   BDMNER  LAKE    (III,  4). 


zedbyGOOtf 


jiGoogle 


GMlogtrsl    Survey    of    UtcblKan. 


I   Report   for   1908. 


FIG.   18.     SUMXKll   LAKE    (III.  .".I.  KASTERN  KMI. 


PIG.  19.     WESTERN   END  OF  SLM.NER  LAKE   (III,   B). 


.vGoo^Ic 


jiGoogle 


Geological   Survey  of  Mlcblgan. 


Annual   Report  for  1908. 


MAUCIN  OP  SUMNER  LAKE  (III,  0). 


FIO.  21.  80UTBBA8TBKN 


OF  SUHNRR  LAKE  C 


■j.,Qooglt' 


jiGoogle 


G«i>1oKlcal    Survey   o(  Michigan. 


I   Report  lor  1908. 


FIG.  22.      WESTERN   END  OF   SUMKBB  LAKE    (III,  6). 


PIG.   23.      KOBTUERN    SHORE    OF   RTjMNEB    IJ.KB    (III, 


i,Coo^?lc>-vx 

I.   5).  O     /O^'tA 


jiGoogle 


Oeoli«lcal   Sairej  ot  HkbtgaD. 


FIG.   24.      ROCK  OPENING  ABOirr  CAMP  ON 


.vGoo^iJj 


FIG.    26.      ROCK  OPENINO  AT   8ISK0WIT  CAMP    (V,  3). 


jiGoogle 


Geoloiilcal   Hurvey    of   Mlchigaa 


FIO.    26.      ROfK    OPKMNG    ON    SISKOWIT    I 


!   (V,  4)-^  I 


jiGoogle 


Oeoloilral   Surrey   of  Mlcblgin. 


Aqdui]   Report  tot  1006. 


FIG.   28.      ANT  NEST   IN  TUB  OrBNlNO  AT  THE  8I8K0WIT  CAMP    (V. 


■X.oooJtT^ 


jiGoogle 


Geologtral   Surv«y  of  Mlrblgnn. 


Annual   Report  for  lOOS. 


,dbyGOOglC^ 


jiGoogle 


Geologleal   Surrer  o(  Michigan. 


1  Report  fat  1008. 


,GooglC"|^ 


jiGoogle 


Geological  Survey  of  Mlcblgao. 


AddubI  Report  for  IMS. 


OENKnAL  VIEW  ALOXO  THE  SHORE  AT  V.  2 


jiGoogle 


Oeologlc&l    Surrer    o(   Mlcbigaa. 


I.  88.      FABTHEB  UP  THE  SAME  SLOPE  AS  IN  FIG.  32  AND  ADJACENT  TO  IT. 


DyGOL 


jiGoogle 


GeoIoglL-al  SDrrc;  at  UlcblsiD. 


ADDUil  Beport  for  1906. 


BTILL  FARTHER  fP  TIIK  SI.fll'E  AND  ADJACEXT  TO  FIG    33. 


,Got»l/«^ 


jiGoogle 


<>eologlcal  Surrey  of  Ulcblgau. 


Annua]  Bepoi'C  for  1908. 


FIG.  85.      LOOKING  t'P  THE  8LOPE  OX  THK  WESTEBN   POBTION   OF  STATION  V.  2. 


zedbyGOOQ 


jiGoogle 


I'PPER   PORTION  OF  WKSTKKX   TAKT  OK  STATION  1 


DETAIL  OP  WK8T1CRN  I'AIIT 


OP  STATION  V.  2,|,y(^iOOQlC 


jiGoogle 


Qcoloxlc«l  Barre;  ot  Mlcblgao. 


Annaal  Report  (or  1908. 


DyGoOgk 


jiGoogle 


Gealoglcal   Surve;  ot  Mlcblgna  Aonuil   Report  tor  1908. 


FIG.    39.      OPEN    SPACE    IN   TOE    BAI.»AM-BIKCII    FOEEST    (V.   4). 


„db,Google(^~?^ 


jiGoogle 


GtoloKlcBl   Survey  of  Michigan. 


iHl  Report  tor  1&08. 


FIG.    40.      OPEX    1 


:    IN   THE    BAI.SAM-BIRCII   FOREST    ( 


TAMAllACK  SWAMP    (V,   Til. 


,C<jffp 


jiGoogle 


Geoloslcal  Surve;  ot  Ulchlgan. 


I  Report  tor  1908. 


Pio.  4L'.     srnri'K  margin  fir  station  v,  s. 


zedbyGOOQ 


\t'o^ 


jiGoogle 


Geologlc&l  Surrey  of  UIchlBan. 


Annaal  Report  tor  IMS. 


SI'RI'CK    MAHCIN    Of    STATION    V.    5. 


,Googlc^5^ 


jiGoogle 


Ceological   Surver  of  Mlrlilgan.  ADDual   Report  tot  1908. 


FIG.  «.     BLACK  SPRITE  MARr.IX  OF  STATIOX  V.  5. 


FIG.    44.      BOG    MARGI.V    OF    St.lTION 


,  ,,  s,.„..,Google 


jiGoogle 


OcologlcBl    Survey  of  Michigan. 


An  DUB  I  Reimrt  For  1048. 


45.      LONG  ISLAND  GULL   ROOKEHy.    (V,   10). 


FIO.   40.      I'O.ND   IN  TAMARACK— BLACK  E 


irCE   8WAMP    (V.  dip-'*-  *-  /jN^X 


jiGoogle 


try  lit  MIobtgan.  Annual   Report   (or  1908, 


'    LILV    POXD    < 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


licologlcal  SuFTFy  of  Mkblgaa. 


ADDual  Report  for  IU08. 


FIG.  40.     MAl'LE  K0HK5T  ON  THE  DBSOR  TRAIL    (III,    Ol). 


zed  by  Cop 


jiGoogle 


Geolostcal  Survpf  of  Michigan, 


PIG.  00.     FOREST  AI^XG  WASHlKCTllX  BROOK  (IV,  ■04). 


DyGOOgll 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROTALB.  17 

ie  rocky  and  eteep,  with  Birehee  and  other  trecB  growing  down  to  the 
water.  The  north  shore  has  been  largely  burned  over,  and  is  being  re- 
placed by  Birches  and  Small-toothed  Aspens,  whioh  are  now  dominant; 
the  nnde^Towth  consists  of  alders  and  the  abundant  Large-leaved  Ast^. 
The  water  in  the  lake  is  brownish.  At  the  western  end  there  are  White 
Waterlilies,  near  the  shore  Yellow  Waterlilies,  Calthn  pahistrig,  Equiae- 
turn,  and  farther  back  Cassandra  and  alders,  Tamarack,  Arbor  Vitae, 
and  Black  Sprnce. 

On  the  north  shore  a  rocky  point  projects  into  the  water,  and  east  of 
this  along  the  shore  is  a  floating  sphagnum  bog,  ranging  in  width  from 
aboDt  40  to  100  feet  and  containing  Pitcher  Plants,  Low  Cranberry, 
Buckbean,  scattered  sedges  and  Blue  Flags,  and  a  shrub  growth  of 
Cawandra,  Labrador  Tea  and  Wild  Rosemary.  Scattered  trees  of 
Tamaracks,  Arbor  Yitae,  and  Black  Spruce  grow  to  tiie  edge  of  the 
water.     Water  stninds  in  the  small  depressions  over  this  b<^. 

The  fauna  was  not  studied  in  detail,  but  the  forms  collected  were 
as  follows;  The  spider,  Pardosn  (jIaciaJis,  with" egg  masses,  was  found 
mniung  about  over  the  wet  sphagnum;  a  dragonfly,  Aeschna,  was  seen 
on  wing;  two  species  of  grasshoppers  were  found  in  the  wet  Sphagnnm; 
Melanoplus  extremv8  and,  in  the  wetter  places,  nymphs  of  Mecoatethus 
lineatua  were  quite  abundant.  There  were  also  great  numbers  of 
mosquitoes  and  Black  Flies,  Upou  some  driftwood  near  the  end  of 
the  lake  was  found  PJii/m  gyrina  (Ko.  71  A.).  Yellow  Perch  were  so 
abandant  in  this  lake  that  locally  it  is  called  Perch  Lake.  A  Canada 
Jay  was  seen  in  the  top  of  a  tree. 

titatioii  III.  ^Vrlltn■}l■  tJnd  of  Itocl-  Harbor.  This  station  was  in- 
tended to  include  those  localities  near  the  western  end  of  Bock  Harbor. 

Station  HI,  Substation  1  and  2.  fimaHl  Island.  The  general  character 
of  this  island  is  shown  in  Fig.  15.  This  is  a  small,  rocky,  wooded  island, 
the  trees  consisting  of  one  large  White  Pine,  about  14  inches  in  diameter, 
Arbor  Vitae,  Birch,  Balsam,  and  White  Spruce,  the  dominant  ones  being 
the  Balsam,  Arbor  Vitae  and  Birch,  with  a  shrub  growth  of  Mt.  Alder, 
Willow,  Nine-bark,  Monntain  Ash,  A  mcUinchier  alnifoUo.  Upon  the  rock 
occurred  Cladonia,  Bearberry,  and  IjOw  Juniper,  and  toward  the  western 
end  of  the  island,  where  the  trees  shade  the  ground,  grew  Lycopodium 
complanatvm,  mosses  and  Clintonia  borcalis. 

Gf  the  fauna,  the  bird  life  only  was  examined;  Cedar  Birds  and  a 
Song  sparrow  nested  here,  the  former  being  quite  abundant. 

The  submerged  western  end  of  this  island  formed  Station  III,  2. 
The  bottom  was  composed  of  sand  and  angular  rocks.  In  the  shallower 
water  Anodonta  grandis  footiana  valves  were  found,  and  live  animals 
in  water  about  18  Inches  deep.  These  rocks  also  furnished  a  number 
of  Limnaea  atagnaUs,  and  a  dead  specimen  of  Planorbis  bicarinatus.  A 
few  scattered  rushes  (i^eirpus)  grew  at  this  place. 

Station  III.  Substation  S  and  S.  Head  of  Rock  Harbor.  These 
stations  include  the  delta  at  the  month  of  the  largest  stream  flowing  into 
the  Harbor,  Station  3,  and  the  sandy  and  rocky  shallow  water  zone 
extending  from  III,  2  around  the  head  of  the  Harbor,  Station  6, 

The  genera]  character  of  the  delta,  III,  3,  region  is  shown  in  Fig.  16. 
This  small  delta  had  been  formed  by  a  small  sluggish  brown-stained 
brook,  15  or  20  feet  wide,  which  enters  the  Harbor  at  this  point    The 


hyCOOgIC 


18  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

chanDjel  contained  a  growth  of  ValHaneria  8}}irali8,  Potanwgeton  orispui, 
and  the  banks  supported  a  growth  of  sedges,  Lycopodium-  complanatum, 
Clintonia  boreaUs,  alders  and  Mountain  Ash.  The  surface  of  the  delta 
is  strewn  with  driftwood  and  other  plant  remalDS,  upon  a  clean  sandy 
bottom.  Nearer  the  shore,  upon  a  muddy  bottom,  were  found  an  abund- 
ance of  Amphipod  crustaceans,  HyaUlla  knickerbockeri,  Gammerus 
Imnaeua,  and  the  small  bivalve  molluscs,  Pisidmm.  The  fiesh  water 
sponge,  kpongiUa  lacmtrix,  was  found  here,  and  water  striders,  Gerris 
remigia.  were  found  on  the  surface.  Individuals  were  abundant,  bo  that 
the  fauna  is  relatively  varied. 

Substation  6  included  the  southwestern  coves  of  the  Harbor,  The 
bottom  was  rocky,  and  covered  in  places  with  much  sand ;  the  water  was 
shallow  and  contained,  near  the  shore,  many  patches  of  rushes,  Scirpue 
and  Kquiaetum.  Anoilnnta  grandis  footiana,  Limiiaca  xtagnalis  and 
Piaidium  were  the  characteristic  molluscs,  and  a  few  flsh  were  found. 

The  protected  character  of  the  shore  is  noteworthy,  as  no  beach  is 
developed,  because  "the  coves  are  protected  from  the  hea>7  lake  waves. 
Another  characteristic  feature  is  the  sand  bottom.  Tliis  sand  is  carried 
toward  the  head  of  the  Harbor  by  the  currents.  Even  at  higher  Lake 
levels,  this  Harbor  was  sandy,  as  is  shown  by  the  sand  banks  on  the 
north  shore,  and  these  are  being  re-worted  by  currents  and  waves 
and  carried  up  the  Harbor.  The  spit  developing  from  the  south 
phore.  Fig.  17,  illustrates  this. 

Station  III,  Subatationa  4  and  5.  Sumner  Lake  attd  Tifiil.  The  trail 
to  Sumner  Lake  (III,  4),  begins  on  the  south  shore  of  Koek  Harhoi- 
and  extends  south  about  one-half  mile  to  Sumner  Lake.  It  passes) 
through  a  second  growth  of  Birch  and  Aspen  (which  has  followed  a 
burn),  a  small  Arbor  Yitae  swamp,  over  a  rock  ridge  to  the  north  shore 
of  the  lake,  where  there  are  a  few  large  Norway  Pines,  from  12  to 
15  inches  in  diameter,  and  a  few  White  Pines.  But  little  attention  was 
given  to  the  life  along  the  trail,  although  a  few  observations  on  the  bird 
life  were  made,  and  some  mammals  were  trapped.  However,  Sumner 
Lake  proved  to  be  such  an  intei-esting  locality  that  attention  was  given  to 
it  more  especially  than  to  the  trail.  This  lake  has  many  of  the  charac- 
teristics of  a  large  lily  pond,  because  the  White  Wateriilies  and  Pota- 
mogetons  form  such  a  wide  belt  around  the  lake.  Pigs.  lS-^3.  In  pass- 
ing from  the  interior  of  the  lake  toward  the  shore,  the  following  zones 
of  v^etation  are  fouud:  The  bulrush  zone,  which  is  well  developed, 
with  its  denser  growth  about  the  eastern  end ;  then  the  Yellow  Water- 
lilies,  followed  by  the  dense  sedge  zone  which  produces  a  substratum. 
In  the  eastern  and  western  ends  of  the  lake  the  water  gradually  shal- 
lows; but  on  the  sides  the  change  is  more  abrupt,  thns  interrupting 
the  shallow  water  zone  of  sedges,  as  shown  on  the  north  shore, 
Fig.  23.  This  encroachment  of  vegetation  upon  each  end  of  the  lake 
is  very  marked,  and  is  much  more  extensive  at  the  eastern  end, 
where  the  lake  is  drained  into  the  bead  of  Conglomerate  Bay  by  a  small 
brook.  The  encroachment  at  the  western  end  of  the  lake  is  well  shown 
in  Fig.  19.  A  partial  view  of  the  eastern  end  of  the  lake  is  given  in  Fuf. 
18.  The  sedge  zone  contains  a  variety  of  plants,  including  several  or- 
chids. Iris,  Pitcher  Plants,  Buckbean,  scattered  Eriophorum  and  Sphag- 
num, Cassandra  end  Andromeda.    The  substratum  is  quaking  and  sinks 


:byCOOgIC 


KCOLOQY  OF  ISLB  ROYALE.  10 

several  inches  below  the  water  level  with  the  weight  of  one's  body;  occa- 
sionally small  but  deep  holes  are  found  through  this  subetratum,  and 
care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  them.  This  zone  is  very  broad  and  contains 
an  abundance  of  life.  Outside  the  sedge  zone  occur  alders  and  Tama- 
rncks,  which  border  the  forests  at  the  base  of  the  slopes. 

The  fauna  of  the  open  Waterlily,  Bulrush  and  Potamogeton  zone  con- 
sists of  insects  flying  over  the  water,  such  as  the  dragonfly,  Aeschna 
and  the  leaf  beetles  Donada,  which  abound,  especially  about  the  Yellow 
Waterlilies.  On  the  surface  film  were  water  stridera,  Oetris  margma- 
ius.  and  whirligig  beetles,  Gyrinidae.  Sticklebacks  were  abundant,  and 
are  quite  characteristic  of  such  waters,  as  is  another  small  ilsh.  Loons 
were  frequently  seen  here,  and  also  a  Hooded  Merganser.  Toward  the 
onter  margin  of  this  zone  "whei-e  the  lilies  are  often  closely  matted  on 
the  surface,  the  insect  life  and  the  surface  film  fauna  are  the  most 
abundant.  A  live  mussel,  Anodonta  grandis  footiana,  was  found  on  the 
bottom;  and  the  snails,  Planorhis  campanulaius  and  parvus,  were  found 
in  small  pools  in  this  sedge  zone.  The  bottom  in  this  vicinity,  and  that 
bordering  the  water  margin  of  the  ridges,  is  covered  with  a  mass  of 
partly  floating  debris,  the  appearance  of  which  suggested  to  Wood,  who 
first  observed  it,  that  something  had  exploded  and  scattered  the  strands 
of  debris  about  the  surface.  It  is  not  improbable  that  the  formation 
of  marsb  gases  will  adequately  explain  this  phenomenon,  (Cf.  Peuhailow, 
Science  Vol.  22,  1905,  pp.  794-7%). 

The  dragonfiics  were  Enallagma  hageni,  Acschna,  Somatocblora  8hurt- 
h/fi.  and  Lacorhina  proximo,  the  last  being  very  abundant. 

Where  the  sedge  zone  wan  absent,  as  at  our  raft  landing  at  the  end  of 
the  trail,  an  abundance  of  needles,  leaves  and  twigs  from  the  over- 
hanging conifers  and  hardwoood  had  accumulated  at  the  shore,  and  were 
stained  almost  black.  The  water  of  the  lake  ia  brownish.  At  this 
point  a  number  of  invertebrates  wei-e  taken,  including  shells,  leeches, 
insects,  etc. 

Station  IT.  Tobin  Harbor  and  Vicinitj/.  As  very  little  time  was 
spent  at  this  station,  the  description  will  be  correspondingly  brief.  Tobin 
Harbor  is  a  deep,  nari-ow,  protected  bay,  similar  to  that  at  the  bead  of 
Rock  Harbor,  but  narrower.  The  adjacent  hills  are  forest  covered, 
largely  with  Aspen  and  White  Birch.  In  the  vicinity  of  Neutson's  Resort 
there  is  a  large,  cleai-ed  area.  Mattson's  resort  is  located  on  an  island  in 
this  Harbor.  The  most  marked  scenic  feature  of  the  Island,  Monument 
Rock,  is  on  the  north  side  of  Tobin  Harbor. 

It  is  a  noticeable  fact  that  many  of  the  low  islands  in  Tobin  Harbor, 
and  especially  those  near  its  eastern  end,  are  clothed  with  vegetation 
close  to  the  edge  of  the  water.  They  are  thus  in  marked  contrast  with 
the  islands  along  the  southern  shore,  and  to  the  various  points  of  rocks 
which  project  into  the  water. 

Upon  a  small  island,  Number  14  on  the  Land  Office  map,  were  found 
small  rock  beach  pools,  just  above  or  near  the  height  of  the  usual  quiet 
weather  waves.  The  water  in  one  was  about  a  foot  in  depth  and  con- 
tained a  very  small  amount  of  algal  growth.  In  this  pool  were  found 
water  stridens,  Qerris  remigis,  a  few  other  insects  (No.  30),  and  small  tad- 
poles. In  another  small  pool  about  10  inches  above  lake  level,  and  with  a 
temperature  of  77"^    (the  Harbor  water  having  a   temperature  at  the. 


20  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

time  of  50°  F,),  were  many  Bpecies  of  lAmmiea  cataacopium  and  a 
few  adult  Physa,    vVlgae  were  oiily  aeen  in  tlie  creviceB. 

Station  IT,  Substations  1  and  2.  Rock  Pools  arui  Scovill  Point. 
BcoTill  Point  ib  an  almost  bai'e,  glacially  planed,  narrow  and  low  rock 
ridge,  projecting  out  into  the  lake.  Xumerous  small  faults  occur  on 
the  sloping  southern  side,  and  these,  supplemented  bv  the  waves,  etc.. 
have  produced  rock  poolB.  In  one  case  a  long  row  of  pools  occurred 
along  the  line  of  the  fault.  The  presence  of  tadpoles  about  an  inch 
long  wonid  suggest  that  these  pools  have  some  duration.  The  higher 
Rummer  waves  might  also  reach  many  of  these  pools.  Water  stridei-s. 
Oerria,  are  abundant  upon  the  surface,  and  a  large  deep  ravine,  nenr 
the  lake  level,  contained  Sticklebacks,  but  no  shells  were  observed  in  any 
of  these  pools. 

Station  IV,  Substation  3.  Bayou  East  of  the  Monunvent  Rock  Trail. 
This  is  a  very  Bmall  pond  which  is  connected  with  the  Harbor  by 
a  small  stream  just  large  enough  to  admit  a  row  boat.  It  illustrates  the 
last  stage  of  separation  of  the  valleys  from  the  Harbor,  as  only  a  very 
slight  fall  of  the  lake  level  would  completely  isolate  it.  In  this  particular 
ease  the  outlet  is  on  the  nouth  side,  and  not  at  one  end  as  is  iisnally 
the  case.  The  central  part  of  the  pond  is  open  water  and  is  surrounded 
by  an  almost  complete  zone  of  Yellow  Waterlilies,  and  a  sedge  zone  con- 
taining several  low  shrubs.  The  Waterlilies  were  badly  infested  by  a 
small  le^  beetle,  Galcrucella-  nifinpkaea;  larvae,  pupae,  and  freshly 
emerged  beetles  were  taken.  A  few  dead  shells  of  Anodonta  marginata 
and  one  of  Limnaea  wegasonia  (the  only  spe<nnien  taken  upon  the 
island)  were  secured  here.  An  extensive  suspended  flocculent  mud  cov- 
ered the  bottom,  so  that  molluscs  could  not  obtain  a  foothold.  At  the  west- 
ern end  of  this  pond  innumerable  small  tadpoles  formed  an  almost 
compact  pavement  upon  (he  bottom  at  the  edge  of  the  watci'.  A  few 
dragonfliea  were  seen,  but  were  not  captured. 

Station  IV,  Substation  4,  S  and  9.  Forest  on  tlie  Greenstone  Range. 
These  three  stations  are  combined  Itecause  they  are  related  to  the  forest 
occupying  the  Gi-eeustone  range.  The  trail  to  Monument  Rock  (IV,  4) 
begins  on  the  north  shore  of  Tobin  Harbor  and  extends  northwest  about 
one-half  mile  to  Monument  Rock.  The  forest  is  dense  and  is  apparently 
a  second  growth  of  Balsam,  White  Spruce,  Birch  and  Aspen,  with  un- 
derbrush of  Mountain  Alder,  Mountain  Ash,  Ground  Hemlock,  and  a 
ground  cover  of  Few-flowered  Cranberry,  Clintonia  boreaUs,  IJnnea 
borealis,  and  AVild  Sarsaparllln.  In  the  moist  places  was  found  Ground 
Cornel,  Aster  macrophyllus,  an  Equisetum.  Lycopodium.  and,  in  wet 
places  of  the  swamp  traversed,  the  Buckbean  and  Bkunk  Cabbage.  For 
some  distance  on  the  slope  down  from  the  base  of  Monument  Rock  occur 
large  blocks  which  are  covered  by  a  dense  mat  of  mosses,  and  the 
ground  is  covered  with  a  thick  layer  of  humus,  so  that  the  general 
appearance  of  the  vegetation  is  that  of  a  mesophytic  forest. 

The  trail  up  the  Greenstone  (IV,  8),  begins  at  the  mouth  of  a  small 
brook  at  the  head  of  Tobin  Harbor,  and  follows  the  crest  of  an  open 
burned  over  ridge  southeast  for  about  half  a  mile.  This  ridge  contains 
a  scanty  growth- of  Amelanchier  oligocarpa  and  alnlfolta,  Prunus  penn- 
ayl&tnica,  Jack  Pine,  wild  rose,  SoUdago,  Bearberry  and  Yarrow.  From 
the  end  of  this  ridge  a  valley  crosses  to  the  north  and  contains  large 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE   ROYALB.  .  21 

.Vspens,  Tamarack,  Norway  aud  White  Fine,  and  an  underbrush  of 
Speckled  Alder  and  Ground  Hemlock.  After  croBsing  this  depreeston, 
the  trail  aecendg  the  elope  and  croBses  tlie  burned  ridges  where  there 
is  a  growth  of  Birch  and  ^Vapeu.  The  slope  increases  more  abruptly 
as  the  crest  of  the  Greenstone  is  approached.  This  is  the  vicinity  of  an 
old  signal  station  and  has  an  elevation  of  about  4G0  feet,  according  to 
the  I^ke  Survey.  This  forest  along  the  crest  comprised  Station  IV,  9. 
The  large  trees  stand  above  the  snrrounding  second  growth,  on  the 
burned  area,  and  can  be  seen  for  some  distance.  The  Balsam,  Birch 
and  Quaking  Aspen  are  the  dominant  trees,  the  Balsams  reaching  a 
diameter  of  about  10  to  12  inches,  and  the  Birches  and  Aspens  abont  12 
to  15  inches.  The  shrub  growth  is  composed  of  Mountain  Maple,  Ground 
Ilemlock,  and  the  Few  flowered  Cranberry,  the  ground  cover  of  Dier- 
riUa  diervtlla,  I^rge-flowering  Raspberry,  Aster  macrophyllua,  CUntonia 
bort-alis,  Lmnea  horcalis,  Lycopodiutn,  Wild  Sarsaparilla  and  Brake 
Fern;  the  White  and  Black  iSpruces  being  only  occasionally  seen.  This 
forest  produced  dense  shade.  Fallen  timber  is  abundant  in  places,  but 
no  signs  of  fire  were  observed.  This  ridge  was  bounded  on  the  north 
by  a  cliff  of  perhaps  20  to  30  feet,  below  which  was  a,  long  talus  slope 
covered  with  Birch,  Aspen  and  Balsam.  From  the  top  of  this  ridge  there 
is  a  splendid  view  to  the  north.  The  crest  was  followed  west  to  a  small 
open  burned  area  where  DiervUla  diertdlla  and  Large-flowering  Baspberry ' 
were  abundant.  The  leaves  of  the  latter  were  badly  perforated  by  the 
abundant  grasshoppers,  Hibbincim  tvicrmilatiis  and  Metanophis  alaa- 
kanvs.  In  the  deep  wood  a  Ti-ee  Toad.  Sj/la  versicolor,  was  found,  and 
Varying  Hares  and  Red  Squirrels  were  seen. 

Station  IV,  Substation  5.  Clearing,  and  Vicinity  of  -Veu(«on'«  Resort 
(Park  Place).  There  is  a  rather  extensive  clearing  at  Neutson's  Resort, 
so  that  very  little  collecting  was  done  in  this  virinity.  A  collection  of 
grasshoppers  was  made  here  by  Brown  and  Wood,  nud  the  following 
list  of  plants  was  made  by  the  former  from  the  same  vicinity:  White 
Spruce,  Birch,  Aspen,  Mountain  Alder.  Junipcrua  nana,  Wild  Bed 
or  Pennsylvania  Cherry,  Red  and  White  Clover,  Bush  Honeysuckle,  Fra- 
garia  vesoa,  Cow  Parsnip,  and  lAjcopodium  complanatum. 

The  grasshoppers  were:  CMoenltis  ahdominalis,  Camnula  pelludda. 
Hippixcut  tiibcreiilatns,  Circotettix  verruculatus,  Melanoplus  alatkamm. 
and  hnrord.  Two  butterflies,  Argynnis  at)antis  and  Pyrameia  cardui, 
and  the  dragonfly  Lcstes  unguinilatus  were  also  taken  here.  In  Rock 
Harbor,  at  Neutson's,  leech  egg  capsules  of  Nephalopsis  obscure,  and 
Physa  were  taken.  On  a  small  island  across  the  Harbor  to  the  south, 
in  a  Sphagnum,  I'itcher  Plant  and  Tamarack  swamp,  a  number  of  Wood 
Frogs,  i  liana  cmUabrigcnsis)  were  taken. 

A  Red-bellied  Snake  (Storeria  occipitonia^data)  was  reported  to  have 
been  killed  in  the  clearing,  during  July.  . 

Station  IT,  Substation  6.  Small  Island  in  Tobin  Harbor.  This  sta- 
tion includes  the  sedges  and  shallow  water  at  the  west  end  of  a  small 
island  in  Tobin  Harbor.  The  bottom  was  covered  with  sand  and  large 
angular  blocks  of  rock.  Limnaea  stagnalis  was  very  abundant  and  oc- 
corred  in  water  with  a  depth  of  about  three  feet.  The  shells  are  very 
fra^le.  Upon  the  rocks  Physa  occurred  in  limited  numbers  and  was  wide- 
ly scattered,  but  they  were  abundant  on  the  stems  of  the  sedges  not  far 


22  MICHtGAN   8URVBY.   1908. 

below  the  surface.  The  yoang  of  L.  atagnalia  occurred  with  the  Phifsa. 
A  specimen  of  Qordiua  aqualicus  was  secured  here. 

Station  IV,  Substation  7.  Hca4  of  Tobin  Harbor.  A  small  brook 
empties  into  the  head  of  the  Harbor,  and  its  brown  water  brings  into  the 
bay  quantities  of  vegetable  remains  and  flocculent  debris.  These  cover 
the  bottom  near  the  mouth  of  the  stream,  and  although  carefully  ex- 
amined, were  found  to  be  singularly  free  of  animals.  Upon  patches  of 
Potamogetoti  perfoHatum  occurred  a  few  Phyaa,  and  in  the  shallow 
water  a  few  flsh  were  found.     (No,  35.) 

Station  V.  8i»lto\cit  Bay,  Lake,  and  Vicinity.  This  station  includes 
all  the  localities  in  the  vicinity  of  Hiskowit  Bay  and  Siskowit  Lake,  ex- 
cept that  of  VIII,  '04,  which  is  at  the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay. 

Station  V,  Svitstation  1  and  3.  The  Bay  Beach  at  Camp,  and  the 
Rock  Clearing.  The  beach  (V,  1),  is  protected  from  the  waves  of  the 
open  lake  and  bay  by  large  off-shore  islands.  The  rock  composing  it  is 
vesicular  lava,  and  slopes  lo  the  water  at  an  angle  of  ."ibout  10  degrees. 

The  Rock  Clearing  aboot  Camp  (V,  3),  begins  at  the  beach  and  ex- 
tends up  the  slope  backward  ta  the  Balsam,  Spruce  and  Birch  forest  os 
a  park-like  opening.  The  soil,  mainly  of  residual  and  humic  origin,  is 
very  shallow  and  completely  lacking  in  places.  The  surface  of  tbe  rock 
is  rough,  showing  that  it  has  been  eroded  simee  glaciation.  In  places 
the  rocks  are  more  or  leas  covered  by  crustaceous  and  foliaceous  lichens, 
or,  where  there  is  more  humua  or  soil,  by  Cladonia,  Fig.  24.  Where 
the  soil  is  deeper  is  found  Bearberry,  Narrow-leaved  Cow-wheat,  Soli- 
dago,  grasses  and  moss.  A  scattered  shrub  growth  is  composed  of 
JunipOrus  nana  and  AmelanchAer,  Fig.  25  and  26,  and  the  bordering 
tree  growth  consists  of  Balsam,  Black  and  White  Spruce,  Birch  and 
Arbor  Vitae.  In  the  sbade  of  these  bordering  trees.  Aster  macrophyUus 
develops  in  abundance.  The  above  description  also  outlines  the  prob- 
able succession  of  plant  societies  upon  this  surface,  all  stages  of  which 
are  now  to  be  found  witliin  tliis  area.  Many  smaller  patches  of  this 
open  condition  are  found  scattered  through  the  forest  and  are  becoming 
shaded  and  converted  into  the  forest  as  a  soil  develops,  Fig.  27. 

The  fauna  of  the  openings  is  rather  characteristic  and  abundant. 
Of  course  many  species  range  over  a  variety  of  plant  societies  and  only 
reci^nize  a  clearing  or  forest  society,  and  not  their  varieties.  Yet 
others  are  much  more  sensitive  to  smaller  environmental  units.  This 
is  well  shown  by  certain  ants.  Ant  nests  of  Formica  fusca  as  illustrated 
b.V  Fig.  28,  and  certain  spiders,  as  Pardosa,  are  quite  characteristic  of 
the  Cladonia-Bearberry  plant  society.  The  opening,  as  contrasted  with 
the  forest,  is  frequented  by  grasshoppers,  such  as  Melanoplus  faaciatu»; 
butterflies,  as  Argynnia  and  Bamlurchia  arthemia;  and  the  dragonflies, 
Sympctrum,  which  were  very  abundant  and  characteristic  (Aechna 
patrols  the  margins  of  such  openings).  The  robber  fly,  Asilua  annttlatua, 
frequents  such  open  sunny  areas  where  animal  food  abounds. 

The  vertebrate  frequenters  of  the  open  were  the  Flickers,  which  were 
observed  by  McCreary  to  destroy  ant  nests.  Several  of  such  demolished 
nests  were  seen.  Toward  night  a  nocturnal  association  frequented  the 
■open;  the  bats  on  wing;  and  the  hares  came  from  the  forest  to  feed, 
having  been  in  hiding  during  the  day. 

No  doubt  the  presence  of  this  opening,  in  part,  determined  the  location 

■  D,s    ZK;l„COOgIC 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALB.  23 

of  the  log  cabin  used  by  our  party.  The  logs  were  thoponghly  infested 
by  beetle  larvae,  and  attracted  vast  numbers  of  parasitic  Hymenoptera. 
For  this  reason,  insect  collecting  abont  the  cabin  was  of  an  exceptional 
character,  and  included  a  considerable  variety  of  species.  From  the 
adjacent  forest  a  number  of  trees  had  been  cut,  but  this  did  not  material- 
ly inflaence  this  locality,  except  near  the  shore. 

Station  V,  Substation  2.  Heath  Zone  and  Beach.  This  locality  in- 
cludes a  strip  of  rocky  coast  on  the  south  shore  of  the  island,  a  short 
distance  east  of  the  entrance  of  Biskowit  Bay,  Fig.  29,  and  extends  from 
the  edge  of  the  water  back  to  the  forest.  This  is  an  exposed  section  of 
the  coast  and  is  unprotected  by  offshore  islands,  so  that  easterly  storms 
from  the  open  lake  have  full  sweep  on  this  shore.  The  slope  is  a  fairly 
uniform  rock  surface,  with  an  upward  slant  of  about  10  degrees,  and 
is  composed  of  amygdaloidal  lava.  Crevices  of  various  dimensions,  from 
a  mere  crack  to  a  deep  rock  ravine,  extend  obliquely  up  the  slope.  One 
of  these  ravines,  the  only  large  one,  divides  this  station  into  two  sections 
east  and  west.  The  eastern  section  of  the  slope  is  covered  by  a  Cladonia- 
Junipents  procumiens  society,  while  the  western  section  is  occupied  by 
a  Cladonia-Junipcrug  fWrta-Hnckleberry  society.  Thus  there  are  three 
fairly  well  defined  natural  divisions  of  this  part  of  the  coast,  the  beach, 
tbeprocumhcns.  and  the  nana  societies. 

1.  The  Beach.  The  low  angle  of  the  slope,  and  the  exposed  sitaation 
and  deep  offshore  water  all  combine  to  make  the  beach  zones  quite  wide 
(four  or  Ave  paces)  upon  this  slope.  No  collections  were  made  upon  the 
riubnierged  beach  and  only  a'  few  specimens  wen;  taken  upon  the  lower. 
The  characteristic  species,  however,  were  a  small  hemipterous  shore  in- 
sect, Salda  ligata,  a  caddis  fly,  and  ants.  Above  the  lower  beach  is  a 
wide  upper  one,  characterized  by  a  dark  green  moss  (Grimmia)  and 
crustaceoas  lichens. 

A  number  of  rock  pools  occupy  the  oblique  crevices  which  extend 
up  the  beach.  The  largest  of  these  is  shown  in  Fig.  SO.  This  is  a  pool 
about  4x8  feet  in  diameter  and  contains  about  15  to  18  inches  of 
water.  On  the  surface  of  the  water  were  fragments  of  insects,  water 
striders,  Qerris  remigis,  and  on  the  bottom,  dragonfly  nymphs  (No.  14), 
while  caddis  fly  larvae  crawled  upon  the  sides  and  bottom.  No  algal 
growth  was  visible.  The  character  of  this  insect  life  suggests  a  pool 
of  some  duration,  but  the  absence  of  shells  suggests  a  lack  of  permanent 
water.  Numerous  baein-like  depressions,  a  few  inches  in  depth,  occur 
on  the  lower  beach  and  on  the  foliaceons  lichen-covered  portions  of  the 
middle  beach.  The  sharp  angles  of  some  of  the  pools  show  that  these 
are  occasionally  produced  by  the  removal  of  small  blocks  of  rock.  Most 
of  the  pools,  however,  occur  in  crevices.  From  one  of  the  large  pools 
a  frog,  Rana  clamitans  (No.  120),  was  taken,  clearly  showing  how  tad- 
poles may  reach,  such  pools. 

In  the  crevices  and  behind  angular  rock  projections  occur  Harebells, 
Yarrow,  Ninebark,  and  an  interesting  succulent  Saxifrage,  Sasifraga 
aizoon,  Fig.  SI,  and  some  grasses.  In  the  crustaceous  lichen  zone  is 
a  greenish  moss,  Orimmia,  and  in  the  crevices  are  Bearberry,  Juniperua 
procunibena,  and  Arbor  Vitae. 

2.  The  CUtdonia-Juniperua  procunibcna  Society  of  the  Eastern  Section,  t  ^ 
About  ten  paces  farthei-  up  the  slope,  Fig.  33,  this  crevice  society  spread^''- 


24  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1S108. 

out,  and,  with  the  addition  of  Cladonia  and  some  Jumperus  nana,  fomw 
internipted  patches  or  streaks,  Fig.  33,  which  farther  up  the  slope  fuse 
and  form  a  solid  mat,  completely  covering  the  surface  of  the  rock,  Figs. 
S3  and  34.  The  dominant  forms  are  Juniperus  procumbens  and  certain 
species  0/  Cladonia.  This  was  the  only  place  where  J.  procumbens  was 
found  growing  on  such  an  extensive  scale,  or  associated  in  abundance 
with  Cladonia.  This  formed  a  novel  and  beautiful  sight,  the  light-colored 
patches  of  the  Reindeer-lichens  in  places  intermingled  with  the  bright 
green  of  the  procanibeng  to  form  a  variegated  mat.  The  beauty  of  color 
and  pattern  is  lost  in  a  general  view,  as  in  Fig.  Si.  The  White  Spruce 
invades  the  slope  in  crevices,  just  in  advance  of  the  solid  mat  formation, 
but  the  soil  is  so  shallow  that  it  may  be  blown  over,  as  is  shown  in 
Fig.  33.  Procumbens  grows  bo  densely  and  close  to  the  ground  that 
it  greatly  favors  the  formation  and  retention  of  the  soil,  and  it  appai-- 
ently  precedes,  on  this  slope,  the  Cladonia.  In  the  large  crevices  within 
this  zone  grow  patches  of  White  Pine,  Balsam,  Mountain  Alder,  Spruce, 
Birch  and  Arbor  Vite.  The  general  relations  of  this  slope  can  easily 
be  seen  by  a  comparison  of  Figs.  32,  33  and  34,  in  which  is  shown  the 
transition  from  the  bare  wave  washed  beach,  the  flat  growing  lichens, 
the  pioneers  of  the  mat  formation  invading  the  crevices,  and  the  domi- 
nance of  the  J.  procumbens -Cladonia  society  with  its  scattered  trees,  up 
the  slope  into  the  Balsam-Bpruce  forest.  This  same  order  probably  also 
expresses  the  succession  of  plant  societies  at  this  place.  As  previously 
mentioned,  the  fauna  of  the  lower  beach  is  quite  limited,  the  greater 
variety  occurring  in  the  pools;  but  farther  up  the  slope  appear  various 
forms  which  frequent  the  open.  On  the  scattered  part  of  the  Cladonia- 
procunibens  zone  occurred  the  spiders,  Pardosa  glaoialia  and  8temali8, 
the  grasshoppers,  Circotctiix  verrucuJatus,  Melanoplus  alaskantts  and 
faadatus.  A  ground  beetle,  Pterostichua  femoraUs  was  found  under 
CUtdonta,  and  under  similar  conditions  were  found  an  abundance  of 
shells,  Aoanthinula  harpa,  Strobilopa  virgo,  Vertigo  tridentata,  Vitrina 
limpida,  binneyana,  Euconulua  fulvus,  Euconulua  cher»inus  polygyratws, 
Zonitoidea  arborea  milium,  AgrioHmaiB  oampeatria,  Pyramidula  cronk- 
heitei  anthonyi,  Helicodicua  parallelus,  and  Cochlicopa  lubrica.  The 
number  of  these  shells  which  have  a  distinctly  boreal  range  is  particular- 
ly noteworthy,  suggesting  that  such  a  habitat  has  some  of  the  character- 
istics of  a  "boreal  island." 

3-  I'A«  Cladonior  Juniper  us  nana  Society  of  the  Weatern  Section. 
Here,  as  at  the  eastern  section  of  this  slope,  the  bare  lake  beach  bounds 
this  area  shoreward.  A  general  view  up  this  slope  is  shown  in  Fig. 
35.  The  bare  wave-washed  lower  beach  is  in  the  foreground,  and  the 
green  moss  and  light  colored  lichen  zone  is  a  broad  belt  above  it,  followed 
in  tnm  by  foliaceous  lichens,  and  in  the  crevices  by  Aspen.  The  rock 
surface  is  considerably  router  than  that  of  the  east  beach.  In  general 
appearance  this  beach  is  much  more  like  that  about  the  camp  at  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  3)  than  the  Cladoniaprocumbcna  section,  and  contains  more 
of  the  Low  Janiper  rather  than  the  Procumbent  Juniper.  There  is 
also  much  more  exposed  rock,  and  a  miich  more  diversified  flora.  In 
places  the  Low  Huckleberries  are  very  abundant,  while  they  are  not 
at  all  conspicuoQB  on  the  eastern  section.  To  get  an  idea  of  the  general 
appearances  Figures  3-i  and  36  should  be  cmnpared.      ■ 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   ROYALE,  25 

Figure  34  shows  the  marked  dominance  of  proctniibcnK,  which  was  not 
abandaut  oo  the  west  slope.  The  plant  life  is  more  varied,  with  the 
foliaceons  lichens  and  bunches  of  corat-like  Cladonia.  ferua,  grasses,  Soli- 
dago,  and  the  willows  and  aspens  in  the  crevices,  Fig.  37.  These  forms 
give  a  very  different  aspect  to  the  pioneer  society  from  that  of  one 
composed  of  a  Cladonia-procumhena  mat.  The  open  or  patch  like  char- 
acter of  this  society  suggests'  that  the  retarded  development  of  the 
Tegetatiooal  cover  may  be  related  in  some  way  to  the  scarcity  of  J. 
procumbens,  which  is  such  an  excellent  agent  in  soil  formation.  But 
■why  this  shrub  should  not  thrive  here  is  not  known. 

Associated  with  these  conditions  wei-e  the  snail  Polygyra  alboUibris, 
and  the  grasshopper  MeUinoplus  faaoiatus.  The  absence  of  the  dense 
mat,  and  less  soil,  greatly  reduced  the  variety  of  animals  frequenting 
snch  conditions.  ' 

Tal:ing  the  station  as  a  whole  (V,  2),  it  is  one  of  the  most  interesting 
places  seen  on  the  island.  The  beauty  of  the  variegated  Cladonia  mat, 
the  extensive  area  of  the  open  habitat,  the  boreal  character  of  the  lichens, 
the  Saxifrage  and  many  of  the  shells,  the  apparent  completeness  of  the 
lueservatioa  of  the  stages  in  the  transformation  fi-om  the  lower  beach 
back  to  the  forest,  all  combine  to  make  this  situation  one  of  the  most 
interesting  and  important  of  those  examined.* 

Statioji  T,  Substation  J.  Trail  through  BaUamrSprucc  Forest.  This 
station  begins  at  the  opening  about  camp  (V,  3)  and  extends  northwest 
to  the  south  shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  opposite  the  eastern  end  of  an 
elongated  island.  The  topography  of  the  region  traversed  is  one  of  low 
relief,  with  only  occasional  low  rocks,  hills,  or  ridges,  la  to  20  feet  in 
height,  and  a  few  shallow  and  moist  ravines.  A  thick  layer  of  humus 
covers  the  surface,  except  on  the  ridges.  The  trail  first  passes  through 
a  forest  of  White  Spruce,  Balsam,  Birch  and  scattered  Tamaracks. 
Among  these  trees  are  many  fresh  windfalls,  due  to  the  winds  and  the 
shallow  soil.  In  the  more  shaded  portions  the  ground  cover  consists 
of  a  dense  growth  of  mosses,  liverworts,  Fig.  38,  with  Aster  macrophylliis  , 
in  the  less  shaded  portions.  There  arc  open  patches  10  to  15  feet  in 
diameter  scattered  about  through  the  forest,  especially  on  low  rock 
ridges,  which  contain  a  growth  of  Cladonia,  and  illustrate  the  last  stages 
of  the  decline  of  the  openings. 

In  the  moist  depressions  was  found  an  abundance  of  Round-leaved 
Cornel,  alder,  and  also  Ground  Hemlock,  Mountain  Ash,  Balsam,  White 
Spruce,  and  the  Ground  Pine  (abundant.)  There  were  many  fallen 
and  decayed  \o^.  In  and  characterizing  the  more  open  places,  such  as 
were  a^ociated  with    lar^    Birches,  are    the    Large-flowering  Rasp- 


liien  mre  the  moat  Important  papers  on  tbJa  subject, 

IMS.     EcokwIeBl  Distribution  an  Incentive  to  the  Study  of  Llchena.     HryoloKiat,  5,  pp.  39-40, 
IMS.    BomeCiHnniini  Trp«a  o(  I.lchen  tormallons.    Bull.  Torrey  not.  Club.,  30,  pp.  i\2-il6. 
IWS.    Some  Talua  Cladonia,  Formations.    Bot.  Ciiu.,  as,  pp.  ie.'i-208, 
IMM.     A  Llclun  Bodety  ot  Sandatone  Riprap.     Bot.  Gaz.,  3S,  pp.  26S-2S1. 
CcmtributlonB  to  the  Btudr  of  Lichens  of  Ulnneiota: 

I.    Llehanj  ot  the  Laka  ot  the  Woods.    Uinn.  Bol.  Stud..  1.  18H.  pp.  W3-70I 
IL    Uchent  ot  Hlnneap^  and  Vidnlty.    Ulnn,  Bol.  Stud..  I,  IBH.  pp.  703-735. 

III.  The  Rock  Llchena  ot  Taylon  Falls.    Ulnn.  Bot.  Stud.,  2.  isOS.  pp.  1-18 

IV.  Uehcnt  of  tbe  Lake  Supeilor  Redon,    HInn.  Bot  Stud.,  a,  1809,  pp.  21.'>-Z7e. 

V.    Uchena  of  the  Uinneaota  Valley  and  Southwestern  Ulnnewla.    Ulnn,  Bot.  Stud.,  2, 181 
_  pp.  277-820. 

TI.    licbens  of  Northwestern  Minnesota.    Minn.  Bot.  Stud.,  2.  1001,  pp.  SS7-709,  , 

VII.    Lichens  of  the  Northern  Boundary.    Minn.  Bot.  Stud.,  2.  1003,  pp.  lS7-23e.  \a  p 

4  ^'d'^ 


26  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

berry,  SarBaparilla  (dominant),  and  CUntonia  borealU,  bnt  Aster 
mojctxyphyllua  was  not  as  abondant  here  a«  elsewhere.  Tbe  larger 
Birches  averaged  about  12  to  15  inches  in  diameter.  The  general 
apjiearance  of  the  conditions  is  shown  in  Fig.  39.  This  patch  of  birches 
was  near  the  swamp  (V,  5).  From  this  Birch  colony,  on  to  the  end 
of  the  trail  to  Siskowit  Lakej  tbe  forest  was  dominated  by  large  Birch, 
with  a  few  quaking  Aspen,  Balsam  and  White  Spmce,  while  in  the 
damper  places  Ground  Hemlock  and  Dogwood  were  abundant.  On 
the  ridges  there  are  small  "island^"  ot  Cladonia,  mosses,  Bearberry  and 
a  ground  pine.  The  general  appearance  of  this  forest,  in  an  open  place, 
is  sbown  in  Fig.  40. 

While  there  are  thus  minor  differences  which  prevent  absolute  homo- 
geneity in  the  general  conditions  .of  the  forest,  yet  these  differences  do 
not  seem  to  particularly  influence  the  environment  as  a  whole.  The 
general  transition  from  the  openings,  as  found  on  rock  ridges  like  those 
about  camp  {V,  3),  to  the  Balsam-Bpnice  forest  may  be  seen  by  a  com- 
parison of  Figures  25,  26,  27  and  38. 

The  fauna  of  the  forest  (V,  4)  is  rather  varied.  Tbe  shells  are  repre- 
sented by  Acantkinula  harpa.  Zonitoidea  arborea,  and  PyramiAuUt 
cronkheitei  anthonyi;  the  beetles  by  the  carabid,  Calathua,  the  fnngns- 
inhabiting  beetles,  Boletobius.  Tritoma  and  Qrophaena,  and  doubtless 
many  of  the  other  species  which  were  taken  about  the  flowers  and  the 
comp.  The  wood-boring  Hymenoptera,  as  UrGcenis.  are  also  character- 
istic of  this  kind  of  forest.  Hares  remained  concealed  in  the  forests 
during  the  day,  but  at  dusk  they  came  in  large  numbers  into  the  clear- 
ings to  feed.  The  birds  had  begun  to  migrate  when  this  location  was 
examined,  so  that  little  attention  was  given  to  their  habitat  preferences. 

Station  V,  Substation  5.  Tamarack  Swamp.  This  swamp  lies  between 
Siskowit  Lake  and  the  western  end  of  the  trail  through  the  Balsam- 
Spruce  forest  [V,  4).  This  is  a  valley  swamp  bordering  a  small  stream 
which  flows  through  the  swamp.  The  central  open  part  of  the  swamp 
Is  occupied  by  a  small  pool  or  pond,  Fig.  4h  which  is  invaded  by  Yellow 
Waterlilies,  Surrounding  this  is  a  zone  of  Buckbean  and  sedge,  the 
overgrowing  sedge  being  more  conspicuous.  This  sedge  zone  is  quite 
wet  aud  quaking.  The  current  of  the  stream  passed  through  this  zone 
and  parted  the  sedges  in  a  wet  line  two  or  three  inches  wide.  At  its 
outer  border,  the  zone  becomes  invaded  by  small  Tamaracks,  4  to  5 
feet  highj  alders,  willow,  scattered  Cassandra  and  Pitcher  Plants,  and 
Wild  Rosemary  (common).  Eiiophonim,  the  Blue  Flag  and  the  Purple 
(.'inquefoil  occur  in  some  of  the  depressions.  A  very  few  small  Arbor 
Vitae  also  occur  here.  A  ntrip  of  trees  bordered  the  stream,  while 
farther  south  occurred  the  Cassandra  aud  Sphagnum  zone  proper.  The 
latter  contained  scattered  Blue  Flags,  and  upon  dry  hummocks,  colonies 
of  Cladonia,  which  seemed  rather  out  of  place.  The  margin  of  this 
area  was  invaded  by  the  Tamarack,  Black  Bpruoe  and  Labrador  Tea. 
The  geneva!  ap]jearance  of  this  forest  is  sbown  in  Figs.  -}2 -}?.  Near  the 
margin  of  the  swamp,  where  the  spruces  are  quite  large  and  the  ground 
well  shaded,  the  growth  of  Ijabrador  Tea  and  Sphagnum  was  very  Inx- 
uriant.  The  growth  of  Sphagnum  at  this  place  was  by  far  the  most 
luxuriant  seen  upon  the  island.  It  grew  in  billucks  over  fallen  trees 
and  stumps,  and  stood  considerably  above  the  general  level  of  the  swaniflJp 


ECOLOGY  OF    ISLE   ROYALBL  27 

Thifl  grouBd  cover  was  not  limited  to  the  awamp,  but  invaded 
the  Baisam-Spnice  forest  in  large  billow  growths,  such  as  is 
shown  in  Fig.  H-  In  other  places  the  undergrowth  and  ground 
cover  of  the  BaJsam-Spruce  forest  apparently  invaded  the  swamp,  as 
was  Been  by  the  interminnling  of  the  two  plant  Bocieties.  Here 
thei-e  is  a  mat  of  the  Sphagnnm  and  Labrador  Tea  intermingled 
with  Ground  Cornel.  CUntonia  horealia  and  young  Balsams.  As 
in  FUf.  4i.-  tl'is  might  also  be  interpreted  to  mean  an  Invasion  of  the 
Balsam-Sprnce  forest  bv  the  swamp ;  but  the  vigor  and  dominance  of  the 
Balsam  society'  favors  the  interpretation  that  this  is  an  Invasion  of  the 
swamp  by  the  Balsam  society.  It  is  not  surprising  that  along  snch  a 
tension  line  either  society  may  dominate  at  times. 

The  fauna  of  this  bog  consisted  of  a  Garter  Snake  (7*.  sirtalit),  found 
near  the  small  brook  flowing  into  the  western  or  upper  end  of  the  bog. 
Here  also  was  fonnd  Hyla  pickeringii,  Rami  clamitana,  and  R. 
cantabrigensia,  and  a  water  strider,  Oerria,  running  on  the  surface.  In 
tbe  Cassandra  and  Sphagnum  hammock  zone  were  found  the  grasshop- 
pers, Mecostethus  Uneatvs,  Melanoplvs  extremua,  and  Stenobothrus 
curtipennis.  Nearer  the  central  lilypond,  among  the  sedges  and  Cas- 
sandra, were  found  the  dragon  flies,  Tetregoneutia  spinigera,  Aeaohna, 
t/eucorlUnia  hudaonica  and  Sympetrum  obtrusum,  and  the  spider  Epcira 
patagiata.  Through  the  central  area  of  the  bog  the  stream  was'  only 
indicated  by  the  parting  of  the  sedges,  but  at  the  lower  or  eastern 
end  it  again  became  well  defined,  and  contained  the  small  Stickle- 
back, Eucalia  inconatans.  Beetles  taken  ffom  this  bog  were  Haliplut 
ruficollia,  Eydroptyrua  triatia  and  Agabtis  congener.  The  molluscs  were 
represented  by  tbe  small  bivalves,  Pi8i4ium. 

Station  V,  Subatation  6.  South  Shore  of  Siakoicit  Lake.  This  sit- 
uation is  simply  the  end  of  the  trail  through  the  forest,  and  marks  the 
location  of  some  collecting  in  the  lake.  The  shore  is  rocky,  with  rather 
low  and  ovei^own  banks. 

Station  V,  Subatation,  7.  The  Hat/town  Trail.  This  trail  begins  al- 
most directly  opposite  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  lake,  where  a  large  White 
Pine  has  been  marked  "36  W,  65  X.,  19  E."  This  area  has  been  burneil 
over,  but  farther  inland  the  blaze  on  the  older  trees  enables  one  to  follow 
the  trail.  The  course  is  shown  by  Lane,  ('98,  PI,  XI),  but  we  examined 
it  only  to  abont  the  point  where  it  is  crossed  by  the  outlet  of  Hatchet 
lake,  at  which  place  there  was  a  Tamarack  swamp  with  very  large  trees 
(V,  8).  After  crossing  the  burned  area  near  Siskowit  lake,  this  trail 
passed  through  dense  Arbor  Vitae  bogs  and  a  large  area  of  Balsam-Birch 
•  forest.  In  general  the  area  traversed  was  ratlier  deeply  covered  with 
soil  and  contained  very  few  rock  exposures,  those  observed  probably 
being  due  to  Area. 

Tbe  general  character  of  the  upland  forest,  of  mixed  conifer  and 
hardwood,  is  indicated  by  the  following  list:  Balsams.  Birch  and 
Aspens  {all  about  10  inches  in  diameter),  scattered  Arbor  Vitae  (10  to 
15  inches),  a  few  scattered  White  Pines  (about  3  feet  in  diameter),  and 
a  few  Hard  Maples  (some  S  inches).  It  is  thus  seen  that  the  largest 
abundant  trees  are  the  White  Pine,  Arbor  Vitae,  Birch,  Hard  Maple  and 


byCoogle 


28  MICHIGAN    SUHVEY,    1908. 

Aepen,  The  lar^e  amount  of  hardwood  present  was  an  unexpected  feature. 
This  forest  ma;  be  considered  transitional  betveen  the  Balsam,  White 
Spruce  forest,  iind  the  Hard  Maple,  Yellow  Birch,  Balsam  and  Arbor 
Yitse  foi"eat  as  found  on  the  Desor  Trail  (HI,  .'04). 

The  undei^owth  consisted  of  Ground  Hemlock  in  abundance,  Moan- 
tain  Maple,  Beaked  Hazel,  .young  Balsams  and  Birches.  The  ground 
cover  was  composed  of  Clititonia  borealis,  Lycopodmm  lecidulum,  Cla- 
bonia  on  dry  rotten  wood,  Aster  macrophyllus,  Large-flowering  Rasp- 
berry and  Wild  Sarsaparilla. 

Mountain  Maples  and  young  Balsams  sliowed  a  marked  tendency  to 
take  possession  of  the  trail.  The  lack  of  an  undergrowth  in  the  dense 
swamps  was  particularly  noticeable,  and  the  clearly  defined  old  trail 
through  such  places  indicated  relatively  stable  conditions. 

A  very  marked  characteristic  of  this  trail  was  its  limited  fanna.  Very 
few  birds  were  seen,  and  Red  Squirrels  were  not  at  all  abundant.  Sev- 
eral times  we  saw  the  remains  of  Balsam  cones  where  a  Bed  Squirrel 
had  taken  a  meal.    Almost  uo  effort  was  made  to  collect  invertebrates. 

Station  V,  Substation  8.  Arbor  Tilac  Stoamp.  This  swamp  marked 
the  end  of  owr  Haytown  Trail,  and  bordered  on  a  Bmall  stream.  The 
dark  colored  soil  contained  much  humus  and  was  soft  and  apongy.  The 
vegetation  bordering  this  stream  was  composed  of  Speckled  Alder,  Skunk 
Cabbage,  Marsh  Marigold,  Clintonia  borealis,  scattered  Bine  Flags, 
and  Ground  Cornel ;  in  the  moderate  shade,  CopUs  trifolia,  Mountain  Ash, 
young  Arbor  Vitae  and  Balsams,  Tivayblade,  and,  in  the  damp  places, 
away  from  the  stream,  Mitella  nuda. 

In  the  dense  and  apparently  well  drained  swamp  there  was  a  firm 
humic  soil  covered  by  a  thick  layer  of  leaves,  conifer  needles  and  twigs. 
The  ground  cover  was  composed  of  Ground  Cornel,  Clintonia  borealifi 
and  Wild  Sarsaparilla,  with  an  undergrowth  of  Mountain  Maple,  Ciliated 
Honeysuckle,  numerous  young  Balsams,  young  Arbor  Vitae,  Ground 
Hemlock,  Mountain  Ash,  and  Beaked  Hazel.  The  large  Tamaracks  were 
about  3  feet  in  diameter,  and  the  Arbor  Vitae  about  2  feet,  others  about 
20  inches  in  diameter  were  abnudant.  It  is  thus  seen  that  this  was 
an  old  and  mature  swamp  with  some  very  large  trees,  under  which  the 
ground  was  quite  open.  With  better  drainage,  the  young  or  suppressed 
imdei^-owth  would  succeed  the  Tamarack  society. 

The  old  trail  through  this  swamp  was  remarkably  well  preserved  and 
distinct  because  the  dominance  of  the  large  shade-producing  trees  pre- 
vented the  derelopment  of  an  undergrowth.     No  animals  were  collected. 

Station  V,  Substation  9.  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake.  A  trail  or  path 
ran  from  the  head  of  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake  south  to  the  Siskowit 
Bay  beach,  a  distance  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  The  area  traversed 
had  l>een  burned,  and  second  growth  had  developed,  the  best  of  which 
was  in  the  depressions  where  the  soil  is  deeper.  The  open  ridges  near 
Siskowit  Lake,  where  the  soil  is  thin,  have  an  open  growth  near  the 
head  of  the  trail  and  support  Priums  pennsylixinica.  Birch,  Dierville  dier- 
ville,  Mountain  Asb,  Mountain  Maple,  Amflanohier  oUgocarpa,  Ground 
Cornel,  Everlasting,  Wild  Rose,  White  Clover,  Fire  Weed  and  mosses. 
In  the  depressions  among  the  underbrush  in  the  deeper  soil  and  in  shade 


3y  Google 


ECOLXXSY  OF   ISLE   ROYALE.  29 

is  found  Dif^villa  diervilla.  Fire  WenA,  Primus  pcnmylvattica,  Mountain 
Maple,  Mountain  Aah,  Birch,  Mountain  Alder,  Willow,  Sarsaparilla, 
Wood  Equisetum,  Oak  and  I^adiee'  Fern.  Lai-ge-flowering  Raspberry, 
Comua  stolonifera  and  CUntonia  borealis. 

The  open  arid  character  of  much  of  this  station  is  reflected  in  the 
grasshopper  fauna,  as  follows :  Hibbieaig  tuierciiluttift,  Melanoplus 
alaskanus,  fasciatus  and  Circotcttix  v^ruciiUitua.  The  butterfly,  Basil- 
archia  arthemia  was  also  taken  here.  The  rare  dragonfly,  Ophiogomphva 
eolumbrinus  was  also  taken  at  this  station,  probably  because  of  the 
proximity  of  the  rapid  flowing  outlet,  which  forms  a  trout  stream. 

Station  V.  Siitstation  JO.  Long  Island  Gull  Rooko-y  and  Mctutgerie 
Talaml.  This  station  was  examined  solely  for  its  bird  life,  which  will 
be  discussed  elsewhere  in  this  report.  This  large  Gull  rookery  is  on  Long 
Island,  Fig.  ^5,  which  lies  about  one  mile  west  of  Menagerie  Island 
where  Isle  Royale  Liglit  is  located.  This  bird  clearly  breeds  upon  the 
middle  and  upper  baches.  Long  Island  is  formed  by  the  upturned 
edges  of  red  sandstone  and  is  exposed  to  the  full  sweep  of  the  lake 
waves,  as  is  dearly  evidenced  by  the  bniv  rocks.  The  vegetation  on  the 
island  was  not  examined,  as  the  time  thiit  could  he  devoted  to  the  exam- 
ination of  the  rookery  was  limited.  But  mention  should  be  made  of  the 
abundance  of  algae  in  the  lake  bordering  the  rookery,  and  of  their 
abundance  in  the  rock  pools  on  the  beach. 

Station  V,  Subitfation  11.  TamaracU-Spntcc  Stcamp.  This  station 
includes  a  waterlily  pond  surrounded  by  zones  of  sedge,  heath  shrubs, 
Tamarack  and  Black  Spruce.  A  general  view  of  the  pond  is  shown  in 
Pig.  ^0'.  It  was  located  nlmost  due  wej^t  of  the  western  end  of  Station 
V,  2,  and  only  a  short  distance  northwest  of  the  boat  landing. 

In  the  pond,  submerged,  was  Utricularia.  Yellow  Waterlily. 
Potamogeton.  and  Broaema  (Water  Shield) ;  practically  all  the  open 
water  was  occnpied  by  the  Yellow  Water  Lily.  At  tlie  edge  of  the 
water  grow  the  sedges,  Fig.  Ift,  which  fonu  a  distinct  zone,  and  the 
Backbean.  The  sedge  zone  also  includes  the  Egiiisctvm.  Purple  Cinijue- 
foil.  Comaruiii  pahtftre,  a  willow.  Miipirinnn.  Water  Hemlock  (Cictita 
bulbifei-a),  and  the  White  Bog  Orchid,  Beyond  the  sedge  zone  comes 
Sphagnum,  AiidrOmeda  polifolia,  Cassiindra,  patches  of  Labrador  Tea. 
Oxycoccits  oxyvoceus  (Small  Cranberry,  abundant),  Alder,  Chiogcne^ 
iiispidula  {Creeping  Snowberry),  Bunch  Berry  or  Dwarf  Gomel  iComus 
canadensis),  Kalmut  glauoa.  Pitcher  Plants,  Drosera  intermedia.  The 
trees  do  not  extend  to  the  inner  limit  of  the  Cassandra  zone.  Cladonia 
grew  upon  dry  hummocks  in  this  zone.  In  a  few  places,  in  depressions  in 
the  tree  zone,  Eriophornm  was  found.  The  trees  are  Tamarack.  Black 
Spruce,  and  small  Arbor  Vitae.  The  general  appearance  of  the  Cassan- 
dra and  tree  zones  are  shown  in  Fig.  .'18. 

The  invertebrate  fauna  of  this  station  was  abnndant  and  varied,  but 
the  vertebrates  were  more  limited.  In  the  Water  Lily  and  Pota- 
mogeton zone  the  Stickleback,  Fucalia  inconatans,  was  taken,  and  at 
the  sedge  margin,  Rawi  clamitann.  Water  bugs  arc  represented  by  licl- 
ostoma  and  Corixa  nymphs,  and  on  the  surface  bv  the  Water  Stridcr, 
Qerris  rvfosciftrthtits.     A  small  shell,  Phyaa  aplcvtoidca.  was  found  in 


D,3-ZBcbyCOO<^Ie 


30  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

Biuall  foot-print  like  pools  in  the  outer  pai-t  of  tbe  -Btickbean  and  sedge 
zone.  In  the  (.Jassandi-a  zone  wei-e  taken  the  dragontlies  Enallagma  ha- 
geni,  Aeachna,  Leucorhinia  proxima,  the  grasshopper  llelanoplua  alas- 
kanus,  and  the  butterfly  Pyramaia  cardtii.  From  this  Im^  were  also  taken 
the  Arachnids,  Laciniua  ohiocngc,  Draaatia  ncglectua  and  Pardoaa  gla- 
cialis.^ 

The  stations  at  Washington  Harbor  were  not  examined  in  1905  in  as 
mnch  detail  as  were  other  localities,  and  the  descriptions  will  therefore 
be  correspondingly  brief,  and  will  be  supplementary  to  a  similar  account 
by  Ruthven,  '06.  pp.  48-52. 

Station  7,  '0^,  Cleoring  at  the  Head  of  WaaMngtoii  Harbor.  This 
clearing  is  the  property  owned  bj  the  Washington  Club  of  Duluth.  Minn. 
Mnch  of  it  is  sodded,  pastured  and  under  some  form  of  cultivation. 
These  conditions  were  particularly  favorable  for  gi-asshoppers,  which 
occur  in  great  numbers.  The  following  species  were  taken:  Stcnobo- 
thrua  curtipennia,  Chloealtia  abdominalia,  C.  conaperaa,  Mecoatethus 
Uneatiis,  CatiinuJa  pelliicidxi,  and  Melanopiua  alaakanus.  This  area  ap- 
peared to  be  a  favorable  resort  for  migrating  birdR,  as  shown  in  the  ac- 
companying report  by  Peet. 

Station  fl.  'Q-'f.  Waahington  Creek.  This  is  the  small  titiut  streaiu 
which  flows  into  the  head  of  Washington  Harbor. 

Station  III.  '0.j.  Trail  aUyng  the  Top  of  (fte  Orcriistone  Range,  the 
"Desor  Ti-aiV  This  trail  follows  the  road  which  has  been  opened  from 
the  Club  House  (I,  '04)  to  Lake  Desor  (VII,  '04).  At  the  western  end 
this  road  traverses  a  forest  which  varies  considerably  in  its  eom- 
position.  In  places  it  is  dense  and  apparently  oiiginnl.  bnt  at 
one  place  it  has  been  bnraed  and  replaced  by  an  abundant  growth  of 
Bircb.  The  original  forest  is  dense  and  composed  of  large  trees,  and 
the  proportion  of  hardwoods  is  surprising,  since  the  Balsam-Spruce 
forest  is  so  prevalent  elsewhere  upon  the  island.  The  hardwoods  are 
really  dominant.  The  forest  Fig.  -}.9,  is  composed  of  Yellow  HIitIi, 
Balsam,  Arbor  Vitae,  and  a  few  Hugar  Staples,  and  the  undergrowth  of 
Mountain  Maple  and  Ground  Hemlock.  Farther  out  on  the  trail,  toward 
I^ke  Desor,  the  Maple  becomes  dominant  and  forms  an  almost  pure 
stand,  so  dense  that  in  places  there  is  almost  no  undergi-owth,  and  tbe 
forest  appears  quite  open  with  a  scattered  ground  cover.  A  loose  thick 
layer  of  leaves  and  twigs  covers  the  forest  floor.  In  the  more  open 
places  the  ground  cover  is  composed  of  Large-flowering  Raspberry.  Wild 
Sarsaparilla,  CUntonia  ioreaiia,  Lycopodium,  mosses,  Ground  Cornel,  and 
the  shrubs.  Mountain  Ma]>le,  lieaked  Hazel,  Round-leaved  Cornel,  Moun- 
tain Ash  iiud  Red  Cheirv.  The  Yellow  Birch  is  a  large  ti-ee.  with 
a  diameter  of  about  -  feet;  White  Pine  is  very  rai-e,  but  the  ti-ees  are 
large,  even  about  3  feet  in  diaiueter;  Arbor  Vitae  reaches  about  2  feet. 
A  few  Large-toothed  Aspens,  Black  Oak  and  Black  Ash  were  seen,  the 
Aspens  about  20  inches  in  diameter  and  the  Maples  10  to  15  inches. 

Red  K(]nin-el8  were  seen  in  the  foiest,  the  body  of  a  Lynx  was  fonnd 
banging  on  a  tree  where  it  had  been  left  by  a  trapper,  and  several  Toads 
were  seen.  Invertebrate  life  was  abundant.  In  an  Arbor  Vitae  stump, 
galleries  of  an  ant^.  Caniimnotua  lierculeaiitis  lohymperi  (140  A),  were 


DyGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  31 

fouud  ID  both  the  Heaeoned  and  the  decayed  wood.  A  few  beetles  were 
takea  alon^  the  trail;  Quediua  ful(fideg,  Tachinu*  memnomiui  and 
Qeotrupea  blackburnii.  t^helle  were  abnuduDt:  Strobilopg  virgo,  Titrea 
hinneyana,  Eticonuhia  cherainua  itolj/ffyratm,  Zonitoidca  arborca,  Z.  exi- 
gua.  Pallifera  dorsali'*,  Pyramiduta  alternala  and  I'.  cronkJicitci 
anthonyi. 

Station  IV,  '04.  Waahingtoii  Brook,  Cf.  Huthven,  '06,  p.  50.  This 
atation  was  examined  on  the  elope  back  of  the  Club-houee.  It  is  a 
swamp  forest  along  the  boi*der  of  a  very  small  sti-ejuii.  Fig.  50.  Part  of 
the  forest  ie  being  cleared. 

Station  V,  '04.  Tamarack  Swamp.  This  swamp  was  not  Tieited  in 
1905.     Cf.  Ruthven,  M)0.  p.  50. 

Station  VI,  'O4.  North  Slope  of  Oreenstotie  Range.  Cf.  Buthven,  '06, 
p.  49. 

Station  VII,  '04.  Lake  Deaor.  Cf.  Ruthven,  '06,  p.  51.  A  few  addi- 
tional records  are:  The  dragonfly,  Ktiollagma  oxaulana,  the  water  Btrider, 
Oerris  remigis,  the  flah,  Coregonus  artedi.  At  the  end  of  the  trail  (III, 
'Oi)  at  Deaor,  tiie  beetle,  Melanotua  paradoxua,  and  the  spider  Dolomedva 
idoneus,  were  taken. 

Station  VIII,  'O4.  Wcatern  End  of  Siskowit  Bay,  The  large  clearing 
and  bnrned  area  at  the  head  of  Siakowit  Bay  marka  the  site  of  a  formei" 
town,  the  county  seat.  A  well-defined  graded  road  leada  from  near  the 
north  shore  of  the  Bay  westivard  and  north  to  au  old  mining  camj). 
This  road  is  being  invaded  in  places  by  Birches  and  Aepens.  This  exten- 
sive clearing  was  overgrown  with  many  introduced  plants  and  wae 
given  only  a  cursory  examination.  The  following  vertebratea  were  ob- 
served: Bharp-tailed  Grouse,  (of  which  several  were  seen),  the  Hare, 
Toad  and  Garter  Snake.  The  snails,  Polygyra  albolabris  and  Pyramidula 
altemata,  and  the  grasshopper  Stenobothrus  cwrtipcnnia  were  found 
here.  The  limits  of  this  station  were  changed  somewhat  fromthoae 
given  in  1904. 

Station  IX,  'O4.  Sottthiccatcrn  End  of  Minong  Trap  Range.  Cf.  Ruth- 
ven, '06,  p.  51-52,    Xo  additional  collections  were  made  here  in  1905. 

Station  X,  'O4.  Washington  Harbor.  Cf.  Ruthven,  ,'00,  p.  52.  No 
additional  collections  were  made  at  this  station  in  1905. 

III.      TUB    EVOLUTION-   OF   TUB   UR088    ENVIRONMENT. 

1.  Geological  SiicceaaiOH.  In  bis  i-eport  on  the  Porcupine  ^fountains. 
Batbven  ('06)  has  summarily  outlined  the  general  geological  history 
of  the  Lake  Superior  region.  It  is  only  necessary,  therefore,  for  our 
purpose,  to  repeat  some  of  this  history  and  to  entai-ge  ufton  thoao 
phases  peculiar  to  Isle  Royale.  The  structural  geology  of  Isle  Boyale 
has  been  studied  in  detail  by  Lane  ('98)  and  is  relatively  simple.  The 
different  rock  formations  are  in  narrow  strips  nearly  parallel  with  the 
long  axis  of  the  island,  while  the  dip  of  the  rocks  is  toward  "the  basin 
of  Lake  Superior.  The  rocks  north  of  Siskowit  Bay  consist  of  the  trun- 
cated beds  of  ancient  lava  flows,  interrupted  by  a  small  amount  of  inter- 
bedded  sedimentary  rocks.  Although  these  tilted  and  truncated  beds  are 


3y  Google 


32  MICHIGAN    aURVET.    1908. 

inclined  at  a  higli  angle,  this  vras  not  their  original  position ;  in  all 
probability  they  were  formed  in  a  nearly  horizontal  position  by  flsBure 
eruptions  under  the  sea,  because  the  lavas  are  interbedded  with  shales, 
sandstoneB  and  conglomerates.  In  thickness  these  lava  beds  vary 
from  a  few  inches  to  hundreds  of  feet.  The  narrow  beds  often  show 
upper  and  lower  surfaces  filled  with  small  cavities  (amygdules)  in 
contrast  with  the  denser  central  part.  These  cavities  were  formed  by 
gas  or  vapor  while  tlie  lava  was  hot,  and  leave  such  ai  rock  porouK 
and  less  resistant  to  disintegrating  agencies  and  to  erosion.  The  same 
principles  also  hold  for  the  thicker  beds  of  lava;  the  outer  parts  are 
more  porous  and  softer  than  the  central  part.  This  structural  difference 
is  clearly  shown  in  the  topography  of  the  island;  the  ridges  mark  the 
central  or  more  resistant  parts  of  the  truncated  lava  beds,  while  the 
valleys,  in  general,  hafe  been  worn  into  the  softer  outer  parts  of  the 
lava  and  into  the  interbedded  sedimentary  rocks.  These  beds  are  of 
Keweenawan  or  pre-Cambrian  age;  their  formation  ceased  with  an  ele- 
vation of  the  land  from  the  sea  and  their  destruction  was  begun  by 
the  agents  of  sobaerial  erosion.  These  processes  continued  until  the 
titled  strata  were  truncated  and  reduced  to  a  base  level.  Again  the 
region  was  depressed  and  upon  this  eroded  surface  were  deposited  un- 
conformably  those  red  sandntoues  and  congloniei-ates  which  now  char- 
acterize the  Siskowit  Bay  region  and  to  the  southward,  and  are  of 
Cambrian  age.  Once  more  the  region  was  elevated,  titled  and  subjected 
to  prolonged  erosion  and  the  strata  truncated  as  had  been  done  with 
the  Keweenawan.  Similar  processes  continued  until  the  marked  eleva- 
tion of  the  land,  which  took  place  at  the  close  of  the  Tertiary,  and 
which  initiated  the  repeated  glaciations  of  the  Ice  Age. 

With  the  extension  of  the  last  or  Wisconsin  ice  sheet  in  the  Superior 
basin,  Isle  Koyale  was  completely  overridden  by  the  movement  of  an 
ice  sheet  from  the  northeast  that  moved  almost  parallel  to  the  ridges, 
but  was  somewhat  more  inclined  from  the  east  (Lane  '98,  p.  183).  For 
this  reason  there  was  a  tendency  to  plane  down  the 'southeastern  slopes 
and  to  presence  the  steeper  ones  which  had  been  formed  on  the  north- 
western side  (Foster  &  Whitney,  '50,  \>.  202).  As  the  island  has  a 
topography  which  indicates  snbaerial  rather  than  marine  erosion,  it 
must  have  had  at  one  time  a  residiml  soil,  which,  unless  it  had  been 
swept  away  by  a  former  ice  invasion  or  the  waves  of  some  body  of  water, 
was  probably  removed  at  this  time  with  the  minor  inequalities  of  the 
surface.  In  this  manner  the  Superior  lobe  burled  the  island  under 
several  thousand  feet  of  ice  and  continued  its  movement  far  to  the 
southward,  leaving  a  glacial  desert  in  its  wake.  This  condition  of  affairs 
lasted  until  the  return  movement  broke  up  the  great  ice  sheet  into  lake 
basin  lobes  and  brought  the  receding  ice  front  into  the  Superior  basin. 
As  soon,  however,  as  this  lobe  wasted  away  from  the  margin  of  this 
basic,  the  water  from  the  melting  ice  accumulated  before  it  and  formed 
a  lake  which,  overflowing  the  rim,  found  its  way  through  the  St.  Croix 
valley  to  the  Misnissippi  river,  as  indicated  in  Fig.  ol.     But,  as  the  ice 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE. 


wall  continued  to  reti-eat  toward  the  northeast,  these  ponded  waters 
increased  in  area  and  formed  the  highest  beach  lines  now  preaerved  on 
the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior.  The  evidence  for  this  is  fonnd  on 
Mt.  Josephine,  located  on  this  shore  just  north  of  the  southwestern  end 
of  Isle  Royale,  which  reaches  an  elevation  of  about  800  feet  above  the 
Lake.  Far  up  em  its  slopes,  according  to  Lawson  ('93,  p.  253),  evidence 
of  beach  lines  are  fonnd,  about  which  he  says :  "These  two  terraces  at 
585  and  607  feet  are  remarkable  for  being  the  highest  strand  lines  which 


D  Ihe  Ice  sheet  and  theic  Mlu- 

have  thuB  far  been  observed  on  the  coast  of  Lake  Superior."  Under  such 
conditions  it  seems  that  Isle  Royale  would  undoubtedly  have  been  sub- 
Tnerped.  The  ice  retreat  continued  and  finally  Isle  Royale,  freed  from 
the  ice  and  in  part  from  the  lake  waters,  emerp^ed  as  a  narrow  rocky 
ridfi^e — the  crest  of  the  Oreenstone  Range  which  today  rises,  at  the 
northeastern  end  of  the  island,  to  a  maximum  elevation  of  about  550 
feet.  As  the  ice  wall  retreated  the  Michigan  and  Huron  basins  became 
confluent,  and  an  outlet  to  the  east  (Trent  valley,  Ontario)  nt  first, 
later  the  Port  Huron  and  possibly  the  Chicago  outlet  ((ioldthwait,  '09, 
p.  65)  became  available.  Fig.  53,  and  at  almut  this  time  the  (ilacial  (Jreat 


34 


MICHIQAN    SURVEY.    1908. 


Ltikea  became  iBolated  from  the  Missiesippi  drainage.  The  lake  level 
wna  lowered,  and  it  was  perhaps  at  this  level  that  the  beach  lines  were 
formed  on  the  north  side  of  I^ate  Superior,  which  are  now  400-500  feet 
above  the  present  lake  level  (Taylor,  '97,  p.  126)!  Similar  evidences  of 
ancient  beaches  have  been  recognized  by  Lane  ('98,  pp.  188-191)  upcm 
Isle  Eoyale,  but  he  is  inclined  to  place  the  level  of  this  Glacial  Laka 
Algonquin  at  about  485  feet.  It  is  probable  that  more  field 
work  will  be  necessary  before  adequate  correlations  of  these  beaches  can, 
be  made. 

Seine  general  idea  of  the  extent  of  the  island  at  this  stage  mai 
gained  by  reference  to  the  160  foot  contour  on  the  accompanying  mai>, 


Fig.  53.  At  this  time,  Fig.  5Z.  the  ice  sheets  had  retreated  far  enough 
the  northeast  that  the  climate  of  the  Superior  basin  must  have  be«i  t 
greatly  ameliorated  that  animal  life  could  have  lived  in  its  water.  Thit 
infei-ence  seems  probable  because  fossil  shells  have  been  found  in  the  beacl^ 
line's  of  the  same  lake  farther  to  the  south  by  Lane  and  Walker  (Laiw-° 
'00.  pp.  248-252) ,  and  at  Port  Huron,  Michigan  by  the  writer  in  conipauft 
with  Dr.  J.  W.  Goldthwait  and  Dr.  A.  G.  Huth'ven  (Goldthwait,  '07,  i  ' 
118).  Here  wei-e  found  an  abundaJice  of  Qomohasis  Uvcscens,  octtf 
sional  valves  of  tipluierinm  xti-iathnum  Lam.  and  Unionid  fragments 
fauna  like  that  of  the  present  beaches.  It  is  therefore  not  improbahlig 
that  this  fauna  invaded  the  Great  Lakes  drainage  from  the  MississipiU 
during  the  early  stages  of  the  great  glacial  lakes,  when  they  still  ove^ 
flowed  into  the  Mississippi  drainage.  ^ 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE. 

.  invaaioD  and  the  Boura 


i.^oAS.-ij^-' ■  i.--^^ 


4''- 


-Sife. 


m^^ 


34 

Luk. 
waa 
forr 
abo" 
one 
l8U 
Alg 
vox 
be 

e 

gai 


MICHIGAN    aURVEY, 
.ted  from  the  UiBeiBBippi  draitM 


II 


EcoLoay  OF  isle  royale.  as 

The  time  of  invasion  and  the  sources  of  the  Glacial  and  post-Glacial 
sapply  of  life  which  invaded  the  northern  land  and  waters  presentB 
several  interesting  problems.  At  this  point  the  origin  of  the  aquatic 
biota  la  of  special  interest.  From  what  is  known  of  the  fresh-water 
ac|uatic  biota  of  the  far  north,  it  is  very  probable  that  the  Glacial  Great 
Lakes,  at  least  in  their  later  stages,  were  not  utterly  devoid  of  animal 
life.  So  it  seems  reasonable,  to  infer  that  such  forms  as  lived  daring 
Glacial  times  near  the  ice  margin  were  among  the  first  to  succeed  the 
retreating  ice  sheet. 

As  the  lake  fauna  is  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  the 
life  of  northeastern  North  America,  the  question  naturally  arises  as  to 
where  this  fauna  was  preserved  during  the  Ice  Age.  Today  there  is 
no  extensive  development  of  lake  fauna  south  of  the  glaciated  region. 
Where  then  was  such  a  fauna  preserved?  On  the  west  were  the  arid 
plains,  and  to  the  south  au  old  land  area  of  mature  drainage  aud  very 
few  lakes.  Such  relations  as  these  suggest  that  this  fauna  must  have 
occupied  the  lakes  formed  on  the  rejuvenated  glacial  topography  or 
in  the  adjacent  streams.  Had  there  been  extensive  lake  areas  to  the  south 
to  act  as  regions  of  preservation,  it  seems  probable  that  the  present  fauna 
of  the  Great  Lakes  would  have  been  much  richer.  Undoubtedly 
the  most  important  fresh-water  preserve  was  the  Mississippi  system, 
on  account  of  its  direct  communication  with  the  glacial  drainage,  thus 
allowing  a  southward  escape  into  more  favorable  climatic  conditions. 
This  was  also  a  water  communication  of  considerable  duration,  lasting 
even  into  early  post-Glacial  times,  and  one  which  has  greatly  influenced 
the  origin  of  the  present  fauna  of  the  Great  Lakes.  In  all  probability  ■ 
it  was  this  Glacial  and  post-Glacial  water  connection  and  barrier 
that  retarded  the  northern  extension  of  so  many  land  species,  and  at  the 
same  time  favored  the  extension  of  certain  aquatic  animals.  The  later  de- 
velopment of  the  eastern  outlets  did  not  open  up  snch  a  favorable 
source  of  supply  as  occurred  farther  west. 

So  much  for  this  phase  of  the  problem.  Now  let  us  continue  with 
the  history  of  the  Superior  basin  since  Algonquin  times.  The  fall  in 
the  lake  level  did  not  take  place  suddenly,  since  a  series  of  bench 
lines  are  preserved  which  show  that  it  halted  for  some  time  at  different 
levels,  but  none  were  of  any  remarkable  duration  until  it  reached  a 
level  marked  by  a  very  extensive  aeries  of  beach  lines  now  preserved 
at  about  60  feet  above  the  level  of  r>ake  Superior.  This  well  defined 
beach  represents  the  shore  of  the  Nipissing  Gi-ent  T^akes,  poat-CJIacial 
lakes  whose  general  outline  was  much  like  that  of  the  present  lakes 
in  the  same  l>asins,  as  is  indicated  in  Fitj.  '>.i.  The  low  outlet  of  this 
Jake  was  to  the  east  through  the  Ottawa,  valley  into  the  Champlain 
Sea,  and  is  of  special  interest  in  that  it  is  suggestive  of  how  certain 
Great  Lake  animals  of  marine  affinities  (Mi/six,  Pontoponna,  Trifflopsis) 
might  have  invaded  the  upper  lakes  in  post-Glacial  times.  At  one 
time  it  was  thought  that  there  had  been  a  Glacial  salt  water  com- 
niuuication  between  Ijike  Superior  and  the  Hudson  Bay  region,  but 
this  view  has  been  abi)ndoned  (cf.  Taylor,  '97,  pp.  127-12S;  *!)G,  pp.  '2'i'>- 
256.  and  Coleman,  '06.  pp.  li):!.  IDS-lilil).  It  is  definitely  known  that 
the  land  was  depressed  to  the  north  of  Lake  Superior,  but  this  period 
of  depression  was  at  a   time  when   it  was  covered   by  the  ice  shMh. 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 


"^ 


Dis  !,=  i„Cooglc 


ECOLOGY  OP  18LE  ROYALE.  37 

and  thus  the  salt  water  was  excluded.  An  altei'native  hypothesis  is 
that  these  animals  are  adapted  to  a  constant  and  low  temperature 
rather  than  to  fresh  or  salt  water,  and  that  during  Glacial  times  they 
were  dispersed  far  to  the  south  in  fresh  water  and  have  only  been 
preserved  in  restricted  favorable  localities.  The  low  temperature  of 
Glacial"  times  would  be  a  period  especially  favorable  for  the  acclimatiza- 
tion of  marine  forms  to  fresh  water  on  arfount  of  the  favorable  con- 
ditions which  accompany  the  slow  rate  of  changes  at  low  temperatures. 

The  long  duration  of  the  Jfipissing  (Sreat  Lakes  is  well  attested  by 
the  character  of  the  beach.  As  Taylor  ('90,  p.  398)  remarks:  "It  is 
altogether  the  most  remarkable  littoral  feature  of  the  Great  Lake 
region.     It  is  a  shore  line  well  advanced  towards  old  age.     All  other 

beaches  of  the  lakes  are  youthful  in  comparison  Instead 

of  the  slender  spits  and  barrier  bars  of  the  Algonquin  and  other  beaches, 
the  Xipissing  beach  has  what  may  be  called  barrier  plains,  made  up 
of  many,  sometimes  forty  or  fifty,  massive  beach  ridges  laid  one  against 
the  other.  Many  bays  were  entirely  filled  by  these  beach  plains  and 
others  were  cut  off,  so  as  to  form  small  littoral  lakes.  Some  of  these 
plains  are  a  mile  to  a  mile  and  a  half  wide.  In  some  instances  the  old 
deltas  of  other  beaches  are  large  and  conspicuous,  but  the  constmctive 
products  of  wave  action  have  no  comparison  to  those  of  the  Nipissing 
beach."  From  a  biological  standpoint  these  facts  are  of  special  signifi- 
cance. The  maturity  of  the  beach  line  is  a  condition  decidedly  favor- 
able to  the  development  of  a  littoral  biota.  The  sandy  shore,  spits, 
bars,  beach  pools,  cut-off  ponds  and  lakes  furnish  a  variety  of  favorable 
habitats  in  marked  contrast  with  the  poverty  stricken  character  of 
life  frequenting  an  exposed  and  topographically  youthful  lake  shon*. 
Such  an  old  beach  is  both  qualitatively  and  quantitatively  favorable 
to  the  biota,  and  not  only  favors  an  abundant  supply  but  also  its  dis- 
persion along  shore  and  by  currents  throughout  such  a  body  of  water. 
The  long  daration  of  such  conditions  is  of  evident  advantage  to  an 
extensive  dispersal  of  such  life. 

As  the  basin  of  the  Nipissing  Great  Lakes  In  the  Superior  basin  was 
so  much  like  that  of  Lake  Superior,  it  is  not  improbable  that  the  lake 
currents  were  much  the  same  in  both  lakes,  so  that  our  knowledge  of 
the  present  lake  currents  should  aid  in  the  interpretation  of  those  of 
the  Nipissing  Great  Lakes.  Such  relations  as  these  suggest  that  at  the 
Nipissing  stage,  and  perhaps  even  earlier,  the  lake-  currents  tended  to 
people  Isle  Boyale  with  north  shore  drift.  By  this  time  the  island 
was  quite  large,  though  smaller  than  the  present  island  by  the  subtraction 
of  the  area  below  the  60-foot  contour.  At  this  time  the  climate  of  the 
region  must  have  become  greatly  ameliorated  so  that  the  north  shore 
of  Lake  Superior  was  perhaps  repopulated  from  the  south,  largely 
around  the  western  end  of  the  lake.  With  the  advent  of  an  abundance 
and  diversity  of  plant  and  animal  life,  a  new  element  enters  the  environ- 
ment, whose  influence  is  far  reaching.  The  vegetation  tends  to  blanket 
the  surface  with  a  humus  layer  and  thus  to  bind  the  soil  so  that  it 
retards  erosion  and  becomes  a  geological  agent.  The  influence  of 
animal  life  is  also  far  reaching  and  may  be  couspieuous  if  beavers  are 
abundant.     But  these  influences  will  only  be  mentioned  here. 

The  development  of  the  Nipissing  beach   upon  Isle  Boyale  hac 


"".^R?' 


38  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

been  eo  clearly  recognized  as  elsewhere.  Thus  Lane  ('98,  p.  187)  con- 
Biders  the  present  beach  as  the  most  distinct  of  any  found  npon  the 
island.  In  a  way  this  is  not  surprisinG;  when  we  recall  the  fact  that 
at  former  lake  levels  the  small  area  of  the  island  did  not  permit  of 
an  extensive  stream  development,  hence  the  limited  quantities  of  sand, 
gravel  and  bonldera.  Thus  the  overriding  of  the  ice,  the  isolation  of 
the  island  in  deep  water,  and  the  steep  shores  of  resistent  rocks  are 
<'onditions  unfavorable  for  supplying  tools  with  which  the  waves  could 
work.  All  of  these  conditions  would  tend  to  preserve  the  youthful 
topographic  features  and  exaggerate  the  apparent  relative  rate  at  which 
the  island  emerged  from  the  waves  and  the  small  time  during  which 
the  waves  beat  at  any  particular  level.  The  materials  available  to  the 
present  waves  have  therefore  been  cumulative.  Lane  ('98,  pp.  188-189) 
has  recognized  several  evidences  of  a  fiO  foot  level. 

After  the  formation  of  the  Nipissing  beach  there  was  an  uplift  towartl 
the  north,  as  shown  by  Taylor's  ('97,  p.  127)  study  of  this  beach  on 
the  Canadian  shore  north  of  Isle  RoyaJe.  In  the  vicinity  of  Port  Arthur 
this  beach  is  at  60  feet;  at  Nipigon  !)0  feet,  and  110  to  115  at  Peninsula 
Harbor,  Such  an  assumed  variation  or  tilting  near  Isle  Royale  sug- 
gests the  necessity  of  great  caution  in  attempting  to  correlate  thR 
various  beaches  and  emphasizes  the  desirability  of  further  field  work 
upon  this  subject.  Lane  ('98,  p.  192)  suggests  that  this  northward  tilt- 
ing has  tended  to  pond  the  northeastward  flowing  streams  and  to  drain 
the  ones  flowing  in  the  opposite  direction.  Such  tilting  as  this  would 
have  considerable  influence  upon  the  biota.  Even  in  an  uplift  of  a  few 
feet  per  mile,  in  the  case  of  Isle  Royale  45  miles  long,  would  be  sufficient 
to  have  a  marked  influence  upon  the  swamp  environment,  which  is  one 
of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  the  island.  In  this  manner  ii 
swamp  and  its  biota  might  migrate  several  miles,  become  a  pond  or 
'ake  or  even  become  drained,  and  other  fates  are  suggested  for  ponds, 
lakes  and  other  environments  when  such  a  distinct  trend  or  dynamic 
tendency  is  present  in  a  given  region. 

The  change  from  the  Nipissing  to  the  present  lake  level  was  not  ii 
sudden  one,  as  Lane  ('98,  p.  191)  has  recognized  beaches  at  various 
levels  showing  its  gradual  character:  the  30  and  15  foot  levels  are, 
however,  the  most  distinct.  A  few  observations  were  made  ui)on  two 
of  these  abandoned  beaches,  but  their  height  was  not  determined.  One 
was  located  just  south  of  the  mouth  of  Conglomerate  Bay  in  a  small 
cove  about  CO  or  70  feet  wide.  There  was  an  abundance  of  fresh  drift 
wood  a  few  feet  from  the  edge  of  the  water,  back  of  this  a  zone  of 
weathered  and  decayed  drift,  and  beyond  this  a  high  boulder  beach 
containing  disintegrated  boulders  with  foliaceous  lichens,  while  back  of 
the  lichen  zone  came  ^^'ild  <:horry,  I'aper  Birch,  Bear-berry,  Wild  Rose, 
Jack  Pine,  Alders  and  Columbine.  The  back  sloj)e  then  declined  into 
a  Jack  Pine  growth.  This  beach  is  interestiug  because  it  illustrates 
the  various  stages  from  wave-waslied,  clean  sand  and  gravel  back  into 
the  forest  growth.  Lane  ("98,  p.  185)  refers  to  a  lichen  covered  beach 
on  Sec.  10,  T.  (i5,  R.  :!4.  The  secniid  of  the  benches  mentioned  is  located  on 
the  south  shoi-e  near  the  eastern  end  of  Siskowit  Bay  (Sec.  26,  T.  G5  >'., 
E.  35  W.).  The  present  beach  is  locally  known  as  the  "Greenstone 
beach"  and  forms  a  good  boat  landing. 

i.,C0CH^Ic 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLB  ROTALB.  39 

2.  The  Topography  and  its  Origin.  The  raoat  oonBpicuous  and  char- 
acteristic topographic  features  of  the  island  are  its  parallel  flat-topped 
rock  ridgea  with  the  intervening  valleya  and  numerous  enampfi.  These 
ridges  project  far  out  from  the  main  body  of  the  island  and  form  the 
narrow  rock  ridges  bounding  the  harbors,  and  forming  a  vast  number 
of  small  islands  and  low  rocky  reefs.  The  tilting,  faulting  and  trunca*- 
tion  of  these  narrow  beds  clearly  shows  that  the  dependence  of  the 
topography  upon  rock  structure  is  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features 
of  the  island. 

The  main  ridge,  the  Greenstone  Range,  is  a  divide  which  extends  the 
entire  length  of  the  island,  and  is  from  about  400  to  500  feet  high, 
with  a  maximum  height  of  about  550  feet  at  the  northeastern  end  of 
the  island.  At  only  one  place  does  a  drainage  line  cross  the  Green- 
stone. This  is  a  small  stream  heading  in  Sec.  17,  T.  64  N.,  B.  37  \V. 
and  a  tributary  to  Washington  Eiver.  This  ridge  is  a  truncated  lava 
bed  whose  outer  softer  part  has  been  eroded,  thus  throwing  into  promi- 
nence the  compact  resistant  central  core.  Thus  erosion,  faulting  and 
the  dip  of  the  rocks  have  combined  to  produce  a  northwestward  facing 
escarpment  nearly  throughout  its  extent.  The  fairly  Sat  topped 
truncated  ridges  of  the  island  clearly  show  that  their  origin  must  be 
due  to  a  period  of  baseleveling  and  is  no  doubt  related  to  those  exten- 
sive processes  which  have  produced  the  Laurentian  peneplain  (cf. 
Bnthven,  '06,  p.  45)  of  the  Superior  region.  The  ridge  of  second  im- 
portance is  the  Minong  Trap  Range,  which  lies  parallel  with  the  Green- 
stone, about  a  mile  to  the  northwest,  and  reaches  n  height  of  about  400 
feet.  Between  these  ranges  lies  a  valley  containing  five  fairly  large 
lakes,  all  of  which  drain  across  this  range  to  the  northward,  and  tbc 
probable  faults  indicated  by  Lane  ('98,  pl.'l)  at  Todd  Harbor  and 
McCargoe  Cove  are  su^estive  as  to  how  the  ridge  has  been  broken 
through.  Faults  seem  to  have  influenced  the  location  of  several  lakes, 
such  as  Angleworm,  Lesage,  Livermore,  Chickenbone,  Feldtmann  and 
also  the  outlet  of  I^ke  Hichie  into  Chippewa  Harbor.  In  addition  to 
these  main  ranges  there  are  great  numbers  of  lower  ones  whose  heights 
range  from  100  to  about  300  feet.  East  of  Lake  Feldtmann  there  is  a 
bold  escarpment  130  feet  high,  which  was  said  by  Mclntyre  (Foster, 
'50,  p.  506)  to  afford  the  "finest  view  that  I  have  seen  on  the  island." 

The  drainage  of  the  island  presents  some  interesting  features.  At 
each  end  of  the  island  the  drainage  is  mainly  along  the  valleys  into 
the  harbors  at  their  ends.  Between  these  two  extremes,  roughly  marked 
by  the  area  between  lakes  Desor  and  Sargent,  the  drainage,  although  it 
may  follow  the  vallej's  for  some  distance,  is  yet  to  a  marked  degree 
across  the  strata  or  ridges.  Taken  as  a  whole  the  drainage  is  very 
imperfectly  developed.  Although  the  island  is  not  extensive,  it  con- 
talus  numerous  small  independent  streams  which  drain  into  the  lakes 
or  directly  into  Lake  Superior,  but  it  has  no  master  stream.  It  seems 
probable  that  this  is  also  related  to  faulting,  as  also  in  the  case  of 
the  stream,  which  may  be  called  Malone  Creek,  that  flows  into  the  head 
of  Si^owit  Bay.  The  probable  influence  of  faulting  upon  the  location 
of  lakes  has  previously  been  mentioned,  and  combined  with  its  influence 
upon  streams  reinforces  the  idea  of  the  dominance  of  structure  ujion 
the  topography  and  consequently  upon  the  drainage.     But  when  in  the 


40  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

field  the  tno^t  conapicuous  features  of  this  imperfect  drainage  are  the 
vast  strips  of  swamp  land  found  in  the  valleys  and  bordering  the  lakes 
and  streams.  The  rock  bound  character  of  the  banins  and  the  south- 
ward tilting  of  the  surface  must  greatly  influence  the  form  and  extent 
of  these  strips.  The  stream  channels  have  not  cut  deeply  but  are  lai^ely 
bordered  by  swamps,  and  tbe  'divides  between  many  of  them  are  very 
low  or  inar  even  be  swamps,  so  that  the  drainage  from  either  end  of 
a  swamp  niay  be  into  a  different  drainage  line.  Such  imperfection  of 
the  drainage  means  that  evaporation  rather  than  mn  off  is  the  pro- 
nounced feature,  and  this  condition,  combined  with  the  insular  loca- 
tion, must  greatly  influence  the  relative  hnmidity  of  the  atmosphere. 
The  brownish  waters  of  even  the  largest  lake  upon  the  island,  Siskowit, 
54  feet  above  Lake  Superior,  clearly  shows  the  influence  of  the  imper- 
fect drainage  and  the  extensive  swamps  of  its  drainage  basin. 

The  general  character  of  the  soil  was  indicated  by  Ives  on  the  Linear 
Survey  map.  This  is  as  a  rule  shallow,  the  deeper  being  at  the  south- 
western end  (T.  64  N.,  El  38  W.)  and  is  characterized  ae  "sandy  loam 
and  stony,  second  rate  sufficiently  deep  for  cultivation."  At  the  head 
of  Siakowit  Bay  (T.  63  N.,  R.  37  W.)  he  records  soil  "stony,  2nd  and 
3rd  rate  land.  Soil  varies  from  a  few  inches  to  3  or  4  feet  in  depth," 
And  near  McCargoe  Cove  (T.  66  N.,  B.  35  W.)  the  soil  is  from  1  to  10 
feet  deep.  The  soil  then  in  general  may  be  said  to  be  shallow,  second 
and  third  rate  stony,  sandy  loam.  In  the  swamps  and  valleys  there 
is  a  large  amount  of  vef^table  debris,  although  it  is  prolrable  that  this 
is  generally  not  deep.  S'o  bog  lime  or  marl  has  been  observed.  Lai^e 
strips  of  the  ridges  are  destitute  of  soil,  especially  those  which  have 
been  bamed.  No  morainic  materials  were  recognized,  although  the  ice 
overrode  the  island,  and  glacial  boulders  are  abundant  in  places,  as 
about  the  head  of  Washington  Harbor.  Dr.  Lane  writes  me  that  there 
is  some  till,  "especially  on  the  lee  end  near  Washingtoa  Harbor." 

The  origin  of  these  soils  appears  to  be  relatively  clear  as  there 
are  only  a  few  possibilities  available.  Some  of  the  pre-Glacial  residual 
soil  may  have  been  preserved  but  it  has  not  been  recognized.  As  above 
mentioned  there  are  some  Qlacial  boulders  and  till.  The  post-Glacial 
disintegration  and  decay  of  the  rocks  has  been  the  most  important 
source,  supplemented  by  organic  remains,  from  the  vegetation  in  par- 
ticular. A  fourth  source  is  the  lake  deposits  of  sand  and  clay  as  the 
waves  have  worked  over  the  entire  surface.  These  are  best  preserved 
in  what  were  once  harbors  or  places  protected  from  the  waves.  In 
many  localities  the  origin  of  the  soil  is  diverse,  several  different  pro- 
cesses having  contributed  a  part. 

From  the  above  topographic  relations  it  is  seen  that  the  flat-topped 
ridges  and  depressions  are  due  to  the  strncture  of  the  rock,  the  influence 
of  base  leveling  processes  and  probably  also  to  faulting.  The  present 
drainage  is  not  sufficient  to  explain  the  primary  ridges  and  valleys; 
these  must  therefore  have  been  inherited  from  past  conditions.  The 
present  drainage  is  therefore  consequent  and  in  its  infancy,  hence 
its  im]>erfection.  From  a  biological  standpoint  these  facts  are  signifi- 
cant because  such  conditions  favor  isolation  of  small  streams,  swamp 
and  lake  habitats  affect  the  relative  humidity  and  produce  a  prominent 
zonal  and  linear  arrangement  of  the  habitats    along  the  ridges  and 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE. 


valleys.  The  absence,  residual,  or  organic  character  of  tlie  soil  is  also 
an  important  factor  of  the  environment. 

3.  The  Atnwspkeric  Influences  an4  their  Evolution,  a.  Climate. 
Unfortunately  there  has  been  no  continuous  series  of  eliniatological 
records  made  on  Isle  Royale.  A  few  records  were  made  by  our  party  with 
instruments  loaned  by  Mr.  C.  F.  Schneider  of  the  Michigan  Weather 
Service,  that,  while  very  imperfect,  are  su^estive.  The  mean  tempera- 
ture for  26  (lays  in  July  is  58°  F.,  the  minimum  record  is  46",  and 
the  maximum  79°.  From  August  2  to  17  the  mean  is  59°;  the  mean 
maximum  is  71°  and  the  mean  minimum  is  47°.  For  the  same  period 
the  maximum  is  80°  and  the  minimum  30°.  There  was  but  little  rain 
although  it  rained  all  day  on  July  15. 

Very  fortunately,  however,  these  meager  records  may  be  ■  supple- 
mented by  those  from  Port  Arthur,  about  25  miles  distant  on  the 
Canadian  shore.'  This  data  has  been  kindly  furnished  by  Mr.  B.  C. 
Webber  of  the  Canadian  Meteorological  Service.  The  records  cover  the 
decade  of  1896  to  1905,  and  show  the  mean  monthly  and  annual  tem- 
peratures, maximum  and  minimum  temperatures,  and  the  precipitation 
for  the  same  period. 

The  table  of  temperature.  Table  1,  shows  that  the  decade  average  of 
the  mean  monthly  temperatures  for  February  is  7.65°  P.,  with  a  maxi- 
mum during  July  of  62.24°  and  an  average  annual  of  36.07°,  The 
monthly  averages  of  the  maximum  temperatures  for  January  is  38.1° 
and  for  July  85.8°,  with  an  average  annual  of  36.7°.  The  lowest 
average  monthly  temperature  for  the  same  period  is — 27.5°  for  January, 
and  for  July  42.0°.  The  average  minimum  temperature  for  this  ten 
years  is — 30.8°.     Hie  monthly  averages  for  5  months  are  below  zero. 


TABLE    NO.    1— MEAN.    M0NTH1.Y    AND    ANNUAL    TKMPERATrREa    AND    AVERAGES 

FOE  ID  YEARS.     FORT  ARTHUR,  1896-1905. 

Mean  Temperaturei  In  °F. 


V-,. 

,.. 

iWi. 

.„. 

April 

Iby. 

Jm.,. 

July. 

A* 

S^ 

Oct 

Not. 

Dk. 

i£ 

ii 

ill 

l'.S 

16  ;b 

35 .9 

II 

r, 

4T.9 

Si 

40.2 
46,7 

45.8 

si 

Si 

ai 

|; 
61 : 

in 

HI 
30:2 

S4:6 

38.S 

«:3 
40:3 

19.7 
307 

26:o 

IS.O 
14:3 

n.7 

,1 

ISTO 

M.0 

Si  S;! 

TBlgl 

7.» 

7,66 

19  .S4 

36.19 

- 

65  82 

».« 

«,1. 

W.S 

42.58 

n.iB 

13,11 

e.E.S(khif»(MaHi)... 

Ml 

>.., 

30.8 

46.9 

„., 

67.1 

„.. 

69.1 

63.6 

»,6 

36.5 

27.0 

p.t 

'  For  B  general  eccounl  o[  the  Cumidtan  cUinate  see  Stupait  '08  and  '05, 


jiGoogle 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 


Highest  Tempenitur 


Y»r. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mir. 

.\pra. 

May. 

JUM. 

My. 

A* 

Sn>t. 

'ott. 

\».. 

Dh. 

A>>D.[ 

3».0 
42.0 

3s:o 

teo 

47.0 

42:0 
MO 

38.0 
S3:o 

47  0 

310 

44.0 
4B0 

41:0 

G»0 

si 

87.0 
8».0 

is 

3B.0 

is 

77.0 

Is 

Bs:a 

80,0 
81.0 

8410 

8fi.a 
86  :a 
in.o 

11 

81  :a 

8J.0 

M.O 
80.0 

is 

77.0 

11 

S2.D 

il 

M.O 

08.0 

TOO 
83:0 

47:0 
81.0 
00.0 

ISO 

69:0 

40  :o 

37,0 
34:0 

r, 

ffi:::::;:::::::::;:::; 

86.0 
WO 

IS;::::.:::. :::.;;:;;;■ 

84,0 

A.  r 

is.i 

33.8 

4S,- 

eg.e 

™,, 

82,, 

»,. 

82.3 

„,, 

.,.. 

.., 

... 

n  'F 

Year-                 1  J.n.  1  F.b. 

UDr. 

April. 

May. 

Jun*.  i  July. 

Aug. 

Sepl. 

Ort,  1  .Nor. 

I^-'t^^ 

-18.0 
-IS.O 

-17:0 
-2fl,0 

-10  :o 

8.0 
8:0 
16.0 

10,0 

31.0 

26.0 

27  :o 

2t.O 
29.0 

24:0 

38,0 

■s.o 

33,0 
3S.0 

41.0 

43:0 

42.0 

40,0 
40,0 
42.0 

34,0 

40  0 
41.0 

40.0 

3B,a 

I:! 

230 
2S0 

11 

,..'..» 

|i 

-2s:o 
-20:0 

-28.0 

li 

ijg...  ..  , , .  ... 

-IS.D  -2S.a 

:l!:8  31 

200 

20  :o 

-6,0 
-8.0 

I8SB 

-30.0 

-34:0 
-21,0 

:g;! 

-26,0 
-24.0 

"^■|f 

-34.0 

-W.J 

-28.4 

-14.S 

1  ?«« 

34,S 

„. 

„,. 

». 

... 

-8.8 

... 

-30.8 

The  precipitation  during  the  same  period  is  shown  in  Table  2.  The 
minimum  average  monthly  i-ninfall  for  the  period  is  .002  inches  for 
February,  wilh  a  maximum  of  4.25  inches  in  July,  and  an  annual 
total  of  21.7S  inches,  more  tlian  half  of  which  fell  during  the  growing 
season  for  the  vegetation — June,  July  and  August.  The  snowfall 
averaged  a  maximum  for  January  with  4.59  inches  and  an  annual  total 
of  25.44  inches.  The  deep  snows  of  this  region  are  thus  seen  not  to 
be  due  so  much  to  the  abundant  precipitation  as  to  its  pi-eservation  by 
the  low  temperature. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROT  ALE. 
TABLE  NO.  Z.— PORT  ARTHUR,  ISM-IMie. 


Y«w. 

,„. 

F*. 

... 

A(«iL 

■>>. 

Juu. 

July. 

Auf. 

Btpt. 

Oct.  1  Kov, 

n*. 

ToUL 

O.ST 

!:1S 

o.m 

0.00 

O.DO 
0.00 

8:S 

si 

o.oo 
o.oo 

Id. 

o'oo 

0.93 
0.00 
O.DO 

O.M 
O.M 

In. 
2. 32 

0.07 

o'so 

SI 

0.00 

S 

0.38 
006 

i:37 

In. 

e.ft4 

248 

in 

if 

in. 

T.aa 

il 

203 

2:«i 

In. 

il. 

il 

S20 

11 

In. 
I.2» 

11 

o.« 
i.ai 

o:is 

i 
if 

In. 

A'-™. 

,0S7 

.00* 

.n 

.BS 

..» 

IN 

'" 

3.12 

... 

... 

» 

.» 

„,» 

S.  ESUchku 

IM 

.... 

..« 

.„ 

,„ 

3... 

i.K 

... 

,.» 

=,» 

2.03 

», 

Y(«r.                  1  J«n. 

1 

Feb. 

Mur. 

April 

Hny. 

'""!* 

Am. 

Sept. 

Ort. 

Kov. 

n«. 

ToUl. 

iB. 

In. 

11 

!:! 
II 

In. 

s.t 

li 

In. 

In. 

In.    i    In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 
1:2 

In. 
.8 

1 

3.5 
137 

in. 

• 

3.3 

11 

0.3 

1.0 

O.T 

^ 

'- 

'" 

S.S7 

7.« 

0.3 

.93 

4.2s 

.,., 

M.« 

1 

38. i 

1 

These  climatic  records  are  likely  to  mean  little  when  taken  by  them- 
selves, but  when  compared  with  ihe  conditions  found  in  the  other  extreme 
of  the  Htate,  interesting  relations  become  apparent.  Tranwau  {'do  b, 
pp.  3^li-3n8)  has  snmmarized  the  temperatare  and  precipitation  nienns 
for  certain  localities  in  southeastern  Michigan,  and  these  means  have 
been  placed  in  the  table  with  the  Port  Arthur  data.  The  most  striking 
difference  (Table  1)  is  the  much  higher  temperature  throughout  the 
year  in  southern  Michigan;  the  mean  July  maxiQimn  is  71.9°  as  coiitn>sf- 
ed  with  62.24°  at  Port  Arthur;  the  annual  mean  is  47.2°  as  contrasted 
with  30.07°  for  Port  Arthur.  The  northern  mean  is  l>etw('en  the  tem- 
perature of  tlie  maximum  density  of  water  (39.2°)  and  tlie  freezing  point. 
The  precipitation  presents  almost  equally  striking  differences.  The  rain- 
fall instead  of  being  largely  confined  to  the  summer  months,  as  at  Port 


44  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    190g. 

Arthur,  is  mucli  more  generally  dietributed  throughout  the  year.  The 
rainfall  is  also  about  %  more  in  the  south,  the  northern  mean  is  21.73 
inches  and  the  aoutheru  one  30.22  inches.  In  the  north  there  is  about 
1/5  more  snow  than  rainfall,  21.72  as  contrasted  with  23.i4  inches; 
while  iu  the  south  about  14  more  of  the  precipitation  occurs  as  Bnow„ 
30.22  of  rain  as  contrasted  with  38.4  inches  of  snow.  While  in  both 
regions  the  greater  precipitation  is  in  the  form  of  snow,  the  longer  grow- 
ing season  of  the  plants  in  the  south  makes  more  of  this  moisture  avail- 
able ;  but  on  the  other  hand,  on  account  of  the  higher  temperature,  more 
is  needed.  While  about  one-balf  of  the  rainfall  in  both  regions  occurs 
during  the  growing  seasou,  ,iet  the  evaporation  is  much  greater  in  the 
south  so  that  the  relative  humidity  is  less  when  compared  with  the 
north.  (Cf.  Transeau,  '05,  a).  It  seems  probable  that  the  relative- 
humidity  of  Isle  Bovate  is  greater  than  on  the  adjacent  mainland  on  ac- 
count of  its  insular  location  and  imperfect  drainage. 

Mention  should  also  be  made  of  the  long  period  of  daylight  in  the 
north  because  this  is  of  great  importance  to  a  vegetation  whose  period 
of  growth  is  limited  to  such  a  short  summer. 

To  one  accustomed  to  the  hot  summers  farther  south,  the  cool  summer 
of  Isle  Royale  is  very  agreeable  and  invigorating.  Moderately  heavy 
clothing  is  needed  for  comfort  except  during  the  middle  of  the  day  wheo 
the  heat  at  times  is  very  oppressive.  This  was  especially  the  case  dar- 
ing our  examinations  of  the  rock  ridges.  Thus  on  July  10  on  the  Jack 
Pine  Hidge  (III,  5}  the  thermometer  on  a  mat  of  Cladonia  recorded 
93°  F.  in  the  sun,  while  at  the  same  time  (2  P.  M.)  in  the  sun,  but  ex- 
posed to  a  cool  breeze,  it  recorded  76°  F.  Such  temperatures  wonid  not 
attract  special  attention  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  usually  the  tem- 
perature is  80  much  lower.  The  nights  are  very  cool,  and  at  Washiugton 
Harbor  on  Aug.  22  there  was  a  frost  in  the  valley  along  Washington 
Creek  (II,  '04).  During  our  camp  at  the  Light-house,  when  shore  winds 
accompanied  a  storm,  the  temperature  became  so  low  that  a  fire  in  the 
evening  was  necessary  for  comfort.  On  July  15  there  was  a  brisk  east 
wind,  with  a  mean  temperature  of  about  50°  so  that  the  vapor  of  ones 
breath  was  visible  all  day.  The  lake  breeze  is  at  times  very  noticeable 
as  one  passes  from  Bock  Harbor  into  the  channel  at  Middle  Islands.  It 
is  quite  probable,  as  Jackson  ('50,  p.  420)  suggests,  that  this  cold  lake 
air  is  a  factor  in  the  production  of  the  stunted  tree  growth. 

The  low  temperature  of  the  wet,  densely  foreate<i  cedar  swamps  is 
^•orthy  of  special  mention.  As  Foster  remarks  (  '50,  p.  420)  "Und»  the 
shade  of  the  crags,  and  among  the  thick  evergreen  swamps  of  white 
cedar,  it  not  nnfrequently  happens  that  perennial  ice  is  found,  covered 
by  a  layer  of  turf.  Mr.  Blake  discovered  a  considerable  area  of  ice  thus 
preserved  in  midsummer,  near  Rock  Harbor."  Unfortunately  our  party 
did  not  find  such  conditions  although  such  "cold  islands"  were  kept 
in  mind  with  the  idea  that  under  such  conditions  "glacial  relicts"  might 
be  expected  if  these  areas  were  of  sufficient  extent. 

ft.  ScicliC8.  The  rapid  and  temporary  changes  of. the  water  level  in  the 
harbors  has  been  the  basis  of  much  comment.  This  was  very  marked  at 
Tobin  Harbor  and  at  Washington  Harbor.  Its  influence  upon  Washing- 
ton Greek  was  quite  marked,  at  times  it  would  be  ponded  for  some 
distance  up  streaui  while  on  other  days  it  would  be  a  briskly  flowin^r 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   ROYALE.  46 

-stream.  Foster  and  Whitney  ('60,  p.  51)  make  the  following  comment 
-upon  these  fluctuations  at  Bock  Harbor;  "While  at  Rock  Harbor,  Isle 
Royale,  in  the  summer  of  1847,  we  witnessed  the  ebbing  and  dowing  of 
the  water,  recurring  at  intervals  of  fltteeo  or  twenty  minntes,  durinp 
"the  entire  afternoon.  The  variation  was  from  twelve  to  eighteen  inches: 
and  we  took  advantage  of  their  recession  to  catch  some  of  the  small 
lake  dsh  which  were  left  in  the  pools.  The  day  was  calm  and  clear 
bnt  before  the  expiration  of  forty-eight  hours  a  violent  gale  set  in." 

This  phenomenon  has  been  investigated  on  the  Great  Lakes  by  Deni- 
■Bon  ("98,  p.  568)  who  states  that  these  seiche  movements  are  very 
marked  preceding  and  during  storms  and  are  due  to  atmospheric  pres- 
«Qre  upon  the  lake. 

c.  Climatie  Succeaaion.  From  what  is  known  of  the  general  geologi- 
cal history  of  the  Superior  region,  during  Glacial  and  post-Glacia)  times, 
it  is  evident  that  there  has  been  a  great  climatic  change  which  has  been 
of  the  utmost  biological  importance.  It  is  therefore  desirable  to  see 
■what  inferences  will  aid  us  in  forming  a  general  conception  of  the  pos- 
sible climatic  successions.  It  appears  to  be  generally  conceded  that  at  tlie 
margin  of  the  ice  sheet  the  conditions  mnst  have  been  quite  arctic  in 
character,  similar  to  that  of  the  "barren  grounds"  of  the  far  north.  Such 
climatic  conditions  might  result  from  a  permanent  atmospheric  low  cor- 
related with  the  presence  of  the  ice  she^  (Cf.  Chamberlin  and  Salisbury, 
'06, 11.  pp.  674  675 ;  111,  p.  433) .  The  prevailing  westerlies,  combined  with 
a  permanent  low  to  the  north  would  favor  westerly  continental  winds 
along  the  margin  of  the  ice.  Perhaps  a  suggestive  comparison  can  be 
made  between  the  seasonal  transitions  from  the  two  permanent  winter 
lows  near  the  Arctic  regions,  into  the  summer  condition  of  one  low  witli 
Its  transitional  "March  weather"  and  that  of  American  and  European 
jjlacial  lows  and  their  transformation  into  the  present  summer  arctic 
low.  In  connection  with  this  subject  a  paper  by  Fassig  ('99)  is  of  spec 
ial  interest.  Analogies  are  often  dangerous  but  the  idea  is  of  interest 
Twcause  it  suggests  a  "March  weather"  transformation  for  post-Glacial 
times.  In  this  connection  the  formation  and  occurrence  of  the  wind 
blown  loess,  with  its  greatest  development  in  the  west  and  on  the  east 
banks  of  certain  streams,  is  of  special  interest,  although  these  condi- 
tions did  not  develop  in  the  north  as  they  did  farther  south.  The  oc- 
-cnrrence  of  the  westerly  winds  seems  to  be  further  supported  by  the  west- 
■erly  and  southwesterly  extenKion  of  the  ire  from  the  centers  of  the  accutt;- 
iilation  (Cf.  Chamberlin  and  Salisbury,  '06,  111.  pp.  330-333).  Home- 
wbat  similar  conditions  in  some  respects  obtained  in  Europe  (Penck,  '06, 
p.  183)  but  the  dry  winds  were  easterly  rather  than  westerly  as  in  North 
America.  The  European  loess  deposits  also  approached  much  nearer 
to  the  (western  Europe)  cosist  than  in  America,  where  they  remain  far 
to  the  inferior.  The  Great  Lake  storm  track  mai-  have  bwn  wider,  but, 
more  probably,  was  narrower  and  more  intense.  The  northeastward  re- 
treat of  the  ice  sheet  is  paralleled  by  the  northeastward  migration  of 
spring  weather  conditions  (Higelow,  '97.  p.  48)  and  if  this  route  of  the 
opening  of  spring  was  initiated  at  this  early  date  it  must  have  had 
important  biological  consequences  upon  the  migrating  animal  life  of  the 
Interior.     The  arctic  and  storm  track  tvpes  of  climate  are  perhaps  the 

"    ■  ■  '"IT! 


46  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

may  have,  as  a  rule^  parsed  farther  south  tli^n  at  present.  If  these  su^- 
gestioDs  are  applied  to  the  interpretation  of  the  Glacial  and  post-Glacial 
Uistorj-  of  Isle  RoyaJe,  the  general  relations  will  be  abont  as  follows: 
Succeeding  the  disappearance  of  the  ice  was  an  arctic  condition  with 
Khort  summers  and  lonR  winters,  prevailing  westerly  winds,  and  severe 
e-tisterly  or  southeasterly  moving  storms.  Such  couditions  as  these 
would  influence  the  direction  of  laie  currents,  wave  action  on  the 
heaohes,  and  the  source  and  movement  of  the  lake  drift,  ali  of  which 
would  greatly  influence  the  biota- 

If  the  Glacial  and  post-Glacial  adjustment  of  the  permanent  lows  was 
accompanied  by  severe  storms,  this  would  be  a  factor  which  would  cer- 
tainly influence  the  rate  of  formation  and  the  distinctness  of  the  beach 
lines,  and  it  is  not  altogether  improbable  that  a  study  of  the  well  de- 
veloped Nipissing  beach,  by  the  development  of  its  spits  and  bars,  may 
furnish  data  regarding  the  lake  currents  and  the  prevailing  winds.  But 
in  order  to  interpret  such  records  it  will  be  necessary  to  formulate 
criteria  by  means  of  which  duration  of  a  beach  formation  may  be  dis- 
tinguished from  one  of  less  duration  but  due  to  more  severe  storms  and 
active  currents, 

d.  Th<'  Ijoke  Storms  and  their  InHvenre.  Tlie  significance  of  lake 
storms  is  of  special  interest  on  account  of  the  bearing  of  the  latter  upon 
the  conditions  of  life  upon  the  b^ch,  and  also  upon  the  lake  drift.  Tb».t 
they  must  ije  reckoned  as  an  importan-t  factor  in  the  post-Glacial  repopu- 
lation  of  Isle  Boyale  is  evident  when  we  recall  that  during  the 
life  of  the  present  fauna  and  flora  the  island  has  never  been  connected 
with  the  mainland  except  by  ice.  Very  fortunately  the  subject  of  lake 
storms  has  been  carefully  investigated  by  Garriott  ('03)  because  of  its 
influence  upon  navigation. 

The  period  of  greatest  seasonal  frequency  for  severe  storms  ranges 
from  September  to  December,  with  a  November  maximum,  while  5Iarch 
contains  the  greatest  number  of  such  storms  for  the  remainder  of  the 
year.     The  smallest  number  occur  in  June,  July  and  August. 

There  are  several  types  of  these  storms,  the  most  severe  of  which  are 
those  of  southwestern  origin  and  which  occur  between  October  and  May. 
They  are  preceded  by  east  and  northeast  winds  which  gradually  become 
a  gale;  but  when  once  the  storm  center  has  passed  the  wiad  suddenly 
shifts  to  the  northwest  and  is  an  offshore  wind  from  Canada.  Such, 
storms  are  frequently  followed  by  much  snow  and  intense  cold.  During 
the  warmer  months,  storms  from  this  direction  are  usually  of  tropical 
origin. 

Less  severe  storms  are  those  coming  from  the  middle-west.  These  are 
preceded  by  gales,  first  from  the  south  and  later  from  the  east,  and  after 
the  i>as8age  of  such  a  storm  center  the  wind  suddenly  changes  to  the 
northwest  and  finally  finishes  with  clearing  weather,  or  if  in  winter, 
sometimes  by  a  light  snow.  These  storms  are  common  at  all  seasons  of 
the  year,  but  the  most  severe  ones  occur  during  the  cold  months. 

Storms  from  the  northwest  are  seldom  severe;  they  are  preceded  by 
south  or  southwest  winds,  and  after  their  passage  the  wind  shifts  to  the 
west  and  northwest  and  rapidly  diminishes  in  velocity.  In  winter  the 
attending  precipitation  is  generally  light,  in  summer  it  is  in  the  "form 
of  thunder  storms,  and  the  high  winds  in  squalls  from  the  southwest 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLB   ROYALR  47 

at  the  time  the  center  of  the  storm  is  paBaing."  To  this  clasB  belong 
the  majority  of  lake  stormB,  but  they  are  seldom  severe. 

From  these  relations  it  is  seen  that  storms  whose  origin  is  from  the 
south,  southwest  or  middle-west,  are  preceded  by  east  or  northeast  winds 
or  (middle-west)  by  southern  winds,  and  followed,  after  the  passage 
of  the  storm  center,  by  northwest  or  west  windu;  while  storms  of  north- 
western origin  are  preceded  by  south  or  southwest,  and  followed  by 
weat  and  northwest,  winds.  These  facts  show  that  offshore  winds  from 
the  eastern  and  southern  shores  of  Lake  Superior  are  the  general  law 
for  winds  preceding  most  storms;  and  that  after  the  passage  of  the 
storm  center  all  appear  to  be  followed  by  west  or  northwest  winds.  These 
offshore  winds  are  likely  to  be  onshore  winds  for  Isle  Royale.  The 
proximity  of  the  north  shore,  fhe  frequency  and  magnitude  of  this  wind 
phenomena,  clearly  suggests  that  these  factors  may  largely  account  for 
the  Canadian  affinities  of  the  majority  of  fbe  Isle  Royale  biota.  But  we 
shall  see  later  that  there  are  other  factors  to  reinforce  this  same  ten- 
dency. It  may  seem  unnecessary  to  enter  these  details,  but  it  should  be 
remeinl)ered  that  the  conditions  under  which  an  organism  may  reach  the 
island  is  an  important  factor  in  its  survival,  a  relation  of  special  import- 
ance in  the  migration  of  birds.  That  fhe  majority  of  these  storms  oocTir 
in  the  fall  and  winter,  at  a  period  of  relative  inactivity  on  the  part  o^f  the 
Isle  Royale  biota,  is  yet  a  condition  which  would  be  favorable  for  the 
transportation  of  some  small  hibernating  invertebrates.  The  life  histories 
of  these  storms,  especially  the  conditions  of  their  termination,  may  be 
expected  to  have  an  important  bearing  upon  the  survival  of  the  drift 
biota. 

There  Is  still  another  important  phase  of  this  subject,  and  that  is 
the  influence  which  these  storms  have  upon  the  life  of  the  shore  and 
beaches.  The  fauna  of  the  exposed  shore  of  Isle  Hoyale  is  very  scanty 
and  much  inferior  to  that  of  the  harbors,  so  that,  generally  speaking,  up 
to  a  certain  point  the  more  protected  the  coast  the  more  diversified  the 
faana.  This  was  very  clearly  shown  by  the  molluscan  life  upon  the 
shore.  These  storms  have  a  powerful  scouring  action  with  the  sand, 
gravel  and  shingle  on  the  exposed  coasts,  so  that  a  rock  surface  or  one 
with  blocks  too  large  for  disturbance  by  the  waves  is  much  more  favor- 
able to  life. 

The  relation  of  waves  to  lake,  currents  presents  a  signiflcant  phase 
closely  related  not  only  to  the  occurrence  and  distribution  of  life  along 
the  beach,  but  also  to  the  problem  of  lake  drift  and  its  biolf^cal  im- 
portance. A  breaking  wave  tends  to  carry  forward  floating  objects  so 
that  when  such  objects  are  carried  along  by  the  currents  and  once  come 
within  the  range  of  influence  of  the  breaking  waves  of  shallow  water, 
they  tend  to  move  with  these  waves  into  the  shallow  water  and  thus 
shoreward  and  are  cast  upon  the  beach  in  harbors,  bays  or  about 
islands  (Harrington,  '95,  p,  VI.). 

e.  The  Surface  Currents  of  Lake  Superior.  Mention  has  previously 
been  made  of  the  fact  that  in  addition  to  the  olTshore  winds  from  Canada, 
which  accompany  certain  severe  storms,  there  are  other  influences 
which  have  a  similar  efl'ect  upon  drift — the  lake  cnrrents.  These  ai-e. 
in  part,  an  expression  of  the  same  climatic  trend  and  their  direction 
is  a  resultant  determined  by   the  influence  of  the  prevailing  westerlp- 


48  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

wiDdB,  the  rotation  of  the  earth,  the  form  and  contour  of  the  basin, 
and  the  positicm  of  the  outlet.  A  detailed  investigation  of  these  car- 
rents  was  made  by  Harrington  and  Conger  (Harrington,  '95)  wht> 
paid  particular  attention  to  the  currents  about  Isle  Royale.  As  these 
investigations  were  made  during  the  season  of  aavigation,  they  are  of 
particular  interest  from  the  standpoint  of  the  biota,  because  it  is  dur- 
ing this  same  period  that  we  must  in  general  espect  the  most  advantage- 
ous dispersal  of  plants  and  animals  to  take  place. 

The  simplest  of  these  factors  influencing  currents  are:  the  general 
movement  toward  the  outlet  of  a  lake,  the  prevailing  westerly  winds, 
the  deflection  to  the  right  (or  southward)  of  the  current  on  account  of 
the  rotation  of  the  earth.  But  the  general  form  of  the  lake  and  its  shore 
line,  the  contour  of  the  bottom  and  the  location  of  islands,  introduce 
important  complexities  into  the  problem.  As  may  be  seen  in  Fig.  53 
Lake  Superior  well  illustrates  the  influences  of  all  these  conditions.  The 
small  size  of  the  outlet  does  not  allow  the  escape  of  this  vast  current, 
so  that  there  is  a  return  along  the  north  shore,  where  islands  are 
encountered  which  produce  eddies ;  and  in  their  shallow  water  and  along 
their  coasts  breakers  are  encountered  which  tend  to  carry  shoreward  and 
lodge  drift, 

Whea  the  return  swirl  reaches  Isle  Royale  the  problem  becomes  com- 
plex and  is  of  such  importance  that  these  currents  were  made  the  sub- 
ject of  a  special  investigation  by  Harrington  snd  Conger.  In  their  study 
of  the  lake  currents,  bottles  containing  instructions  were  sent  adrift  and 
the  finder  was  requested  to  communicate  their  recovery  to  the  Weather 
Bureau.  In  this  manner,  supplemented  by  other  sources  of  information, 
these  currents  were  determined.  The  results  of  the  investigations 
about  Isle  Royale  are  as  follows : 

''Xot  a  single  bottle  has  been  recovered  on  the  northwest  coast  of 
Lake  Superior.  This  is  not  due  to  no  bottles  having  been  floated  in  that 
vicinity,  as  during  the  season  of  1893  alone  Mr.  Conger  floated  250  bot- 
tles between  Duluth.  Minn.,  and  Thunder  Bay,  Ont. 

"This  fact  was  deemed  of  such  importance  that  the  Chief  of  the 
Bureau,  accompanied  by  the  inspector  in  charge  of  the  Lake  Marine 
Service,  made  a  special  trip  from  Duluth,  Minn.,  along  the  northwest 
coast  around  Isle  Royale  to  Port  Arthur,  Ont,  Careful  note  was  made 
of  the  entire  coast,  all  beaches  examined,  and  observations  of  water 
temperature  made  to  assist  in  solving  the  direction  of  the  current  flow 
in  this  region.  At  French  River,  observations  were  made  with  special 
current  floats,  and  it  was  discovered  that  the  main  current  was  to  the 
northeast  from  1  to  3  miles  from  shore.  Inside  this  line  was  found  a 
current  flowing  to  the  westward.  This  shore  current  evidently  begins 
farther  to  the  east,  and  continues  to  the  west  end  of  the  lake,  and  is 
positive  at  or  near  Duluth,  as  is  conflrmed  by  investigation  of  the  offl- 
cijiln  of  the  city  of  Duluth,  however,  narrow  and  does  not  extend  far 
into  the  lake. 

"Around  Isle  Royale  there  was  found  abundant  evidence  that  the  cur- 
rent flows  to  the  west  along  the  north  shore  of  this  island.  Observa- 
tions of  water  temperature  at  this  point  are  very  interesting  and  indi- 
cate a  deep  stream  flowing  from  the  eastward.  There  appears  but  little 
difference  in  the  temperature  of  the  water  at  the  snrface  and  at  the 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  49 

depth  of  100  feet.  In  other  localitieB  to  the  southward  there  is  a  marked 
differeDCe  between  the  aurface  and  deep  water  temperaturea. 

"In  confirmation  of  this  current  there  may  be  mentioned  the  follow- 
ing special  drifts,  the  numbers  referring  to  tlitme  on  the  chart*: 
(7)  Drift  of  the  yacht  Albatross  in  summer,  during  a  dead  calm;  papei-s 
thrown  overboard  remained  alongside  of  the  yatch  for  several  hoars; 
the  drift  was  strong  and  uniform  to  the  west,  (8)  Track  of  driftwood 
floated  by  party  from  the  boat  in  a  caJm  off  McCargoes  Cove,  Isle  Koyale. 
(9)  Drift  of  wreckage  from  the  Silver  Islet  crib  and  pier  which  was 
washed  away  in  a  northeast  storm.  (10)  Becord  of  ice  floea  in  calm 
weather  during  winter  of  1891 ;  reported  to  have  drifted  from  the  north- 
east to  southwest  at  a  rate  of  3  miles  an  hour.  (11)  Drift  of  party  in 
sailboat  while  becalmed  on  July  31,  1894.  (12)  Steamer  Cumberland, 
which  went  to  pieces  on  Rock  of  Ages,  in  1877,  whose  wreckage  was 
distributed  along  the  entire  south  shore  of  Isle  Royale.  (13)  Drift  of  a 
champagne  bottle  floated  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Arnold,  Port  Arthur,  Out,,  on 
October  8,  1893;  and  (14)  the  drift  of  a  flsh  barrel  floated  by  J.  H. 
Malone.  keeper  Menagerie  Island  Light,  about  August  27,  1885,  and 
picked  up  twenty-six  days  later.  The  wind  during  this  period  was  mostly 
from  the  south  shore. 

"The  confirmations  indicate  that  the  current  between  Isle  Boyale  and 
the  Dortli  shore  sweeps  to  the  west  and  southwest  after  passing  the 
island  and  recurving  rejoins  the  main  easterly  current  to  the  south  and 
west;  the  drift  of  the  wreckage  from  the  Silver  Islet  pier  indicates  that 
it  recurves  at  some  point  to  the  southwest  of  Grand  Marais,  Minn. 

"Special  attention  is  called  to  the  current  between  Isle  Boyale  and 
the  north  shore.  The  great  depths,  the  conformation  of  the  bottom,  and 
the  water  temperatures  in  this  locality  indicate  that  there  is  a  steady 
and  fairly  strong  current  sweeping  from  the  east  through  the  narrow 
pathway  to  the  west,  flowing  to  the  southwest  after  passing  the  west 
end  of  the  island,  and  rejoining  the  main  easterly  current  as  mentioned 
above.  This  narrow  and  relatively  rapid  stream,  like  the  one  between 
the  Manitou  Islands  and  the  Michigan  mainland  in  Lake  Michigan  is 
probably  the  moat  persistent  and  regular  to  be  found  in  this  lake,    *    * 

"1.  Section  79. — Floated  by  Capt.  H.  0.  Jackson,  steamer  L.  Shicka- 
luna  on  June  23,  Ifiii'i,  itt  G:4o  p.  ni.,  in  northwest  comer.  Pound  by 
Charles  Tiesage,  Lake  Linden.  Mich.,  at  entrance  of  McCargoea  Cove, 
Isle  Royale,  on  October  20.  1893,  on  the  beach." 

It  is  thus  seen  that  drift  from  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior  tends 
to  be  strained  from  the  lake  currents  by  the  various  harbors  of  Isle 
Royale.  It  also  suggests  that  north  shore  life  might  also  reach  Kewee- 
naw Peninsula,  but  so  far  as  known  this  has  not  been  recognized.  Drift 
waa  observed  in  Tonkin  Bay  which  had  evidently  come  from  a  distance 
and  dead  birds  reported  by  Peet,  as  drifting  into  Washington  Harbor, 
probably  came  in  part  from  the  north  shore  current.  The  long  duration 
of  these  currents  since  the  Ice  Age  seems  very  probable,  and  undoubtedly 
they  have  had  an  important  bearing  upon  the  geographic  origin  of  the  Isle 
Royale  biota,  so  that  they  cannot  receive  too  much  emphasis. 

A  few  words  may  be  added  concerning  the  probable  history  of  the 


■  Not  reproduced.on  the  sis 


abiGoogle 


60  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

lake  fiiirrentfl.  Sinre  the  location  of  outlets,  prevailing  winds,  topo- 
graphy of  the  basin  and  rotation  of  the  earth  all  influence  lake  enr- 
rents,  it  is  evident  that  any  important  change  in  these  conditions  will 
cau8e  a  modification  in  the  currents.  By  means  of  these  criteria  theu 
we  may  infer  what  currents  are  likely  to  have  existed  under  certain 
conditions.  Some  of  these  conditions  have  had  a  very  permanent  value 
in  the  Superior  basin,  because  the  general  form  of  the  southern  shore 
(except  Keweenaw  Peninsula),  the  earth's  rotational  deflection  to  the 
right,  and  the  iH^vailing  westerly  winds,  made  relatively  deflnite  condi- 
tions. Thus  the  early  Glacial  lakes  in  this  basin,  which  had  south- 
western outlets,  must  have  had  different  currents,  perhaps  more  or 
less  against  the  prevailing  westerly  winds,  and  the  absence  of  large 
islands  would  be  favorable  to  uniformity.  Later  at  the  Algonquin  stage. 
Fig.  52,  there  must  have  been  a  very  complicated  system  of  lake  fxu'- 
rents,  perhaps  a  rough  outline  of  those  of  the  present  Great  Lakes,  at 
least  in  the  deflection  toward  the  right  shores  on  account  of  the  rota- 
tion of  the  earth,  and  to  the  eastward  on  account  of  the  prevailing 
westerly  winds  and  the  eastern  outlets.  The  broad  connection  between 
the  Superior  and  the  Huron  bnsins  perhaps  also  favored  a  north  shore 
i-eturn  whirl,  while  at  the  Xipissing  stage,  Fig.  54,  in  the  Superior 
baiiia  the  currents  were  in  general  quite  similar  to  those  of  the  present 
lake,  but  more  simplified  in  detail  by  the  greater  depth  of  the  lake. 

If  such  general  relations  as  these  obtained,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
north  shore  i-etum  whirl  may  have  been  of  considerable  duration,  and 
that  the  opportunity  for  these  (^irrents  to  carry  life  from  the  south 
shore  must  have  been  constantly  less  favorable  than  the  chances  for 
them  to  efl'ect  transportation  from  the  north  shore  of  the  Superior  basin. 
Tn  this  basin  then  it  seems  that  the  currents  were  flrat  relatively  simple, 
became  quite  complex  at  the  Algonquin  ^tage  and  were  simplified  at 
the  Nipissing  stage.  A  detailed  study  of  the  beach  lines  such  as  those 
of  the  Nipissing,  might  add  much  positive  information  as  to  these 
ancient  lake  currents  and  their  biological  relations. 

f.  The  Origin  of  the  Habitats.  Isle  Royale  is  abont  45  miles  in  length, 
has.  an  average  width  of  about  seven  or  eight  miles  and  an  area  of  abont 
210  square  miles.  The  Nhallow  soil,  rock  ridges,  forested  swamps,  lakes, 
Bmall  streams,  rocky  coast,  and  harbors  provide  a  variety  of 
conditions  and  furnish  play  for  such  a  variety  of  processes  that  many 
diverse  habitats  are  produced.  Generally  speaking,  the  island  is  covered 
with  a  stunted  coniferous  forest  growth.  Attention  has  already  been 
called  to  some  of  the  conditions  and  processes  "which  have  produced 
the  major  environmental  i-egions  and  the  general  topography  of  the 
surface.  If  Isle  Royale  had  high  mountains  and  greater  extent,  very 
different  habitats  would  be  expected. 

As  we  have  seen,  the  entire  surface  of  the  island  has  been  beach, 
and  previous  to  that  it  had  been  a  reef  in  the  lake,  so  that  the  beach 
represents  the  original  land  habitat  upon  the  island.  Generally  speak- 
ing this  habitat  has  migrated  from  the  crest  of  the  Greenstone  Range 
downward  for  about  550  feet  to  the  present  lake  level.  With  this 
progressive  downward  movement,  there  has  been  an  increasing  area 
exposed  to  subaerial  processes  of  erosion.  The  origin  of  the  harbors 
has  been  a  part  of  the  beach  problem,  but  that  of  the  protected  beacb, 


lyCoogle 


ECOLOGY  OP    ISLE   ROYALE,  51 

these  with  the  falling  of  the  lake  have  migrated  outward,  a^  ia  sug- 
gested b;  the  courses  of  the  main  streams  occnpying  the  rook  valleys. 

The  very  immature  condition  of  the  drainage  shows  that  during  the 
present  post-Olacial  cycle  only  comparatively  slight  ohanges  have 
modified  the  relief  from  the  eondition  in  pre-Glacial  times;  it  is  thus 
lai^ly  -  an  inherited  topography,  hence  the  conseqaent  drainage. 
It  should  perhaps  be  added,  however,  that  the  date  of  the  faulting  is 
not  definitely  known;  it  may  be  very  ancient,  but  the  weight  of  the 
ice  sheet  may  have  had  considerable  influence.  It  thus  seems  probable 
that  with  the  decline  of  the  lake  level  there  has  been  an  increase  and 
downward  elongation  of  the  stream  environments,  and  that  their,  course 
has  been  determined  largely  by  the  pre-Glncial  topography,  supple- 
mented, of  course,  by  the  southward  tilting  of  tbe  land.  The  lake 
basins  have  had  an  origin  similar  to  that  of  the  streams  and  have 
tended  toward  extinction  by  tilting,  inwash,  organic  debris  and  to  a 
limited  extent  by  the  downcutting  of  outlets.  On  aceount  of  the  rela- 
tively eniall  amount  of  erosion  by  the  ice  sheet  it  is  probable  that  the 
shallow  swamps  and  the  smaller  sti-eams  were  influenced  more  by  tbe 
ice  than  those  features  related  to  the  greater  relief  of  the  surface; 
even  moderate  tilting  nould  considerably  influence  such  an  environ- 
ment, beoauHe  within  the  major  valleys  the  divider  are  generally  low. 

The  origin  of  certain  land  habitats  only  i-emnins  to  be  considered. 
These  have  undergone  a  complex  succefision  of  changes.  The  resistent 
lava  of  the  Greenstone  had  been  the  least  reduced  by  ei-osion  so  was  the 
first  to  emerge  from  the  lake  le\'el.  This  was  first  a  beach,  and  as  the  water 
fell  from  its  crest  the  up{>er  beach  migrated  to  lower  levels  and  the 
land  habitat  continued  to  increase  in  area.  The  beach  line  itself 
expanded  laterally,  if  not  in  width,  as  the  area  of  the  island  increased. 
HTien  once  the  exposed  rocks  were  beyond  the  reach  'of  the  naves, 
weathering  and  erosive  processes  were  initiated  which  tended  to  pro- 
duce a  residual  soil.  Plant  remains  from  lichens  were  perhaps  the 
first  humus  formers,  and  it  ia  probable  that  it  was  not  until  the 
period  of  Lake  Algonquin  that  the  lake  drift  which  was  washed  ashore 
became  a  source  of  such  material;  but  winds,  birds,  lake  currents  and 
the  wavea  may  all  have  contributed  pioneers  of  tbe  higher  plants. 
The  harbors  at  the  northeastern  end  of  the  island  would  tend  to  strain 
out  the  drift  from  the  southwestward  flowing  current  and  the  return- 
ing one  along  the  southeastern  coast  of  the  island  would  tend  to  lodge 
drift  in  Washington  Harbor  and  the  Siskowit  Bay  region. 

As  the  water  continued  to  fall  to  lower  levels,  the  land  biot;i 
followed  down  the  slopes  liehind  the  receding  beach.  By  the 
Xipissing  stage,  the  vegetation  and  many  animals  i\-ere  probably 
well  established  and  had  begun  to  actively  encroach  upon  the 
swamps  and  lakes  and  thus  tended  to  increa.«e  the  land  habitat. 
With  the  tilting  that  followed  the  fonnation  of  the  Nipissing 
bench,  a  readjustment  must  have  taken  place  Itetween  the  land 
and  water  habitats,  hut  to  what  degree  their  relative  areas  weit^ 
infiuenc<'d  is  not  known.  During  the  initial  elevation  ponding  would 
be  expected  at  the  northeastern  end  of  the  island,  but  with  a  greater 
elevation  this  same  area  would  l)e  well  dniined,  as  the  divides  in  the 
valleys  are  low  and  the  transverse  drainage  near  the  central  iwirt  uSfc 


63  MICHIQAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

the  island  would  tend  to  prevent  extensive  ponding,  combined  with 
the  fact  that  the  ralle.va  extended  in  the  Bame  general  direction  as  the 
uplift  and  not  across  it.  It  therefore  appears  that  many  processes 
have  tended  to  inoreane  the  land  habitats  at  the  expense  of  the  aquatic, 
such  as  the  falling  of  the  lake  level,  the  encroachment  of  organic  re- 
mains on  the  depressions,  the  perfecting  of  drainage  lines  and  the 
tilting  of  the  surface.  ■   • 

With  the  advent  of  the  forest  a  habitat  dirferentiation  developed 
in  contrast  with  the  natural  openings.  These  openings  were  originatl.? 
doe  to  the  lack  of  soil,  as  on  the  ridges,  wave  action,  as  on  the  beach, 
or  an  excess  of  water  as  in  the  depressions.  With  the  accumulation 
of  soil,  the  downward  migra,tion  of  the  wares,  and  tbe  filling  up  or 
draining  of  tbe  depressions,  the  range  of  the  forest  has  been  extending, 
and  is  tending  to  completely  cover  the  surface. 


REFEBBNCES. 

Bigelow,  F.  H. 

1897.  Htornis,  Storm  Tracks,  and  Weather  Forecasting,  U.  R.  Dept. 

Agric,  Weather  Bureau,  Bull.  No,  20. 
Chamberlin,  T.C.,  and  Salisbury,  R.  D. 

1906.     Geologj-.    N'ew  York. 
Coleman,  A.  P. 

1906.     Iron  Ilanges  of  Eastern  Michipicoton.    Report  Can.  Bureau  of 
Mines  for  1906,  15  (I),  pp.  173-199. 
Cooper,  W.  F. 

1906.  fleological   Report  on   Rav  County.     Mich.  Qeol.   Surv..  Ann. 

Rep.  for  1905,  pp.  135-426. 
Denison,  F.  N. 

1898.  Tile  tireat   Lakes  as    a    Sensitive    Barometer.     Rej).    of    the 

British  Assoc.  Adv.  Science,  1897,  pp.  567-568. 
Fassig,  O.  L. 

1899.  Types  of  March  Weather  in  the  United  States.     Amer.  Jour, 

'of  Sci.  (4),  S,  pp.  319-338. 
Foster,  J.  W.,  and  Whitney,  J.  J). 

1850.  Report  on  the  Geology  and  Topography  of  a  Portion    of    the 

Lake  Superior  Land  District,  in  the  State  of  Michigan.    Ex. 
Doc,  Ist  Bess.  31st  Cong..  IX,  Part  1.     (Copper  Lands.) 

1851.  Report  on  the  Geology-  of  the  I^ake   Superior  Land   District. 

Part  II,  The  Iron  Region.    Senate  Doc.  Spec'l  S.  32nd  Cong., 
Vol.  3.  • 
Garriott,  E.  B. 
1903.    Storms  of  the  Great  Lakes,    U.  S.  l>ept.  of  Agr.,  Weather 
Bureau,  Bull.  K. 
Gilman,  H. 

1873.     The  Caribou  on  Lake  Superior.    Amer.  Nat.,  7,  p.  751. 
Goldthwait,  J.  W. 

1907.  The  Abandoned  Shore  Lines  of  Eastern  Wisconsin.     Bull.  17, 

Wis.  Geol.  and  N.Tt.  His.  Survey. 

1908.  The  Records  of  the  Extinct  Lakes.     111.  Geol.  Sqrvey,  Bull. 

No.  7,  pp.  54-68.  i„C.OO<^IC 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLK  ROYALE.  53 

HarringtoD,  M.  W. 

1895.  Surface  CurrestB  of  the  Oreat  Lakes.  a»  Deduced  from  the 

movements  of  Itottle  Papers  during  the  Beasons  of  1892,  1893 
and  1894.    U.  S.  Dept.  of  Agric,  Weather  Bureau,  Bull.  B, 
Revised  Edition. 
Hubbard,  G.  H.,  and  Sctiwarz,  K.  A. 

1878^    Jiist  of  Coleoptera  in  tlie  Lake  Superior  Region.    Trans.  Amer. 
Phil.  Soc.,  17,  pp.  627-C66. 
Jackson,  C.  T. 

1849.    Geological  and  Mineralogical  Reports.     Senate  Ex.  Doc,  No. 
1,  iBt  Sess.    3l8t  Cong.,  3,  371-935. 
Lane,  A.  C. 

1898.     Geological  Report  on  Isle  Royale,  Kficbigau.    Mich.  Geol.  Sur- 
vey, VI,  Part  1,  pp.  1-281. 
1900.     Geological   Report  on  Huron  County,  Michigan.     Geol.   Surv. 
Mich.,  7,  Pt.  II. 
liawBon,  A.  G. 

1893.    Sketch  of  the  Coastal  Topography  of  the  North  Side  of  Lake 
Superior,  with  Special  Reference  to  the  Abandoned  Strands 
of  Lake  Warren.    Twentieth  Ann.  Rep.  Minn.  Geol.  and  Nat. 
Hist.  Survey  for  1891. 
Montgomery,  T.  H. 

1906.     The  Analysis  of  Racial  Descent  in  Animals.     'Sew  York. 
Penck,  A. 

1906.    Climatic  Features  of  the  Pleistocene  Ice  Age.     Ge<^.  Jour. 
27,  182-187. 
Buthven,  A.  G. 

1906.    An  Ecological  Sur\'ey  in  the  Porcupine  Kfountains  and  Isle 
Boyale,  Michigan.     Mich.  Geol.  Burvev,  Ann.  Rep.  for  1905, 
pp.  17-56. 
Buthven,  A.  G.,  and  Others. 

1906.    An  Ecological  Survey  in  Northern  Michigan.    Mich.  Geol.  Sur- 
vey, Ann.  Kep.  for  1905,  pp.  1-133. 
Smith,  S.  I.       ' 

1874.     Ann,  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1872  and  1873.  I't.  II.  pp.  690- 
707. 
Spencer,  J.  W. 

1891.    Deformation  of  the  Algonquin  Beach,  and  the  Dirth  of  Lake 
Huron.    Amer.  Jour.  Sci.  (3),  41,  pp.  12-21. 
Stupart,  R.  F. 

1898.    The  Climate  of  Canada.    Scottish  Geogr.  Jour.,  14,  73-81. 
Taylor,  F.  B. 

1896.  Preliminarv  Notes  on   Studies  of  the  Great  Lakes,  Made  in 

1895.    Anier.  Geol..  17,  253-257. 

1896.  The  Aigoutiuin  and  Nipissing  Beaches.   Amer.  Geol.  17,  397-400. 

1897.  Notes  on  the  Abandoned  Beaches  of  the  North  Coast  of  Lake 

Superior.     Alner.  Geo!.,  20,  111-128. 
Transeau,  E.  N. 

1905  a.    Forest   Centers  of   North   America,     Amer.    Nafuralist,   39, 

879-889. 
1905  b.     The  Bogs  nnd  Bog  Flora  of  the  Huron  River  Vallev.     Bot. 

Gazette.  40,  351-375. 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


(Jeologlcal  Sarr^r  ot  Mlcblgan. 


ADDual   Report  lor  IDfM. 


AIM)   1S1.K   KuVAr.IO 


jiGoogle 


A  ami  Hi  Report 


f;l  t.L  ROIIKERY   I 


.   SHOWING   HIDING   INSTINCT 


(111. I.    ROUKKHY    « 


xCoo^jlii^S^^ 


jiGoogle 


(leotoglcsl  »urv?r  «(  Mlvhlgau. 


I   Kepurt  ror  lUOS. 


VUi.    60.      EAGI-n    NK8T    AT    'niHl.V    lIAItttlllt    ilV, 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOaY  OF   ISLE  ROYALE. 


THE  ECOLOGICAL  BELATIOKS  OF  THE  INVERTEBRATE  FAUKA 
OF  ISLE  ROYALE,  MICHIGAN. 

BY    DB.    HBNBr    ALLAN    OLEASON. 

/.    Introduction. 

The  most  recently  emerged  portions  of  Isle  Royale  are  the  rock  and 
gravel  beaches  which  together  constitute  virtually  the  entire  shore  of 
the  island.  Animal  life  is  found  apon  them  almost  to  the  edge  of  the 
water,  and  well  within  the  limits  of  wave  action.  The  phyaiographie 
succession  in  the  island  is  ench  that  the  areas  originally  occupied  by 
beach  pass  through  a  series  of  changes  in  the  physical  factors,  a  series 
which  is  accompanied,  sometimes  hastened,  sometimes  retarded,  by  cor- 
responding vegetational  successions,  and  which  culminates  in  the  final 
or  climax  plant  association  of  balsam  and  spruce  forest.  The  detail  of 
this  physiographic  and  vegetational  succession  is  by  no  means  uniform; 
it  may  proceed  along  either  of  two  well-marked  lines,  depending  on  the 
immediate  physical  and  biotic  conditions,  certain  intermediate  stages 
may  be  prolonged  or  omitted  entirely,  and  various  other  deviations  may 
occur.  Nevertheless  the  final  stage  is  always  the  same.  Accompanying 
the  changes  in  physiography  and  vegetation  is  a  similar  and  dependent 
change  in  the  fauna,  so  that  there  is  a  corresponding  series  of  animal 
associations,  beginning  on  the  beaches  and  developing  in  the  same  di- 
rection, with  the  same  deviations  or  omissions,  to  the  final  or  climax 
association  in  the  balsam-spruce  forest. 

The  preceding  general  statement  rests  on  the  assumption  that  the 
areas  now  occupied  by  the  climax  biotic  associations  have  developed  from 
the  beach  associations  through  a  series  of  stages  intermediate  in  time 
corresponding  to  those  associations  which  now  stand  intermediate  in 
space  between  the  two  extremes.  Or  briefly,  as  some  ecologists  have 
expressed  it,  the  lateral  distribntion  in  space  recapitulates  the  vertical 
distribution  in  time  Such  an  assumption  is  evidently  closely  akin  to 
the  recapitulation  theory  of  the  evolutionists,  and  just  as  that  so-called 
biogenetic  law  has  been  accredited  with  more  than  its  true  value,  so 
has  this  ecological  dictum  possibly  much  less  importance  than  has  been 
usually  supposed.  The  weakness  lies  in  too  little  consideration  of  the 
time  element.  It  is  certain  that  the  higher  land  in  Isle  Royale  has 
been  subnierged.  This  is  shown  by  the  old  beach  marks  now  many  feet 
above  the  present  level  of  the  lake.  Consequently  by  the  gradual  emer- 
gence all  of  the  island  has  passed  through  a  beach  stage.  But  it  is  un- 
warranted to  conclude  from  this  that  the  faunal  or  floral  associations 
of  the  former  beach  were  similar  to  those  of  the  present,  or  that  in  the 
intermediate  stages  the  biota  resembled  that  which  now  occupies  the 
area  between  the  ancient  beach  and  the  present  shore.  While  it  is  like- 
wise certain  that  with  a  continued  subsidence  of  the  lake  level  the  pre- 
sent beaches  will  eventually  be  left  far  above  the  water,  it  must  not 
therefore  be  assumed  that  their  biota  will  show  the  same  t 
or  reach  the  same  climax  as  those  of  the  past.    Changes  in  the  tei 


88  MICHIQAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

tare  or  rainfall  may  certainly  keep  pace  with  the  changes  in  lake  levels 
or  even  be  caused  by  it,  and  in  either  case  they  would  exert  a  profound 
inflnence  on  the  biota.  Migration  of  species  is  still  taking  place  among 
both  plants  and  animals,  and  may  introduce  new  or  even  dominating 
species  among  the  present  forms.  The  so-called  equatorial  pressure  of 
southern  species  is  fully  as  strong  now  as  it  was  directly  after  the  close 
of  the  glacial  epoch.  Lastly,  and  most  important  of  all,  the  influence 
of  the  biota  itself  is  always  to  be  reckoned  with.  Both  plants  and 
animals  are  continually  becoming  more  plastic,  adapting  themselves  to 
new  conditions,  and  extending  their  habitats  into  new  associations. 
They  push  forward  more  rapidly  than  the  changes  in  physiography,  some- 
times hastening  and  sometimes  retarding  physiographical  action,  and 
at  all  times  greatly  inflnencing  the  subsequent  snccessions. 

A  biotic  association  may  develop  into  another  by  a  mere  re-arrange- 
ment of  the  interrelations,  numerical  or  otherwise,  of  the  component 
species,  without  the  necessary  loss  of  some  or  addition  of  otbers.  Bnt 
such  cases  are  rare,  and  the  Isle  Royale  observationa  show  that  no  two 
associations  have  exactly  the  same  species,  and  that  with  each  pro- 
gression there  has  been  an  addition  of  certain  forms  which  bto>me  the 
most  characteristic  types.  The  first  bit  of  beach  fo^ed  was  occupied  by 
an  association  possibly  not  unlike  that  of  the  present  beaches.  All  the 
species  must  evidently  have  immigrated  from  beyond  the  island.  When 
the  soil  deposits  on  the  beach  were  sufficient  to  support  a  second  as- 
sociation its  species  were  derived  partly  from  the  beach  itself  and  partly 
from  new  immigrants.  The  further  development  of  biotic  associations 
on  the  beach  was  then  possible  not  only  from  immigrants,  bat  also  from 
the  two  associations  already  present.  Similarly  at  the  present  time 
each  association  on  the  island  is  constantly  being  invaded  by  species 
frotQ  all  the  others,  and  many  of  them  are  actually  able  to  establish 
themselves.  This  tends  toward  a  homogeneity  in  the  biota  hardly  in 
full  accordance  with  the  recapitulation  idea.  Indeed,  it  is  very  probable 
that  independently  of  all  physiographic  agencies  the  whole  surface  of 
the  island  would  eventaally  be  occupied  by  the  balsam-spruce  forest  and 
its  attendant  faunal  association. 

In  many  cases  it  is  virtually  certain  that  the  lateral  succession  does 
faithfnlly  repeat  the  vertical,  and  the  zonation  of  plants  around  a  pond 
may  be  taken  as  an  example,  but  the  filling  of  a  pond  is  only  a  single 
step  in  the  genetic  development  of  the  biota  of  an  island. 

With  this  preliminary  note  of  warning,  the  truth  of  this  recapitulation 
theory  will  be  assumed  for  the  island,  and  the  discussion  of  the  insect 
and  molluscan  fauna  will  follow  the  genetic  lines  indicated  in  the  first 
paragraph. 

The  relationship  of  the  various  physiographic  types  on  the  island 
to  each  other  may  conveniently  be  expressed  by  a  diagram  (see  end  of 
pai)er),  indicating  the  direction  of  the  devolpment  hy  arrows.  It  must 
be  remembered  that  practically  any  one  of  the  intermediate  etages  may 
be  omitted. 

//.     The  Lake. 

The  lake  (Superior)  must  obviously  be  regarded  as  the  first  stage  in 
the  genetic  development  of  the  faunal  associations.  Broadly  speaking, 
the  lake  fauna  is  divisible  into  two  main  groups.    The  first  is  pelagic  in 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  » 

character  and  includes  those  species  whose  distribution  is  entirely  inde- 
pendent of  the  shore,  for  example,  most  of  the  species  of  fish.  The 
second  group  is  littoral;  the  spe^^ies  occur  aJong  the  shore  in  comparti- 
tively  shallow  water,  and  are  to  a  greater  or  lesB  extent  dependent  upon 
the  land  in  its  relation  to  the  character  and  slope  of  the  bottom  and  to 
the  motion  of  the  water.  Members  of  the  latter  group  only  are  con- 
sidered here. 

The  two  dynamic  factors  just  mentioned  are  the  most  important  ooes 
that  influence  the  biota  of  the  lake.  There  are  no  currents  of  suiBcient 
rapidity  to  affect  the  animal  life.  The  direction  of  the  wind,  whether 
ofF-shore  or  on-shore,  may  respectively  lower  or  raise  the  level  a  few 
centimeters,  especially  when  the  wind  blows  lengthwise  of  the  long 
narrow  inlets,  such  as  Conglomerate  Bay  (Fig.  11).  Borne  fixed  or 
slow-moving  species  may  accordingly  be  alternately  submerged  and  ex- 
posed, while  motile  forms  can  at  once  adjust  themselves  to  any  change 
of  level.  Of  far  greater  importance  is  the  motion  of  the  water  caused 
by  wave  action.  It  is  only  on  rare  occasions  that  the  lake  is  quiet. 
Qentle  waves  come  in  nearly  all  the  time,  and  after  storms  become  of 
great  violence.  Wave  action  is  of  itself  sufBcient  to  inhibit  the  growth 
of  shells  along  tbe  exposed  shores,  where  they  might  easily  be  torn 
loose  and  crushed  against  the  rocks.  Such  forms  are  consequently  re- 
stricted to  the  shores  of  the  smaller  bays  or  to  the  lee  side  of  islands. 

Wave  action  is  of  importance  further  in  determining  the  character 
of  the  bottom.  Where  the  shore  is  exposed  directly  to  the  lake  it  is 
usually  of  massive  rock,  all  the  fragments  having  been  washed  down  to 
deep  water.  In  small  shallow  coves,  where  the  waves  break  always  in 
one  direction  there  is  usually  a  sloping  beach  of  gravel  extending  across 
the  end  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  waves.  Every  breaker 
sorts  over  this  gravel  so  that  it  is  nearly  impossible  for  a  fauna  to 
develop.  In  lat^r  coves  or  bays,  where  the  violence  of  the  wave  action 
is  reduced  by  distance,  the  gravel  is  finer  or  e\'en  a  beach  of  sand  may 
rarely  be  formed.  Along  the  steep  or  cliff-like  sides  of  these  coves  the 
bottom  is  frequently  covered  with  angular  rock  fragments  too  large 
to  be  moved  by  the  water.  These  are  frequently  inhabited  by  shells.  In 
general  the  development  of  a  free  littoral  fauna  demands  quiet  water 
where  the  animals  will  not  be  dashed  on  the  rocks  or  stranded  on  the 
shore,  and  for  attached  species  there  is  required  either  quiet  watw  or 
a  firm  bottom  which  will  not  be  dislodged  by  the  waves.  A  raor^  de- 
tailed discussion  of  this  as  affecting  the  distribution  of  shells  will  be 
given  later. 

In  the  larger  inland  lakes,  of  which  Siskowit  Lake,  the  only  one  of 
the  class  studied,  may  be  taken  as  an  example,  essentially  the  same  con- 
ditions obtain  as  on  Lake  Superior  itself.  The  difference  in  temperature 
and  content  of  the  water  seems  to  be  of  minor  importance.  The  waves 
in  the  larger  lake  can  naturally  reach  a  larger  size,  and  their  influence 
is  felt  far  into  the  bays.  Thus  at  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor,  about  six 
kilometers  from  the  lake  prosier,  the  distribution  of  shells  and  the  al- 
most total  absence  of  free  forms  indicate  that  even  there  wave  action 
is  of  importance.  In  Siskowit  Lake,  although  larger  than  Rock  Harbor 
the  force  of  the  waves  is  so  reduced  by  ever^'  hendlnnd  or  island  that 
on  the  quiet  water  in  their  shelter  a  rich  fauna  of  such  free  forms  as 


60  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

water-Btriders  and  whirligig  beetles  is  found  on  the  enrface,  while 
numerous  muBsel  shellB  live  on  the  silt  or  sand  bottom.  In  Somner  Lake 
and  others  of  limited  area  the  motion  of  the  water  has  no  measurable 
effect  on  the  biota,  and  they  wilt  therefore  be  treated  ander  a  separate 
heading. 

The  distribution  of  Bhells  along  the  shore,  particularly  species  of 
lAmnaca  and  Physa.  is  of  especial  interest.  Having  relatively  low 
motility  they  are  correspondingly  limited  in  their  distribution  and  the 
factors  governing  it  are  more  readilv  determined.  These  will  perhaps 
be  made  clearer  by  concrete  illustrations. 

Tonkin  Bay  is  a  small  inlet  about  half  a  kilometer  long,  opening 
to  the  east  upon  the  lake,  and  with  steep,  approximately  parallel  sides. 
It  is  narrowed  half  way  up  by  two  beaches  lying  perpendicular  to  its 
length.  By  this  the  wave  action  on  the  upper  part  is  reduced,  but  still 
may  sometimes  be  sufficient  to  wash  heavy  driftwood  upon  the  beach. 
Id  the  outer  half  the  wave  action  is  but  slightly  less  than  on  the  lake 
itself,  and  no  shells  are  found.  In  the  inner  or  upper  half  Limnaea 
atagnalis  L.  (Nos.  50,  54,  57),  LUnrwiv  nnarginata  Say  (Nos.  50,  57), 
and  Physa  sayii  (Tap.)  <Nob.  50,  57).  live  along  both  sides  where  the 
bottom  is  rock,  but  not  across  the  ends.  They  live  only  on  a  rock 
substratum,  which  may  be  either  hori7,ontal  or  vertical,  and  in  water 
no  to  45  cm,  in  depth.  The  larger  species,  Limnaea  atagnalis,  is  more 
nbundant  in  the  deeper  water,  and  only  the  smaller  species  live  at  a 
depth  less  than  15  cm.  They  then  prefer  the  vertical  walls  to  the  hori- 
zontal or  flat  bottom. 

Conglomerate  Bay  is  a  rocky  inlet  iFig.  11)  similar  to  the  one  just 
■  described  and  about  1.6  km.  long.  Being  wider  at  its  mouth  than 
Tonkin  Bay  the  force  of  the  wave  action  is  felt  farther  up  the  hay.  Kear 
the  end  the  waves  have  little  effect,  as  is  evidenced  by  a  sandy  beach 
(Fig-  4),  almost  without  driftwood.  At  the  upper  end  of  this  bay  alontc 
the  north  side  Limnaea  emarginata  Say  (Nos,  118,  12S)  and  Physa  aayii 
Tap.  (Nob.  118,  125)  are  found  in  water  15 — 45  cm.  deep,  in  the  deeper 
water  on  the  tops  of  flat  rocks,  in  the  shallower  water,  also  on  the  veiti- 
cal  sides  and  in  small  crevices.  They  never  occur  on  the  sand  or  gravel 
deposited  around  the  rocks,  as  is  frequently  the  case  near  the  sand 
beach  at  the  upper  end  of  the  bay.  The  distance  to  which  they  extend  . 
from  shore  is  greatest  opposite  the  concavities  of  the  shore  line  and  least 
opposite  the  small  rocky  headlands.  Their  distribution  in  both  Tonkin 
Bay  and  Conglomerate  Bay  seems  to  be  regulated  mostl.v  by  the  wave 
action,  since  they  seek  the  most  protected  places,  avoid  the  shallow 
water  where  the  waves  would  strike  them  most,  and  do  not  live  on 
loose  or  small  rocks,  gravel,  or  sand,  which  would  easily  be  dislodged. 
The  fact  that  the  smaller  shells  are  found  at  the  least  depth,  while  the 
larger  Limnaea  emarginata  inhabits  the  deeper  water,  would  indicate 
that  the  small  size  of  the  former  renders  tliom  less  easily  dislodged  by 
the  waves.  Again  their  gi-eater  abundance  on  the  north  side  suggests 
the  possibility  of  a  light  relation. 

Siskowit  Lake,  with  its  rocky  shores  and  large  area,  offers  essentially 
the  same  condition  as  Lake  Superior  itself,  and  the  shells  have  the  same 
general  distribution.  Along  the  very  gently  sloping  rocky  shore  near 
the  outlet  Limnaea  stagnalis  occurs  in  abundance,  always  at  a  depth 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  HOYALE.  61 

of  1040  cm.  Alon^  the  south  Ride  of  n  large  island  near  the  Houth  shore, 
where  they  are  sheltered  from  waves  in  every  direction,  the  same  spe- 
cies is  abiindaot.  They  live  on  rocks  in  the  full  sun  in  \vater  10 — 45  cm, 
deep,  with  the  optimum  depth  at  20—25  cm.  They  may  occur  on  the 
tops  or  sides  of  rocks,  but  never  on  the  sand  between  them.  Associated 
with  the  Ltmnae-d,  but  much  lees  abundant,  are  Planorbia  bicarhtatun 
royaUnais  Walker  (No,  210J,  P.  campanulatug  Say  (Nos.  210,  211), 
Lamp^Us  htteolus  (lAm.)  (Sob.  210,  211),  Anodonta  tnarginata  Say 
(So.  210),  and  Anodonta  grandis  fooiiana  Lea   (Nos.  210,  211). 

Opportunity  was  given  to  observe  the  behavior  of  Limruiea  stagnalis 
(So,  217)  in  waves  of  some  size  near  k  small  circular  island  half  a  kilo- 
meter out  in  the  lake.  The  bottom  was  gently  eloping,  and  either  of 
solid  rock  or  of  large  rounded  fragments.  There  were  no  overhanging 
trees,  so  the  shells  were  found  in  uniform  abundance  in  the  usual  depth 
of  water  on  all  sides  of  the  island.  At  the  time  the  island  was  visited 
a  strong  wind  was  blowing,  and  the  waves  were  probably  nearly  as  high 
as  they  ever  become  on  Siskowit  Lake.  One  or  two  shells  were  seen 
which  had  been  washed  loose,  and  of  course  would  be  unable  to  re- 
attach themselves  until  the  waves  abated.  It  would  be  expected  that  in 
such  cases  the  shells  might  be  crushed  or  broken  or  the  animal  killed. 
That  such  may  happen  was  evidenced  by  finding  a  few  live  shells  which 
had  been  cracked  and  then  healed,  leaving  an  irregular  surface.  Their 
occurrence  here  and  elsewhere  only  upon  rocks  of  considerable  size 
shows  that  they  require  a  firm  substratum,  and  where  the  rocks  are 
free  from  any  coating  of  slime  they  can  certainly  endure  higher  wares. 
Around  the  island  under  discussion  the  rocks  were  washed  perfectly 
clean. 

The  beach  in  front  of  the  ramp  at  Siskowit  Bay  {Fig.  29)  was  inhabited 
by  large  numbers  of  (So.  200)  Physa  sayii  Tapp,,  Pkysa  sp,,  Limnaea 
stagnalis  L.,  and  Limnaea  einarginata  Say,  so  that  more  detailed  obser- 
vations of  them  could  be  made,  and  a  few  experiments  carried  out  to 
show  their  sensitiveness  to  the  depth,  or  bathytropism,  as  it  has  been 
termed.  The  beach  here  is  of  rock  with  a  gentle  slope  of  about  one  in 
five,  corresponding  to  the  dip,  except  where  blocks  have  worn  off,  leaving 
low  vertical  walls.  The  wave  action  here  is  very  light,  its  force  being 
cut  off  by  a  series  of  islands  lying  between  the  beach  and  the  main  body 
of  Siskowit  Bay.  This  was  well  shown  by  the  conditions  on  ,\ugust  2, 
when  there  was  scarcely  a  ripple  inside  the  islands,  although  the  bay 
outside  was  covered  with  whitecaps.  The  beach  is  covered  with  a  thin 
coat  of  slime  formed  mostly  of  excrement  from  the  snails. 

On  such  a  beach  snails  may  live  close  to  the  edge  of  the  water,  but 
the  larger  lAmnaeaa  still  occupy  their  usual  depth  of  1.5  to  4.5  deci- 
meters. About  10  A.  M.,  on  August  3,  all  the  shells  to  a  depth  of  about 
1  decimeter  were  gathered  from  a  strip  of  the  beach  about  10  meters 
long.  They  were  comprised  in  the  following  species:  (So,  200)  Limnaea 
stagnalis  L.,  Limnaea  cmarginata  Say,  Phyaa  aayii  Tapp.,  and  Phyta  sp. 
The  smaller  Physaa  were  especially  abundant  and  about  200  of  them 
were  taken.  Four  hours  later,  at  2  P.  M.,  60  shells,  all  of  the  smaller  spe- 
cies, had  migrated  upon  the  same  strip.  The  only  evidence  concerning 
the  way  that  they  came  is  that  one  shell  of  Limnaea  stagnaliit  was  seen 
to  drift  up  over  a  low  wall  into  the  shallow  Eone.    This  method  could 


62.  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

hardly  account  for  60  of  the  Bmaller  ones,  however,  appearing  in  so  short 
a  space  of  time.  It  may  be  taken  b»  indicating  a  geoeral  and  continued 
migration  in  all  directione  within  their  bathjtropic  limits. 

It  was  noticeable  that  the  large  Limnaea  emarginata  and  Limnaea 
»taffnali8,  aside  from  the  one  specimen  mentioned  above,  live  at  an  aver- 
se depth  of  '3  dm.  and  never  deeper  than  4.5  or  5  dm.  To  test  their  bathy- 
tropism  six  of  them  were  picked  out  of  the  deeper  water  by  band  and 
held  in  contact  with  the  bottom  in  the  shallow  zone  nntil  they  extended 
their  feet  and  attached  themselves.  At  this  time  the  water  was  very 
quiet,  moving  just  enough  to  cause  a  faint  sound  on  the  beach.  But  the 
size  of  the  shell  of  the  two  Limnaem  is  so  large  that  they  offer  consider 
able  surface  to  the  water  and  are  consequently  easily  washed  loose.  Two 
of  the  six  swung  a  little  from  side  to  side  and  were  then  washed  off  and 
carried  by  the  nndertow  into  water  3  dm.  deep,  where  they  again  at- 
tached themselves.  A  third,  without  being  shaken  by  the  waves,  clung 
to  the  rock  for  some  time,  then  suddenly  let  go  its  bold  and  drifted  over 
a  low  ledge  into  the  deeper  water.  Two  others  immediately  started  to 
crawl  down  the  slope,  and  one  in  about  fifteen  minutes,  the  other  in 
about  half  an  hour,  had  crawled  over  the  ledge  into  water  3  dm.  deep, 
where  'they  both  remained  stationary.  The  sixth  remained  attached,  and 
in  three  honrs  had  crawled  2  dm.  parallel  to  the  shore,  keeping  at  the 
same  depth.  The  n^  morning,  twelve  hours  later,  it  had  disappeared, 
and  of  course  could  not  be  recognized  in  the  deeper  water. 

On  Angust  4  two  shells  of  Limnaea  appeared  in  the  sbaDow  zone,  bat 
it  is  not  known  whether  they  drifted  or  crawled  up.  They  were  there 
at  least  three  hours.  After  they  were  last  observed  a  fresh  breeze 
sprang  up  from  the  east  and  the  slight  wave  action  caused  by  it  prob- 
ably washed  tbem  down. 

The  level  of  the  lake  varies  somewhat  with  the  direction  and  inten- 
sity of  the  wind,  so  that  in  front  of  the  camp  a  strip  of  beach  up  to 
5  dm.  in  width  may  or  may  not  be  covered  with  water.  The  smaller 
shells,  Phyaa  nayii  Tapp.  and  Physa  sp.,  live  in  this  zone  in  spite  of  the 
fact  that  they  are  sometimes  out  of  water.  So  far  as  observed  they  are 
never  exposed  for  any  considerable  length  of  time,  so  that  they  do  not 
become  dry.  Then  again  the  weathering  of  the  rock  has  left  bowl-shaped 
hollows  a  centimeter  or  so  across  and  about  the  same  depth,  and  the 
snails  usually  get  into  them. 

To  summarize,  the  known  facts  bearing  on  the  distribution  of  these 
four  species  are  as  follows: 

1.  .Their  lower  limit  is  4.5  to  5  dm.  depth  of  water,  governed  possibly 
by  the  water-pressure  or  the  food  supply. 

2.  The  upper  limit  is  for  Limnaea  stagnalis  and  Limnaea  emarginata 
l.B  dm.  of  water,  for  Phyaa  sayii  and  Physa  sp.  the  shore-line.  The 
cleaner  the  rock  and  the  less  the  wave  action  the  shallower  the  water 
which  they  may  inhabit. 

3.  Their  horizontal  distribution  is  controlled  by  (a)  full  exposure 
to  the  sun;  (b)  a  rock  bottom;  (c)  a  certain  minimum  of  wave  action. 

But  two  species  of  insects  were  collected  which  should  properly  be 
eoDsidered  here,  caddice  flies  and  stone  flies.  The  larva  cases  of  the 
caddice  flies  were  collected  only  in  the  outlet  of  a  small  stream 
emptying    into    Rock    Harbor,  in    1 — 1.5    ni.    of   water    (No.    163    or 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  03 

164),  bat  tbe  iinagOB  were  common  all  along  the  diore  of  the  lake,  ee- 
pecially  on  the  grarel  beaches.  One  (No.  192)  was  taken  on  the  boat 
about  2  km.  off  the  south  shore  of  the  island.  Stone  flies  were  also  fre- 
quently collected  along  the  beaches,  where  they  came  op  to  breed.  They 
were  most  numerous,  however,  on  steep  or  even  vertical  cliffs  with  SKiuth- 
em  exposure  (Nos.  24,  80).  Near  the  entrance  to  Conglomerate  Bay 
(Fig.  2)  they  were  seen  collected  in  such  a  place  by  thousands.  The 
water  there  was  at  least  4  m.  deep. 

A  few  hair-worma,  Qordvas  aquaticm  (L.)  (No.  207),  were  collected 
in  2  to  3  dm.  of  water  on  the  rock  beach  {Fig.  30)  in  front  of  the  camp 
on  Siskowit  Bay. 

The  various  tnussels  collected  in  Biskowit  Lake  and  elsewhere,  even 
though  Bometimes  associated  with  lAmnaea  stagtMilU,  belong  rather  to 
the  associations  of  the  smaller  inland  lakes. 

///.     The  Inland  Lake. 

The  smaller  lakes  are  mainly  surrounded  by  tamarack  swamps,  with 
the  vegetation  showing  the  characteristic  zones,  certain  ones  of  which,  aa 
the  rushes,  water-lilies  and  pond  weeds,  live  in  the  lake  itself.  The  bot- 
tom is  covered  with  peaty  mud  or  with  slime,  and  the  wave  action  is 
never  severe  enough  to  interfere  with  the  growth  of  either  faana  or 
flora.  Id  many  of  the  smaller  lakes,  in  fact,  the  water  lily  zone  is  so 
wide  and  the  open  water  so  restricted  that  there  is  practically  no  wave 
action  at  all  (Fig.  46) .  Accordingly  both  fauna  and  flora  are 
richly  developed  both  in  species  and  individuals.  The  fauna  may 
be  roogbly  classified  into  several  groups  according  to  their  habitat  in 
order  to  facilitate  description.  The  interrelations  of  the  different  spec- 
cies  are  complex  in  the  extreme,  and  of  course  could  not  be  properly 
worked  out  in  such  a  short  time  as  tbe  lakes  "were  under  observation. 

a.  The  Faiimi  of  tlic  Bottom.  In  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  [Figs.  18-22 
and  in  sheltered  places  in  Siskowit  Lake  several  species  of  shells  live  on 
the  bottom  in  sand  or  mud  and  at  a  depth  of  from  3  dm.  to  1  or  2  m. 
Planorhis  trivolvis  Say  (No.  135)  lives  in  the  shallower  water,  prefer- 
ably in  mud.  It  is  nowhcK  abundant,  but  was  collected  in  both  lakes. 
One  specimen  only  was  found  in  Sumner  Lake  in  a  little  pool  with  mod 
bottom.  Shells  were  commoner  on  the  shoreward  side  of  an  island  in 
Siskowit  Lake,  on  a  bottom  composed  of  sand  and  mud.  They  were 
well  buried  under  the  sand  and  the  majority  of  the  shells  were  dead. 

Mussel  shells,  especially  Anodonta  marginata  Say  and  Anodonta 
grandis  Lea,  were  common  in  all  the  smaller  lakes  and  at  the  upper 
end  of  Rock  Harbor.  They  were  most  abundant  in  the  deeper  water 
with  a  sand  bottom,  particularly  where  there  was  comparatively 
little  v^etation.  In  certain  sheltered  bays  at  the  upper  end  of  Sisko- 
wit Lake  they  were  especially  numerous.  Muskrats  carry  them  to  the 
shore  to  eat,  and  leave  the  empty  shells  in  heaps,  which  were  conspiou- 
ooe  sights  along  most  of  the  lake  shores.  In  Sumner  Lake  live  shells 
were  very  scarce,  but  the  piles  of  dead  ones  on  the  bank  testified  to  their 
-former  abundance. 

At  the  upper  end  of  Bock  Harbor  some  small  shells,  Planorbia  Btonn'- 
natus  Sav  (89),  Planorbia  exacutua  say  (89),  PUmoriia  parvus  Say. 
<89,  103,*164),  Talvata  tricarinata  Say  (89,  163),  Valvata  sincera  »^4c 


64  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

landeri  Dall  (8ft.  163,  164),  AmnicoJa  hmtrica  Pile,  (89,  163,  164),  and 
Piaidium  sp.  (163,  164),  and  AmphipodH  were  dredged  from  a  depth  of 
1.5  to  2  metera  near  the  mouth  of  a  Bmall  stream  {Fig.  22)  where  the 
bottom  was  thickly  covered  with  email  twigs  and  other  coarse  vegetable 
debris.  From  the  same  place  the  caddice  fly  larvae  were  obtained,  as 
mentioned  previously.  The  same  fauna  was  collected  in  the  stream  it- 
self,  but  only  near  the  mouth,  where  the  water  was  deep,  the  current 
slow,  and  the  conditions  io  general  much  like  those  of  a  lake.  May  flies 
probably  breed  in  similar  places.  No  larvae  were  seen,  but  a  few  imagos 
were  collected  (No.  178). 

The  fauna  of  the  bottom  shows  a  connection  through  the  presence  of 
Pisidium  sp.  in  the  last  case  with  that  of  the  small  streams  in  the 
tamarack  swamps  and  with  that  of  the  brooks,  like  the  outlet  of  Siskowit 
Lake.  The  accumulation  of  vegetable  debris  and  the  more  restricted 
amount  of  water  are  both  approaches  toward  the  conditions  in  the  former 
places.  In  Siskowit  Lake,  where  Planorbis  campanuJatus,  PUinorJiis 
bicarinatus  royalenais  and  Anodonta  grandw  footiana  were  associated 
with  lAmnaea-  stagnalis,  another  transition  was  shown  between  the  faunas 
of  the  inland  lakes  and  the  larger  lakes  as  tvpifled  by  Lake  Superior 
itself. 

b.  The  Free  Fauna  of  the  Water.  No  species  were  observed  eicept 
fishes  and  leeches.  The  latter  were  abundant  in  Sumner  Lake,  especially 
among  the  water  lilies  and  in  the  shallow  water  along  the  shore. 

c.  The  Fauna  of  the  Surface.  Hardly  belonging  properly  to  this- 
group  weiv  the  small  shells,  Limnaca  catascopium  Say  (220),  Physa  sp. 
(220,  221),  VaJvata  aincera  nylanderi  Dall  (220),  and  Amnicola  limoaa 
Say  (220),  found  abundantly  on  the  under  side  of  water  lily  leaves.  I^ir 
distribution  is  directly  controlled  by  that  of  the  water  lilies,  that  is, 
near  the  shore,  and  in  the  larger  lakes  only  in  the  sheltered  bays.  Pro- 
bably a  third  of  the  leaves  had  one  or  sometimes  two  shells  attached 
to  them.  Water  striders,  Gerris  remigis  Say  (No.  96),  were  abundant, 
usually  near  shore  in  the  water  lily  zone,  but  occasionally  out  in  the 
open  water.  Whirligig  beetles,  Oyrinua  wu'nwtHs  Fabr.  (No.  219)  were 
also  common,  but  not  abundant  on  the  smaller  lakes.  In  the  sheltered 
bays  of  Siskowit  Lake  they  collected  in  immense  awarma,  keeping  mostly 
near  the  shore  among  the  water  lilies  and  under  overhanging  brush. 
Doiiacia  proxinia  (Nos.  171,  184)  and  Donacia  cincticonii-a  (Nos.  171, 
175)  were  abundant  on  Sumner  Lake,  resting  on  the  water  lily  leaves. 
When  alarmed  they  would  fly  a  short  distance  cltwe  to  the  water,  making^ 
a  little  trail  Miind  them,  and  alight  on  another  leaf. 

d.  The  Free  Aerial  Fauna.  Dragonflies  of  several  species  are  abun- 
dant along  all  of  the  lakes.  They  usually  keep  close  inshore  or  over 
the  water  lilies,  aud  fly  regularly  in  patrols  around  the  lake,  searching 
all  the  time  for  insects  but  keeping  up  a  uniform  rate  of  speed.  Aeachna 
sp.  was  probably  the  most  abundant,  and  associated  with  it  were 
Enallagma  hageiU  Walah  and  Leucorkinia  proxima  Anth.  The  butterfly 
Argynnis  atlantia  Edw,  also  occurs  (No.  169). 

The  inland  lakes  may  be  regarded  as  small  detached  portions  of  the 
main  lake,  cut  off  from  it  by  the  lowering  of  the  level  of  the  latter. 
Since  they  are  composed  of  stagnant  water  with  little  or  no  wave  action,, 
where  oi^nic  material   may  accumulate  in  quantity,  they  support  a 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  66 

different  fauna  and  their  genetic  development  is  along  a  different  line, 
culminating  however  in  the  climax  type  or  balsam-spruce  forest.  The 
only  intervening  stage  is  the  tamarack  swamp. 

IV.     The  Tamarack  and  Arhor  Vitae  BwampH. 

Nearly  every  inland  lake  in  the  Isle  Royale  region  ia  wholly  or  partly 
surrounded  by  tamarack  Bwaiiips,  {Figs.  1^,  19,  22,  il,  47,  i8).  It  is 
not  necessary  to  discuss  the  general  stnictnre  of  the  vegetation,  since 
that  is  described  elsewhere  in  this  report,  but  il  may  be  indi- 
cated here  that  the  ground  cover  is  a  spongy  mass  of  sphagnum  covered 
with  a  dense  growth  of  erieaceous  shrubs,  such  as  Cassandra  and  Ledum, 
and  that  the  trees  are  almost  entirely  tamarack  and  black  spruce.  The 
forest  cover  is  open  enough  to  allow  ample  illumination.  Tamarack 
swampe  may  be  found  of  all  ages,  from  those  developing  at  the  edge  of 
a  lake  to  those  which  have  completely  covered  the  lake  and  are  now 
dying  as  an  association.  Their  surface  is  generally  level,  the  older  parts 
being  successively  somewhat  higher  as  they  are  built  up  by  the  accumu- 
lations of  peat. 

When  the  level  is  nearly  that  of  the  lake  the  beds  of  sphagnum  are 
interspersed  by  little  streams  or  pools  of  water,  some  of  them  being 
merely  extensions  of  the  lake  itself,  or  some  of  them  serving  as  inlet 
or  outlet.  The  smaller  ones  have  no  bottom  except  the  sphagnum  itself, 
while  the  larger  have  a  loose  incoherent  bottom  of  slime.  In  the  larger 
of  these  streams  are  found  small  bivalve  shells,  Pisidium  sp.,  embedded 
in  the  slime  at  the  bottom  (No.  230;  V-5),  and  other  material;  and  the 
beetles  Baliplus  ruficoUis  DeG.,  Bydropontu  trigtis  Payk,  and  Agabue 
congener  Payk.  (No.  230,  V-5).  In  the  smaller  ones,  which  are  fre- 
quently only  a  decimeter  or  two  wide  and  half  as  deep,  there  is  no 
difference  in  the  vegetation  except  for  a  little  TJtricuIaria  in  the  bottom. 
Animal  life  is  there  very  scarce  (No.  237,  V-5),  J>ut. included  Pisidium 
sp. 

As  the  swamps  become  older  the  water  is  limited  to  small  shallow 
pools,  seldom  more  than  one  decimeter  deep  or  three  or  fonr  decimeters 
wide.  Their  bottoms  are  covered  with  dead  leaves  and  sphagnum,  and 
they  are  usually  densely  shaded  by  the  forest  growth  above.  In  them  are 
found  small  bivalves,  Pisidium  affine  Pterki  (77A,  TflA),  P.  subrotundum 
Sterki  (116,  lf*l.  \»2,  2371,  P.  subrotundum  Prime  (IIC,  237),  and  water 
beetles,  HaUplus  ruficoUis  l)eg.  (No.  HC,  1-4)  and  8cutopterus  homii 
Cr.  (No.  181,  144).  The  latter  is  restricted,  so  far  as  observed,  to  this 
single  habitat  in  the  pools  in  tamarack  and  arbor  vitae  swamps.  Dragon- 
flies  are  the  principal  aerial  insects,  but  are  not  abundant.  A  fly  (No. 
240,  V-5)  was  taken  on  the  flowers  of  ^olidago  neglecta. 

In  still  drier  swamps,  where  there  is  no  longer  any  standing  water, 
{Fig.  14).  ants  are  a  characteristic  feature  of  the  fauna.  They 
build  huge,  dome-shaped  nests,  4  to  7  dm.  high,  composed  within  of 
sphagnnm  and  other  vegetable  debris,  and  smoothly  covered  on  the 
ontside  with  leaves  of  Cassandra,  doubtless  to  prevent  drying.  Formica 
adamtii  Wheeler  (No.  115,  I-fi)  seems  to  be  the  only  species  concerned, 
and  a  nest  from  which  the  collection  was  made  was  photographed.  No. 
114,  taken  at  the  same  time  from  a  similar  nest,  has  been  identified 


66  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

as  FomUca  dryag  Wheeler,  sa^neBting  a  poBslble  cfmfnsiQD  of  the  nnm- 
bera.  No  other  inaects  were  observed  except  the  omnipreeent  black-flie« 
and  mosquitoes. 

At  the  bead  of  the  numerous  fjord-like  inlets  along  the  shore  there 
is  usually  a  swamp  tract  extending  for  some  distance  inland  in  the 
same  direction  aa  the  inlet  itself.  The  level  is  but  little  above  the  lake 
itself,  but  there  is  no  permanent  standing  water  or  lakes  as  in  the 
tamarack  swamps.  The  standing  water  is  limited  to  small  scattered 
pools,  seldom  more  than  a  meter  acrose,  and  the  forest  cover  is  pre- 
vailingly of  arbor  vitae.  The  shade  is  exceedingly  denee,  and  the 
ground  is  covered  with  tangles  of  underbrush  and  fallen  logs.  The 
fauna  is  accordingly  reduced  to  a  minimum,  and  the  few  forms  col- 
lected were  all  dredged  from  the  leaf-covered  bottoms  of  the  small 
pools,  and  included  bivalve  shells,  Pyramidula  striatella  (Anth.),  and 
PisidUtm  subrotundum  Bterk.  (No.  ISS),  and  water  beetles,  Scutopterua 
homii  Cr.  (No.  182).    The  latter  were  very  scarce. 

Paunistically  the  arbor  vitae  swamp  is  very  cloaely  related  to  the 
later  stages  of  the  tamarack  swamp,  as  a  comparison  of  the  species  will 
show.  At  the  ends  and  around  the  sides  the  swamp  grades  imper- 
ceptibly into  the  balsam-spruce  forest. 

In  connection  with  the  swamps  must  be  mentioned  the  fauna  of  the 
small  rapidly  flowing  streams  leading  ont  of  the  inland  lakes.  The 
bottom  is  usually  rock  or  gravel,  and  the  swift  current  prevents  the 
accumulation  of  organic  debris.  In  Benson  Brook  on  the  north  side 
of  Rock  Harbor  in  stiil,  deeply  shaded  places  were  dredged  up  (No.  149) 
Pallifera  dorsaUs  (Binn.),  Pyramidula  altemata  (Say),  PyramidtiUi 
striatella  (Anth.),  Zonitoides  exiguus  (Stimp.)  and  Physa  sp.  In  the 
outlet  from  Siskowit  Lake,  in  small  pools  5-15  cm.  deep  witb  a  bottom 
of  slime  covered  with  loose  pebbles,  were  collected  several  shells  (No. 
238),  Phyaa  sp.,  Pisiduim  media>iitm  Sterki,  P.  subrotundum  Sterki, 
and  MuscuUum  8cc«rw  (Prime).  The  cnrrent  where  these  were  col- 
lected was  very  slow.  In  the  more  swiftly  flowing  water  nothing  could 
be  found. 

Owing  to  the  peculiar  geological  structure  of  the  Island  the  swamps 
have  a  generally  oblong  form  with  approximately  parallel  sides.  Along 
the  sides  the  swamps  grade  imperceptibly  into  the  balsam-aprnce  forest 
(Fiff.  43),  and  on  the  ends  as  well,  though  there  the  transition 
is  more  gradual  and  the  facies  are  usually  separated  by  an  intermediate 
zone  marked  by  dense  thickets  of  alder. 

Y.    The  Oravel  and  Sand  Beaches. 

The  gravel  beaches  are  found  in  but  certain  places  along  the  shore 
(Fiy.  1),  where  the  slope  of  the  banks  and  the  action  of  the  waves  permit 
the  formation  of  the  gravel  deposits.  Optimal  conditions  are  found 
at  the  heads  of  the  numerous  inlets  or  coves;  such  as  Conglomerate  Bav 
(Fig.  4),  and  Tonkin  Bay,  already  described,  and  many  other  similar 
places.  They  also  occur,  however,  along  the  shore  of  the  lake  itself, 
where  the  wave  action  is  at  its  minimum.  Their  distribution  appears 
to  be  controlled  principally  by  the  slope  of  the  bottom,  since  the  gravel 
could  not  be  piled  up  on  slopes  of  too  steep  pitch,  and  they  are  almofltip 


ECOLOay  OF  isle  HOYALB.  67 

Invariably  in  locationa  so  bounded  by  rot^ks  or  Bhore  that  the  waves 
strike  them  always  in  one  direction.  An  instance  of  this  was  seen 
near  the  light-house.  A  smaU  inlet  about  5  m.  in  length  and  width 
opened  towards  an  island.  Waves  struck  it  in  two  directions,  both 
diagonally,  bnt  rebounding  from  the  rocks  eontinned  into  the  inlet  in 
one  direction.  At  its  back  was  a  small  but  typical  beach,  the  only  one 
in  the  immediate  vicinity  and  likewise  the  only  spot  where  the  waves 
always  came  in  the  same  direction.  As  a  consequence  of  this  directive 
action  the  beaches  always  lie  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  'of  wave 
action. 

The  gravel  of  which  they  are  composed  varies  in  size  from  fragments 
as  large  as  one's  flat  to  mere  sand,  but  the  biota  of  the  sand  beaches 
is  so  different  that  it  requires  separate  discussion.  There  is  no  vege- 
tation,-bnt  the  beaches  are  frequently  strewn  with  dry  drift  wood  in 
which  several  kinds  of  fruits,  dead  insects  and  shells  may  be  found. 
The  gravel  is  dry  on  top,  bnt  is  always  moist  at  a  depth  of  one  or  two 
decimeters  or  even  less.  The  broader  beaches  have  full  exposure  to 
tiie  sun,  hut  the  narrower  are  shaded,  and  all  are  bounded  at  the  rear 
by  a  narrow  but  dense  zone  of  alder. 

The  fauna  of  these  beaches  is  limited  in  species,  probably  o«-ing  to 
the  lack  of  food,  although  the  number  of  individuals  is  relatively  lai^. 

Caddice  flies  are  rather  common  rnnning  about  over  the  finer  gravel 
jast  above  the  reach  of  the  waves,  or  sometimes  taking  short  flights 
(No.  10).  Btoueflies  are  associated  with  them;  they  crawl  abont 
Actively  over  the  wet  gravel  near  the  water's  edge  and  do  not  attempt 
to  fly.  They  are  frequently  struck  by  waves  which  merely  wash  them 
a  Mttle  farther  up  the  bank.  A  few  species  of  ants  are  also  common, 
running  over  and  through  the  gravel  (No.  38).  They  prey  on  dead 
-caddice  flies  or  even  on  live  ones  when  they  succeed  in  capturing  them. 
The  most  characteristic  group,  however,  consists  of  several  species  of 
spiders,  which  are  found  in  great  abundance  on  the  coarser  gravel  in 
the  sun  (Nos.  16,  25,  .38,  39,  GO),  Lijcom  pratensia  Bmer.,  Pardosa 
lapidicina  Emer.,  Pardoea  groenlandioa  Thor.,  Eho  latithorax  Keys. 
They  run  with  great  rapidity  and  at  the  least  alarm  crawl  under  the 
rocks,  where  it  is  almost  impossible  to  find  them.  After  the  flrst  alarm 
they  usually  show  themselves  in  10  to  IB  seconds,  but  being  frightened 
again,  they  crawl  for  some  distance  under  the  gravel  and  are  lost 
permanently.  Many  of  them  carry  egg  cases,  and  if  forced  to  drop  them 
they  spin  a  web  which  they  follow  back  in  a  short  time.  These  spiders 
are  very  numerous,  probably  10  or  12  to  every  square  metre  over  all 
the  gravel  beaches. 

Other  insects  observed  were,  a  small  beetle  (38)  crawling  over  the 
■sandiest  part  of  the  beach;  two  spe<:ieB  of  small  beetles  (39)  crawling 
through  the  coarse  sand  and  fine  gravel  at  the  water's  edge;  a  click 
lieetle,  Corymbitea  medianua  Germ.  (41)  crawling  over  sand  in  a  shaded 
place  near  a  rock  cliff;  a  Scarahaeid,  Serica.  vespertitm  Gill,  (43)  ;  a 
beetle,  Macropogon  rufipea  Horn  (60).  Some  fish  worms  1 40)  were 
also  found  buried  3  dm.  deep  in  moist  coarse  sand  under  the  gravel 
lieach  in  front  of  the  light-house.  They  were  above  the  level  of  the 
jiround  water.    Butterflies  and  wasps,  which  were  so  abundant  on  the 


68  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

sand  beaelies,  were  collected  but  once.  The  butterfly,  Pyrameis  cardui 
Linn.  (39)  flew  out  of  the  woods,  rested  a  moment  on  the  gravel,  and 
then  visited  a  dogwood  flower.  The  angle  wasp  (il),  Ammophtla  sp., 
was  seen  flying  low  over  a  small  area  of  sand  near  the  water's  edge  on  a 
gravelly  beacb. 

^me  fossil  beaches  were  observed,  rising  several  meters  above  the 
lake.  The  gravel  was  then  thinly  covered  with  lichens,  and  in  some 
cases  even -supported  a  scanty  growth  of  flowering  plants.  "A  beetle, 
(37)  Leptura  ckrysocoma  Kby.,  was  collected  on  a  rose  in  such  a  place. 

The  contents  of  the  drift  washed  up  on  the  beaches  is  of  some  inter- 
est as  indicating  a  possible  way  in  which  new  forms  might  reach  the 
island.  Here  were  found  Limnaea  atagnalis  (19) ;  a  dead  butterfly, 
Atiogia  plexippus  Linn..  (19)  ;  some  dead  ladybuga,  Anatis  ISpunctaiu. 
Oliv.  (21)  ;  shells  (21)  ;  butterflies  (21) ;  one  snail  shell,  Polygyra  alho- 
labri»  (Say),  badly  broken  but  still  containing  part  of  the  body  (39). 
The  v^etable  drift  (18,  21)  included  cones  or  fruits  of  jack  pine,  balsam, 
arbor  vitae,  and  alder. 

Sand  beaches  are  formed  in  the  same  way  and  under  the  same  condi- 
tions as  the  gravel  beaches  already  mentioned,  but  only  where  the  wave 
action  is  much  reduced  by  distance  from  the  lake.  The  principal  ecologi- 
cal difl'erence  between  the  two  lies  in  the  presence  of  the  sand,  affording 
a  fairly  uniform  surface,  and  a  finer  substratum  in  which  various  species 
may  live  protected  from  predaceoue  ants  and  spiders. 

The  principal  beach  studied  was  at  the  head  of  Conglomerate  Bay, 
(Fig.  ^1,  and  may  be  described  in  some  detail.  The  beach  was  more  than 
100  meters  long,  and  divided  at  the  middle  by  a  small  stream  mnning 
through  it  into  the  bay.  One  portion  was  only  2-6  m.  wide,  and  over- 
hung by  alders.  There  the  sand  was  always  moist,  and  the  fanna  very 
scanty.  The  other  portion  was  10-20  m.  wide,  fully  exposed  to  the  sun, 
and  sloping  very  gently  back  to  the  usual  zone  of  alders.  There  was 
some  drift  wood  scattered  about  over  it. 

A  warm  sunny  open  place  like  this  attracts  many  casual  visitors  from 
the  neighboring  woods.  Three  species  of  butterflies  were  especially  char- 
acteristic. Papilio  tumus  (No.  29)  was  the  most  abundant.  They  flew 
back  and  forth  along  the  beach  at  a  general  height  of  2-3  meters,  occa- 
sionally flying  ont  over  the  water  and  dipping  into  it  now  and  then. 
They  very  seldom  alighted  on  the  sand.  The  red  butterflies  (No.  29) 
hovered  low  over  the  sand  but  when  they  alighted  chose  gi-ass  or  low" 
shrutm  along  the  margin.  No.  29  includes  Pyrameia  h/utUeri  Fabr., 
Fi/rameis  cardui  Linn,  and  Basilarchia  a/rthemis  Dm. 

The  black  butterflies  were  not  common  (No.  29).  They  flew  rapidly 
and  irregularly  over  the  sand  and  the  edge  of  the  water  at  a  height  of 
1-3  m.  and  very  rarely  alighted.  Two  other  casual  visitors  were  ob- 
served bat  not  caught;  a  redwinged  grasshopper  which  flew  over  the 
sand  at  a  height  of  2  m.,  and  dragonflies  which  hovered  over  the  small 
stream.     Both  came  from,  and  returned  to,  the  woods. 

Peculiar  to  the  beach  were  small  blue  butterflies,  Phtfciodes  tharos 
Drn.  (No.  29),  and  two  or  three  species  of  sand-wasps  (No.  31),  includ- 
ing Diodoatus  n,  sp,,  Ammophila  sp.,  and  Santhoaariis  latimamia  Say, 
which  flew  rapidly  over  the  surface  at  a  height  of  about  1  dm.  but  very 
rarely  alighted.     When  dead  they  were    preyed    upon    by    ants.     One 

'8lc 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE   ROYALB. 


or  two  species  of  flies  (So.  31)  (Cynomyia  cadaverina  Desv.)  were  aluo 
commoD. 

Crawling  over  the  sand  were  ants  (No.  30),  spiders  with  eggs  cases, 
PardoBa  groetilandica  TLor.  (No.  3ft),  and  beetles,  Bembidium  cariniila 
Chaud.  (No.  30).  The  latter  were  very  numerous,  and  iuctuded  two 
species.  They  ran  rapidly  and  irregularly  over  the  sand,  and  especially 
the  flue  gravel  just  back  of  the  wet  margin.  When  alarmed  they  try  to 
hide  under  small  pebbles,  or  sometimes  fly  a  short  distance. 

A  dead  shell  of  Limnaea  stagnalis  (No.  32)  was  found  on  the  beach, 
and  a  dead  Polygijra  alholahrift  in  the  small  stream  (32). 

VI.    The  EocJ:  Beach. 

Where  the  slope  of  the  shore  is  steep  or  the  action  of  the  waves  severe, 
gravel  or  sand  cannot  accumulate,  and  the  bare  rock  is  left  exposed. 
The  ecological  conditions  affecting  animal  life  here  are  so  different  from 
those  of  the  gravel  beaches  that  they  require  especial  mention. 

Rising  directly  from  the  wiLter  they  are  naturally  exposed  to  the  full 
force  of  the  waves,  (Fig.  3),  which  dash  upon  them  to  a  considerable 
height,  washing  away  all  loose  particles  and  effectually  preventing  even 
the  most  meager  formation  of  soil.  Beyond  the  reach  of  the  waves,  rains 
and  drainage  water  act  with  greater  or  less  effect  in  the  same  way.  The 
vegetation  is  therefore  limited  to  various  species  of  crustaceous  or 
foliaceous  lichens,  which  are  true  lithophytes.  Even  they  are  absent 
from  the  lower  portions  where  the  wave  action  is  more  continued,  and 
especially  where  the  ice  may  scrape  them  off.  Higher  up  the  procumbent 
juniper  and  Cladonia  appear  and  the  whole  eventually  metres  into  the 
Cladonia  clearing  to  be  described  next.  Some  idea  of  the  zonal  succes- 
sion of  the  different  plants  may  be  gained  from  the  following  table, 
showing  the  heights  of  the  different  zones  on  a  rock  beach  near  the 
Bock  Ifarbor  light-house,  Figs.  6  and  7. 


Zone. 

HelBhi— teet. 

TDtal  Height. 

7  fi.  7  m. 

4  It.  a  la. 

4  ft.  0  in. 
B  ft,  7  In. 
4  ft.  1  in- 

The  first  two  zones,  to  tlie  height  of  twelve  feet  above  the  lake,  are 
included  here  in  the  rock  beach.  Naturally  these  levels  may  vary  with 
different  localities,  being  lower  in  more  sheltered  places. 

Over  the  lower  portion  of  the  beach  the  fauna  is  practically  without 
shelter  or  protection,  and  in  the  zone  of  foliaceous  lichens  shelter  is 
afforded  only  to  very  minute  species.  There  are  sometimes  small  fis- 
sures in  the  rock,  but  only  two  species  were  observed  to  enter  them. 
During  all  or  part  of  the  day  the  beaches  are  exposed  to  the  direct  rays 
of  the  sun,  and  the  rock  consequently  reaches  a  temperature  far  above 
that  ever  reached  bv  the  air. 


0  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1808. 

The  temperatures  observed  on  July  11  may  be  given  as  an  example. 


Time. 

AJr»t4n.lnsun. 

Rock  mirlace. 

Rock. 

51  '  Fhr- 
68"    ■ 
66°    " 
6«-    • 

eS<Bua) 
81  Caluwie) 

,      ^ 

2      in 

M(sun) 

Tbe  absence  of  plant  growth  also  tends  to  limit  the  number  and  char- 
acter of  species  to  predatory  forms,  and  the  number  of  individoals  is 
small. 

A  small  rock  beach  jntted  into  the  lake  near  the  light-house,  antf 
was  at  most  but  one  meter  higb.  Although  sheltered  from  the  waves 
by  an  island,  it  was  still  completely  flooded  by  even  moderate  waves^ 
Most  of  the  surface  was  accordingly  without  vegetation,  but  besides 
tbe  cnistaceous  lichens  there  was  one  species  of  moss,  a  few  plants 
of  harebell,  and  several  tufts  of  gross.  Five  species  of  insects  were  found 
on  this  beach,  four  of  which  were  merely  casual  visitors.  Borne  spiders 
(No.  46),  Pardoaa  groenlandica  Thor.,  wandered  upon  the  rock  from  the 
neighboring  gravel  beach,  but  finding.no  rocks  to  hide  under  they  soon 
left.  Ants  {No.  46),  Formica  dryaa  Wheeler,  were  rather  common,  but 
it  was  easy  to  see  that  they  came  from,  and  returned  to,  the  gravel 
beach.  The  only  food  they  obtained  appeared  to  be  the  remains  of  dead 
caddice  flies.  A  species  of  fly,  Eydrophorus  philombrius  Wheeler  (No. 
46),  was  very  common  on  those  parts  of  the  rock  which  were  constantly 
wet  by  the  waves-  They  were  seldom  seen  over  the  dry  portions,  but  re- 
mained resting  on  the  wet  rocks.  This  fly  was  of  common  occ.urrence 
in  the  uplands  and  will  be  mentioned  also  under  other  headings.  A 
few  stoneflies  (No.  46)  were  found  on  the  wet  rocks  where  the  waves 
struck.  The  only  species  confined  to  the  beach  was  one  species  of  beetle, 
Bembidmm  grapei,  which  ran  over  the  snr&ce,  hiding  from  time  to  time 
in  tufts  of  moss. 

On  a  smaller  rock  beach  exposed  to  the  full  force  of  the  waves  were 
collected  a  spider  (No.  47)  and  an  ant,  Formica  dryas  Wheeler  (No. 
47) ;  a  butterfly  (Xo.  471,  Ba-ailarchia  arthemis  Dru.,  was  also  taken  while 
hovering  over  the  beach. 

On  a  larger  beach  near  by,  the  elevations  of  which  were  given  in  a 
preceding  paragraph,  the  fauna  was  better  developed.  A  jumping  sptd^ 
was  fairly  abundant,  and  was  a  fine  example  of  protective  coloration, 
l)eing  almost  invisible  against  the  gray  rock  backgi-ound.  Another  spider 
(No.  48)  and  red  mites  (No.  48)  hid  under  the  foliaceous  lichens.  A  small 
beetle  (No.  48)  was  abundant,  running  rapidly  over  the  rock,  never 
attempting  to  fly,  but  hiding  in  the  crevices.  A  brightly  colored  red 
and  black  beetle  was  common.  It  ran  rather  slowly  but  flew  easily.  No 
ants  were  seen.  Besides  the  forms  just  mentioned,  which  may  be  con- 
sidered normal  members  of  the  rock  beach  association,  there  was  collected 
a  caddice  fly  (No.  481  and  a  running  spider  (So.  48),  undoubtedly  a 
straggler  from  the  Oladooia  zone  above. 


ECOLOGT  OP   ISLB  ROTALEL  71 

At  other  times  were  collected  on  rock  beaches  ante,  (No.  15)  Cam- 
ponotua  hercvleanua  L.,  carrying  away  dead  eaddice  flies,  and  as  acci- 
dental %'i8itors  a  CitniCT  americana  I-each  (No.  106),  a  butterfly 
(Xo.  107),  Basilarchia  artkemis  Dm.,  and  a  running  spider  (No.  103), 
Lycoaa  pratengia  Eiaer. 

In  connection  with  the  rock  beaches  may  be  mentioned  the  beach 
pools  {Fig.  5),  which  are  depressiODs  in  the  rock  filled  with  water  by  high 
waves.  They  are  naturally  most  abundant  on  flat  or  gently  sloping 
beaches,  and  their  permanency  varies  with  their  size  and  depth,  affecting 
evaporation,  and  with  their  height  above  the  lake,  affecting  the  frequency 
with  which  they  are  filled.  In  those  which  are  permanent  are  found 
shells,  lAmnaea  emarginata  Say  (No.  58),  and  Planorhis  parvus  Say 
(No.  59),  and  a  few  insects,  Rhantua  binotatu$  Harr.  and  Corixa  sp. 
(73,  74,  75).  The  water  beetles  and  water  boatman  are  strongly  atereo- 
tropic,  staying  on  the  bottom  or  in,  crevices,  and  leaving  it  only  to  dart 
qaickly  to  the  surface  for  air. 

VII.    The  Cladonia  Clearing  and  Jack  Pine  Ridges. 

The  elevated  position  of  the  rock  ridges  and  their  physiographic  rela- 
tion to  the  uplands  are  the  two  chief  factors  determining  the  succession 
of  biota  upon  them.  In  reaponse  to  the  rapidity  of  drainage,  and  the 
slowness  of  soil  formation  the  first  plant  life  to  invade  the  rock  beaches 
is  a  lichen  association  composed  to  a  large  extent  of  Cladonia  rangifertTia, 
which  carpets  the  rock  to  a  thickness  of  1  to  3  dm.  With  it  are  associated 
various  xerophilouB  shrubs  and  herbs,  but  no  trees.  Consequently  the 
insolation  is  strong,  and  after  rains  that  water  not  removed  by  mirface 
drainage  is  soon  evaporated.  The  soil  consists  only  of  those  thin  de- 
posits formed  by  the  disintegration  of  the  underlying  rock  and  the 
decay  of  the  vegetation,  and  is  held  in  place  by  the  tufts  of  lichens. 
Such  natural  clearings  in  the  forest  are  frequent  near  the  lake  (Figs. 
6,  7,  9),  either  on  gentle  slopes  but  little  above  the  lake  and  consequently 
of  late  origin,  or  upon  the  elevated  rock  ridges  {Fige.  8,  25,  26),  where 
they  are  of  much  greater  age.  Their  shape  and  size  varies  naturally 
with  the  topography. 

In  these  Cladonia  clearings  has  been  developed  a  very  characteristic 
faunal  association,  rich  in  species  and  in  individuals,  and  especially  dis- 
tinct in  the  number  and  variety  of  insects.  The  fauna  may  be  con-  ■ 
veniently  divided  for  discussion  into  three  groups,  aerial,  terrestrial,  and 
subterranean.  Since  the  latter  is  the  most  nearly  fixed  in  habit,  it  may 
be  described  first. 

1.  Subterranean  Fauna.  In  the  shallow  depressions  and  crevices  of 
the  Tovk{Figa.7,2o,26),&re  thin  soil  deposits  supporting  a  dense  growth 
of  various  plants,  especially  the  Cladonia  lichens,  the  bearberry,  and  . 
dwarf  juniper.  Ants  are  frequent,  running  over  the  surface  and  ex- 
cavating below  it,  but  they  make  their  nests  only  in  thje  deeper  crevices 
or  under  the  densest  growth  of  plants  where  the  depth  of  soil  is  suffi- 
cient to  allow  them  to  make  their  excavations  and  to  conserve  the  mois- 
ture supply.  In  the  crevices  they  are  usually  1  dm.  or  more  below  the 
sorface.  Camjmnotus  Jiercuieanua  L.  (22),  Myrmica  rubra  L.  (61),  and 
Leptothorax  canadensis  Prov.  (63)  are  the  sjjecies  generally  represented. 
The  nests  are  more  frequent  near  the  margin  of  the  rock  clearings. 


72  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

where  the  eoil  is  better  shaded.  A  nest  of  Formica  sanguinea  Latr.  (No. 
72)  vaB  placed  under  a  decaying  limb,  and  the  soil  beneath  it  was 
largely  composed  of  mintite  fragments  of  rotten  wood.  This  ant  has 
two  sorts  of  pupa  cases.  Another  colony,  Leptothorax  canadeneis  Prov. 
(No.  77),  was  also  collected  in  Cladonia  clearings. 

The  lai^est  species  of  ant  (No.  Q2) ,' Camponotus  heroideanus  L.,  is 
found  always  singly,  and  no  nests  were  ever  observed. 

Spiders  also  occur  in  the  looser  soil  deposits,  but  most  of  them  prob- 
ably belong  to  the  snrfaee,  such  as  (Ko.  71)  Lycosa  kochii  Keys,  which 
had  an  egg  case  attached,  although  buried  under  two  cm.  of  soil. 
The  largest  spider,  (No.  67)  Coelotes  sp,  of  which  only  one  specimen 
was  observed,  is  apparently  entirely  subterranean.  It  spins  a  pocket 
just  about  large  enough  for  its  own  body,  and  when  uncovered  does 
not  attempt  to  run,  but  buries  itself  in  the  soil  or  in  crevices.  A  third 
species  was  a  mite  (No.  64),  Rhyncholophut  aimplesf  Bks. 

Other  species  are  found  in  fewer  numbers,  such  as  the  flshworm  (No. 
70),  in  soil  under  bearberry  at  a  depth  of  5  cm.;  a  shell,  Zonitoitlea 
arboreus  Say  (No.  65);  myriapods  (No.  64),  and  a  few  other 
insects,  including  beetles,  beetle  lar^'ae,  and  one  Jassid  (No.  61). 

2.  Terrestrial  Fauna.  Aside  from  the  ants,  which  I  have  included 
in  the  first  group,  shells,  spiders  and  grasshoppers  are  the  most  import- 
ant members  of  this  fauna.  Of  the  former  but  one  species  is  included, 
Polygyra  albolahris  Bay.  It  was  not  seen  alive,  but  their  dead  shells 
are  abundant  on  nearly  every  Cladonia  clearing  as  well  as  the  drier 
forest  covered  ridges  (Nos.  20,  33,  88,  93,  138,  145,  174,  197).  The 
live  ones  are  also  found  in  damper  places  or  even  in  swamps  (No.  113). 

Spiders  were  numerous  especially  in  the  clumps  of  Cladonia,  where 
they  crawled  ovct  and  under  the  mats,  fretjuently  carrying  e(K  cases. 
Three  species  were  ob8er\-ed,  Orwphosa  brumalis  Th.,  Pardoia  atemalis 
Th.,  and  Lpcoaa  kochii  Keys,   (all  No.  22). 

During  the  first  part  of  July  grasshoppers  were  infrequent,  except  the 
wingless  stages,  but  during  the  last  part  of  the  month  and  in  August  they 
were  extremely  abundant.  They  are  not  confined  to  clearings  with  a 
copious  growth  of  Cladonia  or  other  vegetation,  but  are  equally  abundant 
on  the  most  barren  rock-ridges.  Immature  8i>ecimens  of  Chloealtig  coti- 
speraa  Harr.     (No.  22)  were  hopping  over  the  lichens  on  July  6. 

Mature  forms  of  Melanophm  huroni  Blatchl.  and  Circotettix  verrucu- 
latmKby.  (No  44,  35,  108,  131,  132),  were  very  abundant.  They  fly 
well,  making  a  clicking  noise  the  while,  and  very  rarely  leave  the  sunny 
open  ridge.  Chloealtis  cotMpersa  Harr.  (Nos.  143,  144)  was  collected 
in  similar  places  from  Prunus  pcnnsylvanica,  Diervilia,  and  Coptis  tri- 
foUa.  and  the  grasshopper  Melanoplun  alaakanus  Scudd,  (Nos.  146,  147) 
was  taken  on  Onaphalium,  Diervilia  and  grass. 

3,  Aerial  fauna.  The  light  and  warmth  of  the  Cladonia  clearing 
attracted  many  flying  species,  including  the  cicada,  Tihiccn-  rimosa 
Say,  rar.  (44.  i08.'lll)  ;  bees,  Mommctha.  alUfrons  Kby.  (68),  Xanthos- 
arun  latimanvn  Kay  (68,  108),  A',  melanoph^a  8m.  (108);  the  dragon- 
fiics,  Acschna  (No.  69),  Ophiogotnphua  colubrinua  and  Tetragoneuriri 
epinigcra  Say  (132);  the  butterflies,  Papilio  turnua  Linn.  (97),  Ba^il- 
arrhia  arthcmia  IH'u.  (97),  Arj/j/njtM  vtijrinn  Tranier  (97),  B,m\  Argynnift 
atlantig  Edw.   (32),  and  hosts  of  blackflies,  SimuJium  vcniistiim  Say. 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  HOYALK  73 

The  butterflieH,  Baailarchia  arthcmis  Dm.  and  Argynnig  atlantis  Edw., 
are  so  characteristic  of  thefle  clearingB  that  we  knew  them  by  the  com- 
mon Dame  of  "clearing"  butterflies.  The  blackflies  are  abundant,  and 
are  prejed  upon  by  dragonflies,  probably  the  chief  reason  for  the  occur- 
rence of  them  so  far  from  the  swamps. 

Of  particular  interest  was  the  small  fly.  Hifdrophonia  philomhriiis 
Wheeler,  mentioned  before  in  connection  with  the  rock  beaches.  They 
were  nnmerons  over  all  the  clearings,  bat  they  settled  in  especial  abund- 
iince  on  the  moist  newly  exposed  soil  which  I  UDCovored.  It  is  probable 
that  they  do  this  only  for  the  moisture  or  coolness,  but  io  one  case  a 
number  of  them  swarmed  over  the  pupa  case  of  an  ant.  (No.  66). 

Of  especial  interest  was  the  fauna  of  the  large  complex  of  Oladonia 
clearings  just  behind  the  camp  at  Siskowit  Bay  {V,  3),  Figs.  24,  25,  26. 
There  was  a  uniform  gentle  slope  from  the  margin  of  the  bay  back  some 
distance  inland,  on  which  large  areas  were  occnpied  by  the  usual  growth 
of  Cladonia,  juniper  and  bearberry.  The  whole  was  surrounded  and 
intersected  by  balsam  and  spruce  forest. 

Shells  were  quite  rare,  although  a  few  of  the  usual  species,  Polygifra. 
albolahriK  (Say)    (233),  were  collected. 

The  subterranean  species  of  ants  so  common  about  Rock  Harbor  were 
not  observed.  TTiey  were  replaced  by  another  species,  Fomiica  fusca 
K  (223,  224,  226,  227),  which  built  large  circular  flat-topped  nests 
iFig.  28),  a  to  8  dm.  in  diameter,  composed  of  earth  and  vegetable  debris 
and  covered  with  debris  of  balsam  and  spruce  needles.  Two  sizes,  a 
larger  (223)  and  a  smaller  (224),  were  sometimes  associated  in  the 
same  nest.  Many  nests  had  been  almost  completely  destroyed  by  the 
pileated  woodpeckers.  Spiders,  Pardosa  Btemulia  Th.  (No.  225).  were 
frequently  seen  crawling  over  the  ant's  nests.  Other  spiders  crawl  over 
and  through  the  Cladonia,  dragging  egg  cases  behind  them,  and  crawl- 
ing into  boles  and  crevices. 

Grasshoppers  were  abundant,  as  usual.  Borne  short  winged  nymph» 
of  Melanoplus  fasciatus  Burnst-Walk..  (No.  208)  were  taken  in  thickets 
of  Juniperua  nana.  They  usually  hide  down  in  the  juniper  and  will  not 
jump  out  if  frightened,  but  crawl  down  close  to  the  ground,  so  that  they 
are  practically  invisible.  When  once  seen  they  can  be  picked  up  with 
the  Augers.  Sometimes  they  leave  the  clumps  of  juniper  and  jump  or 
fl^y  out  over  the  Cladonia  and  rocks.  These  flights  seldom  exceed  1-2 
m.  in  length,  but  on  one  occasion  one  flew  6  m.  high  and  disappeared 
among  the  balsam  ti-ees.  The  adults  of  the  same  species  (193,  201, 
208,  214),  with  full  length  of  wings,  fly  long  distances  at  a  height  of 
3-7  m.  or  more,  making  the  usual  clicking  noise.  They  alight  only  on 
the  bare  rock  or  on  short  Cladonia,  avoiding  the  other  vegetation.  One 
fiddling  grasshopper,  Camnula  pcUticida  Scudd.  (No.  228),  was  also 
taken  from  mats  of  the  juniper. 

Bumblebees,  particularly  Bombiis  terricola  Kby.  (208),  visited  the 
flowers  of  Diervilla  and  ilelampyrnm. 

Other  bees,  including  Taithredopais  ncbrlloidrs  MrOHl,  Coelioxya 
moesta  Cr.,  Xanthosariis  nn'lanophca  Sm..  and  A',  latimanua  Say,  visited 
the  same  plants. 

A  small  carabid  beetle.  Carabua  aerraiua  Kby.  (No.  208),  crawls  over 
and  through  the  t'ladonia,  foraging.  Leptura  chryaocoma  Kby.  (208) 
was  taktin  in  the  same  locality.  Oi^jlc 

10  ~   "      6 


74  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

The  yellow  clearing  butterfly,  Bas'ilarchia  arthemia  Dpu.  (208),  is 
■very  common,  flying  in  reRiiInr  paths  up  and  down  the  clearing  at  a 
height  of  about  one  meter,  sometimes  alighting  on  the  ground  and  Bome- 
timeH  on  the  flowers  of  Opvlaster. 

IJrocerus  favicornia  Fabr.  and  V.  flavipennig  Kby.  (208,  209,  228) 
were  specially  common.  They  fly  low,  usually  2-3  feet  above  the 
■ground  with  a  moderate  but  uniform  velocity.  They  are  searching  for 
balsam  trees  in  which  they  deposit  their  eggs,  and  were  sometimes  taken 
crawling  over  the  trunks. 

-A  small  brown  wasp  flies  low  over  the  ground  like  an  asilid. 

Asilid  flies,  Aailus  annulattis  Will.  (208),  fly  low,  1-2  ft.  above  the 
-ground,  alight  on  tufts  of  grass  or  Cladonia  and  crawl  down  into  it. 
It  could  not  be  determined  what  they  were  hunting. 

Tliree  species  were  taken  on  the  flowers  of  the  harebell,  Campanula 
rotunifi folia.  They  were  Coelioxi/s  nivrsta  Cr.,  Xanthosanie  mclan^b/x'a 
Sm.  and  X  latimanns  Say.  Insects  were  more  numerous  on  the  flowers 
«r  Opii  taster,  from  which  were  collected  Tenthredopain  neJyclloides  Mf- 
Oill,  ProBopis  sp.,  Argynnig  atlantig  Edw.,  ErisMis  dimitliatus  Wied., 
J'hormia  terracnovae  I>e8v.,  P.  rrgtiia  Meis,  and  ffyetodcsinia  serva  Meia. 

A  wasp,  Eutii/pus  americanus  Cress.  (235),  was  found  backing  over 
'the  ground  dragging  a  spider,  Lycosa  kochH  Keys.  At  brief  intervals 
it  dropped  the  spider  and  ran  rapidly  back  and  forth  looking  for  the 
liole  to  which  it  was  taking  its  capture.  It  seemed  to  have  a  general 
idea  of  its  location,  but  had  to  crawl  always  exactly  to  it.  Having  found 
it,  a  similar  searcli  was  begun  for  the  spider,  and  then  the  journey  was 
resumed  in  a  direct  line  toward  the  hole. 

The  typical  Cladonia  clearings  just  described  were  almost  invariably 
on  the  lower  ridges  or  gentler  slopes.  They  were  surrounded,  and 
eventually  entirely  covered,  by  the  balsam-spruce  forest.  On  certain 
<if  the  higher  or  steeper  ridges,  there  was  another  intermediate  stage  in 
which  the  clearings  were  covered  with  jack  pine.  This  was  due  ap- 
pajently  to  their  position;  the  formation  of  soil  was  slower  and  the 
•drainage  better,  so  that,  even  with  a  considerable  depth  of  soil  they  were 
«till  too  dry  for  balsam  or  spruce,  and  were  accordingly  occupied  by  the 
,xerophile  jack  pine.  In  general  ecological  conditions  they  were  but 
little  ditfereut  from  the  treeless  associations.  The  ground  vegetation 
was,  as  usual,  Cladonia  or  bearberry,  and  the  forest  cover  was  scarcely 
leavy  enough  to  make  much  shade.  But  the  mere  presence  of  trees 
indicates  that  there  was  a  greater  deposit  of  the  soil.  Under  the  bear- 
berry  and  Cladonia,  the  soil  was  quite  thin,  but  there  were  more  loose 
rocks,  and  larger  and  deejter  Assures,  which  were  fllled  with  soil.  The 
effect  on  the  fauna  was  to  increase  the  number  of  subterranean  species 
and  diminish  the  number'  of  aerial  forms. 

In  the  soil  deposits  up  to  5  cm.  deep  there  is  practically  no  animal 
life,  although  ants  crawl  over  the  surface.  Nests  of  Lasius  niger  h.  are 
mmmon  in  crevices  and  under  loose  stones  at  a  depth  of  1  dm,  or  more 
'|No8.  79.  82).  A  nest  of  Lasiiut  niger  L.  (No.  83)  was  excavated  under 
tand  at  the  side  of  a  large  stone.  The  stone  formed  the  roof  of  shallow 
"excavations  where  the  pupae  were  stored,  and  the  vertical  wall  of  earth 
at  the  side  was  honeycombed  with  rounded  passages  1-2  cm,  high,  2-4  cm. 
liroad,  .and   separated   by    thin   partitions.     Under   larger  stones  their 

D,  _,    i..C0CH^Ic 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROYALE.  7S 

nests  may  be  built  at  less  depth,  as  one  of  Forinica  fuaca  L.  (No.  100> 
at  a  depth  of  4  cm.  These  looae  i-ocks  tend  to  conserve  the  moisture 
just  as  do  the  crevices. 

Beetle  lairae  are  rarely  found,  owing  to  the  abundance  of  ants  which 
feed  upon  them.  Tliey  occur  under  rocks  or  in  the  deepest  soil  deposit* 
where  the  moisture  is  conserved.  (Kos.  80,  82,  102.)  No.  102  contains, 
two  species  of  larvae,  one  a  Cistelid,  the  other  Draitcrivg  sp.  The  latter 
when  collected  had  been  captured  by  an  ant,  FoiTnica  fusca  L.  (No- 
102).  A  dead  beetle,  Dipolataxis  liberta  (103),  was  collected  under  aflat 
rock. 

Spiders  are  abundant,  especially  Draaaua  neglectus  Keys  (No.  101)> 
Cicurina  arcuata  Kej-s  (No.  102),  and  Lycoga  pratcnsia  Emer.  (103). 
The  former  builds  a  small  pocket-like  web  2  by  3cm.  in  cavities  under 
rocks,  at  a  depth  of  about  1  dm.  Spider  egg  cases  were  frequently  found 
under  stones  or  in  rotten  wood  (No.  102). 

Myriapods  were  rarely  seen.  They  seem  to  have  regular  runaways 
excavated  through  the  wood  or  soil  (No.  103).  A  dead  caterpillar  was- 
also  found  under  a  rock  (No.  102). 

Besides  the  numerous  dead  shells  of  Polygyra  alholaVris  Say  (Nos.  23,. 
27,  81,  187)  which  are  common  on  the  ground,  especially  near  dead 
1<^,  others  were  taken  below  ground.  They  occur  at  a  depth  of  1-2  dm. 
under  angular  rocks,  ov  at  a-  less  depth  under  larger  flat  rocks.  In 
either  case  their  presence  seenii*  to  be  controlled  hy  the  moisture  (Nos- 
81,  102).  Other  shells  were  also  rather  common  under  rocks,  especially- 
flat  ones  at  a  depth  of  1  dm.  or  less  (81).  This  single  collection  in- 
Huded  Pjframidvla  cronkheitei  anthont/i  Pils.,  Zonitotdes  arboreus  Say, 
yitrea  binnojana  (Nise),  Strobilops  vtrgo  (Pits,).  Under  angular  rocka 
down  to  a  depth  of  1.5  dm.  Pjfrtimittula  croiikheitei  anthon^/i  (Pils.)  and 
Zonitoidcn  arboreus  (Say)  were  foimd.  There  are  very  rarely  more 
than  one  under  each  stone.  Most  of  them  were  dead,  and  the  shells 
were  fiequently  broken,  but  a  few  were  alive.  At  but  one  place  were 
they  associated  with  a  Polygyra.  and  in  this  case  the  Polygyra  wa« 
sealed  with  a  merabnine  across  the  orifice  and  was  probably  still  alive. 
No  shells  were  ever  found  under  i-ocka  with  ant's  nests. 

One  jiynping  spider,  Lycota  pratemis  Kmer,  (103),  was  caught  on  a 
dead  jack  pine  tree.  0  dm.  from  the  ground. 

The  fly  {HydrophO'rug  philombrius  AVheeler)  already  observed  on 
beaches  and  clearings  was  again  common.  Ordinarily  they  fly  about 
near  the  surface  in  the  sunniest  places,  alighting  on  the  ground  or  od 
low  plants.  As  soon  as  any  moist  soil  is  exposed  they  congregate  on 
it  in  numbers,  crawling  over  the  surface,  into  ant  burrows,  and  evea 
apparently  attempting  to  eat  the  ant  pupae.  One  species  of  ant  was, 
seen  catching  them. 

Among  other  insects  were  bumblebees,  Bombiis  sp.  (23),  visiting  the- 
flowers  of  Dipri-^illa-  dU-'rvilla ;  grasshoppers  Circotrttij"  rcrriiculatug  Kby.. 
(27);  cicadas,  Tibiccn  rhnosa  Sny,  var.  (28,  84),  fi-equent  in  the  pine 
ti-ees. 

nil.     The  Balsam-Spruce  Foirat. 

The  ultimate  tendency  of  all  plant  associations  on  Isle  Royale  is: 
toward  the  balsa  m-spnice  foi-est.  The  succession  is  Hmuetimes  direct, 
Hometimes   indirect;   sometimes   rapid,   as   upon   the   smaller   Cladonia 


76  MICHIGAN   8URVBT,    1908. 

clearings;  Bometimefl  slow,  as  upon  the  jnck-piae  ridges.  Just  as  all 
temporary  plant  associations  are  occDpie<l  by  definite  faumis  of  a  com- 
position largely  dependent  on  the  plant  eovering,  so  the  climax  aRsocia- 
tioQ  of  plants  is  also  accompanied  by  a  definite  fauna,  which  mnst  like- 
wise be  regarded  as  the  olimax  auimal  association. 

The  succession  of  the  dense  forest  growth  brings  into  play  a  number 
of  new  ecological  factors,  which  are  not  only  of  the  highest  inxDortancci 
in  controlling  the  animal  life,  but  are  also  retroactive  upon  the  plant 
covering  itself.  In  all  the  associations  heretofore  described  physio- 
graphic changes  have  been  procee<ling  with  comparative  rapiditj-. 
They  may  be  due  to  wave  action,  drainage,  elevation,  rock  disintegra- 
tion or  soil  formation  as  direct  agents,  or  to  changes  in  the  soil  com- 
position, soil  moisture,  light,  or  heat  through  the  indirect  agency  of 
the  vegetation.  Torresponding  to  the  wide  diversity  in  physical  con- 
ditions there  has  l>een  developed  a  fauna  of  many  ai)ecie8  adapted  to 
many  different  modes  of  living.  Through  the  agency  of  the  forest 
cover  the  light  is  reduced  to  a  constant  minimum,  the  temperature  js 
made  more  uniform,  the  soil  becomes  of  uniform  character  throughout, 
and  the  moisture  is;  kept  nearly  constant.  Indirectly  the  ditfusie  light 
is  normally  too  weak  to  allow  the  growth  of  a  ground  cover  of  herba- 
ceous plants  BO  that  the  variety  of  food  supply  is  reduced.  In  short, 
the  change  in  from  lipferc^eneity  of  ecological  conditions  lo  homo- 
geneity, and  the  number  of  species  varies  diii?ctly  with  the  heterogeneity 
of  the  habitat.  This  is  true  not  only  for  Isle  Royalc,  but  for  any 
biotic  association.  Here,  however,  the  homogeneity  is  esjiecially 
marked,  because  two  species  alone,  the  balsam  ftr  and  the  white  spmce, 
are  dominant  throughout. 

The  soil  in  the  halHam-spnice  forest  is  a  damp  closely  packed  leaf 
mold,  sometimes  deep,  somcliines  shallow  over  the  rocks,  and  com- 
posed of  decaying  balsiim  and  spruce  needles,  mixed  with  decaying 
sticks  and  interwoven  with  fungus  mycelium.  When  the  forest  is  not 
so  dense  asijen  and  lurch  trees  may  be  growing,  and  their  leaves  also 
mix  in  the  mould.  In  such  phues  tliei-e  may  1h'  a  very  thin 
ground  cover  of  Anttr  miicrojtltiiUus.  Liunaca  amcricntia  and  Pyrola 
rhUtrantho:  otherwise  the  soil  is  without  cover.  Above  this  rises 
the  dense  growth  of  trees,  the  younger  ones  and  the  lower  branches 
stunted  or  dead  from  lack  of  sufficient  light. 

The  insect  fauna  is  composed  almost  entirely  of  auhterranean  species, 
all  few  in  number,  and  mostly  colorless.  A  few  species  of  spiders  are 
seen,  and  a  minute  (^ollembolau,  Tomocnua  mfinr  Bourl.  (Xo.  140). 
Two  sjK'cies  of  niyriaidida  { No.  14(1)  ai-e  ralher  abundant  in  the  mould, 
one  other  larger  sj)e<'ics  was  (teen  once  (So.  140),  aud  an  Eiichytraid 
earthworm  (Xo.  140),  A  few  sjwcies  of  small  sheila  are  rarely  found 
at  dejilhs  of  alMHit  3  cm.  or  sometimes  on  the  surface.  They  are  Pi/m- 
iiiielitld  HtritiUlUi  (. \.iith.), ■  Zom'tuidca  aiboixuH  (Say),  Vitna  hiiiiici/ana 
iXise),  and  Anri/duii  sp.   fllO), 

There  are  no  anls  except  a  large  hiack  species  which  forages  singly 
over  the  surface,  ('ampoiiotnit  hrrculcaiiiis  Ij.  (No.  140),  A  single 
black  f'arabid,  Vatthjm  !/rrg(triiiiiH  Say  (No.  140.  2^G),  also  runs  over 
the  surface  and  hides  under  old  balsam  cones. 

A  few  spocies  of  flying  insects  occur,  especially  mosquitoes,  and  wheu 


BCOLOOT  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  77 

the  fresh  mould  is  turned  over  a  few  of  the  tnoistDre-lovitift  flies. 
Hydrophorus  philomhriva  Wheeler,  appear  and  rest  ou  the  moist  ex- 
posed surface. 

The  trees  themselves  shelter  a  more  varied  population.  Most  of  the 
Buprestids  and  Cerambycids  caaght  iu  the  tent  proltabl.v  came  from 
the  forest.  The  dead  trees  of  balsam  or  spnioe  are  attarked  b,v  wood- 
boring  larvae,  which  construct  a  network  of  chambers  just  between 
the  wood  and  bark.  Borne  of  these  turn  into  the  wood  uud  extend 
to  the  center,  following  a  longitudinal  or  tangential  path  for  most  of 
the  way.  These  holes  ma,v  be  filled  with  dust  part  of  the  way,  but 
the  frreateet  portion  in  empty.  They  arc  about  3  by  5  cm.  iu  diameter, 
of  an  elliptical  shape,  but  at  the  ends  sometimeit  widen  out  into  cham- 
bers a  couple  of  centimeters  broad.  Two  species  of  lanae  occupy  these 
burrows  (Xo.  205).  and  in  one  was  found  a  small  spider,  A$nanrobhta 
benneiti  Blk.  (Xo.  205). 

Tinder  the  loose  bark  of  trees  which  have  decayed  further  spiders, 
Atnaurobiiis  hcnnctti  Blk.  (Xo.  205),  frequently  build  their  webs.  A 
beetle.  Calalhus  arhvna  I-e  O,  (No.  li'2),  forages  here  for  food,  and 
in  one  case  a  shell  (142)  was  tnlipu.  A  nest  of  Formk-n  miHt]vineii 
Tjatr.  (No.  78)  was  found  in  the  rotten  wood  of  a  fallen  tree,  hut  the 
ants  probably  foraged'  over  a  rock  clearing  near  by  rather  than  in  the 
forest.  Tn  prostrate  decaying  logs  the  ftinna  is  not  different  from 
that  of  the  leaf  mold,  and  the  Ranie  BpecicB  wei-e  collected. 

A  number  of  tlie  ninshrooma  of  the  genus  Ph'iimtiiti  were  collected 
on  dead  trees  and  they  were  inhabited  hy  large  numbers  of  lieetles* 
(220)  Tritoimi  thorarira  Sa\',  T.  nuifiv  T-w..  lioh'tohiitu  riiK'ticotlis  Say, 
and  (Irophaoia  sp. 

IX.     Artifivial   VU'urimju. 

The  clearing  about  the  <'anipK  Iwth  at  Rock  Harbor  and  at  Siskowit 
Hay  attracteti  many  species  of  in«ectn|  p.irticula Hy  strong  fliers,  sucli 
as  Hymemoptera.  Lepidoptera  and  Diptei-a,  At  Itock  Harbor  Cow- 
parsnip,  Hcifu-lfum  lanatttm,  introduced  in  the  island  some  way,  was 
in  bloom  and  it  atlnicted  a  number  of  s)>ei'iea  of  bees  and  flics. 

In  a  similar  clearing  on  Ibe  north  Hide  of  Km-k  Ifai-bor  a  number  of 
shells  were  collected  from  the  under  side  of  dead  logs  (150).  iSome 
of  these  were  observed  at  no  other  pbu'c,  Tlicy  included  Polygyra 
albolabri$  (Kay).  Ai-anthhiiila  haiita  (Say).  HifuUina  iappaniana  (C. 
B.  Adams),  XoniioUh-s  arbonti  (Say),  J'l/raiiiidiila  nimkheiti  anthonifi 
I'ils.,  C'whlicoiHi  lithriru  (.Miill),  and  Vallonia  costata  (SIflller),  A 
plant  of  OiHilufitcr  blooming  in  the  same  clearing  attracted  a  multitude 
of  insects  (14S),  including  the  flies  i'lnlychinia  peltatiis  .\Ieigeu, 
Sfii/rphvs  urniiaUg  WilJiston,  HiihaiTiifihoriu  cyliHdrica  Say,  ErixtaJis 
diinidiatus  Weed  and  TcirmoKt'niitt  tirtfiialiK  Ix)ew;  the  bees  Htilictna 
vcrmtii  Lowell.  Xamhomms  latiiiiaiiun  Say,  and  Jtmiibiis  terricola  Kby; 
the  beetle  Lcptura  chn/socoina  Kbv.  and  liic  lepidopfcron  Cuindit  stitiu- 
Tiia  Bd. 

X.     Stniiiiifirj/. 

Prom  the  lake,  repi-ewiiting  the  most  primitive  rbalHtiit(  WiXUWlli^ 
three  line*  of  development  culminating  iu  the  climax  a8»o(;iation :  tirst, 


78  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

through  the  tamarack  swamp  and  peat  bog;  second,  through  the  gravel 
beach  and  arbor  vitae  swamp;  third,  through  the  rock  beach  and 
Oladonia  cleariogB.  Physiographic  forces  have  BOine  direct  part  iu 
causing  the  successive  chaugea  in  ecological  factors,  but  most  of  them 
iire  due  to  the  retroaction  of  the  vegetation  upon  the  habitat.  The  first 
stages  of  the  series  are  marked  by  a  severity  of  conditions  which  limit 
the  fauna  to  a  few  well  adapted  species.  The  intermediate  stages  have 
generally  a  wide  variety  of  conditions,  leading  to  the  development  of 
a  varied  fauna.  The  most  noteworthy  in  this  respect  is  the  fauna  of 
the  Cladonia  clearings.  The  ultimate  or  climax  stage  is  homogeneous 
because  of  the  domiuance  of  a  few  species,  and  the  fauna  is  again  lim- 
ited to  a  few  well  adapted  siwcies. 


Iat4rM4tat* 


Blroh  -  Itmfn 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE   ROYALE. 


THE    ECOLOGICAL   IHSTRIBUTIOX    OF    THE    BIRDS   OF    ISLE 
ROYALE,  LAIvE  SUPERIOR. 

On-O    M'CHEAUY,   AUaifLLTUKAL    EXl'EltlMi:XT   STATION",    GENEVA,    S.   Y. 
I.       I S  TROD  I!  CT I  ON', 

[n  this  report  I  shall  discuns  the  habits  of  the  different  birds  and 
their  relation  to  their  environment  as  found  apon  I«le  Royale.  The 
different  localities  visited  will  be  deBeril>ed,  the  birds  listed  an  found 
in  pach  locality,  and  the  details  of  tht-ir  habitn  and  distribution  de- 
scribed. 

On  account  of  the  limited  time,  I  van  unable  to  examine  a  ler^ 
part  of  the  inland,  but  representative  localities  were  visited,  so  that  a 
general  idea  of  the  bird  life  of  the  island  can  be  grained  from  tbis  re- 
port. For  example,  a  nninher  of  tamarack  swamps  were  visited  and 
(^rtain  birdn  were  found  in  each  of  these;  it  therefore  seems  reasonable 
to  infer  that  these  birds  are  found  in  the  many  other  tamarack  swamps 
which  were  not  visited. 

Observations  were  made  in  five  different  localities  by  members  of  the 
Jliiseum  party,  hnt  only  those  visited  by  the  writer  will  be  described. 
In  connection  with  this  paper  the  "Annotated  List  of  Birds"  ^onld 
be  consulted.    These  localities  will  be  taken  up  in  the  following  order: 

1.  Lighthouse  Peninsnla. 

2.  Trail  to  JlcCargoe  Cove. 

3.  West  End  of  Rock  Harbor  and  Trail  to  Summer  Lake. 

4.  Siskowit  Bay  Region. 

II.      LlOHT-noUSB  MISIXSL'LA. 

This  station  included  the  land  between  Conglomerate  Bay  and  Rock 
Harbor.  The  conditions  in  this  small  strip  of  country  varied  very  much, 
and  on  this  account  it  will  be  divide<l  into  a  number  of  stations  as  fol- 
lows: 

1.     Lake  Superior  and  Beach  (Station  I.  1). 

2    Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest  {Station  I,  2  and  3). 

3.  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps   (Station   I,  4). 

4.  Jack  Pine  Kidge  (Station  I,  5). 

5.  Sphagnum  and  Spruce  Bog  (Station  I,  6). 

6.  Valley  at  Head  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (Station  I,  1). 

J.    Lake  Superior  and  Beach  {Station  I,  1). 

This  station  inclndcd  the  whole  of  Tonkin  and  Conglomerate  Bays 
and  that  portion  of  Lake  Superior  and  Rock  Harbor  which  could  be 
seen  from  the  light-bouse.  The  water  was  deep,  cold  and  contained 
very  little  vegetation.  The  shore  bordering  the  lake  was  composed  of 
jagged,  desolate,  wave-washed    rocks     (Figs  2,  r>),    and    only    in    the 


82  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

most  pn((ft(ed  portions  of  the  ba.VH  and  harbors  were  trees  found 
growing  near  the  edge  of  the  water  (Fig  4) .  This  accounts  for 
the  fact  that  no  sboi-e  birds  or  vegetable  feeding  water  fowl  were  ob- 
served here. 

The  birds  seen  in  this  station  were  as  follows:  Herring  Gull.  Loon, 
American  iferganser,  Hooded  Mergansei-,  Spotted  Sandpiper,  Song  Spar- 
row, Myrtle  Warbler,  Olive-backed  Thrush,  Tniw  and  Osprey. 

The  Herring  Gull  was  the  oni.v  bird  seeu  on  the  water  in  large  iniiii- 
Imtb.  At  almost  any  time  of  the  day  there  wei-e  fifteen  or  twenty  in 
sight,  and  sometimes  they  t-auie  in  large  flocks  to  eat  the  refuse  thrown 
along  the  shore  of  Rock  Harbor  by  the  ftsheriiien.  Seventy-seven  wei-*; 
onv^  counted,  and  occasionally  the  number  was  gi-eater. 

A\'hen  not  feeding  on  the  water  they  passed  the  time  soaring  in  the 
air  or  resting  on  the  bai'e  rocks.  They  seemed  to  pi-efer  soaring  during 
windy  weather.  With  the  head  toward  the  wind  they  would  move  slowly 
upward  and  forward  foi-  some  time,  then  tuni  Ruddenly  and  soar 
away  with  the  wind  at  a  rapid  rate,  then  swing  around  in  a  graceful 
curve  and  again  mount  upward. 

.  The  American  Merganser,  T^oon  and  Hooded  Merganser  were  occa- 
sionally seen  on  the  water.  On  .(uly  27  and  2S  a  female  Hooded  Mer- 
ganser and  six  young  wei-e  observed.  These  ducklings  were  yet  small 
and  could  be  overtaken  with  a  row  boat,  but  when  pui-sued  they  escaped 
by  diving. 

Thus  tt  will  be  seen  that,  excepting  the  Gulls,  water  birds  were  scarce 
and  the  shore  bii-ds  nearly  lacking.  Only  one  shore  bird,  the  Spotted 
Sandpijier,  was  seen  and  that  was  observed  two  or  three  times;  this 
wap  pHibabiy  a  migrant.  The  other  birds  seen  on  the  shore,  were  the 
Crow,  Myrtle  Warbler,  Song  Sparrow,  and  Olive-backed  Thrush.  They 
occasionally  <'ame  from  the  bushes  and  forests  to  feed  there.  Of  these  - 
birds  the  Song  Sparrow  was  seen  the  most  often,  and  almost  every 
morning  could  be  heard  singing  on  the  small  rocky  islets  partially  covered 
with  bushes,  which  lay  just  east  of  the  light-bouse. 

2.     t^itntcr.  a»f!  Balstnn  Forest  [titatioti  /,  3-3). 

In  this  forest  of  spruce,  balsam  and  birches,  there  were  many  low 
rock  ridges  whose  tops  wei-e  almost  destitute  of  soil  and  trees,  thus 
forming  a  long,  narrow,  natural  clearing  of  not  more  than  two  hundred 
yards  in  length  and  from  thirty  to  sixty  yards  in  width  (Fig.  8). 
Near  the  light-house  there  wei-e  five  of  these  ridges  from  thirty  to  two 
hundred  yards  ap;trt:  while  farther  to  the  west  there  were  more  of 
them,  but  they  weie  farther  apart. 

On  account  of  these  openings  in  the  forest,  there  were  many  birds 
here  that  frequented  partial  clearings,  yet  no  birds  that  inhabit  large 
tracts  of  cleai'ed  land,  except  the  Chipping  Sparrow,  which  occurred 
in  the  small  clearing  at  the  light-house. 

The  birds  found  under  these  conditions  were  as  follows:  Red-breast- 
ed Nuthatch,  Chip])ing  Sparrow,  Nashville  Warbler,  Black-throated 
Blue  Warbler,  BlacJt -throated  Green  W'arbler,  Chickadee,  Flicker.  Gold- 
en-crowned Kinglet,  Bay-breasted  Warbler,  Crow,  MjTtle  Warbler, 
Sparntw    Hawk,    Magnolia    Warbler,    Wilson's    Thrnsh.    01i\-e-backed 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROYALE.  83 

Thmsli.  Pine  Siskin,  Purple  Finrli,  White- throated  Spari-ow,  Trpe  Swal- 
low, Barn  Kiiv-allow,  Sharp-shiniM'd  Hawk  and  White-winged  ('i'»)H«l)ilI. 

The  Purple  Finch,  Pine  Siskin,  Sparrow  Hawk.  Sharp-»hinned  Hawk, 
Bay-breaHted  Warbler.  Black-throated  Hlne  Warbler.  Tree  Swallow  and 
Barn  Swallow  were  only  oecasionaily  seen. 

Some  of  the  Warblers  were  fouinion,  and  it  was  interesting  to  note 
the  difference  in  the  localitieK  which  they  frequented.  The  Myrtle 
Warbler  was  most  fi-eqnently  seen  nenr  the  shore.  The  Magnolia  Warb- 
ler frequented  the  small  spruce  and  balsam  treea  but  was  not  seen  on 
the  slioi-e.  The  Black -throated  Oreen  Warbler  was  always  observed 
in  that  part  of  the  .forest  where  there  wei-e  many  hirch  trees,  and  the 
Xashviile  kept  near  the  partial  clearings, 

Xests  of  the  Myrtle  Warbler.  Chickadee.  Go  Idea -crowned  Kinglet, 
Olive-backed  Thrush  and  Chipping  Span-ow  were  found  in  this  locality. 
The  nest  of  the  Myrtle  Warbler  was  foiuid  July  7,  on  a  small  jack 
pine  standing  near  the  edge  of  a  rocky  cliff,  which  rose  perpendicularly 
from  the  water  to  a  height  of  about  twenty  feet.  It  was  composed  of 
small  twigs,  dried  grass  and  pine  needles,  and  contained  four  young 
about  a  week  oid.  \MiiIe  we  wei*  near,  the  old  bird  approaclied  the 
nest  very  cautiously.  It  would  lly  from  ti-ee  to  ti-ee  until  within  about 
tlfty  feet  of  the  nest  and  then  drop  down  near  the  ground  and  fly  low 
until  below  the  nest;  when  leaving  it  flew  along  the  edge  of  the  cliff. 

Oq  the  same  day  a  (lOlden-crowned  Kinglet  was  seen  to  take  a  bit 
of  moss  and  fly  into  a  clump  nf  stunted  spruce  tives  on  a  rock  ridge. 
The  tops  of  the  spruce  were  so  thick  and  busliy  that  it  was  impossible 
to  see  the  nest  from  the  ground,  although  the  tree  was  not  more  than 
twenty-flve  feet  high.  On  climbing  the  tree  a  half  tinished  nest  was 
found  built  mostly  of  gi-een  moss.  By  July  21  the  nest  was  finished 
and  contained  eight  small  eggs.  This  beautiful  mossy  cup  was  alioat 
four  in4'he»  in  diameter  and  of  the  same  depth,  but  the  cavity  contain- 
ing the  eggs  was  still  smaller,  as  the  wall  of  the  nest  was  about  two 
and  a  half  inches  thick  and  lined  with  hare  fur. 

In  fi-ont  of  the  lighthouse  at  the  edge  of  the  bea<-li,  stood  a  small 
fqirace  about  twenty  feet  high,  on  a  hotizontial  limb  of  which  was  the 
nest  of  a  Chipping  Sparrow,  composed  entirely  of  grass.  When  the 
neat  was  found  on  July  5  it  contained  four  young  that  had  evidently 
just  hatched. 

Ad  Olive-backed  Thrush's  nest  was  found  July  S,  in  a  low  limb  of 
a  spruce  that  stood  near  the  shore.  It  was  found  five  feet  from  the 
ground,  composed  of  grass  and  moss,  and  contained  three  very  young 
birds.  The  old  bird  would  not  approach  while  I  was  near  the  nest 
and  was  so  shy  that  the  true  owner  of  the  nest  was  difficult  to  determine. 
Probably  more  iiests  would  have  been  found  had  we  arrived  upon  the 
island  earlier,  as  many  young  were  able  to  fly  when  we  came,  and  several 
immature  Magnolia  Warblers  were  found  at  that  time  in  the  bushes 
near  the  light-faonse. 

Birds  were  more  abnndant  in  this  locality  than  in  any  other  of  the 
same  size.     Why  this  was  true,  I  did  not  determine. 


rfbyGOOgIC 


84  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

3.    The  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps  (Station  I,  4)- 

This  almoBt  impenetrable  swamp  of  cedar  and  tamarack,  situated 
at  tbe  head  of  Tonkin  Bay,  extended  back  abont  a  qnarter  of  a  mile 
toward  the  southwest.  To  cross  this  swamp  was  difficult  on  account 
of  the  fallen  trees  and  numerons  low  branches,  but  a  rock  ridge  extended 
from  the  bay  through  the  middle  of  the  swamp,  almost  to  its  western 
end,  .and  furnished  a  convenient  route  into  it.  This  ridge  in- 
Huenced  tbe  bird  life  of  the  vicinity  because  of  its  different  ecological 
conditions.  It  was  bare  in  places,  but  most  of  it  was  partially  covered 
with  birch,  spruce  and  balsam. 

The  birds  seen  in  this  swamp  habitat  were  as  follows:  Nadiville 
Warbler,  Red-breasted  Nuthatch,  Chickadee,  Black-throated  Green  Warb- 
ler, Haven.  Brown  Creeper,  Yellow-bellied  Flycatcher,  Hairy  Wood- 
pecker, Winter  Wren,  Black-throated  Bine  Warbler,  Flicker  and  Canada 
Jay. 

On  July  11,  nests  of  the  Black-throated  Gre«i  and  Nasliville  Warblers 
were  found  on  the  north  slope  of  the  ridge  within  twenty-five  yards 
of  each  other.  The  nests  of  the  Black-throated  Qreen  was  in  a  cedar  tree 
about  twenty  feet  from  the  ground.  It  was  composed  of  grass,  moss 
and  twigs  and  contained  young.  The  nest  of  the  Xashville  Warbler 
was  in  a!  cavity  in  a  thick  bed  of  moss  wbich  covered  the  face  of  a 
small  cliff  five  or  six  feet  high.  Here,  in  a  soft  nest  composed  of  lichens 
and  lined  with  grass,  were  found  five  young  in  the  down. 

These  two  birds  acted  very  differently  when  one  was  near  their  nest. 
The  Black -throated  Oreen  would  come  within  less  than  ten  feet  of  the 
observer  and  scold  while  moving  restlessly  about  among  the  branches. 
The  ^Nashville  Warbler  was  not  as  bold,  for  it  remained  up  in  the  tree 
tops.  It  would  hop  on  a  branch,  turn  around  a  few  times,  turn  anxious- 
ly toward  the  nest  and  then  repeat  the  performance ;  but  it  never  uttered 
a  sound.  Here  was  one  of  tbe  difficulties  in  judging  what  localities 
birds  preferred.  These  two  birds  nested  on  the  slope  of  a  rock  ridge  and 
fed  in  a  cedar  and  tamarack  swamp.  To  which  did  they  belong?  How- 
ever, judging  from  other  observations,  I  would  say  that  if  the  natnral 
clearing  had  not  been  here  the  N,ashville  Warbler  would  not  have  been 
found,  while  the  Black-throated  Green  might  have  been. 

The  Black-throated  Green,  Black-throated  Blue  and  Nashville  Warb- 
lers, Chickadee,  and  Red-breasted  Nuthatch  were  nearly  always  found 
in  this  swamp,  and  these  were  in  the  more  open  parts  where  the  trees 
were  not  so  close  together.  I  visited  the  thickest  part  of  tbe  swamp 
many  times  without  seeing  a  single  bird. 

4.    Jack  Pine  Itidgc  (Station  I,  5). 

Tills  habitat  was  on  the  north  side  of  Conglomerate  Bay  and  composed 
a  portion  of  the  south  side  and  the  top  of  a  hill  abont  100  feet  high. 
The  aide  of  the  hill  was  dry  and  rocky,  and  was  partially  covered' with 
scattered  aspens  and  clumps  of  jack  pines  (Fig.  13).  Where  there 
were  no  trees  the  ground  was  partially  covered  with  mosses,  lichens, 
bearberries,  golden  i^ods.  etc.  The  top  of  the  hill  was  bare  rock  with 
jack  pines  and  a  few  plants  growing  in  the  crevices.  Occasionally  there 
was  a  small  gully  with  other  tiees  growing  in  it. 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  85 

On  accoant  of  the  desolate  character  of  this  locality  few  birds  were 
found  here.  A  Cedar  Waxwiog's  nest  containing  five  eggB  woe  found 
Jaly  10.  Juncoe  and  White-throated  Sparroivs  were  occasionally  heard 
singing  among  the  jack  pines. 

5.    Sphagnum  and  Spruce  Boy,     (Station  I,  6). 

This  small  bog,  sltnated  on  top  of  the  hill  north  of  Conglomerate 
Bay,  was  covered  witb  sphagnum  moss  and  hnrites  with  sev^al  black 
spmce  trees  scattered  over  it.  There  were  also  several  tamaracks  an*! 
spruce  at  the  edge  of  the  bog.  (Fiff-  M),  The  birds  seen  here  were: 
O  olden -crowned  Kinglet,  White- throated  Sparrow,  Cedar  Waxwing,  ami 
Black-throated  Gi-een  Warbler.  The  Oven  Bird  and  Wilson's  Thrusli 
were  heard  in  the  forest  near  by. 

6.     Valley  at  Head  of 'Conglomerate  Bag   [Vicinity  of  Station  f,  1). 

This  location  included  the  alders  and  the  partial  clearing  at  the 
mouth  of  the  brook  that  emptied  into  the  head  of  CoDglomerate  Ba^r. 
Hie  partial  clearing,  evidently  diie  to  fire,  as  blackened  logs  were  still 
lying  aronnd  on  the  ground,  was  covered  with  weeds,  raspberry  bushes, 
dogwoods  and  clumps  of  small  birches. 

The  birds  seen  here  were :  White-throated  Sparrow,  Canadian  Warb- 
ler, Kedatart,  Flicker,  Winter  Wren,  Chickadee,  Nashville  Warbler,  Mag- 
nolia Warbler,  Olive-mded  Flycatcher,  Olive-liacked  Thrush,  Sparrow 
Hawk  and  Cedar  Wazwing.  The  Bedstavt  and  Magnolia  Warbler  swined 
to  be  restricted  to  certain  parts  of  this  locality.  The  Redstart  was  always 
seen  among  the  alders,  while  the  Magnolia  Warbler  kept  among  a  patch 
of  evergreens  at  the  foot  of  the  hill  on  the  north  side  of  the  habitat. 

III.       TBIAI.  TO    MCr.\ltGOE   COVE. 

This  station  included  the  country  along  the  trail  which  ran  from 
Bock  Harbor  to  MrCargoe  Cove.  This  trail  started  on  the  north  aide 
of  the  harbor  at  the  mouth  of  Benson  Brook  which  it  followed  nearly 
to  Lake  Benson,  then  it  crossed  the  hills  to  Sargent  Lake  and  from  there 
it  went  to  McCai-goe  Cove.  As  I  did  not  make  any  observations  north 
of  the  Greenstone  Ridge,  I  will  only  describe  that  portion  of  the  country 
between  Rock  Harbor  and  the  top  of  the  Ridge.  In  this  portion  there 
were  several  different  oonditionR  which  will  be  descnbed  in  the  follow- 
ing order! 

1.  Ransom  riearing  (Station   II,  1). 

2.  Benson  Brook   (Station  II,  1). 

3.  Spruce  and  Tamarack  Swamps  (Station  II,  2  and  5). 

4.  Rock  Ridge  Clearings   (Station  II,  3). 

/.     Ransom  Clearing  {Station  II,  J). 

This  small  clearing  on  the  lowland  at  the  mouth  of  Benson  Brook 
was  covered  with  grass  and  large  clumps  of  alders,  birches  and  aspens. 
These  btishes  scattered  through  the  clearing  formed  an  excellent  habitat 
for  birds,  and,  although  the  clearing  was  small,  thirteen  species  were 
ohserved  liei-e.     They  were  as  follows:  Black-billed  Cuckoo,  Canada  Jay, 


ivCoogIc 


86  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Soug  Spnrrow.  Aider  Flycatt-lier,  White-throated  Sparrow,  Redstart,  Red- 
I'jed  Vireo,  ('edar  Waxwiug,  Wiltion'B  Thrush,  Olive-backed  Thrush, 
Sparrow  Hawk,  Purple  Finch  and  Pine  Siskin. 

Kvery  time  thiH  stntioD  was  visited  there  were  one  or  two  Alder 
Flycatchers  aniou^  the  aldev  bushes,  sometitaes  on  top  of  the  highest 
busli  and  soinefiuies  near  the  ground.  They  seemed  to  be  always  on 
the  lookout  for  insecfH,  and  every  few  minutes  tliey  would  fly  several 
feet  into  the  air  and  a  snap  of  the  bill  told  that  some  insect  had  been 
caught.  They  could  often  be  located  by  their  "pep"  of  alarm,  and  in 
the  morning  1  fretpiently  lieard  them  sing  a  short  song. 

The  Redstart  and  Nashville  Warbler  wei-e  often  seen  among  the  alders 
also.  Both  were  always  on  tiie  move.  The  Redstai't  kept  flitting  from 
branch  to  branch,  only  pausing  an  instant  at  each  one  to  look  for 
insects,  while  the  Xashville  Warbler  would  light  on  a  limb  and  start 
to  hop  towurd  the  tup,  looking  an  instant  at  each  leaf  us  it  passed. 

3.    Bvmon  Brook   iStation  II.  1). 

The  londitions  along  this  little  brook  are  difficult  to  describe  in  a 
general  way  because  tliey  wei-e  so  diverse;  every  few  rods  there  was  a 
change.  The  little  stream  meandei-ed  throngh  dense  forests  of  cetlar. 
spruci'  and  bir<h;  through  thickets  of  aldei-s,  dogwoods  and  small 
Hiaplew:  I'ushed  thi'ough  nm-row  i-avines  between  bai'e  topped  ridge«, 
over  i-ocks,  thi-oHgli  forests  of  birch  and  Jisi>en  until  it  Anally  reached 
the  hiirbor  at  Ransom  clearing. 

The  birds  found  along  this  bi-ook  were  the  M'hite- throated  Sparrow, 
Redstart,  Winter  Wren,  Red('^■ed  Vii-eo,  Cedar  Waxwing,  Oven  Bird, 
Sparrow  Hawk,  Wilson's  Thrush.  Olive-backed  Thrush,  Blue  Jay,  Canada 
Jay.  Crow,  l'urj)le  Finch,  Sharp-tailed  Grouse,  GrinnelTs  Water  Thrush, 
Flicker,  Magnolia  Warbler,  Hairy  Woodpecker,  Njishville  Warbler,  Red- 
breasted  Nuthatch.  Golden -crowned  Kinglet  and  Chickadee.  The  Spar- 
row Hawk,  Blue  Jay,  Flicker.  Sharp-tailed  Grouse,  Cedar  Waxwing  and 
Purple  Finch  were  seen  more  often  in  the  clearings  where  there  were 
berries,  grasshoitpers  and  other  insects.  The  Winter  Wren  and  \\'ater 
Tlirush  were  always  seen  near  the  brook.  The  former  frequented  places 
where  the  iindei'gi-owth  was  thick.  It  was  often  observed  flying  aloD}^ 
the  brook  aud  stopping  every  few  yards  to  look  under  the  leaves  and 
logs  for  insects,  and  one  was  shot  with  a  spider  {Amaurohius  hennetti 
BIk.)  and  two  mosquitos  in  its  mouth.  Sometimes  this  shy  bird  would 
venture  away  from  its  damp  retreat,  perch  upon  the  top  of  a  tree 
and  pour  forth  a  melody  that  rivalled  any  song  heard  in  these  woods. 

The  Oven  Bii-d  and  Hed-eyed  Vireo  were  nearly  always  found  among 
the  birches  and  asjtens.  Tlie  former  very  frequently  was  flushed  from 
among  the  honeysuckle  bushes  on  the  ground,  but  the  Vireo  was  always 
in  the  trees.  The  Magnolia  Warbler,  Kedbreasted  Xuthatch,  and  Golden- 
crowned  Kinglet  were  always  seen  in  that  part  of  the  forest  where  there 
were  several  sjiiuce  or  cedar  ti'ees. 

A  large  number  of  different  species  of  birds  was  observed  in  this 
habitat,  but  that  was  because  it  was  so  large.  In  reality  the  country 
was  rather  deKolate,  for  with  the  excepti<m  of  some  damp  places  along 
the  brook,  the  original  forest  has  all  been  bui-nt  off  and  was  only  partial- 
ly replace«l  by  a  Mccond  growth  of  birch  and  as|>en. 


rfbyGOOgIC 


ECOLOGY  OF    ISLE  ROYALE.  g7 

3.     Tamarack  an<l  Spruer  Swampi*  (Station  TI.  2  and  5). 

About  n  quarter  of  a  niilo  north  of  Itennon  Brook  tlieif  wa«  a  swamp 
similar  to  I,  5,  exiei)t  that  it  was  larger  and  had  more  Bpruce  and 
tamarack  trees  scattered  through  it.  Tlie  jrround  was  covered  with 
Bphaf^um.  Labrador  tesi,  pitcher  plants,  ett-  hut  appai-ently  nothing 
that  would  attract  birds  ext-ept  the  trees. 

The  birds  seen  hei-e  were  the  Red-breasted  Nuthatch.  Marsh  Hawk. 
Juneo,  Canada  Jay,  Black- throated  ftreen  Warbler.  Blaek -throated  Blue 
Warbler,  Thickadee,  Golden-crowned  Kinglet,  White-winged  Crossbill. 
Yellow-bellied  Fl.vcatther,  and  tt'bite-throated  S|)arrow.  The  Juneo 
probabl.v  atra.ved  here  from  a  lai^  rocky  clearinfc  near  b,v.  as  onl.v 
one  was  seen  in  the  swamp,  but  it  was  lieard  in  the  clearing  ever,v 
time  I  visited  it. 

About  a  quarter  of  a  mile  further  on  toward  Greenstone  Kid(i;e,  the 
trail  crossed  another  swamp  similar  to  this  one,  though  it  was  somewhat 
longer.  Kince  tlie  conditions  were  the  same  in  these  two  places,  many 
of  the  same  birds  would  he  exi)ected  to  o«'cur  in  eaeii,  and  this  was  the 
case  as  will  be  seen  l>,v  comparing  the  list  given  above  with  the  following: 
(Hive-sided  Fl.vcatcher.  Red-breasted  Nuthatch,  Nashville  Warbler, 
Tanada  Jay,  Chickadee,  White-winged  Crasshill  and  Golden -crowned 
Kinglet. 

Near  Forbes  Lake  there  were  two  other  swani]>s  and  in  these  the  fol- 
lowing birds  were  seen:  White-throated  Hparrow,  Canada  Jay,  Cedar 
Waxwing,  White-winged  Crossbill,  Ked-breasted  Nuthatch.  Golden-crown- 
ed Kinglet,  Chickadee.  Nashville  Warbler  and  Flicker.  All  these  were 
found  in  both  swamps  with  the  exception  of  the  Nashville  Warbler  and 
Flicker. 

There  is  a  niarketl  similarity  in  the  lists  of  birds  seen  in  each  of 
these  five  swamps,  and  live  of  the  Bi)efie8  were  fonnd  in  all  of  them. 

-i.    Rock  Ridge  Clearings  iStation  If.  .i): 

This  habitat  consists  of  all  the  rock  ridges  which  were  crossed  by 
the  trail  after  it  left  Benson  Brook.  These  ridges  wei-e  nearly  all  bare 
on  the  top,  owing  to  the  absence  of  soil.  They  had  lieen  burnt  over 
sevei-al  years  ago  and  the  stumps  that  are  left  show  that  they  were 
oi-ipinally  almost  if  not  entirely  covei-ed  with  forests.  The  tree's  that 
were  found  in  places  where  there  was  a  little  soil  weve  almost  entirely 
aspen  and  birch.  The  birds  found  in  this  habitat  were  the  Cedar  Wax- 
wing,  Juneo,  Bay-breasted  Warbler.  Mourning  Warbler,  Robin.  White- 
throated  Sparrow,  Olivebacked  Thrush,  Sparrow  Hawk  and  Bed-eyed 
Vireo. 

Very  few  birds  were  seen  in  the  clejirings,  probabl,i-  iKK-ause  the  heat  of 
the  sun  drove  theni  to  the  shade,  as  mnst  of  the  birds  were  olwerved  at 
the  edge  of  the  clearings,  in  places  where  the  gmund  was  jiartiall.v 
covered  with  ti-ees. 

IV.       WESTEKN    KNI>   OF    ROCK    II.MIIIOE   ANn   TRAIL  TO   SI.'.MXBK   I.AKK. 

This  station  comprised  the  western  end  of  Hock  Harlwr  and  a  por- 
tion of  the  adjoining  land.     It  was  divided  into  Ave  habitats.   ^ 

hyCOOgIC 


88  MICHIQAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

1.  Harbor  (Vicinity  of  Station  III,  2). 

2.  Small  Islands  (Rtation  III,  1). 

3.  Bulrush  Zoue  and  T>elta  (Station  IN.  S). 

4.  Trail  to  Sunioer  I>ake  (Station  III,  i). 

a.  Bircli  Forest. 

b.  Birch  and  Coniferous  Forest. 

5.  Runmer  I^ke    (Station   III,  5). 

1.     The  Harbor  iTiomitij  of  Station  TIT.  2). 

In  thts  habitat  the  foUowinfi:  list  of  fish-eating  birds  were  fonnd : 
Ijooq,  American  ^Merganser,  Herring  Gull,  Kingfisher  and  Bald  Eaglo. 

An  adult  American  Merganser  and  a  number  of  young  were  observed 
about  the  middle  of  July,  and  about  a  week  later  another  adult  female 
and  twenty-three  young  were  seen.  Although  the  young  birds  were 
quite  small  they  were  good  ewinimers,  and  it  was  impossible  to  get  near 
them  in  a  row  boat,  except  by  cornering  them  in  a  small  bay  or  in  the 
end  of  the  harbor. 

The  l^oon  was  often  seen  and  heard  here,  and  once  seven  weiT  .seen 
together.  Occasionally  one  of  the  flock  would  swim  around  and  around 
in  a  circle  as  fast  as  it  could,  splashing  the  water  so  that  it  could 
be  heard  for  at  least  half  a  mile.  Tt  was  impossible  to  get  near  these 
birds,  not  even  close  enough  to  shoot  them  with  a  shot  gun,  for  as  soon 
as  they  thought  it  was  dangerous  they  would  dive,  to  appear  after  :i 
few  minutes  very  much  farther  away.  It  is  very  difficult  tor  the  Loon  to 
rise  from  the  water,  as  it  must  fly  a  long  distance  liaising  its  wings 
and  pushing  the.  water  with  its  feet  before  It  can  get  into  the  air. 

The  Eagle  was  seen  on  a  tree  at  the  edge  of  the  water. 

2.     Small  IsUinilx  {Station  ITT,  1). 

Near  the  west  end  of  the  harbor  there  wei-e  two  small  islands  partially 
covered  with  stunted  cedar,  spruce  and  birch  trees,  where  many  birds 
nested.  The  probable  reason  for  this  was  that  no  squirrels  inhabited 
the  islands.  On  one  island  tliree  or  four  rods  long  were  found  the  nests 
of  four  Cedar  AVaxwings,  two  Myrtle  Warblers,  a  White-throated  Spar- 
row and  a  Song  Sparrow,  and  on  the  other  island  which  was  somewhat 
smaller,  were  a  number  of  Cedar  Waxwing's  nests,  three  containing  eggs 
or  young,  and  the  remainder  being  empty,  most  of  them  last  year's  nests. 
The  Waxwing's  nests  were  from  three  to  fifteen  feet  from  the  ground 
and  were  composed  entirely  of  lichens  (Vsnea).  These  birds  do  not 
get  excited  as  do  many  birds  when  their  nests  are  disturbed.  When 
I  looked  into  these  nests  I  did  not  hear  a  scolding  note,  althougli  some 
of  the  owners  were  sitting  on  a  tree  not  far  away. 

Four  Myrtle  Warbler's  nests,  two  old  and  two  new,  «'ere  found.  These 
nests  were  placed  on  spruce  and  cedar  trees,  from  six  to  ten  feet  from 
the  ground,  and  were  composed  of  small  twigs  and  grasses  with  a  lining 
of  feathers.  One  nest  contained  small  young,  July  21,  and  the  other 
contained  nearly  fully  fledged  young.  The  White-throated  Sparrow's 
nest  was  made  of  small  sticks  and  grasses  with  a 'lining  composed 
entirely  of  grass.  It  was  on  some  hushes  about  a  foot  and  a  half  above 
the  ground,  and  contained  one  egg.  ^ 

lyCoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  89 

3.     Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta  {Station.  Ill,  S). 

This  small  grasa  and  sedge  covered  mareh  was  too  ntmall  to  attract 
loaoy  niarali  Mrds,  aad  a  pair  of  Bwamp  Bparrows  with,  two  jonng,  a 
pair  of  Kingflshera  aud  Song  Sparrows,  a  Red-winged  Blackbird  and  the 
I,esiaer  Yellow  Jjega  were  the  only  birds  observed  here.  The  last  two 
were  only  observed  once,  and  no  doubt  they  were  only  stragglers  here. 

This  small  marah  was  aorrounded  by  a  forest  of  s[H-nce,  birch  and 
balsam,  and  here  the  Golden-crowned  Kinglet,  Magnolia  Wai1>ler,  Chick- 
adee and  Red-breasted  Suthatrh  were  found. 

^.     Trail  to  Sumner  Lake  (Station  III,  4). 

Starting  from  the  barbor  this  trail  first  went  np  a  hill  throng^  a 
birch  forest,  then  across  a  narrow  cedar  swamp  into  a  birch,  spmce 
and  balsam  forest  and  down  the  hill  to  Siimoer  Lake.  As  the  birds  found 
in  the  bircb  forest  were  not  the  same  as  those  found  in  the  birch,  spmce 
and  balsam  forest,  the  habitats  will  be  distingaished.  The  cedar  swamp 
was  too  small  to  be  of  any  importance,  and  the  birds  in  it  were  nearly 
the  same  as  in  the  birch,  spruce  and  balsam  forest  of  which  it  will  be 
considered  a  part 

a.    Birch  Forest. 

Judging  from  what  had  been  observed  before  these  bireh  woods  were 
visited,  I  expected  to  find  the  Oven  Bird  and  Red-eyed  Vireo,  and  upon 
investigation,  many  of  both  kinds  were  found.  A  family  of  Black-throated 
Oreen  Warblers  were  also  seen.  Several  Cedar  Waxwings  and  White- 
throated  Sparrows  were  observed  along  the  edge  of  Rock  Harbor  near 
the  trail,  but  they  occurred  almost  everywhere  along  the  edge  of  the 
Harbor  irrespective  of  the  kind  of  ti-ees.  In  rowing  along  the  shore 
these  birds  were  seen  very  much  more  often  than  any  other. 

6.    Birch  and  Coniferous  Forest. 

This  habitat  was  frequented  by  the  Chickadee,  .Golden-crowned  King- 
let, and  Red-breasted  Nuthatch,  the  three  most  common  birds  in  all  the 
coniferous  forests  that  were  visited.  The  Winter  Wren  was  heard 
in  the  cedar  swamp. 

5.     Sumner  Lake  (Station  III,  5). 

This  faabitat  included  Sumner  Lake  and  the  grassy  marsh  whicb  sur- 
rounded it.  Everywhere  in  the  marsh  the  ground  was  soft,  and  the 
thick  mat  of  grass  sank  under  the  weight  of  the  body  until  the  water 
poured  into  the  shoe  tops.  The  line  dividing  the  grass  and  sedges  from 
the  forest  was  very  distinct,  but  there  were  several  stunted  tamaracks 
and  alders  growing  out  in  the  marsh  (Figa.  18-23). 

Many  White-throated  Sparrows  were  heard  in  the  forest  near  the 
marsh,  and  at  the  foot  of  one  of  the  alder  bushes  near  the  edge  a  nest 
was  found  hidden  in  a  bunch  of  grass  growing  around  the  bush.  Here 
in  a  well  built  nest  of  grass  were  two  nearly  Sedged  young  (July  18). 
Od  the  same  day  another  nest  of  this  bird  was  found  on  the  other  side 
of  the  lake,  in  a  position  similar  to  the  one  described  above,  but  instead 
12 


W    ■  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

of  young  it  contained  four  bluiah  white  eggs  densely  and  irregularly 
viiri^ated  with  brown.  Out  in  tlie  marsh  a  Bittern  was  fliished  from 
the  grasB,  and  near  by  a  deserted  nest  containing  a  bad  e^  and  the 
bones  of  two  young  was  found.  Tliis  neet  was  only  a  depression  in  the 
tangled  mat  of  giiiss  in  which  it  was  situated. 

Two  IjOons  were  seen  on  the  I^ke  ninny  times,  and  these  two  birds 
were  much  tamer  than  Iioons  usually  are.  for  they  swam  very  close  to 
the  bank  whei-e  I  was  standing.  As  soon  as  they  saw  nie  one  of  them 
gave  a  weird  and  rapid  "ha !  Iia  I  ha !''  and  on  being  imitated  it  would 
i*eply  evei-^'  time.  A  Hooded  Merftnnser,  another  fish-eating  bird,  was 
als(»  observed  here. 

V.      81BK<IWIT  HAV  RERIOK. 

When  I  arrived  here  in  August  the  breeding  seastm  was  practically 
over,  Many  young  birds  could  Hy  almost  as  well  as  the  adults,  and 
families  were  roving  about  the  forests.  Kandpipers  were  probably  mi- 
grating then,  and  althnngh  many  were  seen  here  it  cannot  be  said  that 
they  bred.  In  two  weeks  other  birds  began  to  come  from  the  north 
in  large  flocks,  so  that  most  observations  were  on  habits  of  birds  during 
migrntiou. 

Another  evidence  that  the  breeding  season  was  over  was  .the  decrease 
in  the  amount  of  singing.  Tliis  was  flrat  noticed  on  July  20,  and  in 
the  next  few  days  some  species  were  heard  for  the  last  time.  The  follow- 
ing is  a  list  of  birds  with  the  last  date  upon  which  they  wete  heard 
singing:  Nashville  Warbler.  July  24;  Myrtle  Warbler  and  OIive-backe<l 
Thrush,  .tuly  25;  Wilson's  Thi-ush,  July  26;  Magnolia  Warbler,  Klack 
and  White  Warbler  and  Redstart,  Aug.  4;  Winter  Wren,  Aug.  8. 

Although  birds  are  more  apt  to  be  found  in  all  kinds  of  conditions 
during  migretion,  yet  many  of  them  showed  a  preference  for  certain 
localities,  so  the  localities  in  which  the  birds  were  seen  will  be  given. 
Tliis  station  has  been  subdivided  into  the  following  habitats: 

1.  Siskowit  Bav  and  Shore  (Htation  V,  1). 

2.  Trail  to  Siskowit  Ijake   (Station  V,  4). 

3.  Siskowit  Lake  (Station  V.  6  and  vicinity). 

4.  Burning  West  of  Outlet  to  Siskowit  Lake  (Station  V,  vicinitv 
of  !l.). 

5.  Ixjng  and  Menagerie  Islands   (Station  Y,  10). 

i.     SisJMicit  Bay  and  Shore  (Station  V.  1). 

The  conditions  at  this  place  were  about  the  same  as  those  at  Rock 
Harbor,  and  almost  the  same  species  of  birds  were  seen.  Those  seen 
here  were:  Herring  Chill,  Loon,  Sciiiii)  Duck,  Solitary  Sandpiper. 
Spotted  Sandpii)er,  Kingfisher,  American  Merganser  and  Osprey. 

J  cannot  say  with  any  certainty  how  many  of  tliese  birds  bred  in 
this  vicinity,  but  the  <iull  and  Merganser  did.  as  u  female  Merganser 
with  a  flock  of  very  small  young  was  seen  several  times,  and  the  Her- 
ring Gulls  bred  on  the  Islands  south  of  the  bay.  The  Ijooh.  KingQsber 
and  Spotted  Sandpiper  were  observed  nearly  every  day.  The  Solitary- 
Sandpiper  was  seen  only  once,  (ui  August  lij. 

On  August  S  four  young  Gulls  were  obtained  from  a  flsheruian,  imd. 


KCOLOQY    OF    ISLE   ROYALE.  gi 

we  had  an  ojiportHniti'  to  stmly  the  habits  of  these  birds.  One  was 
uearly  full-gfown,  while  the  other  three  were  just  gettiQg  their  winj; 
feathers.  Ail  were  quite  tume  and  tlie  oldest  would  eat  from  the  hand 
iind  allow  itself  to  be  picked  up:  We  were  surprised  to  find  how  ch'au 
tlie«e  younp  (lulls  were,  for  tlie  nenta  were  as  flifhy  as  those  of  the 
domestic  Pigeon.  They  all  seem  very  fond  of  bathing,  and  the  largeNt 
one  took  a  Imth  several  times  a  day.  It  'nould  swim  ont  into  the  bay. 
splash  water  over  itself  with  its  iiead  and  wings,  dip  itn  head  under 
water,  then  xhake  itself;  after  rejwaling  these  perfonnanres  sevenil 
times  it  would  <-oine  to  the  shoi-e,  flap  tlie  wings  and  jump  as  if  try- 
ing to  fly.  They  were  very  particular  abont  keeping  their  bills  cieiiu, 
for  after  eating  they  would  walk  to  the  water,  immerse  the  bill  and 
shake  the  head. 

2.     Troi!  to  SinI:oirit  Lair  (Station  T.  .J). 

This  habitat  ini-iuded  all  the  forest  along  the  trail  In'tween  Siskowit 
Ray  and  Siskowit  I^ke.  If  it  had  l)een  in  the  breeding  season  it 
might  have  l)een  divided  into  two  or  three  different  habitats,  but  the 
migrating  birdu  did  not  seem  to  show  any  preference  for  a  particular 
forest. 

The  birds  seen  at  this  station  were  ns  follows:  (Toldenci-owned 
Kinglet,  rhickadee,  Raven,  Tigeon  Hawk.  Winter  Wi'eu,  Red-breasted 
Nuthatch,  Bay-breasted  tt'arbler.  Red-eyed  ^'ireo.  Hairy  Woodpecker. 
Magnolia  Warbler,  Black  throated  (ii-een  Warbler,  Brown  Creeper. 
While-throated  K|»aiTow,  Tennessee  AVarbler,  Flicker,  Canada  Jay, 
.Tunco,  Blue  Jay.  Pileated  Woodpecker,  Nashville  Warbler,  Sparrow 
Hawk,  Chippiug  Hparrow,  (Siinnell's  Water  Thi-ush,  I'urple  Finch.  Pine 
Grosbeak,  Hharp-shinned  Hawk.  Myi-tle  Warbler,  Black-throated  Blue 
'\\'arbler,  Olive-backed  Thrush,  l>owuy  Woodpecker,  Yel low- liel lied  Fly- 
catcher, and  Cape  May  Warbler. 

The  nests  of  only  two  hirds  were  fouud  here,  the  ('hi<'kadee  and  Gold- 
en-crowned Kinglet.  The  Chickadee's  nest  was  in  a  dead  birch  tree 
about  ten  feet  from  the  groinid,  and  contained  four  young  which  were 
able  to  leave  the  nest  August  11.  The  Kinglet's  nest  was  in  a  spruce 
Tree  about  thirty  feet  from  the  ground.  Both  old  birds  wei-e  obsened 
carrying  insects  into  the  tree,  but  the  top  was  so  thick  that  the  nest 
could  not  be  seen  from  the  ground.  On  .Vngust  11  the  young  birds 
were  still  in  the  nest. 

The  Nashville  Warbler.  Olive-backed  Thrush,  Junco.  White-throated 
Sparrow  and  ('hipping  Hjjarrow  frequented  partial  <'learjngs  or  clear- 
ings in  the  breeding  season  but  were  found  in  the  forests  in  the  second 
week  in  August.  On  August  11  a  flock  of  bii-ds  were  seen  feeding  in 
the  top  of  a  tall  tamarai'k.  They  wei-e  mistaken  for  warblers  but  on 
shooting  one  to  identify  it.  it  was  found  to  be  a  Chipping  Sparrow. 

.?.     Kiskoirit  Lair  (Stntiim  Y.  C). 

This  Lake  was  six  miles  long  and  about  two  miles  wide  at  the  widest 
part.  The  shores  were  mostly  rocky,  aud  trees  grew  down  nearly 
to  the  waters  edge.  The  birds  found  hci'e  were:  Herring  (Jull,  Ospi-ey, 
Eagle,  Spotted  Sandpiper.  American  Jlerganser,  Loon,  and  Kingfisher. 


lyCoogle 


92  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    ISOS. 

The  Song  Sparrow  and  Grinnel's  Water  Thrush  were  also  seen  along 
the  shore. 

Tile  American  Merganser,  Ijoon.  nnd  Eagle  nested  in  the  neighborhood. 
Three  diffei-ent  families  of  SiergauHerB  n-ere  seen  on  the  lake.  One  consist- 
ed of  a  female  and  three  young,  but  I  did  not  get  close  eooagh  to  the  other 
tw«  flocks  to  count  them.  When  first  ob8er\'ed,  these  two  flocks  were  to- 
gether, but  they  sepaiuted  when  we  rowed  toward  them.  Two  younsj 
Loons  in  the  down  were  seen  August  JO.  An  Eagle's  nest  composeil 
of  sticks  was  found  -about  125  yards  north  of  the  lake,  on  top  of  a 
dead  pine  which  was  at  least  sixty  feet  high.  The  nest  was  four  feet 
in  diameter,  and  contained  one  young  bird  nearly  ready  to  Sy. 

-!.     Burning  West  of  Outlet  to  Shhoidt  jAike   (Station  V,  9). 

Here  the  original  forest  had  all  been  burnt  away  and  was  only 
partially  replaced  by  a  seccoid  growth  of  birch,  mountain  ash,  aspen, 
wild  cherry,  June  berry,  and  northern  maple.  Between  the  trees  the 
ground  was  covered  wi^  grass,  currants,  fire  weed  and  other  plants. 

The  stream  that  formed  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake  formed  the  east- 
em  boundai'v  of  the  burning.  The  birds  found  in  this  partial  clear- 
ing were  as  follows:  Purple  Finch,  Cedar  Waxwing,  Hawk  Owl,  White- 
thi-oated  Sparrow,  Chickadee,  Redstart,  M\Ttle  Warbler,  Flicker,  Ked- 
eyed  Vireo,  Black  and  White  Warbler,  Xashville  Warbler,  Sharp-tailed 
Grouse,  Water  Thrush,  Olive-sided  Flycatcher,  Chipping  Sparrow  and 
Song  Sparrow. 

The  Hawk  Owl  bred  some  place  near  here,  as  a<  young  bird  with  only 
down  ou  its  head  was  taken  August  4.  This  owl  was  seen  flying  around 
the  clearing  in  the  middle  of  the  day  and  in  the  bright  sunlight.  The 
young  bird  was  quite  tame,  or  rather  it  was  ignoraoft  of  the  ways  of 
man.  It  flew  from  one  dead  stub  to  another  uttering  a  peculiar  screech 
ofi  it  flew.  The  old  bird  was  seen  about  a  quiarter  of  a  mile  away  on  the 
top  of  a  dead  tree,  but  was  wary  and  flew  away. 

Along  the  stream  there  were  several  dead  trees  still  standing,  and 
on  these  trees  eight  to  ten  or  more  Myrtle  Warblers  were  seen 
many  times.  These  warblers  sat  on  the  limbs  and  watched  for  flies 
like  flycatchers,  and  every  few  minutes  the  snap  of  a  bill  sounded 
the  death  note  of  some  unfortunate  insect.  They  did  not  sit  in  one 
place  as  long  as  a  flycatchet  does,  but  on  the  other  hand  they  were  not 
constantly  in<  motion  like  most  warblers. 

Very  little  can  be  said  about  the  other  birds  that  were  seen  here. 
The  Purple  Finch  and  Cedar  Waxwing  fed  on  the  berries  here,  and 
a  Orouse  was  taken  with  berries  and  grasshoppers  in  its  crop.  The 
Water  Thrush  was  seen  near  the  lake  and  stream. 

J.     Long  and  Meimgerie  Islands   (Station  Y,  10). 

These  two  long  narrow  rocky  islands  were  on  the  soutli  side  of  Sis- 
kowit  Bay  about  three  miles  from  the  mainland.  Long  Island  was 
covered  with  trees  except  for  a  wide  belt  along  the  shore  which  was 
washed  clean  by  the  waters.  Menagerie  Island,  on  which  the  light- 
house was  situated,  had  very  few  trees  on  it,  as  the  top  was  barely 
out  of  the  reac^  of  the  waves  in  severe  storms. 


'■'Google 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  93 

Menagerie  Island  was  visited  twice,  on  August  6  and  16.  The  birds 
seen  liere  were;  Song  eparrow,  Barn  Swallow,  Tree  Swallow,  Herring 
Cull,  Spotted  Sandpiper,  and  Humming  Bird. 

The  Bam  Swallow  huilt  in  the  boat-houBe  and  under  the  cliffs  alongc 
the  Bhore.  On  August  16  the  neetH  under  the  cliffa  contained  young 
nearly  ready  to  fly.  These  cup  shaped  homes  were  composed  of  moss 
and  mud,  lined  with  feathers,  and  placed  on  small  projections  of  the 
rock. 

The  light-house  keeper,  Mr.  J.  A.  Malone,  told  us  that  the  Tree  Swal- 
low built  in  the  tower;  but  at  this  time  the  young  were  probably  gone 
as  none  were  observed  entering  the  light-honse,  although  many  were 
flying  around. 

Long  Island  was  visited  on  August  6.  but  no  obsen-atious  were  made 
on  any  birds  except  the  Gulls,  These  birds  nested  here  by  the  thou- 
sands. The  nests  were  among  the  rocks,  some  being  just  beyond  the 
reach  of  the  waves  of  ordinary  storms,  and  others  back  among  the 
bushes.  They  were  from  one  to  two  inches  thick,  and  composed  of 
grasses,  sticks  or  moss,  depending  on  which  of  these  materials  was 
found  near.  Most  of  the  nests  were  .on  the  south  side  of  the  island, 
and  only  a  few  were  found  on  the  north  shore.  At  the  approach  of 
the  boat  the  young  Gulls  that  could  not  fly  swam  out  into  the  water 
or  hid  in  the  bushes,  while  the  old  birds  flew  around  overhead  utter- 
ing their  weird  notes  of  alarm. 

XI.     Summary. 

Hiis  brief  review  of  the  birds  foimd  in  each  of  the  habitats  studied  on 
Isle  Royale  will  give  an  idea  of  the  birds  that  should  be  expected  to  occur 
in  similar  habitats  of  the  island  which  were  not  visited.  Of  course  only 
the  common  birds  will  be  mentioned,  because  preference  cannot  be  de 
termined  by  a  few  observations.  The  habitats  of  this  rugged  and  hilly 
island  presented  a  variety  of  conditions.  There  were  bays,  lakes  and 
harbors,  with  rocky  shores,  wave-beaten  and  desolate.  There  were 
Kwamps  that  were  covered  with  sphagnum  moss  and  low  bushes  with 
here  and  there  a  black  spruce  or  tamarack  tree,  other  swamps  that  were 
covered  with  a  dense  forest  of  cedar  and  tamarack.  There  were  clear- 
ings and  partial  clearings,  forests  of  birch,  containing  scattered  bal- 
sams and  spruce,  and  still  other  forests  of  spruce  and  balsam  con- 
taining a  few  birch  trees.  The  characteristic  birds  of  each  of  these 
habitats  will  be  discussed  in  the  order  just  given. 

1.  Water  Birds.  The  water  birds  found  on  the  harbors  and  small 
lakes  were  the  Herring  Gull,  Loon,  American  Merganser,  and  Hoodeil 
Merganser.  Of  these  birds  the  Herring  GuH  was  the  most  abundant 
species  and  could  always  lie  seen  on  I^ike  Snperior  amd  quite  often 
on  the  smaller  lakes  on  the  island.  The  .American  Merganser  pro. 
bably  ranked  second  in  abundance.  The  T^on  wns  (juitc  numerous, 
and  at  first  it  seemed  as  if  they  were  more  abundant  that  the  Merganser, 
but  in  time  it  became  evident  that  the  Merganser  was  the  more  nnraer- 
ouB,  though  much  less  conspicuous,  as  they  did  not  make  any  noise,  while 
the  Loon  is  very  noisy  and  can  often  be  heard  a  mile  away.  The  Mer- 
ganser frequented  the  hays,  harbors  and  larger  inland  lakes.  The 
Ijoon  was  seen  very  often  on  the  larger  bodies  of  water,  but  seemed  to 


&4  MICHrOAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

prefer  tlif  siiitiner  laketi  more  Itian  llie  other  water  bii-ds.  as  every  little 
lake  cDritiiiiieil  a  pair  of  t>oons.  Yowng  Merpansei-s  aud  Gulls  were 
oftjeu  seen,  bnt,  strange  as  it  may  appear,  young  Loons  were  only  seen 
once,  Ait^roW  10. 

The  Otjprey,  Eagle  and  Kingfisher  were  also  seen  several  times,  but 
only  the  latter  was  seen  around  any  of  the  smaller  lalces,  and  it  was 
not  often  seen.  These  lakes  alK>iinded  in  small  fish  and  would  have 
Iteen  a  good  feeding  gi-ound  for  Kingfishers,  but  there  were  no  sand 
banks  aronnd  Ihe  small  lakes  where  it  rould  have  nested,  and  this-may 
have  iK^n  the  reason  for  its  absence.  There  were  two  sand  banks 
along  the  shores  of  Rock  Harbor,  and  these  were  used  as  nexting  sites, 

2.  t^hoiT  BinlH.  The  Solitary  aud  Spotted  Sandpipers  were  seen 
along  the  shore,  but  these  were  probably  migrants  as  only  oue  or  two 
Spotted  Sandpij>ers  were  seen  before  August  1. 

Although  they  were  not  shorn  birds  the  Tedar  Waxwing,  Winter 
Wren  aud  White-thi-oated  Sparrows  wei-e  often  seen  and  heard  while 
i-owing  along  the  shore.  The  Cedar  Waxwing  would  sit  on  the  tops 
of  the  dead  trees  and  every  few  minutes  would  (ly  out  over  the  water 
after  insects. 

Herring  Oulls  nested  on  the  shores  of  the  sniallei*  islands  in  large 
numliers  but  very  few  nested  on  the  main-  island.  There  is  a  reason 
why  tliey  choose  (he  smaller  islands  instead  of  the  mainland,  and  it 
.  is  pi'oliflbly  Woause  there  are  no  minks,  lynx  or  other  oarnivors  on 
these  small  islands.  The  Gull  seems  to  place  its  nest  on  the  shore  at 
1-aiuloni.  wilhnnt  any  view  to  protwtion  oi-  secret-y.  and  if  there  were 
mink  or  lynx  about  the  yonng  would  soon  all  be  killed  by  these  animals. 

The  Barn  Swallow  nested  underneath  the  cliffs  along  the  shore  at 
Memigerie  Island  and  at  Scoviil  I'oint.  The  Song  Sparrow  and  Myrtle 
Warbler  weiv  often  seen  feeding  on  fiie  shore,  and  both  were  found 
breeding  near  it.  The  Song  Kparrow  fi-equented  the  small  rocky  islands 
in  front  of  the  Jight-honse,  one  of  the  islands  in  the  west  end  of 
Hock  Harbor,  and  also  Kansoni  Plearing  on  the  north  side  of  the  Har- 
bor. Kven  in  tliis  clearing  it  was  never  seen  far  from  the  water.  The 
M.vrtle  Warbler  was  found  breeiliug  on  the  uortii  shoi-e  of  Tonkin  Bay, 
and  on  an  island  in  the  west  end  of  Ro<k  Harbor, 

S.  JSirdu  Fifqiifittiiig  Niiftuipx.  The  characteristic  birds  of  the 
tamarack-sprnoe  swamps  wei-e  the  Pedar  Waxwing,  Chickadee,  Red- 
hreasted  Xntbatch,  Golden -crowned  Kinglet.  White-winged  Croashill, 
Canada  Jay.  Xasbville  WaHder  and  White-throated  Spari-ow.  Pro- 
baiily  none  of  these  birds  were  foimd  here  simply  beeanse  it  was  a 
swamp,  for  all  frefjuented  other  localities.  The  White  throated  Spar- 
row, Cedar  Waxwing,  and  Nashville  Warbler  are  characteristic  of  par- 
tial clearings,  and  this  was  realty  a  partial  clearing  l)ecause  the  trees 
were  SI)  far  apart.  The  Wltite-winged  Crossbill,  Red-bresisted  Xuthatch 
and  (ioldeu-crowned  Kinglet  are  characteristitr  of  coniferous  forests, 
and  as  the  ti-ees  in  the  swamp  wei-e  nearly  all  coniferous  trees,  this 
would  tlierefoi*e'be  their  natural  habitat.  The  White-winged  Crossbill 
fewls  on  the  seeds  of  the  tamarack  ti-ees,  and  during  the  first  few 
weeks  of  July  it  was  only  seen  where  there  were  tamarack  trees;  dur- 
ing the  latter  part  of  July,  when  the  seeds  of  the  spiiu-e  became  more 
mature,  ihey  were  seen  many  times  in  the  .spruce  ami  balsam  forests. 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  95 

The  seeds  of  the  tamarack  mature  quicker  than  the  Hpriice,  hence  the 
CrossblllH  would  prefer  the  tamnracka  during  the  earlier  part  of  the 
siiiamer.  The  Black-throated  Green  Wnrbler  wan  characteristic  of 
forests  where  there  were  a  number  of  large  bircli  ti-ees,  and  this  bird 
was  oqI.v  »een  in  those  Bwamps  which  had  several  of  these  trees  around 
the  edf^e.  Indeed  the  only  true  tiwanip  bird  seen  here  was  the  Marsh 
Hawk,  and  tliat  waM  only  seen  once. 

In  the  thickeat  part  of  the  cedar  swaiup  only  a  few  birds  were  seen, 
and  these  wei-e  the  Winter  Wren.  Ohickadee.  Red-breasted  Nuthatch,  and 
Brown  Treeper.  The  Canada  Jay,  Nashville  Warbler.,  Black-throate<l 
Blue  Warbler  and  Black -throated  Green  Warbler  were  seen  where  tlio 
trees  were  tall  and  farther  apart. 

4.  Rirtlx  of  Clearings  oiirf  Partial  ('IrtirinffH.  The  characteristic 
birds  of  the  clearings  were  the  Ohipping  Sparrow.  .Tunco,  White-throat- 
ed Sparrow.  Flicker,  Cedar  Waxwing,  I'lirple  Finch  and  Sharp-tailed 
Gi-onse. 

The  Cedar  Waxwing  and  Purple  Finch  were  often  seen  feeding  on 
berries  in  the  clearings,  and  a  Flicker  was  observed  scratching  in  an 
ant's  nest  and  eating  the  ants.  Many  ants  nests  were  fnnnd  scratched 
to  i)ieces.  probably  by   these  birds. 

The  cliaracteristic  bii-ds  of  the  partial  clearings  were  the  White- 
throated  Sparrow,  Cedar  Waxwing.  Chickadee,  Olive-backed  Thrnsh, 
Wilson's   Thrush   and   Nashville   Warbler. 

5.  Birds  Frequenting  the  Forests.  In  the  forests  of  birch  or  aspen 
the  Ked-eyed  Vireo  and  Oven  Bird  were  quite  abundant,  and  in  many 
Bniall  tracts  of  birch  and  aspens  these  were  the  only  birds  seen.  Other 
birds  seen  many  times  in  the«e  f oi-ests,  wei-e  Wilson's  Thrush.  Chickadee. 
Black -throated  Green  Warbler  and  Canada  Jay.  The  character iertic 
birds  of  the  spruce  and  balsam  forests  were  the  Chickadee,  Red-breasted 
Niitlintch.  Golden-crowned  Kinglet.  Magnolia  Warbler.  Canada  Jay 
aod  Wilson's  Thrush.  The  Magnolia  Warbler  seemed  to  prefer  places 
where  the  ti-ees  were  not  very  high,  for  on  the  small  rocky  knolls  which 
were  covered  with  stunted  spruce  and  balsam,  this  bird  was  more 
numerous  than  elsewhere. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE   HOYALE. 


THE  FALL  MIGRATION  OF  BIRDS  AT  WASHINGTON  HARBOR, 
ISLE  ROYALE,  IN  1905. 

Br  MAX  MINOR  PEET. 
I.       INTBODCCTIOX. 

Oar  observations  of  the  fall  migrations  of  birds  at  Washington  Har- 
bor extended  over  the  period  from  Angnst  18  to  September  22.  A 
basty  examination  was  made  of  the  bird  life  here  before  migration  had 
really  set  in  (August  5  to  8) ,  and  the  obsen-ations  gathei-ed  at  this  time, 
together  vith  the  records  obtained  the  previous  rear,  gave  us  nn  insight 
into  the  conditions  existing  there.  This  was  important,  as  migration 
had  commenced  while  we  were  still  at  Siskowit  Bay. 

Isle  Roj-ale  is  situated  about  fifteen  miles  from  the  north  shore  of 
I^ke  Superior,  and  ties  nearly  northeast  by  southwest.  Sitiiatn)  as 
it  is  several  miles  from  the  north  shore  and  with  an  unbroken  stretch 
of  water  100  miles  across  lying  south  of  it,  the  island  iiuikes  an  ex- 
cellent point  for  the  migrants  to  stop  before  crossing  the  lake.  The 
birds  seemed  to  center  at  Washington  Harbor  as  if  focussed  there  from 
the  north  shore,  and  in  all  probability  the  birds  observed  there  repre- 
sented the  avian  life  of  many  square  miles  on  the  mainland.  Records 
were  kept  of  the  species  seen  each  day  and  are  given  in  tabulated  form 
at  the  end  of  this  paper. 

II.      THE  ESVIRONMEXT. 

1.  The  Clearing.  Under  the  head  of  clearings,  we  include  the  thi-ee 
artificial  clearings  and  the  nari-ow  roads  conuectiug  them.  The  first  of 
these  was  situated  on  the  sliore  of  Washington  Harbor,  near  its  head 
and  close  to  the  mouth  of  Washington  River.  The  trees  bad  been  en- 
tirely cleared  away  over  an  area  of  several  acres,  making  a  rectangular 
clearing  which  had  been  seeded  to  timothy  and  short  grasses.  The  waves 
had  cut  away  the  soil  along  the  shore  leaving  a  nearly  vertical  bank 
two  or  three  feet  high,  in  some  places  overlianging  the  water.  The 
land  gradually  rises  from  the  water's  edge,  more  rapidly  at  tiie  south- 
ern end  where  a  low  bluff  is  formed.  On  this  bluff  the  <'lub-house 
stands,  and  below,  nearer  the  lake,  is  a  little  group  of  four  small 
houses,  the  largest  of  wtiich  ^ve  used  as  a.  camp.  Other  buildings  were 
also  located  in  this  clearing.  Part  of  the  clearing  was  overgrown  witli 
brush  and  small  trees.  These  had  been  burned  ami  tlie  debris  left 
where  it  fell.  Many  small  bushes,  weeds,  and  vines  sprang  up  among 
the  fallen  logs  and  branches,  forming  on  ideal  retreat  for  the  smaller 
birds  such  as  warblers  and  sparrows.  The  rank  growth  of  the  vegeta- 
tion made  it  almiost  impossible  to  penetrate  any  distance  into  it.  Here 
the  Lincoln  Sparrows  were  most  abundant  during  their  migration. 
Asthe  soil  was  very  shallow,  the  timothy  grew  short  and  scattering, 
and  probably  furnished  little  protection  for  the  birds,  as  it  was  cut 


98  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

about  tlie  middle  of  August.  Near  tlie  road  leading  to  the  second 
clearing  to  the  north  vaA  a  siiiall  upot  cleared  for  a  frarden.  This 
bai-e  ground  was  tJie  favorite  feeding  place  of  the  Horned  Larks.  On 
the  i«hor1,  steep  slope  which  skirted  the  road  to  the  second  vtenring. 
thirty  OP  forty  stnmps  had  l>een  left.  These  were  the  favorite  perches 
for  the  Sparrow  and  Hbarp-shiimed  Hawks,  and  the  tops  of  many 
of  thf'ni  were  rovered  with  tlie  harder  portions  of  grasshoppers,  these 
insects  foraiiug  one  of  the  principal  foods  of  these  birds.  Thre^  nar- 
row roads  or  trails  left  this  clearing,  one  to  the  second  clearing,  one 
to  the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay,  and  the  third  to  I^ake  Desor,  The  first 
of  these  was  kept  oi>eii  and  had  originally  been  much  wider  than  at 
pi-esent,  being  uarmwed  by  a  fringe  of  alders,  birches,  and  small  bashes 
together  with  young  balsams  and  spruces. 

Tlie  second  clearing,  consisting  of  3  acres,  was  divided  into  two  parts, 
a  grassy  tract  nnd  a  garden  in  which  potatoes,  carrots,  etc.,  were 
grown.  Fro'ni  this  a  i-oad  ( Fig.  HH)  led  to  the  third  clearing, 
<'alled  Wendigo.  which  was  about  the  same  size,  and  contained 
two  old  log  houses  and  two  or  three  decaying  sheds.  Few 
of  the  stumps  had  been  removed  and  hawks  used  them  as  per- 
ches. The  ground  was  ovei'gi'own  with  short,  nearly  dead  grass. 
White-footed  mice  were  abundant  in  these  clearings  after  ni^tfalU 
and  mnuy  Northern  Hares  were  seen  along  the  roads  just  at  dusk.  A 
iiuri-ow  road  wound  past  the  clearing  and  off  along  the  base  of  the 
bluffs  for  a  mile  or  more  to  several  abandoned  cuts  made  by  the  old 
mining  company.  It  was  along  these  roads,  which  ran  approximately 
north-east  and  south-west,  that  the  bulk  of  the  migi-ants  passed.  Even 
during  the  heavy  migration  comparatively  few  birds  were  obsened  in 
the  deiine  forests.  aJtbougb  many  passed  along  the  river.  It  has  been 
generally  noticed  that  many  birds,  the  smaller  migrants  in  particular, 
as  the  spajTOWR  and  warblers,  prefer  the  borders  of  clearings,  and  a 
long  narrow  road  through  heavy  timber  and  bordered  by  bushes  and 
small  trees,  appeared  to  be  an  ideal  place  for  them.  All  the  clearings 
were  surrounded  by  the  dense,  coniferous  forest  except  the  first  which 
fi-onted  on  the  lake. 

2.  Th/"  Forent.  The  forest  may  be  considered  to  consist  of  all  that 
portion  which  has  not  been  entirely  cleared  of  the  native  trees.  The 
major  part  consists  of  balsam  and  spruce  with  a  heavj-  undergrowth 
of  ground  hemlock,  and  in  places  along  the  river  there  are  dense 
thickets  of  alder.  The  soil  in  the  depi-essions  is  damp,  with  small  poolfl 
of  water  standing  on  the  decayed  leaws.  Waaliington  River  f^ceKS 
through  the  lower  portion  of  the  forest.  It  is  a  stream  sixty  or  seventy 
feet  wide  near  its  mouth,  but  it  rapidly  diminishes  in  size,  so  that 
near  Wendigo  is  not  more  than  five  or  six  feet  across.  Howe^-er  it 
l>e4-onies  much  iiioi-e  rapid  and  the  Imnks  are  cox'wed  with  refuse  ami 
fallen  logs  and  hramhes. 

Few  resident  birds  were  found  in  the  dense,  dark  forest,  and  still 
fpwei'  migmnts  wei-e  found  there.  During  very  severe  weather  tho 
Chipping  Sparrow  sometimes  retreated  to  the  protection  of  the  balsams, 
but  it  never  wandered  far  from  the  open.  The  l^'hite-throated  Spar- 
row was  quite  common,  breeding  in  the  foi-est  along  the  river,  and  even 
during  niigration  it  was  fonnd  most  abundant  in  the  nnderbrush.    The 


-    BcoLoay  OP  isle  royalb.  m 

Sharp-BhiDiied  aud  Sparrow  Hawkfi  rarely  remained  here,  except  dur- 
ing the  night,  or  in  very  Btormy  weather.  The  wArbters  wei-e  Bcarcely 
ever  found  in  the  heavy  timber,  but  along  the  more  open  ptirt  of  tlio 
river  and  in  the  aldn*  thii-kets  the>'  were  abundant.  By  far  tlie  most 
eommon  warbler  along  the  river  was  GrinneH's  Water  Thrush.  This 
bird  was  confined  aliuoet  entirely  to  the  forent,  and  especially  to  that 
portion  bordering  the  stream  where  fallen  logs  and  rubbish  furnisheil 
their  favorite  haunt.  They  Reenied  to  lie  .  migrating  in  pail's,  but  no 
immature  birds  were  seen  with  them.  Dui-ing  the  Mtorniy  period  laMt- 
ing  from  September  2  to  5,  the  Water  Thruali  came  out  into  the  road 
and  clearings.  The  Wiltton  and  Olive-backed  Thrushes  bred  in  tlie 
forest,  but  during  migration  they  preferred  the  open  and  were  only 
occasionally  found  in  the  heavy  timber.  The  path  skirting  the  river 
waa  also  a  favorite  route  for  them.  The  maple  brush  which 
tiordered  the  forest  in  many  places  was  the  favorite  habitat 
of  the  Hermit  Thmsh.  This  and  the  diminutive  Winter  Wren  were 
sometimes  met  with  among  the  very  densest  conifers.  .  Among  the 
other  birds  occurring  here  were  the  Browii  i'.i-eeper,  Qolden-crowned 
Kinglet,  and  Ked-breasted  Nuthatch.  Chickadees  were  neai"ly  always 
present.  This  habitat  was  chosen  by  nearly  all  of  these  birds  during 
migration,  probably  because  it  furnished  the  right  kind  of  food  and 
excellent  protection.  Many  <rther  species  were  occasionally  met  with, 
bot  they  were  only  wanderers  and  no  particular  significance  can  he 
attributed  to  their  occun-ence  here. 

8.  Food.  The  clearing  afforded  abundant  food  for  nearly  all  spet^ies. 
The  grassy  meadows  and  dry  hillsides  were  infested  with  great  swarms 
of  grass hop[)ei-H  which  rose  up  before  one  as  a  buzzing  cloud.  Nearly 
all  the  birds  taken,  among  which  miglit  be  mentioned  the  Rharp-shinncil 
and  Sparrow  Hawks.  Thick-billed  Redwing,  Rusty  Grackle.  Flicker  and 
Nightliawk,  fed  to  a  gi-eater  or  less  extent  on  these  pests,  as  was  shown 
by  an  examination  of  their  stomachs.  Many  other  species  of  insei'ta 
were  abundant,  blackflies,  deer  flies,  and  "no-see-ums"'  being  at  times 
almost  unbearable.  The  I)eer  Mouse  was  very  plentiful,  and  also  the 
Northern  Hare,  as  many  as  twenty  or  thirty  of  the  latter  being  seen 
at  one  time  feeding  in  the  road  between  the  first  and  second  clearings. 
These  animals  together  with  the  large  niunber  of  Ked  Squirrels  found 
along  the  edge  of  the  road  furnished  abundant  food  for  the  owls  and 
migrating  hawks.  Seeds  were  plentiful  and  constituted  the  principal 
food  of  the  Savannah  and  other  sparrows.  Wild  red  raspberry  buslies 
were  common  and  these  berries  together  with  several  other  kinds  werf^ 
greedily  eaten  by  many  of  the  birds,  especially  the  Cedar  W'axwings. 
A  few  wild  flowers  grew  in  the  clearing  and  these  were  oci-asionally 
visited  by  the  Ruby-throated  Humming  Rird.  Insect  life  characteris- 
tic of  coniferous  forests  was  probably  abundant  because  the  Brown 
Creeper,  Chickadee,  and  Oolden-crowne<l  Kinglet  fed  here  almost  ex- 
clnsively;  otherwise  this  habitat  did  not  appear  to  furnish  much  food 
for  the  migrants. 

III.      THE   WEATHER   CONDITIONS   AND    JIIORANTS. 

1.  Wrather  Cim^Jitions.  Throughout  the  iteiiod  of  thirty-five  days 
daring  which  observations  were  made  on  migratiou  at  Washington  Har- 


100  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

bor,  a  daily  record  was  kept  of  the  direction  of  the  wind,  temperature, 
and  the  general  weather  conditions.  The  barometric  readings,  taken 
at  Port  Arthur,  thirtj-flve  miles  nfearly  due  north  from  the  Harbor,  are 
from  the  daily  weather  maps.  A  comparison  of  my  observations  on 
the  weather  with  thosfe  from  Port  Arthur  shows  that  the  conditions 
at  the  two  places  were  much  the  same,  so  I  feel  safe  in  assuming  the 
barometric  pressure  at  the  island  to  be  approximately  that  recorded  jnst 
tn  the  north.  An  examination  of  the  daily  weather  maps  for  this  period 
shows  that  the  same  isotherms  and  isobars  include  boiii  localities.  Un- 
fortunately Port  Arthur  is  the  most  northern  station  on  the  daily 
weather  map  that  could  have  any  appreciable  effect  on  the  bird  life 
(if  Isle  Boyale.  A  reference  to  the  areas  of  high  and  low  pressure  in- 
dicates that  conditions  similar  to  those  on  the  island  probably  prevailed 
over  a  large  ai-ea  to  the  north  of  it. 

The  records  for  the  entire  thirty-five  days  are  included  in  the  follow-  • 
ing  table.  The  readings  were  made  between  7 :30  and  8  A.  M.  Other 
readings  vere  made  during  the  day  and  where  these  are  of  importance 
I  will  give  them  under  the  particular  discussion  upon  which  they  bear. 
All  temperature  readings  were  in  Fahrenheit.  The  dates  of  the  large 
bird  waves  are  starred. 


Dste. 

Baromcm. 

Tempegi- 

tuie,  F. 

Wind. 

Sky. 

18 

2»!9 

iS:S 

30.3 

20. e 

1:1 

30 

55 

1 
1 

44 

:19 

.■■.2 

i 
1 

8. 

!"■ 

None.' 

i 

Ii: 

II 
'ft: 

iZ 

ll 

w: 

38;! 

30.1 
30.2 

30. 1 

ii 

.10.2 

i:: 
II 

20 

K:' 

2.  The  Bird  Miffiantn.  a.  Warblers.  Many  warblers  nest  on  the 
island,  and  so  the  first  indicutiou  of  migration  in  this  family  was  the 
tendency  to  flock  pi-epanitory  to  the  trip  south.     At  first  these  flocks 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROYALB.  10! 

(nnsistf^  only  of  the  parent  birds  and  young,  but  as  tlieae  wandered 
about  tbey  were  joined  by  other  families  and,  impelled  by  the  gregarious 
instinct  which  is  so  strong  after  the  breeding  Beaaon,  kept  together  and 
formed  one  large  flock.  Beginning  to  feel  the  migratory-  impulse  they 
were  restless  and  waudered  about  over  coasiderable  territory,  probably 
being  joined  from  time  to  time  by  other  families  and  often  by  other 
forms,  for  a  flock  of  migrating  warblers  is  rarely  composed  of  a  single 
species,  aa  are  the  flocks  of  so  many  birds.  Smalt  bands  of  Myrtle 
Warblers  were  seen  feeding  in  the  balsam  trees  on  August  18,  and  on 
August  19  the  first  flocks  of  Tennessee  Warblers  appeared.  However, 
these  were  scattered  and  composed  of  only  a  few  birds,  mostly  adults. 
On  August  30  I  saw  the  first  Redstarts,  and  from  then  on  different 
species  were  constantly  making  their  appearance.  On  the  26  the  bulk 
of  tlie  Black  Poll  Warblers  began  to  arrive,  only  a  few  admits  being 
seen  among  the  hundreds  which  came  to  the  clearing.  It  is  a  siguificant 
fact  that,  in  all  cases  where  the  yoimg  were  not  in  company  with  the 
adults,  the  latter  and  not  the  former,  as  some  have  reported,  preceded. 
In  tlie  case  of  the  Tennessee  Warblers  three  days  elapsed  before  there 
was  any  noticeable  number  of  young,  while  toward  the  last  of 
the  migration  the  young  greatly  outnumbered  the  adults.  Throughout 
the  entire  migration,  however,  the  immature  Blackpolls  outnumbered 
the  old  birds,  in  fact  the  latter  were  very  rarely  seen.  Only  two  Black 
and  White  Warblers  were  observed,  and  only  four  small  flocks  of 
r- Black-throated  Green  Warblers. 

The  principal  feeding  grounds  were  among  the  alders,  birches  and 
balsams  which  lined  the  more  open  parts  of  the  road.  In  the  narrow 
strips  where  the  high  conifers  bordered  the  path,  the  bird  life  was 
scanty,  and  when  these  portions  were  enconntwed  by  the  migrating 
warblers  they  were  qaickly  passed,  often  in  a  single  flight.  The  ilyrtle 
Warblers  were  the  only  ones  observed  to  linger  among  these  large  trees. 

The  food  of  the  warblers  consisted  largely  of  insects,  most  of  it  being 
gleaned  from  the  leaves  and  twigs  of  the  bushes,  but  some  was  taken  on 
the  wing.  The  o|>en  area  here  affoi-ded  a  greater  supply  of  insettn  than 
the  forest,  aud  this  may  possibly  have  played  a  part  in  the  choice  of 
this  {inrticular  habitat. 

On  cold  mornings,  when  the  thermometer  registered  about  45°  F.  or 
below,  the  warblers  would  remain  hidden  in  the  dense  underbrush, 
not  appearing  until  about  nine  o'clock,  when  the  sun  would  be  quite 
warm  and  the  usual  morning  fog  be  dispelled.  This  fog  bung  over  the 
haobor  nearly  every  morning  aud  frequently  was  so  dense  that  Beaver 
Island,  in  tl|e  harlKir,  was  almost  invisible.  It  was  often  blown  back  over 
the  clearings,  and  until  it  raised,  the  majority  of  the  birds  remained 
quiet.  The  height  of  the  migrating  movement  seemed  to  be  from  the 
middle  of  the  afternoon  until  nightfall;  how  far  into  the  night  it  ex- 
tended I  was  unable  to  ascertain,  but  the  cries  of  innumerable  birds 
could  be  beard  until  nearly  morning.  These  cries,  usually  of  a  single 
faint  syllable,  were  possibly  uttered  to  help  keep  the  birds  together. 
When  the  migrating  flock  had  to  cross  the  clearing  it  was  a  noticeable 
fact  that  they  rarely  flew  directly  across,  thus  exposing  themselves  to 
the  attack  of  the  numerous  hawks,  but  instead  kept  near  to  the  ground, 
making  short  flights  from  bush  to  bush,  and  where  these  were  scattered 


102  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

thev  alighted  directly  on  the  ground.  This  waB  especially  noticeable 
in  the  case  of  the  Palm  Warblers,  which  often  lingered  to  feed  in  the 
grase. 

The  Sparrow  and  Sharp-shinned  Hawka  were  the  principal  enemies 
of  these  birds,  de\oi]rinR  manr  earh  day.  Pnring  the  large  bird  wave 
of  September  12,  the  Pigeon  Hawk  also  played  a  conspicuous,  part  in 
their  desrtruction.  The  influence  of  the  hawks  will  be  taken  up  under 
the  discussion  of  that  family. 

During  the  first  days  of  migration  the  warblers  moved  aloog  very 
leisurely,  the  same  flocks  apparently  remaining  about  the  clearings 
all  day,  but  toward  the  latter  part  of  the  season  the  birds  hurried  for- 
ward, taking  their  food  as  tliey  moved  along.  There  were  several 
warbler  waves  or  periods  of  great  abundance,  the  first  occurring  on 
Auffnst  23.  This  one  was  made  np  almost  entirely  of  Tennessee  War- 
blers, adwlt  and  young  being  about  equal  in  number.  For  the  re- 
mainder of  the  migration,  however,  the  young  outnumbered  the  adults. 
The  second,  made  up  largely  of  immature  Blackpolls,  arrived  on  August 
26.  The  third  wave,  consisting  principally  of  Palm  Warblers,  occurred 
on  August  30.  The  last  wave,  and  by  far  the  largest,  occurred 
September  12.  At  this  time  the  clearings  and  roads  were  full  of 
warblers,  nearly  every  species  observed  at  Isle  Royale  being  represented 
to  a  greater  or  leas  extent.      These  waves  will  be  dealt  with  separately. 

During  the  heavy  rain  and  wind  storms  of  September  1,  2  and  3, 
the  warbler  migration  was  at  a  standstill,  the  birds  keeping  under 
cover  as  much  as  possible.  The  Blackpolls  and  Palm  Warblers  were 
the  only  species  which  seemed  to  be  unaffected  by  the  weather.  These 
beautiful  warblers  were  obsci-ved  feeding  in  the  open  clearing  during  the 
heaviest  rains,  but  even  they  did  not  undertake  to  migrate  against  the 
strong  wind,  so  far  as  1  could  determine. 

b.  Spairotcs.  The  sparrow  migration  b^an  much  later  in  19fl5  than  in 
1904,  some  of  the  most  striking  examples  being  Savannah,  Aug.  17, 
White-crowned,  Aug.  28  and  Lincoln,  Sept.  1,  1904.  On  August  18, 
(1005)  the  first  day  obser\'ations  were  made,  Chipping  and  White-throat- 
ed Sparrows  were  seen,  The  Chipping  had  gathered  into  flocks  and 
roamed  about  the  clearings,  feeding  near  the  borders,  while  the  White- 
throated  were  still  in  single  families  hunting  about  among  the  dead 
leave»  in  the  damp  underbrush.  Many  of  the  White-throated  Sparrows 
were  still  too  young  to  migrate,  some  having  a  little  of  the  first  down 
on  them.  On  August  22,  an  immature  Vesper  Sparrow  was  taken, 
the  only  one  found  on  the  island.  A  few  Song  Sparrows  were  pre^nt 
from  August  21  to  24.  These  were  the  only  ones  seen  and  were  probably- 
migrating  at  that  time.  The  next  few  days  the  number  of  both  Chip- 
ping and  White-throated  Sparrows  was  materially  increased,  large  num- 
bers of  young  of  both  species  making  their  appearance.  Very  few  of 
these  had  moulted  the  first  plumage.  ^ot  until  August  31  were  any 
other  species  seen,  then  large  Hocks  of  Savannah  Sparrows,  both  young 
and  adults,  came  to  the  clearings.  All  were  in  perfect  fall  plumage. 
It  seems  peculiar  that  none  of  tliese  birds  were  seen  before  this  date, 
because  between  August  5  and  8,  I  saw  several,  and  obtained  one  im- 
mature barely  able  to  leave  the  nest-  The  food  was  obtained  along 
the  roads,  in  the  meadows,  and  about  the  houses,  where  several  lost 
their  lives  by  entering  deserted  rooms  and  not  being  able  to  find  their 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  103 

way  out.  The  Sharp-Bhinned  Hawks  proved  to  be  their  worst  enemy. 
The  first  ftocks  of  Savannah  Sparrows  to  arrive  remained  for  several 
diays,  their  numberB  constiintly  increasing.  On  September  5  many 
of  the  Chipping,  White-throated,  and  Havannali  Sparrows  left  the  island, 
and  for  the  next  two  days  only  a  comparatively  few  were  seen,  then 
others  came  in  from  the  north  and  the  flocks  were  rapidly  increased. 

It  was  noticeable  that  most  of  the  birds  which  migrated  from  the 
island  on  September  5  were  adults,  the  young  remaining  until  a  later 
time.  The  Savannahs  showed  the  least  fear  of  man  during  migration 
of  any  of  the  sparrows.  On  September  12,  with  the  great  bird  wave, 
<>uine  the  Lincoln  Sparrows.  Throughont  this  and  the  next  three  days 
hundreds  of  these  birds  were  seen.  As  a  mie  they  kept  secreted  in 
the  burned  brush  and  weeds  of  the  first  clearing,  but  individuals  were 
met  with  all  along  the  road,  where  they  were  seen  bunting  among  the 
fallen  logs  and  underbrush  for  insects. 

Chipping  Sparrows  remained  throughout  the  entire  period  during 
which  observations  were  made,  but  probably  none  of  the  individuals 
first  seen  remained  throughout  that  time.  This  seems  the  more  likely 
afl  on  aevernl  dates  the  bulk  of  the  sparrows  of  alt  species  left,  while 
more  came  in  later  from  the  north. 

c.  Hawks.  During  a  few  days  spent  at  Washington  Harbor  early 
in  August  (Aug.  5  to  8)  only  a  few  Sparrow  and  Sharp-shinned  Hawks 
wei-e  seen,  but  by  August  18,  many  individuals  of  both  species  had  ar- 
rived, liiese  remained  here  to  feed  on  the  swarms  of  grasshoppers  in- 
fecting the  meadows,  and  on  the  small  birds,  as  warblers  and  sparrows, 
which  were  easily  caught  in  the  exposed  clearing.  The  first  few  days 
the  Sparrow  Hawks  outnumbered  the  Sharp-shinned  about  10  to  1,  bat 
QK  the  season  advanced  their  numbers  became  more  equal  and  toward 
the  last  the  Sharp-sbinned  outnumbered  the  Sparrow  Huwks,  both 
because  of  a  steady  increase  of  the  former  and  because  many  of  the 
latter  left  the  island  for  the  south.  When  the  observations  were  first 
made  the  adult  Sparrow  Hawks  were  as  numerous  as  the  immature, 
bat  toward  the  last  of  September  the  adults  had  nearly  all  left  and 
many  more  immature  had  taken  their  places.  Some  idea  of  their 
number  may  be  gained  from  the  statenient  that  more  than  thirty  were 
counted  at  one  time,  sailing  over  the  first  clearing.  Until  the  middle 
of  September  the  immature  Sharp-shinned  greatly  outnumbered  the 
adults.  These  immature  were  full  size,  but  did  not  have  the  spotted 
plumage  of  the  adult.  The  females  of  both  species  greatly  predominated. 
Toward  the  end  of  September  many  male  Shnrp-shiDned,  both  im- 
mature and  adult,  appeared.  These  two  species  of  hawks  fed  on  grass- 
hoppers to  a  considerable  extent,  but  many  crops  of  both  species  were 
found  filled  with  the  remains  of  Tennessee,  I'alm  and  Blackpoll  War- 
blers, Savannah  Span-ows  and  other  species  not  determined.  As  a 
rule  the  older  hawks  were  the  ones  which  destroyed  the  birds,  and  this 
may  account  for  their  migration  from  the  island  at  the  same  time  that 
"the  large  warbler  and  spaiTow  wave  passed,  while  the  immature  hawks 
remained.  Pigeon  Hawks  were  recorded  from  time  to  time,  but  not 
until  September  V2,  when  the  lower  end  of  the  island  was  suddenly 
flooded  with  bird  life,  did  they  apjiear  in  any  numbers.  On  this  date 
several  flocks  of  (J  or  8  were  seen   in  different  parts  of  the  clearing. 


104  illCHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Tliey  were  preying  principall.1'  on  the  eparrowe,  and  were  creating 
gi-eat  Iiavoc  anioug  llieni.  Coming  with  the  great  wave  they  remained 
throughoat  the  day  and  passed  on  with  it  that  night,  on);  one  being 
seen  the  next  morning. 

Tlie  migration  of  the  hawks  is  thus  seen  to  have  been  intimately  con- 
nected with  the  migration  oC  the  smaller  birds  npon  which  they  preyed, 
and  seems  to  give  at  least  one  instance  of  bird  migration  being  in- 
fluenced by  tlie  food  supply. 

During  cold,  rainy  niorninga  the  hawks  rarely  appeared  in  the  open, 
usually  not  until  about  9  o'clock.  This,  however,  was  the  time  the 
warblers  appeared  on  such  days,  and  this  may  also  have  determined 
their  appearance. 

d.  OiHs.  Only  two  species,  the  Great  Horned  and  Acadian  Owls, 
were  seen.  These  wei-e  residents  at  this  time  and  only  concerned  mig- 
ration in  that  they  sometimes  preyed  upon  the  migrants.  Their  effect 
was.  pi'obably  slight. 

e.  Thrushes.  Six  species  wei*e  observed  migrating,  the  Bluebird, 
Robin,  Wilson's.  Olive-backed,  Gray-cheeked  and  Hermit  Thrushes.  A 
pair  of  Blue  Birds  nested  in  a  dead  Birch  at  Wendigo,  and  this  family 
left  the  island  about  August  22.  On  the  2ith  a  small  flock  probably 
consisting  of  two  families  appeared  at  the  first  clearing  and  remained 
about  the  tangled  bmsh  imtil  .Vugiist  31.  when  they  also  left.  No  others 
were  seen  escept  on  Hepteuiber  11  and  12.  Robins  were  seen  twice 
during  August,  but  on  Hepteniber  6,  the  first  real  migratory  mo\'e- 
ment  was  initiated,  and  from  then  on  the  number  rapidly  increased. 
Kmall  flocks  numbering  a  dozen  or  so  wandered  about  the  clearings 
and  open  woodland.  Many  disappeared  on  the  night  of  September  12, 
but  the  number  was  soon  replenished,  and  at  the  time  the  observations 
were  closed  the  Robins  were  quite  abundant. 

The  most  common  of  the  Thrushes  was  the  Wilson's,  They  bred  on 
the  island  and  showed  no  indications  of  the  migrating  spirit  until  the 
latter  part  of  August,  when  they  gradually  increased  in  numbers  and 
moved  about  to  a  greater  extent.  After  September  6  they  became 
rather  scarce,  and  none  were  seen  after  the  14th.  Their  place  was 
taken  by  the  Olive-backed,  and  later  the  Gray-cheeked  became  abundant. 
Many  immature  Olive-backed  were  seen  but  this  species  had  nearly 
disappeared  when  the  great  flocks  of  Gray-cheeked  arrived  (ta  September 
12.  They  showed  little  fear  and  did  not  seem  to  be  frightened  at  the 
report  of  a  gun.  The  flocks  of  the  Gray-cheeked  were  made  up  of 
immature  and  adult  birds,   all  in  perfect  fall  plumage. 

f.  Other  Birds.  Following  the  breeding  season  the  woodpeckers  wan- 
der about  the  island  milking  what  might  be  called  a  local  migration. 
Perhaps  some  of  these  birds  leave  the  island  in  the  fall  and  probably 
others  come  in  from  the  north.  In  one  iustance,  that  of  the  Flicker, 
their  numbers  are  enormously  increased  during  the  latter  part  of 
.\ugust  and  all  through  September.  It  is  very  improbable  that  any  of 
these  latter  birds  winter  on  tlie  island.  Flickers  were  seen  every  day, 
but  the  number  gi-eatly  increased  toward  the  last  of  September,  and 
from  the  report  of  residents  the  number  continues  to  increase  until  late 
October  when  they  api>ear  to  leave  the  island.  Many  were  found  dead 
without  any   apparent   cmiMC,  and   it   was  reported  that   in   the  latter 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  105 

part  or  October  imudreds  were  fouud  dead  eaeli  year.  The  Downy 
aod  Hairy  Wood]>eckers  visited  the  Hearings  occHHionaU.r,  ns  did  the 
P ileal ed  Woodpecker. 

Several  {>airs  of  Kingflshei's  frequented  the  river  bankx,  and  one 
pair  neftted  in  a  sand  bank,  i-earing  7  younf^.  These  birds  gradunll.v 
diBappeared,  uutil  on  Kepteinber  15  the  last  OQes  left.  Families  of 
Sedbrea&ted  Xuthatohes  oecasionally  vinited  the  cleariuj^s,  often  ac- 
companied by  Cliifkadeee,  During  Ahgust,  Crows  were  commonly 
seen,  but  by  the  latter  part  of  September  they  bad  entirely  disappeared, 
n'hether  to  the  south  or  not  it  was  impossible  to  determine.  Se\eriii 
species  of  flycatchers  and  vireos  were  seen  migrating,  the  Alder,  Green- 
crested,  and  Least  Flycatchers  being  seen  several  times,  while  only  out- 
Yellow-bellied  was  found.  Both  young  and  adults  of  the  I^ost  Fly- 
catcher were  seen,  usually  tc^ther. 

One  pair  of  Chimney  Swifts  was  obsen'ed  circling  over  the  river  on 
An^st  19.  Whether  these  were  migrating  I  do  not  know,  but  tliey 
■were  the  only  ones  noted  here  in  IJKta,  One  of  the  most  conspicuous 
species  during  August  was  the  Thick  hilled  Redwing  Blackbird  which 
came  to  the  cleai'ing  in  flocks  numbering  from  about  30  to  E50.  Flocks 
composed  of  young  and  adults  arrived  nearly  every  day.  The  propor- 
tion between  the  two  seemed  to  be  about  equal,  or  if  anything,  in  favor 
of  the  adults.  Xone  were  in  the  black  breeding  dress,  and  only  a  few 
males  had  the  red  on  the  shoulders  out  of  the  pin  feather  stage.  The 
majority  left  on  August  26,  a  few  wei-e  seen  on  August  29,  31,  and  Sep- 
tember 2,  and  two  young  were  found  on  the  8th,  9th  and  10th.  A  single 
specimen  was  taken  September  16  and  another,  partially  moulted,  on 
the  20th. 

There  were  many  instances  where  only  an  individual  or  a  singlo 
flock  of  a  certain  species  was  seen.  Among  these  might  be  mentioned 
the  Catbird  observed  on  September  12.  which  was  the  only  one  the  ex- 
pedition noted  either  in  the  Porcupine  Mountains  or  Isle  Royale  during 
bcth  years,  the  I'hitadelphia  Vireo,  Blue-headed  Vireo,  Chimney  Swift, 
Vesper  Sparrow,  Humming  Bird,  Migrant  Shrike,  Black-throated  Bhw 
Warbler,  Black-thi-oated  Green  and  Black  and  White  Warblers,  Yellow- 
bellied  Flycatcher,  Red-eyed  ^'ireo,  UDid  Kingbird.  Of  these,  only  two 
of  the  Philadelphia  Vireo  and  Chimney  8wift  were  seen,  and  but  single 
individuals  of  the  Migrant  Shrike,  Black  and  White  Warbler  and  Ruby- 
throated  Huonming  Bird. 

IV.         LARGE    BIRR    W.WES. 

During  the  period  from  August  18  to  September  21,  six  large  bird 
waves  passed  over  the  island.  Sometimes  the  waves  were  composed 
principally  of  one  species,  and  again  several  species  occurred  in  vary- 
ing numbers.  These  bird  waves  were  mostly  from  the  north,  although 
small  ones,  consisting  of  the  birds  which  had  accumulated  on  the  island, 
took  place  at  various  times. 

A  bird  wave  may  be  recognized,  first,  by  a  sudden  increase  of  indi- 
viduals, second,  an  increaso  of  species,  or,  third,  by  a  sudden  decrease 
in  the  number  of  birds  which  were  residents  or  had  gradually  accumu- 
lated OD  the  island.  During  the  large  wave  of  September  12,  all  of 
14 


108  MICHIGAN   SURTE!T,    1908. 

these  evidences  were  preBent,  but  nsually  only  one  or  two  were  recog- 
ni?^,  the  most  proaonnred  of  which  was  the  great  increaae  of  birds 
n«  they  paseed  nloDg  tlie  ronds  from  one  clearing  to  another. 

In  some  cases  the  bird  wave  marked  the  date  of  first  arrival,  at  other 
times  it  simply  marked  the  arrival  of  the  bnik.  The  bird  waves  were 
p-nerally  sharply  defined,  so  that  their  relation  to  the  atmospherir 
changes  could  be  noted  to  the  beat  advantage.  The  bulk  of  the  migration 
took  place  during  the  nights  of  bird  waves,  although  there  was  a  con- 
stant going  and  coming  of  certain  specie*  throughout  the  fall.  Being 
almost  constantly  in  the  field  the  writer  had  excellent  opportunities  to 
Ktudy  the  migration  when  it  was  most  pronounced,  that  is,  during  the 
large  waves. 

1.  First  Wai/C.  The  first  wave  observed  occurred  on  August  23,  and 
consisted  principally  of  Tennessee  Warblers,  immature  and  adults  being 
alwmt  equal  In  number.  At  7:00  A.  M.,  the  temperature  was  58°,  a 
rise  of  6°  in  the  last  twenty-four  hours.  The  weather  was  clear,  and 
it  was  in  fact  one  of  the  most  beautiful  autumn  days  of  the  season. 
A  light  northwest  wind  prevailed,  the  barometer  standing  at  29.9  inches 
Mow).  This  wave  lasted  for  three  days.  The  day  previous  the  weatlier 
conditions  had  been  about  the  same,  except  that  the  thermometer  stood 
at  .'»2''.  An  area  of  low  pressure  (29.75)  was  advancing  towards  the 
iislsmd  and  on  this  date  was  central  over  Assiniboia.  On  the  23d  this 
an-i  was  central  over  Isle  Royale  and  the  area  to  the  north  and  northeast 
of  it.  On  August  24  a  low  area  was  centered  over  northeastern  Missouri 
while  the  high  pressure  which  followed  it  reached  very  nearly  to  Isle 
Koyale,  thus  lowering  the  temperature  to  53°  with  a  northwest  wind  and 
barometer  reading  of  30.2.  On  the  25th  of  August  the  high  (30.3  inches) 
included  the  island  and  the  area  directly  south  of  it.  The  weather  was 
clear,  no  wind,  and  a  fall  in  temperature  to  50°.  On  this  date  the 
beginning  of  the  large  wave  of  Blnckpoll  Warblers  comm^iced,  many 
large  docks  appearing  before  nightfall.  On  the  fourth  day  of  the  wave 
(August  26)  the  barometer  fell  to  30.2  with  an  increase  to  54°  in  tem- 
perature. There  was  scarcely  a  breeze,  and  the  day  was  for  the  most 
part  humid  and  cloudy.  The  bulk  of  the  Blackpolls  arrived  during  the 
previous  night  and  throughout  the  day.  The  wave  lasted  for  se\'eral 
days,  decreasing  gradually  in  volume,  so  that  it  was  difiScult  to  tell  ex- 
actly when  it  stopped,  if  in  fact  it  did  not  grade  off  into  the  next  one. 

2.  ■S'cro«</  Wove.  On  August  30  great  flocks  of  Palm  W-irblers  in- 
vaded the  island.  On  the  previous  day  the  area  of  low  pressure  was 
central  over  the  i-egion  a  little  to  the  west  of  Isle  Boyale,  with  a  bar- 
ometric pressure  of  29.9.  a  temperature  of  61°,  and  wind  northeast  with 
rain.  On  the  30th  the  low  area  had  passed  on  to  the  St.  Lawrence  Val- 
ley and  the  advancing  high  pressure  was  over  Manitoba.  The  barometer 
stood  at  29.8  with  a  northwest  wind  blowing  4  miles  per  hour  and  a 
temperature  of  .^16".  This  wave  also  lasted  three  days  and  might  have 
continued  longer  but  for  the  severe  gales  which  set  in  on  the  night  of 
September  1. 

The  second  day  of  this  wave  (August  31)  the  area  of  high  pres- 
sure (30.1)  was  central  over  all  of  Northern  Michigjin.  a  considerable 
area  north  of  it,  and  south  to  southern  Wisconsin.  With  the  high  pres- 
sure came  a  drojt  in  tenii)enitui'e  to  4C°.    The  day  was  clear  with  a  north 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROYALE.  107 

wind  blowing  about  4  nii)«8  per  hour.  The  Palm  Wapblers  continued  to 
come  in  large  flocks  and  were  by  far  the  most  abundant  bird  at  the 
Harbor.  The  vanguard  of  the  migrating  host  of  Savannah  Sparrows 
appeared  early  on  the  morning  of  the  Slst,  and  by  evening  the  clearing 
was  (airl.v  covered  with  them;  more  came  during  that  night  and  all 
the  next  day  large  flocks  were  arriving  at  the  flrst  clearing.  There  was 
no  appreciable  increase  during  the  four  succeeding  days  among  the  bird 
migrants.  The  third  day  of  the  wave  (September  1)  the  barometer  stood 
30.1  inches,  temperature  52°,  with  a  northeast  wind  and  a  cloudy  (*y. 
This  day  marked  the  close  of  tliis  wave  both  of  birds  coming  to  and 
leaving  the  island.  This  wave  might  have  l)een  checked  either  by  the 
gales  which  follon-ed  or  the  change  of  the  wind  from  north  to  northeast. 
A  few  birds  attempted  to  cross  during  these  succeeding  days,  as  many 
were  killed  by  striking  the  lighted  windows,  etc.,  or  were  found  in  an 
exhausted  condition.  These  were  probably  part  of  that  steady  stream  of 
migrants  which  continues  to  paes  south  during  the  fall,  without  any 
marked  wave  and  in  general  disregard  of  the  weather  conditions. 

:{.  Third  Wavt:  Thin  wave  was  noticed  flit<t  on  September  5  when  the 
bulk  of  the  Chipping,  White- throated,  and  Savannah  Sparrows  left  the 
island,  and  on  September  G  the  first  real  migration  of  the  Hobin  com- 
menced. I  have  considered  these  two  days  as  parts  of  one  wave,  con- 
trolled by  the  same  conditionH,  for  probably  the  same  influences  acting 
at  the  saiiie  time  caoeed  the  sparrows  to  leave  the  island  and  the  Robins 
to  leave  their  more  northern  home.  The  weather  conditions  were  suth 
as  seem  to  be  niost  favorable  for  fall  migration.  On  September  5  the 
high  pressure  had  advanced  to  an  area  lying  from  Winnipeg  on  the  north 
to  Memphis  on  the  south,  and  extending  east  nearly  to  Duluth.  The 
barometer  stood  at  30.1  I  high)  with  a  northwest  wind  blowing  six 
miles  per  hour  and  a  temperature  of  39°.  The  day  was  {tartially  cloudy, 
but  no  rain  fell.  On  the  6tli  an  area  of  high  pressure  had  formed  over 
the  region  directly  to  the  north  and  northeast  of  the  island.  A  moderate 
northwest  wind  prevailed  with  the  bai-ometer  at  30.1  inches,  and  ther- 
mometer 42°.  and  the  weather  was  clear.  A  few  Robins  had  been  noted 
befoi-e  this,  but  these  were  only  scattered  individuals  or  pairs,  but  on 
this  date  a  large  number  came  to  the  island,  both  youug  nud  adults  being 
seen,  although  the  latter  greatly  predominated. 

4.  Fourth  Wave.  On  September  12  the  largest  wave  of  the  season 
occurred.  For  number  of  species  as  well  as  individuals  it  could  scarcely 
be  compared  to  the  other  large  waves,  a  total  of  41  species  being  ob- 
served in  actual  migration  on  this  day.  On  the  previous  day  the  low 
area  was  central  over  Lake  Erie,  and  a  similar  area  was  formed  over 
the  Dakotas.  The  barometer  stood  at  29.8  inches,  the  temperature  at 
52",  with  a  north  wind  and  a  clear  sky.  It  was  cloudy,  however,  on  the 
north  shore.  On  the  morning  of  the  12th  the  low  area  was  central  over 
Sew  England,  while  the  western  one  had  moved  south  and  had  been 
followed  by  an  area  of  high  pressure  central  over  the  Dakotas  and 
Western  Minnesota.  The  island  lay  between  the  isobars  of  30.1  and  30.2 
inches,  with  a  temperature  of  42^,  and  a  northwest  wind  averaging  8 
miles  per  hour.  The  day  was  clear  and  seemed  i>erfect  in  every  way. 
The  birds  were  so  plentiful  in  the  clearing  at  0:30  A,  M.,  as  to  attract 
my  attention   from   the   windows.     Unlike   the   other   bird   waves,   the 


108  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

motioii  was  continuons,  scarcely  a  break  occurring  in  the  steady  stream 
of  migrants  as  tbey  passed  along  the  road.  There  was  very  little  linger- 
ing by  the  way,  although  when  the  birds  arrived  at  the  first  clearing 
they  often  scattered  about,  feeding  on  the  myriads  of  insects  infesting 
the  grass  and  shrubbery.  Many  of  the  birds  after  collecting  into  great 
flocks,  sometimes  numbering  more  than  a  hundred,  rose  directly  from 
the  clearing  and  taking  a  south  westerly  direction,  left  the  island,  pre- 
sumably for  the  south  shore.  As  a  rule  the  birdie  flew  dii-ectly  down  the 
Harbor  and  the  fishermen  and  tourists  at  Washington  IxJiind  reporte<1 
that  never  before  had  they  seen  such  numbers  of  birds  except  during 
the  spring  migration.  These  observers  reported  that  the  majority  of 
the  flocks  passed  at  a  considerable  height  above  the  island,  many  of 
them  probably  belonging  to  the  same  flocks  that  left  the  clearing  four 
and  one-half  miles  ap  the  bay.  Some  -species,  particularly  the  warblers 
aud  sparrows,  flew  from  the  ground  in  practically  the  direction  they 
took  when  on  their  way,  but  others  as  the  American  Pipit,  Bna^  Qrackle, 
Horned  Lark  and  Thick-billed  Redwing  flew  around  in  great  circles, 
often  hanging  around  the  border  of  the  clearing'  for  some  time,  as  if  not 
quite  decided  whether  to  go  or  not.  No  flocks  of  the  last  named  bird 
were  seen  on  this  day,  however.  As  I  passed  up  the  road  toward  Wendi- 
go  that  morning  I  met  flock  after  flock  of  Palm  Warblers,  Grey-cheeked 
Thrushes,  and  Savannah  Sparrows,  The  pn^ressive  movement  of  the 
migratory  birds  was  clearly  shown  as  they  passed  in  a  southwesterly 
direction  along  the  road  from  Wendigo  to  the  clearing  at  the  Club 
House. 

Darting  everywhere  were  Sbarp^hinned  and  Sparrow  Hawks,  while 
every  few  miniites  a  Pigeon  Hawk  would  dash  by.  All  the  birds  seem- 
ed restless  as  if  impelleil  by  some  uncontrollable  spirit  to  keep  ever  on 
the  move.  Warblers,  thrushes,  sparrows  and  flycatchers  were  coDStantty 
crossing  and  recrossing  the  path  in  front  of  me. 

During  the  night  of  September  12  nearly  ail  the  birds  left  the  island. 
Towards  evening  the  temperature  gradually  dropped,  until  at  9  P.  M, 
it  was  only  ZS".  The  morning  of  the  13th  was  one  of  the  coldest  I 
experienced  on  the  island,  ice  remaining  on  the  water  pail  until  nearly 
noon.  During  the  night  the  area  of  high  pressure  had  advanced  until 
at  7:00  A.  M.  it  was  central  over  Isle  Royale  with  a  barometer  reading 
of  30.4,  temperature  at  26°,  and  a  brisk  west  wind.  The  sky  was  clear, 
as  is  usual  under  high  barometi-ic  pressure.  2tfany  Lincoln  Sparrows 
remained,  as  well  as  numerous  flocks  of  Gray-cheeked  Thrushes.  But 
the  great  flood  of  migrants  had  passed  on  the  previous  night.  Howe^-er, 
the  wave  set  U|»  by  these  verj'  favorable  conditions  was  not  yet  over. 
Large  flocks  of  Homed  Larks  numbering  from  about  60  to  200  or  more 
came  to  the  clearing,  feeding  on  the  injects  and  seeds  in  the  open 
meadow  and  on  the  cultivated  ground.  On  this  morning  many  dead 
birds  were  found,  among  which  was  aji  adult  male  yellow-bellied  Fly- 
catcher, the  only  one  of  this  species  seen. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  41  migrants  which  composed  this  re- 
markable wave  of  September  12:  Chipping  Sparrow,  White-throated 
Sparrow.  Sharp-shinned  Hawk,  Sparrow  Hawk,  Blue  Bird,  Flicker. 
Myrtle  Warbler,  Tennessee  Warbler,  Phoebe,  Redstart,  Least  Fly- 
catcher. Hermit  Thrush,  Spotted  Sandpiper,  Pigeon  Hawk,  Robin,  Olive- 
backed    Thrush,   Golden-crowned     Kinglet,     Cooper's    Hawk,    Wilson's 


BCOLOQY  OP  ISLE  ROYALK.  109 

Thmsh,  Solitary  Sandpiper,  Slagnolia  Warbler,  Palni'  Warbler,  Oven- 
bird,  Bay-breasted  Warbler,  Blue  Headed  Vireo,  BlackpoU  Warbler, 
SaTannah  Sparrow,  Black -throated  Ore«i  Warbler,  Grinnell's  IVater 
IMirtish,  Marsh  Hawk,  Catbird,  Black-throated  Blue  Warbler.  Naah- 
Tille  Warbler,  Philadelphia  Vireo,  Bed«yed  Vireo,  Linoolo's  Sparrow, 
Connecticut  Warbler,  Ruby-crowned  Kinglet,  Gray-cherfted  Thi'ush, 
Broad-winged   Hawk   and  White-crowned   Sparrow. 

The  following  were  seen  on  September  13:  Chipping  Sparrow,  White- 
throated  Sparrow,  Sharp-shinned  Hawk,  Sparrow  Hawk,  Flicker,  Her- 
mit Thrnsh,  Pigeon  Hawk,  Robin,  Palm  Warbler,  BlackpoU  ^I'arbler, 
Savannah  Sparrow,  Marsh  Hawk,  Lincoln's  Sparrow,  Gray-cheeked 
Thrush.  White-crowned  Sparrow,  Homed  Lark  and  Yellow-bellied 
Flycatcher. 

5.  Fifth  Wave.  On  September  16  the  bulk  of  the  Rusty  Crackles 
arrived.  A  few  had  Iteen  seen  the  day  previous,  but  only  scattered  in- 
dividuals composing  the  vanguard  of  the  large,  noisy  flocks  to  follow. 
The  area  of  highest  pressure  was  off  the  Kew  England  states,  while 
the  low  pressure  centered  in  Kansas.  The  barometer  stood  30.0  inches, 
temperatnre  50°,  and  an  easterly  wind  with  a  cloudy  sky.  While  this 
was  one  of  the  smallest  of  the  sharply  defined  waves,  it  presents  a 
tnarked  contrast  to  most  of  the  others.  Although  the  area  of  highest 
pi-essure  was  not  near  Isle  Royale.  as  during  most  waves,  the  barometer 
litood  at  30.0  inches,  which  was  higher  than  for  the  area  to  the  west 
and  south ;  the  wind  was  from  the  east  and  the  sky  cloudy  in  con- 
trast to  the  northwest  wind  and  clear  sky  of  the  other  waves. 

6.  Sixth  Wave.  On  September  18  the  high  area  was  far  to  the 
east  (Maine)  and  the  low  centered  over  Kansas.  The  barometer  stood 
at  29.S  inches,  with  a  clear  sky,  northeast  wind,  and  a  temperature  of 
53°,  Like  the  last  this  was  comparatively  a  small  wave  and  only  in- 
volved a  single  species,  the  American  Pipit,  which  came  in  large  flocks 
numbering  from  perhaps  100  to  200  birds. 

V.      THE   BBLATION    OP    WEATHBll    TO    MIGBATIOX. 

Gooke  ('88.  p.  16,)  makes  the  following  statement  in  regard  to  the 
relation  of  temperature  and  barometric  pressure  during  migration,  '"The 
area  of  the  lowest  pressure  is  nfever  stationary  but  con.**tantIy  moving, 
and  in  an  easterly  direction.  It  may  be  moving  northeast,  east,  south- 
east, and  rarely  north  or  south;  but  never  northwest,  west,  nor  south- 
west. The  usual  direction  in  the  Mississippi  Valley  is  a  little  Bonth 
of  east."  Warm  wa^-es.  which  are  associated  with  areas  of  low  jires- 
sure,  therefore  b^n  in  the  northwest,  and  move  toward  the  southeast, 
'"It  is  a  law  of  the  movement  of  winds  that  they  go  toward  areas  of 
lo^'  pressure,  and  from  an  area  of  high  pressure."  "But  an  area  of 
low  pressure  is  followed  by  one  of  high  pressure,  producing  an  opposite 
effect,  and  the  isotherms  which  bent  north  to  welcome  the  coming  of  the 
low  area  turn  rapidly  southnard  l)efore  the  icy  breath  which  blows 
from  an  area  of  high  pressure.  Thus  the  cold  and  warm  waves  both 
come  froml  the  same  quarter,  and  both  move  in  the  same  direction: 
that  is  "the  direction  in  which  the  area  of  low  pressure  is  advancing."' 
It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  temperatnre  and  the  direction  of  the  wind 
over  any  given  area  are  both  associated  with  the  barometric  pressnpdi- 


110  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

and  the  inovemeiit  of  its  high  and  low  arefls,  and  since  "low  preesnre 
is  generally  accompanied  by  clouds  and  rain,  while  areas  of  high  pres- 
sure are  cloudless"  it  will  be  seen  that  this  important  etement  is  also 
associated  vrith  the  barometric  pressure,  Tims  we  see  that  the  four 
striking  factors  which  influence  migration,  namely  teauperature,  direc- 
tion of  wind,  condition  of  the  weather,  and  barometric  pressure  are 
correlated  and  work  together,  the  same  factors  being  always  associated 
together  and  giving  the  same  resultn. 

To  detei-niine  the  true  relation  of  these  factors  to  migration  we 
must  discover  the  most  favorable  conditions  for  this  moveiDeDt,  and 
then  we  can  coi'i-elate  the  atmospheric  changes  which  are  taking  place 
with  the  corresponding  migratory  moi'emenf.  Of  course  many  birds 
are  constantly  passing  to  the  south  throughout  the  fall,  iiTCspecti^-e 
of  the  weather  conditions,  but  the  changes  which  will  set  great  num- 
bers moving  onward  simultaneously  must  be  the  ideal  conditions  for 
migratiou.  If  this  be  true  the  time  to  study  this  relation  of  the  weather 
is  during  the  great  waves. 


TABLE  OF  BIRD  WAVES 

DatF. 

Tempen- 

Wind- 

Sky. 

riMT  Bin 

WAVE. 

Aug.    23 

29.9 

i 

IS 

B 

S8;f 

Is 

Vr 

CloudT. 

THIHD    Bia 

Sept.     -I 

30.1 

FOVBTH    BIB 

« 

!i:S: 

^ly  cJoudr- 

*•"■!!:;::::::::,;:::.:::;;:::::::::;:;::: 

S.i 

42 
28 

N.  W. 

Clear. 

Clear, 

Sept.  18 

29-8 

S2 

fj.  E 

Cte«T. 

1.  Influence  of  M'ind.  A  reference  to  the  table  of  bird  waves  shows 
that  on  six  days  of  the  thirteen  during  which  large  waves  were  ob- 
served, the  wind  was  from  the  northwest.  Two  diays  were  without 
appreciable  wind,  on  two,  the  wind  was  from  the  northeast,  and  upon 
other  days  it  was  from  the  north,  east,  and  west,  but  npon  none  of 
them  was  it  fmiii  the  south,  soutlieast,  or  southwest.  A.  n<H^hweet 
wind  prei-ailed  the  first  two  days  of  the  first  wave,  the  third  and  fourth 
days  being  without  wind.  Tlie  second  wave  commenced  with  a  north- 
west wind,  which  changed  to  north  on  the  second,  and  to  the  north- 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE.ROTALE.  Ill 

east  OD  the  third  day.  The  northwest  winds  prevailed  both  dajs  of 
the  third  ware,  while  the  fonrth  started  with  a  northwest  wind,  and 
changed  to  west  on  the  succeeding  da.r.  The  fifth  wave  was  )>ei-uliar 
in  having  an  east  wind  and  the  sixth  a  northejist  one,  both  of  which 
brought  birds  of  different  species,  and  from  a  different  direction  than 
those  with  nopthweet  winds.  These  two  waves  were  also  mnch  smallra' 
than  the  preceding  ones.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  great  bnik  of 
migration  took  place  with  a  n(K*thwest  wind. 

2,  Iitflarufc  of  TcmprratHrc.  Since  fall  migration  pi-evails  at  a 
tinte  when  the  temperature  is  gradually  falling,  the  records  for  a  wave 
near  the  first  of  the  movement  would  be  much  lii;{ber  than  those  at 
the  last,  so  this  factor  can  be  considered  only  in  a  relative  way,  i.  e., 
we  must  not  compare  the  temperature  at  the  fli'St  and.  last  of  the 
season,  bnt  simply  consider  the  tempera tiu-e  immediately  preceding  and 
following  a  wave.  The  average  temperature  for  the  thii*teen  days  was 
47°.  This  low  average  was  partially  due  to  two  days  of  very  low 
temperature.  All  the  waves  but  one  were  on  a  falling  temperature, 
and  in  this  cnse  the  mercury  had  fallen  from  the  day  previous.  As 
-a  falling  or  low  temperature  is  the  cause  of  the  high  barometric  pres- 
sure, which  in  turn  with  the  passage  of  the  high,  causes  the  north- 
west winds  which  are  so  favorable  to  migration,  it  will  be  seen  that 
a  falling  or  low  temperature  ii«  perhaps  the  first  reqnisite  for  the  bird 
wave.  The  low  temperatnre  also  influences  the  food  of  the  migrants, 
billing  off  the  insects,  or  driving  them  to  shelter,  and  in  this  con- 
nection may  prove  to  be  very  important. 

:{.  Inftncmi:  of  Baronutric  I'rrsHuiT.  One  of  the  most  striking  con- 
ditions was  the  high  barometric  pressm-e  under  which  these  lai-ge  waws* 
took  place.  On  ten  of  these  thirteen  days  the  barometer  stood  at  Sti 
inches,  or  above,  the  average  of  these  being  3(M7.  The  lowest  pressnits 
was  29.  8,  the  average  for  all  bedng  Sll.Oi).  None  of  the  waves  took 
]>laee  on  a  falling  buroineter,  but  whei^e  there  was  a  change  the  pre**- 
sure  was  rising  as:  first  wave  29.9.  Hit.i,  30.3.  30.2;  second  Wave  29.8, 
:t0.1,  30.1;  third,  30.1,  .30.1;  fourth  30.2,  30.4.  As  before  stated  the 
direction  of  the  wind  is  due  to  the  relation  of  the  arenn  of  low  and 
high  pressure  to  the  region  under  consideration,  and  it  is  in  this  con- 
net'tion  that  it  bears  upon  the  problem  of  migration  )ilienotiicmi. 

Cooke  in  his  discussion  of  the  effects  of  atmospheric  changes  on 
spring  migration  shows  that  at  this  season  the  large  movements  took^ 
place  on  low  or  falling  baroaneters,  and  stated  that  it  probably  would 
be  found  that  in  fall  the  opposite  conditions  existed  and  mignitinn 
would  occur  on  the  rising  or  high  barometric  pi-essiires.  This  was  found 
true  at  Isle  Bovale  and  probably   is  true  for  all   fall   mignition. 

4.  Condition  of  the  Hky.  It  will  be  noticed  that  on  9  of  the  13 
days  of  bird  waves  the  sky  was  clear,  and  on  the  remaining  four  it 
was  simply  cloudy,  fflo  waves  occurring  during  rainy  weather.  In 
spring  the  wa^-es  usually  occur  during  cloudy  nights;  in  the  fall,  as 
witnessed  here,  the  opposite  is  the  case-,  and  the  bulk  of  the  fall  migra- 
tion can  be  said  to  take  place  on  clear  nights. 

H.  Summarif  and  Cmiclusion.  From  the  data  submitted  we  see  Ihat 
fall  migration  as  witnessed  at  Isle  Royale  occurs,  in  the  majority  of 
cases,  with  a  nni'thwest  wind  and  a  falling  temperature  with  its  rising 


112  MICHIOAN   SDHVE7,  1908. 

barometer,  and  clear  aky.  (Cf.  Smith,  '07,  p.  223.)  It  therefore  seems 
evident  that  low  temperature  and  high  barometric  jttcssnre,  with  the 
prevailing  northwest  winds  and  clear  sky  which  accwnpany  them  far- 
niahes  the  most  favorable  conditions  for  the  bulk  of  the  fail  migratioo. 
It  will  be  noticed  under  the  head  of  Migration  Routes  that:  a  few  birds 
prefer  northeast  instead  of  a  nortliwest  wind.  The  conditions  which 
would  be  favorable  for  the  migration  of  these  birds  would  occur  after 
the  passage  of  a  high  and  while  the  approaching  low  was  still  some  dis- 
tance off. 

It  is  desirable  that  similar  observations  be  carried  on  at  other  favor- 
able localities  in  order  to  further  test  these  conclusions,  and  determine 
whether  thej  are  of  general  application  to  the  fall  migration. 

VI.     roi;tE3  of  migration. 

From  the  observations  made  during  the  falls  of  1904  and  1905,  it 
seems  that  Isle  Royale  ties  directly  in  the  path  of  a  very  strong  mi- 
gratory movement.  In  the  fall  there  was  a  great  massing  of  bird 
life.  For  some  unknown  reason  the  path  of  densest  movement  was 
very  narrow,  at  least  appearances  pointed  to  such  a  condition.  Tbia 
apparent  narrowness  of  the  route  through  the  island  was  strikingly 
shown  on  September  9  when  a  trip  was  made  across  it  from  Washing- 
ton Harbor  to  Siskowit  Bay,  About  15  miles  were  traversed,  em- 
bracing every  environment  from  clearings  to  high  hardwood  forests 
and  damp  cedar  swamps.  Nearly  a  day  was  spent  hunting  over  the 
clearing  and  adjacent  forest  near  the  head. of  the  bay,  but  scarcely 
any  migrants  were  observed.  A  few  Black-throated  and  Tmnessee 
Warblers  and  a  few  sparrows  were  seen,  while  an  occasional  Sparrow 
or  Sharp-shinned  Hawk  was  met.  This  was  not  due  to  a  lack  of  food, 
as  gras^oppers  and  other  insects  were  very  plentiful.  At  Washington 
Harbor  the  reverse  was  the  case;  here  on  September  9  and  10  I  saw 
many  migrants,  the  majority  of  which  wwe  not  seen  at  Siskowit  at 
all.  These  observations  at  the  harbor  were  made  in  the  morning  before 
leaving  and  in  the  late  afternoon  of  the  following  day  when  I  re- 
turned from  the  bay.  While  at  Siskowit  scarcely  a  bird  was  heard 
passing  over,  although  at  the  harbor  they  could  be  heard  throughoat 
the  night.  The  path  apparently  extended  lengthwise  of  Isle  Boyale 
with  Washington  Harbor  and  the  r^on  lying  between  it  and  the 
north  shore  of  the  island  as  its  diameter. 

In  a  recent  paper,  Tavemer  ('06)  makes  the  statement  that  perhaps 
a  migration  route  lies  between  Isle  Boyale  and  Eewe^iaw  Point.  From 
the  observations  made  on  the  island,  I  am  led  to  believe  that  such  a 
route  does  exist  and  also  one  lying  much  to  the  west  of  this  point, 
perhaps  to  the  Apostle  Islands  and  the  mainland  lying  Southwest  of 
them.  These  conclusions  were  drawn  from  a  consideration  of  the  fol- 
lowing facts.  The  route  taken  by  the  majority  of  the  migrants,  both 
those  which  passed  slowly  across  the  island  and  those  observed  fiying 
overhead,  whether  by  night  or  day,  lay  nearly  southwest.  During  the 
latter  part  of  August  and  parts  of  September,  the  nights  irere  un- 
iiMially  bright,  so  that  migrating  flocks  could  often  be  seen  high  in  the 
air  even  when  not  crossing  the  face  of  the  moon.  The  cries  of  mi- 
grating birds,  heard  mostly  on  cloudy  nights,  usually  came  from  a 


BCfOLOQT  OP  ISLB  ROTALE.  113 

northeasterly  directioo  and  died  away  in  a  sonthwesterly  one.  Cer- 
taiu  birds,  as  the  Thick -billed  B«d-wing  Blackbird  and  'Lincoln 
Sparrow,  which  were  found  commonly  at  the  island,  are  very 
rare  or  do  not  occnr  at  all  in  the  r^ion  directly  south 
or  southeast  of  it  The  Thick-billed  Red-wing  has  never  been  taken 
at  any  point  in  southern  Michigan.  These  birds,  being  of  western  origin, 
have  gradoally  worked  their  way  east  where  tiiey  have  found  suitable 
breeding  grounds,  but  it  seems  probable  that  in  their  fall  migration  they 
move  westward  and  join  the  throng  passing  down  the  migration  route 
traversed  by  their  ancestors.  It  seems  probable  that  the  greater  portion 
of  the  migrants  which  leave  Isle  Rojale,  moving  in  a  southwesterly 
direction,  continue  thus  until  they  reach  the  Mississippi  Valley,  where 
they  are  joined  by  birds  from  other  regions,  and  all  move  down  this  great 
liighway  of  bird  migration. 

It  was  observed  that  nearly  all  the  large  bird  waves  were  associated 
with  northwest  winds.  As  the  birds  probably  take  a  southwest  course 
this  gives  them  the  beam  wind  which  seems  to  be  most  favorable  for 
their  flight.  Of  course  it  was  impossible  to  tell  from  what  directiOTi 
the  birds  came  to  Isle  Boyale,  but  it  seems  reasonable  that  they  should 
choose  a  beam  wind  when  leaving  the  mainland,  since  they  arrived 
shortly  after  at  the  island  flying  with  such  a  wind.  If  this  proves 
to  be  tme,  the  majority  of  the  birds  coming  to  Isle  Boyale  are  from 
the  north  or  northeast. 

The  data  for  the  supposed  roilte  to  Keweenaw  Point  is  slight  com- 
pared with  that  for  the  southwestern  one.  Two  species,  the  Busty 
Gracfcle  and  the  American  Pipit,  were  observed  migrating  in  this  direc- 
tion. During  their  flight  the  wind  was  from  the  niH-theast  giving  them 
the  beam  wind  which  a  number  of  observers  have  noted  to  be  the  one 
preferred  by  hawks  and  gnlls  during  their  migration.  Under  "Perils 
oif  Migration"  an  instance  is  cited  where  a  number  of  birds  were  caught 
by  a  storm  while  crossing  to  the  east  of  the  island  and  were  driven 
to  Washington  Harbor.  These  birds  were  possibly  crossing  to  Kewee- 
naw Point.  Probably  the  majority  of  the  bdrds  which  strike  this  point 
are  from  regions  lying  to  the  northeast  of  it,  and  arrive  there  on  north- 
west winds  as  do  those  birds  which  n^grate  across  Isle  Boyale.  The 
theory  that  many  birds  skirt  the  Great  Lakes,  'as  brought  out  by 
Tavemer,  explains  the  absence  of  several  species  from  Southern  Mich- 
igan which  is  not  done  by  the  discussion  of  the  routes  from  Isle  Boyale. 

VII.      TUB    PERILS    OF     MIORATION. 

Dixon  in  his  "Migration  of  Birds,"  divides  the  perils  of  migration 
into  three  important  classes :  flrst,  those  arising  from  fatigue  doe  to 
the  mechanical  part  of  season-flight;  second,  those  arising  from  the 
natural  enemies  of  each  species;  and  third,  those  arising  from  Munders 
and  fatalities  on  the  way.  These  three  classes  were  observed  in  vary- 
ing degree  during  the  fall  migration  at  Washington  Harbor. 

1.  Fatigue.  Between  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior  and  Isle 
Boyale,  the  distance  is  so  short  that  unless  unfavorable  winds  inter- 
cept them  the  older  birds  would  have  little  trouble  from  fatigue  due 
to  the  simple  operation  of  flight;  but  the  young,  which  often  commence 
migration  soon  after  being  able  to  fly,   would  experience  considerable 


114  HlCHIOAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

strain  on  their  frail  bodies  in  even  bo  short  a  flight.  This  was  vividly 
Bhown  in  the  number  ot  exhausted  young  found  after  every  bird  wave. 
During  September,  immature  warbler*  and  sparrows  were  often  founil 
in  the  morning  in  an  almost  completely  exhausted  condition  after  their 
night's  flight.  This  was  especially  evident  among  the  Tennessee  and 
Rlackpoll  Warblers.  On  the  morning  of  September  13,  following  the 
day  which  witnessed  the  largest  bird  wave,  I  picked  up  many  dead 
birds.  Nearly  alt  were  warblers,  the  Tennessee  seeming  to  have  suffered 
most,  although  the  Palm  was  a  close  second.  A  few  inunature  Savan- 
nah Sparrows,  one  adult  Yellow-bellied  Flycatcher,  and  ae\'eral  young 
Flickers  were  also  found  dead.  These  dead  migrants  were  seen  in  the 
clearing,  along  the  sroads,  aud  on  the  banks  of  the  stream.  An  ex- 
amination of  these  victims  showed  no  outward  indieoition  of  the  cause 
of  their  death.  Only  a  few  were  emaciated  to  any  extent.  It  was  a 
noticeable  fact,  however,  that  none  of  the  birds  found  dead  were  in 
the  prime,  fatty  condition  of  most  of  the  other  migrants  taken.  The 
conclusion  therefore  seems  probable,  that  the  birds  must  be  in  the 
best  condition  possible  to  miake  a  successful  migration  flight,  and  that 
the  greatest  mortality  among  the  migrants  lies  in  that  class  which  for 
some  unknown  reason  are  not  in  prime  condition.  As  there  were  no 
other  reasons  evident  which  could  have  brought  on  this  high  death  rate, 
it  is  probable  that  death  had  been  caused  by  severe  exertion,  coupled 
perhaps  in  a  few  instances  with  lack  of  food  and  unfavorable  weather 
conditions  in  which  to  recuperate.  This  seemed  the  more  plausible 
considering  the  fact  that  in  only  a  comparatively  few  cases  were  the 
victims  adult  birds,  while,  as  before  stated,  many  of  the  immature 
warblers  and  sparrowH  had  only  been  ahle  to  fly  for  a  ^ort  time. 

After  heavy  storms,  especially  those  from  the  southeast,  many  adult 
as  weli  as  young  birds  -were  fonnd  in  an  exhausted  condition,  their 
plumage  presenting  a  dilapidated  appearance,  the  wing  and  tail  feathers 
broken,  and  showing  genera)  evidence  of  a  hard  struggle  with  the  wind. 
Some  of  these  birds  may  have  been  caught  by  the  storm  while  cross- 
ing from  the  north  shore  to  the  island,  but  as  the  birds  appeared  to 
be  blown  before  the  wind  I  think  thait  at  least  part  of  themi  were  over- 
taken while  crossing  the  take  considerably  to  the  east  of  Isle  Royale, 
perhaps  toward  Keweenaw  Point.  Overtaken  by  the  storm  and  with 
no  place  to  take  refuge  they  were  gradually  blown  in  the  direction 
of  the  island  where  they  were  found  the  succeeding  morning  in  such 
an  exhausted  condition.  Some  of  these  birds  would  even  allow  them- 
selves to  be  picked  up  and  handled  without  showing  any  fear.  The 
birds  which  suffered  moat  were  the  Palm  and  Tennessee  Warblers. 
Michael  Hollinger,  a  i-esident  on  the  island  for  several  years,  told  me 
that  often,  especially  ini  spring,  he  had  seen  Washington  Harbor  "liter- 
ally covered"  with  floating  birds  which  had  succumb^  in  their  struggle 
against  the  storms  and  had  drifted  in  from  the  open  lake.  The  peciUiar 
shape  of  the  harbor  and  the  lake  currents  tends  to  mass  floating  bodies 
at  this  point.  But  the  loss  as  shown  by  those  collected  at  the  harbor 
oonld  be  bat  ai  slight  proportion  of  the  vast  numbers  which  must  have 
jterished  in  the  open  lake. 

Se^-eral  flshermen  said  that  after  heavy  gales  in  late  fall  and  early 
spring,  the  shore  at  Washington  Harbor  would  be  strewn  with  the  life- 


•      ECOLOGY  OF   I8LB   ROYALK.  IIB 

le«s  bodieB  of  birds  thrown  up  by  the  ■*'BTea.  During  the  fall  of  19H3, 
birda  w-ere  several  times  reported  as  lighting  on  the  ehipe  coming  into 
the  island,  andt  the  fishermen  eecured  several  which  lit  on  their  small 
boats  after  a  storn^  when  about  two  miles  from  land.  They  reported 
the  birds  as  very  tajne  and  allowing  themselves  to  be  handled  freely. 
The  birds  secured  were  several  small  Bparrows,  Tennessee  and  Palm 
Warblers,  a  Saw-whet  Owl,  and  one  adnlt  Bobin.  Theae  birds  were 
all  encountered  near  the  southwestern  end  of  the  island.  They  had 
probably  been  blown  out  of  their  course  and  were  striving  to  reach 
the  nearest  point  of  land,  as  no  birds  would  be  coming  from  the  south 
at  this  time  of  j-ear  nor  would  any  so  completely  exhausted  have  at- 
tempted to  leave  the  island. 

2.  Natural  Enemiea.  Without  doubt  the  greatest  natural  enemies 
of  the  birds  during  migration  were  the  Hharp-shinned  and  Sparrow 
Hawks.  At  times  the  Pigeon  Hawk  made  great  havoc  among  the 
smaller  birds,  and  the  Owls  aim  played  a  small  part.  Probably  weasels 
and  minks  fed  to  aome  extent  rm  the  migrants,  which  they  canght  while 
the  birds  were  resting.  These  animals,  however,  onJy  destroyed  com- 
paratively few,  as  remains  of  their  victims  were  seldom  fonnd.  Like- 
wise the  Owls  probably  destroyed  only  those  which  came  direftly  in 
their  path,  the  abundance  of  the  Varying  Hare  furnishing  a  food  much 
easier  to  procure.  This  undoubtedly  saved  a  large  number  of  mdgrants. 
Of  the  other  animals,  the  Lynx  also  fed  largely  on  the  Hares  and  so 
probably  molested  the  birds  very  little,  while  the  family  of  house  cats 
kept  at  the  clnhhonse  were  more  than  supplied  by  the  n'umi9er  of  small 
birds  which  met  death  striking  against  the  windows,  etc. 

The  early  migrants  were  preyed  upon  very  little  by  the  hawks,  prin- 
cipally because  the  Sharp-shinned  Hawk  had  not  arrived  in  any  ap- 
preciable numbers,  and  secondly,  the  great  swarms  of  grasshoppers  fur- 
nished an  abundance  of  appetizing  food.  As  the  season  advanced  and 
both  species  of  hawks  grew  more  uumerons.  their  effect  on  the  bird 
life  increased.  None  of  the  smaller  birds  were  safe,  away  from  the 
protecting  boughs  of  the  conifers  and  alders,  and  therefore  were  con- 
fined almost  exclusively  to  the  edge  of  the  clearings.  The  Sparrow 
Hawks  fed  both  on  grasshoppers  and  on  warblers  and  sparrows,  while 
the  Sharp-shinned  fed  almost  entirely  on  the  latter.  During  the  bird 
waves  the  hawks  became  more  numerous,  this  being  especially  true  for 
the  great  wave  of  September  12,  On  this  date  great  numbers  of  both 
Sharp-shinned  and  Sparrow  Hawks  made  their  appearance,  as  well  as 
many  of  the  Pigeon  and  a  few  CoopCT's  and  Broad-winged  Hawks. 
The  Pigeon  Hawks  in  particular  timed  their  migration  to  that  of  their 
victims,  appearing  and  disappearing  with  each  successive  wave,  very 
few  remaining  on  the  island.  The  majority  of  the  Shapji-shianed  also 
kept  pace  with  the  retreating  birds  and  by  the  time  the  bulk  of  the 
warblers  and  sparrows  had  passed  they  too  had  gone  on.  Among  the 
birds  which  suffered  most  heavily  ntay  be  m«itioned  the  Tennessee, 
Blackpoll,  and  Palm  Warblers,  the  Wilson's,  Olive-backed,  and  Oray- 
cheeked  Thrushes,  and  the  Chipping  and  Savannah  Sparrows.  Great 
daring  was  shown  by  the  Sharp-shinned  Hawks.  Sometimes  so  eager 
were  th^  in  pursuit  of  their  i»a-ey  that  they  would  dart  within  a  few 
inches  of  one's  head. 


lie  MICHIGAN   SnRVBT,   190S. 

3.  Blunderg  and  Fatalities.  A  comparatively  new  danger  vbich 
besets  migratory  birds  on  tJie  IslaDd  is  the  fatal  attraction  of  the  lighted 
windows  of  resorts  and  the  light-housefl.  During  the  migration  scores 
of  warblers,  chiefly  Tennessee  and  Palm,  killed  tliemselvea  by  sfriliing 
against  the  lighted  windows  of  the  Club-house  which  stood  4n  a  clearing 
near  the  Harbor.  Many  also  met  death  by  tlie  same  means  at  Washing- 
tori  Island,  which  is  situated  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.  Among 
tbe  species  killed  at  the  latter  place  were  the  Tennessee,  BlackpoU, 
Myrtle,  Magnolia  and  Palm  Warblers,  Gray-cheeked,  Olive-backed  and 
Hermit  Thrushes,  and  several  species  of  sparrows.  On  September  2, 
during  a.  hard  storm  which  lasted  several  days,  five  Olive-backed 
Thrushes  were  fonnd  dead  by  Wood  beneath  the  windows  at  the  hotel, 
and  on  September  5,  a  Oray-chedied  Thmsh  was  found  dead  at  the 
same  place.  This  latter  was  the  first  one  of  this  species  seen^  no  other 
being  observed  until  Beptembei-  12.  Alt  the  birds  were  killed  on  the 
north  side  of  the  buildings.  Sometimes  after  cloudy  nights  numbers 
of  small  birds  would  be  found  on  the  north  porch  of  the  Club  hou^  in  a 
dazed  condition,  probably  from  striking  the  building  the  night  before. 
Both  young  and  adults  were  found,  the  young  being  the  only  ones 
killed  on  clear  nights. 

The  light-house  keeper  at  Menagerie  Island  in  Siskowit  Bay,  Sir,  J. 
H.  Maloue,  reported  that  hundreds  of  birds  lost  their  lives  every  spi-ing 
and  fall  at  his  light  alone.  It  was  mainly  on  cloudy  nights  that  the 
birds  struck  the  lighted  windows  and  the  lantern,  but  some  were  killed 
on  other  nights. 

REFBBBNCBS. 

Oooke,  W.  W. 

1888.     Report  on   Bird   Migraticm   in   the   Mississippi   Valley   in    the 
years  1884  and  1885. 
Bull.  No.  3,  Div.  Economic  Ornithologj',  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr. 
Smith,  Frank. 
1907.     Advantages   of  Migration   Records    in   Connection    with   Bird 
etudv  in  Schools. 
School  Sci.  and  Math.,  7,  pp.  221-224. 
Taverner,  P.  A. 

1905.    A  Hyperlaken  Migration  Boute. 

Bull.  Mich.  Omith.  Club,  VI,  pp.  1-7. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY  OF   IBLG  ROTALB. 


1 

a 

X  :x 

XX     jxx-H- 

iU IJ '  '  '  -  ; ;  ;  ;  •  ; LL:-!-; }L-}g4- 

2 

X  :x 

XX    :x  :  :  : 

X  :     :x     :  :  :  :  :     :  :  :  :  :                   :x  :x  : 

2 

X  :x 

XX    :x  :  :  : 

X  :    XX     :  ;x  :  :     .x  :  :  :     :  ;  :  :  :     :x  :x  : 

^ 

xxxxx     :x  :  :  : 

X  :     :x     :  :x  :  :                   ;  ;  :  :  :     ;  :  ;xx 

2 

xxxxx    XXX  ■  ■ 

X  :x  :  :     ;  :X  :  :     :x  ;  :  :     :  :  :x  :-     :xxx  ; 

:3 

xxxxx    XX  :  :  : 

x  :x  :y     -x  :x  ;     :x  ;  :  :     :  :  :  :  :     :x  ;xx 

2 

X  :x  :x     :xx  :  :     :x  ;  :x     :x  :  :  :     :x  :xx 

2 

xxxxx    XX  :  :  : 

X  :x  ;x     :x  :  :  :                     :x  :  :  :     ;  rxx  : 

2 

xxxxx     :x  :  :x 

xxxxx    xxxx  :     :xxxx    xx  ;x  r     :xxxx 

:: 

xxxxx    XX  :  :x 

X  :x  rx    XXX  :  :     ;  :  :  :x     :x  :  ;  :     :  rxx  ; 

2 

xxxxx     :xx  : 

X  :x  :  :    xxx  :  :     :  :  :  i  :     ;  :  ;  :  :     :xxx  : 

A 

xxxxx     :xx  : 

X  :x  ;  :    xxx  :  :                     :x  :  :  :     :  :  :xx 

• 

xxxxx     :xx  :  : 

X  :xxx     :  :xx  :        :  ;xx     :x  :x  :        :  :xx 

f- 

xxxxx      X : : 

X  :xxx     :  :xx  ;     ;  :  :x  r     :x  :  :  ;     ;xxx  : 

« 

xxxxx     :x  :  ;  : 

xxxxx     :  :  :  :  :     :  :  :x  :      x  :  :  :     :xxxx 

"    1    xxxxx    XX : : : 

X  :xx  :   xxxx  :     :xx  :x     :x  :x  :     ;  :  ;  :x 

'        xxxxx     :x  :  :  : 

X  :xxx    xxxx  :     :x  :x  ;     :  :  :  :  :     :  :x  :x 

CO 

X  ;xxx    xxxx  :     :  :  :  :x     :x  :  :  :     :x  :  :x 

« 

xxxxx      rxx ; 

X  ;x  :  :                     ;  :  ;  :  ;     :  :  :  :  :     :  :  ;  :x 

~ 

xxxxx     :x  :  :  : 

xxxx  :    X  :xxx     ;xxxx     :  :  :x  :     :  :x  ;x 

. 

5         xxxxx     :xx  :x 

xxxxx   xxxxx     :xx  :x     :x  :  :  :     :x  :  :x 

o         xxxxx   XX  :  :x 

X :xx  :     ;  :  :  ;x     :x  :  :x     :x  :  :  :     :x  :xx 

S         xxxxx     :xx:x 

x  ;XXX      :  ;X  :X      :  :  ;XX       x  :  :  :      ;XX  :x 

n 

xxxxx     :x  ;  :x 

X  :xxx     :x  ;xx     :  ;  :  ;x     .x  :x  :     :  :x  ;  : 

!5 

xxxxx  XXX  :x 

X  ixxX     :xxxx     :x  :xx     ;x  .x  :     :x  :  ;x 

s 

xxxxx    XXX  :x 

X  ;xx  :     :xxxx     :  ;  :  :x     :x  :x  :     :  :X  :x 

« 

xxxxx     :xx  :x 

X  ;xx  :   X  :xxx       :  :xx    :  :  :  :  ;     :  :x  :x 

s 

xxxxx   XXX :x 

X  :xx  :   xxxxx     :  :xxx     :x  :xx     :x  :  ;x 

a 

xxxxx    XXX : 

xxxxx     :x  :xx     :x  ;xx     :x  :  :x    xxx  :  : 

a        xxxxx     xx :x 

xxxxx     ixxxx     :xx  :x    xxxx  :     :  :  :x  : 

xxxxx    XXX  :x 

X  :xx  :   X  :xxx     :x  :xx       :  :xx     ;  :  :  :x 

S 

xxxxx    XXX  :x 

X  :xxx      X  :xx     ;  :xxx     :  :xx  :     :  :  :  :x 

2 

xxxxx      ;xx  :x 

X  :xxx    xxxxx    xx  :  :  :     :  :  ;  :  :     :  :  :  :  : 

i 

xxxxx   XX  :xx 

xxx  ;  :     :  :  :  :  :                   :  :  :  ;  :     :  :  :  :  : 

i 

e 

|i 

ll 

Illll 

MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 


1 

1 

g 

X 

;  :x 

X  :  : 

* 

X 

:  : 

:x 

:    x 

:  : 

X  :  : 

2    1    XX 

:x 

:x 

:  :x 

:  ; 

X  :  : 

i:    1    XX 

XX 

:  :x 

X  : 

£     1     '^x 

xx> 

:  :x 

X  : 

2 

XX 

;x 

:  :    X  :  :x 

:  :X 

X  ;  ■ 

* 

:x 

;x    X  :  ;x 

:  ;X 

X  ■  ■ 

2 

:  .  :x 

:  :X 

X   ;X 

X  : 

2 

X 

XXX     :x 

XX     X   ;XXX      ;XX   :X 

XX  : 

X  :       xxxx 

- 

X 

;xx 

:xxx 

:    x 

X  :  ■ 

X  : 

s 

X 

:  :x    X  : 

.XXX 

;X 

XX  : 

• 

XX 

;x 

:xxx 

:  :x 

X  :  ■ 

X  ; 

« 

X 

:  :x     :  ;> 

:  ;xx 

:  :x 

XX 

:  :     :  :  ■ 

^ 

:x> 

:x 

:xx 

:  :x 

X  : 

X 

• 

X 

X  : 

:x 

:  ;x 

:x 

:  :x 

X  :  ■ 

X      :x 

« 

X 

XX 

X  : 

:    X  :xx 

:x 

;    x 

XX 

X      :x 

:  :    X  :  : 

* 

X 

X  : 

:x 

:x   X  :  :x 

x 

:  :x 

X  : 

X    X  :x 

:x 

« 

:x 

:x    X  :  :x 

:x 

:  :x 

X  : 

X 

" 

X 

:x 

:    X  :  :x 

:x 

:  :x 

X  : 

X     ■ 

- 

*< 

:x 

:x 

:  :x 

:x 

:  :x 

X  : 

X     : 

^ 

n 

X 

:x 

:x> 

:x 

:xxx     :x 

:  :x    XX  ■ 

X      ■ 

X  :    X  :  : 

s 

X 

:x 

:x 

:xxx     :xxxx 

X 

s 

X 

:x 

:x    X  :xxx     :x 

:    X 

X     :x 

s 

■ 

XXX     :x 

:x 

:xxx    XX 

:  :x 

X     :x 

;  :X 

s 

X 

:x 

:  :> 

:x 

:  :x 

s 

X 

■x> 

:x 

X  : 

:  :x 

X  :      :  ;  : 

fi 

X 

:x 

:x 

:x 

;  :x 

X  : 

5 

X 

:x 

XX  :xx    X  ;  ■  : 

n 

: 

:xx     :x> 

1! 

xxxx 

:X 

^ 

:X 

S 

: 

2 

2 

,i 

ii 

m 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

3 

1 

i 

Ii 

i 
III 

ill 

:  > 

M  iil 

M 
Hi 

^5gle 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROTALE. 


:  :x     :x 

:  :    XX 

XX     :  ;  :  : 

;   :x 

:    XX 

;x      : ;  ;  : 

:  :x 

:    XX 

:x 

:   :x     :  : 

:    XX 

X  :     :x 

XX 

:   :x     :  :> 

:    XX 

:  :x     :  :> 

:    xxxx 

:X 

:xx     :  :> 

:    XX 

X  :    X  : 

:x 

:   :x 

;  :    X  : 

X  ; 

:x 

:   ;x 

:x    X  : 

xxxxx   X  :> 

X  ; 

:  :    X  :  ;  : 

:x  :     :  : 

:  ;  :x 

-X  :      ;  : 

:x  :     :  :> 

X  :     :  : 

:xx    X  :> 

:  :   X  : 

:  :     :  :x  : 

;  :    X  : 

:  :     :x  :x 

:  :    X  : 

:  :    X  ; 

:        :x 

:  : 

III 

11  ill 

ill 

M 

ill 

ri  111! 

Ii  nil 

jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROTALE. 


THE  KrOLOGICAL  Sl'CCESSIOX  OF  BIRDS." 

BY    CHARLES    C.    ADAMS. 

"Of  all  truths  relating  to  phenomena,  the  moat  valuable  to  «a  are  tboM  which 
relate  to  thetr  order  ot  Buccession.  On  a  knowledge  ot  theK  la  founded  every 
reasonable  anticipation  of  future  facta,  and  whatever  power  we  possess  ot  In- 
fluencing those  facts  to  our  advantage," — John  Stuart  Mill. 

"Indeed,  some  geologists  aeem  to  take  pride  in  lack  of  knowledge  of  principles 
and  of  their  failure  to  explain  the  facts  obaerved  in  the  terms  of  the  elementary 
scleaces.  '  I  have  heard  a  man  say:  '1  observe  the  facts  as  I  And  them,  unpreju- 
diced by  any  theory,"  I  regard  thia  statemeni  as  not  only  condemning  the  work 
of  the  man,  but  the  pmltlon  as  an  impossible  one,,.. The  geologist  must  select 
the  facts  which  he  regards  of  aufflclent  note  to  record  and  describe.  But  such 
selection  Implies  theories  of  their  importance  and  significance.  In  a  given  case 
the  problem  Is  therefore  reduced  to  selecting  the  facta  for  record,  with  a  broad 
and  deep  comprehension  of  the  principles  involved,  a  deQnlte  understanding  of 
the  rules  of  the  game,  and  appreciation  of  what  Is  probable'  and  what  is  not  prob- 
able; or  else  making  mere  random  observations.  All  agree  that  the  latter  alter- 
native Is  worse  than  useless,  and  therefore  the  only  training  which  can  make 
a  geologist  safe,  even  In  his  observations.  Is  to  equip  bim  with  such  a  knowledge 
of  the  principles  concerned  as  will  make  his  observations  of  value." — Pbeside.vt 
C  R.  Vas  Hise. 

I.       IXTBODfCTIOX. 

-Almost  everv  obsener  of  aniiimiR  liiis  noted  that  certnin  kinds  of 
birds  are  uaually  found  nssocinted  in  certain  conditions,  as,  for  ex- 
ample pflrticnlar  species  of  Kaiid[>i)>ers  and  plovers  upon  the  sand.v 
beaih,  or  the  Mendonlark  and  Dickcissel  upon  certain  prairies;  but 
tills  is  rarely  considered  a  subject  w-orthy  of'serious  scientific  study. 
To  discuss  the  significance  and  (-alue  of  such  ecological  study  and  sug- 
gest phases  for  investigation  is  tite  object  of  this  pai)er.  By  the  ecologi- 
■cal  distribution  of  birds  is  meant  that  correlation  between  envircm- 
mental  conditions  and  the  occurrence  and  association  of  certain  species 
of  hirds.  In  such  study  special  attention  must  be  de\'oted  to  the  places 
of  breeding;  nevertheless  the  associations  of  birds  at  all  seasons  of  the 
year  are  of  importance.  It  is  not  the  isolated  occuri-ence  of  these 
8i>eciea,  but  their  relative  abundance,  the  association  of  certain  species, 
and  thpir'  persistent  wcurrence  in  such  conditions  which  is  signifi- 
cant. In  the  literature  of  omitliologv-  there  is  a  vast  amount  of  isolated 
data  bearing  on  tiiis  subject,  but  very  little  of  it  has  been  organized 
and  systematically  studied. 

When  once  the  fa^-ts  and  general  ecological  relations  have  been  de- 
termined, BO  that  the  representative  bird  associations  or  societies  of 
given  localities  have  Iwen  correlated  with  their  ]iroi>er  environ- 
nients  it  will  then  lie  possible  to  determine  how  one  society  l>ecomes 
"transformed  into  another,  whether  this  is  due  primarily  to  other  birds 
or  to  other  environmental  influences,  A  knowledge  of  the  succession 
of  bird  societies  and  of  the  laws  of  change  will  not  only  lend  to  new 
ideiis  as  to  the  intluence  of  the  envii-onnient.  but  will    also    have    a 


•  Reprinted,  wilh  llie  sddHlon  of  cliapler  VI,  (rom  the  Auk,  25,  ji 


M«r;Coogle 


122  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

marked  influence  npoii  the  practical  field  studies  of  the  bird  student. 
It  should  lead  to  a  more  intelligent  understanding  of  the  relation  of 
birds  to  the  world  about  them,  or  even  better,  to  the  world  of  wliicU 
they  form  a  part. 

Attention  ebould  further  be  directed  to  the  fact  that  simply  tlin 
occurrence  of  the  bird  in  a  definite  habitat  is  not  by  any  means  the 
sole  aim  of  such  wort.  The  influence  of  the  environment  should  l»e 
studied,  in  its  bearing  upon  all  phases  of  bird  life.  Not  only  slioiilcl 
the  most  favorable  habitat  or  optimum^  be  recognized,  but  also  the  in- 
fluence of  the  less  favorable  conditions;  thus  the  nesting  site,  composi- 
tion of  the  nest  material,  food,  abundant'e,  feeding  grounds,  mignttinj; 
habits  and  all  like  relations  are  needed  for  an  adequate  and  exhaustive 
study  of  the  ecological  distribution  and  succession  of  birds. 

It  is  tlierefore  not  surprising  that  such  requirements  will  be  difti- 
cu!t  to  meet  because  the  facts  themselves  are  difficult  to  secure.  Then 
there  are  further  difficulties  which  ai-e  due  to  the  limitiitions  of  tlie 
student  bimiielf,  and  are  psychological  in  their  nature.  As  examples  <if 
this  class  of  difficulties  two  may  be  cited,  because  they  are  of  fi^eqiient 
occurrence  in  all  kinds  of  scientiiic  work  and  not  by  any  means  confined 
to  the  study  of  birds.  For,  contrary  to  our  youthful  ideas,  naturalists 
have  the  same  limitations  as  humanity  in  general!  We  may  divide 
naturalists  into  two  classes,  depending  upon  their  primary  type  of  mind. 
First,  those  who  tend  to  see  only  the  infinite  detail  of  isolated  facts  and 
ob8er\'ations.  Tliis  type  of  mind  is  jMirtirularly  impressed  with  tlwt 
multiplicity  and  variety  in  natui-e,  and  is  one  to  which  a  general  state- 
ment is  almost  a  cause  of  irritation  because  there  are  usually  exceptions 
to  any  general  statement.  The  constructive  imagination  seems  feebly 
developed  in  this  type.  To  this  class  belongs  many  extremely  valuable 
and  useful  students,  because  of  the  data  which  they,  often  with  extreme 
conscientiousness,  collect.  They  are  collectors  of  facts  rather  than  stud- 
ents of  relations.  To  the  second  class  belongs  that  type  of  mind  whose 
primary  interest  is  in  genei-aliaations,  principles,  relations,  and  wbieh 
tends  to  -neglect  isolated  facts  and  observations.  The  constructive  im- 
agination is  liable  to  be  developed  in  this  type.  Tliis  includes  many 
extremely  valuable  and  useful  students  on  account  of  their  tendency  lo 
condense,  sift  and  formulate  great  masses  of  isolated  facts.  They  are 
students  of  ideas  and  relations  rather  than  collectors  of  "facts." 

Each  class,  esijecially  the  well-marked  ty[)es  and  extremes,  often  find* 
it  difficult  or  impossible  to  understand  the  point  of  view  of  the  other 
class.  This  frequently  leads  to  misunderstandings  and  often  to  mutual 
contempt.  Cope  and  Marsh  clearly  illustrate  these  two  types  of  mind» 
among  our  American  naturalists. 

By  this  time  some  may  wonder  why  this  subject  has  been  introduced. 
It  lias  been  with  a  definite  purpose,  because  fi-equently  these  opposed 
points  of  view  cause  delays  in  the  development  of  many  subjects.  Thu» 
a  forewarning  to  students  of  bird  ecology  may  produce  good  results  if 
the  individual  student  makes  a  ronscious  effort  to  counterbalance  such 
deficiencies  as  go  with  his  particular  type  of  mind.  In  the  past,  details 
have  tended  to  pi'oduce  confusion  through  the  neglect  of  general  ideas. 
It  is  rarely  that  a  word  of  warning  on  this  subject  is  out  of  place,  be- 
jMUDse  the  balanced  "golden  mean"  investigator  is  nevei-  too  abundant. 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   ROYALB.  123 

The  quotations  at  the  head  of  this  article  have  au  immediate  bearing 
upon  tiie  subject  at  this  point. 

Not  only  is  habitat  preference,  the  asaociation  of  avian  species,  their 
succession,  and  the  laws  expressing  these  relations  of  much  interest,  but 
they  are  of  much  importance  scientifically  as  well  as  in  a  practical  way. 
It  is  therefore  desirable  that  naturalists  realize  the  necessity  of  under- 
standing the  "roles  of  the  game"  if  the  true  relations  of  birds  «re  to  be 
studied  to  the  best  advantage.  No  adequate  substitute  has  yet  been 
devised  to  replace  a  grasp  of  general  principles. 

Throughout  this  paper  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  definiteness  of  the 
dominant  major  environmental  influences  and  compleies  because  the 
irregular  features  have  apparently  received  undue  emphasis  and  have 
retai-ded  the  recognition  of  certain  important  detinite  relations. 

II.       REPRESENTATIVE    LITERATCHE   OX    HABITATS    AND   SUCCESSION. 

1,  Habitat  Prefcrenfc.  The  American  literature  on  habitat  prefer- 
ence and  succession,  as  a  subject  of  special  investigation,  is  very  limited. 
By  succession  is  meant  the  change  or  i-eplacemMit  at  a  given  place  of 
one  or  several  species  (an  association)  by  others;  as  when  a  swamp  is 
invaded  by  a  dune  and  the  representative  swamp  birds  are  replaced  by 
those  of  the  dune;  or  even  a^in  when  the  dune  becomes  fixed  by  vegeta- 
tion and  is  inhabited  by  still  another  association  of  bird  life.  -This  is  ^ 
a  much  neglected  subject;  however,  isolated  observations  on  habitats 
are  abundant  in  the  biographies  of  the  various  species.  The  fragment- 
ary- character  of  these  biographies  tends  to  make  them  composite  and 
they  lose  what  pecularitics  they  may  have  which  are  due  to  a  response 
on  the  part  of  the  bird  to  its  particular  conditions  of  life.  These  un- 
fortunate limitations  clearly  show  that  here  is  an  extensive  field  worthy 
of  careful  investigation.  The  work  already  done  will  be  a  usefnl'guide 
in  many  cases,  but  the  student  who  wishes  to  develop  this  subject  must 
turn  to  the  fields  and  forests  rather  than  to  the  literature,  both  for 
his  inspiration  and  his  data. 

Perhaps  a  further  word  should  be  added  concerning  the  limitations  of 
the  composite  life-history  method,  as  this  will  aid  in  making  clear  the 
kind  of  work  needed  in  the  future.  This  composite  or  generalized  method 
of  describing  habitats  and  life  histories  and  the  response  of  birds  to  them, 
tends  to  lay  undue  emphaKiK  upon  the  aceragc  conditions  of  life  and  habits, 
and  tends  to  neglect  those  detailed  responses  to  the  environment  which 
reflect  the  laws  of  local  influence.  These  results  are  similar  to  those  pro- 
duced by  systematic  students  who  are  "lumpers"  and  who  do  not  recog- 
nize local  races  or  varieties.  Thus  a  nest  may  be  built  upon  the  ground 
at  the  base  of  a  shrub  or  bunch  of  grass,  or  in  the  brush,  but  what 
conditions  determine  such  sit^?  In  a  dry  meadow  a  Hong  Sparrow  may 
build  directly  upon  the  ground,  but  in  a  swamp,  in  order  to  have  a  dry 
nesting  site,  it  builds  in  a  willow  shrub.  In  many  cases  the  causes  of 
these  differences  will  be  difficult  to  determine,  but  in  others  it  is  a 
relatively  simple  question  for  any  one  familiar  with  the  species  to  solve. 
There  are  also  geographic  variations  of  habits  as  well  as  those  of 
habitats  just  cited,  and  for  this  reason  it  is  necessary  not  to  confuse  such 
variations  with  those  confined  to  some  restricted  area.  These  locqlL. 
and  ge<^airiiic  relations  are  very  intimately  related,  but  they  are  stib^ 


124  MICHIGAN   SURVBT,    190S. 

jects  which  can  only  be  worked  out  in  detail  wlien  local  studies  gire 
proper  attention  to  local  enyironmental  responses. 

In  the  following  account  of  the  literature  no  attempt  is  made  at 
completeness,  but  the  papers  cited  are  helieved  to  be  representative. 
These  pi^rs  will  help  to  give  some  idea  of  the  kind  of  observations 
and  records  already  made,  and  wilt  be  suggestive  as  to  future  work. 
Mention  will  first  l>e  made  of  tbe  literature  on  habitat  preference,  and 
then  of  that  on  succeeeion. 

By  far  the  best  discussion  we  have  found  on  habitat  preference  of 
the  birds  of  a  given  region  is  that  by  Townsend  ('05)  on  Essex  County. 
MassachusettB.  Ilie  primary  avian  environments  are  described,  the 
representative  birds  listed,  and  their  preferred  habitats  are  briefly  dis- 
cussed. niuB,  the  ocean  and  its  birds,  the  sand  beach  and  its  birds, 
the  sand  dnnes  and  their  birds,  the  salt  marshes  and  their  birds,  and 
the  fresh  marshes  and  their  birds,  give  a  general  idea  of  the  subjects 
treated.  B^^arding  the  birds  of  the  sand  beaches,  he  remarks :  "Among 
the  Plover,  the  Black-bellied,  Bemipalmated,  and  Piping  Plovers  are 
above  all  birds  of  the  beach,  although  the  first  two  are  occasionally* 
found  in  the  marshes,  while  the  last-named  rarely  strays  from  the  beach 
and  the  adjoining  sand  dnnes.  The  Golden  Plover,  although  at  timies 
found  on  the  wet  sands,  is  much  more  likely  to  hunt  for  food  on  the 
dry  sands  above  the  highest  tides,  or  still  farther  inland,  while  the 
Eilldeer  genra'ally  avoidB  the  beach  altogether,  preferring  the  fields"  (p. 
21).  And  regarding  the  birds  of  the  sand  dunes  he  remarks:  "Savanna 
Sparrows  nest  in  numbers  at  the  foot  of  clumps  of  tall  beach  grass 
throughout  the  dunes,  and  on  the  edges  of  the  tidai  inlets  from  the 
marsh.  The  nests  of  tbe  Bed-winged  Blackbirds  and  the  Bronzed  Grack- 
lee  are  abundant  in  the  bogs  and  groves  of  the  birches.  The  Crow, 
in  the  absence  of  tall  trees,  builds  perforce  in  the  stunted  pines  and 
birches,  at  times  only  ten  or  twelve  feet  from  the  gronnd''  (p.  34).  In 
the  case  of  the  Crow,  note  that  he  records  the  response  to  the  dune 
wivironment. 

While  TowasCTid  recognizes  changes  in  the  environment,  as  in  the 
dunes  and  beach  (pp.  21,  30),  yet  he  does  not  see  their  relation  to 
the  bird  life  in  the  definite  -wnj  in  which  he  sees  their  habitat  pref- 
erences, nor  does  he  appear  to  clearly  recognize  the  fundamental  re- 
lation of  association  within  the  breeding  habitat.  To  him  the  environ- 
ment ia  static.  However  an  excellent  feature  of  his  work  is  the  record 
of  seasonal  changes  in  the  bird  life  of  the  various  habitats.  In  thin 
connection  attention  should  be  called  to  certain  papers  which  will 
greatly  aid  in  the  study  of  the  dynamics  or  changing  environmentul 
factors  which  influence  sea  or  lake  shores  bordered  by  dunefl  and 
'  BwampB;  conditions  represented  on  the  MassachusettB  coast.  Gilbert 
('85)  has  discussed  the  general  principles  and  top(^raphic  features  of 
lake  shores  and  Gulliver  ('1)9)  the  shore  line  of  the  sea.  But  in  ad- 
dition to  these  physit^raphic  forces,  the  vegetation  also  has  a  dontinat- 
ing  influence  upon  bird  life.  For  genera]  principles  relating  to  this 
subject  Cowles  ('01)  should  be  consulted  for  his  discussion  of  the  vegeta- 
tion of  inland  Bhoree  and  dunes,  and  Ganoug  {'(Ki  and  '06)  for  his 
treatment   of  the   .Atlantic   coastal   conditions.     These  authors  discuss 


,  Google 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROYALB.  126 

the  SQCceesion  of  the  vegetation,  a  factor  of  the  atmost  importance  in 
the  study  of  avaiu  Bui;ce«aion. 

While  considering  Townsend's  reenlts,  it  nmy  be  well  to  outline 
briefly  a  general  euccesmon  of  bird  life  along  the  shore  as  indicated 
by  his  records.  It  is  evident  from  the  map  accompanying  his  volume 
that  the  currents  and  waves  are  constantly  modifying  the  coast  line 
and  f^H-miing  spits,  bars  and  islands ;  and  that  the  barrier  beach  area  is 
increasing,  and  thus  tending  to  become  continnous  at  the  expense  of 
soDie  of  the  ocean  habitat.  As  the  continuity  of  the  beach  develops, 
the  area  of  swamp  land  behind  it  tends  to  increase  and  thus  to  farther 
restrict  the  open  water  and  increase  the  swamp  haibitat.  The  beach 
sands,  once  free  from  the  waves  or  ground  water,  are  caught  up  by  the 
winds  to  form  dunes,  and  may  migrate  into  the  swamps  and  thus  trans- 
form them.  Thus  with  the  extension  of  the  beach  the  sea  birds  are  re- 
placed in  dotninance  by  the  shore  birds,  and  a  succession  is  produced. 

In  a  similar  manner  the  dunes  encroach  upon  the  swamp,  and  swamp 
birds  are  succeeded  by  those  of  the  dunes.  As  the  wandering  dunes 
become  anchored  by  vegetation  and  forests  grow  upon  them,  still  other 
birds  will  invade  thrai.  Thus  all  stages  may  be  expected,  from  ocean 
to  beach  birds,  onward  to  those  cliaracteristic  of  wandering  and  fixed 
forested  dunes.  These  relations  are  outlined  simply  to  indicate  the 
problem  and  its  causes,  which  need  detailed  investigation. 

Tn  Michigan  a  few  habitat  studies  have  been  made.  One  in  the  Por- 
cupine ^fountains,  on  the  south  shore  of  T^ake  (Superior,  and  another  on 
Isle  Koyale.  Both  are  by  McCreary;  the  paper  on  the  latter  area  is  pub- 
lished in  this  volume.  The  summer  birds  of  the  Porcupine  Mountains  are 
listed  (M«*-"peary  'OC)  by  selected'  localities  and  the  habitat  preferences 
are  discussed  as  follows:  water  birds,  birds  frequenting  the  shores  and 
banks  of  streams,  birds  frequenting  grassy  meadows  and  alders,  birds 
frequenting  tamarack  and  cedar  swamps,  birds  frequenting  hemlocks 
and  maples,  and  birds  frequenting  the  cliff  and  mountain  top.  In  its 
emphasis  upon  habitat  preference  this  paper  is  the  only  one  so  far  seen 
which  at  all  approaches  Townsend's  discussion  of  this  subject.  Mc- 
Creary's  work  was  done  without  a  knowledge  Of  Townsend's. 

In  southeastern  Ihlichigan,,  Brown  ('00)  made  a  locality  study  and 
outlines  the  habitats  as  follows:  birds  fonnd  in  orchards,  birds  of  the 
ojieo  woods,  birds  of  the  open  fields,  birds  of  the  thicket,  and  birds  of 
the  marshes  and  river.  Brown's  paper  is  intermlediate  in  character 
between  the  preceding  papers  and  those  of  an  economic  nature,  to  be 
mentioned  later,  because  the  area  studied  has  been  so  much  influenced 
by  man. 

There  are  a  few  papers  which,  althongh  primarily  faunistic  or  geo- 
graphic, contain  habitat  data.  Such,  for  example,  is  Ridgway's  (74) 
discussion  of  the  birds  of  the  Wabash  Valley  and  ('89)  the  birds  of 
the  Illinois  prairie  (pp.  13-16).  An  exceptionally  good  paper  of  thifi 
character  on  the  Louisiana  birds  is  by  Beyer,  Allison  and  Kopman  ('06), 
although  its  aim  and  method  of  treatment  differs  from  that  of  Town- 
send.  The  bird  life  is,  however,  closely  correlated  with  the  vegetation 
and  the  physical  conditions  of  the  State. 

The  papers  previonsly  mentioned  have  been  written  from  a  r^ional 
standpoint.    The  study  however  of  all  the  various  conditions  frequented. 


126  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

by  a  given  speciee  or  some  natural  group  is  also  an  important  and 
Delected  method  of  ecological  study  wbich  poaaeflsefl  certain  important 
advantages.  As  an  illustration  of  this  method  may  be  mentionetl 
Palmer's  ('00)  study  of  the  Maryland  Yellow-throat.  He  has  shown 
that  different  varieties  have  different  habitat  preferences,  Jacobs  ('041 
has  given  us  an  interesting  habitat  study  of  a  single  species  in  Pennsyl- 
vania, the  Golden-winged  Warbler. 

Let  UB  now  turn  to  another  class  of  habitat  studies,  those  which 
through  man's  iufluenre  throw  only  a  subordinate  li^t  upon  "natural" 
habitats  and  succession,  and  are  primarily  of  economic  importance  but 
contain  valuable  habitat  data. 

An  interesting  and  rather  unique  paper  belonging  to  this  class,  based 
on  observations  in  Southeastern  Michigan,  is  by  Watkins  ('00).  It  is 
entitled  'Michigan  Birds  that  Xest  in  Open  Meadows.'  A  few  of  his 
statements  explain  his  point  of  view:  "To  make  ntore  plain  the  limit 
and  scope  of  this  treatise,  which,  of  necessity  must  be  longer  than  I 
hoped,  I  will  include  in  my  list  only  such  species  as  I  have  found  nesting 
u{>on  the  ground  in  the  open  fields  and  meadows,  excluding  those  found 
nesting  upon  the  boundary  fences  or  ground;  also  those  nesting  in  the 
open  marsh  land  which  are  undraioed  and  boggy  to  the  extent  of  being 
unlit  for  hay  or  pasture"  (p.  67).  The  paper  contains  numerous  notes 
on  the  habitat  preference  and  variations  in  these  traits. 

By  far  the  most  comprehensive  and  thorough  study  of  any  limited 
farni  area  is  that  by  Judd  ('02)  of  a  farm  in  Maryland.  In  this  paper 
habitat  preferences  are  clearly  recognized,  and  discussed  rather  fully 
(pp.  12-20).  The  birds  are  associated  thus: — birds  that  nest  in  the 
open  fields,  birds  that  depend  on  covers,  birds  of  less  limited  distribution 
{consists  largely  of  remarks  on  haunts),  and  birds  of  varied  distribu- 
tion. His  last  two  sections  are  rather  miscellaneous  in  character  and 
show  that  the  principles  of  classification  for  habitats  were  not  clearly 
defined  in  his  own  mind. 

The  only  other  paper  discussing  habitat  preference  in  detail  is  also 
the  latest  upon  the  subject,  and  is  by  Forbes  ('07),  This  is  a  pre- 
liminary report  on  a  bird  census  across  the  com  belt  of  Centra)  Illinois 
in  the  early  autumn;  a  study  of  the  feeding  grounds  and  preferences  as 
influenced  by  the  dominant  crops  of  the  arear  traversed,  corn,  pasture, 
and  stubble.  By  means  of  this  census,  the  hRbi^dt  prefei-ences  for  differ- 
ent crops  and  the  association  of  species  in  them  is  statistically  deter- 
mined. The  paper  is  particularly  suggestive  for  its  bearing  on  the  sub- 
ject of  dominance;  however,  the  suggested  method  of  study  has  even 
greater  significance  when  applied  during  the  breeding  seaeon.  Doubt- 
less opinions  will  vary  as  to  the  validity  of  the  method  aa  applied  by 
Forbes,  even  by  thtwe  who  ^-ould  approve  of  it  for  the  detailed  study 
of  a  limited  area,  or  a  breeding  habitat.  For  large  areas  some  co- 
operative method  m«iV  be  necessary. 
■-2.  Succession.  Turning  now  to  the  literature  on  succession,  it  is 
'^und  to  be  extremely  limited  in  amount.  So  far  as  known  to  the 
writer,  only  two  American  authors  seem  to  have  realized  the  existence 
of  succession.  In  his  discussion  of  the  liiotic  succession  in  the  Por- 
cupine Mountains  of  Michigan,  Ruthvcu  (*00)  clearly  included  the  birds. 
alth<mgh  they  did   not  i-eceive  separate  treatment,  and  might  for  this 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  HOTALB.  127 

reason  be  overlooked.  His  poaition  is  clearly  stated  (p.  43)  as  fol- 
lows: '"OwiDg  to  the  dependence  of  forms  of  life  on  their  environ- 
ment, biotic  (.'hnngeti  are  neeeHxarily  closely  i-elated  to  en vii-on mental 
cluinges.  These  biotic  changes  may  occur  in  two  ways;  the  forms  must 
("ither  be  able  to  respond  to  the  new  conditions,  or  be  supplemente'l 
by  other  forms.  That  they  tend  to  become  adjusted  cannot  be  ques- 
tioned, bat  in  many  caaes  at  least,  this  adjustment  Ia(pi  behind  the 
elian^Dg  conditions,  and  the  fomw  are  replaced  by  others  from  ad- 
jaceut  habitats  which  are  adjusted  to  the  conditions  toward  which  the 
particular  habilAt  is  changing,  thus  bringing  about  a  succession  of 
Mocieties."  In  speaking  of  the  biota  of  the  hard-wood  forest  he  further 
says:  "This  region  has  been  reserved  for  the  last,  for  the  conditions 
are  evidently  those  toward  which  the  other  habitats  tend  to  be  changed 
under  the  present  conditions. , .  .This  society  thus  represents  the  climax 
so<iety  of  the  region.  It  consists  of  the  forms  that  are  adapted  to  or 
associated  ii'ith  the  conditions  which  prevail  in  this  region  in  the  last 
stages  of  the  mirtual  adjustment  of  all  the  environmental  processes. 
As  the  processes  become  adjusted  to  one  another,  the  habitat  of  the 
climax  society  is  increased  at  the  expense  of  the  other  habitats,  and 
the  associated  biota  tends  to  become  of  general  geographic  extent  in 
the  region." 

The  only  other  paper  discussing  avaio  succession  is  that  by  Frothing- 
ham  ('06).  and  this  is  not  a  "natural"  succession  but  one  influencetl 
primarily  by  man.  He  clearly  expresses  a  bird  succession  correlated  with 
the  reforestation  of  bui-ned  lands.  The  area  studied  is  the  Michigan 
foi-est  reserve  on  Higgins  Lake.  The  n^ion  was  originally  corered  with 
"White  and  Norway  pine,  hut  repeated  flres  first  killed  off  the  pines,  later 
the  oak  and  maple;  and  finally  the  dominant  vegetation  is  sedge,  sweet 
fern,  huckleberry  and  prairie  willow.  With  the  Are  protection  afforded 
by  the  reserve,  Frothingham  anticipates  a  revei-sal  of  the  above  succes- 
sion of  destruction,  and  further  remarks:  "With  the  types  of  v^jeta- 
tiou  which  mark  tlie  different  stages  of  the  plant  suci-easion  just  de- 
scribed there  seem  to  be  correlated  certain  definite  bird  forms.  These 
forma  are  for  the  most  part  such  as  frequ^t  observations  in  northern 
Michigan  have  identified  as  generally  characteristic  of  the  respective  en- 
vironments." This  is  follon-ed  by  lists  of  birds  characteristic  of  differ- 
ent kinds  of  v^fetation.  While  these  lists  do  not  correlate  perfectly 
with  the  implied  succession,  yet  thfe  general  statement  of  the  problem 
!<'  clearly  ezpt-eased. 

The  burning  of  forests  has  long  been  known  to  change  the  character 
of  the  v^etation  and  fauna  of  areas,  but  this  is  often  referred  ^o  as  the 
change  of  a  "life  zone."  Thus  Merriam  ('99.  p.  47)  states  that  a  fire 
in  the-  Canadian  zone  on  Mt.  Bhanta  is  followed  by  the  Transition 
zone  and  remarks:  "But  in  the  meantime  a  new  growth  of  Shasta 
flr  has  started,  and  in  ten  or  twenty  years  is  likely  to  overtop  and 
drown  out  the  Transition  zone  species,  enabling  the  Canadian  zone  to 
reclaim  the  burn.... But  on  the  steeper  slojtes,  especially  rock  slopes, 
if  the  vegetable  layer  is  burned  off,  the  (lower)  zone  which  creeps  up 
to  replace  the  (higheri  one  destroyed  l>ecomes  {>ennanent  or  nearly 
so. . . . Deforcatration  of  an  area  therefore  tends  to  lower  its  zone  posi- 
tion."   Birds  are  not  mentioned  in  this  discussion  nor  the  relation  of 


126  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

"zones"  to  tbe  general  problem  of  succ^sioo.     Bach  "zones"  are  thus 
only  particular  phases  of  BUccessioQ. 

It  ifl  thus  Been  from  the  above  outline  of  literature  that  habitat  pre- 
ferences have  been  outlined  for  a  few  widelv  eeparated  localities  and 
for  Bome  a^cnltural  conditions,  but  there  has  been  no  comprehensive 
diRCUBsicv  of  the  jH^blema  of  habitats  and  succession,  even  in  a  pr^ 
Iimittar7  manner,  either  fromi  a  scientific  or  economic  standpoint.  This 
fact  seems  rather  remarkable  in  viev  of  the  great  utility  of  a  knowledge 
of  the  general  principles  underlying  economic  practice.  There  are, 
however,  certain  phases  of  biotic  succession  which  have  been  discussed 
by  a  few  authors.  Theae  subjects  have  either  been  discussed  in  a  very 
general  manner  or  are  detailed  discussions  of  special  re^ons  or  groups 
of  plants  and  animals.  For  this  reason,  perhaps,  their  bearing  upon 
other  groups  than  those  speciflally  mentioned  are  very  likely  to  be  over- 
looked by  those  who  take  little  interest  in  any  subject  or  discussion 
which  does  not  specifically  mention  their  specialty  or  locality.  This 
phase  is  mientioned  in  order  to  show  that  while  avaJn  successions  have 
iH-en  considerably  neglected,  advances  have  been  made  elsewhere,  by 
means  of  which  some  general  principles  appear  to  have  been  fairly 
well  established.  This  is  particularly  true  of  plant  succession,  as 
shown  by  the  writings  of  Cowles  ('01),  and  in  considerable  detail  by 
Clements  ('05).  The  discussion  by  Clements  will  be  particohiirly  valu- 
able to  tbe  student  of  avian  succession. 

III.      THB    IMA30B    AVIAN     ENVIRONMENTS. 

Ab  has  been  seen  in  the  preceding  review  of  the  literature  on  haunts, 
no  comprehensive  discnssion  has  been  given  of  the  environmental  influ- 
ences or  ecological  distribution  of  (extra-tropical)  North  American 
birds.  Various  authors  have  discussed  their  ge<^Taphic  distribution, 
and  certain  geographic  variations  have  been  referred  to  certain  environ- 
mental influences,  but  a  general  ecologic  treatment,  as  contrasted  with 
a  primaril,!-  faunistic  one,  has  not  been  made.  This  is  remarkable  when 
we  recall  the  fact  that  the  collections  of  North  American  tnrds  are, 
considering  the  large  area  concerned,  the  beet  in  the  world  both  as  to 
quality  and  as  to  quantity  (Ktejueger,  '03).  This  means  that  there 
have  been  many  trained  collectors;  but  what  has  become  of  the  notes 
and  obsert'ations  on  the  environments  and  conditions  of  life  of  these 
birds,  which  must  necessarily  have  been  known  to  successful  collectors? 
Part  of  these  observations  have  been  published,  and  periiaps  no  one  is 
to  blame  because  more  have  not;  but  the  point  of  significance  is  that 
w<e  have,  in  fact,  hardly  made  a  banning  in  the  careful  detailed  study 
of  the  bird  environment  and  its  development  as  a  distinct  field  of  study. 
In  common  with  the  remainder  of  the  North  American  biota,  several 
general  principle.^  are  known,  but  they  do  not  appear  to  be  current 
among  ornithologists. 

The  following  discussion  and  su^^^tions  on  the  larger  environmental 
units  attempt  only  an  outline  of  certain  phases  of  the  problem,  in  order 
to  call  attention  to  certain  principles  which  seem  useful  as  a  background 
for  the  intelligent  study  of  bird  habitats  and  succession.  From  such 
a  standpoint  as  this,  the  dominant  infiuences  of  given  areas  and  environ- 
ments are  of  particular  interest  and  of  fundamental  value.     By  focuSB- 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  129 

ing  attention  upon  the  importance  of  recognizing  these  dominant  en- 
I'iTonmental  inflnences,  we  niny  hope  to  escape  some  of  tbe  confuaitm 
which  appalB  those  who  are  keenly  intpresBed  with- the  chaos  and  com- 
plexity of  the  problem.  These  dominant  factors  are  usually  not  single 
isolated  forces,  but  resultants  of  several  or  many  influences.  Thus, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  v^etation.  it  is  not  one  factor,  but  a  complex, 
which  influences  different  birds  in  different  ways.  Nevertheless  there 
is  what  may  be  called  a  mass  or  dominant  effect. 

A  major  habitat  unit  may  be  considered  as  a  combination  of  condi- 
tions which  are  dominant  in  a  t^rtain  area.  The  ifrj/  dominance  means 
that  a  relatU-ely  limited  number  of  forces  or  comphrxea  are  operative. 
With  departure  from  such  a  center  of  influence  the  dominance  changes, 
as  other  influences  are  encountered  and  other  dominants  are  established.' 

When  we  consider  that  certain  ecological  groups  of  birds  are  world- 
wide in  their  environmental  relations,  it  becomes  evident  that  such 
characters  are  of  fundamental  importance.  Thus  water  birds  may 
occur  in  any  part  of  the  world  where  water  is '  a  dominant  environ- 
mental factor.  This  is  not  a  simple  ecological  group  of  birds,  bat  one 
of  the  greater  units  of  association  which  may  be  subdivided  into  many 
minor  classes;  as  those  which  frequent  tbe  sea,  and  others  the  inland 
bodies  of  water.  The  shore  birds  form  another  natural  ecological 
group,  and  also  the  inland  birds  a  third.  There  may  thus  be  considered 
to  be  three  primary  ecological  groups  of  birds  which  are  closely  correl- 
ated with  definite  and  dominant  environmental  influences:    Thus: — 

1.  W^er  blrdB. 

Tbose  trequentlng  the  sea  and  the  adjacent  rocks  on  which  tbey  oeet, 
and  Inland  waters. 

2.  Shore  and  Marsh  birds. 

Those  frequenting  shores  of  all  kinds,  seas,.  lakes,  swamps  and  rivers. 

3.  Inland  birds. 

Those  frequenting  deserts,  grass  lands  and  forests. 

'  Of  course  these  ecologic:il  classes  are  not  sharply  defined,  and  yet 
they  are  so  distinct  that  they  can  be  easily  recognized.  It  should  be. 
noted  that  the  above  groups  are  closely  correlated  with  certain  domin- 
ant physical  features  of  the  earth— the  sea,  the  shore  and  the  inland 
environ  ments. 

Tbe  relative  abundance  and  dominance  of  these  classes  of  birds  will 
be  determined  largely  by  the  dominance  of  such  physical  conditions 
as  most  distinctly  favor  a  particular  ecological  group.  Thus  at  sea 
the  water  birds  are  dominant;  on  shore,  the  shore  birds;  and  inland, 
still  other  kinds.  The  linear  character  of  the  shore  habitat  and  tbe 
adjacent  breeding  grounds  gives  it  a  rather  unique  character,  as  the 
two  other  habitats  occupy  lai-ge  expanses.  However,  the  swampy,  some- 
what shore-like  conditions  of  the  far  north  most  nearly  approach,  for 
the  shore  birds,  the  expansive  character  so  usual  for  water  bodies  and 
inland  areaa 

In  the  present  discussion  the  emphasis  placed  upon  the  inland  vegeta- 
tion does  not  mean  that  tbe  dominance  of  other  influences  is  not  recog- 
nized, but  simply  that  it  makes  a  convenient  and  fairly  reliable  index 
to  many  other  environmental  ivfltiencea.  as.  for  example,  the  climate 
and  topography.  A  further  important  advantage  of  the  plant  index  is 
17  • 


130  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

that  the  st-ieace  of  plant  ecologv  and  many  of  its  general  priocipIeH  and 
methods  are  applicable  to  birds-  A  general  knowledge  of  plant  eeo\t>gy 
is  therefore  becoming  one  of  the  most  valuable  tools  in  the  hands  of  the 
field  ornithologist.  Everj-  field  naturalist  has  obser\-ed  the  general  cor- 
relation of  certain  birds  with  certain  kinds  of  vegetation.  This  rela- 
tion is  clearl.v  eKi»re».sed  by  Ridgway  ('8i),  p.  S)  us  foliowM:  "There 
is  probably  no  better  index  or  key  to  the  distribution  of  birds  in  any 
countrj'  than  that  afforded  by  the  character  of  the  vegetation;  should 
thifi  vary  essentially  within  a  given  area,  a  corresponding  difference 
in  the  bird-life  is  a  certainty."  This  phase  of  the  subject  clearly  illus- 
trates the  oft-i¥peated  experience  of  naturalists  that  in  order  to  tUor- 
ougjily  understand  one  subject — perhaps  the  favorite  one — it  becomes 
necessary  to  study  another,  or  even  several.  Thus  iui  order  to  know 
the  bird  life  of  a  region  it  has  become  necessary,  to  study  the  ecolo- 
gical relations  of  its  vegetation. 

The  study  of  eoolt^cal  plant  gec^^phy  is  an  extensive  one,  but  many 
of  the  details,  so  important  to  the  botanist,  are  of  much  less  concern 
to  the  ornitholr^ist,  who  needs  primarily  to  knoT  the  major  plant  as- 
sociations or  formations  and  their  snccessional  relations.  This  im- 
plies ability  to  re<^'C^rnize  dominance  among  plant  si^ecics  and  the  gen- 
eral method  of  transformation  from  the  dominance  of  one  to  that  of 
another. 

By  a  plant  formation  i^  meant  that  association  of  species  (or  plant 
society)  which  is  correlated  with  those  conditions  which  tend  to  pre- 
vail over  a  large  (ceographic  area  in  the  last  stages  of  mutual  adjust- 
ment of  nil  en  vi  ran  mental  and  biotic  processes.  Snch  an  association 
or  formation  tends  to  occupy  sach  an  area  to  the  exclusion  of  all  others, 
■end  is  thus  a  climax  society. 

But  absolute  dominance  of  a  formation  does  not  occur,  because  local 
conditions  break  the  monotony  where  streams,  water  basins,  bare  rock, 
and  similar  influences  may  interrupt  the  desert,  grasslaiud  or  forest, 
and  produce  minor  habitats  and  associations  of  both  plants  and 
animals. 

It  is  not  my  purpose  to  discuss  in  detail  the  varioos  plant  formations 
of  fextratropical)  North  America,  but  to  outline  those  which  are  of 
evident  omitliolopical  utility.  The  following  may  be  recognized  pro- 
visionally : — 

1.  The  Arid  Deaerte  of  Southwestern  U.  S.  and  the  Mexican  Plateau. 

2.  The  OraselHiida  of  the  Great  PlaloB. 

3.  The  Deciduous  Hardwood  Forest  of  Soutbeastem  U.  S. 
1.  The  Coniferous  Forest  of  Eastern  Canada. 

6.    The  Giant  Conifer  Foreat  of  the  Pacitlc  Coast  and  the  Rocky  Mountafna. 

6.  The  Barren  Grounds  or  Cold  Desert. 

7.  The  Alpine  Deserts, 

A  mere  inspection  of  this  list  of  avain  and  vegetational  formations 
shows  that  the  recognition  of  these  large  environments  is  relatively 
simple.  It  is  also  seen  that  they  represent  fairly  definite  physical 
or  environmental  complexes  of  such  fundamental  importance  that  there 
can  be  no  doubt  as  to  their  general  validit.v.  As  to  the  relative  value, 
influence-  iKiundaries.  and  the  dynamic  relations  of  these  formations, 
much  is  already  known,  but  not  as  an  organized  bod.v  of  facts  and  prin- 


ECOLOGY   or    ISLE    ROYALE.  131 

ciples.  It  will  also  l>e  noted  that  these  regioDR  do  not  closelv  correspond 
with  cuiTent  faunnl  ai'cas,  although  there  is  a  very  cloee  correlation 
in  some  cases.  An  avian  fnrniatioa  may.  in  general  terms,  be  coonid- 
ered  the  anal(^ue  of  a  vegetational  fonuation,  altliough  this  do^  not 
imply  tbat  they  necesnarily  huve  the  same  boundaries. 

As  the  literatare  treating  (►f  the  \-egetation  of  tlie»e  aivas  is  extensive 
and  scattered,  a  few  papers  will  be  rited  as* an  index  to  others: — 

1.  Arid   Deserta;    Bray,   '06:   CoTlIle  and   MscDougal.   '03. 

2.  OrasHlandB  or  Plains;  Clements,  'OS;   Pound  and  Clements,  '00. 

3.  Southeastern   Hardwoods:   Cowles,  '01;   Harper.  '06;   Transeau.  '05. 

4.  Eastarn  Canadian  Conifers;    Wblttord.  '01;    Transeau.  '03,  '05-'06:   Oanong. 

'03,  '06;   Harvey,  '03. 

5.  Rocky  Mountain  and  Pacific  Conifers;  Wbltford.  '05;  Gray  and  Hooker,  'SI; 

Piper,  '06:  Young,  '07. 

6.  Alpine;   Merrlam,  '90,  '99;   Covllle,  '93;   Fernald,  '07. 

These  environiueutal  nnit  areas  a«  found  to-day,  are  the  result  of 
many  succesaions  which,  in  some  vase»  at  least,  reiu-li  i-atber  far  back 
into  the  past.  This  is  because  some  m'<-upy  aneient  land  areas,  such 
as  much  of  the  Houtheiistern  Hardwood  area.  On  the  other  hand,  some 
occupy  relatively  new  regions,  that  is,  at  least  with  regard  to  the  dom- 
inant factors  no*-  in  contnd.  as  in  the  glaciated  part  of  Xorth  America 
and  on  the  <'o4istal  I'lain.  Ho  far  as  the  present  is  <'on«-emed  wm'h  rela- 
tions clearly  show  that  these  ai-eas  are  only  the  end  results  of  extensive 
past  changes  or  snccetJiHions  which  represent  the  termimi)  branches  and 
cross  sections  of  development.  It  is  to  the  study  of  snch  ivgioiis  and 
associations  that  we  must  turn  for  the  fundamental  organisation  or 
nssociational  relations  of  the  various  elements  which  compose  not  only 
the  environments  but  also  the  associations  of  animals. 

In  order  to  make  as  definite  as  possible  the  structural  and  rcoloffical 
characteristivs  of  these  formations,  certain  general  relations  are  here 
formulated.  Throughout  this  paper  it  ^nuld  be  remembered  that  the 
individual  birds  and  associations  of  given  areas  form  tlie  units  of  com- 
parison. Such  a  distinction  is  necewary  because  many  species  show  con- 
siderable geographic  vai-iation  in  habits  and  in  the  habitats  frequented. 
The  writer  clearly  recognizes  the  risks  and  difficulties  of  siu-h  an  at- 
tempt. They  are  delibenitely  pnt  in  their  present  form  to  imitr  criti- 
cism omt  qualification  from  field  workers.  It  is  desii-nbJe  to  know  the 
validity  of  these  formations,  their  internal  e<-ological  relations  and  dy- 
namic tendencies,  their  relation  to  dominant  envifonniental  influencea. 
etc,  A  complete  list  is  not  attempted,  and  some  of  the  statements  may 
he  only  fragments  of  hirger  generalizations;  but  it  is  just  snch  i-ehitions 
as  these  which  will  develop  if  the  entire  subject  is  considered  critically 
and  synthetically.  Kome  of  the  leading  characteristics  of  these  larger 
environmental  nnits  and  their  avian  fontnitioiiH  may  be  briefly  outlined 
as  follow^s: — 

1.  The  dominance  of  a  limited  number  of  ph^-sicnl  conditions  or 
complexes,  as  climate,  topography,  vegetation,  aninuils,  etc.,  in  a  given 
area  prodwes  the  iH-imary  envii-on mental  units  and  formations. 

2,  Secondary  environmental  dominance  is  shown  b.v  a  secondary  avian 
association.  Thus  in  the  Xortheastem  biotic  center  there  is  a  second- 
an'  dominance  due  to  wafei*  l)asins  in  the  forest  area.      ,-  > 

i,C.ooglc 


132  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1808. 

3.  A  formation  or  climax  society  is  compoeed  of  a  relatively  (and 
usually  absolutely)  limited  number  of  species  wbich  are  dominant  in  a 
given  environment  of  geographic  extent.  Such  dominance,  in  general, 
implies  extensive  range,  relative  abundance,  and  ability  to  ind^nitely 
succeed  or  perpetuate  iteelf  under  given  conditlona. 

4.  Where  dominance  obtains,  avian  variety  is  limited  so  that  the 
greatest  div«^ty  occurs  where  local  influences  prevail,  and  at  the  mar- 
gins  of  the  formation. 

5.  Correlated  environmental  and  biotic  dominance  produces  That 
may  be  considered  a  iiotic  base,  stratum,  or  optimum,  from  which  de- 
partures may  be  considered  less  favorable.  This  is  a  relative  equilibrium, 
resulting  from  complete  environmental  and  biotic  adjustmetit,  under 
gi\-en  conditions. 

6.  Tn  each  formation  there  is  a  normal  inter-adjustment  of  the  avian 
species  and  indiN-iduals,  in  addition  to  the  adjustment  with  the  domi- 
nant physical  environment.  The  former  is  dominated  by  their  straotnre. 
habits,  and  Ihe  instincts  or  behavior;  hence  the  colonial  breeding  or 
spacing,   migration,  etc. 

7.  Each  large  environmental  area  or  formation  tends  to  have  a  full 
complement  or  set  of  species,  of  div«-Be  but  supplementary  ecological 
character,  such  as  water,  shore  or  inland  birds.  One  set  is  likely  to  be 
dominant. 

8.  Relative  stability  in  an  association  is  correlated  with  the  climax: 
dominance,  and  generally  with  extreme  and  slowly  changing  local  in- 
fluences.    Fluctuation  is  correlated  with  intermediate  conditions. 

9.  Diversified  aasociatione  and  isolation  are  greatest  with  imperfect 
dominance,  but  dominance  itself  produces  isolation  of  the  climax  as- 
sociation. This  diversification  produces  associatitms  surrounded  by 
others  and  hence  their  isolation. 

lU.     The  taxonomic  elements  in  different  formations  vary  much,  but 
there  are  close  analogies  in  the  kinds  of  taxonomic  and  ecological  groups 
in  different  formations. — as  the  Mniotiltidte  of  the  New  are  repre««itecl  - 
bv  the  Svlviidae    of  the    Old  World.     Cf.  Osborn  '02.     LeConte,  '50, 
1>.  239.     Cf.  No.  7. 

11.  The  roughly  zonal  arrangement  of  societies  about  the  climax 
society  (formation)  or  the  environmental  optimum,  is  primarily  due 
either  to  local  reversals,  the  lagging  influence  of  local  or  neutral  condi- 
tions, or  to  the  influence  of  adjacent  formations.  This  is  a  result  of 
the  retardation  of  the  complete  cycle  of  successions. 

12.  The  primary  environmental  conditions  tend  to  encroach  upon 
all  others.  The  local  conditions  thus  tend  to  become  transformed  in 
the  direction  of  the  dominant  environni«it  and  to  be  appropriated  by 
it.  The  corresponding  avain  associations  are  thus  given  a  deflnite 
dynamic  trend. 

13.  The  mobility  of  birds  during  the  breeding  season  is  very  generally 
overestimated.  The  presence  of  the  nest  and  young  renders  tbem  for  a 
time  relatively  sedentary.  There  are  many  causes  influencing  this,  such 
as  other  individuals,  proximity  of  food  for  young,  homing,  instinct,  etc. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOOT  OF  ISLE  ROYALK.  133 

IV.      MiNOE  AVAIN  EXVIKONMEXTS  AXD  THBIft  ASSOCIATIONS. 

We  have  seen  that  the  larger  geograf^c  environments  or  formations 
are  characterized  by  definite  conditi<ms  and  associations,  and  at  the 
same  time  that  even  throughout  these  favorable  r^ions  the  climax  as- 
sociation is  not  distributed  with  absolute  uniformity  because  of  local 
variations  in  the  physical  features,  such  as  vegetation,  water  basins, 
streams,  mountains,  etc.  For  the  student  of  local  bird  life  the  real  work 
begins  when  one  attempts  to  examine  into  the  causes  and  influences  ex- 
erted by  these  conditions  which  break  the  monotony  of  the  formation 
and  make  possible  a  diversified  avifauna.  But  birdfi  do  not  always  re- 
spond as  closely  to  slight  local  influences  as  does  the  vegetation,  and  for 
this  reason  one  must  learn  by  experience  just  what  size  of  units  must 
be  used.  Thus  in  the  forest  a  few  wind-falls  will  attract  but  little 
attention,  bat  a  bum  of  a  few  acres  will  have  a  noticeable  influence  in 
harboring  those  species  of  birds  which  frequent  openings;  while  swifts 
and  swallows  ignore  many  local  influences  which  dominate  other  species. 

It  should  also  be  noted  that  whenever  possible  it  is  of  distinct 
advantage  to  examine  all  habitats  in  their  original  state,  uninfluenced 
by  man. 

Instead  of  discussing  the  leading  features  of  local  conditions  and 
their  societies  or  associations  in  detail,  only  an  outline  of  them  will 
be  given,  and  that  in  a  form  to  facilitate  use  and  revision, 

1.  ftfinor  environments  are  primarily  dependent  upon  local  conditions, 
and  are  thus  in  a  sense  correspondingly  independent  of  the  dominant 
forces  of  the  region.    This  is,  of  course,  a  relative  condition. 

2.  Minor  environments  are,  as  a  rule,  relatively  limited  in  area. 
In  general  their  limited  area  favors  their  short  duration,  but  age  is 
primarily  a  result  of  the  rate  of  change. 

3.  Marked  isolation,  even  when  of  extensive  linear  extent, — as  a 
shore  line,  along  a  streain,  or  an  elongate  rocky  ridge, — is  also  character- 
istic of  minor  environments. 

4.  Minor  environments  tend  to  become  encroached  upon  by  the 
dominant  regional  influences  and  ultimately  to  be<'ome  extinct.  The 
succession  of  societies  in  local  habitats  is  a  declining  one,  while  that 
of  the  geographic  or  climax  habitat  is  an  increasing  and  ascending  <me. 

5.  Local  habitats  produce  most  of  the  variety  within  the  dominant 
area,  and  make  possible  a  diversified  avifauna.  The  structural  dif- 
ferentiation within  a  formation  (zones,  etc.)  is  thus  largely,  in  addition 
to  variations  in  the  formation  itself,  of  local  origin. 

6.  Local  associations  or  societies,  in  general,  furnish  the  essential 
clues  aa  to  their  earlier  successions  which  have  attended  the  evolution 
or  development  of  regional  dominance.  The  variations  in  these  are  due 
both  to  the  kind  of  life  and  to  the  influence  of  adjacent  associations  and 
centers  of  dominance. 

7.  Marginal  societies  are  particularly  liable  to  variation  in  com- 
position, due  to  the  combined  influences  of  adjacent  formations  or  centers 
of  dominance  as  well  aa  to  local  conditions. 

8.  Comparative  studies  of  local  habitats  will  form  the  most  general 
and  practical  guide  in  the  determination  of  the  successions  in  the  forma- 
tion. 

9.  Local  habitats  and  societies,  in  common  with  the  larger  environ- 


MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 


mental  complexes,  are  characterized  by  the  doDiinance  of  few  phyeical 
and  biotic  factors,  and  by  a  limited  Dumber  of  epeciee. 


V,      AVAIX  SUCCESSIOX. 

1,  General  Remarks.  Since  the  breeding  i^onnda  are  fundamental 
importance  in  the  ecol(^^  of  birds.  the"sTudy  of  tliem  in  such,  situations 
furnishes  the  Rreatest  source  of  innight  into  tiieir  life  relations.  By 
an  avain  association,  formation  or  soeiety  is  meant  different  combina- 
tions of  species  wltich  reffuJarlij  occur  together  in  the  mine  breedinff 
habitat  or  area.  These  breeding  {^rounds  must  be  considered  broadly, 
and  include  not  only  the  nesting  site  but  also  the  feeding  grounds, 
even  when  they  are  jihysically  very  different,  bemuse  e<-ol<^ically  these 
conditions  foi-m  a  unit  dui'ing  the  breeding  season. 

It  is  well  known  that  when  a  given  set  of  physical  conditions  are 
dominant,  as  in  a  dense  conifer  forest,  a  swamp  or  an  extensive  orchard, 
relatively  few  individuals  and  kinds  of  breeding  birds  are  charactOTstic 
of  such  conditions,  except  in  the  case  of  those  nesting  in  colonies.  The 
field  relations  of  these  colonial  and  isolated  bi-eeders  are  quite  different. 
It  is  also  of  imj>ortance  io  i-ecall  that  nbundam-e  i«  a  relative  term,  with 
a  very  different  meaning  in  the  case  of  seed-eating  and  predaceous 
species. 

Bearing  in  mind  these  conditions,  bird  succession  means  a  change 
fi-oni  the  dominance  of  certain  species  or  associations  to  that  of  others. 
Thus  in  the  beginning  a  slight  change  in  abundance  of  a  species  may  be 
noted,  with  a  corresponding  decrease  in  another;  and  this  proportioo 
may  continue  to  change  until  the  intruder  becomes  dominant  and  the 
rival  fojrm  may  disappear  entirely.  Tliis  process  of  change,  as  a  rule. 
is  not  limited  to  a  single  8]>ei-ies,  but  usually  involves  several  or  all 
of  the  members  of  the  association,  as  when  a  dune  invades  a  swamp 
and  the  swamp  birds  are  completely  replaced  by  those  fi-equenting  the 
sand  dunes. 

2.  Succession  on  Isle  Royalr.  With  these  preliminary  considera- 
tions in  mind,  we  will  turn  to  the  ecological  succession  of  bird  life 
upon  Isle  Royale,  I>ake  Kui>erior.  The  field  work  ujion  the  island  was 
CiU-ried  on  by  a  party  from  the  University  Museum  of  the  University 
of  Michigan,  under  tlie  dire<-tion  of  the  MTiter.  Aside  from  succession, 
the  general  ecol<^ical  relations  of  the  birds  were  studied  by  Otto  Mc- 
Creary  and  Max  M.  Peet,  and  elsewhere  detailed  descriptions  of  the 
i-egion  and  detailed  notes  will  be  published.  The  TVTiter  has  based  his 
main  retoi-ds  of  habitat  preference  upon  their  work.  For  this  outline 
of  suc^-ession  only 'the  primary  features  of  the  location  need  be  given. 

In  the  present  treatment  an  attempt  will  he  made  to  follow  the 
genetic  suc(ression,  at  least  in  its  broader  outlines.  Vanous  qualifica- 
tions and  reservations  have  been  made,  and  otliers  will  follow,  so  it 
is  hoped  that  no  confusion  will  be  produced  by  this  method  of  treat- 
ment. 

Oeoijraphlcalhi,  Isle  Hoyale,  Michigan,  is  an  island  in  Lake  Superior, 
near  the  North  Shore,  not  far  from  I'ort  Arthur,  Ontario.  The  topogra- 
phy forms  a  pait  of  nu  ancient  peneplain  of  niodei'ute  I'elief,  glaciated 
and  with  an  abundance  of  elong-ated  low  ridges  and  valleys  with  numer- 
ous water  basins.     Tlie  >toil.  which  is  locally  absent,  is  generally  humic 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  135 

or  mixed  in  ohaTnctep,  boi-dering  and  in  the  depre«siona;  but  is  mineral, 
stony  and  reaidual  elsewhere.  The  combined  shore  and  beaches  are 
extenaive.  largely  stony  and  gravelly,  and  contain  but  little  aaud^  mncb 
of  the  Hhoi-e  line  is  rocky  and  precipitous;  many  outlying  islands. 
Vegetation,  herbaceous  in  shallow  inland  waters  and  a»  a  ground  cover 
except  where  the  shade  is  too  dense,  and  upon  rocks;  shrubs  on  pro- 
tected beaches,  in  moi-e  open  places  in  the  forest  and  in  bums;  the 
forest  consists  of  Tiimarack,  Black  Hpruce  and  Arbor  Vitje  in  bogs;  and 
elsewhere  in  inesophytic  conditions  of  Balsam  Fir,  Arbor  Vitie,  White 
and  Yellow  Birch,  and  rarely  Hugar  Maple,  I'pon  the  drj-  ridges,  Jack 
Pine;  and  in  bnnied  areas,  Aspen  and  Paper  Birch.  Climate,  seasonal 
changes  very  pronounced;  winters  very  long  and  cold,  and  summers 
short  and  cool;  a  relative  humidity  of  about  80%  in  December  and 
of  about  7ttfo  in  July  (cf.  Jofaoson,  '07) ;  a  mean  temperature  for 
January  7.97°  F.;  and' for  July,  I>2.:i4=  F.  (Port  Arthur  data).  Early, 
deep  snows.  Pntlartom  animals,  as  the  Lynx,  Marten,  weasels,  Red 
Squirrel  and  bats  are  directly  in  competition  with  the  birds  for  food, 
or  prey  upon  the  birds. 

The  alwive  environmental  fartorx  are  dominant  featui-es  nnd  gi^-e  us 
a  general  pictnre  of  the  conditions,  largely  in  terms  of  common  ex- 
perience. In  the  life  of  the  birds,  however,  a  complete  reassortment 
and  change  of  intensity  in  these  factors  occurs  when  they  are  com- 
bined as  habitats.  The  suiTOunding  lake,  the  nnmerous  baj-s,  small 
lakes  and  ponds  compose  the  aquatic  habitat  and  make  it  a  characteris- 
tic feature.  The  very  iri-^ular  and  extensive  shore  line  and  limited 
beach  ai-ea  characterize  the  coastal  border,  while  inland,  excepting  the 
main  bodies  of  the  few  larger  lakes,  the  encroachment  of  the  bog  vegeta- 
tion upon  the  shores  is  such  as  to  prevent  an  extensive  development  of 
sandy  open  beaches.  The  above  mentioned  habitats  are  oi>eD  unforested 
areas;  the  remainder  of  the  island,  with  the  exceptions  of  the  bare 
rocky  ridges,  the  clearings  and  burned  over  areas,  are  fJS^ed.  Very 
extensive  swamp  forests  abound  in  the  elongate  valleys  and  the  borders 
of  the  water  bodies,  and  are  composed  of  Tamarack,  Black  Hpruce  and 
Arbor  Vitse.  Tlie  uiesophytic  forest  occurs  on  drained  ai-eaa  and  is 
characterized  by  Balsam  Fir,  White  Spruce  and  Pai)er  Birch;  the 
bui-ned  areas  by  second  growths  of  aspens  and  Paper  Birch.  Then  tliere 
are  also  influences  which  are  exerted  upon  the  bird  life  in  general,  as 
for  example,  uitgration.  In  this  case,  undoubtedly  both  external  condi- 
tions and  the  habits  and  the  behavior  must  be  correlated.  Another 
general  and  dominant  influence  should  be  reiterated  here,  and  that  is 
that  all  open  areas  tend  to  become  invaded  with  vegetation  and  finally 
forested,  whether  they  are  lakes,  ponds,  bogs,  rock  openings  on  the 
ridges,  bums  or  clearings.  The  mes<»phytic  Balsani-npnu-e  foi-est  tends 
to  monopolize  all  habitats,  and  gives  a  definitenefs  lo  all  succession 
upon  the  island. 

From  a  genetic  standpoint  the  past  and  present  dominance  of  the 
surrounding  I^ake  must  be  recognizad.  This  formerly  stood  at  a  level 
much  above  that  of  the  highest  ridges  upon  the  island,  as  is  clearly 
evidenced  by  the  abandoned  beaches  on  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior. 
Such  relations  prove  that  Isle  Royale  was  once  a  rocky  i-eef  in  the 
lake,  which,  as  the  l^ake  level  was  lowei-ed  (it  is  quite  unlikely  that  the 


136  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

islancl  has  been  materially  elevated)  became  exposed  as  a  wave-washed 
beach.  These  conditions  are  appix>xniinted  to-da.v  by  the  low  outly- 
ing islands.  The  beach  or  shore  is  thus  the  original  habitat  upon  Isle 
RoyalCf  and  in  general,  all  others  have  been  derived  or  developed  from 
it.  To  discnse  these  as  a  truly  genetic  series  would  require  that,  these 
be  described  ximtiltnncoualij,  as  the  differentiation  took  place.  These 
habitats  did  not  develop  as  isolated  phenomena,  but  several  developed 
at  the  same  time,  or  abreast.  Tluis  as  soon  as  enauffh  of  the  land  sur- 
face had  become  exposed  so  that  its  inequalities  b^n  to  have  an  in- 
fluence, the  ridges  would  be  the  parts  best  drained,  and  certain  depres- 
sions would  tend  to  nccuiuulate  the  drainage.  This  process  would  lead  ■ 
to  a  simultaneous  development  or  differentiation  of  the  well,  moderately, 
and  poorly  drained  habitats.  Almost  all  of  the  residual  soil  formed 
as  the  region  was  haseleveled  was  prabably  cleared  away  by  the  glaciers; 
or  later,  as  the  waves  fell  from  the  island,  by  the  pounding  of  the  waves. 
Thus  the  relative  absence  of  a  soil  must  characterize  all  habitats.  At 
what  period  life  first  reached  the  island  in  post-Glacial  time  is  not 
definitely  known;  but  it  is  likely  that  the  pioneer  vegetation  of  lichens, 
mosses  and  low  herbaceous  vegetation  reached  it  soon  after  its  ej-posure. 
If  the  biota  reached  the  island  about  the  time  of  the  formation  of  the 
Algonquin  beach,  which,  i-oughly  speaking,  may  have  l»een  nt  about 
the  present  elevation  of  475  feet  above  the  Lake  surface,  it  has  since 
spread  upward  and  do\i-nward  from  that  lei-^l.  The  composition  of 
the  initial  societies  is  not  liable  to  as  much  variation  at  the  later  ones. 
Thus  if  the  Herring  Qulls  returned  to  the  region  at  this  early  period 
of  the  exposure,  they  were  probably  the  pioneer  birds;  but  if  only 
at  a  much  later  date,  still  other  species  might  have  accompanied  tbeui. 
While  such  variations  as  this  may  be  ex|>ected,  and  due  allowance  must 
be  made  for  them,  yet  there  can  be  little  reasonable  doubt  but  that 
water  birds  and  those  frequenting  open-  places' tended  to  become  the 
pioneers,  and  that  later,  with  the  development  of  a  soil  and  forests, 
other  associations  of  birds  became  established. 

There  are  at  least  five  important  factors  which  enter  into  the  com- 
position of  the  past  and  present  conditions  which  have  moulded  and 
are  even  now  moulding  the  formation  of  the  habitats  upon  Isle  Royale. 
These  five  are:— first,  past  climatic  changes;  seconrZ,  the  local  topogra- 
phy; third,  the  falling  lake  surface;  fourth,  dynamic  tendency  of  the 
vegetation;  and  fifth,  the  habits  and  structure  of  the  birds.  With  these 
guiding  principles,  let  us  now  turn  to  certain  details  of  the  resultant 
succession. 

a.     The  Aquatic  Association  and  Hahitat. 

Tlie  expanse  of  Lake  Superior,  the  irregular  shore  line  producing 
coves,  the  inland  water  bodies  and  streams,  together  furnish  an  ex- 
tensive and  expansive  area  of  habitat.  The  cutting  of  the  Lake  waves 
enci-oaches  ui)on  the  land  habitat,  and  the  deposition  by  them  elsewhere 
i-auses  minor  extensions  of  the  land  habitat  (as  at  Kock  Harbor  where 
a  sand  spit  furnishes  a  nesting  site  for  a  Kingfisher).  Inland  the 
encroachment  of  the  vegetation  tends  to  restrict  the  water  areas,  as  the 
falling  Lake  level  has,  in  the  [Mist,  tended  to  increiise  the  land  habitat. 
These  processes  must  l»e  recofmized  in  order  to  grasp  the  dynamic  ten- 
dencies of  the  hahitat. 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  13? 

The  characteristic  aquatic  society  la  composed  of  the  Herring  Gull, 
liOOD,  American  and  Hooded  AfergaQsers,  and  ttie  Pied-billed  Grebe; 
mainly  fish  eaters  and  scavangere.  Other  species,  of  greater  inland 
tendencies,  are  attracted  by  the  flsh  food,  as  the  Eagle,  Osprey  and  the 
Kingflsber.  The  GuIIa  show  a  decided  preference  for  the  great  Lake, 
and  the  Loon  for  the  inland  waters.  The  presence  of  tiie  Kingfisher 
was  influenced  by  the  harbor  with  its  attendant  sand  banks  and  bars. 
As  all  these  water  bodies  near  Isle  Eoyale  freeze  over  in  winter,  the 
strictly  aquatic  birds  must  normally  migrtLte  to  secure  food.  Of  course 
none  of  these  birds  nest  in  the  open  waters,  but  on  the  island  beaches 
(Gulls),  near  the  moutfas  of  streams,  and  inland  in  marshy  places;  but 
all,  as  a  rule,  nest  near  the  water.  The"  very  young  soon  attend  tbeic 
parents,  and  are  thus  in  the  water  at  an  age  when  many  laud  birds  are 
yet  helpless  in  tlie  nest,  thus  confirming  their  aquatic  habits  and  habi- 
tat.    During  migrations  many  other  species  frequent  this  habitat. 

Where  Isle  Royale  now-  is,  once  rolled  the  open  Lake;  and  it  is  not 
improbable  that  as  the  islaaid  appeared  the  Herring  Gull  was  oue  of  the 
first  species  to  discover  it.  Such  a  bird  might  even  reach  the  island  under 
climatic  conditions  of  the  Ice  Age,  for  the  species  now  ranges  far  north 
along  rlie  shdre  of  the  Arctic  Sea.  A  sjiecies  of  such  extensive  chronolog- 
ical and  geographical  range  will  tend  to  give  much  stability  to  suc- 
ceeion.  The  present  range  of  the  Mei^ansers  and  the  Loon  is  not  so  far 
north,  and  for  this  reason  they  may  have  arrived  under  milder  climatic 
conditions.  But  if  the  island  l>ecame  exposed  under  mildpost-Glacial 
conditions,  all  of  these  species  may  have  arrived  at  much  the  same  time. 
But  even  with  the  chances  for  such  variations  the  general  succeesion 
seeiiifr  to  have  been  initiated  with  the  aquatic  association  as  the  pioneer 
society. 

In  following  the  genesis  of  the  habitats  and  associations  from  this 
point  onward,  divergence  and  differentiation  becomes  so  marked  that 
it  is  impossible  to  develop  all  lines  abreast.  A  linear  treatment  be- 
comes necessary,  and  therefore  certain  general  relations  are  liable  to 
become  obscured  unless  specifically  mentioned  in  advance. 

The  aquatic  and  beach  habitats  possess  a  mariied  tendency  toward  a 
zonal  arrangement.  From  the  Superior  beach  the  transition  is  through 
open  or  ^mb  zones  into  the  climax  forest.  The  topography  of  the 
island  with  its  longitudinal  ridges  and  valleys  form  a  dominant  factor  in 
impressing  this  zonal  structure  upon  the  biotic  associations.  The  series, 
— from  the  water,  through  the  beach,  open  and  shrub  marginal  zone, 
into  the  climax  forest, — may  be  considered  as  the  genetic  vegetable  suc- 
cession. They  change  simultaneously  and  are  due  to  the  same  general 
cause, — the  falling  Iiake  surface,  which  transforms  the  water  area  into 
beach,  the  beach  into  forest  margin,  and  forest  mai^n  into  the  climax 
association.  But  as  mentioned,  it  is  manifestly  impossible  to  discuss  all 
these  transitions  at  once,  and  each  ecological  unit  must  therefore  receive 
separate  genetic  treatment. 

This  tension  line  or  marginal  zone  between  the  Lake  and  the  forest 
shows  such  a  wonderful  diversity  and  complexity  in  its  conditions, 
that  several  plant  and  animal  associations  are  formed  within  this  zone. 
With  its  onward  march  there  are  simultaneous  changes  in  several  asso- 


138  MICHIGAN    SURVET,    1901. 

riationn  which,  while  tliey  will  vary  iu  their  cfaafajjoK,  yet  all  tend  to  fon- 
verge  iu  harnionv  with  the  dominant  factors.  Tliene.  conditions  migrate 
or  radiate  from  the  hijfliest  land.  On  the  other  hand,  the  inland  marginal 
zoneB,  which  border  the  Bnialler  water  bodies,  inigi*ate  inwardly;  anil 
being  closed  areas,  tend  ti>  become  extinct.  This  mar^imrl  zone,  parti- 
cularly beyond  the  njiper  beacii,  forms  one  of  the  most  interesting  and 
complex  conditions  found  upon  the  island.  It  is  not  an  ecological  unit, 
but  is  comjKised  of  several  of  them.  This  is  where  most  of  the  eon- 
fusion  arises  in  actual  field  work  of  habitat  studies. 

b.     The   Shai-e   ant!    .Ifirsft   Axuoriation   nniJ   Habitat. 

As  the  area  of  the  islands  ex[>anded  and  the  shoi-e  line  was  leujitheD- 
ed,  the  habitat  for  sbore  birds  inci-eased :  but  the  stee|»  and  rocky  shores 
M-ere  unfaivorable  for  the  development  of  Iteachett  because  loose  ro<k,  as 
tools  for  the  waves,  was  limited  in  amount.  The  local  character  of  the 
shingle  and  gi'avel  to-day  found  in  the  various  coves  clearly  indicates 
their  local  origin;  and  much  the  same  conditions  have  obtained  iu  the 
past.  On  acconnt  of  ttiese  conditions,  tbe  sandy  loaches  ore  very  con- 
spicnously  absent.  The  dynamic  tendencies  of  the  beach  are  those 
whi<;h  cause  the  extension  or  restriction  of  the  aquatic  and  beach 
habitats,  supplemented  In'  the  drift  whicJi  is  tossed  upon  the  sbot«. 
A\Tiere  there  is  shallow  water,  and  mud  accumulates,  favorable  condi- 
tions are  furnished  for  invei-tebrate  food  for  birds.  Inland,  the  numer- 
ous lakes,  ponds  and  marshes  furnish  shoi-e  conditions  which  tend  to 
become  extinct  through  drainage  or  overgitiwth  of  the  vegetation,  except 
in  those  |>arts  of  the  larger  lakes  where  wave  action  tends  to  scatter 
such  accumulations  as  rajiidly  as  formed,  or  to  pi-event  its  formation 
altojjether. 

Although  observations  on  this  subject  are  <|uite  limited,  yet  it  seems 
fairly  safe  to  consider  the  Sp<itted  and  Solitary  Kandpii>erH  as  char- 
acteristic birdx  of  this  association.  TT|H)U  such  a  i*ocky  coast,  sandy  and 
gravelly  iH-nches  are  r|uite  exceptional  and  are  conflnetl  to  protected 
coves.  Additional  diversity  is  produced  where  small  streams  enter 
tlicHe  coves  and  produce  deltiia 

Little  is  gained  by  sharply  segi-egating  the  marsh  and  shore  birds, 
althougli  the  marsh  birds  show  a  preference  for  conditions  better 
represented  or  correlated  with  tO]K>graphically  older  coasts,  pro- 
tected and  inland  conditions.  Attention  should  be  directed,  how- 
ever, to  the  signifliant  fact  Ihat  smTcssions  initiated  with  such 
diversity  will  produce  a  variation  in  the  composition  of  the  associa- 
tions. Also  that  so  far  as  possible  these  variations  should  be -coo- 
sidei-ed  couipanitively  and  synthetically  in  reconstructing  and  antici- 
pating successions. 

The  American  Bittern,  T.«Bser  Yellow-legs,  Swamp  Sparrow  and 
Marsh  Hawk  belong  to  this  society  of  marsh  birds.  As  in  the  case  of 
the  aquatic  association,  these  birds  generally  nest  in  close  proximity 
or  entirely  within  these  shore  or  marsh,  conditions.  Still  other  species 
frequent  this  belt  to  feed,  as  it  is  aa  open  area;  but  their  presence  is 
mainly  conditioned  by  the  adjacent  shrubs  or  forest.  The  very  limited 
number  of  s|>edes  it)  the  aquatic  amd  shore  associations  is  worthy  of 
particular  mention. 


ECOLOQT  OF   ISLE  ROTALB.  130 

The  Yell«>w-leg8,  Spotted  Sandpiper,  Bittern  aod  Mareh  Hawk  range 
far  to  the  north,  even  to  the  Barren  Grounds,  and  thus  Buggest  chances, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  aquatic  aMociation,  of  an  early  arrival  and  suc- 
cession upon  the  island. 

With  the  growth  of  the  island,  there  has  been  a  oorre«ponding  ex- 
tension of  the  outer  and  inner  shore  habits,  although  the  eDcroaching 
vegetation  has  had  a  marked  tendency  to  restrict  the  area  of  the  inland 
habitat.  The  dominant  enYironmental  inSuences  in  this  habitat  appear 
to  be,  1,  the  physical  character  of  the  shore  and  beaches;  2.  the  dynamic 
forces  of  the  water  bodies  and  sti-eams;  3,  the  encroachment  of  the 
1-egetation;  4,  the  downward  migration  of  the  shore;  and  5,  the  habits 
and  structure  of  the  birds. 

As  a  general  rule,  we  may  say  tliat  the  beach  of  the  outer  laice 
tends  to  be- succeeded  by  either  the  bog  or  upland  associationa,  and 
those  inland  by  the  bt^  nssociation. 

c.  Bog-forest  Association  and  Habitat. 

As  just  stated  the  outer  coast  or  an  inland  one  may  develop  into 
a  marsh  or  hog  habitat  or  association.  lu  the  bog.  the  Tamarack, 
Black  Sprace  and  Arixw  Vitie  are  the  pioneer  trees  in  traosformin*; 
the  open  marsh  into  a  forested  one;  while  upon  the  outer  rfiore  the 
alders  and  aspens  tend  to  precede  the  conifers  as  a  general  rale. 
From  the  bog  forest  the  transition  to  the  Balsam-White  Spruce  forest 
may  be  perfectly  continuous,  and  thus  there  will  be  a  series  character- 
ized by  the  dominant  conifers.  In  places  Arbor  Vitffi  may  form  the 
dominant  swamp  forest,  but  this  is  only  a  variation  in  the  conifei:  domi- 
nance. With  improved  drainage  or  the  accumulation  of  ve^ietable 
debris,  these  habitats  become  converted  into  the  Balsam-spruce  climax 
foreet  and  hence  the  environmental  dynamic  tendency. 

As  the  forest  encroaches  upon  the  open  bogs  the  Tamarack,  Black 
Spruce,  Arbor  Vitie,  Cassandra,  Labrador  Tea  and  alders  are  accom- 
panied by  birds  characteristic  of  this  early  stage;  such  as  the  Eed- 
breasted  Xuthatoh,  Yellow-bellied  Flycatcher,  Golden-crowned  Kinglet, 
Cedar  Waxwing,  Chickadee,  Canada  Jay,  White-winged  Crossbill. 
Where  alders  abound  the  conditions  are  favorable  for  the  Redstart  and 
the  White-throated  Sparrow,  But  later,  as  the  bog  conifer  forest 
becomes  continnons  and  dominant,  the  ^'axning.  Redstart  and  White- 
throated  Sparrows  diminish  in  numbers  and  finally  disappear.  Still 
later,  as  the  swamp  becomes  eliminated  with  the  development  of  the 
climax  forest,  the  Yellow-bellied  Flycatcher  will  also  become  excluded. 

This  is  perhaps  the  simplest  suceessioo  from  the  water  to  the  climax 
forest,  via  the  bog  forest.  This  series  is  very  perfectly  presented  in 
all  stages  and  has  an  extensive  range.  The  number  of  species  In  the 
association  is  rather  large  when  compared  with  the  preceding  asso- 
fiattons. 

d.  Aspeniinh  Association  and  Hah'tat. 

This  series  develops   from   the  beach   and  the  waves  fall   from   the 

ridges  or  low  rock  surfaces  and  leave  the  bare  ex[)anBc«.  As  the  rock 

disintegrates,   decomposes,   and   humus   arcumulates,   a   soil   is  formed, 

mainly  in  deprefwioiiR  or  nt   Hie   buses  of  the  ridges,  and  from   these 

19 


140  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1M8. 

it  tends  to  encroach  upon  the  open  places  with  a  zone  of  Jack  Pine, 
aspens,  or  White  Birches.  These  areas  are  largely  strips  along  the  crests 
of  ridges  or  small  park-like  openings  on  rather  level  rock.  In  no  case  are 
these  single  areas  large,  so  that  the  habitat  is  only  extensive  in  the 
aggregate  With  the  presence  of  the  open  aspen  and  birch  woods,  the 
following  society  is  likel;  to  be  characteristic : — J  unco.  Oven  Bird,  Red- 
eyed  Vireo,  Chipping  Sparrow,  White-thnmted  Sparrow,  Flicker,  Cedar 
Waxwing,  Wilson's  Thmsh  and  the  Chickadee,  As  the  deciduous  trees 
are  replaced  by  the  open  encroaching  ccmifer  forest,  the  Song  Sparrow, 
the  Nashville,  Myrtle  and  Black-throated  Green  Warblers  and  Wilson's 
and  Olive-bflched  Thrushes,  which  frequent  the  forest  margins,  increase 
in  abundance.  The  Oven  Bird  has  an  extensive  northern  range  from 
Labrador  into  the  Yukon  Valley  and  may  well  have  been  a  very  early 
pioneer  upon  the  island  as  the  aspens  and  birches  were  probably  the 
first  broad-leaved  tree  arrivals.  From  the  above  it  is  seen  that  this 
means  an  extensive  vai'iety,  but  as  the  dominance  of  the  climax  foi-est 
encroaches  this  number  again  becomes  reduced. 

I'he  composition  of  the  society  varies  somewhat,  depending  upon 
the  surroundings,  as  proximity  of  the  present  shore  or  distance  fi-otu 
it.  Many  of  these  openings  are  continuous  with  the  present  beacli. 
It  is  not  improbable  that  this  was  a  prominent  society  whenever  the 
waters  fell  rapidly  from  the  island  between  rather  stationary  levels. 
This  has  beoi  a  society  decidedly  on  the  decline  with  the  eocroachment 
of  the  forest. 

Probably  this  association  varies  considerably  in  its  composition,  and 
bas  done  so  in  the  past;  but  its  main  features  are  fairly  constant. 
These  variations  seem  likely,  through  the  influence  of  openings  pi-o- 
duced  by  fires  which,  when  extensive,  may  have  caused  a  new  equilib- 
rium among  those  species  frequenting  openings. 

The  Burned  Area  Association. 

This  phase  should  perhax>s  be  considered  as  supplementary  to  the 
aspen-birch  association  just  considered.  A  fire  brings  about  a  reversaT 
of  conditions  through  the  destruction  of  the  forest,  and  in  some,  cwses. 
a  part  of  the  soil  as  well.  As  there  are  all  degrees  of  extent  and  com- 
pleteness in  this  process,  thei-e  is  a  corresponding  \-ariation  in  the 
detiiHs  of  the  resulting  succession,  at  least  in  its  early  stages.  Jt  is 
on'y  when  there  is  a  very  complete  destruction  of  the  v^etatlon  that 
the  continuity  with  former  occupancy  is  wholly  broken. 

The  easily  inflammable  character  of  these  conifers,  even  when  in  a 
green  conditicm.  makes  it  likely  that  natural  causes,  such  as  lightning^ 
or  marsh  gas  (cf.  Penhallow,  '07),  may  have  been  influential.  The 
proximity  of  the  gas  supply  and  the  conifers  is  of  interest  as  this  may 
influence  their  liability  to  flre  and  thus  to  this  sort  of  reversal  of  con- 
ditions. Thus  liability  to  flres  is  rather  characteristic  of  the  r^ion, 
and  man's  influence  has  tended  merely  to  reinforce  rather  than  to  intro- 
duce this  feature.  Thus  it  seems  probable  that  fires  have  been  a  factor 
in  supplementing  the  natural  park-like  openings.  In  addition  to  the 
burned  areas  found  upon  Isle  Boyale,  other  limited  open  areas  are  due 
to  cultivation  and  are  kept  open. 

The  birds  characteristic  of  the  more  open  situations  are  the  Sharp- 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROTALE.  141 

tailed  Gnrase,  Song  and  Chipping  Sparrows,  Flicker,  and  the  Pnrple 
Finch.  The  Grouse  is  a  Plains  form,  is  near  its  eastern  limit,  and  is 
pertiaps  a  late  arrival  npoo  the  island.  The  other  specieft  are  wide 
ranging  in  the  Canadian  coniferoas  forests  bat  are  not  of  sach  northern 
range'  as  the  agnatic  and  shore  associations.  There  is  nothing  in  their 
range  to  sn^jest  their  arriral  earlier  than  the  forest  association.  Tak- 
ing all  the  birds  of  the  openings  together,  it  is  not  improbable  that 
they  arrived  at  about  the  same  time  as  those  of  the  forests,  hxit  fre- 
quented different  situatione, — tte  forest  kinds  occupying  the  slopes 
and  drier  mlleiys,  and  the  others  the  openings. 

e.    The  CUmax  Association  or  Formation  anA  Eahitat. 

The  climax  Rssociafion  should  not  be  considered  in  such  a  way  h» 
to  lead  one  to  think  that  it  is  distinct  from  the  other  associHtions.  It 
belongs  to  all  of  them  as  the  end  of  their  series  under  existing  biotic 
and  environmental  conditions.  Thus  the  aquatic  association,  througli 
the  bog  conifers,  is  transformed  into  the  Balsam-spruce  association ; 
and  from  the  beach  through  the  aspen-birch  association  again  to  the 
balsams  and  sjvnces.  The  -climax  association  is  the  conditimi  of  ad- 
justment toward  which  all  societies  move  under  the  present  conditions. 
For  this  reason  the  earlier  stages,  conditions  and  associations  of  the 
climax  have  been  outlined  in  the  preceding  dlscussicm. 

In  the  dominant  forest  the  dense  shade  prevents  an  extensive  ground 
cover  of  herbaceous  plants;  and  although  Ground  Hemlock  is  abundant 
locally,  yet  in  places  the  forest  floor  is  quite  open  and  free  from  lower 
shrub  growth.  The  remarkable  preseri'ation  of  trails  or  roads  throngh 
such  tracts  shows  clearly  how  slowly  changes  take  place.  Such  a. 
habitat  must  be  relatively  equable  in  its  temperature  and  moisture 
relations. 

Gec^raphically  speaking,  the  primary  characteristic  of  the  climax  is 
its  relatire  atahility,  due  to  a  dominance  or  relative  equilibrium  pro- 
duced by  the  se^-ere  environmental  and  biotic  selection  and  adjustment 
throughout  the  process  of  succession. 

At  this  point  attention  itbould  be  called  to  the  fact  that  dominance 
is  a  resultant  of  an  equilibrium  produced  by  neutralizing  or  overcoming 
other  forces  and  influences.  We  may  think  of  the  process  of  successioa 
as  a  stream  of  forces  whose  development  may  be  <'ompared  with  the 
transformation  of  a  drainage  line, — such  as,  for  example,  that  of  a 
rivulet  into  a  creek,  and  then  into  a  river.  The  stream  and  the  char- 
acter of  the  ground  mutually  infinence  each  other  and  the  course  fol- 
lowed is  a  resultant  of  the  mutual  adjustments.  The  stream  is  deflected 
by  one  condition  and  then  another,  just  as  succession  varies  with  local 
conditions;  yet  the  water  continues  to  run  down  grade  and  se^s  an 
eqnilibriom,  and  similarly,  biotic  succession  continues  on  its  course  de- 
flected here  and  there  by  local  influences,  yet  forever  tending  toward  ii 
state  of  biotic  equilibrituii.  The  dominance  of  th^  climax  society  or 
formation,  considered  as  a  pro<-eBB  rather  than  a  product,  has  much  in 
it  that  is  analf^^oos  to  the  dominance  produced  by  the  process  of  base^ 
leveling. 

The  characteristic  birds  of  the  climax  forest    are: — the    Chickadee^ 


142  MICHIQAN   SURVEY,   1906. 

Golden-crowned  Kinglet.  Red-breasted  Nnthatch,  Canada  Jaj,  Downy, 
Hairy,  Arctic  Tliree-toed  and  Pileated  Woodpeckers,  and  the  White- 
ninged  CroBBbill,  Here  again  the  aasociation  becomen  email  in  \-ariet^' 
of  species  and  comparable  with  the  small  society  which  must  have  be«i 
associated  with  the  complete  dominance  of  the  Lake  waters.  TIiub  there 
has  been  a  development  of  diversity  from  simplicity,  with  later  a  return 
to  simplicity.  To  tliese  birds  of  the  forest  should  also  be  added  those 
species  of  general  distributiouv  as  the  Eagle,  Swift.  SwnJlows,  etc.,  a 
class  of  birds  whose  predaceous,  insect  feeding  and  wide  ranging  habits 
make  them  particnlarly  difficult  to  properly  asBooiate.  A  careful  etudy 
of  this  class  of  birds  will  be  necessary  before  they  can  be  satisfactorily 
correlated  with  their  proper  avian  associations. 

But  let  us  not  overloJ*  the  fact  that  even  this  dominance  is  only 
7'elative,  for  since  the  Ice  Age  even  tliis  entire  formation  has  migrate*! 
northward,  and  a  true  succession  has  been  produced  with  its  attend- 
ant changes  in  the  conditions  and  in  the  composition  of  the  associa- 
tions. Just  as  upon  Isle  Roya]e  a  definite  dynamic  trend  was  given  to 
tiie  complete  environment  by  the  falling  Lake  surface,  so  ia  the  post- 
fllacial  northward  migration  there  was  a  northward  migrating  climate. 
These  conditions  determined  that  on  the  north  aide  of  thia  immense  sue- 
cession  or  migration  habitats  and  associations  were  developed  which 
are  comparable  to  those  attending  the  downward  marcli  of  the  Isle 
Boyale  beach ;  and  eveji  today,  by  passing  from  Isle  Koyale  to  the  tree 
limit  with  its  zone  of  aspens  and  birches,  one  may  find  representatives 
of  the  various  kinds  of  associations  which  in  all  probability  moved  north, 
just  as  today  in  passing  from  the  forest  to  the  rocky  beach  balsams 
and  »pruce  are  encountered  before  the  aspens  and  birch.  If,  however, 
this  is  only  another  case  of  convergence  and  not  at  bottom  the  same  or 
a  comparable  process,  we  are  then  certainly  far  from  an  tmderstanding 
of  even  the  general  nature  of  the  problem. 

3.  Internal  Factors.  With  the  idea  of  succession,  as  exemplified 
by  Isle  Hoyale,  let  us  turn  to  other  factors  which  influence  the  internal 
relations  of  the  birds  within  an  association  or  society,  because  such 
relations  are  also  necessary  to  an  intelligent  understanding  of  suc- 
cession. Bome  of  these  general  relations  have  been  outlined,  but  certain 
others  are  needed  which  have  been  well  expressed  by  Breivster  ('06,  p. 
fi2-fi3) :  "Many  if  not  most  birds  show  a  nmcked  preference  for  breed- 
ing in  certain  regions,  throughout  which  they  are  more  or  less  evenly 
and  generally  distributed,  but  within  which  their  munbers  do  not  seem 
to  increase  beyond  fixed  maximum  limits  no  matter  how  carefully  tlie 
birds  may  be  protected  or  how  sncccKsful  they  may  be  in  rearing  their 
young  •  •  •  J  iiavp  observed — as,  indeed,  who  has  not  I — that  few 
birds — excepting  those  which,  like  Swallows,  Terns.  Herons,  ond  Gulla, 
are  accustomed  to  nest  in  colonii-s — tolerate  very  near  neighbors  «-f 
their  own  species  during  the  season  of  repi'odnction.  At  its  beginning 
each  pair  takes  pofisession  of  a  definite  Inict  of  wootliand.  orchard, 
swamp  or  meadow,  which  the  male  is  ever  on  the  alert  to  defend  against 
Irespassera  of  his  own  kind  aud  sex,  although  he  often  seems  quite 
willing  to  shai-e  liis  domain  with  birds  of  other  and  perhaps  closely  iv- 
lated  species.  The  rxteut  of  the  aiva  thus  monopolii^ed  varies  exceed- 
ingly with  l>ird«  of  dilTercnf  8i>ecles.     M\  apple  orchard  which  suffords 


BCOLOaY  OF   I8LB   ROYALB.  143 

SQfflcieat  room  for — let  ua  siay — two  pairs  of  Yellow  Warblers,  two 
pairs  of  orioles,  three  or  four  pairs  of  Chippies  and  four  or  five  pairs 
of  BobiDB,  seldom  or  uever  hnrborfi  more  tlian  a  sini^le  pair  of  King- 
birds or  crested  Flycatchers.  •  •  •  As  a  nilf,  the  species  which 
roam  wer  the  most  ground  in  the  course  of  tlieir  daily  wanderings 
claim  and  maintain  the  broadest  presen-es,  while  those  of  sedentary 
habits  often  content  themsches  with  very  modest  freeholds.  Whatever 
the  extent  of  the  domain,  the  birds  who  occupy  it  as  a  sypimer  borne 
evidently  regard  it  as  exclunively  their  own.  The  readiness *and  celerity 
with  which  trespassing  birds  are  accustomed  to  retire  when  attacked 
or  wen  merely  threatened  by  the  established  tenants,  has  seemed  to  me 
to  indicate  that  the  claims' of  temporary  ownership  are  respected  by 
all  right-minded  birds.  •  "  '  In  my  opinion  the  desire  for  exclu- 
sive possession  so  conspicuously  shown  by  the  male,  and  often  by  him 
alone,  is  usually  the  direct  result  of  sexual  jmlomy.  This,  as  is  natural, 
makes  him  intolerant,  during  the  breeding  season,  of  the  near  presence 
of  rival  males.  If  his  concern  were  chiefly  in  respect  to  the  food  supply, 
it  would  be  equally  manifested  at  every  seoflon  and  towards  all  birds 
who  subsist  on  the  same  food  that  he  and  his  mate  require— wWch  Ik 
certainly  not  the  case." 

The  tendency  of  pairs  and  species  to  space  tlicmgdves  and  to  become- 
fclatircli/  sedentary  is  thus  a  cbaracteristic  condition  in  an  associaticm,. 
and  is  an  important  element  in  an  understanding  of  succession  because' 
it  shows  the  internal  organization  and  habit  with  which  an  invader 
or  pioneer  from  another  association  has  to  contend.  As  Dixon  ('97, 
p.  91 )  has  pointed  out,  this  spacing  tendency  is  an  important  factor  in 
the  extension  of  range  of  species  and  is  intimately  related  to  the  loca- 
tion of  nesting  sites.  These  facts  clearly  show  that  both  these  internal 
influences  and  the  environmental  ones  must  be  distinguished  if  we  wish 
to  determine  the  relatii-e  influence  of  each  and  their  bearing  on  suc- 
cession. The  above  quotation  from  Brewster  clearly  shows  that  iu 
general  not  only  a  gi-eater  number  of  birds  can  live  in  a  given  area, 
but  also  that  they  can  live  closer  together,  if  they  vary  in  kind.  Then 
again,  within  the  association  there  are  marked  differences  in  habitat 
preference.  Thus  in  tlie  forest  there  Are  those  birds  which  nest  in 
the  trunks  or  among  the  topmost  branches  of  the  trees,  or  even  upon 
the  ground ;  and  these  are  differences  largely  distinct  from  the  spacing 
of  the  pairs  of  the  same  epecles.  These  influences  must  be  recognized 
among  the  dominant  influences  within  the  association,  and  upon  which 
much  emphasis  must  be  placed. 

4.  Environmental  Factors.  Then  in  addition  to  these  internal  fac- 
tors, there  are  the  dominant  physical  factors.  In  the  following  discus- 
sion primary  emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  succession  as  found  in  the 
Xortheastem  Biotic  or  Conifer  Center,  because  suc<'esHions  at  other 
centers  with  different  biotic  components  and  other  dominant  physical 
conditions  must  possess  a  certain  amount  of  individuality,  in  addition 
to  those  features  common  to  succession  in  general.  The  dominant  biotic 
tendency  or  dynamic  trend  of  this  center,  as  a  resultant  of  all  internat 
and  enpironmental  infiticncrs.  is  for  the  conifer  biotic  association  to 
encroach  upon  all  other  soeUticn  and  habitats  and  to  become  the  donii- 
nant    or    tiniversalhf    diatribiitcd    association.     Thus,    in    general,    all 


144  MICHIOAN   SURVEY.    1908. 

habitata  produced  by  local  influences  tend  to  bec<Hne  transformed  into 
the  dominant  biotic  association  or  formation.  In  general  also,  amaJl 
bodies  of  water  are  rapidly  encroached  upon  by  iun'ash,  vegetation  or 
drainage,  and  tend  to  become  extinct  and  forested.  All  other  openings, 
aa  the  rocky  ledges  and  ridges  or  burns,  are  encroached  upon  as  soil 
accumulates  or  fires  are  prevented,  and  the  forest  biotic  association 
spreads  over  the  entire  area. 

From  Bnctw^lations  it  will  be  seen  that  our  knowledge  of  the  causes 
and  condititffs  of  succession  must  largely  result  from  the  study  of 
these  local  environment  it  or  habitats  and  thevr  biotic  succession,  because, 
where  dominance  is  establislied  the  succession  is  almost  completely 
obliterated.  Each  minor  habilal  and  society  is  to  be  looked  upon  an 
simpl}/  a  stage,  more  or  less  temporary,  in  the  onnxird  taave  toicard  the 
■domiruint  or  climaa:  association.  Thus  in  the  marshes,  birch  or  aspea 
woods,  rock  openings  and  ponds  may  be  "original"  conditions  which 
are  becoming  cumulatively  transformed  in  the  diredtion  of  the  final 
dominance  of  the  climax  biotic  type. 

Tbe  relatively  slow  rate  of  change  in  many  environmental  processes 
anfl  tbe  relative  stability  of  the  climax  biota,'  is  doubtless  the  basis 
for  the  current  view  that  such  conditions  are  relatively  constant  or  fixed ; 
but  that  change  and  not  constancy  is  the  normal  and  usual  condition  in 
nature  is  quite  evident  upon  a  moment's  reflection.  Almost  every  (me  no- 
tices these  changes  after  an  absence  of  a  few  years  from  a  region.  Thus 
intimacy  tends  to  blind  us  to  changes  unless  a  habit  of  giving  attention 
to  them  is  deliberately  cultivated.  For  this  reason  some  find  it  almost 
impossible  to  recognize  environmental  changes  or  to  comprehend  thrir 
significance.  Jt  is  therefore  of  practical  value  to  recognize  clearly 
under  what  conditions  changes  may  be  most  readily  perceived.  There- 
fore the  importance  of  the  study  of  local  influences  is  emphasized,  and 
the  necessity  recognized  of  distinguishing  the  dominnnce  of  geographic 
and  relatively  stable  conditions  or  formations  as  contrasted  with  those 
due  to  iocai  and  often  relatively  changeable  conditions.  Then  among 
these  changes  we  must  distinguish  those  which  are  mere  fluctuations 
and  .those  which  are  iadicati\-e  of  the  true  progressive  succession. 
This  is  mainly  aocomplished  by  attention  to  general  relations  and  the 
subordination  of  minor  details. 

5.  Environimenlal  and  Associational  Convergence.  At  the  present 
imperfect  stage  of  ecological  development,  comparison  must  furnish  us 
the  most  important  and  general  clues  to  the  processes  of  succession ;  and 
undoubtedly  thin  method  must  long  remain  as  our  main  guide  on  ac- 
<tount  of  its  comprehensive  applicaftion  and  the  magnitude  of  tbe  prob- 
lem to  be  solved.  It  is  tlierefore  desirable  that  the  limitations  of  the 
method  shouJd  be'clenrly  borne  in  mind.  It  is  often  assumed  that  tbe 
implied  successions  of  a  given  place  are  the  same  as  those  which  have 
developed  at  that  place  in  the  evolution  of  the  present  climax.  But 
as  we  positively  know  that  many  different  causes  are  able  to  prod/uce 
the  same  or  very  similar  results,  such  conclusions  must  be  received 
with  due  caution.  Tlrat  the  dominant  geographic  conditions  tend  to 
override  local  influences  seems  very  fairly  established  because  diverse 
local  or  original  conditions  are  transformed  into  the  climax  or  domi- 


ivCoogIc 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLB   ROYALE.  146 

vant  type.  This  clearly  ehows  that  in  time  di^-erse  local  iafluencea  bare 
flowed  into  the  general  environmental  tread  or  current  and  have  become 
a  part  of  it.  There  is  thus  a  very  strong  convergent  tendency.  By 
convergence  is  meant  the  independeOt  production  of  the  same  kind  of 
asHDciation  from  'diverse  starting  points  or  habitats  and  associations. 
Quite  minor  ecological  units  may  show  similar  but  temporary  con- 
vergent tendencies  in  their  succession.  It  is  therefore  not  surprising 
that  any  marked  environmental  dominance  will  tend  to  produce  simi- 
lar or  convei^c^it  results,  even  in  local  areas.  Under  such  circumstances 
similar  associations  or  societies  may  be  independently  and  repeatedly 
formed  by  the  selecting  environmental  influences,  such  as,  for  example, 
are  found  in  the  numerous  small  lakes  scattered  throughout  the  conl- 
feiious  forests.  This  convergent  phenomenon  is  certainly  a  fertile 
source  of  confusion  throughout  all  phasea  of  science.  Perhaps  the  best 
guide  through  such  a  labyrinth  will  be  to  clearly  bear  in  mind  the  rela- 
tive valne  of  general  and  local  influenoes,  and  watch  with  an  "eternal 
vigilance"  for  convergent  results  due  to  diverse  causes.  This  con- 
vergent phenomenon  is  particularly  liable  to  occur  in  the  case  of  en- 
vironments produced  by  reversible  physical  conditions.  It  should 
fm-ther  be  stated  that  a  study  of  these  problems  from  a  genetic  and 
dynamic  point  of  view  will  aid  in  recognizing  such  results.  Under  such 
circumstances  attention  is  primarily  directed  toward  the  dominant 
causes  and  conditions  of  change  rather  than  to  the  stages,  products, 
and  results  produced  by  tbem.  Convergence  thus  viewed  is  the  result 
of  several  causes  and  should  be  considered  a  product  rather  than  a 
process.  This  same  distinction  may  be  made  for  all  societies,  associar 
fions  and  formations.  Comiergent  plienomena  are  thus  partioularljf 
liable  to  confuse  wherever  products  rathei'  than  genetic  prooesaea  receive 
primary  emphasis, 

6.  Succession  and  Envirottmental  Evolution.  The  relation  of  suc- 
cession to  general  biological  problems  is  very  intimate.  This  opens  up 
a  very  extensive  field  which  is  only  mentioned  to  indicate  its  general 
relation  to  succession.  The  facts  of  succession  and  evolution  must  ever 
remain  far  in  advance  of  our  knowledge  of  their  causes.  If,  however, 
one  tnms  to  the  standard  evolutionary  treatises  and  searches  for  a  dis- 
cussion of  the  evolution  of  the  environment,  as  correlated  with  animal 
evolution,  only  the  most  general,  or  the  elementary  and  superficial 
phases,  are  as  a  rule  discussed.  To  be  sure,  certain  papers  and  treatises 
take  up  special  phases  of  tlie  problem,  and  the  broadest  phases  are 
treated  by  the  geologists;  but  none  of  them  seem  adequate  as  a  com- 
prehensive treatment  of  so  important  a  subject.  Sucoession,  broadly  and 
genetically  considered  (dynamic  rather  than  static),  is  a  phase  of  en- 
vironmental  evolution. 

7.  The  Relation  of  Succession  to  Organic  Evolution.  Mention  baa 
been  made  of  the  releitiou  of  succession  to  environmental  evolution,  but 
its  relation  to  the  organic  evolution  of  birds  should  also  be  indicated. 
The  mutual  relations  of  organic  and  environmental  evolution  have  been 
and  will  continue  to  be  the  battleground  of  biological  thought  for  an 
indefinite  length  of  time.  Here  lies  the  tension  line  between  the  two 
main  schools  of  biological  interpretation. 

One  school  maintains  that  all  causes  of  ei'olntion  are  internal,  aiid 


146  MICHIGAN   SURVET,   IMS. 

that  tbe  enrironment  is  odIt  n  conditifMi,  not  a  cause.  From  thia  point 
'  of  view  the  fundamental  causes  are  internal  and  therefore  environmeiital 
conditlouH  can  only  indirectl.v  influence  evt^lutlon  tfaroogh  the  weeding 
out  of  those  forms  not  in  harmony  with  ttie  conditions;  and  hence  it 
has  a  elective  rather  than  an  oriifinative  influence.  Prom  this  point  of 
view  succesBion  aod  environmentnl  evolution  citn  contribute  nothings  to 
the  elucidation  of  the  causes  of  organic  evolution,  though  they  may  to 
an  understanding  of  the  eelection  produced  by  the  succession  of  condi- 
tions la  which  organic  evolution  has  taken  and  is  tailing  place.  In 
harmony  with  this  point  of  view,  sacceesion,  iMvadly  treated,  should 
furnish  a  fundamental  method  of  treatment  for  the  process  of  selec- 
tion, and  the  detailed  principles  of  its  worliing.  This  would  certainly 
be  an  important  advance  because  natural  eelection  has  frequently  been 
reproach^  for  its  indefinite  methods  and  lack  of  definite  treatment. 
Succession  from  this  point  of  view  is  primarily  related  to  tbe  Dar- 
winian factors  of  evolution.  Xo  doubt  this  ia  one  reason  viiy  Darwin 
himself  put  sucJi  high  value  npon  the  'study  of  ecological  relations  of 
animals,  t.  e.,  their  relation  to  their  complete  environmeait,  or  their 
struggle  for  existence. 

If,  however,  all  causes  are  internal  and  not  directly  subject  to  ex- 
twual  influences,  they  must  be  beyond  experimentation  to  a  correspond- 
ing d^ree.  Under  such  conditions  evolution  becomes  a  descriptive 
■  rather  than  a  causal  science,  and  all  that  investigation  can  do  is  to 
describe  the  succession  of  forms  produced  by  these  internal  causes. 

On  the  other  hand  -tiie  rival  school  maintains  that  both  internal  and 
external  conditions  may  be  real  cavaes  of  oi^;anie  evolution.  This  is 
thought  to  be  brouf^t  about  by  the  direct  or  indirect  influence  of  tbe 
environment  vpoD  the  germ  cells,  by  environmental  selection,  or  even 
by  both  combined.  From  such  a  point,  of  view  the  environment  may 
thus  be  either  a  cause  or  a  condition  of  organic  evolution,  or  both.  From 
such  a  standpoint  the  evolution  of  tbe  environment  receives  increased 
importance,  as  under  such  conditions  organic  and  environmental  e\'olu- 
tion  are  cansnally  related,  and  thus  intimately  correlated.  Viewed  thus, 
.environmental  evolution  is  more  than  the  description  of  the  succession 
of  conditions,  but  may  be  explanatory  as  well. 

The  particularly  significant  feature  is  that  environmental  evolution 
and  biotic  succession  are  of  great  value  and  can  cMitribute  either  to 
the  causes  or  conditions,  or  to  both,  of  evolutionary  advanoement. 

VI,     SosiE  Principi.es  of  Succession. 

By  succession  is  meant  the  progressive  change  (,==  adjnstm^it)  in 
the  composition  of  the  associations  at  a  giveji  place.  If  a  swamp  be- 
comes filled  with  dute  sand,  the  birds  charax^teristic  of  the  swamp  will 
be  replaced  by  those  of  the  dunes,  and  thus  succession  is  initiated.  But 
in  addition  to  changes  due  to  local  influences  there  are  those  pro- 
duced by  very  extensive  or  geographic  influences,  as  in  the  case  of  a  cli- 
matic change.  Attention  nfaonld  also  be  directed  to  the  fact,  that  biotic 
succession  is  only  a  particular  phase  of  the  general  law  of  change 
which  we  see  operating  wherever  a  complex  of  forces  are  tending  to- 
ward a  condition  of  mutual  adjustment.    That  succession  is  a  process 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROTALE.  147 

whicb,  from  its  very  nature,  muet  be  as  extensive  as  m-e  the  caiueH  of 
change  does  not  appear  to  have  been  clearly  recop^ized  by  all  students  of 
biotic  succession.  For  this  reason  there  are  certain  principles  of  suc- 
cession which  are  well  establiBhed  in  other  sciences,  but  which  have  not 
been  applied  to  biotic  succession.  In  human  society,  for  example,  there 
are  many  institutions  whose  formation,  development  and  perpetnatiou 
clearly  illustrate  the  laws  of  succession  which  also  apply,  not  only  to 
plants  and  animals,  but  to  geologic  phenomena  as  well.  It  is  not  at 
all  Borprising  therefore  that  under  these  various  guises  their  common 
features  are  easily  overlooked  and  even  denied  by  some  students. 

In  t^  study  of  the  animal  environment  some  knowledge  of  the  gen- 
eral principles  of  succession,  not  worked  out  in  detail  for  birds 
but  already  well  established  elsewhere,  ought  to  be  suggestive  anri 
possibly  valuable  in  the  study  of  avian  Bucces8i(»i.  Though  such  geoer- 
aJizations  are  primarily  of  a  provisional  and  suggestive  character,  yet 
investigation  should  be  stimulated  rather  than  retarded  by  them.  Bucb 
descriptive  characteristics  and  principles  are  stated  briefly  in  a  form 
convenient  for  testing  and  criticism  and  should  be  useful  as  are  cri- 
teria in  the  study  of  ge<^aphic  origin.  So  far  as  known  to  the  writer 
only  two  authors  have  attempted  to  formulate  principles  of  biotic  suc- 
cession, and  these  have  been  limited  to  plants.  The  first  is  by  the  Dan- 
ish ecologist  Warming  ('ilfi,  Oekol<^i8che  Pflanien  Geographie,  pp.  3611- 
361),  and  the  second  by  Clements  (*05),  whose  treatment  merits  special 
attention.  Cowles  ('01)  has  done  much  to  put  the  idea  of  succession 
upon  a  goietic  basis.  In  the  present  outline  only  those  features  and 
principles  are  mentioned  which  are  thought  to  be  of  a  more  or  less 
general  chairacter,  and  those  particntaily  applicable  to  animals.  This 
list  needs  to  be  greatly  prolonged,  and  the  interrelations  of  these  char- 
acteristics must  be  determined  as  well  as  their  relative  value  and  appli- 
cation to  various  ecological  gi-oups  and  in  diverse  regions.  The  fol- 
lowing suggestions  can  only  outline  the  problems  involved.  At  this 
stage,  differentiation  is  particularly  desirable.  Processes  and  pro- 
ducts bear  the  same  names  and  muet  be  understood  accordingly;  thus 
the  proceasee  of  dominance  lead  to  ibe  product  dominance.  Dynami- 
cally considered,  the  process  is  primary',  but  used  in  a  structural  sense 
such  terms  i-efer  to  products, 

1.  Starting  with  any  given  9et  of  environmental  conditions  and  or- 
ganisms, theee  become  a  cause  and  condition  of  futui-e  changes.  All 
changes  are  cumulative  and  form  a  continuous  series  or  process. 

2.  Ko  sharp  line  can  be  drawn  between  cause  and  conditions  in 
succession  as  their  relations  are  often  reversible.  A  cause  at  one  time 
may  be  a  condition  at  another,  and  vice  versa. 

3.  The  formation  or  association  itself  must  be  considered  as  an 
essential  part  of  the  complete  environmeu't,  and  rfiould  be  so  under- 
stood when  reference  is  made  to  the  environment,    cf.  Xo.  1. 

4.  A  given  formation  in  its  dominance  tends  to  encroach  upon  all 
minor  habitats  and  associations.  These  minor  habitats  tend  to  be- 
come cumulatively  changed  convergently  toward  the  climax  environ- 
ment or  formation.  This  Is  a  process  of  eliminating  diversity  and  thus 
establi^ing  dominance. 

5.  Where  complete  environmental  and  biotic  adjustmeni -has  taken 

20  ,,,X.oogTc 


148  MICHIGAN  SURVBY,   1908. 

pliioe,  the  domiuaDce  of  the  biotic  formation  i»  most  complete.  This 
ina,v  be  considered  a  geographic  or  environmental  optimam.  This,  in 
general,  implies  complete  BucccsBion  and  the  dominance  of  the  climax 
formati<m. 

n.  From  the  standpoint'  of  causes  and  processes,  the  succession  of 
societies  and  formations  is  the  expression  or  result  of  the  environ- 
mental process  moving  toward  an  equilibrium. 

7.  The  lack  of  a  uniform  rate  of  succession  throughout  large  areas 
is  the  rule,  on  accouut  of  the  slowness  with  which  extreme  conditions 
are  transformed  into  those  of  the  average. 

8.  The  slowly  changing  extreme  conditions  tend  to  preserve  many 
of  tlie  most  important  early  stages  of  conditions  and  succession;  hence 
the  utility  of  these  belated  changes  in  validating  snccession  as  deter- 
mined by  the  comparative  method, 

9.  Other  things  being  equal;  the  slower  the  succession  the  greater 
the  chances  for  rariation  in  the  details  and  composition  of  the  societies. 

10.  The  formation  or  climax  society  is  only  the  most  conspicuouB 
ctise  of  convei^nce.  reached  by  all  routes  and  successions,  at  a  given 
environmental  center. 

11.  The  succession  of  societies  within  a  formation  is  liable  to  be 
more  stable  in  its  main  features  than  the  composition  of  its  societies. 
Probably  the  general  features  of  such  a  soccessioa  most  nearly  ap- 
proximate that  which  the  region  passed  through  in  the  development 
of  the  formation.    Adams,  '05,  p.  67. 

V2.  Pommtions  of  different  geographic  centers  will  vary  in  their 
doiinnant  dynamic  tendencies,  yet  open  (nnforested)  formations  will 
have  certain  features  in  common,  as  will  also  forest  formations.  Thus, 
not  only  will  the  compositions  of  the  societies  vary,  but  also  the  climax 
formations  and  their  dynamic  trends. 

13.  The  stability  of  the  climax  environmental  factors  and  their  biotic 
formations  is  only  relative.  They  may  themselves  migrate  or  change 
by  a  pr(^;reB6ive  succession  in  the  direction  of  the  dominant  environ- 
mental trend.  This  migration  involves  a  true  succession,  as  is  well 
illustrated  by  changes  and  successions  attending  the  Glacial  influencea 
and  the  elevation  of  the  Coastal  Plain  of  the  United  States.  (Cf.  Adams, 
'05). 

14.  The  stability  of  dominance  is  due  to  a  complete  biotic  and 
enWroumentul  adjustment  brought  about  by  the  repeated  selections  of 
the  preceding  succession  and  resulting  in  a  "pure  culture."  Dominance 
may  be  likened  to  the  static  social  condition  of  China  or  to  a  monopoly. 

15.  Succession  is  a  form  of  complete  or  entire  environmental  selec- 
tion, certain  species  or  associations  receiving  an  envirwi mental  ap- 
proval while  others  are  excluded.  This  is  a  particular  and  extensive 
form  of  natural  selection.  Successional  selection  in  its  broadest  ecolo- 
gical aspect  includes  the  evolution  of  the  organisms,  particularly  as 
members  of  associations  in  their  most  intimate  environment. 

Hi,  Any  association  not  a  climax  is  in  unstable  equilibrium  and  in  a 
condition  unfavorable  to  its  permanence.  The  climax  society  is  in  a 
state  of  biotic  and  environmental  equilibrium.  (Cf.  Warming,  No.  6 
and  Clements  V;  also  cf.  No.  13,  14). 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  149 

17.  Widespread  physically  uniform  conditionH  favor  n  domiDaot 
biotic  formation.  Climate  may  neutralize  topographic  diversity,  or 
topography  the  climate.  Baseleveliog  and  other  geological  processes 
which  favor  the  production  of  uniform  conditions  will  favor  dominance. 
(AdamB,  Amer.  Nat.,  ,15,  p.  842). 

IS.  From  an  evolutionary  standpoint  the  ealier  stages  of  succession 
ore  liable  to  be  struggles  with  the  physical  environment;  later,  in  the 
intermediate  state  of  "storm  and  stress,"  the  competition  is  most  di- 
verse and  intense,  and  may  thus  be  a  fertile  source  of  adaptive  changes 
and  individual  adjustments,  through  se\'ere  selection;  and  finally  in 
the  stage  of  dominance,  the  competition  is  also  biotic  and  physical,  but 
under  relatively  simpler  conditions.  Permanence  of  new  characters  may 
be  favored  by  habitat  isolation  and  thus  fuvor  polytypic  or  divergent 
evolution.  , 

19.  In  RuccesHion  the  adjustments  and  modifications  of  species  may 
be  accomplished  by  a  change  from  one  society  to  another  as  well  as 
by  indiTidual  modifications  or  adjustment  within  the  society. 

20  Pioneer  invaders,  except  in  social  species,  are  generally  isolated 
«ud  increase  progressively  with  dominance.    Cf.  Warming,  No.  1, 

21.  Species  and  individuals  in  the  early  stages  of •  succession  or  of 
societies  are  relatively  few,  increase  in  the  intermediate  stage,  and 
are  again  reduced  in  number  with  dominance  and  in  the  climax  society. 
Cf.  Warming,  No.  2.     Clements  VI,  (3,  B). 

22.  The  species  of  open  (unforested)  formations  are  only  pioneer 
societies  in  forested  formations  and  vice  versa.    Cf.  Warming,  No.  5, 

23.  The  less  sedentarj'  species,  those  less  inclined  to  regularly  re- 
turn to  old  nesting  sites,  and  young  birds  tend  to  become  pioneers  and 
thus  extend  the  breeding  range.  Cf.  Warming  No.  4.  Dixon,  '97,  p. 
Kl. 

24.  Pioneers  generally  come  from  near  bv  and  from  similar  condi- 
tions.   Cf.  Clements  III,  (3). 

25.  Extension  of  range  takes  place  mainly  at  the  unoccupied  mai^n. 
This  may  mean  unilateral  or  radiate  extension.    Cf.  Clem^its  V,  (5). 

26.  The  succession  from  the  aquatic  aBsociation  to  the  forest  is 
probably  an  ancient  one.  In  this  there  is  a  general  succession  from  the 
leas  to  ihe  more  specialized  kinds  of  birds.  Cf,  Warming  No.  2;  Clements 
VI  (4). 

VII,    SoMH  Adyantaoes  op  a  Knowlbdob  op  th^  Laws  op  Succession. 

The  study  of  snccession  implies  a  detailed  knowledge  of  the  field 
relations  of  birds,  and  as  this  hasr  received  so  little  attention  as  a  sub- 
ject of  special  study,  it  is  perhaps  worth  while  to  mention  briefly  some 
of  the  practical  and  scientific  advantages  which  we  may  reasonably 
expect  will  result  from  the  development  of  this  phase  of  ini'estigation. 

The  onrrent  discussions  of  environments  are  generally  very  frag- 
mentary and  chaotic,  and  the  careful  study  of  bird  habitats  and  suc- 
cession will  greatly  improve  this  phase  of  ecology.  Here  is  a  field  of 
study  in  need  of  distinct  recognition  as  a  subject  worthy  of  detailed 
investigation,  in  addition  to  those  lines  already  current.  When  once 
this  field  is  developed,  then  and  only  then  will   it  be  possible  to  in- 


ISO  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

telligently  diaruBB  tbe  evolution  of  avian  enviroiiiuents  and  to  cor- 
relate them  with  the  evolution  of  birds  themselvcB.  It  is  qnite  prob- 
able that  one  of  the  main  couditiong  whieh  prevents  a  more  rapid  ad- 
vance along  evolutionary  lines  is  in  a  large  measure  diie  to  the  almost 
utter  failure  to  anahze  dvnami<-anv  environmental  i-mnpleieg.  Suv- 
ceseion,  studied  in  its  broader  aspects,  should  greatly  aid  in  the  for- 
mulation of  the  laws  governing  the  "struggle  for  existence,"  which  is 
frequently  condemned  for  its  indefinite  charactei'. 

From  another  ]>oint  of  view  there  aPe  very  important  reasons  for 
urging  extensive  studies  of  this  character  at  a  relatively  early  date, 
because  tbe  encroachmenta  of  civijization,  which  by  the  destruction  of 
the  foreetB,  the  di'ajuage  oi  tiie  Tand,  irrigation,  fanning  and  grazing 
of  the  grasslands,  are  rapidly  deBtroying  original  environmental  con- 
ditions  before  they  ai-e  studied  ecologloallyT^ivitiCll  ffT  WUrope  nas  al- 
ready  gone  through  this  stage  of  demolition,  and  it  is  only  to  new  and 
relatiraly  unmodified  countries  that  we  can  loiA  for  an  adequate  state- 
ment of  these  pi-oblems  and  their  relations  in  their  original  and  pri- 
marily evolutionary  and  developmental  form.  It  is  not  improbable 
that  the  next  generation  may  wonder  why  Bome  subjects,  the  investiga- 
tion of  which  might  have  been  delayed,  have  received  detailed  attention, 
while  others  equally  or  perhaps  even  more  important  have  been  almo^^t 
ignored  and  must  forever  remain  unknown  because  of  this  n^lect  to 
secure  the  "vanishing  data."     (C'f.  Haddon,  '03.) 

Such  ecological  studies  may  be  expected  to  have  a  valuable  reflex  in- 
fluence upon  the  naturalist  himself.  ^Ve  may  hope  that  the  future  re- 
visor  of  a  group  of  birds  will  consider  a  knowledge  of  the  field  relations 
of  his  specimens  as  an  essential  qualification,  just  as  at  the  present 
time  a  large  aeries  of  specimens  is  held  necessary.  Fifty  years  ago  a 
limited  series  waa  considered  no  disqualification,  just  as  to-day  the 
lack  of  a  knowledge  of  their  ecological  relations  is  not  so  considered. 
Perhaps  our  ideas  of  relative  values  must  change.  In  this  connection  a 
statement  from  Tristram  ('94,  p.  472)  is  to  the  [Ktiut: — "The  closet 
aystematist  is  very  apt  to  overlook  or  take  no  count  of  habits,  voice, 
modification  and  other  features  of  life  which  have  an  important  bear- 
ing'on  the  modification  of  Bpecies.  To  take  one  instance,  the  short- 
toed  lark  {Caliindrella  trachydactyla)  is  spread  over  the  countries  bor- 
dering on  the  Mediterranean;  but  along  with  it,  in  Andalusia  alone  is 
found  another  species.  Cat.  baetidOj  of  a  rather  darker  color,  and  with 
the  secondaries  generally  somewhat  shorter.  Without  further  knowl- 
edge than  that  obtained  from  a  comparison  of  skins,  it  might  be  put 
down  as  an  accidental  variety.  But- the  field  naturalist  soon  recc^-; 
nizes  it  as  a  most  distinct  species.  It  has  a  different  voice,  a  diOei*-: 
ently  shaped  nest;  and,  while  the  common  species  breeds  in  the  plains,; 
this  one  always  resorts  to  the  hills.  The  Spanish  shepherds  on  tfaeJ 
spot  recognize  their  dietinctness,  and  have  a  name  for  each  species."     ' 

Many  cxtunples  of  similar  character  might  be  cited  to  show  the 
scientific  value  of  a  knowledge  of  the  environmental  relations  of  birds, 
and  a  nmraent's  reflection  will  show  that  the  problem  of  succession  is 
only  a  small  part  of  the  genei-al  problem  of  environmental  relations 
of  plants  and  animals.     Attention  has  already  been  directed  to  the 


relation  whi<h  this  general  subject  bears  to  evolutionary  )>roblem8.    [ 


ECOLOOT  OF  ISLE  ROYALS.  151 

It  is  not  at  all  aalikely  that  ancceBBJon  i»  very  closely  relaW  ^"^  ■f""" 
of  the  caoflcg  of  bird  migratioiij  mnl  lllftt  Tt'ith  advapce  in  this  subject 
much  ligjEir  would  be  tnrown  upon  migratiou.  Migration  is  doubt- 
less another  ilhistration  of  convergent  phenomena.  In  all  probability, 
migration  has  originated  not  only  independently  in  very  diverse  kinds 
of  birds,  but  perhaps  repeatedly,  from  different  causes,  even  in  the 
same  group.  The  causes  of  migration  must  l>e  numerous,  varying  with 
different  eeolc^eal  groups,  which  appear  to  be  the  true  natural  units 
for  study  and  comparison.  Thus  the  comparative  etudy  of  migrations 
of  different  kinds  of  associations,  as  formations  and  societies,  should 
lead  not  only  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  various  aesociationa,  but 
should  also  contribute  to  tlie  genial  subject  of  migration  which  seems 
to  have  shown  a  tendency  toward  stability  in  the  current  methods  of 
study.  It  scarcely  seems  probable  that  with  the  diverse  formations  in- 
habited by  birds,  and  with  their  ecological  diversities  there  should  be 
only  a  few  causes  of  the  phenomena. 

To  keep  pa^e  with  auccesaions  animals  must  either  adjust  themselves, 
change  their  habitat,  or  migrate.  Fi-om  suck  reJations  ii  is  eviaent  that 
varfoUH  SUpinwWI  "ellV IruuiHPL lUi  responses  must  be  tested  primarily 
irithin  the  amioriation  avd  cnvirotinient  to  icftir/i  the  animal  normalhf 
helongs.  To  this  class  belongs  protective  coloration  and  allied  phenom- 
ena. To  be  of  fundameotaJ  value,  the  influence  must  have  some  perman- 
ence and  this  may  be  sought  in  the  dynamic  trend  and  dominant  influ- 
ences of  different  associations.  It  is  difficult  to  conceive  of  other  more 
reliable  methods  of  ai»i»roach  to  such  problems. 

In  addition  to  the  scientific  value  of  this  line  of  investigation,  there 
are  important  economic  npplic.Ttinna  ^  ttu  lawn  ofny-jini  envimnmpnt 
This  is  parti culafiyTPTtH-onorestry  and  agriculture.  The  forestry  prolj- 
lem  is  continually  becoming  more  important,  but  the  relation  of  bird 
life  to  forests  and  forest  succession  has.  received  little  attention.  As 
agents  for  scattering  seeds  of  trees  and  shrubs,  birds  ni-e  very  important. 
Here  is  where  the  interests  of  the  avian  ecol(^st  and  forest  ecologist 
overlap.  The  student  of  bird  life  will  wish  to  know  how  a  region  is  to  be 
reforested,  and  what  smceBsion  of  bird  life  will  attend  the  auccession 
of  the  forest  .as  reforeslnlion  Piogi'esses.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
forester  will  wish  to  know  how  birds  will  aid  or  retard  him  in  the 
process  of  reforestation.  Then,  in  guarding  or  protecting  the  forest, 
what  help  can  be  aecuitd  from  birds  with  regard  to  insect  pests?  These 
are  only  samples  to  show  that  here  is  a  field  which,  as  time  advances, 
will  become  of  more  and  more  importance,  and  that  these  problems 
will  eventually  call  for  specially  trained  men  to  handle  them. 

In  connection  with  forestry  and  agriculture  we  have  quite  exceptional 
conditions  for  extended  experimental  studies  in  hird  succeswion  as  re- 
lated to  forest  succession,  crop  rotation,  etc.  The  relation  of  birds 
to  agriculture  appeals  to  a  much  larger  number  of  people  than  does 
their  relation  to  forestry.  There  are  several  reasons  for  this;  first, 
because  more  jwraons  are  interested  iii  farm  and  horticultural  crojwi 
than  in  forests;  and  second,  because  birds  an*  soon  attracted  in  such 
large  numbers  hy  the  food  supply  of  grains  and  fruits  which  these  crojis 
80  greatly  increase,  that  the  extensive  destnii-tion  hy  birds  readily  at- 
tracts attention.     And  while  we  hear  much  of  the  great  reduction  of 


1B2  MICHIGAN  SURVBT,    190S. 

certain  species  of  birds  in  parts  of  the  coantry,  it  is  not  at  all  im- 
probable that  with  the  destruction  of  the  forests  (which  wm*  dense  and 
dominant  and  tended  to  limit  the  abundance  of  many  species  frequent- 
ing the  open),  and  the  increase  of  food  in  cultivated  fields,  there  has  j 
been  an  increase  in  the  total  nnmber  of  birds,  even  in  spite  of  the  I 
great  numbers  killed  bj  man. 

But  to  the  i^ase  of  succession  with  which  we  are  primarily  concerned, 
almost  no  attention  has  be«i  given,  in  spite  of  its  fundamental  rela- 
tion to  crop  rotation  and  the  corresponding  avian  succession  attend- 
ing this.  Indeed  there  seems  to  be  a  very  decided  need  of  a  thorough 
investigation  and  discussion  of  the  general  principles  underlying  alt 
these  economic  problems,  that  they  may  be  brought  into  harmony  with 
the  advances  made  in  some  other  phases  of  ecology. 


»    Rbpebexcbs. 
Adamt,  riian  c. 

1905.  The  Postglacial  Dispersal  of  the  North  American  Btota.     BIoI.  Bull.,  9, 

pp.  53-71. 
Beyw,  G.  E.,  AUiwn,  A.,  uid  Kopman,  H.  H. 

1906.  List  of  tlie  Birds  of  Louisiana.    Part  1,  The  Auk.  23.  pp.  1-15. 
Bray,  W.  L. 

1306.    Distribution  and  Adaptation  of  the  Vegetation  of  Texas.    Bull.  Univ.  of 
Texas.  No.  82. 
Btewiter,  W. 

1906.  Tbe  Birds  of  the  Cambridge  Region  of  Massachusetts.     Mem.   NuttalT 

Omilh.  Club,  No.  IV. 
Brown,  R.  A. 

1907.  A  Study  of  the  Birda  of  the  Overflow,    Bast   of    Ann    Arbor,    Michigan. 

Bigbtb  Ann.  Report  Mich.  Acad.  Scl..  pp.  162-174. 
Bonis,  F.  Z. 

1901.    A  Sectional  Bird  Census.    The  Wilson  Bull.,  N.  8..  8.  pp.  84-103. 
Clements,  F.  E. 

1905.    Research  Methods  to  Ecology.    Lincoln,  Nebraska. 
Coville,  F.  V. 

1893.    Botany  of  the  Death  Valley  Expedition.    Cont.  U.  S.  Nat.  Herbarium,  IV. 
Coville,  F.  v.,  and  MacDougal,  D.  T. 
1903.    Desert  Botanical  Laboratory  of  the  Carnegie  Institution.     Carnegie    In- 
stitution. 
Cowles,  H.  C. 

1901.    Plant  Societies  of  Chicago  and  Vicinity.    Bull.  Oeog.  Soc.  Chicago,  No.  1. 
1901.    The    Phyaiograpblc   Ecology   of  Chicago  and   Vicinity;    a   Study  of    the 
Origin,  Development  and  Classiflcatlon  of  Plant  Societies.    Bot.   Gaz., 
31,  pp.  73-108,  145-182. 
Dixon,  CbM. 

1897.    The  Migration  of  Birds.    London. 
Fcf  nald,  M.  L. 

1907.    Soil  Preferences  of  Alpine  Plants.    Rbodora,  9,  pp.  149-193. 
Forbes,  S.  A. 

1907.    An    Ornithological   Cross-Section    of  Illinois    in   Autumn.    Bull.    III.    St. 
Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  7,  pp.  305-336.  C^r»  -nl  > 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  153 

Frottingham,  E.  H. 

1907.    Notes  on  the  Ulctlgan  Forest  Reserve.    Bfshth  Rep.  Mich.  Acad.  Sci., 
pp.  167161. 
Guiong,  W.  F, 

1903.    The  Vegetation  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  Salt  and  Diked  Marshes;  an  Ecologi- 
cal Study.     Bot.  Qaz.,  36,  pp.  161-1S6,  280-302,  349-367,  42$-4e&. 
190E.    The  NaMent  Forest  of  the  MIscou  Beach  Pl^n.    Bot.  Oaz..  42,  pp.  81-106. 
Gilbert,  G.  K. 

1885.    The  Topogntphtc  Features  of  Lake  Shores.    Fifth  Ann,  Rep.  U.  8.  Oeol. 
Surr.,  pp.  69-123. 
Gr«T,  A.,  and  Hooker,  J.  D. 

1881.    The  Vegetation  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  Region.    Bull.  U.   8.  Geol.  and 
Oeogr.  SUFT.  of  Terr.  (Hayden),  6,  pp.  1-77. 
GulliTer,  F.  P. 

1899.  Shoreline  Topogr^hy.    Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Arts  and  Scl.,  34,  pp.  149-258. 
Haddon,  A.  C. 

1903.    The  Saving  of  Vanishing  Data.    Pop.  Scl.  Ho.,  62,  pp.  222-229. 
Harper,  ILM. 

1906.  A  Phytogeographlcal  Sketch  of  the  Altamaha  Grit  Region  of  Uie  Coaatal 

Plain  of  Georgia.    Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Scl.,  17,  pp.  1-3G9. 
Harvey,  L.  H. 

1903.  A  Study  of  the  Physiographic  Ecology  of  Mount  Ktaadn,  Maine.    Univ. 

of  Maine  Studies,  No.  &. 
Jacob*,  J.  W. 

1904.  The  Haunts  of  the  Golden-Winged  Warbler.    Gleanings,  No.  3.    Waynes- 

burg,  Pa. 
Johnson,  K.  S. 

1907.  Mean  Monthly  and  Annual  Relative  Huniiillty  Charts  of  the  United  States. 

Rep.  South  African  Assoc.  Adv.  Scl.,  1906,  pp.  161-168. 
Jadd,8.  D. 

1902.    Birds  of  a  Maryland  Farm.    Bull.  No.  17,  Dlv.  of  Biol.  8ur.  U.  8.  Dept. 

AgT. 

LeConte,  J.  L. 

18G0.    General  Remarks  upon  the  Coleoptera  of  Lake  Superior.    Agasslz,  "Lake 
Superior,"  pp.  201-242. 
HcCreary,  0. 

1006.    The  Ecological    Digtributioo  of    the    Birda    in    the    Porcupine  Mountains, 
Michigan.    Mich.  Geol.  Surv.  Ann.  Rep.,  1906,  G6-67. 
HerrianitC.  H. 

1890.    Results  of  a  Biological   Survey  of  the  San   Francisco  Mountain  Region 
and  Deaert  of  the  Little  Colorado,  Arizona.     N.  A.  Fauna,  No.  3,  Dlv. 
Ornlth.  and  Mammalogy,  V.  S.  Dept.  Agriculture. 
1S99.    Resalta  of  a  Biological  Survey  of  Hotmt  Shasta,  California.   N.  A.  Fauna, 
No.  16,  Dlv.  Biol.  Surv.,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agriculture. 
Oibom,H.  F. 

1902.    The  Law  of  Adaptive  Radiation.    Amer.  Nat.,  36,  pp.  353-363. 
Palmer,  W. 

1900.  Ecology  of  the  Maryland  Yellow-throat,  and  Its  Relatives.     The  Auk,  17. 

pp.  216-242. 

PenhaUow,  D.  P. 

1907.    A  Blazing  Beacb.^  Pop.  Scl.  Mo..  70,  pp.  657-664. 
np«r,  C.  V.  I 

1906.    Flora  of  the  SUte  of  Washington.    Cont.  U.  S.  Nat.  Herbarium,  XT^>^IC 


154  MICHIGAN   8URVBT.   I»08. 

Pound,  R.,  and  Clemento,  F.  E. 

1900.    The    Phytogeography    ot    Nebraska.    Bot.    Surr.    ol    Nebraska.    General 
Survey,  1. 
Kidgwari  R> 

1874.    The  Lower  Wabash  Valley,  Considered  In  Its  Relation  to  the  ntunal  DIb- 
trfcta  of  the  Bastem  Region  of  North  America:  with  a  Synopals  ot  Its 
Avian  Fauna.    Pro.  Boat.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  16,  pp.  304-332. 
18S9.    The  Omltbology  ot  llllnola.    III.  Nat.  Hlet.  Suft.,  1,  Springfield,  111. 
Ruthven,  A.  G. 

190S.    An  Kcologlcal  Survey  of  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and  Isle  Royale,  Michi- 
gan.   Geol.  Surv.  Mich.,  Ann.  Rep-,  1905,  pp.  17-5E. 
Stejneger,  L. 

1903.    A  Reply  to  Recent  Strictures  on  American  Biologists.     Science,  N.  S., 
19,  pp.  371-376. 
Townsend,  C.  V. 

190G.    The  Birds  of  Essex  County,  Massachusetts.    Mem.  Nuttall  Ornithol.  Club. 
No.  3. 
Transeau,  B.  H. 

1903.    On  the  Geographic  Distribution  and  Ecological  Relations  of  the  Bog  Plant 

Societies  of  Northern  North  America.    Bot.  Gaz.,  3S,  pp.  101-420. 
1905.    Forest  Centers  of  Eastern  America.    Amer.  Naturalist,  39,  pp.  875-889. 
190&-'O6.    B<«B  and  Bog  Flora  of  the  Huron  River  Valley.    Bot.  Gaz.,   40.  pp. 
3&1-3T&.  418-448;  41,  pp.  17-42. 
Tristiam,  H.  B. 

18B4.    Field  Study  in  Ornithology.    Smith.  Rep.  for  1893,  pp.  465-486. 
Watlcina,  L.  W. 

1900.  Michigan  Birds  that  Nest  in  Open  Meadows.    First  Report  of  Mich.  Acad. 

of  Scl.,  pp.  66-75. 
"Whitford,  H.  IT. 

1901.  The  Genetic  Development  of  the  Forests  of  Northern  Michigan;  A  Study 

in  Physiographic  Ecology.    Bot.  Gaz.,  31,  pp.  289-325. 
1905.    The  Forests  of  the  Flathead  Valley.  Montana.    Bot.  Gaz.,  39,  pp.  276-296. 
Young,  R.  T. 

1907.    The  Forest  Formations  ot  Boulder  County.  Colorado.    Bot.  Gaz.,  44,  pp. 
321-352. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALE. 


THE   COLEOPTERA   OF   IBLE   BOYALE,  LAKE  SUPERIOR,  AND 

THEIR   RELATION   TO   THE    NORTH   AMERICAN 

CENTERS   OP   DISPERSAL. 

BY  DR.  CHA8.  C.  ADAMS. 

1.     Introductory  Xotc. 

The  beetles  secured  ia  1905  by  the  Museum  expedition  were  collected 
during  July  and  Augnst  by  rarions  members  of  the  party.  We  are 
indebted  to  Prof.  H.  F.  Wiekhani,  of  the  Univwsity  of  Iowa,  Iowa  City, 
for  the  determiDatioD  of  moat  of  the  species ;  the  Temainder  were  deter- 
mined by  Mr.  E.  A.  Schware,  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  through 
Dr.  L.  O.  Howard  and  Mr.  E,  S.  Titos.  To  these  gentlemen  we  wish 
to  express  our  appreciation  for  these  favors.  Mr.  A.  B.  Wolcott  has 
kindly  furnished  certain  records  of  distribution,  as  indicated  in  the  text. 

The  field  notes  and  collections  were  largely  made  by  Dr.  H.  A. 
Oleason;  some  were  made  by  the  writer;  and  specimens  were  also  col- 
lected by  B.  F.  Savey.  The  geographic  range  of  all  the  species  taken 
is  giren  in  some  detail,  as  a  basis  for  geographic  conclnaions.  Time 
limitations  have  prevented  a  full  discussion  of  these. 

Tlie  geographic  relations  of  the  fauna  have  been  discussed  in  more 
than  customary  fullness.  The  entire  subject  of  the  geographic  rela- 
tions of  the  North  American  beetle  fauna  had  to  be  gone  over;  and 
as  the  work  advanced,  it  became  evident  that  a  general  account  of  these 
fauna!  relations  was  desirable  from  a  standpoint  sontewhat  different 
from  that  generally  expressed.  Undoubtedly  many  important  papers 
and  statements  have  been  overlooked,  so  that  it  will  be  desirable  for 
others  to  further  extend  this  treatment  of  the  subject. 

Attention  should  also  be  called  to  the  fact  that  in  the  past  studies  of 
the  distribution  of  insects  hare  been  largely  irresiiectiTe  of  their 
habitats,  associations  and  such  ecological  relations.  This  has  been 
one  of  the  many  defects  of  distributional  studies,  as  it  is  of  the  present 
study.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  an  attempt  is  made  to  briefly  discuss 
the  habitat  relations  and  successions  of  beetle  associations.  Life 
history,  food  habits  and  other  ecological  phases  need  detailed  investiga- 
tion and  discussion  so  that  all  these  phases  can  be  related  to  the  causes 
and  conditions  which  affect  distribution.  The  economic  advantage  of 
a  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  succession  of  beetle  associations  has  largely 
been  neglected,  but  ultimately  must  become  one  of  the  main  general 
principles  in  much  economic  practice.  This  will  probably  become  more 
conspicuous  when  forests  assume  a  higher  value,  and  the  relation  of 
beetles  to  reforestation,  etc.,  demands  careful  attention. 


3y  Google 


168  MICMiaAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

77,    Notes  on  the  Habitat  Relations  of  Beetles. 

The  beetles  collected  by  onr  party  were  tabulated  by  Stations  to 
determine  if  mailed  babitat  preferences  were  evident.  The  tabolatioD 
BbowB  that  at  most  stations  only  a  relatively  few  species  were  found. 
At  those  atatioDB  where  the  largest  variety  was  found,  as  at  our  camps, 
the  condittODB  were  exceptional.  The  occurrmce  of  the  dowers  of  Uie 
Cow  Parsnip  attracted  many  species.  It  is  quite  evident  that  tliese 
flower  frequenting  species  did  not  breed  there,  so  that  in  a  strict  sense 
they  do  not  belong  to  these  open  areas,  as  the  breeding  places  of  in- 
sects must  furnish  the  only  substantial  basis  for  the  determination 
of  insect  habitats.  In  many  cases  only  provisional  habitats  can  be 
assigned  with  our  presait  incomplete  knowledge  of  life  histories.  In 
many  species  the  larval  and  adult  habits  are  very  different,  particular- 
ly with  regard  to  their  food.  For  this  reason  error  is  very  liable 
to  occur  and  caution  is  necessary.  In  the  present  provisional  dis- 
cussion the  haunts  frequented  by  the  adults  have  been  primarily  utilized. 
This  is  an  nnfortunate  limitation,  but  it  is  hoped  that  this  will  not 
confuse  the  main  feature  of  the  problem. 

On  the  JAke  Snperior  beach  (I,  1)  the  following  14  species  were 
found:  Caloaoma  frigidum,  Bembidium  {five  species),  Rhantas  hinota- 
tut,  Anatis  15-punctata,  Macropogon  rufipea,  Corynibites  medianas, 
Podabrus  diadetna,  MaUhodes  niger,  Sericea  vespertina  and  Lep- 
utura  chrjfsoooma.  It  is  evident  that  some  had  been  washed  up 
by  the  waves  {Calosoma  and  Anatis)  while  others  normaJly  frequent 
sandy  beaches  {Bembidium)  or  the  beach  pools  (Bhantus),  while  still 
others  were  here  because  of  the  open  character  of  the  beach  and  the 
proximity  of  the  forest,  Hayward  ('97,  p.  37)  says  concCTning  the 
habitat  of  BembidiuTn:  "Most  of  them  are  riparial  in  their  habits, 
occurring  under  stones  and  refuse  near  the  water's  edge  along  streams, 
the  shores  of  ponds,  or  on  the  seamoss,  while  a  few  occur  alm(»t  any- 
where." 

The  clearing  about  the  Light-house  (I,  7)  had  the  greatest  variety 
of  beetles  found  at  any  station.  It  included  37  out  of  the  89  species 
found  at<  all  stations.  There  were  several  circnmstances  which  com- 
bined to  make  this  number  large.  The  greater  opportunity  of  those 
about  camp  to  make  collections;  the  season  of  the  year  (July);  the 
presence  of  the  Cow  Parsnip  in  large  numbers  (which  acted  as  insect 
traps,  and  upon  which  beetles  congregated  in  sach  numbers  that  they 
were  easily  brushed  into  the  cyanide  bottles  in  large  numbers) ;  and 
the  jffesence  of  logs,  stumps,  brush,  etc.  The  flowers  were  a  very  con- 
spicuous factor,  and  on  these  Leptura  chrysocoma  gathered  in  large 
numbers.  The  open  space  was  favorable  to  the  Carabids,  the  flowers, 
for  the  Coccinellids,  Elaterids,  Buprestids,  Trichias  and  the  Cerambycids. 
The  two  latter  frequent  also  the  logs  and  stumps.  The  wandering, 
trauip-like  existence  of  these  adult  wood-boring  beetles  should  not  con- 
fuse one  as  to  the  true  habitat  of  the  immature  stages  which  is  in  the 
forest.  The  surrounding  forest  was  mainly  composed  of  White  or  Paper 
Birch,  Balsam  and  Spruce. 

At  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (Y,  3)  somewhat  similar  conditions 
were  found  to  those  at  the  Light-house  (I,  7),  but  there  were  fewer 
flowers,  more  cut  timber,  furnishing  logs,  stumps,  brucdi;  a  log  shack 


BCOLOQY  OF   ISLB  ROYALE.  ISO 

WEB  very  thoroughly  infeeted  with  beetles  and  their  Hymenopterons 
parasites.  The  BtnToiinding  forest  was  largely  White  SiHiice  and  Paper 
Birch.     Xylotrechus  was  particularly  abundant  at  this  place. 

Other  open  places,  as  those  bordering  the  beach  (V,  2)  or  the  small 
openings  on  the  ridges  {I,  2],  produced,  in  addition  to  the  wandering 
flower  feeders  Bupresth  atriata  and  Mordelleatiita  acapularis,  a  few 
Carabids,  as  Rarpalus  megacephalua  and  Pterostichua  femoralia. 

In  the  Balsam,  White  Spruce  and  White  Birch  forests  (I,  3  and  V, 
4)  the  Staphylinids,  Orophoema,  Boletobiua  cincticolUa,  the  Erotylids, 
Tritoma  and  the  Carabids,  Calathita  and  Blechrua,  are  characteristic. 
The  moist  conditions  which  favor  fleshy  fungi  show  a  marked  influence. 
Here  in  the  forest,  of  course,  must  also  belong  a  great  number  of  wood 
and  bark  boring  beetles,  which  our  limited  collecting  found  assembled 
in  the  sunny  openings  on  flowers. 

Along  the  Desor  trail  (III.  '04),  through  the  hardwood  forest  of 
Yellow  Birch,  aspen  and  Sugar  Maple,  two  other  Staphylinids  were 
found,  Quediua  fulgidus  and  Tachinua  memnoiua  and  the  Scarabaeid 
Oeotrupea  hlackburtUi. 

If  now  we  turn  to  the  lakes  and  bogs,  a  very  different  kind  of  beetle 
life  is  found.  On  the  surface  of  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  6)  were  found 
Oyrimta  minutua  and  picipea  and  in  the  water-lily  margins  of  ponds 
and  lakes  were  found  (III,  5  and  IV,  3)  Donacia  proximo,  cincticomia 
and  Oalentcella  nymphaeac.  In  the  tamarack  and  arbor  vitae  swamps 
(I,  4,  6  and  V,  5)  the  following  species  of  water  beetles  were  found: 
Baliplua  ruficoUia,  Bf/droporus  triatia,  Agabua  congener  and  Scutop- 
terua  Jtomii. 

These  may  seem  very  elementary  and  commonplace  observations,  but 
the  principles  which  underlie  the  correlation  of  certain  (even  comioon) 
species  and  their  environmental  conditions  are  very  generally  ignored 
by  students  of  local  faunas,  except  for  collecting  purposes.  To  know 
the  exact  habitat  of  certain  species  in  one  locality  does  not  by  any 
means  prove  that  tbe  subject  is  exbausted  for  other  localities.  ' 
No  general  ecological  treatment  of  our  beetle  fauna  has  been  attempted, 
not  even  of  the  smaller  groups,  such  as  families  or  genera,  or  even 
for  a  local  area.  The  nearest  approach  we  have  to  such  woi^c  is  found 
in  certain  economic  papers,  devoted  to  insects  affecting  some  particular 
plant.     Here  is  an  excellent  field  for  investigation. 

Before  leaving  the  subject  of  habitats,  attention  should  be  called 
to  certain  publications  which  are  of  particular  use  in  the  study  of  tbe 
life  histories  of  insects  in  these  northern  forests.  The  first  is  Packard's 
"Forest  Insects,"  and  the  second  is  Felt's  "Insects  Affecting  Park 
and  Woodland  Trees," 

A  few  suggestions  are  added  as  to  methods  of  ecological  collecting 
which  may  aid  similar  8ur\'eys.  When  the  time  for  a  survey  is  limited 
some  system  of  ecolt^ic  trapping  will  prove  of  great  advantage.  Thus 
for  aquatic  beetles  traps,  like  those  planned  by  \eedham,  may  be  very 
useful;  and  still  others  are  needed  for  the  ground  fauna  and  those 
frequenting  trew  and  shrubs.  Sweeping  and  beating  as  usually  prac- 
ticed, while  securing  many  species,  certainly  produce  little  ecological 
data.  It  may  be  suggested  that  systems  of  trapping  may  be  devised 
which  will  contribute  much  valuable  ecological  infonnation. 


160  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

///.     The  8ifCce8tion  of  Beetle  Asaociattona. 

'nie  subject  of  BUcceasioQ  ia  a  relatively  new-  one  in  entomology.  The 
only  other  paper  treating  of  beetle  succession  known  to  the  writer  is 
that  by  Shelford  ('07).  Our  points  of  view  are  very  eimilar  but  have 
been  independently  conceived.  Broadly  speaking  succession  means  the 
change,  in  time,  of  the  insect  life  at  any  given  habitat  or  place. 
Our  aim  is  to  note  the  changes  in  the  composition  of  the  beetles 
found  associated  in  a  given  breedinf/  habitat  or  region.  The  method 
is  first  to  determine  whait  species  of  beetles  are  associated  or  found 
together  in  the  same  habitat,  and  then  to  determine  their  mutual  and 
environmental  relations,  so  that  their  laws  of  change  may  be  determined. 
Habitats  and  their  associated  insects  have  ver>'  rarely  been  considered 
«a  worthy  subjects  for  special  study.  Even  ia  very  excellent  local 
lists,  but  little  attention  is  given  to  this  subject.  This  is  well  exemplified 
by  Wickham's  Bayfield  list.  In  one  case  he  says :  "A  peat-bog  of  several 
acres  ia  extent  also  proved  very  productive  of  peculiar  species."  But 
unfortunately  he  does  not  indicate  the  kinds. 

In  spite  of  the  lack  of  a  detailed  study  of  the  problem  of  beetle  suc- 
cession, however,  certain  general  relations  are  apparsit.  We  will  onlj 
attempt  an  outline  of  the  problem  as  found  on  Isle  Royale.  This  in- 
volves an  idea  of  the  history  of  the  island  as  the  Lake  formerly  stood 
at  a  much  higher  level,  which  as  it  fell  exposed  I^le  Royale.  We  are 
thus  given,  as  a  natural  starting  point,  the  Lake  shore  and  beaches. 

1.    The  Lake  Shore  and  its  Beetle  Associations. 

Topographically  the  shore  is  very  diverse  in  its  character,  and  all 
stages  are  to  be  found,  from  a  cliff  to  a  low  rocky  shore  and  on  to  the 
gravelly  and  aondy  beach.  When  the  shoi:e  lies  at  a  low  angle,  so  that 
beach  pools  are  developed  by  the  waves  and  rain,  certain  water  beetles 
as  Rhantus  binotatus  at  Tonkin  Bay  ( I,  1)  and  Scovill  Point 
(IV,  1)  find  a  habitat.  Upon  topographically  older  beaches,  where 
gravel  and  sand  have  accumulated,  various  species  of  Bembidium  are 
to  be  found,  as  previously  listed.  8uch  a  sandy  beach  often  contains 
a  mixed  lot  of  beetles,  and  may  contain  examples  of  a  large  number  of 
species  from  all  habitats,  which  have  been  tossed  up  by  the  waves. 
It  is  probable  that  many  of  these  come  from  a  considerable  distance. 
Upon  the  upper  parts  of  such  a  beach,  where  soil  accumulates  and 
annuals  grow,  certain  flower  beetles,  as  Leptura  and  Trichias  are  liable 
to  be  found  feeding.  In  such  a  soil  may  be  expected  Carabids,  as 
PterostichAis  fcmoralis  was  found  upon  the  heath  beach  (V,  2)  on  the 
south  shore  of  the  island. 

The  transition  from  the  upper  beach  to  the  rock  openings  is  often  a 
gradual  one;  all  stages  of  which  were  found  preserved. 

2.  Rock  Opcningn  and  Astuciatcd  Bcctlcn. 

These  park  like  rock  openings  and  open  oak  ridges  furnish  a  transition 
from  the  beach  into  the  forest  conditions.  They  are  characterized  by  the 
absence  of  soil  or  the  presence  of  only  a  shallow  one.  and  by  the  rein- 
deer moss  and  heath  plant  society,  liie  shallow  soil  and  low  open  v^- 
vegetation  favors  the  continuation  of  some  of  the  Carabids  found  upon 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROYALE.  161 

the  apper  beach,  as  Pteroatichus,  Under  such  conditions  were  found 
P.  femoraKe  and  Harpalas  megacepkalus  (1.  2;  V,  2).  The  flower 
feeders  also  continue  to  maintain  their  position,  bnt  the  Bembidiumi 
have  lai^ly  been  eliminated. 

These  open  sunny  spots,  sorronnded  by  dense  shady  forests,  in  their 
attractivenees  for  insects,  remind  one  of  electric  li(^ts  where  insects 
congregate  in  sndi  vast  numbers.  As  representative  of  these  condi- 
tions the  great  variety  of  beetles  found  about  the  camps  should  be 
recalled. 

3.  Lake,  Pond  and  Bog  Habitats  and  Aasociationa, 

From  the  park-like  rock  openings  let  us  turn  to  another  series  of 
open  habitaits:  those  which  are  initiated  by  inland  water  bodies.  The 
vater  beetles  to  be  found  in  the  open  lakes  were  not  given  special  at- 
tention but  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  their  existence  in  such  places,  but 
in  general  we  may  say  that  water  beetles  increase  in  number  andi  hind 
nearer  the  margins  and  in  shallow  water.  Here  the  Oyrfnidt  (V,  63)» 
Donaoia  (III,  5),  and  Oalerucella  (VI,  3)  abound,  while  farther  in- 
land at  the  bog  mai^ns  and  in  the  bogs  occur  Haltplids  and  Hydro- 
philids,  Saiiplut,  Eydroporus,  Agahvs  and  Soutopteraa  (I,  4,  6;  T,  6). 
Even  this  brief  series  outlines  the  main  features  seen  in  the  transition 
from  the  strictly  open  water  conditions  and  species  to  those  of  the  bog. 
But  this  succession  may  even  be  safely  carried  a  st^  farther,  as  i» 
clearly  shown  by  an  important  obBcrvation  by  Wickham  ('97,  p.  126)  at 
Bayfield,  Wisconsin.  He  states  that  "l%e  Water  Beetles  were  not: 
found  in  such  abundance  as  I  had  hoped  from  a  perusal  of  lists  fronk 
northern  localities,  and  of  those  named  in  the  present  report  a  great 
part  were  taken  not  in  water  but  under  moss  in  damp  spots — a  pecu- 
liarity which  I  have  noted  in  some  species  of  Agaibua  collected  on  a 
previous  trip  to  Alaska."  Under  such  conditions  as  this  the  bog  aaso- 
oiatlon  of  w»ter  beetles  may  even  be  able  to  spread  beyond  the  bogs 
and  invade  the  forest,  a  change  of  habitat  which  has  been  recognized 
among  plants  but  has  been  largely  overlooked  by  students  of  animals. 
It  is  only  by  the  detailed  study  of  habitats  that  the  significance  of  such 
facts  can  be  understood  and  the  peculiarities  of  succession  determined 
for  different  regions. 

There  is  thus  seen  to  be  a  very  perfect  transition  from  the  bog 
forest  into  that  of  the  balsam  and  spmce,  and  the  dominance  of  coni- 
fer trees  clearly  shows  that  the  beetles  frequenting  such  forests  will  be 
on  the  increase  as  the  aquatic  association  of  beetles  declines  in  domin- 
ance. The  methods  and  detailed  order  of  this  succession  awaits  in- 
vestigation, but  it  is  clearly  dominated  by  the  forest  succession. 

Jf.  The  Forests  and  Their  Beetle  Associations. 

The  gradual  and  perfect  character  of  the  transition  from  the  bog 
to  the  balsam-spruce  forest  has  just  been  indicated.  This  is  paralleled 
by  a  corresponding  transition  from  the  park-like  openings  and  the  bare 
ridges  to  the  forest.  These  liabitats  change  as  rapidly  as  soil,  humus, 
and  shade  increase  at  the  mar^ns  of  the  openings;  and  as  shrubs  and 
young  trees  encroach  upon  the  open.  Thus  as  the  hogs  fill  up,  and  as  the 
soil  increases  on  the  rock  surfaces,  both  habitats  tend  to  become  trans- 


162  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

formed  toward  and  invaded  bv  the  balsam-Bpnice  forest  conditioDB  and 
asBOciation.  Here  is  a  clearly  defined  convergeiLt  tendency,  the  exposed 
ridges  and  the  water  basine  both  tending  to  become  forested.  Corre- 
sponding with  these  environmental  changes  are  corresponding  ones  in 
the  beetles.  The  Carabids,  as  previously  mentioned,  continne  in  the 
homns  from  the  rock  openings  as  the  wuter  beetles  may  in  the  damp 
moss.  As  the  vertical  extent  of  the  forest  increases  and  the  forest 
crown  migrates  upward,  the  intervening  trunk,  bark  and  branch  habitat 
for  beetles  enlarges  and  the  leaf  eaiting  inhabitants  of  the  forest  crown 
rise  upward.  This  crown  fauna  retains,  or  rather  continues  SMne  of 
the  characteristics  found  at  the  mai^nal  zone,  with  which  it  retains 
direct  continuity.  The  mai^nal  zone  of  trees  is  likely  to  be  birchen  (yel- 
low or  white)  or  aspens,  in  the  rock  opening  succession,  and  conifers 
in  the  b(^  series,  a  feature  which  Influences  the  beetle  fauna.  With  a 
dominance  in  the  forest  of  Balsams,  Paper  Birch  and  White  Spruce,  the 
beetles  (and  many  other  insects  as  well)  are  likely  to  be  much  in- 
floenced,  not  only  by  the  plauit  food,  but  also  by  the  physical  con- 
ditions associated  with  the  forest.  As  one  plant  or  forest  societ? 
replaces  another,  the  unfavorable  oonditiona  of  the  declining  society 
may  be  expected  to  favor  insect  injury  as  it  is  well  known  that  in 
general  vigorous  trees  suffer  less  from  sncb  attacks  than  those  which 
are  defective.  Uoder  such  circumstances  as  this  Insect  injury  may 
be  a  useful  index  of  succesBion,  as  well  as  a  factor  hastening  it.  Under 
such  circumstances  the  climax  of  insect  abundance  or  dominance 
may  la^  behind  the  climax  of  the  development  of  the  plant  society 
upcm  which  it  depends.  Insects  may  also  initiate  a  plant  succession, 
through  a  period  of  extreme  abundance  by  doing  damage  to  the  food 
plant,  thus  permitting  the  invasion  of  other  forms.  If,  however,  the 
hardwoods,  the  yellow  birch-sugar  maple  forest,  is  the  climax  type,  then 
the  balsam-spmce-paper  bircb  association  will  be  succeeded  by  it  in 
time;  and  a  farther  change  in  the  beetles  may  be  expected.  But  here 
also,  as  in  the  coniferous  forest,  a  dense  forest  stand  appears  to  be 
unfavorable  for  the  abundance  and  variety  of  beetles  (as  is  generally 
the  case  with  many  other  aiuimals).  This  scarcity  of  beetle  life  in 
the  dense  forests  of  the  I^ake  Superior  region  has  been  commented 
upon  by  LeConte  ('50,  p.  201)  as  follows:  "The  whole  country  being 
still  almost  in  a  primitive  condition,  the  specimens  are  equally  dis- 
tributed throughout  a  lai^  space;  the  woods  will  not  therefore  be 
found  very  productive  to  tiie  collector.  In  fact  nearly  all  the  species 
were  adjacent  to  small  streams ;  or  else  were  driven  on  shore,  particu- 
larly on  sand  beaches,  by  the  winds  and  waves  after  being  drowned  in 
the  lafca" 

Throu^ont  the  preceding  discussion  the  intimate  relation  of  the 
beetles  and  the  v^etation  has  been  assumed.  There  seems  to  be 
a  good  reason  for  this.  TJlke  ('02,  p.  3)  has  well  expressed  this  dependence 
as  follows:  "Now,  as  about  half  of  all  the  beetles  depend  upon  plants 
for  their  food,  the  greater  variety  of  food  plants  the  larger  we  find 
the  nomber  of  species  of  beetles."  In  this  we  alsA  see  why  so  few 
species  (relatively)  are  found  where  a  climax  plant  society  has  become 
dominant,  because  such  societies  are,  as  a  rule,  composed  of  but  rela- 
tively few  species.    At  the  same  time  it  is  seen  why  at  an  intermediate 


ECOLOGT  OS*  ISLa   ROTALB.  168 

stage,  with  a  diversified  vegetation,  we  may  expect  the  greateBt  variety 
of  beetles.  From  sncb  relations  as  these  it  foiloiws  that  a  knowledge 
of  plant  Bocceesion  vill  famish  a  very  important  tMlflis  for  the  study 
of  beetle  micceBsion. 

While  theae  remains  hare  been  primarily  intended  for  beetles,  it 
is  eqnally  evident  that  they  have  a  mnch  more  extended  application 
to  other  plant  feeding  InsectB  and  certain  other  invertebrates  as  well. 

IV.   The  Oeneral  Characteriatics  of  tkc  North  American  Beetle  Fauna. 

In  attempting  to  form  some  idea  of  the  general  faonal  aflinities  of 
the  Isle  Boyole  beetle  fauna,  the  literature  was  searched  for  a  gen- 
eral account  of  the  distribution  of  North  American  beetles.  As  no 
recent  comprehensive  account  of  the  subject  could  be  found,  various 
general  statements  and  generalizations  were  compiled.  On  account 
of  their  soaittered  occorreace  in  the  literature  and  their  value  and 
saggestivenesB  to  stndents  of  other  groups  of  insects,  it  has  been 
thought  desirable  to  assemble  and  publish  them.  An  effort  has  been 
made  to  quote  only  the  more  important  statements.  Several  of  the 
old^*  statements  by  LeOonte,  before  he  accepted  the  theory  of  evolu- 
tion, are  omitted.  A  similar  selection  has  also  been  exercised  in  the 
case  of  some  other  writings.  The  main  aim  has  been  to  bring  to- 
gether the  most  comprehensive  generalizations  which  have  been  made 
upon  our  beetle  fauna,  so  that  they  may  have  f^'eater  utility,  furthea- 
extension,  and  revision.  Supplementary  data  from  other  groups  of 
insects  has  lai^ly  been  omitted,  although  this  should  be  given  due 
weight  in  a  comprehensive  study  of  this  subject.  The  references  should 
he  consulted  in  connection  with  the  compiled  abstracts. 

1.   Compiled  OcneralizatiotM  on  the  Fauna. 

Carpenter,  W.  t.  1875,  pp.  539-542 :  "The  principal  and  most  inter- 
esting resnlt  obtained  from  the  study  of  this  collection,  is  the  demon- 
straticHi  of  the  fact  that  the  alpine  insect-fauna  of  the  Elocky  Moun- 
tains, is  nearly  identical  with  that  of  Mount  Washington  (New 
Hampshire),  Labrador,  and  Alaska;  and  that  insects  which  are  found 
upon  mountains  at  great  elevations  will  likely  occur  in  a  much  higher 
latitude  at  a  less  elevation. 

"Insect-life,  with  the  exception  of  the  grasshoppers,  is  more  abund- 
ant in  the  foot-hills  than  the  plains  near  the  foot  of  the  monntains. 
An  altitude  of  about  seven  thousand  feet  appeared  to  produce  the 
greatest  variety  of  species."  p.  540. 

Cockerell.  T.  D.  A.  1893,  pp.  305,  306,  309,  310-311,  312,  313-314. 
315,  316,  317,  319-320-322. 

"The  Insect  fauna  of  the  mld-alplne  zone  of  Cueter  County  [Colorado]  pre- 
sents some  elements  which  are  sufficiently  diverse:  but  taken  as  a  whole,  It 
le  a  natural  fauna,  helongl&i;  to  a  well -defined  region,  and  henr^e  available 
for  comparison  with  other  like  faunae.  It  Is.  indeed,  truly  characteristic  of 
tbe  mld-alplne,  that  besides  Its  ordinary  elements.  It  contains  spcclee  coming 
up  from  the  sub-alplne,  and  down  from  the  high  alpine;  but  altbougti  it  thus 
liftppene  that  Junonia  coenia  and  Famaaaiui  sminthevt  have  been  taken  In 
tbe  same  zone,  It  does  not  follow  that  either  are  truly  characteristic  of  It, 
«r  that  they  belong  to  tbe  same  fauna.    All  faunal  lists  contain  such  excep- 


164  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

tlons  or  devlRtlons  from  the  average;  but  vhen,  as  la  the  case  of  Colorado 
as  a  whole,  there  Is  do  imltorinlty  about  the  range  of  the  various  Bpecfea.  and 
the  majority  do  not  occur  throughout  the  territory.  It  la  Impossible  to  treat 
the  region  as  containing  a  single  fauna."  p.  305. 

"The  mld-alplne  zone,  as  I  have  defined  It,*  extends  from  about  fl,500  feet 
to  10,000  feet.  It  Is  essentially  the  zone  of  oak-ecrub  (Querent  undulata)  and 
quaking  asp  (Poputua  tremulotaea) .  Its  most  chaiacteristfc  conifer  Is  Pintu 
ponderoia  var.  icopjilomm,  but  with  the  higb-alplne  zone  It  shares  Picea  enget- 
manni,  with  the  eub-alplne,  Finua  eAutia,  and  Junijierui  virginianut."  p.  306. 

"Among  the  Coleoptera  It  will  be  notlcad  at  once  how  many  of  the  species 
are  boreal  extending  to  Canada  {tens.  lot.)  and  often  to  the  New  England 
States.  The  Soutbem  element  Is  but  alight  althougb  distinct  II  looked  for; 
and  there  la  also  a  fair  number  of  species  endemic  In  the  Kocky  Mountains. 
The  Tenebrlonldae,  characteristic  of  the  Western  prairies,  are  fairly  numennn. 
The  Coleopterons  fauna,  as  a  whole.  Is  strikingly  distinct  from  that  ol  tta« 
HIsslaslpiri  region  and  the  Eastern  States  generally,  except  aa  regards  the 
boreal  element.  Mr.  WIekham  has  publtsbed  a  list  of  the  beetles  found  In  the 
vldnlty  of  Iowa  City,  and  on  comparing  It  with  the  present  list.  I  was  astonished 
to  find  how  few  were  the  species  common  to  both.  This  result  Is  brought 
about  In  large  measure,  no  doubt,  by  ,the  different  character  of  the  forests — 
those  of  Iowa  ctmtalnlng  a  great  variety  of  deciduous  trees,  those  of  Colorado 
mainly  cwklfers,  with  very  few  deciduous  spectee.  Thus.  It  happens  that  not 
one  species  of  Cenunbycldae  Is  Common  to  the  Custer  County  and  Iowa  Cltjr 
lists,  although  six  species  are  common  to  our  district  and  the  much  more  distant 
State  of  New  Jersey."  p.  309. 

"The  high -alpine  zone  in  Custer  County  extends  from  10,000  feet  on  tho 
Sangre  de  Crlsto  range  to  aummtts  of  the  mountains  (Olbb'a  Peak,  wroni^ 
called  Qlbaon  Peak,  13.729  feet;  Horn's  Peak.  13,447  feet;  Humboldt  Peak. 
14,041  feet,  etc.).  A  list  xit  the  blgb-alplne  species  eo  f ar  as  observed.  Is  given 
In  "Can.  Gnt."  1890.  Although  the  number  of  records  Is  not  great,  Uiey  show 
that  the  high-alplne  and   mid-alplne  lonee  are  sufficiently  distinct."  p.  SIO. 

"Of  the  high-alpine  Coleoptera,  2G  species  are  recorded,  and  a  S6th  may 
be  added,  namely,  Coccinejfo  trifatoiata  L.,  from  near  the  Ulcawbw  Mine  In 
October.  It  extends  to  Canada,  Lapland,  etc.  Of  these  26,  seven  ganera  ar« 
not  mld-alplne,  namely,  OrtoAacliiui,  Diclielonycha,  ChrytobotKria,  Zeugophora, 
Athout,  Daaytet  and  Glyptina.  Eleven  of  the  species  are  wanting  tn  the  mta- 
alpine  collections."  p.   310. 

"These  statistics  would  undoubtedly  be  altered  by  further  research,  but  I 
do  not  think  they  can  be  without  significance.  That  the  high  alptne  and  mtd- 
alpine  fauna  are  largely  of  different  derivation  seems  to  be  proved  by  the  large 
proportion  of  generic  difference.  Thus.  23  distinct  species  of  Hymenoptera  In- 
clude no  less  than  IG  genera;  and  eleven  Coleoptera  Include  eight  genera. 
The  high-alplne,  therefore.  Is  not,  as  regards  Its  peculiar  features,  derived  tram 
the  mid-alplne  or  lower;  contrasting  In  this  respect  with  the  hl^-alplne  of 
Ecuador,  which  1b  bo  derived. 

"The  affinltlee  of  the  hl^h  alpine  not  being  with  the  mld-alplne,  they  could 
only  be  with  the  far  North.  Alberta  being  a  suitable  region  for  comparlsoa, 
I  wrote  to  Mr.  Thomas  E.  Bean.  asXing  him  to  tell  me  how  many  of  my  high- 
alplne  species  occurred  with  him.  He  moat  kindly  replied,  giving  me  the  fol- 
lowing   interesting    Information: 

"Of  the  ColeopterH.  be  finds  at  Laggan  f>oIoptus  loteralu,  FodabTvt  lateraHa, 
Orsodachna  atra.  Cicindela  longilabris,  Adoxxu  viti»,  CKrytobothris  trinervia, 
Coccineila  tranMvertoguttata.  Trichodei  ornatus.  Scmaeopi  pratensit  and  Cor- 
delia icutellaria.-  He  adds:  ''That  Is  a  good  sprinkling  concldering  that  I  de- 
rive the  facts  from  a  small  lot  I  sent  Mr.  Fletcher  several  years  ago,  pre- 
sumably the  commoner  species.'  *  •  •  The  timber  line  at  Laggan  Is  at 
7.000  ft.    p.  311, 

■'Thirty-Blx  Coleoptera  were  found  and  Identified  In  the  sub-alpine  zone,  and 
of  these  twenty-two,  or  nearly  two-thirdB,  were  not  found  In  the  mld-alplne. 
These  include  the  following  eleven  genera  not  found  in  the  mid-alplne:  Ptlyo- 
phagus.  Batyle,  Dityhta.  Badisler,  Serica,  Diabralica.  Tomicv».  Polyphylla, 
Euryomia,  Listnis  and  Dfamaris.  Of  the  thirty-six  species,  only  one,  Hippo- 
damia  lonvergens.  was  observed  to  range  up  to  the  hlgh-alpine. 

•  Use  '■  EnWiDological  .Vews."  1893,  p,  303, 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  166 

"Thus,  to  both  Coteoptera  and  Orthoptera,  the  difference  between  the  two  zones 
Is  seen  to  be  very  marked,  not  only  as  to  epecieH.  but  also  as  to  genera,  ebow- 
Ing  that  we  have  to  deal  with  distinct  fauna,    p.  312. 

"So  far  as  I  am  able  to  judge,  the  suppression  of  the  central  region  Is  en- 
tJrely  Juatlfled,  but  I  cannot  agree  as  to  tbe  propoeea  Sonoran  region.  An 
analysis  of  the  Insects  ot  tbe  Colorado  Rochy  Mountains  shows  that  the  blgh- 
alptne  and  mld-alpine  elements,  although  sufficiently  distinct,  are  both  essential- 
ly boreal.  If  we  follow  Dr.  Merrlam's  arrangement,  It  appears  that  the  hlgh- 
alplne  Is  truly  boreal  while  tbe  mld-alpine  belongs  to  the  transition  reslon, 
containing  a  considerable  number  of  strictly  American  types.  The  sub-alplne, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  southern  or  Sonor&n. 

"Dr.  Horn  has  kindly  given  m«  his  opinion  as  follows;  'My  IdeM  of  the 
distribution  of  the  Coleoptera  In  the  mountainous  region  of  Colorado,  which 
Is  a  good  center  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  chain  are  as  firilows:  The  blgta  region 
seems  to  have  been  populated  from  the  Canadian  throngb  the  H.  B.  T.  reslon. 
A  collection  made  above  8,000  feet  in  Colorado  is  atmoat  identical  with  cne 
made  In  tbe  Lake  Superior  region.  The  same  fanna  runs  down  to  N.  M.  and 
ArlEono,  and  again  appears,  mixed,  of  course,  tn  the  Mexican  Mountains. 

"  'The  sub-alplne  region  Is  one  that  continues  from  Washington  to  New  Mexico, 
as  shown  by  such  striking  forms  as  Brgate;  MelanopttUa  miranda,  Iphthimut 
»«Tratut,   Oaieniea  externa.  Caloioma  Junalum  in  varleUea. 

"'The  lower  region,  foothills,  etc..  Is  a  mixture  of  New  Mexico  forms  with 
those  ot  th«  Eastern  United  Btatea,  with  some  peculiar  forms  allied  more  to 
the  southern  regions. 

"'California  Is  a  peculiar  n«l(Mi,  and.  In  man?  resp«cts,  allied  to  Europe  (la 
Seneral),  I  think  Calltomla  sntwiles  us  with  more  species  of  genera  pecniiar 
to  Europe  than  does  the  Eastern  region.'     (In  litt.,  July  14,  1S92.) 

"According  to  the  tacts  now  recorded  It  seems  that  there  1»,  flnitly,  a  drcum- 
polor  and  strictly  boreal  element;  secondly,  a  boreal  but  modifled  or  Canadian 
eJement;  and  thirdly,  a  southern  element  belonging  to  the  arid  portion  of  Dr. 
Merrlam's  Sonoran  region.  I  do  not  thluK  any  distinct  &unae  except  these 
can  be  recognised,  and  the  central  region  acoordSngly  falls.  But  there  la, 
sprinkled  among  the  w^lnary  types,  a  dittinct  element  of  endtmic  tpeclet,  to 
which  I  shall  refer  later.  There  also  seems  to  be  a  tew  surviving  fragments 
ot  an  ancient  fauna,  of  which  AntAracopteryr  is  a  good  example. 

"There  seenu  to  be  a  amati  California  element,  but  tbe  species  falling  under 
this  head  are  perhaps  rather  Southern  than  properly  Callfornian.     pp.  313-314. 

"The   resemblance  between   the  Colorado   fauna,   and   that  of   the  Mlsslssti^i 
basin  and  further  East,  always,  excepting  the  boreal  element  that  comes  from  - 
the  North,   is  very  slight  Indeed.    Tbe  great   plains  to  the  east  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains  have  been  as  much  a  barrier  as  the  sea  would  have  been.     p.  314. 

"A  Method  for  De/lning  Faunal  Regions.  It  appears  from  a  consideration 
of  what  has  been  written  on  faunal  regions,  that  it  would  be  desirable  If  some 
rules  could  be  laid  down,  so  as  to  leave  tbe  matter  less  to  the  discretion  of 
the  Individual  writer.  It  would  require  a  good  deal  ot  research  to  determine 
what  rules  could  be  litid  down,  that  would  work,  but  as  regards  insects,  at 
all  events,  I  have  thought  It  possible  that  the  following  rule  might  answer  for 
secondary  faunal  divisions: 

"Any  (ICO  districts  shall  6t  regarded  as  in  the  same  jecondorv  fownol  division, 
if  the  number  of  species  common  to  both  exceeds  the  number  of  genera  in  com^ 
mon.    p.  315. 

'Equigeneric  Areas.  For  minor  divisions,  to  be  used  In  relation  to  partlcu:ar 
groups,  I  have  devised  what  may  be  termed  equigeneric  areas. 

"Eguigeneric  areas  are  areas  throughout  which  the  genera  of  the  group  under 
consideration  are  identical,  • 

"These  areas  are  sometimes  large,  sometimes  small.  When  two  genera  over- 
lap, the  r^on  where  they  both  occur,  however  small,  mokes  a  separate  equ- 
generlc  area-  This  might  be  thought  a  dlsadvantt-ge;  but  really.  I  believe  it 
to  be  an  advantage  In  the  method,  since  It  Is  Important  to  reco[;iiIze  these 
Intermediate  or  overlapping  areas,  p.  316. 

■'Origin   of   the  Rocky   Mountain   Fauna.    The   numerous   fossils    of   Colorado 

bear  testimony  to  the  fact  that  tbe  region  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  has  In  tbe 

past  been   peopled   by  a  highly  remarkable  and  numerous   fauna.     This   fauna, 

however,  does  not  appear  to  be  ancestral  to  that  ot  the  present  day.     Nor  has 

22 


166  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

the  present  fauna  any  specla]  c<Hinectton  with  that  of  the  blgli  reglona  to  the 
tar  South—the  Andes.  In  order  to  arrive  at  Just  conclUBlons,  ft  will  be  need- 
ful to  consider  tbese  points  In  some  further  detail, 

"Alpine  InsecU  of  the  Andes.  The  recently- published  'Supplementary  Ap- 
pendix' to  Mr.  Whymper'B  work  on  his  travels  amoDget  the  Andes  of  Ecuador, 
containing  an  account  of  bis  captures,  Includes  some  very  valuable  Information 
about  the  Inaectfi  of  high  altitudes  In  that  country.  The  late  Mr.  H.  W.  Bates 
has  written  the  Introduction,  In  which  the  following  passages  occur: 

"  'It  there  had  been  any  distinct  element  of  a  North  Temperate  or  South  Tem- 
perate Coleopterous  Fauna  on  tbe  Ecuadorian  Andes  the  collections  he  made, 
InexhauBtlve  though  they  may  be,  would  have  shown  some  traces  of  It;  but 
there  are  none.  A  tew  genera  belonging  to  temperate  latitudes,  though  not 
found  in  the  tropical  lowlands,  do  Indeed  occur,  but  they  are  forma  ot  almost 
world-wide  dlstrlbutliHi  in  similar  climates,  and  there  Is  no  representative  of 
tlie  numerous  characteristic  and  common  genera  of  the  North  or  South,  Even 
tbe  Northern  genera,  more  or  less  abundantly  found  on  the  Mexican  highlands, 
are  absent. 

"  'One  feature  of  tbe  fauna  is  of  great  interest.  It  Is  the  occurrence  of  apterous 
speclea  of  genera  which  at  lower  levels  are  always  winged. 

"  'It  seems  to  me  a  fair  deduction  from  the  facts  here  aet  forth  that  no  distinct 
traces  of  a  migration  during  the  llletlme  of  existing  epecles,  from  North  to 
South,  or  vice  versa,  along  the  Andes,  bave  as  yet  been  discovered,  or  are  dow 
likely  to  be  discovered,' 

"Going  through  the  list  of  insects  taken  at  high  altitudes  in  Ecuador,  the 
following  points  may  be  noted.  There  are  four  new  species  of  Pterottichua 
from  12.000  feet  upwards,  but  they  represent  a  new  subgenus.  There  Is  not  a 
single  Amara  or  Harpalvt,  pp.  31T-31S, 

"The  Glacial  Epoch.  It  can  readily  be  Imagined  that  such  a  state  of  aSalrs 
[Prestwick's  account  of  the  Amer.  Ice  Age]  would  lead  to  the  destruction  of 
a  large  part  ot  the  fauna,  tbe  remainder  either  surviving  along  the  northwest 
ccoat-llne,  or  going  southward  to  the  Gulf  States  and  Mexico.  The  eastern 
fauna,  with  which  we  are  not  now  particularly  concerned,  would  largely  sur- 
Tlve,  owing  to  there  being  a  considerable  area  of  unglaciated  territory  avail- 
able. This,  Indeed,  baa  been  the  case.  The  Callfomlaa  fauna  would  survive 
in  port  to  tbe  north,  and  also  In  lower  California  and  the  western  coast  region 
of  Mexico.  But  the  fauna  of  the  central  region  would  be  almost  annihilated, 
because  the  warm  winds  being  cut  off  by  the  coast  ranges,  the  country  would 
become  extremely  cold,  even  far  down  into  the  higher  lands  ot  M^lco.  Tbe 
avid  region  where  not  actually  glaciated  would  be  a  frozen  deeert,  and  tbe 
migration  of  the  fauna  southward  would  be  far  from  easy. 

"In  the  eastern  province  the  species  ot  the  moist  Northern  atates  would  And 
little  difficulty  Id  migrating  southward  into  the  equally  moist  Southern  States. 
The  Isotherms  would  shift  southward  over  moderately  uniform  country.  In 
the  centr:^  refjion,  bowever,  this  would  not  be  the  case.  There  Is  no  place 
available  to  the  South,  except  tbe  molster  coast  line,  and  tbe  Interior  uplands, 
which  latter  were  undoubtedly  glaciated.  Tbe  great  plains  between  the  Rocky 
Mountains  and  the  Mlsaiaslppl  would  have  made  an  Impaaaable  barrier  for  moat 
species,   preventing   migration   In   that   direction. 

"But,  It  may  be  urged,  at  so-me  point  to  the  southward  the  mountains  or 
central  uplands  would  cease  to  be  glaciated,  and  why  should  not  migration  take 
place  Into  the  neotropical  region.  That  it  did  not  take  place  at  all  events 
beyond  the  isthmus,  la  evidenced  by  tbe  facts  above  quoted  from  Mr.  Whymper's 
'Appendix;'  and  tbe  reason  of  this  no  doubt  is,  that  the  Isthmus  itself  was 
submerged,  and  all  connection  between  North  and  South  America  cut  off.  This 
question  of  the  submergence  of  the  Isthmus  ot  Panama  has  been  fuUy  dis- 
cussed by  various  naturalists,  and  need  not  be  enlar;:ed  upon  here. 

"It  is  Impossible  In  the  present  paper  to  give  more  th^ji  this  bare  outline 
of  the  subject,  but  I  believe  the  conclusion  Is  justified,  that  the  central  region 
fauna  was  practically  stamped  out  during  the  glacial  epoch;  and  that  tbe 
present  fauna  Is  derived  from  the  boreal  faunae  which  survived  to  tbe  mst 
and  to  the  west,  and  the  southern  fauna  which  survived  in  Mexico.  This  view 
seems  to  be  supported  by  a  consideration  of  tbe  present  distribution  of  species, 
as  well  as  by  geological  evidence,  pp.  319-320. 

"Post-Olacial    Developments.    Excepting    the    remnants    ot   the    am^eot  fanna. 


amaeot  fanna, 

,  Google 


ECOLOaY  OF   ISLB  ROYAIlE.  167 

ftll  the  strlctlr  endemic  el«ment  In  tli«  Rocky  MountaioB  ta  of  poit-gJacial 
aigtn — that  ts,  according  to  the  view*  bere  »et  fortli.  ThlB  means  ft  good  deal, 
If  It  1b  actually  the  case,  as  I  believe.  Under  certain  clrcumatances,  Bpecies 
ilerelop  quickly,  and  we  have,  at  least  anumK  insects  and  flowering  plants,  a 
gteaJ.  array  of  new  species  coming  Into  existence.  Such  species  are  closely  al- 
lied to  species  from  which  they  sprang,  and  to  each  other,  so  as  to  give  rise 
to  much  dispute  as  to  their  validity— as  an  example,  cme  may  cite  the  genus 
Jlrffimni*,  whl(±  has  been  very  productive  of  post-glacial  species  In  America. 
In  such  a  case  It  matters  little  whether  we  term  all  these  diverse  Forms  true 
species,  or  eulHipeciee  or  races, — but  to  lump  them  under  a  common  name  ob- 
scures the  facts,  and  leads  us  to  Ignore  one  of  the  moat  Interesting  phenomena 
that  are  presented  to  a  zoologist,     pp.  320-321. 

"Bpeciei- Forming  Area*.  It  Is  well  known  that  the  genera  commonly  accepted 
oj-e  unequal  In  value,  but  most  of  those  whose  validity  could  not  be  queetloned, 
sre  evidently  of  considerable  antiquity. 

"But  the  curious  -thing  Is,  that  these  wide-ranging  genera  are  not  equally 
productive  of  species  over  their  whole  areas,    p.  321. 

"Among  insects,  Arg^nrUt  and  Colitu,  and  several  genera  of  Koctuae,  exhibit 
strong  species -forming  tendencies  in  the  Western  States  of  North  America. 
Catocala.  In  the  Eastern  States,  has  a  tmt  BtKmg  species -forming  area.  And 
BO  on  In  many  other  Instances  niilch  will  occur  to  the  reader.  This  phenomenon 
Is  a  most  remarkable  one,  since  It'  affects  chiefly  old  and  almost  cosmopolitan 
genera,  and  does  not  occur  In  the  same  districts  In  all  the  genera.  Two  cosmo- 
politan genera,  as  we  have  seen,  may  have  their  species-forming  areas  on  op- 
posite sides  of  the  world.  It  would  teem.  Indeed,  as  if  there  were  causes  at 
the  bottom  of  It,  that  we  do  not  yet  understand."  p.  322. 

Fall.  H.  C.  and  Cockerell.  T.  D.  A.  1907.  pp.  lGO-151,  1G2-1G3;  "Comparing 
the  beetles  ai  New  Mexico  with  those  of  Colorado,  one  Is  struck  by  the  large 
amount  of  difference  In  the  lists.  Colorado  haa  not,  of  course,  the  important 
and  characteristic  Middle  Sonoran  element,  but  the  higher  elevations  are  con- 
tinuous from  north  to  south,  and  one  would  expect  a  practically  Identical  fauna. 
Botanical  investigations,  however,  hare  revealed  striking  differences  in  tha 
plants  of  the  northern  and  soatbem  Rocky  Mountains,  and  a  degree  of  ea- 
4)«mlclty  among  those  Inhabiting  the  mountain  ranges  which  Is  quite  nurprlslng. 
The  oaks  {Querent)  are  abundant  in  New  Mexico,  and  have  a  luxuriant  develop- 
ment as  far  north  as  MSnltou.  Colorado,  and  even  beyond.  But  at  Boulder,  and 
north  of  Denver,  generally,  they  are  totally  absent.  On  the  western  slope  they 
go  farther  north,  and  one  species  Just  enters  Wyoming;  but  there  are  none 
at  all  in  Wyoming,  with  this  exception,  and  none  in  Montana.  This  alane  would 
«xplain  the  northward  limitations  to  the  distribution  of  the  numerous  species 
of  Coleoptera  which  are  attached  to  the  oak,  and  various  similar  cases  could 
be  cited.  It  appears  probable  that  the  oaks  were  driven  south  during  the 
Slaclal  period,  and  owing  to  the  nnsultablllty  of  their  seed  for  being  carried 
treat  distances,  have  been  unable  to  recover  their  lost  ground.  Under  these 
circumstances,  the  ample  powers  of  flight  of  certain  of  the  oak  feeding  beetles 
are  of  no  service  for  promoting  migration  northward  of  the  slowly  moving 
line  of  oaks.    pp.  IGO-lGl. 

"It  will  be  noted  that  New  Mexico  shows  a  greater  proportitm  of  non-Colorado 
genera  than  species;  or.  In  other  words,  the  species  found  In  New  Mexico  but 
not  in  Colorado  are  more  likely  to  be  of  non-Colorado  genera  than  In  the 
reverse  case.  This  Is  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  desert  fauna  In  nearly  ail 
groups  is  rich  In  peculiar  genera,  but  these  are  represented  so  far  up  as  New 
Mexico  by  comparatively  few  species.  On  the  other  hand,  the  boreal  fauna, 
-so  strongly  developed  in  Colorado,  Is  largely  characterized  by  the  abundance 
«f  species  of  circnmpolar  genera. 

"In  Colorado  the  eastern  plains  region  has  been  little  searched  for  beetles, 
.and  the  corresponding  region  of  New  Mexico  Is  also  poorly  known.  There  Is 
no  doubt  that  the  plains  will  furnish  many  species  additional  to  the  lists  and 
most  of  these  will  doubtless  be  common  to  both.  The  Following  are  characteristic 
eastern  species  which  are  known  to  reach  New  Mexico,  but  have  not  yet  been 
found  in  Colorado;  Scariteg  gublerraneut.  Clivina  bipuatulata.  Clivina  ferrea 
Atpidogloiaa  tubangulata,  Panagaeng  fasciatus.  Tachvs  xanthopna,  Fteroattchui 
.»^/i,  Dyruutes  tityua,  Anomaia  undttlata,  AHndrUi  teres. 

"The  New  Mexico  list  contains  over  135  species,   Indicating  that  the  eastern 


168  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

fauna  is  really  cToealng  the  plains  to  Bome  extent,  and  not  only, reaching  vb  by 
way  ol  tbe  nortbern  mountains.  There  are  etrong  reasons  tor'  believing  that 
a  considerable  part  of  this  migration  Is  recent,  and  has  been  assisted  Involun- 
tarily by  man,  Thia  affords,  of  couree,  a  strong  argument  in  (avor  of  the 
speedy  exploration  ol  western  regions,  in  order  that  ttkelr  original  fauna  may 
be  ascertained  before  it  Is  unduly  oontAminated  by  introduced  forma.  Fortunate- 
ly For  the  naturaliBts,  the  desert  vlll  not  quickly  or  easily  accommodate  alien 
elements,  but  It  Is  quite  otherwise  In  more  ordinary  localities:  and  as  Perkins 
has  sbown  in  tbe  Hawaiian  Islands  the  result  may  be  destrucUoc  as  well  as 
confusion. 

"Tbe  number  of  species  common  to  New  Mexico  and  Southern  California,  but 
not  known  from  C<^Drado,  is  over  ISO,  indicating  a  wide-spread  southwestern 
fauna;  but  In  general,  the  spedes  of  tbe  Southern  California  caaat  region  are 
.  not  tboae  of  the  Rocky  Honntalns. 

"We  And  over  30  names  of  New  Mexico  species  listed  from  the  Lower  Rio 
Grande,  but  not  in  the  Colorado,  Southern  California  or  District  of  Columbia  lists. 
Such  for  example:  Cincindela  cirpumpfcta,  Cindela  »evera,  DyicMriut  ter- 
minaliM,  PMlopAttga  vtridtcollit,  Selluomorpha  ferruffinea,  Oode§  oupraevM, 
Iichiodontus  ferreua,   LwUtu   texantu,   Agnjua   otbt^ftdiu,  Jiattinocenu   textmva. 

"The  following  are  examples  of  characteristic  touthern  genera  which  readt 
New  Mexico,  but  do  not  enter  Ci^rado:  I'halplus,  Hoioiepta,  SanOalua,  Thrim- 
copvff^.  I^ciu,  PhuioHa,  AphonUlet.  Btrategiu,  Allorhina,  Derobrachut,  TylosiM, 
Dinirohiat. 

"Because  of  tbe  eonsptcuous  place  which  these  southern  genera  occupy  in 
tbe  fanna,  an  entomolosist  arriving  from  tbe  north  or  east  la  very  likely  to 
sasume  that  the  Middle  Scmoran  of  New  Mexico  contains  precisely  tbe  same 
elements  as  the  Liower  Sonoran  of  Arizona  Just  as  It  haa  been  assumed  tbat 
Florida  Is  typically  West  Indian,  becaun  its  numeroue  We«t  Indian  genera 
attnhct  attention,  and  the  alMence  of  innumerable  West  Indian  types  is  not  ao 
readily  ohwrvcd."  pp.   151-1E3. 

Hamilton.  '94  a.  pp.  406-416.  Cf,  also  Fauvel  'S9.  Hamilton  gives  the  fol- 
lowing llsta  of  BpeclcA  Indicative  as  to  their  nativity: 

1.  Speclea  equally  native  In  North  America  and  in  northern  Asia  not  yet 
otaerved  as  occurring  In  Ehirope — 19  qteciea. 

2.  Species  native  In  North  America  and  Northern  Asia  occurring  In  Europe — 
277  species. 

3.  Species  native  in  North  America  and  Europe  not  at  present  known  to 
occur  in  northern  Asia — 50  speciea. 

4.  Species  probably  Introduced  Into  North  America  now  acclimated  occurring 
In  Europe,  and  those  marked  witb  a  ■  likewise  In  Asia.  Many  of  these  are 
cosmopolite,  or  becoming  so,  through  commerce — £16  spectee. 

B.    Species  cosmopolite  or  subcosmopollte. 

Horn,  a.  H.  1872.  pp.  383-384.  "As  is  well  known  to  all  collectors,  varlou* 
species  of  Eleodet  occur  In  great  numbers  In  alt  parts  of  tbe  west  of  our  con- 
tinent, and  the  speclea  themselves  occur  over  a  wide  range  of  territory,  and 
are  not  limited,  as  might  be  Interred  from  their  apterous  condition,  to  ragiona 
of  small  extent.  As  we  pass  from  east  to  west  over  a  given  line,  we  find 
variations  of  average  temperature,  and  of  course  great  differences  in  eJtltude. 
These  two  causes,  combined  with,  of  course,  the  botanical  cbanges.  bave  tended 
to  produce  variations  from  a  given  type  to  a  greater  or  leea  extent  Elvodea 
obscuTa  Say  affords  a  beautiful  llluetratlon  of  tbe  extent  to  which  this  diver- 
gence may  be  carried.  As  a  general  rule  I  And.  not  only  in  Eleodea.  but  also 
In  many  other  genera,  that  Che  higher  the  elevation  or  the  colder  tbe  climate, 
the  rougher  and  more  deeply  sculptured  Is  the  species.  Tbe  smoother  forms  of 
E.  obgcura  may  therefore  be  expected  !n  the  southern  regions  In  which  It  occurs; 
for  example,  var.  di»per»a  is  New  Mexican,  elytra  with  scarcely  any  tiTLOes 
of  atrlae;  var,  obscura,  elytra  distinctly  sulcata,  but  not  deeply.  !e  from  Colorado 
and  Southern  Idaho.  As  we  advance  to  tbe  west  the  elytra  are  more  deeply 
sulcate,  as  in  var.  arala,  while  var.  sulcipennij,  from  nearer  the  Pacific  Coast. 
has  deeply  sulcate  elytra,  with  very  convex  Interspaces.  The  same  variation 
of  sculpture  occurs  In  Calosoma  luxatum,  Say.  wblch  starts  In  Colorado  with 
comparatively  smooth  elytra,  until  In  Vancouver  we  And  the  elytra  covered  with 
tines  of  KranuUr  elevation.^,  forming  the  variety  known  as  C.  pemelioidea. 
Walker,    The  two  extremes  of  each  series  above  noted  appear  to  differ  widely 


ECOLOGT  OF    ISLE  ROYALE.  169 

from  each  other,  and  to  be  sDtltled  to  rank  ae  a  distinct  species.  In  the  fore- 
golng  remarks  reference  only  has  been  made  to  variatloiiH  within  apectflc  limits. 
The  same  law  appears  to  hold  between  different  species.  In  the  genus  Omtia 
the  most  roughlr  Bcnlptured  species  occurs  In  Washington  Territory,  {O.  Deieanii 
Befche)  and  the  amoothest  (O.  laevii,  Horn)  from  near  Vlsolla,  California.  The 
object  of  the  preceding  remarks  Is  to  explain  what  appears  to  be  a  law  of 
variation  for  our  western  slope,  and  thus  cauee  the  nnnaeess&rr  multiplication  of 
species,  founded  on  slight  characters,  to  be  avoided. 

"9pecles  everywhere  Id  our  fauna  appear  to  be  distributed  on  ilnes  of  country 
presenting  as  nearly  as  possible  similar  meteori^oglc  conditions.  Thus  many 
Oregon  forms  extend  southward  Into  California,  sradoalty  seeking  a  higher 
mountain  habitat  as  the  region  becomes  warmer.  Two  species  Illustrate  this — 
Tragotoma  Harrttil  and  Pftry^an-opftlltM  collarit.  Both  extend  tbelr  habitat 
from  Maine  to  California  following  the  cooler  regions  westward  from  Maine 
throneh  the  Canada  and  Red  River  region,  thence  northward  nearly  to  Sitka.  Prom 
the  latter  point  southward  to  Oregon  both  occur  at  ordinary  level,  and  rising 
as  a  more  southern  region  Is  reached  until  at  the  latitude  of  Vlsalla  they  occur 
only  a  short  distance  below  the  anow-llne,  at  an  altitude  of  from  ten  to  twelve 
tbouaand  feet.    p.  383. 

"As  might  be  expected  each  new  region  vlaited  yields  new  MeUHdae  of  the 
genera  Bpicavta  and  Lytta;  in  fact,  each  species  of  Attragalut  has  Its  peculiar 
Lytta;  and  whenever  any  of  that  genus  of  plants  Is  found  In  flower,  an  ac- 
companying visitant  may  always  be  looked  for."  p.  384. 

LeConte,  J.  L.  1850.  pp.  239-Z3S*,  240*:  "First,  the  entire  absence  [in  Lake 
,  Superior  region]  of  alt  those  groups  which  are  peculiar  to  the  American  con- 
tinent. Thus,  there  Is  no  DIcaelus,  no  Paelmachus  among  the  Carablca;  the 
Brachelytra  are  represented  only  by  forms  common  to  both  continents.  Amcmg 
the  Buprestldae  is  no  Brachys;  In  the  Scarabaeldae,  the  American  groups  (except 
Dlchelonycba)  are  completely  unrepresented;  In  brief,  there  Is  scarcely  a  genus 
enumerated  which  has  not  Its  repreaentstlve  In  the  Old  World,     p.  239. 

"Secondly,  the  deficiency  caused  by  the  disappearance  of  characteristic  forma. 
Is  obviated  by  a  large  Increase  of  the  members  of  genera  feebly  represented 
In  the  more  temperate  r^ilons.  and  also  by  the  introduction  of  many  geneni  here- 
tofore regarded  as  confined  to  the  northern  part  of  Europe  and  Asia.  Among 
these  latter  are  many  species  whlch^  can  be  distinguished  from  their  foreign 
snaio^es  only  by  the  most  careful  eiamlnatlou.    p.  239.* 

"When  a  species  In  one  district  is  paralleled  by  another  In  a  different  region 
80  closely  allied  that  upon  a  superficial  glance  they  would  be  regarded  as  the 
aame.  Theae  are  called  aruiiogouK  apeciej;  e.  g..  the  Ollsthaert,  Spondyll,  Bem- 
hidla,  Helophon,  etc.,  etc.,  of  the  preceding  catalogue,  as  c(»npared  with  European 
species. 

"Where  several  species  In  one  region  are  represented  by  several  others  of 
the  same  genus,  which  perform  a  similar  part  in  the  economy  of  nature,  without, 
however,  displaying  any  further  afllnlty  to  each  other.  These  are  called  equivalent 
apeciea:  e.  g,,  moefc  of  the  species  of  Clclndela,  Brachlnus,  Clytus,  Donacla,  etc., 
of  America,  as  compared  with  those  nf  the  eastern  world,     p.  239.* 

'■Nctw'thFtaDdiHB  this  snproilniatlon  to  a  uniform,  9u^n^ct1c  Pti^ilprd.  "-e  atlll 
find  In  these  tmreal  regions,  a  prevailing  character  of  North  American  fauna — 
the  extreme  paucity  of  CurcuHonldae.  The  Donaclae  too,  although  numerous, 
do  Dot  afTord  any  prominent  nareilellsm."     i>.  240*. 

LeConte.  J.  L.  1851.  pp.  249-250,  251,  252,  253-254.  "The  first  fact  observed 
by  the  collector  [In  California],  is  the  very  small  number  of  species  which 
can  be  obtained  at  any  single  locality.  Day  after  day  be  meets  with  a  continual 
repetition  of  a  few  commoa  forms,  with  an  occaaloca]  admixture  of  rare  species; 
so  that  at  the  end  of  two  or  three  months  a  single  locality  will  have  furnished 
hfm  with  about  ZOO  species  of  Coleoptera,  and  a  rather  leas  number  of  other 
orders.  It  will  be  here  remembered  that  the  contrary  is  true  of  the  eastern 
port  of  the  continent,  where  each  locality  furnlehes  a  large  number  of  species, 
extending  over  a  large  area,  and  represented  by  comparatively  few  Individuals. 

"On  removing  to  another  locality,  the  same  thing  Is  again  observed,  with  this 
difference;  tbe  species  of  the  first  place,  even  the  most  abundant,  are  replaced 
by  others,  many  of  which  are  true  representative  species,  approaching  as  closely 
as  those  of  Eastern  America  and  Ehirope;  while  others  belong  peculiarly  to  their 


170  UICHIOA.N   SnRVET,   1&08. 

own  district,  and  ftre  without  sjiy  repreeent&UveB  in  the  other  parts  of  the 
country,    pp.  249-250. 

"It  must  Iw  observed  that  the  locallttes  east  of  the  Sierra  (Vallecitas,  Colorado 
and  Olla)  show  more  reeemblance  in  their  productions  than  the  maritime  regions 
of  California:  the  desert  nature  of  the  country  undoubtedly  iH-oduces  this  effect, 
by  preeentlns  conditions  unfavorable  to  animal  life;  yet  even  In  this  uniformly 
aterlle  tract,  great  differences  are  observed  among  the  smaller  species  whlcb 
abound  only  In  moist  places,    p.  250. 

"The  flrat  point  worthy  of  notice  in  this  list  la  the  extremely  small  number 
[compared  with  Europe]  of  Scarabaef,  Elaterldae  and  Longtcornia:  this  might 
have  been  predicted,  as  these  Insects  derive  their  food  for  the  most  part  from 
large  jdants.  The  Curcullonldae  and  Chrysomelldae  are  not  In  the  same  pro- 
portion as  in  the  more  wooded  countries.  The  saprophagous  Coleoptera.  with 
the  exception  of  Htsterldae.  are  almost  wanting:  and  these  latter  are  not  Id 
larger  prop<»-tion  than  with  us.  Thus  the  only  effect,  so  far  as  observed.  Is 
the  paucity  of  species  In  tribes  tor  which  the  country  alForda  but  little  food. 
The  Staidiylini  and  Carahica  bear  the  same  proportion  to  the  whole,  that  they 
do  with  ub;  while  the  deficiency  caused  by  tbe  small  representation  of  the  tribes 
mentioned  above,  Is  made  up  almost  entirety  by  tbe  Tenebrlonldae,  wbicb,  as 
is  well  known,  are  bnt  slightly  develoi>ed  In  E^astern  America.  The  Malachldae 
tiK  also  in  larger  proportion  than  in  other  parts  of  the  continent."  p.  2G1. 

"The  Tenebrlonidae,  from  being  the  group  most  characteristic  of  the  country, 
might  be  supposed  capable  of  giving  us  the  most  certain  data  with  regard 
to  the  law  of  dlstrlbutJon.  The  great  majority  of  tbe  genera  of  this  tribe  are 
apterous:  and  (tf  those  which  are  not  apterous,  all  the  genera  found  in  Cali- 
fornia are  coamopolitan  (Phalerla,  Platydema,  Helops.  Uloma,  Tenebrio.  TJpIs, 
etc.) ,  except  Blapatlnus.  which  again  occurs  in  tropical  America.  Of  the 
apterous  genera,  only  three  are  found  In  eastern  temperate  America:  two  ot 
these  are  peculiar,  and  one  (Noeoderma)  which  exists  in  Calltomia  is  also 
found  in  Brazil.  Of  this  group,  there  are  in  CalifCH-nla  about  23  genera,  of  whlcb 
6  or  £  extend  into  the  tropics. 

"The  Histerldae,  though  not  in  undue  priqwrtlMi,  exhibit  a  peculiarity:  they 
nearly  all  belong  to  the  genus  Saprlnus,  which.  In  Eastern  America  and  Knrope, 
forms  scarcely  one-fourth  of  the  group. 

"Thus  the  only  manner  in  which  the  insect  fauna  of  California  approaches 
that  of  Europe,  is  in  the  great  abundance  of  apterous  Tenebrlonidae.  But  in 
this  respect  it  does  not  differ  from  a  large  psj't  of  South  America  and  by 
the  very  form  of  these  Tenebrlonidae,  which  bear  no  resemblance  at  all  to  those 
of  Europe,  the  greater  relation  of  the  Californlan  fauna  to  that  of  the  rest 
of  America  is  clearly  proved.  It  will  be  seen,  too,  that  the  resemblance  to 
European  forms  in  tbe  other  tribes  is  only  Indirect,  proceeding  solely  from 
universal  or  zonal  forms,  while  the  greater  relation  le  again  with  the  rest 
of  America.  It  will  moreover  be  seen,  that  while  the  stronger  relation  of  the 
fauna  Is  continental,  yet  a  sufficient  number  of  individual  peculiarities  are 
Introduced  to  prove  that  tt  conHtltutes  a  system  of  Its  own,  bearing  no  relation 
to  that  of  Eastern  America,  except  the  slight  continental  resemblance  proceeding 
Indirectly  through  the  tropics,     pp.  251-262. 

"The  principles  shown  by  the  preceding  analysis  may  be  expressed  briefly  as 
follows: 

1.  Catirornia  constitutes  a  peculiar  zoolc^Ical  district,  with  sufficient  relation 
to  the  other  districts  of  America  to  prove  that  It  belongs  to  the  same  continental 
system. 

2.  This  zoological  district  is  divided  Into  several  sharply  defined  sub- districts, 
having  a  very  cloee  resemblance  to  each  other. 

As  tbe  same  mode  of  distribution  obtains  In  the  group  of  Islands  adjacent 
to  the  western  coast  of  America,  we  are  led  to  believe, 

3.  That  the  local  distribution  of  a  small  number  of  species  is  tbe  characteristic 
of  the  eastern  Pacific  region,  as  the  extensive  distribution  of  a  large  number 
Is  the  prevailing  feature  of  the  Atlantic. 

4.  The  genera  occurring  in.  but  not  peculiar  to.  this  district,  belong  to  two 
classes:  either  they  occur  on  the  Atlantic  slope  of  both  continents,  or  they 
ere  peculiar  to  America,  and  are  also  found  within  the  tropica."  pp.  253-25*. 

1859.  pp.  III-V.  "Before  proceeding  to  consider  tbe  special  material  usedlntho 
preparation   of   this   memoir,   it   will   be  proper  to   give  a  short  sketch  of  the 


BCOLOOT  OP  ISLE  ROYALE.  171 

general  results  thus  I&r  obtained  regardlns  the  geographlcKl  dlHtrlbutfon  of 
Coleopterous  insects  In  the  terrttor;  of  out  republic. 

"The  whole  region  ol  the  Unlteil  States  1b  divided  by  meridional  or  nearly 
meridional  It  nee  Into  three,  or  perhaps  four,  great  zoolt^cal  districts,  dls- 
tfnenlBbed  each  by  numerous  peculiar  genera  and  species,  which,  with  but  few 
exceptions,  do  net  extend  Into  the  contiguous  districts.  The  eastern  one  ot 
these  extends  from  th«  Atlantic  Ocean  to  the  arid  prairies  on  the  west  ot 
Iowa,  Missouri,  and  Arkansas,  thus  embracing  (for  conveDience  merely)  a 
narrow  strip  near  the  sea-coast  of  Texas.  This  narrow  strip,  however,  belongs 
more  properly  to  the  eastern  province  of  the  tropical  zoological  district  ot 
Mexico. 

"The  central  district  extends  from  the  western  limit  of  the  eastern  district, 
perhajiB  to  the  mass  ot  the  Sierra.  Nevada  of  California,  including  Kansas, 
Nebraska,  Utah,  New  Mexico,  Arizona,  and  Texas.  Except  Arizona,  the  entomo- 
It^cal  fauna  of  the  portion  ot  this  district  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  and 
in  fact  that  of  the  mountain  region  proper,  is  enttrelv  unknown;  and  It  is 
very  probable  that  the  region  does  in  reality  constitute  two  districts  bounded 
hy  the  Socky  Mountains,  and  southern  contlnnatlon  thereof. 

"The  western  district  Is  the  maritime  alone  of  the  continent  to  the  Facttlc, 
and   tliua  includes  California,   Oregon,  and  Washington  territories. 

"These  great  districts  are  divided  Into  a  number  of  provinces,  of  unequal 
size,  and  which  are  limited  b;  changes  In  climate,  and  therefore  sometlmea 
distinctly,   sometimes  vaguely  defined. 

"The  Atlantic  district  may  be  divided  Into:  1,  a  northern  province,  Including 
Maine,  Sastern  Canada,  Nova  Scotia,  Newfoundland,  etc.,  and  extending  weet- 
wardly  from  Lake  Superior  to  Lake  Winnipeg  and  Western  Canada,  which  fades 
Insensibly  Into  the  great  Arctic  district;  2,  a  middle  province,  limited  weetward- 
ly  by  the  Appalachian  chain,  and  extending  to  Southern  Virginia;  3.  a  western 
province,  including  Minnesota  and  the  States  of  the  valley  ot  the  Mississippi, 
as  far  as  the  State  of  that  name;  4,  a  southern  nrovlnce.  including  the  States 
south  of  Virginia  and  Kentucky;  G,  a  subtropical  province.  Including  the  point 
of  the  peninsula  of  Florida;  6,  a  subtropical  province,  including  the  sea-coast 
of  Texas. 

"The  Central  district,  aa  far  as  known,  may  he  thus  divided:  1,  a  northern 
province,  comprising  the  regions  north  of  the  Missouri,  the  plains  of  the  Sas- 
katchewan, etc.;  2,  a  middle  eastern  province,  divided  Into  two  subprovlnces, 
including:  a,  Kansas,  and  Nebraska;  b,  northeastern  New  Mexico;'  3,  a  south- 
eastern iH-ovtnce,  Including  Texas,  with  the  exception  of  province  six  of  the 
Atlantic  district;  4,  a  southwestern  province.  Including  the  upper  part  of  the 
volley  of  the  Gila;  and  6,  a  south-southwestern  province.  Including  the  lower 
Gila  and  Colorado.  The  unexplored  portions  of  this  district  will  Indicate  middle 
western,  and  northwestern  provinces,  or  perhaps  the  necessity  ot  constituting 
with  them  and  the  southwestern  province  a  district  to  be  called  the  Interior 
district. 

"The  Pacific  district  may  be  divided  as  follows:  1,  a  hyperborean  province, 
consisting  of  Sitka  and  the  neighborhood;  2,  a  northern  province,  including 
Eastern  Oregon  and  Washington;  3.  a  middle  province.  Including  Cali- 
fornia probably  as  far  south  as  Santa  Barbara;  4,  a  southern  province. 
Including  California  from  Santa  Barbara  to  San  Diego,  extending  to  the  crest 
of  the  Sierra.  Southern,  or  lower  California  Is  also,  perhaps  only  In  part,  a 
province  of  this  district;*  but,  as  yet,  no  collections  of  magnitude  have  been 
received  therefrom.  Other  provinces  will,  from  the  peculiar  method  of  distri- 
bution of  species  In  that  portion  of  America,  be  defined  when  more  full  collec- 
tions are  mode,  but  at  present  cannot  he  indicated. 

"At  the  north,  the  Atlantic  and  Central  districts  seem  to  merge  Imperceptibly 
together,  about  the  valley  of  the  Athabasca,  and  Winnipeg  rivers,  and  finally 
to  disappear  In  the  limited  Arctic  fauna;  the  hyperborean  province  of  the  Pacific 
district  also  tares  into  this  Arctic  fauna,  without,  however,  losing  Itself  so 
perfectly  In  the  northern  provinces  of  the  other  districts.  We  have  thus  evi- 
dence that  the  American  Arctic  distrkt  may  be  divided  into  two  provinces,  an 
eastern  and  a  western, 

•  "  A  revr  ipedea,  collecled  by  John  XantuB,  Esq..  at  C>p«  San  J.ucaB,  though  all  new,  Indlntte  a 
girsler  resembhtnn  to  Ihe  EauDS  ol  the  lonei  Colonido,  than  to  that  of  marUlme  CaUlomla  l.  IIUb 
province  may  therefore  bo  (ound  evBntu«Hy  to  belong  to  .the  interior  distrlol."  OvIC 


172  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

"At  the  south,  the  Atlantic  dlBtrlct  merges  through  Florida  Into  the  Carlbbeao 
tropical  province,  aod  through  maritime  Texas  into  the  Mexican  lower  eastern 
province.  In  the  same  direction  the  Central  district  merges  Info  the  Mexican 
upper  or  central  province,  and  the  Interior  district,  towards  the  Guir  ol  Cali- 
fornia, Into  the  Mexican  western  province.  Regarding  the  southern  afllllatl<MiB 
of  the  PaclSc  district  wo  know  ^solutely  nothing;  scarcely  a  single  species 
found  at  San  Diego  had  been  found  In  Mexico. 

"The  method  of  distribution  of  species  In  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  districts, 
as  already  observed  b7  me  In  various  memoirs,  Is  entirely  dlfFerent.  In  ttie 
Atlantic  district,  a  large  number  of  species  are  distributed  over  a  large  extent 
of  country;  many  species  are  of  rare  occurrence,  and  In  passing  over  a  distance 
of  severaJ  hundred  miles,  but  small  variation  will  be  found  in  the  species 
obtained.  In  the  Pacific  district,  a  small  number  of  species  are  confined  to  a 
small  region  of  country:  most  species  occur  In  considerable  numbers,  and  in. 
trardllng  even  one  hundred  miles.  It  la  found  tttat  the  most  abundant  speclea 
are  replaced  by  others,  In  many  Instances  very  slmflar  to  them;  these  small 
centers  of  distribution  can  be  limited  only  after  careful  colIectlooB  have  been 
made  at  a  great  number  of  localities,  and  it  is  to  be  hapeA  that  this  very 
Interesting  and  Important  subject  of  inveetlgation  may  soon  receive  proper  at- 
tention from  the  lovers  of  science  on  our  Pacific  shores. 

"In  the  Central  district,  consisting,  as  It  does  to  a  very  large  extent,  of 
deserts,  the  distribution  seems  to  be  of  a  moderate  number  of  species  over  a 
large  extent  of  country,  with  a  considerable  admixture  of  local  species;  such 
at  least  seems  to  be  the  result  of  observations  In  Kansas,  Upper  Texas,  and 
Arizona."  pp.  III-V. 

1860.  pp.  2.4.  "The  distribution  of  species  In  the  northern  part  of  the  region 
which  furnishes  the  materials  for  this  report  [Pacific  R.  R.  Report],  presents  no 
remarkable  phenomenon.  As  In  other  northern  lands,  certain  tribes  like  Adephaga, 
Staph yllnidae,  and  Elatertdae  assume  a  greater  predominance  in  the  fauna,  from 
the  fading  out  of  the  groups  more  characteristic  of  warmer  climates,  while  a 
greater  number  of  species  are  found  common  to  both  continents.  Of  these  latter, 
about  one-half  are  found  on  the  Atlantic  slope  of  America,  while  the  other  half 
have  not  yet  occurred  there. 

"The  number  of  species  occurring  on  both  sides  of  America  is  also  largely 
increased  In  these  northern  regions,  but  with  the  exception  of  Epiphania  comutiu 
and  PriognatHua  monilicornia,  the  genera  of  such  speclea  are  distributed  on 
both  continents. 

''On  proceeding  southwards  to  Oregon  (and  Washington  Territory,  wblch  Is. 
for  purposes  of  convenience,  always  Included  when  Oregon  Is  referred  to  In 
these  pages),  similar  phenomena  may  be  observed,  though  on  a  diminished 
scale.  The  species  of  the  eastern  continent,  not  found  on  the  Atlantic  slope 
of  America,  have  entirely  vanished,  and  of  the  species  common  to  both  sides 
of  both  continents,  but  four  remain.  The  number  of  species  common  to  the 
Atlantic  and  Pacific  slopes  oF  America  has  greatly  diminished,  and  among 
them  Haplocltile  pygmaea,  Ligyrtta  gibboaus,  Alaus  myopa,  and  Jficrorhopala 
vittata  are  the  only  representatives  of  America  genera. 

"Finally  reaching  California,  the  species  common  to  the  two  continents  are 
reduced  to  SUpha  lapponica  and  Dermestea  vulpinu*.  the  species  common  to 
Atlantic  and  Pacific  America  have  not  diminished  absolutely  in  number,  but 
from  the  more  complete  and  copious  fauna  known  to  their  relative  proportion 
is  much  lessened.  Among  them,  however,  are  found  but  few  which  extend 
their  range  to  ttie  Atlantic  States  proper,  while  the  greater  proportion  are  not 
found  east  of  Kansas.  Of  American  genera,  Ambljichila  cylindriformia,  Lacftno- 
phorus  eleganttilus,  and  Earmetopon  a  (rum  are  found  In  Kansas,  or  New 
Mexico,  while  Ligyrua  gibboaua  and  two  apeclee  of  Diabrotica  also  extend  to 
the  Atlantic," 

"In  Russian  America  the  genera  seems  to  follow  to  a  certain  extent  the 
course  already  pointed  out  of  the  species,  that  is:  the  genera  common  to  both 
continentB  have  a  much  greater  relative  proportion,  and  among  them  a  by  no 
means  insignificant  part  have  not  yet  been  found  In  Atlantic  America;  but 
as  some  o(  them  are  ctiaracterlstic  of  high  northern  latitudes,  there  Is  reason 
to  believe  that  the  number  will  be  reduced  by  more  thorough  explorations  in 
Labrador.  Newfoundland,  and  the  regions  near  Hudson's  Bay. 

"Of  genera  confined  to  America,  but  six  or  seven  occur  In  Russian  America;  of 


ECOUXJY    OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  173 

tbese  but  three.  PiiBtodactyla,  Eplpbanls.  and  Prlognathua.  have  been  <1etected 
on  tb«  Atlantic  slope.  Prlatodactyla  might.  Indeed,  be  for  the  present  excluded 
from  the  list  of  peculiar  American  genera,  for  two  reasons:  1.  a  certain  number 
of  epeclee  classed  by  Dejean.  with  Agonum,  and  remarkable  for  having  but 
two  dorsal  punctures,  are  In  reality  Prlstodactylae.  and  until  the  species  ot 
Siberia  are  thorouglily  revised,  we  are  warranted  In  supposing  that  some  of 
tbem  may  also  be  Included:  but,  2,  tiecause  the  distinctions  between  Calathus 
and  Prlstodactyla.  as  ob»ierved  by  Lacordalre.  are  hardly  sufflclent  to  warrant  the 
retention  of  the  latter  genus. 

"In  Oregon  the  eastern  genera,  n'ot  found  in  the  Atlantic  States,  have  dimin- 
ished in  number,  but  among  them  occurs  Caillslhenes.  which  is  Found  In  Kansas. 
The  number  of  American  genera  has  largely  Increased,  even  with  our  limited 
collections;  ot  them  14  are  found  In  the  Atlantic  States,  2  In  Kansas,  while 
3  are  peculiar  to  Pacific  America:  of  the  14  found  in  the  Atlantic  States. 
Haplochlle,  Dlchelonycha,  Anelastes.  and  Alaus  are  the  oniy  ones  not  found 
within  the  tropics. 

"In  California  the  Renern  of  the  eastern  continent  have  increased  absolutely. 
from  more  eitenslve  collections,  over  those  found  in  Oregon,  but  do  not  attain 
the  same  relative  proportion  as  those  found  In  Russian  America;  among  them 
Is  one,  Tryssus.  a  genus  heretofore  known  only  from  Madagascar,  and  Is  thus 
far  the  sole  representative  of  the  tribe  of  Scarabaeldae,  to  which  It  belongs 
on  this  continent. 

■•The  number  of  American  genera  has  greatly  Increased,  partly  by  the  ad- 
dition of  genera  found  within  the  tropics,  and  partly  by  the  Introductlou  of  a 
few  peculiar  genera;  the  most  remarkable  addition,  however,  is  that  of  eighteen 
genera  of  Tenebrlonidae,  of  which  but  two.  Noeoderma  and  Blapstinus.  extend 
Into  the  Atlantic  States,  while  only  four  others  extend  into  Kansas  or  New 
Mexico.  The  genera  found  in  the  Atlantic  States,  and  not  la  the  tropics,  are 
Thai  plus,    Axinopalpus.    Dlchelonycha.    Anelastes,    Perothops.    and    Melanactes. 

"Another  fact  ot  great  Interest  is  the  distribution  of  species  within  narrow 
limits  observed  in  California.  I  am  not  able  to  exhibit  the  results  In  a  tabular 
form,  as  collections  have  not  been  made  with  minuteness  at  a  sufficient  number 
of  localities  to  give  any  definite  results,  but  I  can  merely  state  my  own  ex- 
perience, that  but  few  species  occurred  at  more  than  one  place,  and  call  at- 
'  tention  to  the  fact  that,  In  every  collection  made  at  a  fresh  locality,  a  large 
proportion  of  new  species  is  found,  while  In  Oregon,  at  points  equally  distant 
from   each  other,   a  greater   uniformity   la    seen. 

"The  analysis,  therefore,  conducts  to  the  same  results  announced  by  me. 
in  1S51,  at  the  meeting  of  the  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science;  the  fourth  proposition  was,  unfortunately,  announced  In  too  absolute 
terms,  as  the  only  two  genera  then  known  to  me.  Tbalplus  and  Ailnop&lpus, 
were  not  considered  na  of  sufficient  importance  to  modify  the  result.  Thalplus, 
Indeed,  is  to  closely  allied  to  Diaphorus,  that  we  may  well  expect  some  o(  the 
species  ot  the  latter  genus  to  belong  to  It,  while  Axinopalpus  is  by  many  en- 
tomologists not  separated  from  Dromius.  The  other  four  American  genera  com- 
mon to  California  and  Atlantic  America,  not  found  in  the  tropics — Dlchelonycha, 
Anelastes,  Perothops.  and  Melanacies— upon  which  I  am  now  obliged  to  modify 
the  assertion,  were  subsequently  obtained. 

"The  four  propositions  mentioned  by  me  in  the  essay  mentioned  are: 

1.  California  constitutes  a  peculiar  zoological  district,  with  sufDceient  rela- 
tion to  the  other  districts  of  America  to  prove  that  it  belongs  to  the  same 
continental  system. 

2.  This  zoological  district  Is  divided  into  several  sharply-defined  sub-districts, 
having  a  very  close  resemblance  to  each  other. 

As  the  same  mode  of  distribution  obtains  in  the  groups  ot  islands  adjacent 
to   the   western   coast  of   America,   we   are  leii   to  believe — 

3.  That  the  local  distribution  of  a  small  numlwr  of  species  is  the  character- 
istic of  the  eastern  Paclfle  region,  as  the  extensive  distribution  ot  a  large 
number  Is  the  prevailing  feature  of  the  Atlantic  basin. 

4.  The  genera  occurring  In,  but  not  peculiar  to,  this  district  belong  to 
two  classes;  either  (with  the  exception  of  Ergatesl  they  occur  on  the  Atlantic 
Slope   of   both    continents,   or.   If    peculiar    to    America,   they   are    (with    the   few 


exceptions   above   noted)    also   found    within    the   tropics." 
This  paper  is  accompanied  by  four  tables  as  folloi 


.CocH^le 


17i  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

I.  Genera  Common  to  the  Eastern  and  Western  Continents. 

II.  Genera  Peculiar  to  America. 

III.  SpecleB  Common  to  the  Atlantic  and   Pacific  Slopes  of  the  Continent. 

IV.  Species  Pounrt  In  Russian  America  and  In  the  Eastern  Continent,  not 
Introduced  and  not  Found  In  Atlantic  America. 

1862.  p.  336.  "Some  of' the  more  conspicuous  and  peculiar  species  are  des- 
cribed below:  enough  has  been  stated  to  show  that  the  aiBnItles  of  the  fauna 
[of  Lower  California]  are  with  that  of  the  region  extending  from  the  Colorado 
Desert  across  to  the  Rio  Grande  valley,  thereby  confirming  the  results  obtained 
by  Prof.  Balrd  and  Mr.  Cope  from  the  study  of  the  vertebrata  collected  by  Mr. 
Xantus. 

"The  limited  tiumber  of  speclee  oF  these  two  classes  precludes  the  possibility 
of  the  occurrence  of  many  new  rorms  In  the  region  here  treated  of;  but  in  the 
number  of  peculiar  species  of  the  much  more  extensive  class  of  insects  seen 
!n  Mr.  XantuE'  collections,  we  recognize  that  lower  California  constltuteB  one 
or  more  provinces  of  the  Interior  district,  aa  denned  by  me  In  the  Introduction 
to  my  synopsis  of  the  Coleoptera  of  Kansas  and  New  Mexico. 

"The  preponderance  of  Tenebrlonidae,  both  in  genera  and  species  seen  In  the 
fauna  of  Upper  California  and  Arizona,  has  here  been  partially  deetroyed.  Tbe 
genera  which  survive  are,  however,  such  aa  are  already  known  from  the  last 
mentioned  region.  None  of  those  peculiar  to  maritime  California  have  as  yet 
occurred."  p.  336. 

1878.  pp.  447-448.  "The  elevated  interior  region  of  North  America  presents 
peculiarly  favorable  opportunities  for  the  study  of  some  of  the  most  interestlog 
questions   connected   with   geographical    distribution    of  animals   and   plants. 

"If  the  materials  at  our  handa  be.  as  Indeed  they  yet  are,  a  very  scanty 
representation  of  the  organic  forms  now  living  in  that  part  of  the  continent, 
they  are,  at  least,  sufficient  to  Indicate  the  direction  in  which  Inveatigatlons 
should  be  pushed,  In  order  to  arrive  at  definite  and  final  results. 

"The  peculiarly  favorable  circumstances  to  which  1  chlefiy  refer  at  present 
are  dependent  on  the  following  points  in  tbe  development  of  the  region:  — 

1st.  The  gradual  enlargement  of  the  land-surface  at  the  expense  of  tbe 
circumambient  seas  during  the  latest  Mesozolc  periods. 

2d.  Tbe  gradual  elevation  of  the  middle  of  the  continental  mass  during  post- 
Cretaceous  times,  so  as  to  greatly  modify  the  climate  In  respect  to  both  moisture 
and  temperature.  These  changes  have  been  ao  gradual,  that  we  may  say  with 
certainty  (excluding  the  local  eruptive  phenomena,  which  were  more  numerous, 
but  not  remarkably  different  from  those  of  tbe  present  age)  there  has  been 
no  great  or  paroxysmal  disturbance  destructive  of  the  land -surface  In  the 
elevated  plains  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  since  the  deposition  of  our  early 
Cretaceous  strata  (Daliota  Group). 

3rd.  While,  during  tbe  Glacial  epoch,  the  valleys  of  the  mountains  were 
filled  with  glaciers  of  moderate  size,  and  the  line  of  permanent  Ice  streams 
and  fields  brought  to  a  much  lower  level,  there  was  an  absence  of  the  extensive 
ice  sheets  and  fiooded  areas,  which  in  Eastern  America  destroyed  entirely  the 
terrestrial  organized  beings  of  the  former  period. 

"It  must  be  inferred  from  the  first  and  second  of  these  premises  that  tbe 
new  land  exposed  by  this  gradual  development  of  the  continent  received  Its 
colonies  of  animals  and  plants  from  the  conterminous  older  land-surfaces  in 
various  directions,  and  that  the  subsequent  elevation  of  the  continental  mass, 
by  which  the  moisture  was  diminished,  caused  a  later  invasion  of  the  territory 
by  those  genera  and  species  which  are  characteristic  of  arid  regions. 

"We  may  also  conclude,  from  the  third  premise  that  the  glacial  displacement 
of  species  In  the  Rochy  Mountains  has  been  much  less  than  in  Eastern  America, 
and  that  a  very  small  area  would  be  left  bare  of  life  on  the  return  to  a  normal 
temperature;  consequently,  the  previous  occupants  of  the  higher  mountains 
would  again  return  to  their  former  domain,  increased  by  refugees  from  the 
circumpoiar  continent  of  temperate  climate,  driven  southward  by  tbe  Increas- 
ing cold, 

"Such  being  the  case,  it  ought  to  be  possible,  with  well-prepared  lists  of  the 
lnse<'ts  of  the  plains  and  mountain  regions,  by  comparison  with  Hats  of  tbe 
local  fauna  of  other  zoological  districts  of  the  continent,  to  ascertain,  with 
reasonable  probability,  the  invaalona  from  different  directions  by  which,  in  the 
first   place,   the   newly  emerged   land   was   colonized;    and.,  in   the  second  place. 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROYALE.  175 

the  modifications,  either  in  distribution  or  In  structure,  which  have  aubsequently 
occurred. 

"I  h&ve  on  an  other  occasion'  expressed  my  belief  that  the  study  of  the 
distribution  of  existing  Insects  could  give  much  information  concerning  former 
topographical  and  geographical  chajigea  in  the  surface  of  the  earth.  I  then 
gave  several  examples  to  sbow  how  the  distribution  of  species  peculiar  in  their 
habits  and  structure  conflrmed  what  was  already  known  by  geological  investiga- 
tion of  tbe  gradual  evolution  of  the  middle  part  of  the  continent.  I  will  now 
advance  the  additional  thesis,  that  we  may  obtain  somewhat  deflnlte  Informa- 
tion of  the  sequence,  extent,  and  effects  of  geological  changes  in  tbe  more  recent 
periods  by  a  careful  study  ot  tbe  insect  fauna  in  Its  totality." 

1878b.  pp.  470-471.     Includes  lists  oC  Florida  Coleoptera: 

1.  Florida  species  also  found  In  the  Antilles. 

2.  Common  to  Florida  and  Mexico  and  partly  found  in  Texas. 
?..     Common  to  Texas,  Arizona,  and  southern  California. 

4.  Anomalous  common  to  Florida  and  South  America. 

5.  Bistrlbutlon  of  anomalous  species. 

Hurray,  A.  1870.  pp.  7,  8,  11-12,  32.33.  3G-37,  38,  "The  position  I  am  about 
to  maintain  then  is,  that,  subject  to  modifications  to  be  afterwards  mentioned,  all 
the  Coleoptera  in  the  world  are  referable  to  one  or  other  of  three  great  Htlrpes. 
These  three  no  doubt  originally  sprung  from  one  stlrpe,  and  acquired  their  dls- 
ttnguishing  features  by  long-continued  isolation  from  each  other,  combined  with 
changes  In  their  conditions  of  life.  But  now  we  have  three,  and  only  three, 
great  strains,  sometimes  Intermingling  with  each  other,  sometimes  underlying 
or  overlying  each  other,  and  sometimea  developed  into  new  forms,  but  always  dls- 
tlorulshable  and  traceable  to  one  or  other  of  tbe  three  sources. 

"These  are — 1,  the  IndoAfrlcan  stirps;  2,  tbe  Brazilian  stlrpe:  and  3,  what, 
for  want  of  a  better  name.  I  shall  call  the  microtypal  stlrpe,  in  allusion  to  tbe 
general  run  ol  the  species  composing  It  being  of  a  smaller  size,  or,  more  strictly 
si>eaking,  not  containing  such  large  or  consplcucnis  insects  as  tbe  others.  It  la 
not  altogether  a  satisfactory  name,  because  the  stlrps  does  contain  some  large 
species,  and  it  is  not  peculiar  to  it  to  abound  In  small  ones.  But,  taken  as  a 
wb(de,  its  ingredients  are  smaller  and  more  modest  in  aK>earance  than  those 
of  the  others.  Tbe  fanna  and  flora  of  chit  own  land  may  be  taken  as  its  type  and 
standard,    pp.  7.8. 

"Tbe  iDdo-African  stlrps.  as  Its  name  Impllee,  Inhabits  Africa  south  of  the 
Sahara,  and  India  and  China  south  of  the  Himalayas,  also  the  Malayan  district, 
tbe  Indian  archipelago,  and  the  New  Guinea  group.  This  range  is  less  modified 
by  the  general  Introduction  ot  foreign  elements  than  that  of  tbe  next  stirpa. 

"The  Brazilian  stlrpe  Inhabits  South  Central  America  east  of  the  Andes,  and 
north  of  the  River  Flatte,  and  furnishes,  moreover,  a  large  share  In  the  constl- 
tntloB  of  North  America,  but  has  also  received  in  return  a  very  perceptible  tinge 
from  the  microtypal  stlrps. 

In  the  microtypal  stlrps  I  include  the  fauna  of  Europe,  Asia  north  of  the 
Himalayas.  Baalern  North  America,  bo  tar  as  not  modllled  by  the  Brazilian  element, 
and,  what  has  lees  of  this  strain,  the  whole  of  North  west  America,  California, 
part  of  the  Mexican  fauna,  Peru,  Chill,  the  Argentine  Republic  south  of  Tucuman, 
Patagonia.  Tlerra  del  Fuego.  Polynesia,  New  Zealand,  and  Australia,    p.  8. 

"Let'uB  now  turn  to  the  three  great  stlrps,  and  pass  each  of  them  in  review, 
trace  their  course,  and  determine  their  limits.  1  shall  begin  with  the  micro- 
typal Btirpe  (with  which  we  are  most  familiar).  It  is  the  most  extensive  of  the 
whole,  being  distributed  over  the  whole  world  with  tbe  exception  of  the  In- 
dian, African,  and  Brazilian  regions;  and  even  they,  from  various  exceptional 
causes,  have  a  greater  or  less  tinge  of  it  In  their  faunas.  It  contains  some 
minor  faunas,  and  these,  again,  a.  number  of  subfaunas.  The  Buropeo. Asiatic 
region  Is  one  of  these  minor  faunas,  and  of  it  the  Atlantic  islands,  the 
Mediterranean,  and  tbe  Monoglian  are  subraunas.  Taken  as  one  fauna, 
the  Buropeo-Aslatlc  extends  from  the  Azores  esst  to  Japan,  the  whole 
of  that  vast  space  being  inhabited  entirely  by  the  same  type  and,  for  the  most 
part,  by  the  same  species,  a  few  only  dropping  off  here  and  there,  and  being  re- 
placed by  others  of  the  same  general  character,    p.  11. 

1.  TnuiB.  Am.  Assoc.  Adv.  Science.  187S,  Detroit.  Prealdenl  's  address,    [f/,  l,f  Ccaitf ,  76.1 


yCoogle 


176  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

"The  Buropeo- Asiatic  Beetle- fauna'  does  not  stop  even  at  Japan;  It  paBses  over 
Into  North  America  by  Behrlng's  Straits,  or  rather,  I  should  say.  It  Is  found  In 
North  America  on  the  other  side  of  BehrlDg's  Straits.  In  Russian  America  we 
have  a  fresh  crop  of  Europeo- Asiatic  form,  genera  and  species;  and  here  another 
noteworthy  circumstance  presents  Itself.  It. is  generally  taken  for  granted  that 
there  Is  a  unftorm  homoeeneous  arctic  fauna  which  estends  all  around  the  arctic 
circle.  It  Is  so,  and  It  Is  not  so.  It  Is  bo  on  the  large  scale,  but  not  so  on  the 
small.  The  arctic  fauna  Is  subject  to  the  laws  of  spreading  by  continuity  and 
stoppage  by  barriers  just  the  same  as  any  other  fauna.  I  have  elsewhere  endeav- 
ored to  show  that  the  mammalian  fauna  of  Greenland  la  Europeo -arctic  as  dls- 
tlnguBhed  from  Amerlcano-aretlc.  I  maintain  that  the  homogeneity  of  a  fauna 
depends  on  other  causes  than  uniformity  of  condition  of  life  within  its  limits. 
I  cannot  doubt  that  if  there  had  been  an  isolated  communication  between  the 
£ndo-African  districts  and  the  North-Pole,  we  should  there  have  had  a  fauna 
related  to  and  developed  out  of  that  fauna,  and  wholly  distinct  from  the  other 
faunas  ot  the  arctic  regions.  It  is  continuity  of  soil  or  freedom  of  intercommuni- 
cation which  has  produced  the  present  uniformity  of  fauna  in  the  arctic  regions; 
but  were  minor  interruptions  exist,  or  old  barriei-s  or  conditional  equivalent  to 
a.  barrier  formerly  existed,  there  are  also  subdivisions  In  the  character  of  the  fauna. 
and  in  the  position  of  these  minor  divisions  we  see  the  operation  ot  these  laws 
and  are  able  to  trace  the  existence  and  former  position  of  the  barriers.  Thus 
we  find  two  minor  subfaunas  In  Arctic  America,  an  eastern  and  a  western 
one.  Two  causes  may  have  produced  these.  One  of  these  may  have  been 
the  sea  which.  It  can  i-carcely  be  doubted,  formerly  existed  between  the 
Oulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Polar  Sea,  in  the  Hue  of  the  Missouri  and  Mackenzie 
rivers;  another  may  have  been  that  the  ground  now  occupied  by  one  at  these 
subfaunas  was  under  water  at  a  later  period  than  the  other,  so  that  it  was 
peopled  at  a  different  date  from  it.  Probabiy  both  contributed  to  produce  the 
present  arrangement  of  the  subfaunas  to  the  east  and  west  of  the  Mackenzie  Kiver. 
That  there  was  a  barrier  there,  and  that  that  side  was  still  supplied  with  the  same 
general  type  (though  with  mjnor  devlatioas).  is  to  be  explained  by  their  having 
received  their  species  from  the  same  general  stock,  but  coming  to  It  from  dif- 
ferent directions,  the  one  from  the  east,  the  other  from  the  west.  That  the  minor 
differences  to  which  I  allude  are.  in  the  case  of  North  America,  to  he  referred 
this  cause,  and  not  to  mere  gradual  Increase  of  variation  arlaln;;  from  Increase  of 
distance,  seems  to  be  a  legitimate  Inference  from  the  fact  that  while  the  whole 
of  the  north  of  North  America,  without  exception,  belongs  to  the  Europeo- Asiatic 
type,  there  are  a  number  of  European  genera  which  occur  in  North-east  America, 
and  not  In  the  North-west,  and  a  few  tchich  occur  in  the  Xorth-west,  and  not  in 
i/orth-east  America,     pp.  32-33. 

''Returning  to  the  Asiatic  terminus  ot  the  microtypal  stirps,  let  us  now  en- 
deavor to  trace  its  further  couFse.  The  genus  Blaps.  which  Is  a  characteristic 
feature  in  the  Coleopterous  fauna  ot  Central  Asia,  will  furnish  us  with  the  means. 
It  may  be  taken  as  a  representative  case  applicable  to  other  species  also,  although 
it  is  the  most  striking  instance  which  occurs  to  me.  Upwards  of  100  dltfereot 
species  ot  Blaps,  out,  of  a  total  ot  about  150.  have  been  described  as  Inhabttiag 
the  country  between  Southern  Russia,  Mongolia,  and  Mantchourla.  Now  If  we 
cross  to  California  in  continuation  of  the  same  line  we  have  not  Blaps,  but  we 
have  Blaps's  brother  and  he  baa  been  a  twin.  We  have  Eleodes.  Its  perfect 
counterpart  and  representative;  and  it  is  to  be  observed  that  while  the  faciei 
of  the  si^ecies  actually  inbablllni:  California  is  entirely  that  of  Biaps.  a  number 
4>t  species  which  are  found  in  Kansas  and  on  the  eastern  flanks  ot  the  Rocky 
Mountains  have  a  somewhat  different  facles:  and  I  should  add  that  the  suppoal- 
-tion  that  these  are  stra^Klers  from  the  Calirornian  shores  is  strengthened  by  the 
fact  that  the  genus  does  not  occur  to  the  east  of  the  Missouri;  other  Heteromeroua 
forms,  reminding  us  of  Mediterranean  and  Asiatic  species,  occur  in  California, 
and  the  whole  of  the  north. west  of  America  has  a  greater  preponderance  of  the 
microtypal  stirps  than  perhaps  occurs  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,    pp.  SG-ST. 

"Next  step  to  the  south  of  Calltornla  comes  Mexico.  It  also  is  lari;ely  supplied 
with  Eleode»:  and  although  some  of  the  showiest   and   finest   non-microtypo!   Col- 

■■  '  1  Has  unulilc  in  my  *(li-UKrniililinil  l>i.«rilnuion  of  MummuiN'  lo  pili.[it  Dr.  ttclalerN  t*rmlnoloKy 
Of  Pulup.i relic,  Ntoarctfr.  Ai..  I)i'('jii.si-  ui-  rliil  noi  atntv  iii  the  ncleiil  nnil  1  mils  oC  oiir  n^lonii:  iiixt 
now,  of  rourw.  In  tlilN  piinpr  1  iiiii  iIIH  Ifss  iln  so.  'an  a  nrllii'ItMl  i-rfi-n  of  mv  hyiiu*bF»is.  if  it  be 
Bounil.  niu»t  be  lo  mill  furtliiT  lireak  down  tliclr  limlti^  niiU  iksiruy  i\kii  iiolldily.'- 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALB.  177 

eoytera  In  the  whole  world  come  rrom  Jlexlco.  they  have  no  bearing  on  tbiB  part 
of  my  inquiry;  for  they  cotae  From  parts  of  Mexico  which  are  In  direct  com- 
manlcatlon  with  another  stirps,  the  rich  Coleopterous  fauna  of  Brazil  and  Vene- 
zuela: and  the  vast  multitude  of  small  European-looking  species  which  occur 
on  the  high  lands  and  western  side. la  quite  suEBclent  for  my  purpose.  The  col- 
lectiotta  made  by  TruquI  In  Mexico  sbow  this  thoroughly  microtypel  character 
in  a  very  marked  way,  Staphyllnidoua  genera,  eueh  as  Falaffria.  HoTiuilota,  ftc., 
abounding.  Mexico,  being  a  sort  of  halfway  houEe  between  Europe  and  Australia, 
might  be  expected  to  contain  species  both  from  the  north  and  the  south  which 
have  got  thus  far.  Eleodia  Is  an  Instance  of  this  from  tbft  north,  Phitonthua 
another;  both  reach  as  far  as  Chili,  but  not  Into  Australia.  Zophera*.  on  the 
other  hand,  is  an  instance  of  a  species  wbicb  occurs  in  Australia,  and  runs  up 
into  Mexico,  where  It  Is  In  strength,  and  goes  even  a  little  further.  Mexico  may, 
indeed,  have  been  its  starting-point,  but  the  connexions  and  relations  of  It  and 
the  allied  genus  Notodendron  decidedly  indicate  a  separation  between  the  eastern 
and  western  type  of  both;  and  the  weateru  type  extends  into  Australia  and  New 
Caledonia."    p.  38. 

Schworr.  E.  A.  1888.  pp.  166-167,  168-170,  171-172.  "After  a  study  of  this 
peculiar  fauna  of  Key  West  which  I  also  found  on  many  other  localities  farther 
north  and  which  constitutes  the  eemitroplcal  fauna  of  Florida,  I  have  come  to 
the  conclusion  that  it  is  entirely  of  West  Indian  origin,  and  that  the  region  I  shall 
hereafter  circumscribe  as  Semltropical  Florida  does  not  contain  any  endemic 
forms.  In  other  words,  the  distinctive  fauna  of  Southern  Florida  Is  a  permanent 
colony  of  West  Indian  forms,  much  more  numerous  In  species  than  it  has 
hitherto  been  supposed;  the  number  in  Colcoptera  alone  amounting,  accord- 
ing to  a  very  low  estimate,  based  upon  my  collection,  to  at  least  300  species  not 
yet  in  our  catalogues,     pp.  ieG-167. 

"Before  entering  on  a  discussion  of  the  character  and  extent  of  this  West  Indian 
colony  in  Florida  it  seems  worth  while  and  Instructive  to  give  a  glance  at  the 
Bouth-western  extremity  of  North  Ameiiica  where  our  fauna  comes  also  In  contact 
with  a  semltropical  fauna.  The  great  faunal  regions  known  as  Nearctic  and 
Neotropical  are  connected  or  divided  by  the  Central  American  fauna  which  from 
the  nature  of  the  conditions  participates  in  the  characters  of  Iwtb  regions,  but 
Is  more  nearly  allied  to  the  latter  than  to  the  former.  It  is  again  divided  lata 
the  fauna  of  the  Central  American  continent  and  the  Insular  fauna  of  Central 
America,  more  commonly  called  the  West  Indian  fauna;  ttaeee  two  faunal  regions 
t)eiag  related  to  each  other  in  the  same  degree  as  Is  the  fauna  of  our  Atlantic 
slope  to  that  of  the  Pacific  slope.  At  the  zone  of  contact  between  the  North 
American  fauna  and  that  of  Mexico  the  conditions  are  as  follows:  The  ocean 
current  along  the  PaclHc  coast  of  North  America  runs  from  north  to  south,  thus 
facilitating  the  spread  of  more  northern '  species  southward.  It  loses  its  force 
and  disappears  before  reachfng  southern  California  and  thus  the  Nortb  American 
fauna  along  the  coast  does  not  come  into  contact  with  that  of  the  Mexican  coast. 
On  the  mainland  we  find  between  California  and  the  largest  portion  of  Arizona 
on  the  one  side  and  Mexico  on  the  other,  a  broad  tract  of  the  most  barren  and 
sterile*  country  which  proves  to  be  a  moat  effectual  barrier  between  the  two 
faunal  regions.  Farther  east,  and  more  especially  along  the  Rio  Grande,  a  complete 
intermingling  of  the  two  faunas  takes  place  In  such  a  way  that  species  of  ail  fam- 
ilies participate  In  this  intermingling.  It  is  thus  impoaslble  to  decide  whether  a 
collection  of  insects  comes  Irom  Texas  or  the  State  of  Tamaullpas,  or  whether 
it  comes  from  southern  New  Mexico,  from  south-eastern  Arizona,  or  from  Sonora. 
The  Morrison  collection,  for  Instance,  has  been  distributed  among  North  American 
entomologists  as  coming  from  south  eastern  Arizona  and  la  worked  up  in  the 
'Blologia  Contrail  Americana'   as  coming  from   Sonora,   Mex.     pp.   167-163. 

"In  looking  for  the  original  home  of  this  colony  of  West  Indian  insects  and 
plants  we  have  been  hitherto  too  much  accustomed  to  consider  the  island  of  Cuba 
88  the  only  place  from  which  tbls  immigration  has  taken  place.  In  the  task  ot 
determining  my  South  Floridlan  Coleoptera  it  was  found  over  and  over  again 
that  these  Immigrants  may  have  been  described  not  only  from  Cuba,  but  from  any 
other  of  the  West  Indian  islands,  or  from  the  Central  American  continent  south 
of  Yucatan,  or  even  from  Columbia  and  Venezuela — in  other  words  from  all 
parts  of  Central  America  which  come  under  the  Influence  of  the  Gulf  stream.  As 
can  be  seen  from  any  physical   atlas,   the   warm  equatorial  current  enters  the 

'BiolQ(!ia  Cenrrali-AmiTirGnj,'  "     Trans.  Amec.  Ent.  S^C 


178  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

Caribbean  Sea  througli  the  Windward  Islands  and  attaining  by  this  contractlMi 
a  considerable  velocity  forms  the  Gulf  Stream  which  flows  between  the  southem- 
moet  chain  of  the  West  Indies  and  the  Leeward  Islands  and  etrlkes  the  Central 
American  continent,  flowing  northward  along  the  coast.  Deflected  by  the  project- 
ing peninsula  of  Yucatan,  the  stream  turns  eastward  and  reachea  the  coast  of 
Cuba  and  the  southernmost  part  of  Florida.  Thus  the  West  Indian  colony  of 
Insects  In  Florida  may  come  from  any  part  of  this  vast  area  swept  by  the  Gulf 
stream,  although  the  largest  proportion  comes  of  course  from  Cuba  since  this 
Island  is  the  nearest  to  Florida.  This  Immigration  by  the  aid  of  the  Gulf  stream 
explains  the  following  Interesting  phenomenon  In  geographical  distribution.  We 
have  seen  that  Insects  from  the  coast  of  Central  America  aouih  of  Yucatan  may 
occur  In  Southern  Florida;  but  the  same  species  often  had  the  power  of  exteudlng 
their  geographical  distribution  northward  on  the  Central  American  mainland 
through  Mexico,  thus  reaching  the  south-eastern  limits  of  the  United  States. 
Certain  species  may  occur,  therefore,  in  the  United  States,  In  Western  Texas 
or  South-eastern  New  Mexico  and  In  Southern  Florida,  being  however, 
^sent  In  the  intervening  Southern  States,  viz:  Eastern  Texas,  Louisiana, 
Alabama,  Georgia,  and  Northern  and  Central  Florida.  This  curious  distribution 
"has  never  been  pointed  out  so  far  as  I  am  aware  but  can  be  exempllfleil  by  nnm- 
■erouB  species,  not  only  among  the  Coleoptera  but  also  other  Orders  of  Insects. 

"The  distance  between  Cuba  and  Florida  Is  not  very  great,  the  current  of  the 
Gulf  stream  Is  very  swift,  and  logs  and  other  debris  swept  out  to  sea  from  the 
rivers  of  Cuba  may  reach  the  coast  of  Florida  within  three  or  tour  days;  from 
Yucatan  in  about  double  that  time.  It  is  evident  that  within  that  short  time  ail 
^stich  insects  may  safely  be  carried  from  the  West  Indies  to  Florida  which.  In  the 
Imago  or  preparatory  stages,  live  under  bark,  or  within  the  wood  of  tre*«,  or 
within  seeds  and  similar  sheltered  conditions,  or  whose  eggs  are  firmly  attached 
to  trees  and  covered  with  viscous  liquid.  But  It  is  evident  that  this  sea  voyage 
la  too  long  tor  all  such  Insects  as  do  not  live  In  such  sheltered  positions.  As  a 
consequence,  all  odephogous  Coleoptera,  further  all  those  living  under  old  leaves, 
in  the  ground,  In  very  rotten  wood  and  similar  places,  and  finally  moat  of  the 
Chrysomelidae  which  lay  their  eggs  either  onto  the  leaves  or  in  the  ground  are  not 
brought  over  from  the  West  Indies.  There  are,  therefore,  no  West  Indian  Cara- 
bidae,  Lampyrdae,  Btaphj/Unidae  and  other  rhypophagous  Clavlcorn  families  and 
very  few  West  Indian  Scarabaeidae  and  ChTyiomelidae  to  be  found  In  Southern 
Florida.*  This  Is  a  meet  character Istic  feature  of  the  semltroplcal  Coleopterous 
fauna  of  Florida,  strikingly  contrasting  with  the  state  of  atlatrs  In  the  south- 
western extremity  of  North  America.  I  have  stated  before  that  along  the  Texan 
and  New  Meilcan  frontier  there  Is  a  perfect  intermingling  of  the  North  and  Central 
American  faunas  so  that  It  Is  Impossible  to  decide  whether  a  miscellaneous  col- 
lection of  Coleoptera  comes  from  Western  Texas  or  the  adjacent  parts  of  Mexico. 
A  miscellaneous  collection,  consisting  only  of  about  100  species  but  made  pro- 
miscuously in  semltroplcal  Florida  can  at  a  glance  be  distinguished  from  a  similar 
collection  made  In  Cuba  or  any  other  part  of  the  West  Indies.  Further,  the  pecu- 
liar composition  of  this  fauna  at  once  precludes  the  assumption  that  any  agencies 
other  than  the  current  of  the  Gulf  stream  could  have  been  active  In  assisting  the 
Immigration  from  the  West  Indies,     pp.  1S8-170. 

"Most  of  the  more  southern  Keys  are  covered  with  semltroplcal  forest,  i.  e. 
forest  covered  with  composed  of  West  Indian  trees,  while,  as  I  stated  before,  the 
true  Floridian  fauna  and  flora  are  almost  entirely  absent.  These  Islands  are,  there- 
fore, by  no  means  favorable  to  a  study  of  the  relation  of  semltroplcal  to  the  true 
Floridian  fauna.  However,  a  stay  of  a  few  weeks  on  the  shores  of  Biscayne  Bay 
fully  sufficed  to  settle  this  question.  Here,  as  well  as  on  the  mainland  tartlier  south 
and  the  northernmost  Keys  (Key  Largo  and  Elliott's  Key)  the  Floridian  flora 
largely  Infringes  upon  the  semltroplcal  forest  and  rednces  the  same  to  smaller 
or  larger  Island-like  patches  lying  close  to  the  shore  or  occupying  similarly  isolated 
patches  on  the  shore  of  the  Everglades  and  the  few  Islands  In  the  Everglades. 
The  bulk  of  the  mainland  Is  covered  by  pine  woodst  with  an  undergrowth  com- 

"  >  The  absence  of  freeh  naler  In  the  coral  regloii  of  the  keys  and  1h«  mainland  south  of  Miami 
River  necesailates  the  nljaenci!  of  iiytitcidae  and  mosi  other  aqunclc  or  semi  aquatic  funlUes.  Even 
the  Everglades  and  [he  HTers  draining  the  same  at  the  northern  «id  of  Biscayne  Bay  aeem  to  be  al- 
most destitute  of  aquallc  Coleoptera. 

"  t  While  it  is  true  tliat  the  pine  of  Soulbrm  Florida,  Pi'nus  Cubeiuii.  is  also  of  West  Indian  orl- 

Sn.  its  distribution  in  Florida  is  quite  dlffprtnt  from  in*  tfst  of  the  serailropical  tlMa  Uid  Its  Intro- 
ictlon  Is  pTldt'ntly  of  very  andcnt  date.  Its  fauna  do>.!i  not  difttr  from  that  of  the  Yellow  Pine, 
(P.  ralaf.ris)." 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROVALE.  179 

posed  almost  entirely  of  true  Plorldlan  planU.  There  are  further  vast  stretches 
of  what  la  called  'the  pralrla.'  I.  e.  land  quite  recently  formed,  partly  by  the  accuinu- 
latlan  of  seaweeds  swept  asbore  by  the  waves,  aud  partly  by  the  advance  of  the 
Mangroves.  This  prairie  is  covered  witb  the  same  herbaceous  vegetation  wblcta 
we  see  la  similar  places  in  Central  Florida  and  does  not  contain  a  single  semi- 
tropical  plant.  Even  the  hammock  Is  Invaded  by  several  Florldian  trees:  the 
Live  Oaks,  several  Palmettos,  the  Hackberry  and  others  make  their  appearance 
and.  oo  higher  ground  we  find  plenty  of  Pertea  carolineniis.  Now  on  all  these  trees 
In  the  pine  woods  and  on  the  praJrle,  In  short  wherever  there  Is  the  Florldian 
flora  we  meet  the  true  Florldian  Insect  fauna  whereas  the  semitroplca)  fauna  Is 
coi'fined  to  the  semltroplcal  forest.*  This  fact  once  recognized,  It  becomes  evi- 
dent that  the  northward  extent  of  this  fauna  is  identical  wltb  that  of  the  semi- 
tropical  forest,  a  fact  fully  borns  out  by  subsequent  experience."    pp.  ITO-lTl. 

"I  desire  to  emphasize  here  once  more  as  one  of  the  principal  characteristics 
of  this  Bora  and  fauna,  that  north  of  the  Everglades  they  nowhere  appear  Inland 
but  always  close  to  the  shore.  Even  along  the  inner  bank  of  the  Indian  River 
there  are— or  rather  were— hut  a  very  few  spots  covered  with  semltropical  forest, 
viz:  on  the  mouth  of  the  St  Lucie  and  Sebastian  Rivers,  at  the  southern  end  of 
Herritt's  Island  and  perhaps  some  others;  but  they  are  now  mostly  destroyed  by 
cultivation."    p.  172. 

1890.    pp.  1S6-1ST. 

"The  mountain  ranges  In  America  run  in  the  direction  from  north  to  south, 
and  the  colonies  of  circumpclar  Insects  upon  their  summits  have  thus  been  able 
to  preserve  their  connection  and  specific  Identity  with  the  arctic  forms;  whereas 
In  Europe,  where  the  mountain  ranges  run  from  east  to  west,  the  alpine  colonies 
have  generally  undergone  changes  and,  by  Isolation,  lost  their  specific  identity 
with  the  arctic  species.  There  Is,  therefore.  In  the  Old  World  an  abundance  of 
distinct  alpine  forms,  none  of  which  are  Identical  with  North  American  species; 
while  we,  on  our  high  mountains,  have  but  few,  If  any,  alpine,  but  more  arctic 
forms,     pp.  18S-187. 

"Among  the  strictly  circumpolar  Coleoptera  the  predaceous  famlltes  predom- 
inate over  the  phytophagous  families;  the  Carabidae.  Dytiaddae,  BtaphyHnidae, 
and  Coccinellidae  are  well  represented,  the  Cliryaomelidae  and  Rbpnchoptiera  are 
tolerably  well,  and  the  Ccrambycidae  and  Etateridae  are  poorly  represented.  The 
Bitprestidae  are  absent  although  this  family  contains  numerous  boreal  species 
In  every  region.  The  phytophagous  Bcarabaeidae  do  not,  or  barely  extend  into 
the  arctic  regions;  the  coprophagous  8carat>aeidae  (Apliodiua)  are  well  repre- 
sented there,  still  none  of  them  (with  the  exception  of  Aphodiua  ruflpes,  which 
doubtfully  belongs  here)  is  on  the  list  of  circumpolar  Coleoptera,"    p.  187. 

"Species  not  Belonging  to  the  Circumpolar  Founo.^This  division  compriaea 
endemic  species  of  probably  intratropical  origin,  which  have  spread,  by  natural 
dispersion,  into  the  temperate  zone  of  North  America."    p.  1S7. 

1890a.    pp.  170-171. 

"Turning  now  to  the  bulk  of  the  species  in  the  list  [St.  Augustine,  Florida]  we 
find  that  they  consist  of  the  usual  admixture  of  more  or  less  widely-distributed 
species  and  true  Florldian  forms,  the  proportion  being  but  little  different  from  that 
of  the  other  localities,  e.  g.,  Crescent  City,  Enterprise,  Taropa.  .  ,  But  the  St, 
Augustine  list  contains  another  element,  viz:  species  belonging  to  the  faunal 
region  lying  directly  north  of  eastern  Florida  and  comprising  lower  Georgia,  the 
lower  Carollnas,  and  eastern  Virginia.  This  Is  an  ill-dehned  region  with  very 
few.  or  no,  peculiar  spectes,  and  only  characterized  by  a  certain  combination  of 
a  number  of  southern  species.  The  existence  of  this  faunal  region  will  become 
evident  to  any  one  who,  on  a  summer  day,  goes  from  here  [Washington]  down 
to  Fortress  Monroe,  Va.  The  difference  between  the  Washington  fauna  and  that 
ot  Fortress  Monroe  will  then  be  found  quite  striking.  Of  this  fauna  I  noticed 
about  twenty  species  in  the  St.  Augustine  list  not  previously  known  from  Florida." 
pp.  170-171. 

1901.    pp.  1.  2,  3. 

"Still,  southwestern  Texas  belongs,  at  least  as  far  as  the  Insects  are  concerned, 
to  the  lower  Sonoran  fauna,  of  which  it  forms  a  marked  subdivision,  but  wltb 
marked  affinities  to  the  austrorlparian  region. 

*  There  la.  in  ■ddltion.  Id  Southern  Florida  a  maritime  fauna  of  Ktnitroplcii  cturacter,  but  the 
.1 ■  — .J 1 —  .i.„  .jmg  (iboul  13  la  Coleoptera)  Is  ao  anal!  that  it  Is  hardlr  worth 

^.    itent  la  atUI  uQcerlain  but  It  la  aate  lo  say  that  on  the  eastern  coast 

hbeyond  Uoaqiillo  lalel  at  New  Bmynia." 


ISO  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

"Collections  made  at  Laredo.  San  Dl€go.  Corpus  Chrlsli  and  In  the  lower  Nueces 
river  valley  prove  that,  with  (ew  exceptions,  no  tropical  forms  occur  In  that  aectioo, 
and  the  trip  on  the  stage  from  Alice  to  BrownBville  shows  that  the  character  of 
the  coiintr<'  does  not  change  southward  until  the  black  alluvial  SO'II  of  the  delta 
of  the  Rio  Graude  Is  reached.  Here,  within  the  bends  of  the  river,  as  well  as 
along  the  various  bacUwaterp  and  old  river  arms  (resocaa)  which  dlsaect  the  delta. 
Isolated  areas  or  strips  of  larger  or  smaller  extent  are  covered  with  a  dense  forest 
having  thick  underKrowth  of  varied  shrubbery  and  ft  rich  vegetation  of  lower 
plants,  the  like  of  which  Is  not  Keen  at  any  other  place  In  Southwestern  Texas. 
The  forest  jungles  (In  Florida  tbey  would  be  called  hammocks)  are  the  home 
of  the  semltropical  irsect  fauna  of  Texas,  which,  so  tar  as  known  to  me,  has, 
previous  to  the  year  1S9&.  never  been  Investigated  hy  any  entomologist,  since  even 
many  of  the  most  abundant  species  are  either  entirely  new  or  not  yet  recorded 
from  the  United  States.  If,  confining  myself  to  Coleoptera  found  by  Prof.  Town- 
send  or  mysuil  near  Brownsville,  I  mention  the  genera  Agra.  Daavdactj/lua,  Phya- 
orhinus,  Achryton.  Onaphalodes.  AmpMonycha.  MegasceJis,  Plectrotreta.  Brachy- 
coryne,  Liilronvchns.  Polypria  (quite  a  number  of  others  are  not  yet  determined, 
or  u nd escribed  I .  no  one  can  deny  the  existence  of  a  semitroplcal  insect  fauna  along 
the  north  bank  of  the  lower  Rio  Grande.  The  number  of  species  compoalnt;  this 
fauna  Is  very  lariie:  In  Coleoptera  alone  I  estimate  that,  after  proper  exploration, 
between  300  and  400  specie  will  be  added  to  our  lists. 

As  stated  above,  these  semitroplcal  thickets  occur  In  Isolated  patches  In  the 
lowest  parts  of  the  delta;  wherever  the  ground  is  a  little  more  elevated,  the  usual 
mesqulte  and  spiny  chaparral,  liberally  Interspersed  with  Opuntlas.  malre  their 
appearance,  and  with  ibem  the  general  fauna  of  southwestern  Texas." 

Scudder,  1895.     pp.  27-28. 

■'The  Post-pliocene  deposits  have  proved  the  most  prolific  with  thirty-two  species, 
though  here  only  seven  families  are  represented,  of  which  the  Carabldae  and 
Staphyllntdae.  but  especially  the  former,  very  largely  predominate.  The  greatest 
Interest  attaches  to  the  interglaclal  locality  near  Scarboro'.  Ont,,  which  alone  has 
yielded  twenty-nine  species,'  and  is  the  largest  assemblage  of  Insects  ever  found 
In  such  a  deiwsit  anywhere.  These  clays  have  been  studied  and  their  fossils  col- 
lected by  Dr,  G.  J.  Hlnde.t  who  sets  forth  the  reasons  why  he  regards  them  as 
interglaclai.  tying  as  they  do  upon  a  moralnal  tilt  of  a  special  character  and  over- 
tain  by  till  of  a  distinct  kind.  The  elytra  and  other  parts  of  beetles  found  by  him 
represent  Ave  families  and  llfteen  genera;  they  are  largely  Carabldae.  there  tieing 
half-a-dozen  species  each  of  Platynus  and  Pterostlchus,  and  species  also  of  Patro- 
bus,  Bembldlum,  Lorlcera  ai<d  Btaphrus. 

The  next  family  In  Importance  is  the  Staphyllnldae.  of  which  there  are  Ave 
genera.  Geodrctmtcus,  Arpcdlum.  Bledius,  Oxyporus  and  Lathroblum,  each  with  a 
single  species.  Hydrophiltdae  are  represented  by  Hydrochus  and  Helophorus,  each 
with  one  species,  and  the  Chrysomelldae  by  two  species  of  Doaacia.  Finally  a 
species  of  Scolytldae  must  have  made  the  borings  under  the  hark  of  a  Juniper 
described  below. 

"Looking  at  the  Bsseml^lage  of  forms  as  a  whole  and  noting  the  distribution  of 
the  species  to  which  they  seem  to  be  most  nearly  related,  they  are  plainly  IndtgMi- 
ous  to  the  soil,  but  would  perhaps  be  thought  to  have  come  from  a  somewhat  more 
nortliern  locality  than  that  in  which  they  were  found;  not  one  of  them  can  be 
referred  to  existing  species,  but  the  nearest  allies  of  not  a  few  of  them  are  to  be 
sought  In  the  Lake  Superior  and  Hudson  Bay  region,  while  the  larger  part  are  In- 
habitants of  Canada  and  the  northern  Cnlted  States,  or  the  general  district  in 
which  the  deposit  occurs.  In  no  single  Instince  have  any  special  afflnities  been 
found  with  any  characteristically  southern  form,  though  several  are  most  nearly 
allied  to  species  found  there  as  well  as  in  the  north.  A  few  seem  to  be  most  nearly 
related  to  Pacific  forms,  such  as  the  Elaphrus  and  one  each  of  the  species  of 
Platynus  and  Pterostlchus.  On  the  whole,  the  fauna  has  a  boreit  aspect,  though 
by  no  means  so  decidedly  boreal  as  one  would  anticipate  under  the  circumstances." 
pp.  27-28.     Cf.  Scudder  '94. 

[Jlke,   H.     1902.     p.   3. 

"The  appearance  of  northern  and  southern  forms  are  here  controlled  [Wash- 

'■•This  slati'mpnl  includo  tour  sppcfcs  (Hy. 
milani,  and  Brmhtdium  IntamfMumi.  found  b\ 
Krlp,  in  riiiy  Ix-ds  v^ry  slnillor  lo  those  found 


ly  Google 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE.  ROY  ALE.  181 

Ington,  D.  C-l  by  the  chang<>  of  seasoas.  ao  in  early  aprlUR  we  may  always  evpect 
more  northern  types,  wblle  in  mldBuntmer  the  southern  ones  predominate." 

VanDjfke.  E.  J.     1901.     pp.  198199. 

''The  California  faunal  region  proper  Includes  practically  all  the  lowlands  of 
the  State,  the  fertile  valleys  of  southern  California  ani)  the  extensive  valleys  of 
tbp  Sao  Joaquin  and  Sacramento,  the  lesser  valleys  along  the  const  and  the  foot 
hills  bordering  them.  The  fauna  prevailing  throughout  Ihese  portions  are  bo 
affiliated  with  Sonoran  forms,  narticularly  towaril  the  south  as  to  warrant  the 
designation  of  such  portions  as  Sonoran  Bub-reglons.  and  by  the  extension  of 
these  forms  into  the  foot  hills  where  they  have  Interbred  with  Boreal  types 
through  a  series  of  aged,  genera  characterlatlc  of  both  parent  regions  have  l>een 
evolved.  Otnu*.  Brenrms  la  cychrld  subgenus).  Mplriiis.  Fromecognattiua.  FJeo- 
roma,  and  Rosalia  with  others  while  more  or  lese  related  to  adjacent  northern 
forms  probably  developed  from  a  rich  circumpolar  fauna  under  the  Influence  of 
adaptation  to  environment.  Omut  occurs  rather  generally  throughout  the  state, 
and  Metriut  and  Framecognathvi  ilmllarly  but  less  frcQitertly  in  the  moisl  timber 
^elt  of  the  Coast  Range,  although  an  Alpine  variety  of  Metriun  is  found  In  tha 
Sierras,  and  Brennua  Is  confined  to  the  coast.  Many  other  examples  of  restricted 
location  could  be  given.  In  earlier  periods  California  was  more  Isolated  partic- 
ularly from  the  Sonoran  region  and  northern  Influences  prevailed.  Then  such 
genera  as  Omua  and  Piecoma  became  first  established.  Subsequently  a  few  sotith- 
»rn  forms  such  as  Contontia  and  Its  congeners  gained  access.  These  constituted 
the  old  California  fauna,  but  when  the  southern  Isolation  ceased,  followed  by  the 
invasion  of  Sonoran  forms,  a  new  and  later  fauna  was  developed.  This  IbMry 
Is  partially  supported  by  the  fact  that  in  the  Islands  off  Lbe  coast  and  In  certain 
still  Isolated  areas  are  faunas  which  are  largely  sui  generii.  and  typical  of  the  old 
California  fauna  above  described." 

Wlckham.  H.  F.     1902.    pp.  221-222. 

"The  phenomena  of  distribution  in  Colorado  are  of  much  Interest.  Within  a 
radius  of  a  few  miles  we  may  And  assemblages  of  species  representing  at  least 
three  distinct  faunae.  The  Qrst,  that  of  the  great  plains  surrounding  the  moun- 
tains, is  marked  by  a  great  development  of  wingless  or  Imperfectly  winged  forms, 
probably  largely  Invaders  from  the  south  where  we  may  suppose  thnt  the  arid 
deserts  first  made  their  appearance  and  where  this  characteristic  feature  Is  more 
In  evidence  among  the  beetles.  Good  examples  may  be  found  among  the  Meloldae, 
Tenebrlonldae  and  eplgaeal  Rhyncbophora.  Occasionally  these  forms  leave  their 
natural  haunts  and  extend  for  long  distances  up  the  river  valleys.  Thus  Eleodes 
may  sometimes  be  met  with  at  altitudes  exceeding  ten  thousand  feet.  As  we  enter 
the  timbered  country  on  the  higher  foot-hilln  and  lower  mountain  aides,  we  en- 
counter a  fauna  which  while  not  unmixed  with  species  that  have  come  up  from 
the  plains,  shows  a  strong  affinity  to  the  life  about  our  Great  Lakes.  Higher  etlll 
— that  is  to  say  from  about  eight  thousand  to  nine  thousand  feet,  according  to 
the  exposure,  presence  or  absence  of  near-by  snow-fields  and  so  on — we  meet  with 
many  species  of  genera  still  more  boreal  in  habits.  We  may  mention  Nebria  with 
its  many  species,  usually  taken  along  the  coldest  mountain  streams,  the  flattened 
Bembidia,  and  the  large  Aphodii.  Above  timber  line  the  peaks  sustain  a  few 
beetles  which  seem  to  be  of  arctic  origin,  left,  probably,  by  the  retreating  Ice- 
sheets  of  the  Glacial  period. 

"I  cannot  agree  with  Prof.  Cockeretl*  who  claims  that  the  Glacial  epoch  would, 
for  the  time  l>elng  result  in  the  almost  complete  extermination  of  the  Insect  fauna 
of  Colorado  and  the  ad.^acent  table'lands.  He  assumes  that  the  arid  region 
'where  not  actually  glaciated  would  be  a  frozen  desert,'  something  which  I  think 
Is  not  Indicated  by  such  geological  evidence  as  we  poeaess.  The  glaclatlon  of  Col- 
orado was  apparently  not  particularly  extensive.  Neither  does  it  seem  likely  that 
the  western  Ice-sheet  went  so  tar  south  aa  San  Diego;  at  any  rate  the  indications 
aeem  to  show  that  along  the  highlands  of  Southern  California  only  the  loftier 
mountains  were  glaciated  at  all.  Today  great  glaciers  exist  In  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  well-wooded  districts  rich  In  animal  life.  The  same  phenomenon  may 
have  occurred  during  ancient  times." 

1893.     pp.  232-233. 

*'  1.  That  the  fauna  of  southern  Alaska  Is  less  closely  related  to  our  alpine, 
northern  Inland,  or  north-east  coast  faunae  than  Is  that  of  the  Stikine  Canon  or  of 
Glenora. 


*  TnUlMctfoni  of  tlie  American  Enlomolocical  SoclBly.  Vol.  XX.  p.  319. 


lyCoogle 


J82  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

2.  Tha,t  the  Stlkloe  Canon  fauna  la  more  doeety  allied  to  that  of  tbe  Nortb  and 
East  tban  1b  that  of  the  coast,  and  about  tbe  same  aa  la  that  of  Glenora. 

3.  That  the  chief  relations  of  all  three  are  In  the  direction  of  Lake  Superior: 
with  larger  lists  this  affinity  might  turn  to  the  Rocky  Mountains,  especially  in 
the  case  of  Oleaora. 

Kegardlng  the  afflnltles  of  the  faunae  of  the  Coast,  the  Stlhlne  Canon  and 
Olenora  among  themselves  we  And: 

4.  That  one-sixth  of  the  Coast  species  extend  up  to  the  Canon  while  only  one- 
thirtieth  reach  Qlenora. 

6.  That  the  last-named  fauna  is  much  more  closely  allied  to  tbat  of  the  Canon 
that  to  that  of  the  Coast;  nearly  one-fourth  of  the  Glenora  species  are  found  also 
at  the  Canon  while  only  about  one-eleventh  extend  to  the  Coast. 

6,  That  the  fauna  of  Qlenora  Is  apparently  Ie«e  related  to  that  of  the  Coast 
than  to  that  of  the  interior  or  the  East. 

"Reference  to  tbe  accompanying  maps  will  throw  some  ll|:ht  on  the  problems 
here  suggested.  Olenora  Is  on  tbe  Inside  of  the  great  Coast  Ranges  while  the 
Little  Canon  is  regarded  by  Dr.  Dawson  as  marking  the  bead  of  the  old  salt-water 
Inlet  that  has  been  silted  up.  This  would  account  for  much  In  tbe  distribution  ot 
the  species  In  question.  The  climate  of  the  country  above  tbe  Canon  Is  also  much 
dryer  and  with  greater  extremes  of  heat  and  cold  than  on  tbe  Coast.  Aside  from 
the  Influence  of  the  barrier  of  the  Coast  Mountains  interposed  between  faunae 
whl<4i  mi^t  tend  to  Intermingle,  tbe  change  of  plants  consequent  upon  ditference 
in  climate  on  opposite  sides  must  also  have  Its  effect  on  the  Insects  dependent 
on  vegetation  tor  food."    pp.  232  233. 

190G.    p. '46. 

"My  proposed  explanation,  correlating  tbe  briefly  outlined  geological  history  with 
tbe  facts  offered  as  to  the  distribution  of  the  Insects  [shore  Insects  of  the  Great 
Basin],  may  be  summarized  as. follows: 

1.  The  shore  beetles  under  consideration  are  confined  to  the  Great  Basin  or  its 
immediate  borders,  and  have,  In  general,  no  allies  in  other  districts  from  which 
they  could  have  been  recently  developed.  This  In  itself  is  strong  presumptive 
evidence  that  they  are  endemic,  not  Immigrants. 

2.  Within  the  Basin,  recent  conditions  are  such  that  the  present  distribution 
cannot  possibly  be  a  matter  of  modern  origin.  The  small  lakes  now  remaining 
in  the  Basin  are  separated  by  great  tracts  of  arid  desert,  impassable  to  beetles 
depending  on  a  moist  soil  for  their  development  and  food  supply.  The  nature  of 
these  Insects  is  such  that  they  cannot  be  carried  long  distances,  as  eggs  or  larvae, 
on  tbe  feet  of  birds  or  other  animals. 

3.  Ancient  conditions,  as  shown  by  the  geological  history  through  the  Pleisto- 
cene, were  favorable  to  tbe  diffusion  of  shore-loving  insects  through  the  Basin, 
because  of  tbe  much  greater  extension  of  the  lakes  In  those  times. 

4.  The  Insect  most  thoroughly  studied,  Cicindela  echo,  is  entirely  cmiflned,  in 
Its  present  range,  to  the  neighborhood  of  lakes,  froni  which  their  size  and  the 
presence  of  nearby  sprlnga,  may  be  presumed  to  have  lasted  in  some  form  from 
a  remote  i>eri<id — even  through  times  of  severe  drought.  Other  littoral  forms 
follow  the  same  general  law,  though  some  of  them  are  less  sensitive  to  local  con- 
ditions, 

"Prom  these  facts,  I  think  we  can  come  to  but  one  conclusion — the  heetlee  under 
consideration  are  types  that  have  inhabited  the  Basin  during  the  Pleistocene  times 
vhen  the  shores  oi  the  great  lakes  stretched  over  hundreds  of  miles  of  what  are 
now  desert  sauds.  As  the  lakes  shrunk  during  times  of  drought,  the  Insects  fol- 
lowed the  retreating  beaches.  Those  which  attached  themselves  to  bodies  of 
sufficient  size  or  permanence  were  able  to  suHtain  their  specific  existence,  while 
auch  as  were  dwelling  on  the  edRea  of  pools  of  a  transient  nature  were  extermin- 
ated altogether.  Thus  we  have  tbe  phenomenon  of  discontinuous  distribution, 
presented  not  by  one  species  alone  but  by  an  entire  assemblage."  p.  46.  Cf. 
Wlckham,  1904. 

2.  Comments  on  the  Preceding  Qeneralizations  and  on  the  Literature 
(if  Geographic  Distribution,  The  American  authors  who  have  given 
special  attestion  to  tbe  study  of  the  geographic  distribution  of  onr 
beetle  fauna  are  few  iu  number,  but  they  are  very  repreaentatiTe  men. 
First  and  foremost  is  l>r.  J.  L.  LeConte,  the  most  remarkable  and 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  183 

"exceptional"  of  American  entonio)oj;ist».  A  man  wlio,  had  he  devoted 
himBelf  to  subjects  of  more  general  iaterest  than  insects  or  to  more 
general  problema  would,  in  all  pi-obability,  bave  been  generally  re- 
cognized as  one  of  the  greatest  of  American  naturalists.  Other  students 
who  have  devoted  much  attention  to  distribution,  although  none  have 
given  as  much  attention  to  the  general  principles  of  the  problem  as  did  Le- 
Conte,  are:  Schwarz,  Hubbard,  Hamilton.  Wickham  and  Cockerell. 
Then  there  are  several  authors  of  local  lists  which  must  furnish  the 
basis  for  comparisons,  but  only  in  a  few  coses  do  the  authors  of  these 
local  lists  attempt  to  discuss  the  general  charactcrifitics  of  their  fauna  ■ 
or  compare  them  with  those  of  other  localities.  This  is  certainly  an 
unfortunate  omission,  particularly  so  as.  in  general,  the  authors  of 
Buch  lists  should  be  the  most  competent  to  discuss  the  main  features 
of  their  fauna.  Of  the  various  local  lists,  two  are  to  be  particularly 
commended  for  the  ecological  notes  which  they  contain:  those  by 
t^chwarz  in  I.'lkes  Washington  list,  and  those  by  Hamilton,  in  the  Pitts- 
burg list.  It  is  through  the  ecological  influences  upon  distribution  that  we 
must  expect  the  greatest  advances  in  the  future  study  of  distribution. 
In  this  connection  there  should  be  mentioned  the  studies  by  Webster 
on  the  routes  of  dispersion  of  certain  species,  particularly  those  of 
economic  importance.  A  very  useful  bibliograph,v  of  local  lists  of  beetles 
has  been  published  by  Hamilton  and  Henshaw  ('9l-'92).  and  still  other 
recent  local  lists  will  be  found  in  the  bibliography  accompanying  this 
l>ai"er,  although  no  attempt  at  completeness  is  made. 

liimited  time  has  prevented  a  detailed  discussion  of  the  quotations 
as  ori^nally  intended,  but  in  their  pi-esent  form  they  are  much  more 
iiccessible  than  when  scattered. 

V.     The  Present  Centers  of  Dispcrml  of  the  Beetle  Fauna. 

The  general  characteristics  of  the  Isle  Eoyale  beetle  fauna  can  onlv 
be  appreciated  through  a  comparison  with  other  areas,  particularly 
with  those  of  boreal  regions  and  the  remainder  of  the  North  American 
continent.  Only  the  major  features  can  here  be  outlined.  It  has  been 
thought  desirable  to  consider  the  subjects  from  the  standpoint  of  centers 
of  dispersal,  rather  than  from  the  current  taxonomic  standpoint  because 
of  the  emphasis  thus  put  upon  the  genetic  side  of  distribution  and  its 
ecological  relations. 

In  a  former  paper,  (Biol.  Bull.,  1902,  9,  p.  122)  the  writer  listed 
certain  criteria  which  may  be  used  to  determine  biotic  centers  of  dis- 
persal and  centers  of  origin.  As  is  well  known,  centers  of  origin  and 
centers  of  dispersal  do  not  necessarily  coincide,  although  all  established 
centers  of  origin  must  be  centers  of  dispersal.  Centers  of  origin  are 
very  often  difficult  or  impossible  to  determine  with  the  present  state 
of  knowledge;  and  many  are  likely  to  reniain  so  indefinitely.  Then 
there  is  the  possibility-,  or  even  probability,  that  some  forms  have  origi- 
nated at  more  than  one  place,  and  independently.  This  certainly  com- 
plicates the  subject  of  origins,  increases  the  im|>ortance  of  determin- 
ing them,  and  means  that  this  method  must  be  repeated  in  such  cases, 
but  not  that  such  determinations  are  impossible.  Centers  of  origin, 
either  single  or  multiple,  at  once  become  centers  of  dispersal,  and 
by   means  of  disi>ersal   new   centers   become   established   so   that   there 


184  .  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

may  lie  numerous  centei-s  of  dispei-sal  in  wide  ranjjfing  fonns.  It  ^otild 
also  he  again  stated  tliat  centers  of  diiii>erfial  while  not  nece»uiril.v 
centers  of  origin,  are  likely  to  heconte  aucli  with  age,  jKirficularty  if 
favored  by  diverse  environmental  conditions. 

It  is  desirahle  to  nnderstand  clearly  what  in  meant  by  criteria.  As 
understood  hy  the  writer,  they  indicate  the  kinds  or  convenient  classes 
of  evidence  to  which  we  may  tura  for  suggestions  and  proof  as  to  the 
origin  and  dispersal  of  organisms.  Their  value  is  largely  relative,  so 
that  they  vai"y  much  in  value,  and  in  their  application  to  various  groups. 
In  some  cases  a  criterion  may  have  great  weight,  while  in  another 
taxonoinic  or  ecologic  group  it  may  have  no  value  or  so  little  as  to  be 
merely  suggestive.  Each  case  must  be  tested  oti  its  own  merits.  The 
main  advantage  of  criteria  is  the  definite  form  in  which  they  present 
the  problems  and  in  the  deflniteness  which  it  gives  to  such  inquiries 
as  to  origin.  The  number  of  criteria  needs  to  he  gi-eatly  increased 
by  the  formulation  of  those  restricted  to  groups  of  peculiar  taxonomic 
or  e^oloijic  clianuter.  It  should  l»e  clearly  emphasized  that  it  is  the 
convergence  of  evidence  from  many  criteria  which  must  be  the  final 
test  in  the  determination  of  origins  rather  than  the  dependence  upon 
any  supposedly  absolute  criterion. 

The  development  of  criteria  has  l>eeu  largely  along  taxonomic  lines, 
because  taxonomy  has  been  based  largely  upon  structural  characters 
nitlier  than  upon  the  convergence  of  all  kinds  of  nflinities  and  evidence. 
For  this  reason  ecological  criteria  have  been  lai-gely  overlooked.  With 
their  increase  in  number,  certain  origins  and  dispersals  may  be  estab- 
lished which  otherwise  could  not  I>e  determined. 

It  should  be  understood  that  the  breeding  range  only  is  of  fundamen- 
t«i  value  in  the  use  of  criteria,  in  the  determination  of  origins  and  the 
centers  of  dJspei-sal.  Of  course  only  natural  dispersal  is  considered 
when  criteria  and  natural  centei's  are  involved.  Dispersal  as  influenced 
by  man  has  peculiarities  of  its  own  which  have  not  yet  befen  carefully 
formulated.  Sitei'ies  introduced  hy  man  may  thus  secui-e  many  new 
centers  of  disiiei-sal. 

Aside  from  historical  and  paleontologiciil  evidence  the  following 
criteria  may  he  listed  as  those  which  will  probably  be  of  value  ia  the 
study  of  beetles.  They  have  also  furnished  the  basis  for  the  determina- 
tion of  centers  of  dispersal  and  origin  of  the  North  American  beetle 
fauna. 

1.  Location  of  great  or  maximum  taxonomic  differentiation  of  a  type 
or  types. 

2.  Location  of  synthetic,  primitive  or  closely  allied  taxonomic  forms 
or  groups  possessing  convergent  affinities. 

'i.    Location  of  maxiinnm  size  of  taxonomic  forms  or  groups. 

4.  Continuity  and  convergence  of  lines  of  dispersal. 

5.  Dii-ection  indicated  by  seasonal  api»earanoe;  vernal  suggesting 
boreal  or  montane  origin,  and  aestival  as  austral  or  lowland  derivation. 

0.  Direction  indicated  by  continuity  and  directness  of  individual 
variations  or  modifications  along  highways  of  dispersal. 

7.  Lo<ation  where  the  succession  of  beetle  associations  or  societies 
reaches  the  relativt;  e<)uilibriuni  of  a  climax  association  or  formation. 


«ibyGOOgIC 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  les 

f*.    Tiocation  of  dominam*  and  great  abundance  of  individnals. 

9.  Direction  indicated  by  biogeographioal  or  ecological  aflBnitieH. 

10.  Location  or  least  dependence  upon  a  i-estricted  habitat,  except 
huinid  t.vpCK  in  ai-id  repioiis.  and  analogous  cases, 

11.  Location  (when  both  a  center  of  origin  and  dispersal)  of  maxi- 
mum ecological  differentiation  in  habits,  habitiits,  food,  etc.  "Adai>- 
tivc  radiation,''  in  part,  of  Osborn. 

By  various  combinations  ninny  additional  criteria  may  be  produced. 
By  sorting  into  grouiw  most  of  the  above  criteria  will  readily  fall  into 
either  a  taxononiic  or  ecologic  class.  Biit  it  will  readily  be  seen  that 
no  sharp  distinction  can  be  drawn  lietween  the  two  groups;  and  fur- 
ther, no  particular  advantage  is  gained  by  such  a  classiflcation. 

The  neccBsarily  condensed  character  of  such  formulations  iiuikes 
fnrther  expansion  and  discussion  desirable,  but  certain  criteria  are 
so  well  known  and  easily  understood  that  their  discussion  is  not  nec- 
essary iis  in  the  case  of  No's.  1.  •_'  and  i;  the  remainder  will  be  briefly 
t-onsidcTed. 

;{.  Maximum  size.  Tliis  should  be  expected  to  apply  to  the  lai^er 
taxonomic  units  as  well  as  to  the  smaller  ones.  In  certain  families, 
genera,  etc.,  there  can  be  no  question  but  that  thia  criterion  has  great 
value,  althougli  it  might  not  apply  to  allied  groups.  The  broader  out- 
lines of  the  relationship  must  be  borne  in  mind  and  should  not  out- 
veigli  exceptional  cases.  This  relation  of  large  size  and  centers  of 
<irigiu  seems  to  be  supjiorted  in  jwirt,  by  Murray's  i7l),  pp.  T-Sj  pri- 
mary strains  of  Iteetle  descent.  Two  of  the  thi-ee  strains,  the  Indo- 
African  and  the  Brazilian  centers,  contain  the  largest  beetles.  But 
this  entire  subject  needs  critical  study  before  its  value  and  limitations 
can  be  fully  understood. 

5,  Seasonal  distribution.  .Uthough  familiar  with  this  criterion, 
it  was,  by  an  ovei-sight,  omitted  from  my  former  list  of  criteria.  The 
northern  affinities  of  the  venial  flora  have  long  been  known.  My  atten- 
tion to  this  ovei-sight  wnw  called  by  my  friend,  Mr.  A.  B.  Y\'olcott. 
Recently  Ulke  ('02,  p.  3)  formulated  this,  in  part,  for  beetles.  But  it 
flhould  i)erhaps  i>e  extended  to  include  montane  forma  also,  as  the  ver- 
nal fauna  of  the  mountains  may  be  ex|>ected  to  extend  their  breeding 
range  downward,  whei-e  they  will  appear  as  vernal  forms  at  lower  alti- 
tudes. At  the  same  time  the  fauna  at  lower  altitudes  might  tend  to 
spread  up  the  mountains  where  they  would  occur  at  the  height  of  the 
summer  season.    I  do  not  know  that  this  subject  has  been  investigated. 

The  late  fall  feeding  habits  and  the  lack  of  ability  to  resist  low 
temperature  on  the  part  of  certain  si>pcies  which  are  extending  their 
range,  may  be  indicative  as  to  their  direction  of  origin.  Many  plant 
feeding  insects,  acclimated  to  northern  localities,  tend  to  cease  feed- 
ing some  time  before  the  fall  frosts  and  are  thus  lietter  able  to  resist 
low  temperatui-es  (cf.  Ibichmetjew,  'iM.  Zeit.  wiss,  Z(miI..  4f»,  p.  (JOttj 
than  those  which  feed  late  and  are  well  fed.  Chittenden  I'lll.  \>.  74)  lias 
iwi^fDized  this  general  tendency,  but  has  not  correlated  it  with  Jlacli- 
net Jew's  results. 

It  is  highly  ])i-oliabIe  that  there  ai-e  miuiy  other  seasonal  plieno- 
mena  which  indicate,  in  a  general  but  more  or  less  dcflnite  nianiier.  (lie 
direction  of  origin.  r 


186  MICHIGAN    SUHVBY,   1808. 

6.  Continuity  and  dirertne^ta  of  individual  vamtions.  The  contiDU- 
ity  and  directness  or  definiteness  of  individual  variations  along  routes 
of  dispersal  may  give  very  definite  information  as  to  the  direction  of 
origin.  This  in  perhaps  not  of  universal  application  but  parries  much 
weight  nnder  certain  conditions.  For  example,  continuity  of  variations, 
as  dwarfing  or  iiioreasing  size,  have  a  certain  definiteness  which  clearly 
points  in  a  limited  numlter  of  directions,  when  correlated  with  highways 
of  dispersal  (cf.  Horn  '72,  p.  383),  This  is  particularly  so  when  a  route 
is  of  a  restricted  character,  as  a  drainage  line,  or  a  vaJley.  If  these 
variations  were  entirely  promiscuous  along  lines  of  dispersal,  there  could 
be  no  idea  of  direction ;  hut  by  taking  into  consideration  the  entire  range, 
as  ooe  is  pterfectly  justified  in  doing,  continuity  and  directness  clearly 
point  in  a  given  direction.  Jt  is  mainlywhen  the  animals  along  a  route 
are  uniform  or  promiscuous  tliat  direction  cannot  be  determined  by  tlie 
character  of  the  variation.  This  criterion,  as  restated,  like  most  other 
criteria  should  not  be  used  independentlv.  Compare  Tower  '06,  pp. 
12-13. 

7.  Geographical  centers  and  climax  asaoeiations.  To  apply  this 
ecological  criterion  it  is  necessary  to  understand  the  principles  which 
underlie  the  succession  of  beetle  associations  or  societies.  By  a  beetle 
association  is  meant  that  combination  of  beetles  which  occur  asso- 
ciated in  the  same  breeding  habitat.  As  the  environmental  conditions 
upon  which  beetles  depend  chnnge,  the  beetles  also  change  and  thus  a 
succession  is  produced.  The  same  general  principle  holds  for  a  beetle 
association.  Thus  as  the  conditions  change  the  association  also 
changes  and  a  surrfsnioii  of  beetle  associations  is  produced.  When, 
however,  a  relatively  complete  adjustment  or  equilibrium  is  acquired, 
and  changes  become  slight,  a  self  perpetuating  or  climax  association  or 
formation  has  be<;ome  established.  Areas  occupied  by  formations, 
through  their  abundance  and  dominance,  become  centers  of  disp^^al, 
although  they  art  probably  more  productive  or  originative,  at  an  in- 
termediate stage,  before  the  dominance  of  the  climax  associaticm  ia 
fully  established.' 

Meml)ers,  therefoi-e,  of  such  climax  associations  may  be  expected  to 
point  in  the  direction  of  such  centers  as  include  their  associated  species. 
If  such  a  i-elation  is  valid,  the  various  characteristics  of  climax  associa- 
tions will  aid  in  the  determination  or  location  of  centers  of  origin  and 
dispersal.  Such  criteria  may  have  more  value  in  determining  centers 
of  dispersal  than  those  of  origin.  This  criterion  will  probably  apply  to 
secondare'  societies,  but  with  attenuated  force. 

S.  Dominance.  This  is  a  fundamental  criterion  in  the  determination 
of  ecological  associations.  The  tendency  for  certain  associated  speciea 
to  obtain  exclusive  possession  of  any  given  area  implies  the  abundance 
of  individuals  and  their  dominance.  This  idea  is  prevalent  and  funda- 
mental in  ecologic  studies.  This  is  also  a  relative  term,  and  like  all 
other  criteria,  has  its  limitations.  Dominance  in  a  desert  must  In 
general  have  a  diff'ereut  meaning  than  in  a  humid  area. 

9.  Bicgeographical  or  ecological  affinities.  In  its  broader  applica- 
tion tins  criterion  is  applicable  to  general  biotic  relations  and  to  large 
areas.  It  is  one  of  the  oldest  criteria  used  in  the  determination  of  faunal 
and  floral  affinities.    In  some  i-espects  it  is  closely  related  to  Xo.  7.  This 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  187 

criterion  can  be  illuBtrated  by  reference  to  tlie  Ajax  Butterfly  (/.  ajax). 
The  sole  food  plant  of  the  Ajax  larva  ia  the  Pawpaw,  a  shrub  clearly 
of  tropical  ori^n.  The  allies  of  Ajax  are  also  tropical ;  thus  the  asso- 
ciated biogeographic  (plant  and  animal)  affinities  clearly  point  to  the 
tropics.  It  is  this  combination  of  certain  ecological  relations  or  associa- 
tions which  show  biogeographic  afflnitieei.  Thus  food  and  other  habits 
and  instincts  become  of  special  value.  Here  also  belongs  a  large  class 
of  ecological  relations,  particularly  those  related  to  the  succession  of 
insect  associations.  The  great  dependpnce  of  insects,  as  a  class,  upon 
vegetation  necessitates  a  close  relation  between  the  succession  of  plant 
associations  or  societies  and  certain  species  of  beetles.  If  certain  mem- 
bers of  a  biotic  (plant  and  animals)  association  or  society  have  certain 
geographic  afBnities,  others  associated  with  them  are  likely  to  have 
similar  affinities  (cf.  Horn  '72,  p.  384).  This  phase  ia  not  identical  with 
the  idea  (»f  fauna!  or  floral  affinities,  it  includes  them  and  the  relation  of 
biotic  aiaociation,  particularly  us  members  of  a  climax  association  or 
formation,   when   geographic   affinities  are  to   lie  determined. 

This  criterion  is  of  very  extensive  application.  It  is  really  a  group 
of  criteria  and  not  a  single  one,  because  associations  include  not  only 
organisms  in  close  proximity,  but  also  commensals,  symbiots,  parasites, 
etc.    Seasonal  phenomena  might  well  be  included  within  this  class. 

iO.  Least  dependence  upon  a  restricted  habitat.  From  the  stand- 
point of  animal  associations  this  is  a  criterion  which  may  be  ex- 
pected to  have  a  rather  extensive  application.  Its  most  conspicious 
application  is  to  that  of  dispersal.  Outlying  colonies  tend  to  have 
a,  limited  or  restricted  range.  At  the  same  time  such  colonies  are 
particularly  liable  to  become  extinct,  as  they  are  usually  near  the 
limit  of  favorable  conditions.  Uften  beetles  in  such  a  location  are 
dependent  upon  a  single  food  plant,  etc.  This  is  true  of  the  "boreal 
islands"  in  swamps  within  the  glaciated  portion  of  the  continent.  For 
example,  members  of  the  tamarack  bog  association,  toward  their  southern 
limit,  have  very  restricted  or  local  range;  but  to  the  north,  the  bog 
forest  conditions,  as  it  were,  spread  from  the  bogs  proper  and  become 
of  extensive  geographic  range,  as  the  water  beetles  invade  the  damp 
mosses  (Wickham,  '97,  p.  126).  The  outlying  tropical  "islands"  border- 
ing the  Rio  Grande,  as  described  by  Schwarz  ('01)  and  Wickham  ('97a), 
apparently  illustrate  the  same  phenomena.  These  restricted,  attenuated, 
or  isolated  colonies,  dependent  upon  special  conditions,  are  clearly 
indicative  that  they  are  pioneers  or  relicts,  which  point  toward 
the  region  where  their  range  is  spread  out  and  becomes  of  geographic 
extent.  But  it  does  not  follow  that  every  isolated  habitat  has  such 
■a.  meaning.  In  general,  a  study  of  succession  in  the  region  will  deter- 
mine to  which  class  the  colony  belongs,  pioneer  or  relict. 

There  is  an  exception  to  this  criterion  in  the  case  of  semi-aqnatic 
or  aquatic  animals  in  an  arid  region.  In  such  regions  the  springs, 
streams,  and  water  basins  are  so  limited  in  extent  that  their  isolation 
is  conspicuous;  and  yet  these  conditions  may  be  very  fai'orable  to  the 
formation,  or  at  least  preservation,  of  new  variations  and  species. 
Thus  an  arid  region  may  be  particularly  favorable,  in  a  sense,  to  the 
formation  of  varieties  and  species,  although  individuals  may  not  l)e 
numerous.     In  such  cases  the  amount  and  kind  of  differentiation  mitU- 


188  M[CHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

in  the  aren  slionld  carry  more  weiplit  than  abundnnoe  of  indmduals. 
But  by  the  proper  «-ori*elation  of  criteria,  such  cases  will  not  be  con- 
fusing. This  sort  of  differentiation  is  well  shown  among  beetles  by 
Wickham,  '04.  '(15. 

This  criterion  evidently  does  not  apply,  at  least  in  part,  to  the  fannn 
now  found  in  glaciated  North  America.  This  is  made  probable  through 
origin  elsewhere  and  a  later  expansion  in  the  glaciated  area  as  the  Ice 
Age  declined. 

11,  Ecological  diffei-entiation.  Ecological  and  taxonomic  diffeivntia- 
tion  need  separate  recognition,  althougii  they  are  frequently  not  di:<- 
tinct  because  of  their  intimate  genetic  relaiions.  With  great  taxonomic 
diversity,  within  a  gronii.  there  is  almost  certain  to  be  ecolojjic  diver- 
sity; but  generally  much  letw  attention  is  given  to  the  ecological  diver- 
sity.    Compare  Xo.  1. 

The  following  outline  of  the  centers  of  beetle  dispersion  must  be 
considered  provi.sional  and  suggestive,  as  it  is  a  aubjei't  which  has 
i-eceived  but  little  attention  from  the  standpoint  here  presented.  The 
preceding  criteria,  of  taxonomic  and  ecolt^ic  natui-e,  have  been  given 
much  emphasis  in  locating  the  present  centers  of  dis])ers!il.  Through- 
out this  section  references  are  given  to  significant  pai)ers,  hut  this 
does  not  imply  that  the  views  here  presented  are  ap]>roied  by  the 
authors  to  whom  i-eferenoe  is  made.  Tliese  referencew  also  apply  to 
the  quotations  already  given  in  detail. 

1.  The  American  Tropical  Venter.  From  Panama  northwartl  to  the  . 
Mexican  pUvteau  is  the  main  body  of  the  tropical  center.  Xarn»«- 
elougatious  extend  coaKtwise  ou  each  side  of  theplateau,  andon  theOulf 
Coast  to  the  Rio  Grande  river,  William  Wickham  '07a;  Schwarz  '(II: 
Toii-nsend  '95,  '37;  Tower  '06.  Outlying  colonies  are  found  on  the 
Pacific  coast  of  Mexico  and  at  the  Southern  extremity  of  Lower  Cali- 
foi-nia;  at  the  mouth  of  the  Colorado  river  (Bchwarz) ;  and  in  south- 
em  Florida  (I*Conte  '7Sa;  Kchwar?.  '7S,  "SS).  The  fauna  of  the  \Ve«t 
Indian  Archijjelago  probably  belongs  «-ith  this  gi-eat  coniiKwite  center. 

A  vast  number  of  beetles  are  characteristic  of  this  complex  area.  The 
Biologin  Centrali-Americana  devotes  thirteen  volumes  to  the  descrip- 
tion of  beetles  from  part  of  tliis  area.  \Yithin  the  United  States  the 
attenuated  tropical  element  has  Iieen  most  carefully  studied  and  its 
faunal  affinities  detennined  by   Scliwar^    ("SSi    and   tt'iokham    (!)7al. 

This  tropical  center  is  composed  of  several  distinct  units.  This  is 
an  ancient  center  of  origin,  pi-eservation  and  of  disjiei-sai.  Tlie  routes 
of  dispersal  into  the  T'nited  States  have  lieen  along  both  coasts  of 
Mexico  and  via  the  West  Indies.  It  was  practically  uninfluenced  by  the 
Ice  Age. 

2.  The  Meriean  Platcfiti  ami  the  itonthirfHtem  Dry  Bencrt.  This  center 
includes  the  Mexiojin  I'iateau;  most  of  Lower  California;  the  deserts  of 
southwestern  United  States;  the  low  landx  of  California;  the  Great 
Basin  and  the  (ii-eat  Tiains  northward  into  Canada  and  east  to  the 
forests.  I^Conte  '.")1,  TtO,  'fi(t,  'fiL';  VauDyke  '01:  Wickham  '!)(!.  'OS,  "tli, 
'Oii:  Tower  '0(5;  Fall  and  Cockerel!  "07, 

(Characterized  by  numerous  desert  species;  winglesN  Teuebrionidae 
(Hoi-n  71),  and  Cicindellidne.     A  given  Iwality  is  characterized  by  a 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROTALE.  189 

limited  number  of  species  wliich  are  individually  abaodant;  aumerous 
local  fannfle.  Containa  the  characteristic  desert  fauna  of  Nortii  America. 

lofluenced  markedly  by  glaciation  only  at  the  extreme  north,  and 
poBBiblj  in  the  Great  Basin,  but  certainly  by  the  great  fresh  water 
lakes  formerly  occnpyinp  this  basin  (Wickham  '04,  '051.  An  old  {pre- 
Glacial)   center  of  origin,  preservation,  and  center  of  dispereal. 

.^.  The  Southeaatem  Humid  Hardvood  Fmegt  Area.  This  area  in- 
cludes much  of  eastern  United  States  east  of  the  plains  (exclusive  of 
southern  Florida),  and  north  to  the  Canadian  conifers.  Tlie  Coastal 
Plain  (and  possibly  the  Mississippi  Embayment  area)  may  form  a  sub- 
<«nter  through  the  influence  of  its  conifers  (Schwarz  '90;  Chittenden 
'00,  '01). 

Local  lists  within  this  center:  Summers  '74;  Schwarz  '78;  Ulke  '02 j 
Dury  '02,  '06.    cf.  LeConte  '78a. 

Characterized  by  the  abundance  of  forest  insects,  particularly  those 
infesting  hardwoods;  species  of  extensive  range;  few  local  fauna;  a 
large  number  of  species  found  in  a  given  locality,  often  but  few  in- 
dividuals. 

An  ancient  centre  of  origin,  preservation  and  dispersal.  Glaciated 
on  the  north,  and  post-GlaciaJly  repopulated,  as  was  also  the  Coastal 
Plain  and  Embayment,  with  the  elevation  of  the  Coastal  Plain. 

4.  The  Trantcontinental  Conifer  Area.  This  area  includes  the  re- 
mainder of  forested  North  America,  and  Includes  all  of  the  higher 
mountain  ranges.  Its  relation  to  the  Coastal  Plain  conifer  belt  has 
not  been  determined. 

Characterized  by  conifer  feeding  beetles.  Cerambycids,  Scolytids ; 
numerous  Carabids  and  Staphyllnids,  and  thus  shows  a  decided  sutwrctia 
circumpolar  affinity.  Few  endemic  elements  and  local  faunae.  Ex- 
tensive range  of  species,  except  in  the  high  mountains.  Largely  a  new 
land  surface  through  glaciation;  largely  repopulated  at  a  relatively 
late  date;  apparently  characterized  by  dispersal  or  diffusion  of  forms 
rather  than  for  their  origin  or  preser^-ation,  except  the  mountain  areas 
of  the  United  States,  which  were  areas  of  preservation  and  origin. 

The  very  different  history  of  its  eastern  portion,  with  much  more 
extensive  glaciation,  is  to  be  contrasted  with  the  moderate  western  gla- 
ciation. The  differences  in  the  character  of  the  forests  is  also  marked; 
the  giant  western  conifers  are  to  l>e  constrasted  with  the  smaller  con- 
ifers of  the  Northeast,  The  Mackenzie  Basin  and  the  Plains  mark  the 
line  of  division  between  these  suticenters.  This  division  is  so  marked 
that  it  may  yet  necessitate  a  complete  se\ering  of  the  tranaeontin- 
«ntal  conifer  belt,     (cf,  Murray  '70,  pp.  y2-3X) 

a.  The  Eastern  Canadinn  Conifer  Fauna. 

This  includes  Canada  east  of  the  Rocky  ?tIountains,  north  to  the  tree 
limit  and  the  interior  of  Alaska:  northeaslem  United  States;  and 
southward  on  the  Appalachians, 

Characterized  by  forms  of  extensive  subarctic  range,  very  few 
«ndemic  elements  or  those  peculiarly  American;  individuals  abundant, 
variety  moderate;  beetles  feeding  on  conifers,  birches,  and  as{>ens.  I>e- 
■Conte  '50,  '59.  '7Sb.     There  is  a  posRibilily  that  this  fauna  has  North 


100  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   I9D3. 

£nropeaD  nfBnities  stronger  than  Asiatic  ones;   the   i-ererse  from   the 
western  conifer  center. 

Local  Hats  including  this  fanna;  Hubbard  and  Schwarz  '78;  Har- 
rington '84;  Wickham   '97;  Hamilton  "d^,  94a,  '95,  Klages  '01. 

b.  The  Western  Canadian  Conifer  Fauna. 

This  ioeludes  the  western  mountains  northward  and  upward  to  the 
tree  limit,  eastward  to  the  Great  Plains  and  the  eastern  Conifers. 
North  of  the  United  States  this  area  has  been  extensively  glaciated  but 
within  the  United  States  the  glaciers  wfre  local. 

On  account  of  this  moderate  glaciation  in  the  mountains  of  the 
United  States,  this  old  land  surface  has  been  a  center  of  origin,  prener- 
ration  and  dispersal.  It  contains  more  endemic  elements  than  the 
eastern  conifer  center,  and  more  local  faunae.  Beetles  feeding  upon 
conifers  and  aspens  are  fairl.v  characteristic.  The  Asiatic  affinities  of 
the  fanna.  are  much  more  pronounced  than  those  of  the  eastern  con- 
ifer center.  Part  of  the  apparently  European  influence  may  more  truly 
be  considered  Asiastlc — both  the  Western  and  European — having 
been  derived  from  Asia.  Elements  of  this  fauna  probably  8urvi*-ed  the 
Ice  Age  on  the  Pacific  Coast  north  of  the  United  States,  but  tlie- 
humid  interior  has  been  invaded  from  the  south,  or  is  endemic.  I^e- 
Conte  '76;  Wickham  '96;  Cockerel!  '93;  Hamilton  '94,  '94a;  Fall  and 
Cockerell  '07;  Keen  '95. 

5.  Alpitie  and  Arctic.  This  fauna  occupies  the  area  north  of  the 
tree  limit,  and  above  the  tree  limit  on  the  mountains.  This  fauna  i:* 
very  imperfectly  known  and  is  limited  in,  variety  and  in  the  number  of 
individuals.  Many  species  are  of  circumpolar  range  in  the  Arctic  re- 
gions. Composed  of  \-ery  diverse  elements  and  of  diverse  origin.  The 
nnglaciated  arctic  areas  are  probably  centers  of  origin  as  well  as  of  dis- 
persal, as  also  slightly  or  moderately  unglaciated  alpine  areas.  The 
glaciated  portions  have  been  repopulated  and  show  incipient  endemisni 
but  are  mainly  characterized  by  the  extensive  dispersal  of  species,  tut  i» 
apparently  true  of  unglaciated  Asiatic  Siberia.  Both  of  these  centeriii 
(Alpine  and  arctic)  have  been  much  confused  with  regard  to  whethei- 
<bey  are  centers  of  origin  or  of  dispersal.  These  types  are  curivntly 
stated  as  of  boreal  origin,  but  this  is  very  improbable  for  perhaps 
the  majority  of  the  population.  They  may  be  of  alpine  origin  on  the 
western  mountains  with  an  extensive  post-Glacial  dispersal  favored  bv 
climatic  conditions,  and  the  low  topographic  relief  of  the  northern  land, 
areas.    Schwarz  '90 ;  Murray  '70,  pp.  32-33. 

Eastern  Alpine,  Scudder  '74 ;  Bowditcb  '96. 

Western  Alpine.  Carpenter  '75 ;  I^Conte  '78,  '79 ;  Schwarz  '90 ;  Cock- 
erell (including  Horn)  '93;  Wickham  '03;  Fall  and  Cockerell  '07. 

TI.    The  Oenerat  Characteristics  and  Affinities  of  the  Isle  Royale  Fauna. 

1.  Faunal  Characteristics.  The  accompanying  list  of  beetles  col- 
lected in  1905  includes  89  species.  The  only  previous  list  is  that  by 
Hubbard  and  Schwarz  ('78)  in  which  they  list  123  species.  A  surprisinft 
feature  of  our  1905  collections  is  that  of  our  89  species,  66  are  not 
listed   by  Hubbard  and   Schwarz,     Such   species   are  indicated  by  the 


ECOLOGT  OF  ISLE  ROTALE.  191 

letter  A.  following  the  seientiflc  name.  •  On  the  basis  of  these  two  lists, 
206  species  are  now  recorded  from  the  island.-  It  is  not  improbable 
that  other  species  have  been  recorded  in  tbe  scattered  literature,  but 
no  effort  has  been  made  to  search  for  them.  Undoubtedly  only  a  fair 
start  has  been  made  in  the  study  of  the  beetle  fauna.  Careful  detailed 
(.■ollecting,  covering  several  years,  would  probably  increase  the  number 
(ibout  five  times,  or  bring  it  up  to  about  1,000  or  1,100  species;  that  in, 
judging  from  other  northern  localities.  Pcttit  has  recorded  from 
Grimsby,  Ontario  1,143  species  and  Harrington  ('84)  from  Ottawa 
1.00.3  species.  On  the  other  hand  it  is  not  improbable  that  the  present 
known  206  species  give  a  fair  sample  of  the  dominant  features  of  the 
l)eetle  fauna.  Wickham's  ("J7)  Bayfleld,  WisconNin  list  contains  Oftl 
species  (six  weeks  collecting  by  an  expert).  Such  statistics  mean  but 
little,  beyond  showing  tbe  reduction  in  variety  toward  the  north  when 
compared  with  southern  localities.  The  two  best  local  southern  lists — 
tbe  best  in  America — are  those  by  Ulke  for  Washington,  D.  C,  with 
2,975  species,  and  by  Dury  for  the  r^on  about  Cincinnati  with  2,2£H> 
species.  Two  important  intermediate  locality  lists  between  these  north- 
em  and  southern  ones  are  from  the  vicinity  of  Allegheny  and  Pittsburg 
by  Hamilton,  in  which  2,153  species  are  listed  or  2,500  as  given  by 
Klages ;  and  at  Buffalo,  where  about  1,424  species  are  listed  by  Reinecke 
and  Zescli.  The  variety  in  tieetle  life  is  thus  seen  to  drop  off  about  Vi 
or  more  in  passing  from  the  latitude  of  Washington  and  Cincinnati  to 
that  of  Lake  Superior  and  the  St.  Lawrence  valley. 

2.  MisceUaneous  XoUa  on  the  FatuM,  In  the  present  list  there  are 
included  6  species  which  in  the  Hubbard  and  Scliwarz  list  are  indicated 
as  "Species  found  by  Dr.  LeConte,  mostly  catal<^pied  in  Agassis'  Lake 
Superior,  p.  203-239,  which  have  not  since  occurred."  These  species 
are  as  follows:  Carabus  seratus,  Calthus  gngariut,  Blechrua  nigrinua 
(linearis  Lee),  Barpalua  ruficoUis.  Pachijta  Uturata,  Dtmacia  proxima. 
All  these  and  other  rare  species  turned  up  in  our  collection. 

TjcConte  and  Horn  describe  the  following  three  new  species  from 
Isle  Boyale  specimens  in  the  Hubbard  and  Schwarz  paper:  Sabroceras 
magnua  Lee,  p.  598;  Phymatodea  mactilicollig  Lee,  p.  614  (from  one 
specimen) ;  Orcheatea  vantia  Horn,  p.  020.  None  of  these  species  were 
found  in  our  collection.  LeConte  ('IS,  p.  463)  described  Magdaiia 
alutacca  {armicollia  Say)   from  Colorado  and  Isle  Boyale  specimens. 

As  numbered  in  the  accompanying  list  of  species  collected  during 
1005,  the  following  are  not  to  be  found  in  tbe  Bayfield  list  by  Wickham ; 
Xo's.  2.  6,  7,  10,  12,  15,  16,  17,  18,  20.  21,  22,  25,  27,  30,  34,  36,  41, 
50,  52,  53,  55,  56,  59,  60,  62,  64,  73,  76,  77,  79,  81,  85,  86,-35  species. 


DigtizedbyCOOgle 


^IICHIQAN   8URYBY.   1908. 


VII.     LISTS  OF  ISLE  ROYALE  BEETLES. 

1.       LiaT  OP  SPECIES  COLLBCTED  IS  1905. 

Cichidelidac. 

1.  Oidndela  longilabria  Say.  A,  One  fipeciiiieD  of  the  dark  form 
\vaB  taken  from  the  clearing  about  Neiitson's  resort  (IV,  S)  on  Julv  21 
(Q.  121). 

Geographic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Ottawa,  Canada:  Hudeon  Bay; 
Nova  Scotia;  Quebec;  Mt.  Washington  (summit),  N.  H.;  Michigan:  Wis- 
consin; Nebraska;  New  Mexico;  Colorado  (10,000-12,000  ft.);  Utah; 
Idalio;  Montana;  Albei-ta;  California;  Oregon;  Alaska. 

Carabidm: 

2.  Carahus  aerratim  Say.  A.  A  single  specimen  was  found  crawling 
over  and  through  the  tults  of  Cladonia  in  the  rock  opening  near  camp 
on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  on  August  .">  {(3.  208). 

Geographic  Range.  Saskatchewan  Itasin,  Canada:  Mt.  Washington. 
N.  H. ;  W.  Penna. ;  Michigan;  Indiana  (A.  B.  Wolcott)  :  Chicago,  III. 
(Wolcott);  Kansas;  Colorado;  New  Mexico.    Hamilton  '94ii,  p.  35i. 

3.  Caloaoma  frigidum  Kb.v.  A.  A  single  siiecimeu  was  found  on  July 
7  among  the  drift  on  the  beach  (I,  11  near  Tonkin  Bay  (A.  7).  , 

Geographic  Range.  Prummond's  Island,  Ottawa.  Canada;  Mt.  Wash- 
ington (summit)  N,  H.;  New  York;  Chicago,  Illinois  (Wolcott);  W. 
Penna.;  Michigan;  Indiana;  Wisconsin;  New  Mexico;  Texas. 

4.  liemiidium  caritiula.  Chand.  A.  "Very  abundant  July  8  on  the 
sandy  beach  at  the  head  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (I,  1).  Running  rapidly 
over  the  sand  and  fine  gravel  just  back  of  the  wet  strip  along  the  shore." 
(G.  30),  Oleason. 

Geographic  Range,  New  Hampshire;  Mass.;  Adirondack  Mts.,  New 
Y'ork;  Port  Arthur,  Ontario;  Saskatchewan  Basin,  Canada;  Georgin; 
Ohio;  Michigan;  Indiana  (Wolcott)  ;  Illinois;  Wisconsin;  Arkansas; 
Colo.  (8,0(t0  ft.) ;  Oregon;  Brit.  Columbia.  Hayward,  '97.  p.  4G. 

5.  Bembidiiim  transcersale  I>ej.  Two  specimens  were  taken  about 
the  camp  at  the  Light-house  (I,  7)  on  July  11  (G.  4SK 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Gulf  of  St.  Lawi-ence;  Lake  Superior 
region;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Ne'braska;  Kansas;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Ari- 
zona; Wyoming;  Utah;  Pacific  Coast  from  So.  Calif,  to  Alaska. 

(!.  Urtmbidium  grapii  GyW.^nitenn  Ijec.  A,  "On  a  low  bare  rock  on 
the  shore  near  the  Lighthouse  at  Rock  Harbor  (I,  11.  On  July  11,  early 
in  the  morning,  with  air  temperature  of  51°  F.  and  surface  temperature 
about  the  same,  no  specimens  were  seen ;  but  as  the  surface  grew  warmer, 
up  to  95°  F„  the  beetles  liecanie  abundant.  They  jirobably  conceHl  them- 
selves in  crevices  in  the  rock  when  the  temperature  is  low."  (0.  46. i 
Oleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Greeulaud ;  Hudson  Bay  region,  Saskatchewan  and 
Mackenzie  Basins;  Isle  Royale,  Michigan:  White  Mts.,  N.  H. ;  New  York; 
southward  on  the  mountains  of  the  wwl  to  Colorado,  New  Mracico  and 


ECOLOQY  OP   I8]J!  HOYALE.  193 

Nevada;  Alaeha;  Siberia;  Northern  Europe.    Hamilton,  '94,  p.  8;  '94a, 
p.  351. 

7.  BembUUum  rariegatum  Say.=patniele  l^ej.  "In  debris  cast  up  on 
the  beach  at  the  head  of  Tonkin  Kay  {I,  1)  with  B.  versicolor  and 
Plati/ntis."  (G.  21i.     Glenson. 

Geographic  Rantjc.  Nova  Scotia;  New  England  States;  New  York; 
New  Jeniey;  Peniia.;  Maryland;  Distr.  Oolnmbia;  Texas;  Ohio;  Mich- 
igan; Lake  Superior  region;  Wisconsin;  Illinois;  Iowa;  Missonri; 
Nebraska;  Saskatchewan  Basin,  Manitoba;  Colorado;  Nevada;  Calif, 
to  Brit.  Columbia. 

8.  Bembidiiim  versicolor  TjCC.  A.  "In  debris  at  the  head  of  Tonkin 
l!ay  (I,  1)  with  B.  varicgutum  and  Platynns  4-punctatus  (G,  21)." 
*  i  leasoQ. 

(leogrophir  Rinige,  General  distribution  in  Canada  and  United  States; 
fi-oni  Auti,costi.  Quebec  to  Florida,  Texas  and  California  and  north  to 
(Colorado  and  Manitoba;  Pine,  Ind.  (Wolcott). 

9.  Ptcroatichus  coracinus  Neivni.  A.  A  specimen  of  this  species  was 
taken  in  the  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7)  on  Julv  11  (G.  49)  and  on  July 
28  (G.  179). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  Mt.  Washington  (summit)  N. 
H. ;  Vermont;  New  York;  New  Jei-sey;  W.  Penoa. ;  Maryland;  Virginia; 
Itist.  Columbia:  Teun.;  Ohio;  Mich.;  Northern  IltinoiB;  Iowa;  Wyoming. 

10.  PteroDticTms  fcmoralis  Kby.  A.  A  specimen  of  this  ground  beetle 
was  found  under  Cladotiia  upon  a  sloping  rock  slioi-e  (V,  2)  just  beyond 
the  reach  of  the  waves,  on  August  16  (A.  130). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Ontario;  Saskatchewan  Basin;  Mass.; 
Mich.;  W.  Penn.;  New  York;  Ohio  (Dury) ;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  No.  111. 
anil  Ind.  (Wolcott). 

il.  Caiatkua  grcgarius  Say.  A.  A  specimen  was  taken  on  or  in  leaf 
mould  in  a  deeplv  shaded  balsam-spruce  forest  (I,  3)  on  July  24  (G.  140) , 
and  (V,  4)  on  August  14   (G.  236). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Ontario;  Quebec;  Saskatchewan  Basin; 
Vermont;  New  York;  New  Jersey  to  Florida  and  Texas;  W.  Penna.; 
Ohio;  Mich.;  No.  Illinois  (Wolcott);  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Kansas;  Neb- 
raska; New  Mexico, 

12.  Cafaihus  adtena  Lee.  A.  "One  was  found  crawling  through  soft 
decayed  wood  in  the  balsam-spruce  forest  (I,  3)  on  July  24  (G.  142)." 
Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Maine;  Vermont;  Mt.  Washington,  N.  H. ;  Mich- 
igan; Colorado;  New  Mexico;  So.  Alaska.    Hamilton,  '94,  p.  11. 

13.  Platynus  4  punctatua  YieO.  A.  A  single  specimen  of  this 
species  was  found  about  camp  at  the  Lighthouse  (I,  7)  on  July  11  (Q. 
49),  also  in  debris  cast  uji  on  the  beach  at  the  head  of  Tonkin  Bay  (I,  1) 
.where  it  was  found  alive  (G,  21). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Ontario;  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  and 
Lake  Superior  regions;  Mt.  Washington,  N.  H. ;  New  York;  W,  Penna.; 
Mich,;  Wisconsin;  Idaho;  Colorado;  New  Mexico;  Montana;  Alaska; 
Kamchatka;  Siberia;  Northern  and  Alpine  Europe.    Hamilton,  '94,  p.  11. 

14.  Bl€chru8  nigrinug  Mann.^/iwcuWs  J^c.  "In  the  debris  under 
mats  of  bearherrv  on  the  rock  ridge  north  of  the  Lighthouse  at  Rock  Har- 
bor (I,  3),  (G.  64)."    Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.     Saskatchewan  Basiu,  Canada;  New  York;  New 

hyGoogIc 


194  MICHIGAN    8URVBT,   1808. 

Jersej ;  Mich. ;  Iowa ;  Wisconsin ;  Missouri ;  Dakota ;  Wyoming ;  Colo- 
rado; New  Mexico;  Calif.;  Brit.  Oohimbia;  possibly  Siberia  and  No. 
Europe.    Hamilton,  '94o,  p.  355. 

15.  Harpalus  megacephalua  Lee.  "In  rock  crevices  and  under  debrin 
from  bearberry  on  the  jack  pine  ridge  (1,  2)  on  July  13  (Q.  72)." 
Oleason. 

Geographic  Range.     Lake  Superior;  Isle  Royale,  MicUigan. 

HaHptidae. 

IB.  Haliplua  ruficollis  DeG.  A.  "At  the  bottom  of  small  pools  in 
the  partially  drained  sphagnum  bog  near  Conglomerate  Bay  {I,  6)  on 
July  18  (G.  116),  and  at  the  bottom  of  a.  small  stream  flowing  from 
a.  tamarack  swamp  near  Si^owit  Bay  (V,  5)  on  August  12  (O.  230). 
In  each  case  the  water  wae  shallow  and  the  bottom  composed  of 
-sphagnum  covered  with  dead  leaves."  Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Canada ;  Hudson  Bay  region ;  Mt.  Washington ; 
Kew  Hampshire;  Vermont;  New  York;  New  Jersey;  Mich.;  W.  Penna.; 
Ohio;  111.  (Wolcott) ;  Iowa;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Texas;  .Wyoming; 
Kansas;  Western  Siberia;  Europe;  Tnrkestan.    Hamilton,  '94a,  p.  355. 

I^fftiscida^. 

17.  Hgdroporus  triatta  Pavk.  A,  "In  the  bottom  of  small  streams 
draining  a  tamarack  swamp  (V,  5).  (G.  237)."  Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Ontario;  Vermont;  Mass.;  Mich.;  Lake 
Superior  region;  Hudson  Bay;  Colorado;  British  Columbia;  Alaska; 
Arctic  Miberia;  Northern  Europe  to  Finland.  Hamilton,  '94,  pp.  13. 
'94a,  357.     Sharp,  '82,  p.  472. 

18.  Hydroporus  modestua  Aube.  A.  Taken  at  Benson  Brook  clear- 
ing (II,  1)  on  July  29  (A.  81). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Ontario ;  Mt.  Washington,  N.  H. ;  Mass. ; 
W.  Penna.;  New  Jersey;  Dist.  Columbia;  "Carolina";  Wis,;  Mich.; 
Ohio   (I>ur>).     Sharp,  '82,  p.  480. 

19.  Ilyhiits  pleuritictis  Jjec.  A.  "In  the  water  near  the  shore  at 
camp  on  Slskowit  Bay  (V,  1)  on  August  7  (G.  213)."  Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Penna.;  New  York;  Isle  Royaile,  Mich.;  Bayfield, 
Wis. ;  Iowa ;  Colorado. 

20.  Agabus  stridulator  Sharp.  A.  Taken  in  a  clearing  (II,  1)  on 
July  29   (A.  81). 

Geographic  Range.  Isle  Rovale,  Mich. ;  Hudson  Bay ;  Canada. 
Sharp,  '82,  p.  509. 

21.  Agabu8  congener  Payk.  A,  "In  the  bottom  of  streamlets  drain- 
ing a  tamarack  swamp  (V,  5),  (G.  237)."  Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Greenland;  Labrador;  Hudson  Bay;  White 
Mountains  N.  H. ;  Mass.;  Penna.;  Mich.;  Missouri;  Arctic  and  Western 
Siberia;  Centnii  and  Northern  Europe.  Hamilton,  '94a,  p.  358.  Sharp, 
'S3,  p.  513. 

22.  Scutoptcrtit  hornii  Cr.  A.  "In  small  pools  in  the  tamarack  and 
nrbor  vitae  swamp  (1,  4)  on  July  28.  These  pools  were  under  fallen 
logs  and  at  the  bases  of  trees;  seldom  more  than  1.5  dm.  in  depth  and 
with  a  bottom  of  sphagnum  and  vegetable  debris  (G.  181,  182)." 
<ilea9on.  ,-  , 

i.Cooglc     ■ 


ECOI^OOY   OF   ISLB  ROYALE.  19S 

Geographic  Range,    Canada ;  lele  Royale,  Michigan. 

23.  Rhanius  iinotatus  Horr.  A.  Two  were  found  in  rock  pools  on 
the  beflch  at  the  entrance  to  Tonkin  Bay  (I,  1)  on  Julj  13  (G.  73,  7i) 
nnd  at  Hcovill  Point  (IV,  1)  on  July  19  (G.  130).  The  beetles  nsually 
remained  on  the  bottom  except  when  they  came  to  the  surface  for  air. 

Oeographic  Range.  Labrador;  Ottawa,  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  region; 
Brit.  Colambia;  Mt.  Washington,  X.  H.;  New  York;  Xew  Jersey;  Mich.; 
"Wisconsin;  Kansas;  Nebraska;  Colorado;  Sew  Mexico;  So.  Arizona', 
T^tah;  Nevada;  Calif.;  Lower  Calif.;  Mexico;  Guatemala.  Sharp,  '82, 
p.  614. 

Gprinidae. 

24.  Ggrinm  m'mutm  Fab.  A.  "In  sheltered  coves  of  Siskowit 
T^ke  (V,  6)  on  August  9,  where  the  water  was  quiet.  Most  numeroas 
near  the  shore  under  the  overhanging  alders  where  they  congregated  in 
large  flocks  (G.  219)."    Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  region;  Sad- 
katchewan  basin  (Hvans  '03) ;  Vermont;  W.  Penna.;  Michigan;  Wiscon- 
Hin;  Washinffton;  Or^on;  Siberia;  Central  and  Northern  Europe. 
Hamilton,  '94a,  p.  360. 

25.  G>/rinu8  pidpea  Aube.  A.  In  lai^e  numbers  near  the  shore  of 
t^iskowit  lake  (V,  6)  with  the  preceding  species  (fi.  219). 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador  to  Brit.  Columbia;  Vermont;  Michi- 
gan; Idaho;  Oregon;  So.  Alaska.     Hamilton  '94,  p.  14, 

Siaphylinidae. 

26.  Oyrophaena  species.  "Several  specimens  (G.  229)  were  taken 
from  a  ahelf  fungus,  Pleurotiia  ogtreatua,  on  August  11  (V,  4)."  Gleason. 

27.  <^uediu8  fulgidus  Fab.  A.  Two  were  taken  from  leaf  mould  or 
under  dcfcared  bark  in  the  maple  forest  (III,  '04)  on  August  21  (A. 
142). 

Geographic  Range.  Greenland  to  Alaska;  south  to  No.  Georgia  and 
I^a.  and  Central' Calif. ;  Peru;  Mich.;  West  Siberia;  Europe;  Asia  Minor; 
No.  India;  Java;  Tasmania;  Australia;  New  Zealand.  Hamilton,  '94, 
p.  18,  '94a,  p.  366. 

28.  Philotithua  politiia  hiua.^aencui  Kossi.  A.  Hamilton,  '94a,  p. 
19.  One  specimen  was  taken  about  camp  at  the  Lighthouse  (I,  7)  on 
July  7  (G.  26). 

Geographic  Range.  Isle  Royale,  Mich.;  Nova  Scotia;  Hndson  Bay 
region;  British  Columbia;  New  York;  Mass.;  Penn.;  New  Jersey;  La.; 
Ohio;  Illinois  (Wolcott) ;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Kansas;  Colorado;  Neiv 
Mexico;  Queen  Charlotte  Island;  Alaska;  Siberia;  Amur  region; 
Europe. 

29.  Lathobium  simplex  I^ec.  A.  One  specimen  {A.  24)  was  taken 
July  17  on  a  jack  pine  ridge  {I,  5). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Mass.;  New  York;  Michigan;  Wiscon- 
sin, Am.  Knt.  Soc,  '80,  p.  17G. 

30.  Tachinua  memnmiiua  Grav.  A.  One  beetle  was  found  under  the 
bark  in  the  hardwoods  along  the  Desor  trail  (III,  '04)  on  August  24 
(A.  149). 


DigtizBdbyCOOgle 


196  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

Qeoffraphic  Range.  Dist.  of  Columbia;  W,  Penna.;  Ohio  (Dury)  ; 
WlBConsin;  Michigan;  III.   (Wolcott). 

31.  Bolctobius  cincticollis  8aj.  "In  fresh  plants  of  the  bracket 
mnshrooiD  Pleurotua  sp.  growing  in  the  baisam-spruce  forest  (V,  1)  on 
August  11."    tileason.     One  speciineu   (G.  229). 

Qeographic  Range.  Canada;  New  York;  W.  Feooa. ;  New  Jersey; 
Dist,  of  Columbia;  Ohio;  Wiacoasin;  Iowa;  Mich,  to  Brit.  Columbia; 
Calif,  and  Arizona;  cf.  Hamilton,  '94,  p.  21,  Alaska. 

CoccincUidae. 

32.  Hippod^mia  ISpunctata  L.  A.  Taken  about  camp  at  Kocfc 
Harbor  (1.  7)  on  July  li  (G,  98). 

Qeographic  Range.  "All  America  north  of  Mexico ;"  WeBt  Indies ; 
Alaska;  throughout  Europe  and  Central  Asia;  Siberia.  Hamilton,  '94a. 
p.  378. 

33.  Anatis  15punctata  0\\y. ^=ocellata  L.  A.  Found  among  drift 
cast  up  on  the  beach  at  the  head  of  Tonkin  Bay  (1, 1)  on  July  6  (G.  21). 

Qeographic  Range.,  Ottawa,  Saskatchewan  tKisin,  Canada;  Nova 
Scotia;  New  York;  New  Jersey;  West  Indies;  W.  Penna.;  Ohio; 
Illinois;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Siberia;  Europe.  Hamilton,  '94a,  p. 
379. 

Erotylidae. 

34.  Tritoma  macro  Lee.  A.  "One  specimen  (G.  229)  found  August 
11  in  a  shelf  fnngus  Pleurotua  ostreatus  (V,  4)."  Oleason. 

Qeographic  Range.    Maine;   Michigan;   Illinois;   W.  Penn. 

35.  Tritoma  thoracica  Say.  A,  From  fre^  specimens  of  Pleurotua 
growing  in  the  balsam-spruce  forest   (V,  4)  on  August  11  (G.  229). 

Geographic  Range.  Hudson  Bay  region;  Saskatchewan  basin;  Ot- 
tawa, Canada;  Vermont;  New  Y'ork;  New  Jersey;  Va.  ;  Georgia; 
Florida;  Texas;  W.  Penna.;  Ohio;  Ulinois;  Mich.;  Wis.;  Iowa;  Colo.; 
New  Mexico;  Washington. 

DascylUdae. 

36.  Macropogon  ruftpcs  Horn.  A.  One  specimen  was  found  upon  the 
beach  of  Lake  Superior  (I,  1)  on  July  12  {G.  60). 

Geographic  Range.  Illiuois;  Isle  Koyale,  Mich.;  White  Mts.,  N.  11.; 
Horn,  Amer.  Ent.  Soc,  '80,  p.  80. 

Elateridae. 

37.  Adclocera  brcvicornis  Lee.  A.  One  taken  about  camp  at  the 
Lighthouse  (I,  7)  on  July  18  (G.  117). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  Micb.;  Wisconsin;  Lake  Su- 
Ijerior. 

38.  Elater  hepaticue  Mels.  A.  Two  taken  about  the  camps  both 
at  the  Lighthouse  (I,  7)  on  July  13  (G,  86),  and  at  Siskowit  Bay  iV, 
3)   on  Aug.  7   (G.  212). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Vermont;  W.  Penna.;  New  Jersey; 
Ohio;  "Western  States;"  Wisconsin;  Michigan. 

39.  Elater  apicatus  Say.  A.  One  taken  at  the  camp  on  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  3)  on  .-Vugust  3  (G,  193).  CoC^jIc 

'  ''  o 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  197 

Qeofjraphic  Raiiffe.  Hankatrhewnn  baoin ;  Ottawa,  Canada ;  New 
Hampshire;  Vermont;  Xew  York;  Mich.;  Wis.;  Duluth,  Minn.  fWoI- 
cott)  ;  Colo.;  Arizona;  Kew  Mexico;  Idaho;  Wafili.;  Oregon;  Calif.; 
"Xortbem  U,  8.  generally." 

40.  Affriotes  limosua  Leo.  Taken  on  flowera  of  the  Cow  Parsnip 
(Heraclcum  latiatum)  in  the  cleai-inR  at  the  Lighthouse  {I,  7}  on 
.Inly  17  (G.  1031  and  on  July  23  (G.  1.161.    Five  »|>ecioiens. 

Qeoffntphic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Mt,  Washington  (sammit),  N. 
n.;  Ottawa,  Canada;  Lake  Superior;  Sai^atchewaD  basin;  Michigan; 
Wisconsin. 

41.  MelanotuH  para^oxvfi  )leli>h.  A.  One  taken  about  the  ramp 
at  the  Lightboutie  (I,  7)  on  July  11  (G.  49).  and  near  Lake  Desor 
{VII,  '04)  on  August  21   (A.  139). 

Geographic  Range.  Isle  Royale,  Mich. ;  Colorado ;  New  Mexico 
{Snow). 

42.  Corpmhites  medianug  Germ.  One  taken  on  the  beach  south  of 
Tonkin  Bay  (I,  1)  on  July  10  (G.  41),  "crawling  over  the  sand  in  a 
shaded  place  near  a  rock  cliff."  Gleason. 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada:  Mt.  Washington  (summit),  N. 
H. ;  New  York;  W.  Penn.;  Michigan;  Wisconsin. 

43.  Corymiitcs  acripcnnis  Kby.  One  taken  at  Scovill  Point  {IV, 
1)   on  July  19  (G.  130). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa.  Canada;  Nova  Scotia;  Maine;  Mt. 
Washington,  N,  H.;  New  York;  Mich.;  Wis.;  Colo.;  New  Mexico; 
Idaho;  Oregon;  Brit.  Columbia. 

44.  Corymhites  aratus  I*c.  On  July  19  one  was  taken  at  Tobin 
Harbor  (A.  29). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Lake  Superior;  Michigan;  No.  Wis- 
consin. 

Bupreatidac. 

45.  Dicera  prolongata  Ijcc.  A.  Two  were  taken  alMmt  caniji  at 
the  Light-house  (I,  7)  on  July  10  (G.  45)  and  on  July  15  (G.  86). 

Geographic  Range.  Saskatchewan  basin ;  Ottawa,  Canada ;  New 
Hampshire;  Mass.;  New  Jersey;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Nebraska;  Kansas; 
Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Idaho. 

46.  Dicera  tenebroaa  Kby.  Taken  about  the  campn  at  the  Light- 
house (I,  7)  on  July  25  (G.  l.">3),  and  at  SisOtonit  Bay  {V,  3)  on 
August  7  (G.  212),  and  15  (G.  239). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  Lake  Sujwrior;  Mt.  Washing- 
ton, N.  H.;  Mass.;  Mich.;  Duluth,  Minn.  {Wolcott) ;  Wisconsin; 
Colorado, 

47.  Buprestis  macuUventris  Say.  A.  This  was  the  most  abundant 
species  of  the  family,  and  was  very  abundant  about  the  camp  on  ^is- 
kowit  Bay  (V,  3}  during  August;  others  were  taken  at  the  Light-bouse 
clearing  (I,  7)  during  July  (G.  86,  117,  179,  195,  212,  222,  231),  (A. 
152). 

Food  plants.  Beetles  have  been  found  on  balsam  and  spruce,  and 
emerging  from  pine  timber,     (Felt,  1906,  p.  674.) 

Geographic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Ottawa,  Canada;  Lake  Superior 
region;  Mt.  Washington  {summit),  N.  II.;  Yenaont;  Mass.;  New  York; 


198  MICHIGAN   SURVBT,   ISDS. 

Petina.;  Mich.;  Wieconfiin;  Xebraeku;     Kaneas;     Colo.;  Xew     Mexico; 
Utah.     (WaBfaington;  Oregon,  cf.  Bethune,  '76,  p.  65). 

48.  Buprestia  faaciata  Fab.  (aad  vArietiee).  Like  ttie  preceding 
species,  this  was  also  taken  m  large  numbers;  at  the  Light-house  (1,  7) 
during  July  and  at  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  during  August.  (G. 
117,  133.  153,  166,  195,  212,  231).  Thi»  is  a  large  metallic  green  species 
which  shows  considerable  variation  in  the  amount  of  the  light-colored 
spots  on  the  elytra.  In  some  Isle  Boyale  specimens  the  spots  are  well 
developed,  in  others  completely  tacking.  The  var.  langii  is  credited  to 
Isle  Royale  in  the  Hubbard  and  Schwarz  list  (78).  This  is  a  western 
and  northwestern  variety,  Alaska,  Brit.  Columbia  and  western  moun- 
tains. 

Food  plants.  Found  on  poplars,  and  the  larva-bores  in  maple.  (Felt, 
'06,  p.  459.) 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  Nova  Scotia;  Xortheastem  U. 
S.  generally;  W.  Penna.;  Ohio  (Dury) ;  Michigan;  Wisconsin;  Colo- 
rado. 

49.  Bupreatis  striata  Fab.  A.  Taken  on  the  open  rock  ridge  north 
of  the  Light-house  (I,  2)  on  July  13  (G.  68).    One  specimen. 

Food  plants.  Occurs  on  pine  and  spruce,  the  buds  of  which  the 
beetles  are  said  to  eat;  may  also  feed  upon  dead  wood.  (Felt,  '06,  p. 
655). 

Geographic  Range,  Ottawa,  Canada ;  New  York ;  Mass. ;  New  Jersey ; 
Penna.;  Ohio   (Dury) ;  Michigan:  Wisconsin. 

50.  Melanophila  aceuminata  TteG.-longipeg  Bay.  A.  Two  speci- 
mens were  taken  at  the  Light-bouse  (1,  7)  on  July  7  (G.  26)  and  on  Jolv 
11   (G.  49). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  south  to  Virginia,  and 
Kentucky ;  W.  Penna. ;  Mich. ;  Wisconsin ;  Colo. ;  New  Mexico ;  So, 
Calif,;  Brit.  Columbia;  Alaska;  Knrope;  China. 

51.  Mclanophila  driinimoitdi  Khy.^guttulata  Gebl.  A.  Taken  about 
the  camps  at  the  Light-house  (I,  7)  during  July  (G.  98),  and  on  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  3)  during  August  (G.  212,  231,  239).      Five  specimens. 

Food  plant.    Found  on  spruce  logs.    ( Blanchni-d,  Ent.  Ainer.,  5,  p,  30). 

Geographic  Range.  Maine  to  Alaska  (Yukon)  ;  Mt.  Washington 
(summit),  N.  H.;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Idaho;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Utah; 
Calif.;  Washington;  Oregon;  Alaska;  Siberia,  Hamilton,  '94,  p.  29. 
'94a,  391. 

52.  Clirysobothris  trtticrvia  Kby.  Found  at  the  Lighthouse  (I,  7) 
during  Julv  (G.  106)  and  verv  abundant  at  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bav 
(V,  3)  during  August  (G.  212,  222,231,  239). 

Food  plant.    Found  on  spruce  l(^,    Blanchard,  Ent,  Amer.,  5,  p.  31. 

Geographic  Range.  Ijike  WinHi|»eg;  Alberta;  Hudson  Bay  region; 
Ottawa,  Ontario;  N.  H.;  W.  Penna.;  North  Cai"olina;  Mich.;  Colo.;  New 
Mexico;  Washington;  Oregon.    Hamilton,  '94,  p.  29, 

53.  Agrihts  aciitipf-nniit  Mann.  A.  One  specimen  from  the  clearing 
at  the  Light-house  (I.  7)  on  July  26  (G.  166). 

Food  plant.    Found  on  t)ak.    lllanchard.  Ent.  Amer.,  5,  p,  33. 

Geographic  Range.  ''Mass.  to  Kansas,  Floi'ida  and  Texas" ;  W.  Penna, ; 
Ohio  (Durv);  Mich.;  Glendon  I'ark,  III.  (Wolcott).  Horn,  Trans.  Ani. 
Ent.  Soc.,  18,  p.  309. 


,dbyGOO<^IC 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLB  ROYALE.  199 

Lampyridae. 

54.  Podahrius  diadema  Fab.  A.  Found  about  the  camp  at  tbe  Light- 
honse  (I,  7)  on  July  23  ((!.  1X1),  and  among  beach  drift  at  the  head  of 
Tonkin  Bay  (I,  1)  on  July  7  (A.  7).    Two  Hpeciniens. 

<;ei>f/raphic  Banffe.  Ottawa,  Canada ;  Mt.  Washington,  X.  .H ;  Ver- 
mont; Xew  York;  New  Jersey;  W.  Pennn. ;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Iowa. 

.55.  Podahnts  tumentomm  Sav.  A.  Taken  at  the  camp  on  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  .3)  on  August  4  (<J.  201). 

ISeoijraphh  Range.     W.  I'enna. ;  Mich.;  IllinoiH  (Wolcotf) ;  Colorado. 

.50.  ilaHhodca  n'lger  I*c.  Fonnd  in  a  small  rock  ytool  on  the  Lake 
shore  (I,  1)  on  July  12  i^G.  75). 

Geographic  Hange.  Isie  Boyale,  Marquette,  Mich.;  fiake  Superior 
region;  Mt.  Washington,  N.  H. 

i^carahaeidue. 

57.  Oeotnipefi  blackburnii  Fab.  A.  Two  of  these  beetles  were  taken 
about  home  dung  on  the  Deiwr  trail  (IIT,  'U4)  on  August  21  (A.  143). 

Olographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  New  York;  Xew  Jersey;  Dist. 
Columbia;  Ohio;  Mich.;  Wis. 

58.  Hcriva  vcitpertina  Gyll.  A.  One  specimen  found  on  the  grarelly 
lieach  near  the  Ijigbt-houne  (I,  1)  on  July  10  (G.  43). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada ;  Nova  Scotia :  Saskatchewan 
basin;  Vermont;  New  York;  N.  J.;  I>ist.  Columbia;  Fla. ;  W.  Penna. ; 
Ohio;  Mich.;  No.  Illinois  and  Indiana  (Woicott) ;  Wisconsin;  Iowa; 
Nebraska;  Kansas:  Colorado;  New  Mexico. 

59.  Diplotaxia  Uberta  Germ.  A.  A  single  dead  specimen  {Q.  102)  was 
foand  under  a  flat  rock  on  a  jack  pine  ridge  (I,  5). 

Geographic  Range.  Isle  Bovale,  Mich;  W.  Penna.;  New  Jweer;  Dist, 
of  Col. 

(JO.  /.arhnoatema  arctiata  Smith,  A.  Taken  at  the  Lighthouse  camp 
(I,  7),  on  July  26  (G.  166), 

Geographic  Range.  W,  Penna.;  Dist.  Columbia;  Michigan;  Elliot  and 
Carbondale,  111.     (Woicott). 

61.  Trichius  a^nis  Gory.  Very  abundant  in  the  flowers  of  the  Cow 
Parsnip  (Seraclcum  lanatum)  in  the  clearing  at  the  Lighthouse.  (I,  7) 
during  July  (G.  26,  45,  49,  105,  133,  136,  137). 

Geoyru])hi<-  Range.  Saskatchewan  basin:  Ottawa,  Canada;  Nova 
Scotia;  N.  H.;  New  York;  New  Jersey;  Virginia;  W.  Penna.:  Ohio. 
" "■  "  Wisconsin;    Iowa;    Colorado;    New 

mbgcidae. 

\.  Two  specimens  were  taken  on  Sis- 
kowit Bay  {V,  3)  on  August  15  (G.  239)  and  August  16  (A.  153). 

Food  plants.  I^rva  feeds  on  the  inner  bark  of  dead  and  dying  oaks 
and  hickory.  Probably  has  other  food  plant  as  hickory  was  not  found 
on  the  island  and  oak  is  of  very  rare  occurrence.    (Fett,''06,  p.  433.) 

Geographic  Range.  Mass.  to  .\labama ;  W.  Penna. ;  Ohio  { l>ury ) ;  New 
Y'ork;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Kansas;  Colorado;  Arizona.  Hamilton,  'y7a, 
p.  395.    IVobably  introduced. 

63.    Xylotrtvhiia  undulatua  Say.     This  active  beetle  was- exceedingly 


Mich.;   No. 
Meiico. 

Illinois 

(Woicott) ; 

Cera, 

62. 

Phymatodi'H  n 

inaJiilh 

iFnb. 

200  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

abundant  about  the  cnnips  at  the  Ligfat-hoxise  (I,  7)  during  July  and 
on  SiBkowit  Bay  <V.  3)  during  August.  There  is  couBiderable  variation 
in  the  tcUow  elytral  markings  in  the  series  secured.  (G.  86,  212,  222, 
231,  239),  (A.  5,  152). 

Food  plants.  Has  been  found  on  hemlock  and  spruce,  but  as  hemlock 
is  not  found  on  the  island,  spruce  is  probably  the  food  plant.  (Felt,  '06, 
p.  671). 

Qeoffraphic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada ;  Lake  Superior ;  New  Hampshire ; 
"New  York;  New  Jersey;  W.  Penna.;  Mich,;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Nebr. ; 
Kansas;  New  Mexico;  Northwest  Terr.;  Colorado;  British  Columbia. 

U4.  Pachyta  Uturata  Kby.  A.  The  one  specimen  is  from  the  camp 
at  Rock  narbor   (1,  7)   on  July  31   (G.  191). 

.  Qeographie  Range.  Vermont;  Hudson  Bay  region;  Mich.;  Colo.; 
New  Mexico  (Psyche  9,  p.  303) ;  Washington;  Idaho;  British  Col.  Ham- 
ilton, '94,  p.  31. 

65-  Acmaeops  pi-oteua  Kby.  One  taken  at  the  Siskowit  camp  (V,  3) 
on  August  15  (G.  239). 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Ottawa,  Ontario;  "common  through 
Canada;"  Hudson  Bay;  Saskatchewan  basin;  Mt.  Washington  (sum- 
mit), N.  H. ;  Mass.;  New  York;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Kansas;  New 
Mexico;  Montana;  Colo,;  Oregon;  Brit.  Columbia. 

66.  BelJamifa  scalaris  Say.  A.  A  single  specimen  of  this  slender 
beetle  came  from  the  Light-house  camp  (1,  7)  on  July  22  (G.  133). 

Food  plants.  Beetle  and  larva  have  been  found  under  the  bark  of  the 
Yellow  Birch.  {B.  lutoa)  and  has  been  found  ovipositing  on  maple. 
(Beutenmuller,  '96,  p.  77.) 

Oeogmphio  Range.  Saskatchewan  basin;  Ottawa,  Canada;  N.  II.; 
New  York;  W.  Penna.;  New  Jersey;  Maryland;  Va.;  La,;  Ohio  (Dury)  ; 
Mich.;  Wisconsin. 

67.  Lcptura  suhargenta-ta  Kby.  One  specimen  from  the  Light- 
house camp  (1,  7)  on  July  11  (G.  49). 

QeograplUc  Range.  Canada ;  Hudson  Bay  and  Lake  Superior  region ; 
N.  H.;  Mass.;  New  York;  Dist.  Columbia;  Georgia;  Mich.;  Ohio 
(Dory) ;  Wisconsin;  Montana;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Nevada;  Utah; 
Calif.;  Washington;  Brit.  Columbia;  Alaska. 

68.  Leptura  nigrella  Say  A.  A  single  specimen  was  taken  at  the 
Siskowit  camp  (V,  3)   on  August  7   (G.  212). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  region;  Maine; 
Georgia;  W.  Penna.;  Mich,;  No.  Illinois  (Wolcott) ;  Wisconsin;  Colo.; 
New  Mexico ;  Nevada ;  Washington. 

69.  Lcptura  sexmaculata  L.  A.  Taken  on  the  flowers  of  the  Gow 
Parsnip  in  the  clearing  at  the  lighthouse  (1,  7)  during  July  {G.  105). 

Geographic  Range.  Hudson  Bay  to  Lake  Superior;  Ottawa,  Canada; 
Quebec;  Mt.  Washington  (summit),  N.  H.;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Colo.; 
Brit.  Columbia;  eastern  and  western  Siberia;  Alps  and  Europe.  Ham- 
ilton, '94,  p.  396. 

70.  Leptura  canadensis  Fab.  A.  Only  two  specimens  of  this  i-eH 
shouldered  beetle  were  taken,  one  from  the  camp  on  Siskowit  (V.  3> 
on  August  7  (G.  212),  and  the  other  on  August  13  (G.  232)  from  near 
the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay   {VIII,  '04). 


3y  Google 


BCOLOGY  OP  ISLB  ROTALB.  201 

Food  plants.  Larva  barrows  in  spruce  and  hemlock.  (Beutenmnller, 
'96,  p.  78). 

Oeographic  Range.  Ottawa.  Can.;  Nova  Scotia;  N.  H.;  Vermont; 
Mass.;  New^  York;  Penna.;  ViiTiinia;  Qa,;  Mich.;  WiBconBin;  Mo.;  Colo.; 
Hew  Mexico ;  No.  ArizOQa ;  No.  Idnho ;  Brit.  Colnmbia ;  eastern  an4 
■western  Siberia;  Japan;  Russia;  Germany.     Hamiltou,  '94a,  p.  396. 

71.  Leptura  chri/socoma  Kby.  This  bright  yellow  beetle  was  the 
7i]0st  abundant  Oerambycid,  occurring  in  great  numbers  in  the  flowers 
of  the  Cow  Parsnip  in  the  clearing  at  the  Light-house  (1,  T) ;  also 
found  in  the  flowers  of  the  Wild  Rose  on  the  beach  (I.  1) ;  and  on  the 
flowers  of  Opniaatcr  opuUfoUiig.  at  the  month  of  Benson  brook  (II.  1> 
during  Julv.  Also  taken  at  the  Siskowit  camp  (V,  3)  on  August  u. 
((.).  :17,  45.  49,  105,  133.  137,  148,  191.) 

Oeoffniphir  Range.  Ottawa.  Can.;  Hudson  Bay  region;  Nova  Scotia; 
Haine;  N.  11.;  New  York;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  No. 
Arizona;  Priest's  Ijike,  Idaho.  (T\'olrott) ;  Utah;  Nevada;  Calif,;  Brit. 
Columbia. 

72".  Leptura  proxitna  Say.  A.  Two  specimens  were  found  on  the 
flowers  of  the  Cow  Parsnip  {I.  7)  in  July  (G.  105.  179),  and  another 
specimen  at  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  on  August  3  (O.  195). 

Pood  plant.    Reared  from  nmple.     (Wickham.  Can.  Ent.,  29.  p.  192.) 

Oeographic  Range.  Ottawa.  Can.;  Vermont;  N.  H.;  Mass.;  New 
York;  W.  Penna. ;  Virginia;  fia.;  Pist.  of  Columbia;  Oliio;  Mich.;  No. 
111.    (Wolcott)  ;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Missonri, 

73.  Leptura  tibialis  I^ec.  A.  The  one  specimen  is  from  the  camp 
on  Siskowit  Bay   (V,  3)  on  Angust  16  (A.  152). 

Oeographic  Range.  Mt.  Washington,  New  Hampsiiire;  Michigan; 
Oi'^on. 

74.  Leptura  mutabilig  Newm.  Four  specimens  were  taken  at  the 
Light-house  {I,  7)  during  July  (G.  49,  105,  137,  16C).  Some  of  these 
were  taken  on  the  flowei-s  of  the  Cow  Parsnip, 

geographic  Range.  Saskatchewan  basin;  Ottawa,  Can.;  Mt.  Wash- 
ington (summit),  N.  H.;  New  York;  Dist.  Columbia;  Mass.:  New  Jersey; 
W.  Penna.;  Ohio   (Dury);  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  New  Mexico. 

75.  Monohammua  acutellatus  Say,  A.  Six  specimens  of  these  large 
beetles  were  taken:  one  at  the  Liglit-house  (I.  7)  on  July  24  (G.  152), 
and  the  others  on  Angust  7.  12  and  16  at  the  Siskowit  camp  (V,  3). 
(G.  212,  2S1;  A.  152). 

Food  plant.  Taken  on  white  and  hard  pine:  beetle  girdles  branched 
and  the  larva  bores  in  spruce  trunk.     (Felt,  'Oti,  p.  364.) 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Can. ;  Hudson  Bay  i-egion ;  Saskatchewan 
basin;  W.  Penna.;  St.  Joseph  (Wolcott),  Isle  Boyaie,  Mich.:  Wisconsin; 
Dulutb,  Minn.  (Wolcott) ;  Colo.;  New  Mexico;  Brit.  Columbia;  Alaska; 
extensive  N.  American  range  in  "'pine  regions,"  Itistrict  of  Columbia. 

ChryKomclidac' 

76.  Donaeia  protrima  Kby.  A.  "In  the  water-lily  zone  of  Snmner 
Lake  (III,  5)  on  July  27  (G.  171).  The  beetles  fly' low,  dragging  the 
tip  of  the  abdomen  in  the  water,  and  apparently  alight  only  on  leaves 
of  the  waterlily."     Gleason.     Also  taken  July  29  (A.  iS4). 

*cl.  Chliu-iKlen  CSS)  tor  rood  htiblls  or  ililn  family. 


202  MICHIGAN    SURVET,    1908. 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Can.;  Lake  Superior;  N.  H.;  Mass.;  New 
York;  Penna.;  Mich.;  Wie. ;  Hudson  Bay  Terr.;  Idaho;  Calif.  Leng. 
Trans.  Am.  Ent  Soc.,  18,  p.  167. 

77.  Donccia  cincticomia  Jiewm,  A.  "Three  apecimenB  were  taken  on 
July  27  and  28  at  Snniner  Lake  (III,  5),  associated  with  the  preceding 
Blieciee  and  with  the  same  habit,"     Gleason.     (G,  171,  1751. 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  Vermont;  New  HampshiFe;  MaBS.;  New 
York;  Michigan;  No.  Illinois;  Texas. 

78.  Orsodachna  atra  Alir.  var.=cfti7drrn»'  Kbv.  Two  specimens  were 
taken  at  the  Liftht-hoiise  (I,  7)  on  July  11  (G.  49).  Horn.  Tr.  Am.  Ent. 
Soc..  '92,  pp.  6-7.    Ent.  Amer.,  I,  p.  9. 

Geographic  R«uge.  Saskatchewan  basin;  Ottawa,  Canada;  New  Eng- 
land and  south  on  the  mountains  to  N.  Carolina;  W.  Penna. ;  Mich.; 
Wisconsin;  No.  III.  (Wolcott);  Iowa;  Alberta;  Colorado;  New  Mexir^; 
Arizona;  California.     Psyche,  9,  p.  303;  Brit.  Columbia. 

79.  GalcruccUa  ngmphaea  L.  A.  These  leaf  beetles  were  taken  in  a 
small  bayou  (IV,  3)  connected  with  ^Tobin  Harbor  on  July  21  (A.  42). 
Larvae,  pupae,  freshly  emerged  and  fully  covered  adults  were  all  rep- 
resented in  very  lat^e  nunibei«.  The  lily  leaves  were  riddled  by  the 
innumerable  lai-vae.  Cf.  Chittenden,  '05,  p.  58  and  Mac  Glllivcay,  '03,  |>. 
3^5  for  the  life  history  of  this  species. 

Geographic  Range.  In  Canada  westward  to  the  Mackenzie  Basin  and 
into  Alaska;  New  York;  Va.;  Ohio  (Dury):  W.  Penna.;  Mich.;  Colo- 
rado; Texjis;  Oregon;  Calif.;  Siberia  into  Europe.  Hamilton,  '94a,  p. 
398. 

TcnchrioHidac. 

80.  Vpi"  rcramhoiflci*  L.  A.  A  single  specimen  was  taken  at  the 
Lighthouse  (1,  7)  on  July  23  (G.  153). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Can,;  Hudson  Bay;  Saskatchewan  basin; 
Lake  Superior;  Nova  Scotia;  Maine;  Mt  Washington,  K,  H.;  Vermont; 
New  York;  New  Jei-sey;  W.  Penna.;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Estherville, 
Cass  Co.,  Minn.  (Wolcott);  Colo.;  Montana;  Manitoba;  No.  Asia; 
Siberia;  No,  EnrojMj:  Germany.    Hamilton,  '94a,  p.  400. 

CixtcUdac. 

81.  CistcJa  ^erirca  Sav.  .\.  Found  under  loo^e  stones  on  the  jack 
pine  ridge  (I.  5)  on  July'l4  (G.  81). 

Pood  plants.  Has  been  found  on  pine,  oak  and  basewood.  (Felt,  '06, 
p.  518.) 

Geographic  Range.    Michigan;  W.  Penna.;  New  Jersey;  New  Mexico. 

Jlciandrgidae. 

82.  fferropalpii*  harhaliiit  Schall.  A.  One  specimen  was  taken  at 
Tobin  Harlwr  on  July  19  (G.  129). 

Food  plant.  I^irva  bores  in  sap  and  heart  wood  of  balsnm  and  sprnce. 
(Pelt.  '01!.  p.  071). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada;  I>ake  Superior  and  Hndson  Bay  regioD8<; 
Maine;  Vermont;  New  York;  W.  Penna.;  West  Virginia:  Colorado; 
Rocky  Mrs.  south  to  New  Mexico;  Manitoba;  Oregon;  Brit.  Columbia; 
Alaska ;  Kil>eriti ;  I'urope. 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE   ROYALE.  203 

MordcUidar. 

83.  An^i^pis  riifa  Say.  A.  Many  Rpwiineng  of  this  fi[>e(-ief<  were  takeu 
about  the  camp  at  the"l-ighthouBe  (1.  7)  ou  July  28  (G.  179). 

Geographic  Range.  Ottawa,  Can.;  Mt.  AVaahington  (summit),  N.  H.; 
Vermont;  New  York;  New  Jersey;  Dist.  Col.;  Florida;  Oliio;  Michigan; 
"WiBooDBin ;  Wyoming;  Colo,;  Utah;  Lower  Calif.;  New  Mexico;  Mexico; 
'W'ashinfrton ;  Brit.  Columbia;  Alaelia. 

84.  MordelUstcna  biplagiatn  Helm.  A.  One  specimen  was  taken  on 
flowers  in  the  clearing  at  the  Lighthouse  (I.  7)  on  July  11  (G.  4ft). 

Qeograpbic  Range.  New  York;  Dist.  of  Colnmbia;  Ohio;  Mich.;  Illi- 
nois; Wis. 

85.  Mordellistctia  arapiilarin  Hav.  A.  Two  specimens  were  taken  at 
the  Lighthouse  (1,  7)  on  July  28  (G.  179). 

Geographic  Range.  Dist.  of  Columbia ;  "Middle  and  l^'estern  States" ; 
lUich.  (Isle  Royale) ;  Ottawa,  Canada. 

Ciirculionidae. 

86.  HyJobivs  paleg  Hbst.  A.  .\  single  specimen  was  taken  at  the 
I>igbthouse  (I,  7)  on  July  13  (O.  86). 

Food  plant.     Larvae  lire  in  bark  of  white  pines.     (Felt,  '06,  p.  664). 
Geographic  Range.     Ottawa.  Canada ;  Maine  to  Florida ;   Michigan ; 
\V.  Penna.;  Dnlnth,  Minn.     (Wolcott). 

87.  HypomolyT  pineti  Fab.  A.  This  lai^  snout  beetle  (G.  179)  was 
taken  July  28  in  the  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7>. 

Geographic  Range.  Canada ;  Hudson  Bay  region ;  Saskatchewan 
basin;  Mich.;  Wisconsin;  Siberia;  Enrnpe. 

88.  Magdalig.  "Apparently  new,"  Wickham.;  Taken  at  the  Light- 
house camp  {I,  7)  on  Julv  23  (G.  130),  at  Siekowit  (V,  3)  on  August  !"► 
(G.  239). 

Calandridac. 

89.  Comoniin  subarcata^  Boh.  A.  Taken  at  the  Siskowit  Camp  (V,  3> 
on  August  7  (G.  212). 

Geographic  Range.  Mt.  Washington.  N.  H. ;  Michigan;  Wisconsin: 
OlendoQ  Park,  III.  (Wolcott) ;  Iowa;  Kansas;  Nebraska;  Colorado;  New 
Mexico;  "Middle  States." 


3y  Google 


MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 


2.     mPPLEMENTARY  LIST  OF  ISLE  ROYALE  BEETLES. 

BY  A.  B.  WOLCOTT, 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Chicago. 

Thin  Rupplementary  lint  of  speciee  records  from  Isle  Royale  all  the 
speries  taken  by  Hubbard  and  Schwarz  ('78,  pp.  627-043)  but  not  foond 
in  the  1905  collectiono.  These  two  lists  make  a  complete  cataloff  of  the 
species  so  far  found  on  this  island,  exocptinff  those  species  which  are 
scattered  in  the  literature  and  have  thus  been  overlooked.  The  general 
geographic  range  of  each  speoies  is  giren. 

Carabidac. 

1.  Bp.mhidittm  concoUir  Kby.  Xew  York;  Maine;  Canada;  Michigan 
( M ichipicoton  River) ;  Wyoming;  Maine  to  the  Pacific  coast. 

2.  Bembidium  planatiim  Lev.  Michigan  (Isle  Royale) ;  Colorado; 
Wyoming;  Nevada;  Oregon;  Washington  to  British  Columbia. 

\i.  fntrobiua  lonfficornis  Say.  Sew  Jersey;  Vermont;  New  York; 
I>i»t.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Pennsylvania;  Canada;  Michigan  (Escanaba)  ; 
Wisconsin;  Illinois;  Indiana;  Iowa:  Colorado;  Texas;  New  Mexico. 

4.  PteroKtichus  punctatisshiiua  Rand.  Massachusetts;  New  Hamp- 
shire; Vermont;  Maine;  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  region;  Michigan  (Mich- 
ipicoton  Island) ;  Arctic  Sibera;  the  Amur;  Dnuria. 

5,  Pierostichus  mandibularia  Kby,  var.  New  Hampshire;  Vermont; 
Massachnsetts ;  Canada;  Wisconsin;  Michigan  (Marquette.  Michipicoton 
River);  Hudson  Bay  region;  Alaska;  Arctic  ^il>eria. 

0,  Amara  latior  Kby.  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire;  Canada;  Mich- 
igan (Escanaba.  Ann  Arbor)  ;  Wisconsin;  Illinois;  Nebraska;  Colo- 
rado; Idaho;  New  Mexico;  .\ri7,ona;  Vancouver  Island. 

7.  Amara  impuncticoUis  Say.  Hist.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Michigan  (De- 
troit);  Wisconsin;  Canada;  Montana;  Colorado;  New  Mexico. 

8.  Calaihns  advcna  var.  mollis  Mots.  Vermont;  Maine;  ^lichigau 
(Michipicoton  Kiver,  Michipicoton  Island);  Alaska. 

!t.  Platyntis  aemginoms  l>ej.  Dist.  Columbia ;  Indiana  (Pine)  ; 
Illinois   (Chicago);  Michigan   (Escanaba,  l>etroit) ;  Wisconsin. 

10,  Dromiua  picctis  r>ej.  New  Jersey;  New  York:  Dist,  Columbia: 
Massachusetts;  Ohio;  Michigan  (Manjuette,  Detroit);  Wisconsin;  Can- 
ada: Iowa;  California. 

11,  HarpaUta  fulvilahris  Maun.  Michigan  (Marquette,  Michipi- 
coton River). 

12,  Harpalus  rufimatim  I>ec.  Jlichigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette) ;  Wis- 
consin; Canada;  British  Columbia. 

i:i.  Harpalus  laticepa  T-ec,  New  Hampshire  (iSnmmit  Mt,  Washing- 
ton); Michigan  (Escanaba,  Mai-quctte,  Lake  Hui-on) ;  Wisconsin;  Can- 
ada  (Ottawa);  Colorado, 

14.  Bradj/cflhin  cordicollis  Ta-c.  New  Ilaniiishii-e  (Mt.  Washington)  ; 
Michigan  (Marquette).  CoOqIc 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLB  ROTALE.  205 

Hydrophilidae. 

15.  Crenophilua  {Hydrohiiis)  diffeatus  1*0.  Miohigan  (Marquette,  De- 
troit). 

fill  phi  dar. 

16.  Necrophorua ^  re-ipilloidei*  Hbst.  New  Jernev;  New  Hampshire 
(Mt.  Washington);'  Michigan  (EHonnaba.  Mii-hipicoton  Island)  ;'^^'i(*- 
consin;  HtidsoD  Bar  Territor,v;  Nova  Bcotia;  Ontario:  Manitoba;  Brit- 
ish Columbia ;  Alaska ;  Wa«bington ;  Oregon ;  East  Siberia ;  Kamt- 
schatka;  Amurland;  Europe;  China. 

17.  Choleia  baniUaria  Sa.v.  New  Jersey;  New  IIanii>shire  (Mt.  Wash- 
ington);  Ohio;  Michigan  (Bault  de  Kte.  Marie,  Detroit);  Wisconsin; 
Nebraska;  Kansas;  Canada:  Hudson  Bay  Territory;  British  Columbia; 
Alaska;  Nevada  to  Colorado;  California. 

18.  Choleva  {Catopjt)  terminann  Lee.  Virginia;  New  Jersey;  Mass- 
achusetts; Dist,  Columbia;  Ohio;  Illinois;  Michigan  (Bachewauung  Bay, 
Michipicotou  Island);  Wisconsin;  Canada  (Ottawa). 

19.  Anistoma  aaaiinilis  Lee.  Dist.  Columbia;  New  Hampshire  (Buni- 
mit  Mt.  Washington) ;  Michigan  (Marquette,  Michipicoton  River) ;  Wis- 
consin; Canada;  Colorado;  Vancpuver  Island. 

20.  Liodea  globma  Lee.  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington)  ;  Michigan 
(Marquette) ;  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Colorado;  New  Mexico. 

21.  Agathidium  revolrens  Lee.  Canada  (Ottawa)  ;  British  Colum- 
bia; New  Mexico. 

22.  Clambus  gibbulus  Lee.  Florida;  Dist.  Columbia;  Michigan  (Mar- 
quette, Detroit);  Colorado;  S.  Arizona. 

Paelaphidae. 

23.  Tychus  longipalpua  Lee.  Florida ;  Dist.  Columbia ;  Michigan 
(Marquette);  Canada  (Ottawa). 

24.  Reichenbackia  (Bryaxis]  propinqua  Lee.  Canada  (Ottawa) ; 
Michigan  (Marquette,  Point  aux  Pins);  Colorado  (si»ecies  doubtfully 
identical). 

8taphyUnida€. 

25.  Qvediiis  lticrigatiif<  Gyll,  Geot^ia;  New  HampHliire  (summit  Mt. 
Washington);  Massachusetts;  Pennsylvania;  Ohio;  Illinois;  Michigan 
(Marquette,  Bachewanung  Bay,  Detroit);  Canada;  British  Columbia; 
Alaska;  Or^on;  Nevada;  Colorado;  Kansas;  New  Mexico;  California; 
eastern  Siberia;  northern  and  Alpine  Europe. 

26.  Stenus  aemicolon  Lee.  Dist.  Colu^iibia;  Michigan  (EscanabOr 
Marquette,  Basbewanung  Bay,  Micbipicoton  River), 

27.  Lathrobium  tcrmtnatum  Grav.  (piinc(M/a(«m  Lee.).  Florida; 
Georgia;  Dist.  Columbia;  New  Jersey;  W.  Pennsylvania;  Ohio;  "East- 
em  States";  Massachusetts;  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marqnette,  Detroit); 
Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Canada;  Kansas;  Colorado;  Europe  and  Siberia. 

28.  Tachinua  fumipetinis ,Say.  Florida;  Dist.  Columbia;  Michigan 
(Marquette);  Wisconsin:  Colorado. 

29.  Bolitobius  cvngiilatus  Mann.  Virginia;  New  Jersey;  New  Hamp- 
shire (Mt,  Washington);  Pennsylvania;  Michigan  (Sault  de  Ste.  Marie, 

27 


i06  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

Bachewaniing  Bay,  Detroit)  ;  Wiflconsio;  Canada;  Oregon;  Queen  Char- 
lotte iBland;  Britieh  Columbia;  Alaska;  Caucasia;  Europe. 

30.  HobroceruS  matfnus  Lee.  Michigan  (Marquette).  The  type  of 
this  speoies  came  from  Isle  Royale. 

31.  OliBthaerus  mcgaoephalva  Zett.  Michigan  (Michipicoton  laland) ; 
Canada;  Alaska;  California;  Siberia;  Lapland;  Sweden;  Hungarj; 
Arctic  and  Eastern  Siberia. 

32.  Olisthacriis  aub^triatua  Payk.  (nitidua  JjCC.).  Massachusetts; 
Michigan  (Midiipicoton,  Eagle  Harbor) ;  Wisconsin;  Sweden;  Germany; 
France;  Arctic  and  Eastern  Siberia. 

33.  Ancyrophorua  planua  Lee.  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington)  ; 
Michigan  (Isle  Boyale). 

34.  Anthophagua  vertwalia  Say.     Michigan    (Marquette,  Detroit). 

35.  Acidota  creanta  Fabr,  {aeriata  Lee).  Massachusetts;  Common 
on  Islands  and  shores  of  Lake  Superior;  Michigan  (Marquette,  Mich- 
ipicoton River,  Detroit)  ;  Canada;  central  and  northern  Europe;  Siberia. 

36.  Arpedium  sp.   Michigan    (Marquette). 

Phalacridae. 

37.  Phalacrua  poUtua  Melsh.  Florida;  Dist.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Illinois; 
Michigan  (Marquette,  DetTOit) ;  Canada  (Ottawa);  Iowa;  Colorado. 

CoccineUidae. 

3*?.  CoccineUa  perplexa  Muls.  (trifasciata  Linn.).  New  York;  New 
HamjiRhire  (Mt.  Washington);  Canada;  Hudson  Bay  Territory;  Mich- 
igan (Detroit.  Marquette,  Au  Train  Falls,  St.  Joseph);  Wisconsin;  Ill- 
inois (Chicago,  taken  by  Wolcott) ;  Alaska;  Vancouver  Island;  Oregon; 
Washington  to  California;  New  Mexico;  Kamtschatka  through  northern 
Siberia  and  Europe  to  Lapland.    Circumpolar. 

39.  Coccinetta  tranaveraoguttata  Fald,  var,  tranaveraalia  Muls.  The 
typical  form  or  its  varieties  are  known  from  New  Hampshire  (summit 
Mt.  Washington)  ;  Greenland;  Hudson  Bay  region;  various  places  in 
Canada;  British  Columbia;  Northwest  Territory;  Alaska;  Illinois  (Chi- 
cago, Wolcott  coll.) ;  Michigan  (Bachewanung  Bay,  Chatham ;  Wisconsin; 
Minnesota  (l)uluth,  Wolcott  coll.);  Nebraska;  Nevada;  Colorado;  New 
Mexico;  California;  Rocky  Mountains  and  Pacific  r^ions  to  mountain- 
ous Mexico;  eastern  Siberia;  Japan;  northern  China;  Dauria;  Lapland. 
Circumpolar. 

40.  Cycloneda  aanguinea  Linn.  Floiida;  West  Indies;  "United  States 
and  Canada  generally";  Michigan  (Michipicoton  River,  Chatham) ;  Wis- 
consin; Illinois;  Indiana;  Ohio;  New  Jersey  to  Colorado;  New  Mexico; 
N.  Arizona ;  Texas ;  Baja  California ;  Europe. 

41.  Cleia  {Sarmonia)  picta  Band.  Dist.  Columbia;  Pennsylvania; 
Canada  to  Colorado;  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mti  Washington) ;  Mich- 
igan (Escanaba,  Marquette);  Minnesota  (Dulnth,  Wolcott  coll.);  New 
Mexico. 

42.  ficymnua  lacustria  Lee.  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette)  ;  Col- 
orado; Arizona. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLB   ROyALB. 


Endomychidae. 


43.  Lycoperdina  ferruyinea  Lee.  Dist,  Culumbia;  New  Jersey  west 
to  Colorado;  New  Hampshire  (Mt  Washington)  ;  New  York;  "Middle 
and  Southern  States";  Ohio;  Illinois  (central  and  northern) ;  Michigan 
(Bachewannng  Bay,  Detroit);  Canada;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Colorado; 
New  Mexico, 

HUteridae. 

44.  Biater  haaalia  1*0.     Ohio:  Michigan  (Marquette). 

45.  Ptegaderua  sayi  Mara.  "Middle  States";  Michigan  (Sault  de  Ste. 
Marie,  Marquette);  Canada;  Wisconsin;  Colorado;  New  Mexico. 


46.  Omoaita  diecoidea  Fabr.  Canada;  Michigan  (uorthem)  ;  Colo- 
rado; New  Mexico;  Europe  and  the  Pa>ciflc  States,  east  to  Colorado. 

Lathridiidae. 

47.  8tepAo8t€thua  (Laihridua)  liratux  Tjec.  Dist  Columbia;  Ohio; 
Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Michigan  (Detroit)  ;  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  Brit- 
ish Columbia. 

48.  Lathridiua  tninutua  Linn.  "Nearly  all  North  America";  Dist. 
Columbia;  Michigan  (Detroit) ;  Wisconsin;  Colorado;  "Alaska  to  Louis- 
iana and  to  Massachusetts  and  eastern  Canada" ;  all  Europe  and  north- 
em  Asia  to  Kamtschatka. 

49.  Corticaria  aerrtcolUs  Lee  Michigan  (Michipicoton  River,  De- 
troit) ;  British  Columbia. 

Byrrhidae. 

50.  Bffrrhua  geminatua  Lee.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washing- 
ton);  Michigan  (Isle  Royale  only). 

Daacyllidac. 

51.  Macropogon  picena  Lee.     Michigan   (Isle  Royale  only). 

52.  Eurypogon  niger.     Michigan   (Michipicoton  River). 

53.  Eascinettta  terminalia  Lee.  New  Jersey  west  to  Colorado;  New 
York;  Vermont;  Ohio;  Illinois;  Michigan  (Bscanaba,  Marquette,  De- 
troit) ;  Canada. 

Elaterid^Ie. 

54.  Cryptohypnua  bicolor  Jlach.  This  species  is  believed  to  be  merely 
a  variety  of  nocturttim  Esch.  which  is  recorded  with  the  variety  from 
the  following  localities; — Labrador;  Hudson  Bay  regions;  New  Hamp- 
shire  (summit  and  alpine  regions  Mt.  Washington) ;  Canada;  Michigan 
(Marquette,  Sault  de  Hte.  Marie) ;  Dakota;  Wisconsin;  Utah;  Colorado; 
Montana;  Idaho;  New  Mexico;  Or^on;  British  Columbia;  Alaska; 
Kamtschatka;  eastern  Siberia. 

55.  Crytohypnua  tumcscena  Lee.  Michigan  (Sault  de  Ste.  Marie); 
Colorado;  New  Mexico. 

56.  Elater  nigrinus  Pajk.  var.?  Elatcr  nigrinua  occurs  in  Vermont; 
Canada  (Ottawa);  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette,  Detroit);  Alaska: 


208  MIGHIGAN   aURVET.   1908. 

Vancouver  Inland  and  Queen  Charlotte  Island;  British  Columbia;  Kew 
Mexico;  northern  and  central  Europe;  west  Siberia;  Amurlaud. 

57.  Slater  mtxtm  Hbst.  Dist.  Columbia ;  New  Hampehire  (sunmut  Mt. 
Washiugton);  Canada  (Ottawa);  Michigan  (Marquette,  Micbipicoton 
Island)  ;  Colorado. 

58.  lietarmon  bigeminatus  Rand.  Dist.  Columbia;  Canada  (Ottawa)  ; 
Michigan    ( Marquette) . 

59.  Melanotus  Leonardr  Lee.     Michigan  (Marquette,  Detroit). 

60.  AfeUmotus  castanipea  Payk.  {acrobieotlia  IjCc).  "Middle  States  to 
Canada";  New  York;  Vermont;  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washing- 
ton);  Dist.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Pennsylvania;  Canada;  Michigan  <Esca- 
naba,  Marquette,  Detroit) ;  Wisconsin;  Colorado;  Europe;  West  Siberia; 
Amurland. 

61.  Limon^a  aeger  Lee.  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washing- 
ton);  Canada   (Ottawa);  Michigan   (Marquette);  Wisconsin. 

62.  Campylus  denticornis  Kirby.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt. 
Washington);  Maine;  Peunsylvania ;  Canada  (Ottawa);  Ohio;  Mich- 
igan;  (Marquette,  Port  Huron);  Wisconsin. 

63.  Paratuymvs  costalis  Payk.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Wash- 
ington);  "The  northern  shore  of  Lake  Superior";  Labrador;  Europe 
(Sweden,  Finland,  Lapland) ;  Amurland. 

64.  Sericoaomua  incongruua  Lee,  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Michigan  (Mar- 
quette) ;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington). 

65.  Corymhitcs  resplendcns  Escb.  Newfoundland ;  Maine ;  Lake 
Superior  region  northward  to  56°;  Vermont;  Canada  (Ottawa);  Mich- 
igan ( Michipicoton  Island,  Marquette)  ;  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt. 
Wtibhington) ;  Wisconsin;  Queen  Charlotte  Island;  Dritish  Columbia; 
Alaska. 

66.  Corymbitea  apinoaua  1*0.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Wash- 
ington) ;  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette) ;  Wis- 
consin; Iowa. 

67.  Corymbitea  mendax  Lee,    Michigan  (Eagle  Harbor). 

68.  Cori/miitea  inaidiosua  Ijec.  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington)  ; 
Michigan   (Marquette) . 

69.  Corymbitea  falalficua  I^c.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt,  Wash- 
ington);  Canada;  Michigan   (Marquette):  Wisconsin, 

70.  Corymbitea  triutidtilatus  Rand.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt. 
Washington) ;  Maine;  Vermont;  Michigan  (Marquette) ;  Canada 
(Ottawa);  Wisconsin;  Colorado. 

71.  Corynibites  propnia  I^ec.  New  York;  Vermont;  New  Hampshire 
(summit  Mt.  Washington);  Canada;  Michigan  (Michipicoton  River, 
Marquette) ;  British  Colmnbia. 

72.  Corymbitea  nigricolHa  Bland.     Michigan   (Marquette);  Colorado. 

73.  Corymbitea  aplendena  Ziegl.  Dist.  Columbia ;  Ohio ;  Canada 
lUltawa)  ;  Michigan  (Marquette). 

74.  CorymAitea  nigricomia  Panz.  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire 
(summit  Mt,  Washington);  Massachusetts;  Illinois  (Ft,  Sheridan,  Wol- 
cott) ;  Michigan  (Marquette,  Detroit) ;  Canada;  Iowa;  WiBCOUsin;  Col- 
orado; central  and  boreal  Euro^ie  and  Siberia. 


3y  Google 


BCOLOOT  or   ISLE  ROTALE. 


Buprestidae. 

76.  ,Melanophila  fulvoguttata  Harr.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt. 
Washington);  Canada  (Ottawa);  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette,  Port 
Huron) ;  Eanaas. 

Lampyridae, 

76.  Plateros  (Eros)  modcstus  Say.  Florida;  Dist.  Columbia;  New 
Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washington);  Ohio;  Michigan  (Detroit,  Mar- 
quette) ;  Canada  (Ottawa)  ;  Iowa  (McGregor,  Wolcott)  ;  New  Mexico. 

77.  EUychnia  (Photintm)  corrusca  Linn.  "Common  in  Canada  and 
most  of  the  United  States  Mst  of  the  Rocky  Mountains" ;  Dist.  Columbia ; 
Virginia;  Georgia;  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washing- 
ton); New  York;, Ohio;  Indiana  (Wolcott);  Illinois;  Michigan  (Mich- 
ipicotoQ  River,  Detroit);  Iowa;  Wisconsin;  Nebraska;  Kansas;  Col- 
orado; New  Mexico;  Arizona.;  Canada  (Ottawa);  Nova  Bcotia;  North- 
west Territory. 

78.  Podabrug  modeatus  Say.  Georgia;  New  Jersey;  New  York;  New 
Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington);  Pennsylvania;  Ohio;  Michigan  (Esca- 
naba, Mu-quette,  Detroit);  Canada  (Ottawa);  Iowa;  Wisconsin;  Colo- 
rado. 

79.  Podabrus  lacvtcoUia  Kby.  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington); 
Michigan  (Marquette,  Michipicoton  River)  ;  Colorado. 

80.  Telephorua  CurtisU  Kby.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washing- 
ton);  Michigan  (Marquette,  Michipicoton  River);  Wisconsin;  Iowa; 
Hudson  Bay  region ;  British  Columbia. 

81.  Malthodd$  laticolUg  Lee.  [traneversus  T^ec.).  Michigan  (Isle 
Ko.vale  only). 

82.  Malthodes  condavus  Lee.  Diet.  Columbia;  Michigan  (Marquette, 
Detroit) ;  Colorado. 

83.  Malthodes  fragilis  I*c.     Michigan  (Detroit). 

Cleridae. 

84.  Tha)iasimus  (Clerus)  undatulus  Say.  New  York;  Vermont;  Maine; 
New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washington);  Canada;  Michigan  (Mar- 
quette, Escanaba);  Minnesota;  Hudson  Hay  north  (o  lat.  I>5°;  Kansaa; 
Colorado;  New  Mexico;  variety  nubilii8  occurs  in  Northwest  Territory 
and  Alaska. 

Ptinidae. 

85.  THnodervfi  substriatns  Payk,  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt. 
Washington) ;  "Northern  States";  Canada;  Pennsylvania;  Michigan 
(Escanaba,  Marquette,  Bachewanung  Bay) ;  Alaska;  eastern  and  western 
Siberia;  Europe. 

Cioidae. 

86.  Cis  creberrimua  Melli4.  Florida;  Dist.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Michi- 
igaa   (Marquette,  Detroit). 


3y  Google 


210  HIOHIQAN   SURVET,   1908. 

Cerambycidae. 

S7.  Tetropium  cinnam'opterum  Kirby.  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire 
(summit  Mt  Washington);  Vermont;  PennBylvania ;  Canada;  Michigan 
(Marquette);  Wisconsin;  Colorado;  New  Mexico;  northern  and  mount 
ainous  Arizona;  California;  Oregon;  Washington;  Northwest  Terri- 
tory; British  Columbia;  Alaska;  "north  to  55°". 

SB. .  Phymaiodes  macitUcollis  Tjec.  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  ^Vashing- 
ton)  ;  Michigan  (Isle  Royale-type  locality) ;  Colorado  (7-9000  ft.  el.). 

89.  MicToclytus  gazellula  Hald.  (Crytophorua  gibbuJua  Lee.).  Dist 
Columbia;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington);  Canada  (Ottawa); 
Michigan  (Detroit). 

90.  Pachyta  monticoJa  Rand.  New  York;  New  Hampshire  (summit 
Mt.  Washington ) ;  Vermont ;  Maine ;  Massachusetts ;  Pennsylvania ; 
Michigan  (Marquette) ;  Wisconsin;  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Antlcosti  Island; 
Alaska. 

91.  Leptura  rvfula  HaM.    Michigan  (Isle  Eoyale  only). 

92.  Pogonocherus  mia^tus  Hald.  Dist,  Columbia;  New  Jersey;  New 
York;  New  Hampehii-e  (summit  Mt.  Washington);  Indiana  (Clarke 
Junction,  Dune  Park,  Wolcott  coll.) ;  Canada;  Michigan  (North  Muske- 
gon, Marquette,  Michipicoton  River,  Port  Huron) ;  Kansas;  New  Mexico; 
Colorado;  Northern  Arizona. 

Chryaomelidac. 

93.  Zeugophora  varians  Cr.  New  Jersey;  New  Hampshire;  Penn- 
sylvania; Indiana  (Pine-Wolcott  coll.);  Illinois  (Glen  Ellyn,  Wolcott 
coll.);  Canada;  Michigan  (Detroit);  Wisconsin;  Kansas;  Washington, 

94.  Syneta  fcrnigirwa  Cerm.  Dist.  Columbia;  Maryland;  New  Jer- 
sey; New  York;  New  Hampshire  (Mt,  Washington);  Vermont;  Mass- 
achusetts; Ohio;  Illinois  (central  and  northern) ;  Michigan  (Mar- 
quette) ;  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Wisconsin;  Nebraska;  Colorado;  New- 
foundland. 

95.  Basmre.tin  mamiiiifn-  Newm.  var.  nrlUttus  Suffr.  {Cryptocephalu* 
Kcllafus  Suffr.).  DJst.  Columbia;  New  Jersey;  "Middle  and  Western 
States";  Ohio;  Indiana  (Clarke,  Hessville,  Wolcott  coll.);  Michigan 
(Escanaba,  Mai-qnette,  Detroit,  North  Muskegon,  Holland);  Wisconsin; 
Iowa ;  Canada ;  Colorado. 

96.  PackybrachyH  sp.    Michigan  (Sault  de  Sfe.  Marie,  Marquette). 

97.  fionioctvna  pallida  Linn.  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washinft- 
ton) ;  Michigan  (Marquette,  Bacbewanung)  ;  Minnesota;  Wisconsin ; 
('olorado;  Hudson  Bay  region  generally;  Europe  and  Siberia. 

9K  Phylhdecta  viilf/rithsiina  Lii\n.  \^i^inia;  New  Jersejj;  New 
Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Washington) ;  New  York;  Pennsylvania;  Ohio; 
Illinois  (central)  ;  Michigan  (Detroit)  ;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Canada 
(Ottawa) ;  Iceland;  Siberia;  China;  Turkestan;  Canaries.  Perhaps  also 
in  Alaska. 

Cistelidae. 

99.  Hymenorus  nigcr  Melsh,  Florida ;  Texas ;  Dist.  Columbia ; 
New  York;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington);  Pennsylvania;  Ohio; 
Canada  (Ottawa);  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette,  Detroit);  Wiscon- 
sin;  Colorado.  ^  ,,  CoOgIc 


BCOLOGT  OP   ISLE  ROTALB.  211 

Melandryidae, 

100.  Emmem  connect-;n8  Newm,  New  Hampshire  (summit  Mt.  Waeh- 
ington) ;  Michigan  (Uarqnette). 

101.  Scotochroa  ftfwn/w  Lee.  Canada  (Ottawa) ;  Michigan  (Esca- 
naba,  Marqoette) ;  Colorado. 

Pythidac. 

102.  Lecontia  (Crpmodes)  disicoIUs  Lee.  New  Hampshire  (summit 
Mt.  Washington);  Alichigan  (Marquette);  Manitoba;  Canada;  (Ot- 
tawa) ;  Idaho;  Colorado;  New  Mexico. 

103.  Boroa  vnicotor  Say.  Piat.  Columbia;  Michigan  (Marquette); 
Canada  (Ottawa). 

104.  Rhinoaimua  viridiaencua  Rand,  (nitens  Lee).  Dist.  Columbia; 
Michigan  (Detroit,  Marquette). 

Ciirculionidae. 

105.  Pis»odvs  duViut  Hand.  New  Hampshire  {Mt.  Washington); 
Canada;  Michigan   (Maniuette)  ;  Wisconsin. 

100.  Dori/tomiis  brevimllia  Lee.  DiKt.  Columbia;  New  Jersey;  New 
York;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington);  Ohio;  Michigan  (Marquette, 
Detroit);  Colorado;  New  Mexico;  Canada:  Vancouver  Island. 

107.  Trichalophiia  aUnnatua  Say.  Michigan  (Michipicoton  River) ; 
Wyoming   (Laramie) ;  Colorado.  ' 

108.  Apion  sp.     Michigan  (Marquette). 

109.  Maffdalia  hiapoides  Lee.  Djst.  Columbia;  Michigan  (Marquette, 
Port  Huron);  Colorado;  British  Columbia. 

110.  Magdalia  gentilia  I^c,  Michigan  (Marquette);  Colorado;  Cali- 
fornia. 

lU,  Magdalis  armicolUa  Sav  (Magdalis  alvtacca  Lee.  Bui.  U.  S.  Geo!, 
and  Geogr.  Surv.  Terr.,  4  p.  '4(i3,  1878).  J*Conte  described  alutacea 
from  Isle  Royale,  Lake  KiiiHriof  (Mr.  K.  A.  Hchwara)  and  I/cavenworth 
Valley,  above  Georgetown,  Ci>lunulo,  sfiecimens;  the  species  is  not  given 
in  Hubbard  and  Schwarz's  list.  It  has  since  t»een  found  at  various 
places  in  the  mountains  in  Colorado;  Ohio;  Canada  (Ottawa);  New 
Ilamiwhire  (Mt.  Washington)  ;  and  a  species  doubtfully  referred  here 
occurs  in  New  Mexico. 

112.  Antkonomua  cornilua  Lw.  Dist.  Columbia;  Ohio;  Illinois 
(Itiver  Foreflt,  Bowmanvi lie,  Wolcofl  coll.);  Miohigjin  (Marquette,  De- 
troit). 

Iia.  Paeudanthonomun  (Anthoiiomus)  rralacffi  Walsh.  Florida; 
Disf.  Columbia;  Ohio;  llliuuis  (cenfrul  and  northern)  ;  Michigan  (De 
iroit,  Marquette). 

114.  Orcheatca  pallwiriiin  Say,  "Nova  Kcolia  to  Texas,  and  to  Puget 
Sound"  (LeConte) ;  Dist.  Columbia;  New  Hampshire  (Mt.  Washington) ; 
Ohio;  Michigan  (Escanaba,  Marquette,  Detroit). 

115.  Orchestcs  cantia  Horn.  Ohio;  Tyjie  locality  given  thus;  "Speci- 
mens are  before  me  from  Isle  Koyale  and  Kscauaba.  Michigan,  and  from 
San  Juan,  Colorado"  Horn,     Also  known  fi-oni  Marquette,  Michigan. 

116.  Ctvemogonus  epilobH  Payk.  Michigan  (Marquette) ;  British  Col- 
umbia; Great  Slave  Lake,  Northwest  Territory;  Colorado;  northern  and 
central  Europe. 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 


117.  Dendroctonus  rufipennia  Kbj.  Alaska;  "Vancouver  to  Anti- 
costi.  New  BmnBirick  and  sonthweBt  to  Florida  and  New  Mexico";  West- 
ern PennsylTania ;  Michigan  (Marqnette). 

.    RGPERKNCBS. 

Refhiine,  C.  J.  8.   (compiled  by). 
1876.    iDBeots  of  the  Northern  Parts  of  British  America.    Ent.  Soc. 
Ontario,  pp.  l-15fi,  6npp.     pp.  1-14. 
[From  Kirby's  Fauna  Boreali-Americana;  Insecta.] 
Beutenmnller,  W. 
1893.    On  the  Food-Habits  of  North  American  Rhyncopbora.    Jonr. 

N.  Y.    Ent  Soc,  I.  pp.  36-43,  80-88. 
1896,     Food-Habits  of  North  American  Cerambycidae.    Jour.  N.  Y. 
Ent.  Soc.,  4,  pp.  73-81. 
Blanchard,  F. 

1889.      List  of  Buprestidae  of  New  England.    Ent.  Am.,  5,  p.  29-32. 
Bowditch,  F.  0. 

1896.  List  of  Mt.  Washington  Coleoptera.  Psvche,  7,  Bnpp.  pp.  1-11. 
Caudell,  A.  N. 

1903.    Some  Insects  from  the  Summit  of  Pike's  Peak,  Found  on  Snow. 
Pro.  Ent.  Soc.  Wash..  5,  pp.  74-82. 
Carpenter,  W.  L. 

1875.     Report  on  tlie  Alpine  Insect-Fauna  of  Colorado.    Ann,  Rep.  U. 
S.  Oeol.  Surv-ev  Terr,  for  1H73.     (Havden),     pp.  539-S43. 
Chittenden.  F.  H. 

1889.    Notes  ou  the  Habits  of  Buprestidae.    Ent.  Am.,  5,  pp.  217-220. 
1893.     Notes  on  the  Food  Habits  of  Some  Species  of  Chrysomelidae. 
Pro.  Ent.  Soc.  Wash.,  2.  pp.  261-267. 

1900.  Insects  and  the  Weather:     Otwen-ations  Daring  the  SeasOD  of 

18.99.    BiUI.  22,  N.  S.  Div.  of  Entomology,  U.  S.  l>ept.  Agric, 
pp.  51-64. 

1901.  Insects  ami  the  Weather  During  the  Benson  of  1900.    Bull.  .30. 

U.  K.  Div.  Entomolog.v,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr..  pp.  63-75. 

1905.  The  Pond-Lilv  I*uf-Bcetle.  Bull,  Bureau  of  Ent.,  No,  54,  58-60. 
Cockerell.  T.  D.  A. 

1893.     The  Entomology  of  the  Mid-Alpine  Zone   of    Custer    County, 
Colorado.    Trans.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  20,  pp.  305-370. 
Coleman,  A.  P. 

1906.  Interglacial  Periods  in  Canada,    Inter-  Oeol.  Congress,  Mexico, 

1906,  reprint,  pp.  1-26. 
Dury.  C. 

1902.  A  Revised  List  of  the  Coleoptera  Observed    near    Cincinnati, 

Ohio,  etc.     Jour.  Cinn.  Soc,  Nat.  Hist,  20,  pp.  107-196. 
1906.     Additions  to  the  List  of  Cincinnati  Coleoptera.     Jour.  Cinn. 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  20,  pp.  251-260. 
Evans,  J.  D. 

1903.  List  of  Canadian  Coleoptera.  Can.  Ent.,  35,  pp.  239-243,  288- 

292,  317-320. 


3y  Google 


BCOLOOY  OF  ISLB  ROTALB.  213 

Pall,  H.  C. 

1902.    Some  Insects  of  the  Hudsonian  Zone  in  New  Mexico— Coleop- 
tera.    Psyche  9.  p.  303. 
Fall,  H.  C,  and  Cockerell,  T.  D.  A. 

1907.     Tlie  Coleoptera  of  New  Mexico.     Trans,   Am.  Ent.    Soc.,    33, 
pp.  145-272. 
Fauvel,  A. 

1889.     Liste  des  Coleopteres  Comiuana  a  I'Enrope  et  a  TAmerique  dn 
Nord.     Rer.  D'Rntomologie,  8,  pp.  92-174. 
Feit,  E.  r. 

1905-OC.     Insects  affecting  Park  and  Woodland  Trees.    Mem.  8,  N.  Y. 
St.  Mns.,  Vol.  1,  1905;  Vol.  2,  190C. 
Hamilton,  J.,  and  Hennbaw,  S, 

1891-92.    A  List  of  Some  of  the  Catalogues  and  Local  Lists  of  North 
American  Coleoptera.     Psyche,  7,  I   (A.-G),  pp.  160-162; 
II   (H.-P),  pp.  188-193;  III   (R.-Z.),  pp.  205-209.     (Con- 
tains an  index  of  localities.) 
Hamilton,  J. 

1894.  Catalogue  of  the  Coleoptera  of  Alaska,  with  the  Synonymy  and 

l>i8tribution.    Trans.  Am.  Ent.  Soc.,  21,  pp.  1-38. 
1894a,     Catalogue  of  the  Coleoptera    Common    to  'North    America, 
Northern    Asia  and   Enropc,  with    Distribution  and  Biblio- 
graphv.     Second  edition.     Trans.   Am.   Ent.   Soc,  21,  pp. 
345-416'.     (First  edition  I.  c,  '89,  16,  pp.  88-162.) 

1895.  Catalogue  of  the    Coleoptera   of    Southwestern    Pennsylvajiia, 

with  Notes  and  Descriptions.    Trans.  Am.  Ent.  Soc.,  22,  pp. 
317-381. 
Harrington,  W,  H. 

1884.  List  of  Ottawa  Coleoptera.    Trans.  Ottawa  Field  Natur.  Club, 

No.  5,  pp.  67-85. 
Hayward,  R. 

1897.     On  the  Species  of  Bembidium  of  America,  North  of  Mexico, 
Trans.  Am.  Ent.  Soc.,  24,  pp.  32-143. 
Henshaw,  S.  i 

1885.  IJst  of  the  Coleoptera  of  Ameri^-a,  North  of  Mexico.     Amer. 

Ent,  Soc, 
1895.    Third  Supplement  to  the  List  of  Coleoptera  of  America,  North 
of  Mexico.    Amer,  Ent,  Soc. 
Horn,  G.  H. 

1871.  Revision  of  the  Tenebrionidae  of  America.     Trans,  Amer.  Pbil. 

Soc,  N.  S.  14,  pp.  'lotiiOi. 

1872.  Coleoptera-  Fifth  Ann,  Rep.  U.  6.  Geo!.  Surv,  Montana  and  Por- 

tions of  Adjacent  Territories  (Hayden),  pp.  382-392. 
Hubbard,  H.  G.,  and  Schwan:,  E.  A. 

1878,    Coleoptera  of  Michigan.    Pro.  Amer,  Phil.  Soc.,  17,  pp.  593-669. 
Keen,  J.  H. 

1895.     List    of    Coleopterai    collected    at    Massett,    Queen    Charlotte 
Islands,  B.  C.    Can.  Ent,  27,  pp.  1C5-172,  217-220. 
Klages,  H.  0. 

1901.     Supplement  to  Dr.  John  Hamilton's  List  of  the  Coleoptera  of 

Southwestern  Pennsvlvania,     .\nn.  Carnegie  Museum,  I,  uii„ 

265-294.  "^ 

LeConte,  J.  L. 

1^0,    General  Remarks  upon  the  Coleoptera  of  Lake  Superior,  pp. 


214  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   190«. 

1851.     On  tbe  (ieojp-utihical   DiHtribution  of  AtiimaU    in  Californiii. 
Pi-o.  Ain.  Assoc.  Adv.  Si-i.,  6,  pp.  248-254. 

1859.  TTie  Coleoptera  of  Kansas  and  Eastern  New  Mexico.     8mitb. 

Cont.  Kuowl.,  11,  pp.  1-58. 

1860.  Report  upon  Insects  Collected  on  the  Survey.     Rep.  Ezpl.  and 

Snrv.  from  Miss.  River  to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  12,  Pt.  3,  pp. 

1-72. 
18ti2.     Notes  on   the  Coleopterous  Fauna  of  Lower  California,   Pro. 

Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  for  1861,  pp.  335-338. 
187(i.     Presidential   Address.    Pro.   Am,   Assoc.   Adv.   Sci.,   1875,   pp. 

1-18.      (Also  Pop.   Sci.   Mo.,  8,  pp.  285-299;   Amer.   Nat.,  !), 

pp.  481-498.) 

1878.  The  Coleoptera  of  the   Alpine  Regions  of   the  Rocky   Moun- 

tains.    Bull.  U.  S.  Geo!,  and  Oeogr.  Surv.  Terr.,  4,  pp.  447- 
480. 
1878a,     Remarks  on  Geogi-aphical  Distributitm.     [Florida  Coleoptera.] 

Pro.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  17,  pp.  470-471, 
1878b.     Description    of    New    Species    [from    Michigan].     Pro,    Am. 
Phil.  Hoc.,  17,  pp.  593-B26. 

1879.  The  Coleoptera  of  the  Alpine  Rocky  Mountain  Regions — Part 

II.    Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Sui-vey,  Terr.,  5,  pp.  499-520. 
MacGillivray,  A,  D. 

1903.     Aquatic  Chrvsonielidac  and  a  Table  of  the  Families  of  Coleop- 
terous Larvae.    Hull.  68,  N.  Y.,  St.  Mus.,  pp.  288-327. 
Murray,  A. 
1870,    On    the   Geographical    Relations  of   the   Chief    Coleopterous 
Faunae.     Jour.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool,  11,  pp.  1-89. 
Packard,  A.  S. 

1890.    Forest  Insects.    Fifth  Report  U.  S.  Bnto.  Comm.  U.  8.  Dept. 
Agr. 
Riley,  C.  V. 

1880.  Food  Habits  of  the  T»ngicorn  Beetles  or  Wood  Borers.    Amer. 

Ent.,  3,  pp,  270-271,  237  339. 
Schwarz,  E.  A. 

1878.     The  Coleoptera  of  Florida.     Pro.  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  17,  pp.  353- 
469. 

1888.     The  Insect  Fauna  of  Semi-tropical  Florida  with  Special  Regard 
to  the  Coleoptera.    Ent.  Amer.,  4,  pp.  165175. 

1890.     On  the  Coleoptera  Common  to  North  America  and  Other  Coun- 
tries.   Pro.  Ent.  Roc.  Wash.,  1,  pp.  182-195. 

1890a.     On  a  Collection  of  Coleoptera  from  St.    Augustine,    Florida. 
Pro.  Ent.  Soc.  Wash..  1,  pp.  169-171, 

1901.     Semi-ti-opical  Texas.     Pro.  Ent.  Soc.  Wash.,  4,  pp.  1-3. 
Scudder,  S.  H, 

1874.     The  Distribution  of  Insects  in  New  Hampshire.    Final  Report 
Geol.  New  Hampshire,  I,  pp.  331-380. 

1894.  The  Effects  of  Glaciatlon  on  the  North  American  Fauna.    Am. 

Jour,  Sci,,  48.  p.  180. 

1895.  TTie  Coleoptera  Hitherto  Found  Fossil   in   Canada.     Cont,  to 
,     Can.  Paleon.  II,  Pt.  I,  pp.  27  50;  Can.  Geol,  Surv. 

1900.     Additions  to  the  ('oleopterouR  Fauna  of  the  Infer^Iacial  Clays 
of  the  Toronto  District,  With  an  Appendix  by  A.  D.  Hopkins 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    HOYALE.  215 

OD  the  Scolytid  Borings  from  tbe  Same  Deposits.     Coot. 

to  Can.  Paleon.  II,  Pt.  II,  pp.  67-92. 
Sharp,  D. 

1882.     On  the  Aqnatic   CarnivoroiiK  Col«>ptera   or  Dytiwidac.     Soi. 

Trans.  Gov.  Dublin  Noc,   (2>,  2,  pp.  17fi-10<Kt. 
Shelford,  V.  E. 

1907.     Prelimiunrv  Note  on  the  Distribntiou  of  the  Tiger  Beetle  (Cin- 

cindela)   and  its  Belation  to  Plant  eucceneion.     Biol.  Bull. 

14.  pp.  9-14. 
Skinner,  H,    (editor). 

1903.  A   List   of  the   Insects  of   Beitlah,  Kew   Mexico.    Trans'.   Am. 

Ent.  Soc.,  29,  pp.  3,>1J7. 
Smith,  J.  B. 

1900.  Insects  of  New  Jersev.     Snpp.  Twentv-seveuth  Ann.  Rep.  N. 

J.  St.  Bd.  Agr.,  1899.  pp.  107-S67. 
Sammers,  S.  V. 

1874.     Catalf^ie  of  the  Coleoptei-a  from  the  Region  of  Lake  Pontehar- 
train,  La.     Bui!.  Bnffalo  Soc.  Nat.  Sci-,  5,  ,pp.  78-09. 
Tower,  W.  L. 

1906.    An  Investigation  of  Evolution  in  the  Chrysomelid  Beetles  of 
the  <!enus  I.eptinotarsa.     Carnegie  Institution. 
ToTi-nsend,  C.  H.  T. 

1897,  On  tiie  Biogeography  of  Mexico  and  the  Southwestern  United 

States.    Trans.  Texas  Acad.  Sci.,  2,  pp.  33-86. 
Ulke,  H. 

1902.     A  Ust  of  the  Beetles  of  the  District  of  Columbia.    Pro.  U.  S. 

Nat.  Mus.,  25,' pp.  1-57.    No.  1275. 
VanDyke,  E.  J. 

1901.  Observations  upon  the  Faunal  Relations  of  California  from  the 

Standpoint  of  a  Coleopterist.    Jonr.   N-    Y.    Ent.    Soc,    9, 

pp.  197-199. 
Wickham,  H,  F. 

1893.     Report     on     an    Entomological     Rcconnaisanoe    of    Southern 

Alaska.    Bull.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  Univ.  of  Iowa,  2,  pp.  202-233. 
18!)fi.     A   List  of  <:'oleoptera  from  the  Southern   Shore  of  Lake  Sii- 

perior,  With  Remarks  on  Geographical   Distribution,     Pro. 

Davenport  Acad.  Sci.,  (i.  [jp.  125169, 
1896.     A   List   of   Some   Coleoptcra   from   the  Northern   Portions  of 
,  New  Mexico  and  Arizona.     Bull.  Lab.  Nat.  His,  Univ.  Iowa. 

3,  pp.  15;!-171. 
1897a.     The  Coleoptera  of  the  Lower  Rio  Grande  Vailey.     Bull.  Lab. 

Nat.  His.  Univ.  Iowa,  4,  pp.  96-115, 

1898.  Tile  Beetles  of  Southern  Arizona,     Bull.  Lab.  Nat.  His.,  Univ. 

Iowa,  4,  pp.  295-312. 

1902.  A  Catalogue  of  the  Coleoptera  of  Colorado.     Bull.  Sci.  I^b. 

Nat,  His,  Univ.  of  Iowa,  .^,  pp.  217-310. 

1904.  The  Influence  of  the  Mutations  of  the  Pleistocene  I^kes  upon 

the  Present  Distribution  of  Cicindela.  .Vmer.  Nat.,  38.  pp. 
643-654, 

1905.  Insect  Distribution  in  the  Great  Basin  Considered  in  tbe  I^ight 

of  its  <;eological  Historv.     Thirtv-flfth  .\nn.  Rep.  Ent.  Soc. 
Ont.  pp.  42-46. 


jiGoogle 


BCOLOOT  OP   ISLE  ROYALB. 


NOTES   ON  THE  VEGETATION   OF   ISLE   ROYALE,   HICHIGAN. 

W.  p.  HOLT,  CENTRAL.  HIGH  SCHOOL,  TOLBIK),  OHIO. 

/.    Qeneral  Oltservations  on  the  Plant  Societies. 

Situated  in  tlie  northern  part  of  Lake  Superior,  in  ni^ht  of  the 
Canada  shore,  and  bisected  by  the  parallel  of  43°  N.,  ThIp  Royale  offers 
a  most  attractiire  field  for  summer  work.  That  its  Horn  is  strikingly 
northern  may  be  inferred  from  its  proximity  to  the  Cana^hn  shore,  as 
well  as  by  the  many  species  of  northern  plants  include*!  in  the  anno- 
tated list  of  plants. 

The  island,  45  miles  long  and  containing  about  210  square  miles,  has 
had  almost  no  permanent  population  since  the  "copper  days;"  and  only 
a  few  localities  along  the  water's  edge  are  frequented  by  summer  visitors, 
thus  leaving  the  island  largely  free  fromi  man's  occupancy.  With  the 
exception  of  the  building  and  mining  improvements  of  the  Wendigo 
Mining  Company,  at  the  bead  of  Washington  Harbor,  little  remains  on 
the  island  to  mark  the  vanished  population,  except  the  burnings  and 
clearings,  which  are  easily  recognized  by  tbeir  characteristic  floras. 

Large  parts  of  the  island,  however,  have  remained  quite  free  from 
man's  invasion.  That  the  present  natural  conditions  are  not  likely  to 
remain  long  undisturbed,  and  that  the  past  Bummer's  observations  and 
records  were  made  none  too  soon,  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  contemporane- 
ous with  the  work  of  the  Museum  party  there  were  at  least  three  differ- 
ent parties  of  timber  estimators  working  over  large  parts  of  the  island  . 
looking  toward  the  cutting  off  of  the  forests. 

The  general  plan  of  the  summer's  work  on  the  biota  of  the  island  was 
to  select  the  most  typical  and  representative  parts  as  general  stations, 
wolfing  these  through  sub-stations  as  carefully  as  time  would  allow, 
and  comparing  other  similar  localities  with  these. 

The  principal  plant  societies  of  Isle  Boyale  may  be  considered  under 
four  heads,  viz.:    B(^  societies,  shore  societies,  forests,  and  bumingSi. 

I.  Bog  Societies.  It  is  doubtful  if  there  could  be  found  anywhere 
in  an  area  of  the  same  size  a  more  interesting  and  more  complete  series 
of  bogs  than  occurs  ou  Isle  Royale.  On  the  geologic^  map  of  the 
island,  by  Lane  and  Stoekly,  there  are  shown  over  100  smaller  bog 
areas,  exclusive  of  the  extensive  bog  region  in  the  southwest  part  of  the 
island,  to  the  west  of  Siskowit  Bay.  Add  to  this  the  various  stages 
of  partly  filled  takes,  and  there  is  shown  almost  every  conceivable  stage 
in  the  life  history  of  bogs,  from  the  open  tarns,  or  lakes,  to  the  climatic 
bog  forest. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  call  attention  to  the  very  interesting  manner  in 
which  the  bog  floras  respond  to  the  various  stages  of  physical  changes; 
such  responses  of  vegetation  in  any  physi<^aphic  series  are  too  well 
known  to  need  comment.  For  any  student  who  desires  to  work  out  in 
detail  these  stages  of  successions  as  carefully  and  minutely  as  Cowles 
has  done  for  the  dunes  of  the  Chicago  region,  Isle  Royale  presents  all 


218  MICHIGAN  SURVEY.   1908. 

that  conid  be  desired;  and  one  important  advantage  here  is  that  most 
of  the  bog  areas  are  comparatively  small,  and  all  in  a  reasonably  limited 
area,  thus  offering  an  unusaal  opportunity  for  their  comparative  study. 

There  is,  on  the  other  hand,  one  difficulty  that  should  be  mentioned 
in  connection  with  any  kind  of  fleld  work  on  Isle  Hoyale  which  takes 
one  far  back  from  the  shore,  and  that  is  the  difficulty  of  penetrating 
the  dense  tangles  of  the  forest.  The  absence  of  roads,  the  limited  num- 
ber even  of  old  blazed  trails,  the  unusually  dense  underbrush,  includ- 
ing a  very  rank  growth  of  Tawu-a  minor  (Ground  Hemlock)  and  Dumer- 
oua  windfalls,  together  with  the  necessity  of  carrying  by  pack  one's 
supplies — all  render  the  penetration  of  many  parts  of  the  island  a  mat- 
ter of  such  difficulty  that  it  has  been  remarked  by  all  who  have  at- 
tempted it. 

In  the  limited  time  at  our  disposal  during  the  summer  It  was  im- 
possible to  visit  all  of  the  100  or  more  bc^  areas  on  the  island :  our 
attention  was  therefore  confined  to^a  limited  number  of  those  which 
are  typical  of  a  certain  stage  of  development,  or  to  those  having  in- 
dividual points  of  special  interest. 

Three  general  stages  of  the  lake-bog  series  will  be  briefly  touched  upon, 
(1)  the  open  lake  withovt  marginal  vegetation,  (2)  the  partly  open 
lake  icith  marginal  vegetation  of  varying  width,  (3)  the  wholly  carpeted 
b<^  area ;  the  vegetative  carpet  in  some  cases  being  recent  enough  to  give 
beneath  the  feet,  in  other  cases  old  and  solid  enough  to  be  more  or  less 
forested. 

The  first,  or  open  stage,  includes  only  a  few  of  the  lai^est  lakes  of 
Isle  Royale,  such  as  Lake  Siskowlt  and  Sargent  Lake.  Of  these  Lake 
Siskowit  is  hy  far  the  largest,  being  at  least  a  mile  and  one-half  broad 
in  places.  The  principal  reasons  for  the  absence  of  vegetation  in  the 
lakes  of  the  first  class  seems  to  be  that  their  size  and  openings  renders 
the  sweep  of  the  wind  and  the  resulting  wave  action  so  vigorous  thsft 
even  annuals  cannot  get  a  foothold  along  their  shores. 

Wave  action  in  a  few  places  is  clearly  marked  by  a  narrow  but  well- 
defined  beach,  as  along  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Biskowit. 

Another  factor  that  has  to  be  reckoned  with  in  the  larger  lakes  of 
the  first  class  is  the  work  of  ice.  Ice  destroys  shore  vegetation  in  two 
ways,  first — hy  pushing,  due  to  expansion  by  freezing  (and  this  total 
expansion  in  a  lake  as  large  as  Lake  Hiskowit  is  considerable)  ;  seconil 
— the  open  expanse  allows  large  ice  floes  to  blow  ashore  during  the 
spring  breakup.  Tlie  most  interesting  example  of  ice  pushing  noted 
was  along  tht  north  shore  of  Lake  Siskowit,  where  there  is  an  irre- 
gular ridge,  varying  in  height  up  to  15  feet  and  composed  of  bowlders 
and  various  fragiiiental  materials.  Along  this  ridge  there  were,  in 
places,  even  overturned  trees  of  considerable  size,  pointing  away  from 
the  lake,  back  20  to  25  feet  from  the  present  shore.  This  ridge  seems 
certainly  to  be  the  work  of  ice  as  in  the  case  of  the  so-called  "bowlder 
rim"  lakes  of  the  western  United  States,  or  the  ice  floe  ridges  at  Put- 
in-ltay  in  Lake  Erie. 

In  drawing  a  line  between  the  lakes  that  will  long  continue  to  remain 
free  from  the  encroachment  of  vegetation  and  those  which  are  being 
gradually  captured  by  vegetation,  the  size  and  openness  seem  to  be  the 
most  important  factors,  affecting  the  vigor  of  wave  action  as  well  as 
the  work  of  ice  in  one  or  both  of  the  ways  suggested. 


ECOLOGY    OP    ISLE   ROYALE.  219 

In  the  smaller  lakes,  espeoiallr  those  nestled  in  depressions,  the 
surrounding  forests  protect  their  surfaces  from  vigorous  wind  action 
BO  that  there  are  practically  no  waves  at  all  to  check  the  encroachment 
of  regetRtion  along  the  lake  margins. 

That  the  slope  of  the  shore,  in  the  ense  of  protected  lakes,  has  much 
to  do  with  retarding  or  aBsisting  the  encroachments  of  plants  is  self 
evident.  The  Isle  Boyale  lakes  of  the  protected  class  show  numerous 
examples  where  the  plant  zone  is  much  farther  advanced  on  the  gently 
sloping  side  than  on  the  opposite  one  with  a  more  abrupt  slope. 

A  typical  example  of  a  lake  midway  in  the  process  of  capture  is 
Sumner  Lake.  This  lake,  which  is  roughly  one-half  mile  long  and  one- 
third  as  wide,  with  its  long  axis  nearly  east  and  west,  has  already 
been  captured  at  its  east  and  west  ends.  Had  its  north  and  south 
borders  been  less  steep  the  entire  lake  would  doubtless  have  been 
covered  ere'this.  This  lake  has  an  outlet  into  Conglomerate  Bay,  bat 
at  its  west  end  it  receives  a  small  creek.  The  west  end  is  covered  by 
a  bog  carpet  still  so  young  and  elastic  as  to  render  the  crossing  of  it 
diflBcult.  Along  the  more  abrupt  sides,  and  connecting  the  bog  carpet 
at  the  ends,  was  a  narrow,  irregular  zone  of  CaJla  palaatris  and  Iria 
versicolor,  with  the  Mcnyanthes  (lEuckbean)  and  Comarv/m  palustrc 
(Marsh  cinquefoil)  mixed  in  places.  Parts  of  this  zone,  where  the  shore 
is  less  steep,  were  closely  backed  up  by  willows,  Comns  stoUmifera,  and 
Alitu«  inmna.  thus  giving  to  the  marginal  zone  the  aspert  of  a  swamp 
rather  than  of  a  bog.  Growing  on  the  wet  bog  carpet  at  the  ends  we're 
the  Sarracenta  purpurea,  Droaera  rotundi folia.  Drosera  intermedia.  Men- 
yanthea  trifoliata,  Comarum  palvstre,  Droacra  linearis  (the  latter  two 
in  wetter  places  generally  than  the  former),  Oxycoccus  oxycoccva, 
Hahcnaria  pai/codrs,  Hahcnaria  diJatnta,  Pogonia  ophioglossoidea,  Vtri- 
cularia  minor  (wetter  parts),  Campauula  oparinoidea,  Scutellaria  galer- 
icuJa,  Cicvta  bulbifcra,  Triadenum-  t-irginicum,  Pamassta  pahistris, 
Sotidago  neglecta,  etc. 

A  word  in  passing  in  regard  to  the  "false  bottom"  of  Sumner  Lake, 
for  in  no  place  on  the  island  was  this  better  shown.  In  paddling  aronnd 
the  open  part  of  this  Iflke  on  a  raft  it  appeared  in  places  that  the  water 
was  only  6-10  feet  deep.  This  was  a  matter  of  surprise  since  even  a 
raft's  length  from  the  shore  we  could  not  touch  bottom  with  our  15  foot 
pole.  Further  investigation  showed  a  "false  bottom"  in  various  parts 
of  this  lake.  This  was  composed  of  the  fine,  disintegrated  remains  of 
leaves  and  other  light  organic  material.  In  places  there  were  great 
breaks  in  this  "false  bottom,"  doubtless  due  to  the  escape  of  gases 
which  has  lifted  this  flue,  ooze-like  material  from  a  greater  depth;  and 
through  these  breaks  one  could  look  down  several  feet  through  the  . 
brownish  colored  water.  While  this  "false  bottom"  was  so  tenuous 
that  a  pole  could  be  thrust  through  it  almost  as  easily  aa  through  the 
clear  water,  it  seemed  to  play  an  important  part  in  the  distribution 
of  patches  of  CastaHa  odorata  (White  Pond  Lily)  so  abundant  on  the 
surface  of  the  lake,  and  also  served  to  call  attention  to  the  manner  in 
which  this  material  assists  in  lake  filling. 

An  area  illustrating  the  final  stage  of  bog  covering  was  examined 
at  the  end  of  the  cabin  trait  from  our  Kiskowit  Ray  camp.  In  this 
sphagnum  hog   (V,   5).   containing  80-100  acres,  all  lias  been  covered 


220  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   190S. 

except  an  area  of  open  water  about  60  feet  long  and  'balf  as  wide 
surrounded  by  an  exceedingly  wet,  unstable  margin. 

A  few  years  hence  and  even  this  will  be  covered.  The  main  part  of 
the  bog  was  covered  with  sphagnum  hummocks,  upon  which  were  grow- 
ing Ledum  ffroenlandicum,  Chamacdaphne  calyculata  and  Andromeda 
poUfolia  in  dense  patches.  Young  Tamaracks  and  Black  Spruces  were 
pushing  out  from  the  older  parts  of  the  margin,  with  Balsam  Firs  close 
behind. 

Along  the  south  margin  of  this  bog,  in  the  tension  zone  between  the 
bog  and  the  adjacent  forest,  there  was  being  waged  one  of  the  most 
intense  and  most  interesting  struggles  for  plant  supremacy  that  we 
have  ever  seen.  Working  up  the  gentle  slope  from  the  bog  margin  the 
sphaguum  invasion  (after  the  manner  of  a  large  snowdrift)  was  push- 
ing out  its  lobate  fingers,  over  the  forest  carpet  of  leaves;  and  during 
a  single  season  by  its  rapid  growth  had  surrounded  sucb  plants  of 
the  forest  as  Aralia  nudieaitlis,  Trientalis  americana,  Clintonia  borealis. 
Lycopodium  lucidulum,  all  of  which  were  completely  helpless  in  the 
path  of  the  sphagnum  invasion.  Even  lai^e,  fallen  trees  were  able 
to  check  its  advance  only  temporarily,  for  instances  were  noted  where 
entire  fallen  trunks  were  covered,  only  the  upward  projecting  branches 
being  out  of  reach  of  the  Sphaguum.  In  a  dry  carpet  of  forest  leaves 
the  clean-cut  forward  margin  of  the  sphagnum  was  so  wet  that  water 
could  be  wrung  from  it  at  a  distance  of  15-20  feet  from  the  original 
bog  margin,  thus  showing  how  readily  water  is  transferred  through  the 
sphagnum  patches,  even  up  a  slope. 

While  the  sphagnum  invasion  was  eminently  successful  against  all 
the  scattered  plants  of  the  woods  there  was  at  "least  one  species  of 
moss  {Polytrichum  cmnmtine)  growing  in  dense  formations  which  was 
succe-fuful  in  holding  the  sphagnum  in  check.  The  moss  colonies  were 
so  dense  that  the  sphagnum  could  not  penetrate  them;  on  the  other 
hand  the  moss  was  actually  invading  the  moist  sphagnum  and  growing 
over  it. 

Before  leaving  the  semi-enclosed  lake  bogs  a  few  questions  surest 
themselves  regarding  the  trembling  bog  carpet  adjacent  to  the  water's 
edge.  What  is  the  thickness  of  this  elastic,  quaking  water  cover  which 
is,  at  the  same  time,  strong  enough  to  enable  one  to  walk  out  to  with- 
in a  single  step  (in  some  cases)  of  the  water's  edge?  Also  of  what  is 
it  composed?  In  all  the  measurementfl  taken  it  was  found  that  this 
vegetative  cover,  within  two  to  three  feet  of  the  water's  edge,  had  a 
thickness  varying  from  22-24  inches.  Back  from  this  younger  and  more 
unstable  margin  the  bog  cover  becomes  thicker  and  firmer.  In  one  bog, 
back  about  100  yards  from  the  water's  edge,  where  the  surface  was 
firm  and  unyielding,  the  boring  pole  broke  through  into  open  water  at 
a  depth  of  5  feet  6  inches.  In  another  instance,  at  the  west  end  of 
Wninner  Lake,  at  a  distance  of  over  100  yards  back  from  the  water's 
edge,  I  found  the  bog  cover  still  so  thin  and  trembling  that  I  broke 
through  in  one  place  in  attempting  to  walk  across  it,  and  anticipated 
that  the  same  might  happen  in  several  other  places.  These  and  other 
instances  all  go  to  show  that  no  definite  statement  can  be  made  as  to 
the  exact  distance  from  the  water's  edge  at  which  the  bog  cover  be- 
comes thick  enough  to  support  one.  ,This  may  vary  with  the  depth 
of  water  underneath,  as  well  as  the  distance  from  the  original  shore 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE   ROYALE:.  221 

It  ia  to  be  regretted  tbat  more  borings  and  measurements  coald  not 
bave  been  taken  in  the  limited  time  at  our  disposal.  A  summer  spent 
with  suitable  borinj;  tools  in  malting  an  extended  series  of  borings  over 
various  parts  of  several  of  the  Isle  Royale  bogs  and  boi;-lake  margins 
would  doubtless  bring  to  light  some  very  interesting  data. 

Now  as  to  what  gives  strength  to  the  bc^  cover.  Kince  the  Rphagnum 
is  so  predominaut  on  bog  areas,  covering  large  parts  of  the  surface, 
and  often  extending  out  uluioKt  to  the  water's  edge,  oue  is  apt  to  think 
only  of  the  sphagnum  surface  and  fail  to  consider  the  important  net- 
work below  that  gives  such  strength  to  the  trembling  bog  carpet  ont 
almoKt  to  the  very  water's  edge.  It  iw  scarcely  necessarj'  to  add  that 
the  delicate  sphagnum  alone  i.i  not  sufficient  to  make  a  strong  bog 
cover.  The  weakness  of  the  individual  sphagnum  plants  to  resist  strain, 
the  lack  of  interlacing  parts,  or  of  even  ''felting"  properties  are  clearly 
shown  in  that  one  can  reach  down  a  foot  or  more  into  the  loose,  soft, 
sphagnum  and  pull  out  a  handful^  of  it  without  seriously  disturbing 
the  adjacent  plants.  Moreover,  the  Nphagnuni  does  not  grow  along  the 
water's  edge  in  advance  of  its  supporting  mat — at  least  we  failed  to 
find  a  single  instance  of  this  on  Isle  Boyale->-wbiIe  in  many  cases  it 
did  not  extend  out  to  within  several  feet  of  the  water  edge  of  the 
supporting   mat. 

0^  pulling  up  large  masses  of  the  floating  mat  at  the  water's  edge 
it  was  found  to  consist  of  a  dense  tangle,  or  network,  of  tough  fibrona 
roots  and  rhizomes  of  KcdgeM,  Mi-nyanth<:n  trifoliata  and  Comarum  pal- 
ustre,  all  so  tightly  interlaced  that  it  was  very  dilBcult  to  separate  any 
part  of  the  tangle  from  the  rest.  Such  tou^  parts  are  in  striking 
contrast  to  the  delicate  sphagnum,  as  is  also  the  manner  of  growth;. 
and  furnish  the  platform  on  which  the  sphagnum  works  out  toward  the 
lake  margin. 

In  the  last,  or  wholly  covered,  division  of  bogs  a  wet  and  a  drier  stage 
may  be  reci^nized;  the  former  may  be  cbaractwized  by  the  Sarracenia 
purpuria,  Menj/anthes  trifoliata,  Comarum  palwstre,  and  one  or  more 
species  of  Droaera.  Rpbagnum  hummocks  may  occur  in  both  of  these 
covered  stages,  or  the  surface  may  be  comparatively  smooth.  These  hum- 
mocks, of  varying  size  up  to  4  feet  in  height,  seem  to  be  due  in  most 
cases  to  the  sphagnum  growing  up  around  tree  trunks,  shrubs,  or  other 
objects.  Instances  were  noted  of  where  the  rapidly  growing  sphagnnm 
had  so  nearly  covered  the  Ledum  groenlandicum  that  only  the  ends  of 
the  upper  branches  were  to  be  seen.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  some 
of  the  hummocks  may  be  formed  in  other  ways,  e.  g.  one  large  hummock 
was  noted  that  was  inhabited  by  ants.  This  suggested  that  possibly  the 
sphagnum  had  overgrown  a  large  ant  mound,  although  it  is  also  possible 
that  the  ants  may  have  inhabited  the  mound  only  after  its  formation  in 
some  other  way. 

The  pioneer  trees  to  apjMiar  in  Isle  Royale  bogs  are  the  /rfin>  laririmt 
jTamarack),and  Picea  mariana  (Black  Sprnce) ,  which  appear  simultan- 
eously, and  seem  equally  well  adapted  to  bog  conditions.  Owing  to  the 
advance  of  the  bog  cover  from  the  margin  toward  the  centre,  one  nat- 
urally expects  to  And  the  youngest  trees  farthest  in,  and  this  is  utrik. 
ingly  well  illustrated  in  many  of  the  bogs.  , 

By  counting  the  rings  of  trees  cut  in  the  bogs,  and  comparing  with 
the  same  species  just  outside,  it  was  found  tbat  the  growth  of  those  in 


222  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

the  bogs  was  strikingly  slower;  The  rings  of  the  bog  species  were  in 
many  cases  so  close  together  as  to  render  a  band  lens  desirable  for 
cooating  them,  while  the  annnal  rings  of  the  same  species  in  the  adja- 
cent forest  were  widely  separated. 

2.  Shore  Vegetation.  The  work  done  on  shore  forms  was  confined 
entirely  to  the  south  shore,  including  the  group  of  small  islands  near 
the  abandoned  Light-hoase  at  Buck  Harbor.  The  northern  shore  is  steep 
and  cliff-like,  the  southern  shore  gently  sloping.  While  the  northern 
shore  is  strikingly  different  from  the  southern,  and  might  have  hronght 
to  light  many  interesting  things  (especially  in  the  way  of  lichen  forma- 
tions), it  seemed  best  to  confine  the  limited  time  at  our  disposal  to  work 
on  the  south  shore. 

Of  the  special  shore  forms,  the  crevice  plants  are  both  interesting 
and  attractive.  The  crevices  in  most  cases  are  due  to  fissuring,  altbongh 
some  long,  narrow  grooves  were  made  by  the  differential  weathering  of 
the  softer  vein  rock.  The  bed-rock  of  the  shore  is  often  amygdaloidal, 
and  many  small  depressions  in  this,  due  to  the  more  rapid  weathering, 
afford  a  foothold  for  the  hardy  plants  of  the  rock  shore.  In  their  narrow 
rock  crevices  and  confines,  with  little  soil,  and  on  dark-colored  rock  which 
in  summer  becomes  highly  heated,  at  all  times  exposed  to  the  strong 
lake  winds,  and  in  winter  often  washed  by  the  powerful  storm  waves  of 
I^ke  Superior,  their  struggle  for  existence  is  certainly  a  most  strenuous 
one.  On  the  whole  their  size  and  appearance  is  strikingly  alpine,  as 
is  also  their  coloring  in  many  cases. 

A  partial  list  of  the  crevice  plants  is  as  follows:  Campanula  rotun- 
difolia,  Potentilla  trideatata,  PotentiUa  littoralis,  Saxifraga  tricunpi- 
data,  Saxifraga  aizoon,  Saxifraga  nivalis,  Artemisia  canadensis,  Senecio 
dalsamitae,  Primula  miatasainica,  Solidago  virgaurea  ( ?) ,  Sagina  sag- 
inoidea,  Achillea  millefolium,  Aster  ptarmacoides,  Sisifmbrium  humile. 
Lobelia  kalmii,  Nabahia  racemosa,  etc.  The  insectivorous  Pinguicuia 
vulgaris  (Butterwort)  occurs  in  rock  pools  and  on  wet  rocks  along  the 
rocky  shores. 

The  most  common  crevice  shrubs  were  the  Juniperua  nana,  Junipcrua 
procumbena.  Arctostaphylos  uva^irai  (Bear-berry) ,  Shepherdia  cana- 
densis (Shepherdin),  Opulaater  opuUfoliua  fNinebark).  On  the  exposed 
rocks  at  Scovill  Point  and  at  the  eastern  end  of  the  island,  the  Empctrvm 
nigrum  (Crowberrj)  was  also  found,  forming  a  part  of  the  heath  mat. 
Of  all  these  the  ./.  procumbena  is  easily  of  the  greatest  importance  in 
preparing  the  way  for  other  larger  forms  of  plants.  Certainly  no  shrub 
of  Isle  Royale  precedes  it  or  has  better  claims  for  pioneer  distinction. 
Its  hardiness,  prostrate  manner  of  -  growth,  and  its  thick,  sheltering 
branches  are  all  of  great  importajice  in  making  it  an  excellent  pioneer. 

A  study  of  the  small  rock  islands'  near  the  Bock  Harbor  light-house 
was  very  interesting  not  only  on  account  of  the  striking  differences  in 
the  individual  flora  of  each,  but  also  for  a  comparative  study  of  the  plant 
successions  upon  them.  All  stages  of  successions  were  noted  from  an 
unusually  rich  mesophytic  flora,  growing  on  a  humus  soil  3-10  inches 
in  depth,  down  to  islands  almost  bare  except  for  a  few  crevice  plantn. 
In  general  ail  the  islands  showed  a  less  development  of  the  flora  on  the 
side  exposed  to  the  open  lake  than  on  the  more  protected  land  side:  in 
some  cases  the  vegetation  of  the  two  sides  was  strikingly  different. 

The  advantages  of  crevices  in  enabling  vegetation  to  get  a  start  upon 


BCOLOOT   OF   ISLE   ROYALB.  223 

bare  islands  was  well  illnBtrated  in  the  caee  ot  one  of  the  email  ielands 
of  this  group.  Ita  smooth,  sloping  surface  was  bare  except  for  a  few 
small  patches  of  crustaceous  licbens  and  a  single  large  procumbent 
juniper.  The  juniper  -was  growing  in  a  crevice  along  which  it  had 
reached  for  several  feet  in  either  direction,  occasionally  rooting  along 
the  crevice  which  held  it  more  securely  in  place.  The  spaces  between  its 
dense  sheltering  branches  were  filled  with  a  vigorous  growth  of  moss 
which  doubtless  started  on  the  wind-blown  material  that  had  lodged 
there.  So  solidly  had  the  moss  filled  the  spaces  between  the  branches 
where  it  was  growing  that  in  breaking  off  a  portion  of  the  juniper  every- 
thing was  stripped  oS  down  to  the  bed-rock.  As  such  a  juniper  patch 
spreads,  and  the  humus  made  by  the  moss  increases,  other  plants  come 
to  grow  on  the  juniper  patch,  and  an  ever-increasing  heath  mat  is  formed. 
Other  similar  crevices  may,  in  like  manner,  spread  to  join  this,  and  in  a 
comparatively  short  time  the  entire  surface  is  carpeted  with  vegetation. 
On  other  small  islands  crevice  trees  and  shrubs  have  contributed  shade 
and  partial  protection  from  the  wind,  and  the  process  has  gone  on  even 
more  rapidly.  Had  there  been  ito  crevices  to  enable  these  higher  pioneer 
plants  to  secure  a  foothold  the  process  of  vegetative  capture  would  have 
gone  on  infinitely  slower.  What  the  possible  steps  are  in  such  a  case 
may  best  be  considered  in  connection  with  the  rock  shore-heath-forest 
series  to  be  referred  to  presently. 

To  suggest  the  severe  and  varied  conditions  of  the  exposed  rock  shore 
the  following  is  cited.  On  a  bare,  gently  sloping  {10°-12'')  portion  of 
the  rock  shore  near  Rock  Harbor,  there  were,  in  an  area  approximately 
40  fteet  square,  over  100  fresh  scars  where  the  thin  (1-6  to  1-8  inch^ 
patches  of  rock  had  recently  been  broken  off.  These  patches  varied  in 
size  from  12  inches  in  diameter  down:  some  were  covered  in  part  by 
licbens  (principally  Parmelias),  others  were  entirely  bare.  The  intense 
daily  heating  and  expansion  to  which  the  immediate  surface  of  the  dark 
colored,  exposed  rocks  is  subjected,  together  with  the  rapid  cooling  and 
the  resulting  contraction  at  night,  doubtless  has  much  to  do  with  weak- 
ening the  immediate  surface,  and  starting  the  chipping.  The  freezing 
of  moisture  in  the  rock  surface  may  have  been  responsible  for  the  final 
breaking  away  and  lifting. 

For  a  brief  survey  of  the  vegetation  from  the  water's  edge  back  through 
the  heath  zone  to  the  forest  at  the  top  of  the  gently  sloping  rock  shore 
area,  V  2,  (designated  as  "the  heath  zone  and  beach"  of  Siakowit  Bay) 
will  be  selected  as  a  typical  locality,  and  supplemented  by  additional 
observations  on  similar  places  elsewhere  along  the  southern  shore.  The 
IKtrtion  of  rock  shore  to  be  considered  has  a  rather  uniform  slope  of 
about  10°  and  a  width  of  200-250  feet  from  the  water's  edge  back  to  the 
forest  at  its  summit. 

The  first  zone  of  no  vegetation  extends  back  about  20-25  feet  from  the 
water's  edge,  although  the  winter  waves  doubtless  reach  far  beyond  this. 
Back  of  this  occur,  in  turn,  the  crustaceous  and  foliaceous  licheu  zones, 
which  meet  in  a  somewhat  irregular  tension  zone  that  can,  nevertheless, 
be  distinguished  by  looking  up  or  down  the  shore.  The  lichens  of  these 
zones  are  included  in  the  annotated  list,  and  will  not  be  enumerated  here. 

Numerous  crevice  plants  (as  already  listed  under  shore  forms)  make 
their  appearance  in  the  crustaceous  and  foliaceous  lichen  zones,  also 
Thuja  occidentalia  and  Picea  oatiaderma,  the  former  being  the  hardier 


224  MICHIGAN   SUBVEY,   1908. 

pioDeer  of  the  two.  In  parts  of  the  upper,  or  third,  lichen  zone  there 
are  unnanally  denne  and  luxuriant  formations  of  CladoniaB,  often  50-60 
feet  across.  Kcattered  among  the  Cladonias  were  Junipertts  nana,  J. 
procumbcm,  Arctostaphylon  uea-ursi,  and  -Vaccinium  pennsglvanicum. 
The  upper,  op  back  iiortion,  of  this  zone  will  be  designated  as  the 
Cladonia-beatb  zone,  for  it  is  here  that  the  real  shore  heath  begins.  The 
baelt  of  the  heath  zone  contains  numerous  young  Balsam  Firs  and  White 
Birches  which  have  worked  in  irrt^ularl.v  from  the  adjacent  forest. 

\  similar  sloping  rock  shore  near  our  Siskowit  cabin  camp  (V,  4) 
showed  some  interesting  later  stages.  The  shore  was  here  better  pro- 
tected from  waves  and  wind  by  the  flat  neighboring  wooded  islands;  and 
the  forest  development  had  gone  on  more  rapidly,  having  extended  irreg- 
ularly from  the  higher  shore  down  to  the  very  water's  edge  sug- 
gesting the  ultimate  condition  elsewhere  along  the  less  "protected  rock 
shore.  There  were  still  open  places,  NUggesfing  the  irregular  manner 
in  which  the  trees  had  pushed  out  to  take  possession  of  the  lower  shore; 
but  the  forest  was  here  far  better  established  (seemingly  on  account  of 
the  better  protection)  than  elsewhere  along  the  beach  where  exposed 
directly  to  the  lake  winds  and  waves. 

As  the  trees  increase  in  number,  and  afford  better  conditions  of  shade 
and  moisture,  vigorous  mosses  and  wood  plants  begin  to  invade  the 
<'ladonia  patches  still  occnpying  the  more  open  places.  A  series  of 
jrhotographs  was  taken  showing  various  stages  of  this  invasion  of 
uuder-growth  wood  plants,  from  a  pure  formation  of  Cladonias  to  a 
climax  of  a  dense  society  of  wood  plants  with  not  a  vestige  of  Cladonias- 
remaining.  These  later  back  shore  formations  were  equally  well  shown 
along  the  heath  forest  tension  zone  at  Kock  Harbor. 

If  carefully  worked  out  the  i-ock  shore  series,  from  the  water's  edge 
Imck  to  the  neighboring  foi-est,  might  be  made  to  rival  in  interest  the 
liike-bog-forest  series,  so  deserving  of  more  cai-eful  study  on  Isle  Royale. 

.'t.  ForeHta.  The  forests  of  Isle  Royale  include  about  21  species  of 
ti-ees,  13  of  which  ar^  deciduous,  the  remainder  evergreen  conifers.  The 
paucity  of  species  has  been  more  than  offset  by  a  generous  distribntion 
and  abundance,  for  the  island  as  a  whole  is  heavily  forested.  The  largest 
and  dominant  trees  of  Ihe  i)resent  forest  are  Abies  balaamea  (Balsam 
Fir),  lictuia  papyrifern  fWhite,  op  Canoe  Birch),  and  Plcea  vatmden»it 
(White  Hpruce),  with  the  exception  of  the  western  end  of  Greenstone 
ridge  where  Acer  sacvharum  (Hard  Maple),  Bctula  lutea  (Yellow 
Binh),  and  Bctula  htita  (Black,  or  Chepry  Birch)   are  dominant. 

Between  the  end  of  Washington  Harbor  and  Lake  Desor  there  are 
places  where  almost  pure  stands  of  Hard  Maple  and  birches  obtain. 
The  scarcity  of  Abii-^  balnniin'a  hei-e.  which  is  so  abundant  ovep  almost 
all  other  parts  of  the  island,  is  an  interesting  matter  of  speculatiou. 
Young  Balsam  Fire  wei'e  noted  growing  in  the  shade  and  shelter  of 
the  maple  groves,  and  they  appeared  to  be  vigorous  and  thriving,  yet 
scarcely  a  large  fir  could  be  found  associated  with  the  maples  in  this 
jmrt  of  the  (Si-eenstone  ridge.  An  examination  of  the  soil  here  showed 
that  it  is  only  4-6  inches  deep.  This,  together  with  the  laterally 
limited  root  system  exhibited  by  the  larger  overturned  firs,  seemed  to 
suggest  that,  after  attaining  a  certain  height  and  rigidity,  they  be- 
came BufBciently  exposed  to  be  overtamed  by  the  powerful  winds  that 
sweep  that  exposed  part  of  the  Greenstone  ridge.  r-  [ 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROTALE.  225 

The  forested  bog  areas  are  characterized  by  the  domiDance  of  Tam- 
arack, Black  Spruce  and  White  Cedar.  As  a  rale,  where  the  Tamarack 
is  more  abundant  the  White  Cedar  is  less  abundant,  and  tbe  opposite. 
Where  the  White  Cedar  is  dominant  (ae  it  is  in  many  bog  areas,  tbe 
largest  trees  being  2 — 314  f«et  in  diameter),  the  few  Tamaracks  pres- 
ent are  lai^  and  appear  as  pioneer  relicts.  The  White  Cedar,  more- 
over, does  not  appear  with  the  Black  Spruce  and  the  Tamarack  in  the 
earliest,  wetter  stages;  but  seems  to  come  in  only  when  a  drier  con- 
dition has  been  reached. 

It  may  also  be  added  that  none  of  these  characteristic  bog  trees  are 
here  eo  closely  confined  to  their  bog  habitats  as  to  the  south  of  here; 
but  they  have  a  much  more  general  distribution.  The  Black  Spruce, 
for  example,  one  of  the  earliest  pioneers  of  the  bogs,  occnrs  sparingly 
dietribated  in  the  original  forests  along  with  the  White  Cedar  and 
Balsam  Fir;  and  I  have  also  noted  it  growing  on  dry  exposed  rocks 
where  very  little  soil  was  present.  The  Tamaracks  also  get  out  of  the 
bogs  and  occur  sparingly  distributed  in  the  npland  forests — sometimes 
in  most  unexpected  places. 

Of  all  the  island  conifers  the  Abies  bahamea  is  easily  the  most  com- 
mon, and  seems  to  be  superseding  the  sprures  and  tamaracks.  Tbe 
young  seedlinf^  of  it  grow  in  dense  shade,  as  well  as  in  more  open 
places.  Seedlings  of  the  Balsam  Fir  come  np  abundantly  under  the 
White  Spruces  in  place  of  the  seedlings  of  that  species  which  do  not 
seem  to  be  able  to  endure  the  shade  of  the  dense  forest.  It  will  doubt- 
less form  an  important  part  of  the  climatic  forest  of  the  island. 

The  Picec  eana4ensis  is  fairly  common  along  tbe  margins  of  forests, 
and  in  the  more  open  parts — even  in  the  deeper  parts  of  tbe  forest — 
when  it  has  come  in  as  a  pioneer  with  firs  and  other, conifers  of  the 
present  generation;  but  the  White  Spruces  do  not  seem  likely  to  suc- 
ceed themselves  and  become  a  considerable  part  of  the  dominant  forest, 
on  account  of  the  inability  of  their  seedlings  to  withstand  deep  sbade. 

4.  Burnings.  The  burnings  and  old  clearings  are  everywhere  char- 
acterized by  an  abundance  of  PopuJus  trcmuloidea  and  Betula  papyri- 
fera.  while  the  undergrowth  consists  largely  of  Diervilla  diercUJa.  Aster 
macrophylla,  Cha^naenerion  anguatifoUum,  Hubus  parviftorum,  Comu» 
canadensis,  and  in  places  an  abundance  of  TaxuK  minor.  Burnings  of 
different  periods  were  suggested  by  uniform  stands  of  Quaking  Aspens 
and  W'hite  Birches  which  were  of  difFerent  heights. 

Tbe  Pennsylvania  Cherry  {Primus  pennaylvanicus)  occurs  in  burned 
areas  and  elsewhere  where  there  is  little  soil,  sometimes  growing  out 
of  the  crevices  of  exposed  rocks  where  the  conditions  of  growth  were 
strikingly  unfavorable.  Perhaps  no  other  tree  on  Isle  Boyale  can 
withstand  more  xerophytic  inland  conditions,  with  the  possible  excep- 
tion of  the  Jack  Pine  {Pinns  divaricata)  which  was  occasionally  found 
associated  with  it  on  high  exposed  ledges.  In  one  locality  where  the 
two  were  growing  in  close  company — a  high  rocky  ledge  near  Conglom- 
erate Bay  (III,  5) — there  was  an  almost  total  absence  of  soil,  dne 
to  its  removal  to  lower  altitudes  by  wind  and  rain;  there  was  a  strik- 
ing range  of  SO^-TO"  F.  in  the  daily  temperature,  and  a  complete  ex- 
posure to  the  powerful  Lake  Superior  winds  which  overturn  so  many 
trees  when  they  had  developed  enough  heart  wood  to  become  rigid  and 


226  MICHIGAN   SURVBT,   1908. 

resisting.  There  might  be  added  to  the  unfavorable  conditions  of 
growth  on  such  exposed  ridgea  the  work  of  Hares,  for  the  Northern 
Varying  Hare  often  resorts  to  the  expoaed  heights — as  in  the  case  just 
noted — for  its  winter  feeding  ground,  since  there  is  probably  less  snow 
left  there  by  the  sweeping  winter  winds  than  at  lesser  elevations,  and 
the  Hares  can  get  about  more  easily.  The  principal  damage  done  to 
the  trees  by  Hares  consists  of  the  cutting  off  of  the  yonng  branches, 
and  gnawing  the  bark,  and  this  in  some  cases  amounts  to  considerable. 

Scattered  individuals  of  White  Pine  {Pinu*  atrohus's  occur  along 
the  ridges  and  on  the  north  side  of  Siskowlt  Lake,  hut  it  is  nowhere 
abundant.  Only  a  few  Norway  Pines  {Pimus  resinoaa)  were  noted — 
these  occurring  principally  on  ridges  and  in  exposed  places,  as  on  the 
ridge  north  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5). 

The  Qrecn,  or  MonntainAlder  (Alnua  alnobctula)  was  widely  dis- 
tributed on  higher  ground,  and  can  seemingly  stand  as  much  shade  as 
any  broad  leaved  teee  on  the  island.  The  Speckled  Alder  {AUtua 
incuna)  was  common  near  the  water's  edge  and  on  low  ground ;  and  is 
places  had  worked  back  some  distance  from  the  water. 

The  Sorbus  americana,  found  on  many  parts  of  the  island,  was  in 
moat  cases  solitary  in  its  distribution  and  nowhere  abundant.^  It  ap- 
pears to  be  most  abundant  along  the  water's  edge. 

The  successions  of  the  burnings  and  clearings  due  to  the  attempts  of 
the  early  copper  prospectors  to  clear  the  land,  as  well  as  the  results 
of  later  forest  flres,  present  an  interesting  problem;  also  the  peculiar 
distribution  of  the  Hard  Maple  and  White  Pine  on  the  island.  Students 
of  fleshy  fungi  may  also  find  a  most  fascinating  field  for  later  summer 
work  at  the  west  end  of  the  island,  especially  along  the  forest  road 
from  the  Washington  Club  grounds  to  Lake  Desor.  Never  have  we 
seen  a  more  inviting  field  for  mycologists;  and  in  a  region  as  yet  un- 
touched as  to  its  fungi. 

In  conclusion,  we  beg  to  call  attention  to  the  fact  that,  owing  to 
time  limitations,  no  attempt  was  made  to  work  out  in  detail  any  of  the 
Lirge  and  interesting  problems  that  presented  themselves;  our  object 
being  rather  to  make  a  general  reconnaisance  of  the  plant  life  on  as 
many  different  parts  of  the  island  as  possible.  It  is  to  be  regretted 
that  time  did  not  permit  the  party  to  investigate  several  habitats  on 
the  north  side  of  the  island  in  addition  to  the  work  done  on  the  south 
side,  for  the  physiographic  conditions  there  are  different  from  those 
on  the  south  shore,  and  a  comparison  of  the  environmental  conditiona 
of  the  two  localities  would  doubtless  throw  additional  I^bt  upon  the 
teries  of  shore  societies. 

To  give  a  more  detailed  account  of  the  plants  noted  and  collected  on 
the  island  than  could  be  attempted  in  this  resume  of  conditions  the 
following  annotated  list  is  herewith  presented. 

The  -writer  is  indebted  to  Dr.  C.  A.  Davis  of  the  Michigan  Biological 
Survey  for  the  determination  of  the  sedges  and  certain  flowering 
plants;  to  Prof.  Bruce  Fink  of  Miami  College,  Oxford,  Ohio,  for  the 
d4 termination  of  the  lichens;  for  the  determination  of  the  momes  to 
Prof.  J.  M.  Holzinger  of  Winona  Normal  School,  Winona,  Minn.,  and 
Dr.  J.  Boll,  Germany.  • 

The  nomenclature  is  that  of  Britton  and  Brown's  Illustrated  Floro  of 

iX.ooglc 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROTALE.  ■  227 

tbe  Northern  States  and  Canada,  189S.  The  report  of  the  expedition 
for  1904  followed  the  nomenclature  of  Britton'a  Manual  of  the  Flora 
ot  Northern  United  Btatea  and  Canada,  IdOl. 

II.    Annotated  List  of  Plants. 

lAchens. 

Dy  lichen  zone  No.  1  in  meant  to  inclnde  the  crustaceovs  lichens; 
liiese  forming  Bmall  patches  on  the  rocke  as  in  Placodium  elegans,  in 
which  the  thnllue  is  principally  imbedded  in  the  rock  bo  closely  that 
I  he  rock  must  be  broken  away  to  secure  them.  Zone  No.  2  (Foliose 
zone)  includes  the  flat  thallus  species  which  are  attached  by  rhizoids, 
as  ParincUa.  These  can  he  scraped  or  pnlled  off.  Zone  Xo.  3  (Fruiti- 
cose  zone)  includes  the  upright  lichens  like  Cladonia. 

1.  Ramalhia  calicaria  farinacea  (C)  Pr.  Vertical  rock  cliffs  at 
water's  elge.  Principal  branching  lichen  on  vertical  cliffs.  Common 
8ta.  I,  Sub.  1. 

2.  Cctraria  larunosa  .\ch.  On  nearly  bare  surface  of  rocks  Sis- 
bowit  Bay,  (V.  2).    Occasional. 

3.  Evemia  prKrmatria  (C)  Arch.  A  light  green,  branching  form 
growing  in  Cladonia  zone   (I,  1). 

4.  ilsnea  barbata'cerotina  (Ach.)  Schaer.  Hanging  from  trees  along 
Siskowit  cabin  trail  (V,  4),  also  on  trees  at  Rock  Harbor  (I,  3).  Com- 
(tion. 

5.  Usnea  longissima  Ach.  A  pendulous  form  12-15  inches  or  more 
in  length.     Occurs  on  conifers.     T^sb  common  than  preceding  species. 

B,  Parmdia  perlata  (Jacq.)  Ach.  Top  of  cliff  at  Bock  Harbor  ([, 
H).    Sot  widely  distributed. 

7.  Parmelia  saxttalis  sulcata  Taiyl.  A  gray  foliose  form  growing  on 
very  thin  black  humus  on  sloping  tops  of  cliffs.  Noted  to  be  abundant 
top  of  rock  cliff  at  Bock  Harbor   (I,  1). 

8.  Pmynelia  caperata  (C)  Ach.  On  rocks  of  foliose  lichen  zone  at 
Bock  Harbor,  I,  1;  V,  2. 

9.  ParmeUa  conspersa  Ehr.  One  of  the  most  common  lichens  on 
the  island,  and  the  principal  form  in  the  second  (foliose)  lichen  zone  of 
the  sloping  rock  shore.  Also  fairly  abundant  on  rock  surfaces  back 
fi-om  the  shore.     I.  1;  V,  2;  V,  3;  I,  2. 

10.  Phpscia  pulverulenta  (Scrieb.)  Nyl.  Natural  openings  on  bed 
rock,  growing  on  very  thin  hard  humus.    V.  3. 

11.  Oyrophora  hyperborca  Ach.  On  almost  bare  rock  in  the  foliose 
lichen  zone  (No.  2).    Scarce.  V,  2. 

12.  Qyrophora  (Vmbilicaria)  vellea  (C)  Ach.  Occurs  in  patches 
on  vertical  rock  faces.    I,  1.    Fairly  common. 

13.  Bticta  pulmonaria  (C)  Schaer.  Cmnmon  along  Siskowit  cabin 
trail,  on  trunks  of  fallen  trees.  Fairly  common  in  similar  places  else- 
where in  forest.    V,  4 ;  II, 

14.  Peltidea  (Peltigera)  apkthosa  (L)  Ach.  In  forest  along  cabin 
trail  to  bog  at  Siskowit  Bay.     Fairly  abundant  (V,  4). 

15.  Peltigera  canina  (C)  Hoffm.  On  moist  moss  patches  in  woods, 
and  in  shady  places.    Common.    V,  4. 

16.  Placodittm  elegans  (Link)  DC.    On  exposed  rock  surfaces  along 


228  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

shore.  Very  abundant.  Also  on  conglomerate.  Gives  a  striking  darfc 
orange  color  to  the  cliffs  along  the  main  shore  and  on  surfaces  of  small 
rock  leefs  and  islands.  I,  1;  V,  2.  The  most  striking  ticben  of  the 
crustaceons  lichen  zone. 

17.  Lecanora  rttbina  (Vill.)  Ach.  In  foliose  lichen  zone.  Not  com- 
mon.    V,  2. 

18.  Lecanora  mwalis  Schrieb.  In  low  rocky  reefs  Scarcely  above- 
tlif  action  of  nunimer  waves.     I,  1.     Sot  abundant. 

19.  Lecanora  fmstulosa  (Diclis.)  Ach.  Rocky  shores  and  cliff  facea^ 
also  in  patches  among  parmelias.     I,  1 ;  V,  2. 

20.  Lecanora  atihfusoa  allophana  Ach.  Rocky  shores  and  exposed 
rocks.     Fairly  common,  I,  1 ;  V,  2. 

21.  Lecanora  cinerea  gibhosa  (Ach.)  iJfyl.  Back  20-25  feet  fronn 
water's  edge  in  second  or  foliose  lichen  zone,  in  lower  edge  of  sanie. 
V,  2. 

22.  Stereocaulon  corallotdes  Fr.    In  foliose  lichen  zone.    V,  2. 

23.  Stereocaulon  paachale  (C)  Ach.  Rocky  openings  near  Sidcowit 
cabin.    V,  3.    Not  abundant. 

24.  Cladonia  rangiferina  (C)  Web.  Very  common  in  cladonia  zone- 
on  all  parts  of  shore  where  ciadonias  occur.  Probably  most  abundant 
of  all  ciadonias  noted. 

25.  Cladonia  ejflvatica  (C)  Hoffm.  Very  common  in  cladonia  zones- 
Lighter  and  smaller  than  preceding.     Common  in  V,  2;  I,  1. 

26.  Cladonia  alpestris  (L).  One  of  the  principal  form»  in  cladonia 
zone  in  the  shore-heath  swiee.     Common.     I,  1;  V,  2. 

27.  Cladonia  cocoifera  (C)  Willd.  Thin  earth  on  exposed  rocks. 
Fairly  common.    II,  3;  V,  7  (in  burned  area). 

28.  Cladonia  dcfornus  (C)  Hoffm.  On  partly  decayed  bark' and  wood 
of  fallen  trees.     Not  common.     V,  4. 

29.  Cladonia  cristatella  Tuck.     On  old  wood.     V,  4. 

30.  Cladonia  crispata  (Ach.)  Fib.  Forest  trail  Siskowit.  Also  found 
growing  into  moss  patches  in  woods.    V,  4. 

31.  Cladonia  amoatirocraea  (Flk.)  Schaer.  A  cladonia  in  heath- 
cladonia  zone  at  Rock  Harbor,  I,  1.  Patches  of  this  are  being  invaded 
by  moss.  , 

32.  Cladonia  furcata  pi nnata  Flk.  Growing  along  cabin  trail  oa 
debris,  and  on  fallen  conifers.    V,  4,     Not  abundant. 

33.  Cladonia  turgida  (Ehrh.)  Hoffm.  Growing  on  thin  humus  ac- 
cumulation on  open  rocky  places,  V,  4.  Also  along  portage  to  Siskowit 
Lake  (V,  9). 

34.  Cladonia  gracilis  dilatata  (Hoffm.)  Wain.  On  thin  humus  cover- 
ing of  bed  rock.     Natural  forest  "openings."     V,  4,  3. 

:!5.  Cladonia  rerticiHata  Hoffm.  Woods  and  rock  clearing  at  Sis- 
kowit Bay  station,  V,  4,  5. 

36.  Cladonia  pyxidata  (C)  Hoffm.  Rock  shore  in  foliose  and  fmiti- 
cose  lichen  zones.     V,  2.     Not  abundant. 

37.  Cladonia  finibriata  simplex  (Weis)  Wainio.  On  decaying  bark: 
of  fallen  trees  in  forest.  Forest  trail  from  Washington  Harbor  to  Lake 
Desor. 

38.  Cladonia  fimhriata  coniocraca  (Flk.)  Wainio.  Bark  of  falleik 
trees  in  forest  along  Siskowit  cabin  trail.    V,  4.    Not  abundant. 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLS  ROTALB.  229 

39.  Leoidea  lactea  (Flk.).  In  rather  amall  patches  an  exposed  slop- 
lug  aod  vertical  rocky  cliffs.  GommoD  on  the  water  Bide  of  crustaceous 
or  liiwer  Hchen  zone.    A  white  lichen  with  black  dots.    I,  1;  V,  2. 

40.  Endocarrpon  miniatum  (0)  Ach.  Bock  sorfaces  with  little  soil, 
Along  Siakowit  cabin  trail,  V,  4.  Also  in  lower  crustaceous  lichen 
zone.    V,  2;  I,  1.    Not  abundant. 

41.  Endocarpon  miniatum  aaauaticum.  In  lower  crnstaceous  lichen 
zone  within  reach  of  winter  wafes.    Not  abundant.    I.  1;  V,  2. 

42.  lohmodophila  aeruginosa.  On  decaying  bark  of  fallen  trees  along 
fiiekowit  cabin  trail.     Scarce.     V,  4. 

43.  Rhieocarpon  (BuelHa)  geographioum  <C)  DC.  A  small  green 
lichen  occnrring  in  small  patches  on  rocky  shores  in  crustaceous  lichen 
zone,  often  near  tbe  water.  Can  only  be  removed  by  chipping  away 
the  i-ock  on  which  it  grows.    Fairly  common.    I,  2;  V,  1. 

if 08868. 

44.  Sphagrwm  teres  Aug.,  var.  tenelhtm  Bl.,  bicolor. 

45.  Sphagnum  robustum  Bl.,  var.  gracile  Rt.,  palleus. 

46.  Sphagnum  girgensohnii  Ruas.,  var.  molle  Crev.,  palleua. 

47.  Sphagnum  platyphyllum  Bull.,  var.  subsimphx  Cdbg.,  glaucum. 
The  above  sphagna  were  abundant  in  all  the  bog  areas  of  the  island, 

and  were  of  occasional  occurrence  on  the  low  ground  along  creeks  and 
elsewhere  on  low  wet  ground.  I,  4;  I.  6;  II,  2;  II,  5;  III,  5;  IV",  10; 
V,  5;  V,  8;  V,  11. 

48.  (Seorgia  peXludda  {Tetraphis  pelliicida).  Woods  along  Biskowit 
«abia  trail.    V,  4. 

49.  Polytrichum  commune  C.  A  moat  vigorous  moss  growing  in 
-dense  colonies;  in  places  along  the  forest-bog  tension  zone  successfully 
Invading  the  sphagnum  masses.  The  only  plant  of  the  woods  that 
could  hold  its  own  against  the  invasion  of  the  Sphagnum  into  the  forest. 
Confined  to  moist  or  wet  places.    V,  4, 

aO.  Polytrichum  atrictum  Banks.  Rather  bare  exposed  places  along 
<Jreenstone  Ridge,  also  "natural  openings"  along  the  Biskowit  cabin 
trail.      V,  2;  y,  4. 

51.  Dicranum  gchreberi.  Near  sphagnum  bog  at  end  of  cabin  trail. 
V,  5. 

n2.  Dicranum  fuaceacvns  Turn.  Occurs  in  small  beads  or  clumps  on 
dead  wood.    In  woods.    V,  i. 

53.  Dicranum  longifoUum  Hedw.  Woods  along  Siskowit  cabin  trail. 
V,  4. 

54.  Dicranum  acoparium  (C)  Hedw.  Woods  along  Siskowit  cabin 
trail.    V,  4. 

55.  Dicranum  unduiatum  Volt.  Woods  along  Siskowit  cabin  trail. 
V,  4. 

56.  Qrimmia  unicolor  Hook.  Confined  entirely  to  small  crevices  and 
cavities  in  the  bed  rock  of  the  gently  sloping  shore.  It  occurs  nearer 
to  the  water's  edge  than  any  other  form  of  vegetation  observed  on  the 
island.  No  other  mosses  approach  it  in  nearness  to  the  water's  edge. 
and  it  surpasses  even  the  hardiest  lichens  of  the  crustaceous  zone  in 
this  respect.  Very  hardy,  and  at  times  highly  xerophytic.  I,  1;  V,  2. 
It  is  of  a  very  dark  greenish  brown  color.  OoC^jlc 


230  MICHIGAN    SURVET.    l»Og. 

57.  Lmeohryum  glaucum  (L)  Schimp.  Grows  in  beade  of  varying^ 
size,  principally  in  woods.     I,  3 ;  V,  4. 

58.  Tortella  tortuosa  (h)  Limpr.  Bock  ridges,  and  other  rocky 
plHces.    firo^fi  in  dense  rounded  fufts.    II,  3. 

59.  Vlota  americana  (Beauv.)  Liitdb.  Growing  on  gently  8lopiD|r 
rock  shore,  sometimeB  covering  crustaceous  and  foliose  lichen  patcbes. 
I,  1 ;  V.  2. 

60.  Bartramia  pomiformis  (L)  Hedw.  Shady,  moist  niches  and 
crevicefl  in  rock  cliffs,  A  beautiful  moss  having  the  appearance  of  green 
wool.    I.  1;  V,  4. 

61.  BryuM  palleus  Swartz.  Gn  dead  wood,  and  on  thinly  covered 
rock  surfaces  In  woods,  V,  4, 

62.  Aulocomium  palustre  (L)  Schwaegr.  Near  b<^  at  end  of  cabin 
trail  ei8k<>wit  Bay.    V,  5, 

63.  Mnium  punctatum  Hedw.  Moist  woods  along  Benson  Brook; 
also  in  moist  places  along  giskowit  cabin  trail  through  woods.  II,  1; 
V,  4. 

64.  Leakea  nermaa  (Schwaeg.).  Myr.  Closely  associated  with  Vlota 
americana  on  the  sloping  rock  shore  where  it  sometimes  coverB  patcbes 
of  cpustaceous  and  foliose  lichens.     I,  1 ;  Y,  2. 

65.  Thvidium  abietinum  (L)  B.  &  8.  Growing  on  fine  material  that 
has  accumulated  among  the  close  branches  of  the  low  Procumbeat 
Juniper,  It  was  noted  on  one  of  the  small  rock  islands  ia  Bock  Harbor 
which  had  little  if  any  vegetation  besides  the  crevices  plants.  It  here 
plays  an  important  pert  in  the  early  formation  of  a  hamus  soil  by 
solidly  filling  in  the  spacer  between  the  Jnnii^er  branches.     I,  1. 

66.  Hypmim  crUta-castrensia  L.  On  decayed  wood  in  coo!  moist 
woods  near  peat  bog,    V,  4,  5. 

67.  Eppntim  ackreberi  Willd.  Rich,  moist  woods  along  forest  road 
Washington  Harbor;  also  noted  growing  in  Cladonia  patches  in  woods 
along  Siskowit  cabin  trail.  It  seems  to  be  replacing  and  Bucoeeding  the 
Cladonias  in  places.    V,  4;  I,  3. 

68.  Bypmun  scorpoides  L.    B(^  margin  of  Forbes  Lake.    II,  5. 

69.  Hiypnum  inemicoswm  Lindb.  Bog  beyond  Malone's  fishing  camp. 
Back  from  V,  2. 

70.  Hypnum  polarc  Lindb.  Protected  rock  crevices,  Bock  Harbor. 
I,  1. 

71.  Bypnum,  ftuitans  L.     Bock  pools  Scovill  Point.     IV,  1. 

7-.  Bypnum  «tramincum  Dicks.  Bog  beyond  Malone's  fishing  camp. 
Back  from  V,  2, 

73.  Hypnum  aduncam  Scb.  Bog  at  end  of  Siakowit  Bay  cabin  trail. 
A",  5. 

74.  Hi/ptuiiii,  (uUiiicum  inttrmcdiitm  Seh.  Growing  in  water  in  mar- 
gin of  a  brook  emptying  into  Forbes  Lake,  II,  5. 

75.  BypHviii  uncinatum  Hedw.  formaplumoaa  Sch.  Moist  woods 
along  trail  to  Monument  Bock.     iV,  4. 

76.  Byloconiium  triquetiim  (L)  B.  &  S.  Woods  along  Siskowit  cabin 
trail.     V,  4.     Fairly  common. 

77.  Bkylocomiiim  aplendcns.  Woods  along  forest  road  from  Wdbhing- 
toii  Harbor  to  Lake  Desor,  III,  '04. 

78.  Distichiiim  capillaceinii.  From  a  partly  protected  vertical  rock 
crevice  6-8  feet  above  water.  Rock  Harbor.    I,  1.  i,  CoOqIc 


■  ECOLOGY  OF   ISLB  ROYALB.  231 

79.  Neckera  oligocarpa  B.  &■  S.  Forest  road,  Washington  Harbw: 
woods. 

80.  Dickelyma  uncinatum  Mitl.  (?)  Growing  in  a  pool  on  small 
island  at  upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor.    IjDaBnally  lai^.    Ill,  1. 

81.  Palndella  squarrosa  (L)  Brid.  Bog  margin  of  Forbea  Lake.  II, 
6. 

Pteridophytes. 

Ophioffloasaceae — Adder's  Tongue  Family. 

82.  Botrychium  lunaria  (L)  Sw.  Moonwort.  Bare.  Partially  shaded 
rocky  ground  near  Rock  Harbor  Ugbt-honse.  I,  1. 

83.  Botrychium  virginicum  (L)  Sw.  Yii^nia  Grape  Fern.  Spar- 
ingly distributed  in  rich  woods.     I,  3;  III,  4;  V,  4. 

Oamundoceae. 

84.  Osmunda  regalia  L.  Royal  Fern.  One  locality.  Rich  low  ground 
near  small  creek  emptying  into  Forbes  Lake,  II,  5. 

85.  Ogmunda  cinnamomea  L.  Cinnamon  Fern.  Moist  thickets  and 
low  ground.     II,  6. 

86.  0$munda  claytoniana  L.  Interrupted  Fern.  Mesophytic  woods. 
!Not  common. 

Polypodiaceae — Fern  Family. 

87.  Onoclea  teneibilis  L.     Bensitive  Fern.     Fairly  abundant. 

88.  Onoclea  strutkiopteris  (L)  Hoifm.  Ostrich  fern.  Few  localities : 
not  abundant. 

89.  Woodaia  ilvenaia  (L)  R.  Br.  Rusty  Woodaia.  Several  small, 
dense  patches  on  rock  surfaces,  and  along  rock  crevices.  Island  upper 
end  of  Rock  Harbor  and  I,  1 ;  V,  2. 

90.  Cystopteris  hulbifera  (L)  Bernh.  Bulblet  Cystopteris.  Thinly 
scattered  on  moist,  shaded  cliff  faces.  Cliff  near  Bock  Harbor  ligbt- 
bonae. 

91.  Cystopterig  fragilis  (C)  Bernh.  Brittle  Fern.  Shaded,  moist 
places.    Not  abundant. 

92.  Dryopteria  the^teria  (L)  A,  Gray,  iMarsh  Fern.  Wet  mar- 
gins of  .bogs,  and  other  low,  wet  places.  Common  in  such  places.  II, 
5;  III,  5. 

93.  Dryopteria  fragrana  (L)  Schott.  Fragrant  Shield  Fern.  Com- 
mon in  patches  on  cliffs  and  rocks  along  shore,  I,  1. 

94.  Dryopteria  filiwmas  (L)  Schott.  Male  Fern.  Fairly  abundant 
in  rich,  moist  woods.     Especially  abundant  near  Benson  Brook.     II,  1. 

95.  Dryopteria  apinuloaa  (Retz.)  Kuntze.  Spinnloee  Fern.  Rich, 
moist  woods.  Fairly  common.  Unusnally  large  and  vigorous  on  Malone'a 
Island  in  Siskowit  Bay.     Ill,  4;  V,  4. 

96.  Phegopteris  phegopteria  (L)  Underw.  Long  Beech  Fern.  Moist 
woods  (IV,  4).     Less  common  than  P.  dryopteria. 

97.  PJiegopteria  dryopteria  (L)  Fee,  Oak  Fern.  Bich,  moist  woods. 
Fairly  common.     IV,  4;  III,  4. 

98.  Aaplenium  trtchomatu^a  L.  Maiden-hair  Spleenwort.  On  thinly 
soil-covered  rocks.     Rare.     Rock  cliflf  along  Siskowit  cabin  trail.     V,  4. 


232  UICHIOAN   SURVBT,   1908. 

&9.  Adiantum  ped^tum  L.  Maidenhair  Fern.  Sparingly  distri 
bnted  in  the  mesophytic  forest.    Ill,  4,  and  at  Washington  Club  (forest). 

100.  Pteria  aquilina  h.  Brake.  Abundant  in  open,  drier  places, 
especially  in  bnmed  areaH. 

101.  Cryptogramma  acrostiekoidca  B.  Br.  American  Rock  Brake. 
In  denfie  jKitches  on  exposed  bed-rock  where  thinly  soil-covered.  Upper 
end  of  Rock  Harbor  and  I,  1. 

102.  Pokypodium  milgare  L.  Common  Polypody.  Tops  and  exposed 
edges  of  cliffs.    Common.    I,  1. 

Eguisetoceae — Horsetail  Family. 

103..  Eqtii»etum  arccnse  L.  Between  forest  and  bog  margin  Forbes 
Lake,  II,  5. 

104.  Equieetum  sylvaticum  L.  Wood  Horse-tail.  Moist  woods.  II. 
1.    Noted  in  one  locality  only. 

105.  Eguiaetum  palustre  L.  Marsh  Horse-tail.  Wet,  back-margin  of 
bog. 

106.  Equisetum  fluviatUe  L.  Swamp  Horse-tail.  In  water  apper 
end  of  Rock  Harbor.    Ill,  3. 

107.  Equisetum  ncirpoides  !tlichx.  Depression  in  Arbor-vitae  swamp 
along  Siskowit  I^ake  portage,  (V,  9). 

Lycopodiaceae — Club-Moss  Family. 

108.  Lycopodium  selago  L.  Fir  Club  Moss.  Rare. .  Exposed  rocks 
at  Scovill  Point,  IV,  1. 

109.  Lycopodium  lucidulum  Michx.  Shining  Clnb  Moss.  Edge  of 
rock  pools  Scovill  Point,  IV.  1,  and  in  moist  woods.  III,  4. 

110.  Lycopodium  invndatum  L.  Bog  Clnb  Moss.  Wet  bog  margin, 
Sumner  Lake.     Ill,  5. 

111.  Lycopodium  obgcurnm  L.  Ground  Pine,  Sparingly  distributed 
in  moist  woods.     I,  3. 

112.  Lycopodium  clavntum  L.  Running  Pine.  Common  in  dry  to 
moist  woods.     Ill,  4;  V,  4;  I,  3. 

113.  Lycopodium  complanalum  L,  Fairly  common  in  woods  and 
shady  places.    V.  4;  III,  4. 

114.  Lycopodium  annotinum  h.  Stiff  Club  Moss.  Cool,  dry  woods. 
V,  4. 

Selaginellaceae — Selaginella  Family. 

115.  Selaginella  rupestria  (L)  Spring.  On  thinly  soil-covered  rocks 
along  Siskowit  Lake  portage  (V,  9).    Sparingly  distribnted. 

Isoetttceae — Quillwort  Family. 

116.  lioetcB  sp?  In  shallow  water  at  upper  end  of  Bock  Harbor, 
III,  3. 

Spermatopkytcs.      (Seed   Plants). 

Xaiad4iceae — Pondweed  Family. 

117.  Potamogelon  natans  L.    Fairlv  common  on  mai^n  of  Sumner 

'-'«■  ™'^-  '  ,„  Google 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALB.  233 

118.  Potamogetott  perfoliatus  L.  Claeping  leaved  Pond-weed.  Mar- 
^n  of  Snmner  Lake. 

119.  Potamogeton  heterophyllaa.     fichreb.     Washington  Creek. 

120.  potamogeton  hillii  {?)  Hill's  Potamogeton.  Uargia  of  Butnoer 
■Lake. 

121.  Potamogeton.  pectinatus  L.    Margin  of  Sumner  Lake. 

122.  Tfaiag  ^ctili*  WHld.  Slender  Naias.  Shallow  water  at  head  of 
Bock  Harbor. 

Scheuchzeriaceae — Arrow-Grass  Family. 

12.t.  Triglochin  maritima  L.  B(^  margin  of  Sumner  Lake.  Not 
Abundant.    Ill,  5. 

Vallianeriaceae — Tape-Orass  Family. 

124.  Valliineria  spiralis  L.  Tape-GrsBs,  Eel-Orass.  Shallow  water 
-at  bead  of  Bock  Haii>or. 

Graminae — Grass  Family. 

125.  Panicum  ranthophysum  A.  Gray.  Dry  rocky  ridges,  and  rocks 
"with  little  soil. 

126.  Agroatia  hyemaUe  (Walt.)     B.  S.  P.    Rather  dry  ground. 

127.  Calamagrostia  canadensis  (Micbz.)  Beauv.  Bock  pool  margins. 
■Scovill  Point,  IV,  1.  Creek  margin  upper  end  of  Bock  Harbor,  III,  3. 
Wet  places  generally. 

128.  Trisetum  subsptcatum  (L)  Beauv.  Common  in  rock  crevicee 
and  dry  places.  Bock  shore  where  little  soil  is  present,  where  it  occurs 
■as  the  picmeer  grass.    I,  1;  V,  2. 

129.  Pkragmites  phragmHes  (L)  Karst.    Washington  Creek. 

130.  Poa  pratenaia  L.  A  dry  ground  form.  Island  in  Bock  Harbor, 
III,  1. 

131.  Panicularia  canadensis  (Michx.)  Kuntze.  Upper  end  of  hog  at 
«Dd  of  Siskowit  cabin  trail.    V,  Q. 

132.  Panicularia  elongata  (Torr.)  Kuutze.  Mar^n  of  Siskowit  cabin 
trail  bog.    V,  5. 

133.  Feaeuta  ovina  L.  Bock  crevices  and  on  thinly  soil-corered  rocks. 
I,  2;  V,  2. 

Cyperaceae — Sedge  Family. 

134.  Eleocharig  paUistria  (L)  B.  &  S.  In  shallow  water  at  upper 
«nd  of  Siskowit  cabin  trail.    Y,  5, 

135.  Eleocharia  patuatris  glauceacens  (Willd.)  A.  Gray.  (?)  Wet 
part  of  island  in  Tobin  Harbor. 

136.  Scirpus  caespitosug  L.  Margin  of  Forbes  I^ake,  II,  5.  Bock 
poors,  Scovill  Point,     IV,  1. 

137.  Scirpua  cjfperinua  (L)  Knnth.  Tx>w  ground  along  "Island^ 
mine"  road,  head  of  Siskowit  Bay. 

138  Eripphorum  alpinum  L.  Alpine  Cotton-Grass.  Slost  common 
'"cotton-grass"  on  the  island.     Common  in  all  the  bogs.     II,  2;  III.  5. 

139.  Eriophorum  vaqinatum  L.  Sheathed  Cotton-Grase.  Spht^nnm 
tKigs.    V,  11;  III,  4;  V,  5. 


234  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.    1808. 

140.  Eriophorum  gracile  L.    Bog  margin  of  Samner  Lake,  II,  5. 

141.  Rynchospora  alba  (L)  Yahl.  White  Beaked  Bu^.  Common  in 
vet  bog  margiuB.     V,  11;  II,  5. 

142.  Carex  paucifiora  Lightf.  Few-flon*ered  Bedge.  Margin  of 
Siskowit  cabin  trail  bog,    V,  5. 

143.  Carex  folliculata  L.  Long  Sedge.  Associated  with  preceding- 
species. 

144.  Carex  monile  Tnckerm.  Necklace  Bedge.  Wet  creek  margin 
of  bog  near  Malone's  fishing  camp,   (V,  11). 

145.  Carex  tuchermani  Bewev.     Along  Washington  Creek. 

146.  Carex  retrorsa  Schwein.  Betrorse  Sedge.  Along  WashingtoD 
Creek. 

147.  Carex  riparia  Curtis.  Biver-bank  Sedge.  Creek  margin  heaif 
of  Bock  Harbor,  III,  3. 

148.  Carex  fiUformis  L.  Blender  Sedge.  Common  in  1k^  mat;gin»> 
IL  5;  IIP,  5. 

149.  Carex   atricta   Lam.     Tussock   Bedge.    Bog   margins.    Y.    11; 

II,  5. 

150.  Carex  a^uatilis    Wahl.    Water  Sedge.    Bog  margins.    V,   11  r 

III,  5. 

161.  Carex  Umoaa  L.  Mud  Sedge.  Bock  pools,  Scovill  Point,  IV^ 
I.    Siskowit  cabin  trail  bog.    V,  6. 

152.  Carex  crinita  Lam.  Along  road  to  "Island  Mine"  head  of  Sis- 
kowit Bay. 

153.  Carex  arctata  Boott.  Drooping  Wood  Sedge.  Dry  woods,^ 
Washington  Harbor. 

154.  Carex  viridula  Michx.  Edge  of  rock  pools,  and  on  moister 
parts  of  rock  beach.    I,  1;  V,  1,  2. 

156.    Carex  chordorhiza  L.    Creeping  Sedge.    Bog  margins.    V,  lip 

III,  5;  II.  5. 

156.  Carex  teneUa  Schk.  Soft-leaved  Sedge.  Arbor-ritae  depree- 
sioD,  Siskowit  Lake  portage,  (V,  9). 

157.  Carex  aterilis  Willd.  Bock  pools,  Scovill  Point,  TV,  1,  and 
Siskowit  cabin  trail  bog.    Y,  4. 

158.  Carex  hruanesoena    (Pers.)     Poir.     Bock   pools,   Scovill   Point. 

IV,  1. 

169.  Carex  triaperma  Dewey.  Three-fmited  Sedge.  B(^  margins, 
n,  5;  III,  5. 

160.  Carex  acoparia  Schk.  Pointed  Broom  Bedge.  Washington 
Club  QroiiDds.    I,  '04. 

161.  Carex  fe8tucacea>  Willd.  Fescue  Sedge.  Dry  rocky  places;, 
rock  ridges.    II,  3;  V,  3. 

NOTE. — For  more  convenient  reference  the  principal  trees  of  the 
island  will  be  grouped  together  instead  of  being  placed  under  their- 
respective  orders  and  genera. 

Pinaceae — Pine  Family. 

162.  Ptnus  strobM  L.  White  Pine.  I<ai^,  isolated  indiyidual» 
occur  along  the  Greenstone  Bidge,  and  on  other  ridges;  bat  is  no- 
where abundant.     It  is  confined  almost  entirely  to  higher  ground,  and 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE   HOYALE.  236 

to  Open,  sunny  places.  Large,  cbarred  trunks  3-4  feet  in  diameter  are 
still  fairly  abundant  along  the  Greenstone  and  other  ridges.  Very 
few  young  trees  of  this  species  were  noted;  and  there  are  do  indica- 
tions, at  present,  to  suggest  that  it  will  again  become  abnndant  on  tlie 
island.     I,  3;  II,  3;  III.  '04;  VII,  '04. 

163.  Pinus  resinoaa  Ait.  Red,  or  Norway  Pine.  Not  abundant; 
noted  in  two  localities  only.     Occurs  on  high,  exposed  ground.     Ill,  4, 

164.  Pinus  divaricata  (Ait.)  Budw.  Labrador,  or  Gray  Pine.  Fairly 
common  on  exposed,  dry  rock  ridges,  and  on  a  few  of  the  rock  islands. 
Several  in  heath-forest  tension  zone  near  Bock  Harbor  light-honse 
Able  to  withstand  highly  zerophytic  conditions. 

165.  Larix  Iwicina  (DuBoi)  Koch.  Tamarack,  or  American  Liirch. 
Principally  in  recently  filled  bogs  or  working  in  along  mai^ns  of 
partly  filled  ones.  The  tamaracks  and  Black  Sprnces  are  the  pioneer 
trees  of  the  bogs.  In  the  older  bogs  the  few  large  tamaracks  present 
are  relicts,  and  few  young  ones  appear  to  be  coming  on.  Scattered  in- 
diyidnals  occur  throughout  the  upland  forests  but  are  nowhere  abund- 
ant outside  the  bogs.  Largest  individuals  noted  (V,  8)  were  over  3 
feet  in  diameter,  I.  4;  T,  6;  II,  2;  II,  4;  II,  5;  III,  5;  IV,  4;  IV,  8; 
V,  5;  V,  7;  V,  8;  V,  U;  V,  '04. 

166.  Abies  balaamca  (L)  Mill.  Balsam  Fir.  The  most  character- 
istic and  abundant  e\'ergrcen  of  the  upland  forest.  Abundant  on  all 
parts  of  the  island  except  the  Greenstone  Ridge,  and  in  the  more  re- 
cently filled  b(^.  Along  the  forest  road  from  Washiagton  Club  to 
Lake  Desor  the  absence  of  the  larger  firs  was  probably  due  to  the 
shallowness  of  soil,  exposure  to  the  powerful  winter  gales  (as  soon 
as  they  overtop  the  maples  and  other  trees  among  which  they  start  to 
grow),  and  the  reduced  root  system  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the 
tree.  It  reproduces  i-eadily  in  dense  shade  as  well  as  more  open 
places,  and  is  not  only  succeeding  itself  but  other  forest  trees,  as  the 
White  Spruce.  It  will  certainly  occupy  a  large  and  important  place 
in  the  climatic  forest.  Up  to  3  feet  in  diameter.  I,  3;  I,  4;  III,  4;  IV. 
4;  IV,  8;  IV,  9:  V,  4;  V.  7;  ITT,  '04.  - 

167.  Picea  oanadensia  (Mill.)  B.  8.  P.  White  Spruce.  Older  trees 
are  fairly  common  where  they  have  come  in  with  Abies  as  pioneers. 
It  does  not  appear  to  be  succeeding  itself  except  along  the  edge  of 
clearings  and  in  more  open  parts  of  the  forest.  Since  the  Fir  seedlings 
ere  common  under  the  older  trees  instead  of  those  from  the  present 
spruces  it  appears  that  the  White  Spruce  will  be  replaced  by  the  Fir 
in  the  climatic  forest,  the  Fir  seedlings  being  able  to  endure  much 
deeper  shade.    I,  2;  I.  3;  III,  1. 

168.  Piwa  mariana  (Mill.)  B.  8.  P.  (Possibly  Pioea  brevifoHa 
Peck).  Black  Spnice.  Confined  principally  to  sphagnum  bogs  where 
it  cou'es  in  with  the  tnniaratk  as  a  pi»neer.  The  largest  trees  noted 
were  '2'/j  feet  in  dijimeter.  AIho  H)mringly  disirihnted  outside  of  bogs. 
In  a  few  instances  it  Wiis  found  growing  on  the  exp<!sed  tops  of  cliffs 
(as  at  Roek  Harbor)  where  there  is  only  a  thin  covering  of  soil.  I,  R. 

16!).  Thuya  oifidrntalis  L  White  ("cdar  or  Arlwrvitae.  Occurs  iit 
all  bog  ureax  except  those  mont  recently  cnriieted  ovr.  It  does  not 
appear  to  ronie  in  as  a  pionM-r  but  follows  closely  Pirra  iitariatm  and 
Larij-  lanritia.   Ijargpsl  n|>ecinien8  in  old  bog  areas,  V,  8,  were  40  inctieR 


236  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

■D  diameter.  Occasional  in  upland  forest,  in  fact,  fairly  abnodant  in 
placee;  also  one  of  tbe  trees  to  occnr  In  crevices  on  the  small  rock 
islands  and  along  the  rock  shore,  in  which  cases  they  have  a  decidedly 
Rtanted  appearance,   and  are  often  broader  than  high.    I,  4;  I,  6;  II,  2; 

IV,  4;  IV,  8;  V,  6;  Y,  7;  V,  8;  Y,  11;  II,  '04;  Y,  '04. 

170.  Jumperus  nana  Willd.  Low  evergreen  shrub  common  on  the 
back  heath  zone  and  along  the  rock  shore.  It  appears  to  follow 
rather  than  to  precede  Juniperus  {procwnbens)  sahitui  with  which  it  is 
80  commonly  associated.  A.  common  form  on  the  rock  islands  and  in 
the  rock  shore  crevices.  Also  in  the  natural  rock  openings  back  from 
the  shore.    I,  1;  I,  2;  I,  5;  III,  1. 

171.  Jwniperus  {procumhcns)  sabiva  L.  Procumbent  Juniper,  A 
very  important  pioneer  on  the  rock  Islands  and  on  the  sloping  rock 
shore,  starting  as  a  crevice  plant  and  sending  out  its  dense  prostrate 
branches  6-10  feet-  It  offers  a  favornble  place  for  wind  blown  material 
which  there  accumulates,  and  this  is  of  great  importance  for  the 
pioneer  mosses  which  contribute  so  largely  to  the  first  humos  soil. 
Rome  most  interesting  examples  of  these  pioneer  stages  were  noted  on 
one  of  the  low,  nearly  bare  rock  islands  near  the  Rock  Harbor  light- 
house, I,  1,  and  at  V,  2,  it  was  very  abundant. 

Taxaceae — Yew  Family. 

172.  Taxtu  canadonsia  Marsh.  Ground  Hemlock,  American  Yew. 
Everywhere  abundant  in  the  upland  forests  of  the  island.  On  account 
of  its  low,  spreading  growth  it  forms  one  of  tbe  greatest  impedimenta 
in  penetrating  the  island  forests.  The  rankest  growth  was  noted  in  the 
lower  forest  region  around  Washington  Harbor,  where  it  attains  a 
height  of  four  to  five  feet.    I,  6;  lY,  4;  lY,  8;  IV,  9;  V,  4;  V,  5;  V,  7; 

V,  '04. 

iSflltcaccflc— Willow  Family. 

173.  Popuhia  grandiientata  Michz.  Large-toothed  Aspen.  Princi- 
pally along  tiie  Qreenston«  Bidge;  not  at  all  common  as  compared  with 
P.  tremuMdea. 

174.  Popuhut  tremuloides  Michx.  American  Aspen.  Very  cwnmon 
on  almost  all  parts  of  the  islands  where  burnings  and  clearings  have 
occorred.  This  and  the  Betula  papyrifera  are  the  pioneer  decidaous 
trees  is  bnmed  and  cleared  areas,  where  the  two  seem  about  equally 
abundant,  colonies  of  both  being  intimately  associated.  Younger  and 
older  staods  of  this  as  noted  along  the  Greenstone  Ridge  near  Rock 
Harbor,  suggest  the  vounger  and  older  burnings  bv  the  copper  profi- 
pectoFB.  I,  1;  I,  2;  I,  3;  I,  H;  I,  B;  I,  7;  II.  1;  11,  3:  III,  4;  IV,  5;  IV, 
9;  V,  8;  V,  9;  V,  3;  Y,  t;  V,  5;  V,  7;  I,  '04;  III,  '04. 

76.  Populus  balaamifera  L.  Balsam  Poplar.  One  locality  only ; 
head  of  Siskowit  Bay. 

Betulaceae — Birch  Family. 

176.  Corylua  roatrata  Ait.  Beaked  Hazel.  Rocky  slopes  and  sum- 
mits of  ridges.     In  thickets  along  the  Qreenstone- 

177.  Betula  papyrifera  Marsh.    Paper,  or  Canoe  Birch.     Common 


KCOLOGY  .OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  237 

everywhere  In  forested  portions  as  well  as  burnings  and  clearings. 
This  and  the  Balsam  Fir  seem  to  he  the  climax  trees  of  the  upland 
forest.  I,  2;  I,  3;  I,  7;  11,  1;  III,  4;  IV,  8;  IV,  9;  V,  3;  V,  4;  V,  7; 
I,  '04;  III,  '04. 

178.  Betula  lutca  Michx.  F.  Yellow  Birch.  Noted  only  along  the 
forest  road  from  Washington  Harbor  to  Lake  Desor,  where  it  was  very 
common  along  the  Oreeui^tone  Uidge.  (Specimens  SU  inches  in  diameter 
were  noted.    Ill,  '04. 

179.  Betula  lenta  L.  Black  or  Cherry  Birch.  Associated  with  D. 
lutca  as  mentioned  above.     Also  attaining  great  size.     Ill,  '04. 

180.  Alnv8  alnobctuUi  (Ehrh.)  Koch.  Green,  or  Mountain  Alder. 
Fairly  common  in  npland  forest  at  Rock  Harbor.  Common  shrub  along 
with  birches  and  nspens. 

181.  Alnus  incajia  (L)  Willd.  Speckled  Alder.  Low  ground,  Irorders 
of  streams  and  margins  of  lakes.  Along  water's  edge  at  Bock  Harbor, 
and  sparingly  associated  with  Alnu^  alnobctula  in  the  forest  back  from 
■water. 

Note. — Thru  an  ovw-sight  the  3  species  of  Salix  observed  wera 
omitted  in  preparing  this  list  for  the  press. 

Fagaceac — Beech  Family.  i 

183.  Quereiis  ruhra  L.  Red  Oak.  .\  single  specimen  was  noted  along 
the  forest  road  between  Washington  Club  and  Ijike  Desor,  (III,  '04). 
The  onl}/  oalc  noted  on  the  island. 

Pomaceae — A]>ple  Family. 

183.  SorbuS  americana  Marsh.  American  Mountain  Ash.  Fairly 
common  along  the  forested  margins  of  the  principal  inlets,  as  Rock 
Harttor,  and  sparingly  distributed  through  the  inland  forest.  Always 
more  or  less  isolated,  never  in  colonies. 

184.  Aronia  nigra  (Willd.)  Britton.  A  single  specimen  noted  on 
north  side  of  Rock  Harbor. 

186.  Amelanchier  ainifolia  Nutt.  Nlorthwestem  Juno-lrerry,  A 
shrub  6  feet  or  less  in  height.  Rock  openings  also  rock  ridge  near 
Conglomerate  Bay  (I,  5), 

186.  Amelanchier  oUgocarpa  (Michx.)  Roen.  Oblong-fruited  June- 
berry.  A  shrub  about  the  size  of  preceding,  but  occurring  on  lower 
ground. 

Dnipaceae — Plum  Family. 

187.  Prumia  penaisylvanioa  L.  Wild  Red  Cherry,  Pennsylvania 
Cherry.  Characteristic  of  xerophytic  places  as  rock  openings,  talus, 
slopes,  and  bnmings;  and  able  to  thrive  in  exposed  rocky  positions- 
where  subject  to  great  temperature  extremes,  and  where  there  is  very 
little  soil.    I,  5. 

188.  Prtmtis  mrginuina  h.    Choke  Cherry.    Woods:  not  common. 

Aceraceae — Maple  Family. 

189.  Acer  aaccharum  Marsh.  Sugar  or  Hard  Maple.  One  part  of 
the  island,  on  the  summit  of  the  Greenstone  Ridge  along  the  forest 


238  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

road  from  Wasbington  Harbor  t^  I^ake  Desor,  it  is  very  abundant. 
Reported  to  occur  eparingl;  along  other  parts  of  the  Oreenstone,  bnt 
8eemB  to  be  coufloed  entirely  to  the  higher  parts  of  the  aummit  ridge. 
Along  this  "forest  road"  it  forms  almost  pure  stands,  iu  other  places 
there  is  B.  lenta  and  B.  luted  mixed  with  it.  Some  of  the  trees  are  2-3 
feet  iu  diameter.    {Ill,  '04.) 

190.  Acer  apicatum  Lam.  Mountain  Maple.  Generally  distributed 
in  the  forest,  but  nowhere  very  abundant.  Largest  trees  over  30  feet 
high.  One  of  the  lower  growth  forms  to  invade  the  forest  roads.  Oftea 
in  rocky  places.    V,  7;  III,  '04. 

191.  Acer  pennaylvanicum.  Striped  Maple,  Moosewood.  Rare  on 
island. 

Oomaccae — Dogwood  Family. 

192.  Comn8  atolonifera  Michx.  Common  in  low  ground  and  back 
margins  of  bogs.  A  prominent  member  of  the  shrub  zone  Hnrronoding 
amall  lakes. 

193.  C<rrnvs  circinata  L'Her.  Round-leaved  Cornel.  Sparingly  dis- 
tributed in  rich  woods. 

Araceae — Arum  Family. 

194.  Calla  palustris  L.  Water  Arum.  Lake  margins,  especially 
abundant  at  Sumner  Lake,     III,  5. 

195.  Spathyema  foetida  (L)  Baf.  Skunk  Cabbage.  Common  in  low 
grounds  in  woods,  and  near  logs.    Ill,  5;  II,  1,  2;  II,  o;  IV,  4. 

Juncaceae — Rush  Family. 

196.  Juncus  effusus  L.  Along  old  road  to  "Island  mine,"  and  in 
shallow  water  at  upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor.    Ill,  3, 

Meianthaceae — Bunch-Flower  Family. 

197.  Tofieldia  paluatria  Huds.  Asphodel,  Rocks  at  Scovill  Point, 
TV,  1. 

189.  Uvularia  perfoliata  L.  Perfoliate  Bellwort.  Rich,  moisi  woods. 
Scattered. 

lAlwceae — Lily  Family, 

199.  TJUum  phiUidelphicum  h.  Bed,  or  Wood  Lily,  Common  in  drier 
pnrts  of  woods ;  even  occurs  as  a  rock  crevice  plant  on  the  small  islands 
in  Rock  Harbor, 

ConraHorifloMe—Li!y-of -the- Valley  Family. 

300.  Clintonia  iorealia  (Ait.)  Raf.  Yellow  Clintonia.  Common 
everywhere  in  moist,  rich  woods;  verv  abundant  in  places.  I,  3;  TV, 
4;  V,  4;  V,  5. 

201.  Vagnera  trifoUa  (L)  Morong.  Three-leaved  Solomon's  Seal. 
Frequent  in  forest  margins  of  bogs,  and  in  cool,  moist  woods.  I,  4:  II, 
2;  V,  5, 


D,3-ZBcbyCOO<^IC 


ECOLOGY   OP  ISLE  BDYALE.  239 

202.  VnifoUum  eanadetme  (Deef.)  Greene.  False  Lily-o{-YaUey,  Two- 
leaved  Solomon's  Seal.  Rather  open  patches  in  rich,  tnoiat  woods.  1, 
4;  11,  2. 

203.  Streptopas  amplexicaiUia  (L)  DC.  Claaping-Ieaved  Twisted- 
stalk.    Woods  along  porta^  toSiskowit  Lake  (V.  9). 

204.  Trillium  grandiflorwn  iiiicb:!.)  Salisb.  Showy,  White  Triliitim. 
Flood  plain  of  Washington  Creek. 

Iridaceae — Iris  Family. 

305.  Iris  versicolor  L.  Larger  Blue  Flag.  Common  in  low  wet 
places,  as  lake  and  bc^  margins.    Y,  5;  III,  5;  II,  5. 

Orehidaceae — Orchid  Family. 

206.  Cypripedium  reginae  Walt.  Showy  Ladies-Slipper.  Wet  places 
in  woods :  not  abundant.    II,  1 ;  near  II,  5. 

207.  Gypripedium  hirmtutn  Mill.  Larger  Yellow  Ladies-Slipper.  In 
drier  parts  of  woods  than  preceding.    lY,  4. 

208.  Orchis  rotundifolia  Pursh,  Small  Bonnd-leared  Orchild.  Bare: 
tamarack  forest. 

209.  Habenaria  orbiculata  (Pursh)  Torr.  Large  Round-leaved 
Orchid.    Rich  woods  near  lY,  2;  few  localities. 

210.  Habenaria  oMusata  (Pursh)  Richards.  Small  Northern  Bog 
Orchid.  Fairly  common  in  forested  hog  margins,  and  bog  forests.  I, 
4;  II,  2;  Y,  5. 

211.  Eabenaria  h}/p^borea  (L)  R.  Br.  Tall  Leafy  Oteen  Orchid. 
B<^  and  wet  woods:  margin  of  Sumner  Lake,  II,  5. 

212.  Habenaria  dilatata  (Pursh)  Hoc^.  Tall  White  Bog  Orchid. 
Trembling  hog  margins  of  Forbes  and  Snmner  Lakes,  very  abundant 
in  latter  place.    II,  5;  III,  5. 

213.  Habenaria  pstfoodes  (L)  Gray.  Smaller  Pnrple-fringed  Orchid. 
Associated  with  H.  dilatata  as  given  above,  and  also  abundant.  Ill,  5; 
II,  5. 

214.  Pogonia  ophiogloasoidea  ( L)  Eier.  Rose  Pogonia.  Common 
along  wet  bog  margins.     Ill,  5;  II,  5. 

215.  Arethusa  bviboia  L.  Aretbusa.  Wet  bog  margins.  Xot  so 
common  as  preceding  species. 

216.  Qyrostachya  romancoffiana  (Cham.)  MacM.  Wet  margins  of 
Sumner  J^ke  and  Forbes  Lake. 

217.  lAstera  cordata  (L)  R.  Br.  Heart-leaved  Twayblade.  Moist 
woods  and  ravines. 

218.  Peramium  repens  (L)  Salisb.  Lesser  Rattle-snake  Plantain. 
Cabin  trail  woods,  Y,  4,  Siskowit. 

219.  Peramium  pubesoens  (Willd.)  MacM.  Downy  Rattle-anake 
Plantain.    Rather  dry  woods.    Y,  4,  III,  4. 

220.  Peramium.  menzieaii  (Lindl.)  Morong.  Menzies'  Battle-snake 
Plantain.     Rich  woods.     Y,  4;  III,  4. 

221.  Acroanthcs  monophylla  (L)  Greene.  (?)  Sumner  Lake  mar- 
gin.    III.  5. 

222.  Leptorehis  UUifoIia  (L>  Kuotze.  Large  Twayblade.  Uoist 
woods  and  along  bog  margins.    Woods  of  I.  /  -  ^       i 


240  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

223.  Leptorchit  lofselii  (L)  UacM.  Loesel'B  Twayblade.  Wet  thick- 
ets and  flpring  banks, 

224.  Calypso  iulbosa  (L)  Cakes.  Calypso.  Wet,  cool  woods  and 
ravines. 

225.  Corallorhiza  corallorhiza  (L)  Karst.  Early  Coral-root.  Rich, 
moist  woods.    Woods  at  upper  end  of  Bock  Harbor. 

226.  Corallorhiza  multi flora  Nutt.  Large  Coral-root.  Fairly  com- 
mon in  rich  woods,    I,  4;  III,  4. 

Santaiaceac — Sandalwood  Family. 

227.  Comandi'a  livida  Richards.  Northern  Comandra.  Tfaiu  soil  on 
rocks,  and  in  open,  xerophytic  plac^.  Pine  ridge  near  Sumner  Lake. 
Ill,  i.     Fairly  common. 

Ariatolochiaceae — Birthwort  Family. 

228.  Aaarum  canadense  L.     Wild  Ginger.    Flood  plain,  Washington 


il///»-icac(;ae— Bayberry  Family. 

229.  Myrica  gale  L,  Sweet  Qale.  Margin  of  bayou  off  Tobin's  Har- 
bor; wet  rocks  at  Sco\iIl  Point.     Also  V.  6. 

CaryophyllaGeae — Pink  Family. 

230.  Sagina  saginoides  (L)  Britton.  Arctic  Pearl-wort.  A  hardy, 
low,  rock  crevice  plant.     I,  1. 

231.  AUine  longifoUa  (Muhl.)  Britton.  Long-leaved  Stitch-wort. 
Scattered  ruderal.     II,  1. 

232.  Silene  antirrhina  L.  Sleepy  Catch-Fly.  Side  of  Greenstone 
Itidge,  and  exposed  xerophytic  places.    Not  abundant.    II,  3. 

Nymphaeaceae — Water-Llly  Family. 

233.  Brasenia  purpurea  (Michx)  Casp.  Water  Shield.  Open  water 
in  a  few  bogs;  not  abundant.    Bog  near  Malone's  fishing  camp,  V,  II. 

234.  Nymphaea  advena  Soland.  Large  Yellow  Pond-Lily.  Margins 
and  shallower  water  in  a  few  bogs.     Ill,  5. 

235.  Castalia  odorata  (Dryand.)  W.  &  W.  Sweet-scented  White 
Pond-Lily.  Abundant  in  Sumner  Lake,  III,  6,  where  it  seems  to  grow 
in  part  on  tbe  uplifted  "false  bottom." 

Ranunculaceae — Crowfoot  Family. 

236.  Caltha  palustria  L.  Marsh  Marigold,  Cowslip,  Wet  places  in 
woods.    Low  woods  at  head  of  Bock  Harbor,  II,  1,  2;  III,  5. 

237.  Coptia  trifolia  (L)  Salisb.  Gold-thread.  Hummocks  in  wet 
woods  and  filled  bogs,  and  in  wet  bog  margins.     Common. 

288.  Actaea  rubra  (Ait.)  Willd.  Bed  Baneberry.  Sparingly  dis- 
tributed in  woods.     V,  4,  9;  IV,  4. 

239.  Aquilegia  canadensis  L.  Wild  Bed  Columbine.  Rocks  near 
lieht-boQse  at  Bock  Harbor.    Not  abundant.  r^ '         i 

D=    z.<:byL.OOg[e 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROTALB.  241 

240.  Anemone  multifida  Poir.  Red  Wind-Flower.  Bare.  Bock  shore 
or  one  island  in  Rock  Hai-bor. 

2*1,  Eepatica  hepatica  (L)  Karet.  Bound-lobed  Hepatica.  Woods: 
not  abundant. 

242.  Sanunculus  abortivua  L,  Kidney-leaved  Crowfoot.  Scattered  as 
a  rnderal.     II,  1,  and  on  Waahington  Club  grounds. 

243.  Ranunculus  omlia  Eaf.  Thin  soil  on  rock  islands.  Upper  end 
of  Rock  Harbor,  III,  1;  also  near  Biskowit  cabin   (V,  1). 

244.  Ranunculus  maeounii  Britton.  Macoun's  Buttercup.  Bare,  one 
locality,  near  Biskowit  cabin  (V,  1). 

245.  Thalictrum  purpuraacens  L.  Tall  Purple  Rue.  Moist,  rich 
woods  near  Benson  Brook  (II,  1),  and  along  Washington  Creek. 

Papaveraceae — Poppy  Family. 

246.  Capnoides  sempervirena  (L)  Borck.  Pink  Corydalis.  Rocky,  ex- 
posed places  along  the  Greenstone.    II,  3. 

CruCT/erac— Mustard  Family. 

347.  Thlaspi  arvense  L.  Field  Penny  Crew.  Washington  Club 
groonds.    Only  locality.    Bnderal. 

248.  Siaymbrium.  altissium  L.  Tall  SiBymbrinm.  Washington  Clulx 
grounds:     waste  places.     I,  '04.     Rnderal, 

249.  Arabis  bracht/carpa  (T.  &G.)  Britton.  Pnrple  Rock  Cress.  Ex- 
posed rocks.     Greenstone  Ridge  along  the  McCargo  Cove  trail.    II,  3. 

SarracfmMceae — Pitcher  Plant  Family. 

250.  Sarracenia  purpurea  L.  Pitcher  Plant.  Common  in  bog  areas 
everywhere  on  island.     I,  6;  II,  2;  II,  5;  V,  6;  V,  11. 

Droaeraceae — Bundew  Family. 

261.  Droaera  rotundifolia  L.  Round-leaved  Drosera.  Common  along 
wet  bog  margins,  especially  III,  5. 

252.  Droaera  intermedia  Hayne.  Bpatulate-Ieaved  Bundew.  Bc^  mar- 
gins, bat  generally  in  wetter  parts  than  the  preceding;  often  elevated 
on  a  short  stem  extension.    Ill,  5. 

253.  Droaera  liru:aria  Goldia  Slender-leaved  Drosera.  Bog  margins; 
fairly  abundant.     Ill,  5. 

Saxifragaceae — Saxifrage  Family. 

254.  SaiBifraga  tricuspidata  Eetz.  Three-toothed  Saxifrage.  Fairly 
common  as  a  crevice  plant  along  the  low  rock  shore.    L,  1. 

265.  Saxifruga  aizcKyn  Jacq.  Livelong  Saxifrage.  A  rock  shore  crev- 
ice plant.    Bare,    V,  2. 

266.  Sawifraga  nivalis  L.  Clustered  Alpine  Saxifrage.  Exposed  rook 
shores,  growing  on  scanty  soil.    I,  1 ;  Y.  2. 

257.  MitelUt  nuda  L.  Naked,  or  Low  Mitrewort  Very  common  in 
moist  woods.  I,  3.  Woods  at  end  of  Rock  Harbor  and  on  forested 
ialands.  ^~.  ■ 

32  lyCoogle 


242  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

258.  Panmssia  paJu^itrig  L.  Northern  Omss  of  FamaesaB.  "Bog  mar- 
gin of  Sumner  Lake.    Sparitigl;  distributed. 

OroxmtJariaceac — Gooseberry  Family. 

259.  Ribea  setoaum  Liadl.  BriBtly  GooBeberry.  Shore  of  Siskovit 
Lake.    Bare. 

260.  Ribes  proatratum  L'Her.  Fetid  Currant.  Rich,  moist  woo&; 
also  one  of  rock  islands  at  Hock  Harbor.    Fairly  abandant. 

261.  Ribea  rulrum  L.  Bed.  Currant.  Growing  wild  in  abundance  in 
vicinity  of  Biskowit  Lake  portage.    V,  9. 

■  Hoaaceae — Rose  Family. 

262.  Opulaster  opuUfoUus  (L)  Kuntz.  Kinebark.  Occurs  principally 
along  the  shores,  often  aa  a  crevice  plnnt  on  the  root  islands,  as  well 
as  on  rocky  shore  of  main  land.     I,  1;  III,  1;  V.  6, 

263.  Rvbua  parviflorus  >'iitt.  White-flowering  Raspberry.  A  very  com- 
mon and  characteristic  plant  of  clearings  and  burnings;  also  occurs  in 
thickets  and  open  parts  of  woods.    VIII,  '04. 

264.  Ruhut  arcticus  L.  Arctic  Raspberry,  or  Bramble.  Sparingly 
distributed  in  moist  woods  and  filled  bog  areas. 

265.  Rubua  atrigoans  Michx.  Wild  Red  Raspberry.  Found  most 
abundant  in  the  burned  areas  at  head  of  Siskowit  Bay.  ' 

266.  Riibua  americanvs  (Pers.)  Britton  Dwarf  Raspberry.  Occa- 
sional in  woods;  rather  common  in  bog  forests. 

267.  Fragaria  veaca  L,     Sparingly  distributed.     I,  1. 

268.  Poteatilla  arguta  Pursh.  Tall  "WTiite  Oinquefoil.  Common 
around  light-house  clearing  at  Rock  Harbor  as  a  ruderal.    I. 

269.  Potentilla  monspelienais  L.  Rough  Oinquefoil.  Exposed  rocks 
having  scanty  soil. 

270.  Potentilla  tittoratia  Rydberg.  Coast  Cinqnefoil,  Fairly  common 
as  a  rock  crevice  plant  along  main  shore,  and  on  small  rook  islands.  I, 
1. 

271.  Potentilla  tridentata  Soland.  Three-toothed  Oinquefoil.  Very 
common  as  a  rock  crevice  plant  along  shores  and  on  small  rock  Islands. 
I,  1;  V,  2. 

272.  Potentilla  fruttcoaa  L.  Shrubby  Cinqnefoil.  Rocks  at  Scovill 
Point,  IV,  1.    Occasional  shore  crevice  plant.    I,  1. 

273.  Comarum  paluatre  L.  Purple  Marsh  Cinqnefoil.  One  of  the 
most  common  and  most  characteristic  plants  of  all  bog-lake  margins, 
and  contributing  an  important  part  toward  the  vegetative  bog  carpet. 

274.  Waldsteinia  fragariodeg  (Miclix.)  Tratt.  Barren  or  Dry  Straw- 
berry. Large  patches  on  the  side  of  tlie  Greenstone  range  along  McCargo 
trail.    II,  3. 

275.  Boaa  adcularia  Lindl.  Prickly  Bose.  Only  species  of  rose  found 
on  Island.  Fairly  common  around  lighthouse  clearing  and  in  open 
places. 

Oeran'taceac — Geranium  Family. 

276.  Qeranium  JticknelUi  Britton.  Bicknell's  Cranebill.  Rock  crevice 
plant:  also  on  rocks  with  thin  soil  covering.  Few  localities  only.  1, 
1. 


ECOLOQT  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  243 

Polygalaceae — Milkwort  Family. 

3T7.  PolygaUt  pauoifolia  Willd.  Fringed  Polygala.  Fairly  common  Id 
rich,  moist  woods.    I,  3;  III,  4. 

Empetraoeae — Crowberry  Family. 

278.  Empetrum  nigrum  L.  Crowberry,  Heath-berry,  On  exposed, 
nearly  bare  rocka  at  Scovill  Point.    IV,  1. 

Anacardiaceae — Sumac  Family. 

279.  RhMS  hirta  (L)  8udw.  Btaghorn  Sumac.  Sparingly  distributed 
on  higher  parts  of  Greenstone.    II,  3. 

Bypericacnae — St.  John's-wort  Family. 

280.  Triadenum  virginicum  (L)  Raf.  Marsh  St.  John's-wort.  B(^ 
margin  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5) ;  also  margin  of  Forbes  Lake  (II,  S). 
Common. 

VMaceac — Violet  Family. 

281.  Viola  rotundifoUa  Michx.  Round-leaved  Violet.  Fairly  com- 
mon in  ricb,  moist  woods,  especially  near  I,  6. 

282.  Viola  lahradorica  Schrank.  American  Dog  Violet.  Few  Speci- 
mens in  low  moist  ground  near  shore  at  Siskowit  Bay  cabin,  V,  1. 

2^.  Viola  areneria  DC.  Sand  Violet.  Rocky  shore  near  Siskowit 
cabin  V,  1. 

Onagraccae — Evening  I'rinirose  Family. 

284.  Ckamaenerion  angttatifoUutn' (L)  Scop.  Fireweed.  Very  abund- 
ant everywhere  in  burnings  and  clearings. 

285.  Epilobiiim  Hneare 'iiahl.  Narrow-leaved  Willow-Herb.  Bogmar- 
,  g'la  Sumner  Lake,  III,  5. 

286.  Epiiobium  adetuicaulon  Haussk.'  Northern  Bog  Willow-Herb. 
Wet  soil  near  shore  of  Siskowit  cabin,  V,  1. 

287.  Circaea  Alpiiia,  Li  Smaller  Enchanter's  Nightshade.  Cool 
moist  woods  at  head  of  Rock  Harbor.    Not  conunon, 

Pt/rolaceae — Wintei^reen  Family, 

288.  Pyrola  chlorantha  Sw.  Greenish-flowered  Winte^reen.  Rich, 
moist  woods. 

2S9.  Pyrola  asarifoUn  MicUx.  Liver-leaf  Pyrola.  Most  common  of  the 
island  pyrolas.    Wooda. 

290.  Pyrola  scciniil<i  1..  One-sided  Wintergreen.  Ricb,  moist  woods. 
Not  common.     . 

291.  Pyrola  minor  L.    Jjeseei'  I'vroln.     Woods.     Scarce. 

292.  Manages  iini flora  (L)  A.  Omy.  One-flowered  Wintergreen. 
Rather  widely  distributed  in  rich,  moist  woodx,  although  nowhere  abund- 
ant.   I,  3,  4;  III,  4;  IV,  4. 

293.  Chimaphila  umbeVata  (L)  Nntt.  Pipeissewa.  Dry  woods  and 
fxitosed  sunny  places,  as  the  pine  ridge  near  Snmner  Iiake./ 


"C.oogic 


244  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

Monotropaccae — Indian  Pipe  Family, 

294.  Monotropo  unifiora  L.  Indian  Pipe.  Qnite  abundant  in  ricli, 
dark,  moiet  woods.  Unusnally  large,  vigorooB  specimens  in  wet  mar^n 
of  woods  beyond  Cabin  bog  at  Siskowit  (V,  5) . 

295.  Bypopityg  hypOpitya  (L)  Bniall.  Woods  at  Siskowit  Bay,  V,  4. 
Bare. 

Haioragidaceae — Water  Milfoil  Family. 

296.  Hippuria  vulgaris  L.  Mare's  Tail.  Head  of  Bock  Harbor  in 
shallow  water.     Ill,  2. 

Araliaceac — Ginseng  Family. 

297.  Aralia  nud'waulis  Ij.  Wild  Sarsaparilla.  Abundant  everywhci-e 
in  rich  moist  woods,  where  it  is  one  of  the  characteristic  plants  of  the 
mesophytic  forest.     V,  4. 

298.  Aralia  hispida  Vent.  Bristly  Sarsaparilla.  One  single  colony 
on  a  burned-over  island  in  Bock  Harbor.    I,  1. 

.    VmbelUferae — Carrot,  or  Umbel  Family. 

299.  Heracleum  lanatum  Michx.  Cow  Parsnip.  Light-house  clear- 
ing at  Bock  Harbor;  also  an  old  mine  clearing  along  Bock  Harbor. 
Budera).    I,  7;  V,  3, 

300.  Cicuta  hulbif&ra  L.  Bulb-bearing  Water  Hemlock.  Occasional 
in  bog  margins,  as  II,  5;  III,  5. 

301.  PaatimMca  aativa  L.  ^Vild  Parsnip.  Clearing  at  banning  of 
McCargo's  trail. 

Cornaceac — Dogwood  Family, 

302.  Conttia  oanadensia  L.  Low,  or  Dwarf  Cornel.  Bunchberry. 
Very  abundant  in  filled  bog  areas  and  in  moist  woods.  Also  occurring 
abundantly  in  open  places.  One  of  most  common  herbaoeons  plants  od 
the  island. 

Cornua  stolorUfera   {See  tree  and  shrub  list.) 
Comiis  circinata    (See  tree  and  shrub  list). 

Ericaceae — Heath  Family. 

303.  Ledum  ffroeiilandioum  OEder.  Labrador  Tea.  One  of  the  most 
characteristic  bog  shrubs.  Common  in  b(^  everywhere.  I,  6;  II,  2; 
II,  5;  V,  5;  V,  11. 

304.  Ealmia  glauca  Ait.  Swamp  Laurel.  Fairly  common  in  tx^, 
but  nowhere  so  abundant  as  the  preceding. 

305.  Andromeda  polifolia  L.  Wild  Bosemary.  Abundant  in  nearly 
all  the  recently  filled  bogs. 

306.  Chamaednphne  calyculata  (L)  Moench.  Dwarf  Cassandra. 
A  very  characteristic  and  common  shi-ub  of  nearly  all  the  ho^. 

307.  Arctoataphylos  uva^urai  (L)  Spreng.  Bearberry.  Very  abund- 
ant as  a  heath  plant  along  the  rock  shore,  and  on  the  thinly-covered 
"rock  openings."    I,  1,  5  and  V,  2.  ■  ("^qooI,. 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLB  ROYALB.  245 

Vacciniaceae — Huckleberry  Family. 

308.  Vaccinium  uliglnostim  L.  Great  Bilberrj-.  Bocks  at  Scovill 
Point.     IV,  1. 

309.  Vaccinium  pennayhanicum  Lam.  Low,  or  PennsylTania  Huck- 
leberry. Abundant  as  a  heatU  plant  along  shores,  and  oo  nearly  bare 
.mountain  sides.  V,  2;  11,  3;  IV,  8,  and  on  some  of  the  small  islands  at 
Kock  Harbor. 

310.  Chiogenet  hMpiOitla  (L)  T,  &  G.  Creeping  Snowberry.  Edge 
of  bogs,  and  on  sphagnum  hummocks.    I,  6;  V,  5;  II,  2. 

311.  Oxycoccua  outyroccua  (L)  MacM.  Low  Cranberry.  Confined  to 
wet,  UDforested  bogs:  only  fairly  abundant.  I,  6;  II,  2;  V,  5,  and  bog 
near  Malone's  flsliing  camp,  V,  11. 

Primulaccae — Primrose  Family. 

312.  Primula  Jtiistammica  Miclis.  Dwarf  Canadian  Primrose.  A 
crevice  plant  along  the  rock  shore.    Not  abundant.    I,  i;  I^',  1;  V,  2. 

313.  fji/simachia  terrct^tris  (L)  B.  8,  P.  Bulb-bearing  Ixiosestrife. 
Thinly  soil-covered  rock  shore  nenr  Kiskowit  cabin,  V,  1. 

314.  Naumbcrgia  thyrsifolia  (L)  Duby.  Tufted  Loosestrife.  Margin 
of  Siskowit  I^ake  near  head  of  Trout  Creek,  V,  G. 

315.  Trientalia  amcricana  Pursh.  American  Star-Flower.  Moist, 
rich  woodg.     Sparingly  distributed.     I,  i;  IV,  4;  V,  4. 

Gentianaccac — Gentian  Family. 

31G.  Oentiana  andretvuii  Griseb.  Closed,  or  Bottled  Gentian.  A 
few  specimens  from  the  Siskowit  cabin  trail  bc^,  V,  5.    Rare. 

317.  Tetrag(mantku8  deftexus  (J.  E.  Smith)  Kuntze.  Spurred 
Gentian.    Moist  woods,  head  of  Bock  Harbor.    Few  localities  only. 

Jfenyanfftocp«e— Buck-bean   Family. 

318.  Menyanthes  trifoUata  L.  Buckbean.  Abundant  in  wetter  parts 
of  bogs :  very  important  contribution  in  tbe  formation  oT  the  "bog  car- 
pet."   II,  5,  III,  5,  and  bog  near  V,  2, 

Apocynaceae — Dc^bane  Family. 

319.  Apocynum  andtvaaetnifolium  L.  Spreading  Dogbane.  Wash- 
ington Club  grounds. 

Conporeu^accof— Morning-glory  Family. 

320.  Com?olvulus  repetis,  var.  pvbeacens.  Pubescent  Bindweed.  Xearly 
bare  sides  of  the  Greenstone  along  the  McCargo  Cove  trail,  II,  3. 

Hydrophyllaceae — Water-leaf  Family. 

321.  Phacelia  franklinii  (R.  Br)  A.  Gray.  Franklin's  Phacelia.  Few 
ftpecimens  taken  on  a  thinly  soil-covered  rock  elevation  near  Rock  Harbor 
lighthouse. 


3y  Google 


246  MICHIGAN  SURVEY.   1908. 

Labiatae — Mint  Family. 

323.  S!cateUaria  laterifoUa  L.  Mad-Dog  Sknllcap.  Along  flood  plain 
of  Washington  Creek. 

•323.  Scutellaria  galerhvlata  L.  Mflnth  Skull-Cap.  Wet  bog  mar- 
ginti,  as  of  Bamner  (III,  5)  and  B'nrbeR  (II,  5)  lafcee. 

324.  Prunelia  vulgarin  L.  ^If-heal.  Clearings:  occurs  as  a  rnderal, 
Washington  CInb  grounds,  II,  1,  etc. 

326.  Clinopodium  vulgare  L.  Wild  Basil.  Woods  on  Oreenstone 
along  McCargo  trail.     Not  abundant. 

326.  Lycopus  americanus  Muhl.  Cnt-leaved  Water  Hoar-hound.  Wet 
bog  margin  of  Aumner  Lake.    Ill,  5. 

327.  Mentha  canadensis  L.  American  Wild  Mint.  Near  water's  edge 
at  Siskovit  cabin,  V,  1.    Also  on  Washington  Club  grounds. 

Sorophulariaceae — Pigwort  Family. 

328.  Scrophularia  leporella  Bicfcnell.  Hare  Firwort.  Along  Wash- 
ington Creek. 

329.  Veronica  americana  Schirein.  American  Brooklime.  Along 
Washington  Creek  on  low  ground. 

330.  Castitteja  acuminata-  (Pnrsh)  Spreng.  Lance-leaved  PaJnted- 
Onp.  Common  around  light-house  at  Bock  Harbor.  Fairly  abundant 
in  open,  moist  places. 

331.  Melampyrum  Utiearc  Lam.  Narrow-leaved  Cow-wheat.  Fairly 
common  on  dry.  open,  to  partly  shaded  [riaces.  Exposed  Norway  Pine 
ridge  near  Sumner  Lake;  also  occasional  in  open  woods. 

Lentibula riaceac — B I adderwort  Family. 

332.  Vtricularia  mmor  L.  (?)  Ijcsser  Bladderwort.  In  shallow  water 
on  bog  marginal  carpet  at  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5) ;  also  occurs  at  Forbes 
Lake  (II,  5). 

333.  Pinguicula  vulgaris  L.  Butterwort,  B<y  Violet.  Rock  pools  or 
moist  rocks  near  water's  edge ;  fairly  common.    IV,  1 ;  I,  1 ;  V,  2. 

Riibiaceac — Madder  Family. 

334.  Galium  spurium  L.  I^esser  Cleavers,  Low  ground  along  Wash- 
ington Creek, 

336.  Oalium  trifloram  Michx.  Sweet-scented  Bed-straw.  Woods 
along  McCargo  trail. 

336.  Oalivm  trifidum  L.  Small  Marsh  Bed-straw.  Wet  bog  mai^ins 
of  Snmner  (III,  5)  and  Forbes  (II,  S)  lakes. 

Caprifoliaceae — Honey-suckle  Family. 

337.  Sambuctfs  puhetu  2tlichx.  Red-Berried  Eider.  Along  Biskowit 
portage.     Fairly  common. 

338.  Sambucue  canadenne  L.  American  Elder.  Light-house  clearin;^ 
at  Bock  Harbor. 

339.  Yiburnum  acerifoUum  L.     Fairly  common  in  woods.    L,  S;  III, 


'■'Google 


BCOXXIQY  OF   ISLE  ROTALE.  247 

.      340-    Tiburtmm  paudfoUum  Pyl.     Few-flowered    Cranberry,     Moist 
woods:  abundant.    I,  3. 

341.  Linnaea  bor€aU$  L.  Tn-Ln-dower.  Very  common  in  woods  and 
partial  clearings.  Even  occurs  at  I,  1,  as  a  rock  crevice  plant.  Widely 
distributed. 

342.  Lonicera  dioica  L.  Glaucous  Honey-suckle.  Occasional  in 
woods.    I,  3. 

343.  lAmic^a  ciliata  Muhl.  American  Fly  Honey-suckle.  Fairly  com- 
mon in  woods.    I,  3;  III,  4;  IV,  4,  S;  V.  4. 

344.  Lonicera  hirauta  Katon.     Hairy  Hooey-suckle.    Rare:  in  woods. 

345.  Lonicera  involucrata  (Richards)  Banks.  Involucred  Honey- 
suckle. Border  of  lighthouse  clearing,  and  in  open  parts  of  woods. 
Fairly  common.     I,  3. 

346.  Diervilla  dicrviUa  L.  Bush  Honeysuckle.  A  very  abundant  and 
characteristic  shrub  of  burnings,  clearings,  and  natural  openings  in 
woods.  1,  2  (and  on  rock  islands  in  Rock  Harbor),  II,  1,  3;  III,  4;  IV, 
4;  V,  2,  3. 

Campanulaceac — Bell-Flower  Family. 

347.  Campanula  rotitndifoUa  L.  Blue  Hare-bell.  Common  rock 
crevice  plant  on. rock  shore  and  small  rock  island.  Also  growing  on  thin 
soil  along  the  shore.     I,  1:  V,  2.    . 

348.  Campanula  aparinoides  Pursh.  Marsh  Bell-flower.  Common  in 
wet  bog  margins  of  Sumner  (III,  5)  and  Forbes  (II,  5)  lakes. 

349.  Ij>})eUa  khlmii  L.  Brook,  or  Ealm's  Lobelia.  A  rocfe  crevice 
plant,  and  on  moist  rocks  near  water's  edge.    Common.    1, 1 ;  IV,  1 ;  V,  2. 

Chicoriaceae — Chicory  Family. 

350.  Lactuea  pulchella  (Pursh)  DC.  Large-flowered  Bine  Lettuce. 
IS'oted  in  one  locality  only,  rock  clearing  on  side  of  Greenstone  along  the 
McCargo  trail.    II,  3. 

351.  Hieracium  umhcllatum  L.  Karrow-leaved  Hawkweed.  On  rockn 
or  in  rock  crevices.     V,  2. 

352.  NaAalus  albua  (L)  Hook.  White  Battle-snake  Root.  Woods: 
not  abundant.     Forest  along  Riskowit  portage,     V.  9. 

353.  Nabalui  raeemosus  (Michx.)  I)C.  Glaucous  White  Lettuce. 
Rocks  and  rock  crevices  along  shore.    IV,  1 ;  V,  2. 

Componitoc — Composite  Family. 

354.  Etipatoriiim  pupuiTiiin  L.  Joe-P>"e  AVeed,  or  Purple  Boneset,  In 
moist  land  near  ci'eek,  upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  III,  .1. 

356,  Holidago  rirganrea  L.  var.  (?)  European  Golden-rod.  Rook 
crevices,  and  thin  soil  on  rocks  and  rock  islands.  I,  1, 

356.  Solidago  neglecta  T,  &  G,  Bwamp  Golden-rod.  Fairly  cotnnion 
in  most  of  the  wet  bogs.     I,  fi;  III,  5;  V.  5. 

357.  Solidago  jimcfa  .\it.  On  thinlv  Koil-co\-ered  i-ock  surfaces.  Rock 
Harbor,  I,  S, 

35fi,     SuUdago  nJiginow  Nntt,     Siskowit  cabin  trail  Iwp.     Y.  ."i. 

.139.  Aatcr  maci-ophfilhiH  L.  I.aifre-lenved  Aster.  Very  abundant  and 
rbaracteristfc  in  nearly  nil  clearings,  and  in  natural  rock  openiuf^  in 
woods.    Often  forms  large  colonies.  >»jIc 


248  UICHIOAN   SURTBT,  1908. 

360.  Aster  ptarmacoides    (Nees)  T.    &  G.     Upland   White   Aster.  . 
Fairly  common  on  smal)  rock  Island,  and  as  a  rock  shore  crevice  plant, 
the  only  crevice  aster.     I,  1;  IV,  1;  V,  2. 

361.  Aster  hirsuticauUs  Lindl.  Hairy-stemmed  Aster.  Woods  along 
Washington  Creek ;  one  locality  only. 

362.  Anaphalis  margarttacea  (L)  B.  &  H.  Large  Pearly  Everlasting. 
Dry  soil,  and  rock  clearings  along  Greenstone  (McCat^  trail).  II,  3, 
and  on  Washington  Cluh  grounds. 

363.  Artemisia  canadensis  Michx.  Canada  Wormwood.  Crevice 
plant  along  rock  Hhore,  and  on  small  islands  in  Rock  Harbor.    I,  1 ;  V,  2. 

364.  8enecio  balsaniitae  Mubl.  Balsam  Groundsel.  Common  rock 
crevice  plant  on  Rock  Harbor  islands,  and  elsewhere  along  the  rock 
whore.    I,  1;  III,  1;  IV,  1;  V,  2. 


SUMMARY. 

Species  of  lichens  43 

Species  of  mosses  38 

Species  of  Pteridophy tes 35 

Species  of  Spermatbpbytee 248 

Total 364 


Wheeler,  W.  A. 

1901.     Notes  on  Some  Plants  of  Isle  Boyale.     Minn.  Bot.     Studies,  2, 
pp.  619-620. 
Kuthven,  A.  G. 
1906.    Notes  on  the  Plants  of  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and  Isle  Bov- 
ale,  Michigan.    Bep.  Mich.  Geol.  Survey  for  1905,  pp.  86-92." 


D,gt,ZBdbyG06<^le 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE   ROYALB. 


ANNOTATIONS  ON  CERTAIN  ISLE  ROYALE  INVERTEBRATES. 

niL    CEtAS.    C.    ADAMS. 

The  follovJDg  annotated  list  of  Isle  Royale  invertebrates  includes  the 
;;roups  whioh  have  not  Ireeu  made  the  basis  for  separate  papers  b,v 
fipecialists.  For  the  determination  of  these  I  nm  indebted  to  the  follow- 
ing persons :  Prof.  N.  A.  Harvey,  the  Sponge ;  Dr.  T.  H.  Monl^oinery, 
Hair-worms;  Prof.  Fmnk  Smith,  Earthworms;  Dr.  J.  Percy  Moore, 
Leeches;  Miss  Ada  Weckel,  Amphipods;  Dr.  Harriet  Richar^n,  Sow- 
bug;  Mr.  Nathan  Banks  and  Mr.  J.  H.  Emerton,  Spiders;  Dr.  J.  W. 
Folsom,  Spring-tail;  Mr.  E.  B,  Williamson,  Dragonflies;  Prof.  Herbert 
Osbom  and  Mr.  J.  B.  de  la  Torre  Bueno,  Hemiptera;  and  to  Prof.  A.  J, 
Snyder  and  Dr.  James  Fletcher,  Lepidoptera. 

In  general,  in  addition  to  the  field  notes  which  include  those  made 
by  Dr.  H.  A.  Gleason  and  myself,  the  geographic  range  has  been  outlined 
and  a  selected  series  of  references  is  given  for  the  convenience  of  the 
i<tudent  of  the  Michigan  fauna.  The  insects  were  largely  collected  by 
Dr.  Gleason,  the  writer,  and  B.  F.  Saverj  who  collected  insects  about 
tl»e  camps,  but  all  members  of  the  party  aided  in  the  collection  of  the 
fipecimens.  The  field  numbers  are  indicated  in  parentheses,  preceded  by 
O  in  the  case  of  Dr.  Gleason's  numbers  and  A  in  my  own. 

An  examination'of  these  lists  will  reveal  their  incomplete  character, 
as  an  effort  was  made  to  make  representati^'e  rather  than  complete  col- 
lections of  the  groups.  On  account  of  the  small  amount  of  zoological 
information  which  we  possess  from  Isle  Royale  it  has  been  thought  desir- 
able to  make  the  determinations  of  the  collecfions  as  complete  as  cir- 
cumstances would  allow. 

FOSIPBKA. 

SpongilUdae. 

Spoitgitla  lacuatrk  (Linn.).  Fresh  Water  Sponge.  A  small  colony 
of  this  sponge  was  found  on  July  26  in  shallow  water  near  the  head  of 
Bock  Harbor  (III,  3)  by  Gleason.  Prof.  N.  A.  Harvey  examined  the 
specimen  and  makes  the  following  comments:  "Small  encrusting  sponge, 
with  a  tendency  to  branch.  One  branch  cylindrical,  full  of  gemmules. 
Skeleton  spicules  smooth,  pointed,  slightly  curved,  nomerous.  Dermal 
spicules,  few,  half  as  long  as  skeleton  spicules,  densely  spined,  spines 
short,  more  numerous  towards  the  ends,  slightly  curved.  Gemmules 
with  very  thin  membrane,  destitute  of  spicules,  foramen  oval. 

"This  sponge  is  evidently  a  weak  form  of  Spon^Ua  laciistris  (Linu.), 
It  is  very  close  to  the  paupercula  of  Bowerbank,  Theif  can  be  no 
question  about  the  identity  of  this  sponge,  although  it  is  somewhat  un- 
usual to  find  gemmules  so  well  developed  in  July.  It  develoi>es  its 
gemmules  ordinarily  very  late  in  the  fall.  The  spicules  on  the  gemmule 
iil)pearto  be  wholly  wanting,  and  the  dermal  spicules  ni-e  not  numerous. 


250  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

The  speeimeo  is  too  small  to  show  the  peculiar  branching  habit  very 
distiiictlv." 

A  targe  (]oantity  of  this  sponge  was  also  secured  during  190i  in  the 
Porcupine  Motmtains.  Qntonagon  county,  Mich.,  by  N.  F.  Macdutf.  The 
specimens  came  from  Carp  Ci-eek  {Sta.  VI)  in  Augnat.  Concerning  these 
specimens  Prof.  Harvey  also  remarks:  "Skeleton  spicules  smooth, 
slightly  curved,  pointed  at  both  ends.  Dermal  spicules  half  the  length 
of  skeleton  spicules,  or  shorter,  spinous  spines  numerous  but  short. 
Gemmules  not  well  develoi)ed.  TJie  branches  contaiuing  few  or  none. 
The  encrusting  portion  of  the  sponge  manifesting  some.  Gemmiile 
spicules  wanting.  The  geniiiiule  crust  very  thin,  or  altogether  wantinp. 
Its  branching  character  is  well  marked,  and  the  small  size  of  the 
branches  indicate  the  weak  form  which  seldom  shows  many  gemmuleH 
or  in  which  the  gemmule  sjiicnles  are  seldom  well  developed.  In  con- 
sequence of  the  size  and  striking  branched  habit  of  this  sponge  it  is  the 
one  that  is  usually  first  found  by  collectors.  I  am  surprised  to  find  any 
gemniules  matured  in  these  s]K)ngeH  at  the  season  when  these  were  col- 
lected." 

NEMATODA. 

Gordh'dae. 

Gordius  aqiiaticHS  robiistiis  (Ijeidy)  Montg.  Hair  Worm.  This  spe<ifs 
of  hair  worm  was  fairly  abundant;  siwcimens  were  taken  at  the  head 
of  Tobin  Harbor  {IV,  7)  among  Potamogcton  perfoliatum  on  July  '2it: 
among  sedgee  at  the  head  of  a  small  island  in  the  Harbor  (IV.  fi),  an<l 
on  the  beach  at  onr  camp  on  Siskowit  Hay  (V,  1)  August  3  and  6.  Both 
sexes  are  represented  in  our  series,     cf,  Montgomery,  '!>S,  pp.  30-31, 

Ocoffraphic  Range.  Bay  of  Fundy;  Maine;  Massachusetts;  Maryland; 
District  of  Columbia;  New  York;  Pennsylvania;  Montana;  Michigtin ; 
Kansas.    The  typical  form  occurs  in  Europe. 

During  August,  1903,  Mr.  A.  G.  Rnthvensecnred  specimens  of  (^or'/iif^ 
lincatus  Leidy,  in  a  spring  in  l^e  Porcupine  Mountains  (Station  \l), 
Ontonagon  county,  Midi.  cf.  Montgomery,  'OS,  p.  32.  This  species  seems 
to  frequent  springs.  It  is  recorded  from  New  York,  Pennsylvania  and 
Maryland. 


1898.  Montgomery,  Jr.,  T,  H.  The  Gordiacea  of  Certain  American 
Collections  with  Particular  Reference  to  the  Korth  American  Fauna. 
Bull.  Mus.    Conip.  Zool.,  32,  pp.  23-59. 

1899.  Goi"diacea   (Hair  worms).     Amer.  Nat.,  33,  pp.  047-652. 

IIlRt'DlNEA. 

(Ilosaiphonidae. 

Glomphonia  coiiiplannta  (Linn.).  One  specimen  of  this  leech  was 
taken  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (V,  5)  on  August  12.  Moore  {^01,  p.  4!Kti 
states  that  it  aliounds  under  stones  in  running  water  and  "feeds  chiefiy 
on  small  snails  and  annelids." 

Geographic  Range.  Connecticut;  I^ke  Ontario;  Lake  Erie;  Ontario; 
Ohio;  Slichigan;  Illinois;  also  found  in  Europe. 

i.Googlc 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  251 

Tfirudinidae. 

MacrobdeUa  devoiti  (Sav)  Verrill.  This  sixscies  wjik  quite  abuodant 
fit  a  iiiarshY  margin  af  ^iiiiiuer  Lake  (III.  5>,  whore  many  specimeiiH 
Ttere  tatfeu  duriug  Jnt.v.  This  is  a  larfce  speriex  and  easily  racogniKetl 
l)y  its  dark  brown  dorsal  surfaoe  and  reddish  colored  ventral  surface. 
They  are  very  gracefa)  and  con»picuouA  objects  when  seen  swimining. 
Odg  Bpecimeu  was  taken  upon  a  frog.  Moore  (1901,  p.  511>  reports  this 
i'jtecieH  as  a  true  blood-sucker  and  that  it  is  frequently  found  goi^jed. 

Geographic  Jiaiifjc.  Maine;  New  York;  Tonnecticut;  Virginia;  >liph- 
igan;  Minnesota;   Illinois;   Kansas;   Nebraska. 

Baemopnia  grandii  Verrill.  One  specimen  was  taken,  .July  5,  on  the 
f.outh  shore  of  Siskowit  Luke  (V,  6).  This  is  a  mud  leech  and  at  times 
leaves  the  water  in  seaiTh  of  earthworms  (Moore,  '01,  p.  527),  Also 
taken  in  1004  l»y  Rnthven  at  Lake  Desor  (VII,  '04),  Ruthven,  'Ofi,  p.  51. 

Oeofft-aphic  Hange.  Conne«-ticut ;  Lake  Huron ;  Afichigau ;  Lake 
Superior  (Ven-ill.  '74,  p.  6721:  VeUowstone  I'ark;  Kansas;  Alaska  {E. 
vtarmoratis  Mooi-e,  "OS,  p.  560);  Michigan;  Illinois;  Nebraska. 

En-pohdeUidav. 

HcrpobdfUa  lateralis  (Verrill)  Moore.  On  the  south  shore  of  Siskowit 
Lake  (V.  G)  one  »|)eciinen  was  taken  August  5,  and  another  specimen 
was  taken  Jnlv  14.  in  shallow  water,  at    the    head    of    Rock    UarI)or 

(in.  3). 

The  type  of  this  si)ecies  came  from  near  the  northern  shore  of  Lake 
Superior. 

GeograiiHlc  Range.  Maine;  Connecticut;  Lake  Huron ;  I-ake  Hui»erior; 
Colorado,  (Verrill.  '74,  p.*67.">). 

Xephalopsis  ohitrnra  \'en'ill.  Egg  capsules  of  these  leeches  were  taken 
July  27  at  Sumner  T^ke  (III,  5),  on  a  yellow  water  lily  leaf  ( .Vj/mpAflci 
advena)  and  apparently  young  were  associated  with  them;  and  similar 
capsules  were  also  found  on  Potamogeton  leaves.  \  capsule  i^as  also 
found  in  Bock  Harbor  at  Neutson's  Resort  (IV,  5)  also  in  a  swampy 
bayou  off  Tobin'e  Harbor  (IV,  3)  on  July  21.  Specimens  of 
the  leeches  themselves  were  taken  in  Siskowit  Bay  on  the  beach 
at  our  camp  (V,  1),  in  Siskowit  Lake  at  a  small  island  <m  the  south  shoi-e 
(V,  6)  and  at  the  swamp  nmrgin  of  a  pond  in  the  yellow  water-lily  and 
Potamogcton  rone  (V,  11).  Also  taken  in  1904  by  Rnthven  at  Tjake 
Desor  (VII,  '04),  Ruthven,  'OC,  p.  Bl. 

Geographic  Range.  Wisconsin;  Colorado  (Verrill,  "74,  p.  074);  Mich- 
igan. 

ILErCRENCES. 

1874,    A'errill,  A.  E.     Synopsis  of  the  North  American  Fresh-water 

r^eeches.     Rejmrt  V.  S.  Fish  Comm.      I't.    II,    1872-7^,    i>p. 

666fi.SD. 
ISflS.     Moore,  .7.  T.  ■  The  IxH>che8  of  the  V.  S.  National  Museum-  Proc, 

U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Vol.  21.  No.  1160,  pp,  r)43-.=ili;!. 
1901.     Moore,  .1.  r.    The  Hirundinea  of  Illinois.     Hull.  HI.  State  I,«b. 

Nat.  His.  Vol.  5.  pp.  479-547. 


,y  Google 


252  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    190S. 

lOOC.  HtmdiDea  and  Oligochaeta  Collected  in  the  Oi-eat  Lakes 
Region.     Bull.  U.  H.  Bureau  of  Fiaheries,  25,  pp.  153-171. 

1906.  Rnthveu,  A.  G.  An  Ecological  Survey  in  the  Porcupine  Mount- 
ains and  Isle  Royale,  Michigan.  Ann.  Rep.  1905,  Mich.  Oeol. 
Survey,  pp.  17-55. 

1902.  Ward,  H,  B.  Notes  on  the  Ijceches  of  Nebraska.    Report  Neb. 

State  Board  of  Agriculture  for  1901.     pp.  229-242. 

OLIGOCHAETA. 

Lumbricidae. 

Helodrilua  {Allolobophtna)  caliglnoaua  (Savigny),  neater  to  tffpicvtt 
than  to  H.  {A.)  C.  trapesoiilea  (.\nt.  Dug.).  These  earthworms  were 
taken  along  the  beach  near  the  lighthouse  at  Rock  Harbor  (I,  1)  July 
9,  and  in  a  "rock  clearing"  (I,  2)  on  July  13,  aud  also  at  the  outlet  of 
Siskowit  Lake  (V,  9)  on  August  15,  An  undetermined  Bpecies  was 
taken  in  the  shallow  humus  on  the  i-ock  beach  under  Cladonia  (Y,  2). 

OeograpJiic  Rangr.  Northern  Europe  and  North  America.  (Mlch- 
aelsen,  '00,  p.  483). 

Lnmbricus  terrestris  Mull.  A  lai^  specimen  was  taken  fi-om  the 
mouth  of  a  Garter  Snake ( 7'/tanmo/)/i is  sirtalis)  found  in  a  clearing  which 
was  formerly  the  location  of  the  Ransom  settlement  (II,  1).  The  snakes 
were  very  abundant  near  the  shore  in  the  grass.  It  is  not  improbable 
that  these  earthworms  were  introduced  at  this  locality.  Other  specimens, 
doubtfully  referred  to  this  species  came  from  the  balsam-spruce  forest 
<I,  3),  where  there  was  also  found  an  Enchytraid.     (G.  140). 

Qeographic  Range.  Europe;  New  England;  Illinois;  M^co.  (Mich- 
aelsen,  '00,  p.  512,  '03,  p.  144). 

REFEBEN'CES. 

1900.    Michaelsen,   W.    Oligochaeta.    Das   Tierreich.    10  Lieferung. 

1903.  Michaelsen,  W.    Die  geographische  Verbreitnng  der  Ollgochae- 

ten.     Berlin. 


Gammaridac, 

Eucrangonym  gracilis  (Smith).  Among  the  dark  colored  vegetablo 
debris  on  the  north  shore  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  this  species  was  found, 
July  29;  also  in  a  small  si  ream  flowing  from  a  tamarack-spruce  swamp 
<V,  5)  on  August  8,  in  the  Potamogrton  and  Nf/mphaea  adtxna  zone  of 
a  small  pond,  and  also  back  from  the  pond  in  small  footprint-like  pool» 
of  water  in  the  buck-bean  ( Maiyanthc»  trifoUiita)  and  sedge  zone.  (A. 
126,  128,  77,97). 

ByaUlla  knickcrhockcH  (Bate).  Taken  at  the  west  end  of  Rock  Har- 
bor in  the  bulrushes  about  the  mouth  of  a  small  stream  (III,  3)  on 
July  26,  (G.  159).  Other  s|)ecimens  were  taken  in  1904  at  I.ake  Desor 
('04,  VII)  on  -Vuguat  30;  and  on  water  plants  in  Washington  river  ("04. 
II)  on  August  18. 

Gammarus  Ihmiarus  Smilh.  Found  in  the  same  conditiopa  as  the 
above  species  (Til,  3)  and  in  abundant'.  i.,dOO»^?IC    • 


ECOLOGY   OP    ISLE  ROYALE. 


KEFEREXCE8. 


Smith.  S.  I.  Tbe  Crustacea  of  the  Fresh  Watei-s  of  the  United 
States.    Report  U.  8.  Fish  Comm.  1872-73.  Pt.  II,  pp.  63T-665. 

Weckel.  A.  L.  The  Freshwater  Amphipoda  of  North  America. 
Tro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  32,  pp.  25-58. 


Oniscidae. 

Ctjlisticiia  convexws  (PeG,').  One  specimen  of  this  sow-bug  was  taken 
at  camp  at  the Light-bonse  (1,7)  on  July  15.  (Q.99).  Another  specimen 
was  taken  July  2.  at  Mackinaw  Island,  Btraits  of  Mackinac,  Michigan. 
cf.  Richardson,  '05,  p.  609. 

Geographic  Range.  Jifapsachusetts ;  New  York;  Washington,  D.  C, 
Ohio;  Michigan;  Illinois;  New  Mexico;  also  Norway;  Sweden;  Pen- 
marii;  British  Isles;  Germany;  Bohemia;  Holland;  Belgium;  fiance 
Turkey.    This  Hi)ecie8  may  have  been  carried  to  Isle  Royale  by  man. 

REFERENCE. 

1905.    Richardson,  H.    A  Monograph  of  the  Isopods  of  North  Amer- 
ica.    Bnll.  No.  54,  U.  S.  Nat.  Museum. 


JiJtijiicolopkidae. 

RhjfticoJophiis  simplex  Bks.  This  mite  was  found  in  the  thin  soil  and 
debris  beneath  the  mats  of  bearben-y  in  a  dry  rock  clearing  (I,  2). 
Banks,  '04.  p.  30. 

Sydrachnidac. 

Limnochares  (xtcndcns  Say.  This  water  mite  was  taken  from  the 
water  in  the  sedge  zone  near  the  open  water  at  Sumner  Lake  (III,  51. 

Geographic  Range.  "It  occurs  in  northern  states,  from  Maine  to  Mich- 
igan, perhaps  farther  west."     (Banks,  in  letter). 

ARACHNIDA. 

Phalangiidac. 

Lacinitm  ohio€ii8i.i  Weed.  Only  three  specimens  of  this  Harvest  Spider 
were  taken,  one  was  found  under  stones  on  a  shallow  soil  among  the 
Jack  Pines  (I,  5)  in  a  very  hot  and  dry  locality;  the  second  from  the 
margin  of  the  sedge  none  about  a  pond  (V,  i  1) ,  and  the  third  from  under 
Cladonia  on  a  rocky  beach  with  a  ver>-  shallow  soil  (V,  2). 

Geographic  Range.    Ohio,  Illinois,  Weed,  '9.3,  p.  559;  Michigan. 

Dicti/itidac. 

Amaurohiiis  beiitictti  Blk,  A  few  specimens  were  tnken  under  dry 
hark  in  the  hardwoods  on  a  ridge  north  of  the  Club  House  at  Washington 
Harbor  (V.  '04) ;  also  from  under  the  bnrk  of  decayed  log  in  the  maples 


254  MICHIGAN    SURVBY,    190S. 

on  tlie  Deeor  Trail  (III,  '04),  In  the  moist  vpftetnble  mold  in  the  baleam- 
sprfice  forest  (I,  3)  and  under  tUe  bark  of  dead  trees  near  the  rock 
clearing  at  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3),  One  was  found  in  the 
mouth  of  a  Winter  Wren  phot  by  McCi-eary  (il,  1).  In  the  clearing  at 
Benson  Brook  (II,  1),  and  in  the  "i-ock  clearing"  at  camp  on  Siskowit 
Bay  (V,  3). 

Geographic  Range.  Canada,  Marx,  '00,  p.  510;  Porcupine  Mountains, 
Michigan. 

Drassidac. 

Dranmiit  negleetuit  Key8,=/>.  taccatuR,  Emerton.  '02,  p.  6.  One  speci- 
men was  taken  from  under  a  stone,  upon  the  jack  pine  ridge  where  the 
soil  was  very  shallow  and  the  heat  intense  during  the  middle  of  the  day 
(I,  5).  It  was  enclosed  in  a  rather  comi>ac-t  close  fitting  web.  Also  taken 
from  the  margin  of  a  pond  among  the  vegetation  (V.  11).  One  col- 
lected on  the  rock  ridge  north  of  the  light-house  (I,  2)  was  in  a  small 
pocket-like  web  about  2  by  2.5  cm.  in  a  cavity  under  a  flat  stone,  sur- 
rounded by  moist  soil,  at  a  depth  of  about  6  cm.  (Gleason). 

Geographic  Range.  New  Hampshire,  Slosson,  '98,  p.  247;  Michigan; 
Hist.  Columbia,  Marx,  '96a,  p.  154. 

Gnaphoita  hnimalis  Th.  The  only  specimen  (G.  22)  was  taken  in  a 
small  Cladonia  clearing  on  the  north  side  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (I,  2) 
near  the  beach. 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Anticosti  Island,  Quebec;  White  Mts.. 
above  tre^  limit,  N,  H, ;  Ithaca,  >'.  Y.;  Massachusetts;  Colorado; 
I^ggan,  Alberta,  cf.  Emerton,  '94.  p.  413;  Banks.  '9S,  pp.  417,  421; 
Marx,  '90,  p.  SOS.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  the  New  York  and  Massaehu- 
sets  localities  are  from  "boreal  islands" — swamps  or  cool  ravines,  and 
are  thus  outliers  from  the  principal  range  of  this  form  to  the  north- 
ward.   Alaska,  Marx,  '9([a,  p.  189. 

A<p-iopi(iac. 

Linyphi^t  phri/giana  Koch,  One  specimen  was  taken  at  our  camp  at 
the  Light-house   (1,  7).     Emerton,  '02,  p.  141. 

Geographic  Range.  Gaspe,  Quebec;  Mt.  Washington,  K.  H.;  Maine; 
Mass. ;  New  York ;  Connecticut ;  Colorado ;  -  Rocky  Mts.  of  Canada ; 
Calif.;  probably  all  over  the  United  States  and  Northern  Europe. 
Emerton,  '94,  p.  409,  and  '82,  p.  fi3;  Banks,  '95,  p.  425. 

Tetragnatlut  ejienaoi  Linn.  One  specimen  was  taken  on  the  window 
sill   at  the  Lighthouse   (I,   7).     Emerton,  '02,  201.  203. 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Mass.;  New  York,  Marx,  '90,  p.  552 
Anticosti  Island,  Quebec;  Saskatchewan  River;  \Vliite  Mts.,  N.  H.: 
Adirondack  Mts.,  N.  Y.;  Connecticut;  Dist.  Columbia;  Alaska;  Siberia, 
Lapland;  EuroiM.',  Emerton.  '04,  p.  40C;  Beaver  Island,  Mich.,  Pettitj 
'01.  p.  39;  Calif..  Collidge,  Civn.  Ent.  39,  p.  376.     Marx.  '96a,  p.  196. 

Epeira  patagiata  Clerck.  Taken  in  the  cassandra  zone  of  a  tamarack 
swamp  (V,  5).     Emerton,  '02,  p.  160.     Comstock,  '03,  p.  38. 

Geographic  Range.  Lapland;  Labrador;  New  Foundland;  New  Hamp- 
shire; New  York;  Pennsylvania;  Maryland;  District  of  Columbia; 
Vii^inia;  Illinois;  Alontreal.  Anticosti  Island.  Quebec;  Lake  of  tho 
Woods;   Saskatchewan   River;   Colorado:   British   Columbia;   Washing- 


EKIOLOGY   OP   ISLE  ROYALK.  255 

ton;  Oregon;  Sitka,  AiaBka;  Europe.  Enierton,  '04,  p.  404,  and  '84, 
p.  SO.'i;  SloBson.  '08,  p.  248;  Banks,  'S5,  pp.  417.  425.  Marx.  '96a,  p. 
104.  It  eeems  probable  that  the  most  southern  localities  of  this  species 
are  confined  to  some  restricted  habitat. 

Thommdae. 

Ebo  lalithorax  Keys.  One  specimen  was  taken  on  the  beach  near  the 
Lighthouse  (I.  1).     Emerfon.  '02,  p.  38. 

Geographic  Uange..  Mass.;  New  York,  Emerton,  '92,  p.  378;  Virginia; 
District  of  Columbia;   Maryland;   Utah.  Marx,  '90,  p.  558. 

Chibionidae. 

Cliibiona  riparia  Koch.  One  specimen  was  taken  in  the  vicinity  of 
TobiD  Harbor  (IV). 

Geographic  Range.  Maryland.  Marx.  '90,  p.  512;  New  Hampshire, 
8ioB80n.  '98,  p.  247;  Colorado,  Banks,  '95,  p.  422.  Dist,  Columbia, Marx. 
'9fi.  p.  155. 

Agelenidae, 

Tcgeimria  derhami  (Scop.).  Found  in  the  hardwood  forest  on  the 
ridge  east  of  the  tamarack  swamp  (V,  '04)  back  of  tbe  Club  House  at 
Washington  Harbor.     Emerton,  '02,  p.  06,  and  Marx,  '90,  p.  516. 

Geographic  Range.  I^brador;  Gaepe,  'Quebec;  "A  common  house 
spider  in  North  America  and  Europe,"  Emerton,  '94,  p.  411;  New  Hamp- 
shire, Slosson,  '98,  p.  247;  Colorado,  Banks,  '95,  p.  422;  Calif.,  Collidge, 
ran.  Ent.,  39,  p.  375.  Marx.  .'96a,  p.  190.  Dist.  Columbia,  Marx.  '96,  p, 
155.     Indiana,  Fox,  '93,  p.  268.     Probably  introduced   (Emerton). 

COflotes  sp.  A  s]>ecimen,  too  young  for  epeciflc  identification,  was 
taken  in  a  rock  clearing  (I,  2)  near  the  Lighthouse.  It  spins  a  pocket 
just  about  large  enough  for  its  body  beneath  loose  rocks. 

Oiciirina  arniata  Keys.  Where  the  soil  was  very  thin  on  the  jack 
pine  ridge  (I,  5)  one  specimen  was  taken  under  a  stone  and  a  female 
was  found  with  a  white  disk-like  cocoon  containing  a  lat^  number  of 
young  white  spiders.  A  specimen  belonging  to  this  genua  was  found 
along  the  trail  through  the  balsam  forest  in  leaf  mold  at  Siskowit  Bay 
IV.  4),  hnt  it  is  too  young  for  specific  determination.  It  spins  a  small 
pocket-like  web  beneath  flat  stones.  Pi-equents  the  dead  leaves  of 
forests  (Emerton). 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  New  Hampshire;  Penn. ;  District  of 
Columbia;  Virginia;  Lalie  Superior;  Minnesota;  IlliDois;  Colorado, 
Slarx,  '90.  p.  516 ;  '96«,  p.  190,  '92  ,p.  155. 

Pisauridae. 

Dolomcdca  idoneus  Montg.  This  large  spider  was  taken  at  the  log 
cabin  of  the  Washington  Club  at  T^ike  Desor  (VII.  '04)    (A.  139). 

Geographic  Range.  Lake  Champlain;  Conn.  (Emerton) ;  Penn.; 
Michigan. 


3y  Google 


256  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Lycoaidae. 

Lycosa  frondicoJa  Enier.  One  Hpecinien  was  taken  about  camp  at 
the  Light-house  (I,  7). 

Geographic  Range.  Conn.,  Marx,  '90,  p.  561 ;  New  Hampshire ; 
Slosson,  '98,  p.  248;  Penn.,  Stone,  '90,  p.  426;  Michigan;  l>ist.  Columbia, 
Marx,  '96,  p.  160.     Indiana,  Fox,  '93,  p.  269. 

]jycoaa  pratensia  Emer.  On  a  gravelly  beach  near  the  Light-houee  (I, 
1)  dragfiiDg  an  egg-caae  with  it,  in  the  rock  clearing  (I,  2)  and  on 
the  dry  Jack  Pine  Ridge  (I,  5)  were  the  situatioDB  in  which  this  species 
was  taken.     Emerton,  '02,  p.  69. 

Geographic  Range.  Anticosti.  Quebec ;  White  Mts.,  N.  H. ;  MasB. ;  Conn. ; 
Porcnpine  Mountains,  Mich.;  Lake  of  the  Woods;  I^aggan,  Alberta. 
Marx,  '90,  p.  563  and  Emerton,  '94,  p.  422. 

Lycosa  kochi  Keys.  This  was  an  abundant  species,  found  upon  the 
beach  near  the  Light-house  (I,  1)  ;  in  a  rock  clearing  adjoining  the 
beach  (I,  2)  (G,  71),  and  about  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  where 
one  had  been  captured  by  a  wasp.  One  with  an  egg-case  attache*! 
was  buried  under  half  an  inch  of  soil  on  a  rock  ridge  (I,  2).  Emerton, 
'02,  p.  74. 

Geograph\c  Range.  Mass.^  Conn.;  Penn.;  New  Jersey;  Bist. 
Columbia;  Michigan.  Emerton,  '^,  p.  486;  Stone,  '90,  p.  426;  Marx, 
'96.  p.  160. 

Pardosa  glacialis  Thor.  Found  quite  abundantly  running  about  over 
the  wet  sphagnnm  on  the  north  shore  of  Forbes  Lake  (II,  5) ;  man.r 
were  carrying  cocoons.  Others  were  secured  among  the  open  cassandra. 
tamarack  and  spruce  zone  about  a  pond  (V,  11).  Several  other  speci- 
mens were  taken  running  about  with  cocoons  in  the  Cladonia-Jitniper 
procumbena  and  bearberry  belt  on  a  sloping  rock  beach  (V,  2).  Emer- 
ton, '02,  p.  80. 

Geographic  Range.  Gi-eenland;  I^abrador;  White  Mts.,  K,  H.;  Massu- 
chusetts  (Emerton) ;  Conn. ;  Laggan,  Alberta ;  Emerton,  '94,  p. 
425;  New  Mexico,,  Psyche,  9,  p.  123,  Marx,  96a,  p.  197.  Found 
near  Ann  Arbor,  Mich,  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (Miss  Jean  Dawson), 
thus  clearly  indicating  the  boreal  island  character  of  such  a  habitat. 

Pardosa-  groenlandica  Thor.  This  was  apparently  the  most  common 
Kpeoies  of  spider  .collected.  Many  were  found  running  about  over  th« 
rocky,  gravelly  or  sandy  beaches  (I,  1)  with  cocoons  (G.  16,  38,  39,  30. 
46).  A  specimen  was  also  taken  on  the  open  heath  beach  on  the  south 
shore  near  Siskowit  Bay    (V,  2),     Emerton,  '02,  p.  79. 

Geographic  Range.  Greenland;  Labrador;  Anticosti  Island,  Quebec; 
White  Mrs,,  above  the  tree  limit  among  stones  (Emerton),  N,  H.;  Lake 
of  the  Woods;  Laggan,  Alberta;  Idaho;  Colorado;  Washington ;  Oregon ; 
Alaska.  Emerton,  '94,  pp.  400,  423;  Banks,  '98,  p.  16,  '95,  p.  430;  Marx, 
96a,  p.  197. 

Pardosa  stemalis  Th.^=hUeoJ<i  Em.  .411  the  specimens  of  this  specieH 
were  taken  in  open  areas  in  a  small  CJadonia  clearing  near  the  beach 
on  the  north  side  of  Conglomerate  Bay  (I,  2),  and  crawling  about  over 
the  nests  of  the  ant  Foi-mica  fusca  (V,  3)  ;  the  heath  beach  near  Sis- 
kowit Ba.v  (V,  2)  (A.  1071  and  in  the  open  area  about  our  camp  on 
Siskowit  Bay   (V,  3)    (G.  22ri).     Most  of  the  females  carried  cocoons. 


E(X)UX}Y   OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  257 

Geographic  Range.  ColoraiSo,  Banks,  '95,  p.  429.  Mt.  Washington, 
N.  H,    On  mosses  and  lic&ens  (Emerton). 

Pardoaa  lapidicina  Emer.  This  was  also  a  beaoh  spider  (I,  1)  (G. 
25,  38  (2)).  The  cocoous  are  very  large  Id  proportion  to  the  size  of 
the  female  and  are  flattened.  Emerton,  '02,  p.  78.  Lives  among  stones 
(Emerton). 

Geographic  Range.  Gaspe,  Qviel>ec ;  Massaehnsetts ;  Connecticut ; 
Pennsylvania.  Emerton,  '02,  p.  79,  states  that  this  species  "lii'es 
nmong  stones  in  the  hottest  and  drvest  places  from  Connecticut  to 
Labrador."     Man,  '90,  p.  565;  Stoned  '90,  p.  431. 

Pardoaa  tachypoda  Thor,  Found  running  over  the  bare  rocks  on  the 
top  of  the  jack  pine  ridge  (I,  5),  and  carrying  cocoons  (A.  21).  Emer- 
ton, '02,  p.  81. 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Mt.  Washington,  X.  H.;  Adirondack 
Mt8.,  N.  Y.;  Manitou,  Colo.   Emerton,  '85,  p.  493,  and  "94,  p.  401. 

Salticidac — AttiAae. 

Phdddippus  borealig  Bks.  One  specimen  of  this  jumping  spider  was 
found  ander  loose  stones  on  moist  earth  on  the  jack  pine  ridge  (I,  5). 

Geographic  Range.  New  Hampshire,  Banks,  '95,  p.  96,  Blosson,  '98, 
p.   249;  Maine;  Kew  York,  Banks   (in  letter). 

Habitat  Preferencea.  Reviewing  the  preceding  list  of  mites  and 
spiders  the  following  habitat  preferences  appear  to  be  Indicated: 

I.  Beach,  rocky,  bouldery  or  sandy. 
Lycoaa  pratensia  (also  dry  openings). 
LJ/coaa  kocki. 

Pardoaa  groenlandica. 

Pardoaa  aternalia   (also  dry  openings). 

Pardoaa  lapidicina. 

Pardoaa  gUicialis  (also  in  sphagnum  bogs). 

II.  Dry  openings,  rock  or  shallow  soil,  heath-juniper — Cladonia  jilaut 
society  represented  by  1,  S;  V,  2. 

Rhyncolophna  aimplcx. 

Laciniua  ohioejiaiH  (in  swamp  also). 

Onaphoaa  brumalts. 

Draaaua  ncglecUis   (in  swamp  also). 

Coeletea  sp. 

Cicurina  arcuata. 

Lycoaa  piatensts, 

Lycoaa  kochi  (also  beach). 

Pardoaa  atemaUs  (on  beach  also), 

Pardosa  tachypoda. 

Pardoaa  glacialis. 

Phidippua  borealia. 

III.  Wet  places — as  sphagnum  swamps, 
Epeira  patagiata  (cassandra  zone). 
Pardoaa  glacialia   (also  dry  openings). 
Draaaua  neglectua  (also  dry  openings). 
Luciniia  ohiocnaia  (also  dry  openings). 


rfbyGOOgIC 


25S      .  M[CHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

IV.  MeBophytio  forest— balsam -Bpruce  or  hardwoods. 
Amarobius  bi'itnetti. 

Tegenaria  derhami.   . 

V.  About  Camps. 
Linifphia  phrygiana. 
DolomeCeg  idoneua. 

From  tlie  above  tubiiltition  it  is  evident  tlint,  if  the  coUectionn  are 
representative,  moBt  of  tbe  spiders  prefer  the  open  places,  the  beach, 
rock  openings  or  oiien  parts  of  .swamps,  tbe  most  marked  preferenee 
Iteing  for  dry  opening.  It  thus  appears  that  as  the  forests  encroach 
upon  these  areas  the  spider  habitats  become  more  restricted.  The 
genus  Pardona  seems  quite  characteristic  of  the  open  places.  The 
general  Arachnid  successions  are  thus  suggested  in  outline  as  follows: 
from  beach  types  and  rock  openings  to  the  forest;  inland  from  the 
aquatic  types  and  swamp  forms  to  the  forest.  Particular  attention  is 
directed  to  the  following  habitats  which  deserve  special  attention  for 
their  bearing  ou  succession;  these  ai-e  the  bii-cb-a8i>en  border  and 
clearing  wciety,  and  ^chides  or  openings  in  the  forest  and  the  forested 
swamps.  An  examination  of  the  literature  clearly  shows  that  tbe 
habitats  of  spiders  have  received  bnt  little  attention.  This  is  an  ex- 
i-ellent  field  for  study  and  one  certain  to  give  interesting  and  valuable 
results. 

Geographir;  "Xotcs.  The  following  nine  species  of  Isle  Eoyale  spiders 
Lave  been  recorded  from  Labradoi*:  Gnaphoaa  brumalis,  Tetragnatha 
cxtcnaa,  Tegenaria  derhami.  Ciairiiia  arciiata,  Epeira  patagiata.  Par- 
dosa  glacialia  (also  Greenlaud),  Pardoaa  groenlandica  (also  Greenland), 
J'artloaa  lapUUciua  and  Pardosa  tachypoda. 

The  following  fourteen  species  Iiave  l>een  reported  from  New  Hamp- 
shire: DranmiJt  wylcctua,  Onaphosa  briftnalis,  Linyphia  pkrpgiana, 
Tetragnatha  cxtenaa,  Epeira  patagiata,  Clubiona  riparia,  Tegenaria  der- 
hami,  Dolunirdea  idonem,  Lyvom  fnntdieola,  Lyvoaa  p^-atenaia.  Par- 
doati  glacialia,  Pardoaa  gnynhiidk'a,  Pardosa  taehypoda  and  Phidippus 
borealia. 

The  following  s{>ecies  are  found  in  the  mountains  of  Colorado :  Onap- 
hosa  bni-malia,  Epeira  patagiata  and  Pardoaa  groeii  land  tea,  (Banks,  '95). 
They  also  occur  in  New  Ilainpxhire,  Labrador,  and  fre(iuent   oi«n  places. 


ukveuksceh. 
Banks.  N. 
l,s!i:t.    The    Spider    Fauna    of  the  rpi)er  Coviiga  Lake  Basin.     Pro. 

Acad.  Nat.  «ci.,  Philn.  1S!I2.  pp.  11-81. 
18i>4.    On  the  lo'cosidae  of  Colorado.    Jour.  X.  Y.  Ent.  Soc,  2,  pp. 

40-52. 
lS9u.     The  Arachnida  of  Colorado.     Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad,  of  Sciences, 

pp.  417-4:14. 
ISllii.     Some  New  Attidae.     Caw.  Ent.,  27,  pp.  !W-102. 
IS'JS.    Aracbuida  from  the  Malaspinn  Glacier,   Alaska.     Ent.   News. 

!l,   p.   1(). 
1904.     A  Treatise  on  the  Acarina  or  Mites.     Pro.  V.  9.  Nat.  Mus., 

28.  PI-.  1-114. 
1907.     .\  Catalogue  of  the  Acarina.  or  Mites,  of  the  Uaited  States. 

Pro.   U.  S.  Nat.  Mns.,  32,'pp.   595-625.  i,000<^[e 


KCOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  259 

C'hamberlin.  K.  V. 

1908,     Kevisiou  of  North  Aiiiericiin  Spidei-s  of  the  Fauiilv  Lvoonidao. 
Pro.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci.,  I'hila.,  lOOfci,  pp.   l58-ai8. 
Comstock,  J.  H. 

1903.  A  Classification  of  Xorth  American  t^piders.     Ithaca,  N.  Y. 
Eraerton,  J.  H. 

1882.    New  England  Spidera  of  the  Family  Therididae.    Trans.  Conn. 
Acad.  Arts  and  ScienceB,  6,  pp.  1-86. 

1884.  New  England  Spiders  of  the  Familv  Epeiridae.    Trans.  Conn. 

Acad.,   6,   pp.  295342. 

1885.  New  England  Lycoeidae.     Trans.  Conn,  Acad.,  6,  pp.  481-505. 
1888.     New  Kngland  Spiders  of  the  Family  Ciniflonidae.  Trans.  Conn. 

Acad.,   7,   pp.   443-458. 
1890.     New  England  Spiders  of  the  Families  I>ras9idae,  Agalenidae 
and  Djsderidae.     Trans.  Conn.  Acad.,  8,  pp.  166-206. 

1892.  New  England  Spiders  of  the  PamilT  Thomisidae.     Trans.  Conn. 

Acad.,  8,  pp.  3S9-381. 
1895.     Canadian  Spiders.     Trans.  Conn.  Acad.,  9,  pp.  400429. 
Marx,  G. 

1890.     Catalogue  of  the    Described    Araneae    of    Temperate    North 

America.     Pro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Miis.,  12,  pp.  497-594. 
1S96.     A  Revision  of  the  Araneae  of  the  District  of  Columbia.     Proi-. 

Ent.  Soc.  Wash.,  2,  pp.  148-ltil.     See  also,  ^.  pp.  199-201. 
1896a.     A  Contribution   to   the  Stndy  of   the   Spider  Fauna  of   the 

Arctic  Regions.    Proc,  Ent.  Soc.  Wash.,  2.  pp.  196-200. 
Montgomery,  T.  H. 

1904.  Descriptions  of  North  American  Araneae  of  Families  Lycosidae 

and  Pisauridae,  Pro,  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1904,  pp.'261-323. 
Pettit,  R,  H. 

1901.     Insect  and  Animal  Life  on  the  Upper  Peninsula  Experiment 
Station.     Bull.     186,  Mich.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  p.  28-42. 
I'iersig,  R, 

1901.     Hrdrachnidae.     Das  Tierreich.     13  Lieferung   pp.  1-272.     Ber- 
lin. 
Rutbven,  A.  G. 

1906.     Spiders  and  Insects  from  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and  Isle 
Royale,  Michigan.     Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Sur.  Mich,  for  1905,  pp. 
.     100-100. 
Stone,  W. 
1890.    Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey  Spiders  of  the  Familv  Licosidae, 
Pro,  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Pbil.,  1890,  pp.  420-434. 
SlosBon,  A.  T. 

1898.    List  of  Araneae  taken  in  Franconia,  New  Hampshire.     Jour. 
N.  Y.  Ent.  Soc,  6,  pp.  247-249. 
Weed,  C.  M. 

1893.  A  Descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  Harvest  Spiders  (Phalangiidae) 

of  Ohio.     Pro.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  16,  pp.  543-563. 

Useful  Bibtiograpbies. 
Banks,  N. 

1900.     A  liist  of  Works  on  North  American  Entomologj.  pp.  77-83. 
Bull.  24,  r.  S.  Div.  of  Ent.  V.  S.  Dept.  of  Agriculture>o|c 


260  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

XJndenvood,  L.  M. 
1887.     The  Progress  of  Axaclmology  in  America.     Amer.  Nat.  21,  pp. 
963-975. 


Entomobryidac. 

Tomofvnis  nigor  Beurl.  Specimeos  of  this  spriag-tail  (G.  140)  were 
ttikCD  J«I,v  24,  in  the  balsam -spruce  forest  (I,  3). 

This  species  has  an  extensive  range;  through  Europe,  Siberia.  Alaska, 
California,  Minnesota,  Isle  Eovale,  Michigan,  cf.  Folsom,  1902,  Proc. 
Wash.   Acad.   Sciences.   IV.  p.  97;  Guthrie,  1903,    The    Collembola    of 


Minnesota,  p. 


HEMIPTERA. 


Coriia  sp.  N.vmphs  were  taken  in  the  rock  pools  on  the  beach  (I,  1> 
(G.  7.1,  74.  7n) ;  in  Rummer  Lake  {III.  5),  (G.  175)  ;  and  in  the  pond 
in  a  tamarack -spruce  s\ram]>s  (V,  11)    (120.  A). 

Belo8tomatidae. 

Bclostoma  sp.  Nvmphs,  but  no  adults,  were  secured  at  Sumner  Lake 
(III,  5)  (77  A.) ;  and  in  the  pond  in  the  tamarack-spruce  swamp  (V, 
11)    (126  A)   on  August  16. 

Saldidae. 

Salda  ligata  Say.  On  August  10  these  shore  bugs  were  running  about 
in  numbers  on  the  bare  rock  beach,  just  beyond  the  reach  of  flie  waves, 
on  the  south  shore  near  the  mouth  of  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  2)  (106  A). 
"Common  over  eastern  United  States.  These  specimens  are  darker 
than  most  in  my  collection  but  seem  to  agree  very  perfectly  with  de~ 
Bcriptions  of  Say  and  Uhler."     H.  Osborn. 

Eydrohat'tdae. 

Gerris  remigis  Say.  This  member  of  the  surface  film  fauna  was  found 
ou  July  14  on  the  bulrush  zone  and  delta  near  the  bead  of  Rock  Harbor 
(III.  3);  in  rock  pools  at  Scovill  Point  on  July  19  (33  A),  where 
it  was  very  abundant  and  represented  by  unwinged  adults  and  nymphs; 
in  rock  pools  on  the  south  shore  near  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  2)  on  August 
9  and  14  by  adults  and  nymphs  (103  A.  117  A) ;  and  on  LakeDesor  (VI [. 
04)  on  .\ugu8t  20  (139  A)  by  both  young  and  adults. 

Oerris  mfoscvMlattis  Latr.  This  species  of  water  strider,  in  com- 
jiauy  with  O.  remigis.  was  taken  from  rock  i)ooIb  at  Scovill  Point  (IV, 
I)  on  July  19  (33  A),  The  specimens  are  winged.  Also  from  the  rock 
licach  pools  on  the  south  shore  (V,  2)  on  August  14  (117,  A),  and  from 
a  pond  surrounded  bv  a  tamarack-spruce  bog  (V,  11)  on  August  16 
(126  A>. 

Gerris  marginaitiK  Say.  This  third  species  of  strider  was  found  only 
at  Sumner  Lake  (111.  5)  ou  July  28  (G.  175),  and  was  represented  by 
iivmphs  and  adults.  ,  --  i 


ECOLOGY    OP    ISLE   ROYALB.  261 

Oerria  8p?  Nymphs  were  taken  io  a  rock  pool  at  Tobin  Harbor 
tlV,  2)  on  July  19  (30  A),  and  oq  a  small  stretim  at  the  head  «f  a 
bog  (V,  5)  near  Siskowit  Lake  {95  A). 


Aradus  abbas  Berg.  One  Hpecimen  was  taken  on  August  7  about 
ramp  on  Siskowit  Bay   (V,  3). 

Lygaeidae. 

],ygva  pratensis  L,  Taken  about  camp  at  the  Light-houee  (I,  7) 
July  11.  "One  of  the  dark  colored  yarieticB.  The  speciea  has  a  wide 
distribution  in  both  Europe  and  North  America."     H.  Oeborn. 

Pamera  sp.  Also  taken  about  camp  at  the  Light-house  (L  7)  on  July 
2S.    "Apparently  an  undcscribed  species."   H.  Osborn.     (136  A). 

Cicadidae. 

Tibicem  rimoaa  Say.  var.  This  cicada  was  abundant  upon  the  hot 
jatk  pine  ridge  (I,  5)  and  among  the  birches  at  its  base.  Adult 
specimens  and  a  nymph  skin  were  taken  ou  July  8  (O.  28),  10  (G.  44) 
and  17  (G.  108)  ;  at  Neutson'M  resort  (IV.  5)  ou'jnly  lil  (44.  A)  ;  in  the 
i-ock  clearings  (I,  2)  on  July  13  (G,  08)  ;  on  the  rock  ridges  on  the 
MeCai^oe  trail  (II,  3)  on  July  25  (G.  147)*;  in  the  clearing  about  the 
Light-house  (I,  7)  on  July  S;  and  near  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  6) 
on  July  17  (G.  111).  The  sjiecies  thus  showed  a  decided  pi-eference  for 
the  open  dry  situations.  Prof.  H.  Osborn  writes  concerning  the  speci- 
mens sent  to  him  for  determination ;  "These  specimens  agree  closely  with 
a  variety  of  rhnosa  occuiTing  at  Ft.  Bridger,  Wyoming." 

Concerning  the  habits  of  this  sjiecies  Osborn  ('HO,  p.  190)  states  that 
in  northwestern  Iowa  it  occurs  "on  prairie  land  remote  from  timber, 
thus  indicating  a  habit  quite  different  from  the  other  members  of  the 
genus."  The  occnrrence  ot  this  gjiecies  in  the  more  or  less  open  place 
upon  Isle  Royale  is  thus  in  harmony  with  its  prairie  habits  and  shows 
that  these  rock  openiugs  may  contain  not  only  forms  of  northern  faunal 
affinities  but  also  those  from  the  western  plains.  The  occurrence  of 
these  western  species  in  open  places  in  the  northern  forest  region  is 
aualt^ous  to  the  soiithei-n  prairie  sjwcies  found  in  dry  or  sandy  places 
in   the  south-eastern  forests. 

JaHsideuc. 

RnthoKcopiis  pitivi  Pn>v.  This  leaf  hopjter  was  taken  from  a  rock  pool 
uiion  a  small  island  in  Tohin  Harbor  (IV.  2|  on  July  19. 


Ortheaia  ap.     This  bark  louse  was  taken  July  1!).  at   S<'ovill   I'li 
(IV,  1).     '"rndescribed  so  far  as  I  can  discoypr."  H.  ttsborn. 


3y  Google 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 


RErEREXCE3. 


Gillette,  C.  P.,  and  Haker.  F.  0. 

1895.  The  Hemiptera   of   Colorado.     Bull.   31.     Tech.   Sep.   I.  Colo. 

Agr.  Exp.  StatioD. 
Osborn,  H, 

1896,  Observations  on  the  Cicadidae  of  Iowa.     Proc.  Iowa  Acad,  of 

Sciences  189"),  III,  pp.  194-2<Kl. 
.1900.     Remarks  on  the  Ileniipteroua  Fauna  of  Ohio,  with  a  Ppelini- 
inary  Kecord  of  Species.    Eighth  Sep.  Oliio  State  Acad.  Bci.. 
pp.  60-79. 
1901.     Additions  to  the  List  of  Ohio  Hemiptera,  ?finth  Rep.   Ohio 
Acad.  Sci..  pp.  3(»-37. 

1904.  A  Ftirther  Confribntion    to  the  Hemipteroiis    Fauna  of  Ohio. 

Ohio  Naturalist,  4,  pp.  99-103. 
Torre  Bueno,  J.  R.  de  la 

1905.  A   List  of   Cei-tain  Families  of  Hemiptera  Occurring  uititiii 

Sereutv  Miles  of  Sew  York.     Jour.  !N.  Y.  Ent.  Soc.,  13,  jip. 
29-47,  '{also,  12,  pp.  251-253). 
VanDuzee.  E.  P. 

1894.     A  List  of  the  Hemiptera  of  Buffalo  and  Viciuitv.     Bull.  Buff. 
Soc.  Nat.  Sci.,  5,  pp.  167-204. 

XEl-ROPTEIt.V. 

Myrmeleon  tdae. 

Myrniclcott  hmtuiriiJatiis  DeG.  Aut-lion.  An  nppaientiv  full  gi-own 
ant-lion  was  taken  on  one  of  the  bare  burued  over  ridges  on  the  McCai^oe 
Trail  (II,  3),  on  July  23.  None  of  the  adult  insects  were  seeu  and  this 
was  the  only  specimen  and  funnel  obsen'ed. 

Geographic  Range.  Maine;  Keene,  N,  H.;  Isle  Royale,  Mich.;  Illinois; 
Washington,  D.  C;  North  Carolina;  Texas;  Colo.;  Oregon;  Calif,  cf. 
Psyche,  9,  p.  95. 

ODONATA — DRAGON  f  LIES. 

The  Dragonfly  collection  seciii-ed  by  the  party  is  an  interesting  one  in 
several  respects  as  will  be  seen  by  reference  to  the  geographic  distribu- 
tion of  the  varions  species.  MokI  of  the  specimens  were  collected  by 
H.  A.  Gleason;  the  writer  and  other  nieuibera  of  the  party  also  secured 
some.  Vi'e  are  indebted  to  Mr.  E.  B.  ^Villiamson  of  Bluffton,  Ind- 
iana, for  the  determination  of  the  aeries. 

AgiioiUdac. 

Lcatnn  utigtiinilntw*  Hag.  A  single  female,  apparently  of  this  species 
was  found  in  the  clearing  at  Neutson's  resort  (IV,  5)  July  21. 

Geographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia;  Quebec;  Maine;  Mass.;  Rhode  Is- 
land; New  York;  Penn.;  New  Jei-sey;  Ohio;  Indiana;  Tenn, ;  Illinois; 
Iowa;  Missouri;  Wyoming;  Montaua;  California;  Corunna,  Ann  Arbor, 
Porcupine  Mts.,  Mich. 

Xehalvnnia  irene  Hag.  Two  males  of  this  species  were  found  in  or 
near  a  tamarack-spnice-spiiagnum  swamp   (I,  6)  on  July  10.     This  is  a 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  263 

swamp-land  species  which  iisimll.v  flieb  slowly  among  the  low  voRPtaHon. 

Geographic  Range.  Ontario;  Maine;  New  Hampshire;  Slaxs. ;  New 
-lersey;  Florida;  New  York;  Teiin. ;  Ohio;  Indiana;  Illinois;  Iowa;  Wis- 
consin; South  Dakota;  Ann  Arbor  (Kavunangh  I/ake,  VII,  -i,  Wik 
Porcupine  Mts,,  Mich. 

Enallagma  ej^ulans  Hag.  One  male  was  taken  flying  over  the  water 
near  the  boat  landing  at  Lake  Hemr  (VII.  '04)  on  .Viigiist  2(1. 

Qeographic  Range.  Ontario;  Maine;  New  York;  I'enn,;  Maryland: 
District  of  Columbia;  Virginia;  Ohio;  Indiana;  Illinois;  Missouri: 
Texas;  Comnnn,  Huron  Kii'ei',  near  Portage  Lake,  Aug.  Ill,  '03,  Wash- 
tenaw Co.,   Kavanangh   Lake,  July   10.  '03,  Chelsea,   Mich. 

Enallagma  hageni  Walsh.  This  species  was  quite  abundant  about  the 
sedge  mat^iu  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  where  eight  males  were  taken 
between  July  24  and  2!).  Three  other  males  were  taken  on  August  16 
in  the  cassandra  and  sedge  zone  aliout  a  pond  neiir  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  11). 

Geographic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Quebec;  Ontario;  Maine;  New 
Hampshire;  Mass.;  New  York;  Delaware;  Maryland;  Ohio;  Indiana; 
Illinois;  Iowa;  Missouri;  Wisconsin;  South  Dakota;  (July  10,  '03,  Kav- 
anangh Lake)  Chelsea,  Porcupine  Mts.,  Mich. 

Oomphidac. 

Ophiogoinpkiis  cotiibriniif  Selya.  One  female  was  taken,  .Vugust  7, 
flying  low,  at  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Ijake  (V,  !>).  This  stream  falls  rap- 
idly providing  a  rapid  water  habitat  which  furnishes  favorable  condi- 
tions for  most  Uomphids.  The  streams  on  the  island  are  small  and  How 
through  much  swamp  land  so  that  there  is  but  a  slight  development  of 
the  rapid  water  habitat. 

Geographic  Range.    Hudson  Bay;  Quebec;  Maine;  New  Hampshin', 

Aesehnidnr. 

Anax  jimins  Drury.     Nymphs  only  were  taken.    Cf.  Needham  i-epoit. 

Oeographic  Range.  Central  America  northward  to  Newfoundland  and 
Alaska;  Bermudas;  West  Indies;  Hawaiian  Islands;  Tahati;  China; 
Kamtsehatka.  This  is  a  very  extensive  range,  cpiite  exceptional  among 
Dragonflies,  and  perhajts  only  snrimssed  by  the  cosmopolitan  Pantala 
flavescetui. 

Aeschna  sitchensiit  Hag.  One  female  was  taken  along  the  i-oad  through 
the  hardwoods  on  the  Desor  trail  (III.  '04)  on  August  21.  (Psyche, 
1890,  p.  35.^). 

Qeographic  Range.  Sitka.  Alaska ;  Saskatchewan ;  Newfoundland ; 
(Williamson,  '06,  p.  135);  Pequaming.  Michigan,  Calvert,  Knt.  News. 
15,  p.  288. 

Aeschna  species?  The  remaiaing  Aiwchnids  cannot  be  satisfactorily 
determined  at  present.  A  male  was  taken  in  the  sedge  and  cassandra 
zone  bordering  a  pond  (^',11)  on  .\ugnst  10.  A  male,  which  had  been 
jtatrolling  a  small  stream  flowing  from  a  tamai-ack  swamp  (V,  5),  was 
taken  on  August  8,  -\  teiieral  female  was  taken  .Inly  13  on  a  i*ock  ridge 
(1,2)  and  in  the  clearing  about  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,,"?)  ,[231|; 
one  male  was  taken  .\Hgust  15.  and  a  female  on  August  12,  Kighf  males 
were  taken  at  Snmner  Lake  (III,  51  between  July  20  and  2it.  A  female 
was  taken  in  a  rwk  clearing  near  the  lighthouse  (I,  2)  on  July  13  ('*{)-)- 


264  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

1'i'i-c-c'  nymphs  skins  were  found  nt  tlie  margin  of  the  sedge  zone  of 
Stunner  I^ake  (III,  5).  ronipare  Walker,  'OS,  who  hds  examioed  tlie 
Me  Royale  Bpecitnens. 

CorduUdae. 

Tetragoneuria  apinigera  Selys,  One  specimen  wag  captured  in  a  low 
rock  opening  at  the  shore,  near  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (near  III,  3) 
OD  July  14;  and  a  female  was  taken  floating  npon  the  water  in  the 
west  cove  at  the  head  of  the  Harbor  (III,  6).  Tbe  third  Bpecimeu,  a 
female,  was  secured  from  n  rock  ridge  near  the  head  of  the  Harbor 
near  III,  2,  July  21.     (132.) 

Geographic  Range.  Maine;  Sew  Hampshire;  Mass.;  tieorgia;  Detroit, 
.Mich,;  ^'aucouver  Island. 

CorduUa  ahurtleffi  ScuAd=a€nca  I/.  Three  specimens,  two  males  and 
one  female,  were  taken  at  the  edge  of  the  water  in  the  sedge  zone  on 
llie  north  side  of  8umner  Lake  (III,  5)   on  July  2<.t.     (184.  78A.) 

Olographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia;  Newfoundland;  Ontario;  Maine: 
New  Hampshire;  Penn. ;  Saskatchewan;  Fort  Resolution;  Mackenzie; 
British  Columbia;  Alaska;  Northern  Asia;  Europe;  Algeria. 

Somatochlora  elongata  minw  Calvert.  Only  one  male  of  this  interest- 
ing species  was  found,  it  was  flying  about  the  mouth  of  a  small 
stream  at  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  3)  (165)  on  Julv  26.  Cf. 
<;:>lvert,  Ent.  News  1898.  !l,  p.  87. 

Oeograph ic  Range.  Quebec ;  Maine ;  New  Hampshire ;  Michigan ; 
Wyoming. 

LihelUiUdae. 

Celithemia  eponina  Hagen.   Nymphs  only  taken.   Cf.  Needham  report. 

(I'eographic  Range.  United  States  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  and 
southern  Canada  (Ontario). 

Leucorhinia  hudi*onica  Selys.  Three  females  were  taken,  in  the  sedge 
zone  of  a  tamarack  swamp  (V,  5)  on  August  8.  (i)6A).  Sympctrum 
'•htrusum  occuri-e<i  abundantly  iu  the  siime  locality. 

Ocographic  Range.  Quebec;  Nova  Scotia;  New  Brunswick;  New- 
foundland; Maine;  New  Hampshire;  Mass.;  Lake  Winnipeg;  Sask- 
atchewan Kiver;  Fort  Resolution.  Mackenzie;  Alberta;  British  Colum- 
bia; Alaska. 

Leucorhinia  proxitna  Calvert.  About  the  margins  of  Sumner  I>ake 
(III,  5)  these  dragonflies  were  very  abundant  on  July  18,  24,  and 
29,  and  19  males  and  5  females  were  taken  in  the  sedge  zone.  About  the 
lake  this  zone  was  quite  extensive,  as  shown  by  the  photogi-aphs.  Most 
:if  our  collecting  of  insects  was  done  at  the  northeast  end  where,  with 
the  aid  of  boots,  an  excellent  swamp  collecting  ground  was  found.  The 
ground  was  very  wet,  and  spongy,  and  treacherous  in  places,  on  account 
<)f  these  soft  spots.  This  species  also  occurred  abundantly  about  the 
margins  of  a  similar  pond  near  Siskowit  Bay  (V.  11),  where  it  was 
iisMicinted  wilh  Eiiallagnia  hoydii.  Acxrhiia  and  ygiiiiK'triim  rubivuii- 
tliilitm  obtruHum.  There  is  an  interesting  rorrelatiou  lietween  the  geo- 
^i'ii[>hic  range  of  this  genus  and  of  its  close  ally  ^ti/nipetriim  (both  are 
primarily  bcireal.  throughout  both  hemispheres)  and  the  geographic  de- 
vi'liipiiHiil  (if  those  lijibitat  conditions  which  they  prefer. 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE  ROyALE.  265 

Oeographic  Range.  Xova  Rcotia;  Ontario;  Maine;  New  Hampshire; 
Maee.;  Quebec;  Vancouver  Island;  Kalso,  British  Columbia;  Wanhing- 
ton. 

Lucorhinia  inta^ia  Uagen.  Symphs  onlv  taken.     Ct.  Needham  report. 

Oeographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia;  Maine;  New  Hampshire;  Maaaa- 
chusetts;  New  York;  New  Jersey;  Penn, ;  Ohio;  Michigan;  Ontario; 
Indiana;  Illinois;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Bouth  Dakota;  Nevada;  Wafhin;!:- 
ton. 

Sympctrum  ruhictindithtm  obtrtt»um  (Hag.).  In  the  open  area  about 
the  camp  on  Si^owit  Bay  (V,  3)  this  species  was  \'ery  abundant.  Eight 
-males  and  eight  females  were  collected  on  August  11  and  12.  A  male 
was  also  taken  near  the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay  (VIII,  '04)  on  August 
13 ;  and  3  mates  and  1  female  were  taken  in  the  sedge  zone  of  a  tamarack 
swamp  (V,  5)  on  August  8.  l^e  nrnnber  of  specimens  taken  is  not  a 
fair  index  of  the  abundance  of  this  species  as  an  effort  was  made  only 
to  secure  representative  forms.  Tlie  open  areas  where  the  heath  and 
jiinipercladon:a  plant  MKriety  were  the  representative  types  of  vegeta- 
tion, seemed  to  afford  feeding  grounds  for  this  species  and  they  were 
very  abundant  in  such  places.  It  is  in  just  such  situations  that  the 
small  forms  of  insect  life  are  most  abundantly  seen  on  the  wing. 

Geographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia;  Ontario;  Maine;  New  Hampshire; 
Mass.;  Penn.;  New  Jersey;  North  Carolina;  New  York;  Ohio;  Indiana; 
Illinois;  Wisconsin;  Colorado;  British  Columbia;  Washington;  Coruona, 
Ann  Arbor,  Porcupine  Mts.,  Tsle  Royale.  Mich. 

lAbelliila  quadrimaculata  L.  A  single  male  specimen  represents  this 
species.  It  was  collected  about  the  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7)  on  Julv 
25.     (153). 

Oeographic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Nova  Scotia;  Ontario;  Maine; 
New  Hampshire;  Mass.;  New  York;  Quebec;  New  Jersey;  Penn.;  Ohio; 
Indiana;  Illinois;  Wisconsin;  Wyoming;  Montana;  Idaho;  Utah;  Wash- 
ington; British  Columbia;  Alaska;  Northern  and  Central  Asia;  Northern 
Europe;  Asia  Minor;  Corunna,  Isle  Boyale,  Mich. 

Oeographic  Notes.  Attention  is  called  to  the  geographic  range  of  the 
following  species : 

1.  Opkiogomphua  coluhrinua.  Hudson  Bay;  Quebec;  Maine  and  New 
Hampshire. 

2  Aegchna  sttcherMis.  Sitka,  Alaska;  Saskatchewan;  Michigan; 
Newfoundland. 

3.  Somat.  e.  minor.    Maine;  Quebec;  New  Hampshire;  Wyoming. 

4.  CorduHa  sckurtle/fi  i=^€n€a  L.)  Newfoundland;  Nova  Scotia; 
New  Hampshire;  Mackenzie;  British  Columbia  and  Alaska;  Northern 
Asia;  Europe;  Algeria. 

r».     Tetra.  spinigera.    Maine;  Geor>[ia;  Mich.;  Vancouver  Island. 

6.  L€titx>r.  hudionica.  Newfoundland;  Nova  Scotia;  west  to  Winni- 
peg, the  Mackenzie  basin  and  British  Columbia. 

7.  Libel,  qttadrimanilata.  Newfoundland  and  Alaska;  New  Jer- 
sey; northwestward  to  Wyoming;  Washington;  British  Columbia; 
Northern  Europe;  Asia. 

Prom  the  above  it  is  seen  that  seven  of  the  Isle  Royale  draftonflies  are 
decidedly  representative  of  the  region  from  Labrador  to  Alaska  (wjd> 


2M  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

more  especially  of  the  eastern  part  of  this  area),  largely  aorth  of  the 
17.  S,  boundar.Y.  There  Ib  also  a  marked  tranacontinental  tendency.  As 
these  forms  do  not  now  occur  abundantly  even  in  the  mountain  regions 
of  the  went,  it  if  likely  that  many  have  spread  northweat  in  post- 
Glacial  times  vith  the  Xortheastem  Biota,  rather  than  from  the  reipons 
south  of  the  western  glaciated  area  with  its  relatively  arid  climate. 

Of  these  seven  species  the  following  four:  Cordvlin  aenea  (C.  schurt- 
leffi),  Leucorhitm-  hudaonica  and  Libellvta  quadrimaculata,  are  Asiatic 
(Northern)  and  European — thus  circumpolar.  Ab  to  the  geographic 
origin  of  these  forms  very  little  can  be  said,  as  the  taxonomic  relations  of 
the  Odonata,  from  a  geographic  and  ecologic  standpoint,  has  never  been 
attempted.  Attention,  however,  should  be  called  to  the  fact  that  so  far 
as  known,  these  are  all  forms  that  frequent  quiet  waters. 

There  is  an  interesting  correlation  between  the  geographic  range  of 
the  genera  Lmi^orMnia  and  Stfinpetnim  and  the  geographic  development 
of  the  habitat  conditions  which  they  frequent.  Both  are  circumpolar 
in  the  subarctic  r^ion.  This  same  area  (especially  In  America)  also 
furnishes  the  greatest  almost  continuoug  tract  of  lake,  pond  and  swamp 
conditions  found  upon  the  earth.  In  North  America  at  least,  the  haae 
leveling  of  the  region. 'its  imperfect  di-ninage  due  to  glaciation,  and  its 
cool  climate  are  the  important  or  dominant  factors  in  the  production 
of  this  extensive  area  of  favorable  habitats  for  these  genera.  It  is  very 
probable  that  many  animals,  dependent  upon  such  conditions,  will  show 
a  similar  correlation. 

The  powerful  flight  of  the  larger  species  suggests  that  the  present 
distribution  of  the  above  listed  circumpolar  species  may  have  taken 
place  under  conditions  similar  to  those  which  exist  today.  Thus 
the  habitat  preferences  and  the  present  geographic  distributioD  of  the 
species  all  suggest  a  faiinal  interchange  via  Alaska  and  Siberia.  Such 
a  change  might  have  occurred  during  Glacial,  inter-Glacial  or  post-Gla- 
rial  times,  but  at  present  we  have  no  criteria  or  evidence  by  which  to 
determine  such  relations. 

The  migratory  habits  of  certain  species  of  dragonflies  also  has  a 
direct  bearing  upon  the  extensive  range  of  certain  species.  One  Isle 
Royale  species,  IJbelluIa  quadrimaailata,  has  long  been  known  to  mi- 
grate (cf.  Dragon  Flies  and  Mosquitoes,  1890,  p.  161). 

REFERENCES. 

Calvert,  P.  P. 

1893.     Catalogue  of  the  Odonata-Dragonflies  of  the  Vicinity  of  Phil- 
adelphia, with  an  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  this  Group 
of  Insects.    Trans.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  20,  pp.  152a-272. 
1905.    The  Fauna  of  Xew  England.    No.  6.    List  of  Odonata.     Occ. 
Papers  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  His,  VII,  pp.  1-43. 
Cnrrie,  B.  P. 
1901.    The    Odonata    (Alaska    Harriman    Expedition).    Pro.    Wash. 

Acad.  Sci..  3,  pp.  217-223. 
1905,     Dragonflies  from  the  Kootenay  District  of  British    Columbia. 
Proc.  Ent.  Soc.  Wash.,  7,  pp.  16-20, 


,dbyGoo<^Ie 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROTALE.  267 

Hagen,  H.  A. 

1875.     SynopsiB  of  the  Odonata  of  America.     Pro.  Boat   8oc.  Nat. 
Hist.,  18,  pp.  20-96. 
Harvey,  P.  L. 

1898.  ContributiotiB  to  tlie  Odonata  of  Maine.     Ent.   News.,   Ill,   9, 

pp.  59-88. 
Osburn,  B.  C. 

1906.    The  Odonata  of  Brttisb  Columbia.    Ent.  News,  16,  pp.  184-196. 
Kellicott,  D.  S. 

1894.    List  of  the  Dragonflies  of  Coruoaa,  Michigan.    Can.  Ent.,  26, 
pp.  345-347. 

1899.  The  Odonata  of  Ohio.     Spec.  Paper  Ohio  Acad.  Sd.,  No.  2, 

pp.  1-114. 
Needham,  J.  G. 

1901.     Aquatic  Insects  in   the   Adirondacka.     Bxill.  47,  N.  T.   State 

Museum,  pp.  429-540. 
1903.    Life  Histories  of  Odonata,  sub-order  Zygoptera.     Bull.  68,  N. 
Y.  State  Museum,  pp.  218-276. 
Needham,  J.  G.  and  Hart,  C.  A. 

1901.     The  Dragonflies    (Odonata)    of    Illinois.     Part    I,    Bull.    III. 
State  Lab.  Nat.  His.,  6,  pp.  1-94. 
Walker,  E.  M. 

1906.  A  First  List  of  Ontario  Odonata.     Can.  Ent.,  38,  pp.  106-110, 

149-154. 

1907.  A  New  Somatochlora,  with  a  Note  on  the  Species  known  from 

Ontario.     Can.  Ent,.  39,  pp.  69-74. 

1908.  A  Key  to  the  North  American  Species  of  Aeechna  found  North 

of  Jlexito.    Can.  Ent.,  40,  pp.  377-391. 
"Williamson,  E.  B.' 

1900.  The  Dragonflies  of  Indiana.     24th  Ann.  Rep.  Dept  of  Geol. 

and  Nat.  Resources  of  Indiana,  pp.  229-333. 

1906.  Dragonflies    (Odonata)    Collected    by    Dr.  D.  A.  Atkinson  in 

Newfoundland,  with  Notes  on  some  Species  of  Somatochlora. 
Entom.  News,  17,  pp.  133-139. 

1907.  A  Collecting  Ti-ip  North  of  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Ontario.     Ohio 

Naturalist,  7,  pp.  129-148. 
ig07a.    List  of  Dragonflies  of  Canada.    Ohio  Naturalist,  7,  pp.  148- 
150. 

LBPIDOPTBKA, 


Cameadeg  Itostonicnsis  Qrt. 
Bemaris  definia  Bdv. 
Hetnaria  tlnifsbe  Fabr. 
Papitio  glaitcua  turnua  L. 
Colias  philodice  Godt. 
Argynnia  cyprig  Edw, 
Argynnia  atlantia  EWw. 
Brenthig  fm;/rina  Cramer. 

Brenthis  heUona  Fabr.  ^--  i 

.    Phyciodea  tharos  Dm.  oigtizedbyLjOOglC 


S68  MICHIGAN    BURTBT,    1908. 

11.  Eufffynia  j-album  Bd, — Lee. 

12.  Euvanessa  antiopa  L. 

13.  Aglaig  milberti  Godt, 

14.  Tatwssa  atalanta  L. 

15.  Vanessa  hiintcri  Fabr. 

16.  Vanessa  cardiii  L. 

17.  BaSilarchia  arthemia   Dm. 
J8.  Anosic  plcxippus  L. 

19.  Epidemia  dorciix  Kby. 

20.  Epidemia  cpixanthe  Bd, — Lee. 

21.  Cu-pido  saepiolus  Bd< 

22.  Amblyscirtes  vialis  Edw. 

Noctuidae. 

Cameades  iostoniensis  Qrt.  A  moth  of  this  species  was  taken  aboat 
camp  on  BiBkowit  Bay  (V.  -t)  on  August  9  (G.  222). 

Qeographic  Range,  "Middle,  Bastem  and  Xortliern  States",  Massa- 
chusetts; New  York;  Michigan;  Canada. 

Sphingidae. 

Bemarit  definis  Bdv.  One  specimen  taken  in  the  clearing  about  the 
camp  {I,  7)  on  July  8  (G.  36). 

Oeographic  Range.  "Canada,  Hudson  Bay  Territory,  Maine  to  Georgia, 
westward  to  Mifsonri.  Iowa"     (Smithi.     Michigan. 

Hemaris  tkyshe  Fabr.  One  specimen  in  the  open  abont  the  camp  on 
Siakowit  Bay  (V,  3)   on  August  3   (G.  195).     Food  plant  Viburnum. 

Geographic  Range.  "Ijabrador,  Canada ;  southward  to  Florida ;  west- 
ward to  the  Mississippi"  (Smith);  Michigan. 

Papilionidae. 

Papilio  glaiictis  tumtis  L.  Tumns  ButterJiy.  Nine  specimens  were 
taken  along  the  beaches  'I,  1)  on  July  9,  one  in  tlie  clearing  about 
the  Light-house  (I,  7)  on  July  8.  and  another  on  July  14,  in  a  rock 
clearing  near  the  head  of  Bock  Harbor  (near  III,  3).  The  Isle  Royale 
specimens  of  this  species,  when  compared  with  specimens  from  Ann 
Arhor,  are  much  dwarfed ;  the  right  fore  wing  of  three  specimens  meas- 
nring  41,  42  and  47  mm.  respectively.  Most  of  the  specimens  secured 
were  old  worn  males.  This  species  is  known  to  become  dwarfed  both  in 
the  far  north  (Alaska)  and  upon  mountains  (White  Mountains,  X.  H.). 
A  number  of  animals  show  this  dwarfing  tendency  to  the  northward 
when  they  are  of  southern  origin.     Scudder,  '99,  p.  158. 

Oeographic  Range.  Newfoundland  into  Florida;  U.  8.  generally; 
California  into  Alaska  except  in  southern  British  Columbia.  This  is  a 
species  of  southern  origin;  its  relatives  are  Bouth  American. 

Pieridac. 

CoUan  philodirr  Godt.  Clouded  Sulphur  Butterfly,  This  species  was 
not  taken  in  1905  but  is  recorded  by  Ruthven  ('06,  p.  103)  from  the  south 
end  of  the  island. 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROTALE.  266 

Qeographic  Range.  Anticosti,  Quebec;  Ontario;  Xewfoundland; 
Maine;  New  Hampshire;  Mass.;  New  York;  Penn.;  West  Virginia;  Kew 
Jersey;  Florida;  Ohio;  Illinois;  Indiana;  Kansas;  Nebraska;  Texas; 
Dakota;  Iowa;  Colorado.     Seudder,  '99,  p.  24. 

yympMlidae. 

Argynnis  ci/prix  Edw.  One  specimen  was  taken  on  the  burned  over 
ridges  (II,  3)  on  July  25  {G.  1-17) ;  another  August  14  on  Solidago,  in 
an  open  area  near  the  beach  (V,  2),  (A.  115).  Determined  by  Dr.  J. 
Fletcher  and  Dr.  Wm.  Barnes. 

Qeographic  Range.     A  western  Rocky  Mountain  species. 

ArgynMJs  atlantis  Edw.  Atlantis  Butterfly.  One  specimen  was  token 
on  the  rock  ridge  near  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (III)  on  July  21  (0. 
132) ;  two  in  the  clearing  at  Neutson's  resort  (V,  5)  on  July  21  (G. 
121) ;  one  from  the  burned  over  rock  ridges  on  the  McCargoe  trail  (III, 
3)  on  July  25  (G.  146,  147)  ;  and  five  from  the  clearing  about  the  camp  on 
Siskowit  Bay  (V.  3)  on  August  4,  9,  10  and  16. 

Seudder  eays :  "The  favorite  resorts  of  this  butterfly  are  grassy  fields 
skirting  the  mountain  streams,  and  it  differs  slightly  from  other  species 
of  the  genus,  preferring  sunny  woodland  nooks  to  open  country."  Seud- 
der, '99,  p.  213. 

Qeographic  Range.  Labrador;  Newfoundland;  Nova  Scotia;  Rupert 
House,  Quebec;  Ontario;  White  Mts.,  N.  H.;  Catskill  and  Adirondack 
Mts.;  N.  Y. ;  Indiana ;  Michigan ;  Iowa ;  Wisconsin ;  Lake  Winnipeg ; 
Colorado;  Mackenzie  and  Hudson  Bay. 

BrenthiB  myrina  Cram.  Myrina  Butterfly.  One  specimen  was  taken 
at  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  on  July  18  (G.  120);  a  second  one  upon  a 
Solidago  flower  near  a  small  stream  flowing  from  the  tamarack  swamps 
(V,  B)  on  August  8  (G.  97).  Seudder  remarks  that  this  species  "fre- 
quents low,  moist  meadows  and  roadsides  in  their  vicinity,"  Seudder, 
'99,  p.  317. 

Geographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia  and  New  England ;  south  on  the 
Mountains  to  Maryland,  Virginia  and  North  Carolina;  Indiana;  north- 
ern Illinois;  Wisconsin;  Iowa;  Colorado;  Utah;  Montana;  Alberta; 
British  Columbia;  Sitka,  Alaska;  Saskatchewan;  Nipigon,  Ontario; 
Hudson  Bay.     Has  a  near  relative  in  Asia.  B.  amphisaphe. 

Brcnthis  beUona  Fabr.  Bellona  Butterfly.  One  specimen,  no  data. 
Seudder,  '99,  p.  311. 

Geographic  Range.  Quebec;  New  England;  Ontario;  Penn.;  New 
Jersey;  Virginia;  northern  Ohio;  Indiana;  Alberta;  Colorado;  Great 
HIave  Lake;  Lake yWinnipeg  and  Hudson  Bay.   ' 

Phyciodea  tharoa  Dru.  Tharos  Butterfly.  One  specimen  was  taken 
on  the  beach  (I,  1)  on  July  10  (G.  209).     Seudder,  '99,  p.  121. 

Qeographic  Range.  Southern  Labrador  into  Florida ;  west  to 
Texas,  Mexico  and  the  Sierra  Nevada;  British  Columbia;  Alberta;  Sas- 
katchewan; Mackenzie  River  and  Hudson  Bay. 

Eiigonia  J-album  Bd. — J^ec.  White  J.  Butterfly.  Two  specimens 
were  taken  August  23  and  24  in  the  clearing  at  Washington  Harbor 
(I,  '04)  and  at  the  Siskowit  Camp  (V.  3)  on  August  16.  Seudder,  '9!), 
p.  7.    This  butterfly,  according  to  Seudder,  frequents  "high  open  wcod- 


270  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

land,  and  on  hilly  roadsides  in  the  vicinity  of  woods,"  Perhaps  mi- 
grates.    The  butterfly  hibernates,  cf.  Scudder,  '97,  pp.  139-144. 

Geographic  Range.  No.  Labrador;  >'ova  Scotia;  Ontario;  mountains 
of  Penn. ;  Indiana;  Wisconsin;  British  Columbia;  Alaslia.  Cloaelj 
related  to  the  European  E.  van-album.     Probably  of  Asiatic  origin. 

Euvanesga  antiopa  L.  Antiopa  Butterfly.  Not  secured  in  1905  but 
recorded  by  Buthven  ('OG,  p.  103)  fnm  the  south  end  of  the  island.  This 
is  a  -wide  ranging  species  from  Gautamala  and  Mexico  northward  over 
most  of  the  United  States  and  southern  Canada;  Alberta;  British  Co- 
lumbia; Alaska;  northern  Asia  and  Europe.  Scudder,  '99,  p.  1.  This 
species  is  probably  of  Asiatic  origin.    The  butterfly  hibernates. 

Aglaia  milberti  Godt.  Milbert's  Butterfly.  One  specimen  was  takeD 
in  the  clearing  at  the  Light-house  on  Rock  Harbor  (I,  7),  (G.  36). 
Scudder,  '99,  p.  330.     Butterfly  hibernates. 

Geographic  Range.  Labrador;  Newfoundland;  New  Brunswick;  On- 
tario ;  Nova  Scotia ;  New  Hampshire ;  New  York ;  northern  Ohio ;  In- 
diana; Montana;  Colorado;  Arizona  and  New  Mexico,  on  the  moun- 
tains; Alberta;  British  Columbia  south  to  central  California;  Great 
Slave  Lake;  Mackenzie;  liake  Athabasca;  Hudson  Bay.  A  distinctly 
northern  and  mountain  species. 

Vanessa  atalanta  L,  Bed  Admiral.  Two  specimens  were  taken  in 
the  light-house  clearing  (I,  7),  (G,  15),  This  butterfly  hibernates. 
Scudder,  '99,  p.  79. 

fJeograpkic  Range.  Southern  Labrador;  Newfoundland;  Hudson 
Bay ;  Alberta;  British  Columbia ;  of  general  distribution  over 
United  States  and  extending  southward  on  the  mountains  into  Guata- 
mala;  Europe;  Northern  Asia  and  Africa.  The  extensive  southward 
distribution  on  the  mountains  is  worthy  of  note.  This  species  probably 
originated  in  Asia. 

Vanessa  hunteri  Fabr,  Hunter's  Butterfly.  A  much  worn  specimen 
was  taken  July  19,  on  the  beach  (I,  1).  (G.  29),  and  on  July  21  in  the 
<'learing  at  Neutson's  resort  {IV,  5),  (G.  121).  Scudder,  '99,  p.  114. 
Butterfly  hibernates.  Larva  feeds  on  the  Pearly  Everlasting,  Anophali» 
ninrgaritarca  B.  &  IL  (Dr.  J.  Fletcher),  but  the  plant  was  bot  found 
upon  Isle  Royale. 

Geographic  Range.  Nova  Scotia;  Quebec;  Ontario;  Minn.;  British 
Columbia ;  United  States  generally ;  Mexico ;  Central  America,  and  along 
the  Andes  perhaps  even  to  Patagonia;  Antilles;  Canary  Isles.  This 
species,  like  the  preceding,  has  an  extensive  southern  distribution  along 
the  mountains.    Of  North  American  origin. 

Vanessa  cardui  L.  Thistle  Butterfly,  Four  specimens  were  taken 
July  21,  in  the  clearing  about  Neutson's  resort  (IV,  5),  (G.  121) ;  two 
more  upon  the  beach  (I,  I)  on  July  10;  a  wing  was  found  among  the 
drift  on  the  beach  (I,  1)  ;  several  from  the  clearing  at  the  Light-house 
(I,  7)  on  July  7,  10  and  22  (G.  26.  45,  104,  133) ;  one  in  the  clearing 
about  the  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  on  August  7  {G.  212)  and 
in  the  cassandra  and  sedge  zone  about  a  pond  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V, 
11)  on  Augusi:  16.  Scudder,  '99,  p.  106,  This  butterfly  hibernates. 
This  species,  with  Argynnis  atlantis  and  Basilachia  arthemis,  were  the 
most  abundant  butterflies  upon  the  island. 

Geograpkic  Range. — This  butterflv  has  the  most  extensive,  range  of 

iX-oogFc 


EKX)LOGY    OF    ISLE   HOTALE.  271 

any  known  species.  "With  the  exception  of  the  Arctic  regions  and  Sonth 
America,  it  is  distributed  over  the  entire  extent  of  every  continent." 
(Scnddpr).  This  species  is  very  abandant  in  Sonthern  Europe;  con- 
tinually invades  northern  Europe  but  cannot  establish  itself.  It  Bwarms 
In  immense  numbers  both  in  Europe  and  in  America  (Calif.).  Fletcher, 
'(12,  p.  C6;  Famham,  '!)5.  p.  150;  Scndder,  '76.  This  species  is  probably 
of  North  American  origin.  Its  inability  to  withstand,  even  in  the  adult 
stage,  the  winters  of  northern  Europe  and  northern  North  America,  and 
it»  powers  of  flight  sugfr^Bte  that  this  species,  which  is  probably  of 
southeaBtem  North  American  origin,  reached  the  old  world  not  only 
by  way  of  the  north  but  also  across  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  Specimens 
have  been  taken  at  sea  200  miles  from  the  Cape  Verde  Islands  in  the 
Atlantic. 

Banilarchia  arthemis  Dm.  Arthemis  Butterfly.  This  butterfly  was 
very  abundant  along  the  beaches,  where  they  were  frequently  taken  on 
Conglomerate  Bay  (near  I,  5)  and  where  two  specimens  were  taken 
on  July  10;  five  othCr  specimens  were  taken  along  the  beaches  on  Julv 
19  (G.  29)  and  one  on  July  11  and  17  respectively  (G.  47,  107)  ;  also 
one  specimen  in  the  Light-house  clearing  (I,  7)  on  July  8.  10,  24.  26. 
and  i^o  on  July  17.  A  single  specimen  was  taken  along  the  path  at 
the  outlet  of  Sisltowit  Lake  {V,  9)  on  Angust  7  (G.  215).  This  was  a 
burned  over  area  and  was  relatively  open  and  especially  so  on  the  rock 
exposures.  Three  specimens  were  taken  in  the  clearing  about  the  camp 
on  Biskowit  Bay  (V,  3)  on  August  9  (G.  222).  It  was  also  abundant 
in  rock  clearings  near  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (near  III,  3)  on  July 
14  fG.  97). 

This  purple  black  butterfly  with  its  oblique  white  band  is  a  con- 
spicuous fovm  along  the  beach,  on  the  rock  openings,  and  in  the  clear- 
iogs  and  burnings.     Scudder,  '99.  p.  225. 

OcQifraphio  Range.  Newfoundland;  Nova  Scotia:  Quebec;  Ontario; 
northern  New  England;  New  Hampshire;  northern  and  western  Mass.; 
Catskill  and  Adirondack  Mts.,  N.  Y. ;  mountains  of  Penn. ;  southern 
Mich. ;  southern  Wisconsin ;  northern  Indiana ;  Minnesota ;  Alberta ; 
British  Columbia;  Fort  Simpson,  Mackenzie.  Of  North  American  origin, 
cf.  Field,  '04,  p.  1. 

Anosia  pl&tippug  L.  Milkweed  Butterfly.  Two  dead  specimens  and 
one  yet  alive  were  found  upon  the  beach  at  the  head  of  a  small  cove 
south  of  the  Light-house  (I,  1)  on  July  6  (G.  19).  On  the  following 
day  about  a  half  dozen  dead  specimens  were  also  found  under 
simitar  conditions.  This  drift  must  have  been  cast  up  several  days 
previously,  as  was  indicated  by  its  stage  of  decay.  A  single  bright 
colored  fresh  looking  specimen  was  taken  near  the  head  of  Siskowit 
Bay  (VIII,  '04)  on  August  13,  and  is  in  striking  contrast  to  the  faded 
specimens  preserved  from  the  shore  drift.     Scudder,  '99,  p.  95. 

The  food  plant  of  the  caterpillar  is  milkweed,  one  species  of  which, 
Asclepias  incarnata  L.,  was  found  along  Washington  Kiver  (II,  '04), 

This  species  is  not,  in  all  probability,  a  permanent  resident  of  the 
island,  as  it  cannot  endure  the  winters  of  easteim  Canada.     Scudder 
('93,  p.  52)   has  expressed  the  opinion  that  this  species  cannot  survive 
the  winter  north  of  the  Gulf  States  and  that  those  individuals  found  " 
further  north  reach  there  each  rear  as  migrants  from  the  south,  or  the 


i72  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

immediate  descendante  of  such  migrants.  It  is  -well  known  that  these 
butterflieB  congregate  in  vast  flocks  in  the  fall  and  migrate,  some  think 
to  the  80Uth  (like  birds),  others  that  tbey  wander  about  aimlessl;  antil 
killed  by  the  approaching  winter  (Tntt,  '02,  p.  127).  This  wandering 
tendency,  however,  would  tend  to  scatter  them  as  they  died  off  slowly 
by  exhaustion.  While  it  seems  incredible  to  think  of  a  soiitherly 
migratory  instinct,  yet  the  meteorological  conditions  developing  in  the 
far  north  might  give  a  southerly  direction  to  the  wandering  move- 
ments. 

The  occurrence  of  specimens  in  the  shore  drift  is  of  interest  in 
connection  with  the  wandering  habit  of  tins  butterfly.  Specimens  have 
been  picked  up  on  the  beaches  of  Lake  Michigan  (Needham,  '00,  p.  6) ; 
Lake  Erie  (Moffat,  '01.  p.  48) ;  and  Lake  Ontario  (Bowles,  Can.  Ent. 
Vol.  12,  p.  134;  and  they  have  been  observed  flying  over  Lake  Erie. 
Such  facts  as  above  cited  suggest  that  this  member  of  the  Isle  Royale 
fauna  is  restocked  each  year  by  migrants,  which  are  probably  mope 
likely  to  come  from  the  southern  rather  than  the  northern  shore  of 
Lake  Superior.  If  Scudder's  opinion  is  correct,  an  annual  extension 
of  range  from  the  Gulf  States  to  Isle  Koyale — over  1,200  miles — certain- 
ly shows  remarkable  powers  of  dispersal. 

Geographic  Range. — This  species  has  a  very  extensive  range  in  this 
hemisphere  from  northern  Patagonia  in  South  America,  northward 
through  the  tropics,  West  Indies,  over  most  of  the  United  States  and 
southern  Canada  to  British  Columbia,  Hudson  Bay  and  Lake  .\thabaftka. 
Through  man's  influence  this  species  has  become  almost  world-wide  in 
its  range.  It  has  been  recorded  from  the  south  Pacific  500  miles  from 
land  (Tutt,  '01,  p.  40).    Originally  it  was  of  American  origin. 

Lycaenidae. 

Epid^mia  dwcas  Eby.  A  single  specimen  of  this  was  taken  on  August 
16  in  the  Cassandra  and  sedge  sone  of  an  open  bog  (V,  11),  (A.  136). 
Determined  by  Dr.  James  Fletcher. 

Geographic  Range. — Michigan  (Isle  Royale) ;  Nipigon,  Ontario;  Mani- 
toba ;  Saskatchewan ;  Athabasca ;  .Alaska. 

Epidemia  epixanthe  Bd. — Lee.  Exipanthe  Butterfly.  Pour  specimens 
were  taken  on  the  sedge  zone  on  the  north  shore  of  Sumuer  Lake  (1X1* 
5)  on  July  29. 

This  is  a  swamp  species  about  which  Fiske  ('01,  p.  50)  writes:  "It 
confines  itself  closely  in  its  jouraeyings  to  the  swamp  or  bog  in  which 
its  early  stages  are  passed,  and  rarely  indeed  ventures  upon  higher 
ground.  It  loves  best  of  ail  an  open,  mossy  morass,  such  as  are  found 
scattered  throughout  New  England,  usually  surrounding  some  small 
pond  caught  in  a  hollow  between  the  hills,  and  formed  by  the  moss  and 
«ubaquatic  plants  which,  constantly  encroaching  upon  the  water,  are 
bonnd  in  time  to  cover  it  over." 

Geographic  Range.  Newfoundland;  Quebec;  Ontario;  Maine;  New 
Hampshire;  northern  Indiana;  Iowa;  Kansas  and  Nebraska. 

Ciipido  sacpiolus  Bd,  Greenish  Blue  Butterfly.  In  all  seven  speci- 
mens of  this  interesting  western  species  were  taken ;  one  about  the 
camp  at  the  Light-house  (I,  7)  on  July  7,  (G.  26);  a  second  in  the 
clearing  on  Benson  Brook   (II,  1)   on  July  25  (G.  148)   and  five  speci- 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISI^E  ROYAI^.  '   278 

mens  in  the  clearing  about  Neutson's  R«8ort  (IV,  5)  on  July  21  (G. 
121). 

Geographic  Ran^e. — Michij;aD  (Isle  Royale  only) ;  Great  Slave  Lake; 
Mackenzie  Baein;  British  Columbia;  Montana;  Colorado;  NevBda;  Cali- 
fornia. Cf.  Elrod,  '06,  p.  136;Care.r,  '06,  p.  451.  Isle  Royale  ia  alec 
the  most  eastern  record  for  this  species. 

Seaperidae. 

Ambhfscirtea  viali$  Ed-n-.  Vialis  Skipper.  Three  specimens  of  this 
skipper  were  taken  on  Jnly  11  (G.  49).  23  (G.  133),  and  28  (G.  179) 
in  the  clearing  about  the  Light-house  (I,  7). 

Geographic  Range.  Quebec ;  Maine ;  New  Hampshire  to  Florida  and 
westward  to  Texa*;  Nevada;  Alberta;  Manitoba  (Fletcher),  and 
British   Colnmbia. 

Geographic  'Notes,  After  the  preceeding  geographic  records  had  been 
secured,  the  following  notes  on  the  distribution  of  butterflies  in  Can- 
ada were  received  from  Dr.  James  Fletcher,  of  Ottawa,  Canada.  His 
letter  contains  so  many  interesting  features  that  I  have  thought  it  de- 
sirable, with  Dr.  Fletcher's  consent,  to  publish  it  in  fnll,  supplementary 
to  the  data  already  given,  rather  than  to  scatter  the  records. 

"In  just  running  through  your  letter  I  see  that  I  can  answer  it  with- 
out turning  tip  any  records.  The  geographical  range  in  Canada  of  the 
following  butterflies  is  as  follows:  Papilio  glaucua  tumua — from  the 
Atlantic  to  the  prairie  region,  common;  across  the  prairies  into  British 
Columbia,  rather  scarce,  and  not  to  my  knowledge  crossing  the  interior 
elevated  plateau  which  is  a  semi-arid  region.  North  of  this  Jn  the  moun- 
tuins  it  reaches  right  to  the  Pacific  Coast.  South  of  the  north  part  of 
Vancouver  Island  its  place  is  taken  by  Pap.  eurymedon  and  P.  rutulus 
arizonensig  as  named  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Edwards. 

"CoUas  philodice — very  abundant  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Lake 
Superior  region,  where  its  place  is  taken  by  C.  eurytheme,  of  which  one 
form,  the  variety  eriphgle  resembles  philodice  very  closely  and  although 
it  is  claimed  that  it  is  a  form  of  eun/tkcme  it  resembles  philodice  so 
closely  that  it  cannot  always  be  separated  unless  the  locality  is  known. 

"^rgynnia  atlantia — this  occurs  in  what  we  consider  the  typical  form 
from  the  Atlantic  coast  to  the  Great  I^kce.  West  of  that  the  black 
markings  are  rather  lighter  and  the  color  is  brighter.  In  the  Rocky 
Mountains  I  believe  what  we  have  been  calling  eUcta  is  merely  a  form 
of  atlantia.  That  at  any  rate  extends  to  the  main  chain  of  the 
Rockies,  but  I  have  never  seen  it  further  west  than  the  Arrow  Lakes. 

"BrenthAa  myrina  and  lellxma — from  Atlantic  Coast  to  the  interior 
plateau  of  British  Columbia. 

"P.  tharoa — from  the  Atlantic  Coast  to  British  Columbia,  running 
north  to  the  coast,  probably  with  the  main  chain  of  the  Rockies.  In 
Vancouver  Island  and  the  Fraser  River  Valley  its  place  is  taken  by  P. 
pra-tensia  and  the  same  areas  are  inhabited  by  Brenthia  cpithore  in 
place  of  tdUma.    Pratensia  however  extends  west  into  Manitoba. 

"Ettffonia  j-album,  E.  antiopa,  A.  milberti,  V.  atalanta  and  V.  cardui 
occur  over  the  whole  of  our  country  from  Atlantic  to  Pacific  and  from 
the  southern  border  to  the  arctic  regions. 


274  MICHIGAN.  SURVEY.   1908. 

"V.  h'unteri  also  occurs  right  to  the  coast  but  is  very  much  rarer 
west  of  the  Great  Lakes  thau  the  other  species  meDtioned.  I  have  it 
from  Xora  Scotia  and  also  took  it  on  Vancouver  Island. 

"BasilarcfUa  arthemis  extends  from  the  Atlantic  coast  to  the  Kootenai 
Lakes,  when  its  place  is  taken  hy  B.  lorquimi.  Anoaia  ptexippua  a  mi- 
grant and  may  turn  up  at  any  place  where  Aaclcpias  grows,  but  is 
much  rarei-  in  British  Columbia. 

"Epidemia  epixantJie. — ^This  is  the  only  species  I  have  some  doubts 
about.  Ttiere  is  no  doubt  that  some  of  the  records  of  epixanthe  should 
be  of  the  rare  and  little  understood  species  dorcaa  which  occurs  in  the 
Lake  Superior  region  and  into  Manitoba.  It  is  easily  distinguished 
from  epi-vanthe  by  its  slightly  larger  size  and  the  brilliant  orange  wash 
on  the  under  surface.  Bptxanthe  I  have  only  actually  taken  myself  in 
Ontario.  Dorcaa  I  have  from  Nepigon  on  Lake  Superior  the  Bruce 
peninsula  and  from  Manitoba.  West  of  that  the  form,  for  it  is  hardly 
a  variety,  florus  which  is  really  only  a  dimorphic  form  of  helloidea 
occurs,  and  has  I  think,  sometimes  been  recorded  as  epixanthe.  The 
reference  of  fiorvs  to  dorctis  instead  of  hclloides  as  a  variety,  which 
was  done  by  Dr.  Dyar,  has  in  my  opinion  no  reason  in  it  at  all, 

"Amilyscirtea  vialis.— This  is  nowhere  very  common  but  extends  from 
Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  coast.  I  have  specimens  from  Halifax,  Nova 
Scotia  and  have  taken  it  in  Vancouver  Island.  It  is  more  abundant 
perhaps  in  the  Lake  Superior  region  than  any  other  where  I  have  col- 
lected." 

The  butterfl.y  fauna  of  Isle  Royale  may  well  be  compared  to  that  of 
the  White  Mountains  of  New  Hampshire  on  account  of  the  large  number 
of  species  common  to  both  localities  (cf.  Scudder,  '97,  pp.  71-87).  Much 
the  same  resemblance  holds  for  northern  New  England  in  general.  So 
far  as  United  States  is  conce;-ned  Isle  Royale  is  the  western  outlier 
of  the  distinctly  northeastern  or  Canadian  biotic  type.  Perhaps  the 
Black  Hills  will  show  similar  affinities,  but  farther  west  a  marked 
Rocky  Mountain  influence  becomes  apparent.  It  is  of  interest  to  note 
that  six  of  the  eighteen  species  hibernate  as  butterflies  and  another 
spreads  eacli  season  into  the  region.  This  number  includes  the  species 
which  are  of  the  most  northern  nmge  and  one  (F.  cardtii)  which  is 
cosmopolitan.  Four  of  the  species,  B.  j-album,  P.  cardui,  B.  arthemia 
and  A.  plexippua  are  known  to  flock,  or  migrate.  There  can  be  but 
little  doubt  but  that  these  characteristics  are  important  factors  in  an 
understanding  of  their  geographic  range,  and  are  probably  adaptations 
which  permit  these  species  to  maintain  themselves  in  the  region.  Such 
adaptations  may  have  originated  in  response  to  the  environment  or  the 
possession  of  them  have  allowed  the  species  to  enter  the  region  already 
adapted  to  it. 

When  the  above  listed  species  are  grouped  geographically  they  fall 
into  the  following  classes : 

1.  Of  general  geographic  range  from  Labrador,  Newfoundland,  north- 
ern New  England,  southward  on  the  Adirondacks,  Oatskills  and  Ap- 
palachians, westward  through  northern  Ohio,  Indiana,  Wisconsin  to 
Alberta,  and  southward  on  the  Rocky  Mountains,  British  Colombia  to 
Alaska. 


ECOLOQY   OF   ISLE  ROTAI^.  27S 

1.  Argynnis  atlanttt, 

2.  Brenthia  myrina. 

3.  Brentkig  bellona. 

4.  Eugonia  j-album. 

5.  Vaneaga  milberti. 

6.  Baailarchia  arthemia. 

These  forms  ma;  well  \m:  called  members  of  the  Canadian  biota  for  they 
-only  exteud  a  short  distance  southward  on  the  lowlands  of  the  United 
States,  but  reach  much  farther  Bouth  at  higher  altitudes. 

2.  Much  the  same  uorthem  limit  as  group  1,  but  reaching  much 
fiarther  south  of  the  above  soathern  lowland  limit. 

1.  Papilio  glaucua  tumua. 

2.  Colias  phUodice. 

3.  Phpciodea  tharoa. 

4.  Euvaneasa  antiopa   (Asiatic). 
&.  Taneasa  atalanta  (Asiatic). 

6.  Vaneata  hwnteri. 

7.  Vanessa  cardui  (cosmopolitan). 

8.  Anoaia  plexipjma  (Nearly  cosmopolitan). 

9.  Epidemia  epixanthe. 
10.     AmhVyacirtea  vtalia. 

3.  Species  of  distinctly  Rocky  Mountain  or  Rocky  Mountain  and 
Pacific  coast  distribution,  and  reaching  their  eaBtern  limit  in  the  Lake 
;Snperior  region. 

1.  Epidemia  dorcaa, 

2.  Cupido  saepiolua. 

3.  Argynnia  cypria. 

4.  Of  very  extenpive  getigraphic  range,  Asiatic  or  Cosmopolitan. 

1.  Pyrameia  cardui. 

2.  Anoaia  plexippus. 

3.  Vatteasa  atalanta. 

4.  Euvaneasa  antiopa, 
I¥obable  geographic  origin: 

1.  Papilio  glaucus  tumua,  S.  American. 

2.  Colias  philodice,  American. 

3.  Argynnia  atlanta,  Asiatic. 

4.  Brenthia  myrina,  Asiatic. 

5.  Brenthia  brllona,  Asiatic. 

6.  Phyciodea  tharos,  American, 

7.  Eugonia  j-album,  Asiatic. 

8.  Euvaneasa  antiopa,  Asiatic. 

9.  Vanessa  milberti,  American. 
"lO,  Vanesaa  atalanta,  Asiatic. 

11.  Vanessa  huntert,  American. 

12.  Vaneaaa  cardui,  Amercian. 

13.  Basilarchia  arthemia,  American, 

14.  Anoaia  plexippus,  So.  American. 

15.  Cupido  saepiolua.  West  No.  Amer. 

16.  Epidimiii  cpiratithr.  Eastern  U,  S. 
:17.  Epidemia  dorcas,  W.  No,  Amer, 

18.    Amblyscirtea  vialis,  No.  Amer.  -. 

D,gt,zedby(jOO<^[e 


276  MICHIQAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

In  discBBsing  the  geographic  origin  of  the  batterfiies  oommon  to 
the  old  and  new  worlds,  Scndder  Beldom  attempts  more  than  a  hemis- 
pherical location.  In  discussing  the  origin  of  Americnn  faunae  that 
are  both  boreal  and  Asiatic,  it  is  well  to  recall  that  geologically  speak- 
ing the  American  boreal  and  arctic  are  larffcli/  of  rerciit  origin  in  the 
northern  regiOTit.  It  is  therefore  not  uulikclv  that  manv  of  these  forms 
which  it  has  been  customary  to  consider  boreal  are  in  reality  not  so, 
but  from  high  altitudes — frdm  the  North  American  Cordilleras  or  from 
the  Himalayas,  where  high  altitude  and  low  teaiperatare  existed  long 
before  the  Ice  Age.  With  the  development  of  an  Ice  Age,  there  was 
a  great  increase  of  this  low  temperature,  lowland  habitat  and  when 
once  the  glacial  climate  declined  a  vast  area  was  open  for  invasion — 
an  area  of  such  great  extent  that  we  have  become  thoroughly  accustomed 
to  think  the  fauna  has  originated  there.  It  has  thus  become  customary 
to  speak  of  them  as  of  northern  origin,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  we  know 
that  they  are  almost  entirely  post-Olacial  migrants  from  the  south. 

EEFERBNCES. 

Carey,  M. 

1906.     On  the  Diurnal  Lepidoptera  of  the  Athabaska  and  Mackenzie 
Begion,  British  America.    Pro.  U.  B.  Kat.  Mus.,  31,  pp.  425- 
457.  ■ 
Dyar.  H.  G. 

1903.  A  List  of  North  American  Lepidoptera.     Bull.  52,  U.  S.  Nat. 

Mas. 

1904.  The  Lepidoptera  of  the  Kootenai  District  of  British  Columbia. 

Pro.  U.  B.  Nat.  Mus.,  27,  pp.  779-938. 
Elrod,  M.  J. 
1906.    The  Butterflies  of  Montana.    Univ.  of  Montana,  Bull.  30,  Biol. 
Series  No.  10. 
Engel,  H. 

1908.     A  Preliminary  List  of  the  Lepidoptera  of  Western  Pennsylvania 
collected  in  the  vicinity  of  Pittsburg.     Ann.  Carn^e  Mna., 
6,  pp.  27a36. 
Farnham,  G.  D. 
1895.     (Migration  of  Pyrameis  cardiii  in    Calif.)    Ent.    News,    6,    p. 
150. 
Field,  W.  L.  W. 

1904.    Problems  of  the  Genus  Basilarchia.    Psyche,  11,  pp.  1-6. 
Fiske,  W.  P. 

1901.  An  Annotated  Catalogue  of  the  Butterflies  of  Sew  Hampshire^ 

Tech.  Boll.  No.  1,  N.  H.  Agr.  Exp.  Station. 
Fletcher,  J. 

1902.  The  Painted  Lady   Butterfly.     Thirty-second  Ann.   Rep. '  Ent. 

Boe.  of  Ont.,  1901,  pp.  54-57. 
MoCFat,  J.  A. 
1901.    Anosia  archippus,  yet  Again.    Thirty-first  Ann.  Bep.  Ent.  Soc. 
Ont.,  1900,  pp.  44-51. 
Necdham,  J.  G. 
1900.    Insect  Drift  on  the  Shore  of  Lake  Michigan.  Occ.  Mem.  Chicaga 
Entomol.  Soc.,  1,  pp.  1-8.  ,  , 


BCOLOGT  OF   ISLBI  BOTAl^.  277 

Bnthven,  A.  G. 

1906.    Spiders  aod  Insects  from  the  Porcupine  Moantains  and  Isle 
Rojale,  Michigan.  Ann.  Rep.  Mich.  Oeol.  Burr,  for  1905,  pp. 
100-106. 
Scadder,  8.  H. 

1876.    A  Cosmopplitan  Butterflj.    Amer.  Nat,  10,  pp.  392-396;  602- 

611. 
1889.     Coamopolitaa  Butterflies.     Psyche,  5,  pp.  190-192. 

1897.  Frail  Children  of  the  Air.    Boston. 
1899.    Everyday  Butterflies.    Boston. 

Skinner,  H. 

1898.  A  Synonymic  Catalogue  of  the  North  American  Bhopalocera. 

Amer.  Entomol.  8oc. 
Tutt,  J.  W. 

1902.    The  Migration  and  Dispersal  of  Insects.    London. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   HOTALE. 


ANNOTATED  LIST  OF  THE  ilOLLrSCA  OF  ISLE  KOYALE,  MICH- 
IGAN. 

BY    BftTANT    WALKER, 

1.    Introduction. 

This  list  coataJDS  all  the  species  of  molluBcs  collected  on  Isle  Boyale, 
both  in  ld04  and  ld05,  and  so  represents  the  complete  fanna  bo  far  as 
known.  For  the  details  as  to  the  localities  represented  bv  the  col- 
lection made  in  1904,  reference  should  be  made  to  the  Report  of  that 
expedition   (pp.  96-99). 

The  collection  made  in  1905  was  much  larger  than  that  of  the  preced- 
ing year,  both  in  species  and  IndiTidnals.  While  eleven  of  the  species 
■  collected  in  1904  were  not  found  in  1905,  no  less  than  forty-two  ad- 
ditional species  were  obtained,  making  the  total  nnmber  of  species  now 
known  from  the  island  seventy-two.  The  species  added  in  1905  are  in- 
dicated by  an  *  on  the  list.  In  compiling  the  completed  list,  it  has 
been:  deemed  of  aufflcient  interest  to  add  both  the  general  range  of 
each  species  and  its  distribution  so  far  as  known  in  the  state  of  Mich- 
igan. 

2.    Faunal  Afjinities. 

The  mollnscan  fanna  of  Isle  Royale  becomes  of  additional  interest 
when  considered  in  conection  with  Dr.  W.  H.  Dall's  recent  work  on  the 
''Land  and  Fresh  Water  Mollusks  of  Alaska  and  Adjoining  Regions," 
(Harriman  Alaska  Expedition,  Vol.  XIII,  1905),  which  is  a  complete 
digest  of  onr  present  knowledge  of  the  land  and  fresh  water  molluacn 
of  North  America  north  of  latitnde  49°  North,  and  practically  of  our 
entire  boreal  fauna.  So  far  as  available,  the  general  range  of  the  species 
given  in  that  work  has  been  followed  in  this  list  as  being  the  most  "up- 
to-date"  attainable. 

Of  the  seventy-two  species  recognized  from  Isle  Royale,  forty-nine 
are  included  by  Dr.  Dall  in  his  list  of  boreal  species. 

The  remaining  twenty-three  species  not  cited  by  him  are: 

Strohilops  Virgo  (Pils.) 

Vertigo  tridentata  Wolf. 

Euconulus  chcrsintts  poJygyratus  Pils. 

Zonitoides  exigua  (Stimp.) 
ylgriolimax  campestris  (Say). 
:J>alUfera  hemphilU  (W.  G.  Binn.). 

•J^alUfera  doraalia  (Binn.). 
^Lymnwa  pilsbryana  Walker. 
^hysa  aayii  Tap'p. 

,Physa  aplectoides  Sterki. 

Ancylus  sp? 

Amnicola  lustrica  Say. 

Mmculium  8€curis  Prime.  ,-.  , 

37  D,gt,zedby(jOOg[C 


282  MICHIGAN    SUBVBY.    1908. 

PUidium  afflne  8terki. 

Pigidium  aargenti  Sterki. 

Pigidium  roperi  Sterki. 

Pisidium  subrotimdum  Bterki 

Piaidium  spJendidulum  Bteriii. 

Piaidium  pauperculum  Sterki. 

Pisidium  medianum  Sterki. 

Piaidium  punctatum  aimplea;  Sterki, 

Of  these  Lynrnga  pilsbryana  is,  bo  far  as  yet  known,  peculiar  to  Isle 
Royale.  The  remainder  have,  as  a  rule,  a  general  distribution  all  over  the 
state.  !?ltrohilopa  rirgo  and  Zonitoidea  exigva,  however,  are  charaoterie- 
tic  boreal  species  and  are  apparently  rarely  found  south  of  the  Saginaw- 
Orand  Valley.  While,  of  course,  it  is  possible  that  Isle  Royale  marks 
the  northern  limit  of  the  range  of  these  species,  in  view  of  the  fact 
that  nearly  all  of  them  are  known  to  rajige  through  the  Upper  FeDiasnIa 
and  that  practically  nothing  is  known  of  the  fauna  of  the  north  shore 
of  Lake  Superior,  the  probability  is  that  most  of  them  range  further 
north  and  should  be  included  in  the  boreal  fauna  of  North  America. 
Wbile  the  Isle  Royale  ftinna  is  thus  to  be  considered  purely  boreal 
in  its  character,  it  must  be  understood  that  it  is  not  in  any  material 
respect  different  from  that  of  the  Upper  Peninsula  and  of  the  northern 
part  of  the  Lower.  The  occurrence  of  such  species  as  ValUmia  costala. 
Vertigo  tridentata  and  Physa  aplectoidea  must  be  considered  rather  as 
evidence  that  these  forms  have  been  overlooked  in  the  region  immediate- 
ly south  rather  than  that  they  are  restricted  to  Isle  Royale.  And  the 
existence  of  Lymnwa  pilsbryana  and  the  peculiar  forms  of  Lymtuta 
atdgnalie,  Phmorbia  bicarinatua  and  P.  campanulatua,  if  ultimately  foand 
to  be  confined  to  the  island,  should  rather  be  ascribed  to  long  isolation 
under  peculiar  local  conditions  than  as  indicating  any  essential  difference 
from  the  fauna  of  the  surrounding  region. 

Considering  the  fauna  of  the  Upper  Peninsula  and  Isle  Royale  as  a 
whole,  it  will  be  found  to  include  two  elements.  The  first  and  larger 
one  consists  of  species  having  a  general  range  through  the  northern 
United  States  and  southern  portion  of  Canada,  Just  how  far  to  the 
north  most  of  them  range  is  as  yet  undetermined.  These  species,  although 
found  in  the  boreal  region,  cannot  be  properly  said  to  be  distinctly 
boreal  species.  Accompanying  tliewe  species  of  geueral  distribution,  is 
a  smaller  element  of  purely  boreal  species,  which  are  characteristic  of 
the  northern  region  and  whose  range  to  the  south  i.«  as  a  role  quite 
restricted.  This  purely  boreal  element  is  represented  on  Isle  Royale 
by  the  following  species : 

1.  Aranthinula  harjm  (Say). 

2.  Yitrina  limpida  Gould. 

3.  Vitrea  hinneyana  (Mse.). 

4.  Zonitoidea  CTigua   (Stimp.). 
a.    Pyramidula  asteriacna  (Mse,). 
B.     Lymrwa  megaaoma  Say. 

7.  Lymnaa  emarginata  Say, 

8.  liymnfra  pilsbryana  Walker. 

So  far  as  the  land  species  of  Isle  Royale  are  concerned,  there  are 
but  few  of  special  interest,  most  of  them  being  of  general  distribution 


ECOLOQT  OF  ISL&  ROTALE.  283 

in  the  Upper  Feninsola.  The  occnrrence  of  Polygyra  alboUibriB  (which 
was  not  found  in  1904)  in  abundance  causes  a  feeling  of  surprise  that 
Polygra  fratema  (monodon  auct.)  was  not  found.  In  Michigan,  its 
range  is  coincident  with  that  of  alboldbria  and,  according  to  Dall,  it  is 
fonnd  as  far  north  as  James  Baj,  Hudson  Bay. 

All  the  specimens  collected  of  Pyramidula  cronkhitei  were  of  the 
anthonyi  form  as  in  1904. 

Among  the  fluviatile  species,  however,  several  forms  either  pre- 
viously undiscovered  or  new  to  the  fauna  of  the  state  were  found  and 
some  interesting  facts  in  regard  to  their  distribution  were  developed. 
The  division  of  Lymnaa  staffnaUs  Into  three  very  distinct  forms  coin- 
cident with  the  character  of  their  habitat  is  very  striking  and  specially 
noteworthy. 

The  fact  that  all  the  larger  species  of  Lymn(Bid€te  from  Siskowit 
Lake:  Lymtuea  stagnali«,  Planorbis  bioarinatua  and  PUtnorbi^  cam- 
panulatus,  are  well  marked  varieties  peculiar  to  that  lake,  is  very 
significant  and  points  to  some  specially  farorabie  envlroamental  condi- 
tions, which  apparently  are  not  present  to  affect  the  facies  of  these 
species  on  other  parts  of  the  island.  What  these  are,  if  not  already  de- 
termined, would  be  an  interesting  subject  for  future  investigation. 

The  acqnisitton  of  the  additional  material,  which  has  enabled  the 
specific  distinctness  of  LymjuEa  ptlabryana  to  be  determined,  is  a  matter 
of  congratulation. 

The  occurrence  of  the  beautiful  little  Phyaa  apUctoidea  adds  a  new 
species  to  the  fauna  of  the  state  and  affords  another  instance  of  ap- 
parently anomalous  distribution,  which  so  frequently  puzzles  the 
student.  Originally  described  from  Ohio,  it  has  hitherto  escaped  at- 
tention in  southern  Michigain,  and  its  discovery  on  Isle  Boyale  was 
wholly  unexpected.  The  remarkable  form  of  PJanorbia  bicarinatui 
from  Siskowit  Lake  was  one  of  the  most  interesting  novelties  discovered 
by  the  expedition  and  is  a  noteworthy  addition  to  the  fauna  of  the 
state. 

"All  the  Pisidia,  except  Pisidmm  idahoense  and  Pisidium  aargenti, 
are  represented  by  small,  and,  as  it  seems,  characteristically  northern 
forms,  slight  and  generally  of  light  or  pale  color.  Some  are  not  very 
characteristic  and  apparently  little  different  from  each  other  and 
were  rather  difBcuIt  to  work  up,"    (Sterki.) 

The  writer  again  acknowledges  his  indebtedness  to  Dr.  V.  Kterki  for 
the  identification  of  the  Sphwria  and  Pisidia  and  to  Dr.  H,  A.  Pilsbry 
for  the  determination  of  the  sings.  Dr.  H,  A.  Gleason,  who  collected 
most  of  the  specimens,  and  Sir.  Chas.  C.  Adams  have  kindly  interpolated 
the  details  as  regards  the  local  habitats  and  distribution  of  the 
different  species.  The  field  numbers  by  Mr.  C.  C.  Adams  are  indicated 
bv  the  letter  A;  all  others  are  Dr.  Gleason's,  except  a  few  lots  collected 
bV  Mr.  N.  A.  Wood. 
'  Detroit,  April  1, 1909. 

3.    Annotated  List. 

1."     Polygyra  alboTabria   (Say). 

Range:  "Eastern  United  States,  from  Georgia  and  Arkansas  to  the 
Saskatchewan."  (Dall).  iX.OOglC 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 


2M  MICHIGAN    6URVBT,    190S. 

Distribution  on  Isle  Rovale:  Station  1,  Sub.  1,  I^abe  and  Bav 
Beaches,  Nambers  19,  32,  50 ;  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Eidges,  Nob.  19  A,  23.  33. 
81,  187;  I,  7,  Light-house  Clearing,  Nos.  34.  42;  II,  1,  Ransom  Clear- 
ing, No.  150;  II,  2,  Tamarack  Swamp,  So.  113;  II,  3,  Kock  Ridge 
Clearing.  Nos.  51,  145;  III,  4,  Trail  to  Sumner  Lake,  Nob.  88,  93.  13S. 
174;  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  No.  120;  HI,  6,  Southwest  Coves,  Rock 
Harbor,  No.  91;  IV,  5,  Neutson's  Resort,  No.  121;  IV,  8,  Trail  to 
Greenstone  Range,  No.  128;  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach,  Nos.  101  A. 
107  A;  V,  3,  Rock  Clearing  at  Camp,  No.  233;  VIII,  '04,  Upper  End  of 
Siskowit  Bay,  No.  232. 

A  "dead"  shell  was  found  in  driftwood  cast  upon  the  beach  at  the 
head  of  Tonkin  Bay  (No.  19)  and  {No.  32)  in  a  small  creek  at  the 
head  of  Conglomerate  Bay.  The  animal  was  dead  but  the  body  was 
still  within  the  shell.  In  both  of  these  numbers  the  ehells  were  be- 
yond  their  normal  habitat. 

Live  examples  (No.  50)  were  seldom  seen  but  the  abundance  of  the 
dead  ones  npon  the  rock  ridges  and  open  Gladonm  clearings  make  it 
apparent  that  they  are  abundant  here.  Numbers,  23,  33.  81,  187.  51. 
145,  88,  93,  138,  174,  128,  101  A,  107  A,  232  and  233  were  all  taken  from 
that  association.  Thence  they  wander  in  small  numbers  to  the  moister 
places,  such  as  the  lighthouse  clearing  (Nos.  34  and  42),  Ransom 
Clearing  (No.  150),  or  even  in  the  tamarack  swamps  (No.  113). 

Although  not  found  at  alt  in  1904,  this  species  was  collected  in 
1905  in  considerable  numbers,  which  show  a  wide  variation  both  in 
size  and  in  the  thickness  of  the  shells.  The  124  mature  specimens  col- 
lected varied  in  height  from  14  to  21.5  mm.,  and  in  width  from  21.75  to 
30.75  mm.  The  average  being  17  by  25.86  m/m.  The  accompanying  dia- 
grams, 61-62,  show  the  variation  in  height  and  greater  diameter. 

A  series  of  42  from  all  parts  of  the  Upper  Peninsula  vary  in  height 
from  14  to  20  mm.,  and  in  width  from  22,  75  to  30  mm.,  with  an  average 
of  17.20  by  26.28  mm.  While  a  series  of  183  from  all  parts  of  the  Lower 
Peninsula  vary  in  height  from  12  to  24.25  mm.,  and  in  width  from  18.75 
to  34.25  mm.,  with  an  average  of  18.10  by  27.11  mm. 

It  would  appear  from  these  series  that  the  average  Isle  Royale  shell 
is  slightly  smaller  than  the  average  specimen  from  the  Upper  Peninsula, 
and  considerably  smaller  than  the  average  Lower  Peninsula  example. 
The  range  of  variation  in  the  Isle  Eoyale  series  is  somewhat  greater  than 
in  the  Upper  Peninsula  series,  but  much  less  than  in  that  from  the 
Lower  Peninsula. 

2.     AcaiUhinula  harpa  (Bay). 

Range:  "Northwestern  Scandinavia,  Northeastern  America,  British 
America  near  Hudson  Bay,  Southeastern  Alaska  and  the  easternmost 
margin  of  Siberia."     (Dall.) 

Michigan :  Petoskey  and  Charlevoix  in  the  Lower  Peninsula,  and 
Ontonagon  County  and  Isle  Royale  in  the  Upper. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Kidges,  No.  19  A;  II,  1,  Ransom  Clear- 
ing, No.  150 ;  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  S(^.  118 
A,  129  A,  130  A;  V,  4,  Trail  through  Balsam-Birch  Forest,  No.  236. 

Number  150  was  collected  under  logs  resting  on  the  ground  in  an 
open  clearing  near  the  lake;  No.  236  was  in  leaf  mold  in  the  dense 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  EOTALE.  285 

shade  of  tbe  balsam  forest;  No.  IS  A  vaa  taken  from  under  a  atone; 
and  No.  lis  A,  129  A,  130  A  from  under  mats  of  Cladonia. 

3."     Strobilops  Virgo   (Vila,). 

Range:  "Canada  to  Northern  Alabama,  and  west  to  JXinnesota  and 
Kansas,"     (Pilsbry) , 

Michigan :     Upper  Peninsula  and  northern  conntiea  of  tbe  Lower. 

Isle  Rovale:  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridge,  No.  81;  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and 
Beach  near  Siskowit  Bav,  Noa.  129  A,  130  A;  III,  '04,  Deaor  Trail,  No. 
142  A. 

In  damp  aoil  (No.  81)  under  loose  rocks  at  a  depth  of  2-6  inches; 
Ko.  129  A  and  No.  130  A  from  under  Cladonia;  and  No.  142  A  from 
leaf  mould  and  rotten  logs  in  the  maple  forest. 

4."     Bifidaria  tap-paniana  (C.  B.  Adams). 

Range :  "Ontario  to  Gulf  of  Mexico,  west  to  Iowa  and  Kansas,  south- 
west to  Arizona,  bnt  not  known  from  the  southeastern  Atlantic  States, 
Virginia  to  Florida."     (Vanatta  and  Pilsbry). 

Michigan:     Oenerallj  distributed  in  Lower  Peninsula,  Isle  Boyale. 

Isle  Boyale:  II,  1,  Benson  Brook,  No.  150.  A  single  specimen,  the 
first  record  of  this  species  from  the  Upper  Peninsula. 

Under  a  prostrate  log  in  an  open  place  near  the  lake. 

5.  Vertigo  ovata  Say. 

Range:     "Eastern  United  States  from  Maine  to  Texas  and  north- 
ward."    (Dall). 
Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 
Isle  RoyaJe:     Not  collected  in  1905.     See  Report  1904,  p.  97. 

6.  Vertigo  gouldU  Binn. 

Range:  "Northern  United  States  east  of  the  Socky  Mountalna  and 
northward,"     ( Dall.) . 

Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  Not  collected  in  1905.  See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p. 
97. 

7."     Tertigo  tridentata  Wolf. 

Range:  "Quebec  and  Maine  to  Minnesota,  aontb  to  Illinois  and  Ohio." 
(Pilsbry). 

Michigan :    Ann  Arbor,  Grand  Rapids  and  Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Boyale:  V.  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No. 
130  A. 

A  single  specimen  found  under  Cladonia.  The  first  record  from  the 
Upper  Peninsula. 

8.  Vertigo  sp? 

Isle  Boyale:  I,  2,  Natural  Bock  Clearings,  Light-house  Peninsula. 
Two  unidentifiable  fragments, 

9.  Virtrina  limpida  Gld. 

Bange:  "Central  New  York  and  northward  from  New  Brunswick  to 
Alberta  and  Hudson  Bay."     (Dall). 

Michigan :    Upper  Peninsula  and  northern  coanties  in  the  Lower. 

Isle  Royale:  V,  2,  Heath.  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No. 
130  A.    A  single  dead  specimen  was  found  under  Cladonia. 

10.  Vitrea  hinneyana  (Morse). 

Bange:  "Quebec  and  Maine  to  Northern  Michigan  and  British  Colum- 
bia."    (Dall).  ,--.  , 

X.ooglc 


286  HICHIQAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

Slicbigan;     Upper  Peningnla  and  northern  counties  in  Lower. 

Isle  EoyaJe:  I,  3,  Balsam-Spruce  Forest,  No.  140;  I,  5,  Jack  Pioe 
Ridges,  Xos.  19  A,  81 ;  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay, 
No.  130  A;  III,  '04,  Deaor  Trail,  Noe.  141  A,  142  A;  V,  '04,  Eidge  back 
of  Club  House,  Noe.  144  A,  147  A. 

In  moist  soil  under  loose  rocks  (Nos.  81  and  19  A)  or  in  the  loose 
leaf  mold  under  the  balsam  forest.  No.  140 ;  No.  130  A  under  CladorUa; 
Noe.  141  A  and  142  A,  from  leaf  mould  or  rotten  logs  in  yellow  birch 
or  maple  forest  and  Nos.  144  A  and  No.  147  A  from  under  bark,  leaves 
and  among  moss  in  the  forest. 

11.  Euconulus  fulvua  (Dr.). 

Kange:     "Holarctic,  and  widely  distributed  southward,"     (Dall). 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridge,  No.  19  A;  V,  2,  Heath  Z<Hie  and 
Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  Nos.  129  A,  130  A ;  V.  '04.  Ridge  back  of  the 
Clnb  House  No.  147  A.  No.  15  A  from  under  a  stone;  Nos.  129  A  and 
130  A  from  under  Cladonia. 

12.  Euconulus  chcrainut  polygyratus  (Pila.). 
Range:  Northern  United  States  and  Canada. 
Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridges,  No.  19  A;  V.  2,  Heath  Zone 
and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No.  129  A;  III,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  No. 
142  A ;  V,  '04,  Ridge  back  of  Club  House,  No.  147  A. 

Pound  under  a  damp  stone  (No.  19  A) ;  under  Cladonia  (No.  129  A)  ; 
in  the  forest  nnder  leaf  mould,  barb,  moss  or  decaying  logs  (No.  142  A 
and  147  A.). 

13.  Zonitoides  arborea  (Say). 

Range:     "North  America  generally  and  Japan."     (Dall). 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Rovale:  I,  2,  Natural  Rock  Clearings,  No.  65;  I,  3,  Balsam- 
Spruce  Forest,  Nos.  140,  141 ;  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridges,  Nos.  19  A,  81,  102 ; 
II,  1,  Ransom  Clearins,  No.  150;  II,  2,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  113;  V, 
2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  Nos.  118  A,  129  A,  130  A; 
V,  4,  Balsam-Birch  Forest,  No.  236;  III,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  Nob,  142  A, 
149  A ;  V,  '04,  Ridge  back  of  Club  House,  No.  147  A. 

In  the  thin  soil  collected  under  bearberry  on  the  dry  rock  clearing 
north  of  the  lighthouse  (No.  65);  under  loose  rocks  in  the  jack  pine 
lidges  (Nos.  19  A,  81,  102)  ;  under  log  in  an  open,  sunny  place  (No,  150)  ; 
or  in  leaf  mold  in  the  dense  shade  of  the  balsam  forest;  nnder  Cladonia 
iNos.  IIS  A,  129  A,  i:iOA) ;  and  in  the  dense  forest  among  litter  (No«*. 
142  A,  147  A,  and  149  A). 

li.     Zonitoides  exigiia  (Stimp.), 

Range:  "Quebec  and  Ontario,  New  England,  New  York,  Alleghan.T 
Co.,  Pa.  and  Michigan."     (Pilsbry), 

Michigan:    Upper  Peninsula  and  northern  counties  of  the  Lower. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  Nos.  141  A,  149  A;  V,  '04,  Back 
of  Club  House.  No.  144  A. 

Found  only  in  the  dense  forest  among  litter. 

15.     Zonitoides  miUum.  (Morse). 

Range:    "Eastern  United  States  and  Canada,  Manitoba."     (Dall.) 

Michigan :     Generallv  distributed.  -^-.  ■ 

lyCoogle 


ECOLOGT  OF   ISLE   KOTALE.  287 

Isle  Royale:  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No. 
130  A.     A  single  specimen  under  Cladonia. 

16.  AgrioUmax  campeatris  (Binn.). 
Bange:    "Entire  United  States."     (PiUbry). 
Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Rovale:  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No. 
133  A,     Found  only  ander  Cladonia. 

17.  I'nWfcra  hcntphim  (W.  G.  Binn.). 

Bange:  Mountains  of  Georgia,  North  Carolina,  and  Eastern  Pennayl- 
vania,  and  Michigan. 

Michigan :     Isle  Borale,  Ontonagon  Coantv  and  Ann  Arbor. 

Isle  Royale:     Not  collected  in  11)05.     See  Report  Bxped.  1904,  p.  96. 

18.*     PalUfera-  dorsalis  (Binn.). 

Range:     New  England,  New  York  and  Michigan. 

Michigan:     Isle  Royale.  Eaton  and  Marqnette  Gonnties. 

Isle  Royale:     III,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  Nos.  142  A,  149  A, 

Taken  only  in  the  dense  hai'dwood  forest  among  litter. 

19.  Pyramiduia  aUemata   (Say). 

Range:  "Eastern  North  America  as  far  north  as  Nova  Scotia,  Lower 
Canada  and  the  international  boundary."  (Dall). 

Michigan:  Generailv  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  HI,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  Nob.  142  A,  143  A,  149  A;  V,  'Oi 
Ridge  back  of  Club  Honse,  No.  144  A;  VIII,  '04,  Upper  end  of  Siskowit 
Bay,  No.  232. 

From  the  Htter  of  the  maple  forest  (No.  142  A  and  144  A  and  149 
A). 

20.  Pjframidula  cronkhitci  anthonyi  (Pilsbry). 

Range:  '*Kan6aiJ.  northward  to  Great  Slave  Lake  and  from  New  Eng- 
land to  the  Sierra  Nevada  and  south  to  Arizona."     (Da!!). 

Michigan:  Generally  distributed  in  the  Lower  Peninsula. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  2,  Natural  Rock  Clearing,  No.  78;  BalBam-Spruce 
Forest,  Noa,  140,  141 ;  T,  4,  Tamarack  and  Arbor-vitie  Swamp,  No.  182 ; 
I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridge,  Nos.  19  A,  81,  102;  II.  1.  Ransom  Clearing,  No. 
150 ;  Y,  2.  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  No.  129  A,  130  A ; 
V,  4,  Trail  through  Balsam-Spruce  Forest,  No.  236;  III,  '04,  Desor  Trail. 
Nos.  141  A,  142  A,  149  A;  V,  '04,  Back  of  Club  House,  Nos.  144  A,  14r 
A. 

As  stated  in  the  1904  Report,  this  form  is  apparently  replaced 
throughout  the  Upjier  Peninsula  by  the  var.  catskillcnxis  Pils. 

This  species  shows  a  wide  range  of  habitat,  and  may  occur  under  or 
in  decaying  1(^«  (No.  IS,  150);  under  loose  rooks  (19  A,  81,  102);  in 
leaf  moid  (140,  141.  236).  Also  found  under  Cladonia  (129  A  and  130  At 
and  in  the  litter  of  the  hardwood  forest  (141  A,  142  A,  144  A,  147  A, 
and  149  A). 

20a. var.  albina  (Ckll.), 

Isle  RoTale:  This  form  occurred  in  1905  at  I,  5,  Jack  Pine  Ridge,  No. 
]9  A;  HI,  '04,  Desor  Trail,  No.  141  A;  V,  '04,  Back  of  Club  House,  No, 
147  A. 

Found  under  stones  (No.  19  A)  and  in  the  hardwood  litter  (No.  141 
A  and  147  A.)  '  /^-  i 

21.  Pyramiduia  astenscua  (Morse).  i.,000QIc 


288  MICHIGAN    SURVBT,    1908. 

Banger  "Maine;  Provinces  of  Quebec  and  Ontario,  Canada."  (Dall.) 
Also  Northern  Michigan. 

Michigan :  Isle  Royale,  Ontonagon  Coanty  and  Charlevoix. 

iBle  Royale:  Not  collected  in  1905.    See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  97. 

11*    H elicodisais  parallehig  (Say). 

Range:  Eastern  United  States,  Florida  and  Texas,  north  to  Manitoba. 

Michigan:  Generally  distriboted. 

Isle  Koyale :  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and  Beach  near  Siskowit  Bay,  Nos. 
118  A,  129  A,  130  A. 

All  found  among  or  under  Cladonia,  upon  the  rock  beach  slope. 

23,  Punctum  pygmaiam  (Dr.). 

Range:     "United  States  generally;  Quebec;  Manitoba;  Victoria,  Van- 
couver Island,  Europe,"     (Dall), 
Michigan:  Generally  distributed. 
Isle  Royale :    Not  collected  in  1905.    See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  97. 

24.  Spkyradivm  edcniulum  (Dr.). 

Range:  "Northern  Europe,  Asia  and  America."    (Dall). 
•    Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  Not  collected  in  1905,  See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  97. 
One  of  the  specimens  under  No.  8  may  belong  here. 

25.*     CootUicopa  luirica  (Mull,), 

Range:  "Europe,  North  Africa  and  Asia  Minor;  Siberia;  Kamchatka; 
most  of  North  America,"   (Dall). 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  11,  1,  Ransom  Clearing,  No.  150;  V,  2,  Heath  Zone  and 
Beach  near  Siskon-it  Bay,  No.  130  A. 

No.  160  was  taken  under  a  fallen  log  in  an  open  place  near  the  lake 
and  No.  130  A  under  Cladonia  upon  the  rock  beach. 

26."     Vallonia  pulchclla  (Mull.). 

Range:  Europe;  North  Africa;  Southern  and  Western  Bib^a  to  the 
Amur;  Madeira;  the  Azores;  North  America  from  Manitoba  to  Florida 
and  Montana  to  Nova  Scotia."     (Dall). 

Michigan:  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  A  single  specimen  only  occurred  in  the  collections,  the 
exact  locality  of  which  is  uncertain, 

27.*     Vallonia  ooaUita  (Muller). 

Range:  Europe;  Northern  United  States  and  northward. 

Michigan:  Owobho,  Monroe  and  Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Boyale :  II,  1,  Benson  Brook,  No.  150.  Apparently  a  rare  speciea 
in  Michigan,  and  this  the  first  record  in  the  Upper  Peninsula.  Under  a 
fallen  log  in  an  open  sunny  place  near  the  lake. 

28."     Succinea  ovaiis  Say. 

Range:  "From  Ijouisiana  to  Hudson  Bay  and  eastivard  to  New  Eng- 
land and  Gaepe,  but  not  west  of  the  Mississippi  valley."    (Dall), 

Michigan:  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  Y,  '04,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  145  A.  A  single  dead 
shell  was  found  at  the  margin  of  a  small  stream  flowing  from  the 
swamp. 

29.*     Sucdnfu  retusa  Lea. 

Range:  "Northern  United  States,  from  Kentucky  northward  to 
Canada  and  British  America."     (Dall).  ,   OoO*^?lc 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  R6TALB.  289 

Michigan:  G«Deral1y  diBtributed. 

lale  Eoyale :  Only  a  single  specimen  was  collected,  the  exact  locality 
of  which  waB  loet. 

30,  Carjfchium  exile  canadense  Clapp. 
Hange:  I^ortbern  United  States  and  Canada. 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed  north  of  the  Saginaw-Qrand  Valley. 
Isle  Eoyale:  Not  collected  in  1905.     See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  97., 
where  it  is  listed  as  Carychium  exile. 

31.  Lt/mn<sa  stagnaUa  (L.).     Fig.  63. 

Range:  "Europe;  the  Caucasus;  Western  and  Northern  Asia;  the 
Northern  United  States;  Canada  and  British  America."     (Dall). 

i^Iichigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale : 

Variety  A.  (Fig.  63,  No.  1.)  II,  1,  Month  of  Benson  Brook,  No.  167;  II, 
4,  McCargoe  Cove.  No.  53;  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89; 
III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone,  Head  of  Kock  Harbor,  Nos.  161,  162,  168;  III,  4, 
Sumner  Lake  Trail,  on  Bock  Harbor,  No.  166 ;  HI,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  No. 
155;  III,  6,  Southwest  Coves  of  Rock  Harbor,  No8.  91,  95;  North  side  of 
Rock  Harbor.  No.  110;  IV,  6,  Small  Island  in  Tobin  Harbor,  No.  123; 
Washington  Harbor  (Wood). 

Variety  B.  (Fig.  63,  No.  3.)  I,  1,  Lake  and  Bay  Beaches,  Nos.  32,  50,  57; 
3rd  Cove  below  Camp  on  Light-house  Peninsula,  No,  7 ;  II,  1,  Mouth  of 
Benson  Brook.  No.  54;  III,  4,  Head  of  Sumner  Lake  Trail,  (Wood) ;  V, 
1,  Beach  at  Siskowit  Bay,  No.  200. 

Variety  C.  (Pig.  63,  No.  6.)  V,  6,  South  shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  Nob. 
199,  210,  211,  217. 

Notes  on  the  babitats  of  this  species  are  giv«i  in  detail  in  the  chapter 
by  H.  A.  Qleason. 

This  lai^  and  widespread  species  seems  in  tbis  coontry  at  least,  to 
exhibit  its  greatest  variability  in  the  La^e  Superior  B^on.  Two  well 
marked  varieties  have  already  been  described;  one  var.  higleyi  Baker 
from  Michipicoten  Island  on  the  north  shore,  and  the  other  var.  aanct/p- 
mariw  Walker  from  the  St.  Mary's  River.  It  is  apparently  one  of  the 
inost  abundant  species  on  Isle  Royale,  where  three  very  distinct  for;>ia 
are  represented,  none  of  which  are  typical  and  none  exactly  coincident 
with  any  of  the  described  varieties.  Al!  the  specimens  collected  fall 
into  one  of  these  groups  which  are  apparently  correlated  with  definite 
local  conditions.  For  present  purposes  they  may  be  designated  as 
varieties  A.  B.  and  C.  Variety  A  (Fig.  63,  No.  1)  most  closely  approaches 
to  the  usual  North  American  form  known  as  var.  appreasa  Say  (Fig.  63, 
No.  4)  from  which  it  differs  mainly  in  the  pear-shaped  rather  than  regu- 
larly rounded  aperture.  It  is  characteristic  of  the  quieter  waters  of  the 
long,  narrow  harbors  which  are  such  a  remarkable  feature  of  the  island. 
The  same  form  has  also  been  collected  in  the  St.  Mary's  River  near  the 
Neebish  Rapids.  Variety  B  is  an  inhabitant  of  the  shores  exposed  to  the 
more  violent  wave^  of  the  main  lake.  Correlated  with  these  conditions 
the  shell  is  smaller,  with  a  short  spire  and  a  relatively  large  body  whorl 
for  the  accommodation  of  the  large  foot  necessary  to  enable  it  to  re- 
tain its  hold  upon  the  rocks,  among  which  it  lives.  This  form  (Fig.  63, 
No.  3)  is  more  nearly  related  to  the  var.  higleyi  (Fig.  63,  No.  5)  from  the 
north  shore,  but  is  apparently  much  smaller.    It  is  about  the  size  of  the 


200  MICHIGAN    SURVKT,    1908. 

Tar.  sanctwmaria  (Fig.  fi3,  No.  2)  but  quite  different  in  the  shape  of  the 
spire.  Variety  C.  (Fig.  63,  No.  6)  is  the  largest  in  cubic  capacity  yet 
known  from  this  country.  It  was  found  only  in  Siskowit  Lake,  whose 
quiet  waters  and  especially  favorable  conditions  have  conduced  to  the 
production  of  this  unusually  fine,  thin,  inflated  form. 

32.*     Lymnaa  megasoma  Say. 

Range:  "Northern  New  England,  Canada,  and  British  America  to 
Lat.  57°  N."  (Dall).  Also  Northern  Michigan,  Wisconsin  and  Minnesota. 

Michigan:     Isle  Hovale,  St,  Mary's  River  and  Roscommon  County. 

Isle  Royale:  IV,  3,  Bayou  at  Tobin  Harbor,  No.  124,  (Adams).  A  siD- 
gle  large,  but  dead,  specimen  was  found  in  a  pond-like  bayou  which  was 
connected  with  Tobin  Harbor  by  a  verj-  narrow  and  short  outlet. 

33.  Lymnwa  emarginata  Say. 

Range :  "Northern  United  States  east  of  the  Mississippi,  Canada  and 
northward."     (Dall), 

Michigan :  Shores  of  the  Qreat  Lakes  north  of  Saginaw  Bay  and  some 
inland  lakes  from  Roscommon  County  northward. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  1,  Lake  and  Bay  Beaches,  Nos.  24,  50,  57,  58,  59,  74, 
118,  and  125;  3rd  Cove  west  of  Camp  on  Light-house  Peninsula,  No.  7; 
III,  4.  Head  of  Sumner  Lake  Trail,  (Wood);  V,  1,  Beach  at  Siskowit 
Bay,  No.  200. 

This  is  a  characteristic  and  abundant  species  along  the  lake  beach 
where  it  was  found  associated  with  var.  B.  of  Lymnwa  stagnalis.  The 
same  form,  but  with  a  rather  heavier  ^ell,  is  very  abundant  along  the 
shore  of  Mackinac  Island.  Specimens  from  one  rock  pool,  No.  58,  are 
peculiar  in  being  longitudinally  striped  with  white  like  Lymnaa  refiexa 
zebra  Tr^on.     Those  from  another,  Nos.  58  and  No.  74,  are  nnicolored. 

34.  Lymtura  piUbryana  Walker. 
(Nautilus,  XXII,  p.  4,  PI.  I,  fig.  2,  8-11,  1907). 
Range :     Isle  Royale  is  the  only  known  locality. 

Isle  Royale:  X,  '04,  Washington  Harbor,  No.  1  (Wood).  TTiis  form, 
so  far  as  the  collections  show,  is  apparently  confined  to  the  west  end 
of  the  island.  It  was  doubtfully  referred  to  LymruBa  aumassi  Bd.  in 
the  Report  Exped,  1904,  p.  97.  A  larger  suite  of  specimens  from  the 
original  locality  in  Washington  Harbor  was  collected  in  1905,  including 
a  few  full  grown  examples  which  confirm  its  specific  distinctness. 

35.*     Lymrura  ohrusaa  Say. 

Range:    "Northern  United  States  and  Northward."     (Dall). 

Michigan:     Generally  distrlbnted. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3, 
Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  No.  164. 

36."     hymnaa  catascopium  Say. 

Range:  "Northern  United  States  to  Rocky  Mountains,  Canada  and 
northward,"     (Dall). 

Michigan :  Shores  of  the  Great  Lakes  and  connecting  rivers  and  lower 
waters  of  tributaries  in  northern  counties. 

Isle  Royale:  North  shore  of  Bock  Harbor,  No.  110;  III.  3,  Bulrush 
Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos,  160,  163,  164;  III,  6.  South- 
west Coves  of  Rock  Harbor,  No.  91;  IV,  3,  Island  No.  14,  Tobin  Harbor, 
No.  30  A;  IV,  6,  Small  Island  in  Tobin  Harbor,  No.  123;  V,  6,  South 
shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  No.  220.  ,  ,  , 

iX.ooglc 


ECMJLOGT  OF    ISLE  ROYALE.  291 

Apparently  iDoet  frequent  ia  flhallow  water  in  placee  aheltered  from 
the  wavea,  but  No.  220,  a  single  very  young  specimen,  was  collected  on 
the  nniJer  surface  of  a  water-lily  leaf. 

With  one  exception,  the  specimens  from  all  these  localities  are  alike 
and  belong  to  the  common,  rather  short,  lake  form  of  this  apeciee.  As- 
sociated with  this  form  at  Station  IV,  6,  was  a  very  thin,  elongated 
form  with  the  characteristic  sculpture  of  catastxypium,  which  is  closely 
related  to,  but  much  more  fragile  than,  the  elongated  form,  which  is 
characteristic  of  the  lower  Great  Lakes. 

37.  Iitmncta  sp? 

Isle  RoTale:  III,  3.  Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor, 
No.  163 ;  iV,  2,  Island  No.  14  in  Tobin  Harbor,  No.  126. 

At  boih  these  localities  occurred  a  few  dead,  fragmentary  and  more 
or  less  decayed  specimens,  which  could  hardly  be  referred  to  any  of  the 
species  listed  above,  and  yet  were  too  imperfect  to  saccessfully  identi^. 

38.  Phym  sfKfii  Tapp. 

Range:     Northern  United  States  and  Canada. 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  1,  Lake  and  Bay  Beaches,  Noe.  50,  57,  118,  125;  3rd 
Cove  west  of  Camp  on  Light-house  Peninsula,  No.  7;  III,  4,  Head  of 
Sumner  Lake  Trail,  (Wood);  V,  1,  Beach  at  Siskowit  Bay,  No.  200; 
Washington  Harbor,   (Wood). 

The  specimens  from  Washington  H8rb<H:  Eire  of  normal  thickness  and 
more  nearly  typical  in  shape  than  those  from  the  other  localities,  which 
are  unusually  thin. 

More  detailed  notes  on  the  local  distribution  of  this  species  are  given 
in  the  chapter  by  H.  A.  Gleason. 

30.*     Phiyta  gyrtna  Say. 

Range:  "The  United  States  east  of  the  Mississippi,  Canada  and  north- 
ward."    (Dall). 

Michigan :     Generally  distribnted. 

Isle  Royale:  II,  5,  Forbes  Late,  Noe.  71  A,  90;  III,  B,  Sonthwest 
Coves  of  Kock  Harbor,  No.  91. 

Specimens  No.  71  A  were  found  on  driftwood  In  water  a  few  inches 
deep. 

The  specimens  from  Forbes  Lake  are  a  very  large,  inflated  form.  Those 
from  the  other  locality  are  much  smaller  and  may  be  one  of  the  varying 
forms  of  No.  41,  though  closer  to  typical  gyrina  than  those  included 
under  that  head. 

40.*    Physa  aplectoides  Sterki. 

Range:    "Tuscarawas  County,  Ohio,  and  elsewhere."    Sterki. 

Michigan:    Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Royale:    V,  11,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  128  A. 

Taken  from  foot-print  pools  in  the  Sedge  and  Buck  Bean  Zone 
about  a  small  ■poaA. 

The  occurrence  of  this  minute  species  so  far  from  its  original  locality 
in  Ohio,  was  one  of  the  surprises  of  the  1905  collection.  It  is  a  very 
distinct  form  resembling  a  young  Aplexa  hypnorum  in  shape  but  beauti- 
fnlly  sculptured,  especially  on  the  apical  whorls.  The  identification  ia 
based  on  comparison  with  topotypes  of  aplectoides  received  from  Dr.  Y. 
Sterki.  .-.  , 

lyCoogle 


292  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

41.  Phyaa  sp? 

iBle  Boyale:  II,  1,  Benson  Brook,  No.  149,  167;  III,  2,  Island  at 
West  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  ,11,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end 
of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  161,  162,  163,  164 ;  North  shore  of  Rock  Harbor, 
No.  110;  III,  5,  Stunner  I^ake,  Nos.  77  A,  78  A,  79  A;  IV,  5,  Neutson's 
Resort  at  Bock  Harbor,  No.  44  A;  IV,  6,  Island  in  Tobin  Harbor,  No. 
123 ;  IV,  7,  Head  of  Tobio  Harbor,  No.  127 ;  V,  1,  Beact  near  Siskowit 
Bay,  No.  200;  V,  6,  South  shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  Nos.  220,  221;  V, 
9.  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake,  No.  238;  V,  11,  Swamp  near  Siskowit  Bay, 
Ko.  126  A. 

Under  this  head  are  included  nearly  all  the  Physw  from  the  harbors 
and  interior  waters  which,  although  exhibiting  considerable  rariatioD 
in  shape  and  size,  appear  to  be  variation  of  a  common  form.  Most  o( 
the  specimens  are  Immatnre.  The  few  mature  examples  at  first  glance 
would  naturally  be  referred  to  Physa  heterostropha  Say,  but  the  uniform 
sculpture  of  the  apical  whorls,  which  becomes  more  or  less  obsolete  on 
the  body  whorl  of  the  mature  shell,  forbids  their  reference  to  that  species. 
The  sculpture  is  that  of  gifriiia  and  the  form  may  ultimately  referred 
to  that  species  as  an  extreme  form,  but  the  shape  of  the  immature  shell, 
its  small,  acute  spire  and  deeply  impressed  suture  is  quite  ditfer^it 
from  that  of  typical  gyrina.  In  the  present  chaotic  state  of  the  nomen- 
clature of  the  American  species  of  Physa  it  would  seem  the  better  policy 
to  refrain  from  any  attempt  at  specific  identification  than  to  run  the 
risk  of  adding  to  an  already ,  over-burdened  synonymy. 

42.  Aplexa  hypnorum  (L.). 

Range :    "Northern    Europe,    Asia  and    America,    Northern    United 
States  and  Canada,"     (Dall). 
Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 
Isle  Royale:     Not  collected  in  1906.     See  Report  Bxped.  1904,  p.  98. 

43.  Planorbia  trivolvw  Say. 

Range:    "Entire  Atlantic  Drainage  of  North  America;  and  the  Mis- 
sissippi Valley  and  northward."     (Dall). 
Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 
Isle  Boyale :    III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nob.  78  A,  135. 
in  a  small  pool  in  the  sedge  zone  of  a  tamarack  swamp. 

44.  Planorbia  bicartnatua  Say. 

Range:  "The  United  States  East  of  the  Rocky  Mountains;  Eaatem 
Canada;  Oregon."     (Dall). 

Michigan:    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Boyale;  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3, 
Bulru-iah  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160;  III,  6, 
Southwest  Coves  of  Rock  Harbor,  No.  91. 

Dredged  from  the  mud  Itottom  at  the  upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  near 
mouth  of  a  small  stream,  in  3-5  feet  of  water  (Nos.  159,  160). 

44a,  var.  strtatuH  Baker. 

Isle  Koyjile:  III.  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end  of  Bock  Harbor, 
No.  102;  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  78  A,  79  A. 

Dredged  from  the  mud  bottom  of  the  small  sluggish  stream  at  the 
head  of  Book  Harbor  (No,  162)  and  from  the  margin  and  sedge  zone 
of  Sumner  Lake  (No.  78  A,  79  A.). 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGT  OP  ISLB  ROTALB.  293 

44b,"    var.  fvyalensis  Walker. 

(Nautilns,  XXII,  p.  9-10,  PI.  I,  fig.  11,  (1909). 

Isle  Eojale:    V,  6,  Sonth  shore  of  Siakowit  Lake,  No.  210. 

This  novel  and  very  distinct  form,  characterized  by  its  very  acate 
carinie  and  rough,  irregularly  corrugated  surface,  was  one  of  the  most 
interesting  discoveries  of  the  expedition. 

In  the  mud  among  loose  stones  at  a  depth  of  about  1  foot. 

45.  Planoriia  campanulatus  Say, 

Range:  "Atlantic,  Mackenzie  and  Hudson  Bay  water  sheds  and  north 
to  Great  Slave  Lake."     (Dall). 

Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Tale  Boyale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  78  A,  79  A;  V,  6,  South  shore 
of  Siskowit  Lake,  Kos.  210,  211. 

In  mud  and  among  loose  stones  at  a  depth  of  about  one  foot  (Nob. 
210,  211)  and  in  small  pools  in  the  Sedge  7one  (Nos.  78  A,  79  A). 

The  specimens  from  Sumner  Lake  are  the  usual  form.  Those  from  Sis- 
kowit Lake  are  a  peculiar  variety  resembling  the  rare  Planorhis  multi- 
volvis  Case,  in  having  apparently  the  apical  whorls  elevated  above  the 
line  of  the  body  whorl.  Unfortunately  the  upper  surface  of  all  the  speci- 
mens collected  is  so  eroded  that  it  is  impossible  to  determine  juat  what 
degree  of  elevation  the  spire  of  the  perfect  shell  attains. 

46.  Planorlis  exacuous  Say. 

Eange:  "Northern  United  States,  east  of  the  Bockies;  Canada,  etc., 
Bouth  to  New  Mexico."     (Dall). 

Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Boyale:  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Bock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3, 
Bulrush  Zone  at  the  western  end  of  Bock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160,  161, 
162. 

In  the  muddy  bottom  of  a  small  stream  Sowing  into  Bock  Harbor  and 
in  the  Harbor  itself,  at  a  depth  of  2-5  feet  (Nos.  159  to  163). 

47.  Planorhis  parvus  Say. 

Bauge:  "Eastern  North  America  from.  Florida  to  North  Lat.  67-°, 
and  the  Yukon  Drainage  System."     (Dall). 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Boyale :  I,  1,  Rock  Pool,  No.  2,  Light-house  Peninsula,  No.  59 ; 
III,  2,  Small  Island  at  Bock  Hart)or,  No.  89;  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at 
western  end  of  Bock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160,  163,  164;  III,  5,  Sumner 
Lake,  No.  79  A;  III,  6,  Southwest  Coves  of  Bock  Harbor,  No.  91. 

As  with  the  last  species  (Nos.  159,  160,,  163  and  164). 

48.  Planorbis  hirsutus  Old. 

Range:     '"Washington,  D.  C,  northward  east  of  the  Mississippi." 
(Dall). 
Michigan:    Generally  distributed. 
Isle  Boyale:    Not  collected  in  1905.    See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  98. 

49.  Ancybis  sp? 

Isle  Boyale :    I,  3,  Balsam-spruce  Forest,  No.  140. 

"In  the  damp  leaf  mold  in  the  dense  shade  of  the  balsam-spruce 
forest." 

A  single  broken  specimen,  too  much  damaged  to  identify  spocifically, 
was  the  only  one  obtained.  There  is  apparently  some  mistaJie  in  regard 
to  the  locality  where  this  specimen  was  found.  /^      -,nl,> 

50.  Talvata  tricarinata  Say.  v^.UOyiL 


294  MICHIGAN   SUHTBT,   IMS. 

Bange :  "From  New  England  and  Virginia  westward  to  Missouri  and 
northward."     (Dall). 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale;  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3, 
Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (Nos.  160,  163). 

In  the  mad  in  deep  water  at  the  head  of  Bock  Harbor  (Nos.  160, 
163). 

51.  Yalvata  leteisii  Currier. 

Range :  "Northern  United  States  from  Atlantic  to  Pacific  and  North- 
ward."    (Dall). 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale;  Not  collected  in  1905.  See  Report  Exped.  1904,  p.  98, 
cited  as  Valvata  aincera  lewi»ii. 

52.  Valvata  aincera  nylanderi  Dall. 

Banj;^:  Northern  United  States  from  Maine  to  Wisconsin. 

Michigan :  Isle  Royale  and  Marquette  County. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3,  Bul- 
rush Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160,  163,  164;  V, 
6,  South  Shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  No.  220. 

With  Valvata  tricarinata  at  the  head  of  Bock  Harbor  and  in  shallow 
water  in  Siskowit  Lake  (No.  220),  especially  abundant  on  the  lower 
side  of  water-lily  leares. 

53.  Amnicola  limoaa  (Say). 

Range;  "Virginia  to  Wisconsin  and  Hudson  Bay."  (Dall). 
Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  V,  6,  South  shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  No.  220,  living  in 
company  with  the  preceding  species  under  water-lily  leaves. 

54.  Amnicola  histrica  Pile. 
Range :  Northern  United  States. 
Michigan;     Generallv  distributed. 

Isle  Royale :  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89 ;  III.  3,  Bul- 
rush Zone  at  western  end  of  Kock  Harbor.  Nos.  159,  160,  163,  164. 

In  muddy  bottom  in  deep  water  (3-5  feet  deep)  at  the  head  of  Rock 
Harbor. 

55.  iMmpailis  Juteola  (Lam). 

Range :  "Entire  Mississippi  drainage  and  north  to  the  Bed  River  of 
the  North."     (Dall). 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  V.  6,  South  shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  Nos.  210,  211,  218. 

Some  of  the  specimens  collected  are  very  similar  to  the  form  from  the 
Beaver  Islands.  Lake  Michigan,  referred  to  Lampsilis  ioreaJis  Gray,  but 
they  are  connected  by  intermediate  specimens  with  the  more  tyi>ical 
form  and  seem  I'iither  referable  to  this  species  than  to  horcalis. 

56.  Anodonta  grandis  footiana  Lea. 

Range:  Northern  United  States  and  northward. 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale;  II.  4.  McCargoe  Cove.  No.  52;  III.  2,  Small  Island  in 
Rock  HRPhor,  No.  89;  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  it^estern  end  of  Bock 
rrarlior,  No,  168 ;  III,  4,  near  head  of  Trail  to  Sumner  Lake,  Bock  Har- 
bor. No.  93;  III,  5.  Sumner  Ijake,  No.  154;  III.  6.  Southwest  Coves  of 
Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  91,  91,  156;  South  Side  of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  109; 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROTALE.  205 

V,  6,  South  Shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  Nob.  210,  211,  218;  Sargent  Lake, 
No.  112. 

Abundant  in  all  of  the  takea,  especially  on  sandy  or  gravelly  Iwttom 
in  the  smaller  coves  sheltered  from  the  waves. 

57.    Anodonta  marginata  Say, 

Bange:  "Drainage  of  the  St.  Lawrence  River  basin,  including  the 
Lakes."     (Dall). 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Koyale:  II,  1.  Benson  Brook  Clearing,  No.  80  A;  II,  5,  Forbes 
I^ake,  No.  90;  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  94,  120,  135,  139,  154,  186, 
(Wood) ;  IV,  3,  Bavon  at  Tobin  Harbor,  No.  124;  V.  6,  South  shore  of 
Siskowit  Lake,  No.  210;  VII,  '04,  Lake  Desor,  No.  139  A. 

58.*     Sphaerium  gimile  (Say). 

Range:  "United  Staites  east  of  the  Mississippi  Biver;  Canada,  Mani- 
toba."    (Dall). 

Michigan:    Lake  Michigan  and  Lake  Superior. 

Isle  EoyaJe:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake.    Only  two  immature  valves  taken. 

59.*    Sphaerium  loalkeri  Sterki. 

Range:  Lake  Michigan  and  Northward. 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89.  A  single 
fragmentary  specimen  is  doubtfully  referred  to  this  species  by  Dr.  V. 
Sterki. 

60."    Muscutium  securts  (Prime). 

Range :    Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Minnesota. 

Michigan:  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III.  3,  Bulrush  Zone,  Rock  Harbor,  No.  160;  III,  5, 
Sumner  Lake,  Nob.  77  A,  78  A,  79,  176 ;  V,  9,  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake, 
No.  238.  A  few  examples  only  of  a  small  form.  Some  immature  ex- 
amples from  the  latter  locality  "may  be  the  same." 

In  small,  shallow  pools  in  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake  (No.  238)  and 
at  the  margin  and  Sedge  Zone  of  Sumner  Lake  (No.  77  A,  78  A). 

61.*     Pisidium  idajioenge  Roper. 

Range:  Idaho;  Washington;  Alaska;  Lake  Michigan;  Lake  Saperior. 

Michigan:     Lake  Michigan  and  Lake  Superior. 

Isle  Royale:  IIL  2.  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3, 
Bulroflh  Zone,  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160.  162,  163.  Rather  common. 
The  Isle  Royale  form  is  similar  to  that  from  Lake  Michigan  and  is  neither 
as  lai^e  nor  as  inflated  as  the  typical  form. 

Dredged  from  a  muddy  bottom  in  2-5  feet  of  water  at  the  head  of 
Bock  Harbor  and  in  a  small  stream  (lowing  into  it.  (Nos.  159,  160, 
162.  163.) 

62.    Pisidium  variabile  Prime. 

Range:  "Eastern  United  States,  north  of  Virginia;  Colorado  anil 
northward."     (Dall). 

Michigan :  Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  77  A;  III.  2.  Small  Island  in 
Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  IIT,  3,  Rnlrush  Zone,  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  160, 
162,  163;  V,  9.  Outlet  of  Siskowit  I^ake,  No.  338. 

With  the  last  at  the  bead  of  Bock  Harbor,  and  also  in  the  small 


lyCoogle 


296  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

pools  with  gravel  bottom  in  the  outlet  from  Siskowit  Lake  and  at  the 
margin  of  Sumner  Lake. 

62a.*    Tar.  brevius  Sterki. 

Range: '  "Michigan;   Minnesota  and  Keewatin."    '(Sterki.) 

Michigan :  Upper  Peninsula  and  northern  part  of  the  Lower  Pen- 
insula. 

Isle  Rojale:  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone,  Hock  Harbor,  Nos.  160.  164.  All 
the  examples  both  of  the  typical  form  and  the  variety  are  "Bmall  and 
mostly  immature." 

With  the  typical  form  in  the  mud  bottom  in  3-5  feet  of  water  at  the 
head  of  Kock  Harbor. 

63."     Pisidium  affine  Sterki. 

Range:  "Great  Lake  Region,  Michigan  to  New  York;  Minnesota. 
Illinois  and  Ohio  (Ohio  River  Drainage)."     (Sterki). 

Michigan:  Generally  distributed. 

l^e  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nob.  77  A,  79  A.  A  few  ex- 
amples, "quite  small,"  from  the  margin  and  Sedge  Zone. 

64.*     Pisidium  sargenti   Sterki? 

Range:    "Northern  United  States,  New  Y(ffk  to  Minnesota."  (Sterki). 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed  in  Lower  Peninsala;   Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  No.  176.  Two  specimens  only, 
which  "may  be  Piaidimrt  sargen-ti.  One  example  is  large,  especially  in 
contrast  with  the  small  forms  of  tbe  other  species.  In  the  smaller 
specimen  the  hinge  is  partly  reversed." 

65.*     Pisidium  8(mt€llatum  Sterki. 

Range:  Northern  United  States,  Michigan  to  Washington  and 
northward. 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  2,  Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III.  3. 
Bulrush  Zone,  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  159,  160,  163,  16i;  "Small,  north- 
em  variety.     The  most  common  species  and  somewhat  variable." 

In  the  mud  and  silt  bottom  in  10  inches  to  5  feet  of  water  at  the 
upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (Noa  159,  160,  163). 

66.*     Pisidiwn  roperi  Sterki. 

Range:     Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Minnesota. 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  No.  78;  IV,  8,  Trail  to  Green- 
stone Range,  No.  128.     "Small,  but  good  and  characteristic." 

67.*     Pisidium  ventricosum.  Prime. 

Range:     Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Michigan  and  northward. 

Michigan:  Western  part  of  the  State,  Kent  County  to  Charlevoix 
County ;  Marquette  County ;  Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  77  A,  79  A;  III,  2,  Small 
Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3,  Bulmsh  Zone  at  Rock  Harbor, 
Nos.  163,  164. 

In  10  inches  of  water  in  the  Potamogeton  Zone  at  the  mouth  of  a 
creek  at  the  upper  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (No.  163)  and  at  the  margin 
and  in  the  sedge  of  Sumner  Lake. 

68.*     Pisidium  snJtrotundam  Sterki. 

Range:     "New  England;  Anticoeti  Island  to  Michigan."     (Sterki). 

Michigan :     Kent,  Marquette  and  Ontonagon  counties  and  Isle  Royale. 


ECOLOOT   OF   ISLB  ROYALS.  297 

iBle  Boyale:  I,  6,  Sphagnum-Sproce  Bog,  No.  116;  IV,  8,  TWul  to 
Greenstone  Range,  No.  128;  III,  3,  Bnlrusli  Zone  at  western  end  of 
Kock  Harbor,  Nos.  159.  160;  I,  4,  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vita  Swamp, 
No8.  181,  1^;  V,  5,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  237;  V,  9,  Outlet  of  Siakowit 
Lake,  No.  238.  A  "form"  of  this  species  "common  and  somewhat  vari- 
able." 

Am<mg  dead  leaves  and  sedges  at  the  bottom  of  shallow  pools  in  a 
tamarack  swamp  (No.  116).  In  silt  and  debris  on  the  bottom  in  4-S 
feet  of  water  (Noa.  1H9,  160);  small  sphagnam-lined  pools,  seldom 
exceeding  six  inches  in  depth  in  dense  shade  (Nos.  181,  182);  among 
sphagnnm  and  Utricularia  in  smalt  streams  and  pools,  mostly  in  the 
sun  (No.  237) ;  in  shaded,  shallow  pools  with  gravelly  bottom  (No. 
238). 

69.*    Ptstdiian  rotundatwn  Prime. 

Range:  Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Minnesota  and  north- 
ward. 

Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  I,  6,  Sphagnum-spruce  Bog,  No.  116;  III,  3,  Bulrush 
Zone,  Eock  Harbor  No.  160;  V,  5,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  237;  "Few 
and  probably  none  mature." 

Among  dead  leaves  and  sedges  at  the  bottom  of  shallow  pools,  in 
shade  (No.  116) ;  among  sphagnum  and  Utricularia  in  small,  shallow 
streams  and  pools,  mostly  in  the  sun  (No.  237.) 

70.*    Piaiddum  splendidulum  Sterki. 

Range:     Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Michigan. 

Michigan :     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  77  A,  79  A,  176.  At  margin 
and  in  the  Sedge  Zone. 

71.*    Piaidium  pauperculum  Sterki. 

Range:    Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Minnesota. 

Michigan :    Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor, 
No.  164.    A  few  specimens  of  a  small  form. 

72,*    Piaidium  medianum  Sterki. 

Eauge:    Northern  United  States,  Maine  to  Wisconsin. 

Michigan:     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:  III,  5,  Sumner  Lake,  Nos.  77  A,  78  A,  79  A;  III,  2, 
Small  Island  in  Rock  Harbor,  No.  89;  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  western 
end  of  Rock  Harbor,  Nos.  160,  164 ;  V,  9,  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake, 
No.  238. 

Near  the  mouth  of  a  small  creek,  on  a  silt  and  mud  bottom  at  a 
depth  of  5'  feet  (No.  160) ;  In  shallow,  shaded  pools  with  gravellv 
bottom  (No.  238). 

73.*    Pisidium  pwustatwn  aimples;  Sterki. 

Range:    "Michigan,  Wisconsin  and  Illinois."     (Sterki.) 

Michigan:    Carp  Lake,  Emmet  Co.  and  Isle  Royale. 

Isle  Boyale:  III,  3,  Bulrush  Zone  at  Western  end  of  Rock  Harbor, 
No.  160. 

74.*    Piaidium  milium  Held. 

Range:    Europe;  Maine  and  Michigan. 

Michigan:    Generally  distributed.  ,-.  , 

39  DijtizBdbyLlOOglC 


298  MICHIGAN    SUHVET,    1908. 

Isle  Royale :  III,  3,  Bulmsh  Zone  at  western  end  of  Bock  Harbor, 
No8.  160,  162.  !No.  162  occurred  in  a  smaJi  creek  near  its  mouth,  on  a 
silt  and  debris-covered  bottom  at  a  depth  of  3  feet. 

75.  Pisidivm.  ahditum  Haldenian. 

Range:     "Nortb  America,  from  Honduras,  north  to  Alaska."   (Dall). 

Michigan ;     Generally  distributed. 

Isle  Royale:     Not  found  in   1905."   See  Report  Exped.,  1904,  p.   98. 

76.  Pisidmm  sp.? 

Isle  Royale:  Undetermined  forms  of  Pisidium  were  collected  in  the 
following  localities:  III,  3,  Bulmsh  Zone  at  western  end  of  Rock 
Harbor,  Nos.  169,  160,  163;  V,  5,  Tamarack  Swamp,  No.  237. 


3y  Google 


:: 


abiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


[_ 

-_   - 

"^ 

"     ~ 

i  I 

± 

L 

-OOSQOI:~(Dm' 

Vtiriates. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


iloglc*!  tSurvF;  o(  Mlcblson-  Annunl  Report  for  1908. 


I.YHNAKA    STAdNAI.IS    VARIETIK8    FROM    I8LB    BOTALB.'^ 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE  ROYALB. 


REPORT    OX    THE    ISLE  ROYALE  ORTHOPTERA  OP  THE  1905 
EXPEDITION. 


1.     General  Remarks. 

The  orfhoptera  secured  by  the  University  Museum  expedition  of  1905 
to  Isle  Royale  eonsist  of  representatives  of  13  spepieB.  Of  these,  one 
is  a  cosmopolitan  roach,  tlie  Croton-bug,  BlatteUa  germanica,  doubt- 
less introduced  in  nierchaudise  through  man's  agency.  The  others,  with 
a  single  exception,  are  boreal  Acridians  characteristic  of  the  cooler 
parts  of  central  and  eastern  North  America,  whose  presence  in  this 
locality  was  either  known  or  to  be  confidently  expected.  The  exception, 
MeUmoplas  ala«kantis,  is  a  species  hitherto  known  only  from  the  North- 
west, whose  presence  on  Isle  Royale,  in  sufficient  numbers  to  make  it 
appear  to  be  the  dominant  species  of  its  genus  there,  was,  to  say  the 
least,  unlooked  foK  It  would  be  of  much  interest  in  this  connection  to 
know  the  status  of  this  species  on  the  adjoining  northern  mainland. 

Some  striking  variations  are  present  in  the  representatives  of  certain 
species  and  will  be  found  noted  in  the  following  list.  In  general,  there 
seems  to  be  a  tendency  toward  an  increaiied  duskiness  of  coloring  as 
shown  by  Camnitla  ptAlueida,  Hippiscus  tuberculatus.  and  Circotettix 
vemiculatus  (all  geophilous  species),  due  perhaps  to  humidity,  per- 
haps to  environmental  coloration;  also,  as  compared  with  eastern  ma- 
terial, the  specimens  are  of  relatively  large  size,  particularly  in  the 
cases  of  Melanoplus  ej^tremus  and  faaciatus. 

The  locust  societies  represented  consist  of  campestral  and  thamnoph- 
ilous  groups,  though  all  of  the  species  are  to  be  obtained  in  the  clear- 
ings or  about  their  edges,  rather  than  in  the  forest. 

The  thanmophile  species  are  Chloealtis  conspcrsa  and  abdominalis, 
Melanoplu«  fasciatus  and  httroni.  The  campestral  species,  notwith- 
standing the  generally  forested  character  of  the  country,  are  more 
numerous  and  consist  both  of  phytophilous  and  geophilous  species.  In 
the  damper  situations  occur  iStenohothrus  curtipeiin^K,  Mecostethiis  Une- 
attis,  Alelanoplus  extreniug  and  femoratns.  In  drier  places  Camnv-la 
pelluGtdaf  Meldtwpliia  aUiakantis,  and  Bippiacvs  tuierculatus  are  to  be 
found.  Characteristic  of  the  bare  rock  ridges  is  the  saxicolous  Circo- 
tcttiat  vemiculatus.  The  two  latter  species,  with  their  strikingly  colored 
wings  and  noisy  Sight,  are  the  most  conspicuous  members  of  the  orthop- 
terouB  fauna  of  the  island. 

The  1904  expedition  secured  examples  of  a  Tettigid  (Tettix  acndiais) 
and  of  a  wingless  Ix)custarian — Ceuthophilus  aecUisus.  The  B|>ecie8  of 
CeutlMphihis  usually  inhabit  damp,  dark  places,  under  bark,  in  hollow 
logs,  etc.,  and  are  among  the  most  characteristically  sylvan  of  our  oi^>ol(^ 


tboptera. 


300  MICHIGAN   SDEVBT.   1908. 

The  lot  Qimibers  refer  to  the  field  numbers  of  the  collectors,  thtwe 
without  a  letter  to  H.  A.  Oleaaon  and  those  followed  by  an  A.  to  C. 
C.  Adams. 

2.    Annotated  List  of  Spedcs. 

Blattidce. 

1.  BlottelUi  germanica  Linn.  Croton-bug.  Station  I,  7,  camp.  Lot 
179,  July  28.  A  single  female  with  o6theca.  Probably  introduced  Id 
merchandise. 

AcridHdae. 

2.  Stenoiothrus  citrtipennis  Harr.  Stations  I,  7,  camp;  V,  3;  T,  a; 
I,  '04  and  VIII,  '04.  Lota  99  A.,  134  A.,  137,  228,  232.  July  24  to 
Aug.  24. 

This  species  is  a  characteristic  inhabitant  of  moiat,  grassy  or  se^ 
meadowa.  It  waa  taken  in  the  caasandra  and  hnnunock  zone  at  V,  5. 
and  in  a  clearing  near  end  of  Wendigo  road  at  Washington  Harbor. 
Both  long — and  abort-winged  forms  were  secured. 

3.  Cttloealtis  abdormnalis  Thom.  Stations  II,  3;  IV,  5;  and  I,  '04. 
Lots  121,  143,  154  A.  July  21,  25,  Aug.  24.  A  young  male  in  5tli  stage 
on  July  21. 

4.  Chloealtis  con»perta  Harr.  Stations  I,  1 ;  II,  3 ;  and  I,  '04.  Lots 
22,  143.  141,  147,  354  A.  July  6  to  Aug.  24.  A  young  miile  in  5th  stage 
on  Jnly  6,  Some  of  the  males  of  this  species  show  indications  of  the 
more  closely  reticulated  spot  in  the  tegmina  so  characteristic  of  aii- 

■dominalis. 

The  species  of  this  genus  are  dwellers  in  thicket  and  woodland  edges, 
ovipOBiting  usually  in  decayed,  though  sometimes  in  firm,  wood. 

5.  Mecostethua  lineatva  Scudd.  Stations- II,  5;  V,  5;  V,  11;  and  I, 
'04.    Loft  91  A..  136  A.,  154  A.,  180.    July  8  to  Aug.  24. 

Numerous  immature  examples  of  this  genus  are  referred  to  thi« 
species  with  some  doubt,  and  it  is  quite  poBsible  that  aoine  of  them  be- 
long to  an  allied  species.  The  hind  tibiae  of  these  young  specimens  are 
markedly  fuscous. 

6.  Camnula  pcUucida  Scudd.  Stations  I,  7;  IV,  5;  V,  3;  and  I,  '04. 
Lots  121,  133,  222,  228,  154  A.  July  21  to  Ang.  24.  Young  in  4th  and 
5th  stages  on  July  21  and  22. 

The  representatives  of  this  species,  like  those  of  some  others,  are  im- 
usually  dark  in  color,  a  phase  of  coloration  probably  correlated  with  the 
hnmid  climate  or  soil  background.  This  is  a  campestral  species,  occur- 
ring plentifully  from  Atlantic  to  Pacific  oceans  in  the  boreal  zone, 
usually  upon  dry,  upland  soil. 

7.  Hippiacus  tuberculatua  Palis.  Goral-winged  Locust.  Stations 
IV,  5;  IV,  9;  V,  9.     Lots  121,  122,  215.    July  21  to  Aug.  7. 

This  species  is  represented  by  6  males,  4  females,  which  differ  marked- 
ly from  typical  eastern  examples  in  being  deeply  infuscated,  the  hind 
tibiae  coral  red  except  on  basal  half  of  outer  side,  and  in  baying  tbe 
posterior  process  of  the  pronotum  more  produced. 

This  large  locust  is  an  inhabitant  of  clearings  on  dry  soil.    Itn  bright- 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROTALE.  301 

colored  wings  (whence  the  name  of  Coral-winged  Locast  ia  derived) 
render  it  a  conspicuona  object  during  its  powerful  and  usnally  snatained 
flight. 

8.  Circotettix  verruculatus  Kirbv.     stations  I,  5;  I,  7;  II,  3;  III; 

IV.  5;  V,  2;  V,  3;  V,  9.    Lota  121,  131,  132,  144,  108,  147,  179,  208,  201, 

213,  215,  222,  239,  27,  107  A.,  135  A.     July  20  to  Aug.  16. 

This  BpecieB  is  represented  bj  nnmeroua  specimena,  in-  general  very 
dark  in  color,  which  were  secured  in  the  cladonia  zone,  the  beach  heath 
zone,  rock  clearings  and  ridges.  It  is  a  typically  aaxicolons  locnat,  de- 
lighting to  sun  itself  on  outcropping  ledges  of  rock  or  the  neighboring 
patches  of  bare  soil  and  usually  presents  a  very  cloae  resemblance  in 
coloration  to  its  background. 

9.  Melanoplm  aJaakanus  Scudd.    Stations  I,  7;  II,  3;  IV,  5;  IV,  9; 

V,  2;  V,  9:  V,  11;  and  I,  '04.  Lots  55,  121,  122.  133,  137,  144,  146,  147, 
166,  179,  215.  216.  107  A..  154  A.,  136  A.    July  21  to  Aug.  24. 

This  Bpeciea,  described  from  Alaska,  is  apparently  the  dominant  form 
of  the  genus  occurring  on  Isle  Boyale,  to  judge  from  its  abundance  in 
the  material  examined  and  the  localities  whence  derived.  It  is  recorded 
from  clearings,  along  trails,  rock  ridgea,  the  beach  heath  zone,  etc.  As 
the  original  description  was  based  on  a  small  aeries  of  apecimena, 
measurements  follow  to  show  the  range  of  size  in  the  material  at  hand. 
The  coloration  varies  much  individually,  recalling  that  of  femur-rub- 
riim.  in  cool,  moist  regions. 

Length  of  body:  c?  20-23.5;  9 ,  23-29.  Hind  femora:  &,  12-14;  2 ,  12- 
14.5.     Tegmina:d",  19-20.5;  2,  17.5-23  mm. 

10.  Melanoplua  extremus  Walk.'  Stations  II,  B;  V,  B;  V,  11.  Lota 
180,  99  A.,  136  A.    July  8  to  Aug.  16. 

This  species  was  found  in  the  cassandra  and  sedge  zone  of  the 
swamps,  and  on  the  jack  pine  ridge.  It  ia  a  typical  inhabitant  of  moist 
meadows  throughout  the  Canadian  zone  from  Alaska  to  Nova  Scotia. 
The  examples  secured  are  of  large  aize  and  measurements  are  ap- 
pended. 

Lei>gthof  bodv:  c?,  20-21;  9,26  29.  Hind  femora:  d*,  11.7  12.7;5  ,13.5- 
14.6    Tegmina:  c?.  11.5-14.5;  2,  13.5-15.5  mm. 

11.  Melanoplua  fasaatua  Barnst.-Walk.  Stations  IT,  3;  III;  V,  2; 
V.  3;  W,  5;  V,  9;  IIL  '04.     Lola  121,  131.  114.  146,  193,  207,  208,  212, 

214.  231,  213,  222.  239, 101  A..  107  A.,  135  A..  143  A.    Jnly  20  to  Aug.  16. 
This  is  a  common  and  widely  distributed  species  in  the  procumbens, 

heath  and  cladonia  zones.  It  is  a  tbamnophilous  species  in  the  east, 
and  typically  short-winged,  but  in  the  central  part  of  the  continent  ex- 
amples with  fully  developed  wings  and  tegmina  are  not  rare,  and  both 
forms  are  represented  among  the  material  secured.  The  average  size  is 
considerably  greater  than  that  of  specimens  from  the  east  and  measure- 
men  ta  are  appended. 

Length  of  body:  c?,  19-23;  2,  23-27.  Hind  femora;  d",  10.7-12;  2,  12- 
13.5.     Tegmina;  c?,  11.5-18-5  (average  12.5);  2,  10.5-18  mm. 

12.  Melanoplus  femoratM  Burni.  Station  I,  7,  camp.  July  24.  Lot 
137,  a  single  male. 

13.  Melanoplua  huroni  Blatchley.  Stations  I,  Light-bouse  Penin- 
sula; I,  5;  III.  5;  IV,  5;  IV,  7.    Lots  35,  44,  121,  131.  183,  35  A.   July 

8  to  29.    Seven  females  from  dry,  aspen-covered,  burned-over  ridge,  rock  ,1  -, 
clearing  and  ridges.  cV 


302  MICHIGAN   8URVBT.   1908. 

The  Melanopli  have  been  determined  fron^  adult  examplea  Bolely. 
There  are  in  addition  numerous  immature  specimens,  in  several  stages, 
representing  at  least  three  epeeies  and  possibly  more,  whicb  cannot  be 
identified  with  certaiaty  at  present. 


3.  Station  List,  1905  Collections. 

I,  1.    Lake  Superior  and  Bay  Beaches. 

Ckloealtis  conapersa,   {No.  22). 
1,  5.    Jaelj  Pine  Bidge. 

Circotettix  tx-rnirulatiis,  (108,  27). 

Melanoplus  huroni,  (44). 

I,  7.    Camp  at  Light-bouse  Clearing. 

Blattclla  germanica,   (179). 
Stenobotkrva  curtipentUs,    (137). 
Camtuila  pellucida,  (133). 
Circotettix  verrueulatua,   (179). 
MeUinoplus  alaskanua,  (133,  137,  166,  179). 
Melanoplus  femoratus,  (137). 

II,  3.    Bock  Bidge  Clearings  on  McCargoe  Cove  Trail. 

Chloealtis  consperM,   (143,  144,  147). 
Cliloealtia  abdominalts,  (143). 
Circotettix  verructilatus,  (147,  144). 
Melanoplus  alaskanus,  (144,  146,  147,  55). 
Melanoplus  fasciatus,   (144,  146). 

II,  5.    Forbes  Lake. 

Mecostethus  lineatus,  (ISO). 
Melanoplus  extremus,   (180). 

III.  Western  End  of  Hock  Harbor. 

Circotettix  verruculatus,  (131,  132). 
Melanoplus  fasciatus,  (131). 
Melanoplus  huroni,  (131). 

III,  5.     Sumner  Lake. 

Melanoplus  huroni,    (183). 

IV,  5.  Clearing  at  Neutson's  Resort. 

ClUoealtis  abdominalis,  jav.,   (121). 
Camnula  pellucida,  (121). 
Hippiscus  tubcrculatus,   (121). 
Circotettix  verruculatus,   (121). 
Melanoplus  alaskanus,    (121). 
MeUinoplus  huroni,   (121). 
Melanoplus  fasciatus,   (121). 
rV,  7.    Head  of  Tobin  Harbor. 

MelanoplHs  huroni,  (35  A.). 

IV,  9.     Mountain  Top. 

Hippiscus  tuhercuJatus,   (122). 
Melanoplus  alaskanvs,   (122). 

V,  2.     Heath  Zone  and  Beach. 

Circotettix  rcrniculatus,   (A.  135,  A.  107). 

Melanoplus  alaskanvs.   (107  A.). 

Melanoplus  fasciatus,  (101  A,  135  A,  ^PT  A^.Qqqq[(> 


ECOLOGY   OP  ISLE   ROTALE.  303 

V,  3.    Rock  Clearing  at  Camp  on  Siakowit  Bay. 

Stenobothrus  curtipennig,  (99  A.,  228). 

Camnula  pelludda,  (222,  228). 

Circotettix  verruculatua,  (239,  222,  208,  201,  212). 

Melanoplus  faaciatus,   (193,  201,  208,  212,  214,  222,  239,  231). 
V,  5.     Tamarack  Swamp. 

SteTiobotkrus  curtipennig,  (99  A.)- 

Mecoetethua  lincatus,  (91  A.). 

Mekmoplus  extrcmus,   (99  A.). 
V,  9.    OoHet  to  Siskowit  Lake. 

Sippiacus  tuberculatua,  (215). 

Melanoplus  alaakanua,   (215). 

Melanoplua  fasctatua,  (215). 

Circotettix  verruculatua,   (215). 
V,  11,     Tamarack-Spince  Swamp. 

Mecoatethus  Uneatua,  (136  A.). 

Melanoplus  alaalcanut,  (136  A.,  216). 

MeUinophia  extremua,    (136  A.). 
I,  '04.     Clearing  ou  the  Shore  of  Washington  Harbor. 

Stenohothrua  curtipennia,  {154  A.). 

Chlaealtia  abdominalia,   (154  A.). 

Chloealtis  conapersa,  (154  A.). 

Mecottethus  lineatua,   (154  A.). 

Camnula  pellucida,  (154  A.). 

Melanoplua  alaakanua.   (154  A.). 

Melanoplua  ep.  indet.   9 . 
Ill,  '04.    Trail  along  the  Top  of  Greenstone  Range. 

Melanophia  faaciatua,  (143  A.). 
VIII,  '04.     Western  End  of  Siskowit  Bay. 

Stenobothrua  curtipennia,  (232). 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE  ROTALB. 


NEUROPTEEOID  INSECTS  FROM  ISLE  ROYALE,  MICHIGAN. 

DR.  JA^ES  G.  NEEDHAM,  COBNELL  UNIVERBITX. 

A  small  bat  intereBting  collection  of  aquatic  larvae  of  dragonflies, 
Btonefllee  and  mayfiies  was  obtained  from  Isle  Royale,  and  the  fine 
Btonefly,  Pteronarcya  dorsata  Say,  from  the  Northern  Peninsula.  Among 
the  dragonfly  larvae  were  two  that  are  hitherto  nndescribed,  a  species 
of  Syrwpetrum  too  immature  for  description,  and  the  cast  skins  and  the 
young  larva  of  a  species  of  Somatochlora,  described  below.  The  list  is 
as  follows: 

Odonata. 

1.  AnOfte  Junius  Drury.  A  young  larva  from  Isle  Boyale  was  col- 
lected on  August  14  (No.  120  A)  in  a  rock  pool  on  the  beach  (V,  2) ; 
and  another  on  July  29  at  Summer  Lake  (III,  5). 

2.  Aeachna  sp.?  perhaps  constricta  Say.  Represented  by  both  cast 
skins  and  nymphs  from  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5),  Nos.  170,  221,  72  A, 
77  A,  78  A,  79  A;  a  rock  pool  on  the  beach  {V,  2)  on  August  14;  in  the 
stomach  of  a  duckling  loon  {Gavia  imber)  from  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  6) 
August  10,  No.  108  A;  and  from  the  mai^n  of  a  swamp  (V,  11) 
on  August  16  (No.  126  A). 

3.  Aeachna  sp?  A  second  species,  represented  by  a  single  young 
larva,  was  taken  in  a  rock  pool  (V,  2)  on  August  14  (No.  120  A).'  It 
has  lateral  spines  on  segments  B-9  of  the  abdomen,  that  of  5  (usually 
absent)  being  very  small.  , 

4.  Somatochlora  sp?  Perhaps  8.  forctpata  Selys.  (This  suggestion 
as  to  the  species  is  based  solely  on  the  fact  that  this  species  is  known 
to  occur  commonly  at  Duluth,  Minn.).  A  single  young  nymph  in 
alcohol,  July  26,  from  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor,  No.  162;  and  a  cast 
skin  (No.  89)  from  Rock  Harbor  (III,  1)  July  14,  1905.  Being  new  to 
science,  a  description  drawn  from  the  cast  skin  is  herewith  offered. 

Length  23  mm.,  abdomen  13  mm.,  hind  femur  7  mm.,  width  of  head  6 
mm.,  of  abdomen  7  mm. 

Body  stout,  hairy  on  all  margins.  Antennae  very  hairy,  and  also  the 
legs,  especially  the  tibiae  externally.  Head  with  a  ruff  of  stiff  rough 
recurved  hairs  overspreading  the  abruptly  narrowed  bind  angles.  La- 
bium stout  and  wide,  its  hinge  reaching  posteriorly  well  between  the 
bases  of  the  fore  legs.  Median  lobe  prominently  angulate  in  the  mid- 
dle ;  mental  setae  alwut  thirteen  each  side,  the  outermost  eight  of  these 
in  a  close-set  uniform  series;  some  of  the  smaller  inner  ones  more  or 
less  out  of  line.  liateral  setae  eight;  hook  small,  hardly  longer  than  the 
setae,  hat  much  stouter;  teeth  crenulately  recurved  and  densely  spinu- 
lose  margined. 

The  wing  cases  reach  posteriorly  to  the  tip  of  the  6th  abdominal  seg- 
ment.   Dorsal  hooks  on  abdominal  segments  3-9,  beginning  with  a  r 


Google 


806  MICHIGAN   3UBVEY,   1908. 

rudiment  on  the  third  and  regularly  increasing  in  size  backward  to  the 
ninth,  where  somewhat  surpassing  the  level  of  the  tip  of  the  lOth  seg- 
ment; the;  are  spinelike  ou  segments  4-6,  but  somewhat  laterally  flat- 
tened and  distinctly  decurved  at  the  tip  on  segments  7-9.  Lateral  spines 
on  segments  7  and  8  straight  and  sharp,  directed  straight  x>osteriorlj, 
at  bas0  very  slightly  angulate  with  the  lateral  margins  of  their  seg- 
ments, that  of  the  9th  segment  about  two-thirds  as  long  as  its  segment 
and  about  twice  as  large  as  that  of  the  8th  segment.  The  marffins  of 
all  the  abdominal  segments  are  hairy,  especially  posteriorly,  and  there 
is  a  dense  fringe  across  the  ventral  spical  border  of  the  9tfa  segment. 
The  superior  appendage  is  slightly  shorter  than  the  inferiors:  these  are 
triangular  and  sharp  pointed ;  the  laterals  equal  the  supwior  in 
length,  and  are  stout  and  cylindric,  and  abruptly  pointed. 

The  larvae  of  the  four  American  species  of  Somatochlora  now  known 
may  be  distinguished  as  follows: — 

1.  Lateral  setae  of  the  labium  eight:  lateral  spine  of  the  9th 
abdominal  segment  more  than  half  as  long  as  its  s^ment,  and 
the  dorsal  hook  of  that  segment  larger  than  its  predecessors. 
8.  forcipata,  supposition. 

Ijateral  setae  of  the  labium  seven :  lateral  spine  of  the  9th 
abdominal  segment  less  than  half  as  long  as  its  segment,  and  the 
dorsal  hook  of  that  segment  not  larger,  usually  smaller,  than  some 
of  its  predecessors 2. 

2.  Abdomen  less  than  one-fonrth  longer  than  wide:  lateral 
spines  of  the  abdomen,  short  and  broad,  eqnilateral  triangles. 
8.  tenebrosa,  supposition 3. 

Abdomen  more  than  one-half  longer  than  broad:  Lateral  spines 
of  the  abdomen  longer  than  more  acute. 

3.  Dorsal  hooks  of  the  abdomen  of  equal  size  on  segments  6-9. 
Dorsal  hooks  largest  on  the  7th  and  Sth  s^ments,  that  of  the 

9th  segment  smaller  8.  Nnearts. 

6.  Cordulia  shurtlefji  Bcudder.  This  fine  species  is  apparently  com- 
mon on  Isle  Boyale,  being  represented  br  DTmphs,  Kos.  79  A,  from  Sum- 
ner Lake  (III,  5),  July  29;  No.  120  A.  from  a  rock  pool  on  beach  {V,  2) 
on  August  14;  and  Ko.  126  A.  from  a  swamp  (V,  II)  on  August  16. 

6.  Celithemig  eponina  Hageu.  Two  large  and  four  small  larvae. 
From  a  rock  pool  (Y,  2)  on  August  14,  No.  120  A. 

7.  Leucorliinia  intacta  Hagen.  A  nnmber  of  larvae  in  bad  conditioo, 
apparently  this  species,  ou  July  29,  No.  78  A,  79  A,  from  the  sedge  sone 
of  Sumner  Lake   {III,  5). 

8.  Enallagma  sp.?  A  number  of  broken  larvae:  Sumner  Lake  (III, 
G),  July  29,  Hob.  79  A  and  126  A;  and  a  rock  pool  on  beach  (T,  2)  on 
August  14.  (No.  120  A) ;  also  from  a  swamp  (Y,  11)  on  August  16 
{No.  126  A). 

Plecoptera. 

1.  Arsapnia  vemalis  Newman.  A  number  of  specimens  of  both 
sexes,  Nos.  24.  46,  and  80  (I,  1),  July  6,  11,  and  14.  Very  abundant 
upon  the  cliff  at  the  shore. 

2.  IsopterjjjT  cydippa  Newman.  One  specimen  from  the  balsam-birch 
forest  (V,  4).  on  August  14  (G.  236.)  ,.  , 

,„.CoogIc 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROYALB.  307 

Pteronarcys  doraata  Say.  A  feir  larvae  from  Otter  Eiver,  in  Baraga 
County  Michigan,  collected  by  A.  G.  Eutliven,  No.  30791,  U.  of  M. 
Museum. 

Ephemerida. 

1.  He.ptagenia  sp.?  One  pinned  female  subimago  from  Isle  Royale 
in  August,  whollr  undeterminable;  another  specimen  from  Tobin  Har- 
bor on  Jiilv  'Id. 

2.  Sipklunts  sp.?  probably  S.  altemata  Say.  A  larva  from  the 
sedge  zone  of  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  Ko.  78  A,  on  Jaly  29. 


Neuroptera. 

1.  Sialig  infumata  Walker.  One  larva  and  one  adnlt  were  taken  on 
July  26,  bv  H.  A.  Uleason,  (No.  160)  near  the  head  of  Bock  Harbor 
(in,  3). 


3y  Google 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 


DIPTERA  OP  THE  1905  UNIVERSITY  MUSEUM  EXPEDITION  TO 
ISLE  ROYALE. 

PROFESSOB   JAMES    S.    HINE,   OHIO    STATE    UNIVEESITT. 

Mnch  interest  always  attaches  to  a  collection  of  insects  from  north- 
ern regions  and  when  Mr.  Cbas.  C.  Adams  wrote  and  asked  me  to  work 
Tip  the  Diptera  of  the  1005  Isle  Eojale  Expedition,  I  gladly  accepted. 
The  collection  is  a  small  ope  and  includes  a  number  of  common  and 
widely  distributed  species,  but  on  the  other  hand  it  also  includes  several 
species  of  special  interest.  Moat  of  the  specimens  were  collected  by 
Dr.  H.  A.  Qleason,  bnt  be  was  aided  by  Mr,  B.  F.  Savery. 

As  the  locality  is  not  so  far  from  midway  between  the  East  and  the 
West  the  question  naturally  ariees  as  to  whether  the  eastern  or  the 
western  species  predominate  in  the  makeup  of  the  fauna.  This  matter 
is  the  more  interesting  to  me  for  the  reason  that  lately  I  have  studied  a 
collection  of  Diptera  from  Hew  England  and  also  one  from  British 
Columbia.  After  some  study  of  species  of  Diptera  from  boreal  regions 
I  am  convinced  that  there  is  not  the  difference  in  the  eastern  and 
western  faunas  in  the  North  that  there  is  in  the  South.  There  are  a 
number  of  species  in  the  collection  that  are  common  to  New  England 
and  British  Columbia,  but  there  are  others  that  so  far  are  not  proven 
to  have  such  a  wide  range,  and  it  is  with  the  latter  that  most  interest 
attaches  in  the  consideration  of  our  question. 

If  the  Tabanidae  are  considered  we  find  that  three  species  may  he 
said  to  be  exclusively  eastern  and  one  exclusively  western,  while  six 
are  distributed  entirely  across  the  continent. 

In  the  family  Syrphidae  are  seven  species  that  may  be  considered  ex- 
clusively eastern,  and  twelve  species  that  reach  clear  across  the  conti- 
nent, but  not  a  single  one  that  is  exclusively  western. 

Id  the  Stratiomyidae  the  single  species  is  eastern.  So  far  ae  I  can 
find  Isle  Royale  is  the  farthest  west  the  species  has  been  taken. 

In  the  Bombyliidae  one  species  is  western,  and  the  other  reaches 
across  the  continent. 

In  the  Theivvidae  the  single  species  is  western,  Montreal  being  the 
farthest  east  that  specimens  have  been  taken. 

In  the  Asilidae  two  species  are  eaatem  and  one  is  western.  The  west- 
ern species  however  is  hardly  typical. 

Id  the  remaining  families  are  several  species  that  are  exclusivelv 
eastern  and  several  that  reach  clear  across  the  continent,  but  none  that 
are  exclusively  western.  To  sum  up  I  find  four  western  species  and 
more  than  a  dozen  eastern,  while  there  are  about  thirty  that  occur  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific.  Therefore,  although  there  are  many  species 
common  to  Isle  Eoyale  and  British  Columbia,  the  following  show  that 
the  general  complection  of  the  Isle  Royale  Dipterous  fauna  favors  that 
of  eastern  rather  than  that  of  western  North  America. 


lyCoogle 


ECOLOGT  OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  309 

Family  Culicidae. 

1.  Culex  pipieni  Linn.  The  rain  barrel  Moaquito  wafl  taken  July 
11,  (Station  I,  Sub.  1)  and  August  3,  (V,  3).  This  is  the  common  mos- 
qnito  that  breeds  in  receptacles  of  standing  water  and  small  pools 
generally,  and  widely  dlatributed  in  this  country  and  in  Europe,  hav- 
ing been  described  under  various  names.  I  hesitated  somewhat  in  giv- 
ing the  specimens  a  specific  name  for  the  reason  that  they  were  dropped 
into  alcohol  when  they  were  collected  and  lost  many  of  their  scales  be- 
fore they  reached  me. 

Family  Bimuliidae. 

2.  SimuUum  venustvm  Say.  Black  Fly.  Taken  July  14  (I.  5)  and 
July  28,  fill,  5).  In  Ohio  I  have  found  the  larvae  of  this  species  cling- 
ing to  rocks  in  swift  flowing  brooks  and  at  the  outlet  of  a  small  artifl- 
cial  lake  where  the  water  passed  through  an  iron  pipe  and  dropped  ,a 
foot  or  two  on  to  rubbish  and  stones.  This  miuatnre  waterfall  seemed 
to  furnish  ideal  breeding  grounds  for  the  species,  for  the  larvae  were 
there  in  abundance  and  the  adults  were  flying  about  in  swarms.  The 
type  locality  for  the  species  is  along  the  Ohio  River  near  Cincinnati, 
but  it  has  been  identified  from  a  number  of  states  and  from  Canada. 
It  is  a  matter  of  interest  to  know  that  the  species  is  a  member  of  the 
geous  with  the  well  known  and  destructive  Buffalo  Gnat. 

Family  Stratiomyidae. 

3.  Stratiomyia  badia  Walker.  Judging  from  the  large  number  of 
specimens  taken  the  species  must  have  been  common  from  July  17-31. 
Ail  specimens  were  taken  at  the  Light-houfe  clearing  (I,  7).  At  San- 
dusky the  species  appears  in  numbers  on  flowers  of  White  Sweet-clover 
and  milkweeds,  and  specimens  are  often  seen  with  the  pollen-masses  of 
the  latter  plant  clinging  to  their  feet.  Tbe  Isle  Boyale  specimens  are 
typical  in  coloration  but  are  slightly  larger  on  an  average  than  other 
specimens  I  have  seen.  The  type  locality  is  Kew  Hampshire  but  its 
range  is  known  to  extend  over  a  large  part  of  northeastern  North 
America. 

Family  Taianidae. 

4.  Cltrysops  carhonarius  Walker,  Specimens  were  taken  along  the 
MeCai^oe  Cove  trail  and  at  the  head  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  3),  July  11- 
14.  This  is  nsually  a  northern  species  but  has  been  taken  on  the  east- 
ern coast  of  the  United  States  as  far  south  as  North  Carolina.  It  be- 
longs to  the  group  without  an  apical  spot  and  is  closely  related  to  mitis, 
the  species  next  considered,  and  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the  pres- 
ence of  8  hyaline  spot  at  the  base  of  the  fifth  posterior  cell.  In  these 
specimens  this  spot  is  very  small,  sometimes  making  it  difScnIt  to  say  to 
which  species  they  really  belong.  As  a  usual  thing  specimens  of  oar- 
iomiriua  are  noticeably  smaller  than  specimens  of  mitia. 

5.  Chrysopa  mitis  Osten  Sacken.  A  number  of  specimens  taken 
along  the  McCai^oe  Cove  Trail,  July  11,  are  of  this  species.  As  stated 
above  the  difference  between  this  species  and  the  former  is  not  always  ap- 


310  MICHIGAN   SURVET.   1908. 

parent,  but  the  specimens  ■with  the  fifth  posterior  cell  uniformly  infus- 
,  cated  at  its  base  are  usually  decidedly  larger  than  the  othere.  This  is 
quite  noticeably  in  the  Isle  Itoyale  specimens.  The  type  locality  for  the 
species  is  the  Lake  Superior  region,  therefore  these  specimens  ehould  be 
and  are  very  nearly  typical.  Specimens  of  carbonarius  from  farther 
east  usually  have  a  distinct  hyaline  spot  at  the  base  of  the  fifth  pos- 
terior cell  and  therefore  are  easily  known. 

6.  Chrysops  fp'gidua  Osten  Sacken.  A  single  specimen  taken  Au- 
gust 7,  by  B,  F.  Savery  (V,  3)  answers  the  description  of  this  species 
very  well.  Here  the  abdomen  is  variable  in  coloration  in  a  series  of 
specimens,  but  the  wing  markings  are  nearly  constant.  I  have  never 
observed  or  heard  of  the  species  being  so  abundant  and  troublesome  as 
other  niembera  of  the  genus.  Type  locality  Great  Slave  Lake  and  other 
northern  regions,  but  it  is  now  known  from  as  far  south  as  Ohio  and 
New  Jersey. 

Tabanwf  afflnU  Kirby.  Taken  July  2,  on  Mackinaw  Island,  Michigan. 
A  species  with  hairy  eyes,  measuring  nearly  30  millimeters  in  length,  the 
abdomen  is  broadly  red  on  the  sides  and  the  palpi  are  long  and  slen- 
der. The  type  locality  is  Boreal  America  and  the  species  may  be  ex- 
pected anywhere  from  Maine  to  British  Columbia.  This  specimen  is 
typical  for  the  species. 

7.  Tabanus  epiatatua  Osten  Sacken.  Three  specimens  taken  at 
Light-house  clearing  (1,7)  July  8,  11  and  31.  Similar  to  the  last  in 
coloration  and  g^eral  appearance,  but  smaller  and  the  palpi  are  ro- 
bust. Type  locality  Ilu^on  Bay  Territory,  but  now  known  to  be 
widely  distributed  in  northern  United  States  and  Canada  south  to  Ohio 
and  New  Jersey, 

8.  Tabanus  lasiophthalmua  Macquart.  A  single  specimen  taken  at 
Rock  Harbor,  in  July,  by  Adams.  The  eyes  are  hairy,  the  abdomen  is 
red  on  the  sides  and  the  sise  is  near  that  of  cpistatua.  The  cross-veins 
are  margined  with  fuscons  making  the  wings  appear  spotted,  a  char- 
acter which  ser^'es  to  separate  it  from  epiatatua  and  most  other  north- 
ern species  with  hairy  eyes.  Type  locality  Carolina,  but  it  is  dis- 
tributed over  northeastern  North  America  south  to  Georgia  and  west 
to  Illinois. 

9.  Tabanus  nivoaua  Osten  Sacken.  Several  specimens  taken  at 
Light-house  clearing  (T,  7)  July  11,  2fi  and  28;  (V,  3)  August  7  and  9. 
Tvcngth  about  15  millimeters  with  a  row  of  large  white  blotches  or 
spots  on  each  side  of  the  abdomen;  wings  clear  hyaline;  general  color 
blackish.  Type  locality  New  Jersey,  and  known  from  New  York  and 
Ohio. 

10.  Tabanvs  sp.  Specimens  taken  at  Light-house  clearing  (I,  7), 
July  18  and  22.  This,  I  take  it.  is  a  distinct  species  but  it  may  be 
one  of  Walker's  obscure  forms  and  I  bestitate  to  name  it  specifically 
until  more  material  is  available.  The  size  is  near  that  of  nivi)sus,  but 
the  general  color  is  reddish,  and  the  white  markings  on  the  sides  of  the 
abdomen  are  not  so  conspicuous.  There  are  a  number  of  other  char- 
acters which  distinguish  it. 

11.  Tabatiug  illotus  Osten  Sacken.  Specimens  taken  at  Light-houae 
clearing  (I,  7).  July  7,  11  and  25;  and  fill.  3),  July  14.  and  AuguBt 
5.    Eyes  hairy,  abdomen  with  a  row  of  white  spots  on  each  side,  wings 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROTALE.  311 

with  the  front  part  o(  the  basal  half  clouded  with  fuscous,  but  other- 
wiae  hyaline.  The  species  is  near  the  si?^  of  nivosus  and  appears 
much  like  that  species.  Type  locality  Hudson  Bay  Region,  but  at  the 
present  time  known  from  Alaska  and  various  parts  of  the  British  Pos- 
sessions.  Specimens  from  Isle  Royale  have  the  white  spots  on  the 
sides  of  the  abdomen  lai^r  than  in  some  specimens  I  have  observed. 

12.  Tabanus  insnetus  Oaten  Sacken.  A  single  specimen  taken  by 
B.  F.  Savery  August  9,  (V,  3).  This  is  the  only  species  known  from  the 
western  states,  with  the  hairy  eyes  and  ocelligerous  tubercle  absent  and 
therefore  falls  in  the  genus  Atylotua  of  some  authors.  Type  locality 
Weber  Lake,  California,  ^'ow  known  from  Alaska,  British  Columbia 
and  several  of  the  northwestern  states. 

13.  Tabanus  astiittis  Osten  Sacken,  (?)  Several  specimens  taken  at 
Light-house  clearing  (I,  7)  July  2(i  and  2S,  and  (V,  3}  August  7  and 
15,  by  B.  F.  Savery.  These  specimens  come  nearer  agreeing  with  aatutus 
than  any  other  species  I  know,  but  there  are  some  points  in  which  they 
do  not  agree  and  for  that  reason  I  have  named  them  aatutu^  with  a 
question.  Walker  described  a  number  of  species  from  the  far  north  that 
have  never  been  identified  since.  It  is  therefore  with  much  interest  that 
I  receive  such  collections  as  the  present.  Although  a  number  of  species 
have  a  wide  uorth  and  south  distribution  in  boreal  regions  every  col- 
lection from  the  north  is  apt  to  contain  something  of  interest. 

Family  BombiUidae. 

14.  Anthrax  morio  Linn.  Two  specimens  taken  at  Light-house  clear- 
ing (I,  7),  July  11  and  26.  Anthrax  seminigra  and  morio  are  be- 
lieved to  be  synonyms.  The  species  is  common  to  Europe  and  North 
America  and  is  distributed  in  the  latter  country  from  Maine  to  British 
Columbia.  Nearly  the  basal  two-thirds  of  the  wing  is  black,  the  re- 
mainder hyaline.  The  outer  margin  of  the  black  is  irregular  and  begins 
on  the  costa  near  the  apex  and  proceeds  obliquely,  gradually  nearing 
the  base. 

15.  Anthrax  fulmana  Say.  A  single  specimen  taken  July  26,  (IIT, 
3).  The  whole  body  of  this  insect  is  clothed  with  dense  yellow  pile, 
the  legs  are  black  and  the  wings  hyaline  with  costal  margin  and  narrow, 
base  black.  Type  locality  Pembina,  Minnesota,  and  besides  it  has  been 
taken  in  New  Mexico, ,  Washington  and  British  Columbia. 

Family  Thereddaf. 

16.  Tkeretv,  frontalis  Say.  Two  specimens  taken  at  Light-house 
clearing  (I,  7)  July  29,  and  (V.  3)  August  9.  Type  locality  Northwest 
Territory  and  specimens  are  at  hand  from  Montreal,  Colorado  and  Brit- 
ish Columbia.  The  Isle  Eoyale  specimens  are  rather  larger  in  size  than 
other  specimens  I  have  seen  but  agree  closely  in  coloration  with  Colo- 
rado examples.  Those  at  hand  from  British  Columbia  are  slightly  more 
brownish,  but  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  markings  are  of  the  same 
form  and  extent  in  all. 


3y  Google 


312  MICHIQAN   SURVBT,    1908. 

Family  Asilidae, 

17.  Cyrtopogon  chryaopogon  I^oew.  Taken  at  Light-house  clearing 
(I,  7),  Julj  6  and  10.  Type  locality  Massachusetts.  Known  from 
Montreal,  Quebec,  New  Jersey,  New  York  and  Florida.  This  record  ei- 
tends  the  westward  range  of  the  Bpecieg  considerably.  It  ia  black  with 
tlie  beard  straw-yellow  and  the  bases  of  all  the  tibiae  red. 

18.  DasyllU  a»tur  Osten  Sacken.  Taken  at  Lighthouse  clearing  (I. 
7),  July  7.  The  two  specimens  that  I  include  under  this  name  do  not 
fully  agree  with  the  original  description  of  the  apeciea  bnt  are  nearer 
it  than  to  poatioata^  and  as  Osten  Sacbeu  indicates  certain  variationB  Id 
his  description  the  specimens  are  given  this  name.  In  typical  astur 
from  British  Columbia  the  pile  on  the  anterior  dorsum  of  the  thorai 
is  largely  black  and  that  on  the  tibiae  yellow.  In  the  Isle  Boyale  speci- 
mens the  pile  on  the  anterior  dorsum  of  the  thorax  is  all  yellow  and 
that  on  the  tibiae  is  black.  Osten  Sacken  observed  that  specimens  ot 
aatur  taken  at  low  altitudes  bad  the  pile  on  the  tibiae  black,  and  as  the 
size  agrees  I  belieTe  it  proper  to  place  the  Bpecimens  in  this  way.  Type 
locality  California,  but  otherwise  known  from  Oregon,  Washington  and 
British  Columbia. 

19.  Aailua  onntdotiwt ' Williston.  Three  specimens  taken  August  5 
(V,  3) .  Known  from  northeastern  North  America,  as  far  west  as  Kan- 
sas.   The  specimens  appear  to  be  typical  for  the  species. 

Family  Dolichopodidae. 

20.  Eydrophorua  pftitomftrius  Wheeler.  A  number  of  specimnia 
taken  July  11  (I,  1).  I  suspect  there  are  plenty  of  species  of  this 
family  in  the  Isle  Boyale  locality  but  this  is  the  only  one  Included  in 
the  collection  sent  for  study.  The  type  locality  is  Milwaukee  County. 
Wisconsin,  and  it  is  also  recorded  from  Texas.  These  specimens  are 
typical,  agreeing  in  detail  with  the  original  description  and  figure. 

Family  Syrphidae. 

21.  Chryaotoxum  ventricosum  Loew.  Specimens  taken  July  7,  at 
Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7),  The  family  Syrphidae  is  a  most  attractive 
family  of  flies  and  the  genus  to  which  this  species  belongs  is  one  of  its 
finest  groups.  The  various  species  are  mostly  found  in  northern  regions 
or  at  high  altitudes,  and  are  easily  recognized  by  the  oblique  yellow 
abdominal  markings  and  elongate  antennae.  This  one  is  tlie  largest 
American  species  of  the  genus  and  was  first  described  from  specimens 
taken  in  the  District  of  Columbia.  It  is  now  known  from  New  JerseT, 
Canada  and  Arizona. 

22.  Pyrophaena  granditarsua  Forster.  A  female  specimen  taken 
July  28,  at  Light-house  clearing  {I,  7).  This  is  the  same  species  that 
formerly  passed  under  the  specific  name  ocymi.  It  is  common  to  Europe 
and  North  America  and  in  the  latter  country  is  distributed  from  Ne* 
England  to  British  Columbia.  The  two  sexes  are  very  different  in 
appearance  and  to  some  extent  in  structure,  and  it  is  from  the  front 
tarsi  of  the  male  that  its  specific  name  is  derived. 

23.  Platyehirus  peltatus  Meigen.    Taken  July  26,  [II,  1).    Common 

i.Cooglc 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE   ROYALE.  313 

to  Europe  and  North  America.     Widely  distributed  in  northern  Noi-th 
Aniei'ica  from  >'ew  Knp^lEmd  to  Itritish  Columbia  and  Alaska. 

24.  Platychirus  hi/pcrborciis  Stsiefxr.  Taken,  at  Light-house  clear- 
inp:  (I,  7)  July  23  and  26.  Type  locality  Greenland  but  widely  dia- 
trihiited  in  XoVth  Amcriea.  As  with  most  species  of  the  genus  only 
tlie  males  can  be  identified  satisfactorily  by  the  known  characteps. 

25.  Melanostnma  atimistatum  Williston.  Specimens  taken  July  23 
and  26,  at  Light-house "olearinp;  fl.  7).  Type  locality,  state  of  Wash- 
ington.   Known  also  from  the  White  Mountains  and  British  Columbia. 

26.  Syrphm  americanns  Wiedemann.  One  specimen  taken  Jnly  22, 
at  Light-house  clearing  (I,  7).  The  species  is  abundant  and  somewhat 
variable  in  coloration  and  is  distributed  over  nearly  the  whole  United 
States  and  Canada.  The  larvae  have  been  observed  feeding  on  the  grain 
Aphis. 

27.  SyrphuB  direraipes  Macquart.  Specimens  taken  August  i  and 
7,  (V,  31.  Type  locality  Newfoundland.  Distributed  from  New  York 
to  British  Columbia  and  Alaska,  reaching  as  far  south  as  southern  Ohio. 

28.  Syiphiis  genualia  Williston.  Taken  Jnly  24,  at  Lighthouse 
clearing  (I,  7),  July  25,  (IT,  1).  Type  locality  New  Hampshire  and 
recently  reported  from  Beulah,  New  Mexico. 

20,  i'lj/rphvs  ribesH  Linn.  Specimens  taken  July  24  and  26  at  Light- 
house clearing  (I.  7).  Common  to  Europe  and  North  .\merica.  This 
is  one  of  the  most  common  members  of  the  family  and  is  almost  sure  to 
l)e  included  in  local  lists  of  Diptera  as  it  is  distributed  over  nearly  the 
whole  of  North  .\merica.  The  larvae  are  of  importance  as  they  feed  on 
various  species  of  plant  lice.  One  often  sees  a  colony  of  plant  lice  with 
one  of  the  syrphid  larvae  in  the  midst  of  them,  and  he  cannot  help  be- 
coming intei-ested  if  he  observes  for  a  short  time  and  endeavors  to  count 
the  number  of  plant  lice  a  larva  is  able  to  devour  in  a  given  time  under 
favorable  conditions. 

30.  Hphaerophoria  cyliitdrica  Say,  Specimens  taken  July  25,  26,  and 
2S  at  Light-house  clearing  (I,  7)  and  July  25,  (II,  1).  Tyjie  locality 
PennsyJvania.  Common  over  a  wide  range  and  included  in  many  local 
lists.  The  larvae  ai-e  reported  as  feeding  on  the  grain  Aphis  and  on  that 
account  the  species  is  of  interest  to  the  economic  entomologist.  The 
sexes  are  quite  different  from  one  another  and  one  is  not  likely  to  asso- 
ciate them  on  first  acquaintance. 

31.  ErhtttliH  dimidiatus  Wiedemann,  Si>ecimens  taken  July  22,  24. 
25  and  26  at  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7),  August  4  (V,  3)  and  July  25 
fll,  1).  About  40  Bi)ecimens  of  this  siMK-ies  were  procured  indicating 
that  it  is  as  common  at  Isle  Koyale  as  at  other  places.  The  larvae  of 
the  various  species  of  KristuUs  are  what  are  known  as  rat-tailed  larvae 
and  are  found  in  shallow  water  in  swamjiy  places  or  at  the  outlet  of 
sewers  and  drains.  Each  larva  is  furnished  with  a  posterior  appendage  . 
which  can  be  lengthened  and  shortened  at  will  and  which  contains  the 
posterior  parts  of  the  tracheal  trunks.  At  the  free  end  of  the  appendage 
are  the  two  posterior  spiracles  which  ai-e  kept  at  the  surface  of 
the  water.  Thus  the  larva  is  fitted  so  it  can  remain  beneath  the  water 
and  yet  get  the  necessary  air  for  carrying  on  respiration.  The  adults 
are  common  around  flowers  in  autunm,  sometimes  several  species  visit- 
ing the  same  patch  of  asters  or  goldenrods  as  the  case  mav  be,  .E.  dimi- 

41  '      X.OCH^IC 


314  MICHIGAN    SURVBY,    1908. 

iiatiia  is  found  all  over  eastern  North  America  from  Florida  to  Canada 
and  west  to  Kansas. 

;i2.  EHstaiis  bastardii  Macquart,  Specimens  taken  August  4  (V,  3). 
I  hare  observed  tiiis  species  at  midday  when  the  sun  was  shining,  flvlng 
actively  over  water  and  hove  taken  them  in  numbers  at  snch  times  with 
a  net.  It  ia  common  over  the  preater  part  of  northeastern  North  Amer- 
ica, being  found  as  far  south  as  the  District  of  Columbia. 

33.  Hclophihia  nimilis  Loew.  Specimens  taken  July  2G  and  28  at 
Light-house  clearing  (I,  7).  The  members  of  this  genus  are  i)eculiar 
in  that  the  eyes  are  separated  in  the  male  as  well  as  the  female.  This 
species  is  often  taken  in  early  spring  from  the  blossoms  of  willow  and 
other  early  flowering  plants.  The  type  locality  is  Georgia  bnt  it  appears 
to  be  more  common  northward  where  its  range  extends  from  the  Atlantic 
to  the  Pacific. 

34.  Afallota  cimbicifonnis  Fallen.  Specimens  taken  July  23  and  26 
at  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7).  Common  to  Europe  and  North  America 
and  widely  distributed  over  the  eastern  part  of  the  latter  country.  The 
species  has  a'resemblance  to  certain  species  of  EristaUs,  but  the  greatly 
thickened  hind  femora  are  distinctive. 

35.  Xylota  curvipes  Loew.  One  specimen  taken  July  26,  at  Light- 
honse  clearing  (I,  7).  The  genus  Xylota  contains  upwards  of  40  North 
American  species  which  in  the  main  are  reasonably  easy  to  separate, 
and  for  that  reason  it  is  an  ati:ractive  group.  Various  species  are  often 
observed  resting  on  toga  in  damp  places  or  that  lie  across  small  streams. 
In  many  the  abdomen  is  distinctly  elongated  and  the  hind  femora  are 
swollen.  X.  curvipes  is  common  to  Europe  and  North  America,  being 
most  often  taken  in  northern  latitudes. 

3fi.  Xylota  fraudulosa  Loew.  One  specimen  taken  August  12  (V,  3). 
Type  locality  Illinois,  but  known  in  northern  North  America  from  New 
England  to  Washington  reaching  south  to  Ohio  and  Nebraska, 

37.  Xylota  pi(jra  Fabr.  One  specimen  taken  July  22  at  Lighthouse 
clearing  (I,  7).  Common  to  Europe  and  North  America  and  generally 
distributed  over  the  United  States  and  Canada.  The  adult  has  been 
reared  from  a  larva  taken  from  under  the  bark  of  a  pine  tree. 

38.  Temnostoma  aequalia  Loew.  Specimens  taken  July  17,  22,  23,  24, 
26  at  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7)  and  July  25  (II,  1).  This  fly  has  some- 
what the  appearance  of  the  common  bald-faced  hornet  and  one  usually 
thinks  the  second  time  before  taking  it  in  his  hand.  In  Ohio  various 
species  of  the  genus  are  to  be  found  around  rotten  logs  where  the  females 
oviposit  and  the  larvae  pass  their  lives  as  such.  Type  locality,  English 
River,  Hudson  Bay  Kegion.  Otherwise  known  from  New  England  and 
Colorado.  The  Isle  Royale  specimens  vary  slightly  in  abdominal  and 
thoracic  markings  but  on  the  whole  agree  very  well  with  the  original 
description. 

39.  Temnostoma  hombylani  Fabr.  One  specimen  taken  July  17,  at 
Light-house  clearing  (I.  7).  Common  to  Europe  and  North  America  and 
widely  distributed  in  the  latter  country,  having  been  taken  as  far  south 
as  southern  Ohio. 

Family  Tachinidae. 

40.  Pelcteria  robiista  Wiedemann.  One  specimen  taken  July  26  at 
Light-house  clearing  (I,  7).    This  species  is  reported  as  occuring  from 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  315 

Ai^ntina  to  Canada  and  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific,  Wiedemann's 
types  were  taken  in  South  America.  The  Isle  Royale  specimen  has 
less  red  at  the  tip  of  the  abdomen  than  most  Ohio  specimens. 

The  family  Tachinidae  contains  a  large  number  of  species  and  nearlv 
all  of  them  are  of  more  or  less  interest  to  the  economic  entomologist  on 
account  of  their  parasitic  habits.  Many  injurious  insects  have  one  or 
more  Tachinid  parasites  which  aid  in  holding  them  in  check. 

41.  Echi iiomi/ia  algetis  Wiedemann.  Two  specimens  taken  July  14 
(III,  3)  and  July  26  at  Lighthouse  clearing  (I,  7).  The  types  were 
taken  in  North  America,  but  the  exact  locality  is  not  given.  Recent 
writers  have  reported  the  species  from  many  points  in  Mexico  and  north- 
ward. It  is  said  to  be  parasitic  on  the  larvae  of  the  moth,  Hadena  ligni- 
color  Gnenfe. 

Family  Sarcophagidac. 

42.  Sarcophaga  sarraceniae  Riley.  Flesh  Fly.  A  specimen  taken 
July  11  at  Light-house  clearing  (I,  7).  This  ia  our  common  flesh  fly, 
and  is  an  important  scavenger.  Type  locality  MiBsouri.  The  species  of 
Sarcophaga  are  not  well  understood  in  America  and  it  may  be  that  this 
is  a  synonym.  However  the  name  is  included  in  many  local  lists  of 
Diptera  which  indicates  a  wide  range  for  the  species. 

43.  Lucilia  caeaar  Linn.  Carrion  Flv.  Four  specimens  taken  July 
2.5  (II,  1),  July  26  at  Light-honse  clearing  (I,  7)  and  August  5'  (V,  3). 
Known  from  Europe  and  America.  A  very  common  carrion  fly  every- 
where. Along  the  shores  of  the  Great  Lakes  its  larvae  feed  lately 
upon  the  carcases  of  fishes  cast  on  the  beach  by  the  waves. 

44.  Gallophora  virtdesccns  Desv.  Blow  Fly.  Three  specimens  taken 
July  25  (II,  3)  and  August  7  (V,  3).  This  is  one  of  the  common  blow 
flies  and  is  widely  distributed  in  Europe  and  America. 

45.  Cynomyia  cadaverina  Desv,  Two  specimens  taken  July  8  (I,  1). 
Carolina  is  the  type  locality  but  the  species  is  found  in  most  localities 
in  the  United  states  and  Canada. 

46.  Phormia  terraenovae  Desv.  A  specimen  taken  August  4  (V,  3). 
Type  locality  Newfoundland.  Generally  distributed  over  North  Amer- 
ica, especially  northward. 

Family  Muscidae. 

47.  Musca  domestica  Linn.  House  Fly.  A  specimen  taken  August 
7  (V,  3).  This  species  needs  no  particular  comment  here.  It  is  found 
In  nearly  all  parts  of  the  world  and  has  lately  been  proven  to  be  con- 
nected with  the  transmission  of  typhoid  fever. 

Family  Anthomyidac. 

48.  Byetodegia  aerva  Meigen.  Five  specimens  taken  July  11,  23  and 
24  at  Light-hpuse  clearing  (I,  7)  and  August  4  (V,  3).  This  European 
species  has  been  reported  for  America,  but  its  distribution  is  not  well 

^understood.  I  have  compared  these  specimens  carefully  with  Schiner's 
description  and  find  that  they  agree  well,  but  as  the  group  is  very  rich 
in  species  their  determination  is  not  alwaj's  an  easy  matter. 


lyCoogle 


MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 


Family  Scionij/zidae. 


49.  Tetanoccra  plebeia  hoew.  A  specinieo  taken  July  26  at  Light- 
liOTise  clearing;  (I.  7).  Type  locality  Jliddle  States.  Specimens  are  at 
hand  from  Britisli  Columbia  and  other  localities.  The  niembei'S  of  this 
genus  are  often  common  in  marshy  and  damp  places. 

60.  Sepcdon  piisUhis  Tjoew.  Two  specimens  taken  in  a  swamp  in  Cass- 
andra and  Sedge  Zone  (V,  2),  by  Max  M.  Peet.  Type  locality  Middle 
States.  Known  from  Ohio,  New  Jersey  and  White  Mountains,  New 
Hampshire.  The  various  sj}ecies  of  this  genus  are  usually  found  in 
swamps  where  they  may  be  observed  flying  over  water. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY  OF    ISLE   ROYALB. 


ANNOTATED  LIST  OF  ISLE  ROYALE  HYMENOI'TERA. 

B.   G.   TITUS,  KNTOMOI^OIST,   UTAH    AGRICLLTUEAL  EXPERIMENT   STATION. 

The  determinations  id  this  gronp  were  made  in  Washington  at  the 
U.  K.  National  MnKPuni,  Mr.  J.  C  Crawford  and  nijself  working  over 
most  of  the  material  together.  Mr.  Tlieodore  Tergande,  Bureau  of  Ento- 
mology', determined  the  two  species  of  anta  represented  in  the  collertion. 
The  general  collection  of  anta  are  reported  upon  elsewhere  by  Dr.  W. 
M.  Wheeler.  Mr.  W.  F.  Fiske.  at  that  time  in  the  Foi-est  Insect  section 
of  the  Bureau  of  Entomology,  very  liindly  determined  the  Ichnenmons 
and  Siricids,  both  of  which  groups  he  had  been  worliing  with  for  sereral 
years.  At  the  time  the  determinations  were  made  the  writer  had  no 
expectation  of  wi-iting  up  the  notes  or  he  would  have  doubtless  been  able 
to  add  considerable  to  their  value  by  making  further  notes  on  the  speci- 
mens  retained   at   the   National   Museum. 

Bombiis  tcrricola  Kby.  (Det.  Crawford.)  Three  on  flowers  of  Opu- 
laster  (II,  1)  (14) :  about  camp  at  Rock  Harbor  several  specimens  (133, 
lfi6  three,  179,  191)  and  one  Bi>ecimen  (222)  around  camp  at  Siskowit 
Bay. 

Geographic  Range:  Originally  described  from  Canada;  Kirby,  1S37. 
Also  reported  by  Provancher  from  region  around  Montreal  and  by 
other  authors  from  various  localities  in  Northern  United  States  east  of 
the  Rocky  mountains  and  as  far  south  as  Colorado.  I  have  seen  speci- 
mens from  Massachusetts,  New  York,  Illinois,  Kansas  and  Colorado. 

Bombus  conaimilis  Cress.  (Det.  Crawford.)  Two  were  taken  around 
camp  at  Rock  Harbor  (36,  45). 

Geographic  Range :  I>esepibed  from  New  York,  Cresson  1864,  p.  41 
and  reported  by  Packard,  IHQi,  p.  112. 

BomliHS  sp.  One  flying  over  beach  at  end  of  Conglomerate  bay  (31) ; 
one  on  flowers  of  D.  trifida  on  a  jack  pine  ridge  (23) ;  and  two  about 
camp  at  Rock  Harbor  (A.  5,  98).  These  ail  seem  to  represent  one  species 
but  neither  Mr.  Crawford  or  myself  care  to  name  it  in  the  present  un- 
settled condition  of  the  group. 

Psith'ijru«  latitarmis  Morrill  (Det.  Crawford.)  Two  around  camp 
clearing  at  Rock  Harbor  (A  36,  45), 

Geographic  range :     Desc.  from  Montana  by  Morril  1903,  p.  224. 

Megach'Udac. 

Monumctha  albifrotis  Kby.  (Det.  Titns.)  One  specimen  flying  over 
■  ridges  near  Conglomerate  bay,  (68). 

Geographic  range:  Desc.  by  Kirby  1837,  p.  270  from  "Lat.  C5°"; 
again  by  Cresson  1864,  p.  387,  388,  as  three  separate  new  si>ecies  from 
Colorado,  Pikes  Peak,  and  Slave  Lake.  It  probably  occurs  over  all  the 
region  from  the  Mackenzie  river  and  Upper  Hudson  bay  to  the  lower 


318  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Rocky  Mts.  areaa  io  New  Mexico  and  westward  to  the  Pacific.  (Titns 
1906,  p.  158,  Cockereil  1906)  (1  aod  2).  Nothing  is  known  of  its 
breeding  habits.  I  have  specimenR  ffom  eastern  Canada  and  New  Eng- 
land but  have  seen  none  from  south  of  New  York  along  the  Atlantic 
region.    There  are  mites  on  the  Isle  Koyale  specimens. 

Xanthosarus  mclanophwa  Smith.  (i)et.  Titus).  Taken  on  jack  pine 
ridge  (108)  ;  about  camp  at  Rocfc  Harbor  (133,  160  eleven)  and  on  flow- 
ers of  Vampatiula  rotuiidifoHa  in  clearing  at  Siskowit  Bay   (148,  202). 

Geographic  range:  Described  from  British  America,  Smith  1853,  p. 
91  and  known  to  occur  throughout  the  region  of  southern  Canada,  New 
England,  New  York,  and  in  northern  United  States  to  the  Pacific  coast 
and  in  British  Columbia.  This  and  the  following  species  are  leaf-cut- 
ters working  esi)ecial!y  on  the  leaves  of  Rosa  spp.,  the  pieces  clipped 
out  ai-e  used  in  lining  their  nests  which  are  usually  made  in  old  logs 
or  dead  trees,  the  female  often  utilizing  the  abandoned  boring  of  some 
other  insect.  The  little  rolls  are  often  found  when  splitting  I(^b  or 
wood  in  the  fall  or  winter. 

Xmitkosarvs  latimanus  Say.  (Det.  Titus).  Very  frequently  taken 
about  the  camp  clearings  at  Rock  Harbor  and  Sit^kowit  Bay  (S8,  49,  6S, 
133,  137,  153,  179,  231) ;  also  at  sand  beaches  at  head  of  Conglomerate 
bay  {^1} ;  on  jack  pine  ridges  (68,  1-8) ;  near  Neutson's  resort  (121) ;  on 
flowers  of  OpuJastcr  (148);  and  on  flowers  of  Campanula  rotiindifolui 
(202). 

Geographic  range:  Described  from  "Arkansas"  by  Say  1823,  p.  81. 
which  may  mean  any  where  from  Missouri  to  Colorado,  It  is  one  of  the 
most  common  species  in  the  United  States  and  Canada,  occurring  from 
coast  to  coast  and  from  the  Gulf  northward. 

Anthemoia  sp.  near  infragilis  Creseon  (Det.  Titus).  This  specimen 
was  taken  around  camp  at  Rock  Harbor  (86).  While  it  bears  a  close 
resemblance  to  A.  infragilis  there  are  sufficient  differences  to  make  it 
a  good  species  and  probably  new.  A.  infragilis  was  described  from 
New  York  and  probably  occurs  in  the  Isle  Royale  region,  since  I  have 
seen  specimens  from  Canada   (Titus  1906,  p.  152). 

Stelidae. 

Ctrlioxys  moesta  Cresson.  (Det.  Titus).  One  on  flowers  of  Cam- 
pnntil^i  rotuiidifolia  in  clearing  at  Siskowit  Bay  (202)    (V,  2), 

Geographic  range :  Described  from  Connecticut,  Cresson,  1864,  p. 
403;  reported  by  Provancher,  1882,  p.  241,  1S83,  p.  725  as  tristit,  from 
Canada.  Occui-s  westward  to  Colorado,  New  Mexico  and  probably 
Utah. 

Chclynia  nitida  Cresson.  (Det.  Titus).  One  specimen  about  camp  at 
Rock  Harbor  (26). 

Geographic  Range :  Desc.  from  New  York  by  Cresson,  1878,  as 
a  Htelia  and  from  Canada  by  Provancher,  1888,  p.  322  as  Chelnia 
labiata  and  in  Panurgidae.  Ashmead,  1896,  p.  283,  erected  the  genoB 
MelanostcHs  for  his  species  betkcU,  which  is  congeneric  with  nitida 
(Titus,  1906,  p.  161). 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE   ROYALE. 


Andrenidac. 


ffalirtiia  IcroiixU  Lepeletior.  (Det.  Crawford).  One  specimen  about 
camp  at  Kock  Harbor  (133). 

Ot'Ograpliic  range:  Described  by  J^epeletier  1S41,  p.  272  from  "Am. 
Boreal.*'  Occurs  at  least  as  far  west  as  Illinois,  Robertson,  ISitS,  p.  146. 

ffalictiis  irrsaiiji  Lo^■Bl!.  (I)et.  Crawford).  Five  specimens  on  flowers 
of  I'hifsocarjitis  in  Bnnsom  clearing  (II.  1),  (14S). 

Oeograpliio  range:    Descrilied  from  Maine  by  Lovell. 

Proaopidae. 

Pyoso-pin  hifKtilis  Smith.  (Det.  Crawford  and  Titus).  Ctae  about  clear- 
ing at  Rock  Harbor  (lllti), 

Oeograt.liic  range:  l(e8cril)cd  from  Hudson's  Bay  by  Smith,  1853, 
p.  ^i:^  and  occurs  from  the  upper  Atlantic  coast  to  at  least  the  moun- 
tains of  Colorado. 

Mxjsopis  RjR'cies.  (Det.  Crawford).  On  flowers  of  Opulaater  (V,  2) 
behind  camp  at  H^iskowit  Bay  |203) ;  in  camp  clearing  at  same  plac*^ 
1 212)  and  two  unmarked  epecimena.  There  may  be  two  species  involved 
here  but  we  were  unable  to  specifically  determine  them.  The  species  of 
the  genus  breed  in  stems  of  small  plants. 

Crabronidae. 

Crabro  sittffulans  Smith.  (Det.  Crawford).  One  specimen  on  sand 
beach  on  a  jack  pine  ridge  near  Conglomerate  bay.  (lOS). 

(ieograpliic  nm'ge:     '"Canada  and  United  States." 

t^'olcnius  sp.  (Det.  Titus  and  Crawford).  One  specimen  about  canip 
at  Bock  Harbor.  (170). 

Pcmphrcdonidae. 

Diodontiis  atUiiiisi  n.  sp.  Titus  (Det.  Titus  and  Crawford).  On  sand 
beach  with  Ammophila  at  end  of  Conglomerate  bay  (31).  Xotes  on 
AiiimOphUa  will  apply  to  this  s{)ecies. 

2  Leng  h  7.1  mm'.  Black,  with  scattered  silvery  pubescence,  espec- 
ially abundant  on  fai-e;  olyitens  projecting,  with  two  sharp  teeth  wide 
at  the  base,  tips  of  mandibles  rnJdish,  palpi  brown;  tegulae  brown, 
yellow  in  front;  wings  slightly  infuscated;  tibiae  and  tarsi  reddish 
brown. 

Sphrgidae. 

Ammophila  sp.  (Det,  T,  &  C).  Three  on  sand  beaches  at  head  of 
Conglomerate  bay  (31) ;  one  near  Tonkin  bay  (41)  ;  and  one  about  camp 
at  Bock  Harbor  (13.3).  The  normal  habitat  of  this  species  of  sand- 
wasp  Is  on  the  sand  beaches.  They  fly  rapidly  about  at  a  height  of 
3-iri  centimeters  over  the  sand  or  gravel,  alighting  only  ■  on  the 
«and.  This  gi-oop  all  store  their  nests  with  caterpillars,  the  holes  being 
nsHally  in  quite  hard  ground.  They  are  very  skillful  in  removing  <»!• 
covering  up  all  traces  of  the  place  where  they  have  worked,  often  going 
to  much  more  lal)or  than  the  occasion  would  seem  to  require.  Feckham 
and  Peckham,  1S98,  pp.  6-32,  have  a  very  interesting  chapter  on  this 
subject. 


320  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

PsamtiiopliiUt  sp.  (I)et.  T.  &  C.)-  One  apecinieu  from  rock  clearing 
near  outlet  of  WisUowit  lake  {V,  9)    (215). 

Ccropalidae. 

EntyiHis  amevk-uniiH  Pal-Beaiiv.  (I)et.  T.  &  C).  One  Bpecimen  (2^5) 
captiireii  with  a  Hi>ecimen  of  Lycosn  kochi  Keys,  (Det.  Banks).  The 
waap  was  backing  over  the  gpounrt.  dragging  the  spider,  at  brief  in- 
tervals it  drop])ed  its  prey  and  ran  rapidly  back  and  fortli  looking  for 
its  hole.  It  apparently  had  a  general  idea  of  tlie  direction  in  which 
llie  nest  lay  hut  had  to  walk  right  to  it  in  order  to  be  certain  of  its 
location.  Even  a  couple  of  uentiuieters  was  not  close  enough.  Having 
found  the  nest  the  wasp  searched  in  the  same  way  for  the  spider  and 
was  backing  away  with  it  in  a  direct  line  for  the  hole  when  both  were 
cajitured. 

fieograpliic  range:  Delia  Torre  gives  "United  States,"  It  was  de- 
scribed by  Palisot-Beauvois,  1811,  p.  117.  Peckham  and  Petkham,  li^DS, 
pp.  125-l(i6,  describe  the  labors  of  several  siwcies  belonging  to  this 
gronp  and  call  them  '"The  Spider  Itavishers." 

Vcspidac. 

Ycspa  (Uaholico  Saussure,  (Det.  T.  &  C).  One  specimen  about  camp 
cleai-ing  at  Rock  Harbor  {16fi).  Described  by  Sanssure,  1853,  p. 
138.  Occurs  fairly  common  throughout  the  eastern  United  States  and 
Canada.  There  have  l>een  many  errors  in  determining  si>eties  of  This 
group  so  that  one  can  hardly  state  the  distribution  of  any  species. 

Eiiwinidae. 

Ancintroceniit  ciiprn  Sauss.  (Det.  T.  &  C).  One  taken  about  camp 
at  Rock  Harbor  (133). 

Geographic  range:  Sanssure  1857,  p.  273.  Known  to  occur  in 
nortliern  United  States  and  eastern  Canada. 

Atu-istrocfTiia  pertinax  Sauss.  (Det.  T,  &  C).  Two  on  flowers  of 
Hi'rarJriiii)  iintoiiiiii  in  camp  clearing  at  Rock  Harbor  (105).  Tliis 
si)ccies  may  l>e  a  true  O'Ii/iktus.  All  of  this  group  are  predaceous  and 
these  probably  store  their  uests  with  caterpillars.  Their  habits  are 
rnried,  some  boring  in  one  plant  or  substance  and  others  using  old 
burrows. 

Geographic  range:  Snusanre.  185G,  ]».  216.  Known  from  northern 
and  eastern  T'nited  States  and  Canada. 

Enmnivs  sp.  (Det.  T.  &  C).  One  in  Cladonia  clearing  behind  camp 
at  Siskowit  Ray  |2II1|.  Tliis  genns  are  the  so-called  "jug-makers"  or 
"mason-wasps"  and  store  their  nests  with  smalt  caterpillars. 

Formicidoc. 

Formica  sp.  (Det.  Pcrgande).  One  specimen  in  camp  clearing  at 
Siskowit  Bay  (23U. 

Ciiinpnnotiis  piiii)s>/h-;iinnin  Degeer,  (Det.  Pergaude).  One  from 
Station  IV,  1  |13()),  another  found  running  over  smmith  sand  bleach  at 
head  of  Conglnmenite  bay   (311;  one  at  camp  at  Rock  harbor   tl"-** 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE   ROYALB.  321 

and  others  at  Siskowit  Bay  camp  (212,  222  eleven,  and  232).    A  very 
common  Bi>e<:le8  throughout  eastern  United  States  and  Canada. 

CJtrifsididae. 

ChrffSOgOna  vrticolis  Piitton.  (Pet.  T.  &  C).  One  specimen  about 
cauip  clearing  Siskowit  Bay   (2.10).  ■* 

Geograi)hic  ran^e:  Described  by  Patton  ISJO,  p.  07,  and  aftei-ward 
noted  by  Aaron  1.SS5,  p.  226,  from  California  and  Provancher  1887,  p. 
215,  fi-om  Canada. 

Emniidac. 

Gaxteruption  incerttis  Cresson.  (Det.  Fiske).  One  at  camp  at  Sisk- 
owit  Bay  (239).  Mr.  Fiske  placed  this  in  Focntis  which  Ashmead  makes 
a  synonyn  of  Ganternptioti. 

(icographic  range;  "Cauadii,  Colorado"  Cresson.  All  of  this  gennH 
that  have  been  bied  were  foiind  jKirasitic  on  some  apeoiea  of  wasp  or  bee. 

GasteruptioH  tarsitorius  Say.  (Det.  Fiske).  One  taken  at  Hiskowit 
hay  camp  clearing  (A.  152). 

Geogi-aphio  range:    Eastern  United  States  and  "Canada." 

Aiilficus  ruptareus  Cresson,  (Det.  Fiske).  One  at  Eock  Harbor 
(133)  ;  and  others  at  Siskowit  Bay  (A.  152,  212  five,  231  two,  239). 

(Jeographic  range:    "Canada,  Colorado"  Cresson. 

Some  of  the  8;>ecies  in  this  gi'oup  are  parasitic  on  Cerambycid  larvae. 

Ichneumonidac. 

Pmnenis  Hp.  (Det.  Fiske).  One  about  camp  clearing  Siskowit  Bay 
(231).    Probably  a  parasite  on  some  wood-boring  coleoptera. 

Fimpla  conquisitor  Sav.  (Det.  Fiske).  One  about  camp  clearing  Rock 
Harbor  (179). 

Oeographic  range:    ''(Canada;  TT.  S."  Ci-esson. 

Doubtless  parasitic  on  a  T^pidopterous  lar\'a. 

Ephialtcx  gigaa  Walsh.  (Det.  Fiske).  One  about  camp  at  Siskowit 
Bay  (153). 

Geographic  range:  Descrilied  from  Illinois,  also  reported  from  Can- 
ada. 

Rhi/ssa  alboiiutciilata  Cresson  (Det.  Fiske).  Taken  at  Rock  Harbor 
clearing  (106),  and  at  Siskowit  Bay  camp  clearing  (A.  152.  153,  212 
six.  222.  231  two.  239). 

Geographic  range :    "Canada ;  U.  S,"  Cresson, 

Species  in  this  genus  have  been  repeatedly  bred  from  the  larva  of 

xyloi)hagous  saw-flies  such  as  Trrocerns.    The  ovipositors  in  some  species 

,   attain  the  length  of  six  or  more  inches,  with  these  they  are  able  to  reach 

the  larva  of  the  host  and  lay  their  eggs  even  when  the  unsusi>ecting 

victim  is  living  far  inside  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Bra<conidac. 

ApantrlcM  sp.  (Det.  C.  &  T.).  One  alcoholic  specimen  without  data. 
It  would  be  hnpossible  to  even  superficially  determine  this  from  the  one 
specimen.  '   ..^ 


322  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Oymnoscclus  pedulis  CrcBBon  (IVt  Fiske).  All  taken  arouod  camp 
clearing  Siskowit  Bay,  {A.  152.  212  six,  222  three,  231,  239  six). 

(jeogra()liic  range:     Canada,  Eastern  U-  S, 

Parasitic  upon  some  nood-boring  Coleoi)tera. 

Mclanobrocon  sp.  {I>et.  Fiske).  Two  taken  at  camp  clearing  Siskowit 
Bay  (212). 

SHcUlac. 

Vroceni€  fiavipcimia  Kirby,  (Det.  Fieke),  All  sitecimens  taken  in 
camp  clearing,  or  near  it,  at  Siskowit  Bay  (A.  152  four,  153,  ftl,  O,  212 
two,  209,  22y,  231  three,  239  seven).  Usually  flying  with  a  moderate 
velocity  about  the  cJenring,  keeping  at  average  height  of  2-3  feel 
and  not  alighting.  A  few  were  found  climbing  up  and  down  trunks  of 
balsam  trees  in  which  they  deposit  their  eggs. 

Ge<^aphic  range:  Vancouver's  Island,  Kirby  1882,  p.  380.  Occurs 
across  the  continent. 

Urocrrus  fiamcomis  Fabricius.  (Det.  Fiske).  All  taken  in  or  near 
Siskowit  Bay  camp  clearing  and  not  differentiated  at  the  time  from  the 
previous  species   (195,  201.  212,  241  two). 

Geographic  range:  British  America,  Fabricius  1781,  p.  418;  appears 
to  be  a  more  northern  species  in  its  range  than  V.  ftavipennis  tliough 
they  are  often  taken  in  same  localities. 

Tenthridinidae. 

Teiithredo  melUna  Nort.  (Det.  MacOillivray).  One  at  Bock  Harbor 
(136),  others  on  flowers  of  Opula^tcr  in  camp  clearing  .Biskowit  Bay 
(203)  and  around  camp,  same  place  (208). 

(ieographic  range:    Canada  and  U.  S, 

CimJiicidae. 

Cimbcx  amerU-ana.  Leach.  (Det.  T.  &  C).  Taken  in  rock  clearing  near 
water's  edge  on  north  side  Conglomerate  bay  (106) ;  also  one  lar\-a  in 
alcohol  which  may  belong  to  this  or  the  next  species. 

(ieographic  range:  The  earliest  record  for  this  species  is  Alibot 
1792.  plate  01,  under  the  name  of  femoi-ata  Linne.  Leach  described  it 
in  1817,  p.  33,  and  since  that  time  many  autliors  have  written  upon 
the  species  which  is  rather  a  common  insect  throughout  most  of  the 
regions  in  North  America  where  willows  are  found.  The  larva  of  this 
and  probably  the  following  species  feed  on  willow  leaves. 

Cimhrx  violacea  Lepeletier.  (Det.  T.  &  C).  Julv  13.  eta.  I,  2 
(71  and  55). 

Geographic  range :  Described  by  lepeletier  1823,  p.  27,  from  North 
America  and  reported  by  Kirby  from  British  America ;  also  occurs  in 
northern  United  States. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   ROTALE. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


AaroD,  1885,  Tr.  Am.  Eat.  Soc,  xii. 
Abbot,  1792,  Drawings  Insects  Georgia,  xii. 

Cockereil,  190G,  (1)  The  Bees  of  New  Mexico,  Tr.  Am.  Ent  Soc.,xxxii. 
(2)   The  Bees  of  FloriesaDt,    Am.    Miis.    Nat.    Hist., 
V.  xxii,  art.  xxv. 
Cresson,  18«3,  Proc.  Ent.  Soc.  Phila.,  ii. 

1864,  Proc.  Ent.  Soc.  Phila.,  vol.  ii  and  iii. 
1878,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soo.,  vii. 
De  Geer,  ni'i,  Mem.  Sen-.  Ins.,  iii. 
Pabricius,  1781,  Spec.  Insecta,  i. 
Kirby,  ISiST,,  Fauna  Boreal  America,  iv. 

1882,  List  Hvm.  Brit.  Mnseum,  i. 
T-each,  1817,  Zool.  Miec,  III. 
I^peletier,  1823,  MonograjA,  Tenthredin. 

1841,  Hist.  Nat.  Ins.  Hymenop.,  ii. 
Morrill,  1903:  Canad.  Entomologist. 
Norton,  1860,  Boston  Jour.  Nat.  Hist,  VII. 

Paliaot  Beauvois,  1811,  Ins.  rec.  en  Africa  and  America,  Hymenop. 
Patton,  1873,  Canadian  Entomologist,  xi. 
Packard,  1864,  Proc.  Epsex  Inst.,  iv. 
Peckham  &  Perkham,  1898,  Solitary  Wasp. 
Provaocher,  18S2,  Nat.  Cadadien  xiii. 

1883,  Fauna  Ent.  Canad.  Hym. 
1887-8,  Addit.  faun.  Can.  Hym. 
Robertson,  1893,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  xx. 
Say,  1823,  Western  Quarterly  Reporter  Cin.  ii. 
Saussure,  1856,  Etud,  fani.  Vespidae,  iii. 

1857,  Rev.  and  Mag.  Zool.  (2),  ix. 
Titus,  1906,  Proc.  Ent.  Soc.  Washington,  vii. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OP  I8LB  ROTALB. 


THE  AKTS  OF  ISLE  ROYALE,  MICHIGAN. 

BY    DK.    WILLIAM    MORTON    WHEELBR. 

Hairard  University. 
Subfamily  Myrmicinae. 

1.  Myrmica  hiviinoilis  Eniei'y  var.  cana^ieTisig  Wheeler.  Sev- 
eral workers  from  a  single  colony:  CI  (I,  2)  H.  A.  Gleason.  "Found 
on  the  dry  rock  ridgea  under  the  mats  of  bearberry  and  also  excavating 
nests  in  the  crevices  of  rocks  to  a  depth  of  some  8  cm."  This  is  the  com- 
mon variety  of  the  subepecira  brevinodis  at  higher  elevations  in  Canada 
and  the  Eastern  States. 

2.  Leptothorax  acercorum  canadenitis  Provancher,  Workers  from 
three  colonies:  63  (I,  2),  (I,  1),  77  (I.  2),  H.  A.  G.  "Abundant  in  Cto- 
donia  clearings  and  on  rock  ridges,  running  about  on  the  surface  and 
through  the  thin  deposits  of  soil.  The  specimens  of  No.  73  were  from  the 
pock  pools  on  the  shore  just  south  of  Tonkin  Bay."  This  ant,  like  the  pre- 
ceding, extends  its  range  info  the  Northern  and  Eastern  States,  but  it  is 
by  no  means  common.  It  is  abundant,  however,  at  higher  elevations 
(8000-9000  ft.)  in  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  at  lower  elevations  in  Nova 
Scotia. 

Subfamily  Dolochodcrinoe. 

3.  Tapinoma  sessile  Say.  Workers  from  a  single  colony:  132  (V, 
2)  C.  C  Adams,  "under  Oladonia."  This  is  the  only  I  >olichodfirine  ant 
which  ascends  to  high  latitudes  and  elevations.  I  have  found  it  nesting 
under  stones  at  altitudes  of  over  10,000  ft.  near  Cripple  Creek,  Colorado, 
and  it  is  common  in  the  Canadian  zone  throughout  the  Eocky  Mountains. 
In  the  Northeastera  States  it  descends  to  sea-level. 

Subfamily  Cnmponotiiiae. 

4.  Lasiiis  niger  L.  var.  n€onig<'r  Emerv.  Workers  from  five  col- 
onies: 20  (I.  5)  C.  C.  A.,  and  75  (I.  1),  70  (I,  5),  82  (I,  5),  83  (I,  5), 
H.  A.  G.,  "Abundant  on  the  rock  ridges  and  jack  pine  ridges  (I,  2,  5). 
The  nest  is  always  constructed  beneath  or  at  the  side  of  a  flat  or  angular 
stone,  at  a  depth  of  one  decimeter  or  more,  A  complicated  system  of 
roomy  galleries  is  excavated  with  passages  l.D-2.5  cm.  high  by  2-5  cm. 
broad.  This  ant  was  seen  to  capture  and  kill  a  beetle.  No.  75  H.  A.  G. 
is  material   from  the  rock  pools."     (Gleason). 

There  are  in  North  America  three  distinct  varieties  of  the  circum- 
boreal  L,  niger,  viz.,  var.  tieoniger  Emery,  sitkdcnsis  Pergande  and  ameri- 
canus  Emery.  The  first  and  second  have  the  legs  and  antennae  of  the 
workers  and  females  covered  with  suberect  hairs,  and  the  hairs  on  the 
body  are  also  conspicuously  abundant.  L.  nrnniger  is  small  and  black, 
sitkaensis  much  larger  and  of  a  lighter  brown  or  yellowish  color.  ^^JL^ 


32Q  MICHIGAN   SURVET,    1908. 

americanus  is  small,  like  neonlger,  but  brown  aod  has  few  erect  bairs 
on  the  body  and  none  on  the  legs  and  scapes.  It  is  clowly  related  fo 
the  palearctie  variety  alicnxis  Porster.  and  like  this  form  inhabits  warm 
and  rather  dry  localities.  It  is  the  eonimou  form  of  nigr.r  throughout 
the  Northern  States.  L.  gitkdciiais  occui's  in  Alaeka,  Jlova  Scotia  and  in 
the  damp  alpine  meadows  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  at  altitudes  between 
8000  and  9000  ft.  L.  nconigrr  occurs  in  dryer  situations  at  somewhat 
lower  elevations  and  is  occasionally  found  even  near  sea-level  in  isolated 
colonies  in  our  northern  woods.  Varieties  (hybrids?)  intermediate  be- 
tween neoniger  and  americanus  also  occur  in  thece  same  localities. 

5.  Formica  aanguinca  attcrva  Forel.  Workers  from  two  colonies:  78 
(I,  2),  72  (I,  2)  H.  A.  G.  "This  is  one  of  the  commonest  species  on  the 
rock  ridges,  but  constructs  its  nest  either  in  or  under  decaying  wood. 
On  the  ridge  north  of  the  light  house,  a  nest  (72)  was  made  under  a 
rather  small  rotten  stick,  and  the  soil  beneath  was  composed  mainly  of 
finely  comminuted  fragments  of  the  wood.  The  second  colony  (78)  had 
constructed  a  nest  in  the  interior  of  a  large  decaying  li^,"  (Gleason). 
This  subspecies  has  been  taken  hitherto  only  at  Toronto  (Porel),  on  the 
summit  of  Mt.  Washington  (Mrs.  A.  T.  Slosson),  among  the  Litchfield 
Hills  of  Connecticut  (Wheeler)  and  in  Casco  Bay,  Maine  (Wheeler). 
It  is  a  decidedly  boreal  form,  approaching  the  typical  palearctie 
sanguinea  in  size  and  coloration.  There  were  no  slaves  accompanying 
the  specimens  from  Isle  Boyale,  a  fact  which  tends  to  confirm  the  con- 
clusions of  Porel  and  myself  that  this  subspecies  usually  lives  in  pure 
colonies. 

6.  Formica  adamsi  sp.  nov.  Worker.  Length  S.5-5mm.  Allied  to 
F.  rvfa  Ij.  Head,  including  the  mandibles,  nearly  as  broad  as  long 
even  in  the  smallest  individuals,  with  straight  posterior  border,  rounded 
posterior  corners,  and  slightly  but  distinctly  convex  sides.  Eyes  large. 
Mandibles  7-8  toothed.  Clypeus  prominently  carinate,  with  broadly 
rounded  anterior  border,  not  produced  in  the  middle.  Palpi  of  moderate 
length.  Antennae  slender,  scapes  nearly  straight  at  the  base,  funicular 
joints  all  distinctly  longer  than  broad,  the  basal  somewhat  more  slender 
and  longer  than  the  apical  joints.  Pro-  and  mesonotum  moderately 
rounded,  convex,  the  latter  eliptical  and  nearly  twice  as  long  as  broad, 
the  former  a  little  broader  than  long.  Kpinotiim  with  subequal  base 
and  declivity,  the  former  slightly  convex,  the  latter  flattened  or  slightly 
concave;  the  two  surfaces  in  profile  passing  into  each  other  through  a 
rounded  angle.  Petiole  more  than  half  as  broad  as  the  epinotum,  in 
profile  with  convex  anterior  and  flattened  posterior  surface  and  sharp 
upper  border;  seen  from  behind  the  border  is  rounded  and  but  feebly 
or  not  at  all  produced  upward  in  the  middle.  Gaster  and  legs  of  the 
usual  shape. 

Opaque  throughout ;  only  the  mandibles,  frontal  area  and  sides  of  the 
clypeus  faintly  shining  or  glossy.  Mandibles  finely  and  densely  striated. 
Surface  of  body  densely  and  indistinctly  shagreened. 

Hairs  and  pubescens  pale  yellow;  the  latter  covering  the  whole  body 
and  appendages,  not  conspicuous  except  on  the  gaster,  but  even  on 
this  r^on  not  sufHciently  dense  to  conceal  the  surface  sculpture.  Hairs 
short,  sparse  and  obtuse,  in  several  rows  on  the  gastric  segments;  on 
the  thorax  confined  to  the  upper  portions  of  the  pro-  and  mesonotum. 
on  the  head  to  the  clypeus,  front  and  vertex.    The  hairs  on  the  mandibles 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE  ROYALE.  327 

are  appreesed  and  pointed,  ob  the  palpi  short  bat  numerous  and  conapic- 
nous.  I-egs  naked  except  for  a  series  of  pointed  bristles  on  the  flexor 
surfaces  of  the  tibiae  and  tarsi  and  a  few  blunt  hairs  on  the  anterior 
surfaces  of  the  fore  coxae. 

Sordid  brownish  red,  the  smaller  sppcimens  somewhat  more  yellowish 
red.  Gaster  dark  brown,  except  a  large  spot  on  the  base  of  the  first  seg- 
ment and  the  anal  region,  which  are  reddish  yellow.  A  large  spot  on 
the  pronotuni,  one  on  the  mesonotum,  much  of  the  posterior  portion  of 
the  head,  the  distal  halves  of  the  antennal  funicnli  and  in  many  speci- 
mens also  the  coxae  and  femora,  dark  brown  or  blackish.  These  dark 
markings  are  present  in  the  largest  as  well  as  in  the  smallest  workers. 
Teeth  of  mandibles  black. 

Described  from  numerons  specimens  taken  from  a  simple  colony:  115 
fl,  6)  n.  A.  G.  A  dozen  workers  taken  by  myself  on  Pikes  Peak,  Col- 
orado, near  timber  line,  at  an  altitude  of  lO.EiOO  to  11,000  ft.  differ  from 
the  Isle  Hoyale  specimens  only  in  having  the  frontal  area  smooth  and 
shining,  in  having  the  middle  of  the  petiolar  border  produced  upward 
as  s  distinct,  blunt  jxiint,  and  in  the  less  extensive  infnscation  of  the 
bead,  pro-  and  mesonotnm.  Th«(e  specimens  may  be  regarded  as  repre- 
senting a  distinct  variety,  alpina  var.  nov.  Both  this  and  the  typical 
adamsi  may  be  distinguished  from  onr  other  North  American  forms  of 
the  rufa  group  by  their  small  size,  opaque  surface  and  peculiar  color- 
ing and  pilosity.  The  following  collector's  note  on  the  Isle  Royale 
specimens  adds  some  elhological  characters  which  are  not  seen  in  the 
other  small  forms  of  the  rufa  group  known  to  me:  "The  nests  of  this 
ant  are  one  of  thij  most  conspicuous  features  of  the  drier  tamarack 
Kwanips.  They  aro  rounded-conical  in  shape.  %Q  dcm.  high  or  even 
lai^er  and  with  a  diameler  at  the  base  about  equalling  the  height.  They 
are  composed  within  of  Sphagnum,  but  as  would  be  expected  with  such 
material,  without  any  definite  system  of  galleries.  The  outer  surface 
is  thickly  covered  with  leaves  of  Cassandra,  probably  to  prevent  loss 
cf  moisture  by  evaporation  from  the  interior.  They  are  frequently 
placed  near  or  under  a  bush  of  the  Cansandra,  but  the  same  covering  is 
used  if  no  Cassandra  is  near,"   (H.  A.  Gleason). 

7.  Ff>rmica  rufa  obsctiriventi-is  Mavr,  Workers  from  six  colonies: 
4«  (I.  1),  47  (I,  1),  63  {I,  2),  76  (I,  2),  114  {I.  6),  14  (112)  H.  A.  G. 
"This  subspecies  occurs  on  the  rock  beaches  (I,  1,  46,  47)  where  it 
forages  about  on  the  surface  and  in  crevices  but  is  more  abundant  on 
the  jack  pine  ridges  (I,  5,  63)  and  on  the  rock  clearings  (I,  2,  76)." 

I  recently  described  this  subspecies  as  F.  dryas,  but  an  examination 
during  the  past  summer  of  some  of  Mayr'e  types  in  Pi-ofessor  Forel's 
collection,  shows  that  in  so  doing  I  created  a  synonym.  Mayr's  original 
description  based  on  specimens  from  Connnecticut  is  entirely  inade- 
quate, and  the  list  of  localities  which  he  later  cited  for  obsniriventris 
shows  that  he  lumped  together  a  number  of  different  forms  belonging 
to  the  rufa  group  The  name  ohscurivcntris,  therefore,  should  be  re- 
stricted to  the  form  having  the  characters  of  my  F.  dryas.  This  ant  is 
rare  in  the  Eastern  and  Northern  States  and  evidently  belongs  to  the 
boreal   fauna. 

8,  Formica  fusca  L.  var.  subscricca  Say.  Workers  from  11  colonies: 
23  (I.  5),  102  (V.  2),  131  (V,  2),  C.  C.'a.,  and  80  (I,  5),  81  (I,  5). 
100  (I.  5).  102  (I,  B),  223  (V,  3),  224  (V,  3),  226  (V,  3).  227  (V,  3) 


328  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

II.  A.  G.  Also  specimens  from  a.  single  rolony  ou  Mackiimt^  Inland 
(3.  H.  A.  G.)-  "A  common  ant  ou  the  jack  piue  ridges  (T,  5,  8(1,  81. 
]00,  102),  It  constructs  its  nests  under  rocks  in  moist  soil  (100)  and 
was  observed  to  capture  beetle  larvae  (103).  Tlie  specimens  collected 
in  the  rock-clearings  at  Piakowit  Bay  (V,  3,  223,  224,  220,  227i.  con- 
strupted  circular,  flat-topped  craters  6  dcm.  in  diameter,  covered  with 
debris  of  balsam  and  spruce  needles  and  frequently  with  growinft  plants 
on  them."  This  is  the  common  form  of  the  circumboreal  F.  fusm- 
throughout  Canada  and  the  northern  states.  At  higher  altitudes  on 
the  Bocky  Mountains  it  passes  into  the  more  silvery  red-legfred  var- 
arfjentata  Wheeler,  a  form  which  also  occurs  even  near  sea  level  but 
very  sporadically  in  the  Atlantic  States, 

9.  Formica  ftisca  L.  var.  neorufibarhifi  Emery.  A  few  workers  from 
two  colonies;  15  (I,  1)  and  20  (I,  1)  H.  A.  G.  in  vials  with  specimens 
of  Lasius  neoniger  and  Cnmiponotus  whympcri.  Of  the  numerous 
varieties  of  F.  fvsca  this  is  the  most  boreal,  being  known  only  from 
Alaska  and  British  America  as  far  east  as  Labrador  and  Nova  Scotia, 
and  from  higher  altitudes  in  the  Rocky  Mountains  (9,000  to  12,500 
feet).  It  forms  rather  small  colonies  under  stones  and  logs  in  moist 
or  shady  places. 

10.  Camponotus  hercuUaitue  L.  var.  ichymperi  Forel.  Workers 
from  10  colonies,  with  larvae  and  pupae;  15  (I,  1),  18  (I.  1),  22 
(I,  1).  30  fl.  1).  63  (I,  2),  140  (I,  3)  H.  A.  G.  and  105  (Y,  2),  126 
(V,  11),  148  (TIT,  '04),  149  (III,  '04)  C.  C.  A.  "Although  an  abund- 
ant species  on  the  rock  and  gravel  beaches  (15,  18,  22  H.  A.  G.)  where 
it  forages  for  dead  insects,  its  actual  home  appears  to  be  the  ridges. 
On  the  dry  ridges  it  occurs  singly,  usually  in  soil  under  stones  (62, 
H.  A.  G.),  It  was  also  collected  |140  n.  A.  G.)  in  the  dense  balsam 
fir  woods,  where  it  forages  over  the  surface.  This  variation  in  habit 
lends  to  the  conclusion  that  it  belongs  properly  to  the  rock  ridges." 
Like  the  preceding  variety  of  F.  fusca,  C.  ivhympcri  is  a  truly  boreal 
ant.  It  is  our  North  American  representative  of  the  typical  paleo- 
boreal  C.  hcrculeanu8  and  in  the  Tnited  States  is  known  to  occur  only 
at  considerable  elevations  in  the  Rocky  Mountains  (above  8,000  feeti 
and  on  the  summits  of  the  Green  Mountains  of  Vermont.  The  types 
of  whtfinpori  were  taken  in  the  mountains  of  Alberta,  B.  C,  by  the  noted 
monntain  climber,  to  whom  the  variety  was  dedicated.  I  have  seen 
specimens  from  Nova  Scotia  (Russell)  and  Labrador  (Henshaw). 

The  foregoing  series  of  Formicidae,  though  represented  by  only  ten 
different  forms,  is  of  considerable  interest  on  account  of  its  pronounced 
boreal  character.  Only  two  of  the  forms  {Formica  subsericea  and 
Ta/iinoina  sritsilc)  are  abundant  at  ordinary  elevations  in  the  northern 
states,  Myrmica  canadensis,  Leptothorax  canadensin,  Formica  ascrva. 
F.  ohscuriventris  and  Lasius  neontger  occur  sparingly  in  the  same 
region,  but  always  in  situations  which  indicate  that  they  are  not  in 
their  optimum  environment  or  station,  or  where  they  seem  to  represent 
the  laggai'ds  of  a  wave  of  post-glacial  migrants  to  more  northern  lati- 
tudes cr  higher  altitudes.  F.  adamsi.  F.  neorufiharhis  and  Camponotiis 
trhyviperi  are  exquisitely  boreal  ants  of  circumscribed  alpine  distribu- 
tion in  the  United  States,  but  probably  of  extensive  range  in  British 
America. 


ECOLOOY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE. 


THE  COLD-BLOODKI)  VKKTRRKATES  OF  ISLE  BOYALE. 

DR.    ALEXANDER    G.    RfTIIVES. 

The  collection  wliitli  Las  wrved  as  the  basis  for  this  report  was  made 
by  the  T'nivereity  of  5IkliTK(in  Muapiini  cxiiedition  to  Tale  Royale,  in 
the  Mimmer  of  1!)0j».  The  rei»ort  fthouhl  be  considered  as  supplementary 
to  the  papers  upoo  the  fish,  ampliibians  and  reptiles  of  the  island,  pub- 
lished in  1905.  (Kuthvpn,  IflOy.  pp.  107  112.)  This,  the  second  expedi- 
tion to  iBle  Royale,  hns  added  a  nunilier  of  species  to  the  fauna,  and 
has  established  the  fact  that  most  of  the  previoosly  known  forma  ex- 
tend thi-oughont  the  entire  length  of  tlie  island,  which  was,  of  coarse, 
to  l»e  expected. 

The  amount  of  data  on  this  fauna  accumnlated  by  the  two  expedi- 
tions is  considerable,  ^vhon  ii  is  considered  that  np  to  1904  practically 
nothinn;  was  known  of  the  cold-blooded  vertebrates  of  the  Island.  Our 
knowledf^,  however,  is  still  very  incomplete.  In  the  case  of  the 
fishes  this  is  due  to  the  fact  that  no  systematic  attempt  was  made  by 
the  field  parties  to  secure  these  forms,  and  the  specimens  obtained  are, 
in  most  instances,  those  that  came  most  easily  to  band.  The  list  ifi, 
therefore,  nndnuhtedly  very  incomplete  both  as  regards  the  number  of 
species  and  their  distribution.  On  the  other  band,  particular  attention 
was  paid  to  the  amphibians  and  reptiles,  and.  although  there  is  still 
much  to  be  discovered  concerninfr  the  local  distribution  of  the  species, 
the  complete  list  includes  nearly  all  of  the  species  which  would  be  ex- 
jjected  to  occur  on  the  island. 

\ature  of  the  fauna. — The  cold-blooded  vertebrate  fauna  of  Isle 
Royale,  as  at  present  known,  consists  of  eighteen  fish  (exclusive  of 
Trifffopsis  thompsoni,  whicli  was  taken  in  deeper  waters  of  I^ke  Su- 
perior), one  toad,  one  tree  toad,  three  frops,  the  mud  puppy,  and  two 
snakes,* 

AffinitifH  of  thr  fnmia. — Adams,  on  a  previous  pafce,  has  dwelt  at  length 
on  the  fact  that  Isle  Royale  has  never  been  connected  with  the  main  land 
wince  glacial  times,  a  fact  that  is  of  first  importance  in  discussing  the 
origin  of  the  fauna.  Most  of  the  fish  obtained  on  the  island  occur  both  in 
the  inland  waters  and  in  the  bays  and  coves  about  the  shores.  Since  they  ' 
are,  moreover,  forms  of  general  disti-ibufiou  in  the  Great  I^akes  drainage 
system,  occurring  also  in  Lake  Superior,  their  presence  on  Isle  Royale 
is  easily  explained.  To  account  for  the  presence  of  the  inland,  brook- 
dwelling  forms,  however,  another  explanation  must  be  sought;  for  such 
species  as  the  common  stickleback,  ninc-spined  stickleback,  black-head 
minnow  and  Lcudsciis  itcotjaciis  can  hardly  be  conceived  as  able  to 
cross  the  fifteen  miles  of  open  lake  intervening  between  the  island  and 
the  nearest  mainland.  At  present  we  have  no  data  that  throw  light 
on  this  problem. 

The  same  diSBculties  arise  in  attempting  to  account  for  the  origin  of 

I.  1905.  pp.  109-112)  rtala  irr»irolorin<l   ThamaophiM  taarUu*  h«TB 
but  the  records  cannot  be  verified.  J  |  ij 


330  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

the  aniphibian  and  reptile  faunas.  As  ia  the  caae  of  the  fish,  the  npeciea 
are  all  of  general  distribution  in  northeaetero  North  America,  but, 
with  the  exception  of  the  mud  puppy,  none  of  the  species  recorded  from 
the  island  are  aquatic,  and,  as  thej  also  belonf^  to  groups  which  are 
very  sensitive  to  cold,  they  could  neither  reach  the  island  through  the 
water  in  summer  or  over  the  ice  in  winter.  The  theory  of  involuntary 
transportation  thus  seems  to  he  the  only  tenable  one.  At  present  the 
most  plausible  explanation  for  the  presence  of  the  reptiles  and  amphi- 
bians (with  the  exception  of  the  mud  puppL?,  which  might  swim  across) 
found  on  the  island  is  that  they  have  been  transported  on  driftVood, 
Unlike  several  of  the  other  groups  of  animals,  and  the  flora,  the 
amphibian-reptile  fauna  is  not  strongly  boreal  in  its  affinities.  It  ib 
true  that  the  forms  which  are  found  on  the  island  also  range  to  the 
northward,  but  the  principal  range  of  the  species  is  to  the  southward, 
and  only  one  species  {Rana  septmtrirmalis')  does  not  extend  rather  far 
south  in  eastern  North  America,  The  southern  affinity  of  this  fauna 
is  undoubtedly  due  to  the  fact  that  the  amphibians  and  reptiles  are  both 
pre-eminently  warm  climate  groups,  and  the  representatives  in  this 
region  are  those  few  (hat  are  able  to  endure  the  colder  climate. 

ANNOTATED   LIST. 

Pisces. 

1.  CafOKtomiin  mmmcrmmi  fTJ^c^<p^de).  Common  Sucker.  Taken 
in  the  sontheast  coves  of  Rock  Harbor  fllT.  6).  As  this  species  was 
found  in  a  similar  habitat  at  the  south  end  of  the  island  in  1904,  it  is 
undoubtedly  to  be  fonnd  in  all  of  the  suitable  hays  and  oovea  along 
the  shores,  and  probably  also  in  the  liirger  inland  lakes. 

2.  Fimephdlen  promelas  Raflnesqtie.  Blaok-head  Minnow.  Speci- 
mens of  this  fish  were  taken  in  Pumner  Lake  fllT.  5).  This  is  the  only 
locality  known  for  the  island. 

3.  Lnwincus  nmgapus  (Cope).  As  in  the  case  of  the  Rlaok-head 
Minnow,  this  species  was  only  taken  in  Sumner  Lake  (TTT.  5). 

i.  Coretjonuit  qnadrUateralix  Richardson.  Menominee  Whitefish. 
This  species,  a  common  food  fish  in  I^ake  Superior,  was  taken  in  Siskowit 
Lake  fV). 

fi-  Artfi/rosnmvs  artcdi  fljc  Sueur),  Lake  Herring.  Taken  hy  the 
1905  expedition  in  Rock  Harbor  and  Lake  Desor  fVIT.  '04).  Like  the 
Sucker  this  fish,  which  is  a  common  Great  Lakes  species,  probably  occurs 
in  most  of  the  larger  inland  lakes. 

6.  Ar0msomm  nitrripinmis  0\\\.  Bliic-fin;  Black-fln.  This  flsh  was 
only  fonnd  in  Rock  Harbor. 

7.  Cristivomcr  namaj/cuah  fWalbaum).  Mackinaw  Trout;  Lake 
Trout.  Adult  specimens  were  taken  in  Rock  Harbor,  and  a  single  im- 
mature specimen  (41  mm.  in  length)  in  Benson  Brook  fll.  1). 

8.  Salvelinus  fontinnlh  (Mitchell).  Brook  Trout,  The  1905  expedi- 
tion secured  specimens  of  the  Brook  Trout  only  in  Benson  Brook  (IL  11. 
As  it  was  found  on  the  southern  end  of  the  island,  in  Washington  Harbor 
and  river,  in  1004.  it  may  be  considered  as  occurring  throughout  the 
length  of  the  island,  in  suitable  habitats. 

9.  Liiriiin  lucms  (Linnaeus).  Common  Pike;  Pickei-el.  Taken  in  Sar- 
gent Lake.    This  is  apparently  the  only  Isle  Boyale  record. 


ECOLOGY  OP*   ISLE  ROTALE.  33l 

10.  Eitcalia  inconstans  (Kirkland).  Brook  Stickleback.  This  species 
was  found  iu  the  following  localities:  Tamarack  awamps,  giskowit  Lake 
(V.  5) ;  Spruce  swamp,  Siskowit  Lake  (Y.  11) ;  Sumner  Lake  (III.  B). 
It  is  pTobabl;  to  be  found  in  most  of  the  ponds  and  small  streams  on 
the  island. 

11.  Pygosteus  pungittta  (Linnaeus).  Ninespined  Stickleback.  The 
Nine-spined  Stickleback  is  represented  in  the  collection  by  specimens 
from  the  "Bulrush  and  Delta  zone  at  the  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor" 
{III.  3),  and  from  Tobin  Harbor  (IV). 

12.  Percopsia  guttatus  Agaasiz.  Trout  Perch.  This  fish  was  taken 
about  a  small  island  in  Tobin  Harbor  (lY.  6). 

13.  Ferca  flaveacens  (Mitchell).  Yellow  Perch.  Taken  in  Forbes 
Luke  (II.  5).  This  sitecies  is  probably  to  be  found  in  most  of  the  larger 
inland  lakes  as  well  as  in  tbe  coves  and  harbors  about  the  island.  It 
was  taken  in  Washington  Harbor  in  1904. 

14.  Cottiis  ictalops  (Bafinesque).  Miller's  Thumb.  This  cottid  was 
found  along  the  shores  of  Rock  Harbor  (III.  6)  and  the  island  iu  this 
harbor  (III.  2).  As  it  was  found  in  a  similar  habitat  at  the  southern 
end  of  Isle  Royaie  in  1904,  it  may  be  coueidered  to  occur  throughout 
the  entire  length  of  the  Island  in  this  habitat. 

15.  Vranidea  franklini  (Agassiz).  There  are  specimens  of  this  form 
in  the  collections,  labeled  Rock  Harbor  and  Benson  Brook  (II.  1), 

16.  Triglopsia  thompaoni  Oirard.  Three  specimens  of  this  rare 
species  were  taken  from  the  stomachs  of  Lake  Trout  {Criativomer  namay- 
cash)  taken  by  flshermen  off  the  east  coast  of  Isle  Royaie.  Jordan  and 
Erermann  write  of  this  form  as  follows;  "Deep  waters  of  the  Great 
Lakesj  not  common;  known  from  Lake  Michigan  and  Lake  Ontario; 
doubtless  a  relic  of  a  former  arctic  marine  fauna,  and  descended  from  a 
species  of  Onocotfus."  BoUman  (1890,  p.  225)  records  a  specimen  from 
Torch  Lake,  Michigan,  which  was  also  found  in  the  stomach  of  a  Lake 
Trout. 

17.  Lota  maculosa  (Le  Sueur).  Lake  Lawyer;  Burbot.  Taken  in 
Tobin  Harbor  (lY.  5)  and  Rock  Harbor  (III). 

AmpMhia. 

1.  liecturus  maculos'ua  (Bafinesque).  Three  immature  amphibians 
that  are  undoubtedly  this  species  were  taken  in  Benson  Brook.  They 
are  verj'  young  and  lack  the  dorsal  fin  and  stripes.  Dr.  L.  Stejneger,  who 
has  kindly  examined  these  specimens  for  U8>  states  that  tbe  limbs  and 
gills  are  proportionately  shorter  than  the  smallest  in  the  U.  S.  National 
Museum.  It  should  be  noted  here  that  Yarrow  (1883,  p.  144)  has  pre- 
Tiously  recorded  this  species  from  the  island. 

2.  Bufo  amtricanus  (LeConte).  Common  Toad.  The  capture  of  a 
number  of  specimens  of  this  species  on  the  northern  part  {II)  estab- 
lishes its  occurrence  throughout  tbe  length  of  tie  island. 

3.  Syla  pickeringi  {Storer).  Pickering's  Tree-fri^.  This  amphibian 
was  taken  in  the  woods  on  tbe  northern  end  of  the  island  (lY.  8),  and 
in  the  woods  {Y.  4)  and  Tamarack  swamps  (Y.  5)  in  the  vicinity  of 
Siskowit  Lake.  It  probably  occurs  also  on  the  southern  end  of  the 
island,  although  it  was  not  taken  by  the  1904  expedition. 

i.  Rana  septentrionalia  Baird.  Mink  Frog;  Northern  Frog.  A  single 
specimen  of  R.  scptentrionalis  was  secured  at  Sumner  Lake  (III.  5). 
This  establishes  the  presence  of  the  species  on  Isle  Royaie,  a  point  that 


MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 


ha£  hitherto  been  in  question,  owiog  to  tlie  unidentifiable  condition  of 
the  specimens  taken  on  the  island  bv  Dr.  A.  K.  Foote  (see  Rufhven  1904, 
110).  Mies  Dicltersou  (1900,  225)  writes  of  tlie  habits  of  this  frog  as 
follows:  "The  Northern  Frog  is  described  as  decidedly  a  river  frog; 
it  is  never  captured  in  lakes  and  ponds."  Our  observations  are  exactly 
the  reverse,  all  of  the  specimens  taken  on  both  expeditions  having  been 
found  about  the  shores  of  the  inland  lakes. 

5.  Rana  clamitans  Dand.  Green  Fro};.  As  represented  by  the  col- 
lections of  the  190r>  expedition,  this  is  the  common  frog  of  the  island. 
Numerous  specimens  were  taken  on  the  shores  of  Kock  Harbor  (I.  1), 
at  Sumner  Lake  (III.  5),  and  Siskowit  Lake  (V).  Although  it  was 
not  found  on  the  southern  end  of  the  island  in  1004,  it  doubtless  occurs 
there. 

6.  Rana  sj/Jmitica  cantuhrigcnsia  (Baird).  Northern  Wood  Frog.  This 
frog  is  now  known  from  practically  the  entire  length  of  the  island. 
Specimens  were  taken  by  the  1905  expedition  at  Forbes  I^ake  (II.  5), 
the  small  island  in  Tobin  Harbor  (IV,  0),  and  at  Siskowit  Lake  (V.  5). 

Berpentes. 
1.  Storeria  occipitomaculata  (Storerl.  Red-bellied  Snake.  This 
little  snake  is  the  characteristic  reptile  of  Isle  Royale.  It  was  taken  by 
the  1905  expedition  at  Rock  Harbor  (I.  7  and  IV.  5)  and  Siskowit  Lake 
(V.  5).  No  notes  are  available  on  the  habits  of  the  individual  specimens 
obtained,  bat  they  are  doubtless  similar  to  those  noted  in  1904.  As  the 
variability  of  the  scutelJation  of  this  snake  has  apparently  never  been 
determined,  I  add  the  scale  formulas  of  the  specimens  examined. 


Huseum  No. 

Dorsals. 

bb^s. 

,i'ilS., 

Tempo- 

Oculars. 

caudils. 

v,„,„u. 

Total 
length. 

,e». 

33475 

33476 

33478 

33463 

33104 

33408 

33410 

33411 

•  IS 

15 

15 

15 
16 

15 

IS 

15 

I 
0 

7-G 

7-e 

7-8 
7-T 

(I:? 

1-2 
1-2 

1-2 

1-3 
1-2 

ti 
{S 

i-i 

{l:f 

1-2 
1-2 

2-3 
2-2 

2-2 

48 

41 
43 

43 

48 

115 
124 

ISC 
133 

132 

127 

120 
120 



250 
263 
230 
200 
208 
310 
294 

GO 
59 
61 

58 

33413 

33414 

33436 

33416 

2-3 

3-2 

11 
2-2 

243 
235 

52 
00 

•  In  these  apecliiiens  there  is  tio  derreuse  hi  the  iiuiiilier  or  s<'ale  rons  on  the  posterior  pirl  of  tbe 
body.     (Compare  Rulhven.  1908.) 

2.     Thamnophis    sirtaUs     (Linnaeus).     Garler-snake.     Garter-anakes 
were  taken  in  the  following  localities:    Light-house  clearing  (I,  7),  Etan- 


ECOLOGY  OP  ISLE  ROYALE.  333 

soni  Wearing  (II,  1),  Shoi-e  of  Siskowit  Tjake  (V,  1),  Sumner  Lake  (III. 
o),  Tamarack  Swamp  Rock  Harbor  (V,  5),  and  SUkowit  Bay,  Tin? 
specimens  of  this  snake  obtained  vary  greatly  in  color.  A  number,  like 
the  few  obtained  in  1904,  would  be  referred  unliesitatiugly  to  variety 
parietaliS;  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  tliere  are  other  specimens  in  the 
colle4-tion  which  have  a  smaller  amount  of  red  on  the  sides,  as  well  as 
some  in  which  it  is  entirely  wanting.  Wiien  the  series  ia  examined  as  a 
whole  it  is  quite  evident  that  the  speoimeuB  are  intermediate  between 
the  typical  fomi  and  variety  pai-iclalis,  which  is  not  surprising  since 
the  island  lies  in  the  latitude  of  the  kuowii  "intermediate  zone"  to  the 
southward   (see  Ruthven,  1908,  p.  168). 

This,  however,  in  no  way  vitiates  the  statement  made  in  1904  that 
the  presence  of  this  snake  on  the  island  is  an  evidence  of  a  westem 
affinity  in  the  fauna;  for  the  frequent  presence  of  a  considerable  amount 
of  red  pigment  on  the  aides  and  the  tendency  toward  tlie  fusion  of  the 
upper  row  of  spots,  indicate  that  the  Isle  Koyale  specimens  are  more 
closely  related  to  the  western  parictalis  than  to  the  garter-snake  of 
eastern  Canada  and  Northern  Michigan,  which  belongs  to  the  typical 
form,  in  that  it  never  has  the  interspaces  of  the  first  row  of  spots  en- 
tirely suffused  with  red,  nor  the  upi)er  row  of  spots  usually  fused. 

A  number  of  specimens  from  Kock  Harbor,  differ  so  much  from 
the  usual  <rolor  of  Isle  Royale  specimens  as  to  merit  special 
mention.  The  ground  color  in  the»;e  individuals  is  black  or  blackish. 
The  stripes  are  dark  greenish,  the  dorsal  being  indistinct.  The  spots 
of  the  first  row  are  distinct,  the  interspaces  being  of  a  light  bluish  color; 
the  upper  row  of  spots  is  usually  fused  except  for  short  bars  or  spots 
of  bluish.  Kelly  dark  blue  with  a  black  band  on  the  outer  margin  of 
each  scute.  Supralabials  dark  blue,  bases  of  the  second  to  the  fifth, 
white.  Iris  black.  These  si)ecimens  are  identical  with  those  from  New 
Hampshire  described  by  Allen  (1899,  64)  as  pallidula;  that  they  are 
only  dark  individuals  of  the*  form  wiiich  inhabits  the  entire  island  is 
shown  by  the  numerous  "intermediate''  specimens  in  this  collection. 

References. 
Allen,  O.  M. 
1899.    Notes  on  the  Reptiles  and  Amphibians  of  Intervale,  New  Hamp- 
shire.   Proc.  Host.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  XXIX,  0.1-75. 
Itollman.  O.  H. 

1890.     A  Report  ui>on  the  Pishes  of  Kalamazoo,  Calhoun,  and  Antrim 
Counties,  Michigan.    Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  1888,  219-225. 
Dickerson,  Mary  E. 

1906.     The  Prog  Book.     New  York. 
Jordon,  T>.  S.  and  Evermann,  B.  W. 
1898.    The  Fishes  of  North  and  Middle  America.     Bull.,  47,  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  Vol.  II. 
Ruthven,  A.  G. 

1905.     The  Cold  blooded  Vertebrates  of  the  Porcupine  Mo,untainH  and 
Isle  Royale,  Michigan.     Ann.  Kept.  Geol.  Surv.  Mich.,  1905, 
107-112. 
1908.     Variations  and  Genetic    Relationships    of    the    Garter-snakes. 
Bull.  CI,  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
Yarrow,  H.  C.  w\c 

1883.     Olieck  List  of  North  American  Reptilia  and  Batrachia.^    Mil. 
No.  24,  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROTALE. 


ANNOTATED    LI«T    OF    THE    BIRDS    OF    ISLE    BOYALE, 
MICHIGAN. 

BY    MAX    MINOE   PEET. 

1.    Introduction. 

Our  observatioDB  on  the  birds  of  IbIc  Boyale  extended  over  the  period 
between  July  5  and  September  22,  1905.  Three  parts  of  the  island  were 
stadied,  namely  Kock  Harbor,  Siskowit  Bay  (especially  near  the  outlet 
of  Siskowit  Lake),  and  Washington  Harbor.  The  party  remained  at 
Bock  Harbor  from  July  5  to  August  1;  at  Siskowit  Bay  from  August  1 
to  August  IT;  and  at  Washington  Harbor  from  August  17  to  September 
22.  At  Rock  Harbor  the  ol«ervation9  were  made  by  O.  M'Creary,  N. 
A.  Wood,  and  Dr.  B.  A,  Brown.  At  Siskowit  Bay  the  work  for  the  first 
week  was  carried  on  by  M'Creary  and  Wood,  as  Brown  had  left  the 
island;  on  August  8  they  were  joined  by  the  writer.  On  our  arrival 
at  Washington  Harbor  M'Creary  left  the  island,  and  the  work  was  con- 
tinued by  Wood  and  the  writer  until  September  1,  when  the  former 
was  called  home.  However,  he  was  forced  by  severe  storms  to  remain 
on  Washington  Island  at  the  mouth  of  the  liarbor  until  September  5, 
and  while  there  made  a  number  of  observations  which  are  included  under 
their  respective  heads.  The  observations  during  the  remaining  period 
(September  1  to  September  22)  were  made  by  the  writer.  Before 
joining  the  party  at  Siskowit  Bay,  he  had  spent  three  days,  August  5 
to  8,  at  Washington  Harbor,  the  observations  giving  some  idea  of  the 
bird  life  at  that  place  before  migration  had  set  in. 

Practically  all  the  birds  observed  at  Rock  Harbor  were  nesting,  those 
observed  within  a  few  days  after  our  arrival  at  Siskowit  Bay  may  also 
be  considered  as  breeding,  but  after  about  the  first  of  August  it  is  not 
safe  to  say  whether  the  bird  nested  there  or  was  an  early  migrant.  As 
an  example  of  this  we  may  cite  the  case  of  the  Tennessee  Warbler,  which 
probably  did  not  nest  on  the  island,  and  yet  was  first  observed  there 
August  2.  Unless  the  nest  was  found  or  young  unable  to  fly,  we  did 
not  consider  them  as  breeding  in  that  vicinity,  if  seen  after  August  i. 
In  the  case  of  the  waders,-  the  earliest  migration  date  must  be  placed  in 
the  latter  part  of  July. 

Under  the  head  of  stations,  the  particular  habitats  in  which  the  birds 
were  actually  found  are  given  with  their  numbers,  so  that  a  fuller 
description  of  the  conditions  existing  there  can  be  easily  obtained  by  re- 
ferring to  that  number  under  the  "Description  of  Stations."  It  must  not 
be  supposed  that  the  birds  were  limited  to  the  station  in  which  they  are 
recorded.  In  all  probability  the  birds  noted  in  one  tamarack  swamp 
would  be  found  in  nearly  every  similar  habitat  on  the  island.  But  owing 
44 


3y  Google 


838  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

to  the  limited  time  Bpeot  here  it  was  of  course  impossibie  to  examine 
every  locality,  and  so  the  records  simply  indicate  the  particular  habitatB 
in  which  the  species  under  disciipsiou  were  actually  found.  If  observa- 
tions were  conducted  for  a  sufficiently  long  period,  the  majority,  of  the 
birds  on  the  island  would  probably  be  recorded  for  nearly  every  habitat 
even  if  tliey  did  not  breed  in  them;  especially  would  this  be  true  during 
migrations.  It  is  not  my  intention,  therefore,  to  give  every  habitat 
in  which  a  particular  species  viight  be  found,  but  rather  to  give  the 
habitats  which  are  preferred  by  that  bird, — conditions  which  can  be  said 
to  be  characteristic  of  that  species. 

When  a  species  was  seen  before  the  opening  of  migration,  and  yet 
no  other  signs  of  its  breeding  were  found,  it  was  considered  simply 
as  a  resident,  and  the  first  and  last  dates  when  it  was  noted  are  given. 
The  migration  records  of  the  resident  birds  are  prohably  nearly  all  later 
than  they  ehonld  be,  but  the  dates  are  given  when  they  were  first  seen  in 
actual  migration.  Many  of  the  birds  were  still  migrating  jit  the  time  I 
left  the  island  (September  21),  and  in  snjch  instances  this  is  the  last  date 
given,  and  signifies  that  the  migration  of  the  bird  wns  still  under  way. 
More  ext«ided  observations  on  this  interesting  movement  of  the  birds  can 
be  found  in  the  paper  "The  Fall  Migration  of  Birds,"  which  is  included 
in  this  volume.  The  paper  on  "The  Ecological  Distribution  of  Birds" 
should  also  be  consulted  for  a  discussion  of  that  phase  of  the  work. 

From  July  5  to  September  22  we  recorded  63  summer  residents,  3 
winter  residents,  31  migrants,  and  14  permanent  residents,  making  a 
total  of  111  Biiecies.  In  1904  we  obsen'ed  eight  birds  which  were  not 
recorded  the  second  year;  these  were:  Sora,  American  Coot,  Ijeast  Sand- 
piper, Rhort-enred  Owl,  Bronzed  Crackle,  American  Goldfinch,  Clay-col- 
ored Sparrow,  and  White-breasted  Tiuthatch.  Besides  these,  the  Club- 
■  house  i)eo])le  described  three  other  forms,  the  Snowy  Owl,  Snow  Bunting, 
and  Ijapland  Ix)ngspur,  niaking  a  total  of  122  species  known  to  occur  on 
the  island.  Many  ducks  come  to  the  island,  but  the  descriptions  given  by 
the  fishermen  were  of  no  help'  in  their  determination.  A  complete  list 
of  the  birds  observed  during  the  summer  and  fall  of  1905,  arranged  as 
"Summer  Residents,"  "Migrants,"  '-Winter  Residents,"  and  "Permanent 
Residents,"  is  included  in  this  paper.  Forty-two  species  were  found 
breeding, 

T  have  attempted  to  make  this  more  than  a  simple  annotated  list — 
a  list  giving  nothing  but  the  occurrence,  relative  abundance,  and  dates 
of  migration.  Besides  this  usual  data,  I  have  given  as  complete  a  life 
history  of  each  species  as  I  could,  using  nothing  but  the  original  records 
secured  by  the  expedition.  All  habitat  records  are  also  included  so  that 
the  characteristic  environment  of  the  birds  may  be  understood. 

I  wish  to  acknowledge  my  Indebtedness  to  Mr.  Chas.  C.  Adams  for  the 
opportunity  of  accompanying  the  expedition,  and  for  his  kindness  and 
assistance  in  the  preparation  of  this  paper. 

Specimens  representing  nearly  every  species  found  on  the  island  were 
secured  and  are  now  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Michigan 
Museum.  For  the  determination  of  certain  specimens  we  are  indebted 
to  Mr.  n.  C.  Oberholser  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE   ROYALE. 
2.     Classified  List  of  Birds  Obacrvid  hi  lO'l.'}. 


1.     Summer  Residents, 

ried-bitled  Grebe.  "Xt. 

Loon.  'Si. 

American  Herring  Gull.  *.'!"(. 

American    Merganser.  ".30. 

Hooded  Merganser.  ".'^7. 

American  Bittern.  *^S. 

Spotted  Sandpiper.  39. 

Marsh  Hawk.  40. 

Sharp-shinned   Hawk.  •41. 

Cooi)er8  Hawk.  •■12. 

American  Goshawk.  •4.3. 

Red-tailed  Hawk.  44. 

Red -shouldered  Hawk.  *i5. 

Pigeon  Hawk.  •4({. 

American  Sparrow  Hawk.  47. 

American  Osprey.  •48, 
Saw-whet  Owl. 

Blackbilled  Cuckoo.  "40. 

Belted  Kingfisher.  50. 

Yellow-bellied  Sapsucker.  •51, 

Flicker.  *!>2. 

Whip-poor-will.  Ki. 

Night  Hawk.  .^4. 

Chimney  Swift.  ,55. 
Kubv-throated    Huiiimingbird.*5G. 

OliTe-sided   Flycatcher.  "57. 

Yellow-bellied   Flycatcher.  •58, 

Alder  Flycatcher.  ".50, 

American  Crow.  •fiO. 

Vesper  Sparrow,  •61, 

Savannah   Sparrow.  *«2. 

Slate-colored  Junco.  •C3, 


•  =  Breeding. 

White-throated   Sparrow. 

Chipping  Sparrow. 

Song  Sparrow. 

Swamp  Sparrow. 

Cliff  Swallow, 

Bam  Swallow. 

Tree  Swallow. 

Bank  Swallow. 

Cedar  Waxwing. 

Red-eyed  Vireo. 

^'ashville  Warbler, 

Black-throated  Blue  Warbler, 

Myrtle  Warbler. 

Magnolia  Warbler. 

Bay-breasted  Warbler. 

Black-throated    Green    War!)- 

ler. 
Oven  Bird. 

(Jrinnell's  Wafetthmsh. 
Mourning  Warbler. 
Canadian  Warbler. 
American  Redstart. 
"VM liter  Wren. 
Brown  Creeper. 
Ked-breasted  Nuthatch. 
Chickadee. 

Golden-crowned    Kinglet, 
Wilson's  Thrnsh. 
Olive-backed  Thrush, 
llermit  Thrush. 
American  Robin. 
Bine   Bird. 


Baldpate. 

Green-winged  Teal. 
American   Scanp  Duck. 
Canada  Goose. 
Wilson's  Suii*. 
Yellow  Irf'gs. 
Greater  Yellow  Legs. 
Solitary  Sandpiper. 
Killdeer. 

Broad-winged   Hawk. 
Kingbird, 
Phoebe. 

I>ea8t  Flycatcher. 
Thick-billed  Redwinged 
Blackbird, 
Busty  Blackbird, 


Migrants. 

Ifi.  White-crowned   Sparrow. 

17.  Lincoln  Sparrow. 

IS.  Migrant  Shrike. 

1!J.  I'hiiiidelphia  Vireo. 

20.  Blue-headed  Vireo. 

21.  Black   and   White  Warbler. 

22.  Tennessee  \A'arbler. 

23.  Cape  Jlav  Warbler, 

24.  Black-poll   Warbler, 

25.  Palm  Warbler. 

20.  Connecticut  Warbler. 

27.  Wilson  Warbler. 

2S.  American  Pipit. 

20.  Catbird.  C'.^t^nln 

30.  Ruby-crowned  Klti^h'^'a'^ 

31.  Gray-cheeked  Thrush. 


340  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

3.     WiDter  Kesidents   (migrants  from  tUe  north). 

1.  Hoi-ned   Lark.  3.     Northern  Shrike. 

2.  Pine  Grosbeak. 

4.     Permanent  Residents, 

•1.  I'rnirie   Sharp-tailed   Grouse.       8.  Northern   Pileated  Wood- 

•2.  Bald  Eagle.  pecker. 

"3.  Great-horned    Owl.  0.  Blue  Jay. 

"4.  American   Hawk   Owl,  'lO.  Canada  Jay, 

5.  Hairy    Woodpecker.  'll.  Northern   Raven, 

fi.  Downy  Woodpecker.  12.  Purple  Finch, 

7.  Arctic  Three-toed  Woodpecker  13,  White-winged  Crossbill, 

14.  Pine  Siskin. 

3.  Annotated  List. 

1,  Podilymhus  podiceps   (B).     Pied-Wlled  Grebe, 

Range:  British  Provinces  southward  to  Brazil,  Ai^entine  Republic, 
and  Chili,  including  West  Indies  and  Bermuda,  breeding  nearly  through- 
out its  range. 

Stations :     Wa8hing:ton  Harbor,  X  '04 ;  Washington  River,  II  '04. 

Breeding:,  Brood  of  5  young,  Aug.  18. 

The  Pied-billed  Grebe  was  not  found  either  at  Bock  Harbor  or  Sis- 
kowit  Bay,  but  was  a  common  summer  resident  at  Washington  Harbor, 
frequenting  the  river  and  upper  end  of  the  Harbor, 

Breeding  Notes:  A  family  consisting  of  t^'o  old  birds  and  five  young 
were  seen  almost  daily  at  that  place.  They  seldom  came  oat  into  the 
harbor.  Although  very  shy  when  approached  from  land  I  succeeded  in 
getting  quite  close  when  in  a  rowboat.  They  were  never  seen  to  take 
wing,  generally  diving  or  swimming  rapidly  away  upon  the  approach  of 
danger.  Sometimes  when  badly  frightened,  instead  of  diving,  they  would 
rise  upon  their  small  wings  so  that  their  feet  just  touched  the  sur- 
face and  in  this  way  half  ran,  half  flew  across  the  water.  The  young 
were  still  unable  to  fly  by  the  middle  of  September,  and  I  doubt  if  the 
parents  had  completed  their  moult  auCBciently  to  use  their  wings  much 
either.  During  the  rainy  days  when  the  creek  was  swollen  and  v'ery 
rapid  the  grebes  generally  stayed  out  in  the  harbor  near  the  river's 
mouth.  A  shallow  spot  covered  with  water  plants  and  grasses  near  the 
bend  in  the  river  was  their  usual  feeding  place, 

2,  Qai'ia  imhcr  (7).     Loon. 

Range:  Northern  part  of  northern  hemisphere.  In  North  America 
breeds  from  the  northern  tier  of  states  northward;  ranges  in  winter 
south  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  Lower  California. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  III,  2;  Snmner  Lake,  III,  5. 
Siskowit  Bay,  V,  1 ;  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6, 
Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04. 

Breeding:  Ti^'o  voung,  two  or  three  davs  old,  were  taken  on  August 
10. 

Common  summer  resident  throughout  the  island,  as  shown  by  such 
records  as  these:  '"Seveu  loons  seen  in  the  west  end  of  Rock  Harbor. 
July  13"  and  "eight  adults  seen  at  Siskowit  Bay.  August  Ist,"     These 


ECOLOGY    OF    ISLE   ROYALE.  311 

birds  had  not  left  the  iBlaud  September  21st,  aa  the  fishermen  reported 
them  at  this  time. 

They  appeared  to  be  more  common  at  the  northern  end  of  the  island 
and  at  Siskowit  than  at  Waahin{»ton  Harbor.  It  is  doubtful  whether 
any  nested  in  the  immediate' vicinity  of  the  latter  pla**. 

Breeding  notes:  Prom  their  actions  a  pair  were  supposed  to  be  breed- 
ing on  Sumner  Lake  (III,  5)  during  July,  but  no  nest  was  found. 
As  long  as  any  one  was  in  sight  the  pair  remained  together,  calling 
and  diving  continuously,  often  coming  up  many  rods  from  their  diving 
point. 

On  August  10th.  a  pair  of  adult  birds  were  found  with  their  two 
young  on  Siskowit  Lake,  The  birds  were  swimming  together  with  their 
young  close  beside  them,  .\lthough  apparently  not  more  than  two  or 
three  days  old,  they  »-ere  expert  divers  and  could  swim  uuder  water 
much  faster  than  the  boat  could  be  rowed  when  pursuing  them.  When 
approached,  the  parents  swam  rapidly  away,  leaving  the  young  to  take 
care  of  themselves,  which  they  seemed  perfectly  capable  of  doing,  and 
would  have,  had  it  not  been  for  the  use  of  a  shot  gun.  As  the  young 
were  approached,  they  swam  rapidly  away  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 
Upon  being  closer  pressed  th^  dived,  swimming  under  water  for  twenty 
or  twenty-five  feet.  This  was  kept  up  until  they  were  procured.  The 
young  at  this  early  age  were  capable  of  performing  that  remarkable  feat 
for  which  the  adults  are  so  noted — the  act  of  swimming  at  different  depths 
with  the  head  still  above  the  surface.  This  is  not  done  by  diving,  but 
simply  by  linking  the  body  lower  down  as  a  fish  might  lower  itself; 
no  special  motion  is  noticeable,  the- sinking  being  gradual,  and  seemingly 
without  effort.  Towards  the  last  the  young  swam  with  only  the  head 
out  of  water.  One  which  was  only  wounded  we  kept  alive  twenty-fonr 
hours,  after  which  it  was  killed  as  there  was  no  food  which  we  could 
easily  procure  for  it.  When  placed  in  a  basin  of  water  it  swam  briskly 
about,  seldom  using  the  whole  leg,  but  simply  the  foot,  bending  at  the 
upper  end  of  the  tarsus,  which  was  moved  hack  and  forth  with  a  fanning 
motion,  the  toes  folding  back  on  the  forward  stroke.  It  showed  little 
fear,  even  when  taken  in  the  hand.  Occasionally  it  uttered  a  call  or 
cry,  much  resembling  that  of  a  young  turkey.  In  the  stomach  of  the 
other  was  found  a  dragon-fly  nymph  and  four  small  fish  about  an  inch 
and  a  half  to  two  inches  long,  which  shows  that  the  fish  diet  is  acquired 
early  in  this  siiecies.  Low  marshy  land  suitable  for  nesting  sites  oc- 
curred in  some  part  of  nearly  every  lake  or  bay  on  the  island,  and 
probably  many  breed  here  every  year. 

Miscellaneous  notes:  Many  loons  are  caught  each  year  on  "set  lines" 
and  also  in  the  gill  nets  on  the  shores  of  the  island.  One  fine  male 
was  brought  to  the  party  by  a  fisherman,  which  was  caught  this  way. 
The  line  had  been  sunk  w'here  the  water  was  about  100  fathoms  deep  and 
about  ten  miles  out  in  the  lake  from  the  Rock  Harbor  light-house.  The 
line  was  down  twenty  fathoms,  and  this  loon  is  supposed  to  have  swam 
down  this  distance  and  taken  the  small  herring  used  as  a  bait.  The 
fisherman  reported  that  this  was  a  very  common  occurrence,  the  birds 
sometimes  being  found  at  the  great  depth  of  fifty  and  sixty  fathoms; 
but  this  seems  improbable.  These  birds  roamed  about  much  in  the 
evening  and  during  the  night,  their  loud  peculiar  cry  being  heard  at  all 


S42  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

lionrs  as  tliey  paaweij  over  the  camp.  Sevei'e  etormH  like  those  during 
the  first  few  days  of  September  drove  the  birds  into  the  seclueion  of 
WaHhingtOQ  Harbor,  where  tliey  were  usually  in  pairs,  and  very  sliy. 

3,     Laiiis  argcntatus  smithsonianvs   (51a).     American  Herring  <iull. 

Kange:  Korth  America  generally,  bi-eeding  from  Maine,  northern  Xew 
York,  the  Great  Laltea  and  Minnesota  northward;  in  winter,  south  to 
Cutwi  and  Lower  (California. 

Wtations:    Rock  Harbor,  I,  1;  III,  2. 

Siskowit  Lake  and  vicinity,  V,  YIII,  '04. 
Long  and  Menagerie  Islands,  V,  10. 
Washington  Harbor,  X  'ft4,  River.  II  '04. 

Breeding :    Young  seen  Auj^st  1  and  0. 

Very  abundant,  their  numbers  at  places  being  counted  in  thousands. 
This  was  the  only  gull  seen  on  the  trip.  Gatherin_g  on  the  rocky  islands 
in  such  numbei-e  as  to  make  them  look  like  one  solid  mass  of  white, 
their  cries  wci-e  almost  deafening.  In  the  evenings  they  visited  the 
various  places  where  the  fishermen  had  thrown  away  the  fish  cleanings. 
At  these  feasts  the  water  would  be  fairly  covered  with  the  birds,  which 
would  remain  feeding  long  after  dark.  So  matter  on  what  part  of  the 
island,  within  a  mile  or  so  of  the  water,  these  gulls  were  nearly  always 
in  sight. 

Breeding  notes:  On  August  1st,  near  Chippewa  Harbor,  a  brood  of 
these  young  were  seen  swimming  with  their  parents,  the  former  being 
unable  to  fly.  On  August  6th  a  visit  was  made  to  the  breeding  grounds 
of  these  Bi)eciea  at  Riskowit,  V,  10.  Fig.  ^5.  Here  a  chain  of  small 
islands  runs  nearly  parallel  to  the  shore  and  about  three  miles  distant 
from  it.  The  largest  of  these  is  nearly  two  miles  long,  and  from  a  few 
rods  to  a  fourth  of  a  mile  wide.  It  is  composed  of  red  sandstone,  which 
rises  out  of  the  lake  at  an  angle  of  about  20^,  The  rocks  are  almost 
bare  of  vegetation,  but  above  the  wave  swept  zone  there  is  a,  narrow 
belt  of  shrubs  and  small  trees. 

As  the  island  was  approached,  the  rocks  could  be  seen  covered  with 
the  adnlt  birds,  which,  however,  soon  took  wing  and  circled  about  our 
heads,  making  a  great  noise.  As  we  landed,  many  of  the  young  birds 
jumped  into  the  water  and  swam  hastily  away  to  the  gathering  flock  of 
adults  which  was  forming  just  out  of  range.  Others  ran  and  hid  in 
the  small  bushes,  while  some,  particularly  the  youngest,  merely  squatted 
down  between  the  rocks.  Fig.  58,  their  mottled,  downy  plumage  fur- 
nishing such  excellent  protective  coloring  that  many  were  actually  pass- 
ed over  in  the  first  search.  The  great  mass  of  young  remained  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  out  in  the  lake,  while  overhead  the  parents  flew  and 
screamed.  Tiie  uesfs  were  built  in  crevices,  Fig.  59,  and  nooks  in  the 
rocks  from  near  the  water's  edge  to  the  top  of  the  ridge  which  in  some 
places  was  from  ten  to  twenty  feet  high.  Most  of  them  were  placed 
on  the  southern  exposure  and  were  composed  of  grass,  sticks  and  such 
rubbish  as  was  easily  accessible.  No  fresh  eggs  were  found,  and  the 
young  birds  appeared  to  be  a  mouth  or  more  old. 

The  young  when  frightened  squatted  flat  on  the  Itai-e  rocks,  or  squeezed 
theniPelves  up  in  Muall  nooks  and  crannies,  trusting  to  their  protective 
coloration  for  safety. 

It  is  a  common  practice  among  the  fishermen  at  Wa^ingttm  Harbor 

■  XiOCH^lc 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  343 

to  take  tbe  newly  hatched  young  from  the  nest  and  raise  thein  at  their 
homes.  Some  wiio  have  a  few  chickens  take  the  eggs  and  place  them 
under  a  setting  hen.  These  young  soon  become  an  tame  as  chicliens.  and 
feed  upon  any  form  of  table  refuse.  The  writer  procured  five  of  these 
young  from  some  fishermen.  They  ranged  in  size  from  one  about  two 
mouths  old  and  nearly  able  to  fly  to  a  little  downy  fellow  scarcely  three 
weeks  old.  These  had  all  been  obtained  on  some  rocks  just  outside  of 
Washington  Harbor,  They  came  into  the  writer's  possession  on  August 
8,  and  in  a  few  days  were  turned  loose  on  the  beach  in  front  of  our  camp 
on  Siskowit  Ray. 

They  ate  everything  offered  them,  vegetable  as  well  as  animal  matter. 
Fish  seemed  to  be  particularly  relished.  Whatever  they  ate  was 
swallowed  entire  if  it  could  possibly  be  gotten  into  the  mouth.  One 
such  instance  was  especially  ludicrous.  A  northern  red  squirrel  with 
simply  the  skin  and  head  removed  was  fed  to  the  youngest.  Because  of 
the  weight  it  was  with  considerable  difficulty  that  the  squirrel  was 
started  in  the  right  direction.  The  body  was  too  long,  so  that  when 
swallowed,  the  tail  still  protruded  from  the  gull's  mouth.  By  stretching 
its  neck  us  high  as  possible,  most  of  the  tail  disappeared,  only  to  appear 
again  as  soon  as  the  gult  dropped  its  head  down  on  its  siioulders,  and 
closed  its  eyes  in  the  satisfied  manner  evinced  by  all  the  young  gulls 
after  a  good  meal. 

Often  when  food  was  given  to  them  they  picked  it  up  and  walked  to 
the  water,  swashing  it  around  several  times  before  eating.  The  downy 
young  never  ventured  into  the  water  where  they  would  have  to  swim, 
preferring  to  stand  on  the  beach  where  the  waves  would  just  lap  their 
feet.  The  older  ones  often  swam  out  a  considerable  distance  from  land 
and  made  the  acquaintance  of  a  young  wild  gull  able  to  fly.  After  a 
few  days  this  latter  bird  became  tame  enough  to  come  on  the  beach  to 
be  fed.  One  of  the  most  characteristic  habits  of  the  young  gulls  was  to 
walk  to  the  water's  edge  where  the  waves  would  just  wash  their  legs, 
and  dive  the  head  down  into  the  water,  raise  it  quickly  and  throw  the 
water  over  their  backs,  at  the  same  time  giving  the  tail  a  few  jerks 
sidewise.  This  performance  was  repeated  many  times  each  day,  often 
not  five  minutes  apart.  The  young  which  had  acquired  their  full  plum- 
age, but  were  not  able  to  fly,  could  usually  be  told  from  those  which 
were  able  to  do  so,  by  their  manner  of  holding  the  head.  The  former 
rarely  held  the  head  erect,  either  when  on  the  water  or  land,  usually 
holding  it  well  forward  and  often  on  a  level  with  the  back,  while  those 
able  to  fly  held  the  head  erect  and  nearly  straight  above  the  breast.  The 
change  appeared  to  take  place  immediately  after  the  first  flight.  For 
many  days  before  this  occurred  the  young  gull  would  be  seen  jumping 
«p  and  down  on  the  beach,  often  to  a  height  of  two  or  three  feet,  flapping 
its  wings  rapidly  at  the  same  time.  The  first  flight  of  our  largest  gull 
occurred  one  afternoon  after  one  of  these  performances.  Making  a 
short  run  down  the  sloping  beach  it  rose  on  its  wings  with  a  few  rather 
uncertain  strokes  and  sailed  out  over  the  harbor.  The  flight  must  have 
covered  half  a  mile  when  it  returned  and  alighted  on  the  water  near 
camp.  Its  alighting  was  anything  but  graceful,  for  not  being  used  to 
this  new  method  of  locomotion,  it  raised  its  wings  straight  over  its  back 
and  dropped  heavily  into  the  water,  nearly  submerging  itself.     When 


344  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

it  rwe  to  the  surface  and  had  completely  arranged  its  feathers,  it  held 
its  head  upright,  like  the  adult  gulls,  as  if  proud  of  its  performance. 

General  Notes;  The  Herring  Gull's  manner  of  feeding  was  interestiag. 
.When  small  bits  of  fish  were  thrown  on  the  water,  the  birds  would  fly 
down  and  just  pat  the  water  with  both  feet,  at  the  same  time  lowering 
the  head  and  picking  up  the  morsel  with  the  bill,  not  even  stopping  in 
their  flight.  When  the  piece  was  too  large  to  pick  up,  the  bird  alighted 
near  it,  and  either  picked  it  to  pieces  or  swallowed  it  whole.  They  were 
often  seen  dropping  into  the  water  from  a  considemble  height,  appar- 
ently catching  small  fleh.  The  Herring  Gull  is  sometimes  taken  on  set 
lines  like  the  loon,  only  in  this  case  the  book  must  be  near  the  surface. 
^Tiile  on  "Ijong  Island"  (V,  10)  the  dried  body  of  an  adult  bird  was 
found  with  a  large  flsb  hook  attached  to  a  short  line  in  its  throat. 

The  majority  of  these  birds  go  south  with  the  freezing  of  the  lake; 
a  few,  however,  remain  throughout  the  winter  around  the  fishermen's 
huts.  Whererer  a  cut  is  made  in  the  ice  at  this  time,  many  of  these  gulls 
may  be  found. 

4.  Merganser  aiiiericanus  (129").     American  Merganser. 

Range:  North  America  generally,  breeding  south  in  the  United 
States,  to  Pennsylvania  and  to  the  mountains  of  Colorado  and  Cali- 
fornia, 

Stations:    Lake  Superior  (Rock  Harbor),  I,  1.  Ill,  2.  Ill,  3.  II,  4. 
Siskowit  Bay,  V,  1.  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6. 
Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04. 

Breeding:     July  13,  young;  also  July  27. 

The  American  Mei^anser  is  a  ratlier  common  species  on  the  island, 
breeding  in  suitable  localities. 

Breeding  Notes:  The  fisherman  re]>orted  several  families  of  adults 
and  young  at  McCargoe  Cove  on  July  11,  and  on  the  13th  a  female  with 
several  young  was  seen  in  the  west  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  3).  A 
much  larger  Hock  of  young  was  seen  with  the  female  at  this  same  place 
on  July  27th. 

At  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  1),  on  August  1,  a  large  flock  of  young  not  yet 
able  to  fly  were  found,  and  on  August  8  another  flock  barely  able  to 
use  their  wings  were  met  near  the  Siskowit  Islands.  As  many  as  twenty- 
two  young  were  counted  with  one  female.  No  young  were  found  this 
year  on  Washington  Biver,  but  several  were  seen  out  in  the  Harbor, 
which  might  have  been  raised  here. 

5.  Lophodytes  ciicullatus   (131).     Hooded  Merganser. 

Range:  North  America  generally,  south  to  Mexico  and  Cuba,  breeding 
nearly  throughout  its  range. 

Stations:    I^ake  Superior  (Rock  Harbor),  I,  1. 
Sumner  Lake,  III,  5. 

Breeding:     Young  observed  July  27. 

This  species  was  quite  rare,  being  observed  only  three  times  on  Sum- 
ner Lake  (III,  5)  July  26,  27,  20,  and  at  the  Caribou  Islands  on  several 
occasions. 

Breeding  Notes :  From  the  actions  of  the  single  females  seen  at  Sum- 
ner Lake  they  were  thought  to  have  young  in  the  vicinity,  but  none  were 
found.  On  July  27  a  female  and  six  young  were  seen  on  the  Caribou 
Islands.    The  young  were  very  small,  not  more  than  two  we^s  old,  and 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  345 

by  rowing  fast  they  were  overtaken,  but  escaped  by  diving.    This  same 
tlock  was  seen  in  this  vicinity  several  times  afterwards. 

6.  Mareca  americana  (137).     Baldpate. 

Range:  North  America  from  the  Arctic  Ocean  south  in  winter,  to 
Guatemala  and  Cuba.    Bi-eeds  chiefly  north  of  United  States, 

Station:     Washington  Harbor,  II,  '04. 

Migration :     Sept.  T>. 

On  September  5  a  single  iadividual  was  found  on  Washington  River, 
II,  '04.     It  was  poorly  colored;  perhaps  an  iminature  specimen, 

7.  Nettion  corolinciisis  (13!)).     Green-winged  Teal, 

Range :  North  America.  Breeding  chiefly  north  of  the  United  States 
and  migrating  south  to  Honduras  and  Cuba. 

Btation :     Washington  Harbor,  II,  '04. 

Migration :     September  4. 

A  flock  of  five  api)eared  In  the  Harbor  on  the  morning  of  September 
4  but  soon  disappeared. 

.S,     Aythya  marila   (148),     American  Scaup  Duck. 

Range:  North  Ameriea,  breeding  far  north.  South  in  the  winter  to 
Guatemala. 

Stations:     Siskowit  Bay,  V. 

Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04. 

Migration :    Aug,  4  to  Sept.  1. 

This  duck  was  very  rare  here.  One  pair  was  found  on  Siskowit  Bay 
near  Wright's  Island  on  August  4.  Just  before  the  hard  storm  which 
commenced  September  1,  a  flock  of  these  birds  came  into  the  harbor  and 
were  seen  near  Washington  Island  (X,  '04). 

9.  Branta  canadensis  (172).    Canada  Goose. 

Range:  Temperate  North  America,  breeding  in  the  northern  United 
States  and  British  Provinces ;  soutli  in  winter  to  Mexico. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  I,  '04. 

Migration:     September  16, 

On  the  afternoon  of  September  IG,  a  solitary  Canada  Goose  was  ob- 
sen'cd  flying  over  the  island  in  a  southerly  direction.  The  residents  on 
the  island  reported  that  in  laie  October  great  flocks  of  geeae  pass  over, 
sometimes  stopping  for  a  few  hours,  but  never  remainiug  for  any  length 
of  time. 

10.  Boiaurus  Icntiginosua  (190).    American  Bittern. 

Range:  Temperate  North  America.  South  to  Guatemala,  Cuba,  Ja- 
maica and  Bermuda. 

Stations :     Shore  of  Sumner  Lake,  III,  3. 

Breeding :     Dead  young  found  on  July  18. 

Only  one  of  this  species  was  seen  during  both  years,  although  there  are 
many  haunts  which  seem  suitable  for  it.  On  July  18  and  again  on  the 
25th  a  single  individnal  was  flushed  from  the  grassy  bog  along  the  edge 
of  Sumner  Lake. 

Breeding  Notes:  An  old  nest  was  found  July  18.  It  was  on  a  grassy 
tuft  in  the  bog,  and  contained  an  addled  egg  and  two  dead  young.  The 
nest  consisted  simply  of  a  depression  in  the  mat  of  green  and  dry  grass. 

11.  QaUinago  delicata  (230).    Wilson's  SniiMj. 

Range:  North  and  Middle  America.  Breeding  from  the  northern 
United  States  northward ;  south  in  winter  to  the  West  Indies. 


346  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

StationB:     II,  'W,  Washington  Harbor. 

Migratiou :    August  27  to  September  21, 

On  August  27,  one  of  these  snijie  was  found  in  the  marshy  spot  near 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  again  on  September  20  another  was  found 
in  the  same  place.  They  were  very  wary  and  were  only  found  by  walk- 
ing through  the  grass  from  which  they  were  flushed.  On  several  occa- 
sions, birds  which  might  have  belonged  to  this  species  were  met  after 
dark  along  the  road  to  Wendigo,  but  owing  to  their  very  rapid  flight, 
identification  was  uncertain. 

12.  Totanus  fiavipes  (255).     Yellow-legs. 

Range:  America  in  general,  breeding  in  the  cold  temperate  and  sub- 
arctic districts,  and  migrating  south  in  winter  to  southern  South 
America. 

Stations:     Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta,  III.  3,  Kock  Harbor. 

Siskowit  Bay,  Beach,  V,  1.     Wasliingtou  Harbor,  I,  '01. 

Migration:     July  26  to  September  15, 

On  July  2t)  a  bird  of  this  species  was  seen  at  close  range  at  III,  3. 
Three  others  stopped  on  the  bluff  above  the  river  September  15,  They 
showed  little  fear,  and  appeared  curious  as  I  approached. 

13.  Helodromas  solitariua  (256),     Solitary  Sandpiper. 

Range:  Korth  America.  Breeding  occasionally  in  the  northern 
United  States,  more  commonly  northward  and  migrating  southward  as 
far  as  the  Argentine  Republic  and  Peru, 

Stations:     Siskowit  Bay  beaches,  V,  1. 
^Va8hington  Harbor,  I  '04, 

Migration:     August  6  to  September  15, 

This  sandpiper  was  rather  common  throughout  August  at  Siskowit 
Bay,  being  found  mostly  on  the  bare  wave  swept  rocks.  True  to  its 
name,  it  was  rarely  seen  when  not  atone.  The  pure  white  underparts 
and  olive  fuscous  head  and  back  made  it  quite  conspicuous  as  it  teetered 
bacli  and  forth  on  the  rocks.  They  were  seldom  seen  at  Washington 
Harbor,  although  on  September  5  small  flocks  were  seen  all  along  the 
road  to  Wendigo.  They  were  picking  up  food  and  paid  little  attention 
to  the  writer,  simply  running  ahead  a  few  feet  when  approached  too 
closely, 

14.  Actitin  nwcalaria  (263),    Spotted  Sandpiper, 

Range:  North  and  South  America  from  Alaska,  south  to  Southern 
Brazil.     Breeds  throughout  temperate  North  America. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  I,  1.     Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6. 

Siskowit  Bav,  V,  1.     Menagerie  Island,  V,  10, 
Washington  Harbor,  I,  '04;  X,  '04, 

Resident  and  Migrants:    July  20  to  September  16. 

The  Spotted  Sandpiper  appeared  to  he  rare  at  the  northern  end  of  the 
island,  hut  was  rather  common  at  the  other  two  localities  where  ob- 
servations were  made.  It  was  seen  almost  daily  at  Siskowit  and  was 
by  far  the  most  common  wader  seen  on  the  trip.  At  Washington  Har- 
bor they  often  came  around  the  dock  and  were  also  met  with  along  the 
river  and  the  road  parallel  to  it.  At  this  latter  station  the  birds  were 
probably  migrants  as  they  were  not  seen  regularly,  being  present  one 
day  and  absent  the  next  with  perhaps  a  day  or  two  between  thpir 
Tiaits. 


,.byCOOgIC 


ECOLOGY   OP   ISLE  EOYALE.  347 

13.     Oxi/c(hu«  vocifenis   (273).    Killdeer. 

Range:  Temperate  North  America,  breeding  north  to  Kewfoundland 
and  Manitoba,  migrating  to  the  West  Indies  and  Central  America  and 
northern  South  America. 

Stafionfi:     itock  Harljor  region,  II,  2.    Washington  Harbor,  I  '04. 

Migration :     July  13  to  August  5. 

Only  one  of  these  birds  was  seen  at  the  northern  end  of  the  island; 
this  was  on  July  13  when  one  was  seen  llj'ing  over  the  tamarack  swamp 
(II,  2),  Xo  others  were  found  until  August  5  when  a  flock  of  three 
were  seen  feeding  on  the  gransy  slope  of  the  first  clearing  (I,  '04), 

16.  Pediococtcs  ph^aianelltis  canipeatris  (308b).  Prairie  Sharp-tailed 
Grouse. 

Kange:  Plains  and  prairies  of  the  United  States  east  of  the  Kocky 
Mountains;  north  to  Manitoba;  east  to  Wisconsin  and  Illinois;  south 
to  New  Mexico. 

Stations:     Partial  clearings  along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1. 
Old  Burning,  V,  !). 
Old  clearing  and  burning  at  end  of  Siskowit  Bay,  VII  '04. 

Breeding:     July  25,  female  with  young. 

The  Prairie  Sharp-tailed  Grouse  was  found  at  Rock  Harbor  and 
Siskowit  Bay  by  our  party  and  was  reported  at  Washington  Harbor 
by  the  residents  who  called  it  a  pheasant.  At  the  latter  place  during  the 
fi'll  of  1904,  I  observed  what  I  still  think  was  a  young  of  this  species, 
but  as  it  was  not  procured,  the  record  for  this  part  of  the  island  must 
depend  almost  entirely  upon  the  reports  of  the  keepers  of  the  club- 
house and  the  fishermen.  It  was  nowhere  very  abundant,  but  probably 
occurred  much  more  plentifully  than  our  observations  would  tend  to 
indicate,  aa  those  parts  which  seem  to  be  favorable  for  its  home  were 
the  least  worked  by  our  party. 

Breeding  Notes:  On  July  23  a  female  accompanied  by  three  young, 
about  half  grown,  was  found  in  a  clearing  on  a  small  rock  ridge  near 
Benson  Brook  (II,  1).  Mr.  Kneutson  of  Park  Place  reported  July 
20,  that  the  grouse  nested  regularly  at  his  clearing  (IV,  5)  and  that 
seieral  broods  of  young  had  recently  been  seen  there.  He  also  said 
that  during  the  previous  fall  he  had  found  them  very  plentiful  and 
tame  at  the  clearing  at  McCargoe  Cove  (II,  4).  The  Malone  boys  at 
Menagerie  Light-House  reported  these  birds  to  be  quite  common  breeders 
at  the  clearing  when  the  old  town  stood  near  the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay. 

Miscellaneous  Notes:  A  Myrtle  AVarbler's  nest  was  found  July  7 
near  the  head  of  Tonkin  Bay  (IV,  7),  lined  with  feathers  of  the  Sharp- 
tailed  Grouse  and  Canada  Jay.  An  adult  bird  was  secured  August  5 
in  a  burnt  clearing  near  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  9),  The  crop 
contained  fifteen  fresh  June-berries  and  three  grasshoppers.  On  August 
13,  three  adults  were  seen  in  the  large  clearing  near  the  bead  of  tiis- 
kowit  Bay  (VIII,  '(W).  This  was  once  a  prosperous  mining  town  but 
has  been  deserted  since  about  187f»,  A  forest  fire  swept  away  nearly 
all  the  buildings,  and  since  that  time  a  second  growth  of  birch,  alder 
and  low  brush  has  covered  a  large  part  of  it.  But  many  acres  are 
still  bare  or  overgrown  with  long  grass,  principally  timothy.  It  was  in 
this  cle.iring  that  the  birds  found  the  most  favorable  conditions,  and 
were  therefore  more  abundant  here  than  at  the  other  stations.  An  adult 


348  MICHIQAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

female,  about  half  moulted,  was  taken  here  on  September.  16.  Its  crop 
contained  seeds  and  berries  with  portions  of  grasshoppers  and  other 
insects.  The  birds  as  a  rule  were  vei*T  wary,  and  when  approached 
either  took  wing  or  ran  swiftly  through  the  long  grass.  Heir  flight 
was  swift  and  direct,  accompanied  by  a  whirring  noise  as  they  arose. 
During  the  fall  they  make  local  migrations  and  are  reported  to  visit 
the  clearings  of  Washington  Harbor  in  qaite  considerable  numbers. 
One  was  thought  to  have  been  seen  here  during  the  latter  part  of 
August  by  Michael  Hollinger,  a  hired  man  at  the  Club-house. 

17.     Circus  hudsonius   {331).     Marsh  Hawk. 

Range:  Xorth  America  in  general.  Breeds  throughout  its  Sorth 
American  range. 

Stations:     Eock    Harbor,    Tamarack    and   .Spruce    Swamp,  II,  2,  5. 
ffaehington  Harbor,  I  '04. 

Resident;     July  13  to  September  12. 

On  July  13  one  of  these  birds  was  observed  in  a  tamarack  swamp  at 
the  end  of  the  island.  At  Washington  Harbor  a  female  was  seen  flying 
over  the  clearing  August  6,  and  again  a  female  was  found  September 
1  in  a  tamarack  swamp  on  Washington  Island. 

Two  old  males  were  seen  together  several  times  on  September  8  and 
again  on  the  12fh  in  the  trees  bordering  the  flrst  clearing,  chasing 
small   birds,   probably   Savanna   Sparrows. 

IS.    Accipiter  velox  (332).     Sharp-shinned  Hawk. 

Range:  North  America  in  general.  Breeds  south  to  Panama  tbrongh- 
out  its  North  American  range. 

Stations:     Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Forest,  "V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor.  I  '04  (clearing) ;  Forest,  II  '04;  Clear- 
ing and  Forest,  X  '04. 

Resident:     July  26. 

Migration:    Began  about  the  first  of  August,  continuing  thronghout 

The  Sharp-shinned  Hawk  was  first  seen  July  26  at  the  western  end 
of  Rock  Harbor.  Only  one  specimen,  a  fine  male,  was  found  at  Siskowit 
Angust  15,  but  at  Washington  Harbor  it  was  rather  common  the  first 
of  Angust,  and  so  increased  in  numbers  that  during  September  it  be- 
came even  more  abundant  than  the  Sparrow  Hawk. 

The  Sharp  shinned  Hawk,  more  than  any  of  the  other  raptorial  birds, 
timed  their  migration  to  that  of  the  warblers  and  sparrows  upon  which 
they  preyed.  During  migration  they  increased  gradually  from  day  to 
day,  those  which  came  in  from  the  north  remaining  with  those  already 
here  instead  of  passing  on  to  the  south,  probably  because  of  the  verj 
favorable  feeding  grounds  offered  by  the  clearings. 

19.     Accipiter  cooperi  (333),     Cooper's  Hawk, 

Range:  North  America  from  sonthem  British  America  south  to 
southern  Mexico.    Breeds  throughout  its  range. 

Stations:    Bock  Harbor,  11,  2;  Washington  Harbor,  I  '04. 

Resident:     July  18  to  September  12. 

This  was  one  of  the  rarest  hawks  on  the  island  although  food  was 
very  abundant.  It  might  be  that  the  clearings  were  not  extensive  enough. 
One  was  seen  at  Rock  Harbor  (I,  2)  July  18.  Also  at  Washington 
(m  Angust  24,  29,  31  and  September  12,    On  this  last  date  several  came 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   R07ALB.  349 

to  tlie  first  clearing  in  search  of  small  birds,  many  of  which  they  caught 
in  the  burned  area  where  Baranna  and  Lincoln  Sparrows  were  quite 
abundant. 

20.  Accipiter  atricapillua  (334),    American  Goshawk. 

Range:  Northern  and  Eastern  North  America,  south  in  winter  to 
the  middle  states  and  southern  Rocky  Mountain  region;  casually  west 
to  Oregon.  Breeding  range  restricted  to  the  Canadian  towns  of  the 
United  States  and  northward. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor  beach,  I,  1,  4. 

Breeding :     Young  seen  and  secured  on  July  26,  1905. 

This  rare  hawk  was  seen  but  twice,  once  on  a  tree  at  the  edge  of  the 
beach  (  I,  1)  and  again  in  the  birch  and  spruce  forest  near  the  tamarack 
swamp  (I,  4),  This  latter  bird  was  secured  and  proved  to  be  a  young 
male.  Professor  W.  B.  Barrows,  in  a  recent  letter  to  the  writer,  gives  this 
bird  in  Michigan  as  a  "winter  visitor,"  "irregular  and  no  nesting  data," 
The  specimen  secured  was  probably  raised  on  the  island,  as  July  26, 
the  date  when  taken,  is  very  early,  for  the  migration  of  hawks  especially 
for  the  immature  birds,  even  in  this  northern  region.  Although  a 
few  Sparrow  and  Sharp-Shinned  had  already  appeared  at  Washington 
Harbor  at  this  date,  they  were  nearly  all  old  birds,  and  I  think  had 
simply  gathered  there  from  the  surrounding  territory.  From  all 
observations  made,  it  seems  evident  that  the  young  of  the  hawks  do 
not  migrate  until  some  time  later ;  therefore  it  seems  probable  that  this 
immature  male  was  bred  on  the  island. 

21.  Suteo  horealis  (337) .    Red-tailed  Hawk. 

Range :  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  Great  Plains,  north  to 
about  60°,  south  to  eastern  Mexico.  Breeds  throughout  its  range,  ex- 
cept possibly  the  extreme  southern  portion. 

Stations :     Rock  Harbor,  II,  1. 

Resident;       July  14. 

The  Red-tailed  Hawk  was  only  observed  once  during  the  two  seasons 
spent  on  the  island.  This  specimen  was  seen  flying  over  a  small  clear- 
ing (II,  1)  at  Rock  Harbor  on  July  14. 

22.  Buteo  Uneatus  (339).    Red-shouldered  Hawk. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  Manitoba  and  Nova  Scotia;  west 
to  Texas  and  the  Plains;  south  to  the  Gulf  states  and  Mexico.  Breeds 
throughout  its  range. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  IV,  1. 

Resident:'    July  20. 

Like  the  Red-tailed,  this  hawk  proved  to  be  very  rare,  the  only  record 
being  that  of  July  20  when  one  waa  seen  pursuing  a  pair  of  Bald  Eagles 
near  the  head  of  Tobin  Harbor. 

23.  Buteo  pkttyptcrua  (343).    Broad-winged  Hawk. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  from  New  Brunswick  and  the  Sas- 
katchewan r^ion  to  Texas  and  Mexico,  and  thence  southward  to  north- 
em  South  America  and  the  West  Indies.  Breeds  throughout  its  United 
States  range. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  I,  '04  (clearing),  X,  '04. 

Migration:    August  30,  September  5  and  12. 

This  hawk  was  rare  on  the  island  and  was  only  observed  as  a  migrant. 
A  single  specimen  was  seen  at  the  camp  clearing   (I,  '04)   on  August 


350  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

30  and  another  on  September  5  at  Washington  Inland  (X,  '04).  Several 
were  found  September  12  accompanying  the  large  bird  wave.  They  were 
exceedinfily  shy  and  there  might  haye  been  many  present  during  the 
large  bird  waves,  which,  owing  to  this  trait,  were  not  identified. 

24.     Salificttis  Icucoccphahis   (352).     Bald  Eagle. 

Range :  North  America  at  large,  eonth  to  Mexico,  northwest  through 
the  Aleutian  Islands  to  Kamchatka.  Breeds  locally  throiighont  its 
range. 

Note.  "The  birds  from  Alaska  and  much  of  British  .\nierica  are  con- 
siderably larger  than  those  from  farther  south,  and  on  this  account  have 
been  separated  as  a  distinct  race  (Raliaccttis  leacocc[)hfiUi«  alascanus 
Townsend)."  Thus  this  new  subspecies  occurring  in  northern  North 
.\merica  makes  the  old  name  of  the  Bald  Eagle  (Haliaeetus  leuoocepha- 
his)  apply  simply  to  the  southern  form.  Without  doubt  the  ones  seen 
here  are  referable  to  the  southern  form. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  III,  2;  Tamarack  Swamp,  II,  2;  Tobin  Har- 
bor, IV,  7. 
Siskowit  Lake,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04;  along  Washington  river,  II, 
'04. 

Breeding:  July  20  two  young  still  in  the  nest.  July  24  an  immature 
bird  was  seen  at  II,  2  and  another  at  Siskowit  Lake  August  5.  On 
August  8  a  nest  with  one  young  was  seen  near  Siskowit  Lake. 

This  species  was  rather  common  when  we  consider  how  few  lai^e 
birds  of  prey  are  usually  found  in  a  limited  district.  They  were  seen 
at  Rock  Harbor,  Siskowit  Bay  and  Washington  Harbor;  only  a  lone 
male  was  seen  at  the  latter  place,  however,  and  probably  none  bred  in 
the  vicinity. 

Breeding  Notes:  On  the  morning  of  July  20  when  near  the  head  of 
Tobin  Harbor  (IV,  7)  a  large  female  tiew  out  over  the  boat  scold- 
ing and  snapping  her  bill,  as  though  a  neat  were  near.  A  Pigeon 
Hawk  soon  attacked  her,  the  eagle  turning  completely  over  in  its  efforts 
to  strike  its  toi-raentor.  The  male  shortly  made  his  appearance,  and  a 
little  further  on  the  nest  was  discovered  in  a  small  ravine.  It  was 
situated  in  n  tall  poplar  tree  about  sixty  feet  from  the  ground.  The 
nest  itself  was  very  lai^e,  about  five  or  six  feet  across  the  top  and  six 
or  seven  feet  deep,  and  had  probably  been  used  for  several  years,  the 
additions  made  each  year  soon  making  it  quite  bulky.  It  contained  two 
young,  one  of  which  flew  from  the  nest  when  approached.  An  im- 
mature bird  was  seen  in  a  tamai-ack  swamp  {II,  2)  near  McCargoe 
Cove  on  July  24.  On  August  5  another  young  bird  was  seen  at  Sis- 
kowit Lake  (V,  9)  and  on  August  8  a  nest  was  found  about  125  yards 
north  of  the  same  lake  in  a  small  burning.  It  was  situated  in  a  dead 
Norway  pine  about  sixty  feet  from  the  ground  and  was  composed  of 
sticks,  making  a  mass  at  least  four  feet  across.  One  young  was  in 
the  nest.  As  the  tree  was  a])proached  the  old  birds  circled  overhead 
snapping  their  beaks,  but  did  not  dare  to  approach  very  closely.  The 
immature  specimen  was  procured  and  proved  to  be  nearly  feathered  and 
about  as  large  as  the  adults. 

At  Washington  Harbor  an  old  white-headed  male  was  a  frequent 
visitor,  a  dead  limb  of  a  giant  white  pine  tree  which  stood  near  the 
shore  being  its  favorite  perch. 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  351 

25.     Falco  cohimbarius  (357).    Pigeon  Hawk. 

REtnge:  The  whole  of  North  America  south  to  tbe  West  Indies  and 
South  America,     Bi'eedn  chiefly  north  of  the  United  States. 

Stations:     Trail  to  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  'Oi. 

Resident:     July  20. 

Migrant:     August  5  to  Septemlier  16. 

The  little  Pigeon  Hawk  was  rather  rare  here,  but  became  more  com- 
mon during  the  fall  migration.  On  July  20  one  was  seen  near  the  head 
of  Tobin  Harbor  pursuing  a  Bald  Eagle.  It  was  seeo  several  times 
annoying  these  great  birds  at  Rock  Harbor  and  Siskowit  Bay. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  young  male  was  taken  August  6  near  our  camp 
at  Siskowit.     Its  cry  closely  resembled  that  of  a  Flicker. 

I  saw  this  species  at  Washington  Harbor  on  August  5,  6,  and  7  and 
again  on  the  23rd.  After  that  it  was  occasionally  seen,  usually  along 
the  border  of  the  road  and  clearings,  until  September  16,  when  the  last 
specimen  was  taken.  The  only  time  when  they  occurred  in  appreciable 
numbers  was  during  the  large  wave  of  September  12.  At  this  time  flocks 
of  6  or  8  were  quite  common  and  must  have  caused  considerable  damage 
to  the  warblers  and  sparrows  on  which  they  seemed  to  be  feeding  en- 
tirely. 

Like  the  other  small  bawks,  they  preferred  the  border  of  clearings  but 
were  not  as  often  seen  far  away  from  the  forest  as  were  the  Sharp-shin- 
ned and  Sparrow  Hawks.  Places  where  the  forest  had  been  cleared  away 
and  had  not  yet  grown  up  to  alders  and  birches,  seemed  to  be  the  favorite 
haunt,  but  some  were  found  in  the  heavy  balsam  forest  where  the  other 
hawks  just  spoken  of  rarely  ventured. 

20.     Falco  sparvcrhts   (300).     American  Sparrow  Hawk. 

Range :  North  America  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  and  from  Qreat 
Slave  Lake  south  to  Northern  South  America. 

Stations:     Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3,     Partial  clearing,  I,  1. 
Clearing  along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1. 
Rock  Ridge  Clearing,  II,  3.     Forest,  V,  4. 
Washington  Harbor  clearing,  I,  '04,  II,  '04,  X,  '04. 

Breeding:  No  nests  were  found  but  immatore  specimens  were  seen 
throughout  July,  August  and  September. 

Migration:    About  Angust  1  until  after  September  21. 

The  Sparrow  Hawk  was  not  very  common  at  Rock  Harbor  and  was 
not  often  seen  at  Siskowit  Bay.  But  at  Washington  Harbor  they  were 
very  abundant  and  during  the  first  part -of  the  season  considerably  out- 
numbered all  other  species  of  raptores.  They  frequented  the  clearings, 
feasting  on  the  swarms  of  grasshoppers  which  everjwhere  infested  the 
open.  The  stumps  at  the  edge  of  the  first  clearing  were  fairly  covered 
with  the  legs  and  wings  of  these  insects  which  had  been  pulled  off  before 
the  bird  would  swallow  them. 

27.    Pandion  hulincttts  carolincnsis    (.364).     American   Osprey. 

Range:  North  America  from  Hudson  Bay  and  Alaska,  south  to  the 
West  Indies  and  northern  South  America.  Breeds  throughout  its  North 
American  range. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  I,  1.     Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6. 

Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04.  -'--  i 

"  '        '  D,s    ze<:byL.OOg[e 


352  MICHIGAN  SURVEY,    1908. 

Resident ;    Observed  from  July  5  to  Beptember  21. 

These  birds  probably  breed  on  the  island,  although  no  nestB  or  young 
birds  were  found.  They  were  often  seen  soaring  over  Rock  Harbor  in 
search  of  food,  dropping  into  the  water  to  catch  a  fish  which  would 
be  taken  to  some  near  by  land,  tbe  bird  soon  returning  and  repeating 
the  act. 

At  Siskowit  Bay  two  Oepreys  were  seen  presumably  catching  herring, 
on  August  2.  Th^e  small  fish  often  swam  near  the  surface  and  vere 
caught  by  tbe  Herring  Gulls  as  well  as  by  the  Oapreys,  Loons  and  King- 
flsbers.  During  the  time  observations  were  made  at  Washington  Harbor 
in  1905,  only  two  individuals  were  seen,  both  at  Washington  Island. 
Several  were  observed  at  the  upper  end  of  the  Harbor  during  the 
previous  year. 

28.  Cryptoglavx  acadica   (372).    Saw-whet  Owl. 

Range:  North  America  at  large,  breeding  from  the  Middle  Stales 
northward,  and  in  mountainous  regions  of  the  West  southward  into 
Mexico. 

Stations:    Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04.     In  forest  near  Washington 
river,  II,  '04. 

Breeding:     Young  in  first  plumage  August  30. 

This  little  owl  may  have  been  much  more  abundant  on  the  island  than 
our  records  would  seem  to  indicate,  its  diminutive  size  and  nocturnal 
habits  easily  permitting  it  to  escape  observation.  The  first  record  we 
have  for  the  island  was  tbe  capture  of  an  adult  bird  on  July  24  by  two 
fishermen  of  Washington  Harbor.  The  owl  had  evidently  been  lost  in 
tbe  fog  as  it  settled  on  the  fishing  tug  when  about  4  miles  out  in  ths  . 
lake. 

Breeding  Notes:  The  other  record  was  of  a  juvenile  male  taken  in 
the  balsam  forest  at  this  harbor.  This  specimen  was  sitting  in  an  alder 
bash  about  two  feet  from  the  ground  near  ttie  river.  It  possessed  the 
beautiful  brown  plumage  of  the  first  moult  and  was  undoubtedly  bred 
near  by.  When  dissected,  a  young  deer  mouse  was  found  in  the  crop. 
For  several  nights  past  deer  mice  caught  in  exposed  traps  set  near  this 
place  had  been  pulled  out  and  it  is  possible  that  it  was  the  woi*  of  this 
owl  or  its  parents. 

29.  Asio  vtagellanicus  occiiJcntnlis  (375).     Great  Horned  Owl. 
Range:     Western  United  States,  from  Jlinnesota  and  Kansas  to  Nev- 
ada, southeastern  Oregon,  Utah,  and  Montana;  south  in  winter  to  Iowa. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04. 

Resident:    Throughout  the  year. 

Breeding  Notes:  Three  young  were  taken  August  26,  1904  at  the 
second  clearing,  Washington  Harbor.  These  were  the  youngest  speci- 
mens found  and  still  possessed  a  considerable  amount  of  the  flret  downy 
plumage.  This  year  (1905)  the  owls  were  observed  practically  through- 
out our  stay  at  the  Harbor  (August  18  to  September  16).  These  were 
mostly  adults,  although  a  few  young  were  seen  which  were  nearly  full 
grown.  The  thick  balsam  forest  was  their  usual  hiding  place  by  day, 
and  at  night  they  frequented  the  borders  of  the  road  and  clearings  where 
they  could  secure  their  prey.  Two  of  the  specimens  procured  this  season 
were  found  sitting  on  the  roofs  of  the  deserted  houses  at  Wendigo  (in 
the  third  clearing).  Here  the  numerous  White-footed  Mice  and  North- 
ern Hares  furnished  them  with  an  easily  procured  food,  and  small  birds 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  353 

were  therefore  probably  seldom  molested.  Often  the  remains  of  hares 
were  found  along  the  road,  showing  where  one  of  these  birds  had  feasted. 
Of  course  many  hares  were  killed  by  the  lynx,  but  as  a  rule  these  animals 
carried  their  victims  into  the  brush  to  devour  them  while  the  owls 
usually  ate  theirs  in  the  open.  Then  too  the  lynx  rarely  ate  the  intes- 
tines while  the  owls  nearly  always  did.  These  birds  appeared  at  the 
clearings  jnst  at  dusk,  and  sometimes  in  rainy  weather  they  were  seen 
along  the  road  even  at  midday.  Their  actions  when  observed  just 
after  dusk  reminded  one  of  the  love  antics  of  the  Flicker.  Sitting  on  the 
end  of  the  ridgepoll  of  a  deserted  house,  they  would  bow  and  turn  one 
way  and  then  the  other,  bowing  at  every  movement  until  their  breast 
nearly  touched  the  roof.  They  showed  little  fear  at  this  time  of  night, 
and  in  fact  appeared  curious  at  our  approach. 

The  Great  Homed  Owl  was  not  seen  at  any  other  station  by  our  party 
but  was  reported  at  Siskowit  Bay  by  the  Malone  boys.  They  are  re- 
ported to  be  much  more  common  in  winter  than  in  summer  and  several 
pairs  of  wings  were  seen  which  had  been  taken  at  this  season. 

30.  Nt/ctra  ni/ctea   (371!).     Snowy  Owl. 

Range:  Northern  portions  of  the  northern  hemisphere.  In  North 
America,  breeding  wholly  north  of  the  United  States;  in  winter  migrat- 
ing south  to  the  Middle  States,  straggling  to  South  Carolina,  Texas, 
C'atifomia  and  Bermnda. 

The  Snowy  Owl  is  a  regular  winter  re.tident  on  the  island  and  several 
were  shot  there  during  the  winter  of  1904.  None  were  seen  by  our  party, 
but  the  descriptions  given  by  the  club-house  keepers  leave  no  doubt  of 
their  identity. 

31.  8umia  ulula  caparoch  (377a).     American  Hawk  Owl. 

Range :  Arctic  America,  breeding  from  Newfoundland  northward 
and  migrating  in  winter  to  the  northern  border  of  the  United  States. 
Occasional  in  England. 

Stations :    Old  burning  at  Siskowit  Bay,  V,  9. 

Breeding :     Young  August  4. 

We  have  only  one  record  of  the  Hawk  Owl  for  the  island,  but  this 
breeding  record  is  one  of  the  first  authentic  records  for  the  United 
States.  About  9  o'clock  in  the  morning  of  August  4  an  adult  Hawk  Owl 
was  seen  sitting  on  the  top  of  a  tall  dead  tree  in  a  small  burning  (V,  9) 
near  the  outlet  to  Siskowit  Lake.  The  sun  was  shining  brightly,  but 
appeared  not  to  effect  the  Hawk  Owl  as  it  would  the  common  species. 
A  short  distance  away  a  young  bird  still  in  the  downy  plumage  was 
found.  When  first  seen  it  was  sitting  on  a  dead  stub  like  a  Sparrow 
Hawk,  but  soon  went  to  another  stnb,  uttering  a  shrill  cry  as  it  fiew. 
The  young  bird  was  taken,  and  is  now  in  the  museum  collection. 

32.  Coccyzua  erythrophthalmus    (388).     Jilack-billed  Cuckoo. 

Range :  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  Rocky  Mountains,  breed- 
ing north  to  Labrador,  Manitoba,  and  easteni  Assintboia;  south  in 
winter  to  the  West  Indies  and  the  valley  of  Ihe  Amazon.  Accidental  in 
the  Britisli  Islands  and  Italy. 

'    Stations:     Partial  clearing,  II,  1. 

It  will  be  seen  that  Isle  Boyale  lies  very  near  the  northern  limit  of 
the  cuckoo's  range.  It  was  accordingly  quite  rare  here,  the  only 
records  being  those  of  July  6,  7  and  9  at  Benson  Brook  (II,  1). 

33.  Ceryle  alcyon  (390).    Belted  Kingfisher.  C"  -.  -»  tI  ^ 

46  ■  l,y*^.OOglt 


351  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

Bange:  Xorth  America  from  tbe  Arctic  Ocean  south  to  Panama  and 
the  West  Indies.  Breeds  from  the  southern  border  of  the  United  ytates 
northward.. 

Stations:     Hai'hor,  III,  2,     BnlriiRh  zone  and  Delta,  VII,  3. 
Siekowit  Bay,  V,  1.     Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6. 
Washington  Harbor,  X,  '01.    Washington  River.  II,  '04. 

Breeding:  An  occupied  nesting  hole  was  found  Jwiv  27  and  another 
on  the  28th.     Also  an  old  one  August  6. 

Migration :     The  last  Kingfisher  was  seen  September  IG, 

Throaghout  the  island  the  Belted  Kingfisher  was  a  rather  common 
snmmer  resident,  preferring  the  banks  of  streams  and  the  shores  of  the 
lakes  and  harbors,  although  it  was  occasionally  found  in  the  cedar  and 
tamarack  swampH. 

Breeding  Notes:  Near  Light-house  Peninsula  (II,  1)  a  nest  of  this 
species  was  found  July  27.  It  was  dug  in  a  sandy  bank  and  probably 
contained  young  as  the  adult  birds  were  frequently  seen  entering  if. 
Another  nest  was  found  on  the  28th  near  the  trail  to  Sumner  Lake  (III, 
4).  At  Washington  Harbor,  on  August  6,  a  nest  was  seen  which  the 
club-house  keeper  said  contained  6  young  the  latter  part  of  June  or 
the  first  of  July.  The  hole  had  been  dug  in  a  sandy  bank.  Fig.  17,  about 
5  feet  high  on  the  road  to  the  second  clearing  and  quite  near  the  river. 

The  Kingfishers  were  very  common  along  Washington  River,  and 
probably  there  were  more  seen  here  than  at  all  the  other  localities  on 
the  island  put  together.  They  were  usually  found  sitting  upon  a  leafless 
birch  limb  overhanging  the  water,  from  which  position  they  often 
sallied  out  to  snatch  up  a  fish  or  chase  a  companion.  On  the  open  lake 
the  birds  were  commonly  seen  hovering  about  30  or  40  feet  above  the 
water  until  a  fish  was  located,  when,  closing  the  wings,  they  would  make 
a  sudden  perpendicular  drop,  often  completely  disappearing  from  sight. 
On  the  Washington  River  they  fed  quite  extensively  upon  brook  trout, 

34.  Dri/obatcs  viilosus  Icucomflas  {393a).  Northern  Hairy  Wooil- 
pecker. 

Range :  Northern  North  America  south  to  about  the  northern  border 
of  the  United  States. 

Stations :    Tamarack  and  Arbor  ■\''itae  Swamps,  I,  4.    Balsam  Forest 
I,  3. 
Along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1. 
Forest,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  clearing  and  burned  area,  I,  '04. 
Resident:  Observed  from  July  12  to  September  12, 
This  Wioodpecker  is  rather  rare  thronghout  the  island.  On  July  12 
one  was  procured  in  the  balsam  forest  back  of  the  Light-house  (I,  31. 
and  on  the  13th  one  was  taken  in  the  birches  along  Benson  Brook.  They 
were  found  in  nearly  every  kind  of  environment  from  the  cedar  and 
tamarack  swamps,  balsam  and  spruce  forest,  and  open  birch  woods  to 
the  camp  clearings  and  old  burnings.  They  were  rarely  seen  at  Sis- 
kowit  and  seldom  at  Washington,  Harbor.  Probably  nearly  all  are 
resident  throughout  the  vear  although  none  were  seen  after  September 
12, 

35,  Dri/ohatcs  puhencciis  m<'(li(iitii3  (,S94o).    Downy  Woodpecker. 
Range.    Northern  and  eastern  North  America  west  to  British  Columbia 

and  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Plains;  south  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE   ROYALB.  355 

StatioDg:    Siskowit  Bay;  Foreat,  V,  i. 

Washington  Harbor,  clearing  and  burned  area,  I  '04, 

Resident:     Jnly  '2-2  to  September  17. 

The  first  of  this  STwcies  was  seen  July  22  and  was  met  with  every 
now  and  then  until  September  17,  although  like  the  Hairy,  it  probably 
stays  all  winter.  It  was  found  in  al!  locations,  but  preferred  burnings 
and  the  more  o|>en  birch  woods. 

3(i.     Picoides  arciirtis   (400),     Arctic  Three-toed  Woodpecker. 

Range :  Northern  North  America  from  the  Arctic  regions  sonth  to  the 
northern  United  States  (Xew  England,  Sew  York,  Michigan,  Minnesota 
and  Idaho),  and  in  the  Sierra  Nevadas  to  Lake  Tahoe. 

Station:  Washington  Harbor,  clearing  along  road  and  bnrned  area, 
I,  '04. 

The  Arctic  Tbree-toed  Woodpecker  was  observed  only  at  Washington 
Harbor,  where  it  was  very  rare,  only  two  specimens  being  found.  Sep- 
tember 7  and  12. 

37.  Sphyrapicus  voriug  (402).    Yellow-bellied  Sapsucker. 

Range:  Eastern  Sorth  America  north  to  about  Latitude  63.°  30' 
(north  of  Fort  Simpson),  breeding  from  Massachusetts  northward; 
eonth  in  winter  to  the  West  Indies,  Mexico  and  Costa  Rica. 

Stations:  Forest,  V,  4.  Washington  Harbor,  balsams  at  edge  of 
clearing,  1,  '04, 

Migration:     September  13, 

A  single  specimen  was  found  Septemher  13  among  tbe  balsams  at 
the  edge  of  the  road  (I,  '04).  This  was  a  young  female  and  probably 
was  raised  on  the  island. 

38.  Ci'ophlocHs  pilintiis  ahirtivoJa  (4fl5a).  Northern  Pileated  Wood- 
pecker. 

Range:  Formerly  the  hoiivily  wooded  region  of  North  America  south 
of  aliout  Latitude  fi-T.  except  in  tlie  southern  Rocky  Mountains;  now 
rare  or  extirpated  in  the  more  thickly  settled  parts  of  the  eastern  states. 

Stations:     Siskowit  Bay,  Foi-est,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  edge  of  clearing,  I,   "04.  also  dense 
forest. 

Resident :    Thi-oughout  the  year.    First  seen  Aug.  3 ;  last  on  Sept.  18. 

None  of  these  birds  were  ohserved  at  Rock  Harbor,  but  evidences 
of  their  work  wei-e  numerous.  Several  were  seen  at  Kiskowit  Bay  and 
one  near  Siskowit  Lake  trail  (V,  7).  On  August  8  two  were  heard 
near  our  camp,  and  by  clapping  the  hands  in  imitation  of  their  ham- 
mering they  wei-e  called  within  fifty  or  sixty  feet  of  us,  when  one  was 
procurcid.     Another  was  taken  on  August  8  near  camp  (V,  3), 

Thuy  were  very  often  heard  at  Washington  Harbor  and  were  seen 
quite  often,  usually  in  the  morning,  but  in  rainy  weather  their  call 
could  be  heard  all  day.  Several  stubs  containing  nesting  cavities  were 
found  and  some  of  the  birds  procured  were  young  of  the  year.  The 
woodpeckers  preferred  the  forest  where  large  dead  or  dying  trees  were 
to  be  found,  usually  in  the  vicinity  of  clearings,  the  large  birches 
usually  being  selected  when  feeding,  possibly  because  they  decaye<l  much 
more  rapidly  and  contained  more  larvae  than  the  balsams  and  spruce. 
Unless  called,  the  birds  were  very  shy  and  difficult  of  approach,  al- 
'thougb  when  busily  engaged  in  digging  into  a  tree  they  would  not  leave 


356  MICHIGAN    SURVET,    190S. 

until  nearly  forced  to  for  the  sake  of  safety.  Xearly  aH  the  Bmaller 
wondpeokers  ppoteit  themselves  by  dodging  around  the  trees,  but  the 
Pileated.  posRibly  becanse  of  its  lai^  size,  rarely  attempts  this,  but 
tlies  away  witli  a  rapid,  nndulatory  motion.  When  in  fall  flight  the 
white  in  the  wings  is  very  striking  and  seems  to  catch  the  attention 
wiien  otherwise  the  bird  might  pass  by  unnoticed  in  the  dark  woods. 

.'lil.     Colaptm  auratiin  luteiut  (412).    Xorthern  Flicker. 
'    Range;     Northern   and  eastern   Sorth   America  west  to  the  eastern 
slope  of  the  Rocky  Monntaina  and  Alaska.     Occasional  on  the  Pacific 
slope  from  California  northward. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor;  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3.     Tama- 
rack and  Arbor  Yitae  swamps,  1,  4. 
Partial  Clearing,  I,  1;  along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1,  II,  4. 
Siskowit  Hay.  Forest  V,  4;  Old  Burning,  V,  9. 
Washington  Harbor,  border  of  forest   and   open    clearing. 
I,  '04. 

Breeding:     A  young  of  the  year  was  taken  July  31. 

While  not  a  rare  bird,  it  was  not  very  abundant  in  the  east  end  of  the 
island,  undoubtedly  owing  to  the  scarcity  of  suitable  timber  to  nest  in. 
Several  individuals  were  seen,  the  first  one  on  July  6  at  the  edge  of 
the  balsamB  along  the  cleacing  from  the  light-bouse  to  the  fisherman's 
cottages  at  Bock  Harbor  (I,  3).  They  were  occasionally  noted  in  the 
cedar  swamp  at  the  end  of  Tonkin  Bay  (I,  4),  and  also  in  the  bir<h 
forests  near  McCargoe  Cove  (II,  4).  A  young  of  the  year  was  taken 
July  31  in  the  balsam-spruce  foreRt(  I,  3). 

They  were  rather  scarce  at  Siskowit  Bay  probably  because  the  timber 
was  mostly  green  balsam  and  spruce,  as  this  bird  prefers  clearings  an<l 
burned  areas  where  it  can  get  larvae  from  decaying  trees,  or  where 
ant  hills  are  abundant.  The  most  favorable  conditions  existed  at  Wash- 
ington Harbor  where  large  clearings  afforded  the  much  coveted  ants 
as  well  as  dead  trees.  At  this  point,  therefore,  the  birds  were  very 
common  and  continued  to  increase  in  number  throughout  our  stay. 
Many  of  these  birds  were  found  dead  during  September  but  I  was 
nnable  to  determine  the  cause;  it  might  possibly  have  been  doe  to  some 
parasite.  The  keejier  at  the  club-house  told  me  that  the  birds  con- 
tinued to  increase  through  October  and  that  towards  the  end  of  the 
season  Jiundreds  died,  but  he  did  not  know  the  cause  of  their  death. 
The  Flicker  probably  gathers  at  the  southwestern  end  from  all  over 
the  island  and  possibly  many  come  from  the  north  shore,  remaining 
here  where  such  favorable  conditions  exist,  until  cold  weather  neces- 
sitates their  journey  onward. 

40.  Antrostomvs  vocifents.     (417).     Whip-iwor-will. 

Range.-  Eastern  Nortli  America  to  the  Plains,  and  from  Latitude 
50'  south  to  Guatemala. 

Stations:    Border  of  clearing,  II,  I. 

One  of  these  birds  was  heard  calling  in  the  edge  of  the  clearings  along 
Benson  Brook. 

41.  Chordeilea  rir;iiniattus  (420).     Niglit  Hawk. 

Range:  Northem  and  eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  great 
plains  and  central  British  Columbia,  and  from  Labrador  south  through 
tropical  America  to  the  Argentine  Republic,  (    (K>»^7k' 


BCOLOGT  OP  ISLBJ  ROTALE.  -  3.'7 

Stations:     Rook  Harbor,   Lighthouse  peninsula,   J, 
Siskowit  Bay,  V,  1. 
Washington  Uarbor,  clearing,  I,  '04. 

Resident:     July  6  to  September  1. 

First  seen  July  6  as  it  was  passinf*  over  the  Rock  Hai'bor  light-house. 
It  appeared  to  be  rare  in  this  locality.  On  August  10,  11,  14,  it  was 
also  observed  at  Siskowit,  but  was  rare  here  also.  At  Washington  Har- 
bor it  was  very  common,  feeding  either  singly  or  in  pairs  or  small  flocks 
in  all  the  clearings.  Jlnch  ot  the  food  was  taken  on  the  wing,  but 
grasshoppers  were  greatly  relished,  and  these  the  birds  pursued  on  the 
ground.  There  is  little  donbt  but  that  these  birds  breed  here  in  the 
clearings,  but  owing  to  the  lateness  of  the  season,  no  nests  were  found. 
I  sec  no  reason  why  these  birds  should  not  be  found  more  plentiful 
at  the  other  localities  unless  the  clearings  are  hardly  extensive  enough 
to  furnish  the  conditions  best  suited  to  thera.  Insect  food  seemed 
abundant  everywhere  on  the  island,  so  it  seems  that  clearings  were  what 
was  lacking.  The  birds  commenced  their  migration  towards  night,  and 
a  little  after  sunset  large  Hocks  would  be  seen  drifting  slowly  toward 
the  south,  catching  their  evening  meal  while  on  the  way. 

42.  Chaetiira  pelagica   (423),    (;%iironey  Swift. 

Range. — Eastern  North  America  north  to  Labrador  and  the  fur 
countries,  west  to  the  Plains,  and  passing  south  of  the  United  State-, 
in  winter,  at  least  to  Jalapa,  Mexico  and  Cozumul  Island. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  I.     Washington  Harbor  clearings,  I,  '04. 

Resident:     July  8  to  August  10. 

These  birds  were  only  occasionally  seen  at  Rock  Harbor,  commenc- 
ing with  July  8.  On  August  1  it  was  found  at  Siskowit  and  the  light- 
house keeper  on  Menagerie  Island  said  that  two  pairs  of  these  swiftii 
nested  in  the  chimney  of  the  light-house,  but  he  thought  they  had  left 
alK>ut  the  flrst  of  August,  At.  Washington  Harbor,  on  August  10  a 
pair  of  these  birds  was  observed  circling  over  the  clearings  and  near- 
by river,  just  at  sunset.  These  were  the  only  ones  observed  here  either 
year. 

Isle  Royale  being  wooded  for  the  most  part  with  conifers  and  having 
very  few  buildings  upon  it,  the  cavities  used  by  chimney  swifts  fcr 
nettling  places  are  of  course  almost  wanting.  Conifers  rarely  offer  any 
cavities  except  where  the  woodpeckers  have  dug  out  their  burrows  in 
the  dead  trunks  so  common  in  old  burnings.  Perhaps  this  is  the  reason 
why  more  were  seen  at  Roclj  Harbor  than  at  the  other  localities  as 
at  this  station  thei-e  were  extensive  burnings.  Probably  as  Isle  Royale 
becomes  more  settled  and  chimneys  and  other  nesting  places  become 
more  plentiful  the  Chimney  Swift  will  become  abundant,  as  it  already 
is  in  some  of  the  towns  on  the  northern  shore  of  Lake  Superior. 

43.  Trochilus  colubris   (42S).     Ruby-throated  Humingbird. 
Range:     Eastern   North   America,  to   the  Plains,    north   to    the   fur 

countries,  breeding  from  Florida  to  Labrador,  and  sooth,  in  winter. 
to  Cuba,  Mexico  and  Veragna. 

Stations:  Menagerie  Island,  V,  10,  Washington  Harbor  clearing. 
I,  '04. 

Resident:     .\ugust  17  to  22. 

A  pair  of  these  birds  were  seen  on  August  17  hoTerine-ovet  Home 


358  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

flowers  on  Slenagprie  Island.     They  were  said  to  be  seen  here  nearly 
every  day  and  probably  bred  near. 

A  single  raaie  was  seen  on  several  occasions  during  August  anil 
September  in  the  clearing  at  Washington  Harbor.  The  calti,vated 
nasturtiums  and  some  wild  flowers  furnished  it  food.  More  of  this 
species  wovuld  probably  live  on  tlie  island  if  it  were  lumbered,  thus 
making  more  extensive   clearings  where  wild  flowers  could  grow. 

44.  Ti/mnniis  tifronmis  (444),    Kingbird. 

Ranjie;  Korth  Amei-ii-a  north  to  New^Brunswiclt  and  Manitoba;  rare 
west  o*  the  Rocky  Moirntaina;  winters  in  Central  and  South  America. 

Station:     WasbiiiRton  Harbor,  I,  '04. 

A  single  individual  came  to  the  clearing  on  the  afternoon  of  Septem- 
ber 4. 

45.  Sai/ornis  phocic  (456).     Phoebe. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  eastern  Colorado  and 
western  Texas,  and  from  the  British  Provinces  south  to  eastern  Mexico 
and  Cuba,  wintering  from  the  south  Atlantic  and  Gulf  States  south- 
ward.    Breeds  from  South  Carolina  northward. 

Station:     Washington  Harbor,  I,  '04. 

Migration :    August  to  September  12. 

The  Phoebe  was  quite  common  throughout  August  and  the  first  part 
of  September  leaving  on  the  twentieth  of  the  latter  month.  It  was 
probably  migrating,  as  I  believe  none  nested  at  this  end  of  the  island. 
The  edges  of  the  clearings  and  along  the  road  were  the  favorite  places, 
and  especially  those  parts  where  there  were  small  burnings,  the  leafless 
bushes  making  ideal  perches  from  which  they  would  sally  forth,  in 
true  flycatcher  fashion.  Both  young  and  adults  were  seen,  sometimes 
in  little  groups  of  three  or  four. 

4fi,    Nuttallomia  borealii'  (4i5!)).     Olive-sided  Flycatcher. 

Range:  North  America,  breeding  from  the  northern  and  the  higher 
mountainons  parts  of  the  United  States  northward  to  British  Columbia 
and  the  Saskatchewan  River.  Accidental  on  the  Lower  Yukon  and  in 
Greenland.     In  winter,  south  to  Central  America,  Columbia  and  Peru. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  alder  zone,  I,  1.  Tamarack  and  spruce 
swamps,  II.  2,  5.  IV.  7.  Siskowit  Bay.  old  burning,  V.  9.  T.  11. 
Washington  Harbor,  X,  '04. 

Resident:    July  17  to  September  3, 

A  rather  common  summer  resident  at  Rock  Harbor  and  Siskowit 
Bay  and  probably  at  Washington  Harbor,  although  only  one  was  seeji 
there  this  year.  In  1904,  however,  they  were  fairly  common.  On  July 
20,  at  the  bead  of  Tobin  Harbor,  one  of  these  birds  was  seen,  wl'.'lch 
probably  had  a  nest  close  by,  as  it  flitted  from  tree  to  tree,  scolding 
and  showing  other  signs  of  distress,  which  usually  indicates  a  nest 
or  young  in  the  vicinity. 

A  parr  wan  tiiken  -July  17  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (II.  2i.  They  were 
quite  common  in  ojieu  tamarack,  spnae  and  cedar  swamps,  usually 
perching  on  top  of  the  highest  dead  trees,  and  uttering  at  short  in- 
tervals a  loud,  harsh  cry.  After  a  short  flight  for  an  insect,  they  gen- 
erally returned  to  the  same  perch.  At  Siskowit  one  was  taken  August 
11  in  a  tamarack-sprnre  swamp  (V.  11)  where  they  were  fairly  abund- 
ant.    In  nearly  every  swamp  visited  two  or  three  pairs  of  these  birds 


KCOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROY  ALE.  3&9 

were  found,  their  horsh  erv  attractiag  instant  attention.  As  a  rule 
they  were  found  in  pairs  with  sonietiuies  a  third,  perhaps  a  young  one. 
The  only  record  for  Washington  Harbor  was  one  observed  September 
.1  on  Washington  Island  (X,  '04). 

47.  Empidojiax  ftaiuivntris    (jfiS).     Yellow-bellied  Flycatcher. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  west  to  tbe  Plains,  and  from  south- 
em  Labrador  south  through  tiie  eaBtem  Mexico  to  Panama,  breeding 
from  the  Northern  states  northward. 

Stations:     Boet  Harbor,  tamarack  and    arbor    vitae    swamps,   I,  4, 
II,  3. 
Tamarack  and  Spruce  forest,  IT,  2,  5. 
Washington  Harbor,  near  river,  II,  04. 

Resident:    July  14. 

Migrant :     September  13. 

A  pair  of  this  species  was  seen  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (II,  2}  on 
July  14,  and  an  adult  female  taken.  Another  pair  was  found  in  a 
f-edar  swamp  (I,  4)  July  26.  These  birds  were  sitting  on  top  of  high 
birch  trees  and  one  uttered  a  note  which  resembled  that  of  tbe  Wood 
Pewee.  None  were  noted  at  Siskowit  and  only  one  at  Washington 
Harbor.  On  the  morning  of  September  13  an  adult  male  was  found  dead 
near  the  river.  It  did  not  lie  there  the  evening  before,  so  probably 
died  while  passing  over  during  the  night.  Many  other  species  were 
found  dead  on  this  same  morning,  the  day  after  the  great  wave,  but 
no  outward  indications  were  evident  which  would  point  to  the  cause 
of  death.  It  might  be  noted  here  that  the  temperature  was  a  number 
of  degrees  below  freezing.  See  discussion  under  head  of  "Perils  of 
Migration." 

48.  Empidonax  traillii  alnorum   (466a).     Alder  Flycatcher. 
Range:     Eastern   North   America   from  the  Maritime  Provinces  and 

New  England  westward  at  least  to  northern  Michigan,  etc.,  breeding 
from  the  southern  edge  of  the  Canadian  Fanna  northward;  in  winter 
south  to  Central  America. 

Stations:    Rock  Harbor,  alders,  II,  1. 

Washington  Harbor,  alders,  II,  '04. 

The  Alder  Flycatcher  appears  to  be  very  rare  from  our  data,  but  owing 
to  its  small  siz-e  and  to  the  fact  that  much  of  its  time  is  spent  in  thick 
alder  bushes  or  the  tops  of  the  forest  trees,  it  seems  probable  that  it 
is  nifire  common  than  it  appeared  to  be.  Small  Flycatchers  were  often 
necn  in  these  situations,  but  could  not  be  procured  and  without  doubt 
many  of  these  were  alders.  A  single  specimen  was  procured  August 
i!G  in  a  clump  of  tag  alders  near  Washington  Kiver  (II,  '04). 

49.  Empidonax  minimus  (467),     I^east  Flycatcher. 

Range:  Chiefly  eastern  North  America,  west  to  eastern  Colorado  and 
oentral  Montana,  south  in  winter  to  Central  America.  Breeds  from 
the  Northern  States  northward. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  I,  '04,  II,  "04. 

Migration:     August  20  to  September  14. 

The  Least  Flyeatcher  was  noted  only  in  migration,  but  some  of  the 
immature  specimens  were  so  young  as  to  warrant  the  supposition  that 
they  breed  on  the  island.  The  first  were  seen  on  August  20,  and  were, 
abundant  the  rest  of  August  and  during  tbe  first  large  waves  of  Sept£3)i-lc 


360  MICHIGAN   SURVEnT,   1908. 

ber.     They  preferred  the  dead  brusli  of  the  burning  and  the  low  open 
alders  and  birches  along  the  road  and  clearings. 

50.  Otocoris  alpestris   (474).     Horned  Ltirk. 

Range:  Northeastern  North  America,  Greenland,  and  northern  parts 
of  the  Old  World;  in  winter  south  in  eastern  United  States  to  the  Caro- 
linas,  IllinoiB,  etc. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04. 

Migration :     September  13  to  21. 

Large  flocl^s  of  Horned  Larks  appeared  at  the  first  clearing  early  in 
the  morning  of  September  13.  The  birds  continued  to  increase  in  number 
for  several  days,  and  were  found  almost  entirely  at  the  first  clearing, 
which  was  considerably  the  largest.  They  were  eminently  birds  of  the 
open,  not  even  being  found  in  the  most  open  foi-est.  They  showed  little 
preference  between  the  plowed  ground  and  the  grassy  meadow,  and  fed 
on  insects  as  well  as  seeds.  Little  fear  was  shown,  and  when  shot  at 
upon  the  ground  they  often  rose  up  in  a  whirling  flock  and  after  circling 
about  the  clearing  would  return  to  the  same  spot.  It  was  a  common 
occurrence  to  see  them  rise  suddenly,  seemingly  without  cause,  and  fly 
rapidly  away  only  to  wheel  about  and  return  to  their  old  feeding 
grounds  after  having  gone  a  quarter  of  a  mile  or  so.  Occasionally  Amer- 
ican Pipits  were  seen  in  company  with  them,  but  usually  because  the 
feeding  grounds  of  the  two  flocks  overlapped.  The  first  flocks  numbered 
from  30  to  50,  but  soon  they  grew  to  two  or  three  hundred,  the  birds 
being  very  gregarious  at  this  time  of  the  year  and  seldom  found  alone. 
In  a  good  series  taken  at  random  from  different  flocks  the  females  seemed 
to  predominate.    The  birds  were  all  highly  colored,  especially  the  males. 

51.  Cyanocitta  cristata   (477).     Blue  Jay. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  and  from  the  Fur 
countries  south  to  Florida  and  eastern  Texas. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  clearing  along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1.  Sis- 
kowit  Kay,  Forest,  V,  i;  clearings,  V,  1.  II,  2.  II,  3.  Ill,  a. 
Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04;  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Resident:     July  13  to  September  20. 

Without  doubt  many  of  the  Blue  Jays  winter  on  the  island  and  none 
were  seen  which  showed  any  indications  of  even  a  local  migration,  either 
from  one  part  of  the  island  to  another  or  to  the  mainland.  They  were 
fairly  common  in  the  swamps  and  along  the  rock  ridges  at  Rock  Harbor. 
On  July  13  several  were  seen  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (II,  2)  and  a  flock 
numbering  six  or  seven  were  found  along  a  rock  ridge  (II,  3),  feeding 
in  the  mountain  alders  along  the  edge  of  the  rock  clearing.  They  were 
also  noted  at  Sumner  Lake  on  July  26.  At  Siskowit  they  were  only 
occasionally  met  with,  one  specimen  being  taken  on  the  trail  to  Sisko- 
wit Lake  (V,  4)  August  15.  At  Washington  Harbor  they  were  very 
common  and  were  recorded  nearly  every  day  of  our  stay.  The  Blue 
Jays  preferred  the  dry  open  birch  forest  and  clearings  or  old  burnings. 
Occasionally  they  were  found  in  the  swamps  and  also  in  the  balsam 
forest  along  the  river.  It  was,  however,  a  bird  of  wide  distribution  and 
was  liable  to  occur  in  any  habitat. 

52.  PeriHoreus  canadensis  (484).     Canada  Jay. 

Range:     Northern  New  York,  northern  New  England,  and  northern 

I.,  Google 


ECOLOGY   OP    ISLE  EOTALE!.  361 

Michigan,  northward  to  Arctic  America. 

StationB:     Rock  Harbor,  tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps,  I,  4; 
Partial  Clearing,  II,  1, 
Clearing  along  Beneon  Brook,  II,  1.;  Tamarack  and  Bpruce 

Swamp,  II,  2,  5. 
Siskowit  Bay,  Forest,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04;  Forest  II,  '04,  III, 
'04. 

Breeding:     July  7,     Adult  with  young. 

The  Canada  Jay  is  a  common  resident  throughout  the  year,  but  ap- 
peared to  be  less  abundant  at  Rock  Harbor  than  at  the  other  localities 
visited.  It  was  found  in  nearly  every  form  of  habitat,  but  was  most 
common  about  clearings  and  especially  those  where  scraps  could  be 
picked  up  from  camps.  In  the  forest  they  showed  a  decided  preference 
for  coniferous  trees  and  even  when  hunting  for  food  atmnt  the  camps 
they  chose  the  balsams  rather  than  birch  or  alder. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  female  witl»  one  yoang  was  seen  on  July  7  near 
the  Light-house  at  Bock  Harbor,  and  on  July  25  an  old  bird  was  found 
with  two  young.  Occasionally  both  parents  would  be  found  together 
accompanied  by  one  or  two  young. 

53.     Corvtis  corax  principalis  {iSGa).    Northern  Raven. 

Bange:  Northern  North  America,  south  to  British  Colnmbia,  north- 
ern Michigan,  New  Brunswick,  Maine,  New  Jersey,  North  Carolina,  etc. 

t^tations:     Book  Harbor,  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  Swamps,  I,  4; 
Clearing  I,  1, 
Siskowit  Bay,  trail  to  8i»kowit  Lake,  V,  4.  YII,  '04. 
Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04, 

Breeding:     See  below. 

The  Northern  Raven  was  nowhere  common  but  seemed  to  occur  in 
limited  numbers  all  over  the  island.  Three  were  seen  in  a  cedar  swamp 
(I,  4)  on  July  29,  and  a  skeleton  was  found  previous  to  this  on  the  rocks 
near  the  lighthouse  {I,  1).  They  were  occasionally  seen  at  Siskowit 
during  August,  usually  flying  overhead  or  at  some  natural  clearing  near 
the  beach.  At  Washington  Harbor  they  were  only  visitors,  coming  every 
now  and  then  to  the  clearings  where  they  fed  on  the  grasshoppers  which 
were  so  abundant.    They  were  very  wary. 

Breeding  Notes:  Earle  Knentson  of  "Park  Place"  (IV,  5)  said  this 
species  nested  in  the  vicinity.  While  exploring  the  ruins  of  the  deserted 
town  (VII,  '04)  near  the  head  of  Siskowit  Bay  on  September  10,  a  nest 
of  the  Northern  Raven  was  found  in  the  old  stamp  mill.  It  was  placed 
In  the  small  hollow  formerly  occupied  by  the  metal  plate  upon  which 
the  head  of  the  stamp  fell.  The  side  walls  of  the  stamp  mill  are  broken 
down  in  places  so  that  the  entrance  to  the  interior  was  simple.  The 
nest  was  about  four  feet  square  and  the  deepest  part  about  a  foot  deep, 
and  was  composed  of  sticks  varying  in  size  from  a  quarter  inch  to  three 
quarters  in  diameter  and  a  foot  to  three  feet  long.  Several  tail  feathers 
of  the  Raven  were  found  in  different  layers  of  the  nest  showing  that  in 
all  probability  the  mass  was  the  accumulation  of  several  years  of  nest- 
building  and  repairing.  Smaller  feathers  were  scattered  about  the  nest 
and  floor.  The  lining  consisted  of  small  sticks  and  roots  loosely  laid  to- 
gether, but  forming  quite  a  compact  mass  in  connection  with  the  other 
material. 


362  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

The  floor  of  the  building  was  strewn  with  pellets  consisting  prin- 
cipally of  tishliones,  skeletons  of  small  mice,  and  some  insect  remains. 
Under  some  of  the  rafters  this  had  atcuuiulated  to  such  an  extent  that 
the  deposit  was  four  or  five  ioehes  in  depth.  In  places  it  was  weathered 
80  badl.v  that  it  appeared  simply  as  a  mass  of  brownish  earth. 

54.  Voi'i-iis  brachi/rhytichos   (iS8).     American  Crow. 

Range:  Xorth  America  from  the  Fur  Countries  to  the  southern  border 
of  the  United  States.     Locally  distributed  to  the  west. 

Stations :     Rock  Harbor.  Beach,  I,  1 ;  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I, 
2-3;  clearing  along  Benson  Brook,  II.  1;  IV,  9;  III,  3. 
Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04;  Forest,  VI,  '04, 

Resident:     Throughout  our  stay. 

The  Crow  was  not  common  at  any  locality  visited.  It  was  occasion- 
ally met  along  the  shore  of  Rock  Harbor  (I,  1)  where  it  fed  on  the 
cleanings  thrown  out  by  the  returning  fishermen.  Several  were  ob- 
served in  the  birch  forest  at  the  top  of  Greenstone  Range  (IV,  9)  and 
aico  at  the  Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta  at  the  western  end  of  Rock  Harbor 
(III,  3),  but  the  natural  and  artificial  clearings  pi-oved  to  be  the  most 
favorable  for  these  birds  throughout  the  island.  They  were  quite  rare 
at  Kiskowit  Bay,  but  proved  to  be  quite  common  at  times  at  Wash- 
ington Harbor.  Here  they  resorted  to  the  clearings  and  roads  where 
they  fed  greedily  upon  the  swarms  of  grasshoppers.  No  nesta  were 
found,  but  young  of  the  year  were  more  abundant  than  adults  at  Wash- 
ington Harl>or.  The  residents  reported  that  these  birds  leave  the  island 
the  last  of  October, 

55,  AgcJaiiis  phocnicciis  fortig   (498).     Thick-billed  Redwing. 

Range:  Breeding  range,  Mackenzie  River,  Athabasca,  and  other  in- 
terior districts  of  British  America.  During  migrations,  the  Great  Plains, 
from  eastern  base  of  Rocky  Mountains  to  Manitoba  (Red  River  settle- 
ment), Iowa  (Burlington,  October),  Indian  Territory  (Beaver  Creek, 
November)  western  Illinois  (Henderson  County,  Morgan  County,  March) 
northern  Kentucky  (Mason  Co.,  December)  and  southward  through 
more  southern  Rocky  Mountains  to  Arizona  (Fort  Verdi,  December, 
February;  Big  Chino  Valley,  March),  and  western  Texas  (El  Paso, 
February), 

Stations:  Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04;  forest  along  river, 
II,  '04, 

Migration,  August  19  to  Sept.  20. 

By  ail  odds  the  most  abundant  black  bird  on  the  island.  On  July 
14  a  Red-winged  Blackbir<i  was  seen  in  a  marsh  at  Rock  Harbor,  but 
was  not  procured,  so  identification,  where  so  slight  a  difference  exists 
as  between  the  species  and  subspecies,  was  impossible.  It  is  my  opinion 
that  this  was  the  common  Redwing  (Af/ctaiits  phociHcvus  phocniceus) 
and  not  the  northern  form.  On  August  19  large  flocks  of  the  latter 
form  came  to  the  clearing  at  Washington  Harbor  (1,  '04).  On  the 
day  previous  several  siwcimene  of  phoeniceiis  were  taken,  but  none  were 
seen  after  this.  The  keeper  at  the  club-houae  said  none  of  these  black- 
birds had  been  seen  bsfoi-e  this  date,  and  as  we  found  none  on  any 
other  part  of  the  island  (unless  the  one  previously  mentioned  should 
have  been  fortia)  it  seems  probable  that  this  form  does  not  breed  on 
the  island,  and  only  ap[)ears  here  during  the  spring  and  fall   niigra- 


ECOLOQY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  363 

tion.  The  ])eo[)!e  at  the  club-Uouae  reported  that  large  numbers  of 
Bed-winged  Blaokbirds  came  to  the  island  in  the  spring. 

About  fifty  speclmena  in  all  were  prociii'ed,  which  prov-ed  to  be  fortta. 
None  were  in  the  black  plumage,  and  the  scarlet  shoulder  patches  were 
just  Hliowing  through  the  pin  fcatheit*  of  those  taken  during  August.  A 
joung  male  taken  on  September  16  was  just  about  half  nwiulted.  The  un- 
der-parts,  except  down  the  breast  bone,  have  black  feathers  edged  with 
browQ;  the  central  line  and  feathers  covering  the  abdomen  are  still  un- 
moulted  and  are  fuscous  with  whitish  borderg.  The  head,  throat  and  nape 
also  unnioulted,  as  are  the  first  four  primaries.  The  next  five  are 
new.  and  the  i-emainder  old.  Nearly  all  the  secondaries  are  new, 
while  the  tertiaries  are  still  unchanged.  Only  the  central  tail 
feathers  have  been  moulted.  The  specimen  thus  presents  a  mottled 
appearance,  glossy  black  alternating  with  brownish  fuscous,  the 
cinnamon  tiiijied  secondaries  and  back  feathers  adding  to  the 
ap|)eai'ance.  The  epaulets  are  a  rich  orange-brown,  a  few,  par- 
ticularly at  the  bend  of  the  wing,  being  tipped  with  black.  The 
pinuiage  of  the  entire  series  varied  greatly,  according  to  the  sex,  stage 
of  moult,  and  also  individual  variation.  Some,  males  and  females, 
have  a  decided  pinkish  tinge  to  the  throat  white  others  have  a  rich 
yellow  sometimes  grading  into  orange.  As  a  rule  the  first  four  prim- 
aries seem  to  be  the  last  feathers  on  the  body  to  moult.  A  few  adults 
taken  on  AugTist  20  have  moulted  entirely,  but  the  majority,  especially 
the  young,  had  jnst  started  to  moult  at  this  date.  Stomach  examina- 
tions showed  the  food  to  consist  largely  of  grasshoppers,  which  were 
very  plentiful  at  the  clearing.  These  birds  were  larger  than  the  aver- 
age male  which,  as  a  rule,  was  considerably  larger  than  the  female. 

The  birds  usually  catne  in  flocks  numbering  from  a  doaen  to  fifty  or 
more.  They  came  to  the  first  clearing  quite  regularly  throughout  August, 
usually  frequenting  the  brushy  ai-ea,  but  extending  out  into  the  graasy 
meadow  in  pursuit  of  the  grasshoppers.  When  shot  into,  the  remnants 
of  the  flock  would  often  wheel  several  times  around  the  gunner's  head, 
allowing  themselves  to  be  fired  at  repeatedly  before  leaving.  These 
birds  migrated  almost  entirely  by  day  and  toward  dusk  were  often 
seen  preparing  to  roost  in  a  alder  thicket  at  the  first  clearing.  That  the 
birds  actually  remained  there  for  the  nigbt  was  several  times  demon- 
strated when  tliey  were  driven  from  their  retreat  long  after  night  fall. 

5fi.     Euphaffus  €arolimi«  (500).     Itusty  Blackbird. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  Alaska  and  the  Plains. 
IJieeds  from  northern  New  England,  Northern  New  York,  and  North- 
ern Michigan  northward.     Accidental  in  lower  California. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearing  and  burned  area,  I  '04. 

Migration:     September   15   on. 

Large  flocks  of  Rusty  Orackles  appeared  at  the  clearings  on  Septem- 
ber 15  and  wei*e  abundant  the  rest  of  the  time  I  I^mained  on  the  island. 
Males  and  females  were  in  about  equal  proportion,  and  while  the  sexes  . 
were  often  found  t^^ether  in  the  same  flock,  there  appeared  to  be 
flocks  composed  wholly  of  one  sex.  Like  so  many  of  the  other  migrants, 
they  were  seldom  found  out  of  a  clearing,  where  they  crammed  tliem- 
selves  full  of  grasshoppers.  As  a  rule  the  birds  were  more  wary  than 
the  Northern  Redwing,  and  were  difilcult  of  approach  when  in  the  open, 


364  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

but  when  gathered  into  the  bnishy  areas  of  the  first  clearing  they 
j)robably  felt  more  flecure,  as  here  I  had  no  difficalt;  whatever  in  pro- 
curing siiecimens.  The  residents  reported  them  abimdant  here  daring 
the  spring  migration. 

57.  Qiu'scalus  <}viscula  aencvs    (511b).     Bronzed  Crackle. 
Range:     From  the  Alleghanies  and  southern  New  England  north  to 

New  Foiindland  and  Great  Slave  Ijake^  west  to  the  eastern  base  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  and  sonth  to  Louisiana  and  Texas.  In  migra- 
tions, the  southeastern  states,  except  Florida  and  the  Atlantic  coast 
district  south  of  Virginia. 

The  Bronzed  Grackle  was  not  observed  this  year,  and  only  one  speci- 
men was  noted  here  in  1904.  This  one  was  secured  August  19  at  the 
third  clearing  (I,  '04),  and  not  at  Station  II,  as  published  in  the  re- 
port of  last  year. 

58.  Pinicola  envcleator  (515).     Pine  Grosbeak, 

Range:  Northern  parts  of  the  northern  hemisphere,  breeding  in 
North  America  from  northern  Now  England,  Quebec,  and  Rocky  Monn- 
fnins  in  Colorado,  and  about  Lat.  37'  in  the  Sierra  Nevada;  northward 
nearly  to  the  limit  of  trees;  south  in  winter  irregularly  into  north- 
enstem  United  States. 

Stations:     SiskOwit  Bay,  Trail  through  Balsam-Birch  forest,    V,  4. 

August  14,  M'Creary  found  two  Pine  Grosbeaks  in  the  Balsams 
(V,  4).  These  were  the  only  birds  observed,  but  the  species  is  prob- 
ably mnch  more  common  and  we  simply  did  not  chance  to  observe  them. 
This  is  the  more  likely  as  the  Grosbeaks  make  little  noise  and  keep  in 
the  tops  of  the  conifers.  As  the  greater  part  of  the  forests  on  the 
island  are  so  dense  that  the  tops  are  practically  shut  off  from  sight 
to  one  below,  the  birds  could  easily  pass  unnoticed. 

59.  Laniui  ludovicianus  migrans  (622a ) .  Northern  Lo^erhead 
Shrike. 

Range:  Greater  part  of  the  United  States  east  of  the  Great  Plains, 
but  very  local  in  more  eastern  districts;  breeding  north  to  New 
Brunswick  (York  County),  Maine  (Bangor),  New  Hampshire  (Han- 
over), Vermont  (Mount  Mansfield,  etc.),  northern  New  York  (I*wis 
and  St.  Lawrence  counties),  Quebec  (Montreal),  Ontario  (Hamilton; 
Kingston;  Beaumaos),  Michigan,  Wisconsin  and  Minnesota,  and  south- 
ward to  Midland  Virginia  and  western  North  Carolina,  Kentucky 
(probably  also  Tennessee),  and  eastern  Kansas;  in  winter  southward 
to  Mississippi,  Tx>uisiana  and  Texas  (El  Paso,  February;  Fort  Clark. 
January;  West  Caranchua  Creek,  January;  Washburn,  August). 

Stations:    Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04. 

A  single  individual  was  seen  at  the  Camp  clearing  (I,  '04)  on  Augnet 
23. 

60.  Carpodaeus  purpureus   (517).     Purple  Finch. 

Range;  Eastern  North  America  from  the  Atlantic  coast  to  the 
Plains.     Breeds  from  the  Middle  States  northward. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Partial 
clearing,  II,  1;  Clearing  near  Benson  Brook  at  II,  1,  Siskowit  Bay, 
Forest,  Y,  4;  old  burning,  V,  9.  Washington  Harbor,  border  of  clear- 
ing, I,  '04 ;  Forest,  II,  '04, 

Resident :    July  7- August  28. 

Dig tized  by  (jOO<^[e 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE  R0YALB3.  365 

The  Purple  Pinch  was  rather  uncommon  all  over  the  island.  A  fine 
male  was  taken  on  July  7  in  the  balsam  and  spruce  forest  (I,  3)  at 
Bock  Harbor  and  on  July  24  a  large  flock  was  seen  in  the  balsams 
just  back  of  the  lighthouse  (I,  3).  It  was  only  observed  a  few  times 
at  Siskowit,  but  usually  in  the  balsam  forest.  At  Washington  Harbor 
the  only  time  it  was  observed  was  August  28.  Although  the  bird  was 
most  abundant  in  the  balsam-spruce  forest,  it  also  frequented  old  burn- 
togs,  the  borders  of  clearings  and  tamarack  and  cedar  swamps. 

61.     Loxia  leucoptera    (522).     White-winged  Crossbill. 

Range:  Northern  parts  of  North  America,  south  into  the  United 
States  in  winter.     Breeds  from  northern  Sew  England  northward. 

Stations:  Bock  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Tama- 
.rack  and  Spruce  Forest.  IT,  2,  5. 

Resident :    July  13  to  the  last  of  July. 

The  White-winged  Crossbill  was  quite  common  at  the  upper  end  of 
Isle  Royale,  but  was  not  obsen-ed  at  Washington  Harbor  this  season, 
although  it  was  observed  several  times  there  in  1904.  At  Rock  Harbor 
they  were  usually  found  in  the  sphagnum  bogs  (II,  2,  5)  and  late 
in  July  were  seen  several  times  near  the  lighthouse  feeiling  on  the  pine 
cones. 

02.     Spinm  pimig  (533).    Pine  Siskin. 

Range:  North  America  generally,  breeding  in  the  British  Provinces, 
Rocky  Mountains,  Sierra  Nevada,  and  high  mountains  of  Arizona, 
south  to  Ixiwer  California  and  the  mountains  of  Mexico  to  Orizaba. 
Also  breeds  sparingly  in  northeastern  United  States. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Partial 
clearing,  II,  1.    Washington  Harbor,  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Resident:     July  9-September  18, 

The  Pine  Siskin  was  only  occasionally  recorded  from  the  vicinity 
of  Rock  Harbor,  and  not  at  all  from  the  other  localiti;es.  On  July  9 
while  rowing  around  the  islands  in  Rock  Harbor  (I,  1)  several  of  these 
birds  wore  seen  and  heard  singing  as  they  fed  among  the  balsams  on 
the  etlge  of  the  islands.  They  were  also  observed  on  July  13  in  a  tama- 
rack swamp  {II,  2)  and  were  seen  several  times  in  the  forest  near  Rock 
Harbor  Light-house. 

fi3.     Po(ecetes  gramineus   (540).     Vesper  Sparrow. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  from  Nova  Scotia 
and  Ontario  southward;  breeds  from  Virginia,  Kentucky  and  Missouri 
northward. 

Stations:    Washington  Harbor,  II,  '04. 

Migration:     August  22. 

An  immature  Vesper  Sparrow,  the  only  one  seen,  was  secured  on 
August  22  in  a  strip  of  brush  on  the  banks  of  Washington  River. 

64,     PassercuUts  sandicicheimn   savanna    (5i2a),     Savanna   Sparrow. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  breeding  from  the  northern  United 
States  to  Labrador  and  Hudson  Bay  Territory. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearings  and  burned  areas,  I,  '04. 

Breeding:    An  immature  specimen  taken  August  0. 

Migration:     August  31  on. 

While  at  Washington  Harbor  the  first  part  of  August  several  Savanna 
Sparrows  were  seen  and  a  young  one  barely  out  of  the  nest  was  secured 


Sm  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

on  the  6(li.  They  were  frequenting  tte  clearings,  and  the  immature  speri- 
men  procured  was  taken  near  one  of  tlie  old  houBee  at  the  flret  clearing. 
Upon  our  return  to  this  localitj-  on  August  16  none  were  seen  and  they 
were  absent  until  Augnst  31,  when  a  large  w^ve  of  Savannas  struck  the 
island.  For  the  remainder  of  my  stay  these  sparrows  were  present,  but 
the  majority  had  pasKed  on  to  the  pouth,  either  slowly  or  with  some  of 
the  other  large  waves.  This  species  was  very  partial  to  the  clearings 
and  was  especially  abundant  along  the  road  where  the  very  short  grass 
did  not  interfere  with  their  motions.  The  birds  were  quite  tame  and  even 
entered  the  houses  by  the  open  doors  and  windows.  During  one  day  of 
the  large  wave  a  dozen  or  more  were  thus  caught  in  the  house  I  was  liv- 
ing in,  most  of  these  entering  my  work  room. 

65.  Zojwtrichia  Jcucophrys   (554).     White- crowned  Sparrow. 

Range:  North  America  at  large,  breeding  chiefly  in  the  Bocky  Moun- 
tains, the  Sierra  Nevada  and  northeast  to  Labrador.  South  in  winter  to 
the  Valley  of  Mexico. 

Stations:    Washington  Harbor,  clearings  and  burned  area,  I,  '04. 

Migration :     September  12  on. 

This  year  the  White-crowned  Sparrow  was  much  later  in  migration 
than  in  1904,  as  none  were  seen  luitil  September  12  while  the  first  date  of 
the  previous  season  was  September  1.  They  were  quite  rare  and  were 
never  seen  in  flocks  of  more  than  5  or  6.  The  clearings,  roadside,  and  old 
burnings  were  the  favorite  resort,  but  occasionally  they  were  found 
busily  scratching  among  the  fallen  leaves  along  the  river, 

66.  Zmiotrichm  albii^Uis   (55S1.     White- throated  Sparrow. 
Range:     Chiefly  eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  Plains,  north  to 

Labrador  and  the  Fur  countries.  Breeds  from  Montana,  northern 
Wyoming,  northern  Michigan,  northern  New  York,  and  northern  New 
England  northward,  and  winters  from  Massachusetts  southward.  .Ac- 
cidental in  Utah,  California,  and  Oregon. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  natural  rock  clearings,  1,  2;  Balsam-S] truce 
Forest.  I.  3;  Ijake  and  Bay  Beaches,  I,  1;  Jack  Pine  Ridge.  I.  5: 
Sphagnum-spruce  Bog,  1,  6;  Itenson  Brook  and  Ransom  Clearing.  II, 
1;  Tamarack  Swamp.  11,  2;  Shore  of  Forbes  Lake,  II,  5;  Rock  Ridge 
Clearing,  II,  3;  Small  Island,  III,  1.     Shore  of  Sumner  Ivake,  III.  5. 

Siskowit  Bay,  Balsam-Birch  forest.  V,  4;  Beach,  V,  1;  Outlet  of 
Siskowit  Lake,  V,  9;  Rock  Clearing,  V.  3;  Clearing.  VIII,  '04. 

Washington  Harbor,  Clearing  and  Burned  area,  I,  '04 ;  Along  river 
II.  '04,     Tamarack  Swamp.  V,  '04. 

Breeding:     Young  able  to  fly,  July  7. 

Migration:    Last  seen  September  17. 

The  White -throated  sparrow  was  very  common  throughout  the  Island, 
where  it  inhabited  the  oi»en  swamps  and  borders  of  rock  clearings,  al- 
though it  was  found  in  limited  numbers  in  nearly  every  8t:ation  ex- 
amined. It  can  easily  be  considered  one  of  the  birds  of  general  dis- 
tribution on  the  island,  chiefly  frequenting  certain  habitats  but  not  by 
any  means  restricted  to  these  sjiecific  environments.  These  sparrows  were 
seldom  found  feeding  in  the  clearings  any  distance  from  shelter,  but 
were  usually  seen  along  the  borders  of  the  forest  or  in  the  more  open 
areas.     Low,   damp  places   where  the  decaying  leaves  formed  a   thick 


by  Google 


BCOLOQY  OF  ISLE  ROYALB.  367 

mat  OD  the  cool  earth  were  favorite  feeding  grounds.  They  were  often 
associated  together  in  small  flocks  of  six  or  eight,  the  young  as  a  rule 
oiitniimtiering  the  adults.  Their  food  ajJiKireiitly  consisted  largely  of 
fallen  seeds  and  small  insects  which  they  found  under  the  ground 
rubbish  by  vigorous  scratching,  much  like  a  barn-yard  fowl.  We  found 
the  White-throats  rather  timid,  and  when  first  startled  they  nsually 
dived  into  the  nearest  thicket,  soon  to  appear,  however,  if  no  further 
move  was  made,  as  if  forgetful  of  our  presence.  Throughout  the  breed- 
ing season  and  even  during  Repteraber  their  plaintive  song  could  be 
heard  at  almost  any  hour  of  the  day  and  often  in  the  night.  It  was 
usnally  rendered  from  some  low  branch  or  pile  of  brush;  and  in  fact  the 
birds  were  seldom  found  above  the  lower  branches,  the  major  part  of 
their  time  being  spent  on  the  ground.  In  flight  the  White-throats  closely 
resemble  the  Hong  Sparrow,  flying  low  for  short  distances  dropping 
suddenly  out  of  sight. 

Breeding  Notes:  On  July  7  several  young  White-throated  Sparrows, 
just  able  to  fly,  were  seen  with  their  parents  at  the  edge  of  a  clearing. 
A  nest  containing  the  nearly  full  ftedf]^  young  was  found  in  the  grassy 
marsh  around  Summer  Lalte  (III,  5)  July  17.  It  was  placed  in  a 
bunch  of  grass  at  the  foot  of  an  alder,  and  consisted  entirely  of  dried 
grasses.  The  nest  was  placed  about  a  foot  above  the  water.  Another 
nest  was  found  July  18  in  a  tussock  of  grass  at  the  foot  of  a  willow 
bush.  It  was  held  about  a  foot  above  the  water  as  was  the  previous 
one.  The  edge  of  the  lake  was  only  a  couple  of  feet  away,  and  a  wave 
would  have  destroyed  it  had  there  been  heavy  winds.  The  forest  was 
about  two  rods  distant.  Four  bluish-white  eggs  heavily  and  irregu- 
larly spotted  with,  brown  were  found  in  the  nest,  which  was  composed 
entirely  of  grasses.  Many  White-throats  were  heard  in  this  habitat. 
Young  abie  to  fly  and  take  care  of  themselves  were  seen  throughout  our 
stay  at  all  parts  of  the  island. 

67.     Spizelfa  socialis  (.^60).     Chipping  Sparrow. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  Rocky  Mountains,  north 
to  Great  Slave  Lake,  and  south  to  eastern  Mexico,  breeding  from  the 
Gulf  States  northward. 

Stations:     Rock  Ilarbor,   natural  rock  clearings,  I,  2;   Open  Balsam- 
Spruce  forest,  I,  3. 
Siskowit  Bay.  Trail  through    Balsam-birch  forest,    V,  4; 

Outlet  of  Siskowit  I^ke,  T,  9. 
Washington  Harbor,  Clearing,  I,  '04,     Border    of    forest 
along  roads  and  river,  II,  '04. 

Breeding;     Chipping  Sparrow  and  nest  seen  July  20. 

Migration:  These  sparrows  were  seen  throughout  our  sojourn  on 
the  island,  but  were  migrating;  those  seen  one  day  might  be  replaced 
by  new  flocks  from  the  north  the  next. 

The  Chipping  Sparrow  was  only  abundant  during  the  migrations;  at 
other  times  it  was  of  very  local  distribution,  and  occurred  in  limited 
numbers.  The  dense  coniferous  forest  is  unsuited  to  this  sparrow,  and 
this  fact  probably  explains  its  comparative  absence  at  Siskowit  Bay 
camp  where  the  clearings  were  very  limited.  They  were  usually  found 
in  pairs  or  families  until  the  middle  of  August,  when  they  collected 
into  flocks  numbering  from  a  dozen  or  so  to  fifty  or  sixty.  -^ 

i.Cooglc 


368  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,   1908. 

BreediDji  Notes;  The  only  nest  which  we  found  was  placed  in  a 
birch  in  the  spruce  and  birch  forest  near  the  light-house.  The  neet 
was  in  a  little  opening,  and  I  doubt  if  the  bird  ever  nestB  in  the  drase 
forest  if  other  conditions  are  available. 

68.  JuncQ  hyemalia  (567).     Slate  Colored  Junco. 

Range:     Korth  America,  chiefly  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  breed- 
ing from  the  higher  parts  of  the  tVlleghanies,  the  Catskills,  and  the 
mountainous   parts  of  southern   Kew   England    northward;    south    in 
winter  to  the  Gulf  States.     Casual  in  California  and  Arizona. 
Stations:     Rook    Harbor,    Jack    Pine    Ridge,    I,  5;  Rock  Ridge  clear- 
ings, II,  3.  IV,  1.  III.  5. 
Siskowit  Bay.  Forest,  V.  4.  V,  I.  Y.  2.  V.  3. 
Washington  Harbor,  Clearing,  I,  '04;  Forest,  II,  '04. 

The  Junco  wa»  a  common  species  throiigbont  the  island,  frequenting 
clearings,  rock  ridges,  and  old  burnings.  Several  were  seen  on  the  Jack 
pine  ridge  along  Conglomerate  Bay  (I,  5)  on  July  10,  and  the  next  day 
they  were  abundant  on  the  rock  ridge  at  Sargent  I^ake  (II,  3),  On 
July  19  a  large  flock  was  observed  feeding  in  a  small  clnmp  of  dwarf 
cedars  at  Scovill  Point  (IV.  1),  They  w*re  also  noted  at  Sumner  Lake 
(III,  5)  on  July  28.  At  Siskowit  they  were  fairly  abundant,  prefer- 
ring the  natural  and  artificial  clearings.  They  were  quite  plentiful  at 
Washington  Harbor,  frequenting  the  same  places  at*  at  the  other  local- 
ities. No  nests  were  found  but  young  in  nearly  all  stages  of  plumage 
were  seen  throughout  our  stay. 

69.  MeJospiza  ninerea  melodia  {.'iSll.     Song  Sparrow. 

Range:     Eastern  United  States  to  the  Plains,  breeding  from  Virginia 
and  southern  portion  of  Lake  States  northward  to  the  Fur  Countries. 
Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  I^ake  and  Bay  Beaches,  I,  1;  Benson  Brook 
and  Ransom  Clearings,  II,  1;  Small  islands.  Ill,  1. 
Siskowit  Bay,  South  Shore  of  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  6 ;  Outlet 
of  Siskowit  Lake.  V.  9;  Ijong  Island  Cull  Rookery,  V,  10. 
Washington  Harbor,  clearings,  I,  '04. 
Resident:    Rock  Harbor,  July  5.    Siskowit  Bay,  Aug.  5,    Washington 
Harbor,  August  21. 

Migration :     None  seen  after  August  24. 

The  Song  Sparrow  probably  bred  on  the  island,  although  no  nestfl 
were  seen.  They  were  usually  found  feeding  on  the  ground,  scratch- 
ing among  the  leaves  and  debris  after  the  fashion  of  the  White-throated 
Sparrows,  although  not  to  such  a  large  extent  as  these  latter  birds. 

70.  Mciofipizn  Ihicolnii  (BKl).    Lincoln's  Sparrow. 

Range :  North  America  at  large,  breeding  chiefly  north  of  the  United 
States  fas  far  north  as  Fort  Yukon)  and  in  the  higher  parts  of  the 
Rocky  ^klountains  and  Sierra  Nevada;  south  in  winter  to  Panama. 

Stations;     Wa.iliington  Harbor,  clearings  and  burned  areas,  I,  '04, 

Migration:     September  12  to  15. 

Lincoln's  Sparrow  was  very  common  September  12,  13,  14  and  16 
at  Washington  Harbor.  They  were  fonnd  along  the  roads,  particularly 
the  borders  where  the  underbrush  was  thick,  and  in  the  clearings.  They 
were  very  difficult  of  approach,  skulking  in  the  ground  hemlock  and 
rubbish  along  the  roads  or  hiding  in  the  piles  of  brush  in  the  old  burn- 
ing at  the  Drst  clearing. 

'■'Google 


ECOLOGY   OF  ISLE  ROTALE.  369 

71.    Melospira  georgiana  (584).    Swamp  Sparrow. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  accidently  to  TJ'tah, 
north  to  the  British  Provinces,  including  Newfoondland  and  Labrador. 
Breeds  firom  the  Northern  States  northward,  and  winters  from  Massa- 
chusetts southward  to  the  Gulf  States. 

Stations:     Bock  Harbor,  Bulrush  Zone  and  Delta,  III,  3;  III,  3. 

Breeding:    Adults  accompanied  by  one  young  seen  Jul;  26. 

Several  of  these  birds  were  heard  singing  at  the  month  of  a  little 
stream  near  the  west  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  3) .  This  wajs  an  ideal 
spot  for  this  species  as  the  stream  was  slow  and  deep,  with  grassy  bogs 
and  alder  bushes  along  its  banks.  Others  were  noted  on  a  grassy  bog 
aronnd  Sumner  Lake  (III,  6).  The  single  immature  specimen  observed 
was  found  at  the  west  end  of  Bock  HM-bor,  Joly  26. 

72.  Petrochelidon  Itmifrong  (612).    Cliff  Swallow. 

Bange:  North  America  north  to  the  limit  of  trees,  breeding  south 
to  the  valleys  of  the  Potomac  and  the  Ohio,  southern  Texas,  southera 
Arizona,  and  California;  Central  and  South  America  in  winter.  Not 
recorded  from  Florida  or  the  West  Indies. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  Scovill  Point,  IV,  1. 

Breeding :     Occupied  nests  July  19. 

The  Cliff  Swallow  was  only  found  at  one  place  on  the  island  and 
only  several  pairs  were  seen  here. 

Breeding  Notes:  At  Scovill  Point  (IV,  1)  on  July  19  a  number  of 
Cliff  Swallows'  nests  were  found  placed  on  the  bare  face  of  the  rocks. 
They*  were  above  the  reach  of  the  waves  and  were  usually  protected  above 
by  shelving  of  rock.  The  nest  was  composed  of  mud  and  lined  with 
feathers  but  could  not  be  examined  closely.  The  probabilitieB  are  that 
they  contained  young,  as  the  old  birds  continually  flew  to  the  nest  and 
then  away  again,  chattering  all  the  time. 

73.  Hirundo  erythrogaster  (613).     Barn  Swallow. 

Bange:  North  America  in  general,  breeding  from  the  Far  Countries 
south  into  Mexico;  visits  the  West  Indies  in  migrations,  and  winters  in 
Central  America  and  South  America. 

Stations:  Hock  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3.  Men- 
agerie Island,  V,  10. 

Breeding:     August  17,  nest  with  young. 

On  July  9  a  flock  of  these  swallows  stayed  around  the  light-house 
and  neighbonng  islands  for  some  time  and  Anally  flew  away  toward 
the  80ut£. 

Breeding  Notes:  At  Menagerie  Island  we  saw  four  nests  in  a  small 
boat-house,  on  August  6.  Several  pairs  of  adults  were  flying  abont  the 
buildings.  On  August  17  they  were  again  seen  and  a  fifth  nest  contain- 
ing young  was  found,  this  time  built  against  the  bare  cliff  about  twenty 
feet  above  the  waves.  A  shelving  of  rock  a  few  feet  above  protected  it 
from  the  rain.  This  nest  contained  four  young  nearly  able  to  fly.  An 
old  nest  was  placed  a  little  ways  from  this  one  and  in  a  like  location. 

74.  Iridoprocne  bicolor  (614).     Tree  Swallow. 

Range:  North  America  at  large,  breeding  from  the  Fur  Countries 
south  to  New  Jersey,  the  Ohio  Valley,  Kansas,  and  Colorado,  etc.,  winter- 
ing from  South  Carolina  and  the  Gulf  States  southward  to  the  West 
Indies  and  Guatemala. 


ly  Google 


370  MICHiaAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

KtatioRB :    Boch  Harbor,  Spruce  and  BalBam  Forest,  I,  2-3. 

Menagerie  Island,  V,  10. 
Resident :     July  17  to  August  1. 

A  flock  of  twelve  Tree  Swallows  was  observed  flying  about  Rock 
Harbor  Light-houBe  on  July  20  and  21.     It  was  also  observed  here  on 
August  1. 
75.    Clwicola  riparia  (616).    Bank  Swallow. 

Range :  Northern  hemisphere ;  in  America  80utb  to  the  West  Indies, 
Central  America,  and  northern  South  America;  breeding  from  the 
middle  districts  of  the  United  States  northward  to  about  the  limit  of 
trees. 
Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Ransom  Clearing,  II,  1. 
A  single  specimen  of  the  Bank  Swallow  was  seen  July  25  at  Ransom 
Clearing  (II,  1)  near  the  moutb  of  Benson  Brook.  The  scarcity  of  this 
species  is  probably  due  to  the  lack  of  suitable  nesting  places  on  tiie 
island.  Scarcely  a  bank  suitable  for  their  burrows  was  foand  by  our 
party. 

7ti.     Totanua  mclanoleumis  (254).     Greater  Yellow-legs. 
Range :    America  in  general,  breeding  from  Iowa  and  northern  Illinois 
etc.,  Dorthward,  and  migrating  south  to  Chili  and  Argentine  Republic. 
Stations:     Siskowit  Bay,  Beach,  V. 

A  single  specimen  of  the  Greater  Tellow-legs  was  seen  on  the  beach 
at  Siskowit  Bay  on  Aagnst  1. 

71.     Ampelis  cedrormm  (fil9).    Cedar  Waxwing. 
Range :    North  America  at  large,  from  the  Fur  Countries  southward. 
In  winter,  from  the  northern  border  of  the  United  States  south  to  the 
West  Indies  and  Costa  Rica.    Breeds  from  Vii^inia,  southern  Alleghan- 
ies,  Kentucky,  Kansas,  Arizona,  etc..  northward. 

Stations:     Rock    Harbor,    Jack    Pine    Ridge,    I,    5;     Balsam-Spruce 
forest,  I,  3;  Benson  Brook  and  Ransom  Clearing,  II,  1; 
Rock  Ridge  Clearing  (burned  over)  II,  3 ;  Small  Island, 
III,  1. 
Siskowit    Bay,    Border    of    Rock    Clearing,    V,  3 ;    Trail 
through  the  balsam-birch  forest,  V,  i;  Outlet  of  Sisko- 
wit Lake  V,  9. 
Washington    Harbor,   border   of   clearings,  I,  '04;  Forest 
along  river,  II,  '04;  Washington  Island,  X,  '04. 
Breeding:    See  below. 

The  Cedar  Waxwing  was  a  rather  uncertain  bird  in  its  distribution. 
Unless  held  to  a  limited  region  by  its  nest,  it  wandered  about  and  was 
seldom  seen  in  the  same  locality  two  days  in  succession.  We  usually 
found  them  in  flocks  of  from  5  or  6  to  15  or  20.  Small  berries  were 
greedily  devoured  by  them,  as  well  as  insects,  the  latter  often  being 
taken  on  the  wing.  In  this  they  were  very  graceful  and  rivalled  ttic 
true  flycatchers,  their  strong,  graceful  flight,  together  with  their 
(]uickness  making  them  quite  expert  on  the  wing.  Ae  a  rule  they  we'-e 
very  quiet,  especially  in  the  vicinity  of  their  nest.  The  Waxwing  was 
usually  found  in  open  places,  as  borders  of  clearings,  along  water  ways, 
and  at  sphagnum  bogs. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  nest  containing  5  eggs  was  found  July  10  in  a 
Jack  pine  ttee  on  the  Jack  Pine  Ridge.  I,  5.  It  was  held  against  the 
trunk  by  two  small  branches  about  ten  feet  from  the  ground.    The  eggs 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLB  ROYALB.  S71 

were  greenish  brown  speckled  with  black.  The  nest  was  composed  of 
moss,  gray  lichen,  and  grasses  and  was  lined  with  pootletw  and  the 
soft  gray  tree  lichen.  .Inly  20  several  nests  were  found  on  a  small  rocky 
island.  III,  1.  The  nests  were  placed  in  amall  sprnces  and  cedars  and 
were  from  eight  to  fifteen  feet  above  the  gronnd.  All  were  hnilt  of  the 
gray  hanging  lichen  which  gi-ew  on  the  neighboring  trees.  Another  nest 
of  the  W'aiwing  was  fonnd  .Inly  27  on  a  suiall  island  in"  Rook  Harbor. 
It  was  about  six  feet  from  tlie  ground  in  a  White  fedar,  and  was  com- 
posed of  the  usnal  gray  lichen.  It  contained  two  nearly  hatched  young, 
and  one  egg.  •Inly  28  a  nest  was  fonnd  on  a  horizontal  limb  of  a  birch, 
about  ten  feet  from  the  ground.  It  contained  three  young.  On  two 
small  islands  in  Rock  Harl>or  U  Waxwing  nests  wei-e  found.  Here 
the  nests  ranged  from  three  to  twelve  feet  above  the  ground.  Another 
nest  was  found  July  28  which  was  placed  on  a  limb  overhanging  the  lake, 
and  about  ten  feet  above  it.  It  contained  several  young.  July  29  a 
nest  was  found  along  the  path  to  the  fisherman's  cabin.  It  was  on  a 
birch  about  twenty  feet  from  the  ground,  the  highest  nest  seen.  The 
nests  of  the  Cedar  Waxwings  were  j>laced  in  both  conifers  and  decidu- 
ous trees,  bnt  all  were  composed  of  the  gray  ti'ce  lichen. 

78.  Lamiift  horealis  (021).     Xorthern  Bhrike. 

Hunge:  Northern  North  America,  south  in  winter  to  the  middle  por- 
tions of  the  t'nited  States  (Virginia,  Kentucky,  Kansas,  Colorado,  Ari- 
zona, northern  California).     Breeds  north  of  the  United  States. 

Stations:  Washington  Harhor,  clearings  at  edge  of  forest,  I.  '04. 
Washington  Island,  X,  '04. 

Migration :     September  1  and  9. 

At  Washington  Island  {X.  '04),  September  1,  a  Northern  Shrike  was 
seen  eating  a  smali  bird  it  had  just  caught.  Another  was  seen  in  the 
first  clearing  September  9. 

79.  Vireo  olivaoetis   (624).     Red-eyed  Vireo. 

Range :  Eastern  North  America  west  to  Colorado,  Utah,  and  British 
Columhia;  north  to  th^  Arctic  regions;  south  in  winter  from  Florida  to 
northern  South  America.  Breeds  nearly  throughout  its  Northern  Ameri- 
can range. 

Stations :  Rock  Harbor,  Partial  Clearing,  II,  1 ;  along  Benson 
Brook,  II.  1. 

Rock  Clearings,  II,  3.     Birch  forest,  III,  4.    Forest,  V,  4. 

Siskowit  Bay.  Old  Burning,  V,  !).  Washington  Harbor.  Along  road 
in  alders,  I,  04. 

Breeding;     July  13,  nearly  full  grown  young. 

Migration:     September  12. 

These  birds  seemed  to  prefer  the  more  open  growths  of  timber  such 
as  the  birch  forests  which  contained  more  or  less  of  an  undergrowth 
of  aspens,  such  as  was  found  along  Benson  Brook  (II,  1),  where  many 
were  seen.  On  July  20  we  found  this  s[>ecies  in  the  valley  at  the  west 
end  of  Tonkin  Bay  (IV,  7)  in  a  second  growth  of  birch  and  aspen. 
It  was  also  found  on  the  trail  to  Sumner  Lake  (III,  4)  on  July  27. 
At  Siskowit  it  was  not  nearly  so  common  and  was  observed  only  two 
or  three  times  at  Siskowit  I^ake. 

It  was  obser^-ed  only  as  a  rare  migrant  at  Washington  Harbor.  Only 
one,  an  adult  male,  being  taken,  September  12. 

«  i,CoogIc 


372  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

Breeding  Notes:  Probably  the  Red-eyed  Vireo  bred  quite  commonly 
in  all  suitable  localities,  but  no  nests  were  found,  A  pair  was  seen 
feeding  nearly  full  grown  voung  along  Benson  Brook  (II,  1)  on  July 
13. 

SO.     Virco  philadelphicvs  (626).    Philadelphia  Vireo. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  north  to  Hudson  Bay;  soatli,  in 
winter,  to  Costa  Rica  and  Panama.  Not  recorded  from  Mexico  or  the 
West  Indies.  Breeds  from  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  and  Manitoba  north- 
ward. 

Stations:    Washington  Harbor  Clearing,  I,  '04. 

Migration :    September  12. 

The  Philadelphia  Vireo  was  by  far  the  rarest  of  this  family,  only 
one  pair  being  seen  throughout  our  stay  this  year.  These  two  were 
found  on  the  morning  of  September  12  among  the  low  alder  bushes 
along  the  road  between  the  first  and  second  clearings  (I.  '04).  The 
year  before  one  was  seen  September  1  in  about  the  same  locality. 

71.     Vireo  soUtarius  (629).    Blue-headed  Vireo. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  north  to  Hudson  Bay 
and  Fort  Simpson.  South,  in  winter,  to  Guatemala.  Breeds  from 
southern  New  England  and  the  northern  part  of  the  Lake  States  north- 
ward. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  alders  at  edge  of  clearing,  I,  '04. 

Migration :     August  30 ;  September  12. 

The  Blue-headed  Vireo  was  only  observed  on  two  occasions.  On 
August  30  a  pair  was  seen  feeding  in  a  low  birch  along  the  road  from 
the  first  clearing  (I,  '04),  and  on  September  12  another  was  noted  ia 
the  same  place  also  feeding  among  low  birches  and  alders, 

82.    Mniotilta  varia  (63fi).    Black  and  White  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  United  States  to  the  Plains,  north  to  Fort  Simpson, 
south  in  winter,  through  Central  America  and  the  West  Indies  to 
Venezuela  and  Columbia.  Breeds  from  Virginia  and  southern  Kansas 
nortliward,  and  winters  from  Florida  and  the  (^ulf  States  southward. 

Stations :  Siskowit  Bay,  Old  Burning,  V,  9.  Washington  Harbor, 
forest  along  river.  II,  '04. 

Migration:     August  3  and  31. 

One  of  these  warblers  was  seen  on  August  3  among  the  alders  and 
dogwoods  which  formed  a  dense  thicket  at  the  outlet  to  Siskowit  Lake. 
No  others  were  seen  until  August  31,  when  a  single  individual  was  pro- 
cured in  an  alder  thicket  along  Washington  River  (II,  '04). 

S3.     SelminthophUa  nificapiUa  (645K    Nashville  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  north  to  the  Fur 
Countries,  breeding  from  the  northern  United  States  northward,  Mexico 
and  Guatemala  in  winter. 

Stations:    Rock  Harbor,  Lake  and  Bay  Beaches,  I,  1;  Natural  Rock 
Clearings,  I,  2;    Balsam-spruce  forest,  I,  3;    Tamarack 
and  Arbor  Vitae  swamps,  I,  4;  Benson  Brook  and  Ran- 
som Clearing,  II,  1. 
Siskowit  Bay,  Trail  through    Balsam-Birch    forest,   V,  4; 

outlet  of  Siskowit  I^ake,  V,  9. 
Washington  Harbor,  border  of  clearing,  I,  '04. 


rfbyGOOgIC 


ECOLOGT   OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  373 

Breeding:     July  11.  5  young. 

Migration:  Migrating  nt  Wasliington  Harbor  from  August  25  to 
Sept.  12. 

The  Naebville  Warbler  was  usually  seen  near  the  tree  tops,  especially 
along  the  border  of  clearings.  They  showed  quite  a  preference  for  the 
vicinity  of  high,  open  mixed  forests. 

Breeding  Notes:  We  found  o  Nashville  Warbler's  ncut  in  the  eide 
of  a  bluff  about  eipht  feet  high.  The  nest  was  placed  about  two  feet 
from  the  foot  of  the  cliff;  which  was  not  quite  perpendicular  at  this 
point.  The  nest  was  almost  hidden  by  the  moss,  and  was  composed 
of  moss  from  the  trees,  the  lining  being  made  of  grasses.  It  contained 
five  young,  still  in  the  down.  There  were  several  birch  and  spruce 
trees  close  to  the  nest,  completely  shading  it  from  the  sun.  The  top 
of  the  cliff  was  bare  rock  and  entirely  exposed.  The  parents  fed  in 
the  tamarack  swamp  near  by,  but  refused  to  come  close  to  the  nest 
while  we  were  near. 

84.    HelmitUhophila  peregrina  (647).    Tenneseee  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  breeding  from  northern  New  York 
and  northern  New  England  northward  to  Hudson  Bay  Territory;  in 
winter  south  through  Mexico  to  Costa  Kica  and  Columbia. 

Stations:  Siskowit  Bay.  Forest,  V,  4.  Washington  Harbor,  clear- 
ings, I.  '04,  Forest,  H,  '04. 

Migration :     August  2  to  September  18. 

The  Tennessee  Warbler  was  perhaps  the  most  abundant  species  of 
this  family  on  the  island,  although  it  was  only  recorded  as  a  migrant. 
The  first  seen  was  on  August  2  in  the  coniferous  and  birch  forest  near 
our  camp  at  Hiskowit  (V,  4).  They  were  observed  regularly  after 
this  date,  but  never  in  vei-y  large  numbers.  We  noticed  these  birds 
soon  after  arriving  at  Washington  Harbor  (August  19).  In  a  few 
days  their  numbers  were  greatly  increased  and  tbey  continued  plentiful 
until  the  first  of  September,  when  their  numbers  gradually  diminished 
until  the  8th,  after  which  time  only  scattered  individuals  were  observed. 
On  August  20  we  saw  flock  after  flock  of  these  beautiful  birds  among 
the  scrub  growth  of  alder,  birch,  and  balsam,  along  tbe  road  (I,  '04), 
and  also  along  Washington  River  (II,  '04).  They  were  evidently  gather- 
ing for  the  long  journey  south  and  were  busy  feeding  in  the  brush  and 
low  trees.  On  August  22  a  large  flock  came  into  the  door  yard,  feeding 
about  the  doorstep  on  crumbs  which  bad  been  thrown  there.  They 
were  also  noticed  diligently  hunting  over  some  wild  mustard,  scanning 
every  leaf  and  blossom  carefully. 

85*.    Dendroica  tigrina  (030).    Cape  May  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  north  to  Lake  Winnei>eg  and  Hud- 
son Bay  Territory,  west  to  the  Plains;  breeds  from  northern  New  Eng- 
land northward ;  winters  in  the  West  Indies. 

Stations :     Siskowit  Bay,  Forest,  V,  4. 

Migration:     August  15. 

This  species  was  seen  August  15  in  a  tamarack  swamp  (V,  5)  at 
Siskowit.  About  six  or  seven  birds  were  seen  in  company  with  several 
other  migrating  warblers.  This  is  the  only  record  we  have  for  the 
island. 

86.    Dendroica  caerulcscena  (654).    Black-throated  Blue  Warbler. 

l,yCOOgIC 


374  MICHIGAN    SUHVBT,   1908. 

Range:  Eastern  Xorth  America  to  the  Plains,  breeding  from  northern 
Xew  Eogland  and  northern  New  York  northward  to  Labrador,  and  ia 
the  Alleghaniea  nouth  to  northern  Georgia;  West  Indies  and  Ouatemala 
in  winter.     Accidental  on  the  Farallon  Islands,  California. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Rpnice  and  Balsam  Forest,  I.  2-3;  Tamarark 
and  Arbor  A'itae  Swamps,  I.  4;  Tamarack  and  Spruce  Swamp,  11,  2-5; 
Siwkowit  Bav.  Forest,  V,  4;  Washington  Island.  Clearing,  I,  "Ifi;  Forest, 
II,  '1)4. 

Sligrant :     August  28 ;  September  12. 

The  Black-threated  Blue  Warbler  was  not  common  on  an.r  part  of 
Isle  Royale.  We  found  tliem  in  the  spruce,  tamara<'k  and  balsam 
forests  and  swamps,  espcciall.v  where  there  was  considerable  under- 
brush. Xo  Toung  were  seen,  although  it  undoubtedly  bi-ed  on  the  island, 
as  males  and  females  were  seen  as  early  as  July  8. 

87.    Dendroica  coronata  (655).     Myrtle  Warbler. 

Kauge:  Eastern  North  America,  chiefly  straggling  more  or  less 
commonly  westward  to  the  Pacific;  breeds  fi-om  the  northern  United 
States  northward,  and  winters  from  sonthern  New  England  and  the 
Ohio  Valley  southward  to  the  West  Indies,  and  through  Mexico  to 
Panama. 

Ktations:  Beach  at  Rock  Harbor,  I,  1;  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest. 
1,  l.'-:t:  Small  Islands,  III,  1.  Forest,  V,  4;  Old  Burning,  Y.  9.  Wash 
inpton  Harbor,  clearing.  I,  '04;  forest,  II,  '04, 

Breeding:     Nest  and  yonng,  July  7  and  July  27. 

Migration :     Last  seen  on  September  12. 

The  Myrtle  Warbler  was  fairly  common  in  the  balsam  and  sprnce 
forest,  but  was  often  found  feeding  along  the  rocky  sbores.  Although 
a  tree  neater,  and  principally  an  arboreal  feeder,  it  commonly  descended 
to  the  ground  in  search  of  food ;  this  was  particularly  noticeable  on  the 
bare  rocks  along  the  shore  of  Rock  Harbor.  They  were  not  as  com- 
mon at  Siskowit.  and  only  scattered  migratory  flocks  were  observed  at 
Washington  HarlH>r. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  nest  containing  four  well  feathered  young  was 
found  on  July  7.  It  was  situated  in  a  Jack  pine  on  the  extreme  edge 
of  a  cliff,  and  about  forty  feet  alrave  the  water.  The  nest  was  placed 
at  the  end  of  a  horizontal  limb,  about  ten  feet  from  the  ground,  six 
feet  from  the  trunk  of  the  tree,  and  directly  over  the  water.  It  was 
compose<l  of  balsam  twigs  and  needles  and  lined  with  feathers  of  the 
Sharp-tailed  Grouse  and  Canada  Jay,  being  a  little  larger  than  a  Chip- 
ping Sparrow's.  No  overhanging  branches  afforded  the  nest  any  pro- 
tection from  the  sun  or  storms.  The  surrounding  trees  were  Jack 
pines  and  spruces.  The  bird  flew  directly  to  the  nest  as  long  as  the 
observer  was  out  of  sight,  Mit  at  other  times  it  approached  very  cauti- 
ously, and  when  about  fifty  feet  from  the  nest  it  would  drop  close  to 
the  ground,  flying  low  until  almost  under  the  nest.  It  always  left  the 
nest  by  flying  low  along  the  top  of  the  cliff.  There  was  very  little 
underbrush  within  fifty  yards  of  the  tree  on  which  the  nest  was  situated, 
and  the  surrounding  Jack  pines  and  spruces  were  scattered  so  that 
the  sun  had  access  to  the  ground.  The  small  plant  life  was  composed 
mostly  of  mosses  and  heath  plants. 

On  July  27  another  nest  was  found,  this  time  on  an  island  at  the 

I,  Google 


ECOLOGY   OF   ISLE  ROYALB.  376 

north  side  of  Rock  Harbor.  It  was  placed  on  a  horiitontal  limb  of  a 
white  sprnce  about  six  feet  from  the  groand.  Like  the  first  one  this 
overhnng  the  water,  but  not  ao  far  above  it.  It  was  composed  of  small 
twigB  and  grasses,  lined  with  feathers  and  contained  three  yoong  about 
two  daj-R  old.  On  July  2S  a  young  Myrtle  Warbler  juwt  out  of  the 
nest  was  found  on  a  small  island  (III,  1).  Four  neata  were  found  on 
two  small  islands  near  the  end  of  Rock  Harbor,  one  of  which  con- 
tained small  and  nearly  full-fled[{ed  young  July  21.  The  other  two 
were  empty,  but  gave  evidence  of  having  been  recently  used.  They 
were  all  in  coniferous  trees  and  ranged  from  six  to  ten  feet  above  the 
ground. 

So  nests  were  found  at  Biskowit,  probably  because  the  breeding  sea- 
son was  nearly  over,  and  due,  in  part  also,  to  our  short  stay  at  this 
location.  A  juvenile  male  was  taken  here  on  August  3,  and  several 
were  seen  feeding  in  the  tree  tops  near  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake  (V, 
9)  August  5.  At  Washington  Harbor  they  were  obsen-ed  on  August  5. 
6  and  7;  after  our  return,  from  August  18  to  September  12. 

88.  Dendtvka  maculosa  (657).     Magnolia  Warbler. 

Range :  Eastern  North  America  west  to  the  base  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains, and  casually  to  British  Columbia;  breeding  from  northern  New 
England,  northern  New  York,  and  northern  Michigan,  to  Hudson  Bay 
Territory  and  soutliward  in  the  Alleghanies  to  Pennsylvania.  In  winter, 
Bahamas,  Cuba,  and  south  through  eastern  Mexico  to  Panama. 

Stations:  Roek  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Grove  of 
Evergreens,  I,  1,  I,  4;  Spruce  and  Cedars  along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1, 
II,  4.  Siskowit  Bay,  Forest,  Y,  4.  Washington  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  "114; 
Forest,  II,  *04. 

Breeding:     July  7,  female  and  young. 

Migration:     .\ugust   28.   September   12. 

Magnolia  Warblers  were  common  in  the  balsam  and  spruce  forests 
and  also  in  the  second  growths  of  birch  at  all  three  localities,  but  could 
not  he  called  migrants. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  female  was  seen  feeding  a  young  bird  in  the 
top  of  a  birch  tree  on  July  7.  The  same  day  a  female  was  found  in  a 
spruce  thicket  feeiliug  a  young  bird  which  had  just  enough  feathers  to 
enable  it  to  fly  six  or  eight  feet.  Another  brood  of  four  young  were 
found  just  back  of  the  light-house  in  a  thicket  of  birch.  These  were 
scarcely  able  to  tty,  two  being  caught  by  hand.  The  following  day 
(July  8)  several  families  were  found  in  the  tamarack  and  arbor  vitae 
swamps  (I,  4).  One  brood  was  large  enough  to  fly.  They  were  also 
found  quite  regularly  along  Benson  Brook  (II,  1)  and  at  McCargoe 
Cove  (II,  4). 

General  Notes:  During  migration  the  birds  preferred  the  banks  of 
the  river  and  the  roadside,  although  scattered  individuals  were  occa- 
sionally met  with  in  the  more  open  parts  of  the  coniferous  forest,  especi- 
ally where  it  was  suflBciently  open  to  allow  the  growth  of  birches. 

89.  Dcndroica  castanea   (660).     Bay-breasted  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  north  to  Hudson  Bay.  Breeds  from 
northern  New  England  and  northern  Michigan  northward,  in  winter 
south  through  eastern  Mexico  (rare)  and  Guatemala  to  Columbia. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,   Spruce  and    Balsam    Forest,  I,  2-3;    Rock 


»76  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

Ridge  Clearinfc.  TI,  3.    Forest  on  Trail  to  SiBkowit  Lake.  V,  4.    Waah- 
ingtOQ  Harbor,  clearing,  I,  '04 ;  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Resident :    July  7. 

Migrant:     Augnst  .28;    September   12. 

Only  a  few  of  these  birds  were  seen  and  it  is  probably  an  ancommon 
summer  resident  tbronghont  the  island.  A  fine  adult  mnle  n-as  seen 
feeding  in  the  balsam -sprnoe  forest  (I,  3)  Jnly  7.  On  July  14  another 
male  was  observed  in  a  thick  second  growth  of  birch,  aspen  and  spruce, 
near  the  edge  of  the  tamarack  swamp  (II,  2),  From  its  actions  we 
thought  a  nest  was  near,  but  it  could  not  be  found.  A  badly  moult- 
ing male  was  tnken  August  S  near  Siskowit  Lake.  At  Washington  Har- 
bor it  was  obsen'ed  only  as  a  migrant,  being  observed  from  Augnst 
28  to  September  12,  At  times,  particularly  during  Warbler  waves, 
they  were  abundant,  but  among  all  those  observed,  only  a  few  adult 
males  were  seen,  and  the  young  greatly  outnumbered  the  females. 

m.    Dcndroica  striata   (fifil).     Black-poll  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  Ameriea  west  to  the  Rocky  ilonntains,  north 
to  Greenland,  the  Barren  Grounds,  and  Alaska,  breeding  from  northern 
New  England  and  the  Catskills  northward.  South  in  winter  to  northern 
South  America,  but  not  recorded  from  Mexico  or  Central  America. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearings,  I,  '04;  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Migration:     August  25  to  September  25. 

At  first  the  Black-polls  were  rather  uncommon,  but  they  rapidly  in- 
creased in  numbers  until  August  26,  when  the  great  wave  of  this  siwcies 
commenced. 

91,    Dendroica  virenn   (6B7).     Black -throated  Green  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  north  to  Hudson  Bay 
Territory,  breeding  from  Connecticut  and  northern  Illinois  northward, 
and  south  along  the  Aileghanies  to  South  Carolina.  In  winter,  south 
to  Cuba  and  Panama.     Accidental  in  Greenland  and  Europe. 

Stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Natural  Rock  Clearing,  I,  2;  Balsam-spruce 
forest,  I,  3;  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  swamps,  I,  4; 
Sphagnum-spruce  bog,  I,  6;  Tamarack  swamp,  II,  2; 
Forbes  Lake,  II,  6;  Birch  Forest,  III,  4. 
Siskowit  Lake,  Balaam-Birch  Forest,  V,  4. 
Washington  Harbor,  Border  of  Clearings,  T.  '04;  Forest 
along  river,  II,  '04. 

Breeding:     Voung  with  adult  seen  July  9. 

The  Black-throated  Green  Warbler  fed  on  the  ground  as  well  as  in 
the  tops  of  the  trees,  but  the  latter  place  was  much  preferred,  and,  ex- 
cept during  the  breeding  season,  when  they  hunt  everywhere  for  food, 
they  were  usually  found  there. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  young  Black-throated  Green  Warbler  was  seen 
in  company  with  the  male  on  July  9  in  the  tamarack  swamp,  I,  4. 
July  11  a  nest  containing  young  was  found  in  a  cedar  tree  about  2<t 
feet  from  the  ground.  It  was  composed  of  moss  and  grass.  The  nesting 
site  was  in  a  rather  open  spot  where  the  tree-i  were  mostly  cedar  and 
birch,  and  only  a  little  underbrush  and  low  vegetation  was  present. 
When  we  were  near  the  nest  the  femaie  Black-thi-oat  moved  anxiously 
about  from  limb  to  limb,  keeping  up  a  constant  chirping,  hut  would  not 
approach  closely.     Another  nest  containing  young  was  found  the  .>5aine 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROT  ALE.  377 

afternoon.  Both  parents  were  very  nervons  in  their  movements,  remain- 
ing within  a  few  feet  of  the  otaerver  and  scolding  constantl.T-  The 
male  had  food  in  its  mouth  when  first  seen.  A  male,  female  and  young 
were  found  in  a  birch  forest  Jul.v  27. 

92.  Dendroica  palmarum  (672).     Palm  Warbler. 

Range:  Northern  interior  to  Great  Slave  Lake;  in  winter  Sonth 
Atlantic  and  Gulf  States,  the  West  Indies  and  Mexico.  Of  rare  but  reg- 
ular occurrence  in  the  Atlantic  States  in  migration. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearings,  I,  '04;  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Migration:     August  28  to  September  21  on. 

The  Palm  Warbler  was  second  in  numbers  only  to  the  Tennessee. 
From  August  28  to  the  middle  of  September  these  birds  were  always 
found  in  considerable  numbers  along  the  road  connecting  the  clearings. 
It  was  also  found  in  the  first  clearing,  usually  near  the  border  where 
the  alders  and  other  shrubs  furnished  a  large  share  of  its  insect  food  as 
well  as  a  protection  from  the  numerous  hanks.  The  birds  were  quite 
tame  and  often  came  into  the  house  through  the  open  doors  and  windows. 
The  birds  have  a  characteristic  habit  of  jerking  the  tail  up  and  down, 
which  serves  as  an  aid  to  identification  at  quite  a  distance.  As  a  rule 
they  were  usually  found  in  flocks,  usually  numbering  about  thirty  or 
forty. 

93.  Seiurus  aurocapillus  (674).     Oven-bird. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  north  to  Hudson  Bay  Territory  and 
Alaska,  breeding  from  Kansas,  the  Ohio  Valley,  and  Virginia  north- 
ward. In  winter  Florida,  the  West  Indies,  southern  Mexico,  and  Central 
America  to  Panama. 

Stations:     Bock  Harbor,  Sphagnum-spruce  bog,  I,  6;  Benson  Brook, 
II,  1;  Birch  forest.  III,  4;  Tamarack  swamp,  I,  4. 
Siskowit     Bay,    Balsam-Birch    forest,    Y,    4;    Tamarack 

swamp,  V,  5. 
Washington    Harbor,    borders  of  clearings,  I,  '04;    found 
along  river,  II,  '04. 
Resident:    Kock  Harbor,  July  8,    Siekowit  Bay,  Aug,  12. 
Breeding:     Young  seen  August  12. 

The  Oven-bird  was  not  common  on  the  island  and  occurred  only  in 
limited  numbers  in  its  favoHte  habitats,  such  as  the  cool,  damp  forest 
along  the  streams  and  in  the  tamarack  swamp.  No  nests  were  found, 
but  young  able  to  care  for  themselves  were  taken  in  the  tamarack  swamp 
(V,  5)  August  12.  It  was  uncommon  even  in  migration  and  was  last 
seen  September  12, 

94.  te'tmrits  novcboracensia  notabilis  (675a).  Grinnell's  Water 
Thrush. 

Range:  Western  United  States,  from  Indiana  and  Illinois  westward 
to  California,  and  north  into  British  America.  Casual  in  migrations 
eastward  to  the  Atlantic  coast.  Winters  from  the  southern  border  of  the 
United  States  southward  to  Lower  California,  Mexico  and  northern 
South  America. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  Along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1;    Forest,  V,  4; 
Siskowit  I^ke.  V,  6;  Old  Burning.  V,  9. 
Washington  Harbor,  Clearing,  I,  '04;  forest  along  river, 

"■  '"*■  ,„Coogle 


378  MICHIGAN   SURVEY.   1908. 

Migration :     August  5  to  September  12. 

On  August  5  several  Grinnell's  Water  Thrushes  were  seen  at  the  edge 
of  Siskowit  Lake  (V,  9).  They  frequeuted  the  borders  of  the  lake,  secret- 
ing themselves  in  the  dense  masses  of  fallen  tree  tops  and  rubbish.  They 
were  afterwards  seen  running  along  on  the  bare  rocks  and  sand,  at  a 
distance  being  similar  in  their  actions  to  the  Spotted  Sandpiper,  as  both 
birds  run  in  about  the  same  manner  with  the  ac«;ompan,ving  tipping  up 
and  down  motions.  These  Water  Thrushes  could  be  as  truly  called  "tip 
ups"  as  the  Sandpiper  and  were  often  found  standing  on  a  rock  or 
log  tipping  op  and  down  and  wig-wagging  the  tail.  It  was  occasionally 
found  on  the  Lake  Superior  shore  Bear  camp,  but  was  nowhere  as  com- 
mon as  on  the  inland  lakes  or  streams.  At  Washington  Harbor  they 
were  found  along  the  road,  in  the  dense  balsam  forest  and  along  the 
river.  During  rainy  days,  e8])ecially,  the  Water  Thrushes  were  quite 
common  along  the  road,  more  particularly  in  the  damp  places  where 
the  alders  thrived.  Usually  the  birds  were  in  pairs  and  were  very  shy. 
About  the  only  way  specimens  could  be  procured  was  to  call  the  birds 
near  by  sucking  or  kissing  the  hand  to  make  a  noise  resembling  that  of 
a  young  bird  in  distress.  This  seldom  failed  to  bring  a  pair  or  two  of 
excited  birds  within  a  few  feet.  As  soon  as  the  deception  was  discovered 
they  were  quick  to  seek  the  protection  of  the  long  grass  on  the  banks 
of  the  stream  or  of  a  nearby  rubbish  heap. 

This  bird  probably  breeds  on  the  island,  although  nothing  definite 
was  determined.  While  at  Washington  Harbor  earlier  in  the  season 
I  shot  a  young  Water  Thrush  unable  to  fly,  but  could  not  find  it  amonf; 
the  dense  underbrush  and  ground  hemlock  which  covered  the  ground. 
An  adult  with  three  or  four  young  was  seen  with  it,  but  it  was  too  dark 
under  the  thick  balsams  to  see  the  color  of  the  breast,  or  determine  in 
and  other  way  whether  it  was  Orinnell's  or  the  Bmall-billed  Water 
Thrush. 

95.     Geolhhjpia  agilia   (678).     Connecticut  Warbler, 

Range :  Eastern  North  America,  breeding  north  of  the  United  States 
(Manitoba,  Ontario).     Northern  South  America  in  winter. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearing  at  edge  of  forest,  I,  '04. 

Migration :     September  12. 

Several  Connecticut  Warblers  were  seen  during  the  large  wave  of 
September  12.  They  were  found  singly  in  the  damp  alder  thickets  along 
the  road.  In  actions  they  reminded  one  of  the  Water  Thrush,  running 
along  the  fallen  logs  and  keeping  out  of  sight  as  much  as  possible. 

9fl.     Oeothlypis  Philadelphia  {1)79).     Mourning  Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Plains,  breeding  from  the 
mountainous  portions  of  Pennsylvania,  New  England,  New  York,  and 
northern  Michigan  northward.  Central  America  and  northern  Sonth 
America  in  winter.     Accidental  in  Greenland. 

Stations:  Kock  Harbor,  burned  area  of  rock  ridge  clearingH,  II,  3; 
Shore  of  Benson  Lake,  II,  1. 

Breeding:     July  11,  young  seen. 

An  adult  female  Mourning  Warbler  was  seen'near  Benson  Lake  July 
11,  and  near  the  outlet  into  Benson  Brook  an  immature  bird  was  seen 
on  the  same  day. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOOY  OF   ISIiB  ROYALE.  379 

97.  Wilaonia  pusilla   (685).     Wilson  Warbler. 

Bange:  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  anci  includiog  the  Rocky 
MouDtaiDS,  north  to  Labrador,  Hudson  Bay  Territory,  and  Alaska. 
Breeds  chiefly  north  of  the  United  States,  migrating  sontb  to  eastern 
Mexico  and  Central  America. 

Stations:     Washington  Ilarbor,  forest  near  river,  II,  '04. 

Migration:     August  31,  September  5. 

.Wilson's  Warbler  was  one  of  the  rarest  of  this  family,  only  two  birds 
being  observed  on  the  island.  On  August  31  a  female  was  seen  catch- 
ing insects  over  the  river  and  also  picking  something  off  the  leaves  on 
a:i  overhanging  alder  bush.  The  other  was  a  male  and  was  found  in 
nearly  the  same  place. 

98.  ^ylvania  ainailcnsia    (68G).     Canadian   Warbler. 

Range:  Eastern  Xorth  America,  west  to  the  Plains,  and  north  to 
New  Foundland,  southern  Labrador  and  Lake  Winnipeg;  south  in  win- 
ter to  Central  America  and  northern  South  .\merica.  Breeds  from  the 
higher  parts  of  the  Alleghanies  and  the  more  elevated  parts  of  southern 
New  York  and  southern  New  England,  northward. 

Stations:     Bock  Harbor,  .\lder  zone,  I,  1. 

Breeding:    July  8. 

Just  above  the  beach  at  the  head  of  thfi  bay  at  Rock  Harbor  is  a 
partial  clearing  fringed  with  alders,  and  here  among  the  bushes,  fallen 
trees,  alders,  birches,  and  spruce  we  found  a  number  of  warblers,  among 
them  being  the  Redstart,  Canadian  and  Nashville  Warblers.  The 
Canadian  gave  unmistakable  evidence  that  it  had  a  uest  near  by  con- 
taining young.  It  scolded  and  fussed,  approaching  the  intruder  and 
fluttering  rapidly  away  as  if  frightened  at  every  movement  in  its  direc- 
tion, all  the  while  holding  food  in  its  mouth. 

99.  Setophaga  ruticilla   (687).     American  Redstart. 

Range:  North  America,  north  to  Fort- Simpson;  west  regularly  to 
the  Great  Basin,  casually  to  California  and  Lower  California;  breed- 
ing from  the  middle  portion  of  the  United  States  northward.  In  win- 
ter, the  West  Indies,  southern  Mexico,  Central  America,  and  northern 
South  .\merica. 

Stations:     Ito*'k  Harbor,  Alder  stone,  I,  1;  Benson  Brook,  II,  1. 
fiiskowit  Bay,  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  9. 
Washington    Harbor,    borders   of   clearings,  I,  '04;    forest 
along  river,  II,  '04. 

Breeding :    August  H  a  male  and  young  were  seen. 

Migration :     I.4ist  seen  September  8. 

The  Redstart  was  a  much  rarer  breeder  on  the  island  than  one  would 
suppose.  It  was  not  near  the  limit  of  its  range  in  any  direction,  and 
the  conditions  were  the  same  as  found  elsewhere  where  it  is  quite  plen- 
tiful. During  migration  it  was  qnite  common,  but  it  never  occurred 
in  flocks  like  the  Tennessee  or  Blackpolls,  but  was  usually  found  asso- 
ciated with  flocks  of  other  species.  The  only  young  bird  found  was  on 
August  3,  when  a  male  Redstart  was  seen  feeding  a  young  one  near 
the  outlet  of  Benson  Brook,  II,  1. 

100.  Anthus  penHi/lvaniais   (697).     American  Pipit. 

Range:     North  America  at  large,  breeding  in  the  higher  parts  of  the 


..COCH^IC 


380  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Rocky  MonotaiDB  aniJ  stib  Arctic  districts,  and  wintering  in  the  Gnlf 
States,   Mexico   and  Central    America,     Accidental   in  Europe. 

Station :    Washington  Harbor,  clearings,  I,  '04. 

Migration:     September  18  on. 

I^rge  flocks  of  the  American  Pipit  appeared  in  the  first  clearing  at 
Washington  Harbor  on  September  19.  More  also  came  on  the  next  two 
succeeding  days  and  probably  continned  to  come,  but  on  the  21at  I  left 
the  island  for  the  south.  They  came  in  flocka  numbering  from  SO-to 
150  and  200.  The  grassy  clearing  was  preferred  to  the  plowed  area, 
possibly  because  it  offered  many  more  insects  at  this  time  of  year. 
Small  seeds,  probably  of  the  wild  grasses,  were  found  in  some  of  the 
stomachs.  The  birds  as  a  rule  were  not  shy,  even  flying  around  one's 
head  and  alighting  within  a  few  feet  after  being  shot  at.  When  in 
the  long  grass  it  was  sometimes  difBcult  at  a  distance  to  distinguish 
Ihem  from  Palm  Warblers,  as  the  latter  has  mufch  the  same  colored 
back,  and  often  resorted  to  the  same  places  to  feed.  On  the  open 
ground  of  course  there  was  no  such  difQculty.  Even  when  in  the  field 
the  exceedingly  long  hind,  toe  nail  is  very  conspicuous.  The  Pipits 
were  very  nervous  in  their  actions,  only  feeding  in  the  same  place  a 
few  moments  at  a  time  and  then  rising  up  in  a  scattered  flock  they  drew 
close  together  into  one  compact  mass  of  whirling  birds  and  flying  a 
short  distance  would  wheel   around  and  return  to  the  same  location, 

101.  Galcoacoptcs  caroUnensis  (704).    Catbird. 

Range:  Eastern  United  States  and  British  Provinces  west  to  and 
including  the  Rocky  Mountains;  occasional  on  the  Pacific  coast,  from 
British  Columbia  south  to  Central  California,  Breeds  from  the 
Gulf  States  northward  to  the  Saskatchewan."  Winters  in  the  southern 
states,  Cuba,  and  Middle  America  to  Panama,  Bermuda,  reeident.  Ac- 
cidental in  Europe. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  forest  near  river,  II,  1. 

Migration:     September  12. 

Only  one  individual  of  this  species  was  seen  during  the  two  years 
of  work  here.  I.,ate  in  the  afternoon  of  September  12  I  took  a  single 
specimen  as  it  was  passing  through  a  dense  thicket  of  mixed  alder, 
bircli  and  balsam  on  the  steep  banks  near  the  river. 

102.  Olbi  orchil  us  hicrrwlis   (722),     Winter  Wren. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  generally,  breeding  from  the  north- 
em  parts  of  the  United  States  northward,  and  in  the  Alleghanies  south 
to  North  Carolina,  and  wintering  from  about  its  southern  breeding 
limit  southward. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  swamps,  I,  4; 
III,  5;  burned  clearing  near  I,  1;    thick    undergrowth 
along  Benson  Brook,  II,  1;  Tamarack  and  spruce  forest, 
II,  2,  5. 
Siskowit  Bay,  forest,  Y,  4, 
Washington  Harbor,  forest  near  river,  II,  '04. 
Resident:     July  13  to  September  18. 

These  little  birds  were  very  partial  to  the  tamarack  and  cedar  swamps 
where  they  would  be  heard  singing  from  the  very  tops  of  the  tallest 
trees.  They  were  often  found  in  a  small  tamarack  swamp  (II,  2)  at 
the  west  end  of  Rock  Harbor  and  in  the  tamarack  swamps  around  Sum- 


ECOLOaY   OF   ISLE  ROYALK.  381 

ner  Lake  {III,  5).  A  pair  was  suspected  to  nest  in  a  small  tama- 
rack swamp,  (I,  4)  but  the  nest  could  not  be  found  in  tbe  thick  taugle 
of  logs  and  brush.  It  was  often  heard  singing  along  the  shores  of  the 
lakes  and  bajB,  preferring  places  where  there  was  a  rank  growth  of 
ground  hemlock.  We  found  it  fairly  common  all  through  tbe  i-e^ions 
studied,  but  in  each  place  the  birds  were  found  in  the  same  environ- 
ment. Those  taken  at  Washington  Harbor  were  found  in  the  wet,  dark 
forest  along  the  riTcr. 

103.  Gerthia  familiaris  fusca  (726).     Brown  Creeper. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  breeding  from  tbe  northern  and 
more  elevated  parts  of  the  United  States  northward,  and  casually  further 
south,  migrating  southward  in  winter. 

stations:  Rock  Harbor,  Tamarack  and  arbor  vitae  swamps,  I,  4. 
£^iskowit  Bay,  Forest,  V,  4.    Washington  Harbor,  Forest,  II,  '04. 

Resident:     July  2fi. 

Migration:     August  22  to  September  19. 

This  species  was  not  common  anywhere  on  the  island  and  was  rare  at 
Rock  Harbor.  It  was  confined  principally  to  the  balsam-spruce  forests 
and  cedar  swamps.  At  Siskowit  it  was  often  seen  in  the  balsam-birch 
forest,  being  much  more  common  than  at  either  Rock  Harbor  or  Wash- 
ington Harbor.  In  all  probability  it  nested  on  the  island,  but  no 
nests  or  young  were  found.  Even  during  migration  it  was  uncommon 
and  was  usually  found  accompanying  flocks  of  Chickadees,  Golden- 
crowned  Kinglets,  or  Red-breasted  Nuthatches.  Sometimes  all  of  these 
birds  would  be  found  together. 

104.  Situ  canadensis  {728).     Red-breaated  Nuthatch. 

Range:  North  America  at  large,  breeding  from  northern  New  Eng- 
land, northern  New  York,  and  northern  Michigan  northward;  and  south- 
ward in  the  Alleghanies,  Rocky  Mountains  and  Sierra  Nevadas;  in 
winter  south  to  about  the  southern  border  of  the  United  States. 

Stations :  Rock  Harbor,  Balsam-spruce  forest,  I,  3 ;  Tamarack  and 
Arbor  Vitae  swamps,  I,  i;  Edge  of  Ransom  Clearing,  II,  1;  Tamarack 
Kwamp,  II,  2;  Border  of  Forbes  Lake,  II,  5;  Conifers  along  trail  to 
Bumner  J^ake,  III,  4. 

Siskowit  Bay,  Conifers  along  trail  through  Balsam-birch  foi-est,  V, 
4;  Tamarack  swamp,  Y,  5;  Arbor  Vitae  swamp,  V,  8;  Tamarack-spruce 
swamp,  V,  11. 

Washington  Harbor,  forest  along  river,  II,  '04;  Tamarack  swamp, 
V,  '04;  Conifers  around  camp  clearing,  1,  '04. 

Breeding:  Young  able  to  take  care  of  themselves  were  seen  through- 
out the  season. 

Migration :     Last  seen  September  12. 

The  Red-breasted  Nuthatch  was  quite  common  on  the  island,  but  was 
somewhat  local  in  its  distribution.  The  tamarack,  arbor  vitae,  and 
spruce  swamps  were  their  favorite  resorts,  but  they  were  often  seen 
along  the  Iwrders  of  the  clearings  where  the  conifers  predominated. 
Practically  all  of  their  food  was  obtained  on  the  various  forms  of  ever- 
greens. 

105.  Parus  atricapillus  {735).     Chickadee. 

Range :    Eastern  North  America,  north  of  the  Potomac  and  Ohio  val- 

''^  i.Cooglc 


.382  MICHIQAN  SURTBT,   ISOB. 

Statious:     Rock  Harbor,  Natural  rock  dearinge,  I,  2;  Balaam-Bpruce 
Forest,  I,  3 ;  Tamarai-k  and  Arbor  Vitae  swamps.  I,  i ; 
Benson  Brook  and  Ransom  clearings,  II,  1;  Tamarack 
swamp,  II,  2;  Forbes  I.ake,  II,  5;  Conifers  along  trail 
to  Sumner  Lake,  III,  4. 
Siskovit  Lake,  Trail  threugh  Balsam-Bireli  forest,  Y.  4; 
Tamarack  swamp,  V,  5;  Outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake,  V,  9; 
West  end  of  Siskowit  Bay,  VIII.  '04. 
Washington  Harbor.    Border  of    clearings,  I,  '04;    Forest 
along  river,  II,  '04;  Tamarack  swamp,  V,  '04;  Washinfr- 
ton  Island,  X,  '04. 
Breeding:     On  July  7  a  nest  was  found  with  young  and  on  August 
10  a  nest  with  4  young. 

The  Chickadee  was  abundant  throughout  the  inland,  but,  except  dur- 
ing the  nesting  season,  it  roamed  about  in  small  flocks  from  place  to 
place,  the  conifers  near  camp  being  well  (lopulated  one  day,  and  the  nest 
day  all  would  be  gone.  These  small  flocks  were  probably  single  families, 
or  at  most  two  or  three  families  together.  As  soon  as  the  yonng  were 
able  to  leave  the  nest  they  commenced  these  local  excursions  and  prob- 
ably never  returned  to  the  nesting  site  except  by  chance.  Their  clear 
whistle  mating  song,  "Pi^to,"  was  heard  throughout  July  and  August 
and  occasionally  even  in  September.  The  Chickadees  were  often  found 
in  company  with  flocks  of  Red-breasted  Nuthatches  and  Brown  Creepers, 
especially  as  the  migration  season  came  on. 

Breeding  Notes ;  On  July  7  a  nest  of  the  Chickadees  was  found  in  a 
hollow  birch  tree  in  the  spruce  and  birch  forest  (I,  3).  It  contained 
several  partially  fledged  young.  Another  nest  was  found  August  10  in 
a  dead  birch  tree  about  ten  feet  from  the  ground.  The  entrance  was  very 
small,  there  being  scarcely  room  enough  for  two  of  the  little  ones  to  stick 
their  small  heads  out  at  once.  The  parents  flew  to  the  nest  with  a  moth 
or  other  small  insect  about  once  a  minute.  Four  young  were  found,  but 
on  the  nest  day  (August  11)  they  had  left  the  nest  and  were  seen  sitting 
in  a  small  balsam,  their  parents  industriously  feeding  them. 
106.  Rcgulus  aatrapa  (748).  Golden -crowned  Kinglet. 
Range:  North  America  generally,  breeding  in  the  northern  and  ele- 
vated parts  of  the  United  States  and  northward,  migrating  south  in 
winter  to  Guatemala. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  natural  rock  clearings,  I,  2;  Balsam-spruL-e 
forest,  I,  3;    Tamarack  and  Arbor  Vitae  swamp,  I,  4; 
Sphagnum- spruce  bog,  I,  6;  Benson  Brook  and  Ransom 
Clearing,  II,  1;  Tamarack  swamp,  II,  2;  Forbes  Lake, 
II,  B;  Conifers,  III,  4. 
Siskowit    Bay,    Balsam-spruce    forest,    V,    4;    Tamarack 
swamp,  V,  5;    Arbor    Vitae    swamp,  V,  8;  Tamarack- 
spruce  swamp,  V,  11. 
Washington  Harbor,  Border  of  clearings,  I,  04;  Conifers 
along  river,  II,  04;  Tamarack  swamp,  V,  '04;  Washing- 
ton Island,  X,  '04. 
Breeding  Notes:     Nest  partially  completed  July  7.     It  contained  S 
eggs  on  July  21. 

The  Golden-crowned  Kinglet  was  very  common  throueboni  the  island. 

i.,C.och(Ic 


ECOLOaY  OF   ISLE  ROYALE.  383 

usually  occurring  in  small  flocks  of  from  fifteen  to  twenty.  The.v  were 
found  wherever  suitable  conditions  existed,  namely,  conifei-ous  habitats, 
:is  balsam,  spruce,  tamarack,  and  arbor  vitae  forests  and  swaniiM. 
The  birds  were  never  shy,  and  were  only  momentarily  disturbed  by  the 
discharge  of  a  gun.  Their  song  was  one  of  the  most  conmion  sounds  of 
the  forest,  and  is  described  in  MCreary's  notes  as  ttee  fxce-tsee-tsce. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  pair  of  Golden -crowned  Kinglets  were  seen  July 
II  with  food  in  their  month  and  giving  every  indication  that  they  had 
young  near.  July  7  a  pair  was  seen  building  a  nest  in  a  tall  spruce. 
The  hirrfu  were  gathering  the  moss  from  the  ground  for  nesting  material. 
The  nest  was  placed  about  25  feet  from  the  ground  and  was  composed 
of  green  mosses  partially  lined  with  a  white  down-like  substance.  The 
site  chosen  was  near  the  top  of  a  small  rocky  hill  where  the  forest  was 
not  very  dense.  The  nest  was  nearly  finished  and  was  suspended  from 
two  limbs  near  the  trunk  of  the  tree.  When  next  examined.  July  21,  it 
oontained  eight  eggs.  It  was  now  composed  of  green  ground  moss, 
together  with  the  long  gray  strands  of  the  tree  lichen,  and  was  lined  with 
fur  from  the  Northern  Hare.  Its  dimensions  were  four  inches  deep,  and 
4  inches  in  diameter,  with  a  circular  oi>ening  li/>  inches  in  diameter. 
In  the  balsam-spruce  forest  near  camp  we  found  a  nest  containing  0 
yonng  August  10,  The  structure  was  placed  about  thirty  feet  from  the 
ground  and  five  feet  from  the  top  of  a  tall,  slender  sprnce.  Both  par- 
ents were  carrying  small  moths  and  other  insects  to  the  young.  This 
was  a  late  nest,  as  yonng  Kinglets  had  been  seen  early  ii^  July.  The 
nest  was  susi)ended  from  a  couple  of  small  limlw,  was  composed  of  gray 
lichen  and  green  moss,  lined  with  Northern  Hare  fur,  and  was  con- 
siderably larger  than  the  nest  previously  described,  the  outside  depth 
being  about  6  inches. 

107.  Regulus   ralmdala    (74ft).     Rnby-crowned   Kinglet. 

Range:  North  America  south  to  Guatemala,  north  to  the  Arctic 
coast,  breeding  chiefly  north  of  the  United  States,  and  in  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  the  Sierra  Nevada,  and  the  mountains  of  Ari7.ona. 

Htations:  Washington  Harbor,  borders  of  clearings  and  forest,  I,  '04. 
II,  '04. 

Jligrations :    September  5  to  13. 

The  Rnby-crowned  Kinglet  was  rather  rare,  especially  if  compared 
with  its  abundant  relative,  the  Golden-crowned.  A  few  were  observed 
migrating  on  September  5,  Both  males  and  females  were  fonnd  in  the 
little  llock  which  passed  slowly  down  the  river,  feeding  on  the  insects 
about  the  alder  bushes;  small  flocks.  i)erhai)s  only  familie.'^,  as  they  seldom 
numbered  more  than  five  or  six,  were  seen  on  the  7th,  Sth  and  9th.  The 
birds  were  found  again  on  the  12th.  but  this  time  they  were  much  more 
common,  and  considerable  flocks  numbering  twenty-five  or  thirty  were 
seen.    Only  a  few  were  seen  on  the  15th,  the  last  day  they  were  observed. 

108.  Hyincichla  fiisrescetis  (756).    Wilson's  Thnish. 

Range:  Kastem  United  States  to  the  Plains,  north  to  Manitoba, 
Ontario,  Anticosti,  and  Newfoundland.  Breeds  from  northern  New 
Jersey  and  the  northern  part  of  the  Lake  States  northward;  winters 
sparingly  in  Florida,  but  chiefly  south  of  the  United  States. 


3y  Google 


384  MICHIGAN   SURVET,   1908. 

StatioDB:     Kock  Harbor,  Spruce  and  Balaam  Forest,  I,  2-3;  Spliag- 
num  and  Spruce  Bog,  st.  I,  6 ;  Along  Benson  Brook,  II. 
1.   II.  4.   Ill,  3.   IV,  7. 
Biskowit  Bay,  V,  4;  Partial  Clearing,  II,  1, 
Washington  Harbor,  OlearingB,  I,  'Oi;  Forest,  II,  '04. 
Migration:    August  24;  September  14. 

The  Wilson's  Thrush  was  very  common  on  nearly  all  parts  of  the 
ialaud,  living  in  the  balsam  forests.  This  bird  was  first  seen  .July  6 
and  was  common  throughout  July  and  August.  At  Hock  Harbor  it  was 
observed  in  all  the  balsam-spruce  forests  and  was  often  seen  along 
Benson  Brook  (II,  1)  at  McCargoe  Cove  (II,  4)  and  on  the  rock  ridges 
near  Sargent  Lake  (II,  3).  They  were  also  found  among  the  bircbes  and 
balsams  at  the  west  end  of  Rock  Harbor  (III,  3),  It  was  oceaBJonaliy 
seen  in  the  birch  forest  near  the  bead  of  Tobin  Harbor  (IV,  7)  and  at 
Siskowit  Bay,  V,  4. 

109.  Hylocichla  aliciae   (757).     Gray-cheeked  Thrush. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America,  west  to  the  Plains,  Alaska,  and  east- 
em  Siberia,  north  to  the  Arctic  coast,  south,  in  winter,  to  Costa  Bica. 
Breeds  chiefly  north  of  the  United  Stafes. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor.     Clearings,  I,  '04.  X,  '04. 

Migration :    September  5,  12  to  21  when  observations  closed. 

The  first  record  was  a  specimen  found  dead  at  Washington  Harbor  on 
September  5.  (X,  '04).  This  was  at  the  close  of  a  heavy  gale  lasting 
since  the  first,  and  the  bird  had  flown  against  a  lighted  window  during 
the  night  previous.  Many  other  species  were  killed  at  this  same  place  dur- 
ing this  storm,  the  lighted  windows  proving  a  much  more  fatal  place 
daring  storms  and  on  cloudy  nights  than  during  clear  weather,  probably 
because  the  birds  fly  lower  on  such  nights.  This  specimen  was  killed  on 
the  north  side  of  a  pavilion.  No  others  were  seen  until  September  12, 
when  in  company  with  thousands  of  other  migrants,  it  was  very  abun- 
dant in  the  clearings. 

Large  flocks  were  seen  every  day  thronghout  the  remainder  of  my  stay, 
the  border  of  clearings  and  the  roadways  being  the  places  where  they 
were  the  most  abundant. 

110.  ByJocichIa  vstulata  sKainsoni   (738a).     Olive-backed  Thrush, 
Range:    Eastern  North  America  and  westward  to  the  Upper  Columbia 

River  and  East  Humbolt  Mountains,  straggling  to  the  Pacific  coast. 
Southward  in  winter  to  Cnba,  Guatemala,  Nicaragua,  Columbia,  Ecua- 
dor, and  Peru.  Casual  in  Bermuda.  Breeds  in  the  northern  Alleghanies, 
the  Catskillg,  the  mountainous  pai*ts  of  southern  New  England,  southern 
Sierra  Nevada,  and  northward. 

Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  Beach  at  Rock  Harbor,  I,  1;  Spruce    and 
Balsam  Forest,  I,  2-3. 
Partial  clearing,  I,  1,  II,  1;  Partial  clearing  along  Ben- 
son Brook,  II.  1;  Rock  Ridge  clearings,  II,  3. 
Siskowit  Bay,  Forest,  V,  4. 

Washington  Harbor,  Clearings,  I,  '04;  Forest.  II.  '04. 
Breeding:    July  8  nest  with  3  young.    August  3,  two  young  just  able 
to  fly. 

Migration:     From  about  the  middle  of  August  to  September  17. 
The  Olive-backed  Thrush  was  a  common  breeder  throughout  the  island 


lyCoogle 


ECOLOGY  OF  ISLE  ROYALE.  386 

and  was  one  of  the  most  abiindaiit  thrushes  daring  migration.  The 
dense  heavily  shaded  forest  offered  the  most  favorable  conditions  and 
except  dnring  migration  it  was  seldom  found  in  any  other  location. 
The  damp  places  bordering  streams  were  a  favorite  resort,  the  birds 
being  usnalty  found  on  the  lower  border  of  the  balsam  and  spruce  or 
among  the  decaying  leaves  and  mbbish  at  their  bases.  Owing  to  the 
dense  shade  the  lowest  branches  usually  died  and  dropped  off,  so  for  a 
height  of  three  to  five  feet  it  was  relatively  open.  It  was  this  rather 
open,  yet  heavily  shaded  condition  which  seemed  to  be  best  suited  to 
these  thrushes  during  the  breeding  season.  They  were  also  found  in 
dense  alder  thickets  and  resorted  to  the  border  of  the  woods  and  the 
roadside  during  the  migration. 

Breeding  Notes :  On  July  8  an  Olive-backed  Thrush's  nest  was  found 
in  the  balsam-spruce  forest  at  Rock  Harbor  (I,  3).  The  nest  waa 
situated  on  a  horizontal  spruce  limb  about  five  feet  from  the  ground. 
The  tree  stood  at  the  edge  of  a  small  rocky  opening.  It  was  placed 
about  four  feet  from  the  tree  trunk  and  was  quite  conspicuous.  The 
nest  was  composed  principally  of  dead  grasses  with  moss  and  the  long 
thread-like  tree  lichens  woven  in.  Rootlets  and  leaves  formed  the  lining. 
Three  very  young  birds  were  found.  Only  one  adult  was  seen  and  this 
one  proved  very  ehy,  refusing  to  return  to  her  young  while  being  watched. 
During  the  forenoon  the  sunlight  fell  directly  upon  this  nest,  so  exposed 
was  its  position  at  the  edge  of  the  rocky  clearing,  but  in  the  afternoon 
it  was  shielded  by  a  high  wall  of  rocks  about  twenty  feet  distant. 

On  August  3  a  female  Olive-backed  Thrush  was  found  accompanied 
by  two  young  just  able  to  fly.  They  were  feeding  in  a  thicket  of  maple 
and  mountain  ash  at  the  edge  of  a  small  clearing  on  one  of  the  islands 
in  Siskowit  Bay. 

111.  Bylocichla  guttata  pallaaii    (759b).     Hermit  Thrush. 
Range:     Eastern  Korth  America,   breeding  from  the  northern    Alle- 

ghanies,  the  mountainous  parts  of  southern  New  England,  southern  New 
York,  and  northern  Michigan,  etc.,  northward  and  wintering  from  the 
northern  states  southward. 

(Stations:     Rock  Harbor,  Balsam-spruce  Forest,  I,  3. 
Siakowit  Hay,  Balsam  Birch  Forest,  V,  4. 
Washington  Harbor,  borders  of  clearings,   I,   '04;  Forest 
near  river,  II,  '04. 

Breeding:     A  young  bird  was  taken  July  7. 

Migration:     August  22;  September  14. 

The  Hermit  Thrush  probably  breeds  throughout  the  islands  in  suitable 
localities.  No  nests  were  found,  but  the  immatnre  specimen  taken  July 
7  is  probably  a  breeding  record,  as  none  of  these  birds  were  observed 
migrating  until  August  22,  They  were  never  abundant,  but  during 
part  of  the  period  were  nearly  as  common  as  the  Olive-Backed.  The 
dense  clumps  of  mountain  maple  were  the  favorite  habitat. 

112.  Mcrula  mignitor'ta  (701).    American  Robin. 

Range:  Eastern  North  America  to  the  Rocky  Mountains,  including 
eastern  Mexico  and  Alaska.  Breeds  from  Virginia  and  Kansas  north- 
ward to  the  Arctic  coast;  winters  from  southern  Canada  and  the  north- 
ern states  (irregularly)  southward. 


3y  Google 


380  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

Stntifins:     Rock  Hnrbor,  Rock  Ridge  riearing.  II,  3. 

Washington   Hartor,   Clearings,   I.   '04;   Oiwn  Forest,  II, 
'04;  X,  '04. 

Breeding:     July  11,  nest  with  setting  bird. 

Migration :  September  G  to  21  on.  The  residents  reported  large  flocks 
in  October. 

This  bird  is  rather  rnre,  considering  the  island  as  a  whole,  but  occurs 
in  limited  nmnberK  wherever  favorable  conditions  exist.  The  clearings, 
Isoth  nutnral  and  artiflcial,  at  Rock  Harbor  afforded  suitable  habitats, 
and  at  this  place  most  of  the  Robins  were  found.  At  Siskowit  they  were 
reiwrted  by  the  lighthouse  keejier  as  occasionally  nesting  on  Menagerie 
Island  and  at  the  large  clearing  near  the  end  of  the  bay  (VIT,  '04)  a 
few  were  obser>'ed  September  !)  and  10.  The.'ie  latter  were  probably 
migrating.  They  were  regular  nesters  at  Washington  Harbor,  the  clear- 
ings and  other  changes  brought  about  by  the  agency  of  man,  furnishing 
conditions  better  suited  to  their  needs  than  the  balsam-spruce  forest 
which  covered  the  island.  Our  observations  at  this  latter  point  were  so 
late  in  the  season  tliat  no  nests  or  young  birds  were  found,  bnt  the  rein- 
dent  at  the  club-house  (I,  '04)  and  also  on  Washington  Island  (X,  04)  re- 
ported that  the  birds  nested  at  both  places  during  the  latter  part  of 
June.  Only  scattered  individuals  were  observed  at  the  club-house  until 
September  G,    when  the  real  migratory  movement  commenced. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  nest  with  the  female  settinf;  upon  it  was  found 
July  11.  It  was  situated  in  a  small  birch  tree  on  the  edge  of  a  clearing 
on  one  of  the  rock  ridges  along  the  trail  to  McOargoe  Cove  (II,  3).  The 
nest  was  placed  about  fifteen  feet  from  the  ground.  Several  pairs  of 
these  birds  were  observed  at  similar  locations  and  probably  nested 
wherever  found. 

113.     fiialia  sialig  (700).    Blue  Bird. 

Range:  Eastern  United  States  to  the  eastern  base  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  north  to  Manitoba,  Ontario  and  Kova  Scotia,  south  in  winter 
from  the  middle  states  to  the  Gulf  States  and  Cuba. 

Stations:     Washington  Harbor,  clearings  and  burned  area,  I,  '04. 

Breeding:     Found  near  nest  August  IS. 

Migrating:    August  22  to  September  12. 

The  Blue  Bird  is  a  rare  summer  resident  on  the  island.  Kone  of  this 
species  were  observed  during  our  stay  on  the  island  the  year  previous, 
and  the  few  families  which  came  to  the  clearing  at  Washington  Harbor 
were  the  only  ones  observed  throughout  this  season. 

Breeding  Notes:  A  nest  of  this  bird  was  found  in  a  birch  stub  near 
the  edge  of  the  third  clearing.  It  was  located  in  a  Downy  Woodpecker's 
hole  about  fifteen  feet  above  the  ground.  On  this  date,  August  18,  the 
young  bad  left  the  nest,  but  still  kept  in  its  immediate  vicinity. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


BCOLOaY  OF   ISLE   HOTALE. 


NOTES  ON  ISLE  KOYALE  MAMMALS  AND  THEIR  ECOLOGICAL 
RELATIONS. 

BY    DR.   CHAR.   C.    ADAMS. 

/.     Introduction. 

The  following  notes  on  the  mammals  should  be  considered  supple- 
mentary to  those  published  concerning  the  collections  made  by  the 
Museum  party  during  i9U4.'  The  specimens  were  IaiT;ely  collected  by 
N.  A.  Wood  and  Max  M.  Peet,  although  others  were  taken  by  Dr.  R,  A. 
Brown,  O.  M'Creary  and  W.  P.  Holt.  Unfortunately  the  ecological 
relations  of  the  mammals  conld  not  receive  the  attention  in  the  field 
which  their  importance  deserved. 

For  the  determination  of  all  doubtful  specimens  we  are  indebted  to: 
Dr.  C.  Hart  Merriam,  Chief  of  the  Biological  Survey  of  the  TI.  S.  De- 
partment of  Agriculture;  to  Mr.  W.  H,  Osgood  and  Mr.  E,  W,  Nelson 
of  the  same  survey;  and  to  Dr.  Glover  M.  Allen,  of  the  Boston  Society 
of  Natural  History,  for  the  determination  of  certain  bats. 

In  the  references  to  the  literature,  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  cite 
all  authorities  for  the  ecological  notes  or  those  of  geographic  range, 
but  euough  are  given  to  furnish  an  index  to  such  literature  as  will  be 
of  special  interest  to  the  Michigan  student. 

Although  Isle  Royale  is  an  almost  uninhabited  region,  except  for  the 
summer  Tisitors,  yet  its  original  condition  has  been  modified  in  several 
important  respects.  Thus  forest  fires  have  at  various  times  swept  over 
large  areas  of  the  eastern  half  of  the  island,  and  trappers  have  extermi- 
nated the  beaver  and  perhaps  other  species. 

The  location  of  the  old  trading  po^ts  is  of  interest  because  of  their 
relation  to  mammal  remains.  Rwh  as  antlers,  which  have  been,  and 
may  be  again  found.  Dr.  Lane  ('98,  p.  3)  cites  the  location  of  several 
of  these  posts  and  others  are  given  on  the  U.  8.  Land  Office  map  by 
Ives;  these  different  posts  were  located  as  follows: 

1.  Near  Washington  Harbor,  Sec.  2,  T.  6.3  N.,  R.  39  W.  American 
Fur  Co. 

2.  Head  of  Siskowit  Bay.  Sec.  2,  T.  63  N.,  R.  37  W.  American  Fur 
Co.     Trading  post  and  fisherv. 

3.  On  south  shore  of  Siskowit  Bay,  Sec.  35,  T.  64  N.,  R.  37  W. 
American  Fur  Co.     Trading  post  and  flsherv. 

4^     Near  Hay  Bay,  Sec.  24,  T.  64  N.,  R.  37  W.     Hudson  Bay  Co. 

5.  On  the  north  shore  of  Fish  Island.  Sec.  35,  T.  67  N.,  R.  34  W. 
American  Fur  Co.    Trading  and  fishing  post. 

6.  Near  Card  Point,     (cf.  Lane,  '98.  p.  3.) 

It  would  be  of  considerable  interest  if  the  records  of  the  fur  com- 
panies could   be  examined  for  information  bearing  upon  the  original 

•  An  Ecological  Survey  in  Northern  MEchlgcin,  1906.  pp.  [31-133.  /  -  T 

51  l.,*^.OOglC 


390  MICHIGAN   SUBVBT,  1908. 

mammal  fauna  of  the  island.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  the  Otter,  Lutra 
hiidsonica  hudsonUn  (Desm.),  was  a  member  of  this  fauna;  it  woujd 
be  more  surprising  if  it  were  not.  Near  the  east  end  of  Todd  Harbor 
there  is  an  Otter  Lake,  hut  it  is  very  ditScult  to  determine  how  much 
reliability  can  be  put  on  such  place  names,  as  evidence  of  the  former 
occurrence  of  animals.  The  moBt  notorious  case  in  Michigan  is  that 
of  the  Wolverine  (which  may  also  have  been  a  resident  t>f  Isle  Royale), 
where  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  Michigan  is  called  the  "Wolverine" 
State  and  there  are  such  place  names,  yet  no  undoubted  records  of  the 
occurrence  of  this  animal  are  known,  (cf.  An  Ecological  Survey 
of  the  Porcupine  Mountains  and  Isle  Bojale,  p.  131.)  In  the  present 
connection  it  is  therefore  of  interest  to  note  that  there  are  several 
place  names  about  the  Isle  Royale  archipelago  which  have  evidently 
been  derived  from  the  fauna,  of  which  at  least  one  member  has  become 
extinct.  Reft^rence  is  made  to  such  names  as  Beaver  and  Caribou 
Islands  and  to  Beaver  Lake  near  the  east  end  of  Todd  Harbor.  Other 
animal  place  names  worth  meitioning  in  this  connection  are  the  fol- 
lowing: Fish  (island),  Pickerel  (cove).  Angleworm  and  Cbicken-bone 
(lakes, .  descriptive  of  their  form).  Hawk  and  Gull  (islands).  The 
abundance  of  pickerel,  hawks  end  gulls  upon  Isle  Royale  make  such 
names  quite  appropriate. 

As  almost  nothing  of  a  general  character  has  been  written  on  the 
mammals  of  Michigan,  it  has  been  thought  desirable  to  depart  from  the 
usual  form  of  an  annotated  list  and  include  such  brief  ecological  notes 
as  could  be  secured  from  available  literature,  while  the  geograiAic 
data  are  intended  to  orient  each  species  geographically. 

The  following  is,  so  far  as  known,  a  complete  list  of  the  mammals 
recorded  from  Isle  Royale: 

1.  Rangifer  o«r»6oM  (Qmelin).    Woodland  Caribou. 

2.  dciunis  hudsontGHs  (Erx.).     Hudson  Bay  Red  Squirrel. 

3.  Castor  canaden«i8  Kuhl.    Northeastern  Beaver. 

4.  Peromyscvs  canadensis  umbrinmt  (Miller).     Isle  Royale  White- 

footed  Mouse. 

5.  Evotomys  gapperi   (Vigors).     Common  Red-backed  Mouse. 

6.  FiJ}er  sibethicvs  (Linn.).     Muskrat. 

7.  Lepiia  anieticanus   (Erx.).     Hudson  Bay  Varying  Hare. 

8.  Lj/na:  canadensis   (Kerr).     Canada  Lynx. 

0.  Mustela  americana   (Turton).     Eastern  Marten. 

10.  Putoriua  vison  (Schreber),    Mink. 

11.  Putorius  cicogtiani  (Bonap.).     Small  Brown  Weasel. 

12.  Putorius  noveboracensis    (Emmons).     New  York  Weasel. 

13.  Myotis  suJ>uiatU8  (Say).     Say's  Brown  Bat. 

14.  Myotis  lucifugus  (Le  Conte).    Le  Conte's  Brown  Bat. 

15.  Vespertilio   fuseus    (BeauT.).     Brown  Bat. 

2.    Majnmal  Successions. 

While  it  was  not  possible  to  make  a  detailed  study  of  the  ecological 
distributioH  of  the  mammals  yet  a  few  relations  seem  evident  which  may 
prove  suggestive  to  others.  The  succession  of  v^etation  has  long  been 
recognized,  as  it  was  well  known  that  burned  forest  lands  will  in  time 
become  invaded  by  herbaceous  plants,  later  by  shrubs,  and  Anally  by 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLK    ROYALE.  391 

a  forest.  Yet  the  fact  that  there  must  be  Bimilar  animal  sucoessions 
'  has  attracted  but  little  Httention  and,  so  far  as  known  to  the  writer, 
no  definite  attempt  has  even  been  made  to  determine  mammal  9uccen- 
aions,  much  less  to  recognize  the  need  of  formulating  itw  laws.  Sac- 
ressions  of  v^^etation  initiated  by  man  were  recognised  long  before 
tbose  in  nature,  but  it  seems  that  the  students  of  animals  have  not  only 
neglected  "natural"  eucceseionB  but  also  even  tlioae  influenced  by  man. 
A  priori  no  one  can  doubt  but  that  there  must  be  mammal  successions 
correlated  with  environmental  changes  upon  which  mammals  are  de- 
pendent. To  resolve  such  a  problem  as  this  demands  more  than  a 
recognition  of  the  species  involved  and  needs  a  knowledge  of  their 
life  history,  habits  and  their  environmental  relations.  On  account  of 
the  preliminary  character  of  this  work  only  a  few  suggestions  will  be 
attempted  at  this  place. 

As  the  level  of  the  Glacial  and  post-Glacial  antecedents  of  Lake  Su- 
perior were  lowered.  Isle  Boyale  began  a  new  biotic  cycle;  from  a  reef 
in  the  lake  it  became  transformed  into  an  island.  But  the  history  of 
the  island  even  prior  to  its  emergence  must  be  considered  because  the 
ppe-Glacial  topography  and  the  overriding  ice  both  left  n  recwd  of  their 
influence  upon  its  surface  in  the  form  of  parallel  ridges  and  depressions. 
Thus  the  Isle  inherited  from  the  past  certain  characters  which  are 
conspicuous  features  of  the  animal  environment  even  today.  These 
irregularities  of  the  surface  produced  rocky  flats  and  ridges,  or  rock 
bound  basins,  which  in  all  probability  were  thoroughly  wave  washed 
and  cleared  of  soil  as  the  waves  fell  from  them.  The  inheritance  of 
these  depressions,  rock  surfaces  and  ridges,  allows  ua  to  consider  two 
sets  of  original  conditions.  That  of  the  depressions  with  their  lakes, 
ponds  and  swamps,  and  that  of  the  ridges  or  rock  surfaces  with  open- 
ings or  "rock  clearings."  The  first  will  be  called  the  Lake-Pond- 
Swamp  series. 

1.  Lake-Pond-Swamp  Series. — From  the  large  lakes  upon  the  island 
all  gradations  of  conditions  are  found  leading  to  the  forested  swamps. 
The  shore  line  of  the  island  itself  should  also  be  mentioned  in  thjis 
connection  as  its  conditions  and  mammal  fanna  in  protected  parts  most 
be  much  like  that  of  the  larger  lakes  upon  the  island.  To  these  mar- 
ginal conditions  must  be  related  the  Muskrat.  Mink,  and  perhaps  the 
Otter  and  the  Beaver.  All  of  these  animals  will  traverse  the  open  water 
but  are  more  truly  amphibious  or  frequenters  of  the  margin.  The  dryer 
shrub  or  Cassandra  zone  is  likely  to  be  invaded  by  Hares,  as  is  clearly 
shown  hy  their  numerous  run-ways,  while  wandering  Lynx,  Mink  and 
Weasels  may  also  be  expected  here  in  search  of  their  food,  while  the 
open  area  over  the  water  and  marsh  are  likely  to  furnish  a  flight  tfrea 
for  bats.  It  should  not  be  inferred,  however,  that  these  mammals  do 
not  occur  in  other  conditions,  but  rather  that  they  are  representative 
or  dominant  forms  in  such  an  environment. 

The  dynamical  relations  of  snch  conditions  should  be  considered 
for  their  bearing  upon  the  laws  of  environmental  changes.  With  the 
falling  of  the  Leke  level  the  beach  zone  mores  downward  and  is  invaded 
by  II  land  flora  and  fauna.  This  same  change  of  level,  supplemented  by 
inwash,  vegetable  and  animal  debris,  and  possibly  the  down-cutting 
of  outlets  tends  to  drain  basins  and  allow  the  encroachment  of  the  open 


302  MICHIGAN   SURVET.   1S08. 

marginal  zone  upon  the  open  or  deeper  water.  At  the  same  time  this 
innr^nal  open  zone,  as  a  solid  substratum  develops,  tends  to  become  in- 
vaded by  Tamni'ack,  Black  Spruoe  and  Arbor  Vitae,  and  still  later  by  the 
balsam  and  white  spruce  forest.  But  while  attention  has  only  been 
directed  to  the  conspicuous  forest  covei-,  it  should  be  remembered  that 
tiie  entire  environment,  the  water,  soil,  ground  cover,  light  relations, 
animal  foods,  etc.,  are  also  undergoing  a  transformation. 

Correlated  with  the  invasion  of  the  open  swamp  by  the  forest  is  the  ar- 
rival of  the  Bed  Squirrel ;  while  as  the  forest  becomes  denser  and  a  shade 
develops  under  the  trees  conditions  are  produced  which  are  favorable 
f.ri-  tiie  Red-backed  ^fouse.  These  forested  swamps  are  likely  to  have 
a  poor  ground  fauna,  as  the  forms  likely  to  frequent  the  open  are 
greatly  reduced  in  numbers  or  excluded,  while  the  wet  ground  tends 
to  exclude  many  forms  of  the  balsam  forest.  But  as  these  forested 
swamps  become  dryer,  the  balsam  and  white  spruce  tend  to  invade 
them  and  thus  one  is  able  to  see  all  stages  of  transition,  from  the  open 
water  to  that  of  the  balsam-spruce  forest.  With  regard  to  the  mammal 
fauna,  these  relations  may  be  briefly  summed  up  as  follows:  from  tbe 
open  water  to  the  balsam-spruce  forest  tliere  is  a  relatively  simple 
change,  from  the  dominance  of  tlie  aquatic  and  marsh  types  (supple- 
mented by  the  bats)  to  land  forms  which  are  terrestrial,  as  the  weasels, 
terrestrial  and  arboreal,  as  the  Lynx,  and  arboreal  as  the  Marten,  and 
aerial  as  the  bats  which  frequent  the  margins. 

fiCt  HB  now  consider  the  second  series,  which  begins  with  land  rather 
th;in  open  water,  and  trace  its  general  succession. 

2.  The  Land.  Series.— As  the  lake  level  fell  from  the  island,  rock 
surfaces  were  esiH>sed  which  surrounded  the  wet  and  damp  depres-  * 
sions.  In  ail  probability  these  surfaces  had  hut  little  soil,  like  th« 
exposed  wave-washed  beaches  of  today.  These  flat  rock  surfaces  and 
ridges  have  probably  had  quite  different  histories  or  successions  from 
that  of  the  depressions,  although  both  were  originally  open,  yet  this 
was  due  to  very  different  causes;  in  the  case  of  the  lake  this  may  have 
l>een  because  a  substratum  was  lacking,  while  on  the  rock  surface  there 
was  no  soil  and  hence  the  openings  or  "rock  clearings."  Thus  hare 
or  lichen  covered  rocks  offer  little  that  is  attractive  to  mammals, 
although  bats  might  take  shelter  here  during  the  day  under  loose 
rocks,  and  paitrol  the  open  at  night;  yet  it  is  not  nntil  there  has  been 
an  accumulation  of  soil  in  the  crevices,  so  that  the  Bearberry,  Pennayl- 
\ania  Cherry,  Cladonia  or  scattered  Jack  Pines  get  a  foothold,  that  the 
Varying  Hare,  Red  Squirrel  and  CarilK>u  can  And  their  food  here.  In 
turn  comes  tbe  Lynx,  Weasels  and  perhaps  the  Marten  in  search  of 
the  vegetarians.  Here  again  the  Bats,  Red  Kquirrel.  Hare  and 
Lynx  are  pioneer  mammals  invading  open  unforested  areas.  As  the 
coil  increases  in  depth  on  such  surfaces,  a  bordering  zone  of  Aspen 
and  Birch  spi-eads  over  the  surfaces  and  slopes  in  a  manner  similar 
to  the  encroachment  of  the  sedge  zone  upon  the  open  water  of  a  lake, 
and  tends  to  restrict  the  open  areas.  These  in  turn  are  followed  hy  a 
zone  of  Balsam  and  White  Spruce,  so  that  in  time  these  surfaces  tend 
to  l)ecomo  completely  forested,  just  as  the  depressions  tend  to  have  a 
similar  fate.  With  these  forests  comes  the  exclusion  of  the  bats,  while 
the  Red  Squirrels  increase,  and  the  Hare  tends  to  fi-equent  the  forest 


ECOLOGT   OF    ISLE   ROTALE.  3r3 

margins,  where  many  go  to  feed  in  the  openiogB  ot  duek.  With  the' 
dryer  subBtratiun  and  more  diversified  vegetation  the  conditioDB  are 
evidently  more  favorable  for  the  White-footed  Mouse,  which  with  the 
Squirrels  and  HareB  become  dominant  forms,  and  prove  attractive  to 
WeaeelB,  Marten  and  Lynx.  These  mammalB  are  the  repreeentative 
balsam-spnice  forest  types;  and  it  is  not  improbable  that  if  Buch  a 
forest  becomes  tranaformed  into  a  mapie-yeliow  bii-ch  ty|)e,  the  char- 
acter of  the  mammals  but  little  changed,  with  the  possible  exception  of 
tlie  relative  abundance  of  some  Hi»<riefi. 

Briefly  summed  up,  the  peneral  succession  of  mammal  typep — from  the 
"rock  clearing"  to  the  balsam-white  spruce  or  hardwood  forest — is  thus 
Been  to  be  a  change  from  the  dominance  of  the  forma  frequenting  the 
open  to  those  of  the  forest.  The  final  result  of  both  the  lake  and  the 
land  aeries  ia  thus  seen  to  be  practically  the  same — both  lead  to  the 
dominance  of  the  forest  ty[)e«,  Such  observatiooR  and  influences,  which 
attempt  to  correlate  environmental  changes  with  the  habit  and  habitat 
relations  of  the  mammalc,  point  to  a  general  couchiaion  which  should 
prove  useful  in  field  work:  that  each  habitat,  swamp,  conifer  or  hard- 
wood forest,  etc.  should  not  only  be  considered  as  a  unit  of  environment, 
but  eien  more — as  parts  of  a  scries  of  changes  or  stages  ia  the  contin- 
iifnis  (li'velopmcnt  of  the  animal  enrironment.  Standing  upon  the  top 
of  the  Greenstone  Bange,  one  may  see  this  entire  series  of  conditions, 
varied,  to  be  snre,  and  confusing  to  many,  yet  in  many  ways  rtlatively 
simple  and  free  from  chaos. 

3.    Faiiital  Affinities  and  Migratifms. 

1.  The  Geographic  Affinitirs  of  the  Fauna.— Af^  determined  by  the 
present  ge<^raphic  range  of  the  species  and  varieties  of  mammals  found 
on  Isle  Royale,  the  ftiuna  is  emphatically  of  the  northeastern  hiotic  tyjie 
(Adams,  '05,  p.  3.S).  This  is  the  dominant  fauna  of  the  region  from 
Labrador  westward.  Iietween  Hudson  Itay  and  Lake  Superior  into  the 
Mackenzie  basin,  and  only  enters  eastern  United  States  to  a  limited  de 
gree,  except  on  mountains.  The  l■e]»re«t^ntative  forms  are:  Caribou,  Bed 
Squirrel,  Beaver  (typical  form).  White-footed  Mouse,  Bed-backed  Mouse. 
Hare,  Lynx,  Marten  and  the  Small  Brown  Weasel.  In  case  tlieae  forms 
range  westward  into  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  to  the  Pacific  Coast,  they 
are  represented  by  another  vai'iety.  except  in  the  case  of  the  l^ynx.  The 
Mnskrat,  Xew  York  Weasel,  Mink  (typical  form)  and  Say's  Bnnvn 
Bat  are  forms  ranging  far  into  southeastern  United  States,  some  reach- 
ing west  to  the  Rocky  Mountains  or  the  Pacific  Coast.  I*  Conte's 
Brown  Hat  and  the  Brown  Bat  have  such  extensive  ranges  to  the  south 
of  the  United  States  as  clearly  to  surest  a  dispersal  from  the  south. 

To  determine  close  faunal  affinities,  much  weight  must  be  given  to  the 
geographic  range  of  the  varieties  or  forms  whose  affinities  are  to  l>e  de- 
termined. In  a  region  whose  fauna  has  undergone  extensive  migrations, 
within  comparatively  recent  times,  as  in  the  case  of  glaciated  North 
.America,  many  allied  varieties  have  liad  a  ver>-  different  history  and  such 
forms  must  be  subordinated  In  the  faunal  comparison  to  those  that  have 
had  similar  histories.  For  this  reason  the  post-GlacinI  migrations  of 
the  fauna  of  eastern  North  America  make  the  north  and  soulh  rela- 
tions stronger  than  those  between  the  east  and  the  west  because  tif^Vfi 


394  MICHIQAN  SURTBT,  190S. 

is  a  closer  genetic  relationship  between  forms  along  the  fame  general 
migration  route  than  between  thoee  of  very  distinct  routes  and  histories. 

2,  Post-Olacial  Origin  of  the  Fauna. — The  geographic  afBoities  of 
the  mammal  fauna  of  Isle  Royale  have  been  shown  to  be  with  those  of  the 
region  north  of  Lake  Superior,  and  representative  of  the  coniferous 
forest  region  of  central  and  eastern  Canada.  There  now  remains  to  be 
considered  the  approximate  post-Olacial  geographic  origin  ot  this  north- 
em  fauna.  But  before  this  subject  can  he  understood,  special  attention 
should  be  dinn-ted  to  the  fact  that  an  extensive  barrier  in  the  form  of 
a  series  of  Glacial  and  post  Glacial  lakes  and  even  the  Champlain  Sea 
(cf.  Taylor,  '05,  pp.  10."!,  106  and  107)  stood  between  the  advancing  fauna 
from  the  south  and  Canada.  All  these  barriers  were  not  contempor- 
aneous, yet  some  of  them,  generally  several  extensive  ones,  have  been 
present  since  the  decline  of  the  Wisconsin  ice  sheet.  This  barrier  was 
only  interrupted,  as  far  as  many  mammals  have  been  concerned,  by 
narrow  streams,  such  as,  the  Saint  Clair,  Detroit,  Niagara  and  St. 
Lawrence  rivers.  Kven  these  must  have  retarded  many  forms,  except 
during  the  winter,  if  they  were  not  amphibious  or  flying  species.  The 
significance  of  this  barrier  seems  to  have  been  generally  overlotAed, 
but  a  moment's  reflection  will  show  its  important  influence  upon  the 
post-GIacial  origin  of  the  biota  of  eastern   Canada. 

On  account  of  the  presence  of  the  ice  sheet  on  both  sides  of  Hudson 
Bay,  and  its  longer  duration  at  the  Labradorian  center,  we  may  safely 
dismiss  the  question  of  the  fauna  under  consideration  as  being  of  imme- 
diate northern  origin.  On  the  other  hand  we  have  much  positive  infor- 
mation which  rfiows  that  there  were  renters  of  preservation  of  biotic 
types  south  of  tlie  ice  margin  in  the  United  States.  For  these  reasons 
our  problem  becomes  one  of  tracing  the  probable  northern  and  perhaps 
eastern  migration  routes  from  these  centers  of  preservation  to  the  region 
vacated  by  the  retreating  ice  sheet. 

Therefore,  keeping  in  mind  the  major  interruptions  of  the  water 
barrier  and  the  fannal  affinities  of  Canada  cast  of  the  Great  Plains,  it 
appears  that  the  major  routes  into  Canada  have  been,  in  the  east,  0|» 
the  Hudson  and  Champlain  valleys,  along  the  Appalachian  range  up  the 
Hudson  and  Mohawk  valleys  and  thence  around  both  ends  of  Lake 
Ontario — routes  for  the  coastal  and  Appalachian  types.  The  Ohio  val- 
ley types  invaded  Ontario  around  both  ends  of  Lake  Erie,  especially  some 
of  the  more  recent  southern  and  Mississippi  forms,  around  the  western 
end.  Perhaps  a  limited  number  of  western  forms  have  entered  Ontario 
through  the  Upper  Peninsula  of  Michigan  and  a  very  large  number  of 
Mississippi  valley,  and  to  a  lesRer  degree  western  types,  around  the 
western  end  of  Lake  Superior.  The  Mackenzie  basin  seems  to  have  beeu 
invaded  largely  up  the  Mississippi  and  down  the  Red  River  valleys,  the 
Plains  also  sending  their  quota.  These  routes  are  largely  shown  by  the 
affinities  of  the  present  biota  and  have  in  all  probability  functioned 
throughout  post-GIacial  times,  because  there  have  been  no  marked 
changes  in  the  major  routes,  with  the  exception  i>erhaps  of  the  drainage 
changes  which  have  influenced  the  freshwater  life.  With  such  general 
relations  in  mind,  we  are  in  a  position  to  consider  the  geographic  origin 
of  the  northern  Ontario  fauna. 

Tn  considering  the  post-GIacial  invasion    of   northern    Ontario    from 

I.,  Google 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE    ROTALE.  3C5 

the  Bonthem  centers  of  preservation,  it  is  erident  that  the  barren  ground 
types  must  have  traversed  this  region  en  route  to  the  northern  position 
which  they  now  occupy.  But  relicts  of  this  type  have  not  been  recognized 
among  the  mammals,  although  it  seems  very  probable  that  some  inverte- 
brates have  lingered.  Miller  ('97,  pp.  6-8)  evidently  considers  that  the 
exposed  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior,  shows  marked  Hudson  Bay  affin- 
ities, but  is  not  able  to  decide  whether  or  not  this  area  is  limited  to  the 
Lake  coast.  Of  the  Ave  mammals  which  he  lists  as  showing  these  north- 
em  affinities,  only  two,  the  Caribou  and  White-footed  Mouse,  occur  on 
Isle  Royale.  Miller  evidently  did  not  recognize  any.  barren  ground 
relicts  in  the  fauna,  yet  its  Hudsonian  affinities  may  belong,  in  part, 
to  this  class.  The  barren  ground  relicts,  when  present  in  the  coniferous 
forest  belt,  may  be  expected  to  occur  in  open  swamps,  talus  or  other 
open  rock  areas  or  habitats,  as  these  conditions  will  most  nearly  ap- 
proach those  of  the  open  barren  grounds. 

With  the  amelioration  of  the  glacial  climate,  the  barren  ground  forms 
were  replaced  by  an  invasion  of  the  stunted  tree  growth  and  its  asso- 
ciated fauna.  The  coniferous  forest  association,  in  all  probability,  in- 
vaded the  north  shore  region,  not  only  around  the  western  end  of  Lake 
Superior  but  also  from  the  east,  where  it  lingers  even  today  as  a  domi- 
nant type  upon  the  higher  mountains,  thus  preserving  a  continuous 
record  to  the  present  day;  while  to  the  westward  this  type  has  not  lin- 
gered so  far  to  the  south  because  of  the  absence  of  favorable  mountain 
habitats.  On  account  of  the  present  great  extent  of  this  bigtic  type  in 
the  east,  a  more  rapid  northward  extension  may  have  taken  place  there, 
but  the  mountainous  character  of  the  country,  the  various  water  harriers 
westward  to  Niagara,  and  possibly  the  longer  duration  of  the  ice  in  the 
northeast  may  have  retarded  this  advance,  so  that  a  relatively  more 
rapid  extension  took  place  from  Michigan  into  southwestern  Ontario 
and  around  the  western  end  of  Lake  Superior  (cf.  Taylor,  'OB,  p.  107, 
map).  It  therefore  seems  quite  probable  that  the  north  shore  region 
was  invaded  both  from  southern  Ontario  and  from  around  the  western 
end  of  Lake  Superior. 

Returning  now  to  the  immediate  origin  of  the  Isle  Royale  mammal 
fauna,  it  is  quite  evident  that  with  the  exception  of  the  bats,  this  fauna 
reached  the  island  from  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior.  There  is 
perhaps  another  possibility,  but  one  which  seems  highly  improbable, 
and  that  is,  that  the  island  was  stocked  from  the  south  shore  of  the 
Lake  at  that  time  during  post-Olacial  migrations,  when  it  contained 
a  more  boreal  type  of  fauna.  But  when  we  consider  the  fact  that  the 
Superior  basin  since  Glacial  times  has  had  much  the  same  general  form 
as  the  present  lake,  it  seems  probable  that  lake  currents  similar  to  those 
of  the  present  lake  existed,  and  under  such  circumstances  the  north 
shore  fauna,  especially  to  the  eastward,  would  be  favored.  The  ice 
bridge  between  the  island  and  the  north  shore  permits  direct  communi- 
cation with  that  shore  during  the  winter.  The  method  of  arrival  for 
various  mammals  must  of  course  remain  largely  conjectural,  but  the 
following  methods  seem  probable;  the  bats  by  direct  flight;  the  (Jaribou, 
Hare,  Lynx  and  Marten  probably  over  the  ice;  tlie  Hed-backed  and  White- 
footed  Mouse,  Red  Squirrel  and  perhaps  the  Weasels  by  means  of  drift- 
wood and  lake  currents;  the  aquatic  forms,  Muskrat,  Mink,  Beaver,  and 
perhaps  OttO",  by  swimming. 


MICHIGAN   SURVEY,  1908. 


^.     Annotated  Li«t. 


1.     Rangifcr  caribou  (ODielin).     Woodland  Caribou. 

Mauy  reports  are  in  circulation  concerning  tlie  occurrence  of  Caribon 
upon  Isle  Ro.vale,  and  yet  I  have  learned  of  but  two  records  in  the 
literature,  and  these  refer  only  to  antlers.  Baird  ('57,  p.  fi34)  figures, 
from  the  Smithsonian  Collection,  an  antler  from  an  adult  Caribou  from 
Isle  Royale  (No.  900),  and  Gillman  ('73,  p.  751)  gives  the  following 
information:  "During  a  recent  visit  (May,  1873)  to  Isle  Royale,  Mich- 
igan (Lake  Superior),  intereeting  evidence  of  the  former  presence  of 
the  Caribou  (Rangifer  caribou  Aud.  and^Bach,),  long  extinct  there, 
was  brought  to  my  observation.  I  have  now  in  my  poBsession  two  relics 
—the  greater  parts  of  the  horns  of  this  animal — which  were  picked  op 
at  different  points  on  the  island.  The  antlers  are  much  decayed,  one 
being  a  mere  shell,  and  besides,  they  had  been  gnawed  by  rodents. 
Such  specimens,  often  of  great  size,  are  frequently  discovered  of  late 
at  tiiis  isolated  place." 

Mr.  Gillman  has  recently  written  to  me  that  these  antlers  were  many 
yeare  ago  presented  to  Columbia  College.  But  upon  inquiry,  it  seems 
that  it  is  not  possible  now  to  find  them. 

Dr.  A.  C.  Lane,  State  Geologist  of  Michigan,  sends  me  the  following 
records  from  his  Isle  Royale  note  book:  "Note  book  115,  p.  72,  Septem- 
ber 25.  1895.     Forbes  found  a  Caribou  horn  2V2  feet  long." 

On  account  of  the  limited  information  on  this  subject  I  Was  tbere- 
fui-e  pleased  to  secure  the  following  observations  from  the  men  who 
had  only  recently  seen  the  live  animals  upon  the  island.  Two  trappers, 
Victor  Anderson  and  his  son,  John,  spent  the  winter  of  1903-1904  trap- 
ping upon  the  isle.  On  March  27,  1904,  John  Anderson  saw  two 
Caribou  at  Blake's  Point,  on  the  northeast  end  of  the  island,  and  on 
the  same  day  his  father  drove  two  Caribou,  on  the  ice,  from  the  head 
of  Rock  Harbor  eastward  to  the  outlet  of  the  Harbor  near  Middle 
Islands.  These  two  Caribou  were  very  tame,  so  that  Anderson,  who 
had  no  gun,  was  able  to  get  within  about  200  feet  of  them.  Anderson 
said  that  at  this  time  the  island  was  connected  with  the  mainland, 
on  the  north,  by  ice.  On  April  10,  1905,  Anderson,  his  son  and  several 
fishermen  saw  9  Caribou  on  the  ire  in  the  channel  near  their  fishing 
camp  on  Rock  Harbor  near  the  Lighthouse.  At  this  time  the  lake  was 
open  but  Rock  Harbor  was  still  frozen  over,  as  the  ice  remained  in 
the  harbor  for  some  little  time  after  the  ice  broke  up  in  the  lake.  These 
facts  clearly  indicate  that  Caribou  must  have  been  upon  the  island 
during  the  past  summer,  and  the  following  observation  tends  to  snb- 
stnntiate  this  inference.  On  September  9,  1905,  Michael  Bollinger,  an 
experienced  trapper,  and  Max  M.  I'eet,  of  this  expedition,  saw,  about 
four  miles  out  from  Washington  Club,  on  the  Oesor  trail  (III,  '04) 
a  small  bunch  of  low  maples  which  had  been  broken  down,  the  branches, 
bark  and  leaves  stripi>ed  off,  and  the  small  branches  eaten  away.  The 
work  was  fresh,  as  the  leaves  were  only  wilted,  and  the  exposeid  wood 
was  not  discolored.  Hollinger  was  confident  that  this  was  the  work 
v(  the  Caribou. 

The  following  information,  which  was  reported  to  me  by  Mr.  J.  H, 
l^fnlone.   Keei>er   of  the   Menagerie   Island   Light   on    Siskowit   Ray,  is 


ivCoogIc 


ECOLOQY  OF   ISLE   ROYALB.  •  397 

suggestive  for  ita  bearing  on  the  qucRtion  of  the  origin  of  the  Cariboo 
upon  the  Isle.  John  ErickHon  vat  fishing  through  the  ice,  about  5 
miles  out  from  Pigeon  Point,  Minn.,  and  at  one  time  naw  11  Cnrihoo 
OD  the  ice  in  the  direction  of  I»le  Royale.  Thin  clearly  aiif^ests  a  flatis- 
factory  method  by  means  of  which  these  animals  coaici  easily  reach  the 
island. 

Ecological  Notes. — According  to  Canton,  Caribou  frequent  marsh  and 
Bwamp  grounds,  a  characteristic  which  is  in  decided  harmony  with  the 
physical  conditions  of  the  area  it  inhabits.  It  is  adapted  to  these  con- 
ditions in  several  ways,  as  is  shown  not  only  in  its  feeding  upon  plant 
life  and  frequenting  damp  and  wet  places,  but  also  in  the  character  of 
its  feet.  Caton  ('77,  p.  90)  says:  "In  traveling  through  the  snows,  or 
soft  marshy  ground,  the  Caribou  throws  his  hind  feet  forward,  so  as  to 
bring  the  leg  into  something  of  a  horizontal  position,  spreads  wide  his 
claws,  and  broad  accessory  hoofs,  and  thus  presents  an  extraordinary 
bearing  surface  to  sustain  him  on  the  yielding  gronnd,  and  so  he  is 
enabled  to  shuffle  along  with  great  rapidity,  where  any  other  large  quad- 
ruped would  mire  in  a  bog,  or  become  absolutely  snowbound.  The  Rein- 
deer [Caribou]  alone  leaves  in  his  track  the  marks  of  all  four  of  his 
hoofs  belonging  to  each  hind  foot,  and  specimens  show  the  effects  of 
attrition  on  these  secondary  hoofs,  and  prove  that  they  serve  a  nsefnl 
purpose  in  the  economy  of  tlie  animal."  Rtill  another  adaptation  is  of 
interest.  During  winter,  the  frog  of  the  Caribou's  hoof  is  entirely  re- 
sorbed  (Elliot,  '02,  p.  2C8),  thus  producing  a  sharp  rimmed  concave  sur- 
face well  adapted  for  walking  upon  the  ice. 

In  additioB  to  the  swamp  plants  used  for  food,  the  branches  and 
leaves  of  trees  are  frequently  eaten,  but  the  characteristic  food  is  the 
"reindeer  lichen  or  moss"  (Cladonia).  This  lichen  is  very  abundant  on 
Isle  Royale  where  the  soil  is  too  shallow  and  physical  forces  too  severe 
for  most  other  plants  to  grow,  as  on  the  south  shore  of  the  island  (  V,  2) 
and  upon  the  ridges.  These  lichen  growths  are  very  chara4'ter- 
istic  of  the  area  over  which  the  Caribou  ranges  in  Northeastern  North 
America.  The  region  has  been  so  recently  glaciated  and  the  «oil  removed 
80  that  extensive  patches  of  these  lichens  occur  scattered  through  the  for- 
ests and  are  as  characteristic  of  the  region  as  are  its  swamjm  and  conifer- 
ous forests.  This  kind  of  food  is  therefore  of  general  occurrence  through- 
out its  geographic  range. 

The  female  Caribou  is  remarkable  in  the  possession  of  antlers,  a  char- 
acteristic in  the  deer  family,  as  a  rule,  of  males  only;  they  are,  however, 
much  smaller  in  size  than  those  of  the  male.  Caribou  antlers  are 
further  remarkable  for  their  variety  of  form,  the  antlers  from  the  same 
individual,  according  to  Caton  ('77,  p.  89),  having  as  little  in  common 
as  those  from  different  individuals.  The  old  males,  as  a  rule,  shed  their 
antlers  annually  before  the  last  of  l>eceniber,  but  the  young  males  retain 
them  longer,  the  yearlings  till  spring  and  the  females  still  later,  until 
after  the  young  are  bom. 

The  breeding  season,  according  to  MacFarlane  ('05,  pp.  679,  678) 
occurs  in  September  and  October,  and  the  young,  one  or  two,  are  bom 
the  following  spring. 

The  migration  habits  of  Caribou  are  of  considerable  interest  and  may 
have  an  important  bearing  upon  the  differentiation  of  the  Woodland  and 


398  •  MICHIGAN   SURTET,   IMS. 

Barren  Ground,  R.  arctii>u9  (Rich),  forms.  In  the  vicinity  of  York 
Factory  on  the  west  coast  of  Hndson  Bay,  the  Woodland  Caribou 
(Preble,  '02,  p.  41)  migrates  to  the  coast  in  the  spring  and  returns  in- 
land about  the  middle  of  October  and  during  November.  In  addition 
to  this  summer  seaward  migration  of  these  coastal  ones,  there  is  also 
a  summer  southward  movement  to  the  interior  (Geor^son,  '04,  p.  378). 
At  least  some  of  the  more  northern  Barren  Ground  Caribou  during  the 
summer  also  mij^rate  to  the  coast  near  Hudson  Bay  as  well  as  near 
the  mouth  of  the  Mackenzie  River  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  681),  and  inland, 
at  Reindeer  Lake,  Keewatin  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  684),  there  is  a  distinct 
northward  spring  migration  during  the  last  of  April  and  May,  and  a 
return  movement  during  late  October,  November  and  December.  The 
breeding  season  is  during  September  and  October,  and  as  this  period  is 
much  the  same  for  the  two  forms,  the  northward  migration  of  the  Barren 
Ground  Caribou  and  the  southward  migration  of  the  Woodland  Caribou, 
has  a  distinct  tendency  to  isolate  these  two  types  during  their  early 
fall  breeding  season;  a  result  which  in  time  would  certainly  influence 
their  speciilc  differentiation.  Similar  relations  in  the  past  may  be  one 
of  the  causes  for  the  differences  which  are  today  recognized.  MacFar 
lane  ('05,  p.  680)  states  that  the  two  forms  do  not  associate.  The 
seaward  migration  is  probably  limited  to  those  in  the  vicinity  of  tbe 
coast  and  does  not  influence  the  inland  forms  to  a  marked  degree.  These 
seasonal  migrations  are  very  sup^estive  of  the  influence  which  climate, 
and,  in  part,  tbe  resultant  habits,  may  have  upon  habit  and  specific 
differentiation. 

Geographic  Range. — The  Woodland  Caribou  ranges  northward,  in  for- 
ested regions,  from  I^brador,  Xova  Scotia,  and  Maine,  (formerly  north- 
ern New  Hampshire  and  Vermont),  on  the  east,  westward  through 
Quebec  and  Ontario  along  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior,  where 
Miller  reports  it  very  abundant,  (Isle  Royale)  Michigan;  northern 
Minnesota;  Manitoba;  Saskatchewan  (Cumberland  House)  to  Atha- 
basca, and  Great  Slave  Lake,  Mackenzie  (cf.  Grant,  '02,  p.  18). 

Aside  from  the  Isle  Royale  records,  the  only  other  record  of  the 
occurrence  of  Caribou  in  Michigan  is  that  given  in  Caton  ('77,  p.  87) 
whose  statement  is  as  follows:  "If  it  was  ever  abundant  south  of  Lake 
Superior,  where  it  was  found  when  the  copper  and  iron  mines  first  in- 
vited extensive  settlements  there,  the  fact  is  not  well  attested,  and  I 
cannot  learn  that  any  have  been  met  with  south  of  that  Lake  within 
the  la.st  twenty  years  or  more." 

Fossil  reindeer  remains  have  been  found  in  a  number  of  Pleistocene 
deposits,  far  to  the  south  of  their  present  range  (cf.  Hay,  '02,  p.  6861 
and  clearly  show  that  they  formerly  occurred  in  New  York,  New  Jersey, 
Pennsylvania,  Kentucky  and  Iowa.  The  extreme  southern  localities  may 
be  due  to  southern  winter  migrants.  It  is  not  improbable  that  among 
these  fossil  remains,  several  forms  occur,  as  even  today  the  ranges  of  the 
various  forms  are  not  sharply  defined,  and  as  our  knowledge  of  the  recent 
species  has  been  greatly  extended  in  i-eeent  years,  these  fossil  remains 
are  in  need  of  critical  study.  Fossil  Caribou  are  of  special  interest  on 
account  of  their  bearing  upon  the  Glacial  and  post-Glacial  dispersal  of 
these  animals.  These  facts  clearly  suggest  an  extensive  migration  from 
the  vicinity  of  the  glacial  border  northward  into  the  barren  grounds. 


ECOLOGY  OP    ISLE  ROYALB.  399 

As  the  Woodland  Cariboo,  even  in  its  migrations,  tends  to  reniaJD  near 
the  forests,  their  fossil  remains  may  furnish  valuable  suggestions  con- 
cerning the  southern  extension  of  forests  during  the  Ice  Age. 

2.  8civru8  hudsonicus  (Erx.).  Hudson  Bay  Red  Squirrel.  Tlie  Red 
Squirrels  were  exceedingly  abundant,  especially  in  the  coniferous  forests. 
The  Squirrels,  Hares,  White-footed  Mice  and  Lynx  are  the  repreeenta- 
tive  mammals  of  the  island.  The  most  conspicuous  as  one  walked 
through  the  forest  were  the  Squirrels,  whose  abundance  and  persistent 
barking  repeatedly  attracted  attention.  A  total  of  40  specimens  was 
secured  from  the  following  localities:  I,  1,  2,  3,  4;  II,  5;  V,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  I. 
'04.  They  were  seen  or  heard  at  or  near  the  following  additional  places: 
I,  5;  III,  2;  IV,  9;  V,  7;  I,  '04  and  II,  '04.  Only  a  few  of  the  details 
of  occurence  will  be  given.  Squirrels  were  abundant  in  the  forests  about 
the  Light-house  at  Bock  Harbor  (I,  3)  and  along  the  path  to  the  fixhing 
camp;  also  fairly  abundant  on  the  Jack  Pine  ridge  on  the  north  side  of 
Conglomerate  Bay  {I,  5),  and  in  the  woods  about  the  niai^n  of  the 
Sphagnum-spruce  bog  (I,  G).  They  also  occurred  in  the  hardwood 
forest  at  the  top  of  the  Greenstone  Range  (IV,  9),  near  the  head  of 
Tobin  Harbor.-  Along  the  Haytown  trail,  north  of  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  7), 
they  were  apparently  not  abundant,  in  fact  very  few  birds  or  mammals 
were  seen  along  this  trail,  and  the  forest  was  noticeably  silent  and  in 
marked  contrast  to  the  forest  at  other  places.  The  small  heaps  of 
bluish  cone  scales  of  the  Balsam  were  several  times  seen  marking  the 
place  where  a  squirrel  had  taken  its  meal.  Our  camp  at  Siskowit  Bay 
(V,  3)  was  surrounded  by  a  balsam-  spruce  forest,  which  fact  explained 
the  abundance  of  squirrels  at  this  place.  Much  the  same  general  con- 
ditions prevailed  along  the  trail  to  Riskowit  Lake  (V,  4)  where  they 
were  also  abundant.  At  Washington  Harbor,  along  the  road  to  Wendigo 
(I,  '04),  squirrels  were  very  abundant,  particularly  young  ones. 

Ecological  yotes. — MacFarlane  ('05,  p.  749)  states  that  this  squirrel 
"makes  its  nest  in  a  tree  and  has  usually,  once  a  year,  from  four  to  six, 
and- occasionally  as  many  as  seven  young."  Merriani  ('86,  p.  218)  states 
that  in  the  Adirondacks  of  New  York  the  yonng  Red  Squirrels  are  born 
about  the  first  of  April.  On  Sept.  17,  1905,  Max  M.  Feet  saw  a  squirrel 
about  20  feet  above  the  ground,  tearing  away  loose  bark  from  a  birch 
tree  and  carrying  it  away,  presumably  to  be  nsed  in  the  construction 
of  a  nest. 

Only  a  few  observations  were  secured  upon  the  food  habits.  While 
fishing  for  trout  in  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake,  Mr.  K.  Neutson  saw  a 
Red  Squirrel  running  with  a  mushroom  in  its  mouth.  Max  M.  Peet  also 
saw  young  squirrels  eat  similar  fungi  at  Washington  Harbor.  He 
further  reported  that  traps  baited  with  nuts  (hickory,  peanut  and  wal- 
nut) did  not  prove  attractive  to  them.  Along  the  Wendigo  road  (I,  '04) 
at  Washington  Harbor  I  saw  a  young  squirrel  examine  some  very  low  red 
raspberry  bushes,  evidently  in  search  of  berries.  It  secured  one  and 
stood  up  to  eat  it,  but  dropped  down  and  approached  within  a  few  feet 
of  me  its  curiosity  momentarily  getting  the  better  of  its  hunger. 

Notes  on  the  SpecimeTis  Collected. — This  series  contains  both  young 
and  adults  collected  during  July  and  August  of  1904  and  1905,  and  in- 
cludes two  specimens  taken  in  winter  pelage  by  a  trapper.  In  all  there 
are  52  specimens,  40  of  which  were  taken  during  1905.    An  examination 

D,  _,  j.,Coo»-^lc 


400  MICHIGAN    SUBVKT.    1908. 

of  these  s|)eo1men8  brings  out  some  interesdng  relations  i-egardiog  the 
BeasoDa)  moults  of  pelage  and  its  consequent  color  changes.  These 
changes,  as  they  occur  about  New  York  City,  in  the  Southeastern  Red 
Squirrel  (K.  hudeonkms  loquax  Bangs),  have  been  studied  by  Alleu 
('90).  This  is  the  common  Red  Squirrel  of  Southern  Michigan.  The 
characteristic  differences  between  the  winter  and  summer  pelages  may 
be  briefly  stated  thus:  The  winter  pelage  (from  Michigan  specimens), 
as  a  rule,  is  long  and  dense,  with  a  bright  rufous  median  dorsal  band, 
very  conspicuous  ear  tufta,  body  without  distinct  lateral  black  stripe, 
lower  parts  of  body  grayish  white,  sides  of  body  yellowish  olive,  and 
soles  of  feet  furred ;  the  summer  pelage  is  short,  lacks  the  conspicuous 
rufous  median  band,  the  ear  tufts,  and  the  fur  on  the  soles.  It  acquires 
a  very  distinct  lateral  black  Hue,  the  lower  parts  are  whitish  or  yellow- 
ish, and  the  upper  parts  suffused  with  rufous. 

The  spring  moult,  according  to  Allen,  begins  in  April  or  May  and  is 
nearly  completed  during  June  and  July.  By  the  fall  moult,  a  winter 
petage  is  acquired  during  the  months  of  November  and  December,  This 
undergoes  slight  change,  with  the  possible  exception  of  an  increasing 
intensity  of  the  broad  mfons  band  during  February  and  March.  The 
gradual  character  of  these  changes  suggests  that  this  process  may  be 
an  almost  continuous  one. 

A  few  specimens  taken  near  Ann  Arbor,  ^fichigan,  early  in  November, 
show  the  transition  from  the  summer  to  the  winter  pelage.  In  some 
specimens  the  ear  tufts  are  becoming  prominent,  the  rufoos  on  the  tail 
is  becoming  intensified  and  is  moving  forward  along  the  mid-dorsal  line. 
One  specimen  (No.  32991)  taken  November  17,  1905,  has  but  few  long 
hairs  upon  the  ears  but  lias  a  very  broad  intense  rufous  dorsal  band, 
a  distinct  black  lateral  line  and  is  white  below.  Another  (No.  830001, 
taken  December  3,  1905,  has  the  dorsal  rufous  band,  well  developed 
ear  tufts  and  lacks  the  lateral  black  line.  It  seems  probable  that  the 
time  of  spring  moulting  will  prove  to  come  during  April  and  May.  as 
in  New  York,  but  specimens  are  not  available  by  whicb  this  can  be 
determined  for  southern  Michigan. 

Turning  now  to  the  Isle  Royale  specimens  some  interesting  differ- 
ences become  evident  when  the  winter  pelage  is  compared  with  that  of 
similar  specimens  of  S.  hKd«onicus  loquax  from  Michigan.  Unfortu- 
nately there  are  only  two  specimens  in  winter  pelage  from  Isle  Royale, 
and  one  of  these  skins  (No.  32138)  lacks  ears  and  feet.  The  other  (No. 
33066)  was  taken  early  in  January,  1904;  both  were  collected  by 
trappers.  In  these  specimens  the  dorsal  rufous  band  is  only  slightly 
developed,  about  to  that  degree  of  general  rufous  suffusion  seen  Id 
summer  specimens  of  S.  hud»onicv8  loquax  from  southern  Michigan.  The 
difference  between  the  two  forms  is  very  striking  when  they  are  placed 
side  by  side.  In  one  specimen  of  hudsoniciis  the  ear  tufts  are  barely 
developed,  and  in  both  specimens  the  lateral  black  stripe  is  indistinct; 
the  lower  parts  are  dirty  white  or  plumbeous;  sides  of  the  body  olivace- 
oos  gray  and  the  pelage  long.  In  one  the  soles  are  densely  furred.  The 
summer  pelage  of  hudsonhiis  apparently  retains  the  rufous  median 
stripe  as  in  winter  but  is  somewhat  obscured  by  the  general  rufous 
suffusion  of  the  upper  surface,  the  amount  of  rufous  having  been  in- 
creased on  the  sides;  the  ear  tufts  are,  of  course,  lacking;  the  lateral 


ECOLOQT  OF   ISLB   ROYALB.  401 

stripe  becomes  black  and  conspicuous;  lower  parts  whitish  or  yellowish; 
above  olivaceous  or  sufFuaed  with  rufous  but  much  paler  than  S.  hud- 
aonicus  loquax  in  the  corresponding  pelage,  soles  bare,  and  the  pelage 
short.  A  few  immature  specimens  (Nos.  33072,  33074,  33076,  33078) 
taken  between  July  27  and  Aug.  11,  are  quite  as  gray  as  the  January' 
specimen,  the  lateral  black  line  and  the  under  parts  corresponding 
closely  to  it.  An  adult  male  (No.  33050)  belongs  in  the  same  category 
but  is  even  more  gray  than  either  winter  skin.  The  amount  of  fur  on 
the  soles  is  perhaps  the  most  marked  seasonal  change  with  such  speci- 
mens. In  other  words,  the  seasonal  color  changes  are  not  well  developed 
in  some  specimens. 

It  is  evident  from  the  above  observations  that,  if  the  two  winter  speci- 
mens are  representative,  the  seasonal  color  changes  are  much  less  jtro- 
nonnced  in  hud»onic\is  (some  individuals,  in  all  probability,  hardly 
changing  in  color  at  all)  than  in  8.  fMid»onicuf  loquax.  This  of  course 
does  not  mean  that  there  are  no  moults,  but  that  moulting  is  not  accom- 
panied by  a  marked  color  change.  Ruch  observations  also  suggest  that  the 
Red  Squirrels,  in  the  northern  part  of  their  range,  may  not  show  as 
marked  seasonal  color  contrast  as  is  seen  farther  to  the  south.  But  this 
point  can  only  be  definitely  determined  by  the  aid  of  a  larger  series  of 
winter  specimens  than  are  at  present  in  the  Museum  collection.  From 
a  somewhat  different  point  of  view,  Allen  ('98,  p.  253)  remarks  "All 
the  forms  of  the  8.  hudsonictis  group  present  two  well-marked  phsRes 
of  individnal  color  variation,  particularly  in  the  summer  pelage,  namely, 
a  rufous  i^ase  and  an  olivaceous  phase,  the  former  usually  predomi- 
nating in  about  the  ratio  of  4  to  3,  with  a  considerable  proportion  of 
intermediates,  which  connect  the  two  principal  phases.  The  two  princi- 
pal phases  are  usually  so  well  marked  that  were  they  separated  geograph- 
ically, it  would  be  natural  to  regard  them  as  subspecies.  For  this  reason 
a  small  series  of  specimeos  from  a  given  locality  is  apt  to  be  unsatis- 
factory." 

Allen's  law  of  the  increase  of  intensity  of  color  from  the  north  south- 
ward is  well  illustrated  by  the  Bed  Squirrels  in  Michigan.  The  paler 
form,  S,  hudnon-icua,  occui-s  to  the  north,  on  Isle  Koyale,  and  the  brighter, 
more  rufons  forms  hudson-icus  loquax  to  the  south,  in  the  remainder  of 
Michigan.  It  is  also  worthy  of  note  that  the  seasonal  contrasts  in  pelage 
are  apparentiv  less  marked  in  the  northern  than  in  the  southern  part  of 
the  State. 

Oeographic  Range. — ^The  typical  form  of  the  species  has  an  extensive 
northern  transcontinental  range  from  Labrador,  New  Brunswick  and 
Vermont,  westward  to  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Sui)erior  in  Ontario; 
Isle  Royale,  Michigan;  North  Dakota;  Manitoba;  Mackenzie  basin  to 
Alaska  and  the  Pacific  Coast. 

This  extensive  geographic  range  in  the  Canadian  forested  region  and 
in  Alaska  is  of  special  interest.  The  far  northern  range  of  this  form 
and  its  great  abundance  suggest  that  it  is  well  adapted  to  the  region  it 
inhabits.  It  is  evidently  a  Glacial  or  post-Glacial  migrant  into  most  of 
its  present  northern  range,  as  the  entire  area  (excepting  part  of  Alaska) 
lies  within  the  region  glaciated  hy  the  Wisconsin  ioc  sheet.  It  seems 
probable  therefore  that,  at  the  time  of  the  maximum  extension  of  this 
sheet,  this  squirrel  frequented  largelv  the  coniferous  forests  at  its  sonth- 


402  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,    1908. 

em  border — east  of  the  Rocky  Moontains^ — and  as  this  sheet  retreated 
northward  it  spread  with  the  forests  into  the  area  now  occupied-  It 
also  seems  lilcely  that  their  main  headquartei's  were  in  the  region  south 
of  the  Qreat  Lakes  and  eastward,  because  the  probable  aridity  of  the 
Great  Plains  in  Glacial  times  would  be  onfaTorable  to  extensive  forest 
growth.  The  Glacial  and  post-GIacial  migrations  of  the  Red  Squirrels, 
as  far  as  they  can  be  inferred,  may  explain  some  of  the  peculiarities  of 
their  present  range.  The  Red  Squirrel  is  a  representative  member  of 
■what  I  have  elsewhere  caJled  the  Northeastern  Biota  (Adams,  '05), 
some  of  whose  members  have,  in  Glacial  and  post-Glacial  times,  invaded 
the  glaciated  region  from  the  south  and  have  spread  northwest  to  the 
Pacific  coast  in  Alaska  as  well  as  eastward,  in  Labrador,  to  the  Atlantic 
coast 

It  also  seems  probable  that  the  geographic  isolation  and  the  peculiar- 
ities of  the  Black  Hills  Red  Squirrel  (S,  hudsonicus  dakotensU  Allen) 
may  be  explained,  in  part,  if  it  be  considered  a  glacial  relict  which  has 
become  isolated  by  the  change  of  climate  attending  the  decline  of  the 
Ice  Age.  The  incomplete  development  of  the  lateral  black  line,  which 
usually  occurs  in  the  summer  pelage  of  this  group,  is  of  special  interest 
in  this  connection. 

In  addition  to  the  typical  form  there  are  d  or  10  varieties  of  this 
species  which  have  a  range  from  soDthem  Alaska  to  Washington,  Oregon, 
Idaho,  northern  Utah,  Montana,  Wyoming.  South  Dakota,  southern 
Minnesota,  Wisconsin,  northern  Illinois,  Indiana,  southward  to  North 
Carolina  and  northward  to  Labrador.  The  Red  Squirrels  are  doubtless 
one  of  the  best  groups  of  North  American  mammals  for  a  study  of  the 
laws  of  geographic  variation,  and  is  a  group  of  undoubted  Mexican  or 
Central  American  origin  (cf.  Cones  &  Allen,  '77,  p.  670) ;  the  Isle  Royale 
form  being  the  one  which  Las  departed  the  fartherest  from  its  region  of 
origin.  This  species,  judging  from  its  geographic  range,  has  apparently 
crossed  the  Rocky  Mountains  from  the  east,  perhaps  near  the  Canadian 
boundary. 

3.  Castor  canadetms  canadensis  Kuhl.  Northeastern  Beaver.  In  all 
probability  the  Beaver  is  extinct  upon  Isle  Royale,  although  it  formerly 
occurred  there.  We  saw  no  one  who  had  any  recent  information  of  its 
occurrence.  Mr.  J.  H.  Malone,  reported  that  a  Mr.  Butterfield  had  seen 
a  beaver  dam  on  a  creek  at  the  head  of  Hay  Bay  in  1878.  About  that 
time  Mr.  Malone  found  beaver  cut  stumps  and  remains  of  a  dam  on  the 
short  stream  which  forms  the  outlet  of  Siskowit  Lake.  The  U.  S.  Land 
Office  map  indicates  the  site  of  "old"  beaver  dams  as  follows:  8W.  14 
Sec.  13.  T.  6i  N.,  R.  38W.  NE.  y^  Sec.  15,  T.  64N.  E.  37W.  and  SE.  14  Sec. 
9,  T.  G3  N.,  K.  38  W.  The  Survey  furnishing  the  data  for  this  map  was 
made  by  Wra.  Ives  in  1848. 

Ecological  Notes. — The  Beavers  of  Jficbigan  have  been  given  more 
study  than  any  other  native  mammal  found  in  the  State,  and  at  the 
same  time  they  hare  perhaps  contributed  more  toward  our  knowledge 
of  the  natural  history  of  the  American  species  than  those  from  any  other 
locality.  The  extensive  and  irai)ortant  investigations  referred  to  were 
made  in  Marquette  County  about  50  years  ago  by  Lewis  H.  Morgan, 
and  were  published  in  1868  in  his  volume  entitled  'The  American  Beaver 
and  His  Works."    This  publication,  to  which  reference  should  be  made 


ECOLOGY   OP    ISLE   ROYALB.  4C3 

for  a  detailed  account  of  the  habits  and  activities  of  this  animal,  has 
become  a  classic  in  American  natural  history. 

In  brief  the  life  history  is  as  follows :  The  breeding  season,  according 
to  MacFarlane  ('05,  p.  742),  occurs  in  January  and  February,  at  which 
time  the  males  fight  fiercely.  The  yonng,  blind  at  birth,  are  bom  during 
April  and  May,  and  are  suckled  for  sereral  weeks,  butsoon  begin  to  eat 
the  succulent  stems  and  roots  of  plants.  The  young  are  believed  to 
remain  with  parents  for  2  or  3  years,  and  to  breed  at  about  the  age  of 
three.  They  are  most  prolific  at  about  middle  age,  when  they  usually 
produce  from  4  to  6  at  a  birtb,  and  occasionally  even  S  or  9.  Tbe 
Indians  believe  that  they  reach  the  age  of  12  to  15  years  (Morgan.  '68, 
p.  222).  There  is  a  tendency  for  beavers  to  migrate  (Morgan,  '68,  p. 
137),  especially  wben  a  region  becomes  overstocked,  and  very  naturally 
they  follow  the  streams. 

Tbeir  food  consists  of  roots  of  grasses  and  water  plants,  inclnding  the 
water-lily,  the  bark  of  aspens,  fresh  willow  branches,  birch,  the  leaves 
of  deciduous  trees,  and  late  in  winter  even  of  wood  itself.  The  winter 
supply  of  food  is  stored  under  water.  The  burrows,  lodges,  dams,  and 
meadows  that  result  from  the  activities  of  this  animal  have  aroused 
much  p|(^ular  interest,  but  space  can  not  be  allowed  to  describe 
these  in  detail.  There  is  a  very  extensive  literature  devoted  to  this 
phase  of  beaver  life.  The  Beaver  is  essentially  a  burrowing  animal,  so 
that  the  margins  of  the  waters  which  they  frequent  contain  numerous 
burrows  or  tunnels.  These  are  from  10  to  15  feet  long  and  open,  at  the 
lower  end,  a  foot  or  so  below  tbe  water;  from  this  point  they  incline 
upward  to  within  a  few  inches  of  the.surface  of  the  ground,  thus  allow- 
ing for  the  necessary  ventilation  of  the  burrow.  Moi^n  reports  that 
in  the  case  of  the  river-inhabiting  beavers  the  upper  ends  of  these 
tunnels  are  occasionally  indicated  by  a  pile  of  cuttings  a  foot  or  so 
high,  and  that  it  is  probable  that  from  such  a  beginning  as  this  beaver 
lodges  have  been  developed.  Of  these  lodges  there  are  several  modi- 
fications, but  their  essential  features  are  a  burrow  with  submerged  en- 
trance, which  leads  upward  into  a  chamber  above  the  surface  of  the 
water.  As  a  rule  these  lodges  are  located  on  the  bank  a  few  feet  back 
from  the  water,  but  they  also  occur  at  the  margins  of  streams  or  lakes, 
and  within  the  ponds  made  by  the  dams.  It  is  very  evident  that  all  of 
these  lodges  are  but  variations  of  the  same  fundamental  plan. 

The  beaver  dams  excite  much  interest,  and  the  completed  dams  may 
be  quite  extensive  affairs  as  some  are  even  several  hundred  feet  long  and 
over  6  feet  high,  causing  tbe  submergence  of  many  acres  of  land.  But 
it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  such  feats  are  not  the  work  of  a  single 
pair  or  family,  bat  are  the  results  of  generations  of  industrious  beavers. 
These  dams  are  begun  on  a  small  scale,  in  all  probability  by  a  single 
pair  or  family,  and  in  the  course  of  time  each  generation  contributes  its 
share  toward  the  repair  and  extension  of  the  dam,  so  that  in  time  it 
may  become  a  very  composite  structure  and  perhaps  of  great  extent. 
The  dams,  like  the  burrows  and  lodges,  are  built  upon  a  simple  plan, 
and  susceptible  of  much  modification  in  different  conditions.  Thus  on 
small  streams  according  to  Morgan,  where  the  banks  are  ill  defined,  the 
usual  form  of  dam  is  one  composed  of  sticks  and  poles,  whose  upper 
or  water  face  is  reinforced  and  plastered  over  with  earth,  stones  and 


404  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.    1908. 

8od,  while  on  larger  streams  or  where  the  banka  are  well  defined  with 
a  deep  channel  and  uniform  current,  the  stick  and  bank  work  becomes 
buried  and  obscured  by  the  large  amount  of  earth,  mud  and  Btoiie»  com- 
posing it.  In  order  to  understand  the  utility  of  these  dams  and  the 
resulting  ponds,  it  is  necefisary  to  recall  the  fundamental  burrowing 
character  of  the  beaver,  whose  burrows  and  lodges  require  a  submei^^ 
entrance,  whose  winter  food  must  be  stored  in  the  bottom  of  these 
ponds,  the  protection  thus  aflforded  as  a  retreat  from  enemies ;  and  there 
is  yet  another  important  relation  which  remains  to  be  considered.  In 
a  large  part  of  Northeastern  North  America  a  marginal  zone  of  Boating 
vegetation,  bordered  by  tamaracks  and  spruces,  tends  to  line  the  banks 
and  margins  of  such  streams  ponds  and  lakes  as  are  frequented  by 
beavers.  But  these  conifers  are  not  only  unavailable  for  food,  but  form 
a,  barricade  between  the  water  and  the  hardwoods,  aspens,  birch,  etc. 
(the  food  of  the  beaver)  which  occupy  the  higher  ground.  A  further 
disadvantage  of  this  7x>ne  of  plant  life  is  that  it  is  very  unstable,  often 
even  floating,  and  furnishes  no  solid  ground  for  burrows,  which  are 
the  final  retreats  of  the  beaver  when  in  danger.  Thus  the  formation 
of  a  dam,  and  the  consequent  drowning  of  this  unfavorable  zone  of  plant 
life,  tends  to  bring  the  water's  edge  neai-er  to  the  hardwoods  and  solid 
ground.  But  to  credit  all  these  advantages  to  the  beaver's  intelligence 
is  unnecessary-  because  the  habit  of  building  dams  is  of  greater  geo- 
graphic extent  than  these  marginal  conditions.  It  seems  more  probable 
therefore,  that  such  a  habit  has  proved'  to  be  of  special  advantage  under 
such  conditions,  rather  than  that  these  conditions  have  developed  the 
habit. 

The  beaver  meadows  are  grassland  areas,  sedges  lately,  which  invade 
the  shallow  water  and  tend  to  replace  the  bordering  conifers  drowned 
out  by  the  formation  of  the  dams.  Such  grasslands  may  be  quite  exten- 
sive, and  even  occupy  many  acres,  but  such  results  are  only  secondary 
products,  as  far  as  the  beaver's  needs  are  concerned,  for  although  the 
grass  stems  and  roots  are  eaten  to  some  estent  and  may  be  useful  in 
plastering  over  their  houses  and  in  repairing  the  dams,  yet  they  are 
apparently  not  essential  features  in  their  economy. 

Ocoffrapldc  Range. — The  typical  form  of  this  species  has  a  range 
throughout  northeastern  North  America  northward  to  the  tree  limit 
from  New  Ilmnswick ;  Maine ;  New  York ;  Quebec ;  Ontario ;  Michigan ; 
Idaho;  .Mackenzie  (Ft.  Simpson);  Alaska  Peninsula  and  Yukon  Valley 
and  Alaska. 

There  are  three  geographic  varieties  ranging  south  of  the  Canadian 
or  typical  form ;  one  in  southeastern  United  States ;  another  in  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  and  the  third  on  the  Pacific  coast.  Pleistocene  beaver 
remains  have  been  found  in  New  Y'ork,  Pennsylvania.  New  Jersey.  Vir- 
ginia, Tennessee,  South  Carolina,  Ontario  and  Oregon,  It  is  thus  seen 
that  for  the  species  as  a  whole,  these  fossils  do  not  indicate  a  range  in 
Pleistocene  times  materially  different  from  that  of  the  present  time. 

The  Glacial  or  post-Glacial  extension  of  range  of  the  Canadian  Beaver, 
from  the  Atlantic  Coast  to  the  Pacific  Ocean  in  Alaska  and  north  to  the 
tree  limit,  is  a  range  much  like  that  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Red  Squirrel, 
and  suggests  a  somewhat  similar  history.  The  great  development  of 
beavers  in  this  northern  region  appears  closely  related  to  the  physical 


ECOLOGY   OF    ISLE   ROYALE.  405 

conditiODB  brought  about  by  baseleveting  and  glaciatiou — the  poor 
drainage,  as  shown  bj  tbe  innuuiernble  swamps,  ]>OQdB  aod  lakes  and 
their  small  and  slaggish  streams. 

In  addition  to  the  great  abxindanct^  of  the  food  plants  there  is  the 
farther  favorable  physical  condition  of  deep  snows,  which  fall  befoi-e  the 
BOil  or  ponds  freeze  to  «  great  depth,  and  thu»<  make  conditions  favorable 
for  beavers  on  account  of  the  protection  afforded  from  deep  frost,  which 
may  close  up  the  entrances  to  their  burrows,  houses,  etc. 

4.  Peromyscus  canadensis  umbrinusf  Miller.  Isle  Royale  White- 
footed  Mouse.  This  mouse  was  periiaps  the  most  abundant  mammal 
upon  the  island.  It  occurred  in  a  great  variety  of  situations  as  is  indi- 
cated by  specimens  taken  at  the  following  stations ;  I,  3,  4,  7 ;  III,  4,  near 
6 ;  V,  1,  3,  4 ;  I,  '04 ;  and  II,  '04.  These  stations  include  a  variety  of  condi- 
tions, balsam-spmce  forests,  tamarack  and  urbor  vitae  swamps;  second 
growth  of  birch  following  a  bum,  and  specimens  were  even  taken  in  the 
Lighthouse.  As  there  was  some  doubt  as  to  the  identity  of  certain 
specimens  secured  in  1904,  the  entire  series  of  5.'i  specimens,  including 
46  taken  in  1905,  were  sent  to  the  Biological  Survey  and  have  been  ex- 
amined bv  Mr.  W.  H.  Osgood  who  pronounced  them  nmbrimis?  [=P. 
man4culaiu8  Wag.  rf.  N.  A.  Fauna,  No.  28.  p.  41,  1909.] 

EcologU^l  Notes. — ,\lniost  nothing  is  known  of  the  life  history  of  the 
variety  umftmiiw;  it  is  only  known  from  the  vicinity  of  the  northern 
shore  of  Lake  Superior  and  Keewatin  and  the  typical  form  P.  carMdensis 
fares  but  little  better  because  the  accounts  of  P.  leucopui  are  confused 
with  it.  It  seems  safe  to  conclude,  however,  that  it  is  a  forest  inhabit- 
ing species  feeding  npon  seeds  and  nuts,  but  Preble  ('02,  p.  50)  rejwirts 
it  as  invading  houses  in  Keewatin  and  as  rare  in  swamps.  It  is  also 
probable  that  they  are  active  during  the  winter,  at  least  on  Isle  Royale. 
The  Beaked  Hazel  {Conjlua  rostrata)  perhaps  furnishes  them  part  of 
their  ffinter  food. 

Geographic  Ran^c. — Known  elsewhere  only  from  Peninsular  Harbor 
(types),  and  Tvipigon,  Ontario.  Compared  with  the  typical  form  this  is 
a  dwarf  and  melauic  variety.  A  similar  dwarfing  and  darkening  of  this 
species  occurs  upon  Hoau  Mt.,  N.  C,  and  U{>on  the  mountains  of  south- 
western Penn.  (var.  nuhiterrae).  A  third  variety,  abietorum,  occurs  in 
Kova  Scotia.  The  typical  form  of  the  species  ranges  from  New  Rruns- 
wick,  western  Massachusetts  and  central  New  York  to  northern  Michi- 
gan and  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior,  in  Ontario. 

5.  Evotomys  gapperi  (Vigors).  Red-backed  Mouse,  Although  our 
parties  trapped  extensively  in  the  vicinity  of  our  camps,  during  1904  and 
1905,  yet  no  specimens  of  this  mouse  were  secured.  The  authority  for 
its  occiirrence  npon  the  island  is  the  10  recorded  specimens  (Zv'os.  7725, 
9966  to  9974)  given  by  Cones  ('77,  p.  145)  and  collected  by  B.  A.  Hoopes. 
These  mice  were  "excessively  abundant  and  universally  distributed"  on 
the  shore  of  Lake  Superior  according  to  Miller  ('97,  p.  15).  It  is  therefore 
surprising  that  is  was  not  secured  in  abundance  on  Isle  Royale. 
Michael  Hollinger  described  to  Max  M.  Peet  a  mouse  which  the  house 
cat  had  caught  dnring  the  winter  and  brought  to  the  Club  House. 
There  were  two  of  these  specimens,  which  were  described  as  reddish 
brown,  short  tailed  mice,  and  which  Hollinger  said  were  quite  differ- 


..COCH^IC 


406  MICHIGAN   SURVBT,    190S. 

ent  from  the  White  footed  mice  with  which  Jie  was  familiaf.  It  seems 
probable  that  these  were  Red-backed  mice. 

Ecological  Notes.  Very  little  seems  to  l)e  known  ooneeroing  the 
breeding  habits  of  this  moufie.  Merriam  ('86,  p.  272)  reports  that 
in  the  Adirondack^  he  has  examined  females  taken  daring  April  which 
contained  four  young,  and  one  taken  early  in  June  wae  nursing  her 
second  brood;  still  later  in  the  season,  on  October  4,  a  female  was 
taken  containing  i  young.  Eennicott  ('58.  p.  !)0)  found  in  Minnesota 
a  neat  with  8  young,  and  another  litter  of  5  or  6.  He  also  states 
of  the  nests  that  "with  the  exception  of  one  placed  in  a  stump,  they 
were  all  situated  on  the  top  of  the  ground,  under  logs.  They  were 
slightly  formed  of  a  Bmall  quantity  of  soft  leaves  and  grass."  Their 
food,  according  to  Merriam,  consists  of  seeds,  berries,  roots,  and  the 
bai-k  of  trees  and  shrubs.  In  addition  to  these  materials  Rhoads  ('03. 
p.  9.1)  states  that  they  feed  upon  the  leares  and  stems  of  many  weedx 
and  grasses,  various  nuts  and  feven  land  snails.  Upon  Iste  Royalc 
both  Beaked  Hazel  nuts  and  snails  are  abundant.  Rhoads  further 
states  that  during  the  winter  it  subsists  "almost  entirely  on  the 
leaves  of  tbe  evergreen  strawberry  busli,  EnOnymvs  americanits,  which 
grows  abundantly  in  the  cedar  swamps  and  damp  hemlock  forests." 

The  habitat  of  this  mouse  is  of  special  interest  and  has  been  de- 
scribed by  Batchelder  ('9G,  p.  192)  as  follows:  "One  may  look  for  it 
with  some  confidence  in  almost  any  large  tract  of  wet  ground  that  re- 
tains its  moisture  through  the  summer,  but  is  not  subject  to  serious 
floods,  and  which  bears  a  growth  of  woods  sufiSciently  heavy  to  afford 
a  dense  shade,  so  that  the  ground  beneath,  and  the  roots  of  the  trees, 
are  covered  with  a  deep  carpet  of  sphagnum.  !f  the  older  trees  have 
been  suffered  to  die  a  natural  death,  and  their  stumps  and  fallen 
trunks  lie  slowly  rotting  on  the  ground,  ha  If -concealed  by  the  sphagnum, 
the  chance  of  finding  it  is  certainly  not  lessened.  One  of  the  most 
evident  peculiarities  of  such  a  spot  as  this,  in  southern  New  England, 
is  that  the  dense  shade  and  the  abundant  evaporation  maintain  a 
temperature  during  the  hottest  summer  weather  that  is  far  below 
that  of  tbe  surrounding  country.  In  these  respects  of  coolness,  mois- 
ture, and  shade,  there  is  a  striking  resemblance  to  the  woods  Evotomyt 
gapperi  inhabits  in  extreme  northern  New  England  and  other  parts 
of  the  Canadian  zone," 

Geographic  Range. — The  typical  form  of  this  species  ranges  north- 
ward from  Massachusetts,  New  York,  Pennsylvania,  no  i- them  Mich  I 
gan,  through  southern  Canada,  westward  to  the  Rocky  Mountains.  Miller 
(■'97,  p.  15)  reported  it  universally  distributed  on  the  north  shore  of 
I^ake  Superior,  and  Kennicott  ('58,  p.  90)  states  that  he  found  Red- 
backed  mice  (perhaps  loringi)  the  most  numerous  in  Minnesota  (near 
Breckinridge)  in  low,  heavily  timbered  valleys,  although  they  were 
common  on  higher  ground.  There  are  5  recognized  varieties  of  this 
fipecies;  one,  ochraeus,  is  confined  to  the  White  Mts.  of  New  Hamp- 
shire; a  second,  rhoadsi,  is  only  known  from  New  Jersey;  a  third, 
loringi,  is  found  in  "timbered  valleys  along  the  edge  of  the  plains  in 
Minnesota,  and  eastern  North  and  8outh  Dakota"  (Elliot)  ;  the  fourth, 
gain,  is  from  the  mountains  of  Colorado  and  Montana ;  and  the  fifth, 
saivratus.  is  from  the  mountains  of  north-eastern  Oregon,  Idaho  and 
British   Oolnmbia. 


ECOUXIY  OF   I8LB  ROY  ALE.  407 

The  geographic  and  topographic  isolation  of  the^e  varieties  is  worthy 
of  special  notice.  The  occurrence  of  a  local  Arm  iloringi)  of  a  forest 
inhabiting  specieo,  in  the  forested  valle.vs  upon  the  plains  is  of  special 
interest  in  showing  how  topographic  and  get^raphic  inflnences  may 
favor  isolation. 

6.  Fiber  zibeihicii«  (Linn.).  Eastern  Muskrat.  No  specimens 
were  talien  b.v  onr  party  in  1905,  bnt  two  specimens  were  found  in  1904, 
at  Washington  Harbor  by  Max  M.  Peet  (I,  '04) ;  and  early  in  the  spring 
of  1905  Charles  Preulx  secured  one  specimen  from  the  same  place— the 
small  island  near  the  mouth  of  Washington  Creek.  A  few  additional 
locality  records  were  secured  this  season.  Victor  Anderson,  the  trap- 
per, reported  muskmlB  abundant  at  Sumner  I-ate  (III,  5),  and  numer- 
ous broken  Anodonta  grandia  footiana  Lea  shells  were  found  there  by 
N.  A.  Wood.  Bimilar  broken  shells  of  the  same  form — were  also  found  by 
W6od  at  Sargent's  I^ake.  while  I  found  such  sheila  abundant  at  the  end 
of  the  McCai^oe  Cove  trail  {II,  4).  John  Anderson  reported  muskrat 
houses  at  Fish  lAand  Bay  and  at  Tobin  Harbor  during  the  fall  of 
1904.  There  is  an  abundance  of  Anodonta  and  Lampsilis  upon  the  is- 
land, especially  of  the  former,  which  occur  upon  sandy  shores,  such  as 
are  found  near  the  head  of  Bock  Harbor.  It  may  be  a  ijuestion  as  to 
how  much  broken  shells  should  be  taken  as  evidence  of  the  presence 
of  Muskrats,  but  the  trapper's  statements  of  occurrence  are  in  harmony 
with  the  evidence  from  the  shells.  Perhaps  part  of  the  damage  to 
these  should  be  credited  to  the  Mink. 

Mike  Johnson,  fisherman,  reports  that  he  has  seen  the  Muskrat  at 
Chippewa  Harbor.  Mr.  J.  N,  Malone,  Keeper  of  Menagerie  Inland 
Light,  several  years  ago  found  a  Muskrat  in  the  cellar  of  the  Light- 
house {X,  10),  and  caught  two  near  the  camp  in  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3), 

Ecological  y^tes. — The  Muskrat  is  one  of  the  most  generally  known 
of  our  native  mammals  hut  although  much  has  been  written  of  its 
habits,  much  more  is  yet  to  be  learned.  In  several  respects  its  habits 
are  similar  to  those  of  the  Beaver,  although  they  are  not  at  all  closely 
related.  Thus  both  are  aquatic,  burrowing,  house-constructing  animals 
with  submerged  entrances  to  their  houses.  Both  have  been  reported 
(Morgan,  '68,  p.  138)  to  exhale  under  the  ice,  and  after  allowing  the 
bubbles  a  moment's  exposure,  to  reinhale  thero,  and  continue  their 
journey  under  the  ice.  Such  similiarities,  if  true,  are  very  interesting 
because  they  illustrate  the  independent  acquirement  of  similar  traits 
along  distant  lines  of  descent;  due  apparently  to  the  influence  of  sim- 
ilar environments. 

The  life  history  is  about  as  follows,  bnt  apparently  varies  in  differ- 
ent localities.  Thus  in  Pennsylvania,  the  young,  according  to  Rhoada, 
('03,  p.  105)  are  born  "at  all  seasons."  This  statement  seems  remark- 
able aa  Kennicott  ("57,  p.  107}  states  that  "from  five  to  seven  yonng — 
more  or  less — are  produced  in  April  or  May,"  and  Men-iam  ('86,  p. 
283)  states  that  in  the  Adirondacks  of  New  York  "It  brings  forth  from 
five  to  nine  young  at  a  birth,  and  is  said  to  raise  three  litters  in  a  sea- 
son." Farther  north  in  Saskatchewan  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  738)  re- 
ports that  the  females  are  said  to  begin  breeding  when  about  a  year  old 
and  give  birth  to  "but  two  litters  the  first,  and  three  each  succeeding 
season  for  a  time."     The  number  of  young  in  each  litter  varies  from  8 


408  MICHIGAN    SUKVET,    190S. 

to  20.  In  British  Columbia  the  femalea  are  said  to  have  three  litters 
each  season  and  to  succesHiyely  diminish  in  fertility  with  eacb 
brood.  The  species  thus  appears  to  be  more  fertile  in  the  northern  part 
of  its  range. 

The  food  of  muskrats  consists  of  grasses  and  water  plants,  and  in- 
cludes a  wide  range  of  vegetable  food.  In  addition  to  this  vegetable 
food,  occasionally  dead  flsh  and  mussels  (Vnionidfie)  are  eaten  in 
quantities,  as  is  shown  by  the  abundance  of  shells  along  the  banks  of 
streams  and  the  margins  of  ponds  and  lakes.  Snch  heaps  of  shells  are 
generally  credited  to  the  Muskrat,  but  the  Mink,  as  has  been  suggested, 
may  share  in  this.  Direct  observations  bearing  upon  this  point  are 
very  desirable,  but  the  usual  nocturnal  habits  of  the  Muskrat  doubtless 
account  for  the  limited  information  on  this  subject.  There  is  a  sur- 
prisingly small  amount  of  direct  information,  in  the  accessable  litera 
ture,  on  the  relation  of  Muskrats  to  the  mussels.  Thus  Kennicott  ('57 
p.  106)  states  that  "Collecting  them  [mussels]  fi-om  the  bottom,  it  car- 
ries tbem  in  its  teetli  to  a  log  or  stone,  where,  sitting,  upon  its  haunches, 
and  grasping  tbem  in  the  fore-paws,  it  opens  the  shells  with  the  in- 
cisors as  skillfully  as  it  could  be  done  with  an  oyster-knife."  •  •  • 
"I  have  observed  that  those  species  with  thin  shells  are  \nore  sought 
for,  and  have  often  found  large  specimens  of  Unio  pJicntjig  unopened 
among  the  piles  of  empty  shells,  the  muskrat  apparently  considering 
them  not  worth  the  trouble  of  gnawing  apart  the  valves  at  the  back,  in 
which  manner  the  heavy  shells  are  sometimes  opened."  The  Muskrat, 
like  the  Beaver,  does  not  hibernate  in  winter  bnt  leads  an  active  life, 
which  means  that  they  require  a  food  supply  throughout  the  winter. 
This  they  are  usually  able  to  secure  under  the  ice,  where  they  may  store 
a  supply,  or  by  eating  their  lodge  (Merriani,  '81,  p.  277),  but  in  ex- 
ceptionally cold  winters  or  during  a  dry  season,  their,  winter  snonly 
may  be  frozen  up;  under  which  circumstances  they  may  be  frozen  in 
their  winter  quarters,  or  must  search  for  food  above  ground. 

Extensive  burrows  are  made  in  the  banks  of  streams  or  In  the  shores 
of  the  bodies  of  water  which  they  frequent,  and  in  these  they  usually 
rear  their  young,  although  the  houses  or  lo^es  may  also  be  e*o  used, 
especially  in  swampy  areas.  These  lodges  are  generally  built  in  the  fall 
for  winter  use,  and  are  constructed  of  grass,  roots,  mud  and  sticks: 
within  this  is  a  chamber,  reached  by  a  submerged  passageway,  lead- 
ing under  the  ice. 

Drouth,  disease,  large  owls.  Mink  and  perhaps  the  Otter  are  the 
most  prominent  native  enemies  of  muskrats. 

The  conditions  which  cause  migration  are  of  interest  on  acconnt 
of  their  bearings  upon  the  geogi-aphic  range  and  isolation  of  muskrats. 
JJevere  cold  may  wliot  off  their  supply  of  submerged  food  and 
necessitate  a  migration  during  the  winter;  also  during  the  summer 
a  change  of  i-esidence  may  be  necessitated  by  dioutli.  especially  of 
those  species  which  inhabit  shallow  ponds.  This  no  doubt  in  part  ex- 
plains the  occurrence  of  those  animals  which  are  occasionally  taken  far 
from  water.  Such  migrations  will  not  only  explain  in  part  the  trans- 
ference of  these  animals  from  one  drainage  system  to  another,  hut 
also  the  populating  of  isolated  bodies  of  water. 


Geographic  Ran^r.     An  examination  of  the  ranges  of  the  fire 


X.oog 


!  specie 

ilk 


BCOLOOT   OF   ISLE    ROYALEL  400 

of  described  mnekrats,  as  given  in  Elliot's  recent  Check  List  ('05,  pp. 
252-255),  clearly  sbowe  that  very  little  is  known  of  the  range  of  these 
common  animals;  and  at  the  same  time  their  somewhat  anomalous 
geographic  relations  surest  that  the  interrelations  of  these  species 
must  be  imperfectly  undei-stood.  Similar  relations  are  suggested  by 
the  data  concerning  sibetkicus,  of  which  there  are  five  varieties  in  ad- 
dition to  the  typical  form.  This  latter  form  ranges  from  Labrador 
to  the  Gulf  States  and  northward,  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  to 
Keewatin.  As  to  its  occurrence  in  earlier  geological  deposits,  musk- 
rat  remains  have  been  found  in  the  Pleistocene  deposits  of  8outh 
Carolina,  New  Jersey  and  Pennsylvania. 

The  post-Glacial  changes  within  the  glaciated  portion  of  their 
range  presents  an  interesting  problem.  Thus  starting  with  a 
poorly  drained  glacial  top<^raphy,  the  in  wash  from  the  sur- 
rounding hills,  the  accumulation  of  vegetable  and  animal  re- 
mains, the  perfecting  of  drainage  lines  due  to  the  down-cutting  of 
outlets,  and  other  effects  of  running  water,  would  all  tend  to  encroach 
upon  the  poorly  drained  areas  and  convert  them  jnto  dry  land  habitats; 
while,  at  the  same  time,  there  would  tend  to  be  a  corresponding  in- 
crease of  stream  habitats  to  a  certain  degree.  Buch  changes  as  these 
would  begin  on  the  surface  first  exposed  by  the  retreat  of  the  ice ;  and 
since  the  ice  retreated  in  a  northerly  direction,  the  southern  margin 
of  this  drift  would  first  be  exposed  to  the  general  processes  of  meta- 
□lorphism  (in  the  sense  of  Van  Hise)  in  the  zone  of  weathering  (so 
far  as  the  soil  was  concerned)  and  to  erosion  (so  far  as  the  topography 
was  concerned) ;  and  as  the  retreat  continued  these  pi-ocesses  would 
extend  their  range  of  inflnwice  northward,  and  thns  give  to  the  en- 
vironment a  definite  dynamic  trend. 

Fortunately,  direct  observation  clearly  shows  that  the  processes  just 
outlined  in  a  general  way  have  been  active  on  all  the  drift  surface. 
In  general,  the  drift  first  exposed  is  the  most  metamorphosed  and 
eroded  and  the  best  drained,  while  those  regions  which  were  later 
exposed  are  less  metamorphosed  and  eroded,  and  imperfectly  drained. 

This  gives  ground  for  the  opinion  that  as  the  ice  retreated  to  the 
north  there  has  been  a  general  extinction,  from  the  south  northward 
of  the  poorly  drained  habitats  whose  origin  was  due  to  the  glacial 
topography.  Perhaps  a  more  definite  statement  of  these  effects,  from 
the  standpoint  of  processes,  would  be  that  the  direction  of  extinction 
was  a  resultant,  determined  by  the  direction  of  the  ice  retreat  and  the 
lines  along  which  the  drainage  later  developed. 

The  above  remarks  on  the  dynamics  and  history  of  the  moskrat  en- 
vironment are  of  special  interest  on  account  of  their  bearing  upon  two 
problems  as  follows:  first,  the  probable  post-Qlacial  migrations  of  their 
optimum  environment,  as  it  thus  seems  probable  that  there  has  been 
a  post-OIacial  northward  migration  of  the  most  favorable  habitat  for 
the  muskrat;  and  second,  on  account  of  its  influence  upon  the  habits 
of  muskrats.  The  muskrat  is  essentially  a  burrowing  animal,  and  this 
is  perhaps  an  older  habit  than  house  building.  It  is  therefore  of  interest 
to  know  that  the  muskrats  of  the  southern  range  are  primarily  bur- 
rowers,  rather  than  lodge  builders.  In  the  south,  below  the  glacial 
lake  area,  they  frequent  the  sea  coast,  coastal  plains,  and  streams, 


410  MICHIGAN    SURVEY,    1908. 

but  find  relatively  few  small  bodies  of  water,  which  are  so  abandaot 
farther  north.  Except  along  the  coast,  these  habitats  are  generally 
or  relatively  isolated,  in  striking  contrast  with  their  relative  prosiniity 
in  the  north.  These  sonthern  niu(*kratB  as  a  rule  especially  those  in- 
habitinp:  streams  do  not  construct  houses,  but  Jive  in  burrows. 

Turning  now  to  the  northern  part  of  the  muskrat's  range,  from  Lab- 
rador to  the  Mackenzie  basin  and  southward  into  the  glacial  lake  belt — 
the  most  exteneive  lake  and  swamp  area  on  earth. — inuskrats  are  found 
in  the  greatest  abundance  and  development.  Here  instead  of  the  rela- 
tive isolation,  as  in  the  more  southern  part  of  its  range,  it  finds  an 
almost  continuous  habitat,  of  considerable  geographic  extent,  and  it 
is  in  this  area  that  they  are  lodge  builders,  in  addition  to  being  bur- 
rowers,  especially  those  that  live  about  the  swampy  margins  of  ponds 
and  lakes.  This  general  change  of  habits  between  northern  (Minnesota) 
and  southern  (Ohio)  muskrats  was  pointed  out  by  the  Herrick  (cf. 
'91,  pp.  15-18;  "or  Herrick  '92,  p.  212). 

It  is  thus  seen  that  a  close  relation  exists  between  the  habits  and 
the  habitats  of  this  animal;  thus,  whether  or  not  they  live  in  barrows 
or  lodges,  is  determined,  in  part,  by  the  local  topography  and  geological 
history.  Such  observations  show  the  need  of  detailed  locality  studies 
of  animals,  in  which  the  interrelations  of  the  habits  and  the  environ- 
ment will  be  given  primary  attention.  From  such  investigations,  it 
will  in  the  future  be  possible  to  prepare  maps  showing  the  topographic 
and  geographic  distribution  of  habits,  just  as  other  characteristics  of 
the  North  American  mammals,  such  as  color,  dimensions,  etc.  have 
been  carefully  investigated  and  mapped.  But  so  far  as  known  to  the 
writer,  no  particular  attention  has  been  given  to  this  phase  of  geo- 
graphic problems.  The  muskrat  would  furnish  an  excellent  subject 
for  such  an  investigation  on  account  of  its  extensive  range,  abundance 
and  evident  response  to  its  environment. 

But  before  leaving  this  subject,  attention  should  be  directed  to  the 
fact  that  while  the  above  remarks  apply  primarily  to  the  Muskrat,  yet 
they  have  a  much  more  general  bearing,  and  apply  equally  well  not 
only  to  many  aniniaJs,  but  also,  it  is  probable,  to  the  habitat  relations 
of  many  plants. 

7.  L<pu8  americanus  Erx.  Hudson  Bay  Varying  Hare.  With  the 
possible  exception  of  the  White-footed  Mouse,  the  Hare  is  the  most 
abundant  mammal  upon  Isle  Rovale.  In  all  27  specimens  were  taken 
from  the  following  localities:  I,  2,  3,  6;  II,  2;  III,  4,  5;  V,  3,  4;  I. 
'04,  VIII,  '04  and  V,  '04.  Evidence  for  their  pi'esence  occurred  at  the 
following  additional  stations:  I,  5;  II,  3;  IV,  5,  9;  and  VII.  '04.  It  is 
thus  seen  that  their  distribution  was  quite  general  and  their  abund- 
ance was  equally  characteristic.  Although  frequently  found  in  the  for- 
est there  was  an  apparent  preference  for  open  areas.  This  was  sug- 
gested by  the  well  defined  paths  or  runways  seen  in  sphagnum 
swamps,  in  Cladonia  openings  and  on  the  jack  pine  ridges. 
The  shallow  soil  with  its  attendant  rock  openings  combined  to  produce 
an  extensive  area  of  favorable  habitats  for  them;  supplementing  this 
is  an  abundance  of  vegetable  food  and  a  relatively  smail  number  of 
carnivora. 

Ecological  2fotc8. — The  food  habits  seem  to  be  quite  varied  as  aliowD 


..Google 


ECOLOaY   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  411 

bj  the  variety  of  trees  and  shrubs  whose  bark  and  twigs  had  been  eaten. 
All  such  injurj-  seen  was  attributed  to  hares,  as  it  oecorred  t-loae  to  the 
ground  in  places  frequented  bv  them.  The  most  extensive  injuries  to 
vegetation  were  on  the  jack  pine  ridge  (I,  5)  where  the  smaller  lower 
branches  of  the  Jack  Pines  had  been  eaten  off  up  to  about  three  feet 
nbove  the  ground.  The  cut  ends  clearly  showed  that  the  branches  had 
been  bitten  off.  The  voung  Wild  Red  Cherry  (Prtmtis  pennsyluinioa) 
growing  in  the  crevices  of  the  lava  were  often  cut  back,  the  bark  re- 
moved and  stems  killed  by  the  injury;  Amelanchier  showed  similar  in- 
jury. Along  the  trail  to  McOargoe  Cove  (11)  Rock  Maple,  aspens  and 
alders  were  seen  with  the  bark  injured.  Max  M.  Peet  otraerved  the 
bark  eaten  from  birches  and  Ground  Hemlock  at  Washington  Harbor, 
and  from  apples  at  Siskowit  Bay   (near  VIII,  '04). 

At  dusk  the  Haretf  came  out  to  feed  in  the  clearing  about  our  camp 
at  Siskowit  Bay  (At  ^)<  ^nd  were  quite  tame,  coming  close  up  to  the 
camp.  On  a  small  island  in  Siskowit  Bay,  about  Yi  mi'^  west  of  camp 
they  were  exceedingly  abundant  at  dusk  in  a  small  clearing  at  a  fish- 
ing camp.  They  were  also  abundant  at  Washington  Harbor,  along  the 
road  from  the  Club  House  to  the  old  mining  camp — Wendigo — and  in 
the  clearings  at  Kentson's  Resort  {IV,  5). 

A  very  young  specimen  was  taken  {IV,  '04)  Aug.  22,  1905.  whose 
total  length  was  100  mm.  This  shows  that  young  are  born  in  August, 
and  it  perhaps  represents  the  last  brood  of  the  season.  The  size  of 
other  young  specimens  {215  and  310  mm.)  suggest  that  at  least  one 
brood  has  preceded  the  one  just  mentioned,  althongh  it  is  i>robable 
that  the  broods  are  not  sharply  defined. 

A  very  interesting  periodic  variation  in  the  fertility  of  the  Varying 
Hare  {L.  americanus  macfarlani  Merr.)  has  been  pointed  out  by  Mac- 
Farlane  {'05,  p.  740)  who  says  "A  litter  usually  consists  of  three  or 
four;  but  when  on  the  'periodic'  increase,  females  are  known  to  have 
as  many  as  six,  eight  and  even  ten  at  a  time,  and  then  gradually  re- 
turn to  three  or  four."  This  periodicity  he  also  shows  {I,  c.,  pp.  691, 
692,  710)  is  of  fundamental  ecological  importance  in  the  nature  his- 
tory of  the  fur  bearing  carnivores  of  the  far  north.  The  staple  food  of 
the  Lynx  is  Hare,  so  that  when  the  latter  decline  in  fertility  and  abun- 
dance, the  Lynxes,  not  only  also  become  reduced  in  number  but  are 
even  known  to  starve.  The  Marten  and  to  a  much  less  degree  the  Mink 
also  seem  to  be  influenced  in  a  similar  manner. 

Dr.  Merriam  ('86,  p.  306)  thinks  that  in  the  Adirondack  Mountains 
there  may  be  two  litters  in  a  season,  of  from  four  to  six,  the  former 
being  the  usual  number.     The  first  Utter  is  bom  late  in  May. 

Upon  Isle  Royale  in  addition  to  those  mentioned,  other  possible 
enemies  of  hares,  at  least  for  the  young,  may  be  the  weasels,  and  the 
hawks,  owls  and  the  Bald  Eagle. 

There  is  an  interesting  seasonal  variation  of  habitat  (Merriam,  '86, 
p.  305),  in  the  Adirondack  Mountains  of  New  York;  during  the  sum- 
mer they  tend  to  frequent  the  coniferous  forests,  and  in  winter  the 
swamps,  alder  and  spruce  thickets  bordering  lakes  and  beaver  mea- 
dows. 

Notes  on  Color  Variation. — A  series  of  27  specimens  was  secured  dur- 
ing July  and  August,  the  examination  of  which  shows  that  there  is  a 


412  MICHIQAN    SURVEY,    190S. 

considerable  color  variatioa.  In  order  to  nnderstaad  tbe  Bigoificance 
of  this  it  is  necesaary  to  have  a  general  idea  of  the  nature  of  the  aea- 
sonal  color  changes  of  the  Varying  Hare.  These  hares  have  a  brown 
summer  coat  and  in  winter  a  white  one;  and  from  this  seasonal  change 
or  variation  1b  derived  the  name  Varying  Hare.  The  difference  in  color 
is  due  to  a  change  of  pelage  which  occurs  in  tbe  spring  and  fall ;  as 
one  coat  is  shed  another  of  a  different  color,  grows  and  replaces  it, 
proving  conclusively  that  tbe  white  color  is  not  due  to  a  bleaching  of 
the  summer  coat  as  some  have  supposed.  Unfortunately  this  subject 
has  not  been  investigated  in  Michigan,  so  that  we  do  not  know  the  ex- 
act period  in  spring  and  fall  at  which  these  moults  take  place.  It 
wonld  be  of  valne  and  of  interest  to  know  how  the  time  of  monlting 
varies  in  different  parts  of  tbe  State. 

This  moulting  process  has  been  studied  in  detail  by  Allen  ('94),  from 
whose  paper  the  following  outline  of  the  laws  of  moulting  are  taken. 
The  fall  moult  (I.  c.  p.  121)  begins  "with  the  feet  and  ears,  the  sides 
of  the  nose  and  front  of  the  head,  which  often  become  radically  changed 
before  the  body  is  much  aflfected ;  while  as  regards  the  body,  the  change 
begins  first  at  the  base  of  the  tail  and  extreme  posterior  part  of  the 
back,  and  at  the  ventral  border  of  the  sides  of  the  body,  working  thence 
upward  toward  tbe  median  line  of  the  hack  and  from  behind  anter- 
iorly; the  crown  of  the  head  and  a  narrow  median  line  over  the 
Rhoulders  and  front  part  of  the  back  being  the  parts  last  changed.  In 
the  spring  the  order  of  change  is  exactly  the  revcrge,  the  moult  begin- 
ning on  the  bead  and  along  the  median  line  of  the  anterior  half  of  the 
dorsal  region,  extending  laterally  and  gradually  to  tbe  ventral  border 
of  the  sides  of  the  body  and  posteriorly  to  the  rump,  and  then  later  to 
the  ears  and  down  the  limbs  to  the  feet,  which  are  the  parts  last  af- 
fected, and  which  often  remain  but  little  changed  till  the  head  and  body 
have  pretty  completely  assumed  the  summer  dress." 

The  Museum  collection,  however,  contains  a  specimen  of  L.  amrricaii- 
us  phaenotve  Allen  (determined  by  E.  W.  Nelson)  from  Houghton. 
Mich.,  which  shows  that  the  earlv  stages  of  the  fall  moult  may  begin 
late  in  October  (No.  31S06,  Oct'Sft,  collector,  W.  H.  Grant),  as  the 
nose.  ears,  legs  and  lower  hind  parts  of  the  body,  are  well  advanced 
with  the  white  pelage.  The  hind  legs  are  only  slightly  mottled  with 
fulvous  although  the  upper  parts  of  the  fore  legs  still  retain  a  consider- 
able amount  of  this  color.  The  remainder  of  the  body  is  in  the  brown 
or  summer  pelage.  Two  April  specimens  Lepue  Omeriaantu  Erx.  (deter- 
mined by  E.  W.  Nelson i  from  Luzerne,  Oscoda,  Co.,  Mich.,  (No,  31-3%. 
31397,  collector,  J.  A.  Parmalee)  have  the  white  winter  coat,  and  the 
upper  parts  of  the  hind  feet  more  mottled  with  fulvous  than  in  the 
Houghton  specimen,  while  the  upper  parts  of  the  fore  feet  are  much 
more  fulvous.  It  is  hoped  that  by  calling  attention  to  the  fragmentary 
character  of  our  knowledge  of  the  moulting  of  the  Michigan  hares  others 
may  be  induced  to  secure  the  spring  and  fall  specimens  needed  to  com- 
plete the  history  of  this  process  in  northern  and  southern  Michigan. 

With  regard  to  the  moulting  of  the  Isle  Royale  hares,  but  little  is 
known,  but  a  few  observations  made  by  Max  M,  Peet  are  of  interest. 
The  following  notes  were  made  by  him  September  13,  1905,  at  Wash- 
ington Harbor:     A  large  Hare  whose  ears  and  the  upper  part  of  the 


ECOLOGY  OF   ISLE  ROTALB.  413 

hind  legs  were  conspicnoufily  white  crossed  the  Wendigo  road  (I,  'Oi), 
Others  were  seen  which  had  apparently  not  begun  to  change,  even  on 
the  ears  or  feet.  Two  were  shot  which  had  much  white  on  the  ears. 
In  general  the  adults  appeared  to  change  first.  Other  specimens  were 
seen  at  close  range  with  white  patches  on  the  legs,  especially  on  the 
hind  ones,  while  the  ears  were  apparently  unchanged. 

From  the  above  observations  it  seems  probable  that  the  Isle  Royale 
hares  begin  their  fall  moult  about  the  middle  of  September.  This  is 
somewhat  earlier  than  might  have  been  expected  from  the  observations 
of  Miller  made  at  Peninsular  Harbor,  Ontario,  on  the  north  shore  of 
Lake  Superior.  He  reports  ('97,  p.  8)  that  one  specimen  was  taken 
October  5,  in  which  the  white  winter  pelage  had  begun  to  appear  upon 
the  ears  and  butto<kB  untile  others  secured  "about  two  weeks  later 
had  nearly  completed  the  moult."  It  seems  likely  that  there  may  be 
a  considerable  amount  of  individual  variation  in  the  moulting  process. 
This  is  very  clearly  shown  by  an  examination  of  the  upper  sides  of 
the  hind  legs  in  the  series  secured  from  Isle  Royale. 

Oroffraphir.  Jfange.^^T\\e  typical  form  of  this  hare  has  an  extensive 
northward  range  from  Labrador  and  New  Brunswick  westward  thi-ough 
Ontario,  north  of  Lake  Superior;  Isle  Royale,  Michigan;  northwestward 
to  Alaska  and  the  tree  limit  on  the  north.  In  1900  Miller  (p.  117)  re- 
ported that  "The  northern  varying  bare  occupies  the  wooded  portions 
of  Labrador.  Its  southern  limit  is  not  definitely  known;  hut  the 
animal  does  not  reach  the  northern  border  of  the  United  States."  The 
specimens  found  last  season  (1904)  by  the  Museum  party  thus  appear 
to  be  the  first  recorded  from  the  United  States.  Miller  ('97,  p.  8) 
records  it  common  on  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior  and  Preble 
('02,  p.  59)  states  that  it  is  "quite  generally  distributed  throughout  the 
region  between  Lake  Winnipeg  and  Hudson  Bay." 

A  decayed  bare  was  found,  July  6,  upon  the  beach  in  a  cove  south  of 
the  Light-house  (I,  1).  It  was,  of  course,  impossible  to  determine 
whether  the  specimen  came  from  the  immediate  vicinity  or  bad  been 
washed  in  from  a  distance.  The  abundance  of  table  refuse(orange 
rinds,  chicken  bones?,  etc.)  stranded  at  the  head  of  this  cove  suggested 
that  at  least  part  of  the  material  came  from  the  open  lake  to  the 
northeast.  This  inference  is  further  supported  by  the  fact  that  the  lake 
currents,  as  mapped  by  Harrington,  favor  this  interpretation.  The 
occurrence  of  the  dead  hare  is  of  interest  in  connection  with  the  ques- 
tion of  the  direction  of  origin  of  the  mammal  fauna  upon  the  island 
and   its  relation   to  lake   currents   and   the   lake  drift. 

8.  Li/tix  cfJnntU'ttsis  Kerr.  Canada  Lynx.  A  lynx  skull  was  picked 
up  at  the  Ransom  clearing  (II,  1)  at  Rock  Harbor;  its  fractured  condi- 
tion suggested  that  it  had  been  killed  by  a  trapper,  Victor  Anderson  and 
son,  John,  secured  48  skins  during  the  winter  of  1903  and  1904.  Most 
of  these  were  from  about  three  miles  southeast  of  the  head  of  Bock 
Harbor,  in  the  vicinity  of  Lake  Richie.  Lynx  tracks  were  seen  abun- 
dantly on  the  jack  pine  ridge  on  the  north  side  •f  Conglomerate  Bay 
(I,  5),  also  along  the  trail  to  McCargoe  Cove,  from  the  top  of  the 
Greenstone  Range  to  the  end  of  the  trail.  William  Garnish,  of  Ash- 
land, Wis.,  was  camping  at  McCargoe  Cove  and  reported  that  lynx 
tracks  were  ahuudant  in   the   clearings  about  the  old  mines.     Tracks 


414  MICHIGAN    SURVEY.   1908. 

were  also  observed  on  the  top  of  the  Greenstone  Range  near  the  head 
of  Tobin  Harbor  {IV,  9).  A  few  tracks  were  noticed  in  the  small 
rock  clearings  in  the  forest  along  the  trail  from  camp  (V,  3)  to 
Siskowit  Lake  (V,  4).  Near  this  trail,  at  the  margin  of  a  tamarack 
swamp  (V,  5),  tracks  were  found  upon  hnmniockB,  and  in  another 
swamp  (V,  11)  in  the  sedge  zone.  Such  observations  suggests  that  the 
Lynx  roams  about  everywhere  through  the  swamps  and  over  the  ridges. 
Several  years  ago,  Mr.  J.  H.  Malone  secured  two  lynx  near  the  outlet 
of  Biskowit  Lake. 

I  secured  a  lynx  skull  from  a  mummjfled  body  found  hanging  on  a 
tree  where  it  had  been  left  by  Chas.  Preulx  along  the  Desor  trail 
(VII,  '04)  through  the  hardwoods.  Charles  Preulx,  Keeper  of  the 
Washington  Club,  has  for  several  years  trapped  lynx  at  the  head  of 
Washington  Harbor.  5Ioat  of  the  specimens  have  been  taken  along 
the  Desor  trail,  not  far  from  the  Club  House.  He  uses  fish  and  Hare 
for  bait.  During  the  past  summer  he  kept  one  alive  in  a  cage  for 
about  a  month,  and  then  sent  it  alive  to  Duluth,  Minn. 

In  September  Max  M.  Peet  often  saw  the  remains  of  Hare^  along 
the  Desor  trail  and  the  Wendigo  road,  evidently  marking  the  place 
where  a  lynx  had  taken  a  meal.  He  saw  two  live  lynx  on  the  Wendigo 
road  (I,  '04)  about  September  15;  and  a  few  days  previous  to  this 
Chas.  Preulx  also  observed  one  here.  Two  were  caught  in  Preulx's 
traps,  at  the  beginning  of  the  Desor  trail,  but  escaped. 

The  Lynx  apparently  wanders  about  over  ranch  of  the  island  and 
seems  to  frequent  in  particular  the  rocky  ridges,  at  least  the  tracks 
were  especially  abundant  in  such  places.  The  Hare  and  Red  Squirrels 
furnish  an  abundance  of  food  for  them.  Attention  has  already  been 
called  to  the  close  correlation,  noted  by  MacFarlane,  between  the 
abundance  of  Hai-e  and  Lynx  in  Canada. 

Ecological  .Votes.— The  life  history  of  the  Lynx,  in  outline,  is  as 
follows:  the  breeding  season  occurs  in  April  and  May;  in  dune  and 
July  from  two  to  five  and  occasionally  six  young  are  born  in  a  partly 
blind  condition.  They  are  "about  the  size  of  a  puppy"  and  are  suckled 
for  about  two  months  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  692).  Reference  has  else- 
where been  made  to  their  dependence  upon  Hares,  and  to  their  remark- 
able periodical  fluctuations  in  abundance.  In  their  native  haunts  the 
food,  in  addition  to  the  Hares,  consists  of  eggs,  birds  of  various  kinds, 
small  mammals  and  young  deer. 

Geographic  Range. — The  Lynx  has  an  extensive  range,  on  the  east 
from  New  Foundland;  Maine;  New  York;  Pennsylvania;  Isle  Royale, 
Mich.;  Mackenzie  Basin  to  Alaska,  and  northward  nearly  to  the  tree 
limit.  At  the  extremes  of  its  range  this  species  becomes  differentiated 
into  two  local  forms,  while  tlie  typical  form  has  an  extensive  range 
in  the  intermediate  territory.  It  has  also  been  found  in  the  Pleistocene 
deposits  of  IVunsylvania. 

Miller  {'HI,  p.  44)  states  that  he  has  no  authentic  record  of  the  Lynx 
for  Ontario.  On  account  of  their  abundance  on  Isle  Royale  this  swins 
rather  remarkable. 

9.  Slustcla  aiiuriaina  Turton.  Eastern  Mai-teu.  During  the  past 
season  Chas.  Preulx  took  eleven  Martens  along  the  Desor  trail  (III, 
'04)  among  the  maples.     Hollinger  secured  one  near  the  creek  {II,  '04) 


BCOLOOT   OF    ISLE    ROYALE.  415 

and -another  on  the  ridge  north  of  Bearer  Island.     Fish  were  used  ns 
bait. 

Ecological  Notes. — ^The  breeding  season  occurs  but  once  a  year,  dur- 
ing February  and  March,  and  the  yonng,  6  to  8  in  a  litter,  are  ttom 
blind.  Their  nests  are  made  preferably  in  hollow  trees,  under  logs, 
and  in  holes  in  the  ground  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  711).  or  by  robbing  a 
Kquirrel  of  its  neet  (Coues,  '77,  p.  95).  Its  food  conKistn  of  mire, 
squirrels  and  rabbits,  supplemented  by  other  small  animals  such  as 
birds  and  their  eggs,  frogs,  toads,  fish,  etc. 

This  animal,  as  well  as  the  Hare  and  Lynx,  shows  the  same  kind  of 
periodical  variation  in  abundance,  niid  MacFarlane  ('05,  p.  710)  brings 
fom'ard  tbe  following  interesting  observations  bearing  on  this  subject: 
"In  years  of  plenty  the  marten  is  very  numerous  throughout  the  entire 
northern  forest  region;  but  is  not  uniformly  so  at  the  same  time  in 
every .  section  of  country  all  over  the  immense  territories  covered  by 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company's  trading  operations.  When  it  is  abundant 
or  scarce,  say  in  the  northern  and  western  departments,  it  will  generally 
be  found  that  there  is  an  important  and  corresponding  increase  or 
deci-ease  in  the  southern  and  Montreal  departments.  The  nntiven  main- 
tain that  lynxes  and  martens  migrate  from  the  north  and  west  to  the 
east  and  south,  and  that  when  they  have  attained  their  height  in  num- 
bers for  several  reasons,  the  great  bulk  (no  section  is  ever  totally 
devoid  of  martens)  of  those  who  escape  capture  resume  the  return 
march  until  the  next  period  of  protracted  migration.  It  must  be  ad- 
mitted that  many  old  fur  traders  have  come  to  entertain  similar  views 
from  their  own  pergonal  experience  and  observation.  I  think  the 
aforesaid  twenty-five  years'  London  sales  statement  adds  strength  to 
the  migration  theory,  and  is  otherwise  of  some  interest."  The  natives 
also  maintain  that  there  is  a  fluctuation  in  the  birth  rate  corre^imnd- 
ing  to  this  periodical  abundance.  Such  migratory  tendencies  as  above 
mentioned  could  not  help  but  have  an  imjiortant  bearing  upon  the 
geographic  range  and  the  interbreeding  opportunities  of  these  animals. 

Geographic  Range.^—The  typical  form  of  this  species  has  a  range 
from  Labrador ;  Nova  Scotia ;  Massachusetts ;  Northern  Pennsylvania ; 
Quebec ;  Ontario ;  Michigan,  southern  Keewatin ;  Saskatchewan ;  Al- 
berta; south  on  the  mountains  into  Colorado;  Utah;  northwestward 
into  eastern  Oregon ;  Washington  and  British  Columbia ;  and  eastward 
to  Hudson  Bay  on  the  north  (Ehoads.  '02,  p.  445).  A  second  form, 
of  this  species  brumalis,  is  restricted  to  the  coast  of  Labrador;  a 
tiiird,  actuosa,  ranges  north  of  latitude  55°  to  the  tree  limit,  from  west- 
ern Labrador  westward  to  the  Rocky  Mountains  nearly  to  the  U.  S. 
boundary  and  westward  to  the  Coast  Ranges  of  British  Columbia  into 
Alaska;  a  fourth  form  abietinoides,  is  restricted  to  the  interior  of 
British  Columbia,  the  Selkirk  and  Gold  ranges;  and  a  fifth  ahieiicola, 
is  only  known  from  Saskatchewan.  So  much  differentiation  of  tbe 
type  seems  rather  remarkable  when  combined  with  tbe  marked  migra- 
tory tendencies  of  the  species  and  suggests  that  these  wanderings  may 
not  be  as  extensile  as  has  been  supposed  or  that  these  movements  are 
quite  local  in  character, 

10.  Pvtwius  vison  (Schreber).  N-ortheastern  Mink.  Three  speci- 
mens of  mink  were  secured  at  Isle  Boyale.    One  was  taken  at  camp 


416  MICHIGAN   SUKVXT,   1908. 

on  SiBkowit  Bay  (V,  1)  where  it  was  shot  by  N.  A.  Wood  at  the  water's 
edge  dnriDg  the  day  time;  the  second  specimen  was  eaught  in  the  fish 
house  at  Maione's  fishing  camp,  jnst  east  of  onr  camp  on  Siakowit 
Bay.  A  steel  trap  had  been  baited  with  a  Herring  by  Frank  Malone. 
The  third  specimen  was  taken  by  W.  A.  Maclean,  at  the  west  end  of 
Grace  Harbor. 

Victor  Anderson  saw  a  Mink  on  July  16,  on  the  mainland  at  Bock 
Harbor,  about  opposite  Middle  Island.  He  reported  it  as  abundant  on 
the  north  of  the  Isle,  at  Fish  Island,  during  the  winter  of  1903  and 
1904,  and  also  reported  it  from  Tobin  Harbor.  Charles  Preulx  secured 
18  skins  during  the  past  winter  at  Washington  Harbor,  most  of  which 
came  from  the  harbor  at  the  Club  House,  but  a  few  veie  found  upon 
the  neighboring  ridges. 

There  can  be  but  little  doubt  that  this  animal  is  of  general  distriba- 
tion  over  the  island  in  moist  and  wet  places.  To  what  degree  broken, 
mussel  shells  (Anodonta)  may  be  credited  to  the  Muekrats  alone  is 
uncertaio,  as  the  Mink  may  share  in  this  mischief. 

Max  M.  Feet  saw  numerous  mink  tracks,  Sept.  16.  (II,  '04)  along  a 
small  stream,  where  mink  had  eaten  a  Grinnell's  Water  Thrush,  Her- 
mit Thrush,  and  a  few  days  previously  an  Oven  Bird. 

An  entry  in  the  Universitv  Museum  Catalogue  records  a  specimen 
of  mink  (No.  3595)  from  Isle  Royale,  collected  in  1868  by  Dr.  J.  C. 
Gubbs,  and  presented  to  the  Museum  by  Dr.  A,  E.  Foote. 

Ecological  Notes. — The  breeding  season  for  mink  occurs  in  February 
and  March,  at  which  time  the  males  wander  about  a  great  deal;  the 
young  are  bom  about  six  weeks  later,  or  usually  in  April.  The  young, 
which  are  born  blind,  remain  so  for  about  five  weeks.  There  are 
usually  five  or  six  young  in  a  litter,  but  tiie  number  varies  and  there 
may  be  only  three,  and  it  is  reported  to  be  subject  to  a  periodical  in- 
crease similar  to  that  of  the  Hare.  When  on  the  increase,  there  may 
be  as  many  as  8,  10  or  12  m  a  litter  (MacFarlane,  '05,  p.  714).  In  each 
litter  one  sex  is  said  to  predominate  (Couea,  '77,  p.  182).  In  tbe  fall 
the  young  begin  to  shift  for  themselves,  as  Minks  live  solitary  lives,  not 
in  pairs,  and  may  frequently  be  seen  swimming  abont,  presumably  in 
search  of  new  quarters.  This  tendency,  with  the  wanderings  by  day 
and  night  of  the  males  during  the  breeding  season,  combined  with  his 
promiscuous  tendencies,  must  have  a  marked  influence  toward  favoring 
Interbreeding.  The  feinaies  reach  their  growth  in  about  a  year,  but  the 
males  require  about  a  year  and  a  half,  altiiough  they  are  somewhat 
smaller  than  the  females.  Their  nests  are  formed  in  burrows,  hollow 
logs,  muskrat  burrows  or  other  cavities,  and  the  female  makes  for  the 
young  a  compact  nest  out  of  leaves,  grass  and  straw,  and  lines  it  with 
her  own  fur. 

The  Mink  is  very  fierce,  and  so  courageous  that  it  will  not  hesitate  to 
attack  animals  larger  than  itself,  such  as  bares,  muskrats,  etc.  Its 
amphibious  habits  allow  it  to  procure  food  from  both  the  land  anil 
water:  Thus  snakes,  frogs,  mussels  and  fish  are  secured  from  the  water 
by  diving  (Webster,  '89,  p.  170),  while  birds  and  their  ^gs,  and  mam- 
mals are  found  on  land.  In  pursuit  of  its  prey,  Kennicott  ('58,  p.  103 1 
says :  "It  follows  the  track  by  scent,  like  a  dog," 


°X' 


ver  meat  ' 

oogTc 


ECOLOGY  OP   ISLE  ROYALB.  4X7 

North  America.  The  typical  form  however,  ranges  from  Labrador  ami 
the  Arctic  Bea,  westward  to  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior,  Ontario, 
to  the  Bocky  Mountains,  Michigan,  northern  Pennsylvania  and  Kew 
Tork.  Id  spite  of  its  activity,  four  other  forms  have  become  more  or 
less  differentiated  but  their  ranges  are  not  well  defined,  laoastria  oc- 
curs west  of  Hudson  Bay,  energumenus  from  Pacific  Coast  from  British 
Columbia  to  Alaska,  ingena  from  the  Yukon  Valley  and  vulvivagus 
from  the  Gulf  States. 

11.  Putoriua  cicognani  Bonap.  Bonaparte's  or  Least  Weasel.  Only 
one  specimen  was  secured,  and  thin  is  a  white  skin  taken  by  Michael 
Hollinger  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Club  House,  at  the  head  of  Washington 
Harbor,  on  December  31,  1904.   (No.  33010). 

Dr.  Merriam  ('96,  p.  6)  has  called  attention  to  the  close  correlation 
between  the  geographic  range  of  the  cioognani  group  of  weasels  and 
the  field  mice  (Microtua),  but  upon  Isle  Royale  these  mice  are  appar- 
ently lacking;  it  is  probable  therefore  that  the  White-footed  mice  form 
an  important  element  in  their  food. 

Ecologwal  Notea. — ^Very  little  seems  to  be  known  of  the  breeding 
habits  of  this  species.  It  is  reported  (Cones.  '97,  p.  109)  to  have  three 
litters  of  young  a  year,  with  four  or  more,  frequently  five,  in  a  litter. 
The  nest,  located  m  a  depression  in  the  ground  or  a  hollow  tree,  is  com- 
posed of  dry  vegetation.  The  female  shows  almost  unlimited  courage 
in  the  defenfie  of  her  young.  The  food  consists  of  small  mammals,  birds 
and  eggs,  and  insects.  As  to  its  native  habitat  preferences,  in  the  Adiron- 
dacks  Merriam  ('86,  p.  54)  says:  "It  inhabits  all  parts  of  the  wilder- 
ness, being  found  along  wa,ter-courses,  in  deep  swamps,  and  on  rocky 
ledges  and  mountain  sides."    Like  the  Mink,  it  tracks  its  prey  by  scent. 

The  seasonal  color  changes  of  this  weasel  are  of  special  interest. 
Bhoads  speaking  of  Pennsylvania  weasels  ('03,  p.  172)  says  "Bona- 
parte's weasel  always  turns  white  in  winter  even  in  its  most  southern 
distribution,  but  the  New  York  weasel  [P.  nnvfborfKfiisia]  in  the  tran- 
sition and  austral  zones  very  rarely  turns  white,  the  winter  pelage  be- 
ing merely  paler  than  that  of  summer." 

Geographic  Ran^e. — The  tj-pical  form  ranges  over  forested  areas 
of  I>abrador;  New  England;  New  York;  Pennsylvania,  in  the  moun- 
tains; Ontario;  Northern  Michigan;  Minnesota;  Colorado;  British  Co- 
lumbia and  Southeastern  Alaska.  In  1896.  Merriam  said :  "It  probably 
occurs  also  in  nortliern  Michigan  and  Wisconsin."  Merriam  ('96,  p. 
12)  recognizes  two  varieties:  richardaoni  ranging  from  British  Colum- 
bia and  the  interior  of  Alaska  to  Hudson  Bay,  and  alaacensts  from 
southern  Alaska. 

12.  Putoriua  noveboracenaia  De  Kay.  New  York  Weasel  or  Ermine. 
Two  specimens  were  secured;  one  a  small  pale  brown  skin  and  skull 
(No.  33015)  on  December  31,  1904,  by  Michael  Hollinger,  near  the  head 
of  Washington  Harbor,  and  the  other  a  much  larger  white  skin  taken 
in  January,  1905,  (No.  3-S019).  Both  of  these  specimens  are  referred 
to  this  species  with  donbt  hy  Dr.  Merriam. 

Ecological  Notea. — The  breeding  season  occurs  in  February  or  March, 
and  the  young  are  born  in  April  and  May.  The  number  of  young  in  a 
brood  appears  to  vary  greatly,  from  two  to  a  dozen,  although  four  to 
six  is  perhaps  the  average  number   (Coues,  '77,  p.  125,  134).     In  the 


418  MICHIGAN   SURTET,    190S. 

Adirondaoks  Merriam  ('86,  p.  60)  says  "from  four  to  six  young  are 
oommoaly  brought  forth  early  io  May."  The  female  is  smaller  than  the 
male. 

The  food  of  the  weasel  conBists  mainly  of  small  mammals  and  birds, 
but  even  animals  much  larger  than  itself,  as  the  ruffed  grouse,  cotton- 
tails, and,  about  settlements,  chiekene,  tall  to  its  share.  Upon  Isle 
Royale.  in  all  probability,  the  Hares  and  Grouse  come  into  this  class. 
Its  habit  of  rlimbing  trees,  while  of  great  advantage  to  it,  proves  to 
be  the  opposite  for  birds.  Like  the  Mink,  it  follows  its  prey  by  scent. 
Kpnnicott  ('58,  p.  106)  wa«  of  the  opinion  that  it  preferred  rocky,  hilly 
and  forested  regions.  The  frequency  with  which  it  occupies  the  bur- 
rows of  other  animals  suggests  that  it  does  not  burrow  with  ease,  al- 
thongh  according  to  Kennicott,  it  burrows  in  the  snow.  It  also  lives  a 
solitary  life. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  two  seasonal  moults  of  this 
species  as  compared  with  the  Least  Weasel.  This  color  change,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  Varying  Hare  and  Red  Squirrel,  is  due  to  a  fall  and 
spring  shedding  of  the  old  pelage  and  to  the  growth  of  a  new  one. 
Winter  specimens  from  the  vicinity  of  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.,  vary  in  color 
from  dark  brown,  through  chocolate  colored  specimens,  to  white.; 
while  specimens  taken  November  fi  (No.  34139)  and  November  18  (No. 
S0019)  are  white  excepting  a  suffusion  of  pale  brown  hairs  along  the 
mid  dorsal  line,  the  former  specimen  having  much  more  brown,  espec- 
ially on  the  head  and  neck. 

Gcogi-aphic  Range. — Routhem  Maine ;  New  York ;  Pennsylvania ; 
New  Jersey;  south  to  North  Carolina  and  west  to  Illinois;  and  north 
to   Michigan.     A  southern   variety,  noting,  occurs  in   North   Carolina. 

13.  Myotis  svbulatus  (Say).  Say's  Brown  Bat.  Only  two  speci- 
mens of  this  species  were  secured ;  one  by  means  of  a  broom  in  the  case 
of  one  which  entered  the  Club  House  on  the  evening  of  August  23, 
1005,  and  the  other  on  September  4,  was  also  taken  in  the  house  at 
Singer's  resort  near  the  mouth  of  Washington  Harbor. 

Erologieal  yotex. — The  females  usually  give  birth  to  t^v'o  young  (cf. 
Merriam,  '86,  p.  195).  Some  species  of  bats  migrate  southward  from 
the  northern  part  of  their  range  (Rhoads,  '03,  p.  209,  Howell,  '08). 
This  species  has  been  known  to  enter  abandoned  houses  in  such  vast 
numbers  as  to  become  an  intolerable  nuisance,  nearly  10,000  having 
been  killed  in  one  house,  (Smith.  Ann.  Kept,  for  1861,  pp.  40740))). 
They  take  flight  not  only  at  dusk  but  at  nearly  dawn,  and  their  flight 
toward  and  over  water  has  suggested  that  not  only  food  but  water 
is  sought  there. 

Geographic  Range. — Nova  Scotia;  Rupert  House,  Quebec;  Ontario; 
Maine;  Mn^s.;  New  York;  Penn.;  Md.;  Va.;  West  Va.;  Tennessee;  Mich- 
igan; Indiana;  Illinois:  Missouri;  Wisconsin;  Minnesota;  Colorado; 
Allierta.  There  is  a  variety  of  this  species,  Kernii,^  occurring  in  British 
Columbia, 

14.  Mi/otis  liicifugus  (Le  Conte).  I^e  Conte's  Brown  Bat.  Nine 
specimens  of  this  8i)ecies  wei'C  secured  by  Max  M.  Peet  between  August 
23  and  September  6,  at  Washington  Harbor  (I.  '04).  At  dusk  several 
were  shot  while  flying  over  the  Harbor. 

A  few  bats  were  seen  on  wing,  which  perhaps  belonged  tcvtfais  aned^a. 


ECOLOGT  OP   ISLE  ROT  ALB.  41 » 

as  it  was  apparently  the  moat  abundant  form,  or  to  M.  suhnJatus.  The 
laat  bat  seen  on  the  wing  by  Peet  was  about  Washiupton  Harbor, 
September  15.  A  small  dark  colored  bat  was  startled  from  a  loose 
projecting  rock  on  the  face  of  the  cliflf  on  the  jack  pine  ridge  (I,  5). 
A  few  days  later  one  was  flushed  at  nearly  the  same  place.  A  bat 
flew  into  the  Lighthouse  at  Rock  Harbor  hot  was  not  secured.  Bats 
were  also  seen  at  camp  on  Siskowit  Bay  (V,  3).  One  epecimm  was 
taken  in  1904  by  Peet  at  Washington  Harbor. 

Two  specimens  were  received  from  Michael  Hollinger,  who  secured 
them  November  30,  1904,  at  the  Club  House  (I,  '04).  These  evidently 
hibernated  in  the  cellar  as  they  were  found  on  wing  in  the  house  after 
a  fire  had  been  built  in  the  cellar. 

This  species  had  previouslv  been  collected  from  Isle  Royale  by  B.  A. 
Hoops,  No.  5310,  U.  S.  Nat.  Mns.  (Allen,  '93,  p.  80).  Allen  also 
records  three  epecimens  from  Grosse  Isle,  Mich.,  collected  by  Rev.  C. 
Fox,  (No.  5500,  5501,  5505  U.  B.  N.  M.) ;  another  specimen  {No.  5354) 
was  taken  by  8,  F.  Baird  on  the  Detroit  River.  Miller  in  his  revision 
of  the  family  Vcapertilionidae  (1897)  examined  no  Michigan  specimens 
of  this  species. 

JEcologioal  Notes. — On  account  of  the  difficulties  in  determining  bats, 
their  life  histories  are  much  confused.  This  species  Todd  found  hiber- 
nating in  the  caves  of  Pennsylvania  (Bhoads,  '02,  p.  208),  and  the 
November  specimens  show  that  it  hibernates  on  Isle  Royale. 

Geographic  Range.  This  bat  has  the  most  extensive  geogi-aphic  range 
of  any  of  the  mammals  on  Isle  Royale.  The  typical  form  ranges  from 
southern  Alaska  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  throughout  North 
America,  yet  in  spite  of  its  powers  of  locomotion,  two  local  forms  are 
known;  longicrus  ranges  from  Pnget  Sound  and  Wyoming  south  to 
northern  Mexico  and  Lower  California,  and  ahiscensig  which  is  restrict- 
ed to  the  northern  British  Columbia  and  the  coast  region  of  southern 
Alaska.  The  differentiation  of  these  forms,  in  the  case  of  a  flying 
mammal,  suggests  that  the  mountains  form  to  some  degree  a  true 
barrier  within  the  range  of  this  species. 

15.  Veapertilio  fuecus  Beauv,  Brown  Bat.  One  specimen  was  taken 
at  Washington  Harbor  (I,  '04)  on  August  19. 

Ecological  Xotes. — Fisher  (Merriam,  '86,  p.  184)  remarks  that  this 
species  is  the  last  to  appear  in  the  evening  and  that  they  are  "parti- 
cularly fond  of  fields  well  surrounded  by  trees."  It  is  an  abundant 
species  about  human  habitations  and  hibernates. 

Ocographic  Range. — The  typical  form  of  this  species  ranges  from 
California  over  the  United  States  except  Florida,  and  northward  into 
British  Columbia  and  Ontario,  There  are  eight  forms  of  the  species 
ranging  over  tbe  West  Indies  and  south  into  Guatemala  and  Oosta 
Rica. 

V.     References. 
Adams,  Chas.  C. 

1905.     The  Postglacial  Dispersal  of  the  North  American  Biota.    Biol. 
Bull.,  9,  pp.  53-71. 
Allen.  H. 

1893.     A  Monograph  of  the  Bats  of  North  America.     Bull.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  No.  43.  ,=byG00gIe 


420  MICHIGAN   SURVEY,   1908. 

Allea,  J.  A. 

1874,  On  Geographical  Variation  in  Color  among  North  American 

Squirrels.     Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  His.,  XVI,  pp.  276-294. 
Allen,  J.  A. 
1894.    On  the  Seasonal  Change  of  Color  in  the  Varying  Hares  (Ivcpns 
amerlcanufi  Exrl.).     Bull  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hie.,  VI,  pp.  107- 
128. 
Allen  J.  A. 

18dO.     On  Seasonal  Variations  in  Color  in  Sciurus  hudBonicus.    Bull. 
Am.  Mas.  Nat.  His.,  Ill,  pp.  41-44. 
Allen  J.  A. 

1898.  Revision  of  the  Chickarees,  or  North  American  Red  Bqnirrels 

(Suhgenns  Tamiaseiurus).    Bull.  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  His.,  X,  pp. 
249-298. 
Allen,  J.  A. 

1899.  The  North  American  Arboreal  Squirrels.    Am.  Nat.,  XXXIII. 

pp.  635-642. 
Baird,  S.  P. 

1857.     Mammals.     "Pacific  Railroad   Surrey  Report."     VIII. 
Bangs,  0. 

1896,    Notes  on  the  Synonomy  of  the  North  American   Mink,  with 
Description  of  a  New  Subspecies,    Proe.^ost.  Soc.  Nat.  His., 
XXVII,  pp.  1-6.    Pis.  1  &  2. 
Batchelder,  C.  F. 
1896.    Some  Facts  in  R^ard  to  the  Distribution  of  Certain  Mammals 
in  New  England  and  Northern  New  York.     Proc.  Bost.  6oc. 
Nat.  HJs.,  XXVII,  pp.  185-193. 
Bell,  R. 

1898.     On    the    Checkeree,    or    Red    Squirrel    (Scinms    Hadsonicnn 
(Pennant).     In  W.  Mill's  The  Nature  and  Development  of 
Animal  Intolligence,  pp.  75-78.     New  York. 
Caton,  J.  D. 

1877.    The  Antilope  and  Deer  of  America.     New  York. 
Coues,  E.  and  Allen,  J.  A. 
1877.    Monc^aph  of  North  American  Bodentia.    Report  of  the  V.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  of  the  Territories  (Hayden).    XI.  Dept  of  the 
Interior.     (Oontaii^  a  valuable  bibliography  of  N.  A.  Mam- 
mals, pp.  255-264,  951-1081.) 
Coues,  E. 

1877.     Fur-bearing  Animals:   a   Monf^raph   of  the   North   American 
Mustelidae.     U.  8.  Geol.  Survey  of  Territories   (Hayden). 
Miscel.  Pub.  No.  8. 
Coues,  E.  and  Yarrow,  H.  C. 

1875.  Report  upon  the  Collections  of  Mammals  made  in  Portions 

of  Nevada,  Utah,  California,  Colorado.  New  Mexico  and 
Arizona,  during  the  years  1871,  1872,  1873  and  1874.  Re- 
]>ort  ui>on  Geographical  and  Geol.  Explorations  and  Surveys 
West  of  the  One  Hundredth  Meridian  (Wheeler).  V,  pp. 
35-129,  969-976. 


3y  Google 


ECOLOGY    OP    ISLE    ROYALE.  421 

Elliot,  D.  G. 

1905.     A  Check  List  of  Uammals  of  the  North  American  Continent, 
the  West  Indies  and  the  Neighboring  Seas.    Field  Columbian 
Mas.,  Pub.  105.    Zool.  8er.  VI. 
Roosevelt,  T.  and  Others. 

1902.    The  Caribou.    The  Deer  Family,  pp.  257-287.    New  York. 
Foster,  J.  W.  and  Whitney,  J.  D. 

1850.  Report  on  the  Geology  and  Topography  of  a  Portion  of  the 

Lake  Superior  Land  District  in  the  State  of  Michigan.  Part 
1,  Copper  Lands,  House  Ex.  Doc,  1  Series,  31  Cong.  IX. 

1851.  Report  on  the  Geology  of  the   Lake   Superior    Land    District. 

Pt  2,  The   Iron    Region.    Senate    Doc.  Special  Seas.  33nd 
Cong.  III. 
Georgeson,  C.  C. 

1904.  Reindeer  and  Caribon.    U.  S.  Dept.  Agrie.    Bureau  of  Animal 

Industry,     Circular  No.  55.     Also  20th  Ann.  Rept.  Bureau 
of  Animal  Industry,  1903,  pp.  377-390. 
Grant,  Madison. 

1902.    The  Caribou.    Seventh  Ann.  Rept.  N.  Y.  Zool.  Soc. 
Oillman,  Henry. 

1873.    The  Caribou  on  Lake  Bnperior.    Amer.  Nat.,  VII,  p.  751. 
Hay,  O.  P.    ■ 

1902.    BibH<^aphy  and  Catalogue  of  the  Fossil  Vertebrata  of  North 
America.  Bull.  tT.  S.  Geol.  Survey,  No.  179. 
Howell,  A.  H. 

1908.    Notes  on  Diurnal  Migrations  of  Bats.    Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash., 
XXI,  pp.  35-38. 
Herrick,  C  L.  and  Herrick,  0.  Jndson. 

1891.  Biol(^cal   Notes  upon   Fiber,   Geomys  and   Erethiz-on.     Bull. 

Sci.  Lab.  Denison  Univ.,  Vol.  VI,  pp.  15-25. 
Herrick,  C.  L. 

1892.  Mammals  of  Minnesota.    Geol.  and  Nat.  Hist.  Survey  of  Minn- 

esota, Bull.  No.  7. 
Jackson  C.  J. 
1850.    Geological  and  Mineralogical  Reports.     Senate  Doc.  1  Sees. 

3l8t  Cong.,  Ill,  pp.  371-935. 
Eennicott,  R. 

1857.  The  Quadrupeds  of  Illinois,  Injurious  and  Beneficial  to  the 

Farmer.  Rept.  of  the  Comm.  of  Patents  for  the  year  1856. 
Agriculture,  pp.  52-110. 

1858.  The  Quadrupeds  of  Illinois,   Injurious   and    Beneficial  to  the 

Farmer.  Report  of  the  Comm.  of  Patents  for  1857.  Agricul- 
ture, pp.  72-107. 

Lane,  A.  C. 
1898.    Geological  Report  on  Isle  Royale,  Michigan.     Geol.    Surv.    of 
Michigan,  VI,  Pt.  1. 

MaoFarlane,  B. 

1905.  Notes  on   Mammals  Collected  and   Observed  in  the  Northern 

Mackenzie  River  District,  Northwest  Territories  of  Canada, 
with  Remarks  on  Explorers  and  Explorations  of  the  Far 
North.     Pro.  V.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XXVIII,  pp.  673-764. 

Google 


422  MICHIGAN   StJKVEY,   1908. 

Merriam,  C,  Hart. 

1886.  The  Mammals  of  the  Adirondack  Region.  New  York. 
Marfan,  L.  H. 

18(i8.  The  American  Beaver  and  His  Works.  Philadelphia. 
Miller,  G.  S.  Jr. 

1897.  KoteB  on  the  Mammals  of  Ontario.    Proc,  Bost.  Soc.  Xat.  His,. 

XXVIII,  pp.  1-44. 
1897a.     Revision  of  the  North  American  Bata  of  the  Family  Vesper- 

tilionidae.     N.  A.  Fauna,  No.  13,  U.  8.  Etept.  Agric,  Div. 

of  Biol.  Surv. 
1900.     Key  to  the  Land  Mammals  of  Xortfaeastem  North  America. 

Ball.  N.  Y.  State  Mnsenm,  No.  38. 
Osgood,  W.  H. 

1909.     Revision   of   the   Mice   of   the   American   Qenus   PeromyBCua. 

North   Amer.  Fauna,  No.  28,   U.  8.  Dept  Agr.,  Bur.  Biol. 

8urv. 
Osgood,  W.  H.  and  Bishop,  L.  B. 
1900.    Results  of  a  Biological    Beconnissance    of   the   Yukon    River 

Region.    North  Amer.  Fauna,  No.  19,  U.  8.  Dept.  of  Agric, 

Div.  of  Biol.  Survey. 
Preble,  E.  A. 
1902.     A  Biological  Investigation  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Region.    North 

Amer.  Fauna,  No.  22,  U.  8.  Dept.  of  Agric,  Div.  of  Biol. 

Surv. 
1908.    A  Biological  Investigation  of  the  Atliabaska-Mai^keDzie  R^ion. 

North  Amer,  Fauna,  No.  27,  U.  8.  Dept.  Agr,,  Bur.  Biol. 

Surv. 
Rhoads,  8.  N. 

1898.  ContribntiouB  to  a  Revision  of  the  North  American  Beavers, 

Otters  and  Fishers.    Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.,  N.  8.  XiX,  pp. 
417-439. 

1902.  Synopsis  of  the  American  Marten.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  8ci,  Phila., 

Uv.  pp.  443-4fi0. 

1903.  The  Mammals  of  Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey.    Philadelphia. 
Taylor,  F.  B. 

1905.     A  Short  History  of  the  Great  Lakes.    Dryer's  Studies  in  Indi- 
ana Geography,  {Terre  Haute),  pp.  00-111. 
Webster,  C.  L. 

1889,     Obsen-ations  on  Putorina  vison,    Amer.  Nat.,  XXIII,  pp.  17C- 
177. 


3y  Google 


jiGoogle 


jiGoogle 


INDEX. 


DiBlradbiGOOgle 


jiGo.ogle 


224,    22B,    2B5 

AcadUo    owl     104,118 

AcaatblDDl&  barpa   '^4.  26.  77,  282,  284 

Acarlnn 25."( 

Acclpiler    atrlcaplUnB    a4a 

cooperl     -• 348 

Acclplter  veloi   348 

Acer  penn«;]TBiiiciiai   238 

Bsccharum     224,  2117 

BplcBtum    r 23« 

Aceraceae    237 

Achillea  mlllerollum 222 

Acldata  creanla   200 

Acmacops  prolens   ^ 300 


AcroaDtbes  moDopbrlla   230 

Acaea  rubra   , 240 

Actltis  macnlaria   340 

Adams,  C.  C 1,  121,  148,  149,  152.  1S7,  240,  283.  300.  308,  310. 

325,  328.  320.  338.  380.  303,  402,  410 

Adder's  tongoe   231 

Adelocera  brevlcoraJi   190 

Adlantnm  pedatom   232 

Aerial  fauna 84.72 

AeKbna 17.  19,  22,  27,  30,  84,  72,  203,  204.  30r, 

Aeacbna   altcheoala    263,  2<t.'> 

Aeacbnldae 283 

Agabaa    161 

Acabaa  congener 27,  66,  100,  104 

strldulator   104 

Agatbldlum  revolveoa   20.'S 

Agelalua  phoenlceua  fortia   3t;2 

Agelenldae    2^7, 

Aglala  mllberti    268.  270 

Agrllna  acutlpennis   108 

AgTloUmai  campeatrlB   24,  281.  287 

Agrionidae   28i* 

Agrlopldae   2ri>l 

Agrlotea  Ilmosna  ■ 107 

Agroatla  byemalla   23;t 

Alaaka,  Inaect  fauna 163,  181.  180.  206,  208.  301,  311.  313,  328 

Alaska,  Bft  Ruaalan  America 181 

Alberla.   Inaect  fauna    184,  32S 

Alder  Flycatcher ; 86,  lO.V  118,  33B.  3r.!) 

Alden 11.  13.  IS.  17.  II),  25,  28,  20.  38,  08,  85.  86.  80.  08.  101.  130 

Algonqula  tlmea,  blatory  of  Superior  baaln 35,  37,  GO,  .'.1 

Allen,  J,  A.,  mammala  42(1 

AlQOa  ainobetala    220, 237 

Incana    219.  226,  237 


P«ge. 

Alpine  «□<]  Arctic.  InsectB IW 

AlBinc  lOQglfolla    240 

Anw™    Impundlnillli 204 

Amant  Utior    204 

Aroturoblui  bennettl    77.  86.  2n3.  2SS 

Ambljaclnea  ylallB    388,  273  2T5 

AmeliDcbler    14, 32 

slDlfolla    17,  20,  237 

olIgocariMt    20.  28.  23T 

American  Inwcta    -...160.   ITO,   ITS-lTn,   271,  315 

American  asiwn 236 

American  bitlern    138.  33S.  34S 

brookllme    248 

coot    338 

crow     .■.,.330,362 

«(«  Tlolet  2*3 

elder 249 

Bj  honej-BDCtle   ,. 247 

BoldOneh    3S8 

foabaVk    330,340 

hawk  owl   340, 15^ 

bcrrlns  ^1    339.342 

larch    235 

merganaer 82,  88.  90-94.  118.  137,  33»,  34  I 

aontitalD  ash    237 

mprey 380,  351 

pipet 108,  109,  113,  119.  339,  860,  379    380 

redstart   339.379 

robin   339. 3S5 

■caap 118,  339.  S46 

aparrow  hawk   S30.  351 

■tar-flower    245 

tropical  center  188 

j-ew    S8« 

Ammophlla    08. 319 

Amnleola  Umoaa   64.294 

luatrlcB    64.  281,  294 

AmnopbtU    68 

Amp«llB  eedrorum   370 

Amphibia    830.  SSI 

AmphLpod  crustacoinB   IS,  64.  24n,  252,  253 

Anacardlaceae    243 

AnaphalU  margarltarca    248 

Anaspls  rufa   803 

Aoatla  13-puncla(a   68 

IS-puncInta    158,19a 

Aoai  Junius 263.  303 

Aoclstrocerus  caprs   320 

AocIslroceruB  pcrtlnai   320 

AncylUH   78,  2S1,  29.1 

Ancrmphorus  planus   ., 206 

Andrenldae    ^ 319 


polKolia   20",  230,  244 

Anemone   multlllda    241 

Angleworm    30 

Aufcleworm  lake  , 390 

Anlaloma  asslmlllB   20r> 

Annelids   25fl 

AnodoDla    418 

Krandls 03 

Rrandls  footlana 16-19.  61,  64.  294,  407 

marglnala   20,  61,  68,  2S5 


Anophaila  margsrltac«a   270 

AMala  pleilppus   C8.  268,  2T1,  274.  275 

Antbonomna  coftuIhb   211 

AnibopbBKiu  yertlcalti 200 

ADt 12.  15,  22.  28,  30,  65,  67.  68-75.  77.  95.  221,  236.  317,  825 

Anltieinols  sp.   818 

Anthomjidae    315 

Anthrax   fulTlana    811 

morlo    311 

BemiDlgra.   811 

AntboB  pena^lvaalcus   '. 879 

Aotiopa  butterO;    270 

Antnwtomus  Toclferna 358 

Ant-lton   262 

ApBDtelCB  ip.   321 

Apbla -  313 

Aplon  ap 211 

Aplexa  bjpnoruni   , 292 

Apocjoaeeae '. 24-^ 

Apocrnnn  androaatriDltollDm    245 

Apple  famllr   237 

Aqallegia  canadeaalg   240 

Armbhi  bracbycarpa 241 

Araceae    „ 233 

ATacbDlda   30.  258,  258 

Amdldae    261 

Andoa  abbaa  S61 

Anna  blaplda   244 

nodlcaulli    220,  244 

Arbor  iltae 11,  IS,  16-18.  22-24,  26-80,  65,  66,  68,  78,  81.  84.  1S»,  150,  233 

Arctic  dlatrlct 171 

Arctic  pearl-wort   240 

rkspberr;    242 

three-toed  woodpecktr  119,  142.  840,  3B.% 

Arctoatapbjloa  BTa-ural   222,  224,  244 

AtetbDia  bnlbosa   230 

Argyonl.    22 

atlantlB 21.  64,  72-74.  267,  269,   270.  273,  27.". 

cfprla    267,  269,   275 

myrlua   72 

Argyroaomna  artedl   33<> 

nlgrlplnnla   3,10 

Arid  de«rta 131 

Arlatotocblaceae    240 

Arlaona,  iDsecla 185,  168,  171,   172.   174.  175,  177.  312 

AroniB  Dlfra    237 

Arpedlnm  Bp 2IM 

Arrow-graaa  bmllr   23.T 

Arsapnia  vemalls 308 

ArtcmlBla  canadeoilB   222,  24S 

Artbemla   bntterflj    271 

Artlflclal  clesrfnKB,  Inserla   ,. 77 

Arum   (amilT    . . .  .i 238 

Aaanim  canadeoae   240 

Aacleplaa  Incamata 2T1 

ABllIdae     308.312 

AalUd  aio    74 

AsDni  abnulatoa 22,  74.  813 

AbIo  magellaolcuB  occfdeDtalla   352 

Aapeo n.  14,   lS-31,  24.  25.  27,  28.  31,  76,  85-87,  OS.  95.  139,   140,  159,  102 


,  Google 


430  INDEX. 

Aapen-blrch  isiioctBtlon   139,  111 

Aspbodel   as 

Aspleaiam  trlchomaDea  231 

Astet  blKotlcaallB   249 

macropbrllQi 1!,  14,  20-22.  23,  28,  28,  78,  226.  24T 

pUrmaroidM    222.14)4 

AtUotU  bntterfl)'   280 

AtmOBpherlc   InBnences    41 

Atlldae    267 


Aulocamlum  palustre   230 

AtIbd  eDTlroniD«ntB 128.   18S,   )60.  151 

formations   131 

BucceasloD    134. 14T 

Aj'tbr*  marllB   346 


Bald  eagle 88.  118.  340,  840.  350,  411 

Baldpate   118.  SSft.  S49 

BbIwid 11-16.  IT,  20.22,  24-28.  30,  67,  «8.  73,  7*.  76,  77,  81,  82,  84. 

80,  04,  06   fl8.  101,  ISO.  ]«1 

nalBam  Hri 220.  224.  22S,  235.  237 

gnuiDdsel    24B 

poplar    23S 

Balaam-birch  foreal   11,  IG.  27 

Balnm-Bpruce  fofMt 11.  24-27,  30.  M,  66,  74-76,  1*1,  101,  16S;  252,  254,  2S« 

BalBim-wblte  Bprure  foreat   12. 131) 

Bank  swallow   »»0.  370 

Barn  Bwallo*    83,  03,  04,  330,  STO 

BBrometrlc  prpBunre Ill 

Barren  gronWl,  mBmnals 896.  308 

Itarren  BtrBwberrjr   242 

BartramlB  pomirormlti    230 

BBBllarcbiB  artfapnilB 10,  22,  20,  68.  70-74.  268.  270,  371.  274.  27.*! 

lorqulDll    2TI 

BassBrFUfl  mammirpr    210 

BBtbnsropiiB  pninl    281 

BatB 16,  22.  301,  302.  305.  4in 

Ba^berrr   tamlij    240 

Baj-breaRled  warbler 82,  83,  87.  01.  100,  118,  SSO,  37,-. 

Barfleld  bwtieg   160,  161,  191 

ReBcbes 9,  10,  66,  68.  257 

Ileaked  bas«l    28,  30,  286,  403 

Bean   T.  F...  Alberta  Inaerl  fauna 164 

B«BriH>rrj- 11.  12.   17.  ^iO.  22.  23.  E6,  38.  71-74,  222,  241 

Beaver    301.  393,  395.  402 

Beaver  dams   402,  403 

Beaver  iBland   101.  300,  4ir. 

Btanr  I.Bhe    390 

Bewh  (arally   237 

Beetle  assorlatlDna.   succewilOD   nf ■. 160.  163 

Beetles 12,  13.  10,  20.  23,  24,  l-fl.  27.  31,  0.1.  73.  7r.,  77,  1S7-163.  182,  183.  18»-a92,  304 

Bell-flower  fBioEly   247 

llellBmirB  BcalnrlK    ; 200 

Bellona  butterflj- 269 

BeloBtama    20, 260 

BeloitomBtldae    260 

Belled  klnKfiobir 330.  353,  354 


D,gt,zedbyGOO<^IC 


IKS,  leoT^ 

carlnula    SB,  103 

eoncolM    204 

srapel    193 

pl(.natiiD     204 

tranirenal*    1S2 

variegatHBi    1B8 

Tenlcolor    183 

Btntoa   brook 1,   7.   16.  ««,   85-ST.   2lf4.  2T2.  SSO.  831.   MT.  SSI.   353. 

3S4,  SSe,  3eO-S«2.  864,  396.  Ses,  3TO-3T2,  8T5,  3TT-3T0.  3S2,  384 

lake  7,  16,  878 

lake,  aee  Lake  Benson. 

BetanaoD   blEtminstui    208 

BetnU  lenU    224,  287,  238 

Intel    224.  287,  288 

papTrtfeM    224,  22B,  286 

Retnlaceae    288 

BIcknelt's  Cranebll)    242 

BlOdarla   UppBotana   77, 38S 

Blogeegnphlcal  alBnltlet,  Inaect*   IBO 

Bloia    3 

Biota,  itatloni    6 

Blotle  mcceralon 147 

BIrcb 12,  14-18,  20-22,  24^81.  TS,  84-80,  »2,  »S,  .98,  101.  104,  163.  2?? 

Bird  tire 1,  10.  26.  81,  82,  80.  Bl.  121.  12S 

Bird   wa»m   100.  108,  110 

Blrdi,  annotated  lUt 8ST 

Btrthwort  tamll7   240 

Bittern    90,  IBB 

Black  and  wblte  warbler 90,  92.  101.  lOB,  889.  872 

Black  aab   IB.  30 

birch    224,  237 

HI** 17,  86,  72.  73.  99,  S01> 

HIllB.  red  sqQlrrel  402 

oak   80 

BUck-polI  «arbl«r 101-103.  106,  lOB,  114-116,  118,'3ai>,  ^^Te,  379 

Black  ipnjce 16-17,  21.  22,  26,  20,  <6,  ISO,  220.  221,  22S.  23^ 

Black-billed  enckoo  85,  339,  8S3 

Black'flD     330 

Black-beaded   mloDow S2B.  330 

Black-tbroated  bine  warbler 82  84,  ST.  91,  95.  105.  100,  118,  839,  873 

green  warbler 13,  13,  82.  84,  8S,  87,  89.  91.  95,  101,  lOS, 

109,  lis.  140,  S3B.  870 

Bladderwort  familr   24t) 

Blake'a  Point    391 

Blattella  Bemunlca   200,  300,  302 

300    ■ 


..101,193 


Bine  bird  104,  108.  117,  339.  886 

flaca    17,  20.  28 

hare-betl    247 

Jay 86,  01,  117,  840,  800 

Blne-fln    330 

Blae-headed  vlreo  103.  100.  118,  372 

Blnndera,  tatalltlea  of  blrda 110 

Ba«  aiaoclatloQB,  beetles  101 

■oeletlea 217 

violet   240 

Bog-toreat  awoclatlon   139 


3y  Google 


Bolctobiai    28 

clnotlcolUs  TT,  166,  190 

cingnlatuH   ' 205 

Bombldae    S17 

BombaB   Tit 

Botnbus  conslmilli 31T 

■p. 317 

terrlcols   78,  77.  31 T 

Bombrllldke    306,311 

Bonapartea  weani    417 

Boroi  unlcolor    211 

Botaurna  lentlKlDoaua   S4S 

Botrrchlum   lanBTlB    231 

Tlrgtolcum    S31 

Bottled  BeotlAn    246 

Bottom  lauoa  ol  lake 83 

BracoDldae    321 

Bradjcellua  cordlcolUa   201 

Brake  fern 21 

BrmntB  canadensis 846 


BraaeDla  purpurea   240 

BraallLan  sdrpe.   Insects. 116 

Breeding  birds 389-843,  844,  346.  S47,  848-364,  8S8,  801,  804.  86S-379,  881-SB6 

Brentbta  bellooft  2«T.  2«»,  2T8,  275 

epithore    27.t 

myrlna   267,  269.  278.  27B 

Brlatlr   gooseberry    242 

aaraaparllla    244 

Btitiab  America.  iDMCta  328 

Columbia   ._ 810-313,  810.  408 

Britten  dwarf  raapberry   242 

Broad-wtnged  bawk  109,  IIS,  119,  339,  349 

Bronied  grackl«   124.  366,  S3S 

Brook  atlcbleback    331 

troat    330 

Brown  liat 890,  893,  419 

creeper 84.  91,  96,  99,  118,  380.  381,  383 

R.  A ),  21.   1».  887,  380 

Bryum  palleus   230 

Bnckbean IT.  18.  20,  20.  29,  30.  219,  246,  2B2 

Balfalo,  Inaects  191 

Buto  amerlcanuH   881 

Bolb-bearlng    loosestrife 248 

Bulrush    10,88 

Bumblebees    78.76 

.    Bunch  berry    29 

Bunch-flower  family  238 

BupreeCldae    19T.  200 

Bupresllds    77 

BuprestlB   fasclata    198 

macullyentrlB    197 

striata   169. 198 

Burned  area  association   140 

Bumlogs.  vegetation   229 

Busb  honeyBDckle   14,  21.  E47 

Buteo  borealls  349 

llneatiis    348 

plalypterus    349 

Butterflies 10,  11,  15,  16.  21.  E2,  29,  30,  04,  07.  08,  70-73,  273,  274.  27fl 

Butterwort    222,246 

Byrrhldae 207 

Byrrhus  (Kmlnatus   


■.g\- 


c. 

Page. 

CiddlB  flj  and  larrae 10,  23,  02,  M.  6T,  TO,  71 

C*lamagn>«tts   mudeDsIa    2S3 

Calandrldac    2«S 

CalatkM     2«,  ISO 

adrena     77,  lOS 

adTCOB  var.  mollla 204 

sr«garla>    103 

Callforola,  Inwct  (aana 146.  I6S,  168-171,  173-177,  161.  188,  271,  3t2 

Calla   paloatrla   219,  283 

Callophora  vlildeacens   BIS 

Calownia   frlcldmn    198,182 

Caltha  palaatrls   17,  240 

Calthua   Er«Ear»>ua    TB,  191 

■   Calrpaa  bulboaa  240 

Cambrian  beds   82 

Cainaula  peiludda 21,  SO,  78.  289,  800,  802.  803 

Campaiiula  aparlnoldcs    210,  247 

rotuudltolla T4,  222,  247,  818 


Camponottnae    325 

CompoitotDi  faeTcalMimi    71,  72,  78.  838 

wh^mperl   80 

pcDnaTlTBDlm*  820 

whTmpctI 828 

Campjina  deDtkonila SOS 

Canada,  Ina«ct  raana 104.  108,  171,  180.  188,  ISO,  271.  273,  810,  312-318,  821,  32B,  328 

Kooae    119.  889,   848 

Jaj 17,  84-87,  81.  94.  B8,  117,  188,  US.  810,  347,  860,  361,  874 

lynx    890.  41S 

wormwood    .  246 

Canadian,  eastern,  conlfera  181 

Canadian  beaver  404 

climate    41 

Ineecta    165,  0211 

meteorolD^eal  aerrlce   41 

warbler   88,  389.  379 

Canoe  birch    234.  286 

Cape  May  warbler  91,  839,  S73 

CapDoldee  aemperrlrena   241 

CaprKollsceae    246 

Carabldae     192, 204 

Carablda 18.  76.   158-100,  162 

Canibus  aerrataa   78.  101,   192 

Card  Point,  mammali 380 

Carex  aioatllla   284 

arcUta 284 


chrodorhlia  . 

featucBcea  .. 
fllUotmla  . . . 
folllmlata    , . 

monlle    

pandllara 


■terllla    384 

67  .    -,=i„C.oogle 


Cam — C<iiitlnti«d. 

t«nelta    234 

trlsperma    234 

tackermaDl    2S4 

Tlridnla 234 

CarlbOD 802,  8»S,  SOS.  387 

Cariboo  lalandB   3*4, 3M 

Carncades  boatoDlensIs   20T,  2«8 

Carollnaa,  iDsecta   170,  810.  3ls 

Carp  Creek    250 

Carpodacaa  pnrpDiMia   365 

Carrion  flj   313 

Carrot     244 

Carjchlum  exile  canadena* 2SS 

Carjophyllaceae    240 

Caaaandra   15-18,  28,  27,  SO.  30.  6B.  180.  272 

Caatalla  i>doraU   210,  240 

Caatltleja  acuminata 24« 

Castor  caoadenala    300 

canedeDsla    402 

Catbird    105.   100.   118,  830,  880 

Caterpillar   75 

CatoatomoB  eommcraoDll  330 

Cedar    „. 88.  $S 

Codsr  bMa    17 

wBiwlDS in.  86-80,  02.  04,  05,  00,  117.  ISO.  140,  330.  3T0 

Celltbemla  tponlna   264.  30S 

Centers  of  dleperaal,  beetle  faniut !83 

Central  dlitrict   171.172 

Ceophloena  plleataa  ablatlcola  855 

Cerambycldae    IBB.  210 

Cerambjclda    12,  18.  77 

Ceropalldae    320 

Certha  famlUarli  Maca  381 

Cerjle  alcron   ;.         353 

Cetrarla  laconoaa 227 

Ceatbophllas  aeclDana  200 

Cbaetnra  pelagica   1 .         35T 

Cbamaedaphne  calrenlata   220,244 

CbamaeDerlon  ansuatllollnm   225, 243 

Charafterlstlea,  general,  beetles,  Isle  Rojale 190  . 

Chelynta  nitldtl 818 

Cherry  birch    224.237 

Chickadee 13.  82-87.  89.  01.  92,  94,  96.  90,  106.  117,  180,  140,  141.  380,  3S1  | 

Chicken-bone  lake  6,  3B,  3WI 

Chtcoriaceae    S4T  i 

Chicory  family 24J 

Cblmaphlla  ambellaU   243 

Chimney  swifts lOB.   117,  83B.  35J 

Chlosenea  hlapldala   20, 345  I 

Chippewa  Harbor  30. 407 

Indiana 5 

Chlpplns  sparrow 18,  82.  83,  01.  02,  05,  OS.  102,  103,  107  100.  I 

116.  117,  HO.  141,  339,  38T,  3T4 

Chloealtla  abdomlnalla 16.  21.  80.  206,  300.  302,  303  | 

coaaperaa 18,  30,   72,  200.  300.   302.  303 

Choke  cherry    237 

Cboleva  beelllarls   205 

(CatopB)    termlnans    205 

Chordellea  vlrglnlanus   358 

Chryaldldse    821 

Chrysobotbrla  trlnervla   198 

ChrysoKona  vertlcalls  321 


INDEX.  436 

Fms*. 

Cbtraomclldas    201,  210 

CtirTKipa  cartwnsriui  309 

frtBldnl 810 

mitli    30U 

Chiraotoinm  TentrlMaunt   312 

Clcadldae    ; 75, 261 

Clelndela   longlubrls   102 

CielnileHd«e   182 

ClcarlDS  arcoBla   76.  265,  267,  268 

ricuta  bulbUera    29,  219,   244 

ClIlatMl  booeyiuckle  28 

Clmbei   amerlrdiia    II,  S22 

Tlalacea   822 

CImblfldae    .■ 323 

Ctoldae    20n 

Clreaea  alptna   243 

rlrmtettli  TerracnlatDS 16.  21,  24.  29.  72.  76,  290.  Sei-.<t03 

Circu*   bndMnlni    848 

Cla  crebeiTlmua   20D 

CI«teIa  aerleea   202 

Ciatelld    TB 

Clstelldae   202. 210 

Ctadonla.  ..11-13,  16.  IT,  22,  28,  26,  26,  28,  29.  44,  69,  71-74.  7fl.  224.  22T.  2S2-294.  2S6,  2ST 

eudoola  HlpeatHi  22a 


deforrals    

fimbtlata  coDlocraca   . 
Blmplei   .... 

(orcata  plnnaCa   

Kradlla  dllaUta    

pfildatB   


aylvatlca    228 

turgldB    228 

Tertlclllata    228 

Cladonta-beartarrj    t 14,  23 

Cladonla-JaBlpenia  nana   24 

naaa-biiAlebcrry   Boclel;    2.t 

proFumbena     23 

Cladonla-procumbciii  lone    ,. . . .  24.  26 


CiaspiDg-lraTed  twlBted-atalk   2!IA 

ClaT-colored  aparrow    838 

Clcarlnci    95 

Clela  (Harmonla)  plcta   208 

ricrldae  209 

Cliff  nrallow   339.  S69 

Climate    41 

Climatic  HQCceaaion 4B 

CHmax  animal  auoclatlon   : 76 

Cllmai  BBiDclHtloii    57.141 

CIlDopodlum  Tnlgare   246 

Cllntonla  boreallB. IT,  18.  20,  21,  26-30,  220,  238 

CH»lcola  rlparla   310 

Closed  gentian   243 

Clonded  Bnlpbur  bntlcrSy  268 

Clnblona  Hparla    236.258 

ClnbloDldae    265 

Cliib-moBB  famll]!  232 


CIniteNd  alplae  sailtrage   241 

CDemoEoDDB  epllobll SI! 

Coi«   cloqucfoll    '. S*S 

CMilal  Plain.  IdbccIi 180 

Coccldfte   ■ Ml 

Cacclnella  p^rplcxa  S06 

traoaTenofutUttt.  Fold.  var.  traniTcraalls SOO 

CacclDellldac    IM,  SOa 

Coccy>D>  «i7throptitlMlmoi  S63 

Cochllcapa  InbricB   24,  T7,  288 

Cockercll.  T.  D.  A 18B,  1«7,  183,  188,  IBO,  212,  823 

Coeletea    72,   369.   2«T 

Coelloir*  miwsU   T«.  818 

Colaptea  anrMus  iHteoi   856 

Cold-blooded   vertebrmtea    829 

Coleoplera 4,  151,   lfrl-l«T,   16»,   174-180 

CollKi  earytbeme  273 

Collaa   pMlodloe    2«7,   288.  2TS,   37S 

CDllembolBD    T« 

Color  Ttrl&tlon    411 

Colorado,  Insact  faoDi 164,  165.  167.  168,  174,  181,  191,  268,  811,  814 

Columbine     38 

Comandim  llvlda    240 

Comarum  palaatra  29,  21ft.  221,  242 

Commoa  redwing 1 17 

■acker    830 

toad 881 

Complied  general liatlona,  beetle  taunt   168 

Compoaltae 247 

Compoalte  tually   Z4T 

Conglomerate  Bar 1,  8,  9,  13.  18,  88.  59.  60.  63,  66,  68,  81,  84.  86, 

21ft,  2ZB,  ZB4,  260.  271.  817,  819,  S2S.  S«8,  890.  411 

Conlferona  foreat  89,  94,  99,  140 

ConnectlcDt  warbler 109,  119,  839.  878 

CoDTallarUceaa    288 

Convergent  tendency   145 


ConvolTulua  repeoa,  i 

Cooper's  hawk   • 108,  116,  118,  889.  848 

Coptia  Irlfolia   28,  78,  240 

CorallorbUa   corallorblu    240 

muItlOora    240 

Coral-winged   loeoat    801 

Cordulla  aenea   264-266 

ahnrtleffl    264-266,   306 

Catdnlldae    261 

Coregonus  artedl    31 

quad  rilatera  11a    330 

Oorlaldne   266 

Corlia 10,  29.  71.  260 

Comaoeae 238,244 

Comus  canadenala   29,   225,  244 

cLrclnatn    ! 238,  241 

Blalanlfera  29,  219,  238,  244 

Cortlcarla  aerrlcoHIa   20T 

Corraa  brachrrh;ncho*  382 

corax   principalis    8«t 

286 


3y  Google 


ConmblteB— CoDtlnaed.  Paice- 

ralseflcna 208 

Insidlouii    208 

medlaniiB  6T,  IM,  187 

mendai    ................... ^ -...,,.,.  ^ .,.-,- .  ^ ....,-.-..  w .,-.... ,         208 

nlgrlcollls    208 

DlKTlcomiU    208 

pntpolB    208 

resplcndeni    208 

■plnoaaa    208 

■plendeiu    208 

triuDdulatD*    208 

CowODDfl   aubareatDS 203 

Cotton  sniu   lit 

COttDB    IctBlops 831 

Cow  parmlp* 18,  21,  77,  158,  214 

Cowslip     240 

Crabro  slnsulaTlB   819 

CnibrauIdBe    810 

Cneplng   inowbeirr    2t><  245 

Crenopbllas   (Hrdroblna)   disestua 20.t 

Crevice   planta    222,  22.'1 

CrlMlToiner  iiBina;caah    ,. S30,  S31 

Crototi-bDK    , ■ 20» 

Crow 82,  86,  lOB,  117,  124 

Crowbcrry    222,248 

Crawfoot  temllj    240 

CnielfeiM    241 

CniatacM   ■. 263 

CrTptoBlanx   acadica    SS2 

CrjptOKramma  aeroatlcholda   233 

CrrptohrptDS  bicolor   207 


Cule*  plplena   809 

Cullcldae   . .'. 809 

Cnpido  racpiolna 77,  268,  272,   275 

CarcDllonldae   203,  211 

CurrcDta.  mrtace  d(  lake 47-60.  no 

CnaCcT  mnntT,  lasect  tanUB  104 

Cat'lMTed    waCer-hoarhaaad    246 

Cranodtta  criatata   360 

CyelODtda  aan^lDea   206 

CyllMlcna  coDTeiaa   253 

CjDomyla    cadsverlna    69,  SIG 

C^peniceae    283 

Crprlp«d1um    blnutnm    2311 

reKlnae    230 

Cf rtopogoD  cbryBopofcou   312 

CjratopterlH  bnlbirera   ,. 231 

IragMla    281 


Daacyllldae    196,  207 

DaaTlloa  aatiir   312 

poatlcata    812 

D«er  flies   99 


DcndrocConaa  ruflp«anla  . 
DandrDlca  raeruleacena  . . 
Dendtoica  c 


S7S 


Ctafidralc* — ConllDDed.  Pmb. 

micnlon    87B 

ptimaram ,.  STT 

■triau    STB 

tlgrlna   8TII 

Tlrena    ■  870 

Desor  lake,  mc  Lake  Desor. 

DtmoT  trail 8,  S8,  SO,  19ft,  2IM,  203.  S»e.  114 

DIcera  prolongata   lOT 

tenebroaa    167 

Dlckelymi  DUcEoatuBi   S31 

DIckenoD,  Uarr  E.,  trogi  833 

r>lcranum  riuceaecns   --. .  229 

lonjtfoHum    220 

scbrebcrl     220 

■ooparlnm    220 


Dlctynfdae    253 

niervlUa     72. 73 

diervllla U,  21,  28,  20,  T6,  22S,  247 

DlmodeniB  sabatrlatDB  200 

Dlodantus    68 

niploatazla   llberta    T5, 100 

DIptera 77.308 

Dlapenal,  center*  of,  beetles  183 

DIatrleblum  caplllaceum   230 

DIatiict  or  Columbia,  iDMCti   168.  812,  811 

Dogliane   rumllr 243 

DoKWOOd   28.  88,  288.  344 

Dollchopodldae    812 

Oolochoderlnae    32S 

Dolomedea  idonena  31,  2!^,  238 

DomlDiDce,   lnBects   188 

DoDBi^la   10, 161 

cinctl«omlB    64,  166,  202 

prozlma   64.  150.  101,  201 

Doiytomaa  brevtcolllB   211 

Downj  woodpecker 01,  106,  110,  143,  280,  840,  3H,  386 

Drapinfllea 10,  11.  IT,  lB-23,  27,  29-31,  64,  66,  68,  72.  73,  249,   282,  SOS 

Dralaage 30.51 

Drawldae    254 

DranuB  neglectui 30,  76,  254.  257,  2S8 

aaccatuB    254 

DnBterluB    7!t 

Dromlnus  pIceuB  204 

Intermedia   29,  210.  241 

llneariB    219,  241 

rotuDdifolIa    210.  241 

Droaeraceae    241 

Drapaceae   S3T 

Drjr  strawberry  242 

Dryobates  pubesceaa  medlauiiB   334 

vIlloBDB  leucomelaa   354 

Dryopteria  flili-mas   231 

trsgraaa    231 

BplDuloaa   231 

DryopterEa  thelypteria   231 

Dwarf  CanadlBD  prlmroaa  -  24! 

cornel     20,244 

cranberry    13 

Dytlacldae   lOi 


Pmfe. 

RkKle    91,  B2,  »4,  1ST,  142 

Karlr  eotml-root   240 

EaHhworms 13,  IB,  76,  24»,  281,  2B2 

EaBtem  CaaadUn  cooltcr  faana,  luMCti 189 

mirttn   390  4U 

naskrat    40T 

Ebo   latitborax   87,265 

RcttlDamyU  alKBDi  31^ 

Rcologlcal  dlffarentiatloD   188 

DOtea.  mamiiiBlB SOT.  3«».  402,  403-407,  410,  414-411) 

ratations   3 

T^qoador,  inaect  taana    164,  ISS 

Elater  aplcatua  , 180 

bepatlcDS    196 

mlitDB    209 

nlxrEnus    207 

Elateridaa   196,207 

ElMcharia  palnatrla    283 


Kllyctanla  (Photlnaa)  cornisca   2ft0 

Rmmeaa  connectaoB   21 1 

Emp«lraceae   243 

Brnpetmni  nlgnim  222,243 

ETmpldoDaz  flsTlTeatrls   8S9 

mlnimaa    359 

tralllll  alnomm  359 

GDallagmB  exmlana    81, 26-') 

hagenl 10,  30,  «4,  2G3.  264 

■p 806 

Encbrtrald    76,  2S2 

Bndocarpon  mlulatam   22ft 


Rndomycbldae   207 

EnKliBh  RlTer.  Budaon  Bar,  inaecta S14 

EDtamabryldae   260 

Ebtrpus  amerlcanuB  SSO 

Environmental  and  assoclatlonal  converBence  144 

faclora    143 

Epeira  paUgiala 27,   254.  267.  258 

Kphemerlda    307 

Epblates  gigaa       821 

Epldemla  dorcas   568.  272,  274,  275 

Epldemla  eplianthe 288,  272,  274,  27S 

florus    274 

belloldea    274 

Epllablam  adeaocaalon    243 

llneare    243 

Eqalsetum    17,  js,  20.  29 

arrenae 232 

flnvlatlle    232 

paliiatre   282 

Bclrpolflea   232 

Bylratlcum    232 

Ericaceae    244 

Erlophomm 18,  26,   20 

alplnum    233 

va^lDatuin   283 

baatardil    314 

ErlBtallB  dlmldlalna  74.  77.  313 

Ennlne    .-. 417 

Rrotylldae   


hyC'oogte 


P««e. 

EwitylldB    189 

E«Mi  cOQntr   li* 

Eucalti  IncoastaDS  27.  29,  331 

EucoDuluB  cheralDua  poljgrstns   ^ -, . ..  .24,  31,  281    280 

ftilTUB 24,  28« 

F.ncraagoaTi  graelllB   202 

Engaala  >atlopa   27» 

J  iilbiim    268,  269.  2TS-275 

Rumenea  sp 820 

Eumlnldse    320 

Kupatorlam  purpurenm    247 

Euphaipig  cardinal 363 

Europe,  iDaecta 16B,  168-170,  176,  177.  178,  271,  SIl-aiK 

Knrjpi^on  nlger  207 

EucFlnetna  tenDlnalls   207 

Entypui  amerlcBDua 74 

EDTaneBBii  antlopa   268-270.  276 

ETanfldae     R21 

Evening  prEmrow  tamllr 2« 

Bvetula  prnnaatrlB   227 

RvolatloD,  cauaea  of  , J46 

Rvotomja  grapperl   390,  405,  406 

Bilpantbc  butterfly    272 


FagaMae  . 

Faico  aptmerluB , S51 

Fklse  Ill7-o(-tbe-TaIleT  239 

Fatigae IIS 

FaortB,  lake  locattoo   30 

Faunal  affinities S9S 

regions,  deflnlng   16,1 

Feldtmann.  lake   39 

Fern  ramll;  231 

Fescuta  ovln«    23S 

Fetid  cnrrant   242 

Few-flowered  cranberry   20    21.  241 

Fiber  ilbethkuB  390,  491 

Field  penny  crsBa  241 

Field  BtBtloQS,  locations  6 

FIjwort  Camlly   240 

Fink,  Bnice   226 

Fire  weed   28,  29,  243 

Flah    829,  B30 

Flah  Island   388,  890,  416 

FlBh  Island  Bay   407 

Fish  warms 67,  72 

Flesh  fly  ,. 81S 

Fletcher,  James 240,  268,  270,  272,  2T3,  271! 

Flickers 22,  82,  84-87,  01,  92,  80.  99,  104,  108,  100,  114,  117,  140,  141.  339.  353 

Fll«« IB,  ee,  70,  73.  7B,  7T 

Florida,  iuKCts 188,  ITl.  1T2,   1TB,  177-179,   188.  188,  312,  314 

Flycatchers   106,  108    143 

Foote,  A.   B 382,416 

Porbea  lake 7,  16.  87,  802.  881,  882,  364,  376,  381,  S8! 

Forestry    , 161 

Foreals    224 

beetle   associations    . 


:.=  b,  Google 


Page. 

Tonalc*  aiUnul    65.  826,   328 

drraa 66,  70,  827 

tDMi , 22,  73,  76,  2MI 

toKa  T*(.  DMTOflblTbla 828 

mbKTlcea 827,  S28 

rot*    ,.  826 

otwcarlTentrli    827.  828 

MDgtilDtft     72, 77 

awiT*    826.  828 

■p.    820 

Formlddae    830 

Fowil  traacbea 08 

Foster,   J.  W 44,  B2,  421 

Foster  sad  WbltMy   4,  45.  421 

fox.  C,  bat* = 41» 

Fngaria  Twnt  , 21,242 

FraDkllD'i  ptwcelli   24S 

Free  lauoa  ol  water  64 

FrlDged  polTgals    243 

Fro*     28, 829 

FnnSM    226 


OaleoMoptM  carolliieBala    380 

Galerncelta     181 

nrrophaea  20,  159,  202 

Galium   spnrlam 24A 

trlfldam    248 

trlflomm    24B 

Galirnaco  dellcata   84S 

Oammaridae   253 

Qamiiienia  Ilmnaetia    18, 252 

Garrfott,  K.  B.,  lake  atorniB 46.  D2 

Garter  anakea 16.  27,  31,  252.  832 

OaBtemption  Incertna 82t 

taraltorlDB    321 

Oavla  kober 305,840 

General  not«a,  birda   844 

GeQetallxatlona,  compiled,  beetle  ranoa 163 

Geatlaa  family   245 

GenClena  andrewalt    245 

Genttanceae    245 

Geofcraphlc  afflnttlea  of  tbe  Tanna,  mammala B98 

Dotea,  apldera   268 

range,  beetles   192-203 

H7meDope«ra     31 7-322 

Insecta    202-265,    268-27.1 

Invertebrates   250-257 

mammala 398,  401,  404-100,  408,  413-410 

Oeogrspblcal    centera,  climax  aasoclatlona,    beelles 180 

Geological   map    6 


Georgia  pelluclda    220 

GoothlTpla  agliia    3T8 

Philadelphia    37S 

Geotmpiis  blackbumll   31,  150,  190 

Geraaiaceae   242 

Geraninu  bkkaelll   242 

tamltr    242 

Gerrls   20,  27,  261 

mai^lnatiiB    10,  260 

rtmlgts 18,  19.  28,  81.  64,  260 

infoscDtellatDS    29,260 


Ollnuii,  H.    <,  B2 

OlnicDg  famlir   2<4 

Olaclal  epoch.  Inttieta  lfl« 

Oreit  Lakea,  life  35 

Mlt  WBtet  3S 

OUueoui  hoDey-suckle  247 

white  lettuce  247 

OlBMon,  H.  A 1,  67,  157,  249,  262,  283.  289;  300,  807,  SOB,  82B-328 

GlonlphoDlB  complanatB 250 

aioMlphouldae    ,- 260 

anBph»lluin    T2 

GDspbOM  bratuftllH    TS,  264,   25T,  208 

Oold'lhread    240 

Oolden  plover  124 

Ooldcn-crowaed  kinglet 13,  ID,  82,  83,  85-87,  89,  91,  94,  96,  99,  108, 

118,  189,  142.  330,  381-383 

Golden- winged   warbler   liS 

Oomphldae   803 

OoniobaalB  IlTeaceua  S4 

Gonloeten*  pallida    210 

Oooeeberrr   lainllr    242 

Oordlldae    280 

Gordlus  aqnatlclUi    22.  63 

TObiurtaa   250 

llneatna    250 

Grace  Harbor  418 

Oraminae    233 

Oraae  ramllf   233 

Oranhoppen. .  .12,  16-17.  21,  22,  24.  25,  27,  29-31,  68,  72,  73,  T5,  98,  90,  108,  112,  115,  1«3 

Graiilands    131 

Gravel  beaches    , S6 

Orar-cheeked  thmah 109,  115.  116,  119,  839.  884 

Great  Baaln.  Ineecta Ifl2.  188,  18S 

bilberry     245 

homed   owl 104.  117,   840.  852.  353 

plalDi,  Inaecta   190 

Slave  lake    , 810 

Greater  yellow  lega 839,370 

Green  alder 226. 287 

(rog    832 

UoDDtatns,  Inaecta   328 

Greencrested  flycatchers   105 

Greealab  Mue  batterlly ,. 272 

Greenlab-flowered   wlntergreen   243 

Greenland,  tnaeeta 176,  268,  313 

OreanatoQe  beach   38 

range 2,  7.  8,  20,  21,  30.  81,  88,  80.  60.  61,  86.  87,  224, 

808,  362.  390,  418.  414 

Green-wlDged  teal   118,  S39,  346 

Grey-cheeked  thraahea  108 

Grimmla    23 

Grlnnell'a  water  thniab 

Gyrophaeoa 

OrosM  Isle,  bata    419 

GroBBularlsceae    242 

Gronnd  cornel , 14,  15,  20,  27.  28,  30 

hemlock 13,  16,  20,  21.  25,  26.  28.  30,  98,  141,  2IS.  236 

pine 25.26 

Gull   Island    390 

rookery   10, 39 


OdII«   10.  94,  187.  142 

armaoBcelas  ptdalla   823 

GrrtDtdu   If.  1«1.   '»■"> 

OTrloni  mlnutni   64.  1B»,  193 

pldiWB    IBB.  195 

G)rn>pb>«iia    103 

Grropbors  hyperborea   SST 

(Umblllcsrla)   Tell«a    227 

GTroatacbyi  romauiolOaiui   23tl 


Habenarla  dllatata   219,  239 

hrpcrbarea    2S0 


ortilciilaU    239 

parcodca    219.289 

Habitat    pnfvreace    123, 124 

Habltata,  orlglD  ot   BO 

BabroccraB  magDoa  191 

naemopali   grandls    2S1 

Ratr-woriDa    68,  249.   250 

Haliy   honey  anckle   24T 

woodpecker 84.  88,  91,  105,   118.   142.  340 

Hatry-atemmed  aater   248 

Haltaetna   teacoephalna    850 

HallctDS  lerouill    BID 

veraana   T7.  310 

flallplldac    194 

Hallpllda   v 161 

Hallplua    161 

ruflrollla    2T.  66.  159,   194 

HatongldBceae    24 1 

Hard  map1«    27.  28,  224,  226,  237 

Rardiroods.  sooIbeaBterQ   131 

Hare-flgwort    .'. 240 

Hare  bells  28.  70,  74 

Harea 11,  14.  IS,  26.  31.  98.  99,  226.  SG3,  391,  393.  395,  399.  410.  411.  414.  41.-1 

Rarpalaa   fulvllabria    204 

latlcepa    204 

megacephalua    ISO,  161,   104 

ruflcollia    191 

rnflmBDua   204 

Harveat  aplder  263 

Harver,    N.   A 249,  250 

Hatcbet  lake   27 

Hawk    98,  09,  101.  103,  104,  411 

Hawk  lalBDd  390 

Hay  Bar.  mammala   889,  402 

HayCown  trail   1.  8,  27.  28,  890 

Heart-leaved  twayblade  230 

Heath-berry    24,1 

Hericodlacna  parallelus    24, 2SS 

Helmlnthaphlla  peregrin*    37.'l 

ruflcapllla'    372 

HelodrllDB   (Allolobophora)   callglDoana   252 

nelodromaa  aolltarlas   840 

Hemarla  deflnla   267,  26S 

Ihysbe   267,  268 

Hemlptera   249,260 


Digtizedby 


Google 


Page. 

Hepatic*    beiMtlra    Ml 

Hcptagenta    307 

ll«r>cleum  Unatnm    2** 

Ilcnnit  tbrnBh M.  104,  108,   100.  118.  IIT,  S30.  38-'^ 

tIeroDB     143 

IIerpobdel1«   lateralis   ^1 

HetpoMellldse    2S1 

HprrlnB    352 

mill 82.  88.  00.  01,  03.  04.  117.  137.  344.  353 

Ileaperldae     ; 27S 

Hlbblacus  tulwrculatus    21.  29 

llleraduin  nmbcllatnia    247 

mtie.   J«»,   8 308 

HIpplscoB  tuberculatua  (8«e  HlbblacuBl 290.  800.  302.  303 

Hlppodamia  13-piin«tBta   106 

Ellppnrua  TulgarlB    244 

Hlrudlnu    250.  2S2 

HIrudlnldae 281 

Fflninda  errtbrogaiCer 380 

HlBter  UsBllB    207 

HIaterrdae    201 

II  litorlcal  note    5 

Ilobroeerua  magniiB    200 

Halllnger,  Hlcbael 114.  848,  896.  4^.  417,  410 

Halopbllna    BimlllB    S14 

Holt,  W.  P 1,  217,  SgO 

Hoae;-siicli1e  famllj   248 

Hooded  mergaDser   10.  82,  90.  93,  I3T.  339 

HOOPM,    B.    A..    n.«iiim.l. 4OS,  419 

Horn.  G.   H..  beetle* 165.   168.  186.    187.  188,  101.  213 

Horned  lark 08,  lOS,  109.  110,  340.  3Wt 

Horaetall    233 

HooKhton.  hare  412 

House  flj   815 

Hubbard.  O.  H..  and  Schwan.  K.  A 4,  68.  183,  190.  101.  204.  213 

HDckkberr;    racDMr    ■■ 243 

Hudson  Bay 3B.  172,  180.  310.  311 

red  squirrel  300,  S99,  404 

varying  hare   800.  410 

Humming  bird   93.  105,  117 

llyalella  knlc^erbookerl    18.252 

Hjdrschnldae 2S3 

Hj-drobatldae T 260 

Hrdrophllldae     205 

Hrdropbillds    161 

ilydopborUH  phllombrlUB   TO.  78.  75.  77.  312 

HfdropbrUaceae    245 

HydroponiB    161 

trlBtla    27,  OS,  150,  194 

llyeladeala  serra 315 

llyla  plckerlnsll    27. 331 

llyloblus  pales    203 

llyloclchla  aliclac    384 

fuBcescens    3R3 

guttata   pallaaii    .ISj 

Ilylacomlum  aplendens    230 

trlquetum    230 

Hymenopters 11.  13,  15,  IB.  28.  26.  TT.  184.  317 

Hymenoins  nlger    210 

Hyperleacese     213 

Ilypprlcnm    30 


INDEX.  445 

rige. 


HypDniD   adancHin    

Intermedium 

crlBta-cutreosta    

flnltaas 

Biramineum    

uacloatum  Hedw.  (onnapliUKMB   . 

TenilM«am    

HjpoiaolTX  pinetl    

HypopltyB  h;popU}'i  


Ichmadopblla  aeruKlnnsa  829 

IchaeumoDldse    S21 

Uybltii  pleariaciia   184 

Indian  archlpelego.  Innvls   ITtl 

Indian  pipe  ramll;   2« 

Inland  Lake   63 

loaecta - 1,  lOlB.  16.  82,  84,  86.  67,  70.  72.  T4-7T.  86.  101,  24D,  280 

Interior  diatrlet   171,172 

luternal  canaM  of  avolntlon   145 

Internal   factora.  blrta    142 

ln*«rlelirate   fauna    97, 2*9 

Involurred   boneyiiuckle    247 

Irldaeeae    230 

Irldoprocne   bicolor    ,- .  -  -         209 

Iria    18, 3B0 

teralcolot   218.239 

lale  Royale  light  1 

iNoctBceae 233 

lauetM  ap!   292 

Isopoda     233 

■aoptcryx  cydlppa   .t06 

Itinerary    1 

iTea   linear  surrey    4. 6 

Ivea.  William    B.  40,  380,  403 


Jack  pine 11-lfi.  20,  38.  88,  71.  74.  7^.  76.  140,  32:^,  253,  2S6.  302 

ridge 44,  81.  84 

Jackson,  C.  J 421 

<■-   T .la 

n.   0 1 49 

Jurne*    Ray    72, 283 

Jaiialdeae     261 

Joe-I'yc   weed   247 

Jun'-o   : ai,  87,  01.  05.   117,  140 

hyemalfa   368 

Junrim   eSusag    338 

June  beery   02 

Janlper   12,  71,  73,  223 

Jnnlperus  nana II,  13,   14,  31.  23,  34.  73.   232.  224.  23tl 

procumbena   33-3.1.  222,  224,  2311 

eladoola  aoclely    I'l 


rfbyGoOgIC 


Page. 

Kalmla  slauc*    29,244 

Kllm's  lobelia   , 247 

KeewHtln,  mammala 40S 

KM iii-v -leaved    crowfoot    241 

KIMderr   124,  »M,  841 

Kln^^bErd    lOB,  118,  148,  339,  3S8 

Klnfflrtier 88-»l,  94.  105,  117,  187.  852,  884 


arcQBtB   199 

Laclniaa  obloeiuv   SO,  fiBS,  251 

Lactuca  piilchella   247 

UdiM  tern    M 

Laftgan,  laiect  fBDiia 1S4 

I.ake  and  bay  beacbes  8 

Lake  aBsoclBtlona,  beetles  ISI 

l,ake  BeoBOD   IS 

Lake'  Deaor 2,  9,  8.  80,  81,  39,  98,  224.  22S,  201.  252,  260.  288,  330 

faaaa   B9 

berrlDg    830 

Lake  iJwrer   3S1 

Rlcble   , 418 

■hore  and  beetle  ataoctatlon   160 

atorms    48, 4T 

EDrrey    S.  8 

troat    330,381 

Winnipeg    171 

Lake-bog  serlea.  plants 218 

Lake- pond-swamp  aerlea,  mammala 891 

Lakes,  origin  of  89 

Lampyrldae    209 

Lampallla    407 

luteolas 61,  294 

t^mprrldne    199 

Lanre-leBTed   painted  cup    246 

Land  serlei.  mammala 8B2 

Lane.  A.  C S,  27,  31.  82.  34,  88-40,  53.  889,  396,  421 

Lane's  geological  map    6,  217 

Lanlna  borealla    371 

ludovlclanua  mlgraDS 865 

Lapland  longHpur 338 

Large  coral-root   2*0 

pearl;  everlasting  248 

round-leBTed  orcbld   289 

tuTBTblade    239 

I^rge-llowered  blue  lettuce   347 

Large- So nre ring  raapberrjr   ■. 14,  21.  25.  28-30 

Large-leared  aster 12.1B,  17,  247 

Large-toothed  aspen    30.230 

Larger  blue  flag 239 

yellow  ladles-allpper   239 

Larii  larlclna   281.  285 

Larits  argentatus  emltliBonlanus   342 

Laslus  nlger    74 

'  Tar.   neoulger    335,323 

Lateral  suorestilon    GS 

Lathoblum   uluiplei    ID,'. 


INDEX.  447 

P*c«. 

I^thtldlida* 207 

Lmthrldltu  mlnntaa 207 

Latbroblnm  tennlnattaiii   '. . .         20IS 

Ii«iireiitl>n  peDeplain   38 

LawB  of  Bucceuloa   140 

Leacb,   iDKCt*   S2S 

Leut    flrcatcher lOS,   108.  117,  339.   3S9 

BBQdplpet 38B 

weasel     «7.  418 

Lecanora  cinera  stbbow   228 

ftnBtulom     228 

■naraliB     228 

niblna    228 

BabfuBcB  allopbaaa  228 

Lecidea  lactea   22(1 

I«Coilt*,  J.   L. IDS,  162,  1S8,   lee,  182.  183.  188-lSl.  213 

I«Cante-s  brown  bat   390,  393,  413 

IiMODtU   (Crrmodea)  dUlcoIllg   211 

I<edum 60 

BToealaDdlcum    220,  221.  244 

Leech    21,  64.  249-2S2 

I^ntlbaUrUceae    246 

L«pldai>tera    T7.   246,  287 

I^ptorehU    milfolEa    239 

Leptorcbls  loeselll    240 

Ij«ptothorei  eanadenils  71,  72,  326,  S2S 

I>ptara    180 

canadeoala    '.....         800 

chrysocoma    68,   73,  77.   188,   201 

inaUblllg    201 

nlgrella    200 

prozlma    201 

rotnla    , 210 

Mzmaculata    200 

■QbameiitaCa    200 

ttblallB   201 

Lenge,  Chas 40 

licng*  lake   39 

tMkea  QervaM   280 

Lepua  anwrlcaaaB 890,  410,  412 

phatnotUB    412 

Ziesaer  bladderwort   246 

clMTcra    246 

pyrola    243 

rattle-anake  plantain   239 

yellow   legs    ^ 89. 188 

IMIeB  iiDgDicuJatua 21,262 

LeadBCUB  aeosaeus   320,  330 

Leacobyrum  glauf um   280 

LCDCorblDla    260 

hudsonka   27.  264-266 

Intacta    265,  306 

pniilma 30,  64,  20* 

Ubellula  quadrlnucttlata   ,. 266,  266 

Llbellnlldae   264 

Llblatae    246 

LIchenB 11.   12.   14,   22-25,  38,   51.  68-71.   88.  136,   222-224.    226.  228 

Ugbt   house   clearing 15,  266,   268,   2T0-2T3,  802,   300-316.  332 

pcnlUBula 7,   81,   364 

Llllaceae    ; 288 

LlliDm  pbllBdelpblcum   238 

Lily  family  238 

Llly-of-tbe-Talley   family    


W 


448  INDEX. 

Pttt. 

LlnnM   80-«a,  291. 

borealls   11,  20,  21,  247 

Ljmnftea  catiaropliim  20,  M,  290 

emarcliuta 10,  00-62,  71.  282    290 

mecawuna   20,  282,  290 

plIrtjiTsna   281-283.  290 

etagoftlls 10.  10-18.  21.  22.  60-64.  68,  69,  282,  283,  289 

LlmnocbarM  extendena   2SI 

LImonns  aeger  - 208 

LIdcdId'b  sparrow 07,  102.  103.  108.  109.  113,  119.  339.  349.  368 

Linear  mrvey   4 

LlnypblB  pbrrgtana   2M,  258 

Llodea  globOM    20B 

Usttn  cordata   239 

Lltfbneia  tlllla.  Conn.,  InaecU.  r. S2a 

Littoral  group  , 59 

Llvetong  Bailtrage   241 

LlTer-lrat  pjrol«    243 

LlTemare  lake   39 

tlverwortB    2B 

Lobena   kalmll    222.  247 

LocoBt     299 

Loeael's  twajMade    240 

Long-leaved   gtltch-wort    , 240 

Lonlcer*  clllats    247 

dlolca     247 

hirsuta     247 

inToinerata    247 

Loon 19,  82,  88,  00-04,  118.  137,  305.  339.  340,  332 

Lota  maeulon   8B1 

Low  cornel   244 

cranberry    17. 24^ 

buckleberry     24. 243 

Juniper    17, 24 

Lower  beachea   9 

Loila    leucoptera    ~. 866 

Lucltia  caeear   31S 

Luclnaa  obtoenala    257 

luclaa    330 

Tjucorhlna  praxima  19 

Lnmbrlcldae    252 

LumbrlcuB  terrestlB   2B2 

Liitra  hudBanlca  badaonfca    800 

Ljcaenldae     272 

Lf Htperdlna  (ermglnea   207 

Lfcopodlaceae    232 

Lycopodlum   14,  20,  21,  30 

annotlnain     232 


complanatum 17,  18,  21.  232 

InnndatUDi    232 

luddulnm    220.  232 


-    aelago    232 

LycopuB  amerlcanuB  .- 24fl 

LycoMt  frondicola   256.  258 

kochl 72,  74.  2S6,  257 

pratenalB 67,  71.  75,  2S6-25B 

Lycoslda    , 13 

L;gaeldae   ■. 261 

I-rpiB  pratenala    ., 261 

I^ni 14,  15,  80.  04,  115,  3<>3,  Se»30S,  S9S,  399.  411.  415 

canadenalB    418 

LjBlmacbla  t 


P«e. 

McCuKoe  Cove 1,  T,  16,  89.  40,  46,  81,  88.  844,  84T,  850.  8M,  37B.  384.  407,  411.  413 

trail 7.   281,   282.  268,   302.   309 

M'Crearr.  Otto 1,  22.  81,  12B.  134,  15.%  254,  337.  885.  383.  883 

MacFarlaae.  R.,  mammals 397,  398.  399.  403.  407.  411,  414-418,  411 

Mackemle  iMsin.  laxcCa  180 

UackenEle  Baaln.  luMcts   189 

river,  caribou SOS 

Mackinaw  Island  26S,  310.  328 

trout    330 

Hacoan'B  buttercup    S41 

Uacrobdella   decora    251 

UacropogoD  plc«ui   207 

ruBpes    07.  ins 

UadasBicar.   Insects   173 

Mad-dog  akallcap 246 

Madder  [amllr   246 

MagdallB 203 

alDUcea    191.  211 

Brmlcotlls   211 

BentUlB    211 

blapoide*    211 

Magnolia  varbler 82.  SS.  85.  8(1.  89  91,  95,  109.  116.  118.  839.  975 

Malayan  district,  loMcti 175 

Mallota   cImblclformlB   314 

Malone  creek  , 3ft 

Malone,  F.,  mink   416 

3.  H.  and  J.  A. 10,  40.  98,  116,  306.  402,  407,  414 

Malthodei  coDcavui    200 

trasllls    200 

latlcoUlB    ; 209 

nl«er   158,190 


1,880 

M»ples   80,  90,  287 

MapB    ,. 5 

Uareca   amerlcanB    34S 

Mare-*  tall 244 

Marab  BBSocIation   138 

Uarsb   bellBower 247 

cinqnerall    B19 

bBwk 87,  9S.  100,  118    138.  130,  880,  348 

marigold    28,  240 

at.   Joha'a-woft    243 

Blfull-cap    £46 

Mart™    * 302,  893.  395,  411 

MarrlBDd  yellow-throat    12fl 

MattBon'B  resort    10 

Maximam  siie.  beetlea 185 

May   flies   64.303 

Mecoalhetus  llneatas 17,  27.  30,  290,  300,  302,  303 

Megachllidae    817 

Helampyrum    73 

llneare   240 

Helandryldae   202,  211 

Melanobracon 322 

Melsnopblla  accnmlnata   198 

drammondl    108 


I  BlBBkanuB 16,  Jl,   24,  29,  30.  72,  289,  301-303 

ertremuB 17,   2T,    200,    301-803 

fBsclatuB 18.  22,  24,  25,  20.  78,  209,  301308 

femoratni   209.  801.  302 

hnranl 21,  72,  299,  301,  302 


450  INDEX. 

PMt. 

Helmoitoma  >DguBtBCam   SIS 

UelauoHtUH  CBatBDlpn   r  •  •  •         20S 

paraaoim    SI.  18T 

MftlanlhiCMs     238 

Meloiplia  cinerea  melodia   968 

georglaaa   S69 

Uncolntl     368 

UenaEerle  lilaod 8.  29.  90.  92-84,  116,  842,  846,  S47,  SS7,  S5B,  869,  870,  S86,  896,  40T 

Menominee  whlleflBh    830 

Mentha  canadeasli    24S 

Menyanthawae     24B 

MeDranthes    219 

trltollata   219,  221,  246.  253 

Meniie'B  rattle-make  plantlan   £39 

Merganser  amerleanna   344 

Memla    mlsralorla    885 

Mesophytlc  lorest,   Inaeeti   258 

Hetbods  of  work 2 

MIcroclytui  gaiellula   SIO 

Uldille  beach  8. 10 

eaateni  prOTlii««,  eeotnl  dlMrict ITl 

Mlsrant  ahrlke   105,  839 

Migration  ot  blrdi 9T,  112,  888.  380,  34S-S40.  3111,  354,  8B5.  398-860 

862,  863,  364,  866-368.  371-381.  383-386 

Migration,   mammals   S9S 

Mlltwrt'a   bntterflr    270 

Milkweed   bnttertlj'    271 

Milkwort  famllj   243 

Mlller'g    thumb    10, 331 

Mink 94,  116,  390.  891,  393.  395.  407,  408.  411 

frog    331 

MlDODg  trap  rangs 8,  31.  30 

Hint   lamllT ■ B46 

Mlacellaneoua  notes,  blrdi 341,  847 

MIralulppi  iTitem,  (re^-water  preserre 85 

MItella  nnda   241 

MItea     257 

Mnlotllta  varia    ST2 

Hnlum   puDctatum    230 

HolInBca 1,  27,  60,  63.  281 

Moneaea  anlflora 24S 

Mongolia,  lOBCctB   ITS 

Monobammua  acQtellataB   201 

Monotropa  nnlflora    244 

llonotropaceae    244 

Montreal 311.  312 

Monument  rotk  trail   , ^. T.  10  SO 

Monumentha  alblttons   72, 317 

Uooeewood    238 

Mordelllatena   biplaglata    203 

acapularla    150,  203 

Mordellldae 203 

Morgan.  I.,evls  FI,.  beaver 402,  403,  407,  422 

Mornlng.glory   famllr    24B 

Horge,    Albert    P 299 

Mosquito    66.    76,   86.   309 

Mo98 11,  12,  IT,  20,  22-26,  28,  SO,  220,  223,  220,  230 

Mt.  JOBephlue,  beach  lines   33 

Mt,  Washington,  Inaect  fauna  188,326 

Mountain  alder 14.  17,  20.  21.  24,  20,  2B0.  237 

aah IB,  IT,  18.  20.  25.  28-80,  02 

maple    K>.  2t.  28  30,  238 


INDEX.  461 

Honmlns  w»rbkr 87,  S39,  ST8 

Hud   pupp7    ^ 329,830 

MDBcm    domeatiea    SH 

MnBcldae     31G 

Hdiniliiim   Mcnrli.... 60,  281,  29S 

Haatarooms    i 77 

HiMkrata 83,  390.  391.   893.   3BS,  40l> 

MoaaelB     «8 

MDXard   famllT   241 

Muatela   abtetlcota   <13 

abtet1nold«fl    415 

actDOM    415 

ameTlcaaa    890.414 

Mrotla    lurtmcaB    890.  419 

■ubalatDi    390,418 

Hrrlopodn s IB.    72.    T5.    76 

.  MjTln    ESle    240 

M;i-icB»Be     240 

Mytina    butterfly    209 

MrmieleoD   ImmaralataB   ,. 262 

MyrmFl»u1da«   262 

Hyrmlpa  brpvloodla  var.  canadmuli S2B,828 

Mynnira   rubra 71 

Mynnlclnae     325 

Myrtle   warbler 82,  88,  88,  90-92,  W,  101,  108.  118.  117,  140.  839.  347.  374.  373 

Mysla     35 

K. 

Kabalna  alba*   247 

racemoaa    222. 247 

Naladaceae     232 

Nalaa  OexlU   238 

Xaked  wltMwoH   241 

Narrow-leaved  cow  whtat 22.240 

hawk-weed    24T 

wlllow-berb 248 

KaahTllle  warbler 82,  84-87,  (H>«2,  94.  95.  109,  118,  140,  339,  372,  373.  379 

Nftumbeivia   tbyraKolla    „ 245 

Nearetlc,   [nB«ct>   177 

Neckera  ollgocarp*   231 

NecTophortia  TeapllloldeB   205 

Nectnrus  macaloana   831 

Needham,  J.  0 169.  283-205.  2B7,  272.  805 

Nehatenia  Irene 262 

Kematoda 250 

NeptiBlopsIa  obscura   21, 251 

Nettion  carollaeDBla 345 

Neuniptera   262,  SOB,  307 

N'eutBon,  K..  BqDlrrela   399 

NeatBon'B  resort 7,  19,  21,  251.  261,  282,  209,  270.  278.  302.  411 

New  EnglaDd.  Insect  fauna  164.  312.3U 

Hemisphere   258.  800.  318,  316   333 

New  Vork  wensel 890.  393.  417 

NewIouQdland,   losecta    171.  172,  313,  315 

Nlghtbawk 09,  117,  339.  356 

Nlnebark 17.  23,   222,  242 

Nine  aplned   stickleback    329,  331 

Nlplgon,  Nlplsaing:  beacb 38 

NlplaslDg  Great  Ijike« 85,  87,  50,  51 

NIHduUdnc    i 20T 


_K:byG00gIC 


P«B.. 

Noetnldae   288 

Nortb  Amertc*.  Bsh  830 

IhmcU 168,  310.  312,  314.  3111,  3ZT.  328 

American  beetle  fauna,  general  chancterlstlcB 193,  169,  168,  311,  813 

Northeuitern  beaver   BBO,  «I2 

NoTtbern  boE  willow-herb   243 


flicker    366 

frog     331 

gnu  of  P&rnaMOB   2i2 

balry   woodpecker 3S1 

bates    352,  883 

logKerhead  ■hrlke    303 

maple    91 

ptleated    waodpe<:ker    340.  3S5 

proTlDce.  Atlantic  district  171 

central  dlatrict   1T1 

Paclflc  aittrlct,  InaertH  171 

ndwlBg   3«3 

thtlke 119.  340,  371 

wood   f ros   332 

Nortbweatem   June-berrj  ' 237 

Norway  pine    18,  21,  226,  23B 

Noia  Scotia,  Inwcts , 171.  32B.  328 

Nuttallomla  borealla 358 

Njrctea  nyctea    853 

Nymphaea  adyena    240,  251,  282 

Njmpbaeaceae    r 240 

Nympballdae    260 


Oak  fern   !0 

Oblong-pttnted  Jnneberry   237 

Odonat* 282,  206,  305 

Olblorcbllus  hiemalla   SBO 

Ollinchaeta    252 

Ollatbaerua  megacepbalna   200 


OliTe-barked  thmab 82,  S3,  8B-87,  00,  01.  06,  00,  104,  108,  115-117,  140,  839.  384,  385 

OIlTe-ilded  Bycatcber 86,  87,  92.  110.  330,  3BS 

Onioaitg  dlacoldes   207 

OnaKnceae    243 

Onedowered  wlntersreen    24:^ 

One-Bided  wintergreen   243 

OnlBcldae    25-"! 

Onoclea  aeDalblils   231 

Htmtblopteria    331 

OphtasloaHHceae    ■. 231 

OphlogompbQB  columbrlDUi 29.  72,  263,  265 

OpuiHBter    74. 77 

opuUfolluB     222,  2V' 

Orcbegtea  canuH    101,211 

pHlllcorala     211 

Orchid   tamUy    239 

Orehldaceae    239 

OrcbldB     ' 18 

Orcbii  rotundlfoUa    230 

Origin  of  babltats  60 


zK:byG00gIC 


Oraodachoa  atn    202 

Orthesl*   ap 261 

Orthoptera    166.  209 

OBborn.   H 2«,  261.  282 

Onmunda  flnnainomea   231 

etaytanlaaa    331 

NCmiU   281 


Osprer 82,  90,  91.  94.  1J9,  187,  852 

OtocoTls  alpeatrla  380 

Ottawa.   Inaecti   191 

Ott»r   890.  891.  395.  408 

lAke    390 

Onn  bird 85.  86.  89.  9B.  109,  118.  140,  339.  8TT 

Owl 99,  104,   116.  3M.  411 

Oijcorcna  aijeooma   29.  219.   245 


Pacbrbraphra  "P 210 

Pachrts  Htnrata   191,  200 


Paclflc  diatilct.  liMecta  ITl.  IT2 

raliltera  donaiia 81.  86.  281.  287 

hempbim    281.  287 

Palm  wacblcra 102,   108,   108-109,   114-116.   118,   839.  371.  S80 

Falndella  ■qoanoia  231 

Pamera  sp 261 

Pandlon  baliaetos  carottDeiwIa   S51 

Panlcnlarla  canadenili  233 

Panlcnlarla  elongata    28.1 

ranlcDoi  lantbopbraDm   23S 

Paper  birch 11-18,  38,  159.   162,  286 

PapanracFae    241 

Paplllo    euryintdon    27.1 

glaucua  tiirnui   267,  268    278,  27B 

nitnlDB  ■rtiotuBili   273 

tumna 68. 72 

Paplltonldae    268 

raranomui  coatallB    208 

Pardooa    ,. 22.  268 

glaclallH 10,  17,  24.   30.  256-258 

groenlandlca    67,  60.  70,  2B6-ari« 

lapldlclDa    ,67,  257.  258 

Bterualla 24.  72.  73,  256.  257 

tarbypoda     257.  258 

Park  Place 7,   21.  347,  361 

Pannella  caperata    227 

rauap^rM    22T 

perlata    227 

■axUalli  sulcata   227 

Parnaula   paluatrls    219.  242 

Parna  airlcaplllua   381 

Passage  Island    6 

rassemilni   sandirLFhenBlB  saTannn    366 

Paatlnaca  aatlva    244 

Patrobiua   longlcorDls    204 

PearlT   eTerlaating-   270 

redlocaeCeB   phaslanellDa  campcstrla    847 

ivpt,  Mai  M ■.  ...1.  30,  41),  97,  134.  816.  337,  389.  396.  899,  40^  407. 

«1I,  412,  414.  418,  418,  419 

ogle 


Pe1et«rla   nibuita   314 

Peltldea   (Pelttgera)   aphthoia   22T 

t>e]tlgera   csdIdb    22T 

Femblu.   iDMcts   , 811 

PemphtedoQldae    319 

Penck,  A.    53 

Penballow.   D.   P 151 

Pcnlnaul&r   Harbor    38,413 

FennajlTanlR  ebwrj 14    21,  225 

goldca -winged   wacbler    1£6 

huckleberry     ^ 245 

wesMl     ., 417 

Peramlum  c 


I*«rc&  fla«eBwn8    331 

Penb  lake   IT 

PercopalB  yuttrnfoa    331 

PerfoUata  b«ll«ort   2M 

Perils  of  mlurmtlon 11» 

Perlsoreui   canadeDsIa SAO 

pErmaaeDt  mEdeati,  t>lrda   340 

Faromyacui  cansdeaila  umbrlDiU   890, 405 

Petrocbelldon   lunlfroOB    869 

l-bacella  fmnkllnll   245 

FbalaeruB  polltng  20<l 

Phalanslldae    253 

Pheasant 34T 

Phegopterls  drjopterle  331 

phegopterli   231 

PhlddippaH  borealK    26T.  258 

PblladelphlB  Tlreo lOB,  10»,   118.  88S,  372 

PhltonCbns  polltua   195 

PbiMbe   ,. . .  , 108.  117,  839,  SBS 

Pbonnla  regtna   74 

terraenoTse    74, 315 

Pbragmlt^  pbrapnltea  233 

Phrd[>des  tbaro» es,  287.  260.  27.1 

Pb;lfoderta  vnlgatlBBlma   210 

Ph^matodea  macallcollla  101 

yarlablllB    180 

Phyaa 18,  20-22,  60,  81,  62,  64,  88,  293 

alpectoldes 20,  281-283,  201 

gyrina    17. 291 

aayli 10.  6<W2.  281,  291 

Pbracla  pulverulenta   227 

Ptoea   breTlIoUa    2SH 

canadeosls   £23-225    235 

marln*    221.  235 

Pickerel    830  i 

COTB     380 

Pickering   tre&frog    331 

Pleoldes  arctlcna   ! 355 

Pled-bllted  grebe  118,  187,  830.  340  , 

Pleridae    2M  | 

Pigeon  hawk 91,  102.  103,  108,  100,  116,  117.  339,  350.  iM  . 

Point,  HlDn.,  caribou   397  I 

Pike 380 

Plkea  Peak,  Colo.,  InMcti S27  ' 

Flleated  woodpecker  78  -91,  105,  117,  142  | 

PImepbales  pomelaa 330 

Flmpla  couqnialtor   321 


■, 284 

PId*  fmmllT 231 

STCMbcak 81,  340,  366 

■likiD 88,  86,  119,  840,  8«6 

Plnxnlciila  ralgiria   222,  24B 

Plnlcola  enncleaCor   SSO 

Pink  mrjdalls 241 

family    240 

Plnui  dlTaileaU  226,  283 

rMlsaM    22«,  285 

■trobu   22G,2S-t 

Fipalneva   243 

Flsanrldas    25". 

FIsoca   SSO 

Ptaldla   283 

Pialdlnm 18,  18,  27,  84,  80.  2»8 

abditum    298 

afflne    8B.  282,  29S 

IdahoeuM    283.295 

medlaaDiii  66,  282.  207 

milium    20T 

paupercnlnin    282,  207 

punctatum  slnplM   282,297 

toperl 282,298 

rotuDdatam    297 

■argenti   282,  283,  208 


■pendidulam    262,21 

■QbrotundnB   66,  66,  282,  2( 


rentricosam     206 

PIsMdes   dublai    211 

PItcbfr  plant IfrlS,  21,  26,  29,  87,   241 

Placodlnm   eleBsna 227 

Planorbna  bicarlnatua 17,  61.  63,  282,  283,  202 

rDjalcnala   61,  64.  293 

Tar.   ilrlataa   292 

campanolatai 19.  61,  64,  282,  283,  293 


hlMntOB 298 

parrna 10,  19.  63,  71,  293 

trlTolTls    68, 292 

Plant   soclatlca    217 

iupremae;    220 

Ptanta,  ilat  of 227 

Plateroa   <Fr<ui)   nodeatna   209 

Flatrcblrna  byperboie*    813 

peltatus     77,.312 

Flatynna  aeruslnoaui    204 

4   puDClatDg 198 

Plceoptcra , . ,  806 

Plejodenn    aarl    207 

Pltlatoeene  bearer   404 

Pleqrotoi    77 

PloTer    124 

Plum   tamllr 237 

Pml  piatenala   233 

Podabnu  diadema - 1S8, 190 

Uerlcollls    209 


tomentoana    . 


,g\v> 


466  -  INDEX. 

PodllrmbDi   podlcepa 840 


PogoDla  ophlOKoasoldes   210,  330 

Fogoaocbetjn  alxtui   £10 

roljgala  pauclfolla    S43 

PolrKtilRceae    243 

Polygrr*     75 

■Ibolabria 28,  SI.  68.  89,  72.  78,  76.  77,  283 

f  ratenu     28.T 

Polrpodtaceac    231 

PalnKidlum   Tulgare   Z3X 

Poljtrichaai  commune   220,229 


Pomaceae    23! 

Pani  aaaoclatloaa,  beetlci   191 

w*eda    OS.  232 

Pontoporela    S'l 

Pooentpg   {rramlneQB   3Sfl 

Poppy   family    241 

Piwalaa  balaamlfen   2M 

eiandldenUta    ZSB 

treroaloldea    225,236 

I'orcuplDe  monnUtlDa  12S,  230,  2S2 

Porlfefa    248 

Port  Arthur,  cllnate  41.  48,  IWi 

MplaalDg  beach   38 

Huron   outlet    88,34 

Foot  gladal  origin  of  tbe  fauna 166.  8M 

PoUmosetOQ    18.  19,  29,  Wl,  252 

crlapU    18 

heterophytlua 233 

hlllll    233 

lutans    282 

pectloatua    2ilt 

pcrtoMatom   22.  288.  280 

PotentUla   amta    242 

trutlroaa    242 

llttoraltg    222.242 

trWentata     222,242 

Prairie  sharp-tailed  grouae   340,347 

PreciplUtlon    42 

Preulx,  Cbas,.  mammala 407,  414,  41R 

Prpvlons  bloLogiul  Inveattgatlona   4 

ITlckly   rose    242 

I'rlmroae   family    245 

Primula   mlgtaaHlnlc* 232,245 

Primulaceae    245 

I'rlaclplea  of  aucceaaloa   146 

rrocumbent   JuDlper    230 

Proaopldae     Sll* 

ProBoplB     74 

baaalta     31!> 

ap 3in 

Prunella  TulgarlH   24(1 

PrunuB  pennaylvanlca 14.  20,  28,  20.  72,  225.  23" 

TirBlnlana 237 

Paammopblla   »p.    320 

Pwlaphldae   205 

PaeudanlhouomuH   (ADtboaomna)   cratacgl   £11 

Paltbyrus   latllargaa   317 

Pterldophytea    231 

Ptecle  aqulllna   £8i 


P«8e. 

Pteronarcju   donatm    30G,80T 

PteroatlcbUB    161 

conclDiu    193 

femonlU   '^i.   ir.Mfil,   198 

iMiidlbullrls    .* 204 

pDDCtatlniilmati    'Mi 

I-ilaldae    SOfi 

PubeBCent   blndn'^rd    24r> 

I>uD€tum   pjrgmaeum    2S8 

Purple    boDeaet    i4T 

clDQUcfoll    ^0,  ^;> 

finch 1.1.  H.l,  SO.  HI.  »2.  11.-.  118,   HI.  .140,  SC."- 

manih  claqiietoll 24:; 

rock    crees 241 

rutorluB  dcugnanl   SilO,  417 

eDerBnmraas    41T 

Ingem    417 


Dovetwraeentis .1!M),  417 

Tlwn     -ISO,  4i;i 

vulrlT«giis     417 

I-j'gosUuK  pungltin 331 

Pyramels  cnrdul    21,  :»),  08.  275 

hunterl     68 

ryraraldniB  Bltemalo  31,  00,  287 

aaterlBcuB     282,287 

rruDkheltet   ftnlhODj'l 11.   13.  24.  20.  31,   7.".  77.  283,  287 

Tor.   nlblna    287 

atrlBleiln     00.711 

I'yrulB   nuarltoUa    '  243 

i-hlor»ii(ha     70,24!) 

mlDor     243 

necunda     243 

I'yrulncpae    243 

ryrophaena  RraDdllBratiB   312 

ocyml     312 

rylbldafl    211 


Quaking  aaiteu    , 21,  26,  22i"> 

Qnebef.    Inaect?!    ,,.,.,,,,,....,.,.....,.. ....,,,.,.,,.,.,.,.,.,.,,...,,,  312 

giicdiufl  migid^B  ::i.  lofl,  lor. 

Uuercua  rubra    287 

QuUlwort   rBmllj-    232 

ijulscalus  qulmiuia  aenms 3fl3 


ItamBllnu  c 

ItnuD    cntabrlgpnala     21, 2T 

OamllanB    23.  27,  21>.  .'{32 

HeptentrlonflllB     330,  331 

BylTatl.-n  cantnbrlgi'UBlK    332 

Itsnglfcr   Hrctlcus    .IflS 

caribou 3B0,  3W 

Kanaom IB,  2n2 

clearing 7.  Ifi.  JT..  SO.  »4.  332.  S(!4.   308.  .'ITIK  :iT2.  3S|.  382,  413 

HuDUDculac 


:  logic 


rap-. 

«lolrre1s 

21,  28.  80.  on,  303.  303 

30r..  401,  <n-2.  414,  41S 

Itcdfi'vd  Tlreo 

....13,  82,  84.  se.  87,  89.  01. 

117 

8,  87.  80,  01,  02,  05,  lOn.  100 

04.  05.  09.  105. 

1^0.  142.  339.  381.  WJ 

no.  140.  nan.  a7i.  S7-.' 

proplnqiia 

Ilhl/ocarpon  tBuellla)  g 

naraiHilpiim 

Khynchi-lophus    Bimiili-jL T-J.    IT.:'.,   -JS! 

Roiiin 87.   IIM,    JOT-llW.   lin.    IH 

Rnrk   llnrlHir 1.  7.   8.   10,   lS-10,  :;i,   44.   ^.^.   30.  62,  63.  OfJ.   GO,   73. 

77.   8J.   81',    85,   87.   89,   00.    94.   222-221.    249.   251,   252,   260,   2C1. 

204.     268-273,    3li2,    305.    307,    3i«>,    310.    317-322.    330-33.1.     337. 

340-342.   344.   ,110-3^.3,   350-   358-302,   364  371.    374.     37.5.    .177-382, 

384-38(1.   306,    3110,   407.    413,    416.    410. 

Itork    iii.i-niiigs.    l>TOtl>-8    

Rdcliy  niciunlnln 131.  16,3,  ItU,    IIIT.  171.   ISO.  32." 

lUdge    c'lparlTiRH    S 

Itotl.    J..    mOB«.'^    

HoHa  nckularfs   


:.cb,  Google 


RoDtM  ot  mlsratlan   112 

Bnbtact^e     24S 

itiibiia  tmeilcana*  242 

arcticni     2*2 

pairJUonim 226,242 

BtrlKoiDB     242 

RubT-crawned  kloglet 100,    119,   339,  383 

Rnb7-Ihn>ated  humming  bird   B9.  339,  AST 

BiiabM     «8,  238 

Riuala,  InMtti  ITS 

ItunlaD  America 178,  1T4,  ITO 

RiutjF   blackbird    839,  363 

gisckie 99.  loa.  10»,   113,  119,  363 

BathTen.  A.  O 2,  4,  30,  81,  34.  89,  B3,  126,  154,  248,  2SO-2B2,  2B9,  268.  2TT.  SOT,  829,  383 

RTDCboipora   alba   234 


Saslna  uglaoldea   222,240 

St,  Jobn'i-irort  bmllr   243 

St.  Lawrence  tbIIcj,  Inaecta  101 

Salda   llsata 23,260 

Saldldaa   260 

Sallcaceae    339 

S«lli     „ 23T 

Saltlclde«    2B7 

SalTellnuB  fontlnalla   380 

Sambacoa  caaadeoBla   246 

pnbeQB    246 

Sandalwood  famllr   240 

SHnd  beach  9.  66,  124 

violet    248 

Bandplpera    90 

Sand  wasps     . .  , 68 

Santalaceae    240 

Sarcopbasa  Hrracealae   813 

Sarcophagldaa     81S 

Sarsent  lake 1,  IB,  S9,  SB,  218,  330,  868,  884,  40T 

Sarracenla  purpurea  218.  221,  241 

3am»nlaeea«    2^1 

Saruparilla     26,29 

Saakatchwan     171,  40T^ 

SaTannab  aparrow 99.  102.  103,  107-109,   114,  115,  118,  124,  330.  348.  340,  866' 

Saw-wbet  owl    110,  886,  852 

SaiKraga  alaooa   23,  222,  241 

nlTallB     222,  241 

trlcuRpldata     222,  241 

SailCragaceBo 241 

Sailfrago    23.  25.  241 

Sajornls  pho«be   „ 858 

Sbj'b  brown  bat 390,  898,  418. 

Bcanp   duck    90 

Bcheuchwriaceae    233 

Schiran  and  Itubbard   4 

B.  A 1S7.  ITT,  188,  187-190.  214 

Hclomyildae    816 

Sclrpua   17,18 

caesplIoeuB    333 

ryperlnna    283 

SolnruB  hndBontcDB   300,  899 

dakotensta    402 

lognaz    400,  401 

61 


Tut. 

Scolftldae    212 

Scotocbroa  basKllB   211 

ScoTllI  Point 7,  20,  04,  180,  222,  260,  261.  368,  389 

Scrophularla   leporella    218 

ScrophularUcMe    248 

Scutellaria  falerlcula 219 

Salerieulata    2411 

Uterirolla    £« 

Bentopterua    181 

hornll , 65.  66.   159.   104 

Scymniui   lacattiia   206 

Seaaonal  distribution,  Inwcta  185. 

Sedget   : 221,  233,  27! 

Hsad  plintl   282 

Sekhd  8,  44.  45 

Seiunu  aarocapilltw  3T7 

noTcboraceiulB   QotablMs   877 

Se1agln«IIa   (amllj    ,* 232 

rapSBtrli    2S2 

Scla^nellaceae    232 

8eJ(  he«l     248 

Senecio   bBlnmltae    222,348 

Sepedon   pualllDB    316 

Serica  reapertloa  ■ 67,  158,  19S 

SerleooBomua  IneoaKTuna   208 

Serropalpni   barbatua    202 

Sctopbags  rutldUa   379 

Bharp-sblDDed  hawk 83.  91,  98.  99,  102,  103,  108.  112,  116.  117,  339,  348,  349 

Sharp-tailed  grouw    31,  86,  92.  OS.  119,   141,  374 

SbellB 24,  26.  31.  50-61.  86-89.  71,  73.  TB-7T 

Hhepherdla  canadenala    2S2 

Sbare   aasiKEatlon    138 

WrdB     91 

Tsgetatlon    222 

8bort-eared   owl    338 

Show;   ladteB-allpper    239 

white  trIlllDm  239 

Shrubby  dnquefoll   212 

Slalla    Infumata    BOT 

Slalla   alalia    386 

SlbbaldlopslB   trldeDtata 11 

Siberia,    Inaecta    173,  266 

Slleae  antlrrhlaa 2« 

Sllphldae    205 

Slmnllldae    309 

SlmuUum  vcDuatam   72, 309 

BlnslDg  blrda  90 

SIphlnniB    307 

Slrlddae    32! 

airldda    817 

SIskowIt  bay 1.   7,  8,  22-34.  28.  31.  32.   38,  .10,  10,  51,  61,   63.   73,   SI.   BO-02. 

97.  08.  112.  116,  217,  219,  223,  250,  251,  251-256,  260,  261, 
263-265,  288-271,  303.  H17,  318,  321.  322,  328,  383.  337.  340, 
343-347,  350-358,  360-362.  361.  365,  367,  308.  370-375,  377. 
379-382,    384,   385.   389.    3!)8.   390,    40T.   411,    416,    419. 

lalaads    31J 

lake 7.  8.  22,  25-28,  10.   59  61.  63,  61,  66,  00  92.  150,   218,  220," 

2'>1,  2B2,  261.  263.  271.  283,  303.  305.  320.  330-332,  337.  340. 
342,  344,  317.  350.  3S1.  353.  351.  360.  361,  364,  367,  368,  370-372, 
875-378,  881,  882,  399.  402,  411. 

trail    229 

SlaymbrlDin  alllaalum    211 

faumiie   222 


Sitka,  iQMCts   189,171 

SItta  onadenala   881 

Bknok  cabbaxe  30,  28,  238 

81«te-calorad   jnoco    389, 368 

SlecpT  catch-By 240 

SlendflT-leaTed  droaera   241 

Small  broTD  weasel   890,893 

cranberrj     29 

matsb  ti«d-atraw    248 

DOTtbem  bog  orchid  289 

round-leaved   orchid    280 

amall-toothed   aapen    : . . .      14,17 

Smaller  eachHnt^r'g  nlgbtahada   243 

purple- (ringed  orchid   239 

Snail 0-11,  19,  25,  31,  81,  68.  260 

Snak«a  2S2, 820 

8dow   bnnttiiK    8SS 

Snowfall    43 

Snow;  owl   388,8113 

aoll    40. 41 

SoIeDlDS   wp.    819 

SolldBEO 11,  14,  20,  23.  26,  260 

JUDce«     247 

neglecta   85,  819.  247 

nllglnoaa    24T 

Ttrganrea    S23 

Bolltarr  Mudplper 90,  »4,  109,  118,  138,  380.  848 

Somatachtora     ^ 30S.  SOfl 

elansata  minor   284,  2SiI 

lln«arfa   308 

(ordpata     30« 

■hartlea    ID 

tenebroaa    80« 

BoDg  sparrow IT,  82,  86,  88,  SO,  02-04,  102,  IIT,  123,  140.  141,  389.  868 

SoDoran 165.   16T.   188,  ITT.  110.   131 

Som    338 

Sorbna  amertcana 220,237 

Boutb-aonth western  proTluca   171 

Sontheastem  humid  hardwood  forest  area,  Insects 180 

proTlDce.   eenCral  district.   Insects    171 

red   squirrel    400 

Eowbug    240 

Sparrow U8.   102-104,    108,   114-118,   8*8 

hawk 82,  83.  86-87.  91.  99.  102,  103,  108,  100,  112.  115.  UT.  848.  340,  3S3 

Spatbjetna  foettda   288 

Spatnlate-leared  sundew    241 

Speciea-tormlnB  areaa   167 

Speckled  alder 21.  28,  226.  237 

Bpermatophf tes    232 

Bphaerla    283 

Sphaerlum   strlatlmniil   34 

simile  20B 

walkerl    295 

Sphaerophorla   cjUndrica   T7, 313 

SpbaKDum 15-18,  21,   20,  27,  65.  81.  85,  87,  220,  221.   257 

Sl^ensohnll  Russ..  TSr.  molle  Crev..  palleus 220 

platTpbTllum   8ull..   Tar.,  subsimplei  Cdb(.,  ^'"■'^■■> ^^ 

robUBtnm  Rl..  var.  graclle  Hi,,  palleus   229 

teres  Aug.,  Tar.  teoellum  R.,  bicolor 220 

15 

310 


P«»e. 

Sphrradlum   edeatulam    288 

SphrraplcDB  Tarlus   855 

Spldera 10,  IS.   17,  32.  27.  31,  6T.  68-77.  86,  21&,  255.  257.  258 

SplnuB  plDOB    SM 

BpUella  Hoclalls   367 

tTponse    „ 18,    240.   260 

Bpongllla  lacusttla   IB.  349 

p>iip«rciila 240 

8pon«llUdae   240 

Spotted  Bindplpen 10.  82.  00,  01,  03,  04,  108,  117,  138.  180,  330,  346.  378 

Spreading  dofbantf 245 

Bpring-tall    248 

Spruce IS,  22,  24.  67,  73,  74,  77.  81,  82,  84-89,  M,  86,  98.  141.  1«1,  >S1 

Spurred  geDtian   845 

Sqnlrrelg    883.  S9& 

Sushom  Buoiac    24.t 

SCapbyllnldae    , 196.  205 

Staphrllnlds    159 

Statloa        1,  '04    SO 

BUbstatlon  1    8.  81,  S5 

2     II 

3     13 


6     16, 87 


.  and  2  17,  88 

r. 17.  18.  88,  8S 

aod  6  18.  88.  80 


IV,  -04     

IV    

subBtatloDS  1. 


eulntatlons  1  and  3  . 


Stenobthrus  curtlpeonU 

KtenOB  semlcalon   205 

StephoBtethnB   ILttbrldni)   llctitus   SOT 

atereoc«u1on    coralloldea    228 

pBBchmIe    228 

Stlctlebntka   in,   20,  27,  20.  320 

Ptlcta  pulmonarla   221 

Stone  lllea   02.  63.  67.  70,  305 

Stonrli  ocelpltonwcolat*    21, 332 

StonuB.   lake   46 

Strollomyla  badia    300 

Stratlomylaae     ..\ 808.300 

SteplapuB    ampleiEcanlla    230 

Striped  maple   238 

StrobllopB  Virgo   34.  31.  75.  281,  282.  2Sr. 

Stumla   DlDla   c&p&rocb    S63 

SabterraneaD   fauna    71, 76 

Sabtroplcal  [trorlncf,  Atlaptlc  district   171 

SaccesBlon  and  envlronniental  evolution  ■' 14n 

Sncceaalon,  blrdg   126 

lawa  of   149 

of  beetle  auoclatlons   160 

prlDFlplea   of    146.  SBO 

Succlnea  ovalta  288 

relUBa     288 

Sugar  maple   ■. 30,  1B».  23T 

Sumac  family   24-1 

Summer  rrBldeuts.  birds  3S9 

Sumner   lake 1.   T,   18.   GO,  G3.  64.  81.   87-80.   210.  220,   226,  2S1-253.   SOfl. 

268.    264,    260.    272.    803.   306.    .107,    330-333,    340,    341.    344,    345, 
354.  360.  364.  SOT-SUO,  371,  381.  382,  401. 

Sundew   family    241 

Superior  baeln,  history   35 

lobe    3'J 

Surface   currents    47 

Swamp  birds    04 

golden-rod 247 

laurel     244 

sparrow   80,   138,  330,  300 

Sweet  gale    240 

Sweet  scented  bed-straw   240 

SylTanla  canadeaals 370 

SympeCrum 22.  266,  305 

obtrnaam     27. 264 

rubleundulum    264.  2li5 

Syneta  ferruglnea   210 

Syrpbid  flies  10 

Syrphidae     808,  312 

Syrpbua  amerlcanua   , 313 

genualla   313 

rlbeBll 3i;i 


«8,a0B 


TbIhuiim — CoDtlnaed.  >  Tate. 

Illotm    SIO 

Inanetai    311 

lagdophthalmDa    SIO 

ntvoffiu    SIO 

■p.    SIO 

TacblnMte    S14,S1X 

Taehlnoa  fomlpeDiiU   205 

memnomttii  31,  IW.  19B 

TiOpDiea ID,  20 

Tall  purple  ni«  241 

■lijmbiiain   841 

wblte  bog  orchM 2S9 

dnqaeroll    242 

Tamarack 13.  13-17,  1»,  21.  2S-29,  81.  OS.  es.  66,  T8.  81.  S4.  85.  ST. 

Se,  M,  95,  189.   1S9,  220,  S21.  223,  285.  250.  260.  SOS.  331 

Tamaraefc-ipnicc 15,   29,   94,  252.  803 

TkiM-grara  family   233 

Taplnoma  aeaalle S2S,  828 

Taiaceae    336 

Taxaa  canadenali  SS6 

minor    218,  2K 

Taylor,  F.  B 34.  SB,  37.  38.  53.  385,  422 

TagenarlB   derhaml    256,  258 

Telephonii  curttsll    209 

TecDDoaEoma  aeqaalla  77,314 

bombrtans    S14 

Temperalure    i 41,  70,   111 

Tenebclonldae     202 

Tenneraee  warbler 01,  101-103.  106,  108.  112.  114-ltT,  887,  389,  878.  370 

Tmthredo   melllna    322 

TeotbredopBla  Debettoldea   73, 74 

TenthrldlniaBB    822 

Tema   143 

Terra  del   Faega.   lnB«ets   17B 

Terreatrlal  fauna   72 

Tetanocera   plebia    816 

Tetragnitha  eitenaa   254,258 

Tetlagonantbua  defleiDi   24A 

Tetraphla  pelluelda    220 

TetregoDEurla  iplnlffera  27,72 

Telroplum  clnnamopterain    210 

Tettlgid    29n 

Teltli  acadlcns    200 

Thallctnim  purpnnucens    341 

Tbamnapbis  alrtalla 16,  27,  253.  382 

TbanailmuB   (Clerus)  andatnlns   200 

Tbarna  butlertly   260 

Tberera  tontalla   311 

Tbererldae   808.  BIl 

Tbli^b-btlled  redwing  blackbird 9D.  105.  108.  113,  117.  389.  302 

Tbiatle   batterti;    27<> 

Tbla^ila  arrenae  -*1 

Thamlaidae    -"''■ 

Three-leaved  Solomon's  seal   -■"* 

Tbree-loolbod   elnqnetoll    242 

Tbmab 83. 104 

Thuldlum   ibletlniim    330 

Tboja  occldenUlls    228,  235 

Tiblcen  rimoaa   72.  75,  261 

TIM 40 

Tilting 38 


TttM,  E.  a IKT,  817.  828 

Toti    15,  30.  31,  326 

TablB  Harbor 1,  T.  10-22,  44,  260,  2S1,  261,  302.  331.  331,  849.  360, 

aai.  396,  384.  3W,  40T.  41'4.  41S 

Todd  Qarbor  39, 3W 

TofleMla   paluatria    / 238 

Tomoceru  algcr   TS,  260 

Tonkin  b>r 11.  13,  49,  60,  66,  61,  84,  04.  160,  31»,  326,  847,  366,  371 

Topognpbj 39 

Tortella  tortooM   280 

Tolanus  flsTlpes   846 

mclKDoleiiciiB    870 

TranKanUnenUI  conifer  area.  InaecCH   160 

Tree  swallow  83.  93,  380,  369 

toad    21, 320 

Treot  miej   1 88 

Trladeaom  TlrglDlcDm  219,  243 

TrkbaloiihaB  alleiruitDB   211 

TrtchiBB    160 

afflniB 190 

Trlglocbfn  marlClma 239 

Trlcutalls  amcrlcana 220,245 

TriKlopsiB 36 

tbompBOQl    320,881 

TrllllDin   grandldoram    239 

Trlsetani  Bubaplcatum   233 

Tiitoma     26. 160 

thoraclea     77, 196 

TrochlluB  colubriB    3iS7 

Trout  perch   , 331 

stream    29, 80 

Tufted  looBeatrlfe    246 

Tumua  butterfly   266 

Tway  bUde   28 

Twtn-dower    247 

Two-leaved  Solomon'B  seal   289 

TycbDB  longliwIpoB 203 

TrrannuB  trjannuB   868 


Dlota  amerlcaaft  280 

Umbel  family   244 

DmbelUferafl    244 

VinbllleartB    14 

L'DKollam  cauadeiue 289 

DdIo  pllcata   406 

Tlnlooldae    40S 

DplB  eenimboldei   ,. , . .         S02 

Upland  white  aster  248 

Upper  bench  0. 10 

Uranldea   fraakllnt    10.33t 

Urocerut 18,26 

flaTlcomls 74,  322 

DaTlpeDDla    74, 322 

Uuiea     88 

barbala  cerotlna  227 

laoslMlma 227 

UtIlcalarU     20. 65 

miDor    219,  246 

UToltrla  perfoUata    , 238 


TacdDlkrate   245 

Vaeclniam  penDajLvanlcum  S24, 245 

ullglnoHDm   245 

Tagnerls    trlfolla     238 

ValllsnerlB  aplratla   18,283 

ValllmerlBreiie     238 

Vsllonla  costata   77,  282,  288 

pulcbella    268 

TalTata  lewlili   294 

■lai^ra  DTlanOerl 63.  64,  29* 

trksrtnata 83,  298,  294 

TancoaTer,  iDsecta  16S 

VaiMM  atalanU   268.  270,  275 

<xrdiil    268,  270,  275 

bnntert    208,  270.  275 

mllbertl   275 

Varying  hares    12.  21.  116.  392.  418 

Vfg«tatic.ii    4. 217 

Ven«inel«,    Insects    177 

Veraaka  amerlcana  246 

VertcbratM.  cold-blooded  329 

Vertkal  aaccewloD   58 

Vartlgo   11,  285 

Stonlilll    : 285 

oiata   285 

tridCDtata 24,  281,  282,  285 

Veapa  diabolic* 320 

Vesper  sparrow 102,  105,  117.  338,  36« 

Veipertllio  Inaciu  390.  419 

Veqildae    320 

VUlta  akipper 273 

Viburnum  acerlfollam   246 

paudfoIlDin    247 

Viola  arenarla   243 

labrsdoTtca    243 

Totuadlfolia   2*3 

Tlolaeeae    24S 

.  Violet  tamUj 243 

Vlreo  oliTaceuB  371 

pblladelphlcDB 372 

aolltarloa    372 

Virginia.  InsecCn   171. 179 

Vltrea  blnnerana 31.  76,  76,  282,  285 

VKrIna  blnneyaoa   24 

llmplda    ....24,  282,  285 


WatdstetDla  fntgarlodea   ,. 242 

Walker,   Bryant    34. 281 

Warblers   83,  08-104,  108.  114-116.  348 

WannlDK.  blotic  successloD   147-149 

Waehlneton  dab   1.  30,  226,  396.  414 

creek 8.  30,  31,  44,  407 

Harbor 1.  2,  8,  30.  31,  40,  44,  49.  51,  07,  00.   103.  112,  224. 

263,    2n.->.   260.  303.  330,   331.   33T.   340-352,    3fi4-3e8.   370-380, 
899,  407,  411,  412.  414.  416-419. 

Tslaod 346,  348,  360.  352,  350.  370,  871,  374,  382,  386 

river 30,  98.  252.  271,  840,  344,  345,  3S0,  352.  354,  369,  866,  872.  373 

Wasps 67,  08,  74 


by  Google 


jiGoogle